{"database": "openregs", "table": "cfr_sections", "is_view": false, "human_description_en": "where part_number = 1910 sorted by section_id", "rows": [["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.1.33.1", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "A", "Subpart A\u2014General", "", "\u00a7 1910.1 Purpose and scope.", "OSHA", "", "", "", "(a) Section 6(a) of the Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (84 Stat. 1593) provides that \u201cwithout regard to chapter 5 of title 5, United States Code, or to the other subsections of this section, the Secretary shall, as soon as practicable during the period beginning with the effective date of this Act and ending 2 years after such date, by rule promulgate as an occupational safety or health standard any national concensus standard, and any established Federal standard, unless he determines that the promulgation of such a standard would not result in improved safety or health for specifically designated employees.\u201d The legislative purpose of this provision is to establish, as rapidly as possible and without regard to the rule-making provisions of the Administrative Procedure Act, standards with which industries are generally familiar, and on whose adoption interested and affected persons have already had an opportunity to express their views. Such standards are either (1) national concensus standards on whose adoption affected persons have reached substantial agreement, or (2) Federal standards already established by Federal statutes or regulations.\n\n(b) This part carries out the directive to the Secretary of Labor under section 6(a) of the Act. It contains occupational safety and health standards which have been found to be national consensus standards or established Federal standards."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.1.33.2", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "A", "Subpart A\u2014General", "", "\u00a7 1910.2 Definitions.", "OSHA", "", "", "", "As used in this part, unless the context clearly requires otherwise:\n\n(a)  Act  means the Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (84 Stat. 1590).\n\n(b)  Assistant Secretary of Labor  means the Assistant Secretary of Labor for Occupational Safety and Health;\n\n(c)  Employer  means a person engaged in a business affecting commerce who has employees, but does not include the United States or any State or political subdivision of a State;\n\n(d)  Employee  means an employee of an employer who is employed in a business of his employer which affects commerce;\n\n(e)  Commerce  means trade, traffic, commerce, transportation, or communication among the several States, or between a State and any place outside thereof, or within the District of Columbia, or a possession of the United States (other than the Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands), or between points in the same State but through a point outside thereof;\n\n(f)  Standard  means a standard which requires conditions, or the adoption or use of one or more practices, means, methods, operations, or processes, reasonably necessary or appropriate to provide safe or healthful employment and places of employment;\n\n(g)  National consensus standard  means any standard or modification thereof which (1) has been adopted and promulgated by a nationally recognized standards-producing organization under procedures whereby it can be determined by the Secretary of Labor or by the Assistant Secretary of Labor that persons interested and affected by the scope or provisions of the standard have reached substantial agreement on its adoption, (2) was formulated in a manner which afforded an opportunity for diverse views to be considered, and (3) has been designated as such a standard by the Secretary or the Assistant Secretary, after consultation with other appropriate Federal agencies; and\n\n(h)  Established Federal standard  means any operative standard established by any agency of the United States and in effect on April 28, 1971, or contained in any Act of Congress in force on the date of enactment of the Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.1.33.3", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "A", "Subpart A\u2014General", "", "\u00a7 1910.3 Petitions for the issuance, amendment, or repeal of a standard.", "OSHA", "", "", "", "(a) Any interested person may petition in writing the Assistant Secretary of Labor to promulgate, modify, or revoke a standard. The petition should set forth the terms or the substance of the rule desired, the effects thereof if promulgated, and the reasons therefor.\n\n(b)(1) The relevant legislative history of the Act indicates congressional recognition of the American National Standards Institute and the National Fire Protection Association as the major sources of national consensus standards. National consensus standards adopted on May 29, 1971, pursuant to section 6(a) of the Act are from those two sources. However, any organization which deems itself a producer of national consensus standards, within the meaning of section 3(9) of the Act, is invited to submit in writing to the Assistant Secretary of Labor at any time prior to February 1, 1973, all relevant information which may enable the Assistant Secretary to determine whether any of its standards satisfy the requirements of the definition of \u201cnational consensus standard\u201d in section 3(9) of the Act.\n\n(2) Within a reasonable time after the receipt of a submission pursuant to paragraph (b)(1) of this section, the Assistant Secretary of Labor shall publish or cause to be published in the  Federal Register  a notice of such submission, and shall afford interested persons a reasonable opportunity to present written data, views, or arguments with regard to the question whether any standards of the organization making the submission are national consensus standards."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.1.33.4", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "A", "Subpart A\u2014General", "", "\u00a7 1910.4 Amendments to this part.", "OSHA", "", "", "", "(a) The Assistant Secretary of Labor shall have all of the authority of the Secretary of Labor under sections 3(9) and 6(a) of the Act.\n\n(b) The Assistant Secretary of Labor may at any time before April 28, 1973, on his own motion or upon the written petition of any person, by rule promulgate as a standard any national consensus standard and any established Federal standard, pursuant to and in accordance with section 6(a) of the Act, and, in addition, may modify or revoke any standard in this part 1910. In the event of conflict among any such standards, the Assistant Secretary of Labor shall take the action necessary to eliminate the conflict, including the revocation or modification of a standard in this part, so as to assure the greatest protection of the safety or health of the affected employees."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.1.33.5", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "A", "Subpart A\u2014General", "", "\u00a7 1910.5 Applicability of standards.", "OSHA", "", "", "[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 58 FR 35308, June 30, 1993; 85 FR 8732, Feb. 18, 2020]", "(a) Except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section, the standards contained in this Part shall apply with respect to employments performed in a workplace in a State, the District of Columbia, the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, the Virgin Islands, American Samoa, Guam, the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands, Wake Island, Outer Continental Shelf lands defined in the Outer Continental Shelf Lands Act, and Johnston Island.\n\n(b) None of the standards in this part shall apply to working conditions of employees with respect to which Federal agencies other than the Department of Labor, or State agencies acting under section 274 of the Atomic Energy Act of 1954, as amended (42 U.S.C. 2021), exercise statutory authority to prescribe or enforce standards or regulations affecting occupational safety or health.\n\n(c)(1) If a particular standard is specifically applicable to a condition, practice, means, method, operation, or process, it shall prevail over any different general standard which might otherwise be applicable to the same condition, practice, means, method, operation, or process. For example, \u00a7 1915.23(c)(3) of this title prescribes personal protective equipment for certain ship repairmen working in specified areas. Such a standard shall apply, and shall not be deemed modified nor superseded by any different general standard whose provisions might otherwise be applicable, to the ship repairmen working in the areas specified in \u00a7 1915.23(c)(3).\n\n(2) On the other hand, any standard shall apply according to its terms to any employment and place of employment in any industry, even though particular standards are also prescribed for the industry, as in subpart B or subpart R of this part, to the extent that none of such particular standards applies. To illustrate, the general standard regarding noise exposure in \u00a7 1910.95 applies to employments and places of employment in pulp, paper, and paperboard mills covered by \u00a7 1910.261.\n\n(d) In the event a standard protects on its face a class of persons larger than employees, the standard shall be applicable under this part only to employees and their employment and places of employment.\n\n(e) [Reserved]\n\n(f) An employer who is in compliance with any standard in this part shall be deemed to be in compliance with the requirement of section 5(a)(1) of the Act, but only to the extent of the condition, practice, means, method, operation, or process covered by the standard."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.1.33.6", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "A", "Subpart A\u2014General", "", "\u00a7 1910.6 Incorporation by reference.", "OSHA", "", "", "[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974]", "(a)(1) Certain material is incorporated by reference into this part with the approval of the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. To enforce any edition other than that specified in this section, the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) must publish a document in the  Federal Register  and the material must be available to the public.\n\n(i) The standards of agencies of the U.S. Government, and organizations which are not agencies of the U.S. Government which are incorporated by reference in this part, have the same force and effect as other standards in this part. Only the mandatory provisions ( i.e.,  provisions containing the word \u201cshall\u201d or other mandatory language) of standards incorporated by reference are adopted as standards under the Occupational Safety and Health Act.\n\n(ii) Any changes in the standards incorporated by reference in this part and an official historic file of such changes are available for inspection in the Docket Office at the national office of OSHA, U.S. Department of Labor, Washington, DC 20210; telephone: 202-693-2350 (TTY number: 877-889-5627).\n\n(2) All approved incorporation by reference (IBR) material is available for inspection at OSHA and at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA).\n\n(i) Contact OSHA at any Regional Office of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), or at the OSHA Docket Office, U.S. Department of Labor, 200 Constitution Avenue NW, Room N-3508, Washington, DC 20210; telephone: 202-693-2350 (TTY number: 877-889-5627).\n\n(ii) For information on the availability of these standards at NARA, visit  www.archives.gov/federal-register/cfr/ibr-locations  or email  fr.inspection@nara.gov .\n\n(3) The IBR material may be obtained from the sources in the following paragraphs of this section or from one or more private resellers listed in this paragraph (a)(3). For material that is no longer commercially available, contact OSHA (see paragraph (a)(2)(i) of this section).\n\n(i) Accuris Standards Store, 321 Inverness Drive, South Englewood, CO 80112; phone: (800) 332-6077; website:  https://store.accuristech.com .\n\n(ii) American National Standards Institute (see paragraph (e) for contact information).\n\n(iii) GlobalSpec, 257 Fuller Road, Suite NFE 1100, Albany, NY 12203-3621; phone: (800) 261-2052; website:  https://standards.globalspec.com .\n\n(iv) Nimonik Document Center, 401 Roland Way, Suite 224, Oakland, CA 94624; phone (650)591-7600; email: info@document-center.com; website:  www.document-center.com .\n\n(v) Techstreet, phone: (855) 999-9870; email:  store@techstreet.com ; website:  www.techstreet.com .\n\n(b) The following material is available for purchase from the American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH), 1014 Broadway, Cincinnati OH 45202:\n\n(1) \u201cIndustrial Ventilation: A Manual of Recommended Practice\u201d (22nd ed., 1995), incorporation by reference (IBR) approved for \u00a7 1910.124(b)(4)(iii).\n\n(2) Threshold Limit Values and Biological Exposure Indices for 1986-87 (1986), IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.120, PEL definition.\n\n(c) The following material is available for purchase from the American Society of Agricultural Engineers (ASAE), 2950 Niles Road, Post Office Box 229, St. Joseph, MI 49085:\n\n(1) ASAE Emblem for Identifying Slow Moving Vehicles, ASAE S276.2 (1968), IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.145(d)(10).\n\n(2) [Reserved]\n\n(d) The following material is available for purchase from the Agriculture Ammonia Institute-Rubber Manufacturers (AAI-RMA) Association, 1400 K St. NW, Washington DC 20005:\n\n(1) AAI-RMA Specifications for Anhydrous Ammonia Hose, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.111(b)(8)(i).\n\n(2) [Reserved]\n\n(e) American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 25 West 43rd Street, Fourth Floor, New York, NY 10036-7417; phone: (212) 642-4980; email:  info@ansi.org ; website:  www.ansi.org .\n\n(1)-(2) [Reserved]\n\n(3) ANSI A11.1-65 (R 70) Practice for Industrial Lighting, IBR approved for \u00a7\u00a7 1910.219(c)(5)(iii); 1910.261 (a)(3)(i), (c)(10), and (k)(21); and 1910.265(c)(2).\n\n(4) ANSI A11.1-65 Practice for Industrial Lighting, IBR approved for \u00a7\u00a7 1910.262(c)(6) and 1910.265(d)(2)(i)(a).\n\n(5) [Reserved]\n\n(6) ANSI A13.1-56 Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems, IBR approved for \u00a7\u00a7 1910.253(d)(4)(ii); 1910.261(a)(3)(iii); 1910.262(c)(7).\n\n(7) ANSI A14.1-68 Safety Code for Portable Wood Ladders, Supplemented by ANSI A14.1a-77, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.261 (a)(3)(iv) and (c)(3)(i).\n\n(8) ANSI A14.2-56 Safety Code for Portable Metal Ladders, Supplemented by ANSI A14.2a-77, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.261 (a)(3)(v) and (c)(3)(i).\n\n(9) ANSI A14.3-56 Safety Code for Fixed Ladders, IBR approved for \u00a7\u00a7 1910.68(b)(4); and 1910.261 (a)(3)(vi) and (c)(3)(i).\n\n(10) ANSI A17.1-65 Safety Code for Elevators, Dumbwaiters and Moving Walks, Including Supplements, A17.1a (1967); A17.1b (1968); A17.1c (1969); A17.1d (1970), IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.261 (a)(3)(vii), (g)(11)(i), and (l)(4).\n\n(11) ANSI A17.2-60 Practice for the Inspection of Elevators, Including Supplements, A17.2a (1965), A17.2b (1967), IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.261(a)(3)(viii).\n\n(12) ANSI A90.1-69 Safety Standard for Manlifts, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.68(b)(3).\n\n(13) ANSI A92.2-69 Standard for Vehicle Mounted Elevating and Rotating Work Platforms, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.67 (b)(1), (2), (c)(3), and (4) and 1910.268(s)(1)(v).\n\n(14) ANSI A120.1-70 Safety Code for Powered Platforms for Exterior Building Maintenance, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.66 app. D (b) through (d).\n\n(15) ANSI B7.1-70 Safety Code for the Use, Care and Protection of Abrasive Wheels, IBR approved for \u00a7\u00a7 1910.215(b)(12) and 1910.218(j).\n\n(16) ANSI B15.1-53 (R 58) Safety Code for Mechanical Power Transmission Apparatus, IBR approved for \u00a7\u00a7 1910.68(b)(4) and 1910.261 (a)(3)(ix), (b)(1), (e)(3), (e)(9), (f)(4), (j)(5)(iv), (k)(12), and (l)(3).\n\n(17) ANSI B20.1-57 Safety Code for Conveyors, Cableways, and Related Equipment, IBR approved for \u00a7\u00a7 1910.218(j)(3); 1910.261 (a)(3)(x), (b)(1), (c)(15)(iv), (f)(4), and (j)(2); 1910.265(c)(18)(i).\n\n(18) ANSI B30.2-43 (R 52) Safety Code for Cranes, Derricks, and Hoists, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.261 (a)(3)(xi), (c)(2)(vi), and (c)(8) (i) and (iv).\n\n(19) ANSI B30.2.0-67 Safety Code for Overhead and Gantry Cranes, IBR approved for \u00a7\u00a7 1910.179(b)(2); 1910.261 (a)(3)(xii), (c)(2)(v), and (c)(8) (i) and (iv).\n\n(20) ANSI B30.5-68 Safety Code for Crawler, Locomotive, and Truck Cranes, IBR approved for \u00a7\u00a7 1910.180(b)(2) and 1910.261(a)(3)(xiii).\n\n(21) ANSI B30.6-69 Safety Code for Derricks, IBR approved for \u00a7\u00a7 1910.181(b)(2) and 1910.268(j)(4)(iv) (E) and (H).\n\n(22) ANSI B31.1-55 Code for Pressure Piping, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.261(g)(18)(iii).\n\n(23) ANSI B31.1-67, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.253(d)(1)(i)(A)\n\n(24) ANSI B31.1a-63 Addenda to ANSI B31.1 (1955), IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.261(g)(18)(iii).\n\n(25) ANSI B31.1-67 and Addenda B31.1 (1969) Code for Pressure Piping, IBR approved for \u00a7\u00a7 1910.103(b)(1)(iii)(b); 1910.104(b)(5)(ii); 1910.218 (d)(4) and (e)(1)(iv); and 1910.261 (a)(3)(xiv) and (g)(18)(iii).\n\n(26) ANSI B31.2-68 Fuel Gas Piping, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.261(g)(18)(iii).\n\n(27) ANSI B31.3-66 Petroleum Refinery Piping, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.103(b)(3)(v)(b).\n\n(28) ANSI B31.5-66 Addenda B31.5a (1968) Refrigeration Piping, IB approved for \u00a7\u00a7 1910.103(b)(3)(v)(b) and 1910.111(b)(7)(iii).\n\n(29) ANSI B56.1-69 Safety Standard for Powered Industrial Trucks, IBR approved for \u00a7\u00a7 1910.178(a) (2) and (3) and 1910.261 (a)(3)(xv), (b)(6), (m)(2), and (m)(5)(iii).\n\n(30) ANSI B57.1-65 Compressed Gas Cylinder Valve Outlet and Inlet Connections, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.253(b)(1)(iii).\n\n(31) [Reserved]\n\n(32) ANSI B175.1-1991, Safety Requirements for Gasoline-Powered Chain Saws 1910.266(e)(2)(i).\n\n(33) [Reserved]\n\n(34) ANSI C33.2-56 Safety Standard for Transformer-Type Arc Welding Machines, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.254(b)(1).\n\n(35) [Reserved]\n\n(36) ANSI H23.1-70 Seamless Copper Water Tube Specification, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.110(b) (8)(ii) and (13)(ii)(b)(1).\n\n(37) ANSI H38.7-69 Specification for Aluminum Alloy Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.110(b)(8)(i).\n\n(38) ANSI J6.4-71 Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Blankets, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.268 (f)(1) and (n)(11)(v).\n\n(39) ANSI J6.6-71 Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Gloves, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.268 (f)(1) and (n)(11)(iv).\n\n(40) ANSI K13.1-67 Identification of Gas Mask Canisters, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.261 (a)(3)(xvi) and (h)(2)(iii).\n\n(41) ANSI K61.1-60 Safety Requirements for the Storage and Handling of Anhydrous Ammonia, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.111(b)(11)(i).\n\n(42) ANSI K61.1-66 Safety Requirements for the Storage and Handling of Anhydrous Ammonia, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.111(b)(11)(i).\n\n(43) ANSI O1.1-54 (R 61) Safety Code for Woodworking Machinery, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.261 (a)(3)(xvii), (e)(7), and (i)(2).\n\n(44) ANSI S1.4-71 (R 76) Specification for Sound Level Meters, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.95 appendixes D and I.\n\n(45) ANSI S1.11-71 (R 76) Specification for Octave, Half-Octave and Third-Octave Band Filter Sets, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.95 appendix D.\n\n(46) ANSI S3.6-69 Specifications for Audiometers, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.95(h)(2) and (5)(ii) and appendix D.\n\n(47) ANSI Z4.1-68 Requirements for Sanitation in Places of Employment, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.261 (a)(3)(xviii) and (g)(15)(vi).\n\n(48) [Reserved]\n\n(49) ANSI Z9.1-51 Safety Code for Ventilation and Operation of Open Surface Tanks, IBR approved for 1910.261(a)(3)(xix), (g)(18)(v), and (h)(2)(i).\n\n(50) ANSI Z9.1-71 Practices for Ventilation and Operation of Open-Surface Tanks, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.124(b)(4)(iv).\n\n(51) ANSI Z9.2-60 Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Systems, IBR approved for \u00a7\u00a7 1910.94(a)(4)(i) introductory text, (a)(6) introductory text, (b)(3)(ix), (b)(4)(i) and (ii), (c)(3)(i) introductory text, (c)(5)(iii)(b), and (c)(7)(iv)(a); 1910.261(a)(3)(xx), (g)(1)(i) and (iii), and (h)(2)(ii).\n\n(52) ANSI Z9.2-79 Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Systems, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.124(b)(4)(i).\n\n(53) ANSI Z12.12-68 Standard for the Prevention of Sulfur Fires and Explosions, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.261 (a)(3)(xxi), (d)(1)(i), (f)(2)(iv), and (g)(1)(i).\n\n(54) ANSI Z12.20-62 (R 69) Code for the Prevention of Dust Explosions in Woodworking and Wood Flour Manufacturing Plants, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.265(c)(20)(i).\n\n(55) ANSI Z21.30-64 Requirements for Gas Appliances and Gas Piping Installations, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.265(c)(15).\n\n(56) ANSI Z24.22-57 Method of Measurement of Real-Ear Attenuation of Ear Protectors at Threshold, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.261(a)(3)(xxii).\n\n(57) ANSI Z33.1-61 Installation of Blower and Exhaust Systems for Dust, Stock, and Vapor Removal or Conveying, IBR approved for \u00a7\u00a7 1910.94(a)(4)(i); 1910.261 (a)(3)(xxiii) and (f)(5); and 1910.265(c)(20)(i).\n\n(58) ANSI Z33.1-66 Installation of Blower and Exhaust Systems for Dust, Stock, and Vapor Removal or Conveying, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.94(a)(2)(ii).\n\n(59) ANSI Z35.1-1968, Specifications for Accident Prevention Signs; IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.261(c). Copies available for purchase from the IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; telephone: 1-877-413-5184; Web site:  www.global.ihs.com.\n\n(60) ANSI Z41-1999, American National Standard for Personal Protection\u2014Protective Footwear; IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.136(b)(1)(ii). Copies of ANSI Z41-1999 are available for purchase only from the National Safety Council, P.O. Box 558, Itasca, IL 60143-0558; telephone: 1-800-621-7619; fax: 708-285-0797; Web site:  http://www.nsc.org.\n\n(61) ANSI Z41-1991, American National Standard for Personal Protection\u2014Protective Footwear; IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.136(b)(1)(iii). Copies of ANSI Z41-1991 are available for purchase only from the National Safety Council, P.O. Box 558, Itasca, IL 60143-0558; telephone: 1-800-621-7619; fax: 708-285-0797; Web site:  http://www.nsc.org.\n\n(62)-(63) [Reserved]\n\n(64) ANSI Z49.1-67 Safety in Welding and Cutting, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.252(c)(1)(iv) (A) and (B).\n\n(65) USAS Z53.1-1967 (also referred to as ANSI Z53.1-1967), Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards, ANSI approved October 9, 1967; IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.97(a) and 1910.145(d). Copies available for purchase from the IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; telephone: 1-877-413-5184; Web site:  www.global.ihs.com.\n\n(66) ANSI Z535.1-2006 (R2011), Safety Colors, reaffirmed July 19, 2011; IBR approved for \u00a7\u00a7 1910.97(a) and 1910.145(d). Copies available for purchase from the:\n\n(i) American National Standards Institute's e-Standards Store, 25 W 43rd Street, 4th Floor, New York, NY 10036; telephone: 212-642-4980; Web site:  http://webstore.ansi.org/;\n\n(ii) IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; telephone: 877-413-5184; Web site:  www.global.ihs.com;  or\n\n(iii) TechStreet Store, 3916 Ranchero Dr., Ann Arbor, MI 48108; telephone: 877-699-9277; Web site:  www.techstreet.com.\n\n(67) ANSI Z535.2-2011, Environmental and Facility Safety Signs, published September 15, 2011; IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.261(c). Copies available for purchase from the:\n\n(i) American National Standards Institute's e-Standards Store, 25 W 43rd Street, 4th Floor, New York, NY 10036; telephone: 212-642-4980; Web site:  http://webstore.ansi.org/;\n\n(ii) IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; telephone: 877-413-5184; Web site:  www.global.ihs.com;  or\n\n(iii) TechStreet Store, 3916 Ranchero Dr., Ann Arbor, MI 48108; telephone: 877-699-9277; Web site:  www.techstreet.com.\n\n(68) ANSI Z54.1-63 Safety Standard for Non-Medical X-Ray and Sealed Gamma Ray Sources, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.252(d) (1)(vii) and (2)(ii).\n\n(69) ANSI/ISEA Z87.1-2010, Occupational and Educational Personal Eye and Face Protection Devices, Approved April 13, 2010; IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.133(b). Copies are available for purchase from:\n\n(i) American National Standards Institute's e-Standards Store, 25 W 43rd Street, 4th Floor, New York, NY 10036; telephone: (212) 642-4980; Web site:  http://webstore.ansi.org/;\n\n(ii) IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; telephone: (877) 413-5184; Web site:  http://global.ihs.com;  or\n\n(iii) TechStreet Store, 3916 Ranchero Dr., Ann Arbor, MI 48108; telephone: (877) 699-9277; Web site:  http://techstreet.com.\n\n(70) ANSI Z87.1-2003, Occupational and Educational Eye and Face Personal Protection Devices Approved June 19, 2003; IBR approved for \u00a7\u00a7 1910.133(b). Copies available for purchase from the:\n\n(i) American National Standards Institute's e-Standards Store, 25 W 43rd Street, 4th Floor, New York, NY 10036; telephone: (212) 642-4980; Web site:  http://webstore.ansi.org/;\n\n(ii) IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; telephone: (877) 413-5184; Web site:  http://global.ihs.com;  or\n\n(iii) TechStreet Store, 3916 Ranchero Dr., Ann Arbor, MI 48108; telephone: (877) 699-9277; Web site:  http://techstreet.com.\n\n(71) ANSI Z87.1-1989 (R-1998), Practice for Occupational and Educational Eye and Face Protection, Reaffirmation approved January 4, 1999; IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.133(b). Copies are available for purchase from:\n\n(i) American National Standards Institute's e-Standards Store, 25 W 43rd Street, 4th Floor, New York, NY 10036; telephone: (212) 642-4980; Web site:  http://webstore.ansi.org /;\n\n(ii) IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; telephone: (877) 413-5184; Web site:  http://global.ihs.com;  or\n\n(iii) TechStreet Store, 3916 Ranchero Dr., Ann Arbor, MI 48108; telephone: (877) 699-9277; Web site:  http://techstreet.com.\n\n(72) ANSI Z88.2-1969, Practices for Respiratory Protection; IBR approved for \u00a7\u00a7 1910.94(c)(6)(iii)( a ), 1910.134(c); and 1910.261(a)(3)(xxvi), (b)(2), (f)(5), (g)(15)(v), (h)(2)(iii), (h)(2)(iv), and (i)(4).\n\n(73) American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z89.1-2009, American National Standard for Industrial Head Protection, approved January 26, 2009; IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.135(b)(1)(i). Copies of ANSI Z89.1-2009 are available for purchase only from the International Safety Equipment Association, 1901 North Moore Street, Arlington, VA 22209-1762; telephone: 703-525-1695; fax: 703-528-2148; Web site:  www.safetyequipment.org.\n\n(74) American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z89.1-2003, American National Standard for Industrial Head Protection; IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.135(b)(1)(ii). Copies of ANSI Z89.1-2003 are available for purchase only from the International Safety Equipment Association, 1901 North Moore Street, Arlington, VA 22209-1762; telephone: 703-525-1695; fax: 703-528-2148; Web site:  www.safetyequipment.org.\n\n(75) American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z89.1-1997, American National Standard for Personnel Protection\u2014Protective Headwear for Industrial Workers\u2014Requirements; IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.135(b)(1)(iii). Copies of ANSI Z89.1-1997 are available for purchase only from the International Safety Equipment Association, 1901 North Moore Street, Arlington, VA 22209-1762; telephone: 703-525-1695; fax: 703-528-2148; Web site:  www.safetyequipment.org.\n\n(76) ANSI Z41.1-1967 Men's Safety Toe Footwear; IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.261(i)(4).\n\n(77) ANSI Z87.1-1968 Practice of Occupational and Educational Eye and Face Protection; IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.261(a)(3)(xxv), (d)(1)(ii), (f)(5), (g)(1), (g)(15)(v), (g)(18)(ii), and (i)(4).\n\n(78) ANSI Z89.1-1969 Safety Requirements for Industrial Head Protection; IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.261(a)(3)(xxvii), (b)(2), (g)(15)(v), and (i)(4).\n\n(79) ANSI Z89.2-1971 Safety Requirements for Industrial Protective Helmets for Electrical Workers, Class B; IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.268(i)(1).\n\n(f) The following material is available for purchase from the American Petroleum Institute (API), 1220 L Street NW, Washington DC 20005:\n\n(1) [Reserved]\n\n(2) API 12B (May 1958) Specification for Bolted Production Tanks, 11th Ed., With Supplement No. 1, Mar. 1962, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.106(b)(1)(i)( a )( 3 ).\n\n(3) API 12D (Aug. 1957) Specification for Large Welded Production Tanks, 7th Ed., IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.106(b)(1)(i)( a )( 3 ).\n\n(4) API 12F (Mar. 1961) Specification for Small Welded Production Tanks, 5th Ed., IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.106(b)(1)(i)( a )( 3 ).\n\n(5) API 620, Fourth Ed. (1970) Including appendix R, Recommended Rules for Design and Construction of Large Welded Low Pressure Storage Tanks, IBR approved for \u00a7\u00a7 1910.103(c)(1)(i)( a ); 1910.106(b)(1)(iv)(b)(1); and 1910.111( d )( 1 ) (ii) and (iii).\n\n(6) API 650 (1966) Welded Steel Tanks for Oil Storage, 3rd Ed., IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.106(b)(1)(iii)( a )( 2 ).\n\n(7) API 1104 (1968) Standard for Welding Pipelines and Related Facilities, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.252(d)(1)(v).\n\n(8) API 2000 (1968) Venting Atmospheric and Low Pressure Storage Tanks, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.106(b)(2)(iv)( b )( 1 ).\n\n(9) API 2201 (1963) Welding or Hot Tapping on Equipment Containing Flammables, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.252(d)(1)(vi).\n\n(g) The following material is available for purchase from the American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), United Engineering Center, 345 East 47th Street, New York, NY 10017:\n\n(1) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Sec. VIII, 1949, 1950, 1952, 1956, 1959, and 1962 Ed., IBR approved for \u00a7\u00a7 1910.110 (b)(10)(iii) (Table H-26), (d)(2) (Table H-31); (e)(3)(i) (Table H-32), (h)(2) (Table H-34); and 1910.111(b)(2)(vi);\n\n(2) ASME Code for Pressure Vessels, 1968 Ed., IBR approved for \u00a7\u00a7 1910.106(i)(3)(i); 1910.110(g)(2)(iii)( b )( 2 ); and 1910.217(b)(12);\n\n(3) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Sec. VIII, 1968, IBR approved for \u00a7\u00a7 1910.103; 1910.104(b)(4)(ii); 1910.106 (b)(1)(iv)( b )( 2 ) and ( i )(3)(ii); 1910.107; 1910.110(b)(11) (i)( b ) and (iii)( a )( 1 ); 1910.111(b)(2) (i), (ii), and (iv); and 1910.169(a)(2) (i) and (ii);\n\n(4) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Sec. VIII, Paragraph UG-84, 1968, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.104 (b)(4)(ii) and (b)(5)(iii);\n\n(5) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Sec. VIII, Unfired Pressure Vessels, Including Addenda (1969), IBR approved for \u00a7\u00a7 1910.261; 1910.262; 1910.263(i)(24)(ii);\n\n(6) Code for Unfired Pressure Vessels for Petroleum Liquids and Gases of the API and the ASME, 1951 Ed., IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.110(b)(3)(iii); and\n\n(7) ASME B56.6-1992 (with addenda), Safety Standard for Rough Terrain Forklift Trucks, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.266(f)(4).\n\n(h) ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, P.O. Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959; phone: (610) 832-9585; email:  service@astm.org;  website:  www.astm.org.\n\n(1) ASTM A 47-68, Malleable Iron Castings, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.111.\n\n(2) ASTM A 53-69, Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe, IBR approved for \u00a7\u00a7 1910.110 and 1910.111.\n\n(3) ASTM A 126-66, Gray Iron Casting for Valves, Flanges and Pipe Fitting, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.111.\n\n(4) ASTM A 391-65 (ANSI G61.1-1968), Alloy Steel Chain, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.184.\n\n(5) ASTM A 395-68, Ductile Iron for Use at Elevated Temperatures, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.111.\n\n(6) ASTM B 88-66A, Seamless Copper Water Tube, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.252.\n\n(7) ASTM B 88-69, Seamless Copper Water Tube, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.110.\n\n(8) [Reserved]\n\n(9) ASTM B 210-68, Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.110.\n\n(10) ASTM B 241-69, Standard Specifications for Aluminum-Alloy Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.110.\n\n(11) ASTM D 5-65, Test for Penetration by Bituminous Materials, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.106.\n\n(12) ASTM D 56-70, Test for Flash Point by Tag Closed Tester, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.106.\n\n(13) ASTM D 56-05, Standard Test Method for Flash Point by Tag Closed Cup Tester, Approved May 1, 2005, IBR approved for Appendix B to \u00a7 1910.1200.\n\n(14) ASTM D 86-62, Test for Distillation of Petroleum Products, IBR approved for \u00a7\u00a7 1910.106 and 1910.119.\n\n(15) ASTM D 86-07a, Standard Test Method for Distillation of Petroleum Products at Atmospheric Pressure, Approved April 1, 2007, IBR approved for Appendix B to \u00a7 1910.1200.\n\n(16) ASTM D 88-56, Test for Saybolt Viscosity, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.106.\n\n(17) ASTM D 93-71, Test for Flash Point by Pensky Martens, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.106.\n\n(18) ASTM D 93-08, Standard Test Methods for Flash Point by Pensky-Martens Closed Cup Tester, Approved Oct. 15, 2008, IBR approved for Appendix B to \u00a7 1910.1200.\n\n(19) ASTM D 240-02 (Reapproved 2007), Standard Test Method for Heat of Combustion of Liquid Hydrocarbon Fuels by Bomb Calorimeter, Approved May 1, 2007, IBR approved for Appendix B to \u00a7 1910.1200.\n\n(20) ASTM D 323-68, Standard Test Method of Test for Vapor Pressure of Petroleum Products (Reid Method), IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.106.\n\n(21) ASTM D 445-65, Test for Viscosity of Transparent and Opaque Liquids, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.106.\n\n(22) ASTM D 1078-05, Standard Test Method for Distillation Range of Volatile Organic Liquids, Approved May 15, 2005, IBR approved for Appendix B to \u00a7 1910.1200.\n\n(23) ASTM D 1692-68, Test for Flammability of Plastic Sheeting and Cellular Plastics, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.103.\n\n(24) ASTM D 2161-66, Conversion Tables for SUS, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.106.\n\n(25) ASTM D 3278-96 (Reapproved 2004) E1, Standard Test Methods for Flash Point of Liquids by Small Scale Closed-Cup Apparatus, Approved November 1, 2004, IBR approved for Appendix B to \u00a7 1910.1200.\n\n(26) ASTM D 3828-07a, Standard Test Methods for Flash Point by Small Scale Closed Cup Tester, Approved July 15, 2007, IBR approved for Appendix B to \u00a7 1910.1200.\n\n(27) ASTM D4359-90 (Reapproved 2019), Standard Test Method for Determining Whether a Material is a Liquid or a Solid, approved July 1, 2019, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.1200.\n\n(28) ASTM F-2412-2005, Standard Test Methods for Foot Protection, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.136.\n\n(29) ASTM F-2413-2005, Standard Specification for Performance Requirements for Protective Footwear, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.136.\n\n(i) The following material is available at the American Thoracic Society (ATS), 25 Broadway, 18th Floor New York, NY 10004; website:  www.atsjournals.org/.\n\n(1) Spirometric Reference Values from a Sample of the General U.S. Population. Hankinson JL, Odencrantz JR, Fedan KB. American Journal of Respiratory and Critical Care Medicine, 159:179-187, 1999, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.1043(h).\n\n(2) [Reserved]\n\n(j) The following material is available for purchase from the American Welding Society (AWS), 550 NW, LeJeune Road, P.O. Box 351040, Miami FL 33135:\n\n(1)-(2) [Reserved]\n\n(3) AWS B3.0-41 Standard Qualification Procedure, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.67(c)(5)(i).\n\n(4) AWS D1.0-1966 Code for Welding in Building Construction, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.27(b)(6).\n\n(5) AWS D2.0-69 Specifications for Welding Highway and Railway Bridges, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.67(c)(5)(iv).\n\n(6) AWS D8.4-61 Recommended Practices for Automotive Welding Design, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.67(c)(5)(ii).\n\n(7) AWS D10.9-69 Standard Qualification of Welding Procedures and Welders for Piping and Tubing, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.67(c)(5)(iii).\n\n(k) The following material is available for purchase from the Department of Commerce:\n\n(1) [Reserved]\n\n(2) Publication \u201cModel Performance Criteria for Structural Fire Fighters' Helmets,\u201d IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.156(e)(5)(i).\n\n(l) The following material is available for purchase from the Compressed Gas Association (CGA), 1235 Jefferson Davis Highway, Arlington, VA 22202:\n\n(1) CGA C-6 (1968) Standards for Visual Inspection of Compressed Gas Cylinders, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.101(a).\n\n(2) CGA C-8 (1962) Standard for Requalification of ICC-3HT Cylinders, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.101(a).\n\n(3) CGA G-1-2009 Acetylene, Twelfth Edition, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.102(a). Copies of CGA Pamphlet G-1-2009 are available for purchase from the: Compressed Gas Association, Inc., 4221 Walney Road, 5th Floor, Chantilly, VA 20151; telephone: (703) 788-2700; fax: (703) 961-1831; email:  cga@cganet.com.\n\n(4) CGA G-7.1 (1966) Commodity Specification, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.134(d)(1).\n\n(5) CGA G-8.1 (1964) Standard for the Installation of Nitrous Oxide Systems at Consumer Sites, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.105.\n\n(6) CGA P-1 (1965) Safe Handling of Compressed Gases, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.101(b).\n\n(7) CGA P-3 (1963) Specifications, Properties, and Recommendations for Packaging, Transportation, Storage and Use of Ammonium Nitrate, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.109(i)(1)(ii)( b ).\n\n(8) CGA S-1.1 (1963) and 1965 Addenda. Safety Release Device Standards\u2014Cylinders for Compressed Gases, IBR approved for \u00a7\u00a7 1910.101(c); 1910.103(c)(1)(iv)( a )( 2 ).\n\n(9) CGA S-1.2 (1963) Safety Release Device Standards, Cargo and Portable Tanks for Compressed Gases, IBR approved for \u00a7\u00a7 1910.101(c); 1910.103(c)(1)(iv)( a )( 2 ).\n\n(10) CGA S-1.3 (1959) Safety Release Device Standards-Compressed Gas Storage Containers, IBR approved for \u00a7\u00a7 1910.103(c)(1)(iv)( a )( 2 ); 1910.104(b)(6)(iii); and 1910.111(d)(4)(ii)( b ).\n\n(11) CGA 1957 Standard Hose Connection Standard, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.253(e) (4)(v) and (5)(iii).\n\n(12) CGA and RMA (Rubber Manufacturer's Association) Specification for Rubber Welding Hose (1958), IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.253(e)(5)(i).\n\n(13) CGA 1958 Regulator Connection Standard, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.253(e) (4)(iv) and (6).\n\n(m) The following material is available for purchase from the Crane Manufacturer's Association of America, Inc. (CMAA), 1 Thomas Circle NW, Washington DC 20005:\n\n(1) CMAA Specification 1B61, Specifications for Electric Overhead Traveling Cranes, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.179(b)(6)(i).\n\n(2) [Reserved]\n\n(n) German Institute for Standardization (DIN) (Beuth Verlag GmbH) Am DIN-Platz Burggrafenstra\u00dfe 6 10787 Berlin, Germany; phone: +49 30 58885 70070; website:  https://din.de/en/about-standards/buy-standard .\n\n(1) DIN 51794:2003-05\u2014Determining the ignition temperature of petroleum products, May 2003, IBR approved for appendix B to \u00a7 1910.1200.\n\n(2) [Reserved]\n\n(o) The following material is available for purchase from the Fertilizer Institute, 1015 18th Street NW, Washington, DC 20036:\n\n(1) Standard M-1 (1953, 1955, 1957, 1960, 1961, 1963, 1965, 1966, 1967, 1968), Superseded by ANSI K61.1-1972, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.111(b)(1) (i) and (iii).\n\n(2) [Reserved]\n\n(p) The following material is available for purchase from the General Services Administration:\n\n(1) GSA Pub. GG-B-0067b, Air Compressed for Breathing Purposes, or Interim Federal Specifications, Apr. 1965, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.134(d)(4).\n\n(2) [Reserved]\n\n(q) International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC), IEC Secretariat, 3 rue de Varemb\u00e9, PO Box 131, CH-1211 Geneva 20, Switzerland; phone: +41 22 919 02 11; email:  sales@iec.ch ; website:  https://www.iec.ch .\n\n(1) IEC 60079-20-1, Explosive atmospheres\u2014Part 20-1: Material characteristics for gas and vapor classification\u2014Test methods and data, Edition 1.0, 2010-01; IBR approved for appendix B to \u00a7 1910.1200.\n\n(2) [Reserved]\n\n(r) The following material is available for purchase from the: International Code Council, Chicago District Office, 4051 W. Flossmoor Rd., Country Club Hills, IL 60478;  telephone:  708-799-2300, x3-3801;  facsimile:  001-708-799-4981;  e-mail: order@iccsafe.org.\n\n(1) IFC-2009, International Fire Code, copyright 2009, IBR approved for \u00a7\u00a7 1910.34, 1910.35, 1910.36, and 1910.37.\n\n(2) [Reserved]\n\n(s) The following material is available for purchase from the Department of Health and Human Services:\n\n(1) Publication No. 76-120 (1975), List of Personal Hearing Protectors and Attenuation Data, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.95 App. B.\n\n(2) [Reserved]\n\n(t) The following material is available for purchase from the Institute of Makers of Explosives (IME), 420 Lexington Avenue, New York, NY 10017:\n\n(1) IME Pamphlet No. 17, 1960, Safety in the Handling and Use of Explosives, IBR approved for \u00a7\u00a7 1910.261 (a)(4)(iii) and (c)(14)(ii).\n\n(2) [Reserved]\n\n(u) The following material is available from the International Labour Organization (ILO), 4 route des Morillons, CH-1211 Gen\u00e8ve 22, Switzerland; telephone: +41 (0) 22 799 6111; fax: +41 (0) 22 798 8685; website:  www.ilo.org/.\n\n(1) Guidelines for the Use of the ILO International Classification of Radiographs of Pneumoconioses, Revised Edition 2011, Occupational safety and health series; 22 (Rev.2011), IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.1001.\n\n(2) [Reserved]\n\n(v) International Organization for Standardization (ISO), ISO Central Secretariat, Chemin de Blandonnet 8 CP 401\u20141214 Vernier, Geneva, Switzerland; phone: +41 22 749 01 11; email:  central@iso.org ; website:  www.iso.org/store.html .\n\n(1) ISO 817:2014(E), Refrigerants\u2014Designation and safety classification, Third edition, 2014-04-15; IBR approved for appendix B to \u00a7 1910.1200.\n\n(2) ISO 10156:1996 (E), Gases and Gas Mixtures\u2014Determination of Fire Potential and Oxidizing Ability for the Selection of Cylinder Valve Outlets, Second Edition, Feb. 15, 1996; IBR approved for appendix B to \u00a7 1910.1200.\n\n(3) ISO 10156:2017(E), Gas Cylinders\u2014Gases and gas mixtures\u2014Determination of fire potential and oxidizing ability for the selection of cylinder valve outlets, Fourth edition, 2017-07; IBR approved for appendix B to \u00a7 1910.1200.\n\n(4) ISO 10156-2:2005 (E), Gas cylinders\u2014Gases and Gas Mixtures\u2014Part 2: Determination of Oxidizing Ability of Toxic and Corrosive Gases and Gas Mixtures, First Edition, Aug. 1, 2005; IBR approved for appendix B to subpart Z.\n\n(5) ISO 13943:2000 (E/F); Fire Safety\u2014Vocabulary, First Edition, April, 15, 2000, IBR approved for appendix B to \u00a7 1910.1200.\n\n(w) The following material is available for purchase from the National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA):\n\n(1) NEMA EW-1 (1962) Requirements for Electric Arc Welding Apparatus, IBR approved for \u00a7\u00a7 1910.254(b)(1).\n\n(2) [Reserved]\n\n(x) The following material is available for purchase from the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), 1 Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269; Telephone: 800-344-3555 or 617-770-3000; Fax: 1-800-593-6372 or 1-508-895-8301; Email:  custserv@nfpa.org;  Web site:  http://www.nfpa.org.\n\n(1) NFPA 30 (1969) Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.178(f)(1).\n\n(2) NFPA 32-1970 Standard for Dry Cleaning Plants, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.106(j)(6)(i).\n\n(3) NFPA 33-1969 Standard for Spray Finishing Using Flammable and Combustible Material, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.94(c)(2).\n\n(4) NFPA 34-1966 Standard for Dip Tanks Containing Flammable or Combustible Liquids, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.124(b)(4)(iv).\n\n(5) NFPA 34-1995 Standard for Dip Tanks Containing Flammable or Combustible Liquids, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.124(b)(4)(ii).\n\n(6) NFPA 35-1970 Standard for the Manufacture of Organic Coatings, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.106(j)(6)(ii).\n\n(7) NFPA 36-1967 Standard for Solvent Extraction Plants, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.106(j)(6)(iii).\n\n(8) NFPA 37-1970 Standard for the Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines, IBR approved for \u00a7\u00a7 1910.106(j)(6)(iv) and 1910.110 (b)(20)(iv)(c) and (e)(11).\n\n(9) NFPA 51B-1962 Standard for Fire Protection in Use of Cutting and Welding Processes, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.252(a)(1) introductory text.\n\n(10) NFPA 54-1969 Standard for the Installation of Gas Appliances and Gas Piping, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.110(b)(20)(iv)(a).\n\n(11) NFPA 54A-1969 Standard for the Installation of Gas Piping and Gas Equipment on Industrial Premises and Certain Other Premises, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.110(b)(20)(iv)(b).\n\n(12) NFPA 58-1969 Standard for the Storage and Handling of Liquefied Petroleum Gases (ANSI Z106.1-1970), IBR approved for \u00a7\u00a7 1910.110 (b)(3)(iv) and (i)(3) (i) and (ii); and 1910.178(f)(2).\n\n(13) NFPA 59-1968 Standard for the Storage and Handling of Liquefied Petroleum Gases at Utility Gas Plants, IBR approved for \u00a7\u00a7 1910.110 (b)(3)(iv) and (i)(2)(iv).\n\n(14) NFPA 62-1967 Standard for the Prevention of Dust Explosions in the Production, Packaging, and Handling of Pulverized Sugar and Cocoa, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.263(k)(2)(i).\n\n(15) NFPA 68-1954 Guide for Explosion Venting, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.94(a)(2)(iii).\n\n(16) [Reserved]\n\n(17) NFPA 78-1968 Lightning Protection Code, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.109(i)(6)(ii).\n\n(18) NFPA 80-1968 Standard for Fire Doors and Windows, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.106(d)(4)(i).\n\n(19) NFPA 80-1970 Standard for the Installation of Fire Doors and Windows, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.253(f)(6)(i)(I).\n\n(20) NFPA 86A-1969 Standard for Oven and Furnaces Design, Location and Equipment, IBR approved for \u00a7\u00a7 1910.107 (j)(1) and (l)(3) and 1910.108 (b)(2) and (d)(2).\n\n(21) NFPA 91-1961 Standard for the Installation of Blower and Exhaust Systems for Dust, Stock, and Vapor Removal or Conveying (ANSI Z33.1-61), IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.107(d)(1).\n\n(22) NFPA 91-1969 Standards for Blower and Exhaust Systems, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.108(b)(1).\n\n(23) NFPA 96-1970 Standard for the Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and Grease Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooking Equipment, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.110(b)(20)(iv)(d).\n\n(24) NFPA 101-1970 Code for Life Safety From Fire in Buildings and Structures, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.261(a)(4)(ii).\n\n(25) NFPA 101-2009, Life Safety Code, 2009 edition, IBR approved for \u00a7\u00a7 1910.34, 1910.35, 1910.36, and 1910.37.\n\n(26) NFPA 203M-1970 Manual on Roof Coverings, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.109(i)(1)(iii)(c).\n\n(27) NFPA 251-1969 Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials, IBR approved for \u00a7\u00a7 1910.106 (d)(3)(ii) introductory text and (d)(4)(i).\n\n(28) NFPA 302-1968 Fire Protection Standard for Motor-Craft (Pleasure and Commercial), IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.265(d)(2)(iv) introductory text.\n\n(29) NFPA 385-1966 Recommended Regulatory Standard for Tank Vehicles for Flammable and Combustible Liquids, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.106(g)(1)(i)(e)(1).\n\n(30) NFPA 496-1967 Standard for Purged Enclosures for Electrical Equipment in Hazardous Locations, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.103(c)(1)(ix)(e)(1).\n\n(31) NFPA 505-1969 Standard for Type Designations, Areas of Use, Maintenance, and Operation of Powered Industrial Trucks, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.110(e)(2)(iv).\n\n(32) NFPA 566-1965 Standard for the Installation of Bulk Oxygen Systems at Consumer Sites, IBR approved for \u00a7\u00a7 1910.253 (b)(4)(iv) and (c)(2)(v).\n\n(33) NFPA 656-1959 Code for the Prevention of Dust Ignition in Spice Grinding Plants, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.263(k)(2)(i).\n\n(34) NFPA 1971-1975 Protective Clothing for Structural Fire Fighting, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.156(e)(3)(ii) introductory text.\n\n(35) NFPA 51A (2001) Standard for Acetylene Cylinder Charging Plants, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.102(b) and (c). Copies of NFPA 51A-2001 are available for purchase from the: National Fire Protection Association, 1 Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02169-7471; telephone: 1-800-344-35557; e-mail:  custserv@nfpa.org.\n\n(36) NFPA 51A (2006) Standard for Acetylene Cylinder Charging Plants, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.102(b) and (c). Copies of NFPA 51A-2006 are available for purchase from the: National Fire Protection Association, 1 Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02169-7471; telephone: 1-800-344-35557; e-mail:  custserv@nfpa.org.\n\n(37) NFPA 30B, Code for the Manufacture and Storage of Aerosol Products, 2007 Edition, Approved August 17, 2006, IBR approved for Appendix B to \u00a7 1910.1200.\n\n(y) The following material is available for purchase from the National Food Plant Institute, 1700 K St. NW., Washington, DC 20006:\n\n(1) Definition and Test Procedures for Ammonium Nitrate Fertilizer (Nov. 1964), IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.109 Table H-22, ftn. 3.\n\n(2) [Reserved]\n\n(z) The following material is available for purchase from the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH):\n\n(1) Registry of Toxic Effects of Chemical Substances, 1978, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.20(c)(13)(i) and appendix B.\n\n(2) Development of Criteria for Fire Fighters Gloves; Vol. II, part II; Test Methods, 1976, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.156(e)(4)(i) introductory text.\n\n(3) NIOSH Recommendations for Occupational Safety and Health Standards (Sept. 1987), IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.120 PEL definition.\n\n(aa) The following material is available for purchase from the Public Health Service:\n\n(1) U.S. Pharmacopeia, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.134(d)(1).\n\n(2) Publication No. 934 (1962), Food Service Sanitation Ordinance and Code, part V of the Food Service Sanitation Manual, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.142(i)(1).\n\n(bb) The following material is available for purchase from the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE), 485 Lexington Avenue, New York, NY 10017:\n\n(1) SAE J185, June 1988, Recommended Practice for Access Systems for Off-Road Machines, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.266(f)(5)(i).\n\n(2) SAE J231, January 1981, Minimum Performance Criteria for Falling Object Protective Structure (FOPS), IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.266(f)(3)(ii).\n\n(3) SAE J386, June 1985, Operator Restraint Systems for Off-Road Work Machines, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.266(d)(3)(iv).\n\n(4) SAE J397, April 1988, Deflection Limiting Volume-ROPS/FOPS Laboratory Evaluation, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.266(f)(3)(iv).\n\n(5) SAE 765 (1961) SAE Recommended Practice: Crane Loading Stability Test Code, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.180 (c)(1)(iii) and (e)(2)(iii)( a ).\n\n(6) SAE J1040, April 1988, Performance Criteria for Rollover Protective Structures (ROPS) for Construction, Earthmoving, Forestry and Mining Machines, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.266(f)(3)(ii).\n\n(cc) The following material is available for purchase from Underwriters Laboratories (UL), 207 East Ohio Street, Chicago, IL 60611:\n\n(1) UL 58-61 Steel Underground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liquids, 5th Ed., IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.106(b)(1)(iii)( a )( 1 ).\n\n(2) UL 80-63 Steel Inside Tanks for Oil-Burner Fuel, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.106(b)(1)(iii)( a )( 1 ).\n\n(3) UL 142-68 Steel Above Ground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liquids, IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.106(b)(1)(iii)( a )( 1 ).\n\n(dd) United Nations (UN), United Nations Publications, P.O. Box 960 Herndon, VA 20172; phone: (703) 661-1571;; email:  order@un.org ; website:  https://shop.un.org/ .\n\n(1) ADR 2019, European Agreement Concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road; Annex A: General provisions and provisions concerning dangerous substances and articles; (Volumes I and II) including December 2018 corrigendum to Volume II, applicable January 1, 2019; IBR approved for \u00a7 1910.1200.\n\n(2) ST/SG/AC.10/Rev.4 (\u201cUN ST/SG/AC.10/Rev.4\u201d), The UN Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods, Manual of Tests and Criteria, Fourth Revised Edition, 2003; IBR approved for appendix B to \u00a7 1910.1200.\n\n(3) ST/SG/AC.10/11/Rev.6 (\u201cUN ST/SG/AC.10/11/Rev.6\u201d), Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods: Manual of Tests and Criteria, sixth revised edition, copyright 2015; IBR approved for appendix B to \u00a7 1910.1200."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.1.33.7", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "A", "Subpart A\u2014General", "", "\u00a7 1910.7 Definition and requirements for a nationally recognized testing laboratory.", "OSHA", "", "", "[53 FR 12120, Apr. 12, 1988; 53 FR 16838, May 11, 1988, as amended at 54 FR 24333, June 7, 1989; 65 FR 46818, 46819, July 31, 2000; 76 FR 10515, Feb. 25, 2011; 85 FR 8732, Feb. 18, 2020]", "(a)  Application.  This section shall apply only when the term  nationally recognized testing laboratory  is used in other sections of this part.\n\n(b)  Laboratory requirements.  The term  nationally recognized testing laboratory  (NRTL) means an organization which is recognized by OSHA in accordance with appendix A of this section and which tests for safety, and lists or labels or accepts, equipment or materials and which meets all of the following criteria:\n\n(1) For each specified item of equipment or material to be listed, labeled or accepted, the NRTL has the capability (including proper testing equipment and facilities, trained staff, written testing procedures, and calibration and quality control programs) to perform:\n\n(i) Testing and examining of equipment and materials for workplace safety purposes to determine conformance with appropriate test standards; or\n\n(ii) Experimental testing and examining of equipment and materials for workplace safety purposes to determine conformance with appropriate test standards or performance in a specified manner.\n\n(2) The NRTL shall provide, to the extent needed for the particular equipment or materials listed, labeled, or accepted, the following controls or services:\n\n(i) Implements control procedures for identifying the listed and labeled equipment or materials;\n\n(ii) Inspects the run of production of such items at factories for product evaluation purposes to assure conformance with the test standards; and\n\n(iii) Conducts field inspections to monitor and to assure the proper use of its identifying mark or labels on products;\n\n(3) The NRTL is completely independent of employers subject to the tested equipment requirements, and of any manufacturers or vendors of equipment or materials being tested for these purposes; and,\n\n(4) The NRTL maintains effective procedures for:\n\n(i) Producing creditable findings or reports that are objective and without bias; and\n\n(ii) Handling complaints and disputes under a fair and reasonable system.\n\n(c)  Test standards.  An  appropriate test standard  referred to in \u00a7 1910.7(b)(1) (i) and (ii) is a document which specifies the safety requirements for specific equipment or class of equipment and is:\n\n(1) Recognized in the United States as a safety standard providing an adequate level of safety, and\n\n(2) Compatible with and maintained current with periodic revisions of applicable national codes and installation standards, and\n\n(3) Developed by a standards developing organization under a method providing for input and consideration of views of industry groups, experts, users, consumers, governmental authorities, and others having broad experience in the safety field involved, or\n\n(4) In lieu of paragraphs (c) (1), (2), and (3), the standard is currently designated as an American National Standards Institute (ANSI) safety-designated product standard or an American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) test standard used for evaluation of products or materials.\n\n(d)  Alternative test standard.  If a testing laboratory desires to use a test standard other than one allowed under paragraph (c) of this section, then the Assistant Secretary of Labor shall evaluate the proposed standard to determine that it provides an adequate level of safety before it is used.\n\n(e)  Implementation.  A testing organization desiring recognition by OSHA as an NRTL shall request that OSHA evaluate its testing and control programs against the requirements in this section for any equipment or material it may specify. The recognition procedure shall be conducted in accordance with appendix A to this section.\n\n(f)  Fees.  (1) Each applicant for NRTL recognition and each NRTL must pay fees for services provided by OSHA in advance of the provision of those services. OSHA will assess fees for the following services:\n\n(i) Processing of applications for initial recognition, expansion of recognition, or renewal of recognition, including on-site reviews; review and evaluation of the applications; and preparation of reports, evaluations and  Federal Register  notices; and\n\n(ii) Audits of sites.\n\n(2) The fee schedule established by OSHA reflects the full cost of performing the activities for each service listed in paragraph (f)(1) of this section. OSHA calculates the fees based on either the average or actual time required to perform the work necessary; the staff costs per hour (which include wages, fringe benefits, and expenses other than travel for personnel that perform or administer the activities covered by the fees); and the average or actual costs for travel when on-site reviews are involved. The formula for the fee calculation is as follows:\n\nActivity Fee = [Average (or Actual) Hours to Complete the Activity \u00d7 Staff Costs per Hour] + Average (or Actual) Travel Costs\n\n(3)(i) OSHA will review the full costs periodically and will propose a revised fee schedule, if warranted. In its review, OSHA will apply the formula established in paragraph (f)(2) of this section to the current estimated full costs for the NRTL Program. If a change is warranted, OSHA will follow the implementation shown in paragraph (f)(4) of this section.\n\n(ii) OSHA will publish all fee schedules in the  Federal Register.  Once published, a fee schedule remains in effect until it is superseded by a new fee schedule. Any member of the public may request a change to the fees included in the current fee schedule. Such a request must include appropriate documentation in support of the suggested change. OSHA will consider such requests during its annual review of the fee schedule.\n\n(4) OSHA will implement periodic review, and fee assessment, collection, and payment, as follows:\n\nNote: For the purposes of 29 CFR 1910.7(f)(4), \u201cdays\u201d means \u201ccalendar days,\u201d and \u201capplicant\u201d means \u201cthe NRTL\u201d or \u201can applicant for NRTL recognition.\u201d\n\n(5) OSHA will provide details about how to pay the fees through appropriate OSHA Program Directives, which will be available on the OSHA web site.\n\nAppendix A to \u00a7 1910.7\u2014OSHA Recognition Process for Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratories\n \n Introduction\n \n This appendix provides requirements and criteria which OSHA will use to evaluate and recognize a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). This process will include the evaluation of the product evaluation and control programs being operated by the NRTL, as well as the NRTL's testing facilities being used in its program. In the evaluation of the NRTLs, OSHA will use either consensus-based standards currently in use nationally, or other standards or criteria which may be considered appropriate. This appendix implements the definition of NRTL in 29 CFR 1910.7 which sets out the criteria that a laboratory must meet to be recognized by OSHA (initially and on a continuing basis). The appendix is broader in scope, providing procedures for renewal, expansion and revocation of OSHA recognition. Except as otherwise provided, the burden is on the applicant to establish by a preponderance of the evidence that it is entitled to recognition as an NRTL. If further detailing of these requirements and criteria will assist the NRTLs or OSHA in this activity, this detailing will be done through appropriate OSHA Program Directives.\n \n I. Procedures for Initial OSHA Recognition\n \n A. Applications.\n \n 1.  Eligibility.  a. Any testing agency or organization considering itself to meet the definition of nationally recognized testing laboratory as specified in \u00a7 1910.7 may apply for OSHA recognition as an NRTL.\n \n b. However, in determining eligibility for a foreign-based testing agency or organization, OSHA shall take into consideration the policy of the foreign government regarding both the acceptance in that country of testing data, equipment acceptances, and listings, and labeling, which are provided through nationally recognized testing laboratories recognized by the Assistant Secretary, and the accessibility to government recognition or a similar system in that country by U.S.-based safety-related testing agencies, whether recognized by the Assistant Secretary or not, if such recognition or a similar system is required by that country.\n \n 2.  Content of application.  a. The applicant shall provide sufficient information and detail demonstrating that it meets the requirements set forth in \u00a7 1910.7, in order for an informed decision concerning recognition to be made by the Assistant Secretary.\n \n b. The applicant also shall identify the scope of the NRTL-related activity for which the applicant wishes to be recognized. This will include identifying the testing methods it will use to test or judge the specific equipment and materials for which recognition is being requested, unless such test methods are already specified in the test standard. If requested to do so by OSHA, the applicant shall provide documentation of the efficacy of these testing methods.\n \n c. The applicant may include whatever enclosures, attachments, or exhibits the applicant deems appropriate. The application need not be submitted on a Federal form.\n \n 3.  Filing office location.  The application shall be filed with: NRTL Recognition Program, Occupational Safety and Health Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, 200 Constitution Avenue, NW., Washington, DC 20210.\n \n 4.  Amendments and withdrawals.  a. An application may be revised by an applicant at any time prior to the completion of activity under paragraph I.B.4. of this appendix.\n \n b. An application may be withdrawn by an applicant, without prejudice, at any time prior to the final decision by the Assistant Secretary in paragraph I.B.7.c. of this appendix.\n\n\n \n B. Review and Decision Process; Issuance or Renewal.\n \n 1.  Acceptance and on-site review.  a. Applications submitted by eligible testing agencies will be accepted by OSHA, and their receipt acknowledged in writing. After receipt of an application, OSHA may request additional information if it believes information relevant to the requirements for recognition has been omitted.\n \n b. OSHA shall, as necessary, conduct an on-site review of the testing facilities of the applicant, as well as the applicant's administrative and technical practices, and, if necessary, review any additional documentation underlying the application.\n \n c. These on-site reviews will be conducted by qualified individuals technically expert in these matters, including, as appropriate, non-Federal consultants/contractors acceptable to OSHA. The protocol for each review will be based on appropriate national consensus standards or international guides, with such additions, changes, or deletions as may be considered necessary and appropriate in each case by OSHA. A written report shall be made of each on-site review and a copy shall be provided to the applicant.\n \n 2.  Positive finding by staff.  If, after review of the application, and additional information, and the on-site review report, the applicant appears to have met the requirements for recognition, a written recommendation shall be submitted by the responsible OSHA personnel to the Assistant Secretary that the application be approved, accompanied by a supporting explanation.\n \n 3.  Negative finding by staff. \u2014a.  Notification to applicant.  If, after review of the application, any additional information and the on-site review report, the applicant does not appear to have met the requirements for recognition, the responsible OSHA personnel shall notify the applicant in writing, listing the specific requirements of \u00a7 1910.7 and this appendix which the applicant has not met, and allow a reasonable period for response.\n \n b.  Revision of application.  (i) After receipt of a notification of negative finding (i.e., for intended disapproval of the application), and within the response period provided, the applicant may:\n \n ( a ) Submit a revised application for further review, which could result in a positive finding by the responsible OSHA personnel pursuant to subsection I.B.2. of this appendix; or\n \n ( b ) Request that the original application be submitted to the Assistant Secretary with an attached statement of reasons, supplied by the applicant of why the application should be approved.\n \n (ii) This procedure for applicant notification and potential revision shall be used only once during each recognition process.\n \n 4.  Preliminary finding by Assistant Secretary.  a. The Assistant Secretary, or a special designee for this purpose, will make a preliminary finding as to whether the applicant has or has not met the requirements for recognition, based on the completed application file, the written staff recommendation, and the statement of reasons supplied by the applicant if there remains a staff recommendation of disapproval.\n \n b. Notification of this preliminary finding will be sent to the applicant and subsequently published in the  Federal Register. \n \n c. This preliminary finding shall not be considered an official decision by the Assistant Secretary or OSHA, and does not confer any change in status or any interim or temporary recognition for the applicant.\n \n 5.  Public review and comment period \u2014a. The  Federal Register  notice of preliminary finding will provide a period of not less than 30 calendar days for written comments on the applicant's fulfillment of the requirements for recognition. The application, supporting documents, staff recommendation, statement of applicant's reasons, and any comments received, will be available for public inspection in the OSHA Docket Office.\n \n b. Any member of the public, including the applicant, may supply detailed reasons and evidence supporting or challenging the sufficiency of the applicant's having met the requirements of the definition in 29 CFR \u00a7 1910.7 and this appendix. Submission of pertinent documents and exhibits shall be made in writing by the close of the comment period.\n \n 6.  Action after public comment \u2014a.  Final decision by Assistant Secretary.  Where the public review and comment record supports the Assistant Secretary's preliminary finding concerning the application, i.e., absent any serious objections or substantive claims contrary to the preliminary finding having been received in writing from the public during the comment period, the Assistant Secretary will proceed to final written decision on the application. The reasons supporting this decision shall be derived from the evidence available as a result of the full application, the supporting documentation, the staff finding, and the written comments and evidence presented during the public review and comment period.\n \n b.  Public announcement.  A copy of the Assistant Secretary's final decision will be provided to the applicant. Subsequently, a notification of the final decision shall be published in the  Federal Register.  The publication date will be the effective date of the recognition.\n \n c.  Review of final decision.  There will be no further review activity available within the Department of Labor from the final decision of the Assistant Secretary.\n \n 7.  Action after public objection \u2014a.  Review of negative information.  At the discretion of the Assistant Secretary or his designee, OSHA may authorize Federal or contract personnel to initiate a special review of any information provided in the public comment record which appears to require resolution, before a final decision can be made.\n \n b.  Supplementation of record.  The contents and results of special reviews will be made part of this record by the Assistant Secretary by either:\n \n (i) Reopening the written comment period for public comments on these reviews; or\n \n (ii) Convening an informal hearing to accept public comments on these reviews, conducted under applicable OSHA procedures for similar hearings.\n \n c.  Final decision by the Assistant Secretary.  The Assistant Secretary shall issue a decision as to whether it has been demonstrated, based on a preponderance of the evidence, that the applicant meets the requirements for recognition. The reasons supporting this decision shall be derived from the evidence available as a result of the full application, the supporting documentation, the staff finding, the comments and evidence presented during the public review and comment period, and written to transcribed evidence received during any subsequent reopening of the written comment period or informal public hearing held.\n \n d.  Public announcement.  A copy of the Assistant Secretary's final decision will be provided to the applicant, and a notification will be published in the  Federal Register  subsequently announcing the decision.\n \n e.  Review of final decision.  There will be no further review activity available within the Department of Labor from the final decision of the Assistant Secretary.\n\n\n \n C. Terms and Conditions of Recognition.\n \n 1. The following terms and conditions shall be part of every recognition:\n \n a.  Letter of recognition.  The recognition by OSHA of any NRTL will be evidenced by a letter of recognition from OSHA. The letter will provide the specific details of the scope of the OSHA recognition, including the specific equipment or materials for which OSHA recognition has been granted, as well as any specific conditions imposed by OSHA.\n \n b.  Period of recognition.  The recognition by OSHA of each NRTL will be valid for five years, unless terminated before the expiration of the period. The dates of the period of recognition will be stated in the recognition letter.\n \n c.  Constancy in operations.  The recognized NRTL shall continue to satisfy all the requirements or limitations in the letter of recognition during the period of recognition.\n \n d.  Accurate publicity.  The OSHA-recognized NRTL shall not engage in or permit others to engage in misrepresentation of the scope or conditions of its recognition.\n \n 2. [Reserved]\n\n\n \n II. Supplementary Procedures.\n \n A. Test standard changes.\n \n A recognized NRTL may change a testing standard or elements incorporated in the standard such as testing methods or pass-fail criteria by notifying the Assistant Secretary of the change, certifying that the revised standard will be at least as effective as the prior standard, and providing the supporting data upon which its conclusions are based. The NRTL need not inform the Assistant Secretary of minor deviations from a test standard such as the use of new instrumentation that is more accurate or sensitive than originally called for in the standard. The NRTL also need not inform the Assistant Secretary of its adoption of revisions to third-party testing standards meeting the requirements of \u00a7 1910.7(c)(4), if such revisions have been developed by the standards developing organization, or of its adoption of revisions to other third-party test standards which the developing organization has submitted to OSHA. If, upon review, the Assistant Secretary or his designee determines that the proposed revised standard is not \u201csubstantially equivalent\u201d to the previous version with regard to the level of safety obtained, OSHA will not accept the proposed testing standard by the recognized NRTL, and will initiate discontinuance of that aspect of OSHA-recognized activity by the NRTL by modification of the official letter of recognition. OSHA will publicly announce this action and the NRTL will be required to communicate this OSHA decision directly to affected manufacturers.\n \n B. Expansion of current recognition\n \n 1.  Eligibility.  A recognized NRTL may apply to OSHA for an expansion of its current recognition to cover other categories of NRTL testing in addition to those included in the current recognition.\n \n 2. Procedure. a. OSHA will act upon and process the application for expansion in accordance with subsection I.B. of this appendix, except that the period for written comments, specified in paragraph 5.a of subsection I.B. of this appendix, will be not less than 15 calendar days.\n \n b. In that process, OSHA may decide not to conduct an on-site review, where the substantive scope of the request to expand recognition is closely related to the current area of recognition.\n \n c. The expiration date for each expansion of recognition shall coincide with the expiration date of the current basic recognition period.\n \n C. Renewal of OSHA recognition\n \n 1.  Eligibility.  A recognized NRTL may renew its recognition by filing a renewal request at the address in paragraph I.A.3. of this appendix not less than nine months, nor more than one year, before the expiration date of its current recognition.\n \n 2. Procedure. a. OSHA will process the renewal request in accordance with subsection I.B. of this appendix, except that the period for written comments, specified in paragraph 5.a of subsection I.B. of this appendix, will be not less than 15 calendar days.\n \n b. In that process, OSHA may determine not to conduct the on-site reviews in I.B.1.a. where appropriate.\n \n c. When a recognized NRTL has filed a timely and sufficient renewal request, its current recognition will not expire until a final decision has been made by OSHA on the request.\n \n d. After the first renewal has been granted to the NRTL, the NRTL shall apply for a continuation of its recognition status every five years by submitting a renewal request. In lieu of submitting a renewal request after the initial renewal, the NRTL may certify its continuing compliance with the terms of its letter of recognition and 29 CFR 1910.7.\n \n 3.  Alternative procedure.  After the initial recognition and before the expiration thereof, OSHA may (for good cause) determine that there is a sufficient basis to dispense with the renewal requirement for a given laboratory and will so notify the laboratory of such a determination in writing. In lieu of submitting a renewal request, any laboratory so notified shall certify its continuing compliance with the terms of its letter of recognition and 29 CFR 1910.7.\n \n D. Voluntary termination of recognition.\n \n At any time, a recognized NRTL may voluntarily terminate its recognition, either in its entirety or with respect to any area covered in its recognition, by giving written notice to OSHA. The written notice shall state the date as of which the termination is to take effect. The Assistant Secretary shall inform the public of any voluntary termination by  Federal Register  notice.\n \n E. Revocation of recognition by OSHA.\n \n 1.  Potential causes.  If an NRTL either has failed to continue to substantially satisfy the requirements of \u00a7 1910.7 or this appendix, or has not been reasonably performing the NRTL testing requirements encompassed within its letter of recognition, or has materially misrepresented itself in its applications or misrepresented the scope or conditions of its recognition, the Assistant Secretary may revoke the recognition of a recognized NRTL, in whole or in part. OSHA may initiate revocation procedures on the basis of information provided by any interested person.\n \n 2.  Procedure.  a. Before proposing to revoke recognition, the Agency will notify the recognized NRTL in writing, giving it the opportunity to rebut or correct the alleged deficiencies which would form the basis of the proposed revocation, within a reasonable period.\n \n b. If the alleged deficiencies are not corrected or reconciled within a reasonable period, OSHA will propose, in writing to the recognized NRTL, to revoke recognition. If deemed appropriate, no other announcement need be made by OSHA.\n \n c. The revocation shall be effective in 60 days unless within that period the recognized NRTL corrects the deficiencies or requests a hearing in writing.\n \n d. If a hearing is requested, it shall be held before an administrative law judge of the Department of Labor pursuant to the rules specified in 29 CFR part 1905, subpart C.\n \n e. The parties shall be OSHA and the recognized NRTL. The Assistant Secretary may allow other interested persons to participate in these hearings if such participation would contribute to the resolution of issues germane to the proceeding and not cause undue delay.\n \n f. The burden of proof shall be on OSHA to demonstrate by a preponderance of the evidence that the recognition should be revoked because the NRTL is not meeting the requirements for recognition, has not been reasonably performing the product testing functions as required by \u00a7 1910.7, this appendix A, or the letter of recognition, or has materially misrepresented itself in its applications or publicity.\n \n 3.  Final decision.  a. After the hearing, the Administrative Law Judge shall issue a decision stating the reasons based on the record as to whether it has been demonstrated, based on a preponderance of evidence, that the applicant does not continue to meet the requirements for its current recognition.\n \n b. Upon issuance of the decision, any party to the hearing may file exceptions within 20 days pursuant to 29 CFR 1905.28. If no exceptions are filed, this decision is the final decision of the Assistant Secretary. If objections are filed, the Administrative Law Judge shall forward the decision, exceptions and record to the Assistant Secretary for the final decision on the proposed revocation.\n \n c. The Assistant Secretary will review the record, the decision by the Administrative Law Judge, and the exceptions filed. Based on this, the Assistant Secretary shall issue the final decision as to whether it has been demonstrated, by a preponderance of evidence, that the recognized NRTL has not continued to meet the requirements for OSHA recognition. If the Assistant Secretary finds that the NRTL does not meet the NRTL recognition requirements, the recognition will be revoked.\n \n 4.  Public announcement.  A copy of the Assistant Secretary's final decision will be provided to the applicant, and a notification will be published in the  Federal Register  announcing the decision, and the availability of the complete record of this proceeding at OSHA. The effective date of any revocation will be the date the final decision copy is sent to the NRTL.\n \n 5.  Review of final decision.  There will be no further review activity available within the Department of Labor from the final decision of the Assistant Secretary.\n\nThis appendix provides requirements and criteria which OSHA will use to evaluate and recognize a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). This process will include the evaluation of the product evaluation and control programs being operated by the NRTL, as well as the NRTL's testing facilities being used in its program. In the evaluation of the NRTLs, OSHA will use either consensus-based standards currently in use nationally, or other standards or criteria which may be considered appropriate. This appendix implements the definition of NRTL in 29 CFR 1910.7 which sets out the criteria that a laboratory must meet to be recognized by OSHA (initially and on a continuing basis). The appendix is broader in scope, providing procedures for renewal, expansion and revocation of OSHA recognition. Except as otherwise provided, the burden is on the applicant to establish by a preponderance of the evidence that it is entitled to recognition as an NRTL. If further detailing of these requirements and criteria will assist the NRTLs or OSHA in this activity, this detailing will be done through appropriate OSHA Program Directives.\n\n1.  Eligibility.  a. Any testing agency or organization considering itself to meet the definition of nationally recognized testing laboratory as specified in \u00a7 1910.7 may apply for OSHA recognition as an NRTL.\n\nb. However, in determining eligibility for a foreign-based testing agency or organization, OSHA shall take into consideration the policy of the foreign government regarding both the acceptance in that country of testing data, equipment acceptances, and listings, and labeling, which are provided through nationally recognized testing laboratories recognized by the Assistant Secretary, and the accessibility to government recognition or a similar system in that country by U.S.-based safety-related testing agencies, whether recognized by the Assistant Secretary or not, if such recognition or a similar system is required by that country.\n\n2.  Content of application.  a. The applicant shall provide sufficient information and detail demonstrating that it meets the requirements set forth in \u00a7 1910.7, in order for an informed decision concerning recognition to be made by the Assistant Secretary.\n\nb. The applicant also shall identify the scope of the NRTL-related activity for which the applicant wishes to be recognized. This will include identifying the testing methods it will use to test or judge the specific equipment and materials for which recognition is being requested, unless such test methods are already specified in the test standard. If requested to do so by OSHA, the applicant shall provide documentation of the efficacy of these testing methods.\n\nc. The applicant may include whatever enclosures, attachments, or exhibits the applicant deems appropriate. The application need not be submitted on a Federal form.\n\n3.  Filing office location.  The application shall be filed with: NRTL Recognition Program, Occupational Safety and Health Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, 200 Constitution Avenue, NW., Washington, DC 20210.\n\n4.  Amendments and withdrawals.  a. An application may be revised by an applicant at any time prior to the completion of activity under paragraph I.B.4. of this appendix.\n\nb. An application may be withdrawn by an applicant, without prejudice, at any time prior to the final decision by the Assistant Secretary in paragraph I.B.7.c. of this appendix.\n\n1.  Acceptance and on-site review.  a. Applications submitted by eligible testing agencies will be accepted by OSHA, and their receipt acknowledged in writing. After receipt of an application, OSHA may request additional information if it believes information relevant to the requirements for recognition has been omitted.\n\nb. OSHA shall, as necessary, conduct an on-site review of the testing facilities of the applicant, as well as the applicant's administrative and technical practices, and, if necessary, review any additional documentation underlying the application.\n\nc. These on-site reviews will be conducted by qualified individuals technically expert in these matters, including, as appropriate, non-Federal consultants/contractors acceptable to OSHA. The protocol for each review will be based on appropriate national consensus standards or international guides, with such additions, changes, or deletions as may be considered necessary and appropriate in each case by OSHA. A written report shall be made of each on-site review and a copy shall be provided to the applicant.\n\n2.  Positive finding by staff.  If, after review of the application, and additional information, and the on-site review report, the applicant appears to have met the requirements for recognition, a written recommendation shall be submitted by the responsible OSHA personnel to the Assistant Secretary that the application be approved, accompanied by a supporting explanation.\n\n3.  Negative finding by staff. \u2014a.  Notification to applicant.  If, after review of the application, any additional information and the on-site review report, the applicant does not appear to have met the requirements for recognition, the responsible OSHA personnel shall notify the applicant in writing, listing the specific requirements of \u00a7 1910.7 and this appendix which the applicant has not met, and allow a reasonable period for response.\n\nb.  Revision of application.  (i) After receipt of a notification of negative finding (i.e., for intended disapproval of the application), and within the response period provided, the applicant may:\n\n( a ) Submit a revised application for further review, which could result in a positive finding by the responsible OSHA personnel pursuant to subsection I.B.2. of this appendix; or\n\n( b ) Request that the original application be submitted to the Assistant Secretary with an attached statement of reasons, supplied by the applicant of why the application should be approved.\n\n(ii) This procedure for applicant notification and potential revision shall be used only once during each recognition process.\n\n4.  Preliminary finding by Assistant Secretary.  a. The Assistant Secretary, or a special designee for this purpose, will make a preliminary finding as to whether the applicant has or has not met the requirements for recognition, based on the completed application file, the written staff recommendation, and the statement of reasons supplied by the applicant if there remains a staff recommendation of disapproval.\n\nb. Notification of this preliminary finding will be sent to the applicant and subsequently published in the  Federal Register.\n\nc. This preliminary finding shall not be considered an official decision by the Assistant Secretary or OSHA, and does not confer any change in status or any interim or temporary recognition for the applicant.\n\n5.  Public review and comment period \u2014a. The  Federal Register  notice of preliminary finding will provide a period of not less than 30 calendar days for written comments on the applicant's fulfillment of the requirements for recognition. The application, supporting documents, staff recommendation, statement of applicant's reasons, and any comments received, will be available for public inspection in the OSHA Docket Office.\n\nb. Any member of the public, including the applicant, may supply detailed reasons and evidence supporting or challenging the sufficiency of the applicant's having met the requirements of the definition in 29 CFR \u00a7 1910.7 and this appendix. Submission of pertinent documents and exhibits shall be made in writing by the close of the comment period.\n\n6.  Action after public comment \u2014a.  Final decision by Assistant Secretary.  Where the public review and comment record supports the Assistant Secretary's preliminary finding concerning the application, i.e., absent any serious objections or substantive claims contrary to the preliminary finding having been received in writing from the public during the comment period, the Assistant Secretary will proceed to final written decision on the application. The reasons supporting this decision shall be derived from the evidence available as a result of the full application, the supporting documentation, the staff finding, and the written comments and evidence presented during the public review and comment period.\n\nb.  Public announcement.  A copy of the Assistant Secretary's final decision will be provided to the applicant. Subsequently, a notification of the final decision shall be published in the  Federal Register.  The publication date will be the effective date of the recognition.\n\nc.  Review of final decision.  There will be no further review activity available within the Department of Labor from the final decision of the Assistant Secretary.\n\n7.  Action after public objection \u2014a.  Review of negative information.  At the discretion of the Assistant Secretary or his designee, OSHA may authorize Federal or contract personnel to initiate a special review of any information provided in the public comment record which appears to require resolution, before a final decision can be made.\n\nb.  Supplementation of record.  The contents and results of special reviews will be made part of this record by the Assistant Secretary by either:\n\n(i) Reopening the written comment period for public comments on these reviews; or\n\n(ii) Convening an informal hearing to accept public comments on these reviews, conducted under applicable OSHA procedures for similar hearings.\n\nc.  Final decision by the Assistant Secretary.  The Assistant Secretary shall issue a decision as to whether it has been demonstrated, based on a preponderance of the evidence, that the applicant meets the requirements for recognition. The reasons supporting this decision shall be derived from the evidence available as a result of the full application, the supporting documentation, the staff finding, the comments and evidence presented during the public review and comment period, and written to transcribed evidence received during any subsequent reopening of the written comment period or informal public hearing held.\n\nd.  Public announcement.  A copy of the Assistant Secretary's final decision will be provided to the applicant, and a notification will be published in the  Federal Register  subsequently announcing the decision.\n\ne.  Review of final decision.  There will be no further review activity available within the Department of Labor from the final decision of the Assistant Secretary.\n\n1. The following terms and conditions shall be part of every recognition:\n\na.  Letter of recognition.  The recognition by OSHA of any NRTL will be evidenced by a letter of recognition from OSHA. The letter will provide the specific details of the scope of the OSHA recognition, including the specific equipment or materials for which OSHA recognition has been granted, as well as any specific conditions imposed by OSHA.\n\nb.  Period of recognition.  The recognition by OSHA of each NRTL will be valid for five years, unless terminated before the expiration of the period. The dates of the period of recognition will be stated in the recognition letter.\n\nc.  Constancy in operations.  The recognized NRTL shall continue to satisfy all the requirements or limitations in the letter of recognition during the period of recognition.\n\nd.  Accurate publicity.  The OSHA-recognized NRTL shall not engage in or permit others to engage in misrepresentation of the scope or conditions of its recognition.\n\n2. [Reserved]\n\nA recognized NRTL may change a testing standard or elements incorporated in the standard such as testing methods or pass-fail criteria by notifying the Assistant Secretary of the change, certifying that the revised standard will be at least as effective as the prior standard, and providing the supporting data upon which its conclusions are based. The NRTL need not inform the Assistant Secretary of minor deviations from a test standard such as the use of new instrumentation that is more accurate or sensitive than originally called for in the standard. The NRTL also need not inform the Assistant Secretary of its adoption of revisions to third-party testing standards meeting the requirements of \u00a7 1910.7(c)(4), if such revisions have been developed by the standards developing organization, or of its adoption of revisions to other third-party test standards which the developing organization has submitted to OSHA. If, upon review, the Assistant Secretary or his designee determines that the proposed revised standard is not \u201csubstantially equivalent\u201d to the previous version with regard to the level of safety obtained, OSHA will not accept the proposed testing standard by the recognized NRTL, and will initiate discontinuance of that aspect of OSHA-recognized activity by the NRTL by modification of the official letter of recognition. OSHA will publicly announce this action and the NRTL will be required to communicate this OSHA decision directly to affected manufacturers.\n\n1.  Eligibility.  A recognized NRTL may apply to OSHA for an expansion of its current recognition to cover other categories of NRTL testing in addition to those included in the current recognition.\n\n2. Procedure. a. OSHA will act upon and process the application for expansion in accordance with subsection I.B. of this appendix, except that the period for written comments, specified in paragraph 5.a of subsection I.B. of this appendix, will be not less than 15 calendar days.\n\nb. In that process, OSHA may decide not to conduct an on-site review, where the substantive scope of the request to expand recognition is closely related to the current area of recognition.\n\nc. The expiration date for each expansion of recognition shall coincide with the expiration date of the current basic recognition period.\n\n1.  Eligibility.  A recognized NRTL may renew its recognition by filing a renewal request at the address in paragraph I.A.3. of this appendix not less than nine months, nor more than one year, before the expiration date of its current recognition.\n\n2. Procedure. a. OSHA will process the renewal request in accordance with subsection I.B. of this appendix, except that the period for written comments, specified in paragraph 5.a of subsection I.B. of this appendix, will be not less than 15 calendar days.\n\nb. In that process, OSHA may determine not to conduct the on-site reviews in I.B.1.a. where appropriate.\n\nc. When a recognized NRTL has filed a timely and sufficient renewal request, its current recognition will not expire until a final decision has been made by OSHA on the request.\n\nd. After the first renewal has been granted to the NRTL, the NRTL shall apply for a continuation of its recognition status every five years by submitting a renewal request. In lieu of submitting a renewal request after the initial renewal, the NRTL may certify its continuing compliance with the terms of its letter of recognition and 29 CFR 1910.7.\n\n3.  Alternative procedure.  After the initial recognition and before the expiration thereof, OSHA may (for good cause) determine that there is a sufficient basis to dispense with the renewal requirement for a given laboratory and will so notify the laboratory of such a determination in writing. In lieu of submitting a renewal request, any laboratory so notified shall certify its continuing compliance with the terms of its letter of recognition and 29 CFR 1910.7.\n\nAt any time, a recognized NRTL may voluntarily terminate its recognition, either in its entirety or with respect to any area covered in its recognition, by giving written notice to OSHA. The written notice shall state the date as of which the termination is to take effect. The Assistant Secretary shall inform the public of any voluntary termination by  Federal Register  notice.\n\n1.  Potential causes.  If an NRTL either has failed to continue to substantially satisfy the requirements of \u00a7 1910.7 or this appendix, or has not been reasonably performing the NRTL testing requirements encompassed within its letter of recognition, or has materially misrepresented itself in its applications or misrepresented the scope or conditions of its recognition, the Assistant Secretary may revoke the recognition of a recognized NRTL, in whole or in part. OSHA may initiate revocation procedures on the basis of information provided by any interested person.\n\n2.  Procedure.  a. Before proposing to revoke recognition, the Agency will notify the recognized NRTL in writing, giving it the opportunity to rebut or correct the alleged deficiencies which would form the basis of the proposed revocation, within a reasonable period.\n\nb. If the alleged deficiencies are not corrected or reconciled within a reasonable period, OSHA will propose, in writing to the recognized NRTL, to revoke recognition. If deemed appropriate, no other announcement need be made by OSHA.\n\nc. The revocation shall be effective in 60 days unless within that period the recognized NRTL corrects the deficiencies or requests a hearing in writing.\n\nd. If a hearing is requested, it shall be held before an administrative law judge of the Department of Labor pursuant to the rules specified in 29 CFR part 1905, subpart C.\n\ne. The parties shall be OSHA and the recognized NRTL. The Assistant Secretary may allow other interested persons to participate in these hearings if such participation would contribute to the resolution of issues germane to the proceeding and not cause undue delay.\n\nf. The burden of proof shall be on OSHA to demonstrate by a preponderance of the evidence that the recognition should be revoked because the NRTL is not meeting the requirements for recognition, has not been reasonably performing the product testing functions as required by \u00a7 1910.7, this appendix A, or the letter of recognition, or has materially misrepresented itself in its applications or publicity.\n\n3.  Final decision.  a. After the hearing, the Administrative Law Judge shall issue a decision stating the reasons based on the record as to whether it has been demonstrated, based on a preponderance of evidence, that the applicant does not continue to meet the requirements for its current recognition.\n\nb. Upon issuance of the decision, any party to the hearing may file exceptions within 20 days pursuant to 29 CFR 1905.28. If no exceptions are filed, this decision is the final decision of the Assistant Secretary. If objections are filed, the Administrative Law Judge shall forward the decision, exceptions and record to the Assistant Secretary for the final decision on the proposed revocation.\n\nc. The Assistant Secretary will review the record, the decision by the Administrative Law Judge, and the exceptions filed. Based on this, the Assistant Secretary shall issue the final decision as to whether it has been demonstrated, by a preponderance of evidence, that the recognized NRTL has not continued to meet the requirements for OSHA recognition. If the Assistant Secretary finds that the NRTL does not meet the NRTL recognition requirements, the recognition will be revoked.\n\n4.  Public announcement.  A copy of the Assistant Secretary's final decision will be provided to the applicant, and a notification will be published in the  Federal Register  announcing the decision, and the availability of the complete record of this proceeding at OSHA. The effective date of any revocation will be the date the final decision copy is sent to the NRTL.\n\n5.  Review of final decision.  There will be no further review activity available within the Department of Labor from the final decision of the Assistant Secretary."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.1.33.8", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "A", "Subpart A\u2014General", "", "\u00a7 1910.8 OMB control numbers under the Paperwork Reduction Act.", "OSHA", "", "", "[61 FR 5508, Feb. 13, 1996, as amended at 62 FR 29668, June 2, 1997; 62 FR 42666, Aug. 8, 1997; 62 FR 43581, Aug. 14, 1997; 62 FR 65203, Dec. 11, 1997; 63 FR 13340, Mar. 19, 1998; 63 FR 17093, Apr. 8, 1998; 71 FR 38086, July 5, 2006; 72 FR 40075, July 23, 2007; 81 FR 48710, July 26, 2016; 82 FR 31253, July 6, 2017; 83 FR 9702, Mar. 7, 2018]", "The following sections or paragraphs each contain a collection of information requirement which has been approved by the Office of Management and Budget under the control number listed."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.1.33.9", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "A", "Subpart A\u2014General", "", "\u00a7 1910.9 Compliance duties owed to each employee.", "OSHA", "", "", "[73 FR 75583, Dec. 12, 2008]", "(a)  Personal protective equipment.  Standards in this part requiring the employer to provide personal protective equipment (PPE), including respirators and other types of PPE, because of hazards to employees impose a separate compliance duty with respect to each employee covered by the requirement. The employer must provide PPE to each employee required to use the PPE, and each failure to provide PPE to an employee may be considered a separate violation.\n\n(b)  Training.  Standards in this part requiring training on hazards and related matters, such as standards requiring that employees receive training or that the employer train employees, provide training to employees, or institute or implement a training program, impose a separate compliance duty with respect to each employee covered by the requirement. The employer must train each affected employee in the manner required by the standard, and each failure to train an employee may be considered a separate violation."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.10.34.1", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "J", "Subpart J\u2014General Environmental Controls", "", "\u00a7 1910.141 Sanitation.", "OSHA", "", "", "[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40 FR 18446, Apr. 28, 1975; 40 FR 23073, May 28, 1975; 43 FR 49748, Oct. 24, 1978; 63 FR 33466, June 18, 1998; 76 FR 33607, June 8, 2011]", "(a)  General \u2014(1)  Scope.  This section applies to permanent places of employment.\n\n(2)  Definitions applicable to this section.\n\nNonwater carriage toilet facility,  means a toilet facility not connected to a sewer.\n\nNumber of employees  means, unless otherwise specified, the maximum number of employees present at any one time on a regular shift.\n\nPersonal service room,  means a room used for activities not directly connected with the production or service function performed by the establishment. Such activities include, but are not limited to, first-aid, medical services, dressing, showering, toilet use, washing, and eating.\n\nPotable water  means water that meets the standards for drinking purposes of the State or local authority having jurisdiction, or water that meets the quality standards prescribed by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency's National Primary Drinking Water Regulations (40 CFR 141).\n\nToilet facility,  means a fixture maintained within a toilet room for the purpose of defecation or urination, or both.\n\nToilet room,  means a room maintained within or on the premises of any place of employment, containing toilet facilities for use by employees.\n\nToxic material  means a material in concentration or amount which exceeds the applicable limit established by a standard, such as \u00a7\u00a7 1910.1000 and 1910.1001 or, in the absence of an applicable standard, which is of such toxicity so as to constitute a recognized hazard that is causing or is likely to cause death or serious physical harm.\n\nUrinal  means a toilet facility maintained within a toilet room for the sole purpose of urination.\n\nWater closet  means a toilet facility maintained within a toilet room for the purpose of both defecation and urination and which is flushed with water.\n\nWet process  means any process or operation in a workroom which normally results in surfaces upon which employees may walk or stand becoming wet.\n\n(3)  Housekeeping.  (i) All places of employment shall be kept clean to the extent that the nature of the work allows.\n\n(ii) The floor of every workroom shall be maintained, so far as practicable, in a dry condition. Where wet processes are used, drainage shall be maintained and false floors, platforms, mats, or other dry standing places shall be provided, where practicable, or appropriate waterproof footgear shall be provided.\n\n(iii) To facilitate cleaning, every floor, working place, and passageway shall be kept free from protruding nails, splinters, loose boards, and unnecessary holes and openings.\n\n(4)  Waste disposal.  (i) Any receptacle used for putrescible solid or liquid waste or refuse shall be so constructed that it does not leak and may be thoroughly cleaned and maintained in a sanitary condition. Such a receptacle shall be equipped with a solid tight-fitting cover, unless it can be maintained in a sanitary condition without a cover. This requirement does not prohibit the use of receptacles which are designed to permit the maintenance of a sanitary condition without regard to the aforementioned requirements.\n\n(ii) All sweepings, solid or liquid wastes, refuse, and garbage shall be removed in such a manner as to avoid creating a menace to health and as often as necessary or appropriate to maintain the place of employment in a sanitary condition.\n\n(5)  Vermin control.  Every enclosed workplace shall be so constructed, equipped, and maintained, so far as reasonably practicable, as to prevent the entrance or harborage of rodents, insects, and other vermin. A continuing and effective extermination program shall be instituted where their presence is detected.\n\n(b)  Water supply \u2014(1)  Potable water.  (i) Potable water shall be provided in all places of employment, for drinking, washing of the person, cooking, washing of foods, washing of cooking or eating utensils, washing of food preparation or processing premises, and personal service rooms.\n\n(ii) [Reserved]\n\n(iii) Portable drinking water dispensers shall be designed, constructed, and serviced so that sanitary conditions are maintained, shall be capable of being closed, and shall be equipped with a tap.\n\n(iv) [Reserved]\n\n(v) Open containers such as barrels, pails, or tanks for drinking water from which the water must be dipped or poured, whether or not they are fitted with a cover, are prohibited.\n\n(vi) A common drinking cup and other common utensils are prohibited.\n\n(2)  Nonpotable water.  (i) Outlets for nonpotable water, such as water for industrial or firefighting purposes, shall be posted or otherwise marked in a manner that will indicate clearly that the water is unsafe and is not to be used for drinking, washing of the person, cooking, washing of food, washing of cooking or eating utensils, washing of food preparation or processing premises, or personal service rooms, or for washing clothes.\n\n(ii) Construction of nonpotable water systems or systems carrying any other nonpotable substance shall be such as to prevent backflow or backsiphonage into a potable water system.\n\n(iii) Nonpotable water shall not be used for washing any portion of the person, cooking or eating utensils, or clothing. Nonpotable water may be used for cleaning work premises, other than food processing and preparation premises and personal service rooms:  Provided,  That this nonpotable water does not contain concentrations of chemicals, fecal coliform, or other substances which could create insanitary conditions or be harmful to employees.\n\n(c)  Toilet facilities \u2014(1)  General.  (i) Except as otherwise indicated in this paragraph (c)(1)(i), toilet facilities, in toilet rooms separate for each sex, shall be provided in all places of employment in accordance with table J-1 of this section. The number of facilities to be provided for each sex shall be based on the number of employees of that sex for whom the facilities are furnished. Where toilet rooms will be occupied by no more than one person at a time, can be locked from the inside, and contain at least one water closet, separate toilet rooms for each sex need not be provided. Where such single-occupancy rooms have more than one toilet facility, only one such facility in each toilet room shall be counted for the purpose of table J-1.\n\nTable J-1\n\n1  Where toilet facilities will not be used by women, urinals may be provided instead of water closets, except that the number of water closets in such cases shall not be reduced to less than \n 2/3  of the minimum specified.\n\n2  1 additional fixture for each additional 40 employees.\n\n(ii) The requirements of paragraph (c)(1)(i) of this section do not apply to mobile crews or to normally unattended work locations so long as employees working at these locations have transportation immediately available to nearby toilet facilities which meet the other requirements of this subparagraph.\n\n(iii) The sewage disposal method shall not endanger the health of employees.\n\n(2)  Construction of toilet rooms.  (i) Each water closet shall occupy a separate compartment with a door and walls or partitions between fixtures sufficiently high to assure privacy.\n\n(ii) [Reserved]\n\n(d)  Washing facilities \u2014(1)  General.  Washing facilities shall be maintained in a sanitary condition.\n\n(2)  Lavatories.  (i) Lavatories shall be made available in all places of employment. The requirements of this subdivision do not apply to mobile crews or to normally unattended work locations if employees working at these locations have transportation readily available to nearby washing facilities which meet the other requirements of this paragraph.\n\n(ii) Each lavatory shall be provided with hot and cold running water, or tepid running water.\n\n(iii) Hand soap or similar cleansing agents shall be provided.\n\n(iv) Individual hand towels or sections thereof, of cloth or paper, air blowers or clean individual sections of continuous cloth toweling, convenient to the lavatories, shall be provided.\n\n(3)  Showers.  (i) Whenever showers are required by a particular standard, the showers shall be provided in accordance with paragraphs (d)(3) (ii) through (v) of this section.\n\n(ii) One shower shall be provided for each 10 employees of each sex, or numerical fraction thereof, who are required to shower during the same shift.\n\n(iii) Body soap or other appropriate cleansing agents convenient to the showers shall be provided as specified in paragraph (d)(2)(iii) of this section.\n\n(iv) Showers shall be provided with hot and cold water feeding a common discharge line.\n\n(v) Employees who use showers shall be provided with individual clean towels.\n\n(e)  Change rooms.  Whenever employees are required by a particular standard to wear protective clothing because of the possibility of contamination with toxic materials, change rooms equipped with storage facilities for street clothes and separate storage facilities for the protective clothing shall be provided.\n\n(f)  Clothes drying facilities.  Where working clothes are provided by the employer and become wet or are washed between shifts, provision shall be made to insure that such clothing is dry before reuse.\n\n(g)  Consumption of food and beverages on the premises \u2014(1)  Application.  This paragraph shall apply only where employees are permitted to consume food or beverages, or both, on the premises.\n\n(2)  Eating and drinking areas.  No employee shall be allowed to consume food or beverages in a toilet room nor in any area exposed to a toxic material.\n\n(3)  Waste disposal containers.  Receptacles constructed of smooth, corrosion resistant, easily cleanable, or disposable materials, shall be provided and used for the disposal of waste food. The number, size, and location of such receptacles shall encourage their use and not result in overfilling. They shall be emptied not less frequently than once each working day, unless unused, and shall be maintained in a clean and sanitary condition. Receptacles shall be provided with a solid tight-fitting cover unless sanitary conditions can be maintained without use of a cover.\n\n(4)  Sanitary storage.  No food or beverages shall be stored in toilet rooms or in an area exposed to a toxic material.\n\n(h)  Food handling.  All employee food service facilities and operations shall be carried out in accordance with sound hygienic principles. In all places of employment where all or part of the food service is provided, the food dispensed shall be wholesome, free from spoilage, and shall be processed, prepared, handled, and stored in such a manner as to be protected against contamination."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.10.34.2", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "J", "Subpart J\u2014General Environmental Controls", "", "\u00a7 1910.142 Temporary labor camps.", "OSHA", "", "", "[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 47 FR 14696, Apr. 6, 1982; 49 FR 18295, Apr. 30, 1984; 61 FR 9238, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 33466, June 18, 1998; 70 FR 1141, Jan. 5, 2005; 70 FR 53929, Sept. 13, 2005]", "(a)  Site.  (1) All sites used for camps shall be adequately drained. They shall not be subject to periodic flooding, nor located within 200 feet of swamps, pools, sink holes, or other surface collections of water unless such quiescent water surfaces can be subjected to mosquito control measures. The camp shall be located so the drainage from and through the camp will not endanger any domestic or public water supply. All sites shall be graded, ditched, and rendered free from depressions in which water may become a nuisance.\n\n(2) All sites shall be adequate in size to prevent overcrowding of necessary structures. The principal camp area in which food is prepared and served and where sleeping quarters are located shall be at least 500 feet from any area in which livestock is kept.\n\n(3) The grounds and open areas surrounding the shelters shall be maintained in a clean and sanitary condition free from rubbish, debris, waste paper, garbage, or other refuse.\n\n(b)  Shelter.  (1) Every shelter in the camp shall be constructed in a manner which will provide protection against the elements.\n\n(2) Each room used for sleeping purposes shall contain at least 50 square feet of floor space for each occupant. At least a 7-foot ceiling shall be provided.\n\n(3) Beds, cots, or bunks, and suitable storage facilities such as wall lockers for clothing and personal articles shall be provided in every room used for sleeping purposes. Such beds or similar facilities shall be spaced not closer than 36 inches both laterally and end to end, and shall be elevated at least 12 inches from the floor. If double-deck bunks are used, they shall be spaced not less than 48 inches both laterally and end to end. The minimum clear space between the lower and upper bunk shall be not less than 27 inches. Triple-deck bunks are prohibited.\n\n(4) The floors of each shelter shall be constructed of wood, asphalt, or concrete. Wooden floors shall be of smooth and tight construction. The floors shall be kept in good repair.\n\n(5) All wooden floors shall be elevated not less than 1 foot above the ground level at all points to prevent dampness and to permit free circulation of air beneath.\n\n(6) Nothing in this section shall be construed to prohibit \u201cbanking\u201d with earth or other suitable material around the outside walls in areas subject to extreme low temperatures.\n\n(7) All living quarters shall be provided with windows the total of which shall be not less than one-tenth of the floor area. At least one-half of each window shall be so constructed that it can be opened for purposes of ventilation.\n\n(8) All exterior openings shall be effectively screened with 16-mesh material. All screen doors shall be equipped with self-closing devices.\n\n(9) In a room where workers cook, live, and sleep a minimum of 100 square feet per person shall be provided. Sanitary facilities shall be provided for storing and preparing food.\n\n(10) In camps where cooking facilities are used in common, stoves (in ratio of one stove to 10 persons or one stove to two families) shall be provided in an enclosed and screened shelter. Sanitary facilities shall be provided for storing and preparing food.\n\n(11) All heating, cooking, and water heating equipment shall be installed in accordance with State and local ordinances, codes, and regulations governing such installations. If a camp is used during cold weather, adequate heating equipment shall be provided.\n\n(c)  Water supply.  (1) An adequate and convenient water supply, approved by the appropriate health authority, shall be provided in each camp for drinking, cooking, bathing, and laundry purposes.\n\n(2) A water supply shall be deemed adequate if it is capable of delivering 35 gallons per person per day to the campsite at a peak rate of 2\n 1/2  times the average hourly demand.\n\n(3) The distribution lines shall be capable of supplying water at normal operating pressures to all fixtures for simultaneous operation. Water outlets shall be distributed throughout the camp in such a manner that no shelter is more than 100 feet from a yard hydrant if water is not piped to the shelters.\n\n(4) Where water under pressure is available, one or more drinking fountains shall be provided for each 100 occupants or fraction thereof. Common drinking cups are prohibited.\n\n(d)  Toilet facilities.  (1) Toilet facilities adequate for the capacity of the camp shall be provided.\n\n(2) Each toilet room shall be located so as to be accessible without any individual passing through any sleeping room. Toilet rooms shall have a window not less than 6 square feet in area opening directly to the outside area or otherwise be satisfactorily ventilated. All outside openings shall be screened with 16-mesh material. No fixture, water closet, chemical toilet, or urinal shall be located in a room used for other than toilet purposes.\n\n(3) A toilet room shall be located within 200 feet of the door of each sleeping room. No privy shall be closer than 100 feet to any sleeping room, dining room, lunch area, or kitchen.\n\n(4) Where the toilet rooms are shared, such as in multifamily shelters and in barracks type facilities, separate toilet rooms shall be provided for each sex. These rooms shall be distinctly marked \u201cfor men\u201d and \u201cfor women\u201d by signs printed in English and in the native language of the persons occupying the camp, or marked with easily understood pictures or symbols. If the facilities for each sex are in the same building, they shall be separated by solid walls or partitions extending from the floor to the roof or ceiling.\n\n(5) Where toilet facilities are shared, the number of water closets or privy seats provided for each sex shall be based on the maximum number of persons of that sex which the camp is designed to house at any one time, in the ratio of one such unit to each 15 persons, with a minimum of two units for any shared facility.\n\n(6) Urinals shall be provided on the basis of one unit or 2 linear feet of urinal trough for each 25 men. The floor from the wall and for a distance not less than 15 inches measured from the outward edge of the urinals shall be constructed of materials impervious to moisture. Where water under pressure is available, urinals shall be provided with an adequate water flush. Urinal troughs in privies shall drain freely into the pit or vault and the construction of this drain shall be such as to exclude flies and rodents from the pit.\n\n(7) Every water closet installed on or after August 31, 1971, shall be located in a toilet room.\n\n(8) Each toilet room shall be lighted naturally, or artificially by a safe type of lighting at all hours of the day and night.\n\n(9) An adequate supply of toilet paper shall be provided in each privy, water closet, or chemical toilet compartment.\n\n(10) Privies and toilet rooms shall be kept in a sanitary condition. They shall be cleaned at least daily.\n\n(e)  Sewage disposal facilities.  In camps where public sewers are available, all sewer lines and floor drains from buildings shall be connected thereto.\n\n(f)  Laundry, handwashing, and bathing facilities.  (1) Laundry, handwashing, and bathing facilities shall be provided in the following ratio:\n\n(i) Handwash basin per family shelter or per six persons in shared facilities.\n\n(ii) Shower head for every 10 persons.\n\n(iii) Laundry tray or tub for every 30 persons.\n\n(iv) Slop sink in each building used for laundry, hand washing, and bathing.\n\n(2) Floors shall be of smooth finish but not slippery materials; they shall be impervious to moisture. Floor drains shall be provided in all shower baths, shower rooms, or laundry rooms to remove waste water and facilitate cleaning. All junctions of the curbing and the floor shall be coved. The walls and partitions of shower rooms shall be smooth and impervious to the height of splash.\n\n(3) An adequate supply of hot and cold running water shall be provided for bathing and laundry purposes. Facilities for heating water shall be provided.\n\n(4) Every service building shall be provided with equipment capable of maintaining a temperature of at least 70 \u00b0F. during cold weather.\n\n(5) Facilities for drying clothes shall be provided.\n\n(6) All service buildings shall be kept clean.\n\n(g)  Lighting.  Where electric service is available, each habitable room in a camp shall be provided with at least one ceiling-type light fixture and at least one separate floor- or wall-type convenience outlet. Laundry and toilet rooms and rooms where people congregate shall contain at least one ceiling- or wall-type fixture. Light levels in toilet and storage rooms shall be at least 20 foot-candles 30 inches from the floor. Other rooms, including kitchens and living quarters, shall be at least 30 foot-candles 30 inches from the floor.\n\n(h)  Refuse disposal.  (1) Fly-tight, rodent-tight, impervious, cleanable or single service containers, approved by the appropriate health authority shall be provided for the storage of garbage. At least one such container shall be provided for each family shelter and shall be located within 100 feet of each shelter on a wooden, metal, or concrete stand.\n\n(2) Garbage containers shall be kept clean.\n\n(3) Garbage containers shall be emptied when full, but not less than twice a week.\n\n(i)  Construction and operation of kitchens, dining hall, and feeding facilities.  (1) In all camps where central dining or multiple family feeding operations are permitted or provided, the food handling facilities shall comply with the requirements of the \u201cFood Service Sanitation Ordinance and Code,\u201d Part V of the \u201cFood Service Sanitation Manual,\u201d U.S. Public Health Service Publication 934 (1965), which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(2) A properly constructed kitchen and dining hall adequate in size, separate from the sleeping quarters of any of the workers or their families, shall be provided in connection with all food handling facilities. There shall be no direct opening from living or sleeping quarters into a kitchen or dining hall.\n\n(3) No person with any communicable disease shall be employed or permitted to work in the preparation, cooking, serving, or other handling of food, foodstuffs, or materials used therein, in any kitchen or dining room operated in connection with a camp or regularly used by persons living in a camp.\n\n(j)  Insect and rodent control.  Effective measures shall be taken to prevent infestation by and harborage of animal or insect vectors or pests.\n\n(k)  First aid.  (1) Adequate first aid facilities approved by a health authority shall be maintained and made available in every labor camp for the emergency treatment of injured persons.\n\n(2) Such facilities shall be in charge of a person trained to administer first aid and shall be readily accessible for use at all times.\n\n(l)  Reporting communicable disease.  (1) It shall be the duty of the camp superintendent to report immediately to the local health officer the name and address of any individual in the camp known to have or suspected of having a communicable disease.\n\n(2) Whenever there shall occur in any camp a case of suspected food poisoning or an unusual prevalence of any illness in which fever, diarrhea, sore throat, vomiting, or jaundice is a prominent symptom, it shall be the duty of the camp superintendent to report immediately the existence of the outbreak to the health authority by telegram, telephone, electronic mail or any other method that is equally fast."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.10.34.3", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "J", "Subpart J\u2014General Environmental Controls", "", "\u00a7 1910.143 Nonwater carriage disposal systems. [Reserved]", "OSHA", "", "", "", ""], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.10.34.4", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "J", "Subpart J\u2014General Environmental Controls", "", "\u00a7 1910.144 Safety color code for marking physical hazards.", "OSHA", "", "", "[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49748, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10, 1984; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996; 72 FR 71069, Dec. 14, 2007]", "(a)  Color identification \u2014(1)  Red.  Red shall be the basic color for the identification of:\n\n(i)  Fire protection equipment and apparatus.  [Reserved]\n\n(ii)  Danger.  Safety cans or other portable containers of flammable liquids having a flash point at or below 80 \u00b0F, table containers of flammable liquids (open cup tester), excluding shipping containers, shall be painted red with some additional clearly visible identification either in the form of a yellow band around the can or the name of the contents conspicuously stenciled or painted on the can in yellow. Red lights shall be provided at barricades and at temporary obstructions. Danger signs shall be painted red.\n\n(iii)  Stop.  Emergency stop bars on hazardous machines such as rubber mills, wire blocks, flat work ironers, etc., shall be red. Stop buttons or electrical switches which letters or other markings appear, used for emergency stopping of machinery shall be red.\n\n(2) [Reserved]\n\n(3)  Yellow.  Yellow shall be the basic color for designating caution and for marking physical hazards such as: Striking against, stumbling, falling, tripping, and \u201ccaught in between.\u201d\n\n(b) [Reserved]"], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.10.34.5", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "J", "Subpart J\u2014General Environmental Controls", "", "\u00a7 1910.145 Specifications for accident prevention signs and tags.", "OSHA", "", "", "[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49749, Oct. 24, 1978; 43 FR 51759, Nov. 7, 1978; 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10, 1984; 51 FR 33260, Sept. 19, 1986; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996; 76 FR 24698, May 2, 2011; 76 FR 44265, July 25, 2011; 78 FR 35566, June 13, 2013]", "(a)  Scope.  (1) These specifications apply to the design, application, and use of signs or symbols (as included in paragraphs (c) through (e) of this section) intended to indicate and, insofar as possible, to define specific hazards of a nature such that failure to designate them may lead to accidental injury to workers or the public, or both, or to property damage. These specifications are intended to cover all safety signs except those designed for streets, highways, and railroads. These specifications do not apply to plant bulletin boards or to safety posters.\n\n(2) All new signs and replacements of old signs shall be in accordance with these specifications.\n\n(b)  Definitions.  As used in this section, the word  sign  refers to a surface on prepared for the warning of, or safety instructions of, industrial workers or members of the public who may be exposed to hazards. Excluded from this definition, however, are news releases, displays commonly known as safety posters, and bulletins used for employee education.\n\n(c)  Classification of signs according to use \u2014(1)  Danger signs.  (i) There shall be no variation in the type of design of signs posted to warn of specific dangers and radiation hazards.\n\n(ii) All employees shall be instructed that danger signs indicate immediate danger and that special precautions are necessary.\n\n(2)  Caution signs.  (i) Caution signs shall be used only to warn against potential hazards or to caution against unsafe practices.\n\n(ii) All employees shall be instructed that caution signs indicate a possible hazard against which proper precaution should be taken.\n\n(3)  Safety instruction signs.  Safety instruction signs shall be used where there is a need for general instructions and suggestions relative to safety measures.\n\n(d)  Sign design \u2014(1)  Design features.  All signs shall be furnished with rounded or blunt corners and shall be free from sharp edges, burrs, splinters, or other sharp projections. The ends or heads of bolts or other fastening devices shall be located in such a way that they do not constitute a hazard.\n\n(2)  Danger signs.  The colors red, black, and white shall be those of opaque glossy samples as specified in Table 1, \u201cFundamental Specification of Safety Colors for CIE Standard Source \u2018C,\u2019 \u201d of ANSI Z53.1-1967 or in Table 1, \u201cSpecification of the Safety Colors for CIE Illuminate C and the CIE 1931, 2 Standard Observer,\u201d of ANSI Z535.1-2006(R2011), incorporated by reference in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(3) [Reserved]\n\n(4)  Caution signs.  The standard color of the background shall be yellow; and the panel, black with yellow letters. Any letters used against the yellow background shall be black. The colors shall be those of opaque glossy samples as specified in Table 1 of ANSI Z53.1-1967 or Table 1 of ANSI Z535.1-2006(R2011), incorporated by reference in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(5) [Reserved]\n\n(6)  Safety instruction signs.  The standard color of the background shall be white; and the panel, green with white letters. Any letters used against the white background shall be black. The colors shall be those of opaque glossy samples as specified in Table 1 of ANSI Z53.1-1967 or in Table 1 of ANSI Z535.1-2006(R2011), incorporated by reference in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(7)-(9) [Reserved]\n\n(10)  Slow-moving vehicle emblem.  This emblem (see fig. J-7) consists of a fluorescent yellow-orange triangle with a dark red reflective border. The yellow-orange fluorescent triangle is a highly visible color for daylight exposure. The reflective border defines the shape of the fluorescent color in daylight and creates a hollow red triangle in the path of motor vehicle headlights at night. The emblem is intended as a unique identification for, and it shall be used only on, vehicles which by design move slowly (25 m.p.h. or less) on the public roads. The emblem is not a clearance marker for wide machinery nor is it intended to replace required lighting or marking of slow-moving vehicles. Neither the color film pattern and its dimensions nor the backing shall be altered to permit use of advertising or other markings. The material, location, mounting, etc., of the emblem shall be in accordance with the American Society of Agricultural Engineers Emblem for Identifying Slow-Moving Vehicles, ASAE R276, 1967, or ASAE S276.2 (ANSI B114.1-1971), which are incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\nAll dimensions are in inches.\n\n(e)  Sign wordings.  (1) [Reserved]\n\n(2)  Nature of wording.  The wording of any sign should be easily read and concise. The sign should contain sufficient information to be easily understood. The wording should make a positive, rather than negative suggestion and should be accurate in fact.\n\n(3) [Reserved]\n\n(4)  Biological hazard signs.  The biological hazard warning shall be used to signify the actual or potential presence of a biohazard and to identify equipment, containers, rooms, materials, experimental animals, or combinations thereof, which contain, or are contaminated with, viable hazardous agents. For the purpose of this subparagraph the term \u201cbiological hazard,\u201d or \u201cbiohazard,\u201d shall include only those infectious agents presenting a risk or potential risk to the well-being of man.\n\n(f)  Accident prevention tags \u2014(1)  Scope and application.  (i) This paragraph (f) applies to all accident prevention tags used to identify hazardous conditions and provide a message to employees with respect to hazardous conditions as set forth in paragraph (f)(3) of this section, or to meet the specific tagging requirements of other OSHA standards.\n\n(ii) This paragraph (f) does not apply to construction or agriculture.\n\n(2)  Definitions. Biological hazard  or  BIOHAZARD  means those infectious agents presenting a risk of death, injury or illness to employees.\n\nMajor message  means that portion of a tag's inscription that is more specific than the signal word and that indicates the specific hazardous condition or the instruction to be communicated to the employee. Examples include: \u201cHigh Voltage,\u201d \u201cClose Clearance,\u201d \u201cDo Not Start,\u201d or \u201cDo Not Use\u201d or a corresponding pictograph used with a written text or alone.\n\nPictograph  means a pictorial representation used to identify a hazardous condition or to convey a safety instruction.\n\nSignal word  means that portion of a tag's inscription that contains the word or words that are intended to capture the employee's immediate attention.\n\nTag  means a device usually made of card, paper, pasteboard, plastic or other material used to identify a hazardous condition.\n\n(3)  Use.  Tags shall be used as a means to prevent accidental injury or illness to employees who are exposed to hazardous or potentially hazardous conditions, equipment or operations which are out of the ordinary, unexpected or not readily apparent. Tags shall be used until such time as the identified hazard is eliminated or the hazardous operation is completed. Tags need not be used where signs, guarding or other positive means of protection are being used.\n\n(4)  General tag criteria.  All required tags shall meet the following criteria:\n\n(i) Tags shall contain a signal word and a major message.\n\n(A) The signal word shall be either \u201cDanger,\u201d \u201cCaution,\u201d or \u201cBiological Hazard,\u201d \u201cBIOHAZARD,\u201d or the biological hazard symbol.\n\n(B) The major message shall indicate the specific hazardous condition or the instruction to be communicated to the employee.\n\n(ii) The signal word shall be readable at a minimum distance of five feet (1.52 m) or such greater distance as warranted by the hazard.\n\n(iii) The tag's major message shall be presented in either pictographs, written text or both.\n\n(iv) The signal word and the major message shall be understandable to all employees who may be exposed to the identified hazard.\n\n(v) All employees shall be informed as to the meaning of the various tags used throughout the workplace and what special precautions are necessary.\n\n(vi) Tags shall be affixed as close as safely possible to their respective hazards by a positive means such as string, wire, or adhesive that prevents their loss or unintentional removal.\n\n(5)  Danger tags.  Danger tags shall be used in major hazard situations where an immediate hazard presents a threat of death or serious injury to employees. Danger tags shall be used only in these situations.\n\n(6)  Caution tags.  Caution tags shall be used in minor hazard situations where a non-immediate or potential hazard or unsafe practice presents a lesser threat of employee injury. Caution tags shall be used only in these situations.\n\n(7)  Warning tags.  Warning tags may be used to represent a hazard level between \u201cCaution\u201d and \u201cDanger,\u201d instead of the required \u201cCaution\u201d tag, provided that they have a signal word of \u201cWarning,\u201d an appropriate major message, and otherwise meet the general tag criteria of paragraph (f)(4) of this section.\n\n(8)  Biological hazard tags.  (i) Biological hazard tags shall be used to identify the actual or potential presence of a biological hazard and to identify equipment, containers, rooms, experimental animals, or combinations thereof, that contain or are contaminated with hazardous biological agents.\n\n(ii) The symbol design for biological hazard tags shall conform to the design shown below:\n\n(9)  Other tags.  Other tags may be used in addition to those required by this paragraph (f), or in other situations where this paragraph (f) does not require tags, provided that they do not detract from the impact or visibility of the signal word and major message of any required tag.\n\nAppendixes to \u00a7 1910.145( f ), Accident Prevention Tags\n\nAppendix A to \u00a7 1910.145( f )\u2014Recommended Color Coding\n \n While the standard does not specifically mandate colors to be used on accident prevention tags, the following color scheme is recommended by OSHA for meeting the requirements of this section:\n \n \u201cDANGER\u201d\u2014Red, or predominantly red, with lettering or symbols in a contrasting color.\n \n \u201cCAUTION\u201d\u2014Yellow, or predominantly yellow, with lettering or symbols in a contrasting color.\n \n \u201cWARNING\u201d\u2014Orange, or predominantly orange, with lettering or symbols in a contrasting color.\n \n \u201cBIOLOGICAL HAZARD\u201d\u2014Fluorescent orange or orange-red, or predominantly so, with lettering or symbols in a contrasting color.\n\nWhile the standard does not specifically mandate colors to be used on accident prevention tags, the following color scheme is recommended by OSHA for meeting the requirements of this section:\n\n\u201cDANGER\u201d\u2014Red, or predominantly red, with lettering or symbols in a contrasting color.\n\n\u201cCAUTION\u201d\u2014Yellow, or predominantly yellow, with lettering or symbols in a contrasting color.\n\n\u201cWARNING\u201d\u2014Orange, or predominantly orange, with lettering or symbols in a contrasting color.\n\n\u201cBIOLOGICAL HAZARD\u201d\u2014Fluorescent orange or orange-red, or predominantly so, with lettering or symbols in a contrasting color.\n\nAppendix B to \u00a7 1910.145( f )\u2014References for Further Information\n \n The following references provide information which can be helpful in understanding the requirements contained in various sections of the standard:\n \n 1. Bresnahan, Thomas F., and Bryk, Joseph, \u201cThe Hazard Association Values of Accident Prevention Signs\u201d,  Journal of American Society of Safety Engineers;  January 1975.\n \n 2. Dreyfuss, H.,  Symbol Sourcebook,  McGraw Hill; New York, NY, 1972.\n \n 3. Glass, R.A. and others,  Some Criteria for Colors and Signs in Workplaces,  National Bureau of Standards, Washington DC, 1983.\n \n 4.  Graphic Symbols for Public Areas and Occupational Environments,  Treasury Board of Canada, Ottawa, Canada, July 1980.\n \n 5. Howett, G.L.,  Size of Letters Required for Visibility as a Function of Viewing Distance and Observer Acuity,  National Bureau of Standards, Washington DC, July 1983.\n \n 6. Lerner, N.D. and Collins, B.L.,  The Assessment of Safety Symbol Understandability by Different Testing Methods,  National Bureau of Standards, Washington DC, 1980.\n \n 7. Lerner, N.D. and Collins, B.L.,  Workplace Safety Symbols,  National Bureau of Standards, Washington DC, 1980.\n \n 8. Modley, R. and Meyers, W.R.,  Handbook of Pictorial Symbols,  Dover Publication, New York, NY, 1976.\n \n 9.  Product Safety Signs and Labels,  FMC Corporation, Santa Clara, CA, 1978.\n \n 10.  Safety Color Coding for Marking Physical Hazards,  Z53.1, American National Standards Institute, New York, NY, 1979.\n \n 11.  Signs and Symbols for the Occupational Environment, Can. 3-Z-321-77,  Canadian Standards Association, Ottawa, September 1977.\n \n 12.  Symbols for Industrial Safety,  National Bureau of Standards, Washington DC, April 1982.\n \n 13.  Symbol Signs,  U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington DC, November 1974.\n\nThe following references provide information which can be helpful in understanding the requirements contained in various sections of the standard:\n\n1. Bresnahan, Thomas F., and Bryk, Joseph, \u201cThe Hazard Association Values of Accident Prevention Signs\u201d,  Journal of American Society of Safety Engineers;  January 1975.\n\n2. Dreyfuss, H.,  Symbol Sourcebook,  McGraw Hill; New York, NY, 1972.\n\n3. Glass, R.A. and others,  Some Criteria for Colors and Signs in Workplaces,  National Bureau of Standards, Washington DC, 1983.\n\n4.  Graphic Symbols for Public Areas and Occupational Environments,  Treasury Board of Canada, Ottawa, Canada, July 1980.\n\n5. Howett, G.L.,  Size of Letters Required for Visibility as a Function of Viewing Distance and Observer Acuity,  National Bureau of Standards, Washington DC, July 1983.\n\n6. Lerner, N.D. and Collins, B.L.,  The Assessment of Safety Symbol Understandability by Different Testing Methods,  National Bureau of Standards, Washington DC, 1980.\n\n7. Lerner, N.D. and Collins, B.L.,  Workplace Safety Symbols,  National Bureau of Standards, Washington DC, 1980.\n\n8. Modley, R. and Meyers, W.R.,  Handbook of Pictorial Symbols,  Dover Publication, New York, NY, 1976.\n\n9.  Product Safety Signs and Labels,  FMC Corporation, Santa Clara, CA, 1978.\n\n10.  Safety Color Coding for Marking Physical Hazards,  Z53.1, American National Standards Institute, New York, NY, 1979.\n\n11.  Signs and Symbols for the Occupational Environment, Can. 3-Z-321-77,  Canadian Standards Association, Ottawa, September 1977.\n\n12.  Symbols for Industrial Safety,  National Bureau of Standards, Washington DC, April 1982.\n\n13.  Symbol Signs,  U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington DC, November 1974."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.10.34.6", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "J", "Subpart J\u2014General Environmental Controls", "", "\u00a7 1910.146 Permit-required confined spaces.", "OSHA", "", "", "[58 FR 4549, Jan. 14, 1993; 58 FR 34845, 34846, June 29, 1993, as amended at 59 FR 26114, May 19, 1994; 63 FR 66038, 66039, Dec. 1, 1998; 76 FR 80739, Dec. 27, 2011]", "(a)  Scope and application.  This section contains requirements for practices and procedures to protect employees in general industry from the hazards of entry into permit-required confined spaces. This section does not apply to agriculture, to construction, or to shipyard employment (parts 1928, 1926, and 1915 of this chapter, respectively).\n\n(b)  Definitions.\n\nAcceptable entry conditions  means the conditions that must exist in a permit space to allow entry and to ensure that employees involved with a permit-required confined space entry can safely enter into and work within the space.\n\nAttendant  means an individual stationed outside one or more permit spaces who monitors the authorized entrants and who performs all attendant's duties assigned in the employer's permit space program.\n\nAuthorized entrant  means an employee who is authorized by the employer to enter a permit space.\n\nBlanking or blinding  means the absolute closure of a pipe, line, or duct by the fastening of a solid plate (such as a spectacle blind or a skillet blind) that completely covers the bore and that is capable of withstanding the maximum pressure of the pipe, line, or duct with no leakage beyond the plate.\n\nConfined space  means a space that:\n\n(1) Is large enough and so configured that an employee can bodily enter and perform assigned work; and\n\n(2) Has limited or restricted means for entry or exit (for example, tanks, vessels, silos, storage bins, hoppers, vaults, and pits are spaces that may have limited means of entry.); and\n\n(3) Is not designed for continuous employee occupancy.\n\nDouble block and bleed  means the closure of a line, duct, or pipe by closing and locking or tagging two in-line valves and by opening and locking or tagging a drain or vent valve in the line between the two closed valves.\n\nEmergency  means any occurrence (including any failure of hazard control or monitoring equipment) or event internal or external to the permit space that could endanger entrants.\n\nEngulfment  means the surrounding and effective capture of a person by a liquid or finely divided (flowable) solid substance that can be aspirated to cause death by filling or plugging the respiratory system or that can exert enough force on the body to cause death by strangulation, constriction, or crushing.\n\nEntry  means the action by which a person passes through an opening into a permit-required confined space. Entry includes ensuing work activities in that space and is considered to have occurred as soon as any part of the entrant's body breaks the plane of an opening into the space.\n\nEntry permit  (permit) means the written or printed document that is provided by the employer to allow and control entry into a permit space and that contains the information specified in paragraph (f) of this section.\n\nEntry supervisor  means the person (such as the employer, foreman, or crew chief) responsible for determining if acceptable entry conditions are present at a permit space where entry is planned, for authorizing entry and overseeing entry operations, and for terminating entry as required by this section.\n\nAn entry supervisor also may serve as an attendant or as an authorized entrant, as long as that person is trained and equipped as required by this section for each role he or she fills. Also, the duties of entry supervisor may be passed from one individual to another during the course of an entry operation.\n\nHazardous atmosphere  means an atmosphere that may expose employees to the risk of death, incapacitation, impairment of ability to self-rescue (that is, escape unaided from a permit space), injury, or acute illness from one or more of the following causes:\n\n(1) Flammable gas, vapor, or mist in excess of 10 percent of its lower flammable limit (LFL);\n\n(2) Airborne combustible dust at a concentration that meets or exceeds its LFL;\n\nThis concentration may be approximated as a condition in which the dust obscures vision at a distance of 5 feet (1.52 m) or less.\n\n(3) Atmospheric oxygen concentration below 19.5 percent or above 23.5 percent;\n\n(4) Atmospheric concentration of any substance for which a dose or a permissible exposure limit is published in subpart G,  Occupational Health and Environmental Control,  or in subpart Z,  Toxic and Hazardous Substances,  of this part and which could result in employee exposure in excess of its dose or permissible exposure limit;\n\nAn atmospheric concentration of any substance that is not capable of causing death, incapacitation, impairment of ability to self-rescue, injury, or acute illness due to its health effects is not covered by this provision.\n\n(5) Any other atmospheric condition that is immediately dangerous to life or health.\n\nFor air contaminants for which OSHA has not determined a dose or permissible exposure limit, other sources of information, such as Material Safety Data Sheets that comply with the Hazard Communication Standard, \u00a7 1910.1200 of this part, published information, and internal documents can provide guidance in establishing acceptable atmospheric conditions.\n\nHot work permit  means the employer's written authorization to perform operations (for example, riveting, welding, cutting, burning, and heating) capable of providing a source of ignition.\n\nImmediately dangerous to life or health  (IDLH) means any condition that poses an immediate or delayed threat to life or that would cause irreversible adverse health effects or that would interfere with an individual's ability to escape unaided from a permit space.\n\nSome materials\u2014hydrogen fluoride gas and cadmium vapor, for example\u2014may produce immediate transient effects that, even if severe, may pass without medical attention, but are followed by sudden, possibly fatal collapse 12-72 hours after exposure. The victim \u201cfeels normal\u201d from recovery from transient effects until collapse. Such materials in hazardous quantities are considered to be \u201cimmediately\u201d dangerous to life or health.\n\nInerting  means the displacement of the atmosphere in a permit space by a noncombustible gas (such as nitrogen) to such an extent that the resulting atmosphere is noncombustible.\n\nThis procedure produces an IDLH oxygen-deficient atmosphere.\n\nIsolation  means the process by which a permit space is removed from service and completely protected against the release of energy and material into the space by such means as: blanking or blinding; misaligning or removing sections of lines, pipes, or ducts; a double block and bleed system; lockout or tagout of all sources of energy; or blocking or disconnecting all mechanical linkages.\n\nLine breaking  means the intentional opening of a pipe, line, or duct that is or has been carrying flammable, corrosive, or toxic material, an inert gas, or any fluid at a volume, pressure, or temperature capable of causing injury.\n\nNon-permit confined space  means a confined space that does not contain or, with respect to atmospheric hazards, have the potential to contain any hazard capable of causing death or serious physical harm.\n\nOxygen deficient atmosphere  means an atmosphere containing less than 19.5 percent oxygen by volume.\n\nOxygen enriched atmosphere  means an atmosphere containing more than 23.5 percent oxygen by volume.\n\nPermit-required confined space  (permit space) means a confined space that has one or more of the following characteristics:\n\n(1) Contains or has a potential to contain a hazardous atmosphere;\n\n(2) Contains a material that has the potential for engulfing an entrant;\n\n(3) Has an internal configuration such that an entrant could be trapped or asphyxiated by inwardly converging walls or by a floor which slopes downward and tapers to a smaller cross- section; or\n\n(4) Contains any other recognized serious safety or health hazard.\n\nPermit-required confined space program  (permit space program) means the employer's overall program for controlling, and, where appropriate, for protecting employees from, permit space hazards and for regulating employee entry into permit spaces.\n\nPermit system  means the employer's written procedure for preparing and issuing permits for entry and for returning the permit space to service following termination of entry.\n\nProhibited condition  means any condition in a permit space that is not allowed by the permit during the period when entry is authorized.\n\nRescue service  means the personnel designated to rescue employees from permit spaces.\n\nRetrieval system  means the equipment (including a retrieval line, chest or full-body harness, wristlets, if appropriate, and a lifting device or anchor) used for non-entry rescue of persons from permit spaces.\n\nTesting  means the process by which the hazards that may confront entrants of a permit space are identified and evaluated. Testing includes specifying the tests that are to be performed in the permit space.\n\nTesting enables employers both to devise and implement adequate control measures for the protection of authorized entrants and to determine if acceptable entry conditions are present immediately prior to, and during, entry.\n\n(c)  General requirements.  (1) The employer shall evaluate the workplace to determine if any spaces are permit- required confined spaces.\n\nProper application of the decision flow chart in appendix A to \u00a7 1910.146 would facilitate compliance with this requirement.\n\n(2) If the workplace contains permit spaces, the employer shall inform exposed employees, by posting danger signs or by any other equally effective means, of the existence and location of and the danger posed by the permit spaces.\n\nA sign reading \u201cDANGER\u2014PERMIT-REQUIRED CONFINED SPACE, DO NOT ENTER\u201d or using other similar language would satisfy the requirement for a sign.\n\n(3) If the employer decides that its employees will not enter permit spaces, the employer shall take effective measures to prevent its employees from entering the permit spaces and shall comply with paragraphs (c)(1), (c)(2), (c)(6), and (c)(8) of this section.\n\n(4) If the employer decides that its employees will enter permit spaces, the employer shall develop and implement a written permit space program that complies with this section. The written program shall be available for inspection by employees and their authorized representatives.\n\n(5) An employer may use the alternate procedures specified in paragraph (c)(5)(ii) of this section for entering a permit space under the conditions set forth in paragraph (c)(5)(i) of this section.\n\n(i) An employer whose employees enter a permit space need not comply with paragraphs (d) through (f) and (h) through (k) of this section, provided that:\n\n(A) The employer can demonstrate that the only hazard posed by the permit space is an actual or potential hazardous atmosphere;\n\n(B) The employer can demonstrate that continuous forced air ventilation alone is sufficient to maintain that permit space safe for entry;\n\n(C) The employer develops monitoring and inspection data that supports the demonstrations required by paragraphs (c)(5)(i)(A) and (c)(5)(i)(B) of this section;\n\n(D) If an initial entry of the permit space is necessary to obtain the data required by paragraph (c)(5)(i)(C) of this section, the entry is performed in compliance with paragraphs (d) through (k) of this section;\n\n(E) The determinations and supporting data required by paragraphs (c)(5)(i)(A), (c)(5)(i)(B), and (c)(5)(i)(C) of this section are documented by the employer and are made available to each employee who enters the permit space under the terms of paragraph (c)(5) of this section or to that employee's authorized representative; and\n\n(F) Entry into the permit space under the terms of paragraph (c)(5)(i) of this section is performed in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (c)(5)(ii) of this section.\n\nSee paragraph (c)(7) of this section for reclassification of a permit space after all hazards within the space have been eliminated.\n\n(ii) The following requirements apply to entry into permit spaces that meet the conditions set forth in paragraph (c)(5)(i) of this section.\n\n(A) Any conditions making it unsafe to remove an entrance cover shall be eliminated before the cover is removed.\n\n(B) When entrance covers are removed, the opening shall be promptly guarded by a railing, temporary cover, or other temporary barrier that will prevent an accidental fall through the opening and that will protect each employee working in the space from foreign objects entering the space.\n\n(C) Before an employee enters the space, the internal atmosphere shall be tested, with a calibrated direct-reading instrument, for oxygen content, for flammable gases and vapors, and for potential toxic air contaminants, in that order. Any employee who enters the space, or that employee's authorized representative, shall be provided an opportunity to observe the pre-entry testing required by this paragraph.\n\n(D) There may be no hazardous atmosphere within the space whenever any employee is inside the space.\n\n(E) Continuous forced air ventilation shall be used, as follows:\n\n( 1 ) An employee may not enter the space until the forced air ventilation has eliminated any hazardous atmosphere;\n\n( 2 ) The forced air ventilation shall be so directed as to ventilate the immediate areas where an employee is or will be present within the space and shall continue until all employees have left the space;\n\n( 3 ) The air supply for the forced air ventilation shall be from a clean source and may not increase the hazards in the space.\n\n(F) The atmosphere within the space shall be periodically tested as necessary to ensure that the continuous forced air ventilation is preventing the accumulation of a hazardous atmosphere. Any employee who enters the space, or that employee's authorized representative, shall be provided with an opportunity to observe the periodic testing required by this paragraph.\n\n(G) If a hazardous atmosphere is detected during entry:\n\n( 1 ) Each employee shall leave the space immediately;\n\n( 2 ) The space shall be evaluated to determine how the hazardous atmosphere developed; and\n\n( 3 ) Measures shall be implemented to protect employees from the hazardous atmosphere before any subsequent entry takes place.\n\n(H) The employer shall verify that the space is safe for entry and that the pre-entry measures required by paragraph (c)(5)(ii) of this section have been taken, through a written certification that contains the date, the location of the space, and the signature of the person providing the certification. The certification shall be made before entry and shall be made available to each employee entering the space or to that employee's authorized representative .\n\n(6) When there are changes in the use or configuration of a non-permit confined space that might increase the hazards to entrants, the employer shall reevaluate that space and, if necessary, reclassify it as a permit-required confined space.\n\n(7) A space classified by the employer as a permit-required confined space may be reclassified as a non-permit confined space under the following procedures:\n\n(i) If the permit space poses no actual or potential atmospheric hazards and if all hazards within the space are eliminated without entry into the space, the permit space may be reclassified as a non-permit confined space for as long as the non-atmospheric hazards remain eliminated.\n\n(ii) If it is necessary to enter the permit space to eliminate hazards, such entry shall be performed under paragraphs (d) through (k) of this section. If testing and inspection during that entry demonstrate that the hazards within the permit space have been eliminated, the permit space may be reclassified as a non-permit confined space for as long as the hazards remain eliminated.\n\nControl of atmospheric hazards through forced air ventilation does not constitute elimination of the hazards. Paragraph (c)(5) covers permit space entry where the employer can demonstrate that forced air ventilation alone will control all hazards in the space.\n\n(iii) The employer shall document the basis for determining that all hazards in a permit space have been eliminated, through a certification that contains the date, the location of the space, and the signature of the person making the determination. The certification shall be made available to each employee entering the space or to that employee's authorized representative.\n\n(iv) If hazards arise within a permit space that has been declassified to a non-permit space under paragraph (c)(7) of this section, each employee in the space shall exit the space. The employer shall then reevaluate the space and determine whether it must be reclassified as a permit space, in accordance with other applicable provisions of this section.\n\n(8) When an employer (host employer) arranges to have employees of another employer (contractor) perform work that involves permit space entry, the host employer shall:\n\n(i) Inform the contractor that the workplace contains permit spaces and that permit space entry is allowed only through compliance with a permit space program meeting the requirements of this section;\n\n(ii) Apprise the contractor of the elements, including the hazards identified and the host employer's experience with the space, that make the space in question a permit space;\n\n(iii) Apprise the contractor of any precautions or procedures that the host employer has implemented for the protection of employees in or near permit spaces where contractor personnel will be working;\n\n(iv) Coordinate entry operations with the contractor, when both host employer personnel and contractor personnel will be working in or near permit spaces, as required by paragraph (d)(11) of this section; and\n\n(v) Debrief the contractor at the conclusion of the entry operations regarding the permit space program followed and regarding any hazards confronted or created in permit spaces during entry operations.\n\n(9) In addition to complying with the permit space requirements that apply to all employers, each contractor who is retained to perform permit space entry operations shall:\n\n(i) Obtain any available information regarding permit space hazards and entry operations from the host employer;\n\n(ii) Coordinate entry operations with the host employer, when both host employer personnel and contractor personnel will be working in or near permit spaces, as required by paragraph (d)(11) of this section; and\n\n(iii) Inform the host employer of the permit space program that the contractor will follow and of any hazards confronted or created in permit spaces, either through a debriefing or during the entry operation.\n\n(d)  Permit-required confined space program  (permit space program). Under the permit space program required by paragraph (c)(4) of this section, the employer shall:\n\n(1) Implement the measures necessary to prevent unauthorized entry;\n\n(2) Identify and evaluate the hazards of permit spaces before employees enter them;\n\n(3) Develop and implement the means, procedures, and practices necessary for safe permit space entry operations, including, but not limited to, the following:\n\n(i) Specifying acceptable entry conditions;\n\n(ii) Providing each authorized entrant or that employee's authorized representative with the opportunity to observe any monitoring or testing of permit spaces;\n\n(iii) Isolating the permit space;\n\n(iv) Purging, inerting, flushing, or ventilating the permit space as necessary to eliminate or control atmospheric hazards;\n\n(v) Providing pedestrian, vehicle, or other barriers as necessary to protect entrants from external hazards; and\n\n(vi) Verifying that conditions in the permit space are acceptable for entry throughout the duration of an authorized entry.\n\n(4) Provide the following equipment (specified in paragraphs (d)(4)(i) through (d)(4)(ix) of this section) at no cost to employees, maintain that equipment properly, and ensure that employees use that equipment properly:\n\n(i) Testing and monitoring equipment needed to comply with paragraph (d)(5) of this section;\n\n(ii) Ventilating equipment needed to obtain acceptable entry conditions;\n\n(iii) Communications equipment necessary for compliance with paragraphs (h)(3) and (i)(5) of this section;\n\n(iv) Personal protective equipment insofar as feasible engineering and work practice controls do not adequately protect employees;\n\n(v) Lighting equipment needed to enable employees to see well enough to work safely and to exit the space quickly in an emergency;\n\n(vi) Barriers and shields as required by paragraph (d)(3)(v) of this section.\n\n(vii) Equipment, such as ladders, needed for safe ingress and egress by authorized entrants;\n\n(viii) Rescue and emergency equipment needed to comply with paragraph (d)(9) of this section, except to the extent that the equipment is provided by rescue services; and\n\n(ix) Any other equipment necessary for safe entry into and rescue from permit spaces.\n\n(5) Evaluate permit space conditions as follows when entry operations are conducted:\n\n(i) Test conditions in the permit space to determine if acceptable entry conditions exist before entry is authorized to begin, except that, if isolation of the space is infeasible because the space is large or is part of a continuous system (such as a sewer), pre-entry testing shall be performed to the extent feasible before entry is authorized and, if entry is authorized, entry conditions shall be continuously monitored in the areas where authorized entrants are working;\n\n(ii) Test or monitor the permit space as necessary to determine if acceptable entry conditions are being maintained during the course of entry operations; and\n\n(iii) When testing for atmospheric hazards, test first for oxygen, then for combustible gases and vapors, and then for toxic gases and vapors.\n\n(iv) Provide each authorized entrant or that employee's authorized representative an opportunity to observe the pre-entry and any subsequent testing or monitoring of permit spaces;\n\n(v) Reevaluate the permit space in the presence of any authorized entrant or that employee's authorized representative who requests that the employer conduct such reevaluation because the entrant or representative has reason to believe that the evaluation of that space may not have been adequate;\n\n(vi) Immediately provide each authorized entrant or that employee's authorized representative with the results of any testing conducted in accord with paragraph (d) of this section.\n\nAtmospheric testing conducted in accordance with appendix B to \u00a7 1910.146 would be considered as satisfying the requirements of this paragraph. For permit space operations in sewers, atmospheric testing conducted in accordance with appendix B, as supplemented by appendix E to \u00a7 1910.146, would be considered as satisfying the requirements of this paragraph.\n\n(6) Provide at least one attendant outside the permit space into which entry is authorized for the duration of entry operations;\n\nAttendants may be assigned to monitor more than one permit space provided the duties described in paragraph (i) of this section can be effectively performed for each permit space that is monitored. Likewise, attendants may be stationed at any location outside the permit space to be monitored as long as the duties described in paragraph (i) of this section can be effectively performed for each permit space that is monitored.\n\n(7) If multiple spaces are to be monitored by a single attendant, include in the permit program the means and procedures to enable the attendant to respond to an emergency affecting one or more of the permit spaces being monitored without distraction from the attendant's responsibilities under paragraph (i) of this section;\n\n(8) Designate the persons who are to have active roles (as, for example, authorized entrants, attendants, entry supervisors, or persons who test or monitor the atmosphere in a permit space) in entry operations, identify the duties of each such employee, and provide each such employee with the training required by paragraph (g) of this section;\n\n(9) Develop and implement procedures for summoning rescue and emergency services, for rescuing entrants from permit spaces, for providing necessary emergency services to rescued employees, and for preventing unauthorized personnel from attempting a rescue;\n\n(10) Develop and implement a system for the preparation, issuance, use, and cancellation of entry permits as required by this section;\n\n(11) Develop and implement procedures to coordinate entry operations when employees of more than one employer are working simultaneously as authorized entrants in a permit space, so that employees of one employer do not endanger the employees of any other employer;\n\n(12) Develop and implement procedures (such as closing off a permit space and canceling the permit) necessary for concluding the entry after entry operations have been completed;\n\n(13) Review entry operations when the employer has reason to believe that the measures taken under the permit space program may not protect employees and revise the program to correct deficiencies found to exist before subsequent entries are authorized; and\n\nExamples of circumstances requiring the review of the permit space program are: any unauthorized entry of a permit space, the detection of a permit space hazard not covered by the permit, the detection of a condition prohibited by the permit, the occurrence of an injury or near-miss during entry, a change in the use or configuration of a permit space, and employee complaints about the effectiveness of the program.\n\n(14) Review the permit space program, using the canceled permits retained under paragraph (e)(6) of this section within 1 year after each entry and revise the program as necessary, to ensure that employees participating in entry operations are protected from permit space hazards.\n\nEmployers may perform a single annual review covering all entries performed during a 12-month period. If no entry is performed during a 12-month period, no review is necessary.\n\nAppendix C to \u00a7 1910.146 presents examples of permit space programs that are considered to comply with the requirements of paragraph (d) of this section.\n\n(e)  Permit system.  (1) Before entry is authorized, the employer shall document the completion of measures required by paragraph (d)(3) of this section by preparing an entry permit.\n\nAppendix D to \u00a7 1910.146 presents examples of permits whose elements are considered to comply with the requirements of this section.\n\n(2) Before entry begins, the entry supervisor identified on the permit shall sign the entry permit to authorize entry.\n\n(3) The completed permit shall be made available at the time of entry to all authorized entrants or their authorized representatives, by posting it at the entry portal or by any other equally effective means, so that the entrants can confirm that pre-entry preparations have been completed.\n\n(4) The duration of the permit may not exceed the time required to complete the assigned task or job identified on the permit in accordance with paragraph (f)(2) of this section.\n\n(5) The entry supervisor shall terminate entry and cancel the entry permit when:\n\n(i) The entry operations covered by the entry permit have been completed; or\n\n(ii) A condition that is not allowed under the entry permit arises in or near the permit space.\n\n(6) The employer shall retain each canceled entry permit for at least 1 year to facilitate the review of the permit-required confined space program required by paragraph (d)(14) of this section. Any problems encountered during an entry operation shall be noted on the pertinent permit so that appropriate revisions to the permit space program can be made.\n\n(f)  Entry permit.  The entry permit that documents compliance with this section and authorizes entry to a permit space shall identify:\n\n(1) The permit space to be entered;\n\n(2) The purpose of the entry;\n\n(3) The date and the authorized duration of the entry permit;\n\n(4) The authorized entrants within the permit space, by name or by such other means (for example, through the use of rosters or tracking systems) as will enable the attendant to determine quickly and accurately, for the duration of the permit, which authorized entrants are inside the permit space;\n\nThis requirement may be met by inserting a reference on the entry permit as to the means used, such as a roster or tracking system, to keep track of the authorized entrants within the permit space.\n\n(5) The personnel, by name, currently serving as attendants;\n\n(6) The individual, by name, currently serving as entry supervisor, with a space for the signature or initials of the entry supervisor who originally authorized entry;\n\n(7) The hazards of the permit space to be entered;\n\n(8) The measures used to isolate the permit space and to eliminate or control permit space hazards before entry;\n\nThose measures can include the lockout or tagging of equipment and procedures for purging, inerting, ventilating, and flushing permit spaces.\n\n(9) The acceptable entry conditions;\n\n(10) The results of initial and periodic tests performed under paragraph (d)(5) of this section, accompanied by the names or initials of the testers and by an indication of when the tests were performed;\n\n(11) The rescue and emergency services that can be summoned and the means (such as the equipment to use and the numbers to call) for summoning those services;\n\n(12) The communication procedures used by authorized entrants and attendants to maintain contact during the entry;\n\n(13) Equipment, such as personal protective equipment, testing equipment, communications equipment, alarm systems, and rescue equipment, to be provided for compliance with this section;\n\n(14) Any other information whose inclusion is necessary, given the circumstances of the particular confined space, in order to ensure employee safety; and\n\n(15) Any additional permits, such as for hot work, that have been issued to authorize work in the permit space.\n\n(g)  Training.  (1) The employer shall provide training so that all employees whose work is regulated by this section acquire the understanding, knowledge, and skills necessary for the safe performance of the duties assigned under this section.\n\n(2) Training shall be provided to each affected employee:\n\n(i) Before the employee is first assigned duties under this section;\n\n(ii) Before there is a change in assigned duties;\n\n(iii) Whenever there is a change in permit space operations that presents a hazard about which an employee has not previously been trained;\n\n(iv) Whenever the employer has reason to believe either that there are deviations from the permit space entry procedures required by paragraph (d)(3) of this section or that there are inadequacies in the employee's knowledge or use of these procedures.\n\n(3) The training shall establish employee proficiency in the duties required by this section and shall introduce new or revised procedures, as necessary, for compliance with this section.\n\n(4) The employer shall certify that the training required by paragraphs (g)(1) through (g)(3) of this section has been accomplished. The certification shall contain each employee's name, the signatures or initials of the trainers, and the dates of training. The certification shall be available for inspection by employees and their authorized representatives.\n\n(h)  Duties of authorized entrants.  The employer shall ensure that all authorized entrants:\n\n(1) Know the hazards that may be faced during entry, including information on the mode, signs or symptoms, and consequences of the exposure;\n\n(2) Properly use equipment as required by paragraph (d)(4) of this section;\n\n(3) Communicate with the attendant as necessary to enable the attendant to monitor entrant status and to enable the attendant to alert entrants of the need to evacuate the space as required by paragraph (i)(6) of this section;\n\n(4) Alert the attendant whenever:\n\n(i) The entrant recognizes any warning sign or symptom of exposure to a dangerous situation, or\n\n(ii) The entrant detects a prohibited condition; and\n\n(5) Exit from the permit space as quickly as possible whenever:\n\n(i) An order to evacuate is given by the attendant or the entry supervisor,\n\n(ii) The entrant recognizes any warning sign or symptom of exposure to a dangerous situation,\n\n(iii) The entrant detects a prohibited condition, or\n\n(iv) An evacuation alarm is activated.\n\n(i)  Duties of attendants.  The employer shall ensure that each attendant:\n\n(1) Knows the hazards that may be faced during entry, including information on the mode, signs or symptoms, and consequences of the exposure;\n\n(2) Is aware of possible behavioral effects of hazard exposure in authorized entrants;\n\n(3) Continuously maintains an accurate count of authorized entrants in the permit space and ensures that the means used to identify authorized entrants under paragraph (f)(4) of this section accurately identifies who is in the permit space;\n\n(4) Remains outside the permit space during entry operations until relieved by another attendant;\n\nWhen the employer's permit entry program allows attendant entry for rescue, attendants may enter a permit space to attempt a rescue if they have been trained and equipped for rescue operations as required by paragraph (k)(1) of this section and if they have been relieved as required by paragraph (i)(4) of this section.\n\n(5) Communicates with authorized entrants as necessary to monitor entrant status and to alert entrants of the need to evacuate the space under paragraph (i)(6) of this section;\n\n(6) Monitors activities inside and outside the space to determine if it is safe for entrants to remain in the space and orders the authorized entrants to evacuate the permit space immediately under any of the following conditions;\n\n(i) If the attendant detects a prohibited condition;\n\n(ii) If the attendant detects the behavioral effects of hazard exposure in an authorized entrant;\n\n(iii) If the attendant detects a situation outside the space that could endanger the authorized entrants; or\n\n(iv) If the attendant cannot effectively and safely perform all the duties required under paragraph (i) of this section;\n\n(7) Summon rescue and other emergency services as soon as the attendant determines that authorized entrants may need assistance to escape from permit space hazards;\n\n(8) Takes the following actions when unauthorized persons approach or enter a permit space while entry is underway:\n\n(i) Warn the unauthorized persons that they must stay away from the permit space;\n\n(ii) Advise the unauthorized persons that they must exit immediately if they have entered the permit space; and\n\n(iii) Inform the authorized entrants and the entry supervisor if unauthorized persons have entered the permit space;\n\n(9) Performs non-entry rescues as specified by the employer's rescue procedure; and\n\n(10) Performs no duties that might interfere with the attendant's primary duty to monitor and protect the authorized entrants.\n\n(j)  Duties of entry supervisors.  The employer shall ensure that each entry supervisor:\n\n(1) Knows the hazards that may be faced during entry, including information on the mode, signs or symptoms, and consequences of the exposure;\n\n(2) Verifies, by checking that the appropriate entries have been made on the permit, that all tests specified by the permit have been conducted and that all procedures and equipment specified by the permit are in place before endorsing the permit and allowing entry to begin;\n\n(3) Terminates the entry and cancels the permit as required by paragraph (e)(5) of this section;\n\n(4) Verifies that rescue services are available and that the means for summoning them are operable;\n\n(5) Removes unauthorized individuals who enter or who attempt to enter the permit space during entry operations; and\n\n(6) Determines, whenever responsibility for a permit space entry operation is transferred and at intervals dictated by the hazards and operations performed within the space, that entry operations remain consistent with terms of the entry permit and that acceptable entry conditions are maintained.\n\n(k)  Rescue and emergency services.  (1) An employer who designates rescue and emergency services, pursuant to paragraph (d)(9) of this section, shall:\n\n(i) Evaluate a prospective rescuer's ability to respond to a rescue summons in a timely manner, considering the hazard(s) identified;\n\nWhat will be considered timely will vary according to the specific hazards involved in each entry. For example, \u00a7 1910.134, Respiratory Protection, requires that employers provide a standby person or persons capable of immediate action to rescue employee(s) wearing respiratory protection while in work areas defined as IDLH atmospheres.\n\n(ii) Evaluate a prospective rescue service's ability, in terms of proficiency with rescue-related tasks and equipment, to function appropriately while rescuing entrants from the particular permit space or types of permit spaces identified;\n\n(iii) Select a rescue team or service from those evaluated that:\n\n(A) Has the capability to reach the victim(s) within a time frame that is appropriate for the permit space hazard(s) identified;\n\n(B) Is equipped for and proficient in performing the needed rescue services;\n\n(iv) Inform each rescue team or service of the hazards they may confront when called on to perform rescue at the site; and\n\n(v) Provide the rescue team or service selected with access to all permit spaces from which rescue may be necessary so that the rescue service can develop appropriate rescue plans and practice rescue operations.\n\nNon-mandatory appendix F contains examples of criteria which employers can use in evaluating prospective rescuers as required by paragraph (k)(1) of this section.\n\n(2) An employer whose employees have been designated to provide permit space rescue and emergency services shall take the following measures:\n\n(i) Provide affected employees with the personal protective equipment (PPE) needed to conduct permit space rescues safely and train affected employees so they are proficient in the use of that PPE, at no cost to those employees;\n\n(ii) Train affected employees to perform assigned rescue duties. The employer must ensure that such employees successfully complete the training required to establish proficiency as an authorized entrant, as provided by paragraphs (g) and (h) of this section;\n\n(iii) Train affected employees in basic first-aid and cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR). The employer shall ensure that at least one member of the rescue team or service holding a current certification in first aid and CPR is available; and\n\n(iv) Ensure that affected employees practice making permit space rescues at least once every 12 months, by means of simulated rescue operations in which they remove dummies, manikins, or actual persons from the actual permit spaces or from representative permit spaces. Representative permit spaces shall, with respect to opening size, configuration, and accessibility, simulate the types of permit spaces from which rescue is to be performed.\n\n(3) To facilitate non-entry rescue, retrieval systems or methods shall be used whenever an authorized entrant enters a permit space, unless the retrieval equipment would increase the overall risk of entry or would not contribute to the rescue of the entrant. Retrieval systems shall meet the following requirements.\n\n(i) Each authorized entrant shall use a chest or full body harness, with a retrieval line attached at the center of the entrant's back near shoulder level, above the entrant's head, or at another point which the employer can establish presents a profile small enough for the successful removal of the entrant. Wristlets may be used in lieu of the chest or full body harness if the employer can demonstrate that the use of a chest or full body harness is infeasible or creates a greater hazard and that the use of wristlets is the safest and most effective alternative.\n\n(ii) The other end of the retrieval line shall be attached to a mechanical device or fixed point outside the permit space in such a manner that rescue can begin as soon as the rescuer becomes aware that rescue is necessary. A mechanical device shall be available to retrieve personnel from vertical type permit spaces more than 5 feet (1.52 m) deep.\n\n(4) If an injured entrant is exposed to a substance for which a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) or other similar written information is required to be kept at the worksite, that MSDS or written information shall be made available to the medical facility treating the exposed entrant.\n\n(l)  Employee participation.  (1) Employers shall consult with affected employees and their authorized representatives on the development and implementation of all aspects of the permit space program required by paragraph (c) of this section.\n\n(2) Employers shall make available to affected employees and their authorized representatives all information required to be developed by this section.\n\nAppendixes to \u00a7 1910.146\u2014Permit-required Confined Spaces\n \n \n Note: \n Appendixes A through F serve to provide information and non-mandatory guidelines to assist employers and employees in complying with the appropriate requirements of this section.\n\nAppendixes A through F serve to provide information and non-mandatory guidelines to assist employers and employees in complying with the appropriate requirements of this section.\n\nAppendix B to \u00a7 1910.146\u2014Procedures for Atmospheric Testing\n \n Atmospheric testing is required for two distinct purposes: evaluation of the hazards of the permit space and verification that acceptable entry conditions for entry into that space exist.\n \n (1)  Evaluation testing.  The atmosphere of a confined space should be analyzed using equipment of sufficient sensitivity and specificity to identify and evaluate any hazardous atmospheres that may exist or arise, so that appropriate permit entry procedures can be developed and acceptable entry conditions stipulated for that space. Evaluation and interpretation of these data, and development of the entry procedure, should be done by, or reviewed by, a technically qualified professional (e.g., OSHA consultation service, or certified industrial hygienist, registered safety engineer, certified safety professional, certified marine chemist, etc.) based on evaluation of all serious hazards.\n \n (2)  Verification testing.  The atmosphere of a permit space which may contain a hazardous atmosphere should be tested for residues of all contaminants identified by evaluation testing using permit specified equipment to determine that residual concentrations at the time of testing and entry are within the range of acceptable entry conditions. Results of testing (i.e., actual concentration, etc.) should be recorded on the permit in the space provided adjacent to the stipulated acceptable entry condition.\n \n (3)  Duration of testing.  Measurement of values for each atmospheric parameter should be made for at least the minimum response time of the test instrument specified by the manufacturer.\n \n (4)  Testing stratified atmospheres.  When monitoring for entries involving a descent into atmospheres that may be stratified, the atmospheric envelope should be tested a distance of approximately 4 feet (1.22 m) in the direction of travel and to each side. If a sampling probe is used, the entrant's rate of progress should be slowed to accommodate the sampling speed and detector response.\n \n (5)  Order of testing.  A test for oxygen is performed first because most combustible gas meters are oxygen dependent and will not provide reliable readings in an oxygen deficient atmosphere. Combustible gasses are tested for next because the threat of fire or explosion is both more immediate and more life threatening, in most cases, than exposure to toxic gasses and vapors. If tests for toxic gasses and vapors are necessary, they are performed last.\n\nAtmospheric testing is required for two distinct purposes: evaluation of the hazards of the permit space and verification that acceptable entry conditions for entry into that space exist.\n\n(1)  Evaluation testing.  The atmosphere of a confined space should be analyzed using equipment of sufficient sensitivity and specificity to identify and evaluate any hazardous atmospheres that may exist or arise, so that appropriate permit entry procedures can be developed and acceptable entry conditions stipulated for that space. Evaluation and interpretation of these data, and development of the entry procedure, should be done by, or reviewed by, a technically qualified professional (e.g., OSHA consultation service, or certified industrial hygienist, registered safety engineer, certified safety professional, certified marine chemist, etc.) based on evaluation of all serious hazards.\n\n(2)  Verification testing.  The atmosphere of a permit space which may contain a hazardous atmosphere should be tested for residues of all contaminants identified by evaluation testing using permit specified equipment to determine that residual concentrations at the time of testing and entry are within the range of acceptable entry conditions. Results of testing (i.e., actual concentration, etc.) should be recorded on the permit in the space provided adjacent to the stipulated acceptable entry condition.\n\n(3)  Duration of testing.  Measurement of values for each atmospheric parameter should be made for at least the minimum response time of the test instrument specified by the manufacturer.\n\n(4)  Testing stratified atmospheres.  When monitoring for entries involving a descent into atmospheres that may be stratified, the atmospheric envelope should be tested a distance of approximately 4 feet (1.22 m) in the direction of travel and to each side. If a sampling probe is used, the entrant's rate of progress should be slowed to accommodate the sampling speed and detector response.\n\n(5)  Order of testing.  A test for oxygen is performed first because most combustible gas meters are oxygen dependent and will not provide reliable readings in an oxygen deficient atmosphere. Combustible gasses are tested for next because the threat of fire or explosion is both more immediate and more life threatening, in most cases, than exposure to toxic gasses and vapors. If tests for toxic gasses and vapors are necessary, they are performed last.\n\nAppendix C to \u00a7 1910.146\u2014Examples of Permit-required Confined Space Programs\n \n Example 1.\n \n Workplace.  Sewer entry.\n \n Potential hazards.  The employees could be exposed to the following:\n \n Engulfment. \n \n Presence of toxic gases.  Equal to or more than 10 ppm hydrogen sulfide measured as an 8-hour time-weighted average. If the presence of other toxic contaminants is suspected, specific monitoring programs will be developed.\n \n Presence of explosive/flammable gases.  Equal to or greater than 10% of the lower flammable limit (LFL).\n \n Oxygen Deficiency.  A concentration of oxygen in the atmosphere equal to or less than 19.5% by volume.\n \n A.  Entry Without Permit/Attendant \n \n Certification.  Confined spaces may be entered without the need for a written permit or attendant provided that the space can be maintained in a safe condition for entry by mechanical ventilation alone, as provided in \u00a7 1910.146(c)(5). All spaces shall be considered permit-required confined spaces until the pre-entry procedures demonstrate otherwise. Any employee required or permitted to pre-check or enter an enclosed/confined space shall have successfully completed, -as a minimum, the training as required by the following sections of these procedures.  A written copy of operating and rescue procedures as required by these procedures shall be at the work site for the duration of the job.  The Confined Space Pre-Entry Check List must be completed by the LEAD WORKER before entry into a confined space. This list verifies completion of items listed below. This check list shall be kept at the job site for duration of the job. If circumstances dictate an interruption in the work, the permit space must be re-evaluated and a new check list must be completed.\n \n Control of atmospheric and engulfment hazards. \n \n Pumps and Lines.  All pumps and lines which may reasonably cause contaminants to flow into the space shall be disconnected, blinded and locked out, or effectively isolated by other means to prevent development of dangerous air contamination or engulfment. Not all laterals to sewers or storm drains require blocking. However, where experience or knowledge of industrial use indicates there is a reasonable potential for contamination of air or engulfment into an occupied sewer, then all affected laterals shall be blocked. If blocking and/or isolation requires entry into the space the provisions for entry into a permit- required confined space must be implemented.\n \n Surveillance.  The surrounding area shall be surveyed to avoid hazards such as drifting vapors from the tanks, piping, or sewers.\n \n Testing.  The atmosphere within the space will be tested to determine whether dangerous air contamination and/or oxygen deficiency exists. Detector tubes, alarm only gas monitors and explosion meters are examples of monitoring equipment that may be used to test permit space atmospheres. Testing shall be performed by the LEAD WORKER who has successfully completed the Gas Detector training for the monitor he will use. The minimum parameters to be monitored are oxygen deficiency, LFL, and hydrogen sulfide concentration. A written record of the pre-entry test results shall be made and kept at the work site for the duration of the job. The supervisor will certify in writing, based upon the results of the pre-entry testing, that all hazards have been eliminated. Affected employees shall be able to review the testing results. The most hazardous conditions shall govern when work is being performed in two adjoining, connecting spaces.\n \n Entry Procedures.  If there are no non-atmospheric hazards present and if the pre-entry tests show there is no dangerous air contamination and/or oxygen deficiency within the space and there is no reason to believe that any is likely to develop, entry into and work within may proceed. Continuous testing of the atmosphere in the immediate vicinity of the workers within the space shall be accomplished. The workers will immediately leave the permit space when any of the gas monitor alarm set points are reached as defined. Workers will not return to the area until a SUPERVISOR who has completed the gas detector training has used a direct reading gas detector to evaluate the situation and has determined that it is safe to enter.\n \n Rescue.  Arrangements for rescue services are not required where there is no attendant. See the rescue portion of section B., below, for instructions regarding rescue planning where an entry permit is required.\n \n B.  Entry Permit Required \n \n Permits.  Confined Space Entry Permit. All spaces shall be considered permit-required confined spaces until the pre-entry procedures demonstrate otherwise. Any employee required or permitted to pre-check or enter a permit-required confined space shall have successfully completed, as a minimum, the training as required by the following sections of these procedures.  A written copy of operating and rescue procedures as required by these procedures shall be at the work site for the duration of the job.  The Confined Space Entry Permit must be completed before approval can be given to enter a permit-required confined space. This permit verifies completion of items listed below. This permit shall be kept at the job site for the duration of the job. If circumstances cause an interruption in the work or a change in the alarm conditions for which entry was approved, a new Confined Space Entry Permit must be completed.\n \n Control of atmospheric and engulfment hazards. \n \n Surveillance.  The surrounding area shall be surveyed to avoid hazards such as drifting vapors from tanks, piping or sewers.\n \n Testing.  The confined space atmosphere shall be tested to determine whether dangerous air contamination and/or oxygen deficiency exists. A direct reading gas monitor shall be used. Testing shall be performed by the SUPERVISOR who has successfully completed the gas detector training for the monitor he will use. The minimum parameters to be monitored are oxygen deficiency, LFL and hydrogen sulfide concentration. A written record of the pre- entry test results shall be made and kept at the work site for the duration of the job. Affected employees shall be able to review the testing results. The most hazardous conditions shall govern when work is being performed in two adjoining, connected spaces.\n \n Space Ventilation.  Mechanical ventilation systems, where applicable, shall be set at 100% outside air. Where possible, open additional manholes to increase air circulation. Use portable blowers to augment natural circulation if needed. After a suitable ventilating period, repeat the testing. Entry may not begin until testing has demonstrated that the hazardous atmosphere has been eliminated.\n \n Entry Procedures.  The following procedure shall be observed under any of the following conditions: 1.) Testing demonstrates the existence of dangerous or deficient conditions and additional ventilation cannot reduce concentrations to safe levels; 2.) The atmosphere tests as safe but unsafe conditions can reasonably be expected to develop; 3.) It is not feasible to provide for ready exit from spaces equipped with automatic fire suppression systems and it is not practical or safe to deactivate such systems; or 4.) An emergency exists and it is not feasible to wait for pre-entry procedures to take effect.\n \n All personnel must be trained. A self contained breathing apparatus shall be worn by any person entering the space. At least one worker shall stand by the outside of the space ready to give assistance in case of emergency. The standby worker shall have a self contained breathing apparatus available for immediate use. There shall be at least one additional worker within sight or call of the standby worker. Continuous powered communications shall be maintained between the worker within the confined space and standby personnel.\n \n If at any time there is any questionable action or non- movement by the worker inside, a verbal check will be made. If there is no response, the worker will be moved immediately.  Exception:  If the worker is disabled due to falling or impact, he/she shall not be removed from the confined space unless there is immediate danger to his/her life. Local fire department rescue personnel shall be notified immediately. The standby worker may only enter the confined space in case of an emergency (wearing the self contained breathing apparatus) and only after being relieved by another worker. Safety belt or harness with attached lifeline shall be used by all workers entering the space with the free end of the line secured outside the entry opening. The standby worker shall attempt to remove a disabled worker via his lifeline before entering the space.\n \n When practical, these spaces shall be entered through side openings\u2014those within 3\n 1/2  feet (1.07 m) of the bottom. When entry must be through a top opening, the safety belt shall be of the harness type that suspends a person upright and a hoisting device or similar apparatus shall be available for lifting workers out of the space.\n \n In any situation where their use may endanger the worker, use of a hoisting device or safety belt and attached lifeline may be discontinued.\n \n When dangerous air contamination is attributable to flammable and/or explosive substances, lighting and electrical equipment shall be Class 1, Division 1 rated per National Electrical Code and no ignition sources shall be introduced into the area.\n \n Continuous gas monitoring shall be performed during all confined space operations. If alarm conditions change adversely, entry personnel shall exit the confined space and a new confined space permit issued.\n \n Rescue.  Call the fire department services for rescue. Where immediate hazards to injured personnel are present, workers at the site shall implement emergency procedures to fit the situation.\n \n Example 2.\n \n Workplace.  Meat and poultry rendering plants.\n \n Cookers and dryers are either batch or continuous in their operation. Multiple batch cookers are operated in parallel. When one unit of a multiple set is shut down for repairs, means are available to isolate that unit from the others which remain in operation.\n \n Cookers and dryers are horizontal, cylindrical vessels equipped with a center, rotating shaft and agitator paddles or discs. If the inner shell is jacketed, it is usually heated with steam at pressures up to 150 psig (1034.25 kPa). The rotating shaft assembly of the continuous cooker or dryer is also steam heated.\n \n Potential Hazards.  The recognized hazards associated with cookers and dryers are the risk that employees could be:\n \n 1. Struck or caught by rotating agitator;\n \n 2. Engulfed in raw material or hot, recycled fat;\n \n 3. Burned by steam from leaks into the cooker/dryer steam jacket or the condenser duct system if steam valves are not properly closed and locked out;\n \n 4. Burned by contact with hot metal surfaces, such as the agitator shaft assembly, or inner shell of the cooker/dryer;\n \n 5. Heat stress caused by warm atmosphere inside cooker/dryer;\n \n 6. Slipping and falling on grease in the cooker/dryer;\n \n 7. Electrically shocked by faulty equipment taken into the cooker/dryer;\n \n 8. Burned or overcome by fire or products of combustion; or\n \n 9. Overcome by fumes generated by welding or cutting done on grease covered surfaces.\n \n Permits.  The supervisor in this case is always present at the cooker/dryer or other permit entry confined space when entry is made. The supervisor must follow the pre-entry isolation procedures described in the entry permit in preparing for entry, and ensure that the protective clothing, ventilating equipment and any other equipment required by the permit are at the entry site.\n \n Control of hazards.  Mechanical. Lock out main power switch to agitator motor at main power panel. Affix tag to the lock to inform others that a permit entry confined space entry is in progress.\n \n Engulfment.  Close all valves in the raw material blow line. Secure each valve in its closed position using chain and lock. Attach a tag to the valve and chain warning that a permit entry confined space entry is in progress. The same procedure shall be used for securing the fat recycle valve.\n \n Burns and heat stress.  Close steam supply valves to jacket and secure with chains and tags. Insert solid blank at flange in cooker vent line to condenser manifold duct system. Vent cooker/dryer by opening access door at discharge end and top center door to allow natural ventilation throughout the entry. If faster cooling is needed, use a portable ventilation fan to increase ventilation. Cooling water may be circulated through the jacket to reduce both outer and inner surface temperatures of cooker/dryers faster. Check air and inner surface temperatures in cooker/dryer to assure they are within acceptable limits before entering, or use proper protective clothing.\n \n Fire and fume hazards.  Careful site preparation, such as cleaning the area within 4 inches (10.16 cm) of all welding or torch cutting operations, and proper ventilation are the preferred controls. All welding and cutting operations shall be done in accordance with the requirements of 29 CFR part 1910, subpart Q, OSHA's welding standard. Proper ventilation may be achieved by local exhaust ventilation, or the use of portable ventilation fans, or a combination of the two practices.\n \n Electrical shock.  Electrical equipment used in cooker/dryers shall be in serviceable condition.\n \n Slips and falls.  Remove residual grease before entering cooker/dryer.\n \n Attendant.  The supervisor shall be the attendant for employees entering cooker/dryers.\n \n Permit.  The permit shall specify how isolation shall be done and any other preparations needed before making entry. This is especially important in parallel arrangements of cooker/dryers so that the entire operation need not be shut down to allow safe entry into one unit.\n \n Rescue.  When necessary, the attendant shall call the fire department as previously arranged.\n \n Example 3.\n \n Workplace.  Workplaces where tank cars, trucks, and trailers, dry bulk tanks and trailers, railroad tank cars, and similar portable tanks are fabricated or serviced.\n \n A.  During fabrication.  These tanks and dry-bulk carriers are entered repeatedly throughout the fabrication process. These products are not configured identically, but the manufacturing processes by which they are made are very similar.\n \n Sources of hazards.  In addition to the mechanical hazards arising from the risks that an entrant would be injured due to contact with components of the tank or the tools being used, there is also the risk that a worker could be injured by breathing fumes from welding materials or mists or vapors from materials used to coat the tank interior. In addition, many of these vapors and mists are flammable, so the failure to properly ventilate a tank could lead to a fire or explosion.\n \n Control of hazards. \n \n Welding.  Local exhaust ventilation shall be used to remove welding fumes once the tank or carrier is completed to the point that workers may enter and exit only through a manhole. (Follow the requirements of 29 CFR 1910, subpart Q, OSHA's welding standard, at all times.) Welding gas tanks may never be brought into a tank or carrier that is a permit entry confined space.\n \n Application of interior coatings/linings.  Atmospheric hazards shall be controlled by forced air ventilation sufficient to keep the atmospheric concentration of flammable materials below 10% of the lower flammable limit (LFL) (or lower explosive limit (LEL), whichever term is used locally). The appropriate respirators are provided and shall be used in addition to providing forced ventilation if the forced ventilation does not maintain acceptable respiratory conditions.\n \n Permits.  Because of the repetitive nature of the entries in these operations, an \u201cArea Entry Permit\u201d will be issued for a 1 month period to cover those production areas where tanks are fabricated to the point that entry and exit are made using manholes.\n \n Authorization.  Only the area supervisor may authorize an employee to enter a tank within the permit area. The area supervisor must determine that conditions in the tank trailer, dry bulk trailer or truck, etc. meet permit requirements before authorizing entry.\n \n Attendant.  The area supervisor shall designate an employee to maintain communication by employer specified means with employees working in tanks to ensure their safety. The attendant may not enter any permit entry confined space to rescue an entrant or for any other reason, unless authorized by the rescue procedure and, and even then, only after calling the rescue team and being relieved by as attendant by another worker.\n \n Communications and observation.  Communications between attendant and entrant(s) shall be maintained throughout entry. Methods of communication that may be specified by the permit include voice, voice powered radio, tapping or rapping codes on tank walls, signalling tugs on a rope, and the attendant's observation that work activities such as chipping, grinding, welding, spraying, etc., which require deliberate operator control continue normally. These activities often generate so much noise that the necessary hearing protection makes communication by voice difficult.\n \n Rescue procedures.  Acceptable rescue procedures include entry by a team of employee-rescuers, use of public emergency services, and procedures for breaching the tank. The area permit specifies which procedures are available, but the area supervisor makes the final decision based on circumstances. (Certain injuries may make it necessary to breach the tank to remove a person rather than risk additional injury by removal through an existing manhole. However, the supervisor must ensure that no breaching procedure used for rescue would violate terms of the entry permit. For instance, if the tank must be breached by cutting with a torch, the tank surfaces to be cut must be free of volatile or combustible coatings within 4 inches (10.16 cm) of the cutting line and the atmosphere within the tank must be below the LFL.\n \n Retrieval line and harnesses.  The retrieval lines and harnesses generally required under this standard are usually impractical for use in tanks because the internal configuration of the tanks and their interior baffles and other structures would prevent rescuers from hauling out injured entrants. However, unless the rescue procedure calls for breaching the tank for rescue, the rescue team shall be trained in the use of retrieval lines and harnesses for removing injured employees through manholes.\n \n B.  Repair or service of \u201cused\u201d tanks and bulk trailers. \n \n Sources of hazards.  In addition to facing the potential hazards encountered in fabrication or manufacturing, tanks or trailers which have been in service may contain residues of dangerous materials, whether left over from the transportation of hazardous cargoes or generated by chemical or bacterial action on residues of non-hazardous cargoes.\n \n Control of atmospheric hazards.  A \u201cused\u201d tank shall be brought into areas where tank entry is authorized only after the tank has been emptied, cleansed (without employee entry) of any residues, and purged of any potential atmospheric hazards.\n \n Welding.  In addition to tank cleaning for control of atmospheric hazards, coating and surface materials shall be removed 4 inches (10.16 cm) or more from any surface area where welding or other torch work will be done and care taken that the atmosphere within the tank remains well below the LFL. (Follow the requirements of 29 CFR 1910, subpart Q, OSHA's welding standard, at all times.)\n \n Permits.  An entry permit valid for up to 1 year shall be issued prior to authorization of entry into used tank trailers, dry bulk trailers or trucks. In addition to the pre-entry cleaning requirement, this permit shall require the employee safeguards specified for new tank fabrication or construction permit areas.\n \n Authorization.  Only the area supervisor may authorize an employee to enter a tank trailer, dry bulk trailer or truck within the permit area. The area supervisor must determine that the entry permit requirements have been met before authorizing entry.\n\nWorkplace.  Sewer entry.\n\nPotential hazards.  The employees could be exposed to the following:\n\nEngulfment.\n\nPresence of toxic gases.  Equal to or more than 10 ppm hydrogen sulfide measured as an 8-hour time-weighted average. If the presence of other toxic contaminants is suspected, specific monitoring programs will be developed.\n\nPresence of explosive/flammable gases.  Equal to or greater than 10% of the lower flammable limit (LFL).\n\nOxygen Deficiency.  A concentration of oxygen in the atmosphere equal to or less than 19.5% by volume.\n\nA.  Entry Without Permit/Attendant\n\nCertification.  Confined spaces may be entered without the need for a written permit or attendant provided that the space can be maintained in a safe condition for entry by mechanical ventilation alone, as provided in \u00a7 1910.146(c)(5). All spaces shall be considered permit-required confined spaces until the pre-entry procedures demonstrate otherwise. Any employee required or permitted to pre-check or enter an enclosed/confined space shall have successfully completed, -as a minimum, the training as required by the following sections of these procedures.  A written copy of operating and rescue procedures as required by these procedures shall be at the work site for the duration of the job.  The Confined Space Pre-Entry Check List must be completed by the LEAD WORKER before entry into a confined space. This list verifies completion of items listed below. This check list shall be kept at the job site for duration of the job. If circumstances dictate an interruption in the work, the permit space must be re-evaluated and a new check list must be completed.\n\nControl of atmospheric and engulfment hazards.\n\nPumps and Lines.  All pumps and lines which may reasonably cause contaminants to flow into the space shall be disconnected, blinded and locked out, or effectively isolated by other means to prevent development of dangerous air contamination or engulfment. Not all laterals to sewers or storm drains require blocking. However, where experience or knowledge of industrial use indicates there is a reasonable potential for contamination of air or engulfment into an occupied sewer, then all affected laterals shall be blocked. If blocking and/or isolation requires entry into the space the provisions for entry into a permit- required confined space must be implemented.\n\nSurveillance.  The surrounding area shall be surveyed to avoid hazards such as drifting vapors from the tanks, piping, or sewers.\n\nTesting.  The atmosphere within the space will be tested to determine whether dangerous air contamination and/or oxygen deficiency exists. Detector tubes, alarm only gas monitors and explosion meters are examples of monitoring equipment that may be used to test permit space atmospheres. Testing shall be performed by the LEAD WORKER who has successfully completed the Gas Detector training for the monitor he will use. The minimum parameters to be monitored are oxygen deficiency, LFL, and hydrogen sulfide concentration. A written record of the pre-entry test results shall be made and kept at the work site for the duration of the job. The supervisor will certify in writing, based upon the results of the pre-entry testing, that all hazards have been eliminated. Affected employees shall be able to review the testing results. The most hazardous conditions shall govern when work is being performed in two adjoining, connecting spaces.\n\nEntry Procedures.  If there are no non-atmospheric hazards present and if the pre-entry tests show there is no dangerous air contamination and/or oxygen deficiency within the space and there is no reason to believe that any is likely to develop, entry into and work within may proceed. Continuous testing of the atmosphere in the immediate vicinity of the workers within the space shall be accomplished. The workers will immediately leave the permit space when any of the gas monitor alarm set points are reached as defined. Workers will not return to the area until a SUPERVISOR who has completed the gas detector training has used a direct reading gas detector to evaluate the situation and has determined that it is safe to enter.\n\nRescue.  Arrangements for rescue services are not required where there is no attendant. See the rescue portion of section B., below, for instructions regarding rescue planning where an entry permit is required.\n\nB.  Entry Permit Required\n\nPermits.  Confined Space Entry Permit. All spaces shall be considered permit-required confined spaces until the pre-entry procedures demonstrate otherwise. Any employee required or permitted to pre-check or enter a permit-required confined space shall have successfully completed, as a minimum, the training as required by the following sections of these procedures.  A written copy of operating and rescue procedures as required by these procedures shall be at the work site for the duration of the job.  The Confined Space Entry Permit must be completed before approval can be given to enter a permit-required confined space. This permit verifies completion of items listed below. This permit shall be kept at the job site for the duration of the job. If circumstances cause an interruption in the work or a change in the alarm conditions for which entry was approved, a new Confined Space Entry Permit must be completed.\n\nControl of atmospheric and engulfment hazards.\n\nSurveillance.  The surrounding area shall be surveyed to avoid hazards such as drifting vapors from tanks, piping or sewers.\n\nTesting.  The confined space atmosphere shall be tested to determine whether dangerous air contamination and/or oxygen deficiency exists. A direct reading gas monitor shall be used. Testing shall be performed by the SUPERVISOR who has successfully completed the gas detector training for the monitor he will use. The minimum parameters to be monitored are oxygen deficiency, LFL and hydrogen sulfide concentration. A written record of the pre- entry test results shall be made and kept at the work site for the duration of the job. Affected employees shall be able to review the testing results. The most hazardous conditions shall govern when work is being performed in two adjoining, connected spaces.\n\nSpace Ventilation.  Mechanical ventilation systems, where applicable, shall be set at 100% outside air. Where possible, open additional manholes to increase air circulation. Use portable blowers to augment natural circulation if needed. After a suitable ventilating period, repeat the testing. Entry may not begin until testing has demonstrated that the hazardous atmosphere has been eliminated.\n\nEntry Procedures.  The following procedure shall be observed under any of the following conditions: 1.) Testing demonstrates the existence of dangerous or deficient conditions and additional ventilation cannot reduce concentrations to safe levels; 2.) The atmosphere tests as safe but unsafe conditions can reasonably be expected to develop; 3.) It is not feasible to provide for ready exit from spaces equipped with automatic fire suppression systems and it is not practical or safe to deactivate such systems; or 4.) An emergency exists and it is not feasible to wait for pre-entry procedures to take effect.\n\nAll personnel must be trained. A self contained breathing apparatus shall be worn by any person entering the space. At least one worker shall stand by the outside of the space ready to give assistance in case of emergency. The standby worker shall have a self contained breathing apparatus available for immediate use. There shall be at least one additional worker within sight or call of the standby worker. Continuous powered communications shall be maintained between the worker within the confined space and standby personnel.\n\nIf at any time there is any questionable action or non- movement by the worker inside, a verbal check will be made. If there is no response, the worker will be moved immediately.  Exception:  If the worker is disabled due to falling or impact, he/she shall not be removed from the confined space unless there is immediate danger to his/her life. Local fire department rescue personnel shall be notified immediately. The standby worker may only enter the confined space in case of an emergency (wearing the self contained breathing apparatus) and only after being relieved by another worker. Safety belt or harness with attached lifeline shall be used by all workers entering the space with the free end of the line secured outside the entry opening. The standby worker shall attempt to remove a disabled worker via his lifeline before entering the space.\n\nWhen practical, these spaces shall be entered through side openings\u2014those within 3\n 1/2  feet (1.07 m) of the bottom. When entry must be through a top opening, the safety belt shall be of the harness type that suspends a person upright and a hoisting device or similar apparatus shall be available for lifting workers out of the space.\n\nIn any situation where their use may endanger the worker, use of a hoisting device or safety belt and attached lifeline may be discontinued.\n\nWhen dangerous air contamination is attributable to flammable and/or explosive substances, lighting and electrical equipment shall be Class 1, Division 1 rated per National Electrical Code and no ignition sources shall be introduced into the area.\n\nContinuous gas monitoring shall be performed during all confined space operations. If alarm conditions change adversely, entry personnel shall exit the confined space and a new confined space permit issued.\n\nRescue.  Call the fire department services for rescue. Where immediate hazards to injured personnel are present, workers at the site shall implement emergency procedures to fit the situation.\n\nWorkplace.  Meat and poultry rendering plants.\n\nCookers and dryers are either batch or continuous in their operation. Multiple batch cookers are operated in parallel. When one unit of a multiple set is shut down for repairs, means are available to isolate that unit from the others which remain in operation.\n\nCookers and dryers are horizontal, cylindrical vessels equipped with a center, rotating shaft and agitator paddles or discs. If the inner shell is jacketed, it is usually heated with steam at pressures up to 150 psig (1034.25 kPa). The rotating shaft assembly of the continuous cooker or dryer is also steam heated.\n\nPotential Hazards.  The recognized hazards associated with cookers and dryers are the risk that employees could be:\n\n1. Struck or caught by rotating agitator;\n\n2. Engulfed in raw material or hot, recycled fat;\n\n3. Burned by steam from leaks into the cooker/dryer steam jacket or the condenser duct system if steam valves are not properly closed and locked out;\n\n4. Burned by contact with hot metal surfaces, such as the agitator shaft assembly, or inner shell of the cooker/dryer;\n\n5. Heat stress caused by warm atmosphere inside cooker/dryer;\n\n6. Slipping and falling on grease in the cooker/dryer;\n\n7. Electrically shocked by faulty equipment taken into the cooker/dryer;\n\n8. Burned or overcome by fire or products of combustion; or\n\n9. Overcome by fumes generated by welding or cutting done on grease covered surfaces.\n\nPermits.  The supervisor in this case is always present at the cooker/dryer or other permit entry confined space when entry is made. The supervisor must follow the pre-entry isolation procedures described in the entry permit in preparing for entry, and ensure that the protective clothing, ventilating equipment and any other equipment required by the permit are at the entry site.\n\nControl of hazards.  Mechanical. Lock out main power switch to agitator motor at main power panel. Affix tag to the lock to inform others that a permit entry confined space entry is in progress.\n\nEngulfment.  Close all valves in the raw material blow line. Secure each valve in its closed position using chain and lock. Attach a tag to the valve and chain warning that a permit entry confined space entry is in progress. The same procedure shall be used for securing the fat recycle valve.\n\nBurns and heat stress.  Close steam supply valves to jacket and secure with chains and tags. Insert solid blank at flange in cooker vent line to condenser manifold duct system. Vent cooker/dryer by opening access door at discharge end and top center door to allow natural ventilation throughout the entry. If faster cooling is needed, use a portable ventilation fan to increase ventilation. Cooling water may be circulated through the jacket to reduce both outer and inner surface temperatures of cooker/dryers faster. Check air and inner surface temperatures in cooker/dryer to assure they are within acceptable limits before entering, or use proper protective clothing.\n\nFire and fume hazards.  Careful site preparation, such as cleaning the area within 4 inches (10.16 cm) of all welding or torch cutting operations, and proper ventilation are the preferred controls. All welding and cutting operations shall be done in accordance with the requirements of 29 CFR part 1910, subpart Q, OSHA's welding standard. Proper ventilation may be achieved by local exhaust ventilation, or the use of portable ventilation fans, or a combination of the two practices.\n\nElectrical shock.  Electrical equipment used in cooker/dryers shall be in serviceable condition.\n\nSlips and falls.  Remove residual grease before entering cooker/dryer.\n\nAttendant.  The supervisor shall be the attendant for employees entering cooker/dryers.\n\nPermit.  The permit shall specify how isolation shall be done and any other preparations needed before making entry. This is especially important in parallel arrangements of cooker/dryers so that the entire operation need not be shut down to allow safe entry into one unit.\n\nRescue.  When necessary, the attendant shall call the fire department as previously arranged.\n\nWorkplace.  Workplaces where tank cars, trucks, and trailers, dry bulk tanks and trailers, railroad tank cars, and similar portable tanks are fabricated or serviced.\n\nA.  During fabrication.  These tanks and dry-bulk carriers are entered repeatedly throughout the fabrication process. These products are not configured identically, but the manufacturing processes by which they are made are very similar.\n\nSources of hazards.  In addition to the mechanical hazards arising from the risks that an entrant would be injured due to contact with components of the tank or the tools being used, there is also the risk that a worker could be injured by breathing fumes from welding materials or mists or vapors from materials used to coat the tank interior. In addition, many of these vapors and mists are flammable, so the failure to properly ventilate a tank could lead to a fire or explosion.\n\nControl of hazards.\n\nWelding.  Local exhaust ventilation shall be used to remove welding fumes once the tank or carrier is completed to the point that workers may enter and exit only through a manhole. (Follow the requirements of 29 CFR 1910, subpart Q, OSHA's welding standard, at all times.) Welding gas tanks may never be brought into a tank or carrier that is a permit entry confined space.\n\nApplication of interior coatings/linings.  Atmospheric hazards shall be controlled by forced air ventilation sufficient to keep the atmospheric concentration of flammable materials below 10% of the lower flammable limit (LFL) (or lower explosive limit (LEL), whichever term is used locally). The appropriate respirators are provided and shall be used in addition to providing forced ventilation if the forced ventilation does not maintain acceptable respiratory conditions.\n\nPermits.  Because of the repetitive nature of the entries in these operations, an \u201cArea Entry Permit\u201d will be issued for a 1 month period to cover those production areas where tanks are fabricated to the point that entry and exit are made using manholes.\n\nAuthorization.  Only the area supervisor may authorize an employee to enter a tank within the permit area. The area supervisor must determine that conditions in the tank trailer, dry bulk trailer or truck, etc. meet permit requirements before authorizing entry.\n\nAttendant.  The area supervisor shall designate an employee to maintain communication by employer specified means with employees working in tanks to ensure their safety. The attendant may not enter any permit entry confined space to rescue an entrant or for any other reason, unless authorized by the rescue procedure and, and even then, only after calling the rescue team and being relieved by as attendant by another worker.\n\nCommunications and observation.  Communications between attendant and entrant(s) shall be maintained throughout entry. Methods of communication that may be specified by the permit include voice, voice powered radio, tapping or rapping codes on tank walls, signalling tugs on a rope, and the attendant's observation that work activities such as chipping, grinding, welding, spraying, etc., which require deliberate operator control continue normally. These activities often generate so much noise that the necessary hearing protection makes communication by voice difficult.\n\nRescue procedures.  Acceptable rescue procedures include entry by a team of employee-rescuers, use of public emergency services, and procedures for breaching the tank. The area permit specifies which procedures are available, but the area supervisor makes the final decision based on circumstances. (Certain injuries may make it necessary to breach the tank to remove a person rather than risk additional injury by removal through an existing manhole. However, the supervisor must ensure that no breaching procedure used for rescue would violate terms of the entry permit. For instance, if the tank must be breached by cutting with a torch, the tank surfaces to be cut must be free of volatile or combustible coatings within 4 inches (10.16 cm) of the cutting line and the atmosphere within the tank must be below the LFL.\n\nRetrieval line and harnesses.  The retrieval lines and harnesses generally required under this standard are usually impractical for use in tanks because the internal configuration of the tanks and their interior baffles and other structures would prevent rescuers from hauling out injured entrants. However, unless the rescue procedure calls for breaching the tank for rescue, the rescue team shall be trained in the use of retrieval lines and harnesses for removing injured employees through manholes.\n\nB.  Repair or service of \u201cused\u201d tanks and bulk trailers.\n\nSources of hazards.  In addition to facing the potential hazards encountered in fabrication or manufacturing, tanks or trailers which have been in service may contain residues of dangerous materials, whether left over from the transportation of hazardous cargoes or generated by chemical or bacterial action on residues of non-hazardous cargoes.\n\nControl of atmospheric hazards.  A \u201cused\u201d tank shall be brought into areas where tank entry is authorized only after the tank has been emptied, cleansed (without employee entry) of any residues, and purged of any potential atmospheric hazards.\n\nWelding.  In addition to tank cleaning for control of atmospheric hazards, coating and surface materials shall be removed 4 inches (10.16 cm) or more from any surface area where welding or other torch work will be done and care taken that the atmosphere within the tank remains well below the LFL. (Follow the requirements of 29 CFR 1910, subpart Q, OSHA's welding standard, at all times.)\n\nPermits.  An entry permit valid for up to 1 year shall be issued prior to authorization of entry into used tank trailers, dry bulk trailers or trucks. In addition to the pre-entry cleaning requirement, this permit shall require the employee safeguards specified for new tank fabrication or construction permit areas.\n\nAuthorization.  Only the area supervisor may authorize an employee to enter a tank trailer, dry bulk trailer or truck within the permit area. The area supervisor must determine that the entry permit requirements have been met before authorizing entry.\n\nAppendix E to \u00a7 1910.146\u2014Sewer System Entry\n \n Sewer entry differs in three vital respects from other permit entries; first, there rarely exists any way to completely isolate the space (a section of a continuous system) to be entered; second, because isolation is not complete, the atmosphere may suddenly and unpredictably become lethally hazardous (toxic, flammable or explosive) from causes beyond the control of the entrant or employer, and third, experienced sewer workers are especially knowledgeable in entry and work in their permit spaces because of their frequent entries. Unlike other employments where permit space entry is a rare and exceptional event, sewer workers' usual work environment is a permit space.\n \n (1)  Adherence to procedure.  The employer should designate as entrants only employees who are thoroughly trained in the employer's sewer entry procedures and who demonstrate that they follow these entry procedures exactly as prescribed when performing sewer entries.\n \n (2)  Atmospheric monitoring.  Entrants should be trained in the use of, and be equipped with, atmospheric monitoring equipment which sounds an audible alarm, in addition to its visual readout, whenever one of the following conditions are encountered: Oxygen concentration less than 19.5 percent; flammable gas or vapor at 10 percent or more of the lower flammable limit (LFL); or hydrogen sulfide or carbon monoxide at or above 10 ppm or 35 ppm, respectively, measured as an 8-hour time-weighted average. Atmospheric monitoring equipment needs to be calibrated according to the manufacturer's instructions. The oxygen sensor/broad range sensor is best suited for initial use in situations where the actual or potential contaminants have not been identified, because broad range sensors, unlike substance-specific sensors, enable employers to obtain an overall reading of the hydrocarbons (flammables) present in the space. However, such sensors only indicate that a hazardous threshold of a class of chemicals has been exceeded. They do not measure the levels of contamination of specific substances. Therefore, substance-specific devices, which measure the actual levels of specific substances, are best suited for use where actual and potential contaminants have been identified. The measurements obtained with substance-specific devices are of vital importance to the employer when decisions are made concerning the measures necessary to protect entrants (such as ventilation or personal protective equipment) and the setting and attainment of appropriate entry conditions. However, the sewer environment may suddenly and unpredictably change, and the substance-specific devices may not detect the potentially lethal atmospheric hazards which may enter the sewer environment.\n \n Although OSHA considers the information and guidance provided above to be appropriate and useful in most sewer entry situations, the Agency emphasizes that each employer must consider the unique circumstances, including the predictability of the atmosphere, of the sewer permit spaces in the employer's workplace in preparing for entry. Only the employer can decide, based upon his or her knowledge of, and experience with permit spaces in sewer systems, what the best type of testing instrument may be for any specific entry operation.\n \n The selected testing instrument should be carried and used by the entrant in sewer line work to monitor the atmosphere in the entrant's environment, and in advance of the entrant's direction of movement, to warn the entrant of any deterioration in atmospheric conditions. Where several entrants are working together in the same immediate location, one instrument, used by the lead entrant, is acceptable.\n \n (3)  Surge flow and flooding.  Sewer crews should develop and maintain liaison, to the extent possible, with the local weather bureau and fire and emergency services in their area so that sewer work may be delayed or interrupted and entrants withdrawn whenever sewer lines might be suddenly flooded by rain or fire suppression activities, or whenever flammable or other hazardous materials are released into sewers during emergencies by industrial or transportation accidents.\n \n (4)  Special Equipment.  Entry into large bore sewers may require the use of special equipment. Such equipment might include such items as atmosphere monitoring devices with automatic audible alarms, escape self-contained breathing apparatus (ESCBA) with at least 10 minute air supply (or other NIOSH approved self-rescuer), and waterproof flashlights, and may also include boats and rafts, radios and rope stand-offs for pulling around bends and corners as needed.\n\nSewer entry differs in three vital respects from other permit entries; first, there rarely exists any way to completely isolate the space (a section of a continuous system) to be entered; second, because isolation is not complete, the atmosphere may suddenly and unpredictably become lethally hazardous (toxic, flammable or explosive) from causes beyond the control of the entrant or employer, and third, experienced sewer workers are especially knowledgeable in entry and work in their permit spaces because of their frequent entries. Unlike other employments where permit space entry is a rare and exceptional event, sewer workers' usual work environment is a permit space.\n\n(1)  Adherence to procedure.  The employer should designate as entrants only employees who are thoroughly trained in the employer's sewer entry procedures and who demonstrate that they follow these entry procedures exactly as prescribed when performing sewer entries.\n\n(2)  Atmospheric monitoring.  Entrants should be trained in the use of, and be equipped with, atmospheric monitoring equipment which sounds an audible alarm, in addition to its visual readout, whenever one of the following conditions are encountered: Oxygen concentration less than 19.5 percent; flammable gas or vapor at 10 percent or more of the lower flammable limit (LFL); or hydrogen sulfide or carbon monoxide at or above 10 ppm or 35 ppm, respectively, measured as an 8-hour time-weighted average. Atmospheric monitoring equipment needs to be calibrated according to the manufacturer's instructions. The oxygen sensor/broad range sensor is best suited for initial use in situations where the actual or potential contaminants have not been identified, because broad range sensors, unlike substance-specific sensors, enable employers to obtain an overall reading of the hydrocarbons (flammables) present in the space. However, such sensors only indicate that a hazardous threshold of a class of chemicals has been exceeded. They do not measure the levels of contamination of specific substances. Therefore, substance-specific devices, which measure the actual levels of specific substances, are best suited for use where actual and potential contaminants have been identified. The measurements obtained with substance-specific devices are of vital importance to the employer when decisions are made concerning the measures necessary to protect entrants (such as ventilation or personal protective equipment) and the setting and attainment of appropriate entry conditions. However, the sewer environment may suddenly and unpredictably change, and the substance-specific devices may not detect the potentially lethal atmospheric hazards which may enter the sewer environment.\n\nAlthough OSHA considers the information and guidance provided above to be appropriate and useful in most sewer entry situations, the Agency emphasizes that each employer must consider the unique circumstances, including the predictability of the atmosphere, of the sewer permit spaces in the employer's workplace in preparing for entry. Only the employer can decide, based upon his or her knowledge of, and experience with permit spaces in sewer systems, what the best type of testing instrument may be for any specific entry operation.\n\nThe selected testing instrument should be carried and used by the entrant in sewer line work to monitor the atmosphere in the entrant's environment, and in advance of the entrant's direction of movement, to warn the entrant of any deterioration in atmospheric conditions. Where several entrants are working together in the same immediate location, one instrument, used by the lead entrant, is acceptable.\n\n(3)  Surge flow and flooding.  Sewer crews should develop and maintain liaison, to the extent possible, with the local weather bureau and fire and emergency services in their area so that sewer work may be delayed or interrupted and entrants withdrawn whenever sewer lines might be suddenly flooded by rain or fire suppression activities, or whenever flammable or other hazardous materials are released into sewers during emergencies by industrial or transportation accidents.\n\n(4)  Special Equipment.  Entry into large bore sewers may require the use of special equipment. Such equipment might include such items as atmosphere monitoring devices with automatic audible alarms, escape self-contained breathing apparatus (ESCBA) with at least 10 minute air supply (or other NIOSH approved self-rescuer), and waterproof flashlights, and may also include boats and rafts, radios and rope stand-offs for pulling around bends and corners as needed.\n\nAppendix F to \u00a7 1910.146\u2014Rescue Team or Rescue Service Evaluation Criteria (Non-Mandatory)\n \n (1) This appendix provides guidance to employers in choosing an appropriate rescue service. It contains criteria that may be used to evaluate the capabilities both of prospective and current rescue teams. Before a rescue team can be trained or chosen, however, a satisfactory permit program, including an analysis of all permit-required confined spaces to identify all potential hazards in those spaces, must be completed. OSHA believes that compliance with all the provisions of \u00a7 1910.146 will enable employers to conduct permit space operations without recourse to rescue services in nearly all cases. However, experience indicates that circumstances will arise where entrants will need to be rescued from permit spaces. It is therefore important for employers to select rescue services or teams, either on-site or off-site, that are equipped and capable of minimizing harm to both entrants and rescuers if the need arises.\n \n (2) For all rescue teams or services, the employer's evaluation should consist of two components: an initial evaluation, in which employers decide whether a potential rescue service or team is adequately trained and equipped to perform permit space rescues of the kind needed at the facility and whether such rescuers can respond in a timely manner, and a performance evaluation, in which employers measure the performance of the team or service during an actual or practice rescue. For example, based on the initial evaluation, an employer may determine that maintaining an on-site rescue team will be more expensive than obtaining the services of an off-site team, without being significantly more effective, and decide to hire a rescue service. During a performance evaluation, the employer could decide, after observing the rescue service perform a practice rescue, that the service's training or preparedness was not adequate to effect a timely or effective rescue at his or her facility and decide to select another rescue service, or to form an internal rescue team.\n \n A. Initial Evaluation\n \n I. The employer should meet with the prospective rescue service to facilitate the evaluations required by \u00a7 1910.146(k)(1)(i) and \u00a7 1910.146(k)(1)(ii). At a minimum, if an off-site rescue service is being considered, the employer must contact the service to plan and coordinate the evaluations required by the standard. Merely posting the service's number or planning to rely on the 911 emergency phone number to obtain these services at the time of a permit space emergency would not comply with paragraph (k)(1) of the standard.\n \n II. The capabilities required of a rescue service vary with the type of permit spaces from which rescue may be necessary and the hazards likely to be encountered in those spaces. Answering the questions below will assist employers in determining whether the rescue service is capable of performing rescues in the permit spaces present at the employer's workplace.\n \n 1. What are the needs of the employer with regard to response time (time for the rescue service to receive notification, arrive at the scene, and set up and be ready for entry)? For example, if entry is to be made into an IDLH atmosphere, or into a space that can quickly develop an IDLH atmosphere (if ventilation fails or for other reasons), the rescue team or service would need to be standing by at the permit space. On the other hand, if the danger to entrants is restricted to mechanical hazards that would cause injuries (e.g., broken bones, abrasions) a response time of 10 or 15 minutes might be adequate.\n \n 2. How quickly can the rescue team or service get from its location to the permit spaces from which rescue may be necessary? Relevant factors to consider would include: the location of the rescue team or service relative to the employer's workplace, the quality of roads and highways to be traveled, potential bottlenecks or traffic congestion that might be encountered in transit, the reliability of the rescuer's vehicles, and the training and skill of its drivers.\n \n 3. What is the availability of the rescue service? Is it unavailable at certain times of the day or in certain situations? What is the likelihood that key personnel of the rescue service might be unavailable at times? If the rescue service becomes unavailable while an entry is underway, does it have the capability of notifying the employer so that the employer can instruct the attendant to abort the entry immediately?\n \n 4. Does the rescue service meet all the requirements of paragraph (k)(2) of the standard? If not, has it developed a plan that will enable it to meet those requirements in the future? If so, how soon can the plan be implemented?\n \n 5. For off-site services, is the service willing to perform rescues at the employer's workplace? (An employer may not rely on a rescuer who declines, for whatever reason, to provide rescue services.)\n \n 6. Is an adequate method for communications between the attendant, employer and prospective rescuer available so that a rescue request can be transmitted to the rescuer without delay? How soon after notification can a prospective rescuer dispatch a rescue team to the entry site?\n \n 7. For rescues into spaces that may pose significant atmospheric hazards and from which rescue entry, patient packaging and retrieval cannot be safely accomplished in a relatively short time (15-20 minutes), employers should consider using airline respirators (with escape bottles) for the rescuers and to supply rescue air to the patient. If the employer decides to use SCBA, does the prospective rescue service have an ample supply of replacement cylinders and procedures for rescuers to enter and exit (or be retrieved) well within the SCBA's air supply limits?\n \n 8. If the space has a vertical entry over 5 feet in depth, can the prospective rescue service properly perform entry rescues? Does the service have the technical knowledge and equipment to perform rope work or elevated rescue, if needed?\n \n 9. Does the rescue service have the necessary skills in medical evaluation, patient packaging and emergency response?\n \n 10. Does the rescue service have the necessary equipment to perform rescues, or must the equipment be provided by the employer or another source?\n \n B. Performance Evaluation\n \n Rescue services are required by paragraph (k)(2)(iv) of the standard to practice rescues at least once every 12 months, provided that the team or service has not successfully performed a permit space rescue within that time. As part of each practice session, the service should perform a critique of the practice rescue, or have another qualified party perform the critique, so that deficiencies in procedures, equipment, training, or number of personnel can be identified and corrected. The results of the critique, and the corrections made to respond to the deficiencies identified, should be given to the employer to enable it to determine whether the rescue service can quickly be upgraded to meet the employer's rescue needs or whether another service must be selected. The following questions will assist employers and rescue teams and services evaluate their performance.\n \n 1. Have all members of the service been trained as permit space entrants, at a minimum, including training in the potential hazards of all permit spaces, or of representative permit spaces, from which rescue may be needed? Can team members recognize the signs, symptoms, and consequences of exposure to any hazardous atmospheres that may be present in those permit spaces?\n \n 2. Is every team member provided with, and properly trained in, the use and need for PPE, such as SCBA or fall arrest equipment, which may be required to perform permit space rescues in the facility? Is every team member properly trained to perform his or her functions and make rescues, and to use any rescue equipment, such as ropes and backboards, that may be needed in a rescue attempt?\n \n 3. Are team members trained in the first aid and medical skills needed to treat victims overcome or injured by the types of hazards that may be encountered in the permit spaces at the facility?\n \n 4. Do all team members perform their functions safely and efficiently? Do rescue service personnel focus on their own safety before considering the safety of the victim?\n \n 5. If necessary, can the rescue service properly test the atmosphere to determine if it is IDLH?\n \n 6. Can the rescue personnel identify information pertinent to the rescue from entry permits, hot work permits, and MSDSs?\n \n 7. Has the rescue service been informed of any hazards to personnel that may arise from outside the space, such as those that may be caused by future work near the space?\n \n 8. If necessary, can the rescue service properly package and retrieve victims from a permit space that has a limited size opening (less than 24 inches (60.9 cm) in diameter), limited internal space, or internal obstacles or hazards?\n \n 9. If necessary, can the rescue service safely perform an elevated (high angle) rescue?\n \n 10. Does the rescue service have a plan for each of the kinds of permit space rescue operations at the facility? Is the plan adequate for all types of rescue operations that may be needed at the facility? Teams may practice in representative spaces, or in spaces that are \u201cworst-case\u201d or most restrictive with respect to internal configuration, elevation, and portal size. The following characteristics of a practice space should be considered when deciding whether a space is truly representative of an actual permit space:\n \n (1) Internal configuration.\n \n (a) Open\u2014there are no obstacles, barriers, or obstructions within the space. One example is a water tank.\n \n (b) Obstructed\u2014the permit space contains some type of obstruction that a rescuer would need to maneuver around. An example would be a baffle or mixing blade. Large equipment, such as a ladder or scaffold, brought into a space for work purposes would be considered an obstruction if the positioning or size of the equipment would make rescue more difficult.\n \n (2) Elevation.\n \n (a) Elevated\u2014a permit space where the entrance portal or opening is above grade by 4 feet or more. This type of space usually requires knowledge of high angle rescue procedures because of the difficulty in packaging and transporting a patient to the ground from the portal.\n \n (b) Non-elevated\u2014a permit space with the entrance portal located less than 4 feet above grade. This type of space will allow the rescue team to transport an injured employee normally.\n \n (3) Portal size.\n \n (a) Restricted\u2014A portal of 24 inches or less in the least dimension. Portals of this size are too small to allow a rescuer to simply enter the space while using SCBA. The portal size is also too small to allow normal spinal immobilization of an injured employee.\n \n (b) Unrestricted\u2014A portal of greater than 24 inches in the least dimension. These portals allow relatively free movement into and out of the permit space.\n \n (4) Space access.\n \n (a) Horizontal\u2014The portal is located on the side of the permit space. Use of retrieval lines could be difficult.\n \n (b) Vertical\u2014The portal is located on the top of the permit space, so that rescuers must climb down, or the bottom of the permit space, so that rescuers must climb up to enter the space. Vertical portals may require knowledge of rope techniques, or special patient packaging to safely retrieve a downed entrant.\n\n(1) This appendix provides guidance to employers in choosing an appropriate rescue service. It contains criteria that may be used to evaluate the capabilities both of prospective and current rescue teams. Before a rescue team can be trained or chosen, however, a satisfactory permit program, including an analysis of all permit-required confined spaces to identify all potential hazards in those spaces, must be completed. OSHA believes that compliance with all the provisions of \u00a7 1910.146 will enable employers to conduct permit space operations without recourse to rescue services in nearly all cases. However, experience indicates that circumstances will arise where entrants will need to be rescued from permit spaces. It is therefore important for employers to select rescue services or teams, either on-site or off-site, that are equipped and capable of minimizing harm to both entrants and rescuers if the need arises.\n\n(2) For all rescue teams or services, the employer's evaluation should consist of two components: an initial evaluation, in which employers decide whether a potential rescue service or team is adequately trained and equipped to perform permit space rescues of the kind needed at the facility and whether such rescuers can respond in a timely manner, and a performance evaluation, in which employers measure the performance of the team or service during an actual or practice rescue. For example, based on the initial evaluation, an employer may determine that maintaining an on-site rescue team will be more expensive than obtaining the services of an off-site team, without being significantly more effective, and decide to hire a rescue service. During a performance evaluation, the employer could decide, after observing the rescue service perform a practice rescue, that the service's training or preparedness was not adequate to effect a timely or effective rescue at his or her facility and decide to select another rescue service, or to form an internal rescue team.\n\nI. The employer should meet with the prospective rescue service to facilitate the evaluations required by \u00a7 1910.146(k)(1)(i) and \u00a7 1910.146(k)(1)(ii). At a minimum, if an off-site rescue service is being considered, the employer must contact the service to plan and coordinate the evaluations required by the standard. Merely posting the service's number or planning to rely on the 911 emergency phone number to obtain these services at the time of a permit space emergency would not comply with paragraph (k)(1) of the standard.\n\nII. The capabilities required of a rescue service vary with the type of permit spaces from which rescue may be necessary and the hazards likely to be encountered in those spaces. Answering the questions below will assist employers in determining whether the rescue service is capable of performing rescues in the permit spaces present at the employer's workplace.\n\n1. What are the needs of the employer with regard to response time (time for the rescue service to receive notification, arrive at the scene, and set up and be ready for entry)? For example, if entry is to be made into an IDLH atmosphere, or into a space that can quickly develop an IDLH atmosphere (if ventilation fails or for other reasons), the rescue team or service would need to be standing by at the permit space. On the other hand, if the danger to entrants is restricted to mechanical hazards that would cause injuries (e.g., broken bones, abrasions) a response time of 10 or 15 minutes might be adequate.\n\n2. How quickly can the rescue team or service get from its location to the permit spaces from which rescue may be necessary? Relevant factors to consider would include: the location of the rescue team or service relative to the employer's workplace, the quality of roads and highways to be traveled, potential bottlenecks or traffic congestion that might be encountered in transit, the reliability of the rescuer's vehicles, and the training and skill of its drivers.\n\n3. What is the availability of the rescue service? Is it unavailable at certain times of the day or in certain situations? What is the likelihood that key personnel of the rescue service might be unavailable at times? If the rescue service becomes unavailable while an entry is underway, does it have the capability of notifying the employer so that the employer can instruct the attendant to abort the entry immediately?\n\n4. Does the rescue service meet all the requirements of paragraph (k)(2) of the standard? If not, has it developed a plan that will enable it to meet those requirements in the future? If so, how soon can the plan be implemented?\n\n5. For off-site services, is the service willing to perform rescues at the employer's workplace? (An employer may not rely on a rescuer who declines, for whatever reason, to provide rescue services.)\n\n6. Is an adequate method for communications between the attendant, employer and prospective rescuer available so that a rescue request can be transmitted to the rescuer without delay? How soon after notification can a prospective rescuer dispatch a rescue team to the entry site?\n\n7. For rescues into spaces that may pose significant atmospheric hazards and from which rescue entry, patient packaging and retrieval cannot be safely accomplished in a relatively short time (15-20 minutes), employers should consider using airline respirators (with escape bottles) for the rescuers and to supply rescue air to the patient. If the employer decides to use SCBA, does the prospective rescue service have an ample supply of replacement cylinders and procedures for rescuers to enter and exit (or be retrieved) well within the SCBA's air supply limits?\n\n8. If the space has a vertical entry over 5 feet in depth, can the prospective rescue service properly perform entry rescues? Does the service have the technical knowledge and equipment to perform rope work or elevated rescue, if needed?\n\n9. Does the rescue service have the necessary skills in medical evaluation, patient packaging and emergency response?\n\n10. Does the rescue service have the necessary equipment to perform rescues, or must the equipment be provided by the employer or another source?\n\nRescue services are required by paragraph (k)(2)(iv) of the standard to practice rescues at least once every 12 months, provided that the team or service has not successfully performed a permit space rescue within that time. As part of each practice session, the service should perform a critique of the practice rescue, or have another qualified party perform the critique, so that deficiencies in procedures, equipment, training, or number of personnel can be identified and corrected. The results of the critique, and the corrections made to respond to the deficiencies identified, should be given to the employer to enable it to determine whether the rescue service can quickly be upgraded to meet the employer's rescue needs or whether another service must be selected. The following questions will assist employers and rescue teams and services evaluate their performance.\n\n1. Have all members of the service been trained as permit space entrants, at a minimum, including training in the potential hazards of all permit spaces, or of representative permit spaces, from which rescue may be needed? Can team members recognize the signs, symptoms, and consequences of exposure to any hazardous atmospheres that may be present in those permit spaces?\n\n2. Is every team member provided with, and properly trained in, the use and need for PPE, such as SCBA or fall arrest equipment, which may be required to perform permit space rescues in the facility? Is every team member properly trained to perform his or her functions and make rescues, and to use any rescue equipment, such as ropes and backboards, that may be needed in a rescue attempt?\n\n3. Are team members trained in the first aid and medical skills needed to treat victims overcome or injured by the types of hazards that may be encountered in the permit spaces at the facility?\n\n4. Do all team members perform their functions safely and efficiently? Do rescue service personnel focus on their own safety before considering the safety of the victim?\n\n5. If necessary, can the rescue service properly test the atmosphere to determine if it is IDLH?\n\n6. Can the rescue personnel identify information pertinent to the rescue from entry permits, hot work permits, and MSDSs?\n\n7. Has the rescue service been informed of any hazards to personnel that may arise from outside the space, such as those that may be caused by future work near the space?\n\n8. If necessary, can the rescue service properly package and retrieve victims from a permit space that has a limited size opening (less than 24 inches (60.9 cm) in diameter), limited internal space, or internal obstacles or hazards?\n\n9. If necessary, can the rescue service safely perform an elevated (high angle) rescue?\n\n10. Does the rescue service have a plan for each of the kinds of permit space rescue operations at the facility? Is the plan adequate for all types of rescue operations that may be needed at the facility? Teams may practice in representative spaces, or in spaces that are \u201cworst-case\u201d or most restrictive with respect to internal configuration, elevation, and portal size. The following characteristics of a practice space should be considered when deciding whether a space is truly representative of an actual permit space:\n\n(1) Internal configuration.\n\n(a) Open\u2014there are no obstacles, barriers, or obstructions within the space. One example is a water tank.\n\n(b) Obstructed\u2014the permit space contains some type of obstruction that a rescuer would need to maneuver around. An example would be a baffle or mixing blade. Large equipment, such as a ladder or scaffold, brought into a space for work purposes would be considered an obstruction if the positioning or size of the equipment would make rescue more difficult.\n\n(2) Elevation.\n\n(a) Elevated\u2014a permit space where the entrance portal or opening is above grade by 4 feet or more. This type of space usually requires knowledge of high angle rescue procedures because of the difficulty in packaging and transporting a patient to the ground from the portal.\n\n(b) Non-elevated\u2014a permit space with the entrance portal located less than 4 feet above grade. This type of space will allow the rescue team to transport an injured employee normally.\n\n(3) Portal size.\n\n(a) Restricted\u2014A portal of 24 inches or less in the least dimension. Portals of this size are too small to allow a rescuer to simply enter the space while using SCBA. The portal size is also too small to allow normal spinal immobilization of an injured employee.\n\n(b) Unrestricted\u2014A portal of greater than 24 inches in the least dimension. These portals allow relatively free movement into and out of the permit space.\n\n(4) Space access.\n\n(a) Horizontal\u2014The portal is located on the side of the permit space. Use of retrieval lines could be difficult.\n\n(b) Vertical\u2014The portal is located on the top of the permit space, so that rescuers must climb down, or the bottom of the permit space, so that rescuers must climb up to enter the space. Vertical portals may require knowledge of rope techniques, or special patient packaging to safely retrieve a downed entrant."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.10.34.7", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "J", "Subpart J\u2014General Environmental Controls", "", "\u00a7 1910.147 The control of hazardous energy (lockout/tagout).", "OSHA", "", "", "[54 FR 36687, Sept. 1, 1989, as amended at 54 FR 42498, Oct. 17, 1989; 55 FR 38685, 38686, Sept. 20, 1990; 76 FR 24698, May 2, 2011; 76 FR 44265, July 25, 2011]", "(a)  Scope, application, and purpose \u2014(1)  Scope.  (i) This standard covers the servicing and maintenance of machines and equipment in which the  unexpected  energization or start up of the machines or equipment, or release of stored energy could cause injury to employees. This standard establishes minimum performance requirements for the control of such hazardous energy.\n\n(ii) This standard does not cover the following:\n\n(A) Construction and agriculture employment;\n\n(B) Employment covered by parts 1915, 1917, and 1918 of this title;\n\n(C) Installations under the exclusive control of electric utilities for the purpose of power generation, transmission and distribution, including related equipment for communication or metering;\n\n(D) Exposure to electrical hazards from work on, near, or with conductors or equipment in electric-utilization installations, which is covered by subpart S of this part; and\n\n(E) Oil and gas well drilling and servicing.\n\n(2)  Application.  (i) This standard applies to the control of energy during servicing and/or maintenance of machines and equipment.\n\n(ii) Normal production operations are not covered by this standard (See subpart O of this part). Servicing and/or maintenance which takes place during normal production operations is covered by this standard only if;:\n\n(A) An employee is required to remove or bypass a guard or other safety device; or\n\n(B) An employee is required to place any part of his or her body into an area on a machine or piece of equipment where work is actually performed upon the material being processed (point of operation) or where an associated danger zone exists during a machine operating cycle.\n\nException to paragraph (a)(2)(ii):  Minor tool changes and adjustments, and other minor servicing activities, which take place during normal production operations, are not covered by this standard if they are routine, repetitive, and integral to the use of the equipment for production, provided that the work is performed using alternative measures which provide effective protection (See subpart O of this part).\n\n(iii) This standard does not apply to the following.\n\n(A) Work on cord and plug connected electric equipment for which exposure to the hazards of unexpected energization or start up of the equipment is controlled by the unplugging of the equipment from the energy source and by the plug being under the exclusive control of the employee performing the servicing or maintenance.\n\n(B) Hot tap operations involving transmission and distribution systems for substances such as gas, steam, water or petroleum products when they are performed on pressurized pipelines, provided that the employer demonstrates that ( 1 ) continuity of service is essential; ( 2 ) shutdown of the system is impractical; and ( 3 ) documented procedures are followed, and special equipment is used which will provide proven effective protection for employees.\n\n(3)  Purpose.  (i) This section requires employers to establish a program and utilize procedures for affixing appropriate lockout devices or tagout devices to energy isolating devices, and to otherwise disable machines or equipment to prevent unexpected energization, start-up or release of stored energy in order to prevent injury to employees.\n\n(ii) When other standards in this part require the use of lockout or tagout, they shall be used and supplemented by the procedural and training requirements of this section.\n\n(b)  Definitions applicable to this section.\n\nAffected employee.  An employee whose job requires him/her to operate or use a machine or equipment on which servicing or maintenance is being performed under lockout or tagout, or whose job requires him/her to work in an area in which such servicing or maintenance is being performed.\n\nAuthorized employee.  A person who locks out or tags out machines or equipment in order to perform servicing or maintenance on that machine or equipment. An affected employee becomes an authorized employee when that employee's duties include performing servicing or maintenance covered under this section.\n\nCapable of being locked out.  An energy isolating device is capable of being locked out if it has a hasp or other means of attachment to which, or through which, a lock can be affixed, or it has a locking mechanism built into it. Other energy isolating devices are capable of being locked out, if lockout can be achieved without the need to dismantle, rebuild, or replace the energy isolating device or permanently alter its energy control capability.\n\nEnergized.  Connected to an energy source or containing residual or stored energy.\n\nEnergy isolating device.  A mechanical device that physically prevents the transmission or release of energy, including but not limited to the following: A manually operated electrical circuit breaker; a disconnect switch; a manually operated switch by which the conductors of a circuit can be disconnected from all ungrounded supply conductors, and, in addition, no pole can be operated independently; a line valve; a block; and any similar device used to block or isolate energy. Push buttons, selector switches and other control circuit type devices are not energy isolating devices.\n\nEnergy source.  Any source of electrical, mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic, chemical, thermal, or other energy.\n\nHot tap.  A procedure used in the repair, maintenance and services activities which involves welding on a piece of equipment (pipelines, vessels or tanks) under pressure, in order to install connections or appurtenances. It is commonly used to replace or add sections of pipeline without the interruption of service for air, gas, water, steam, and petrochemical distribution systems.\n\nLockout.  The placement of a lockout device on an energy isolating device, in accordance with an established procedure, ensuring that the energy isolating device and the equipment being controlled cannot be operated until the lockout device is removed.\n\nLockout device.  A device that utilizes a positive means such as a lock, either key or combination type, to hold an energy isolating device in a safe position and prevent the energizing of a machine or equipment. Included are blank flanges and bolted slip blinds.\n\nNormal production operations.  The utilization of a machine or equipment to perform its intended production function.\n\nServicing and/or maintenance.  Workplace activities such as constructing, installing, setting up, adjusting, inspecting, modifying, and maintaining and/or servicing machines or equipment. These activities include lubrication, cleaning or unjamming of machines or equipment and making adjustments or tool changes, where the employee may be exposed to the  unexpected  energization or startup of the equipment or release of hazardous energy.\n\nSetting up.  Any work performed to prepare a machine or equipment to perform its normal production operation.\n\nTagout.  The placement of a tagout device on an energy isolating device, in accordance with an established procedure, to indicate that the energy isolating device and the equipment being controlled may not be operated until the tagout device is removed.\n\nTagout device.  A prominent warning device, such as a tag and a means of attachment, which can be securely fastened to an energy isolating device in accordance with an established procedure, to indicate that the energy isolating device and the equipment being controlled may not be operated until the tagout device is removed.\n\n(c)  General \u2014(1)  Energy control program.  The employer shall establish a program consisting of energy control procedures, employee training and periodic inspections to ensure that before any employee performs any servicing or maintenance on a machine or equipment where the unexpected energizing, start up or release of stored energy could occur and cause injury, the machine or equipment shall be isolated from the energy source, and rendered inoperative.\n\n(2)  Lockout/tagout.  (i) If an energy isolating device is not capable of being locked out, the employer's energy control program under paragraph (c)(1) of this section shall utilize a tagout system.\n\n(ii) If an energy isolating device is capable of being locked out, the employer's energy control program under paragraph (c)(1) of this section shall utilize lockout, unless the employer can demonstrate that the utilization of a tagout system will provide full employee protection as set forth in paragraph (c)(3) of this section.\n\n(iii) After January 2, 1990, whenever replacement or major repair, renovation or modification of a machine or equipment is performed, and whenever new machines or equipment are installed, energy isolating devices for such machine or equipment shall be designed to accept a lockout device.\n\n(3)  Full employee protection.  (i) When a tagout device is used on an energy isolating device which is capable of being locked out, the tagout device shall be attached at the same location that the lockout device would have been attached, and the employer shall demonstrate that the tagout program will provide a level of safety equivalent to that obtained by using a lockout program.\n\n(ii) In demonstrating that a level of safety is achieved in the tagout program which is equivalent to the level of safety obtained by using a lockout program, the employer shall demonstrate full compliance with all tagout-related provisions of this standard together with such additional elements as are necessary to provide the equivalent safety available from the use of a lockout device. Additional means to be considered as part of the demonstration of full employee protection shall include the implementation of additional safety measures such as the removal of an isolating circuit element, blocking of a controlling switch, opening of an extra disconnecting device, or the removal of a valve handle to reduce the likelihood of inadvertent energization.\n\n(4)  Energy control procedure.  (i) Procedures shall be developed, documented and utilized for the control of potentially hazardous energy when employees are engaged in the activities covered by this section.\n\nException:  The employer need not document the required procedure for a particular machine or equipment, when all of the following elements exist: (1) The machine or equipment has no potential for stored or residual energy or reaccumulation of stored energy after shut down which could endanger employees; (2) the machine or equipment has a single energy source which can be readily identified and isolated; (3) the isolation and locking out of that energy source will completely deenergize and deactivate the machine or equipment; (4) the machine or equipment is isolated from that energy source and locked out during servicing or maintenance; (5) a single lockout device will achieve a locked-out condition; (6) the lockout device is under the exclusive control of the authorized employee performing the servicing or maintenance; (7) the servicing or maintenance does not create hazards for other employees; and (8) the employer, in utilizing this exception, has had no accidents involving the unexpected activation or reenergization of the machine or equipment during servicing or maintenance.\n\n(ii) The procedures shall clearly and specifically outline the scope, purpose, authorization, rules, and techniques to be utilized for the control of hazardous energy, and the means to enforce compliance including, but not limited to, the following:\n\n(A) A specific statement of the intended use of the procedure;\n\n(B) Specific procedural steps for shutting down, isolating, blocking and securing machines or equipment to control hazardous energy;\n\n(C) Specific procedural steps for the placement, removal and transfer of lockout devices or tagout devices and the responsibility for them; and\n\n(D) Specific requirements for testing a machine or equipment to determine and verify the effectiveness of lockout devices, tagout devices, and other energy control measures.\n\n(5)  Protective materials and hardware.  (i) Locks, tags, chains, wedges, key blocks, adapter pins, self-locking fasteners, or other hardware shall be provided by the employer for isolating, securing or blocking of machines or equipment from energy sources.\n\n(ii) Lockout devices and tagout devices shall be singularly identified; shall be the only devices(s) used for controlling energy; shall not be used for other purposes; and shall meet the following requirements:\n\n(A)  Durable.  ( 1 ) Lockout and tagout devices shall be capable of withstanding the environment to which they are exposed for the maximum period of time that exposure is expected.\n\n( 2 ) Tagout devices shall be constructed and printed so that exposure to weather conditions or wet and damp locations will not cause the tag to deteriorate or the message on the tag to become illegible.\n\n( 3 ) Tags shall not deteriorate when used in corrosive environments such as areas where acid and alkali chemicals are handled and stored.\n\n(B)  Standardized.  Lockout and tagout devices shall be standardized within the facility in at least one of the following criteria: Color; shape; or size; and additionally, in the case of tagout devices, print and format shall be standardized.\n\n(C)  Substantial \u2014( 1 )  Lockout devices.  Lockout devices shall be substantial enough to prevent removal without the use of excessive force or unusual techniques, such as with the use of bolt cutters or other metal cutting tools.\n\n( 2 )  Tagout devices.  Tagout devices, including and their means of attachment, shall be substantial enough to prevent inadvertent or accidental removal. Tagout device attachment means shall be of a non-reusable type, attachable by hand, self-locking, and non-releasable with a minimum unlocking strength of no less than 50 pounds and having the general design and basic characteristics of being at least equivalent to a one-piece, all-environment-tolerant nylon cable tie.\n\n(D)  Identifiable.  Lockout devices and tagout devices shall indicate the identity of the employee applying the device(s).\n\n(iii) Tagout devices shall warn against hazardous conditions if the machine or equipment is energized and shall include a legend such as the following:  Do Not Start, Do Not Open, Do Not Close, Do Not Energize, Do Not Operate.\n\n(6)  Periodic inspection.  (i) The employer shall conduct a periodic inspection of the energy control procedure at least annually to ensure that the procedure and the requirements of this standard are being followed.\n\n(A) The periodic inspection shall be perfomed by an authorized employee other than the ones(s) utilizing the energy control procedure being inspected.\n\n(B) The periodic inspection shall be conducted to correct any deviations or inadequacies identified.\n\n(C) Where lockout is used for energy control, the periodic inspection shall include a review, between the inspector and each authorized employee, of that employee's responsibilities under the energy control procedure being inspected.\n\n(D) Where tagout is used for energy control, the periodic inspection shall include a review, between the inspector and each authorized and affected employee, of that employee's responsibilities under the energy control procedure being inspected, and the elements set forth in paragraph (c)(7)(ii) of this section.\n\n(ii) The employer shall certify that the periodic inspections have been performed. The certification shall identify the machine or equipment on which the energy control procedure was being utilized, the date of the inspection, the employees included in the inspection, and the person performing the inspection.\n\n(7)  Training and communication.  (i) The employer shall provide training to ensure that the purpose and function of the energy control program are understood by employees and that the knowledge and skills required for the safe application, usage, and removal of the energy controls are acquired by employees. The training shall include the following:\n\n(A) Each authorized employee shall receive training in the recognition of applicable hazardous energy sources, the type and magnitude of the energy available in the workplace, and the methods and means necessary for energy isolation and control.\n\n(B) Each affected employee shall be instructed in the purpose and use of the energy control procedure.\n\n(C) All other employees whose work operations are or may be in an area where energy control procedures may be utilized, shall be instructed about the procedure, and about the prohibition relating to attempts to restart or reenergize machines or equipment which are locked out or tagged out.\n\n(ii) When tagout systems are used, employees shall also be trained in the following limitations of tags:\n\n(A) Tags are essentially warning devices affixed to energy isolating devices, and do not provide the physical restraint on those devices that is provided by a lock.\n\n(B) When a tag is attached to an energy isolating means, it is not to be removed without authorization of the authorized person responsible for it, and it is never to be bypassed, ignored, or otherwise defeated.\n\n(C) Tags must be legible and understandable by all authorized employees, affected employees, and all other employees whose work operations are or may be in the area, in order to be effective.\n\n(D) Tags and their means of attachment must be made of materials which will withstand the environmental conditions encountered in the workplace.\n\n(E) Tags may evoke a false sense of security, and their meaning needs to be understood as part of the overall energy control program.\n\n(F) Tags must be securely attached to energy isolating devices so that they cannot be inadvertently or accidentally detached during use.\n\n(iii) Employee retraining.\n\n(A) Retraining shall be provided for all authorized and affected employees whenever there is a change in their job assignments, a change in machines, equipment or processes that present a new hazard, or when there is a change in the energy control procedures.\n\n(B) Additional retraining shall also be conducted whenever a periodic inspection under paragraph (c)(6) of this section reveals, or whenever the employer has reason to believe, that there are deviations from or inadequacies in the employee's knowledge or use of the energy control procedures.\n\n(C) The retraining shall reestablish employee proficiency and introduce new or revised control methods and procedures, as necessary.\n\n(iv) The employer shall certify that employee training has been accomplished and is being kept up to date. The certification shall contain each employee's name and dates of training.\n\n(8)  Energy isolation.  Lockout or tagout shall be performed only by the authorized employees who are performing the servicing or maintenance.\n\n(9)  Notification of employees.  Affected employees shall be notified by the employer or authorized employee of the application and removal of lockout devices or tagout devices. Notification shall be given before the controls are applied, and after they are removed from the machine or equipment.\n\n(d)  Application of control.  The established procedures for the application of energy control (the lockout or tagout procedures) shall cover the following elements and actions and shall be done in the following sequence:\n\n(1)  Preparation for shutdown.  Before an authorized or affected employee turns off a machine or equipment, the authorized employee shall have knowledge of the type and magnitude of the energy, the hazards of the energy to be controlled, and the method or means to control the energy.\n\n(2)  Machine or equipment shutdown.  The machine or equipment shall be turned off or shut down using the procedures established for the machine or equipment. An orderly shutdown must be utilized to avoid any additional or increased hazard(s) to employees as a result of the equipment stoppage.\n\n(3)  Machine or equipment isolation.  All energy isolating devices that are needed to control the energy to the machine or equipment shall be physically located and operated in such a manner as to isolate the machine or equipment from the energy source(s).\n\n(4)  Lockout or tagout device application.  (i) Lockout or tagout devices shall be affixed to each energy isolating device by authorized employees.\n\n(ii) Lockout devices, where used, shall be affixed in a manner to that will hold the energy isolating devices in a \u201csafe\u201d or \u201coff\u201d position.\n\n(iii) Tagout devices, where used, shall be affixed in such a manner as will clearly indicate that the operation or movement of energy isolating devices from the \u201csafe\u201d or \u201coff\u201d position is prohibited.\n\n(A) Where tagout devices are used with energy isolating devices designed with the capability of being locked, the tag attachment shall be fastened at the same point at which the lock would have been attached.\n\n(B) Where a tag cannot be affixed directly to the energy isolating device, the tag shall be located as close as safely possible to the device, in a position that will be immediately obvious to anyone attempting to operate the device.\n\n(5)  Stored energy.  (i) Following the application of lockout or tagout devices to energy isolating devices, all potentially hazardous stored or residual energy shall be relieved, disconnected, restrained, and otherwise rendered safe.\n\n(ii) If there is a possibility of reaccumulation of stored energy to a hazardous level, verification of isolation shall be continued until the servicing or maintenance is completed, or until the possibility of such accumulation no longer exists.\n\n(6)  Verification of isolation.  Prior to starting work on machines or equipment that have been locked out or tagged out, the authorized employee shall verify that isolation and deenergization of the machine or equipment have been accomplished.\n\n(e)  Release from lockout or tagout.  Before lockout or tagout devices are removed and energy is restored to the machine or equipment, procedures shall be followed and actions taken by the authorized employee(s) to ensure the following:\n\n(1)  The machine or equipment.  The work area shall be inspected to ensure that nonessential items have been removed and to ensure that machine or equipment components are operationally intact.\n\n(2)  Employees.  (i) The work area shall be checked to ensure that all employees have been safely positioned or removed.\n\n(ii) After lockout or tagout devices have been removed and before a machine or equipment is started, affected employees shall be notified that the lockout or tagout device(s) have been removed.\n\n(3)  Lockout or tagout devices removal.  Each lockout or tagout device shall be removed from each energy isolating device by the employee who applied the device.  Exception to paragraph (e)(3):  When the authorized employee who applied the lockout or tagout device is not available to remove it, that device may be removed under the direction of the employer, provided that specific procedures and training for such removal have been developed, documented and incorporated into the employer's energy control program. The employer shall demonstrate that the specific procedure provides equivalent safety to the removal of the device by the authorized employee who applied it. The specific procedure shall include at least the following elements:\n\n(i) Verfication by the employer that the authorized employee who applied the device is not at the facility;\n\n(ii) Making all reasonable efforts to contact the authorized employee to inform him/her that his/her lockout or tagout device has been removed; and\n\n(iii) Ensuring that the authorized employee has this knowledge before he/she resumes work at that facility.\n\n(f)  Additional requirements \u2014(1)  Testing or positioning of machines, equipment or components thereof.  In situations in which lockout or tagout devices must be temporarily removed from the energy isolating device and the machine or equipment energized to test or position the machine, equipment or component thereof, the following sequence of actions shall be followed:\n\n(i) Clear the machine or equipment of tools and materials in accordance with paragraph (e)(1) of this section;\n\n(ii) Remove employees from the machine or equipment area in accordance with paragraph (e)(2) of this section;\n\n(iii) Remove the lockout or tagout devices as specified in paragraph (e)(3) of this section;\n\n(iv) Energize and proceed with testing or positioning;\n\n(v) Deenergize all systems and reapply energy control measures in accordance with paragraph (d) of this section to continue the servicing and/or maintenance.\n\n(2)  Outside personnel (contractors, etc.).  (i) Whenever outside servicing personnel are to be engaged in activities covered by the scope and application of this standard, the on-site employer and the outside employer shall inform each other of their respective lockout or tagout procedures.\n\n(ii) The on-site employer shall ensure that his/her employees understand and comply with the restrictions and prohibitions of the outside employer's energy control program.\n\n(3)  Group lockout or tagout.  (i) When servicing and/or maintenance is performed by a crew, craft, department or other group, they shall utilize a procedure which affords the employees a level of protection equivalent to that provided by the implementation of a personal lockout or tagout device.\n\n(ii) Group lockout or tagout devices shall be used in accordance with the procedures required by paragraph (c)(4) of this section including, but not necessarily limited to, the following specific requirements:\n\n(A) Primary responsibility is vested in an authorized employee for a set number of employees working under the protection of a group lockout or tagout device (such as an operations lock);\n\n(B) Provision for the authorized employee to ascertain the exposure status of individual group members with regard to the lockout or tagout of the machine or equipment and\n\n(C) When more than one crew, craft, department, etc. is involved, assignment of overall job-associated lockout or tagout control responsibility to an authorized employee designated to coordinate affected work forces and ensure continuity of protection; and\n\n(D) Each authorized employee shall affix a personal lockout or tagout device to the group lockout device, group lockbox, or comparable mechanism when he or she begins work, and shall remove those devices when he or she stops working on the machine or equipment being serviced or maintained.\n\n(4)  Shift or personnel changes.  Specific procedures shall be utilized during shift or personnel changes to ensure the continuity of lockout or tagout protection, including provision for the orderly transfer of lockout or tagout device protection between off-going and oncoming employees, to minimize exposure to hazards from the unexpected energization or start-up of the machine or equipment, or the release of stored energy.\n\nThe following appendix to \u00a7 1910.147 services as a non-mandatory guideline to assist employers and employees in complying with the requirements of this section, as well as to provide other helpful information. Nothing in the appendix adds to or detracts from any of the requirements of this section.\n\nAppendix A to \u00a7 1910.147\u2014Typical Minimal Lockout Procedure\n \n General\n \n The following simple lockout procedure is provided to assist employers in developing their procedures so they meet the requirements of this standard. When the energy isolating devices are not lockable, tagout may be used, provided the employer complies with the provisions of the standard which require additional training and more rigorous periodic inspections. When tagout is used and the energy isolating devices are lockable, the employer must provide full employee protection ( see  paragraph (c)(3)) and additional training and more rigorous periodic inspections are required. For more complex systems, more comprehensive procedures may need to be developed, documented and utilized.\n \n Lockout Procedure\n \n Lockout procedure for\n \n \n \n (Name of Company for single procedure or identification of equipment if multiple procedures are used)\n \n Purpose\n \n This procedure establishes the minimum requirements for the lockout of energy isolating devices whenever maintenance or servicing is done on machines or equipment. It shall be used to ensure that the machine or equipment is stopped, isolated from all potentially hazardous energy sources and locked out before employees perform any servicing or maintenance where the unexpected energization or start-up of the machine or equipment or release of stored energy could cause injury.\n \n Compliance With This Program\n \n All employees are required to comply with the restrictions and limitations imposed upon them during the use of lockout. The authorized employees are required to perform the lockout in accordance with this procedure. All employees, upon observing a machine or piece of equipment which is locked out to perform servicing or maintenance shall not attempt to start, energize or use that machine or equipment.\n \n \n \n Type of compliance enforcement to be taken for violation of the above.\n \n Sequence of Lockout\n \n (1) Notify all affected employees that servicing or maintenance is required on a machine or equipment and that the machine or equipment must be shut down and locked out to perform the servicing or maintenance.\n \n \n \n Name(s)/Job Title(s) of affected employees and how to notify.\n \n (2) The authorized employee shall refer to the company procedure to identify the type and magnitude of the energy that the machine or equipment utilizes, shall understand the hazards of the energy, and shall know the methods to control the energy.\n \n \n \n Type(s) and magnitude(s) of energy, its hazards and the methods to control the energy.\n \n (3) If the machine or equipment is operating, shut it down by the normal stopping procedure (depress stop button, open switch, close valve, etc.).\n \n \n \n Type(s) and location(s) of machine or equipment operating controls.\n \n (4) De-activate the energy isolating device(s) so that the machine or equipment is isolated from the energy source(s).\n \n \n \n Type(s) and location(s) of energy isolating devices.\n \n (5) Lock out the energy isolating device(s) with assigned individual lock(s).\n \n (6) Stored or residual energy (such as that in capacitors, springs, elevated machine members, rotating flywheels, hydraulic systems, and air, gas, steam, or water pressure, etc.) must be dissipated or restrained by methods such as grounding, repositioning, blocking, bleeding down, etc.\n \n \n \n Type(s) of stored energy\u2014methods to dissipate or restrain.\n \n (7) Ensure that the equipment is disconnected from the energy source(s) by first checking that no personnel are exposed, then verify the isolation of the equipment by operating the push button or other normal operating control(s) or by testing to make certain the equipment will not operate.\n \n Caution:  Return operating control(s) to neutral or \u201coff\u201d position after verifying the isolation of the equipment.\n \n \n \n Method of verifying the isolation of the equipment.\n \n (8) The machine or equipment is now locked out.\n \n Restoring Equipment to Service.  When the servicing or maintenance is completed and the machine or equipment is ready to return to normal operating condition, the following steps shall be taken.\n \n (1) Check the machine or equipment and the immediate area around the machine or equipment to ensure that nonessential items have been removed and that the machine or equipment components are operationally intact.\n \n (2) Check the work area to ensure that all employees have been safely positioned or removed from the area.\n \n (3) Verify that the controls are in neutral.\n \n (4) Remove the lockout devices and reenergize the machine or equipment.\n \n \n Note: \n The removal of some forms of blocking may require reenergization of the machine before safe removal. \n (5) Notify affected employees that the servicing or maintenance is completed and the machine or equipment is ready for use.\n\nThe following simple lockout procedure is provided to assist employers in developing their procedures so they meet the requirements of this standard. When the energy isolating devices are not lockable, tagout may be used, provided the employer complies with the provisions of the standard which require additional training and more rigorous periodic inspections. When tagout is used and the energy isolating devices are lockable, the employer must provide full employee protection ( see  paragraph (c)(3)) and additional training and more rigorous periodic inspections are required. For more complex systems, more comprehensive procedures may need to be developed, documented and utilized.\n\nLockout procedure for\n\n(Name of Company for single procedure or identification of equipment if multiple procedures are used)\n\nThis procedure establishes the minimum requirements for the lockout of energy isolating devices whenever maintenance or servicing is done on machines or equipment. It shall be used to ensure that the machine or equipment is stopped, isolated from all potentially hazardous energy sources and locked out before employees perform any servicing or maintenance where the unexpected energization or start-up of the machine or equipment or release of stored energy could cause injury.\n\nAll employees are required to comply with the restrictions and limitations imposed upon them during the use of lockout. The authorized employees are required to perform the lockout in accordance with this procedure. All employees, upon observing a machine or piece of equipment which is locked out to perform servicing or maintenance shall not attempt to start, energize or use that machine or equipment.\n\nType of compliance enforcement to be taken for violation of the above.\n\n(1) Notify all affected employees that servicing or maintenance is required on a machine or equipment and that the machine or equipment must be shut down and locked out to perform the servicing or maintenance.\n\nName(s)/Job Title(s) of affected employees and how to notify.\n\n(2) The authorized employee shall refer to the company procedure to identify the type and magnitude of the energy that the machine or equipment utilizes, shall understand the hazards of the energy, and shall know the methods to control the energy.\n\nType(s) and magnitude(s) of energy, its hazards and the methods to control the energy.\n\n(3) If the machine or equipment is operating, shut it down by the normal stopping procedure (depress stop button, open switch, close valve, etc.).\n\nType(s) and location(s) of machine or equipment operating controls.\n\n(4) De-activate the energy isolating device(s) so that the machine or equipment is isolated from the energy source(s).\n\nType(s) and location(s) of energy isolating devices.\n\n(5) Lock out the energy isolating device(s) with assigned individual lock(s).\n\n(6) Stored or residual energy (such as that in capacitors, springs, elevated machine members, rotating flywheels, hydraulic systems, and air, gas, steam, or water pressure, etc.) must be dissipated or restrained by methods such as grounding, repositioning, blocking, bleeding down, etc.\n\nType(s) of stored energy\u2014methods to dissipate or restrain.\n\n(7) Ensure that the equipment is disconnected from the energy source(s) by first checking that no personnel are exposed, then verify the isolation of the equipment by operating the push button or other normal operating control(s) or by testing to make certain the equipment will not operate.\n\nCaution:  Return operating control(s) to neutral or \u201coff\u201d position after verifying the isolation of the equipment.\n\nMethod of verifying the isolation of the equipment.\n\n(8) The machine or equipment is now locked out.\n\nRestoring Equipment to Service.  When the servicing or maintenance is completed and the machine or equipment is ready to return to normal operating condition, the following steps shall be taken.\n\n(1) Check the machine or equipment and the immediate area around the machine or equipment to ensure that nonessential items have been removed and that the machine or equipment components are operationally intact.\n\n(2) Check the work area to ensure that all employees have been safely positioned or removed from the area.\n\n(3) Verify that the controls are in neutral.\n\n(4) Remove the lockout devices and reenergize the machine or equipment.\n\nThe removal of some forms of blocking may require reenergization of the machine before safe removal.\n\n(5) Notify affected employees that the servicing or maintenance is completed and the machine or equipment is ready for use."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.11.34.1", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "K", "Subpart K\u2014Medical and First Aid", "", "\u00a7 1910.151 Medical services and first aid.", "OSHA", "", "", "[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 63 FR 33466, June 18, 1998; 70 FR 1141, Jan. 5, 2005; 76 FR 80739, Dec. 27, 2011]", "(a) The employer shall ensure the ready availability of medical personnel for advice and consultation on matters of plant health.\n\n(b) In the absence of an infirmary, clinic, or hospital in near proximity to the workplace which is used for the treatment of all injured employees, a person or persons shall be adequately trained to render first aid. Adequate first aid supplies shall be readily available.\n\n(c) Where the eyes or body of any person may be exposed to injurious corrosive materials, suitable facilities for quick drenching or flushing of the eyes and body shall be provided within the work area for immediate emergency use.\n\nAppendix A to \u00a7 1910.151\u2014First aid kits (Non-Mandatory)\n \n First aid supplies are required to be readily available under paragraph \u00a7 1910.151(b). An example of the minimal contents of a generic first aid kit is described in American National Standard (ANSI) Z308.1-1998 \u201cMinimum Requirements for Workplace First-aid Kits.\u201d The contents of the kit listed in the ANSI standard should be adequate for small worksites. When larger operations or multiple operations are being conducted at the same location, employers should determine the need for additional first aid kits at the worksite, additional types of first aid equipment and supplies and additional quantities and types of supplies and equipment in the first aid kits.\n \n In a similar fashion, employers who have unique or changing first-aid needs in their workplace may need to enhance their first-aid kits. The employer can use the OSHA 300 log, OSHA 301 log, or other reports to identify these unique problems. Consultation from the local fire/rescue department, appropriate medical professional, or local emergency room may be helpful to employers in these circumstances. By assessing the specific needs of their workplace, employers can ensure that reasonably anticipated supplies are available. Employers should assess the specific needs of their worksite periodically and augment the first aid kit appropriately.\n \n If it is reasonably anticipated that employees will be exposed to blood or other potentially infectious materials while using first aid supplies, employers are required to provide appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) in compliance with the provisions of the Occupational Exposure to Blood borne Pathogens standard, \u00a7 1910.1030(d)(3) (56 FR 64175). This standard lists appropriate PPE for this type of exposure, such as gloves, gowns, face shields, masks, and eye protection.\n\nFirst aid supplies are required to be readily available under paragraph \u00a7 1910.151(b). An example of the minimal contents of a generic first aid kit is described in American National Standard (ANSI) Z308.1-1998 \u201cMinimum Requirements for Workplace First-aid Kits.\u201d The contents of the kit listed in the ANSI standard should be adequate for small worksites. When larger operations or multiple operations are being conducted at the same location, employers should determine the need for additional first aid kits at the worksite, additional types of first aid equipment and supplies and additional quantities and types of supplies and equipment in the first aid kits.\n\nIn a similar fashion, employers who have unique or changing first-aid needs in their workplace may need to enhance their first-aid kits. The employer can use the OSHA 300 log, OSHA 301 log, or other reports to identify these unique problems. Consultation from the local fire/rescue department, appropriate medical professional, or local emergency room may be helpful to employers in these circumstances. By assessing the specific needs of their workplace, employers can ensure that reasonably anticipated supplies are available. Employers should assess the specific needs of their worksite periodically and augment the first aid kit appropriately.\n\nIf it is reasonably anticipated that employees will be exposed to blood or other potentially infectious materials while using first aid supplies, employers are required to provide appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) in compliance with the provisions of the Occupational Exposure to Blood borne Pathogens standard, \u00a7 1910.1030(d)(3) (56 FR 64175). This standard lists appropriate PPE for this type of exposure, such as gloves, gowns, face shields, masks, and eye protection."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.11.34.2", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "K", "Subpart K\u2014Medical and First Aid", "", "\u00a7 1910.152 [Reserved]", "OSHA", "", "", "", ""], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.12.34.1", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "L", "Subpart L\u2014Fire Protection", "", "\u00a7 1910.155 Scope, application and definitions applicable to this subpart.", "OSHA", "", "", "[45 FR 60704, Sept. 12, 1980, as amended at 53 FR 12122, Apr. 12, 1988]", "(a)  Scope.  This subpart contains requirements for fire brigades, and all portable and fixed fire suppression equipment, fire detection systems, and fire or employee alarm systems installed to meet the fire protection requirements of 29 CFR part 1910.\n\n(b)  Application.  This subpart applies to all employments except for maritime, construction, and agriculture.\n\n(c)  Definitions applicable to this subpart \u2014(1)  After-flame  means the time a test specimen continues to flame after the flame source has been removed.\n\n(2)  Aqueous film forming foam (AFFF)  means a fluorinated surfactant with a foam stabilizer which is diluted with water to act as a temporary barrier to exclude air from mixing with the fuel vapor by developing an aqueous film on the fuel surface of some hydrocarbons which is capable of suppressing the generation of fuel vapors.\n\n(3)  Approved  means acceptable to the Assistant Secretary under the following criteria:\n\n(i) If it is accepted, or certified, or listed, or labeled or otherwise determined to be safe by a nationally recognized testing laboratory; or\n\n(ii) With respect to an installation or equipment of a kind which no nationally recognized testing laboratory accepts, certifies, lists, labels, or determines to be safe, if it is inspected or tested by another Federal agency and found in compliance with the provisions of the applicable National Fire Protection Association Fire Code; or\n\n(iii) With respect to custom-made equipment or related installations which are designed, fabricated for, and intended for use by its manufacturer on the basis of test data which the employer keeps and makes available for inspection to the Assistant Secretary.\n\n(iv) For the purposes of paragraph (c)(3) of this section:\n\n(A) Equipment is listed if it is of a kind mentioned in a list which is published by a nationally recognized testing laboratory which makes periodic inspections of the production of such equipment and which states that such equipment meets nationally recognized standards or has been tested and found safe for use in a specified manner;\n\n(B) Equipment is labeled if there is attached to it a label, symbol, or other identifying mark of a nationally recognized testing laboratory which makes periodic inspections of the production of such equipment, and whose labeling indicates compliance with nationally recognized standards or tests to determine safe use in a specified manner;\n\n(C) Equipment is accepted if it has been inspected and found by a nationally recognized testing laboratory to conform to specified plans or to procedures of applicable codes; and\n\n(D) Equipment is certified if it has been tested and found by a nationally recognized testing laboratory to meet nationally recognized standards or to be safe for use in a specified manner or is of a kind whose production is periodically inspected by a nationally recognized testing laboratory, and if it bears a label, tag, or other record of certification.\n\n(E) Refer to \u00a7 1910.7 for definition of nationally recognized testing laboratory.\n\n(4)  Assistant Secretary  means the Assistant Secretary of Labor for Occupational Safety and Health or designee.\n\n(5)  Automatic fire detection device  means a device designed to automatically detect the presence of fire by heat, flame, light, smoke or other products of combustion.\n\n(6)  Buddy-breathing device  means an accessory to self-contained breathing apparatus which permits a second person to share the same air supply as that of the wearer of the apparatus.\n\n(7)  Carbon dioxide  means a colorless, odorless, electrically nonconductive inert gas (chemical formula CO 2 ) that is a medium for extinguishing fires by reducing the concentration of oxygen or fuel vapor in the air to the point where conbustion is impossible.\n\n(8)  Class A fire  means a fire involving ordinary combustible materials such as paper, wood, cloth, and some rubber and plastic materials.\n\n(9)  Class B fire  means a fire involving flammable or combustible liquids, flammable gases, greases and similar materials, and some rubber and plastic materials.\n\n(10)  Class C fire  means a fire involving energized electrical equipment where safety to the employee requires the use of electrically nonconductive extinguishing media.\n\n(11)  Class D fire  means a fire involving combustible metals such as magnesium, titanium, zirconium, sodium, lithium and potassium.\n\n(12)  Dry chemical  means an extinguishing agent composed of very small particles of chemicals such as, but not limited to, sodium bicarbonate, potassium bicarbonate, urea-based potassium bicarbonate, potassium chloride, or monoammonium phosphate supplemented by special treatment to provide resistance to packing and moisture absorption (caking) as well as to provide proper flow capabilities. Dry chemical does not include dry powders.\n\n(13)  Dry powder  means a compound used to extinguish or control Class D fires.\n\n(14)  Education  means the process of imparting knowledge or skill through systematic instruction. It does not require formal classroom instruction.\n\n(15)  Enclosed structure  means a structure with a roof or ceiling and at least two walls which may present fire hazards to employees, such as accumulations of smoke, toxic gases and heat, similar to those found in buildings.\n\n(16)  Extinguisher classification  means the letter classification given an extinguisher to designate the class or classes of fire on which an extinguisher will be effective.\n\n(17)  Extinguisher rating  means the numerical rating given to an extinguisher which indicates the extinguishing potential of the unit based on standardized tests developed by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.\n\n(18)  Fire brigade  (private fire department, industrial fire department) means an organized group of employees who are knowledgeable, trained, and skilled in at least basic fire fighting operations.\n\n(19)  Fixed extinguishing system  means a permanently installed system that either extinguishes or controls a fire at the location of the system.\n\n(20)  Flame resistance  is the property of materials, or combinations of component materials, to retard ignition and restrict the spread of flame.\n\n(21)  Foam  means a stable aggregation of small bubbles which flow freely over a burning liquid surface and form a coherent blanket which seals combustible vapors and thereby extinguishes the fire.\n\n(22)  Gaseous agent  is a fire extinguishing agent which is in the gaseous state at normal room temperature and pressure. It has low viscosity, can expand or contract with changes in pressure and temperature, and has the ability to diffuse readily and to distribute itself uniformly throughout an enclosure.\n\n(23)  Halon 1211  means a colorless, faintly sweet smelling, electrically nonconductive liquefied gas (chemical formula CBrC1F 2 ) which is a medium for extinguishing fires by inhibiting the chemical chain reaction of fuel and oxygen. It is also known as bromochlorodifluoromethane.\n\n(24)  Halon 1301  means a colorless, odorless, electrically nonconductive gas (chemical formula CBrF 3 ) which is a medium for extinguishing fires by inhibiting the chemical chain reaction of fuel and oxygen. It is also known as bromotrifluoromethane.\n\n(25)  Helmet  is a head protective device consisting of a rigid shell, energy absorption system, and chin strap intended to be worn to provide protection for the head or portions thereof, against impact, flying or falling objects, electric shock, penetration, heat and flame.\n\n(26)  Incipient stage fire  means a fire which is in the initial or beginning stage and which can be controlled or extinguished by portable fire extinguishers, Class II standpipe or small hose systems without the need for protective clothing or breathing apparatus.\n\n(27)  Inspection  means a visual check of fire protection systems and equipment to ensure that they are in place, charged, and ready for use in the event of a fire.\n\n(28)  Interior structural fire fighting  means the physical activity of fire suppression, rescue or both, inside of buildings or enclosed structures which are involved in a fire situation beyond the incipient stage.\n\n(29)  Lining  means a material permanently attached to the inside of the outer shell of a garment for the purpose of thermal protection and padding.\n\n(30)  Local application system  means a fixed fire suppression system which has a supply of extinguishing agent, with nozzles arranged to automatically discharge extinguishing agent directly on the burning material to extinguish or control a fire.\n\n(31)  Maintenance  means the performance of services on fire protection equipment and systems to assure that they will perform as expected in the event of a fire. Maintenance differs from inspection in that maintenance requires the checking of internal fittings, devices and agent supplies.\n\n(32)  Multipurpose dry chemical  means a dry chemical which is approved for use on Class A, Class B and Class C fires.\n\n(33)  Outer shell  is the exterior layer of material on the fire coat and protective trousers which forms the outermost barrier between the fire fighter and the environment. It is attached to the vapor barrier and liner and is usually constructed with a storm flap, suitable closures, and pockets.\n\n(34)  Positive-pressure breathing apparatus  means self-contained breathing apparatus in which the pressure in the breathing zone is positive in relation to the immediate environment during inhalation and exhalation.\n\n(35)  Pre-discharge employee alarm  means an alarm which will sound at a set time prior to actual discharge of an extinguishing system so that employees may evacuate the discharge area prior to system discharge.\n\n(36)  Quick disconnect valve  means a device which starts the flow of air by inserting of the hose (which leads from the facepiece) into the regulator of self-contained breathing apparatus, and stops the flow of air by disconnection of the hose from the regulator.\n\n(37)  Sprinkler alarm  means an approved device installed so that any waterflow from a sprinkler system equal to or greater than that from single automatic sprinkler will result in an audible alarm signal on the premises.\n\n(38)  Sprinkler system  means a system of piping designed in accordance with fire protection engineering standards and installed to control or extinguish fires. The system includes an adequate and reliable water supply, and a network of specially sized piping and sprinklers which are interconnected. The system also includes a control valve and a device for actuating an alarm when the system is in operation.\n\n(39)  Standpipe systems.  (i)  Class I standpipe system  means a 2\n 1/2 \u2033 (6.3 cm) hose connection for use by fire departments and those trained in handling heavy fire streams.\n\n(ii)  Class II standpipe system  means a 1\n 1/2 \u2033 (3.8 cm) hose system which provides a means for the control or extinguishment of incipient stage fires.\n\n(iii)  Class III standpipe system  means a combined system of hose which is for the use of employees trained in the use of hose operations and which is capable of furnishing effective water discharge during the more advanced stages of fire (beyond the incipient stage) in the interior of workplaces. Hose outlets are available for both 1\n 1/2 \u2033 (3.8 cm) and 2\n 1/2 \u2033 (6.3 cm) hose.\n\n(iv)  Small hose system  means a system of hose ranging in diameter from \n 5/8 \u2033 (1.6 cm up to 1\n 1/2 \u2033 (3.8 cm) which is for the use of employees and which provides a means for the control and extinguishment of incipient stage fires.\n\n(40)  Total flooding system  means a fixed suppression system which is arranged to automatically discharge a predetermined concentration of agent into an enclosed space for the purpose of fire extinguishment or control.\n\n(41)  Training  means the process of making proficient through instruction and hands-on practice in the operation of equipment, including respiratory protection equipment, that is expected to be used and in the performance of assigned duties.\n\n(42)  Vapor barrier  means that material used to prevent or substantially inhibit the transfer of water, corrosive liquids and steam or other hot vapors from the outside of a garment to the wearer's body."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.12.34.2", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "L", "Subpart L\u2014Fire Protection", "", "\u00a7 1910.156 Fire brigades.", "OSHA", "", "", "[45 FR 60706, Sept. 12, 1980; 46 FR 24557, May 1, 1981; 49 FR 18295, Apr. 30, 1984; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 1284, Jan. 8, 1998; 63 FR 33467, June 18, 1998; 73 FR 75584, Dec. 12, 2008]", "(a)  Scope and application \u2014(1)  Scope.  This section contains requirements for the organization, training, and personal protective equipment of fire brigades whenever they are established by an employer.\n\n(2)  Application.  The requirements of this section apply to fire brigades, industrial fire departments and private or contractual type fire departments. Personal protective equipment requirements apply only to members of fire brigades performing interior structural fire fighting. The requirements of this section do not apply to airport crash rescue or forest fire fighting operations.\n\n(b)  Organization \u2014(1)  Organizational statement.  The employer shall prepare and maintain a statement or written policy which establishes the existence of a fire brigade; the basic organizational structure; the type, amount, and frequency of training to be provided to fire brigade members; the expected number of members in the fire brigade; and the functions that the fire brigade is to perform at the workplace. The organizational statement shall be available for inspection by the Assistant Secretary and by employees or their designated representatives.\n\n(2)  Personnel.  The employer shall assure that employees who are expected to do interior structural fire fighting are physically capable of performing duties which may be assigned to them during emergencies. The employer shall not permit employees with known heart disease, epilepsy, or emphysema, to participate in fire brigade emergency activities unless a physician's certificate of the employees' fitness to participate in such activities is provided. For employees assigned to fire brigades before September 15, 1980, this paragraph is effective on September 15, 1990. For employees assigned to fire brigades on or after September 15, 1980, this paragraph is effective December 15, 1980.\n\n(c)  Training and education.  (1) The employer shall provide training and education for all fire brigade members commensurate with those duties and functions that fire brigade members are expected to perform. Such training and education shall be provided to fire brigade members before they perform fire brigade emergency activities. Fire brigade leaders and training instructors shall be provided with training and education which is more comprehensive than that provided to the general membership of the fire brigade.\n\n(2) The employer shall assure that training and education is conducted frequently enough to assure that each member of the fire brigade is able to perform the member's assigned duties and functions satisfactorily and in a safe manner so as not to endanger fire brigade members or other employees. All fire brigade members shall be provided with training at least annually. In addition, fire brigade members who are expected to perform interior structural fire fighting shall be provided with an education session or training at least quarterly.\n\n(3) The quality of the training and education program for fire brigade members shall be similar to those conducted by such fire training schools as the Maryland Fire and Rescue Institute; Iowa Fire Service Extension; West Virginia Fire Service Extension; Georgia Fire Academy, New York State Department, Fire Prevention and Control; Louisiana State University Firemen Training Program, or Washington State's Fire Service Training Commission for Vocational Education. (For example, for the oil refinery industry, with its unique hazards, the training and education program for those fire brigade members shall be similar to those conducted by Texas A & M University, Lamar University, Reno Fire School, or the Delaware State Fire School.)\n\n(4) The employer shall inform fire brigade members about special hazards such as storage and use of flammable liquids and gases, toxic chemicals, radioactive sources, and water reactive substances, to which they may be exposed during fire and other emergencies. The fire brigade members shall also be advised of any changes that occur in relation to the special hazards. The employer shall develop and make available for inspection by fire brigade members, written procedures that describe the actions to be taken in situations involving the special hazards and shall include these in the training and education program.\n\n(d)  Fire fighting equipment.  The employer shall maintain and inspect, at least annually, fire fighting equipment to assure the safe operational condition of the equipment. Portable fire extinguishers and respirators shall be inspected at least monthly. Fire fighting equipment that is in damaged or unserviceable condition shall be removed from service and replaced.\n\n(e)  Protective clothing.  The following requirements apply to those employees who perform interior structural fire fighting. The requirements do not apply to employees who use fire extinguishers or standpipe systems to control or extinguish fires only in the incipient stage.\n\n(1)  General.  (i) The employer shall provide at no cost to the employee and assure the use of protective clothing which complies with the requirements of this paragraph. The employer shall assure that protective clothing ordered or purchased after July 1, 1981, meets the requirements contained in this paragraph. As the new equipment is provided, the employer shall assure that all fire brigade members wear the equipment when performing interior structural fire fighting. After July 1, 1985, the employer shall assure that all fire brigade members wear protective clothing meeting the requirements of this paragraph when performing interior structural fire fighting.\n\n(ii) The employer shall assure that protective clothing protects the head, body, and extremities, and consists of at least the following components: foot and leg protection; hand protection; body protection; eye, face and head protection.\n\n(2)  Foot and leg protection.  (i) Foot and leg protection shall meet the requirements of paragraphs (e)(2)(ii) and (e)(2)(iii) of this section, and may be achieved by either of the following methods:\n\n(A) Fully extended boots which provide protection for the legs; or\n\n(B) Protective shoes or boots worn in combination with protective trousers that meet the requirements of paragraph (e)(3) of this section.\n\n(ii) Protective footwear shall meet the requirements of \u00a7 1910.136 for Class 75 footwear. In addition, protective footwear shall be water-resistant for at least 5 inches (12.7 cm) above the bottom of the heel and shall be equipped with slip-resistant outer soles.\n\n(iii) Protective footwear shall be tested in accordance with paragraph (1) of appendix E, and shall provide protection against penetration of the midsole by a size 8D common nail when at least 300 pounds (1330 N) of static force is applied to the nail.\n\n(3)  Body protection.  (i) Body protection shall be coordinated with foot and leg protection to ensure full body protection for the wearer. This shall be achieved by one of the following methods:\n\n(A) Wearing of a fire-resistive coat meeting the requirements of paragraph (e)(3)(ii) of this section in combination with fully extended boots meeting the requirements of paragraphs (e)(2)(ii) and (e)(2)(iii) of this section; or\n\n(B) Wearing of a fire-resistive coat in combination with protective trousers both of which meet the requirements of paragraph (e)(3)(ii) of this section.\n\n(ii) The performance, construction, and testing of fire-resistive coats and protective trousers shall be at least equivalent to the requirements of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) standard NFPA No. 1971-1975, \u201cProtective Clothing for Structural Fire Fighting,\u201d which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6, (See appendix D to subpart L) with the following permissible variations from those requirements:\n\n(A) Tearing strength of the outer shell shall be a minimum of 8 pounds (35.6 N) in any direction when tested in accordance with paragraph (2) of appendix E; and\n\n(B) The outer shell may discolor but shall not separate or melt when placed in a forced air laboratory oven at a temperature of 500 \u00b0F (260 \u00b0C) for a period of five minutes. After cooling to ambient temperature and using the test method specified in paragraph (3) of appendix E, char length shall not exceed 4.0 inches (10.2 cm) and after-flame shall not exceed 2.0 seconds.\n\n(4)  Hand protection.  (i) Hand protection shall consist of protective gloves or glove system which will provide protection against cut, puncture, and heat penetration. Gloves or glove system shall be tested in accordance with the test methods contained in the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) 1976 publication, \u201cThe Development of Criteria for Fire Fighter's Gloves; Vol. II, Part II: Test Methods,\u201d which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6, (See appendix D to subpart L) and shall meet the following criteria for cut, puncture, and heat penetration:\n\n(A) Materials used for gloves shall resist surface cut by a blade with an edge having a 60\u00b0 included angle and a .001 inch (.0025 cm.) radius, under an applied force of 16 lbf (72N), and at a slicing velocity of greater or equal to 60 in/min (2.5 cm./sec);\n\n(B) Materials used for the palm and palm side of the fingers shall resist puncture by a penetrometer (simulating a 4d lath nail), under an applied force of 13.2 lbf (60N), and at a velocity greater or equal to 20 in/min (.85 cm./sec); and\n\n(C) The temperature inside the palm and gripping surface of the fingers of gloves shall not exceed 135 \u00b0F (57 \u00b0C) when gloves or glove system are exposed to 932 \u00b0F (500 \u00b0C) for five seconds at 4 psi (28 kPa) pressure.\n\n(ii) Exterior materials of gloves shall be flame resistant and shall be tested in accordance with paragraph (3) of appendix E. Maximum allowable afterflame shall be 2.0 seconds, and the maximum char length shall be 4.0 inches (10.2 cm).\n\n(iii) When design of the fire-resistive coat does not otherwise provide protection for the wrists, protective gloves shall have wristlets of at least 4.0 inches (10.2 cm) in length to protect the wrist area when the arms are extended upward and outward from the body.\n\n(5)  Head, eye and face protection.  (i) Head protection shall consist of a protective head device with ear flaps and chin strap which meet the performance, construction, and testing requirements of the National Fire Safety and Research Office of the National Fire Prevention and Control Administration, U.S. Department of Commerce (now known as the U.S. Fire Administration), which are contained in \u201cModel Performance Criteria for Structural Firefighters' Helmets\u201d (August 1977) which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6, (See appendix D to subpart L).\n\n(ii) Protective eye and face devices which comply with \u00a7 1910.133 shall be used by fire brigade members when performing operations where the hazards of flying or falling materials which may cause eye and face injuries are present. Protective eye and face devices provided as accessories to protective head devices (face shields) are permitted when such devices meet the requirements of \u00a7 1910.133.\n\n(iii) Full facepieces, helmets, or hoods of breathing apparatus which meet the requirements of \u00a7 1910.134 and paragraph (f) of this section, shall be acceptable as meeting the eye and face protection requirements of paragraph (e)(5)(ii) of this section.\n\n(f)  Respiratory protection devices \u2014(1)  General requirements.  (i) The employer must ensure that respirators are provided to, and used by, each fire brigade member, and that the respirators meet the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.134 for each employee required by this section to use a respirator.\n\n(ii) Approved self-contained breathing apparatus with full-facepiece, or with approved helmet or hood configuration, shall be provided to and worn by fire brigade members while working inside buildings or confined spaces where toxic products of combustion or an oxygen deficiency may be present.\n\nSuch apparatus shall also be worn during emergency situations involving toxic substances.\n\n(iii) Approved self-contained breathing apparatus may be equipped with either a \u201cbuddy-breathing\u201d device or a quick disconnect valve, even if these devices are not certified by NIOSH. If these accessories are used, they shall not cause damage to the apparatus, or restrict the air flow of the apparatus, or obstruct the normal operation of the apparatus.\n\n(iv) Approved self-contained compressed air breathing apparatus may be used with approved cylinders from other approved self-contained compressed air breathing apparatus provided that such cylinders are of the same capacity and pressure rating. All compressed air cylinders used with self-contained breathing apparatus shall meet DOT and NIOSH criteria.\n\n(v) Self-contained breathing apparatuses must have a minimum service-life rating of 30 minutes in accordance with the methods and requirements specified by NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84, except for escape self-contained breathing apparatus (ESCBAs) used only for emergency escape purposes.\n\n(vi) Self-contained breathing apparatus shall be provided with an indicator which automatically sounds an audible alarm when the remaining service life of the apparatus is reduced to within a range of 20 to 25 percent of its rated service time.\n\n(2)  Positive-pressure breathing apparatus.  (i) The employer shall assure that self-contained breathing apparatus ordered or purchased after July 1, 1981, for use by fire brigade members performing interior structural fire fighting operations, are of the pressure-demand or other positive-pressure type. Effective July 1, 1983, only pressure-demand or other positive-pressure self-contained breathing apparatus shall be worn by fire brigade members performing interior structural fire fighting.\n\n(ii) This paragraph does not prohibit the use of a self-contained breathing apparatus where the apparatus can be switched from a demand to a positive-pressure mode. However, such apparatus shall be in the positive-pressure mode when fire brigade members are performing interior structural fire fighting operations."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.12.34.3", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "L", "Subpart L\u2014Fire Protection", "", "\u00a7 1910.157 Portable fire extinguishers.", "OSHA", "", "", "[45 FR 60708, Sept. 12, 1980; 46 FR 24557, May 1, 1981, as amended at 51 FR 34560, Sept. 29, 1986; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996; 67 FR 67964, Nov. 7, 2002]", "(a)  Scope and application.  The requirements of this section apply to the placement, use, maintenance, and testing of portable fire extinguishers provided for the use of employees. Paragraph (d) of this section does not apply to extinguishers provided for employee use on the outside of workplace buildings or structures. Where extinguishers are provided but are not intended for employee use and the employer has an emergency action plan and a fire prevention plan that meet the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.38 and 29 CFR 1910.39 respectively, then only the requirements of paragraphs (e) and (f) of this section apply.\n\n(b)  Exemptions.  (1) Where the employer has established and implemented a written fire safety policy which requires the immediate and total evacuation of employees from the workplace upon the sounding of a fire alarm signal and which includes an emergency action plan and a fire prevention plan which meet the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.38 and 29 CFR 1910.39 respectively, and when extinguishers are not available in the workplace, the employer is exempt from all requirements of this section unless a specific standard in part 1910 requires that a portable fire extinguisher be provided.\n\n(2) Where the employer has an emergency action plan meeting the requirements of \u00a7 1910.38 which designates certain employees to be the only employees authorized to use the available portable fire extinguishers, and which requires all other employees in the fire area to immediately evacuate the affected work area upon the sounding of the fire alarm, the employer is exempt from the distribution requirements in paragraph (d) of this section.\n\n(c)  General requirements.  (1) The employer shall provide portable fire extinguishers and shall mount, locate and identify them so that they are readily accessible to employees without subjecting the employees to possible injury.\n\n(2) Only approved portable fire extinguishers shall be used to meet the requirements of this section.\n\n(3) The employer shall not provide or make available in the workplace portable fire extinguishers using carbon tetrachloride or chlorobromomethane extinguishing agents.\n\n(4) The employer shall assure that portable fire extinguishers are maintained in a fully charged and operable condition and kept in their designated places at all times except during use.\n\n(5) The employer shall remove from service all soldered or riveted shell self-generating soda acid or self-generating foam or gas cartridge water type portable fire extinguishers which are operated by inverting the extinguisher to rupture the cartridge or to initiate an uncontrollable pressure generating chemical reaction to expel the agent.\n\n(d)  Selection and distribution.  (1) Portable fire extinguishers shall be provided for employee use and selected and distributed based on the classes of anticipated workplace fires and on the size and degree of hazard which would affect their use.\n\n(2) The employer shall distribute portable fire extinguishers for use by employees on Class A fires so that the travel distance for employees to any extinguisher is 75 feet (22.9 m) or less.\n\n(3) The employer may use uniformly spaced standpipe systems or hose stations connected to a sprinkler system installed for emergency use by employees instead of Class A portable fire extinguishers, provided that such systems meet the respective requirements of \u00a7 1910.158 or \u00a7 1910.159, that they provide total coverage of the area to be protected, and that employees are trained at least annually in their use.\n\n(4) The employer shall distribute portable fire extinguishers for use by employees on Class B fires so that the travel distance from the Class B hazard area to any extinguisher is 50 feet (15.2 m) or less.\n\n(5) The employer shall distribute portable fire extinguishers used for Class C hazards on the basis of the appropriate pattern for the existing Class A or Class B hazards.\n\n(6) The employer shall distribute portable fire extinguishers or other containers of Class D extinguishing agent for use by employees so that the travel distance from the combustible metal working area to any extinguishing agent is 75 feet (22.9 m) or less. Portable fire extinguishers for Class D hazards are required in those combustible metal working areas where combustible metal powders, flakes, shavings, or similarly sized products are generated at least once every two weeks.\n\n(e)  Inspection, maintenance and testing.  (1) The employer shall be responsible for the inspection, maintenance and testing of all portable fire extinguishers in the workplace.\n\n(2) Portable extinguishers or hose used in lieu thereof under paragraph (d)(3) of this section shall be visually inspected monthly.\n\n(3) The employer shall assure that portable fire extinguishers are subjected to an annual maintenance check. Stored pressure extinguishers do not require an internal examination. The employer shall record the annual maintenance date and retain this record for one year after the last entry or the life of the shell, whichever is less. The record shall be available to the Assistant Secretary upon request.\n\n(4) The employer shall assure that stored pressure dry chemical extinguishers that require a 12-year hydrostatic test are emptied and subjected to applicable maintenance procedures every 6 years. Dry chemical extinguishers having non-refillable disposable containers are exempt from this requirement. When recharging or hydrostatic testing is performed, the 6-year requirement begins from that date.\n\n(5) The employer shall assure that alternate equivalent protection is provided when portable fire extinguishers are removed from service for maintenance and recharging.\n\n(f)  Hydrostatic testing.  (1) The employer shall assure that hydrostatic testing is performed by trained persons with suitable testing equipment and facilities.\n\n(2) The employer shall assure that portable extinguishers are hydrostatically tested at the intervals listed in Table L-1 of this section, except under any of the following conditions:\n\n(i) When the unit has been repaired by soldering, welding, brazing, or use of patching compounds;\n\n(ii) When the cylinder or shell threads are damaged;\n\n(iii) When there is corrosion that has caused pitting, including corrosion under removable name plate assemblies;\n\n(iv) When the extinguisher has been burned in a fire; or\n\n(v) When a calcium chloride extinguishing agent has been used in a stainless steel shell.\n\n(3) In addition to an external visual examination, the employer shall assure that an internal examination of cylinders and shells to be tested is made prior to the hydrostatic tests.\n\nTable L-1\n\n1  Extinguishers having shells constructed of copper or brass joined by soft solder or rivets shall not be hydrostatically tested and shall be removed from service by January 1, 1982. (Not permitted)\n\n(4) The employer shall assure that portable fire extinguishers are hydrostatically tested whenever they show new evidence of corrosion or mechanical injury, except under the conditions listed in paragraphs (f)(2)(i)-(v) of this section.\n\n(5) The employer shall assure that hydrostatic tests are performed on extinguisher hose assemblies which are equipped with a shut-off nozzle at the discharge end of the hose. The test interval shall be the same as specified for the extinguisher on which the hose is installed.\n\n(6) The employer shall assure that carbon dioxide hose assemblies with a shut-off nozzle are hydrostatically tested at 1,250 psi (8,620 kPa).\n\n(7) The employer shall assure that dry chemical and dry powder hose assemblies with a shut-off nozzle are hydrostatically tested at 300 psi (2,070 kPa).\n\n(8) Hose assemblies passing a hydrostatic test do not require any type of recording or stamping.\n\n(9) The employer shall assure that hose assemblies for carbon dioxide extinguishers that require a hydrostatic test are tested within a protective cage device.\n\n(10) The employer shall assure that carbon dioxide extinguishers and nitrogen or carbon dioxide cylinders used with wheeled extinguishers are tested every 5 years at 5/3 of the service pressure as stamped into the cylinder. Nitrogen cylinders which comply with 49 CFR 173.34(e)(15) may be hydrostatically tested every 10 years.\n\n(11) The employer shall assure that all stored pressure and Halon 1211 types of extinguishers are hydrostatically tested at the factory test pressure not to exceed two times the service pressure.\n\n(12) The employer shall assure that acceptable self-generating type soda acid and foam extinguishers are tested at 350 psi (2,410 kPa).\n\n(13) Air or gas pressure may not be used for hydrostatic testing.\n\n(14) Extinguisher shells, cylinders, or cartridges which fail a hydrostatic pressure test, or which are not fit for testing shall be removed from service and from the workplace.\n\n(15)(i) The equipment for testing compressed gas type cylinders shall be of the water jacket type. The equipment shall be provided with an expansion indicator which operates with an accuracy within one percent of the total expansion or .1cc (.1mL) of liquid.\n\n(ii) The equipment for testing non-compressed gas type cylinders shall consist of the following:\n\n(A) A hydrostatic test pump, hand or power operated, capable of producing not less than 150 percent of the test pressure, which shall include appropriate check valves and fittings;\n\n(B) A flexible connection for attachment to fittings to test through the extinguisher nozzle, test bonnet, or hose outlet, as is applicable; and\n\n(C) A protective cage or barrier for personal protection of the tester, designed to provide visual observation of the extinguisher under test.\n\n(16) The employer shall maintain and provide upon request to the Assistant Secretary evidence that the required hydrostatic testing of fire extinguishers has been performed at the time intervals shown in Table L-1. Such evidence shall be in the form of a certification record which includes the date of the test, the signature of the person who performed the test and the serial number, or other identifier, of the fire extinguisher that was tested. Such records shall be kept until the extinguisher is hydrostatically retested at the time interval specified in Table L-1 or until the extinguisher is taken out of service, whichever comes first.\n\n(g)  Training and education.  (1) Where the employer has provided portable fire extinguishers for employee use in the workplace, the employer shall also provide an educational program to familiarize employees with the general principles of fire extinguisher use and the hazards involved with incipient stage fire fighting.\n\n(2) The employer shall provide the education required in paragraph (g)(1) of this section upon initial employment and at least annually thereafter.\n\n(3) The employer shall provide employees who have been designated to use fire fighting equipment as part of an emergency action plan with training in the use of the appropriate equipment.\n\n(4) The employer shall provide the training required in paragraph (g)(3) of this section upon initial assignment to the designated group of employees and at least annually thereafter."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.12.34.4", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "L", "Subpart L\u2014Fire Protection", "", "\u00a7 1910.158 Standpipe and hose systems.", "OSHA", "", "", "[45 FR 60710, Sept. 12, 1980, as amended at 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996]", "(a)  Scope and application \u2014(1)  Scope.  This section applies to all small hose, Class II, and Class III standpipe systems installed to meet the requirements of a particular OSHA standard.\n\n(2)  Exception.  This section does not apply to Class I standpipe systems.\n\n(b)  Protection of standpipes.  The employer shall assure that standpipes are located or otherwise protected against mechanical damage. Damaged standpipes shall be repaired promptly.\n\n(c)  Equipment \u2014(1)  Reels and cabinets.  Where reels or cabinets are provided to contain fire hose, the employer shall assure that they are designed to facilitate prompt use of the hose valves, the hose, and other equipment at the time of a fire or other emergency. The employer shall assure that the reels and cabinets are conspicuously identified and used only for fire equipment.\n\n(2)  Hose outlets and connections.  (i) The employer shall assure that hose outlets and connections are located high enough above the floor to avoid being obstructed and to be accessible to employees.\n\n(ii) The employer shall standardize screw threads or provide appropriate adapters throughout the system and assure that the hose connections are compatible with those used on the supporting fire equipment.\n\n(3)  Hose.  (i) The employer shall assure that every 1\n 1/2 \u2033 (3.8 cm) or smaller hose outlet used to meet this standard is equipped with hose connected and ready for use. In extremely cold climates where such installation may result in damaged equipment, the hose may be stored in another location provided it is readily available and can be connected when needed.\n\n(ii) Standpipe systems installed after January 1, 1981, for use by employees, shall be equipped with lined hose. Unlined hose may remain in use on existing systems. However, after the effective date of this standard, unlined hose which becomes unserviceable shall be replaced with lined hose.\n\n(iii) The employer shall provide hose of such length that friction loss resulting from water flowing through the hose will not decrease the pressure at the nozzle below 30 psi (210 kPa). The dynamic pressure at the nozzle shall be within the range of 30 psi (210 kPa) to 125 psi (860 kPa).\n\n(4)  Nozzles.  The employer shall assure that standpipe hose is equipped with shut-off type nozzles.\n\n(d)  Water supply.  The minimum water supply for standpipe and hose systems, which are provided for the use of employees, shall be sufficient to provide 100 gallons per minute (6.3 l/s) for a period of at least thirty minutes.\n\n(e)  Tests and maintenance \u2014(1)  Acceptance tests.  (i) The employer shall assure that the piping of Class II and Class III systems installed after January 1, 1981, including yard piping, is hydrostatically tested for a period of at least 2 hours at not less than 200 psi (1380 kPa), or at least 50 psi (340 kPa) in excess of normal pressure when such pressure is greater than 150 psi (1030 kPa).\n\n(ii) The employer shall assure that hose on all standpipe systems installed after January 1, 1981, is hydrostatically tested with couplings in place, at a pressure of not less than 200 psi (1380 kPa), before it is placed in service. This pressure shall be maintained for at least 15 seconds and not more than one minute during which time the hose shall not leak nor shall any jacket thread break during the test.\n\n(2)  Maintenance.  (i) The employer shall assure that water supply tanks are kept filled to the proper level except during repairs. When pressure tanks are used, the employer shall assure that proper pressure is maintained at all times except during repairs.\n\n(ii) The employer shall assure that valves in the main piping connections to the automatic sources of water supply are kept fully open at all times except during repair.\n\n(iii) The employer shall assure that hose systems are inspected at least annually and after each use to assure that all of the equipment and hose are in place, available for use, and in serviceable condition.\n\n(iv) When the system or any portion thereof is found not to be serviceable, the employer shall remove it from service immediately and replace it with equivalent protection such as extinguishers and fire watches.\n\n(v) The employer shall assure that hemp or linen hose on existing systems is unracked, physically inspected for deterioration, and reracked using a different fold pattern at least annually. The employer shall assure that defective hose is replaced in accordance with paragraph (c)(3)(ii) of this section.\n\n(vi) The employer shall designate trained persons to conduct all inspections required under this section."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.12.35.5", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "L", "Subpart L\u2014Fire Protection", "", "\u00a7 1910.159 Automatic sprinkler systems.", "OSHA", "", "", "[45 FR 60710, Sept. 12, 1980; 46 FR 24557, May 1, 1981]", "(a)  Scope and application.  (1) The requirements of this section apply to all automatic sprinkler systems installed to meet a particular OSHA standard.\n\n(2) For automatic sprinkler systems used to meet OSHA requirements and installed prior to the effective date of this standard, compliance with the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) or the National Board of Fire Underwriters (NBFU) standard in effect at the time of the system's installation will be acceptable as compliance with this section.\n\n(b)  Exemptions.  Automatic sprinkler systems installed in workplaces, but not required by OSHA, are exempt from the requirements of this section.\n\n(c)  General requirements \u2014(1)  Design.  (i) All automatic sprinkler designs used to comply with this standard shall provide the necessary discharge patterns, densities, and water flow characteristics for complete coverage in a particular workplace or zoned subdivision of the workplace.\n\n(ii) The employer shall assure that only approved equipment and devices are used in the design and installation of automatic sprinkler systems used to comply with this standard.\n\n(2)  Maintenance.  The employer shall properly maintain an automatic sprinkler system installed to comply with this section. The employer shall assure that a main drain flow test is performed on each system annually. The inspector's test valve shall be opened at least every two years to assure that the sprinkler system operates properly.\n\n(3)  Acceptance tests.  The employer shall conduct proper acceptance tests on sprinkler systems installed for employee protection after January 1, 1981, and record the dates of such tests. Proper acceptance tests include the following:\n\n(i) Flushing of underground connections;\n\n(ii) Hydrostatic tests of piping in system;\n\n(iii) Air tests in dry-pipe systems;\n\n(iv) Dry-pipe valve operation; and\n\n(v) Test of drainage facilities.\n\n(4)  Water supplies.  The employer shall assure that every automatic sprinkler system is provided with at least one automatic water supply capable of providing design water flow for at least 30 minutes. An auxiliary water supply or equivalent protection shall be provided when the automatic water supply is out of service, except for systems of 20 or fewer sprinklers.\n\n(5)  Hose connections for fire fighting use.  The employer may attach hose connections for fire fighting use to wet pipe sprinkler systems provided that the water supply satisfies the combined design demand for sprinklers and standpipes.\n\n(6)  Protection of piping.  The employer shall assure that automatic sprinkler system piping is protected against freezing and exterior surface corrosion.\n\n(7)  Drainage.  The employer shall assure that all dry sprinkler pipes and fittings are installed so that the system may be totally drained.\n\n(8)  Sprinklers.  (i) The employer shall assure that only approved sprinklers are used on systems.\n\n(ii) The employer may not use older style sprinklers to replace standard sprinklers without a complete engineering review of the altered part of the system.\n\n(iii) The employer shall assure that sprinklers are protected from mechanical damage.\n\n(9)  Sprinkler alarms.  On all sprinkler systems having more than twenty (20) sprinklers, the employer shall assure that a local waterflow alarm is provided which sounds an audible signal on the premises upon water flow through the system equal to the flow from a single sprinkler.\n\n(10)  Sprinkler spacing.  The employer shall assure that sprinklers are spaced to provide a maximum protection area per sprinkler, a minimum of interference to the discharge pattern by building or structural members or building contents and suitable sensitivity to possible fire hazards. The minimum vertical clearance between sprinklers and material below shall be 18 inches (45.7 cm).\n\n(11)  Hydraulically designed systems.  The employer shall assure that hydraulically designed automatic sprinkler systems or portions thereof are identified and that the location, number of sprinklers in the hydraulically designed section, and the basis of the design is indicated. Central records may be used in lieu of signs at sprinkler valves provided the records are available for inspection and copying by the Assistant Secretary."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.12.35.6", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "L", "Subpart L\u2014Fire Protection", "", "\u00a7 1910.160 Fixed extinguishing systems, general.", "OSHA", "", "", "[45 FR 60711, Sept. 12, 1980]", "(a)  Scope and application.  (1) This section applies to all fixed extinguishing systems installed to meet a particular OSHA standard except for automatic sprinkler systems which are covered by \u00a7 1910.159.\n\n(2) This section also applies to fixed systems not installed to meet a particular OSHA standard, but which, by means of their operation, may expose employees to possible injury, death, or adverse health consequences caused by the extinguishing agent. Such systems are only subject to the requirements of paragraphs (b)(4) through (b)(7) and (c) of this section.\n\n(3) Systems otherwise covered in paragraph (a)(2) of this section which are installed in areas with no employee exposure are exempted from the requirements of this section.\n\n(b)  General requirements.  (1) Fixed extinguishing system components and agents shall be designed and approved for use on the specific fire hazards they are expected to control or extinguish.\n\n(2) If for any reason a fixed extinguishing system becomes inoperable, the employer shall notify employees and take the necessary temporary precautions to assure their safety until the system is restored to operating order. Any defects or impairments shall be properly corrected by trained personnel.\n\n(3) The employer shall provide a distinctive alarm or signaling system which complies with \u00a7 1910.165 and is capable of being perceived above ambient noise or light levels, on all extinguishing systems in those portions of the workplace covered by the extinguishing system to indicate when the extinguishing system is discharging. Discharge alarms are not required on systems where discharge is immediately recognizable.\n\n(4) The employer shall provide effective safeguards to warn employees against entry into discharge areas where the atmosphere remains hazardous to employee safety or health.\n\n(5) The employer shall post hazard warning or caution signs at the entrance to, and inside of, areas protected by fixed extinguishing systems which use agents in concentrations known to be hazardous to employee safety and health.\n\n(6) The employer shall assure that fixed systems are inspected annually by a person knowledgeable in the design and function of the system to assure that the system is maintained in good operating condition.\n\n(7) The employer shall assure that the weight and pressure of refillable containers is checked at least semi-annually. If the container shows a loss in net content or weight of more than 5 percent, or a loss in pressure of more than 10 percent, it shall be subjected to maintenance.\n\n(8) The employer shall assure that factory charged nonrefillable containers which have no means of pressure indication are weighed at least semi-annually. If a container shows a loss in net weight or more than 5 percent it shall be replaced.\n\n(9) The employer shall assure that inspection and maintenance dates are recorded on the container, on a tag attached to the container, or in a central location. A record of the last semi-annual check shall be maintained until the container is checked again or for the life of the container, whichever is less.\n\n(10) The employer shall train employees designated to inspect, maintain, operate, or repair fixed extinguishing systems and annually review their training to keep them up-to-date in the functions they are to perform.\n\n(11) The employer shall not use chlorobromomethane or carbon tetrachloride as an extinguishing agent where employees may be exposed.\n\n(12) The employer shall assure that systems installed in the presence of corrosive atmospheres are constructed of non-corrosive material or otherwise protected against corrosion.\n\n(13) Automatic detection equipment shall be approved, installed and maintained in accordance with \u00a7 1910.164.\n\n(14) The employer shall assure that all systems designed for and installed in areas with climatic extremes shall operate effectively at the expected extreme temperatures.\n\n(15) The employer shall assure that at least one manual station is provided for discharge activation of each fixed extinguishing system.\n\n(16) The employer shall assure that manual operating devices are identified as to the hazard against which they will provide protection.\n\n(17) The employer shall provide and assure the use of the personal protective equipment needed for immediate rescue of employees trapped in hazardous atmospheres created by an agent discharge.\n\n(c)  Total flooding systems with potential health and safety hazards to employees.  (1) The employer shall provide an emergency action plan in accordance with \u00a7 1910.38 for each area within a workplace that is protected by a total flooding system which provides agent concentrations exceeding the maximum safe levels set forth in paragraphs (b)(5) and (b)(6) of \u00a7 1910.162.\n\n(2) Systems installed in areas where employees cannot enter during or after the system's operation are exempt from the requirements of paragraph (c) of this section.\n\n(3) On all total flooding systems the employer shall provide a pre-discharge employee alarm which complies with \u00a7 1910.165, and is capable of being perceived above ambient light or noise levels before the system discharges, which will give employees time to safely exit from the discharge area prior to system discharge.\n\n(4) The employer shall provide automatic actuation of total flooding systems by means of an approved fire detection device installed and interconnected with a pre-discharge employee alarm system to give employees time to safely exit from the discharge area prior to system discharge."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.12.35.7", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "L", "Subpart L\u2014Fire Protection", "", "\u00a7 1910.161 Fixed extinguishing systems, dry chemical.", "OSHA", "", "", "[45 FR 60712, Sept. 12, 1980]", "(a)  Scope and application.  This section applies to all fixed extinguishing systems, using dry chemical as the extinguishing agent, installed to meet a particular OSHA standard. These systems shall also comply with \u00a7 1910.160.\n\n(b)  Specific requirements.  (1) The employer shall assure that dry chemical agents are compatible with any foams or wetting agents with which they are used.\n\n(2) The employer may not mix together dry chemical extinguishing agents of different compositions. The employer shall assure that dry chemical systems are refilled with the chemical stated on the approval nameplate or an equivalent compatible material.\n\n(3) When dry chemical discharge may obscure vision, the employer shall provide a pre-discharge employee alarm which complies with \u00a7 1910.165 and which will give employees time to safely exit from the discharge area prior to system discharge.\n\n(4) The employer shall sample the dry chemical supply of all but stored pressure systems at least annually to assure that the dry chemical supply is free of moisture which may cause the supply to cake or form lumps.\n\n(5) The employer shall assure that the rate of application of dry chemicals is such that the designed concentration of the system will be reached within 30 seconds of initial discharge."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.12.35.8", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "L", "Subpart L\u2014Fire Protection", "", "\u00a7 1910.162 Fixed extinguishing systems, gaseous agent.", "OSHA", "", "", "[45 FR 60712, Sept. 12, 1980; 46 FR 24557, May 1, 1981]", "(a)  Scope and application \u2014(1)  Scope.  This section applies to all fixed extinguishing systems, using a gas as the extinguishing agent, installed to meet a particular OSHA standard. These systems shall also comply with \u00a7 1910.160. In some cases, the gas may be in a liquid state during storage.\n\n(2)  Application.  The requirements of paragraphs (b)(2) and (b)(4) through (b)(6) shall apply only to total flooding systems.\n\n(b)  Specific requirements.  (1) Agents used for initial supply and replenishment shall be of the type approved for the system's application. Carbon dioxide obtained by dry ice conversion to liquid is not acceptable unless it is processed to remove excess water and oil.\n\n(2) Except during overhaul, the employer shall assure that the designed concentration of gaseous agents is maintained until the fire has been extinguished or is under control.\n\n(3) The employer shall assure that employees are not exposed to toxic levels of gaseous agent or its decomposition products.\n\n(4) The employer shall assure that the designed extinguishing concentration is reached within 30 seconds of initial discharge except for Halon systems which must achieve design concentration within 10 seconds.\n\n(5) The employer shall provide a distinctive pre-discharge employee alarm capable of being perceived above ambient light or noise levels when agent design concentrations exceed the maximum safe level for employee exposure. A pre-discharge employee alarm for alerting employees before system discharge shall be provided on Halon 1211 and carbon dioxide systems with a design concentration of 4 percent or greater and for Halon 1301 systems with a design concentration of 10 percent or greater. The pre-discharge employee alarm shall provide employees time to safely exit the discharge area prior to system discharge.\n\n(6)(i) Where egress from an area cannot be accomplished within one minute, the employer shall not use Halon 1301 in concentrations greater than 7 percent.\n\n(ii) Where egress takes greater than 30 seconds but less than one minute, the employer shall not use Halon 1301 in a concentration greater than 10 percent.\n\n(iii) Halon 1301 concentrations greater than 10 percent are only permitted in areas not normally occupied by employees provided that any employee in the area can escape within 30 seconds. The employer shall assure that no unprotected employees enter the area during agent discharge."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.12.35.9", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "L", "Subpart L\u2014Fire Protection", "", "\u00a7 1910.163 Fixed extinguishing systems, water spray and foam.", "OSHA", "", "", "[45 FR 60712, Sept. 12, 1980]", "(a)  Scope and application.  This section applies to all fixed extinguishing systems, using water or foam solution as the extinguishing agent, installed to meet a particular OSHA standard. These systems shall also comply with \u00a7 1910.160. This section does not apply to automatic sprinkler systems which are covered under \u00a7 1910.159.\n\n(b)  Specific requirements.  (1) The employer shall assure that foam and water spray systems are designed to be effective in at least controlling fire in the protected area or on protected equipment.\n\n(2) The employer shall assure that drainage of water spray systems is directed away from areas where employees are working and that no emergency egress is permitted through the drainage path."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.12.36.10", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "L", "Subpart L\u2014Fire Protection", "", "\u00a7 1910.164 Fire detection systems.", "OSHA", "", "", "[45 FR 60713, Sept. 12, 1980]", "(a)  Scope and application.  This section applies to all automatic fire detection systems installed to meet the requirements of a particular OSHA standard.\n\n(b)  Installation and restoration.  (1) The employer shall assure that all devices and equipment constructed and installed to comply with this standard are approved for the purpose for which they are intended.\n\n(2) The employer shall restore all fire detection systems and components to normal operating condition as promptly as possible after each test or alarm. Spare detection devices and components which are normally destroyed in the process of detecting fires shall be available on the premises or from a local supplier in sufficient quantities and locations for prompt restoration of the system.\n\n(c)  Maintenance and testing.  (1) The employer shall maintain all systems in an operable condition except during repairs or maintenance.\n\n(2) The employer shall assure that fire detectors and fire detection systems are tested and adjusted as often as needed to maintain proper reliability and operating condition except that factory calibrated detectors need not be adjusted after installation.\n\n(3) The employer shall assure that pneumatic and hydraulic operated detection systems installed after January 1, 1981, are equipped with supervised systems.\n\n(4) The employer shall assure that the servicing, maintenance and testing of fire detection systems, including cleaning and necessary sensitivity adjustments are performed by a trained person knowledgeable in the operations and functions of the system.\n\n(5) The employer shall also assure that fire detectors that need to be cleaned of dirt, dust, or other particulates in order to be fully operational are cleaned at regular periodic intervals.\n\n(d)  Protection of fire detectors.  (1) The employer shall assure that fire detection equipment installed outdoors or in the presence of corrosive atmospheres be protected from corrosion. The employer shall provide a canopy, hood, or other suitable protection for detection equipment requiring protection from the weather.\n\n(2) The employer shall locate or otherwise protect detection equipment so that it is protected from mechanical or physical impact which might render it inoperable.\n\n(3) The employer shall assure that detectors are supported independently of their attachment to wires or tubing.\n\n(e)  Response time.  (1) The employer shall assure that fire detection systems installed for the purpose of actuating fire extinguishment or suppression systems shall be designed to operate in time to control or extinguish a fire.\n\n(2) The employer shall assure that fire detection systems installed for the purpose of employee alarm and evacuation be designed and installed to provide a warning for emergency action and safe escape of employees.\n\n(3) The employer shall not delay alarms or devices initiated by fire detector actuation for more than 30 seconds unless such delay is necessary for the immediate safety of employees. When such delay is necessary, it shall be addressed in an emergency action plan meeting the requirements of \u00a7 1910.38.\n\n(f)  Number, location and spacing of detecting devices.  The employer shall assure that the number, spacing and location of fire detectors is based upon design data obtained from field experience, or tests, engineering surveys, the manufacturer's recommendations, or a recognized testing laboratory listing."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.12.36.11", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "L", "Subpart L\u2014Fire Protection", "", "\u00a7 1910.165 Employee alarm systems.", "OSHA", "", "", "[45 FR 60713, Sept. 12, 1980]", "(a)  Scope and application.  (1) This section applies to all emergency employee alarms installed to meet a particular OSHA standard. This section does not apply to those discharge or supervisory alarms required on various fixed extinguishing systems or to supervisory alarms on fire suppression, alarm or detection systems unless they are intended to be employee alarm systems.\n\n(2) The requirements in this section that pertain to maintenance, testing and inspection shall apply to all local fire alarm signaling systems used for alerting employees regardless of the other functions of the system.\n\n(3) All pre-discharge employee alarms installed to meet a particular OSHA standard shall meet the requirements of paragraphs (b)(1) through (4), (c), and (d)(1) of this section.\n\n(b)  General requirements.  (1) The employee alarm system shall provide warning for necessary emergency action as called for in the emergency action plan, or for reaction time for safe escape of employees from the workplace or the immediate work area, or both.\n\n(2) The employee alarm shall be capable of being perceived above ambient noise or light levels by all employees in the affected portions of the workplace. Tactile devices may be used to alert those employees who would not otherwise be able to recognize the audible or visual alarm.\n\n(3) The employee alarm shall be distinctive and recognizable as a signal to evacuate the work area or to perform actions designated under the emergency action plan.\n\n(4) The employer shall explain to each employee the preferred means of reporting emergencies, such as manual pull box alarms, public address systems, radio or telephones. The employer shall post emergency telephone numbers near telephones, or employee notice boards, and other conspicuous locations when telephones serve as a means of reporting emergencies. Where a communication system also serves as the employee alarm system, all emergency messages shall have priority over all non-emergency messages.\n\n(5) The employer shall establish procedures for sounding emergency alarms in the workplace. For those employers with 10 or fewer employees in a particular workplace, direct voice communication is an acceptable procedure for sounding the alarm provided all employees can hear the alarm. Such workplaces need not have a back-up system.\n\n(c)  Installation and restoration.  (1) The employer shall assure that all devices, components, combinations of devices or systems constructed and installed to comply with this standard are approved. Steam whistles, air horns, strobe lights or similar lighting devices, or tactile devices meeting the requirements of this section are considered to meet this requirement for approval.\n\n(2) The employer shall assure that all employee alarm systems are restored to normal operating condition as promptly as possible after each test or alarm. Spare alarm devices and components subject to wear or destruction shall be available in sufficient quantities and locations for prompt restoration of the system.\n\n(d)  Maintenance and testing.  (1) The employer shall assure that all employee alarm systems are maintained in operating condition except when undergoing repairs or maintenance.\n\n(2) The employer shall assure that a test of the reliability and adequacy of non-supervised employee alarm systems is made every two months. A different actuation device shall be used in each test of a multi-actuation device system so that no individual device is used for two consecutive tests.\n\n(3) The employer shall maintain or replace power supplies as often as is necessary to assure a fully operational condition. Back-up means of alarm, such as employee runners or telephones, shall be provided when systems are out of service.\n\n(4) The employer shall assure that employee alarm circuitry installed after January 1, 1981, which is capable of being supervised is supervised and that it will provide positive notification to assigned personnel whenever a deficiency exists in the system. The employer shall assure that all supervised employee alarm systems are tested at least annually for reliability and adequacy.\n\n(5) The employer shall assure that the servicing, maintenance and testing of employee alarms are done by persons trained in the designed operation and functions necessary for reliable and safe operation of the system.\n\n(e)  Manual operation.  The employer shall assure that manually operated actuation devices for use in conjunction with employee alarms are unobstructed, conspicuous and readily accessible."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.13.37.1", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "M", "Subpart M\u2014Compressed Gas and Compressed Air Equipment", "", "\u00a7\u00a7 1910.166-1910.168 [Reserved]", "OSHA", "", "", "", ""], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.13.37.2", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "M", "Subpart M\u2014Compressed Gas and Compressed Air Equipment", "", "\u00a7 1910.169 Air receivers.", "OSHA", "", "", "[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10, 1984; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996]", "(a)  General requirements \u2014(1)  Application.  This section applies to compressed air receivers, and other equipment used in providing and utilizing compressed air for performing operations such as cleaning, drilling, hoisting, and chipping. On the other hand, however, this section does not deal with the special problems created by using compressed air to convey materials nor the problems created when men work in compressed air as in tunnels and caissons. This section is not intended to apply to compressed air machinery and equipment used on transportation vehicles such as steam railroad cars, electric railway cars, and automotive equipment.\n\n(2)  New and existing equipment.  (i) All new air receivers installed after the effective date of these regulations shall be constructed in accordance with the 1968 edition of the A.S.M.E. Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(ii) All safety valves used shall be constructed, installed, and maintained in accordance with the A.S.M.E. Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII Edition 1968.\n\n(b)  Installation and equipment requirements \u2014(1)  Installation.  Air receivers shall be so installed that all drains, handholes, and manholes therein are easily accessible. Under no circumstances shall an air receiver be buried underground or located in an inaccessible place.\n\n(2)  Drains and traps.  A drain pipe and valve shall be installed at the lowest point of every air receiver to provide for the removal of accumulated oil and water. Adequate automatic traps may be installed in addition to drain valves. The drain valve on the air receiver shall be opened and the receiver completely drained frequently and at such intervals as to prevent the accumulation of excessive amounts of liquid in the receiver.\n\n(3)  Gages and valves.  (i) Every air receiver shall be equipped with an indicating pressure gage (so located as to be readily visible) and with one or more spring-loaded safety valves. The total relieving capacity of such safety valves shall be such as to prevent pressure in the receiver from exceeding the maximum allowable working pressure of the receiver by more than 10 percent.\n\n(ii) No valve of any type shall be placed between the air receiver and its safety valve or valves.\n\n(iii) Safety appliances, such as safety valves, indicating devices and controlling devices, shall be constructed, located, and installed so that they cannot be readily rendered inoperative by any means, including the elements.\n\n(iv) All safety valves shall be tested frequently and at regular intervals to determine whether they are in good operating condition."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.14.37.1", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "N", "Subpart N\u2014Materials Handling and Storage", "", "\u00a7 1910.176 Handling materials\u2014general.", "OSHA", "", "", "[39 FR 23052, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49749, Oct. 24, 1978]", "(a)  Use of mechanical equipment.  Where mechanical handling equipment is used, sufficient safe clearances shall be allowed for aisles, at loading docks, through doorways and wherever turns or passage must be made. Aisles and passageways shall be kept clear and in good repair, with no obstruction across or in aisles that could create a hazard. Permanent aisles and passageways shall be appropriately marked.\n\n(b)  Secure storage.  Storage of material shall not create a hazard. Bags, containers, bundles, etc., stored in tiers shall be stacked, blocked, interlocked and limited in height so that they are stable and secure against sliding or collapse.\n\n(c)  Housekeeping.  Storage areas shall be kept free from accumulation of materials that constitute hazards from tripping, fire, explosion, or pest harborage. Vegetation control will be exercised when necessary.\n\n(d) [Reserved]\n\n(e)  Clearance limits.  Clearance signs to warn of clearance limits shall be provided.\n\n(f)  Rolling railroad cars.  Derail and/or bumper blocks shall be provided on spur railroad tracks where a rolling car could contact other cars being worked, enter a building, work or traffic area.\n\n(g)  Guarding.  Covers and/or guardrails shall be provided to protect personnel from the hazards of open pits, tanks, vats, ditches, etc."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.14.37.2", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "N", "Subpart N\u2014Materials Handling and Storage", "", "\u00a7 1910.177 Servicing multi-piece and single piece rim wheels.", "OSHA", "", "", "[49 FR 4350, Feb. 3, 1984, as amended at 52 FR 36026, Sept. 25, 1987; 53 FR 34737, Sept. 8, 1988; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996; 76 FR 24698, May 2, 2011; 76 FR 80739, Dec. 27, 2011]", "(a)  Scope.  (1) This section applies to the servicing of multi-piece and single piece rim wheels used on large vehicles such as trucks, tractors, trailers, buses and off-road machines. It does not apply to the servicing of rim wheels used on automobiles, or on pickup trucks and vans utilizing automobile tires or truck tires designated \u201cLT\u201d.\n\n(2) This section does not apply to employers and places of employment regulated under the Longshoring Standards, 29 CFR part 1918; Construction Safety Standards, 29 CFR part 1926; or Agriculture Standards, 29 CFR part 1928.\n\n(3) All provisions of this section apply to the servicing of both single piece rim wheels and multi-piece rim wheels unless designated otherwise.\n\n(b)  Definitions. Barrier  means a fence, wall or other structure or object placed between a single piece rim wheel and an employee during tire inflation, to contain the rim wheel components in the event of the sudden release of the contained air of the single piece rim wheel.\n\nCharts  means the U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration publications entitled \u201cDemounting and Mounting Procedures for Tube-Type Truck and Bus Tires,\u201d \u201cDemounting and Mounting Procedures for Tubeless Truck and Bus Tires,\u201d and \u201cMulti-Piece Rim Matching Chart.\u201d These charts may be in manual or poster form. OSHA also will accept any other manual or poster that provides at least the same instructions, safety precautions, and other information contained in these publications, which is applicable to the types of wheels the employer is servicing.\n\nInstalling a rim wheel  means the transfer and attachment of an assembled rim wheel onto a vehicle axle hub.  Removing  means the opposite of installing.\n\nMounting a tire  means the assembly or putting together of the wheel and tire components to form a rim wheel, including inflation.  Demounting  means the opposite of mounting.\n\nMulti-piece rim wheel  means the assemblage of a multi-piece wheel with the tire tube and other components.\n\nMulti-piece wheel  means a vehicle wheel consisting of two or more parts, one of which is a side or locking ring designed to hold the tire on the wheel by interlocking components when the tire is inflated.\n\nRestraining device  means an apparatus such as a cage, rack, assemblage of bars and other components that will constrain all rim wheel components during an explosive separation of a multi-piece rim wheel, or during the sudden release of the contained air of a single piece rim wheel.\n\nRim manual  means a publication containing instructions from the manufacturer or other qualified organization for correct mounting, demounting, maintenance, and safety precautions peculiar to the type of wheel being serviced.\n\nRim wheel  means an assemblage of tire, tube and liner (where appropriate), and wheel components.\n\nService  or  servicing  means the mounting and demounting of rim wheels, and related activities such as inflating, deflating, installing, removing, and handling.\n\nService area  means that part of an employer's premises used for the servicing of rim wheels, or any other place where an employee services rim wheels.\n\nSingle piece rim wheel  means the assemblage of single piece rim wheel with the tire and other components.\n\nSingle piece wheel  means a vehicle wheel consisting of one part, designed to hold the tire on the wheel when the tire is inflated.\n\nTrajectory  means any potential path or route that a rim wheel component may travel during an explosive separation, or the sudden release of the pressurized air, or an area at which an airblast from a single piece rim wheel may be released. The trajectory may deviate from paths which are perpendicular to the assembled position of the rim wheel at the time of separation or explosion. (See appendix A for examples of trajectories.)\n\nWheel  means that portion of a rim wheel which provides the method of attachment of the assembly to the axle of a vehicle and also provides the means to contain the inflated portion of the assembly (i.e., the tire and/or tube).\n\n(c)  Employee training.  (1) The employer shall provide a program to train all employees who service rim wheels in the hazards involved in servicing those rim wheels and the safety procedures to be followed.\n\n(i) The employer shall assure that no employee services any rim wheel unless the employee has been trained and instructed in correct procedures of servicing the type of wheel being serviced, and in the safe operating procedures described in paragraphs (f) and (g) of this section.\n\n(ii) Information to be used in the training program shall include, at a minimum, the applicable data contained in the charts (rim manuals) and the contents of this standard.\n\n(iii) Where an employer knows or has reason to believe that any of his employees is unable to read and understand the charts or rim manual, the employer shall assure that the employee is instructed concerning the contents of the charts and rim manual in a manner which the employee is able to understand.\n\n(2) The employer shall assure that each employee demonstrates and maintains the ability to service rim wheels safely, including performance of the following tasks:\n\n(i) Demounting of tires (including deflation);\n\n(ii) Inspection and identification of the rim wheel components;\n\n(iii) Mounting of tires (including inflation with a restraining device or other safeguard required by this section);\n\n(iv) Use of the restraining device or barrier, and other equipment required by this section;\n\n(v) Handling of rim wheels;\n\n(vi) Inflation of the tire when a single piece rim wheel is mounted on a vehicle;\n\n(vii) An understanding of the necessity of standing outside the trajectory both during inflation of the tire and during inspection of the rim wheel following inflation; and\n\n(viii) Installation and removal of rim wheels.\n\n(3) The employer shall evaluate each employee's ability to perform these tasks and to service rim wheels safely, and shall provide additional training as necessary to assure that each employee maintains his or her proficiency.\n\n(d)  Tire servicing equipment.  (1) The employer shall furnish a restraining device for inflating tires on multi-piece wheels.\n\n(2) The employer shall provide a restraining device or barrier for inflating tires on single piece wheels unless the rim wheel will be bolted onto a vehicle during inflation.\n\n(3) Restraining devices and barriers shall comply with the following requirements:\n\n(i) Each restraining device or barrier shall have the capacity to withstand the maximum force that would be transferred to it during a rim wheel separation occurring at 150 percent of the maximum tire specification pressure for the type of rim wheel being serviced.\n\n(ii) Restraining devices and barriers shall be capable of preventing the rim wheel components from being thrown outside or beyond the device or barrier for any rim wheel positioned within or behind the device;\n\n(iii) Restraining devices and barriers shall be visually inspected prior to each day's use and after any separation of the rim wheel components or sudden release of contained air. Any restraining device or barrier exhibiting damage such as the following defects shall be immediately removed from service:\n\n(A) Cracks at welds;\n\n(B) Cracked or broken components;\n\n(C) Bent or sprung components caused by mishandling, abuse, tire explosion or rim wheel separation;\n\n(D) Pitting of components due to corrosion; or\n\n(E) Other structural damage which would decrease its effectiveness.\n\n(iv) Restraining devices or barriers removed from service shall not be returned to service until they are repaired and reinspected. Restraining devices or barriers requiring structural repair such as component replacement or rewelding shall not be returned to service until they are certified by either the manufacturer or a Registered Professional Engineer as meeting the strength requirements of paragraph (d)(3)(i) of this section.\n\n(4) The employer shall furnish and assure that an air line assembly consisting of the following components be used for inflating tires:\n\n(i) A clip-on chuck;\n\n(ii) An in-line valve with a pressure gauge or a presettable regulator; and\n\n(iii) A sufficient length of hose between the clip-on chuck and the in-line valve (if one is used) to allow the employee to stand outside the trajectory.\n\n(5) Current charts or rim manuals containing instructions for the type of wheels being serviced shall be available in the service area.\n\n(6) The employer shall furnish and assure that only tools recommended in the rim manual for the type of wheel being serviced are used to service rim wheels.\n\n(e)  Wheel component acceptability.  (1) Multi-piece wheel components shall not be interchanged except as provided in the charts or in the applicable rim manual.\n\n(2) Multi-piece wheel components and single piece wheels shall be inspected prior to assembly. Any wheel or wheel component which is bent out of shape, pitted from corrosion, broken, or cracked shall not be used and shall be marked or tagged unserviceable and removed from the service area. Damaged or leaky valves shall be replaced.\n\n(3) Rim flanges, rim gutters, rings, bead seating surfaces and the bead areas of tires shall be free of any dirt, surface rust, scale or loose or flaked rubber build-up prior to mounting and inflation.\n\n(4) The size (bead diameter and tire/wheel widths) and type of both the tire and the wheel shall be checked for compatibility prior to assembly of the rim wheel.\n\n(f)  Safe operating procedure\u2014multi-piece rim wheels.  The employer shall establish a safe operating procedure for servicing multi-piece rim wheels and shall assure that employees are instructed in and follow that procedure. The procedure shall include at least the following elements:\n\n(1) Tires shall be completely deflated before demounting by removal of the valve core.\n\n(2) Tires shall be completely deflated by removing the valve core before a rim wheel is removed from the axle in either of the following situations:\n\n(i) When the tire has been driven underinflated at 80% or less of its recommended pressure, or\n\n(ii) When there is obvious or suspected damage to the tire or wheel components.\n\n(3) Rubber lubricant shall be applied to bead and rim mating surfaces during assembly of the wheel and inflation of the tire, unless the tire or wheel manufacturer recommends against it.\n\n(4) If a tire on a vehicle is underinflated but has more than 80% of the recommended pressure, the tire may be inflated while the rim wheel is on the vehicle provided remote control inflation equipment is used, and no employees remain in the trajectory during inflation.\n\n(5) Tires shall be inflated outside a restraining device only to a pressure sufficient to force the tire bead onto the rim ledge and create an airtight seal with the tire and bead.\n\n(6) Whenever a rim wheel is in a restraining device the employee shall not rest or lean any part of his body or equipment on or against the restraining device.\n\n(7) After tire inflation, the tire and wheel components shall be inspected while still within the restraining device to make sure that they are properly seated and locked. If further adjustment to the tire or wheel components is necessary, the tire shall be deflated by removal of the valve core before the adjustment is made.\n\n(8) No attempt shall be made to correct the seating of side and lock rings by hammering, striking or forcing the components while the tire is pressurized.\n\n(9) Cracked, broken, bent or otherwise damaged rim components shall not be reworked, welded, brazed, or otherwise heated.\n\n(10) Whenever multi-piece rim wheels are being handled, employees shall stay out of the trajectory unless the employer can demonstrate that performance of the servicing makes the employee's presence in the trajectory necessary.\n\n(11) No heat shall be applied to a multi-piece wheel or wheel component.\n\n(g)  Safe operating procedure\u2014single piece rim wheels.  The employer shall establish a safe operating procedure for servicing single piece rim wheels and shall assure that employees are instructed in and follow that procedure. The procedure shall include at least the following elements:\n\n(1) Tires shall be completely deflated by removal of the valve core before demounting.\n\n(2) Mounting and demounting of the tire shall be done only from the narrow ledge side of the wheel. Care shall be taken to avoid damaging the tire beads while mounting tires on wheels. Tires shall be mounted only on compatible wheels of matching bead diameter and width.\n\n(3) Nonflammable rubber lubricant shall be applied to bead and wheel mating surfaces before assembly of the rim wheel, unless the tire or wheel manufacturer recommends against the use of any rubber lubricant.\n\n(4) If a tire changing machine is used, the tire shall be inflated only to the minimum pressure necessary to force the tire bead onto the rim ledge while on the tire changing machine.\n\n(5) If a bead expander is used, it shall be removed before the valve core is installed and as soon as the rim wheel becomes airtight (the tire bead slips onto the bead seat).\n\n(6) Tires may be inflated only when contained within a restraining device, positioned behind a barrier or bolted on the vehicle with the lug nuts fully tightened.\n\n(7) Tires shall not be inflated when any flat, solid surface is in the trajectory and within one foot of the sidewall.\n\n(8) Employees shall stay out of the trajectory when inflating a tire.\n\n(9) Tires shall not be inflated to more than the inflation pressure stamped in the sidewall unless a higher pressure is recommended by the manufacturer.\n\n(10) Tires shall not be inflated above the maximum pressure recommended by the manufacturer to seat the tire bead firmly against the rim flange.\n\n(11) No heat shall be applied to a single piece wheel.\n\n(12) Cracked, broken, bent, or otherwise damaged wheels shall not be reworked, welded, brazed, or otherwise heated.\n\nAppendix B to \u00a7 1910.177\u2014Ordering Information for the OSHA Charts\n \n The information on the OSHA charts is available on three posters, or in a manual containing the three charts, entitled \u201cDemounting and Mounting Procedures for Tubeless Truck and Bus Tires,\u201d \u201cDemounting and Mounting Procedures for Tube-Type Truck and Bus Tires,\u201d and \u201cMulti-piece Rim Matching Chart.\u201d Interested parties can download and print both the manuals and posters from OSHA's Web site at  http://www.osha.gov/publications  (and type \u201ctire chart\u201d in the search field). However, when used by the employer at a worksite to provide information to employees, the printed posters must be, at a minimum, 2 feet wide and 3 feet long. Copies of the manual also are available from the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA Office of Publications, Room N-3101, U.S. Department of Labor, 200 Constitution Avenue NW., Washington, DC 20210; telephone: (202) 693-1888; or fax: (202) 693-2498).\n\nThe information on the OSHA charts is available on three posters, or in a manual containing the three charts, entitled \u201cDemounting and Mounting Procedures for Tubeless Truck and Bus Tires,\u201d \u201cDemounting and Mounting Procedures for Tube-Type Truck and Bus Tires,\u201d and \u201cMulti-piece Rim Matching Chart.\u201d Interested parties can download and print both the manuals and posters from OSHA's Web site at  http://www.osha.gov/publications  (and type \u201ctire chart\u201d in the search field). However, when used by the employer at a worksite to provide information to employees, the printed posters must be, at a minimum, 2 feet wide and 3 feet long. Copies of the manual also are available from the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA Office of Publications, Room N-3101, U.S. Department of Labor, 200 Constitution Avenue NW., Washington, DC 20210; telephone: (202) 693-1888; or fax: (202) 693-2498)."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.14.37.3", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "N", "Subpart N\u2014Materials Handling and Storage", "", "\u00a7 1910.178 Powered industrial trucks.", "OSHA", "", "", "[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40 FR 23073, May 28, 1975; 43 FR 49749, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10, 1984; 53 FR 12122, Apr. 12, 1988; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 66270, Dec. 1, 1998; 68 FR 32638, June 2, 2003; 71 FR 16672, Apr. 3, 2006; 81 FR 83005, Nov. 18, 2016]", "(a)  General requirements.  (1) This section contains safety requirements relating to fire protection, design, maintenance, and use of fork trucks, tractors, platform lift trucks, motorized hand trucks, and other specialized industrial trucks powered by electric motors or internal combustion engines. This section does not apply to compressed air or nonflammable compressed gas-operated industrial trucks, nor to farm vehicles, nor to vehicles intended primarily for earth moving or over-the-road hauling.\n\n(2) All new powered industrial trucks acquired and used by an employer shall meet the design and construction requirements for powered industrial trucks established in the \u201cAmerican National Standard for Powered Industrial Trucks, Part II, ANSI B56.1-1969\u201d, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6, except for vehicles intended primarily for earth moving or over-the-road hauling.\n\n(3) Approved trucks shall bear a label or some other identifying mark indicating approval by the testing laboratory. See paragraph (a)(7) of this section and paragraph 405 of \u201cAmerican National Standard for Powered Industrial Trucks, Part II, ANSI B56.1-1969\u201d, which is incorporated by reference in paragraph (a)(2) of this section and which provides that if the powered industrial truck is accepted by a nationally recognized testing laboratory it should be so marked.\n\n(4) Modifications and additions which affect capacity and safe operation shall not be performed by the customer or user without manufacturers prior written approval. Capacity, operation, and maintenance instruction plates, tags, or decals shall be changed accordingly.\n\n(5) If the truck is equipped with front-end attachments other than factory installed attachments, the user shall request that the truck be marked to identify the attachments and show the approximate weight of the truck and attachment combination at maximum elevation with load laterally centered.\n\n(6) The user shall see that all nameplates and markings are in place and are maintained in a legible condition.\n\n(7) As used in this section, the term,  approved truck  or  approved industrial truck  means a truck that is listed or approved for fire safety purposes for the intended use by a nationally recognized testing laboratory, using nationally recognized testing standards. Refer to \u00a7 1910.155(c)(3)(iv)(A) for definition of listed, and to \u00a7 1910.7 for definition of nationally recognized testing laboratory.\n\n(b)  Designations.  For the purpose of this standard there are eleven different designations of industrial trucks or tractors as follows: D, DS, DY, E, ES, EE, EX, G, GS, LP, and LPS.\n\n(1) The D designated units are units similar to the G units except that they are diesel engine powered instead of gasoline engine powered.\n\n(2) The DS designated units are diesel powered units that are provided with additional safeguards to the exhaust, fuel and electrical systems. They may be used in some locations where a D unit may not be considered suitable.\n\n(3) The DY designated units are diesel powered units that have all the safeguards of the DS units and in addition do not have any electrical equipment including the ignition and are equipped with temperature limitation features.\n\n(4) The E designated units are electrically powered units that have minimum acceptable safeguards against inherent fire hazards.\n\n(5) The ES designated units are electrically powered units that, in addition to all of the requirements for the E units, are provided with additional safeguards to the electrical system to prevent emission of hazardous sparks and to limit surface temperatures. They may be used in some locations where the use of an E unit may not be considered suitable.\n\n(6) The EE designated units are electrically powered units that have, in addition to all of the requirements for the E and ES units, the electric motors and all other electrical equipment completely enclosed. In certain locations the EE unit may be used where the use of an E and ES unit may not be considered suitable.\n\n(7) The EX designated units are electrically powered units that differ from the E, ES, or EE units in that the electrical fittings and equipment are so designed, constructed and assembled that the units may be used in certain atmospheres containing flammable vapors or dusts.\n\n(8) The G designated units are gasoline powered units having minimum acceptable safeguards against inherent fire hazards.\n\n(9) The GS designated units are gasoline powered units that are provided with additional safeguards to the exhaust, fuel, and electrical systems. They may be used in some locations where the use of a G unit may not be considered suitable.\n\n(10) The LP designated unit is similar to the G unit except that liquefied petroleum gas is used for fuel instead of gasoline.\n\n(11) The LPS designated units are liquefied petroleum gas powered units that are provided with additional safeguards to the exhaust, fuel, and electrical systems. They may be used in some locations where the use of an LP unit may not be considered suitable.\n\n(12) The atmosphere or location shall have been classified as to whether it is hazardous or nonhazardous prior to the consideration of industrial trucks being used therein and the type of industrial truck required shall be as provided in paragraph (d) of this section for such location.\n\n(c)  Designated locations.  (1) The industrial trucks specified under subparagraph (2) of this paragraph are the minimum types required but industrial trucks having greater safeguards may be used if desired.\n\n(2) For specific areas of use, see Table N-1 which tabulates the information contained in this section. References are to the corresponding classification as used in subpart S of this part.\n\n(i) Power-operated industrial trucks shall not be used in atmospheres containing hazardous concentration of acetylene, butadiene, ethylene oxide, hydrogen (or gases or vapors equivalent in hazard to hydrogen, such as manufactured gas), propylene oxide, acetaldehyde, cyclopropane, diethyl ether, ethylene, isoprene, or unsymmetrical dimethyl hydrazine (UDMH).\n\n(ii)( a ) Power-operated industrial trucks shall not be used in atmospheres containing hazardous concentrations of metal dust, including aluminum, magnesium, and their commercial alloys, other metals of similarly hazardous characteristics, or in atmospheres containing carbon black, coal or coke dust except approved power-operated industrial trucks designated as EX may be used in such atmospheres.\n\n( b ) In atmospheres where dust of magnesium, aluminum or aluminum bronze may be present, fuses, switches, motor controllers, and circuit breakers of trucks shall have enclosures specifically approved for such locations.\n\n(iii) Only approved power-operated industrial trucks designated as EX may be used in atmospheres containing acetone, acrylonitrile, alcohol, ammonia, benzine, benzol, butane, ethylene dichloride, gasoline, hexane, lacquer solvent vapors, naphtha, natural gas, propane, propylene, styrene, vinyl acetate, vinyl chloride, or xylenes in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitable mixtures and where such concentrations of these gases or vapors exist continuously, intermittently or periodically under normal operating conditions or may exist frequently because of repair, maintenance operations, leakage, breakdown or faulty operation of equipment.\n\n(iv) Power-operated industrial trucks designated as DY, EE, or EX may be used in locations where volatile flammable liquids or flammable gases are handled, processed or used, but in which the hazardous liquids, vapors or gases will normally be confined within closed containers or closed systems from which they can escape only in case of accidental rupture or breakdown of such containers or systems, or in the case of abnormal operation of equipment; also in locations in which hazardous concentrations of gases or vapors are normally prevented by positive mechanical ventilation but which might become hazardous through failure or abnormal operation of the ventilating equipment; or in locations which are adjacent to Class I, Division 1 locations, and to which hazardous concentrations of gases or vapors might occasionally be communicated unless such communication is prevented by adequate positive-pressure ventilation from a source of clear air, and effective safeguards against ventilation failure are provided.\n\nTable N-1\u2014Summary Table on Use of Industrial Trucks in Various Locations\n\nTable N-1\u2014Summary Table on Use of Industrial Trucks in Various Locations\u2014Continued\n\n**Trucks conforming to these types may also be used\u2014see subdivision (c)(2)(x) and (c)(2)(xii) of this section.\n\n(v) In locations used for the storage of hazardous liquids in sealed containers or liquefied or compressed gases in containers, approved power-operated industrial trucks designated as DS, ES, GS, or LPS may be used. This classification includes locations where volatile flammable liquids or flammable gases or vapors are used, but which, would become hazardous only in case of an accident or of some unusual operating condition. The quantity of hazardous material that might escape in case of accident, the adequacy of ventilating equipment, the total area involved, and the record of the industry or business with respect to explosions or fires are all factors that should receive consideration in determining whether or not the DS or DY, ES, EE, GS, LPS designated truck possesses sufficient safeguards for the location. Piping without valves, checks, meters and similar devices would not ordinarily be deemed to introduce a hazardous condition even though used for hazardous liquids or gases. Locations used for the storage of hazardous liquids or of liquified or compressed gases in sealed containers would not normally be considered hazardous unless subject to other hazardous conditions also.\n\n(vi)( a ) Only approved power operated industrial trucks designated as EX shall be used in atmospheres in which combustible dust is or may be in suspension continuously, intermittently, or periodically under normal operating conditions, in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitable mixtures, or where mechanical failure or abnormal operation of machinery or equipment might cause such mixtures to be produced.\n\n( b ) The EX classification usually includes the working areas of grain handling and storage plants, room containing grinders or pulverizers, cleaners, graders, scalpers, open conveyors or spouts, open bins or hoppers, mixers, or blenders, automatic or hopper scales, packing machinery, elevator heads and boots, stock distributors, dust and stock collectors (except all-metal collectors vented to the outside), and all similar dust producing machinery and equipment in grain processing plants, starch plants, sugar pulverizing plants, malting plants, hay grinding plants, and other occupancies of similar nature; coal pulverizing plants (except where the pulverizing equipment is essentially dust tight); all working areas where metal dusts and powders are produced, processed, handled, packed, or stored (except in tight containers); and other similar locations where combustible dust may, under normal operating conditions, be present in the air in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitable mixtures.\n\n(vii) Only approved power-operated industrial trucks designated as DY, EE, or EX shall be used in atmospheres in which combustible dust will not normally be in suspension in the air or will not be likely to be thrown into suspension by the normal operation of equipment or apparatus in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitable mixtures but where deposits or accumulations of such dust may be ignited by arcs or sparks originating in the truck.\n\n(viii) Only approved power-operated industrial trucks designated as DY, EE, or EX shall be used in locations which are hazardous because of the presence of easily ignitable fibers or flyings but in which such fibers or flyings are not likely to be in suspension in the air in quantities sufficient to produce ignitable mixtures.\n\n(ix) Only approved power-operated industrial trucks designated as DS, DY, ES, EE, EX, GS, or LPS shall be used in locations where easily ignitable fibers are stored or handled, including outside storage, but are not being processed or manufactured. Industrial trucks designated as E, which have been previously used in these locations may be continued in use.\n\n(x) On piers and wharves handling general cargo, any approved power-operated industrial truck designated as Type D, E, G, or LP may be used, or trucks which conform to the requirements for these types may be used.\n\n(xi) If storage warehouses and outside storage locations are hazardous only the approved power-operated industrial truck specified for such locations in this paragraph (c)(2) shall be used. If not classified as hazardous, any approved power-operated industrial truck designated as Type D, E, G, or LP may be used, or trucks which conform to the requirements for these types may be used.\n\n(xii) If general industrial or commercial properties are hazardous, only approved power-operated industrial trucks specified for such locations in this paragraph (c)(2) shall be used. If not classified as hazardous, any approved power-operated industrial truck designated as Type D, E, G, or LP may be used, or trucks which conform to the requirements of these types may be used.\n\n(d)  Converted industrial trucks.  Power-operated industrial trucks that have been originally approved for the use of gasoline for fuel, when converted to the use of liquefied petroleum gas fuel in accordance with paragraph (q) of this section, may be used in those locations where G, GS or LP, and LPS designated trucks have been specified in the preceding paragraphs.\n\n(e)  Safety guards.  (1) High Lift Rider trucks shall be fitted with an overhead guard manufactured in accordance with paragraph (a)(2) of this section, unless operating conditions do not permit.\n\n(2) If the type of load presents a hazard, the user shall equip fork trucks with a vertical load backrest extension manufactured in accordance with paragraph (a)(2) of this section.\n\n(f)  Fuel handling and storage.  (1) The storage and handling of liquid fuels such as gasoline and diesel fuel shall be in accordance with NFPA Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code (NFPA No. 30-1969), which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(2) The storage and handling of liquefied petroleum gas fuel shall be in accordance with NFPA Storage and Handling of Liquefied Petroleum Gases (NFPA No. 58-1969), which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(g)  Changing and charging storage batteries.  (1) Battery charging installations shall be located in areas designated for that purpose.\n\n(2) Facilities shall be provided for flushing and neutralizing spilled electrolyte, for fire protection, for protecting charging apparatus from damage by trucks, and for adequate ventilation for dispersal of fumes from gassing batteries.\n\n(3) [Reserved]\n\n(4) A conveyor, overhead hoist, or equivalent material handling equipment shall be provided for handling batteries.\n\n(5) Reinstalled batteries shall be properly positioned and secured in the truck.\n\n(6) A carboy tilter or siphon shall be provided for handling electrolyte.\n\n(7) When charging batteries, acid shall be poured into water; water shall not be poured into acid.\n\n(8) Trucks shall be properly positioned and brake applied before attempting to change or charge batteries.\n\n(9) Care shall be taken to assure that vent caps are functioning. The battery (or compartment) cover(s) shall be open to dissipate heat.\n\n(10) Smoking shall be prohibited in the charging area.\n\n(11) Precautions shall be taken to prevent open flames, sparks, or electric arcs in battery charging areas.\n\n(12) Tools and other metallic objects shall be kept away from the top of uncovered batteries.\n\n(h)  Lighting for operating areas.  (1) [Reserved]\n\n(2) Where general lighting is less than 2 lumens per square foot, auxiliary directional lighting shall be provided on the truck.\n\n(i)  Control of noxious gases and fumes.  (1) Concentration levels of carbon monoxide gas created by powered industrial truck operations shall not exceed the levels specified in \u00a7 1910.1000.\n\n(j)  Dockboards (bridge plates).  See subpart D of this part.\n\n(k)  Trucks and railroad cars.  (1) The brakes of highway trucks shall be set and wheel chocks placed under the rear wheels to prevent the trucks from rolling while they are boarded with powered industrial trucks.\n\n(2) Wheel stops or other recognized positive protection shall be provided to prevent railroad cars from moving during loading or unloading operations.\n\n(3) Fixed jacks may be necessary to support a semitrailer and prevent upending during the loading or unloading when the trailer is not coupled to a tractor.\n\n(4) Positive protection shall be provided to prevent railroad cars from being moved while dockboards or bridge plates are in position.\n\n(l) Operator training. (1)  Safe operation.  (i) The employer shall ensure that each powered industrial truck operator is competent to operate a powered industrial truck safely, as demonstrated by the successful completion of the training and evaluation specified in this paragraph (l).\n\n(ii) Prior to permitting an employee to operate a powered industrial truck (except for training purposes), the employer shall ensure that each operator has successfully completed the training required by this paragraph (l), except as permitted by paragraph (l)(5).\n\n(2)  Training program implementation.  (i) Trainees may operate a powered industrial truck only:\n\n(A) Under the direct supervision of persons who have the knowledge, training, and experience to train operators and evaluate their competence; and\n\n(B) Where such operation does not endanger the trainee or other employees.\n\n(ii) Training shall consist of a combination of formal instruction (e.g., lecture, discussion, interactive computer learning, video tape, written material), practical training (demonstrations performed by the trainer and practical exercises performed by the trainee), and evaluation of the operator's performance in the workplace.\n\n(iii) All operator training and evaluation shall be conducted by persons who have the knowledge, training, and experience to train powered industrial truck operators and evaluate their competence.\n\n(3)  Training program content.  Powered industrial truck operators shall receive initial training in the following topics, except in topics which the employer can demonstrate are not applicable to safe operation of the truck in the employer's workplace.\n\n(i) Truck-related topics:\n\n(A) Operating instructions, warnings, and precautions for the types of truck the operator will be authorized to operate;\n\n(B) Differences between the truck and the automobile;\n\n(C) Truck controls and instrumentation: where they are located, what they do, and how they work;\n\n(D) Engine or motor operation;\n\n(E) Steering and maneuvering;\n\n(F) Visibility (including restrictions due to loading);\n\n(G) Fork and attachment adaptation, operation, and use limitations;\n\n(H) Vehicle capacity;\n\n(I) Vehicle stability;\n\n(J) Any vehicle inspection and maintenance that the operator will be required to perform;\n\n(K) Refueling and/or charging and recharging of batteries;\n\n(L) Operating limitations;\n\n(M) Any other operating instructions, warnings, or precautions listed in the operator's manual for the types of vehicle that the employee is being trained to operate.\n\n(ii) Workplace-related topics:\n\n(A) Surface conditions where the vehicle will be operated;\n\n(B) Composition of loads to be carried and load stability;\n\n(C) Load manipulation, stacking, and unstacking;\n\n(D) Pedestrian traffic in areas where the vehicle will be operated;\n\n(E) Narrow aisles and other restricted places where the vehicle will be operated;\n\n(F) Hazardous (classified) locations where the vehicle will be operated;\n\n(G) Ramps and other sloped surfaces that could affect the vehicle's stability;\n\n(H) Closed environments and other areas where insufficient ventilation or poor vehicle maintenance could cause a buildup of carbon monoxide or diesel exhaust;\n\n(I) Other unique or potentially hazardous environmental conditions in the workplace that could affect safe operation.\n\n(iii) The requirements of this section.\n\n(4)  Refresher training and evaluation.  (i) Refresher training, including an evaluation of the effectiveness of that training, shall be conducted as required by paragraph (l)(4)(ii) to ensure that the operator has the knowledge and skills needed to operate the powered industrial truck safely.\n\n(ii) Refresher training in relevant topics shall be provided to the operator when:\n\n(A) The operator has been observed to operate the vehicle in an unsafe manner;\n\n(B) The operator has been involved in an accident or near-miss incident;\n\n(C) The operator has received an evaluation that reveals that the operator is not operating the truck safely;\n\n(D) The operator is assigned to drive a different type of truck; or\n\n(E) A condition in the workplace changes in a manner that could affect safe operation of the truck.\n\n(iii) An evaluation of each powered industrial truck operator's performance shall be conducted at least once every three years.\n\n(5)  Avoidance of duplicative training.  If an operator has previously received training in a topic specified in paragraph (l)(3) of this section, and such training is appropriate to the truck and working conditions encountered, additional training in that topic is not required if the operator has been evaluated and found competent to operate the truck safely.\n\n(6)  Certification.  The employer shall certify that each operator has been trained and evaluated as required by this paragraph (l). The certification shall include the name of the operator, the date of the training, the date of the evaluation, and the identity of the person(s) performing the training or evaluation.\n\n(7)  Dates.  The employer shall ensure that operators of powered industrial trucks are trained, as appropriate, by the dates shown in the following table.\n\n(8) Appendix A to this section provides non-mandatory guidance to assist employers in implementing this paragraph (l). This appendix does not add to, alter, or reduce the requirements of this section.\n\n(m)  Truck operations.  (1) Trucks shall not be driven up to anyone standing in front of a bench or other fixed object.\n\n(2) No person shall be allowed to stand or pass under the elevated portion of any truck, whether loaded or empty.\n\n(3) Unauthorized personnel shall not be permitted to ride on powered industrial trucks. A safe place to ride shall be provided where riding of trucks is authorized.\n\n(4) The employer shall prohibit arms or legs from being placed between the uprights of the mast or outside the running lines of the truck.\n\n(5)(i) When a powered industrial truck is left unattended, load engaging means shall be fully lowered, controls shall be neutralized, power shall be shut off, and brakes set. Wheels shall be blocked if the truck is parked on an incline.\n\n(ii) A powered industrial truck is unattended when the operator is 25 ft. or more away from the vehicle which remains in his view, or whenever the operator leaves the vehicle and it is not in his view.\n\n(iii) When the operator of an industrial truck is dismounted and within 25 ft. of the truck still in his view, the load engaging means shall be fully lowered, controls neutralized, and the brakes set to prevent movement.\n\n(6) A safe distance shall be maintained from the edge of ramps or platforms while on any elevated dock, or platform or freight car. Trucks shall not be used for opening or closing freight doors.\n\n(7) Brakes shall be set and wheel blocks shall be in place to prevent movement of trucks, trailers, or railroad cars while loading or unloading. Fixed jacks may be necessary to support a semitrailer during loading or unloading when the trailer is not coupled to a tractor. The flooring of trucks, trailers, and railroad cars shall be checked for breaks and weakness before they are driven onto.\n\n(8) There shall be sufficient headroom under overhead installations, lights, pipes, sprinkler system, etc.\n\n(9) An overhead guard shall be used as protection against falling objects. It should be noted that an overhead guard is intended to offer protection from the impact of small packages, boxes, bagged material, etc., representative of the job application, but not to withstand the impact of a falling capacity load.\n\n(10) A load backrest extension shall be used whenever necessary to minimize the possibility of the load or part of it from falling rearward.\n\n(11) Only approved industrial trucks shall be used in hazardous locations.\n\n(12)-(13) [Reserved]\n\n(14) Fire aisles, access to stairways, and fire equipment shall be kept clear.\n\n(n)  Traveling.  (1) All traffic regulations shall be observed, including authorized plant speed limits. A safe distance shall be maintained approximately three truck lengths from the truck ahead, and the truck shall be kept under control at all times.\n\n(2) The right of way shall be yielded to ambulances, fire trucks, or other vehicles in emergency situations.\n\n(3) Other trucks traveling in the same direction at intersections, blind spots, or other dangerous locations shall not be passed.\n\n(4) The driver shall be required to slow down and sound the horn at cross aisles and other locations where vision is obstructed. If the load being carried obstructs forward view, the driver shall be required to travel with the load trailing.\n\n(5) Railroad tracks shall be crossed diagonally wherever possible. Parking closer than 8 feet from the center of railroad tracks is prohibited.\n\n(6) The driver shall be required to look in the direction of, and keep a clear view of the path of travel.\n\n(7) Grades shall be ascended or descended slowly.\n\n(i) When ascending or descending grades in excess of 10 percent, loaded trucks shall be driven with the load upgrade.\n\n(ii) [Reserved]\n\n(iii) On all grades the load and load engaging means shall be tilted back if applicable, and raised only as far as necessary to clear the road surface.\n\n(8) Under all travel conditions the truck shall be operated at a speed that will permit it to be brought to a stop in a safe manner.\n\n(9) Stunt driving and horseplay shall not be permitted.\n\n(10) The driver shall be required to slow down for wet and slippery floors.\n\n(11) Dockboard or bridgeplates, shall be properly secured before they are driven over. Dockboard or bridgeplates shall be driven over carefully and slowly and their rated capacity never exceeded.\n\n(12) Elevators shall be approached slowly, and then entered squarely after the elevator car is properly leveled. Once on the elevator, the controls shall be neutralized, power shut off, and the brakes set.\n\n(13) Motorized hand trucks must enter elevator or other confined areas with load end forward.\n\n(14) Running over loose objects on the roadway surface shall be avoided.\n\n(15) While negotiating turns, speed shall be reduced to a safe level by means of turning the hand steering wheel in a smooth, sweeping motion. Except when maneuvering at a very low speed, the hand steering wheel shall be turned at a moderate, even rate.\n\n(o)  Loading.  (1) Only stable or safely arranged loads shall be handled. Caution shall be exercised when handling off-center loads which cannot be centered.\n\n(2) Only loads within the rated capacity of the truck shall be handled.\n\n(3) The long or high (including multiple-tiered) loads which may affect capacity shall be adjusted.\n\n(4) Trucks equipped with attachments shall be operated as partially loaded trucks when not handling a load.\n\n(5) A load engaging means shall be placed under the load as far as possible; the mast shall be carefully tilted backward to stabilize the load.\n\n(6) Extreme care shall be used when tilting the load forward or backward, particularly when high tiering. Tilting forward with load engaging means elevated shall be prohibited except to pick up a load. An elevated load shall not be tilted forward except when the load is in a deposit position over a rack or stack. When stacking or tiering, only enough backward tilt to stabilize the load shall be used.\n\n(p)  Operation of the truck.  (1) If at any time a powered industrial truck is found to be in need of repair, defective, or in any way unsafe, the truck shall be taken out of service until it has been restored to safe operating condition.\n\n(2) Fuel tanks shall not be filled while the engine is running. Spillage shall be avoided.\n\n(3) Spillage of oil or fuel shall be carefully washed away or completely evaporated and the fuel tank cap replaced before restarting engine.\n\n(4) No truck shall be operated with a leak in the fuel system until the leak has been corrected.\n\n(5) Open flames shall not be used for checking electrolyte level in storage batteries or gasoline level in fuel tanks.\n\n(q)  Maintenance of industrial trucks.  (1) Any power-operated industrial truck not in safe operating condition shall be removed from service. All repairs shall be made by authorized personnel.\n\n(2) No repairs shall be made in Class I, II, and III locations.\n\n(3) Those repairs to the fuel and ignition systems of industrial trucks which involve fire hazards shall be conducted only in locations designated for such repairs.\n\n(4) Trucks in need of repairs to the electrical system shall have the battery disconnected prior to such repairs.\n\n(5) All parts of any such industrial truck requiring replacement shall be replaced only by parts equivalent as to safety with those used in the original design.\n\n(6) Industrial trucks shall not be altered so that the relative positions of the various parts are different from what they were when originally received from the manufacturer, nor shall they be altered either by the addition of extra parts not provided by the manufacturer or by the elimination of any parts, except as provided in paragraph (q)(12) of this section. Additional counterweighting of fork trucks shall not be done unless approved by the truck manufacturer.\n\n(7) Industrial trucks shall be examined before being placed in service, and shall not be placed in service if the examination shows any condition adversely affecting the safety of the vehicle. Such examination shall be made at least daily.\n\nWhere industrial trucks are used on a round-the-clock basis, they shall be examined after each shift. Defects when found shall be immediately reported and corrected.\n\n(8) Water mufflers shall be filled daily or as frequently as is necessary to prevent depletion of the supply of water below 75 percent of the filled capacity. Vehicles with mufflers having screens or other parts that may become clogged shall not be operated while such screens or parts are clogged. Any vehicle that emits hazardous sparks or flames from the exhaust system shall immediately be removed from service, and not returned to service until the cause for the emission of such sparks and flames has been eliminated.\n\n(9) When the temperature of any part of any truck is found to be in excess of its normal operating temperature, thus creating a hazardous condition, the vehicle shall be removed from service and not returned to service until the cause for such overheating has been eliminated.\n\n(10) Industrial trucks shall be kept in a clean condition, free of lint, excess oil, and grease. Noncombustible agents should be used for cleaning trucks. Low flash point (below 100 \u00b0F.) solvents shall not be used. High flash point (at or above 100 \u00b0F.) solvents may be used. Precautions regarding toxicity, ventilation, and fire hazard shall be consonant with the agent or solvent used.\n\n(11) [Reserved]\n\n(12) Industrial trucks originally approved for the use of gasoline for fuel may be converted to liquefied petroleum gas fuel provided the complete conversion results in a truck which embodies the features specified for LP or LPS designated trucks. Such conversion equipment shall be approved. The description of the component parts of this conversion system and the recommended method of installation on specific trucks are contained in the \u201cListed by Report.\u201d\n\nAppendix A to \u00a7 1910.178\u2014Stability of Powered Industrial Trucks (Non-mandatory Appendix to Paragraph ( l ) of This Section)\n \n A-1. Definitions.  The following definitions help to explain the principle of stability:\n \n Center of gravity  is the point on an object at which all of the object's weight is concentrated. For symmetrical loads, the center of gravity is at the middle of the load.\n \n Counterweight  is the weight that is built into the truck's basic structure and is used to offset the load's weight and to maximize the vehicle's resistance to tipping over.\n \n Fulcrum  is the truck's axis of rotation when it tips over.\n \n Grade  is the slope of a surface, which is usually measured as the number of feet of rise or fall over a hundred foot horizontal distance (the slope is expressed as a percent).\n \n Lateral stability  is a truck's resistance to overturning sideways.\n \n Line of action  is an imaginary vertical line through an object's center of gravity.\n \n Load center  is the horizontal distance from the load's edge (or the fork's or other attachment's vertical face) to the line of action through the load's center of gravity.\n \n Longitudinal stability  is the truck's resistance to overturning forward or rearward.\n \n Moment  is the product of the object's weight times the distance from a fixed point (usually the fulcrum). In the case of a powered industrial truck, the distance is measured from the point at which the truck will tip over to the object's line of action. The distance is always measured perpendicular to the line of action.\n \n Track  is the distance between the wheels on the same axle of the truck.\n \n Wheelbase  is the distance between the centerline of the vehicle's front and rear wheels.\n \n A-2.  General. \n \n A-2.1. Determining the stability of a powered industrial truck is simple once a few basic principles are understood. There are many factors that contribute to a vehicle's stability: the vehicle's wheelbase, track, and height; the load's weight distribution; and the vehicle's counterweight location (if the vehicle is so equipped).\n \n A-2.2. The \u201cstability triangle,\u201d used in most stability discussions, demonstrates stability simply.\n \n A-3.  Basic Principles. \n \n A-3.1. Whether an object is stable depends on the object's moment at one end of a system being greater than, equal to, or smaller than the object's moment at the system's other end. This principle can be seen in the way a see-saw or teeter-totter works: that is, if the product of the load and distance from the fulcrum (moment) is equal to the moment at the device's other end, the device is balanced and it will not move. However, if there is a greater moment at one end of the device, the device will try to move downward at the end with the greater moment.\n \n A-3.2. The longitudinal stability of a counterbalanced powered industrial truck depends on the vehicle's moment and the load's moment. In other words, if the mathematic product of the load moment (the distance from the front wheels, the approximate point at which the vehicle would tip forward) to the load's center of gravity times the load's weight is less than the vehicle's moment, the system is balanced and will not tip forward. However, if the load's moment is greater than the vehicle's moment, the greater load-moment will force the truck to tip forward.\n \n A-4.  The Stability Triangle. \n \n A-4.1. Almost all counterbalanced powered industrial trucks have a three-point suspension system, that is, the vehicle is supported at three points. This is true even if the vehicle has four wheels. The truck's steer axle is attached to the truck by a pivot pin in the axle's center. When the points are connected with imaginary lines, this three-point support forms a triangle called the stability triangle. Figure 1 depicts the stability triangle.\n \n  \n A-4.2. When the vehicle's line of action, or load center, falls within the stability triangle, the vehicle is stable and will not tip over. However, when the vehicle's line of action or the vehicle/load combination falls outside the stability triangle, the vehicle is unstable and may tip over. (See Figure 2.)\n \n  \n A-5.  Longitudinal Stability. \n \n A-5.1. The axis of rotation when a truck tips forward is the front wheels' points of contact with the pavement. When a powered industrial truck tips forward, the truck will rotate about this line. When a truck is stable, the vehicle-moment must exceed the load-moment. As long as the vehicle-moment is equal to or exceeds the load-moment, the vehicle will not tip over. On the other hand, if the load moment slightly exceeds the vehicle-moment, the truck will begin to tip forward, thereby causing the rear to lose contact with the floor or ground and resulting in loss of steering control. If the load-moment greatly exceeds the vehicle moment, the truck will tip forward.\n \n A-5.2. To determine the maximum safe load-moment, the truck manufacturer normally rates the truck at a maximum load at a given distance from the front face of the forks. The specified distance from the front face of the forks to the line of action of the load is commonly called the load center. Because larger trucks normally handle loads that are physically larger, these vehicles have greater load centers. Trucks with a capacity of 30,000 pounds or less are normally rated at a given load weight at a 24-inch load center. Trucks with a capacity greater than 30,000 pounds are normally rated at a given load weight at a 36- or 48-inch load center. To safely operate the vehicle, the operator should always check the data plate to determine the maximum allowable weight at the rated load center.\n \n A-5.3. Although the true load-moment distance is measured from the front wheels, this distance is greater than the distance from the front face of the forks. Calculating the maximum allowable load-moment using the load-center distance always provides a lower load-moment than the truck was designed to handle. When handling unusual loads, such as those that are larger than 48 inches long (the center of gravity is greater than 24 inches) or that have an offset center of gravity, etc., a maximum allowable load-moment should be calculated and used to determine whether a load can be safely handled. For example, if an operator is operating a 3000 pound capacity truck (with a 24-inch load center), the maximum allowable load-moment is 72,000 inch-pounds (3,000 times 24). If a load is 60 inches long (30-inch load center), then the maximum that this load can weigh is 2,400 pounds (72,000 divided by 30).\n \n A-6.  Lateral Stability. \n \n A-6.1. The vehicle's lateral stability is determined by the line of action's position (a vertical line that passes through the combined vehicle's and load's center of gravity) relative to the stability triangle. When the vehicle is not loaded, the truck's center of gravity location is the only factor to be considered in determining the truck's stability. As long as the line of action of the combined vehicle's and load's center of gravity falls within the stability triangle, the truck is stable and will not tip over. However, if the line of action falls outside the stability triangle, the truck is not stable and may tip over. Refer to Figure 2.\n \n A-6.2. Factors that affect the vehicle's lateral stability include the load's placement on the truck, the height of the load above the surface on which the vehicle is operating, and the vehicle's degree of lean.\n \n A-7.  Dynamic Stability. \n \n A-7.1. Up to this point, the stability of a powered industrial truck has been discussed without considering the dynamic forces that result when the vehicle and load are put into motion. The weight's transfer and the resultant shift in the center of gravity due to the dynamic forces created when the machine is moving, braking, cornering, lifting, tilting, and lowering loads, etc., are important stability considerations.\n \n A-7.2. When determining whether a load can be safely handled, the operator should exercise extra caution when handling loads that cause the vehicle to approach its maximum design characteristics. For example, if an operator must handle a maximum load, the load should be carried at the lowest position possible, the truck should be accelerated slowly and evenly, and the forks should be tilted forward cautiously. However, no precise rules can be formulated to cover all of these eventualities.\n\nA-1. Definitions.  The following definitions help to explain the principle of stability:\n\nCenter of gravity  is the point on an object at which all of the object's weight is concentrated. For symmetrical loads, the center of gravity is at the middle of the load.\n\nCounterweight  is the weight that is built into the truck's basic structure and is used to offset the load's weight and to maximize the vehicle's resistance to tipping over.\n\nFulcrum  is the truck's axis of rotation when it tips over.\n\nGrade  is the slope of a surface, which is usually measured as the number of feet of rise or fall over a hundred foot horizontal distance (the slope is expressed as a percent).\n\nLateral stability  is a truck's resistance to overturning sideways.\n\nLine of action  is an imaginary vertical line through an object's center of gravity.\n\nLoad center  is the horizontal distance from the load's edge (or the fork's or other attachment's vertical face) to the line of action through the load's center of gravity.\n\nLongitudinal stability  is the truck's resistance to overturning forward or rearward.\n\nMoment  is the product of the object's weight times the distance from a fixed point (usually the fulcrum). In the case of a powered industrial truck, the distance is measured from the point at which the truck will tip over to the object's line of action. The distance is always measured perpendicular to the line of action.\n\nTrack  is the distance between the wheels on the same axle of the truck.\n\nWheelbase  is the distance between the centerline of the vehicle's front and rear wheels.\n\nA-2.  General.\n\nA-2.1. Determining the stability of a powered industrial truck is simple once a few basic principles are understood. There are many factors that contribute to a vehicle's stability: the vehicle's wheelbase, track, and height; the load's weight distribution; and the vehicle's counterweight location (if the vehicle is so equipped).\n\nA-2.2. The \u201cstability triangle,\u201d used in most stability discussions, demonstrates stability simply.\n\nA-3.  Basic Principles.\n\nA-3.1. Whether an object is stable depends on the object's moment at one end of a system being greater than, equal to, or smaller than the object's moment at the system's other end. This principle can be seen in the way a see-saw or teeter-totter works: that is, if the product of the load and distance from the fulcrum (moment) is equal to the moment at the device's other end, the device is balanced and it will not move. However, if there is a greater moment at one end of the device, the device will try to move downward at the end with the greater moment.\n\nA-3.2. The longitudinal stability of a counterbalanced powered industrial truck depends on the vehicle's moment and the load's moment. In other words, if the mathematic product of the load moment (the distance from the front wheels, the approximate point at which the vehicle would tip forward) to the load's center of gravity times the load's weight is less than the vehicle's moment, the system is balanced and will not tip forward. However, if the load's moment is greater than the vehicle's moment, the greater load-moment will force the truck to tip forward.\n\nA-4.  The Stability Triangle.\n\nA-4.1. Almost all counterbalanced powered industrial trucks have a three-point suspension system, that is, the vehicle is supported at three points. This is true even if the vehicle has four wheels. The truck's steer axle is attached to the truck by a pivot pin in the axle's center. When the points are connected with imaginary lines, this three-point support forms a triangle called the stability triangle. Figure 1 depicts the stability triangle.\n\nA-4.2. When the vehicle's line of action, or load center, falls within the stability triangle, the vehicle is stable and will not tip over. However, when the vehicle's line of action or the vehicle/load combination falls outside the stability triangle, the vehicle is unstable and may tip over. (See Figure 2.)\n\nA-5.  Longitudinal Stability.\n\nA-5.1. The axis of rotation when a truck tips forward is the front wheels' points of contact with the pavement. When a powered industrial truck tips forward, the truck will rotate about this line. When a truck is stable, the vehicle-moment must exceed the load-moment. As long as the vehicle-moment is equal to or exceeds the load-moment, the vehicle will not tip over. On the other hand, if the load moment slightly exceeds the vehicle-moment, the truck will begin to tip forward, thereby causing the rear to lose contact with the floor or ground and resulting in loss of steering control. If the load-moment greatly exceeds the vehicle moment, the truck will tip forward.\n\nA-5.2. To determine the maximum safe load-moment, the truck manufacturer normally rates the truck at a maximum load at a given distance from the front face of the forks. The specified distance from the front face of the forks to the line of action of the load is commonly called the load center. Because larger trucks normally handle loads that are physically larger, these vehicles have greater load centers. Trucks with a capacity of 30,000 pounds or less are normally rated at a given load weight at a 24-inch load center. Trucks with a capacity greater than 30,000 pounds are normally rated at a given load weight at a 36- or 48-inch load center. To safely operate the vehicle, the operator should always check the data plate to determine the maximum allowable weight at the rated load center.\n\nA-5.3. Although the true load-moment distance is measured from the front wheels, this distance is greater than the distance from the front face of the forks. Calculating the maximum allowable load-moment using the load-center distance always provides a lower load-moment than the truck was designed to handle. When handling unusual loads, such as those that are larger than 48 inches long (the center of gravity is greater than 24 inches) or that have an offset center of gravity, etc., a maximum allowable load-moment should be calculated and used to determine whether a load can be safely handled. For example, if an operator is operating a 3000 pound capacity truck (with a 24-inch load center), the maximum allowable load-moment is 72,000 inch-pounds (3,000 times 24). If a load is 60 inches long (30-inch load center), then the maximum that this load can weigh is 2,400 pounds (72,000 divided by 30).\n\nA-6.  Lateral Stability.\n\nA-6.1. The vehicle's lateral stability is determined by the line of action's position (a vertical line that passes through the combined vehicle's and load's center of gravity) relative to the stability triangle. When the vehicle is not loaded, the truck's center of gravity location is the only factor to be considered in determining the truck's stability. As long as the line of action of the combined vehicle's and load's center of gravity falls within the stability triangle, the truck is stable and will not tip over. However, if the line of action falls outside the stability triangle, the truck is not stable and may tip over. Refer to Figure 2.\n\nA-6.2. Factors that affect the vehicle's lateral stability include the load's placement on the truck, the height of the load above the surface on which the vehicle is operating, and the vehicle's degree of lean.\n\nA-7.  Dynamic Stability.\n\nA-7.1. Up to this point, the stability of a powered industrial truck has been discussed without considering the dynamic forces that result when the vehicle and load are put into motion. The weight's transfer and the resultant shift in the center of gravity due to the dynamic forces created when the machine is moving, braking, cornering, lifting, tilting, and lowering loads, etc., are important stability considerations.\n\nA-7.2. When determining whether a load can be safely handled, the operator should exercise extra caution when handling loads that cause the vehicle to approach its maximum design characteristics. For example, if an operator must handle a maximum load, the load should be carried at the lowest position possible, the truck should be accelerated slowly and evenly, and the forks should be tilted forward cautiously. However, no precise rules can be formulated to cover all of these eventualities."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.14.37.4", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "N", "Subpart N\u2014Materials Handling and Storage", "", "\u00a7 1910.179 Overhead and gantry cranes.", "OSHA", "", "", "[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40 FR 27400, June 27, 1975; 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10, 1984; 51 FR 34560, Sept. 29, 1986; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996; 81 FR 83005, Nov. 18, 2016]", "(a)  Definitions applicable to this section.  (1) A  crane  is a machine for lifting and lowering a load and moving it horizontally, with the hoisting mechanism an integral part of the machine. Cranes whether fixed or mobile are driven manually or by power.\n\n(2) An  automatic crane  is a crane which when activated operates through a preset cycle or cycles.\n\n(3) A  cab-operated crane  is a crane controlled by an operator in a cab located on the bridge or trolley.\n\n(4)  Cantilever gantry crane  means a gantry or semigantry crane in which the bridge girders or trusses extend transversely beyond the crane runway on one or both sides.\n\n(5)  Floor-operated crane  means a crane which is pendant or nonconductive rope controlled by an operator on the floor or an independent platform.\n\n(6)  Gantry crane  means a crane similar to an overhead crane except that the bridge for carrying the trolley or trolleys is rigidly supported on two or more legs running on fixed rails or other runway.\n\n(7)  Hot metal handling crane  means an overhead crane used for transporting or pouring molten material.\n\n(8)  Overhead crane  means a crane with a movable bridge carrying a movable or fixed hoisting mechanism and traveling on an overhead fixed runway structure.\n\n(9)  Power-operated crane  means a crane whose mechanism is driven by electric, air, hydraulic, or internal combustion means.\n\n(10) A  pulpit-operated crane  is a crane operated from a fixed operator station not attached to the crane.\n\n(11) A  remote-operated crane  is a crane controlled by an operator not in a pulpit or in the cab attached to the crane, by any method other than pendant or rope control.\n\n(12) A  semigantry crane  is a gantry crane with one end of the bridge rigidly supported on one or more legs that run on a fixed rail or runway, the other end of the bridge being supported by a truck running on an elevated rail or runway.\n\n(13)  Storage bridge crane  means a gantry type crane of long span usually used for bulk storage of material; the bridge girders or trusses are rigidly or nonrigidly supported on one or more legs. It may have one or more fixed or hinged cantilever ends.\n\n(14)  Wall crane  means a crane having a jib with or without trolley and supported from a side wall or line of columns of a building. It is a traveling type and operates on a runway attached to the side wall or columns.\n\n(15)  Appointed  means assigned specific responsibilities by the employer or the employer's representative.\n\n(16)  ANSI  means the American National Standards Institute.\n\n(17) An  auxiliary hoist  is a supplemental hoisting unit of lighter capacity and usually higher speed than provided for the main hoist.\n\n(18) A  brake  is a device used for retarding or stopping motion by friction or power means.\n\n(19) A  drag brake  is a brake which provides retarding force without external control.\n\n(20) A  holding brake  is a brake that automatically prevents motion when power is off.\n\n(21)  Bridge  means that part of a crane consisting of girders, trucks, end ties, footwalks, and drive mechanism which carries the trolley or trolleys.\n\n(22)  Bridge travel  means the crane movement in a direction parallel to the crane runway.\n\n(23) A  bumper  (buffer) is an energy absorbing device for reducing impact when a moving crane or trolley reaches the end of its permitted travel; or when two moving cranes or trolleys come in contact.\n\n(24) The  cab  is the operator's compartment on a crane.\n\n(25)  Clearance  means the distance from any part of the crane to a point of the nearest obstruction.\n\n(26)  Collectors current  are contacting devices for collecting current from runway or bridge conductors.\n\n(27)  Conductors, bridge  are the electrical conductors located along the bridge structure of a crane to provide power to the trolley.\n\n(28)  Conductors, runway  (main) are the electrical conductors located along a crane runway to provide power to the crane.\n\n(29) The  control braking means  is a method of controlling crane motor speed when in an overhauling condition.\n\n(30)  Countertorque  means a method of control by which the power to the motor is reversed to develop torque in the opposite direction.\n\n(31)  Dynamic  means a method of controlling crane motor speeds when in the overhauling condition to provide a retarding force.\n\n(32)  Regenerative  means a form of dynamic braking in which the electrical energy generated is fed back into the power system.\n\n(33)  Mechanical  means a method of control by friction.\n\n(34)  Controller, spring return  means a controller which when released will return automatically to a neutral position.\n\n(35)  Designated  means selected or assigned by the employer or the employer's representative as being qualified to perform specific duties.\n\n(36) A  drift point  means a point on a travel motion controller which releases the brake while the motor is not energized. This allows for coasting before the brake is set.\n\n(37) The  drum  is the cylindrical member around which the ropes are wound for raising or lowering the load.\n\n(38) An  equalizer  is a device which compensates for unequal length or stretch of a rope.\n\n(39)  Exposed  means capable of being contacted inadvertently. Applied to hazardous objects not adequately guarded or isolated.\n\n(40)  Fail-safe  means a provision designed to automatically stop or safely control any motion in which a malfunction occurs.\n\n(41)  Footwalk  means the walkway with handrail, attached to the bridge or trolley for access purposes.\n\n(42) A  hoist  is an apparatus which may be a part of a crane, exerting a force for lifting or lowering.\n\n(43)  Hoist chain  means the load bearing chain in a hoist.\n\nChain properties do not conform to those shown in ANSI B30.9-1971, Safety Code for Slings.\n\n(44)  Hoist motion  means that motion of a crane which raises and lowers a load.\n\n(45)  Load  means the total superimposed weight on the load block or hook.\n\n(46) The  load block  is the assembly of hook or shackle, swivel, bearing, sheaves, pins, and frame suspended by the hoisting rope.\n\n(47)  Magnet  means an electromagnetic device carried on a crane hook to pick up loads magnetically.\n\n(48)  Main hoist  means the hoist mechanism provided for lifting the maximum rated load.\n\n(49) A  man trolley  is a trolley having an operator's cab attached thereto.\n\n(50)  Rated load  means the maximum load for which a crane or individual hoist is designed and built by the manufacturer and shown on the equipment nameplate(s).\n\n(51)  Rope  refers to wire rope, unless otherwise specified.\n\n(52)  Running sheave  means a sheave which rotates as the load block is raised or lowered.\n\n(53)  Runway  means an assembly of rails, beams, girders, brackets, and framework on which the crane or trolley travels.\n\n(54)  Side pull  means that portion of the hoist pull acting horizontally when the hoist lines are not operated vertically.\n\n(55)  Span  means the horizontal distance center to center of runway rails.\n\n(56)  Standby crane  means a crane which is not in regular service but which is used occasionally or intermittently as required.\n\n(57) A  stop  is a device to limit travel of a trolley or crane bridge. This device normally is attached to a fixed structure and normally does not have energy absorbing ability.\n\n(58) A  switch  is a device for making, breaking, or for changing the connections in an electric circuit.\n\n(59) An  emergency stop switch  is a manually or automatically operated electric switch to cut off electric power independently of the regular operating controls.\n\n(60) A  limit switch  is a switch which is operated by some part or motion of a power-driven machine or equipment to alter the electric circuit associated with the machine or equipment.\n\n(61) A  main switch  is a switch controlling the entire power supply to the crane.\n\n(62) A  master switch  is a switch which dominates the operation of contactors, relays, or other remotely operated devices.\n\n(63) The  trolley  is the unit which travels on the bridge rails and carries the hoisting mechanism.\n\n(64)  Trolley travel  means the trolley movement at right angles to the crane runway.\n\n(65)  Truck  means the unit consisting of a frame, wheels, bearings, and axles which supports the bridge girders or trolleys.\n\n(b)  General requirements \u2014(1)  Application.  This section applies to overhead and gantry cranes, including semigantry, cantilever gantry, wall cranes, storage bridge cranes, and others having the same fundamental characteristics. These cranes are grouped because they all have trolleys and similar travel characteristics.\n\n(2)  New and existing equipment.  All new overhead and gantry cranes constructed and installed on or after August 31, 1971, shall meet the design specifications of the American National Standard Safety Code for Overhead and Gantry Cranes, ANSI B30.2.0-1967, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(3)  Modifications.  Cranes may be modified and rerated provided such modifications and the supporting structure are checked thoroughly for the new rated load by a qualified engineer or the equipment manufacturer. The crane shall be tested in accordance with paragraph (k)(2) of this section. New rated load shall be displayed in accordance with subparagraph (5) of this paragraph.\n\n(4)  Wind indicators and rail clamps.  Outdoor storage bridges shall be provided with automatic rail clamps. A wind-indicating device shall be provided which will give a visible or audible alarm to the bridge operator at a predetermined wind velocity. If the clamps act on the rail heads, any beads or weld flash on the rail heads shall be ground off.\n\n(5)  Rated load marking.  The rated load of the crane shall be plainly marked on each side of the crane, and if the crane has more than one hoisting unit, each hoist shall have its rated load marked on it or its load block and this marking shall be clearly legible from the ground or floor.\n\n(6)  Clearance from obstruction.  (i) Minimum clearance of 3 inches overhead and 2 inches laterally shall be provided and maintained between crane and obstructions in conformity with Crane Manufacturers Association of America, Inc., Specification No. 61, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6 (formerly the Electric Overhead Crane Institute, Inc).\n\n(ii) Where passageways or walkways are provided obstructions shall not be placed so that safety of personnel will be jeopardized by movements of the crane.\n\n(7)  Clearance between parallel cranes.  If the runways of two cranes are parallel, and there are no intervening walls or structure, there shall be adequate clearance provided and maintained between the two bridges.\n\n(8)  Designated personnel \u2014Only designated personnel shall be permitted to operate a crane covered by this section.\n\n(c)  Cabs \u2014(1)  Cab location.  (i) The general arrangement of the cab and the location of control and protective equipment shall be such that all operating handles are within convenient reach of the operator when facing the area to be served by the load hook, or while facing the direction of travel of the cab. The arrangement shall allow the operator a full view of the load hook in all positions.\n\n(ii) The cab shall be located to afford a minimum of 3 inches clearance from all fixed structures within its area of possible movement.\n\n(2)  Access to crane.  Access to the car and/or bridge walkway shall be by a conveniently placed fixed ladder, stairs, or platform requiring no step over any gap exceeding 12 inches (30 cm). Fixed ladders must comply with subpart D of this part.\n\n(3)  Fire extinguisher.  Carbon tetrachloride extinguishers shall not be used.\n\n(4)  Lighting.  Light in the cab shall be sufficient to enable the operator to see clearly enough to perform his work.\n\n(d)  Footwalks and ladders \u2014(1)  Location of footwalks.  (i) If sufficient headroom is available on cab-operated cranes, a footwalk shall be provided on the drive side along the entire length of the bridge of all cranes having the trolley running on the top of the girders.\n\n(ii) Where footwalks are located in no case shall less than 48 inches of headroom be provided.\n\n(2)  Construction of footwalks.  (i) Footwalks shall be of rigid construction and designed to sustain a distributed load of at least 50 pounds per square foot.\n\n(ii) Footwalks shall have a walking surface of antislip type.\n\nWood will meet this requirement.\n\n(iii) [Reserved]\n\n(iv) The inner edge shall extend at least to the line of the outside edge of the lower cover plate or flange of the girder.\n\n(3)  Toeboards and handrails for footwalks.  Toeboards and handrails must comply with subpart D of this part.\n\n(4)  Ladders and stairways.  (i) Gantry cranes shall be provided with ladders or stairways extending from the ground to the footwalk or cab platform.\n\n(ii) Stairways shall be equipped with rigid and substantial metal handrails. Walking surfaces shall be of an antislip type.\n\n(iii) Ladders shall be permanently and securely fastened in place and constructed in compliance with subpart D of this part.\n\n(e)  Stops, bumpers, rail sweeps, and guards \u2014(1)  Trolley stops.  (i) Stops shall be provided at the limits of travel of the trolley.\n\n(ii) Stops shall be fastened to resist forces applied when contacted.\n\n(iii) A stop engaging the tread of the wheel shall be of a height at least equal to the radius of the wheel.\n\n(2)  Bridge bumpers \u2014(i) A crane shall be provided with bumpers or other automatic means providing equivalent effect, unless the crane travels at a slow rate of speed and has a faster deceleration rate due to the use of sleeve bearings, or is not operated near the ends of bridge and trolley travel, or is restricted to a limited distance by the nature of the crane operation and there is no hazard of striking any object in this limited distance, or is used in similar operating conditions. The bumpers shall be capable of stopping the crane (not including the lifted load) at an average rate of deceleration not to exceed 3 ft/s/s when traveling in either direction at 20 percent of the rated load speed.\n\n( a ) The bumpers shall have sufficient energy absorbing capacity to stop the crane when traveling at a speed of at least 40 percent of rated load speed.\n\n( b ) The bumper shall be so mounted that there is no direct shear on bolts.\n\n(ii) Bumpers shall be so designed and installed as to minimize parts falling from the crane in case of breakage.\n\n(3)  Trolley bumpers \u2014(i) A trolley shall be provided with bumpers or other automatic means of equivalent effect, unless the trolley travels at a slow rate of speed, or is not operated near the ends of bridge and trolley travel, or is restricted to a limited distance of the runway and there is no hazard of striking any object in this limited distance, or is used in similar operating conditions. The bumpers shall be capable of stopping the trolley (not including the lifted load) at an average rate of deceleration not to exceed 4.7 ft/s/s when traveling in either direction at one-third of the rated load speed.\n\n(ii) When more than one trolley is operated on the same bridge, each shall be equipped with bumpers or equivalent on their adjacent ends.\n\n(iii) Bumpers or equivalent shall be designed and installed to minimize parts falling from the trolley in case of age.\n\n(4)  Rail sweeps.  Bridge trucks shall be equipped with sweeps which extend below the top of the rail and project in front of the truck wheels.\n\n(5)  Guards for hoisting ropes.  (i) If hoisting ropes run near enough to other parts to make fouling or chafing possible, guards shall be installed to prevent this condition.\n\n(ii) A guard shall be provided to prevent contact between bridge conductors and hoisting ropes if they could come into contact.\n\n(6)  Guards for moving parts.  (i) Exposed moving parts such as gears, set screws, projecting keys, chains, chain sprockets, and reciprocating components which might constitute a hazard under normal operating conditions shall be guarded.\n\n(ii) Guards shall be securely fastened.\n\n(iii) Each guard shall be capable of supporting without permanent distortion the weight of a 200-pound person unless the guard is located where it is impossible for a person to step on it.\n\n(f)  Brakes \u2014(1)  Brakes for hoists.  (i) Each independent hoisting unit of a crane shall be equipped with at least one self-setting brake, hereafter referred to as a holding brake, applied directly to the motor shaft or some part of the gear train.\n\n(ii) Each independent hoisting unit of a crane, except worm-geared hoists, the angle of whose worm is such as to prevent the load from accelerating in the lowering direction shall, in addition to a holding brake, be equipped with control braking means to prevent overspeeding.\n\n(2)  Holding brakes.  (i) Holding brakes for hoist motors shall have not less than the following percentage of the full load hoisting torque at the point where the brake is applied.\n\n( a ) 125 percent when used with a control braking means other than mechanical.\n\n( b ) 100 percent when used in conjunction with a mechanical control braking means.\n\n( c ) 100 percent each if two holding brakes are provided.\n\n(ii) Holding brakes on hoists shall have ample thermal capacity for the frequency of operation required by the service.\n\n(iii) Holding brakes on hoists shall be applied automatically when power is removed.\n\n(iv) Where necessary holding brakes shall be provided with adjustment means to compensate for wear.\n\n(v) The wearing surface of all holding-brake drums or discs shall be smooth.\n\n(vi) Each independent hoisting unit of a crane handling hot metal and having power control braking means shall be equipped with at least two holding brakes.\n\n(3)  Control braking means.  (i) A power control braking means such as regenerative, dynamic or countertorque braking, or a mechanically controlled braking means shall be capable of maintaining safe lowering speeds of rated loads.\n\n(ii) The control braking means shall have ample thermal capacity for the frequency of operation required by service.\n\n(4)  Brakes for trolleys and bridges.  (i) Foot-operated brakes shall not require an applied force of more than 70 pounds to develop manufacturer's rated brake torque.\n\n(ii) Brakes may be applied by mechanical, electrical, pneumatic, hydraulic, or gravity means.\n\n(iii) Where necessary brakes shall be provided with adjustment means to compensate for wear.\n\n(iv) The wearing surface of all brakedrums or discs shall be smooth.\n\n(v) All foot-brake pedals shall be constructed so that the operator's foot will not easily slip off the pedal.\n\n(vi) Foot-operated brakes shall be equipped with automatic means for positive release when pressure is released from the pedal.\n\n(vii) Brakes for stopping the motion of the trolley or bridge shall be of sufficient size to stop the trolley or bridge within a distance in feet equal to 10 percent of full load speed in feet per minute when traveling at full speed with full load.\n\n(viii) If holding brakes are provided on the bridge or trolleys, they shall not prohibit the use of a drift point in the control circuit.\n\n(ix) Brakes on trolleys and bridges shall have ample thermal capacity for the frequency of operation required by the service to prevent impairment of functions from overheating.\n\n(5)  Application of trolley brakes.  (i) On cab-operated cranes with cab on trolley, a trolley brake shall be required as specified under paragraph (f)(4) of this section.\n\n(ii) A drag brake may be applied to hold the trolley in a desired position on the bridge and to eliminate creep with the power off.\n\n(6)  Application of bridge brakes.  (i) On cab-operated cranes with cab on bridge, a bridge brake is required as specified under paragraph (f)(4) of this section.\n\n(ii) On cab-operated cranes with cab on trolley, a bridge brake of the holding type shall be required.\n\n(iii) On all floor, remote and pulpit-operated crane bridge drives, a brake of noncoasting mechanical drive shall be provided.\n\n(g)  Electric equipment \u2014(1)  General.  (i) Wiring and equipment shall comply with subpart S of this part.\n\n(ii) The control circuit voltage shall not exceed 600 volts for a.c. or d.c. current.\n\n(iii) The voltage at pendant push-buttons shall not exceed 150 volts for a.c. and 300 volts for d.c.\n\n(iv) Where multiple conductor cable is used with a suspended pushbutton station, the station must be supported in some satisfactory manner that will protect the electrical conductors against strain.\n\n(v) Pendant control boxes shall be constructed to prevent electrical shock and shall be clearly marked for identification of functions.\n\n(2)  Equipment.  (i) Electrical equipment shall be so located or enclosed that live parts will not be exposed to accidental contact under normal operating conditions.\n\n(ii) Electric equipment shall be protected from dirt, grease, oil, and moisture.\n\n(iii) Guards for live parts shall be substantial and so located that they cannot be accidently deformed so as to make contact with the live parts.\n\n(3)  Controllers.  (i) Cranes not equipped with spring-return controllers or momentary contact pushbuttons shall be provided with a device which will disconnect all motors from the line on failure of power and will not permit any motor to be restarted until the controller handle is brought to the \u201coff\u201d position, or a reset switch or button is operated.\n\n(ii) Lever operated controllers shall be provided with a notch or latch which in the \u201coff\u201d position prevents the handle from being inadvertently moved to the \u201con\u201d position. An \u201coff\u201d detent or spring return arrangement is acceptable.\n\n(iii) The controller operating handle shall be located within convenient reach of the operator.\n\n(iv) As far as practicable, the movement of each controller handle shall be in the same general directions as the resultant movements of the load.\n\n(v) The control for the bridge and trolley travel shall be so located that the operator can readily face the direction of travel.\n\n(vi) For floor-operated cranes, the controller or controllers if rope operated, shall automatically return to the \u201coff\u201d position when released by the operator.\n\n(vii) Pushbuttons in pendant stations shall return to the \u201coff\u201d position when pressure is released by the crane operator.\n\n(viii) Automatic cranes shall be so designed that all motions shall fail-safe if any malfunction of operation occurs.\n\n(ix) Remote-operated cranes shall function so that if the control signal for any crane motion becomes ineffective the crane motion shall stop.\n\n(4)  Resistors.  (i) Enclosures for resistors shall have openings to provide adequate ventilation, and shall be installed to prevent the accumulation of combustible matter too near to hot parts.\n\n(ii) Resistor units shall be supported so as to be as free as possible from vibration.\n\n(iii) Provision shall be made to prevent broken parts or molten metal falling upon the operator or from the crane.\n\n(5)  Switches.  (i) The power supply to the runway conductors shall be controlled by a switch or circuit breaker located on a fixed structure, accessible from the floor, and arranged to be locked in the open position.\n\n(ii) On cab-operated cranes a switch or circuit breaker of the enclosed type, with provision for locking in the open position, shall be provided in the leads from the runway conductors. A means of opening this switch or circuit breaker shall be located within easy reach of the operator.\n\n(iii) On floor-operated cranes, a switch or circuit breaker of the enclosed type, with provision for locking in the open position, shall be provided in the leads from the runway conductors. This disconnect shall be mounted on the bridge or footwalk near the runway collectors. One of the following types of floor-operated disconnects shall be provided:\n\n( a ) Nonconductive rope attached to the main disconnect switch.\n\n( b ) An undervoltage trip for the main circuit breaker operated by an emergency stop button in the pendant pushbutton in the pendant pushbutton station.\n\n( c ) A main line contactor operated by a switch or pushbutton in the pendant pushbutton station.\n\n(iv) The hoisting motion of all electric traveling cranes shall be provided with an overtravel limit switch in the hoisting direction.\n\n(v) All cranes using a lifting magnet shall have a magnet circuit switch of the enclosed type with provision for locking in the open position. Means for discharging the inductive load of the magnet shall be provided.\n\n(6)  Runway conductors.  Conductors of the open type mounted on the crane runway beams or overhead shall be so located or so guarded that persons entering or leaving the cab or crane footwalk normally could not come into contact with them.\n\n(7)  Extension lamps.  If a service receptacle is provided in the cab or on the bridge of cab-operated cranes, it shall be a grounded three-prong type permanent receptacle, not exceeding 300 volts.\n\n(h)  Hoisting equipment \u2014(1)  Sheaves.  (i) Sheave grooves shall be smooth and free from surface defects which could cause rope damage.\n\n(ii) Sheaves carrying ropes which can be momentarily unloaded shall be provided with close-fitting guards or other suitable devices to guide the rope back into the groove when the load is applied again.\n\n(iii) The sheaves in the bottom block shall be equipped with close-fitting guards that will prevent ropes from becoming fouled when the block is lying on the ground with ropes loose.\n\n(iv) Pockets and flanges of sheaves used with hoist chains shall be of such dimensions that the chain does not catch or bind during operation.\n\n(v) All running sheaves shall be equipped with means for lubrication. Permanently lubricated, sealed and/or shielded bearings meet this requirement.\n\n(2)  Ropes.  (i) In using hoisting ropes, the crane manufacturer's recommendation shall be followed. The rated load divided by the number of parts of rope shall not exceed 20 percent of the nominal breaking strength of the rope.\n\n(ii) Socketing shall be done in the manner specified by the manufacturer of the assembly.\n\n(iii) Rope shall be secured to the drum as follows:\n\n( a ) No less than two wraps of rope shall remain on the drum when the hook is in its extreme low position.\n\n( b ) Rope end shall be anchored by a clamp securely attached to the drum, or by a socket arrangement approved by the crane or rope manufacturer.\n\n(iv) Eye splices. [Reserved]\n\n(v) Rope clips attached with U-bolts shall have the U-bolts on the dead or short end of the rope. Spacing and number of all types of clips shall be in accordance with the clip manufacturer's recommendation. Clips shall be drop-forged steel in all sizes manufactured commercially. When a newly installed rope has been in operation for an hour, all nuts on the clip bolts shall be retightened.\n\n(vi) Swaged or compressed fittings shall be applied as recommended by the rope or crane manufacturer.\n\n(vii) Wherever exposed to temperatures, at which fiber cores would be damaged, rope having an independent wirerope or wire-strand core, or other temperature-damage resistant core shall be used.\n\n(viii) Replacement rope shall be the same size, grade, and construction as the original rope furnished by the crane manufacturer, unless otherwise recommended by a wire rope manufacturer due to actual working condition requirements.\n\n(3)  Equalizers.  If a load is supported by more than one part of rope, the tension in the parts shall be equalized.\n\n(4)  Hooks.  Hooks shall meet the manufacturer's recommendations and shall not be overloaded.\n\n(i)  Warning device.  Except for floor-operated cranes a gong or other effective warning signal shall be provided for each crane equipped with a power traveling mechanism.\n\n(j)  Inspection \u2014(1)  Inspection classification \u2014(i)  Initial inspection.  Prior to initial use all new and altered cranes shall be inspected to insure compliance with the provisions of this section.\n\n(ii) Inspection procedure for cranes in regular service is divided into two general classifications based upon the intervals at which inspection should be performed. The intervals in turn are dependent upon the nature of the critical components of the crane and the degree of their exposure to wear, deterioration, or malfunction. The two general classifications are herein designated as \u201cfrequent\u201d and \u201cperiodic\u201d with respective intervals between inspections as defined below:\n\n( a ) Frequent inspection\u2014Daily to monthly intervals.\n\n( b ) Periodic inspection\u20141 to 12-month intervals.\n\n(2)  Frequent inspection.  The following items shall be inspected for defects at intervals as defined in paragraph (j)(1)(ii) of this section or as specifically indicated, including observation during operation for any defects which might appear between regular inspections. All deficiencies such as listed shall be carefully examined and determination made as to whether they constitute a safety hazard:\n\n(i) All functional operating mechanisms for maladjustment interfering with proper operation. Daily.\n\n(ii) Deterioration or leakage in lines, tanks, valves, drain pumps, and other parts of air or hydraulic systems. Daily.\n\n(iii) Hooks with deformation or cracks. Visual inspection daily; monthly inspection with a certification record which includes the date of inspection, the signature of the person who performed the inspection and the serial number, or other identifier, of the hook inspected. For hooks with cracks or having more than 15 percent in excess of normal throat opening or more than 10\u00b0 twist from the plane of the unbent hook refer to paragraph (l)(3)(iii)( a ) of this section.\n\n(iv) Hoist chains, including end connections, for excessive wear, twist, distorted links interfering with proper function, or stretch beyond manufacturer's recommendations. Visual inspection daily; monthly inspection with a certification record which includes the date of inspection, the signature of the person who performed the inspection and an identifier of the chain which was inspected.\n\n(v) [Reserved]\n\n(vi) All functional operating mechanisms for excessive wear of components.\n\n(vii) Rope reeving for noncompliance with manufacturer's recommendations.\n\n(3)  Periodic inspection.  Complete inspections of the crane shall be performed at intervals as generally defined in paragraph (j)(1)(ii)( b ) of this section, depending upon its activity, severity of service, and environment, or as specifically indicated below. These inspections shall include the requirements of paragraph (j)(2) of this section and in addition, the following items. Any deficiencies such as listed shall be carefully examined and determination made as to whether they constitute a safety hazard:\n\n(i) Deformed, cracked, or corroded members.\n\n(ii) Loose bolts or rivets.\n\n(iii) Cracked or worn sheaves and drums.\n\n(iv) Worn, cracked or distorted parts such as pins, bearings, shafts, gears, rollers, locking and clamping devices.\n\n(v) Excessive wear on brake system parts, linings, pawls, and ratchets.\n\n(vi) Load, wind, and other indicators over their full range, for any significant inaccuracies.\n\n(vii) Gasoline, diesel, electric, or other powerplants for improper performance or noncompliance with applicable safety requirements.\n\n(viii) Excessive wear of chain drive sprockets and excessive chain stretch.\n\n(ix) [Reserved]\n\n(x) Electrical apparatus, for signs of pitting or any deterioration of controller contactors, limit switches and pushbutton stations.\n\n(4)  Cranes not in regular use.  (i) A crane which has been idle for a period of 1 month or more, but less than 6 months, shall be given an inspection conforming with requirements of paragraph (j)(2) of this section and paragraph (m)(2) of this section before placing in service.\n\n(ii) A crane which has been idle for a period of over 6 months shall be given a complete inspection conforming with requirements of paragraphs (j) (2) and (3) of this section and paragraph (m)(2) of this section before placing in service.\n\n(iii) Standby cranes shall be inspected at least semi-annually in accordance with requirements of paragraph (j)(2) of this section and paragraph (m)(2) of this section.\n\n(k)  Testing \u2014(1)  Operational tests.  (i) Prior to initial use all new and altered cranes shall be tested to insure compliance with this section including the following functions:\n\n( a ) Hoisting and lowering.\n\n( b ) Trolley travel.\n\n( c ) Bridge travel.\n\n( d ) Limit switches, locking and safety devices.\n\n(ii) The trip setting of hoist limit switches shall be determined by tests with an empty hook traveling in increasing speeds up to the maximum speed. The actuating mechanism of the limit switch shall be located so that it will trip the switch, under all conditions, in sufficient time to prevent contact of the hook or hook block with any part of the trolley.\n\n(2)  Rated load test.  Test loads shall not be more than 125 percent of the rated load unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer. The test reports shall be placed on file where readily available to appointed personnel.\n\n(l)  Maintenance \u2014(1)  Preventive maintenance.  A preventive maintenance program based on the crane manufacturer's recommendations shall be established.\n\n(2)  Maintenance procedure.  (i) Before adjustments and repairs are started on a crane the following precautions shall be taken:\n\n( a ) The crane to be repaired shall be run to a location where it will cause the least interference with other cranes and operations in the area.\n\n( b ) All controllers shall be at the off position.\n\n( c ) The main or emergency switch shall be open and locked in the open position.\n\n( d ) Warning or \u201cout of order\u201d signs shall be placed on the crane, also on the floor beneath or on the hook where visible from the floor.\n\n( e ) Where other cranes are in operation on the same runway, rail stops or other suitable means shall be provided to prevent interference with the idle crane.\n\n(ii) After adjustments and repairs have been made the crane shall not be operated until all guards have been reinstalled, safety devices reactivated and maintenance equipment removed.\n\n(3)  Adjustments and repairs.  (i) Any unsafe conditions disclosed by the inspection requirements of paragraph (j) of this section shall be corrected before operation of the crane is resumed. Adjustments and repairs shall be done only by designated personnel.\n\n(ii) Adjustments shall be maintained to assure correct functioning of components. The following are examples:\n\n( a ) All functional operating mechanisms.\n\n( b ) Limit switches.\n\n( c ) Control systems.\n\n( d ) Brakes.\n\n( e ) Power plants.\n\n(iii) Repairs or replacements shall be provided promptly as needed for safe operation. The following are examples:\n\n( a ) Crane hooks showing defects described in paragraph (j)(2)(iii) of this section shall be discarded. Repairs by welding or reshaping are not generally recommended. If such repairs are attempted they shall only be done under competent supervision and the hook shall be tested to the load requirements of paragraph (k)(2) of this section before further use.\n\n( b ) Load attachment chains and rope slings showing defects described in paragraph (j)(2) (iv) and (v) of this section respectively.\n\n( c ) All critical parts which are cracked, broken, bent, or excessively worn.\n\n( d ) Pendant control stations shall be kept clean and function labels kept legible.\n\n(m)  Rope inspection \u2014(1)  Running ropes.  A thorough inspection of all ropes shall be made at least once a month and a certification record which includes the date of inspection, the signature of the person who performed the inspection and an identifier for the ropes which were inspected shall be kept on file where readily available to appointed personnel. Any deterioration, resulting in appreciable loss of original strength, shall be carefully observed and determination made as to whether further use of the rope would constitute a safety hazard. Some of the conditions that could result in an appreciable loss of strength are the following:\n\n(i) Reduction of rope diameter below nominal diameter due to loss of core support, internal or external corrosion, or wear of outside wires.\n\n(ii) A number of broken outside wires and the degree of distribution or concentration of such broken wires.\n\n(iii) Worn outside wires.\n\n(iv) Corroded or broken wires at end connections.\n\n(v) Corroded, cracked, bent, worn, or improperly applied end connections.\n\n(vi) Severe kinking, crushing, cutting, or unstranding.\n\n(2)  Other ropes.  All rope which has been idle for a period of a month or more due to shutdown or storage of a crane on which it is installed shall be given a thorough inspection before it is used. This inspection shall be for all types of deterioration and shall be performed by an appointed person whose approval shall be required for further use of the rope. A certification record shall be available for inspection which includes the date of inspection, the signature of the person who performed the inspection and an identifier for the rope which was inspected.\n\n(n)  Handling the load \u2014(1)  Size of load.  The crane shall not be loaded beyond its rated load except for test purposes as provided in paragraph (k) of this section.\n\n(2)  Attaching the load.  (i) The hoist chain or hoist rope shall be free from kinks or twists and shall not be wrapped around the load.\n\n(ii) The load shall be attached to the load block hook by means of slings or other approved devices.\n\n(iii) Care shall be taken to make certain that the sling clears all obstacles.\n\n(3)  Moving the load.  (i) The load shall be well secured and properly balanced in the sling or lifting device before it is lifted more than a few inches.\n\n(ii) Before starting to hoist the following conditions shall be noted:\n\n( a ) Hoist rope shall not be kinked.\n\n( b ) Multiple part lines shall not be twisted around each other.\n\n( c ) The hook shall be brought over the load in such a manner as to prevent swinging.\n\n(iii) During hoisting care shall be taken that:\n\n( a ) There is no sudden acceleration or deceleration of the moving load.\n\n( b ) The load does not contact any obstructions.\n\n(iv) Cranes shall not be used for side pulls except when specifically authorized by a responsible person who has determined that the stability of the crane is not thereby endangered and that various parts of the crane will not be overstressed.\n\n(v) While any employee is on the load or hook, there shall be no hoisting, lowering, or traveling.\n\n(vi) The employer shall require that the operator avoid carrying loads over people.\n\n(vii) The operator shall test the brakes each time a load approaching the rated load is handled. The brakes shall be tested by raising the load a few inches and applying the brakes.\n\n(viii) The load shall not be lowered below the point where less than two full wraps of rope remain on the hoisting drum.\n\n(ix) When two or more cranes are used to lift a load one qualified responsible person shall be in charge of the operation. He shall analyze the operation and instruct all personnel involved in the proper positioning, rigging of the load, and the movements to be made.\n\n(x) The employer shall insure that the operator does not leave his position at the controls while the load is suspended.\n\n(xi) When starting the bridge and when the load or hook approaches near or over personnel, the warning signal shall be sounded.\n\n(4)  Hoist limit switch.  (i) At the beginning of each operator's shift, the upper limit switch of each hoist shall be tried out under no load. Extreme care shall be exercised; the block shall be \u201cinched\u201d into the limit or run in at slow speed. If the switch does not operate properly, the appointed person shall be immediately notified.\n\n(ii) The hoist limit switch which controls the upper limit of travel of the load block shall never be used as an operating control.\n\n(o)  Other requirements, general \u2014(1)  Ladders.  (i) The employer shall insure that hands are free from encumbrances while personnel are using ladders.\n\n(ii) Articles which are too large to be carried in pockets or belts shall be lifted and lowered by hand line.\n\n(2)  Cabs.  (i) Necessary clothing and personal belongings shall be stored in such a manner as not to interfere with access or operation.\n\n(ii) Tools, oil cans, waste, extra fuses, and other necessary articles shall be stored in the tool box, and shall not be permitted to lie loose in or about the cab.\n\n(3)  Fire extinguishers.  The employer shall insure that operators are familiar with the operation and care of fire extinguishers provided."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.14.37.5", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "N", "Subpart N\u2014Materials Handling and Storage", "", "\u00a7 1910.180 Crawler locomotive and truck cranes.", "OSHA", "", "", "[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984; 51 FR 34561, Sept. 29, 1986; 53 FR 12122, Apr. 12, 1988; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996]", "(a)  Definitions applicable to this section.  (1) A  crawler crane  consists of a rotating superstructure with power plant, operating machinery, and boom, mounted on a base, equipped with crawler treads for travel. Its function is to hoist and swing loads at various radii.\n\n(2) A  locomotive crane  consists of a rotating superstructure with power-plant, operating machinery and boom, mounted on a base or car equipped for travel on railroad track. It may be self-propelled or propelled by an outside source. Its function is to hoist and swing loads at various radii.\n\n(3) A  truck crane  consists of a rotating superstructure with powerplant, operating machinery and boom, mounted on an automotive truck equipped with a powerplant for travel. Its function is to hoist and swing loads at various radii.\n\n(4) A  wheel mounted crane  (wagon crane) consists of a rotating superstructure with powerplant, operating machinery and boom, mounted on a base or platform equipped with axles and rubber-tired wheels for travel. The base is usually propelled by the engine in the superstructure, but it may be equipped with a separate engine controlled from the superstructure. Its function is to hoist and swing loads at various radii.\n\n(5) An  accessory  is a secondary part or assembly of parts which contributes to the overall function and usefulness of a machine.\n\n(6)  Appointed  means assigned specific responsibilities by the employer or the employer's representative.\n\n(7)  ANSI  means the American National Standards Institute.\n\n(8) An  angle indicator  (boom) is an accessory which measures the angle of the boom to the horizontal.\n\n(9) The  axis of rotation  is the vertical axis around which the crane superstructure rotates.\n\n(10)  Axle  means the shaft or spindle with which or about which a wheel rotates. On truck- and wheel-mounted cranes it refers to an automotive type of axle assembly including housings, gearing, differential, bearings, and mounting appurtenances.\n\n(11)  Axle  (bogie) means two or more automotive-type axles mounted in tandem in a frame so as to divide the load between the axles and permit vertical oscillation of the wheels.\n\n(12) The  base  (mounting) is the traveling base or carrier on which the rotating superstructure is mounted such as a car, truck, crawlers, or wheel platform.\n\n(13) The  boom  (crane) is a member hinged to the front of the rotating superstructure with the outer end supported by ropes leading to a gantry or A-frame and used for supporting the hoisting tackle.\n\n(14) The  boom angle  is the angle between the longitudinal centerline of the boom and the horizontal. The boom longitudinal centerline is a straight line between the boom foot pin (heel pin) centerline and boom point sheave pin centerline.\n\n(15) The  boom hoist  is a hoist drum and rope reeving system used to raise and lower the boom. The rope system may be all live reeving or a combination of live reeving and pendants.\n\n(16) The  boom stop  is a device used to limit the angle of the boom at the highest position.\n\n(17) A  brake  is a device used for retarding or stopping motion by friction or power means.\n\n(18) A  cab  is a housing which covers the rotating superstructure machinery and/or operator's station. On truck-crane trucks a separate cab covers the driver's station.\n\n(19) The  clutch  is a friction, electromagnetic, hydraulic, pneumatic, or positive mechanical device for engagement or disengagement of power.\n\n(20) The  counterweight  is a weight used to supplement the weight of the machine in providing stability for lifting working loads.\n\n(21)  Designated  means selected or assigned by the employer or the employer's representative as being qualified to perform specific duties.\n\n(22) The  drum  is the cylindrical members around which ropes are wound for raising and lowering the load or boom.\n\n(23)  Dynamic  (loading) means loads introduced into the machine or its components by forces in motion.\n\n(24) The  gantry  (A-frame) is a structural frame, extending above the superstructure, to which the boom support ropes are reeved.\n\n(25) A  jib  is an extension attached to the boom point to provide added boom length for lifting specified loads. The jib may be in line with the boom or offset to various angles.\n\n(26)  Load  (working) means the external load, in pounds, applied to the crane, including the weight of load-attaching equipment such as load blocks, shackles, and slings.\n\n(27)  Load block  (upper) means the assembly of hook or shackle, swivel, sheaves, pins, and frame suspended from the boom point.\n\n(28)  Load block  (lower) means the assembly of hook or shackle, swivel, sheaves, pins, and frame suspended by the hoisting ropes.\n\n(29) A  load hoist  is a hoist drum and rope reeving system used for hoisting and lowering loads.\n\n(30)  Load ratings  are crane ratings in pounds established by the manufacturer in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section.\n\n(31)  Outriggers  are extendable or fixed metal arms, attached to the mounting base, which rest on supports at the outer ends.\n\n(32)  Rail clamp  means a tong-like metal device, mounted on a locomotive crane car, which can be connected to the track.\n\n(33)  Reeving  means a rope system in which the rope travels around drums and sheaves.\n\n(34)  Rope  refers to a wire rope unless otherwise specified.\n\n(35)  Side loading  means a load applied at an angle to the vertical plane of the boom.\n\n(36) A  standby crane  is a crane which is not in regular service but which is used occasionally or intermittently as required.\n\n(37) A  standing (guy) rope  is a supporting rope which maintains a constant distance between the points of attachment to the two components connected by the rope.\n\n(38)  Structural competence  means the ability of the machine and its components to withstand the stresses imposed by applied loads.\n\n(39)  Superstructure  means the rotating upper frame structure of the machine and the operating machinery mounted thereon.\n\n(40)  Swing  means the rotation of the superstructure for movement of loads in a horizontal direction about the axis of rotation.\n\n(41)  Swing mechanism  means the machinery involved in providing rotation of the superstructure.\n\n(42)  Tackle  is an assembly of ropes and sheaves arranged for hoisting and pulling.\n\n(43)  Transit  means the moving or transporting of a crane from one jobsite to another.\n\n(44)  Travel  means the function of the machine moving from one location to another, on a jobsite.\n\n(45) The  travel mechanism  is the machinery involved in providing travel.\n\n(46)  Wheelbase  means the distance between centers of front and rear axles. For a multiple axle assembly the axle center for wheelbase measurement is taken as the midpoint of the assembly.\n\n(47) The  whipline  (auxiliary hoist) is a separate hoist rope system of lighter load capacity and higher speed than provided by the main hoist.\n\n(48) A  winch head  is a power driven spool for handling of loads by means of friction between fiber or wire rope and spool.\n\n(b)  General requirements \u2014(1)  Application.  This section applies to crawler cranes, locomotive cranes, wheel mounted cranes of both truck and self-propelled wheel type, and any variations thereof which retain the same fundamental characteristics. This section includes only cranes of the above types, which are basically powered by internal combustion engines or electric motors and which utilize drums and ropes. Cranes designed for railway and automobile wreck clearances are excepted. The requirements of this section are applicable only to machines when used as lifting cranes.\n\n(2)  New and existing equipment.  All new crawler, locomotive, and truck cranes constructed and utilized on or after August 31, 1971, shall meet the design specifications of the American National Standard Safety Code for Crawler, Locomotive, and Truck Cranes, ANSI B30.5-1968, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6. Crawler, locomotive, and truck cranes constructed prior to August 31, 1971, should be modified to conform to those design specifications by February 15, 1972, unless it can be shown that the crane cannot feasibly or economically be altered and that the crane substantially complies with the requirements of this section.\n\n(3)  Designated personnel.  Only designated personnel shall be permitted to operate a crane covered by this section.\n\n(c)  Load ratings \u2014(1)  Load ratings \u2014 where stability governs lifting performance.  (i) The margin of stability for determination of load ratings, with booms of stipulated lengths at stipulated working radii for the various types of crane mountings, is established by taking a percentage of the loads which will produce a condition of tipping or balance with the boom in the least stable direction, relative to the mounting. The load ratings shall not exceed the following percentages for cranes, with the indicated types of mounting under conditions stipulated in paragraphs (c)(1) (ii) and (iii) of this section.\n\n1  Unless this results in less than 30,000 pound-feet net stabilizing moment about the rail, which shall be minimum with such booms.\n\n(ii) The following stipulations shall govern the application of the values in paragraph (c)(1)(i) of this section for locomotive cranes:\n\n( a ) Tipping with or without the use of outriggers occurs when half of the wheels farthest from the load leave the rail.\n\n( b ) The crane shall be standing on track which is level within 1 percent grade.\n\n( c ) Radius of the load is the horizontal distance from a projection of the axis of rotation to the rail support surface, before loading, to the center of vertical hoist line or tackle with load applied.\n\n( d ) Tipping loads from which ratings are determined shall be applied under static conditions only, i.e., without dynamic effect of hoisting, lowering, or swinging.\n\n( e ) The weight of all auxiliary handling devices such as hoist blocks, hooks, and slings shall be considered a part of the load rating.\n\n(iii) Stipulations governing the application of the values in paragraph (c)(1)(i) of this section for crawler, truck, and wheel-mounted cranes shall be in accordance with Crane Load-Stability Test Code, Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J765, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(iv) The effectiveness of these preceding stability factors will be influenced by such additional factors as freely suspended loads, track, wind, or ground conditions, condition and inflation of rubber tires, boom lengths, proper operating speeds for existing conditions, and, in general, careful and competent operation. All of these shall be taken into account by the user.\n\n(2)  Load rating chart.  A substantial and durable rating chart with clearly legible letters and figures shall be provided with each crane and securely fixed to the crane cab in a location easily visible to the operator while seated at his control station.\n\n(d)  Inspection classification \u2014(1)  Initial inspection.  Prior to initial use all new and altered cranes shall be inspected to insure compliance with provisions of this section.\n\n(2)  Regular inspection.  Inspection procedure for cranes in regular service is divided into two general classifications based upon the intervals at which inspection should be performed. The intervals in turn are dependent upon the nature of the critical components of the crane and the degree of their exposure to wear, deterioration, or malfunction. The two general classifications are herein designated as \u201cfrequent\u201d and \u201cperiodic\u201d, with respective intervals between inspections as defined below:\n\n(i) Frequent inspection: Daily to monthly intervals.\n\n(ii) Periodic inspection: 1- to 12-month intervals, or as specifically recommended by the manufacturer.\n\n(3)  Frequent inspection.  Items such as the following shall be inspected for defects at intervals as defined in paragraph (d)(2)(i) of this section or as specifically indicated including observation during operation for any defects which might appear between regular inspections. Any deficiencies such as listed shall be carefully examined and determination made as to whether they constitute a safety hazard:\n\n(i) All control mechanisms for maladjustment interfering with proper operation: Daily.\n\n(ii) All control mechanisms for excessive wear of components and contamination by lubricants or other foreign matter.\n\n(iii) All safety devices for malfunction.\n\n(iv) Deterioration or leakage in air or hydraulic systems: Daily.\n\n(v) Crane hooks with deformations or cracks. For hooks with cracks or having more than 15 percent in excess of normal throat opening or more than 10\u00b0 twist from the plane of the unbent hook.\n\n(vi) Rope reeving for noncompliance with manufacturer's recommendations.\n\n(vii) Electrical apparatus for malfunctioning, signs of excessive deterioration, dirt, and moisture accumulation.\n\n(4)  Periodic inspection.  Complete inspections of the crane shall be performed at intervals as generally defined in paragraph (d)(2)(ii) of this section depending upon its activity, severity of service, and environment, or as specifically indicated below. These inspections shall include the requirements of paragraph (d)(3) of this section and in addition, items such as the following. Any deficiencies such as listed shall be carefully examined and determination made as to whether they constitute a safety hazard:\n\n(i) Deformed, cracked, or corroded members in the crane structure and boom.\n\n(ii) Loose bolts or rivets.\n\n(iii) Cracked or worn sheaves and drums.\n\n(iv) Worn, cracked, or distorted parts such as pins, bearings, shafts, gears, rollers and locking devices.\n\n(v) Excessive wear on brake and clutch system parts, linings, pawls, and ratchets.\n\n(vi) Load, boom angle, and other indicators over their full range, for any significant inaccuracies.\n\n(vii) Gasoline, diesel, electric, or other power plants for improper performance or noncompliance with safety requirements.\n\n(viii) Excessive wear of chain-drive sprockets and excessive chain stretch.\n\n(ix) Travel steering, braking, and locking devices, for malfunction.\n\n(x) Excessively worn or damaged tires.\n\n(5)  Cranes not in regular use.  (i) A crane which has been idle for a period of one month or more, but less than 6 months, shall be given an inspection conforming with requirements of paragraph (d)(3) of this section and paragraph (g)(2)(ii) of this section before placing in service.\n\n(ii) A crane which has been idle for a period of six months shall be given a complete inspection conforming with requirements of paragraphs (d) (3) and (4) of this section and paragraph (g)(2)(ii) of this section before placing in service.\n\n(iii) Standby cranes shall be inspected at least semiannually in accordance with requirements of paragraph (d)(3) of this section and paragraph (g)(2)(ii) of this section. Such cranes which are exposed to adverse environment should be inspected more frequently.\n\n(6)  Inspection records.  Certification records which include the date of inspection, the signature of the person who performed the inspection and the serial number, or other identifier, of the crane which was inspected shall be made monthly on critical items in use such as brakes, crane hooks, and ropes. This certification record shall be kept readily available.\n\n(e)  Testing \u2014(1)  Operational tests.  (i) In addition to prototype tests and quality-control measures, each new production crane shall be tested by the manufacturer to the extent necessary to insure compliance with the operational requirements of this paragraph including functions such as the following:\n\n( a ) Load hoisting and lowering mechanisms.\n\n( b ) Boom hoisting and lower mechanisms.\n\n( c ) Swinging mechanism.\n\n( d ) Travel mechanism.\n\n( e ) Safety devices.\n\n(ii) Where the complete production crane is not supplied by one manufacturer such tests shall be conducted at final assembly.\n\n(iii) Certified production-crane test results shall be made available.\n\n(2)  Rated load test.  (i) Written reports shall be available showing test procedures and confirming the adequacy of repairs or alterations.\n\n(ii) Test loads shall not exceed 110 percent of the rated load at any selected working radius.\n\n(iii) Where rerating is necessary:\n\n( a ) Crawler, truck, and wheel-mounted cranes shall be tested in accordance with SAE Recommended Practice, Crane Load Stability Test Code J765 (April 1961).\n\n( b ) Locomotive cranes shall be tested in accordance with paragraph (c)(1) (i) and (ii) of this section.\n\n( c ) Rerating test report shall be readily available.\n\n(iv) No cranes shall be rerated in excess of the original load ratings unless such rating changes are approved by the crane manufacturer or final assembler.\n\n(f)  Maintenance procedure\u2014General.  After adjustments and repairs have been made the crane shall not be operated until all guards have been reinstalled, safety devices reactivated, and maintenance equipment removed.\n\n(g)  Rope inspection \u2014(1)  Running ropes.  A thorough inspection of all ropes in use shall be made at least once a month and a certification record which includes the date of inspection, the signature of the person who performed the inspection and an identifier for the ropes shall be prepared and kept on file where readily available. All inspections shall be performed by an appointed or authorized person. Any deterioration, resulting in appreciable loss of original strength shall be carefully observed and detemination made as to whether further use of the rope would constitute a safety hazard. Some of the conditions that could result in an appreciable loss of strength are the following:\n\n(i) Reduction of rope diameter below nominal diameter due to loss of core support, internal or external corrosion, or wear of outside wires.\n\n(ii) A number of broken outside wires and the degree of distribution of concentration of such broken wires.\n\n(iii) Worn outside wires.\n\n(iv) Corroded or broken wires at end connections.\n\n(v) Corroded, cracked, bent, worn, or improperly applied end connections.\n\n(vi) Severe kinking, crushing, cutting, or unstranding.\n\n(2)  Other ropes.  (i) Heavy wear and/or broken wires may occur in sections in contact with equalizer sheaves or other sheaves where rope travel is limited, or with saddles. Particular care shall be taken to inspect ropes at these locations.\n\n(ii) All rope which has been idle for a period of a month or more due to shutdown or storage of a crane on which it is installed shall be given a thorough inspection before it is used. This inspection shall be for all types of deterioration and shall be performed by an appointed or authorized person whose approval shall be required for further use of the rope. A certification record which includes the date of inspection, the signature of the person who performed the inspection, and an identifier for the rope which was inspected shall be prepared and kept readily available.\n\n(iii) Particular care shall be taken in the inspection of nonrotating rope.\n\n(h)  Handling the load \u2014(1)  Size of load.  (i) No crane shall be loaded beyond the rated load, except for test purposes as provided in paragraph (e) of this section.\n\n(ii) When loads which are limited by structural competence rather than by stability are to be handled, it shall be ascertained that the weight of the load has been determined within plus or minus 10 percent before it is lifted.\n\n(2)  Attaching the load.  (i) The hoist rope shall not be wrapped around the load.\n\n(ii) The load shall be attached to the hook by means of slings or other approved devices.\n\n(3)  Moving the load.  (i) The employer shall assure that:\n\n( a ) The crane is level and where necessary blocked properly.\n\n( b ) The load is well secured and properly balanced in the sling or lifting device before it is lifted more than a few inches.\n\n(ii) Before starting to hoist, the following conditions shall be noted:\n\n( a ) Hoist rope shall not be kinked.\n\n( b ) Multiple part lines shall not be twisted around each other.\n\n( c ) The hook shall be brought over the load in such a manner as to prevent swinging.\n\n(iii) During hoisting care shall be taken that:\n\n( a ) There is no sudden acceleration or deceleration of the moving load.\n\n( b ) The load does not contact any obstructions.\n\n(iv) Side loading of booms shall be limited to freely suspended loads. Cranes shall not be used for dragging loads sideways.\n\n(v) No hoisting, lowering, swinging, or traveling shall be done while anyone is on the load or hook.\n\n(vi) The operator should avoid carrying loads over people.\n\n(vii) On truck-mounted cranes, no loads shall be lifted over the front area except as approved by the crane manufacturer.\n\n(viii) The operator shall test the brakes each time a load approaching the rated load is handled by raising it a few inches and applying the brakes.\n\n(ix) Outriggers shall be used when the load to be handled at that particular radius exceeds the rated load without outriggers as given by the manufacturer for that crane. Where floats are used they shall be securely attached to the outriggers. Wood blocks used to support outriggers shall:\n\n( a ) Be strong enough to prevent crushing.\n\n( b ) Be free from defects.\n\n( c ) Be of sufficient width and length to prevent shifting or toppling under load.\n\n(x) Neither the load nor the boom shall be lowered below the point where less than two full wraps of rope remain on their respective drums.\n\n(xi) Before lifting loads with locomotive cranes without using outriggers, means shall be applied to prevent the load from being carried by the truck springs.\n\n(xii) When two or more cranes are used to lift one load, one designated person shall be responsible for the operation. He shall be required to analyze the operation and instruct all personnel involved in the proper positioning, rigging of the load, and the movements to be made.\n\n(xiii) In transit the following additional precautions shall be exercised:\n\n( a ) The boom shall be carried in line with the direction of motion.\n\n( b ) The superstructure shall be secured against rotation, except when negotiating turns when there is an operator in the cab or the boom is supported on a dolly.\n\n( c ) The empty hook shall be lashed or otherwise restrained so that it cannot swing freely.\n\n(xiv) Before traveling a crane with load, a designated person shall be responsible for determining and controlling safety. Decisions such as position of load, boom location, ground support, travel route, and speed of movement shall be in accord with his determinations.\n\n(xv) A crane with or without load shall not be traveled with the boom so high that it may bounce back over the cab.\n\n(xvi) When rotating the crane, sudden starts and stops shall be avoided. Rotational speed shall be such that the load does not swing out beyond the radii at which it can be controlled. A tag or restraint line shall be used when rotation of the load is hazardous.\n\n(xvii) When a crane is to be operated at a fixed radius, the boom-hoist pawl or other positive locking device shall be engaged.\n\n(xviii) Ropes shall not be handled on a winch head without the knowledge of the operator.\n\n(xix) While a winch head is being used, the operator shall be within convenient reach of the power unit control lever.\n\n(4)  Holding the load.  (i) The operator shall not be permitted to leave his position at the controls while the load is suspended.\n\n(ii) No person should be permitted to stand or pass under a load on the hook.\n\n(iii) If the load must remain suspended for any considerable length of time, the operator shall hold the drum from rotating in the lowering direction by activating the positive controllable means of the operator's station.\n\n(i)  Other requirements \u2014(1)  Rail clamps.  Rail clamps shall not be used as a means of restraining tipping of a locomotive crane.\n\n(2)  Ballast or counterweight.  Cranes shall not be operated without the full amount of any ballast or counterweight in place as specified by the maker, but truck cranes that have dropped the ballast or counterweight may be operated temporarily with special care and only for light loads without full ballast or counterweight in place. The ballast or counterweight in place specified by the manufacturer shall not be exceeded.\n\n(3)  Cabs.  (i) Necessary clothing and personal belongings shall be stored in such a manner as to not interfere with access or operation.\n\n(ii) Tools, oil cans, waste, extra fuses, and other necessary articles shall be stored in the tool box, and shall not be permitted to lie loose in or about the cab.\n\n(4)  Refueling.  (i) Refueling with small portable containers shall be done with an approved safety type can equipped with an automatic closing cap and flame arrester. Refer to \u00a7 1910.155(c)(3) for definition of approved.\n\n(ii) Machines shall not be refueled with the engine running.\n\n(5)  Fire extinguishers.  (i) A carbon dioxide, dry chemical, or equivalent fire extinguisher shall be kept in the cab or vicinity of the crane.\n\n(ii) Operating and maintenance personnel shall be made familiar with the use and care of the fire extinguishers provided.\n\n(6)  Swinging locomotive cranes.  A locomotive crane shall not be swung into a position where railway cars on an adjacent track might strike it, until it has been ascertained that cars are not being moved on the adjacent track and proper flag protection has been established.\n\n(j)  Operations near overhead lines.  For operations near overhead electric lines, see \u00a7 1910.333(c)(3)."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.14.37.6", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "N", "Subpart N\u2014Materials Handling and Storage", "", "\u00a7 1910.181 Derricks.", "OSHA", "", "", "[37 FR 22102, Oct. 18, 1972, as amended at 38 FR 14373, June 1, 1973; 43 FR 49750, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984; 51 FR 34561, Sept. 29, 1986; 53 FR 12122, Apr. 12, 1988; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996]", "(a)  Definitions applicable to this section.  (1) A  derrick  is an apparatus consisting of a mast or equivalent member held at the head by guys or braces, with or without a boom, for use with a hoisting mechanism and operating ropes.\n\n(2)  A-frame derrick  means a derrick in which the boom is hinged from a cross member between the bottom ends of two upright members spread apart at the lower ends and joined at the top; the boom point secured to the junction of the side members, and the side members are braced or guyed from this junction point.\n\n(3) A  basket derrick  is a derrick without a boom, similar to a gin pole, with its base supported by ropes attached to corner posts or other parts of the structure. The base is at a lower elevation than its supports. The location of the base of a basket derrick can be changed by varying the length of the rope supports. The top of the pole is secured with multiple reeved guys to position the top of the pole to the desired location by varying the length of the upper guy lines. The load is raised and lowered by ropes through a sheave or block secured to the top of the pole.\n\n(4)  Breast derrick  means a derrick without boom. The mast consists of two side members spread farther apart at the base than at the top and tied together at top and bottom by rigid members. The mast is prevented from tipping forward by guys connected to its top. The load is raised and lowered by ropes through a sheave or block secured to the top crosspiece.\n\n(5)  Chicago boom derrick  means a boom which is attached to a structure, an outside upright member of the structure serving as the mast, and the boom being stepped in a fixed socket clamped to the upright. The derrick is complete with load, boom, and boom point swing line falls.\n\n(6) A  gin pole derrick  is a derrick without a boom. Its guys are so arranged from its top as to permit leaning the mast in any direction. The load is raised and lowered by ropes reeved through sheaves or blocks at the top of the mast.\n\n(7)  Guy derrick  means a fixed derrick consisting of a mast capable of being rotated, supported in a vertical position by guys, and a boom whose bottom end is hinged or pivoted to move in a vertical plane with a reeved rope between the head of the mast and the boom point for raising and lowering the boom, and a reeved rope from the boom point for raising and lowering the load.\n\n(8)  Shearleg derrick  means a derrick without a boom and similar to a breast derrick. The mast, wide at the bottom and narrow at the top, is hinged at the bottom and has its top secured by a multiple reeved guy to permit handling loads at various radii by means of load tackle suspended from the mast top.\n\n(9) A  stiffleg derrick  is a derrick similar to a guy derrick except that the mast is supported or held in place by two or more stiff members, called stifflegs, which are capable of resisting either tensile or compressive forces. Sills are generally provided to connect the lower ends of the stifflegs to the foot of the mast.\n\n(10)  Appointed  means assigned specific responsibilities by the employer or the employer's representative.\n\n(11)  ANSI  means the American National Standards Institute.\n\n(12) A boom is a timber or metal section or strut, pivoted or hinged at the heel (lower end) at a location fixed in height on a frame or mast or vertical member, and with its point (upper end) supported by chains, ropes, or rods to the upper end of the frame, mast, or vertical member. A rope for raising and lowering the load is reeved through sheaves or a block at the boom point. The length of the boom shall be taken as the straight line distance between the axis of the foot pin and the axis of the boom point sheave pin, or where used, the axis of the upper load block attachment pin.\n\n(13)  Boom harness  means the block and sheave arrangement on the boom point to which the topping lift cable is reeved for lowering and raising the boom.\n\n(14) The  boom point  is the outward end of the top section of the boom.\n\n(15)  Derrick bullwheel  means a horizontal ring or wheel, fastened to the foot of a derrick, for the purpose of turning the derrick by means of ropes leading from this wheel to a powered drum.\n\n(16)  Designated  means selected or assigned by the employer or employer's representative as being qualified to perform specific duties.\n\n(17)  Eye  means a loop formed at the end of a rope by securing the dead end to the live end at the base of the loop.\n\n(18) A  fiddle block  is a block consisting of two sheaves in the same plane held in place by the same cheek plates.\n\n(19) The  foot bearing  or  foot block  (sill block) is the lower support on which the mast rotates.\n\n(20) A  gudgeon pin  is a pin connecting the mast cap to the mast allowing rotation of the mast.\n\n(21) A  guy  is a rope used to steady or secure the mast or other member in the desired position.\n\n(22)  Load, working  means the external load, in pounds, applied to the derrick, including the weight of load attaching equipment such as load blocks, shackles, and slings.\n\n(23)  Load block, lower  means the assembly of sheaves, pins, and frame suspended by the hoisting rope.\n\n(24)  Load block, upper  means the assembly of sheaves, pins, and frame suspended from the boom.\n\n(25)  Mast  means the upright member of the derrick.\n\n(26)  Mast cap (spider)  means the fitting at the top of the mast to which the guys are connected.\n\n(27)  Reeving  means a rope system in which the rope travels around drums and sheaves.\n\n(28)  Rope  refers to wire rope unless otherwise specified.\n\n(29)  Safety Hook  means a hook with a latch to prevent slings or load from accidentally slipping off the hook.\n\n(30)  Side loading  is a load applied at an angle to the vertical plane of the boom.\n\n(31) The  sill  is a member connecting the foot block and stiffleg or a member connecting the lower ends of a double member mast.\n\n(32) A  standby derrick  is a derrick not in regular service which is used occasionally or intermittently as required.\n\n(33)  Stiffleg  means a rigid member supporting the mast at the head.\n\n(34)  Swing  means rotation of the mast and/or boom for movements of loads in a horizontal direction about the axis of rotation.\n\n(b)  General requirements \u2014(1)  Application.  This section applies to guy, stiffleg, basket, breast, gin pole, Chicago boom and A-frame derricks of the stationary type, capable of handling loads at variable reaches and powered by hoists through systems of rope reeving, used to perform lifting hook work, single or multiple line bucket work, grab, grapple, and magnet work. Derricks may be permanently installed for temporary use as in construction work. The requirements of this section also apply to any modification of these types which retain their fundamental features, except for floating derricks.\n\n(2)  New and existing equipment.  All new derricks constructed and installed on or after August 31, 1971, shall meet the design specifications of the American National Standard Safety Code for Derricks, ANSI B30.6-1969, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(3)  Designated personnel.  Only designated personnel shall be permitted to operate a derrick covered by this section.\n\n(c)  Load ratings \u2014(1)  Rated load marking.  For permanently installed derricks with fixed lengths of boom, guy, and mast, a substantial, durable, and clearly legible rating chart shall be provided with each derrick and securely affixed where it is visible to personnel responsible for the safe operation of the equipment. The chart shall include the following data:\n\n(i) Manufacturer's approved load ratings at corresponding ranges of boom angle or operating radii.\n\n(ii) Specific lengths of components on which the load ratings are based.\n\n(iii) Required parts for hoist reeving. Size and construction of rope may be shown either on the rating chart or in the operating manual.\n\n(2)  Nonpermanent installations.  For nonpermanent installations, the manufacturer shall provide sufficient information from which capacity charts can be prepared for the particular installation. The capacity charts shall be located at the derricks or the jobsite office.\n\n(d)  Inspection \u2014(1)  Inspection classification.  (i) Prior to initial use all new and altered derricks shall be inspected to insure compliance with the provisions of this section.\n\n(ii) Inspection procedure for derricks in regular service is divided into two general classifications based upon the intervals at which inspection should be performed. The intervals in turn are dependent upon the nature of the critical components of the derrick and the degree of their exposure to wear, deterioration, or malfunction. The two general classifications are herein designated as frequent and periodic with respective intervals between inspections as defined below:\n\n( a ) Frequent inspection\u2014Daily to monthly intervals.\n\n( b ) Periodic inspection\u20141- to 12-month intervals, or as specified by the manufacturer.\n\n(2)  Frequent inspection.  Items such as the following shall be inspected for defects at intervals as defined in paragraph (d)(1)(ii)( a ) of this section or as specifically indicated, including observation during operation for any defects which might appear between regular inspections. Deficiencies shall be carefully examined for any safety hazard:\n\n(i) All control mechanisms: Inspect daily for adjustment, wear, and lubrication.\n\n(ii) All chords and lacing: Inspect daily, visually.\n\n(iii) Tension in guys: Daily.\n\n(iv) Plumb of the mast.\n\n(v) Deterioration or leakage in air or hydraulic systems: Daily.\n\n(vi) Derrick hooks for deformations or cracks; for hooks with cracks or having more than 15 percent in excess of normal throat opening or more than 10\u00b0 twist from the plane of the unbent hook, refer to paragraph (e)(3)(iii) of this section.\n\n(vii) Rope reeving; visual inspection for noncompliance with derrick manufacturer's recommendations.\n\n(viii) Hoist brakes, clutches, and operating levers: check daily for proper functioning before beginning operations.\n\n(ix) Electrical apparatus for malfunctioning, signs of excessive deterioration, dirt, and moisture accumulation.\n\n(3)  Periodic inspection.  (i) Complete inspections of the derrick shall be performed at intervals as generally defined in paragraph (d)(1)(ii)( b ) of this section depending upon its activity, severity of service, and environment, or as specifically indicated below. These inspections shall include the requirements of paragraph (d)(2) of this section and in addition, items such as the following. Deficiencies shall be carefully examined and a determination made as to whether they constitute a safety hazard:\n\n( a ) Structural members for deformations, cracks, and corrosion.\n\n( b ) Bolts or rivets for tightness.\n\n( c ) Parts such as pins, bearings, shafts, gears, sheaves, drums, rollers, locking and clamping devices, for wear, cracks, and distortion.\n\n( d ) Gudgeon pin for cracks, wear, and distortion each time the derrick is to be erected.\n\n( e ) Powerplants for proper performance and compliance with applicable safety requirements.\n\n( f ) Hooks.\n\n(ii) Foundation or supports shall be inspected for continued ability to sustain the imposed loads.\n\n(4)  Derricks not in regular use.  (i) A derrick which has been idle for a period of 1 month or more, but less than 6 months, shall be given an inspection conforming with requirements of paragraph (d)(2) of this section and paragraph (g)(3) of this section before placing in service.\n\n(ii) A derrick which has been idle for a period of over 6 months shall be given a complete inspection conforming with requirements of paragraphs (d) (2) and (3) of this section and paragraph (g)(3) of this section before placing in service.\n\n(iii) Standby derricks shall be inspected at least semiannually in accordance with requirements of paragraph (d)(2) of this section and paragraph (g)(3) of this section.\n\n(e)  Testing \u2014(1)  Operational tests.  Prior to initial use all new and altered derricks shall be tested to insure compliance with this section including the following functions:\n\n(i) Load hoisting and lowering.\n\n(ii) Boom up and down.\n\n(iii) Swing.\n\n(iv) Operation of clutches and brakes of hoist.\n\n(2)  Anchorages.  All anchorages shall be approved by the appointed person. Rock and hairpin anchorages may require special testing.\n\n(f)  Maintenance \u2014(1)  Preventive maintenance.  A preventive maintenance program based on the derrick manufacturer's recommendations shall be established.\n\n(2)  Maintenance procedure.  (i) Before adjustments and repairs are started on a derrick the following precautions shall be taken:\n\n( a ) The derrick to be repaired shall be arranged so it will cause the least interference with other equipment and operations in the area.\n\n( b ) All hoist drum dogs shall be engaged.\n\n( c ) The main or emergency switch shall be locked in the open position, if an electric hoist is used.\n\n( d ) Warning or out of order signs shall be placed on the derrick and hoist.\n\n( e ) The repairs of booms of derricks shall either be made when the booms are lowered and adequately supported or safely tied off.\n\n( f ) A good communication system shall be set up between the hoist operator and the appointed individual in charge of derrick operations before any work on the equipment is started.\n\n(ii) After adjustments and repairs have been made the derrick shall not be operated until all guards have been reinstalled, safety devices reactivated, and maintenance equipment removed.\n\n(3)  Adjustments and repairs.  (i) Any unsafe conditions disclosed by inspection shall be corrected before operation of the derrick is resumed.\n\n(ii) Adjustments shall be maintained to assure correct functioning of components.\n\n(iii) Repairs or replacements shall be provided promptly as needed for safe operation. The following are examples of conditions requiring prompt repair or replacement:\n\n( a ) Hooks showing defects described in paragraph (d)(2)(vi) of this section shall be discarded.\n\n( b ) All critical parts which are cracked, broken, bent, or excessively worn.\n\n( c ) [Reserved]\n\n( d ) All replacement and repaired parts shall have at least the original safety factor.\n\n(g)  Rope inspection \u2014(1)  Running ropes.  A thorough inspection of all ropes in use shall be made at least once a month and a certification record which includes the date of inspection, the signature of the person who performed the inspection, and an identifier for the ropes which were inspected shall be prepared and kept on file where readily available. Any deterioration, resulting in appreciable loss of original strength shall be carefully observed and determination made as to whether further use of the rope would constitute a safety hazard. Some of the conditions that could result in an appreciable loss of strength are the following:\n\n(i) Reduction of rope diameter below nominal diameter due to loss of core support, internal or external corrosion, or wear of outside wires.\n\n(ii) A number of broken outside wires and the degree of distribution or concentration of such broken wires.\n\n(iii) Worn outside wires.\n\n(iv) Corroded or broken wires at end connections.\n\n(v) Corroded, cracked, bent, worn, or improperly applied end connections.\n\n(vi) Severe kinking, crushing, cutting, or unstranding.\n\n(2)  Limited travel ropes.  Heavy wear and/or broken wires may occur in sections in contact with equalizer sheaves or other sheaves where rope travel is limited, or with saddles. Particular care shall be taken to inspect ropes at these locations.\n\n(3)  Idle ropes.  All rope which has been idle for a period of a month or more due to shutdown or storage of a derrick on which it is installed shall be given a thorough inspection before it is used. This inspection shall be for all types of deterioration. A certification record shall be prepared and kept readily available which includes the date of inspection, the signature of the person who performed the inspection, and an identifier for the ropes which were inspected.\n\n(4)  Nonrotating ropes.  Particular care shall be taken in the inspection of nonrotating rope.\n\n(h)  Operations of derricks.  Derrick operations shall be directed only by the individual specifically designated for that purpose.\n\n(i)  Handling the load \u2014(1)  Size of load.  (i) No derrick shall be loaded beyond the rated load.\n\n(ii) When loads approach the maximum rating of the derrick, it shall be ascertained that the weight of the load has been determined within plus or minus 10 percent before it is lifted.\n\n(2)  Attaching the load.  (i) The hoist rope shall not be wrapped around the load.\n\n(ii) The load shall be attached to the hook by means of slings or other suitable devices.\n\n(3)  Moving the load.  (i) The load shall be well secured and properly balanced in the sling or lifting device before it is lifted more than a few inches.\n\n(ii) Before starting to hoist, the following conditions shall be noted:\n\n( a ) Hoist rope shall not be kinked.\n\n( b ) Multiple part lines shall not be twisted around each other.\n\n( c ) The hook shall be brought over the load in such a manner as to prevent swinging.\n\n(iii) During hoisting, care shall be taken that:\n\n( a ) There is no sudden acceleration or deceleration of the moving load.\n\n( b ) Load does not contact any obstructions.\n\n(iv) A derrick shall not be used for side loading except when specifically authorized by a responsible person who has determined that the various structural components will not be overstressed.\n\n(v) No hoisting, lowering, or swinging shall be done while anyone is on the load or hook.\n\n(vi) The operator should avoid carrying loads over people.\n\n(vii) The operator shall test the brakes each time a load approaching the rated load is handled by raising it a few inches and applying the brakes.\n\n(viii) Neither the load nor boom shall be lowered below the point where less than two full wraps of rope remain on their respective drums.\n\n(ix) When rotating a derrick, sudden starts and stops shall be avoided. Rotational speed shall be such that the load does not swing out beyond the radius at which it can be controlled.\n\n(x) Boom and hoisting rope systems shall not be twisted.\n\n(4)  Holding the load.  (i) The operator shall not be allowed to leave his position at the controls while the load is suspended.\n\n(ii) People should not be permitted to stand or pass under a load on the hook.\n\n(iii) If the load must remain suspended for any considerable length of time, a dog, or pawl and ratchet, or other equivalent means, rather than the brake alone, shall be used to hold the load.\n\n(5)  Use of winch heads.  (i) Ropes shall not be handled on a winch head without the knowledge of the operator.\n\n(ii) While a winch head is being used, the operator shall be within convenient reach of the power unit control lever.\n\n(6)  Securing boom.  Dogs, pawls, or other positive holding mechanism on the hoist shall be engaged. When not in use, the derrick boom shall:\n\n(i) Be laid down;\n\n(ii) Be secured to a stationary member, as nearly under the head as possible, by attachment of a sling to the load block; or\n\n(iii) Be hoisted to a vertical position and secured to the mast.\n\n(j)  Other requirements \u2014(1)  Guards.  (i) Exposed moving parts, such as gears, ropes, setscrews, projecting keys, chains, chain sprockets, and reciprocating components, which constitute a hazard under normal operating conditions shall be guarded.\n\n(ii) Guards shall be securely fastened.\n\n(iii) Each guard shall be capable of supporting without permanent distortion, the weight of a 200-pound person unless the guard is located where it is impossible for a person to step on it.\n\n(2)  Hooks.  (i) Hooks shall meet the manufacturer's recommendations and shall not be overloaded.\n\n(ii) Safety latch type hooks shall be used wherever possible.\n\n(3)  Fire extinguishers.  (i) A carbon dioxide, dry chemical, or equivalent fire extinguisher shall be kept in the immediate vicinity of the derrick.\n\n(ii) Operating and maintenance personnel shall be familiar with the use and care of the fire extinguishers provided.\n\n(4)  Refueling.  (i) Refueling with portable containers shall be done with approved safety type containers equipped with automatic closing cap and flame arrester. Refer to \u00a7 1910.155(c)(3) for definition of Approved.\n\n(ii) Machines shall not be refueled with the engine running.\n\n(5)  Operations near overhead lines.  For operations near overhead electric lines, see \u00a7 1910.333(c)(3).\n\n(6)  Cab or operating enclosure.  (i) Necessary clothing and personal belongings shall be stored in such a manner as to not interfere with access or operation.\n\n(ii) Tools, oilcans, waste, extra fuses, and other necessary articles shall be stored in the toolbox, and shall not be permitted to lie loose in or about the cab or operating enclosure."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.14.37.7", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "N", "Subpart N\u2014Materials Handling and Storage", "", "\u00a7 1910.183 Helicopters.", "OSHA", "", "", "[40 FR 13440, Mar. 26, 1975, as amended at 63 FR 33467, June 18, 1998]", "(a) [Reserved]\n\n(b)  Briefing.  Prior to each day's operation a briefing shall be conducted. This briefing shall set forth the plan of operation for the pilot and ground personnel.\n\n(c)  Slings and tag lines.  Loads shall be properly slung. Tag lines shall be of a length that will not permit their being drawn up into the rotors. Pressed sleeve, swedged eyes, or equivalent means shall be used for all freely suspended loads to prevent hand splices from spinning open or cable clamps from loosening.\n\n(d)  Cargo hooks.  All electrically operated cargo hooks shall have the electrical activating device so designed and installed as to prevent inadvertent operation. In addition, these cargo hooks shall be equipped with an emergency mechanical control for releasing the load. The employer shall ensure that the hooks are tested prior to each day's operation by a competent person to determine that the release functions properly, both electrically and mechanically.\n\n(e)  Personal protective equipment.  (1) Personal protective equipment shall be provided and the employer shall ensure its use by employees receiving the load. Personal protective equipment shall consist of complete eye protection and hardhats secured by chinstraps.\n\n(2) Loose-fitting clothing likely to flap in rotor downwash, and thus be snagged on the hoist line, may not be worn.\n\n(f)  Loose gear and objects.  The employer shall take all necessary precautions to protect employees from flying objects in the rotor downwash. All loose gear within 100 feet of the place of lifting the load or depositing the load, or within all other areas susceptible to rotor downwash, shall be secured or removed.\n\n(g)  Housekeeping.  Good housekeeping shall be maintained in all helicopter loading and unloading areas.\n\n(h)  Load safety.  The size and weight of loads, and the manner in which loads are connected to the helicopter shall be checked. A lift may not be made if the helicopter operator believes the lift cannot be made safely.\n\n(i)  Hooking and unhooking loads.  When employees perform work under hovering craft, a safe means of access shall be provided for employees to reach the hoist line hook and engage or disengage cargo slings. Employees may not be permitted to perform work under hovering craft except when necessary to hook or unhook loads.\n\n(j)  Static charge.  Static charge on the suspended load shall be dissipated with a grounding device before ground personnel touch the suspended load, unless protective rubber gloves are being worn by all ground personnel who may be required to touch the suspended load.\n\n(k)  Weight limitation.  The weight of an external load shall not exceed the helicopter manufacturer's rating.\n\n(l)  Ground lines.  Hoist wires or other gear, except for pulling lines or conductors that are allowed to \u201cpay out\u201d from a container or roll off a reel, shall not be attached to any fixed ground structure, or allowed to foul on any fixed structure.\n\n(m)  Visibility.  Ground personnel shall be instructed and the employer shall ensure that when visibility is reduced by dust or other conditions, they shall exercise special caution to keep clear of main and stabilizing rotors. Precautions shall also be taken by the employer to eliminate, as far as practical, the dust or other conditions reducing the visibility.\n\n(n)  Signal systems.  The employer shall instruct the aircrew and ground personnel on the signal systems to be used and shall review the system with the employees in advance of hoisting the load. This applies to both radio and hand signal systems. Hand signals, where used, shall be as shown in Figure N-1.\n\n(o)  Approach distance.  No employee shall be permitted to approach within 50 feet of the helicopter when the rotor blades are turning, unless his work duties require his presence in that area.\n\n(p)  Approaching helicopter.  The employer shall instruct employees, and shall ensure, that whenever approaching or leaving a helicopter which has its blades rotating, all employees shall remain in full view of the pilot and keep in a crouched position. No employee shall be permitted to work in the area from the cockpit or cabin rearward while blades are rotating, unless authorized by the helicopter operator to work there.\n\n(q)  Personnel.  Sufficient ground personnel shall be provided to ensure that helicopter loading and unloading operations can be performed safely.\n\n(r)  Communications.  There shall be constant reliable communication between the pilot and a designated employee of the ground crew who acts as a signalman during the period of loading and unloading. The signalman shall be clearly distinguishable from other ground personnel.\n\n(s)  Fires.  Open fires shall not be permitted in areas where they could be spread by the rotor downwash."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.14.37.8", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "N", "Subpart N\u2014Materials Handling and Storage", "", "\u00a7 1910.184 Slings.", "OSHA", "", "", "[40 FR 27369, June 27, 1975, as amended at 40 FR 31598, July 28, 1975; 41 FR 13353, Mar. 30, 1976; 58 FR 35309, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996; 76 FR 33607, June 8, 2011; 84 FR 15105, Apr. 15, 2019]", "(a)  Scope.  This section applies to slings used in conjunction with other material handling equipment for the movement of material by hoisting, in employments covered by this part. The types of slings covered are those made from alloy steel chain, wire rope, metal mesh, natural or synthetic fiber rope (conventional three strand construction), and synthetic web (nylon, polyester, and polypropylene).\n\n(b)  Definitions. Angle of loading  is the inclination of a leg or branch of a sling measured from the horizontal or vertical plane as shown in Fig. N-184-5; provided that an angle of loading of five degrees or less from the vertical may be considered a vertical angle of loading.\n\nBasket hitch  is a sling configuration whereby the sling is passed under the load and has both ends, end attachments, eyes or handles on the hook or a single master link.\n\nBraided wire rope  is a wire rope formed by plaiting component wire ropes.\n\nBridle wire rope sling  is a sling composed of multiple wire rope legs with the top ends gathered in a fitting that goes over the lifting hook.\n\nCable laid endless sling-mechanical joint  is a wire rope sling made endless by joining the ends of a single length of cable laid rope with one or more metallic fittings.\n\nCable laid grommet-hand tucked  is an endless wire rope sling made from one length of rope wrapped six times around a core formed by hand tucking the ends of the rope inside the six wraps.\n\nCable laid rope  is a wire rope composed of six wire ropes wrapped around a fiber or wire rope core.\n\nCable laid rope sling-mechanical joint  is a wire rope sling made from a cable laid rope with eyes fabricated by pressing or swaging one or more metal sleeves over the rope junction.\n\nChoker hitch  is a sling configuration with one end of the sling passing under the load and through an end attachment, handle or eye on the other end of the sling.\n\nCoating  is an elastomer or other suitable material applied to a sling or to a sling component to impart desirable properties.\n\nCross rod  is a wire used to join spirals of metal mesh to form a complete fabric. (See Fig. N-184-2.)\n\nDesignated  means selected or assigned by the employer or the employer's representative as being qualified to perform specific duties.\n\nEquivalent entity  is a person or organization (including an employer) which, by possession of equipment, technical knowledge and skills, can perform with equal competence the same repairs and tests as the person or organization with which it is equated.\n\nFabric (metal mesh)  is the flexible portion of a metal mesh sling consisting of a series of transverse coils and cross rods.\n\nFemale handle (choker)  is a handle with a handle eye and a slot of such dimension as to permit passage of a male handle thereby allowing the use of a metal mesh sling in a choker hitch. (See Fig. N-184-1.)\n\nHandle  is a terminal fitting to which metal mesh fabric is attached. (See Fig. N-184-1.)\n\nHandle eye  is an opening in a handle of a metal mesh sling shaped to accept a hook, shackle or other lifting device. (See Fig. N-184-1.)\n\nHitch  is a sling configuration whereby the sling is fastened to an object or load, either directly to it or around it.\n\nLink  is a single ring of a chain.\n\nMale handle (triangle)  is a handle with a handle eye.\n\nMaster coupling link  is an alloy steel welded coupling link used as an intermediate link to join alloy steel chain to master links. (See Fig. N-184-3.)\n\nMaster link  or  gathering ring  is a forged or welded steel link used to support all members (legs) of an alloy steel chain sling or wire rope sling. (See Fig. N-184-3.)\n\nMechanical coupling link  is a nonwelded, mechanically closed steel link used to attach master links, hooks, etc., to alloy steel chain.\n\nProof load  is the load applied in performance of a proof test.\n\nProof test  is a nondestructive tension test performed by the sling manufacturer or an equivalent entity to verify construction and workmanship of a sling.\n\nRated capacity  or  working load limit  is the maximum working load permitted by the provisions of this section.\n\nReach  is the effective length of an alloy steel chain sling measured from the top bearing surface of the upper terminal component to the bottom bearing surface of the lower terminal component.\n\nSelvage edge  is the finished edge of synthetic webbing designed to prevent unraveling.\n\nSling  is an assembly which connects the load to the material handling equipment.\n\nSling manufacturer  is a person or organization that assembles sling components into their final form for sale to users.\n\nSpiral  is a single transverse coil that is the basic element from which metal mesh is fabricated. (See Fig. N-184-2.)\n\nStrand laid endless sling-mechanical joint  is a wire rope sling made endless from one length of rope with the ends joined by one or more metallic fittings.\n\nStrand laid grommet-hand tucked  is an endless wire rope sling made from one length of strand wrapped six times around a core formed by hand tucking the ends of the strand inside the six wraps.\n\nStrand laid rope  is a wire rope made with strands (usually six or eight) wrapped around a fiber core, wire strand core, or independent wire rope core (IWRC).\n\nVertical hitch  is a method of supporting a load by a single, vertical part or leg of the sling. (See Fig. N-184-4.)\n\n(c)  Safe operating practices.  Whenever any sling is used, the following practices shall be observed:\n\n(1) Slings that are damaged or defective shall not be used.\n\n(2) Slings shall not be shortened with knots or bolts or other makeshift devices.\n\n(3) Sling legs shall not be kinked.\n\n(4) Slings shall not be loaded in excess of their rated capacities.\n\n(5) Slings used in a basket hitch shall have the loads balanced to prevent slippage.\n\n(6) Slings shall be securely attached to their loads.\n\n(7) Slings shall be padded or protected from the sharp edges of their loads.\n\n(8) Suspended loads shall be kept clear of all obstructions.\n\n(9) All employees shall be kept clear of loads about to be lifted and of suspended loads.\n\n(10) Hands or fingers shall not be placed between the sling and its load while the sling is being tightened around the load.\n\n(11) Shock loading is prohibited.\n\n(12) A sling shall not be pulled from under a load when the load is resting on the sling.\n\n(13) Employers must not load a sling in excess of its recommended safe working load as prescribed by the sling manufacturer on the identification markings permanently affixed to the sling.\n\n(14) Employers must not use slings without affixed and legible identification markings.\n\n(d)  Inspections.  Each day before being used, the sling and all fastenings and attachments shall be inspected for damage or defects by a competent person designated by the employer. Additional inspections shall be performed during sling use, where service conditions warrant. Damaged or defective slings shall be immediately removed from service.\n\n(e)  Alloy steel chain slings \u2014(1)  Sling identification.  Alloy steel chain slings shall have permanently affixed durable identification stating size, grade, rated capacity, and reach.\n\n(2)  Attachments.  (i) Hooks, rings, oblong links, pear shaped links, welded or mechanical coupling links or other attachments shall have a rated capacity at least equal to that of the alloy steel chain with which they are used or the sling shall not be used in excess of the rated capacity of the weakest component.\n\n(ii) Makeshift links or fasteners formed from bolts or rods, or other such attachments, shall not be used.\n\n(3)  Inspections.  (i) In addition to the inspection required by paragraph (d) of this section, a thorough periodic inspection of alloy steel chain slings in use shall be made on a regular basis, to be determined on the basis of (A) frequency of sling use; (B) severity of service conditions; (C) nature of lifts being made; and (D) experience gained on the service life of slings used in similar circumstances. Such inspections shall in no event be at intervals greater than once every 12 months.\n\n(ii) The employer shall make and maintain a record of the most recent month in which each alloy steel chain sling was thoroughly inspected, and shall make such record available for examination.\n\n(iii) The thorough inspection of alloy steel chain slings shall be performed by a competent person designated by the employer, and shall include a thorough inspection for wear, defective welds, deformation and increase in length. Where such defects or deterioration are present, the sling shall be immediately removed from service.\n\n(4)  Proof testing.  The employer shall ensure that before use, each new, repaired, or reconditioned alloy steel chain sling, including all welded components in the sling assembly, shall be proof tested by the sling manufacturer or equivalent entity, in accordance with paragraph 5.2 of the American Society of Testing and Materials Specification A391-65, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6 (ANSI G61.1-1968). The employer shall retain a certificate of the proof test and shall make it available for examination.\n\n(5) [Reserved]\n\n(6)  Safe operating temperatures.  Employers must permanently remove an alloy steel-chain slings from service if it is heated above 1000 degrees F. When exposed to service temperatures in excess of 600 degrees F, employers must reduce the maximum working-load limits permitted by the chain manufacturer in accordance with the chain or sling manufacturer's recommendations.\n\n(7)  Repairing and reconditioning alloy steel chain slings.  (i) Worn or damaged alloy steel chain slings or attachments shall not be used until repaired. When welding or heat testing is performed, slings shall not be used unless repaired, reconditioned and proof tested by the sling manufacturer or an equivalent entity.\n\n(ii) Mechanical coupling links or low carbon steel repair links shall not be used to repair broken lengths of chain.\n\n(8) Effect of wear. If the chain size at any point of the link is less than that stated in Table N-184-1, the employer must remove the chain from service.\n\n(9)  Deformed attachments.  (i) Alloy steel chain slings with cracked or deformed master links, coupling links or other components shall be removed from service.\n\nTable N-184-1\u2014Minimum Allowable Chain Size At Any Point of Link\n\n(ii) Slings shall be removed from service if hooks are cracked, have been opened more than 15 percent of the normal throat opening measured at the narrowest point or twisted more than 10 degrees from the plane of the unbent hook.\n\n(f)  Wire-rope slings \u2014(1)  Sling use.  Employers must use only wire-rope slings that have permanently affixed and legible identification markings as prescribed by the manufacturer, and that indicate the recommended safe working load for the type(s) of hitch(es) used, the angle upon which it is based, and the number of legs if more than one.\n\n(2)  Minimum sling lengths.  (i) Cable laid and 6 \u00d7 19 and 6 \u00d7 37 slings shall have a minimum clear length of wire rope 10 times the component rope diameter between splices, sleeves or end fittings.\n\n(ii) Braided slings shall have a minimum clear length of wire rope 40 times the component rope diameter between the loops or end fittings.\n\n(iii) Cable laid grommets, strand laid grommets and endless slings shall have a minimum circumferential length of 96 times their body diameter.\n\n(3)  Safe operating temperatures.  Fiber core wire rope slings of all grades shall be permanently removed from service if they are exposed to temperatures in excess of 200 \u00b0F. When nonfiber core wire rope slings of any grade are used at temperatures above 400 \u00b0F or below minus 60 \u00b0F, recommendations of the sling manufacturer regarding use at that temperature shall be followed.\n\n(4)  End attachments.  (i) Welding of end attachments, except covers to thimbles, shall be performed prior to the assembly of the sling.\n\n(ii) All welded end attachments shall not be used unless proof tested by the manufacturer or equivalent entity at twice their rated capacity prior to initial use. The employer shall retain a certificate of the proof test, and make it available for examination.\n\n(5)  Removal from service.  Wire rope slings shall be immediately removed from service if any of the following conditions are present:\n\n(i) Ten randomly distributed broken wires in one rope lay, or five broken wires in one strand in one rope lay.\n\n(ii) Wear or scraping of one-third the original diameter of outside individual wires.\n\n(iii) Kinking, crushing, bird caging or any other damage resulting in distortion of the wire rope structure.\n\n(iv) Evidence of heat damage.\n\n(v) End attachments that are cracked, deformed or worn.\n\n(vi) Hooks that have been opened more than 15 percent of the normal throat opening measured at the narrowest point or twisted more than 10 degrees from the plane of the unbent hook.\n\n(vii) Corrosion of the rope or end attachments.\n\n(g)  Metal mesh slings \u2014(1)  Sling marking.  Each metal mesh sling shall have permanently affixed to it a durable marking that states the rated capacity for vertical basket hitch and choker hitch loadings.\n\n(2)  Handles.  Handles shall have a rated capacity at least equal to the metal fabric and exhibit no deformation after proof testing.\n\n(3)  Attachments of handles to fabric.  The fabric and handles shall be joined so that:\n\n(i) The rated capacity of the sling is not reduced.\n\n(ii) The load is evenly distributed across the width of the fabric.\n\n(iii) Sharp edges will not damage the fabric.\n\n(4)  Sling coatings.  Coatings which diminish the rated capacity of a sling shall not be applied.\n\n(5)  Sling testing.  All new and repaired metal mesh slings, including handles, shall not be used unless proof tested by the manufacturer or equivalent entity at a minimum of 1\n 1/2  times their rated capacity. Elastomer impregnated slings shall be proof tested before coating.\n\n(6) [Reserved]\n\n(7)  Safe operating temperatures.  Metal mesh slings which are not impregnated with elastomers may be used in a temperature range from minus 20 \u00b0F to plus 550 \u00b0F without decreasing the working load limit. Metal mesh slings impregnated with polyvinyl chloride or neoprene may be used only in a temperature range from zero degrees to plus 200 \u00b0F. For operations outside these temperature ranges or for metal mesh slings impregnated with other materials, the sling manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed.\n\n(8)  Repairs.  (i) Metal mesh slings which are repaired shall not be used unless repaired by a metal mesh sling manufacturer or an equivalent entity.\n\n(ii) Once repaired, each sling shall be permanently marked or tagged, or a written record maintained, to indicate the date and nature of the repairs and the person or organization that performed the repairs. Records of repairs shall be made available for examination.\n\n(9)  Removal from service.  Metal mesh slings shall be immediately removed from service if any of the following conditions are present:\n\n(i) A broken weld or broken brazed joint along the sling edge.\n\n(ii) Reduction in wire diameter of 25 per cent due to abrasion or 15 per cent due to corrosion.\n\n(iii) Lack of flexibility due to distortion of the fabric.\n\n(iv) Distortion of the female handle so that the depth of the slot is increased more than 10 per cent.\n\n(v) Distortion of either handle so that the width of the eye is decreased more than 10 per cent.\n\n(vi) A 15 percent reduction of the original cross sectional area of metal at any point around the handle eye.\n\n(vii) Distortion of either handle out of its plane.\n\n(h)  Natural and synthetic fiber-rope slings \u2014(1)  Sling use.  Employers must use natural and synthetic fiber-rope slings that have permanently affixed and legible identification markings stating the rated capacity for the type(s) of hitch(es) used and the angle upon which it is based, type of fiber material, and the number of legs if more than one.\n\n(2)  Safe operating temperatures.  Natural and synthetic fiber rope slings, except for wet frozen slings, may be used in a temperature range from minus 20 \u00b0F to plus 180 \u00b0F without decreasing the working load limit. For operations outside this temperature range and for wet frozen slings, the sling manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed.\n\n(3)  Splicing.  Spliced fiber rope slings shall not be used unless they have been spliced in accordance with the following minimum requirements and in accordance with any additional recommendations of the manufacturer:\n\n(i) In manila rope, eye splices shall consist of at least three full tucks, and short splices shall consist of at least six full tucks, three on each side of the splice center line.\n\n(ii) In synthetic fiber rope, eye splices shall consist of at least four full tucks, and short splices shall consist of at least eight full tucks, four on each side of the center line.\n\n(iii) Strand end tails shall not be trimmed flush with the surface of the rope immediately adjacent to the full tucks. This applies to all types of fiber rope and both eye and short splices. For fiber rope under one inch in diameter, the tail shall project at least six rope diameters beyond the last full tuck. For fiber rope one inch in diameter and larger, the tail shall project at least six inches beyond the last full tuck. Where a projecting tail interferes with the use of the sling, the tail shall be tapered and spliced into the body of the rope using at least two additional tucks (which will require a tail length of approximately six rope diameters beyond the last full tuck).\n\n(iv) Fiber rope slings shall have a minimum clear length of rope between eye splices equal to 10 times the rope diameter.\n\n(v) Knots shall not be used in lieu of splices.\n\n(vi) Clamps not designed specifically for fiber ropes shall not be used for splicing.\n\n(vii) For all eye splices, the eye shall be of such size to provide an included angle of not greater than 60 degrees at the splice when the eye is placed over the load or support.\n\n(4)  End attachments.  Fiber rope slings shall not be used if end attachments in contact with the rope have sharp edges or projections.\n\n(5)  Removal from service.  Natural and synthetic fiber rope slings shall be immediately removed from service if any of the following conditions are present:\n\n(i) Abnormal wear.\n\n(ii) Powdered fiber between strands.\n\n(iii) Broken or cut fibers.\n\n(iv) Variations in the size or roundness of strands.\n\n(v) Discoloration or rotting.\n\n(vi) Distortion of hardware in the sling.\n\n(6)  Repairs.  Only fiber rope slings made from new rope shall be used. Use of repaired or reconditioned fiber rope slings is prohibited.\n\n(i)  Synthetic web slings \u2014(1)  Sling identification.  Each sling shall be marked or coded to show the rated capacities for each type of hitch and type of synthetic web material.\n\n(2)  Webbing.  Synthetic webbing shall be of uniform thickness and width and selvage edges shall not be split from the webbing's width.\n\n(3)  Fittings.  Fittings shall be:\n\n(i) Of a minimum breaking strength equal to that of the sling; and\n\n(ii) Free of all sharp edges that could in any way damage the webbing.\n\n(4)  Attachment of end fittings to webbing and formation of eyes.  Stitching shall be the only method used to attach end fittings to webbing and to form eyes. The thread shall be in an even pattern and contain a sufficient number of stitches to develop the full breaking strength of the sling.\n\n(5) [Reserved]\n\n(6)  Environmental conditions.  When synthetic web slings are used, the following precautions shall be taken:\n\n(i) Nylon web slings shall not be used where fumes, vapors, sprays, mists or liquids of acids or phenolics are present.\n\n(ii) Polyester and polypropylene web slings shall not be used where fumes, vapors, sprays, mists or liquids of caustics are present.\n\n(iii) Web slings with aluminum fittings shall not be used where fumes, vapors, sprays, mists or liquids of caustics are present.\n\n(7)  Safe operating temperatures.  Synthetic web slings of polyester and nylon shall not be used at temperatures in excess of 180 \u00b0F. Polypropylene web slings shall not be used at temperatures in excess of 200 \u00b0F.\n\n(8)  Repairs.  (i) Synthetic web slings which are repaired shall not be used unless repaired by a sling manufacturer or an equivalent entity.\n\n(ii) Each repaired sling shall be proof tested by the manufacturer or equivalent entity to twice the rated capacity prior to its return to service. The employer shall retain a certificate of the proof test and make it available for examination.\n\n(iii) Slings, including webbing and fittings, which have been repaired in a temporary manner shall not be used.\n\n(9)  Removal from service.  Synthetic web slings shall be immediately removed from service if any of the following conditions are present:\n\n(i) Acid or caustic burns;\n\n(ii) Melting or charring of any part of the sling surface;\n\n(iii) Snags, punctures, tears or cuts;\n\n(iv) Broken or worn stitches; or\n\n(v) Distortion of fittings."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.15.37.1", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "O", "Subpart O\u2014Machinery and Machine Guarding", "", "\u00a7 1910.211 Definitions.", "OSHA", "", "", "[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 39 FR 41846, Dec. 3, 1974; 53 FR 8353, Mar. 14, 1988]", "(a) As used in \u00a7\u00a7 1910.213 and 1910.214 unless the context clearly requires otherwise, the following woodworking machinery terms shall have the meaning prescribed in this paragraph.\n\n(1)  Point of operations  means that point at which cutting, shaping, boring, or forming is accomplished upon the stock.\n\n(2)  Push stick  means a narrow strip of wood or other soft material with a notch cut into one end and which is used to push short pieces of material through saws.\n\n(3)  Block  means a short block of wood, provided with a handle similar to that of a plane and a shoulder at the rear end, which is used for pushing short stock over revolving cutters.\n\n(b) As used in \u00a7 1910.215 unless the context clearly requires otherwise, the following abrasive wheel machinery terms shall have the meanings prescribed in this paragraph.\n\n(1)  Type 1 straight wheels  means wheels having diameter, thickness, and hole size dimensions, and they should be used only on the periphery. Type 1 wheels shall be mounted between flanges.\n\nLimitation:  Hole dimension (H) should not be greater than two-thirds of wheel diameter dimension (D) for precision, cylindrical, centerless, or surface grinding applications. Maximum hole size for all other applications should not exceed one-half wheel diameter.\n\nLimitation:  Hole dimension (H) should not be greater than two-thirds of wheel diameter dimension (D) for precision, cylindrical, centerless, or surface grinding applications. Maximum hole size for all other applications should not exceed one-half wheel diameter.\n\n(2)  Type 2 cylinder wheels  means wheels having diameter, wheel thickness, and rim thickness dimensions. Grinding is performed on the rim face only, dimension W. Cylinder wheels may be plain, plate mounted, inserted nut, or of the projecting stud type.\n\nLimitation:  Rim height, T dimension, is generally equal to or greater than rim thickness, W dimension.\n\nLimitation:  Rim height, T dimension, is generally equal to or greater than rim thickness, W dimension.\n\nSide grinding wheel having a diameter, thickness and wall\u2014wheel is mounted on the diameter.\n\nSide grinding wheel having a diameter, thickness and wall\u2014wheel is mounted on the diameter.\n\n(3)  Type 6 straight cup wheels  means wheels having diameter, thickness, hole size, rim thickness, and back thickness dimensions. Grinding is always performed on rim face, W dimension.\n\nLimitation:  Minimum back thickness, E dimension, should not be less than one-fourth T dimension. In addition, when unthreaded hole wheels are specified, the inside flat, K dimension, must be large enough to accommodate a suitable flange.\n\nLimitation:  Minimum back thickness, E dimension, should not be less than one-fourth T dimension. In addition, when unthreaded hole wheels are specified, the inside flat, K dimension, must be large enough to accommodate a suitable flange.\n\nSide grinding wheel having a diameter, thickness and hole with one side straight or flat and the opposite side recessed. This type, however, differs from Type 5 in that the grinding is performed on the wall of the abrasive created by the difference between the diameter of the recess and the outside diameter of the wheel. Therefore, the wall dimension \u201cW\u201d takes precedence over the diameter of the recess as an essential intermediate dimension to describe this shape type.\n\nSide grinding wheel having a diameter, thickness and hole with one side straight or flat and the opposite side recessed. This type, however, differs from Type 5 in that the grinding is performed on the wall of the abrasive created by the difference between the diameter of the recess and the outside diameter of the wheel. Therefore, the wall dimension \u201cW\u201d takes precedence over the diameter of the recess as an essential intermediate dimension to describe this shape type.\n\n(4)  Type 11 flaring cup wheels  mean wheels having double diameter dimensions D and J, and in addition have thickness, hole size, rim and back thickness dimensions. Grinding is always performed on rim face, W dimension. Type 11 wheels are subject to all limitations of use and mounting listed for type 6 straight sided cup wheels definition.\n\nLimitation:  Minimum back thickness, E dimension, should not be less than one-fourth T dimension. In addition when unthreaded hole wheels are specified the inside flat, K dimension, shall be large enough to accommodate a suitable flange.\n\nLimitation:  Minimum back thickness, E dimension, should not be less than one-fourth T dimension. In addition when unthreaded hole wheels are specified the inside flat, K dimension, shall be large enough to accommodate a suitable flange.\n\nSide grinding wheel having a wall flared or tapered outward from the back. Wall thickness at the back is normally greater than at the grinding face (W).\n\nSide grinding wheel having a wall flared or tapered outward from the back. Wall thickness at the back is normally greater than at the grinding face (W).\n\n(5)  Modified types 6 and 11 wheels (terrazzo)  mean some type 6 and 11 cup wheels used in the terrazzo trade having tapered K dimensions to match a special tapered flange furnished by the machine builder.\n\nLimitation:  These wheels shall be mounted only with a special tapered flange.\n\nLimitation:  These wheels shall be mounted only with a special tapered flange.\n\n(6)  Types 27 and 28 depressed center wheels  mean wheels having diameter, thickness, and hole size dimensions. Both types are reinforced, organic bonded wheels having offset hubs which permit side and peripheral grinding operations without interference with the mounting. Type 27 wheels are manufactured with flat grinding rims permitting notching and cutting operations. Type 28 wheels have saucer shaped grinding rims.\n\n(i) Limitations: Special supporting, back adapter and inside flange nuts are required for the proper mounting of these types of wheels subject to limitations of \u00a7 1910.215(c)(4) (i) and (ii).\n\n(ii) Mounts which are affixed to the wheel by the manufacturer may not require an inside nut and shall not be reused.\n\n(7)  Type 27A depressed center, cutting-off wheels  mean wheels having diameter, thickness, and hole size dimensions. They are reinforced, organic bonded, offset hub type wheels, usually 16 inches diameter and larger, specially designed for use on cutting-off machines where mounting nut or outer flange interference cannot be tolerated.\n\nLimitations:  See \u00a7 1910.215(c)(1).\n\nLimitations:  See \u00a7 1910.215(c)(1).\n\n(8)  Surface feet per minute  (s.f.p.m.) means the distance in feet any one abrasive grain on the peripheral surface of a grinding wheel travels in 1 minute.\n\nSurface Feet Per Minute = 3.1416 \u00d7 diameter in inches \u00d7 r.p.m. \u00f7 12 or .262 \u00d7 diameter in inches \u00d7 r.p.m.\n\nSurface Feet Per Minute = 3.1416 \u00d7 diameter in inches \u00d7 r.p.m. \u00f7 12 or .262 \u00d7 diameter in inches \u00d7 r.p.m.\n\n(b) 12-inch diameter wheel, 1,000 revolutions per minute. Surface Feet per minute .262 \u00d7 12 \u00d7 1,000 = 3,144 s.f.p.m.\n\n(9)  Flanges  means collars, discs or plates between which wheels are mounted and are referred to as adaptor, sleeve, or back up type. See paragraph (c) of \u00a7 1910.215 for full description.\n\n(10)  Snagging  means grinding which removes relatively large amounts of material without regard to close tolerances or surface finish requirements.\n\n(11)  Off-hand grinding  means the grinding of any material or part which is held in the operator's hand.\n\n(12)  Safety guard  means an enclosure designed to restrain the pieces of the grinding wheel and furnish all possible protection in the event that the wheel is broken in operation. See paragraph (b) of \u00a7 1910.215.\n\n(13)  Cutting off wheels  means wheels having diameter thickness and hole size dimensions and are subject to all limitations of mounting and use listed for type 1 wheels, the definition in subparagraph (1) of this paragraph and paragraph (d) of \u00a7 1910.215. They may be steel centered, diamond abrasive or organic bonded abrasive of the plain or reinforced type.\n\n(i) Limitation: Cutting off wheels are recommended only for use on specially designed and fully guarded machines and are subject to the following maximum thickness and hole size limitations.\n\n(ii) Maximum hole size for cutting-off wheels should not be larger than \n 1/4 -wheel diameter.\n\n(14)  Abrasive wheel  means a cutting tool consisting of abrasive grains held together by organic or inorganic bonds. Diamond and reinforced wheels are included.\n\n(15)  Organic wheels  means wheels which are bonded by means of an organic material such as resin, rubber, shellac, or other similar bonding agent.\n\n(16)  Inorganic wheels  means wheels which are bonded by means of inorganic material such as clay, glass, porcelain, sodium silicate, magnesium oxychloride, or metal. Wheels bonded with clay, glass, porcelain or related ceramic materials are characterized as  vitrified bonded wheels.\n\n(c) As used in \u00a7 1910.216, unless the context clearly requires otherwise, the following mills and calenders in the rubber and plastic industries terms shall have the meanings prescribed in this paragraph.\n\n(1)  Bite  means the nip point between any two inrunning rolls.\n\n(2)  Calender  means a machine equipped with two or more metal rolls revolving in opposite directions and used for continuously sheeting or plying up rubber and plastics compounds and for frictioning or coating materials with rubber and plastics compounds.\n\n(3)  Mill  means a machine consisting of two adjacent metal rolls, set horizontally, which revolve in opposite directions (i.e., toward each other as viewed from above) used for the mechanical working of rubber and plastics compounds.\n\n(d) As used in \u00a7 1910.217, unless the context clearly requires otherwise, the following power press terms shall have the meaning prescribed in this paragraph.\n\n(1)  Antirepeat  means the part of the clutch/brake control system designed to limit the press to a single stroke if the tripping means is held operated. Antirepeat requires release of all tripping mechanisms before another stroke can be initiated.  Antirepeat  is also called single stroke reset or reset circuit.\n\n(2)  Brake  means the mechanism used on a mechanical power press to stop and/or hold the crankshaft, either directly or through a gear train, when the clutch is disengaged.\n\n(3)  Bolster plate  means the plate attached to the top of the bed of the press having drilled holes or T-slots for attaching the lower die or die shoe.\n\n(4)  Clutch  means the coupling mechanism used on a mechanical power press to couple the flywheel to the crankshaft, either directly or through a gear train.\n\n(5)  Full revolution clutch  means a type of clutch that, when tripped, cannot be disengaged until the crankshaft has completed a full revolution and the press slide a full stroke.\n\n(6)  Part revolution clutch  means a type of clutch that can be disengaged at any point before the crankshaft has completed a full revolution and the press slide a full stroke.\n\n(7)  Direct drive  means the type of driving arrangement wherein no clutch is used; coupling and decoupling of the driving torque is accomplished by energization and deenergization of a motor. Even though not employing a clutch, direct drives match the operational characteristics of \u201cpart revolution clutches\u201d because the driving power may be disengaged during the stroke of the press.\n\n(8)  Concurrent  means acting in conjunction, and is used to describe a situation wherein two or more controls exist in an operated condition at the same time.\n\n(9)  Continuous  means uninterrupted multiple strokes of the slide without intervening stops (or other clutch control action) at the end of individual strokes.\n\n(10)  Counterbalance  means the mechanism that is used to balance or support the weight of the connecting rods, slide, and slide attachments.\n\n(11)  Device  means a press control or attachment that:\n\n(i) Restrains the operator from inadvertently reaching into the point of operation, or\n\n(ii) Prevents normal press operation if the operator's hands are inadvertently within the point of operation, or\n\n(iii) Automatically withdraws the operator's hands if the operator's hands are inadvertently within the point of operation as the dies close, or\n\n(iv) Prevents the initiation of a stroke, or stops of stroke in progress, when there is an intrusion through the sensing field by any part of the operator's body or by any other object.\n\n(12)  Presence sensing device  means a device designed, constructed and arranged to create a sensing field or area that signals the clutch/brake control to deactivate the clutch and activate the brake of the press when any part of the operator's body or a hand tool is within such field or area.\n\n(13)  Gate or movable barrier device  means a movable barrier arranged to enclose the point of operation before the press stroke can be started.\n\n(14)  Holdout or restraint device  means a mechanism, including attachments for operator's hands, that when anchored and adjusted prevent the operator's hands from entering the point of operation.\n\n(15)  Pull-out device  means a mechanism attached to the operator's hands and connected to the upper die or slide of the press, that is designed, when properly adjusted, to withdraw the operator's hands as the dies close, if the operator's hands are inadvertently within the point of operation.\n\n(16)  Sweep device  means a single or double arm (rod) attached to the upper die or slide of the press and designed to move the operator's hands to a safe position as the dies close, if the operator's hands are inadvertently within the point of operation.\n\n(17)  Two hand control device  means a two hand trip that further requires concurrent pressure from both hands of the operator during a substantial part of the die-closing portion of the stroke of the press.\n\n(18)  Die  means the tooling used in a press for cutting or forming material. An upper and a lower die make a complete set.\n\n(19)  Die builder  means any person who builds dies for power presses.\n\n(20)  Die set  means a tool holder held in alignment by guide posts and bushings and consisting of a lower shoe, an upper shoe or punch holder, and guide posts and bushings.\n\n(21)  Die setter  means an individual who places or removes dies in or from mechanical power presses, and who, as a part of his duties, makes the necessary adjustments to cause the tooling to function properly and safely.\n\n(22)  Die setting  means the process of placing or removing dies in or from a mechanical power press, and the process of adjusting the dies, other tooling and safeguarding means to cause them to function properly and safely.\n\n(23)  Die shoe  means a plate or block upon which a die holder is mounted. A die shoe functions primarily as a base for the complete die assembly, and, when used, is bolted or clamped to the bolster plate or the face of slide.\n\n(24)  Ejector  means a mechanism for removing work or material from between the dies.\n\n(25)  Face of slide  means the bottom surface of the slide to which the punch or upper die is generally attached.\n\n(26)  Feeding  means the process of placing or removing material within or from the point of operation.\n\n(27)  Automatic feeding  means feeding wherein the material or part being processed is placed within or removed from the point of operation by a method or means not requiring action by an operator on each stroke of the press.\n\n(28)  Semiautomatic feeding  means feeding wherein the material or part being processed is placed within or removed from the point of operation by an auxiliary means controlled by operator on each stroke of the press.\n\n(29)  Manual feeding  means feeding wherein the material or part being processed is handled by the operator on each stroke of the press.\n\n(30)  Foot control  means the foot operated control mechanism designed to be used with a clutch or clutch/brake control system.\n\n(31)  Foot pedal  means the foot operated lever designed to operate the mechanical linkage that trips a full revolution clutch.\n\n(32)  Guard  means a barrier that prevents entry of the operator's hands or fingers into the point of operation.\n\n(33)  Die enclosure guard  means an enclosure attached to the die shoe or stripper, or both, in a fixed position.\n\n(34)  Fixed barrier guard  means a die space barrier attached to the press frame.\n\n(35)  Interlocked press barrier guard  means a barrier attached to the press frame and interlocked so that the press stroke cannot be started normally unless the guard itself, or its hinged or movable sections, enclose the point of operation.\n\n(36)  Adjustable barrier guard  means a barrier requiring adjustment for each job or die setup.\n\n(37)  Guide post  means the pin attached to the upper or lower die shoe operating within the bushing on the opposing die shoe, to maintain the alignment of the upper and lower dies.\n\n(38)  Hand feeding tool  means any hand held tool designed for placing or removing material or parts to be processed within or from the point of operation.\n\n(39)  Inch  means an intermittent motion imparted to the slide (on machines using part revolution clutches) by momentary operation of the  Inch  operating means. Operation of the  Inch  operating means engages the driving clutch so that a small portion of one stroke or indefinite stroking can occur, depending upon the length of time the  Inch  operating means is held operated.  Inch  is a function used by the die setter for setup of dies and tooling, but is not intended for use during production operations by the operator.\n\n(40)  Jog  means an intermittent motion imparted to the slide by momentary operation of the drive motor, after the clutch is engaged with the flywheel at rest.\n\n(41)  Knockout  means a mechanism for releasing material from either die.\n\n(42)  Liftout  means the mechanism also known as knockout.\n\n(43)  Operator's station  means the complete complement of controls used by or available to an operator on a given operation for stroking the press.\n\n(44)  Pinch point  means any point other than the point of operation at which it is possible for a part of the body to be caught between the moving parts of a press or auxiliary equipment, or between moving and stationary parts of a press or auxiliary equipment or between the material and moving part or parts of the press or auxiliary equipment.\n\n(45)  Point of operation  means the area of the press where material is actually positioned and work is being performed during any process such as shearing, punching, forming, or assembling.\n\n(46)  Press  means a mechanically powered machine that shears, punches, forms or assembles metal or other material by means of cutting, shaping, or combination dies attached to slides. A press consists of a stationary bed or anvil, and a slide (or slides) having a controlled reciprocating motion toward and away from the bed surface, the slide being guided in a definite path by the frame of the press.\n\n(47)  Repeat  means an unintended or unexpected successive stroke of the press resulting from a malfunction.\n\n(48)  Safety block  means a prop that, when inserted between the upper and lower dies or between the bolster plate and the face of the slide, prevents the slide from falling of its own deadweight.\n\n(49)  Single stroke  means one complete stroke of the slide, usually initiated from a full open (or up) position, followed by closing (or down), and then a return to the full open position.\n\n(50)  Single stroke mechanism  means an arrangement used on a full revolution clutch to limit the travel of the slide to one complete stroke at each engagement of the clutch.\n\n(51)  Slide  means the main reciprocating press member. A slide is also called a ram, plunger, or platen.\n\n(52)  Stop control  means an operator control designed to immediately deactivate the clutch control and activate the brake to stop slide motion.\n\n(53)  Stripper  means a mechanism or die part for removing the parts or material from the punch.\n\n(54)  Stroking selector  means the part of the clutch/brake control that determines the type of stroking when the operating means is actuated. The stroking selector generally includes positions for \u201cOff\u201d (Clutch Control), \u201cInch,\u201d \u201cSingle Stroke,\u201d and \u201cContinuous\u201d (when Continuous is furnished).\n\n(55)  Trip or (tripping)  means activation of the clutch to \u201crun\u201d the press.\n\n(56)  Turnover bar  means a bar used in die setting to manually turn the crankshaft of the press.\n\n(57)  Two-hand trip  means a clutch actuating means requiring the concurrent use of both hands of the operator to trip the press.\n\n(58)  Unitized tooling  means a type of die in which the upper and lower members are incorporated into a selfcontained unit so arranged as to hold the die members in alignment.\n\n(59)  Control system  means sensors, manual input and mode selection elements, interlocking and decision-making circuitry, and output elements to the press operating mechanism.\n\n(60)  Brake monitor  means a sensor designed, constructed, and arranged to monitor the effectiveness of the press braking system.\n\n(61)  Presence sensing device initiation  means an operating mode of indirect manual initiation of a single stroke by a presence sensing device when it senses that work motions of the operator, related to feeding and/or removing parts, are completed and all parts of the operator's body or hand tools are safely clear of the point of operation.\n\n(62)  Safety system  means the integrated total system, including the pertinent elements of the press, the controls, the safeguarding and any required supplemental safeguarding, and their interfaces with the operator, and the environment, designed, constructed and arranged to operate together as a unit, such that a single failure or single operating error will not cause injury to personnel due to point of operation hazards.\n\n(63)  Authorized person  means one to whom the authority and responsibility to perform a specific assignment has been given by the employer.\n\n(64)  Certification  or  certify  means, in the case of design certification/validation, that the manufacturer has reviewed and tested the design and manufacture, and in the case of installation certification/validation and annual recertification/revalidation, that the employer has reviewed and tested the installation, and concludes in both cases that the requirements of \u00a7 1910.217 (a) through (h) and appendix A have been met. The certifications are made to the validation organization.\n\n(65)  Validation  or  validate  means for PSDI safety systems that an OSHA recognized third-party validation organization:\n\n(i) For design certification/validation has reviewed the manufacturer's certification that the PSDI safety system meets the requirements of \u00a7 1910.217 (a) through (h) and appendix A and the underlying tests and analyses performed by the manufacturer, has performed additional tests and analyses which may be required by \u00a7 1910.217 (a) through (h) and appendix A, and concludes that the requirements of \u00a7 1910.217 (a) through (h) and appendix A have been met; and\n\n(ii) For installation certification/validation and annual recertification/revalidation has reviewed the employer's certification that the PSDI safety system meets the requirements of \u00a7 1910.217 (a) through (h) and appendix A and the underlying tests performed by the employer, has performed additional tests and analyses which may be required by \u00a7 1910.217 (a) through (h) and appendix A, and concludes that the requirements of \u00a7 1910.217 (a) through (h) and appendix A have been met.\n\n(66)  Certification/validation  and  certify/validate  means the combined process of certification and validation.\n\n(e) As used in \u00a7 1910.218, unless the context clearly requires otherwise, the following forging and hot metal terms shall have the meaning prescribed in this paragraph.\n\n(1)  Forging  means the product of work on metal formed to a desired shape by impact or pressure in hammers, forging machines (upsetters), presses, rolls, and related forming equipment. Forging hammers, counterblow equipment and high-energy-rate forging machines impart impact to the workpiece, while most other types of forging equipment impart squeeze pressure in shaping the stock. Some metals can be forged at room temperature, but the majority of metals are made more plastic for forging by heating.\n\n(2)  Open framehammers (or blacksmith hammers)  mean hammers used primarily for the shaping of forgings by means of impact with flat dies. Open frame hammers generally are so constructed that the anvil assembly is separate from the operating mechanism and machine supports; it rests on its own independent foundation. Certain exceptions are forging hammers made with frame mounted on the anvil; e.g., the smaller, single-frame hammers are usually made with the anvil and frame in one piece.\n\n(3)  Steam hammers  mean a type of drop hammer where the ram is raised for each stroke by a double-action steam cylinder and the energy delivered to the workpiece is supplied by the velocity and weight of the ram and attached upper die driven downward by steam pressure. Energy delivered during each stroke may be varied.\n\n(4)  Gravity hammers  mean a class of forging hammer wherein energy for forging is obtained by the mass and velocity of a freely falling ram and the attached upper die. Examples: board hammers and air-lift hammers.\n\n(5)  Forging presses  mean a class of forging equipment wherein the shaping of metal between dies is performed by mechanical or hydraulic pressure, and usually is accomplished with a single workstroke of the press for each die station.\n\n(6)  Trimming presses  mean a class of auxiliary forging equipment which removes flash or excess metal from a forging. This trimming operation can also be done cold, as can coining, a product sizing operation.\n\n(7)  High-energy-rate forging machines  mean a class of forging equipment wherein high ram velocities resulting from the sudden release of a compressed gas against a free piston impart impact to the workpiece.\n\n(8)  Forging rolls  mean a class of auxiliary forging equipment wherein stock is shaped between power driven rolls bearing contoured dies. Usually used for preforming, roll forging is often employed to reduce thickness and increase length of stock.\n\n(9)  Ring rolls  mean a class for forging equipment used for shaping weldless rings from pierced discs or thick-walled, ring-shaped blanks between rolls which control wall thickness, ring diameter, height and contour.\n\n(10)  Bolt-headers  mean the same as an upsetter or forging machine except that the diameter of stock fed into the machine is much smaller, i.e., commonly three-fourths inch or less.\n\n(11) Rivet making machines mean the same as upsetters and boltheaders when producing rivets with stock diameter of 1-inch or more. Rivet making with less than 1-inch diameter is usually a cold forging operation, and therefore not included in this subpart.\n\n(12) Upsetters (or forging machines, or headers) type of forging equipment, related to the mechanical press, in which the main forming energy is applied horizontally to the workpiece which is gripped and held by prior action of the dies.\n\n(f) As used in \u00a7 1910.219, unless the context clearly requires otherwise, the following mechanical power-transmission guarding terms shall have the meaning prescribed in this paragraph.\n\n(1)  Belts  include all power transmission belts, such as flat belts, round belts, V-belts, etc., unless otherwise specified.\n\n(2)  Belt shifter  means a device for mechanically shifting belts from tight to loose pulleys or vice versa, or for shifting belts on cones of speed pulleys.\n\n(3)  Belt pole  (sometimes called a  belt shipper  or  shipper pole, ) means a device used in shifting belts on and off fixed pulleys on line or countershaft where there are no loose pulleys.\n\n(4)  Exposed to contact  means that the location of an object is such that a person is likely to come into contact with it and be injured.\n\n(5)  Flywheels  include flywheels, balance wheels, and flywheel pulleys mounted and revolving on crankshaft of engine or other shafting.\n\n(6)  Maintenance runway  means any permanent runway or platform used for oiling, maintenance, running adjustment, or repair work, but not for passageway.\n\n(7)  Nip-point belt and pulley guard  means a device which encloses the pulley and is provided with rounded or rolled edge slots through which the belt passes.\n\n(8)  Point of operation  means that point at which cutting, shaping, or forming is accomplished upon the stock and shall include such other points as may offer a hazard to the operator in inserting or manipulating the stock in the operation of the machine.\n\n(9)  Prime movers  include steam, gas, oil, and air engines, motors, steam and hydraulic turbines, and other equipment used as a source of power.\n\n(10)  Sheaves  mean grooved pulleys, and shall be so classified unless used as flywheels."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.15.37.2", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "O", "Subpart O\u2014Machinery and Machine Guarding", "", "\u00a7 1910.212 General requirements for all machines.", "OSHA", "", "", "", "(a)  Machine guarding \u2014(1)  Types of guarding.  One or more methods of machine guarding shall be provided to protect the operator and other employees in the machine area from hazards such as those created by point of operation, ingoing nip points, rotating parts, flying chips and sparks. Examples of guarding methods are\u2014barrier guards, two-hand tripping devices, electronic safety devices, etc.\n\n(2)  General requirements for machine guards.  Guards shall be affixed to the machine where possible and secured elsewhere if for any reason attachment to the machine is not possible. The guard shall be such that it does not offer an accident hazard in itself.\n\n(3)  Point of operation guarding.  (i) Point of operation is the area on a machine where work is actually performed upon the material being processed.\n\n(ii) The point of operation of machines whose operation exposes an employee to injury, shall be guarded. The guarding device shall be in conformity with any appropriate standards therefor, or, in the absence of applicable specific standards, shall be so designed and constructed as to prevent the operator from having any part of his body in the danger zone during the operating cycle.\n\n(iii) Special handtools for placing and removing material shall be such as to permit easy handling of material without the operator placing a hand in the danger zone. Such tools shall not be in lieu of other guarding required by this section, but can only be used to supplement protection provided.\n\n(iv) The following are some of the machines which usually require point of operation guarding:\n\n( a ) Guillotine cutters.\n\n( b ) Shears.\n\n( c ) Alligator shears.\n\n( d ) Power presses.\n\n( e ) Milling machines.\n\n( f ) Power saws.\n\n( g ) Jointers.\n\n( h ) Portable power tools.\n\n( i ) Forming rolls and calenders.\n\n(4)  Barrels, containers, and drums.  Revolving drums, barrels, and containers shall be guarded by an enclosure which is interlocked with the drive mechanism, so that the barrel, drum, or container cannot revolve unless the guard enclosure is in place.\n\n(5)  Exposure of blades.  When the periphery of the blades of a fan is less than seven (7) feet above the floor or working level, the blades shall be guarded. The guard shall have openings no larger than one-half (\n 1/2 ) inch.\n\n(b)  Anchoring fixed machinery.  Machines designed for a fixed location shall be securely anchored to prevent walking or moving."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.15.37.3", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "O", "Subpart O\u2014Machinery and Machine Guarding", "", "\u00a7 1910.213 Woodworking machinery requirements.", "OSHA", "", "", "[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49750, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984]", "(a)  Machine construction general.  (1) Each machine shall be so constructed as to be free from sensible vibration when the largest size tool is mounted and run idle at full speed.\n\n(2) Arbors and mandrels shall be constructed so as to have firm and secure bearing and be free from play.\n\n(3) [Reserved]\n\n(4) Any automatic cutoff saw that strokes continuously without the operator being able to control each stroke shall not be used.\n\n(5) Saw frames or tables shall be constructed with lugs cast on the frame or with an equivalent means to limit the size of the saw blade that can be mounted, so as to avoid overspeed caused by mounting a saw larger than intended.\n\n(6) Circular saw fences shall be so constructed that they can be firmly secured to the table or table assembly without changing their alignment with the saw. For saws with tilting tables or tilting arbors the fence shall be so constructed that it will remain in a line parallel with the saw, regardless of the angle of the saw with the table.\n\n(7) Circular saw gages shall be so constructed as to slide in grooves or tracks that are accurately machined, to insure exact alignment with the saw for all positions of the guide.\n\n(8) Hinged saw tables shall be so constructed that the table can be firmly secured in any position and in true alignment with the saw.\n\n(9) All belts, pulleys, gears, shafts, and moving parts shall be guarded in accordance with the specific requirements of \u00a7 1910.219.\n\n(10) It is recommended that each power-driven woodworking machine be provided with a disconnect switch that can be locked in the off position.\n\n(11) The frames and all exposed, noncurrent-carrying metal parts of portable electric woodworking machinery operated at more than 90 volts to ground shall be grounded and other portable motors driving electric tools which are held in the hand while being operated shall be grounded if they operate at more than 90 volts to ground. The ground shall be provided through use of a separate ground wire and polarized plug and receptacle.\n\n(12) For all circular saws where conditions are such that there is a possibility of contact with the portion of the saw either beneath or behind the table, that portion of the saw shall be covered with an exhaust hood, or, if no exhaust system is required, with a guard that shall be so arranged as to prevent accidental contact with the saw.\n\n(13) Revolving double arbor saws shall be fully guarded in accordance with all the requirements for circular crosscut saws or with all the requirements for circular ripsaws, according to the kind of saws mounted on the arbors.\n\n(14) No saw, cutter head, or tool collar shall be placed or mounted on a machine arbor unless the tool has been accurately machined to size and shape to fit the arbor.\n\n(15) Combs (featherboards) or suitable jigs shall be provided at the workplace for use when a standard guard cannot be used, as in dadoing, grooving, jointing, moulding, and rabbeting.\n\n(b)  Machine controls and equipment.  (1) A mechanical or electrical power control shall be provided on each machine to make it possible for the operator to cut off the power from each machine without leaving his position at the point of operation.\n\n(2) On machines driven by belts and shafting, a locking-type belt shifter or an equivalent positive device shall be used.\n\n(3) On applications where injury to the operator might result if motors were to restart after power failures, provision shall be made to prevent machines from automatically restarting upon restoration of power.\n\n(4) Power controls and operating controls should be located within easy reach of the operator while he is at his regular work location, making it unnecessary for him to reach over the cutter to make adjustments. This does not apply to constant pressure controls used only for setup purposes.\n\n(5) On each machine operated by electric motors, positive means shall be provided for rendering such controls or devices inoperative while repairs or adjustments are being made to the machines they control.\n\n(6) Each operating treadle shall be protected against unexpected or accidental tripping.\n\n(7) Feeder attachments shall have the feed rolls or other moving parts so covered or guarded as to protect the operator from hazardous points.\n\n(c)  Hand-fed ripsaws.  (1) Each circular hand-fed ripsaw shall be guarded by a hood which shall completely enclose that portion of the saw above the table and that portion of the saw above the material being cut. The hood and mounting shall be arranged so that the hood will automatically adjust itself to the thickness of and remain in contact with the material being cut but it shall not offer any considerable resistance to insertion of material to saw or to passage of the material being sawed. The hood shall be made of adequate strength to resist blows and strains incidental to reasonable operation, adjusting, and handling, and shall be so designed as to protect the operator from flying splinters and broken saw teeth. It shall be made of material that is soft enough so that it will be unlikely to cause tooth breakage. The hood shall be so mounted as to insure that its operation will be positive, reliable, and in true alignment with the saw; and the mounting shall be adequate in strength to resist any reasonable side thrust or other force tending to throw it out of line.\n\n(2) Each hand-fed circular ripsaw shall be furnished with a spreader to prevent material from squeezing the saw or being thrown back on the operator. The spreader shall be made of hard tempered steel, or its equivalent, and shall be thinner than the saw kerf. It shall be of sufficient width to provide adequate stiffness or rigidity to resist any reasonable side thrust or blow tending to bend or throw it out of position. The spreader shall be attached so that it will remain in true alignment with the saw even when either the saw or table is tilted. The provision of a spreader in connection with grooving, dadoing, or rabbeting is not required. On the completion of such operations, the spreader shall be immediately replaced.\n\n(3) Each hand-fed circular ripsaw shall be provided with nonkickback fingers or dogs so located as to oppose the thrust or tendency of the saw to pick up the material or to throw it back toward the operator. They shall be designed to provide adequate holding power for all the thicknesses of materials being cut.\n\n(d)  Hand-fed crosscut table saws.  (1) Each circular crosscut table saw shall be guarded by a hood which shall meet all the requirements of paragraph (c)(1) of this section for hoods for circular ripsaws.\n\n(2) [Reserved]\n\n(e)  Circular resaws.  (1) Each circular resaw shall be guarded by a hood or shield of metal above the saw. This hood or shield shall be so designed as to guard against danger from flying splinters or broken saw teeth.\n\n(2) Each circular resaw (other than self-feed saws with a roller or wheel at back of the saw) shall be provided with a spreader fastened securely behind the saw. The spreader shall be slightly thinner than the saw kerf and slightly thicker than the saw disk.\n\n(f)  Self-feed circular saws.  (1) Feed rolls and saws shall be protected by a hood or guard to prevent the hands of the operator from coming in contact with the in-running rolls at any point. The guard shall be constructed of heavy material, preferably metal, and the bottom of the guard shall come down to within three-eighths inch of the plane formed by the bottom or working surfaces of the feed rolls. This distance (three-eighths inch) may be increased to three-fourths inch, provided the lead edge of the hood is extended to be not less than 5\n 1/2  inches in front of the nip point between the front roll and the work.\n\n(2) Each self-feed circular ripsaw shall be provided with sectional non-kickback fingers for the full width of the feed rolls. They shall be located in front of the saw and so arranged as to be in continual contact with the wood being fed.\n\n(g)  Swing cutoff saws.  The requirements of this paragraph are also applicable to sliding cutoff saws mounted above the table.\n\n(1) Each swing cutoff saw shall be provided with a hood that will completely enclose the upper half of the saw, the arbor end, and the point of operation at all positions of the saw. The hood shall be constructed in such a manner and of such material that it will protect the operator from flying splinters and broken saw teeth. Its hood shall be so designed that it will automatically cover the lower portion of the blade, so that when the saw is returned to the back of the table the hood will rise on top of the fence, and when the saw is moved forward the hood will drop on top of and remain in contact with the table or material being cut.\n\n(2) Each swing cutoff saw shall be provided with an effective device to return the saw automatically to the back of the table when released at any point of its travel. Such a device shall not depend for its proper functioning upon any rope, cord, or spring. If there is a counterweight, the bolts supporting the bar and counterweight shall be provided with cotter pins; and the counterweight shall be prevented from dropping by either a bolt passing through both the bar and counterweight, or a bolt put through the extreme end of the bar, or, where the counterweight does not encircle the bar, a safety chain attached to it.\n\n(3) Limit chains or other equally effective devices shall be provided to prevent the saw from swinging beyond the front or back edges of the table, or beyond a forward position where the gullets of the lowest saw teeth will rise above the table top.\n\n(4) Inverted swing cutoff saws shall be provided with a hood that will cover the part of the saw that protrudes above the top of the table or above the material being cut. It shall automatically adjust itself to the thickness of and remain in contact with the material being cut.\n\n(h)  Radial saws.  (1) The upper hood shall completely enclose the upper portion of the blade down to a point that will include the end of the saw arbor. The upper hood shall be constructed in such a manner and of such material that it will protect the operator from flying splinters, broken saw teeth, etc., and will deflect sawdust away from the operator. The sides of the lower exposed portion of the blade shall be guarded to the full diameter of the blade by a device that will automatically adjust itself to the thickness of the stock and remain in contact with stock being cut to give maximum protection possible for the operation being performed.\n\n(2) Each radial saw used for ripping shall be provided with nonkickback fingers or dogs located on both sides of the saw so as to oppose the thrust or tendency of the saw to pick up the material or to throw it back toward the operator. They shall be designed to provide adequate holding power for all the thicknesses of material being cut.\n\n(3) An adjustable stop shall be provided to prevent the forward travel of the blade beyond the position necessary to complete the cut in repetitive operations.\n\n(4) Installation shall be in such a manner that the front end of the unit will be slightly higher than the rear, so as to cause the cutting head to return gently to the starting position when released by the operator.\n\n(5) Ripping and ploughing shall be against the direction in which the saw turns. The direction of the saw rotation shall be conspicuously marked on the hood. In addition, a permanent label not less than 1\n 1/2  inches by \n 3/4  inch shall be affixed to the rear of the guard at approximately the level of the arbor, reading as follows: \u201cDanger: Do Not Rip or Plough From This End\u201d.\n\n(i)  Bandsaws and band resaws.  (1) All portions of the saw blade shall be enclosed or guarded, except for the working portion of the blade between the bottom of the guide rolls and the table. Bandsaw wheels shall be fully encased. The outside periphery of the enclosure shall be solid. The front and back of the band wheels shall be either enclosed by solid material or by wire mesh or perforated metal. Such mesh or perforated metal shall be not less than 0.037 inch (U.S. Gage No. 20), and the openings shall be not greater than three-eighths inch. Solid material used for this purpose shall be of an equivalent strength and firmness. The guard for the portion of the blade between the sliding guide and the upper-saw-wheel guard shall protect the saw blade at the front and outer side. This portion of the guard shall be self-adjusting to raise and lower with the guide. The upper-wheel guard shall be made to conform to the travel of the saw on the wheel.\n\n(2) Each bandsaw machine shall be provided with a tension control device to indicate a proper tension for the standard saws used on the machine, in order to assist in the elimination of saw breakage due to improper tension.\n\n(3) Feed rolls of band resaws shall be protected with a suitable guard to prevent the hands of the operator from coming in contact with the in-running rolls at any point. The guard shall be constructed of heavy material, preferably metal, and the edge of the guard shall come to within three-eighths inch of the plane formed by the inside face of the feed roll in contact with the stock being cut.\n\n(j)  Jointers.  (1) Each hand-fed planer and jointer with horizontal head shall be equipped with a cylindrical cutting head, the knife projection of which shall not exceed one-eighth inch beyond the cylindrical body of the head.\n\n(2) The opening in the table shall be kept as small as possible. The clearance between the edge of the rear table and the cutter head shall be not more than one-eighth inch. The table throat opening shall be not more than 2\n 1/2  inches when tables are set or aligned with each other for zero cut.\n\n(3) Each hand-fed jointer with a horizontal cutting head shall have an automatic guard which will cover all the section of the head on the working side of the fence or gage. The guard shall effectively keep the operator's hand from coming in contact with the revolving knives. The guard shall automatically adjust itself to cover the unused portion of the head and shall remain in contact with the material at all times.\n\n(4) Each hand-fed jointer with horizontal cutting head shall have a guard which will cover the section of the head back of the gage or fence.\n\n(5) Each wood jointer with vertical head shall have either an exhaust hood or other guard so arranged as to enclose completely the revolving head, except for a slot of such width as may be necessary and convenient for the application of the material to be jointed.\n\n(k)  Tenoning machines.  (1) Feed chains and sprockets of all double end tenoning machines shall be completely enclosed, except for that portion of chain used for conveying the stock.\n\n(2) At the rear ends of frames over which feed conveyors run, sprockets and chains shall be guarded at the sides by plates projecting beyond the periphery of sprockets and the ends of lugs.\n\n(3) Each tenoning machine shall have all cutting heads, and saws if used, covered by metal guards. These guards shall cover at least the unused part of the periphery of the cutting head. If such a guard is constructed of sheet metal, the material used shall be not less than one-sixteenth inch in thickness, and if cast iron is used, it shall be not less than three-sixteenths inch in thickness.\n\n(4) Where an exhaust system is used, the guard shall form part or all of the exhaust hood and shall be constructed of metal of a thickness not less than that specified in subparagraph (3) of this paragraph.\n\n(l)  Boring and mortising machines.  (1) Safety-bit chucks with no projecting set screws shall be used.\n\n(2) Boring bits should be provided with a guard that will enclose all portions of the bit and chuck above the material being worked.\n\n(3) The top of the cutting chain and driving mechanism shall be enclosed.\n\n(4) If there is a counterweight, one of the following or equivalent means shall be used to prevent its dropping:\n\n(i) It shall be bolted to the bar by means of a bolt passing through both bar and counterweight;\n\n(ii) A bolt shall be put through the extreme end of the bar;\n\n(iii) Where the counterweight does not encircle the bar, a safety chain shall be attached to it;\n\n(iv) Other types of counterweights shall be suspended by chain or wire rope and shall travel in a pipe or other suitable enclosure wherever they might fall and cause injury.\n\n(5) Universal joints on spindles of boring machines shall be completely enclosed in such a way as to prevent accidental contact by the operator.\n\n(6) Each operating treadle shall be covered by an inverted U-shaped metal guard, fastened to the floor, and of adequate size to prevent accidental tripping.\n\n(m)  Wood shapers and similar equipment.  (1) The cutting heads of each wood shaper, hand-fed panel raiser, or other similar machine not automatically fed, shall be enclosed with a cage or adjustable guard so designed as to keep the operator's hand away from the cutting edge. The diameter of circular shaper guards shall be not less than the greatest diameter of the cutter. In no case shall a warning device of leather or other material attached to the spindle be acceptable.\n\n(2) [Reserved]\n\n(3) All double-spindle shapers shall be provided with a spindle starting and stopping device for each spindle.\n\n(n)  Planing, molding, sticking, and matching machines.  (1) Each planing, molding, sticking, and matching machine shall have all cutting heads, and saws if used, covered by a metal guard. If such guard is constructed of sheet metal, the material used shall be not less than \n 1/16  inch in thickness, and if cast iron is used, it shall be not less than three-sixteenths inch in thickness.\n\n(2) Where an exhaust system is used, the guards shall form part or all of the exhaust hood and shall be constructed of metal of a thickness not less than that specified in paragraph (h)(1) of this section.\n\n(3) Feed rolls shall be guarded by a hood or suitable guard to prevent the hands of the operator from coming in contact with the in-running rolls at any point. The guard shall be fastened to the frame carrying the rolls so as to remain in adjustment for any thickness of stock.\n\n(4) Surfacers or planers used in thicknessing multiple pieces of material simultaneously shall be provided with sectional infeed rolls having sufficient yield in the construction of the sections to provide feeding contact pressure on the stock, over the permissible range of variation in stock thickness specified or for which the machine is designed. In lieu of such yielding sectional rolls, suitable section kickback finger devices shall be provided at the infeed end.\n\n(o)  Profile and swing-head lathes and wood heel turning machine.  (1) Each profile and swing-head lathe shall have all cutting heads covered by a metal guard. If such a guard is constructed of sheet metal, the material used shall be not less than one-sixteenth inch in thickness; and if cast iron is used, it shall not be less than three-sixteenths inch in thickness.\n\n(2) Cutting heads on wood-turning lathes, whether rotating or not, shall be covered as completely as possible by hoods or shields.\n\n(3) Shoe last and spoke lathes, doweling machines, wood heel turning machines, and other automatic wood-turning lathes of the rotating knife type shall be equipped with hoods enclosing the cutter blades completely except at the contact points while the stock is being cut.\n\n(4) Lathes used for turning long pieces of wood stock held only between the two centers shall be equipped with long curved guards extending over the tops of the lathes in order to prevent the work pieces from being thrown out of the machines if they should become loose.\n\n(5) Where an exhaust system is used, the guard shall form part or all of the exhaust hood and shall be constructed of metal of a thickness not less than that specified in subparagraph (1) of this paragraph.\n\n(p)  Sanding machines.  (1) Feed rolls of self-feed sanding machines shall be protected with a semicylindrical guard to prevent the hands of the operator from coming in contact with the in-running rolls at any point. The guard shall be constructed of heavy material, preferably metal, and firmly secured to the frame carrying the rolls so as to remain in adjustment for any thickness of stock. The bottom of the guard should come down to within three-eighths inch of a plane formed by the bottom or contact face of the feed roll where it touches the stock.\n\n(2) Each drum sanding machine shall have an exhaust hood, or other guard if no exhaust system is required, so arranged as to enclose the revolving drum, except for that portion of the drum above the table, if a table is used, which may be necessary and convenient for the application of the material to be finished.\n\n(3) Each disk sanding machine shall have the exhaust hood, or other guard if no exhaust system is required, so arranged as to enclose the revolving disk, except for that portion of the disk above the table, if a table is used, which may be necessary for the application of the material to be finished.\n\n(4) Belt sanding machines shall be provided with guards at each nip point where the sanding belt runs on to a pulley. These guards shall effectively prevent the hands or fingers of the operator from coming in contact with the nip points. The unused run of the sanding belt shall be guarded against accidental contact.\n\n(q)  Veneer cutters and wringers.  (1) Veneer slicer knives shall be guarded to prevent accidental contact with knife edge, at both front and rear.\n\n(2) Veneer clippers shall have automatic feed or shall be provided with a guard which will make it impossible to place a finger or fingers under the knife while feeding or removing the stock.\n\n(3) Sprockets on chain or slat-belt conveyors shall be enclosed.\n\n(4) Where practicable, hand and footpower guillotine veneer cutters shall be provided with rods or plates or other satisfactory means, so arranged on the feeding side that the hands cannot reach the cutting edge of the knife while feeding or holding the stock in place.\n\n(5) Power-driven guillotine veneer cutters, except continuous feed trimmers, shall be equipped with:\n\n(i) Starting devices which require the simultaneous action of both hands to start the cutting motion and of at least one hand on a control during the complete stroke of the knife; or\n\n(ii) An automatic guard which will remove the hands of the operator from the danger zone at every descent of the blade, used in conjunction with one-hand starting devices which require two distinct movements of the device to start the cutting motion, and so designed as to return positively to the nonstarting position after each complete cycle of the knife.\n\n(6) Where two or more workers are employed at the same time on the same power-driven guillotine veneer cutter equipped with two-hand control, the device shall be so arranged that each worker shall be required to use both hands simultaneously on the controls to start the cutting motion, and at least one hand on a control to complete the cut.\n\n(7) Power-driven guillotine veneer cutters, other than continuous trimmers, shall be provided, in addition to the brake or other stopping mechanism, with an emergency device which will prevent the machine from operating in the event of failure of the brake when the starting mechanism is in the nonstarting position.\n\n(r)  Miscellaneous woodworking machines.  (1) The feed rolls of roll type glue spreaders shall be guarded by a semicylindrical guard. The bottom of the guard shall come to within three-eighths inch of a plane formed by bottom or contact face of the feed roll where it touches the stock.\n\n(2) Drag saws shall be so located as to give at least a 4-foot clearance for passage when the saw is at the extreme end of the stroke; or if such clearance is not obtainable, the saw and its driving mechanism shall be provided with a standard enclosure.\n\n(3) For combination or universal woodworking machines each point of operation of any tool shall be guarded as required for such a tool in a separate machine.\n\n(4) The mention of specific machines in paragraphs (a) thru (q) and this paragraph (r) of this section, inclusive, is not intended to exclude other woodworking machines from the requirement that suitable guards and exhaust hoods be provided to reduce to a minimum the hazard due to the point of operation of such machines.\n\n(s)  Inspection and maintenance of woodworking machinery.  (1) Dull, badly set, improperly filed, or improperly tensioned saws shall be immediately removed from service, before they begin to cause the material to stick, jam, or kick back when it is fed to the saw at normal speed. Saws to which gum has adhered on the sides shall be immediately cleaned.\n\n(2) All knives and cutting heads of woodworking machines shall be kept sharp, properly adjusted, and firmly secured. Where two or more knives are used in one head, they shall be properly balanced.\n\n(3) Bearings shall be kept free from lost motion and shall be well lubricated.\n\n(4) Arbors of all circular saws shall be free from play.\n\n(5) Sharpening or tensioning of saw blades or cutters shall be done only by persons of demonstrated skill in this kind of work.\n\n(6) Emphasis is placed upon the importance of maintaining cleanliness around woodworking machinery, particularly as regards the effective functioning of guards and the prevention of fire hazards in switch enclosures, bearings, and motors.\n\n(7) All cracked saws shall be removed from service.\n\n(8) The practice of inserting wedges between the saw disk and the collar to form what is commonly known as a \u201cwobble saw\u201d shall not be permitted.\n\n(9) Push sticks or push blocks shall be provided at the work place in the several sizes and types suitable for the work to be done.\n\n(10)-(11) [Reserved]\n\n(12) The knife blade of jointers shall be so installed and adjusted that it does not protrude more than one-eighth inch beyond the cylindrical body of the head. Push sticks or push blocks shall be provided at the work place in the several sizes and types suitable for the work to be done.\n\n(13) Whenever veneer slicers or rotary veneer-cutting machines have been shutdown for the purpose of inserting logs or to make adjustments, operators shall make sure that machine is clear and other workmen are not in a hazardous position before starting the machine.\n\n(14) Operators shall not ride the carriage of a veneer slicer."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.15.37.4", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "O", "Subpart O\u2014Machinery and Machine Guarding", "", "\u00a7 1910.214 Cooperage machinery. [Reserved]", "OSHA", "", "", "", ""], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.15.37.5", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "O", "Subpart O\u2014Machinery and Machine Guarding", "", "\u00a7 1910.215 Abrasive wheel machinery.", "OSHA", "", "", "[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49750, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984; 61 FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996]", "(a)  General requirements \u2014(1)  Machine guarding.  Abrasive wheels shall be used only on machines provided with safety guards as defined in the following paragraphs of this section, except:\n\n(i) Wheels used for internal work while within the work being ground;\n\n(ii) Mounted wheels, used in portable operations, 2 inches and smaller in diameter; and\n\n(iii) Types 16, 17, 18, 18R, and 19 cones, plugs, and threaded hole pot balls where the work offers protection.\n\n(2)  Guard design.  The safety guard shall cover the spindle end, nut, and flange projections. The safety guard shall be mounted so as to maintain proper alignment with the wheel, and the strength of the fastenings shall exceed the strength of the guard, except:\n\n(i) Safety guards on all operations where the work provides a suitable measure of protection to the operator, may be so constructed that the spindle end, nut, and outer flange are exposed; and where the nature of the work is such as to entirely cover the side of the wheel, the side covers of the guard may be omitted; and\n\n(ii) The spindle end, nut, and outer flange may be exposed on machines designed as portable saws.\n\n(3)  Flanges.  Grinding machines shall be equipped with flanges in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section.\n\n(4)  Work rests.  On offhand grinding machines, work rests shall be used to support the work. They shall be of rigid construction and designed to be adjustable to compensate for wheel wear. Work rests shall be kept adjusted closely to the wheel with a maximum opening of one-eighth inch to prevent the work from being jammed between the wheel and the rest, which may cause wheel breakage. The work rest shall be securely clamped after each adjustment. The adjustment shall not be made with the wheel in motion.\n\n(5)  Excluded machinery.  Natural sandstone wheels and metal, wooden, cloth, or paper discs, having a layer of abrasive on the surface are not covered by this section.\n\n(b)  Guarding of abrasive wheel machinery \u2014(1)  Cup wheels.  Cup wheels (Types 6 and 11) shall be protected by:\n\n(i) Safety guards as specified in paragraphs (b) (1) through (10) of this section;\n\n(ii) Band type guards as specified in paragraph (b)(11) of this section; and\n\n(iii) Special \u201cRevolving Cup Guards\u201d which mount behind the wheel and turn with it. They shall be made of steel or other material with adequate strength and shall enclose the wheel sides upward from the back for one-third of the wheel thickness. The mounting features shall conform with all requirements of this section. It is necessary to maintain clearance between the wheel side and the guard. This clearance shall not exceed one-sixteenth inch.\n\n(2)  Guard exposure angles.  The maximum exposure angles specified in paragraphs (b) (3) through (8) of this section shall not be exceeded. Visors or other accessory equipment shall not be included as a part of the guard when measuring the guard opening, unless such equipment has strength equal to that of the guard.\n\n(3)  Bench and floor stands.  The angular exposure of the grinding wheel periphery and sides for safety guards used on machines known as bench and floor stands should not exceed 90\u00b0 or one-fourth of the periphery. This exposure shall begin at a point not more than 65\u00b0 above the horizontal plane of the wheel spindle. (See Figures O-6 and O-7 and paragraph (b)(9) of this section.)\n\nWherever the nature of the work requires contact with the wheel below the horizontal plane of the spindle, the exposure shall not exceed 125\u00b0. (See Figures O-8 and O-9.)\n\n(4)  Cylindrical grinders.  The maximum angular exposure of the grinding wheel periphery and sides for safety guards used on cylindrical grinding machines shall not exceed 180\u00b0. This exposure shall begin at a point not more than 65\u00b0 above the horizontal plane of the wheel spindle. (See Figures O-10 and O-11 and subparagraph (9) of this paragraph.)\n\n(5)  Surface grinders and cutting-off machines.  The maximum angular exposure of the grinding wheel periphery and sides for safety guards used on cutting-off machines and on surface grinding machines which employ the wheel periphery shall not exceed 150\u00b0. This exposure shall begin at a point not less than 15\u00b0 below the horizontal plane of the wheel spindle. (See Figures O-12 and O-13)\n\n(6)  Swing frame grinders.  The maximum angular exposure of the grinding wheel periphery and sides for safety guards used on machines known as swing frame grinding machines shall not exceed 180\u00b0, and the top half of the wheel shall be enclosed at all times. (See Figures O-14 and O-15.)\n\n(7)  Automatic snagging machines.  The maximum angular exposure of the grinding wheel periphery and sides for safety guards used on grinders known as automatic snagging machines shall not exceed 180\u00b0 and the top half of the wheel shall be enclosed at all times. (See Figures O-14 and O-15.)\n\n(8)  Top grinding.  Where the work is applied to the wheel above the horizontal centerline, the exposure of the grinding wheel periphery shall be as small as possible and shall not exceed 60\u00b0. (See Figures O-16 and O-17.)\n\n(9)  Exposure adjustment.  Safety guards of the types described in subparagraphs (3) and (4) of this paragraph, where the operator stands in front of the opening, shall be constructed so that the peripheral protecting member can be adjusted to the constantly decreasing diameter of the wheel. The maximum angular exposure above the horizontal plane of the wheel spindle as specified in paragraphs (b) (3) and (4) of this section shall never be exceeded, and the distance between the wheel periphery and the adjustable tongue or the end of the peripheral member at the top shall never exceed one-fourth inch. (See Figures O-18, O-19, O-20, O-21, O-22, and O-23.)\n\n(10)  Material requirements and minimum dimensions.  (i) See Figures O-36 and O-37 and Table O-9 for minimum basic thickness of peripheral and side members for various types of safety guards and classes of service.\n\n(ii) If operating speed does not exceed 8,000 surface feet per minute cast iron safety guards, malleable iron guards or other guards as described in paragraph (b)(10)(iii) of this section shall be used.\n\n(iii) Cast steel, or structural steel, safety guards as specified in Figures O-36 and O-37 and Table O-9 shall be used where operating speeds of wheels are faster than 8,000 surface feet per minute up to a maximum of 16,000 surface feet per minute.\n\n(iv) For cutting-off wheels 16 inches diameter and smaller and where speed does not exceed 16,000 surface feet per minute, cast iron or malleable iron safety guards as specified in Figures O-36 and O-37, and in Table O-9 shall be used.\n\nShowing adjustable tongue giving required angular protection for all sizes of wheel used.\n\nShowing movable guard with opening small enough to give required protection for smallest size wheel used.\n\nShowing movable guard with size of opening correct for full size wheel but too large for smaller wheels.\n\n(v) For cutting-off wheels larger than 16 inches diameter and where speed does not exceed 14,200 surface feet per minute, safety guards as specified in Figures O-27 and O-28, and in Table O-1 shall be used.\n\n(vi) For thread grinding wheels not exceeding 1 inch in thickness cast iron or malleable iron safety guards as specified in Figures O-36 and O-37, and in Table O-9 shall be used.\n\n(11)  Band type guards\u2014general specifications.  Band type guards shall conform to the following general specifications:\n\n(i) The bands shall be of steel plate or other material of equal or greater strength. They shall be continuous, the ends being either riveted, bolted, or welded together in such a manner as to leave the inside free from projections.\n\n(ii) The inside diameter of the band shall not be more than 1 inch larger than the outside diameter of the wheel, and shall be mounted as nearly concentric with the wheel as practicable.\n\n(iii) The band shall be of sufficient width and its position kept so adjusted that at no time will the wheel protrude beyond the edge of the band a distance greater than that indicated in Figure O-29 and in Table O-2 or the wall thickness (W), whichever is smaller.\n\n(12)  Guard design specifications.  Abrasive wheel machinery guards shall meet the design specifications of the American National Standard Safety Code for the Use, Care, and Protection of Abrasive Wheels, ANSI B7.1-1970, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6. This requirement shall not apply to natural sandstone wheels or metal, wooden, cloth, or paper discs, having a layer of abrasive on the surface.\n\n(c)  Flanges \u2014(1)  General requirements.  All abrasive wheels shall be mounted between flanges which shall not be less than one-third the diameter of the wheel.\n\n(i) Exceptions:\n\n( a ) Mounted wheels.\n\n( b ) Portable wheels with threaded inserts or projecting studs.\n\n( c ) Abrasive discs (inserted nut, inserted washer and projecting stud type).\n\n( d ) Plate mounted wheels.\n\n( e ) Cylinders, cup, or segmental wheels that are mounted in chucks.\n\n( f ) Types 27 and 28 wheels.\n\n( g ) Certain internal wheels.\n\n( h ) Modified types 6 and 11 wheels (terrazzo).\n\n( i ) Cutting-off wheels, Types 1 and 27A (see paragraphs (c)(1) (ii) and (iii) of this section).\n\n(ii) Type 1 cutting-off wheels are to be mounted between properly relieved flanges which have matching bearing surfaces. Such flanges shall be at least one-fourth the wheel diameter.\n\n(iii) Type 27A cutting-off wheels are designed to be mounted by means of flat, not relieved, flanges having matching bearing surfaces and which may be less than one-third but shall not be less than one-fourth the wheel diameter. (See Figure O-24 for one such type of mounting.)\n\n(iv) There are three general types of flanges:\n\n( a ) Straight relieved flanges (see Figure O-32);\n\n( b ) Straight unrelieved flanges (see Figure O-30);\n\n( c ) Adaptor flanges (see Figures O-33 and O-34);\n\n(v) Regardless of flange type used, the wheel shall always be guarded. Blotters shall be used in accordance with paragraph (c)(6) of this section.\n\nThe Type 27 A Wheel is mounted between flat non-relieved flanges of equal bearing surfaces.\n\n(2) [Reserved]\n\n(3)  Finish and balance.  Flanges shall be dimensionally accurate and in good balance. There shall be no rough surfaces or sharp edges.\n\n(4)  Uniformity of diameter.  (i) Both flanges, of any type, between which a wheel is mounted, shall be of the same diameter and have equal bearing surface. Exceptions are set forth in the remaining subdivisions of this subparagraph.\n\n(ii) Type 27 and Type 28 wheels, because of their shape and usage, require specially designed adaptors. The back flange shall extend beyond the central hub or raised portion and contact the wheel to counteract the side pressure on the wheel in use. The adaptor nut which is less than the minimum one-third diameter of wheel fits in the depressed side of wheel to prevent interference in side grinding and serves to drive the wheel by its clamping force against the depressed portion of the back flange. The variance in flange diameters, the adaptor nut being less than one-third wheel diameter, and the use of side pressure in wheel operation limits the use to reinforced organic bonded wheels. Mounts which are affixed to the wheel by the manufacturer shall not be reused. Type 27 and Type 28 wheels shall be used only with a safety guard located between wheel and operator during use. (See Figure O-24-A.)\n\nTypes 27 and 28 wheels, because of their shape, require specially designed adaptors.\n\n(iii) Modified Types 6 and 11 wheels (terrazzo) with tapered K dimension.\n\n(5)  Recess and undercut.  (i) Straight relieved flanges made according to Table O-6 and Figure O-32 shall be recessed at least one-sixteenth inch on the side next to the wheel for a distance as specified in Table O-6.\n\n(ii) Straight flanges of the adaptor or sleeve type (Table O-7 and Figures O-33 and O-34) shall be undercut so that there will be no bearing on the sides of the wheel within one-eighth inch of the arbor hole.\n\n(6)  Blotters.  (i) Blotters (compressible washers) shall always be used between flanges and abrasive wheel surfaces to insure uniform distribution of flange pressure. (See paragraph (d)(5) of this section.)\n\n(ii) Exception:\n\n( a ) Mounted wheels.\n\n( b ) Abrasive discs (inserted nut, inserted washer, and projecting stud type).\n\n( c ) Plate mounted wheels.\n\n( d ) Cylinders, cups, or segmental wheels that are mounted in chucks.\n\n( e ) Types 27 and 28 wheels.\n\n( f ) Certain Type 1 and Type 27A cutting-off wheels.\n\n( g ) Certain internal wheels.\n\n( h ) Type 4 tapered wheels.\n\n( i ) Diamond wheels, except certain vitrified diamond wheels.\n\n( j ) Modified Types 6 and 11 wheel (terrazzo)\u2014blotters applied flat side of wheel only.\n\n(7)  Driving flange.  The driving flange shall be securely fastened to the spindle and the bearing surface shall run true. When more than one wheel is mounted between a single set of flanges, wheels may be cemented together or separated by specially designed spacers. Spacers shall be equal in diameter to the mounting flanges and have equal bearing surfaces. (See paragraph (d)(6) of this section.)\n\n(8)  Dimensions.  (i) Tables O-4 and O-6 and Figures O-30 and O-32 show minimum dimensions for straight relieved and unrelieved flanges for use with wheels with small holes that fit directly on the machine spindle. Dimensions of such flanges shall never be less than indicated.\n\n(ii) Table O-5, and Table O-7 and Figures O-31, O-33, O-34 show minimum dimensions for straight adaptor flanges for use with wheels having holes larger than the spindle. Dimensions of such adaptor flanges shall never be less than indicated.\n\n(iii) Table O-8 and Figure O-35 show minimum dimensions for straight flanges that are an integral part of wheel sleeves which are frequently used on precision grinding machines. Dimensions of such flanges shall never be less than indicated.\n\n(9)  Repairs and maintenance.  All flanges shall be maintained in good condition. When the bearing surfaces become worn, warped, sprung, or damaged they should be trued or refaced. When refacing or truing, care shall be exercised to make sure that proper relief and rigidity is maintained as specified in paragraphs (c) (2) and (5) of this section and they shall be replaced when they do not conform to these subparagraphs and Table O-4, Figure O-30, Table O-5, Figure O-31, Table O-6, Figure O-32, and Table O-8, Figure O-35. Failure to observe these rules might cause excessive flange pressure around the hole of the wheel. This is especially true of wheel-sleeve or adaptor flanges.\n\n(d)  Mounting \u2014(1)  Inspection.  Immediately before mounting, all wheels shall be closely inspected and sounded by the user (ring test) to make sure they have not been damaged in transit, storage, or otherwise. The spindle speed of the machine shall be checked before mounting of the wheel to be certain that it does not exceed the maximum operating speed marked on the wheel. Wheels should be tapped gently with a light nonmetallic implement, such as the handle of a screwdriver for light wheels, or a wooden mallet for heavier wheels. If they sound cracked (dead), they shall not be used. This is known as the \u201cRing Test\u201d.\n\n(i) Wheels must be dry and free from sawdust when applying the ring test, otherwise the sound will be deadened. It should also be noted that organic bonded wheels do not emit the same clear metallic ring as do vitrified and silicate wheels.\n\n(ii) \u201cTap\u201d wheels about 45\u00b0 each side of the vertical centerline and about 1 or 2 inches from the periphery as indicated by the spots in Figure O-25 and Figure O-26. Then rotate the wheel 45\u00b0 and repeat the test. A sound and undamaged wheel will give a clear metallic tone. If cracked, there will be a dead sound and not a clear \u201cring.\u201d\n\n(2)  Arbor size.  Grinding wheels shall fit freely on the spindle and remain free under all grinding conditions. A controlled clearance between the wheel hole and the machine spindle (or wheel sleeves or adaptors) is essential to avoid excessive pressure from mounting and spindle expansion. To accomplish this, the machine spindle shall be made to nominal (standard) size plus zero minus .002 inch, and the wheel hole shall be made suitably oversize to assure safety clearance under the conditions of operating heat and pressure.\n\n(3)  Surface condition.  All contact surfaces of wheels, blotters and flanges shall be flat and free of foreign matter.\n\n(4)  Bushing.  When a bushing is used in the wheel hole it shall not exceed the width of the wheel and shall not contact the flanges.\n\n(5)  Blotters.  When blotters or flange facings of compressible material are required, they shall cover entire contact area of wheel flanges. Blotters need not be used with the following types of wheels:\n\n(i) Mounted wheels.\n\n(ii) Abrasive discs (inserted nut, inserted washer, and projecting-stud type).\n\n(iii) Plate mounted wheels.\n\n(iv) Cylinders, cups, or segmental wheels that are mounted in chucks.\n\n(v) Types 27 and 28 wheels.\n\n(vi) Certain Type 1 and Type 27A cutting-off wheels.\n\n(vii) Certain internal wheels.\n\n(viii) Type 4 tapered wheels.\n\n(ix) Diamond wheels, except certain vitrified diamond wheels.\n\n(6)  Multiple wheel mounting.  When more than one wheel is mounted between a single set of flanges, wheels may be cemented together or separated by specially designed spacers. Spacers shall be equal in diameter to the mounting flanges and have equal bearing surfaces. When mounting wheels which have not been cemented together, or ones which do not utilize separating spacers, care must be exercised to use wheels specially manufactured for that purpose.\n\nTable O-1\u2014Minimum Basic Thickness for Peripheral and Side Members for Safety Guards Used With Cutting-Off Wheels\n\nTable O-3\u2014Guide for Construction of Band Type Guards\n\n[Maximum Wheel Speed 7,000 SFPM]\n\nTable O-5\u2014Minimum Dimensions for Straight Adaptor Flange\u2014for Organic Bonded Wheels Over 1\n 1/4  Inches Thick \n 1\n\n[In inches]\n\n1  For wheels under 1\n 1/4  inches thick F dimension shall not exceed 40 percent of wheel thickness.\n\nTable O-6\u2014Minimum Dimensions for Straight Relieved Flanges \n 1\n\n[In inches]\n\n1  Flanges for wheels under 2 inches diameter may be unrelieved and shall be maintained flat and true.\n\nTable O-7\u2014Minimum Dimensions for Straight Flanges\u2014for Mechanical Grinders 12,500 S.F.P.M. to 16,5 S.F.P.M. \n 1\n\n1  Flanges shall be of steel, quality SAE 1040 or equivalent, annealed plate, heat treated to R. 25-30.\n\n2  For wheels under 1\n 1/4  inch thick F dimension shall not exceed 40 percent of wheel thickness.\n\nTable O-8\u2014Minimum Dimensions for Straight Flanges Used as Wheel Sleeves for Precision Grinding Only\n\n[In inches]\n\nNote:  These flanges may be clamped together by means of a central nut, or by a series of bolts or some other equivalent means of fastening. For hole sizes smaller than shown in this table, use table 12.\n\nTable O-9\u2014Minimum Basic Thicknesses of Peripheral and Side Members for Safety Guards\n\n[In inches]\n\n1  The recommendations listed in the above table are guides for the conditions stated. Other material, designs or dimensions affording equal or superior protection are also acceptable.\n\nTable O-2\u2014Exposure Versus Wheel Thickness\n\n[In inches]\n\nTable O-4\u2014Minimum Dimensions for Straight Unrelieved Flanges for Wheels with Threaded Inserts or Projecting Studs\n\n1   Note:  Must be large enough to extend beyond the bushing. Where prong anchor or cupback bushing are used, this footnote does not apply."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.15.37.6", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "O", "Subpart O\u2014Machinery and Machine Guarding", "", "\u00a7 1910.216 Mills and calenders in the rubber and plastics industries.", "OSHA", "", "", "[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984; 61 FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996]", "(a)  General requirements \u2014\n\n(1)-(2) [Reserved]\n\n(3)  Auxiliary equipment.  Mechanical and electrical equipment and auxiliaries shall be installed in accordance with this section and subpart S of this part.\n\n(4)  Mill roll heights.  All new mill installations shall be installed so that the top of the operating rolls is not less than 50 inches above the level on which the operator stands, irrespective of the size of the mill. This distance shall apply to the actual working level, whether it be at the general floor level, in a pit, or on a platform.\n\n(b)  Mill safety controls \u2014(1)  Safety trip control.  A safety trip control shall be provided in front and in back of each mill. It shall be accessible and shall operate readily on contact. The safety trip control shall be one of the following types or a combination thereof:\n\n(i)  Pressure-sensitive body bars.  Installed at front and back of each mill having a 46-inch roll height or over. These bars shall operate readily by pressure of the mill operator's body.\n\n(ii)  Safety triprod.  Installed in the front and in the back of each mill and located within 2 inches of a vertical plane tangent to the front and rear rolls. The top rods shall be not more than 72 inches above the level on which the operator stands. The triprods shall be accessible and shall operate readily whether the rods are pushed or pulled.\n\n(iii)  Safety tripwire cable or wire center cord.  Installed in the front and in the back of each mill and located within 2 inches of a vertical plane tangent to the front and rear rolls. The cables shall not be more than 72 inches above the level on which the operator stands. The tripwire cable or wire center cord shall operate readily whether cable or cord is pushed or pulled.\n\n(2) [Reserved]\n\n(3)  Auxiliary equipment.  All auxiliary equipment such as mill divider, support bars, spray pipes, feed conveyors, strip knives, etc., shall be located in such a manner as to avoid interference with access to and operation of safety devices.\n\n(c)  Calender safety controls \u2014(1)  Safety trip, face.  A safety triprod, cable, or wire center cord shall be provided across each pair of in-running rolls extending the length of the face of the rolls. It shall be readily accessible and operate whether pushed or pulled. The safety tripping devices shall be located within reach of the operator and the bite.\n\n(2)  Safety trip, side.  On both sides of the calender and near each end of the face of the roll, there shall be a cable or wire center cord connected to the safety trip. They shall operate readily when pushed or pulled.\n\n(d)  Protection by location \u2014(1)  Mills.  Where a mill is so installed that persons cannot normally reach through, over, under, or around to come in contact with the roll bite or be caught between a roll and an adjacent object, then, provided such elements are made a fixed part of a mill, safety control devices listed in paragraph (b) of this section shall not apply.\n\n(2)  Calenders.  Where a calender is so installed that persons cannot normally reach through, over, under, or around to come in contact with the roll bite or be caught between a roll and an adjacent object, then, provided such elements are made a fixed part of a calender, safety control devices listed in paragraph (c) of this section shall not apply.\n\n(e)  Trip and emergency switches.  All trip and emergency switches shall not be of the automatically resetting type, but shall require manual resetting.\n\n(f)  Stopping limits \u2014(1)  Determination of distance of travel.  All measurements on mills and calenders shall be taken with the rolls running empty at maximum operating speed. Stopping distances shall be expressed in inches of surface travel of the roll from the instant the emergency stopping device is actuated.\n\n(2)  Stopping limits for mills.  All mills irrespective of the size of the rolls or their arrangement (individually or group-driven) shall be stopped within a distance, as measured in inches of surface travel, not greater than 1\n 1/2  percent of the peripheral no-load surface speeds of the respective rolls as determined in feet per minute.\n\n(3)  Stopping limits for calenders.  (i) All calenders, irrespective of size of the rolls or their configuration, shall be stopped within a distance, as measured in inches of surface travel, not greater than 1\n 3/4  percent of the peripheral no-load surface speeds of the respective calender rolls as determined in feet per minute.\n\n(ii) Where speeds above 250 feet per minute as measured on the surface of the drive roll are used, stopping distances of more than 1\n 3/4  percent are permissible. Such stopping distances shall be subject to engineering determination."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.15.37.7", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "O", "Subpart O\u2014Machinery and Machine Guarding", "", "\u00a7 1910.217 Mechanical power presses.", "OSHA", "", "", "[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 39 FR 41846, Dec. 3, 1974; 40 FR 3982, Jan. 27, 1975; 43 FR 49750, Oct. 24, 1978; 45 FR 8594, Feb. 8, 1980; 49 FR 18295, Apr. 30, 1984; 51 FR 34561, Sept. 29, 1986; 53 FR 8353, 8358 Mar. 14, 1988; 54 FR 24333, June 7, 1989; 61 FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996; 69 FR 31882, June 8, 2004; 76 FR 80739, Dec. 27, 2011; 77 FR 46949, Aug. 7, 2012; 78 FR 69550, Nov. 20, 2013]", "(a)  General requirements.\n\n(1)-(3) [Reserved]\n\n(4)  Reconstruction and modification.  It shall be the responsibility of any person reconstructing, or modifying a mechanical power press to do so in accordance with paragraph (b) of this section.\n\n(5)  Excluded machines.  Press brakes, hydraulic and pneumatic power presses, bulldozers, hot bending and hot metal presses, forging presses and hammers, riveting machines and similar types of fastener applicators are excluded from the requirements of this section.\n\n(b)  Mechanical power press guarding and construction, general \u2014(1)  Hazards to personnel associated with broken or falling machine components.  Machine components shall be designed, secured, or covered to minimize hazards caused by breakage, or loosening and falling or release of mechanical energy (i.e. broken springs).\n\n(2)  Brakes.  Friction brakes provided for stopping or holding a slide movement shall be inherently self-engaging by requiring power or force from an external source to cause disengagement. Brake capacity shall be sufficient to stop the motion of the slide quickly and capable of holding the slide and its attachments at any point in its travel.\n\n(3)  Machines using full revolution positive clutches.  (i) Machines using full revolution clutches shall incorporate a single-stroke mechanism.\n\n(ii) If the single-stroke mechanism is dependent upon spring action, the spring(s) shall be of the compression type, operating on a rod or guided within a hole or tube, and designed to prevent interleaving of the spring coils in event of breakage.\n\n(4)  Foot pedals (treadle).  (i) The pedal mechanism shall be protected to prevent unintended operation from falling or moving objects or by accidental stepping onto the pedal.\n\n(ii) A pad with a nonslip contact area shall be firmly attached to the pedal.\n\n(iii) The pedal return spring(s) shall be of the compression type, operating on a rod or guided within a hole or tube, or designed to prevent interleaving of spring coils in event of breakage.\n\n(iv) If pedal counterweights are provided, the path of the travel of the weight shall be enclosed.\n\n(5)  Hand operated levers.  (i) Hand-lever-operated power presses shall be equipped with a spring latch on the operating lever to prevent premature or accidental tripping.\n\n(ii) The operating levers on hand-tripped presses having more than one operating station shall be interlocked to prevent the tripping of the press except by the \u201cconcurrent\u201d use of all levers.\n\n(6)  Two-hand trip.  (i) A two-hand trip shall have the individual operator's hand controls protected against unintentional operation and have the individual operator's hand controls arranged by design and construction and/or separation to require the use of both hands to trip the press and use a control arrangement requiring concurrent operation of the individual operator's hand controls.\n\n(ii) Two-hand trip systems on full revolution clutch machines shall incorporate an antirepeat feature.\n\n(iii) If two-hand trip systems are used on multiple operator presses, each operator shall have a separate set of controls.\n\n(7)  Machines using part revolution clutches.  (i) The clutch shall release and the brake shall be applied when the external clutch engaging means is removed, deactivated, or deenergized.\n\n(ii) A red color stop control shall be provided with the clutch/brake control system. Momentary operation of the stop control shall immediately deactivate the clutch and apply the brake. The stop control shall override any other control, and reactuation of the clutch shall require use of the operating (tripping) means which has been selected.\n\n(iii) A means of selecting Off, \u201cInch,\u201d Single Stroke, and Continuous (when the continuous function is furnished) shall be supplied with the clutch/brake control to select type of operation of the press. Fixing of selection shall be by means capable of supervision by the employer.\n\n(iv) The \u201cInch\u201d operating means shall be designed to prevent exposure of the workers hands within the point of operation by:\n\n( a ) Requiring the concurrent use of both hands to actuate the clutch, or\n\n( b ) Being a single control protected against accidental actuation and so located that the worker cannot reach into the point of operation while operating the single control.\n\n(v) Two-hand controls for single stroke shall conform to the following requirements:\n\n( a ) Each hand control shall be protected against unintended operation and arranged by design, construction, and/or separation so that the concurrent use of both hands is required to trip the press.\n\n( b ) The control system shall be designed to permit an adjustment which will require concurrent pressure from both hands during the die closing portion of the stroke.\n\n( c ) The control system shall incorporate an antirepeat feature.\n\n( d ) The control systems shall be designed to require release of all operators' hand controls before an interrupted stroke can be resumed. This requirement pertains only to those single-stroke, two-hand controls manufactured and installed on or after August 31, 1971.\n\n(vi) [Reserved]\n\n(vii) Controls for more than one operating station shall be designed to be activated and deactivated in complete sets of two operator's hand controls per operating station by means capable of being supervised by the employer. The clutch/brake control system shall be designed and constructed to prevent actuation of the clutch if all operating stations are bypassed.\n\n(viii) Those clutch/brake control systems which contain both single and continuous functions shall be designed so that completion of continuous circuits may be supervised by the employer. The initiation of continuous run shall require a prior action or decision by the operator in addition to the selection of Continuous on the stroking selector, before actuation of the operating means will result in continuous stroking.\n\n(ix) If foot control is provided, the selection method between hand and foot control shall be separate from the stroking selector and shall be designed so that the selection may be supervised by the employer.\n\n(x) Foot operated tripping controls, if used, shall be protected so as to prevent operation from falling or moving objects, or from unintended operation by accidental stepping onto the foot control.\n\n(xi) The control of air-clutch machines shall be designed to prevent a significant increase in the normal stopping time due to a failure within the operating value mechanism, and to inhibit further operation if such failure does occur. This requirement shall apply only to those clutch/brake air-valve controls manufactured and installed on or after August 31, 1971, but shall not apply to machines intended only for continuous, automatic feeding applications.\n\n(xii) The clutch/brake control shall incorporate an automatic means to prevent initiation or continued activation of the Single Stroke or Continuous functions unless the press drive motor is energized and in the forward direction.\n\n(xiii) The clutch/brake control shall automatically deactivate in event of failure of the power or pressure supply for the clutch engaging means. Reactivation of the clutch shall require restoration of normal supply and the use of the tripping mechanism(s).\n\n(xiv) The clutch/brake control shall automatically deactivate in event of failure of the counterbalance(s) air supply. Reactivation of the clutch shall require restoration of normal air supply and use of the tripping mechanism(s).\n\n(xv) Selection of bar operation shall be by means capable of being supervised by the employer. A separate pushbutton shall be employed to activate the clutch, and the clutch shall be activated only if the driver motor is deenergized.\n\n(8)  Electrical.  (i) A main power disconnect switch capable of being locked only in the Off position shall be provided with every power press control system.\n\n(ii) The motor start button shall be protected against accidental operation.\n\n(iii) All mechanical power press controls shall incorporate a type of drive motor starter that will disconnect the drive motor from the power source in event of control voltage or power source failure, and require operation of the motor start button to restart the motor when voltage conditions are restored to normal.\n\n(iv) All a.c. control circuits and solenoid value coils shall be powered by not more than a nominal 120-volt a.c. supply obtained from a transformer with an isolated secondary. Higher voltages that may be necessary for operation of machine or control mechanisms shall be isolated from any control mechanism handled by the operator, but motor starters with integral Start-Stop buttons may utilize line voltage control. All d.c. control circuits shall be powered by not more than a nominal 240-volt d.c. supply isolated from any higher voltages.\n\n(v) All clutch/brake control electrical circuits shall be protected against the possibility of an accidental ground in the control circuit causing false operation of the press.\n\n(vi) Electrical clutch/brake control circuits shall incorporate features to minimize the possibility of an unintended stroke in the event of the failure of a control component to function properly, including relays, limit switches, and static output circuits.\n\n(9)  Slide counterbalance systems.  (i) Spring counterbalance systems when used shall incorporate means to retain system parts in event of breakage.\n\n(ii) Spring counterbalances when used shall have the capability to hold the slide and its attachments at midstroke, without brake applied.\n\n(iii) Air counterbalance cylinders shall incorporate means to retain the piston and rod in case of breakage or loosening.\n\n(iv) Air counterbalance cylinders shall have adequate capability to hold the slide and its attachments at any point in stroke, without brake applied.\n\n(v) Air counterbalance cylinders shall incorporate means to prevent failure of capability (sudden loss of pressure) in event of air supply failure.\n\n(10)  Air controlling equipment.  Air controlling equipment shall be protected against foreign material and water entering the pneumatic system of the press. A means of air lubrication shall be provided when needed.\n\n(11)  Hydraulic equipment.  The maximum anticipated working pressures in any hydraulic system on a mechanical power press shall not exceed the safe working pressure rating of any component used in that system.\n\n(12)  Pressure vessels.  All pressure vessels used in conjunction with power presses shall conform to the American Society of Mechanical Engineers Code for Pressure Vessels, 1968 Edition, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(13)  Control reliability.  When required by paragraph (c)(5) of this section, the control system shall be constructed so that a failure within the system does not prevent the normal stopping action from being applied to the press when required, but does prevent initiation of a successive stroke until the failure is corrected. The failure shall be detectable by a simple test, or indicated by the control system. This requirement does not apply to those elements of the control system which have no effect on the protection against point of operation injuries.\n\n(14)  Brake system monitoring.  When required by paragraph (c)(5) of this section, the brake monitor shall meet the following requirements:\n\n(i) Be so constructed as to automatically prevent the activation of a successive stroke if the stopping time or braking distance deteriorates to a point where the safety distance being utilized does not meet the requirements set forth in paragraph (c)(3)(iii)( e ) or (c)(3)(vii)( c ) of this section. The brake monitor used with the Type B gate or movable barrier device shall be installed in a manner to detect slide top-stop overrun beyond the normal limit reasonably established by the employer.\n\n(ii) Be installed on a press such that it indicates when the performance of the braking system has deteriorated to the extent described in paragraph (b)(14)(i) of this section; and\n\n(iii) Be constructed and installed in a manner to monitor brake system performance on each stroke.\n\n(c)  Safeguarding the point of operation \u2014(1)  General requirements.  (i) It shall be the responsibility of the employer to provide and insure the usage of \u201cpoint of operation guards\u201d or properly applied and adjusted point of operation devices on every operation performed on a mechanical power press. See Table O-10.\n\n(ii) The requirement of paragraph (c)(1)(i) of this section shall not apply when the point of operation opening is one-fourth inch or less. See Table O-10.\n\n(2)  Point of operation guards.  (i) Every point of operation guard shall meet the following design, construction, application, and adjustment requirements:\n\n( a ) It shall prevent entry of hands or fingers into the point of operation by reaching through, over, under or around the guard;\n\n( b ) It shall conform to the maximum permissible openings of Table O-10;\n\n( c ) It shall, in itself, create no pinch point between the guard and moving machine parts;\n\n( d ) It shall utilize fasteners not readily removable by operator, so as to minimize the possibility of misuse or removal of essential parts;\n\n( e ) It shall facilitate its inspection, and\n\n( f ) It shall offer maximum visibility of the point of operation consistent with the other requirements.\n\n(ii) A die enclosure guard shall be attached to the die shoe or stripper in a fixed position.\n\n(iii) A fixed barrier guard shall be attached securely to the frame of the press or to the bolster plate.\n\n(iv) An interlocked press barrier guard shall be attached to the press frame or bolster and shall be interlocked with the press clutch control so that the clutch cannot be activated unless the guard itself, or the hinged or movable sections of the guard are in position to conform to the requirements of Table O-10.\n\n(v) The hinged or movable sections of an interlocked press barrier guard shall not be used for manual feeding. The guard shall prevent opening of the interlocked section and reaching into the point of operation prior to die closure or prior to the cessation of slide motion. See paragraph (c)(3)(ii) of this section regarding manual feeding through interlocked press barrier devices.\n\n(vi) The adjustable barrier guard shall be securely attached to the press bed, bolster plate, or die shoe, and shall be adjusted and operated in conformity with Table O-10 and the requirements of this subparagraph. Adjustments shall be made only by authorized personnel whose qualifications include a knowledge of the provisions of Table O-10 and this subparagraph.\n\n(vii) A point of operation enclosure which does not meet the requirements of this subparagraph and Table O-10 shall be used only in conjunction with point of operation devices.\n\n(3)  Point of operation devices.  (i) Point of operation devices shall protect the operator by:\n\n( a ) Preventing and/or stopping normal stroking of the press if the operator's hands are inadvertently placed in the point of operation; or\n\n( b ) Preventing the operator from inadvertently reaching into the point of operation, or withdrawing his hands if they are inadvertently located in the point of operation, as the dies close; or\n\n( c ) Preventing the operator from inadvertently reaching into the point of operation at all times; or\n\n( d ) [Reserved]\n\n( e ) Requiring application of both of the operator's hands to machine operating controls and locating such controls at such a safety distance from the point of operation that the slide completes the downward travel or stops before the operator can reach into the point of operation with his hands; or\n\n( f ) Enclosing the point of operation before a press stroke can be initiated, and maintaining this closed condition until the motion of the slide had ceased; or\n\n( g ) Enclosing the point of operation before a press stroke can be initiated, so as to prevent an operator from reaching into the point of operation prior to die closure or prior to cessation of slide motion during the downward stroke.\n\n(ii) A gate or movable barrier device shall protect the operator as follows:\n\n( a ) A Type A gate or movable barrier device shall protect the operator in the manner specified in paragraph (c)(3)(i)( f ) of this section, and\n\n( b ) A Type B gate or movable barrier device shall protect the operator in the manner specified in paragraph (c)(3)(i)( g ) of this section.\n\n(iii) A presence sensing point of operation device shall protect the operator as provided in paragraph (c)(3)(i)( a ) of this section, and shall be interlocked into the control circuit to prevent or stop slide motion if the operator's hand or other part of his body is within the sensing field of the device during the downstroke of the press slide.\n\n( a ) The device may not be used on machines using full revolution clutches.\n\n( b ) The device may not be used as a tripping means to initiate slide motion, except when used in total conformance with paragraph (h) of this section.\n\n( c ) The device shall be constructed so that a failure within the system does not prevent the normal stopping action from being applied to the press when required, but does prevent the initiation of a successive stroke until the failure is corrected. The failure shall be indicated by the system.\n\n( d ) Muting (bypassing of the protective function) of such device, during the upstroke of the press slide, is permitted for the purpose of parts ejection, circuit checking, and feeding.\n\n( e ) The safety distance (D s ) from the sensing field to the point of operation shall be greater than the distance determined by the following formula:\n\nD s  = 63 inches/second \u00d7 T s\n\nwhere:\n \n D s  = minimum safety distance (inches); 63 inches/second = hand speed constant;\n \n and\n \n T s  = stopping time of the press measured at approximately 90\u00b0 position of crankshaft rotation (seconds).\n\nwhere:\n\nD s  = minimum safety distance (inches); 63 inches/second = hand speed constant;\n\nand\n\nT s  = stopping time of the press measured at approximately 90\u00b0 position of crankshaft rotation (seconds).\n\n( f ) Guards shall be used to protect all areas of entry to the point of operation not protected by the presence sensing device.\n\n(iv) The pull-out device shall protect the operator as specified in paragraph (c)(3)(i)( b ) of this section, and shall include attachments for each of the operator's hands.\n\n( a ) Attachments shall be connected to and operated only by the press slide or upper die.\n\n( b ) Attachments shall be adjusted to prevent the operator from reaching into the point of operation or to withdraw the operator's hands from the point of operation before the dies close.\n\n( c ) A separate pull-out device shall be provided for each operator if more than one operator is used on a press.\n\n( d ) Each pull-out device in use shall be visually inspected and checked for proper adjustment at the start of each operator shift, following a new die set-up, and when operators are changed. Necessary maintenance or repair or both shall be performed and completed before the press is operated. Records of inspections and maintenance shall be kept in accordance with paragraph (e) of this section.\n\n(v) The sweep device may not be used for point of operation safeguarding.\n\n(vi) A holdout or a restraint device shall protect the operator as specified in paragraph (c)(3)(i)( c ) of this section and shall include attachments for each of the operator's hands. Such attachments shall be securely anchored and adjusted in such a way that the operator is restrained from reaching into the point of operation. A separate set of restraints shall be provided for each operator if more than one operator is required on a press.\n\n(vii) The two hand control device shall protect the operator as specified in paragraph (c)(3)(i)( e ) of this section.\n\n( a ) When used in press operations requiring more than one operator, separate two hand controls shall be provided for each operator, and shall be designed to require concurrent application of all operators' controls to activate the slide. The removal of a hand from any control button shall cause the slide to stop.\n\n( b ) Each two hand control shall meet the construction requirements of paragraph (b)(7)(v) of this section.\n\n( c ) The safety distance (D s ) between each two hand control device and the point of operation shall be greater than the distance determined by the following formula:\n\nD s  = 63 inches/second \u00d7 T s ;\n\nwhere:\n \n D s  = minimum safety distance (inches); 63 inches/second = hand speed constant;\n \n and\n \n T s  = stopping time of the press measured at approximately 90\u00b0 position of crankshaft rotation (seconds).\n\nwhere:\n\nD s  = minimum safety distance (inches); 63 inches/second = hand speed constant;\n\nand\n\nT s  = stopping time of the press measured at approximately 90\u00b0 position of crankshaft rotation (seconds).\n\n( d ) Two hand controls shall be fixed in position so that only a supervisor or safety engineer is capable of relocating the controls.\n\n(viii) The two hand trip device shall protect the operator as specified in paragraph (c)(3)(i)( e ) of this section.\n\n( a ) When used in press operations requiring more than one operator, separate two hand trips shall be provided for each operator, and shall be designed to require concurrent application of all operators' to activate the slide.\n\n( b ) Each two hand trip shall meet the construction requirements of paragraph (b)(6) of this section.\n\n( c ) The safety distance (D m ) between the two hand trip and the point of operation shall be greater than the distance determined by the following formula:\n\nD m  = 63 inches/second \u00d7 T m ;\n\nwhere:\n \n D m  = minimum safety distance (inches); 63 inches/second = hand speed constant;\n \n and\n \n T m  = the maximum time the press takes for the die closure after it has been tripped (seconds). For full revolution clutch presses with only one engaging point T m  is equal to the time necessary for one and one-half revolutions of the crankshaft. For full revolution clutch presses with more than one engaging point, T m  shall be calculated as follows:\n \n T m  = [\n 1/2  + (1 \u00f7 Number of engaging points per revolution)] \u00d7 time necessary to complete one revolution of the crankshaft (seconds).\n\nwhere:\n\nD m  = minimum safety distance (inches); 63 inches/second = hand speed constant;\n\nand\n\nT m  = the maximum time the press takes for the die closure after it has been tripped (seconds). For full revolution clutch presses with only one engaging point T m  is equal to the time necessary for one and one-half revolutions of the crankshaft. For full revolution clutch presses with more than one engaging point, T m  shall be calculated as follows:\n\nT m  = [\n 1/2  + (1 \u00f7 Number of engaging points per revolution)] \u00d7 time necessary to complete one revolution of the crankshaft (seconds).\n\n( d ) Two hand trips shall be fixed in position so that only a supervisor or safety engineer is capable of relocating the controls.\n\n(4)  Hand feeding tools.  Hand feeding tools are intended for placing and removing materials in and from the press. Hand feeding tools are not a point of operation guard or protection device and shall not be used in lieu of the \u201cguards\u201d or devices required in this section.\n\n(5)  Additional requirements for safe-guarding.  Where the operator feeds or removes parts by placing one or both hands in the point of operation, and a two hand control, presence sensing device, Type B gate or movable barrier (on a part revolution clutch) is used for safeguarding:\n\n(i) The employer shall use a control system and a brake monitor which comply with paragraphs (b) (13) and (14) of this section;\n\n(ii) The exception in paragraph (b)(7)(v)( d ) of this section for two hand controls manufactured and installed before August 31, 1971 is not applicable under this paragraph (c)(5);\n\n(iii) The control of air clutch machines shall be designed to prevent a significant increase in the normal stopping time due to a failure within the operating valve mechanism, and to inhibit further operation if such failure does occur, where a part revolution clutch is employed. The exception in paragraph (b)(7)(xi) of this section for controls manufactured and installed before August 31, 1971, is not applicable under this paragraph (c)(5).\n\n(d)  Design, construction, setting and feeding of dies \u2014(1)  General requirements.  The employer shall: (i) Use dies and operating methods designed to control or eliminate hazards to operating personnel, and (ii) furnish and enforce the use of hand tools for freeing and removing stuck work or scrap pieces from the die, so that no employee need reach into the point of operation for such purposes.\n\n(2) [Reserved]\n\n(3)  Scrap handling.  The employer shall provide means for handling scrap from roll feed or random length stock operations. Scrap cutters used in conjunction with scrap handling systems shall be safeguarded in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section and with \u00a7 1910.219.\n\n(4)  Guide post hazard.  The hazard created by a guide post (when it is located in the immediate vicinity of the operator) when separated from its bushing by more than one-fourth inch shall be considered as a point of operation hazard and be protected in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section.\n\n(5)  Unitized tooling.  If unitized tooling is used, the opening between the top of the punch holder and the face of the slide, or striking pad, shall be safeguarded in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (c) of this section.\n\n(6)  Tonnage, stroke, and weight designation.  All dies shall be:\n\n(i) Stamped with the tonnage and stroke requirements, or have these characteristics recorded if these records are readily available to the die setter;\n\n(ii) Stamped to indicate upper die weight when necessary for air counterbalance pressure adjustment; and\n\n(iii) Stamped to indicate complete die weight when handling equipment may become overloaded.\n\n(7)  Die fastening.  Provision shall be made in both the upper and lower shoes for securely mounting the die to the bolster and slide. Where clamp caps or setscrews are used in conjunction with punch stems, additional means of securing the upper shoe to the slide shall be used.\n\n(8)  Die handling.  Handling equipment attach points shall be provided on all dies requiring mechanical handling.\n\n(9)  Diesetting.  (i) The employer shall establish a diesetting procedure that will insure compliance with paragraph (c) of this section.\n\n(ii) The employer shall provide spring loaded turnover bars, for presses designed to accept such turnover bars.\n\n(iii) The employer shall provide die stops or other means to prevent losing control of the die while setting or removing dies in presses which are inclined.\n\n(iv) The employer shall provide and enforce the use of safety blocks for use whenever dies are being adjusted or repaired in the press.\n\n(v) The employer shall provide brushes, swabs, lubricating rolls, and automatic or manual pressure guns so that operators and diesetters shall not be required to reach into the point of operation or other hazard areas to lubricate material, punches or dies.\n\n(e)  Inspection, maintenance, and modification of presses \u2014(1)  Inspection and maintenance records.  The employer shall establish and follow an inspection program having a general component and a directed component.\n\n(i) Under the general component of the inspection program, the employer shall:\n\n(A) Conduct periodic and regular inspections of each power press to ensure that all of its parts, auxiliary equipment, and safeguards, including the clutch/brake mechanism, antirepeat feature, and single-stroke mechanism, are in a safe operating condition and adjustment;\n\n(B) Perform and complete necessary maintenance or repair, or both, before operating the press; and\n\n(C) Maintain a certification record of each inspection, and each maintenance and repair task performed, under the general component of the inspection program that includes the date of the inspection, maintenance, or repair work, the signature of the person who performed the inspection, maintenance, or repair work, and the serial number, or other identifier, of the power press inspected, maintained, and repaired.\n\n(ii) Under the directed component of the inspection program, the employer shall:\n\n(A) Inspect and test each press on a regular basis at least once a week to determine the condition of the clutch/brake mechanism, antirepeat feature, and single-stroke mechanism;\n\n(B) Perform and complete necessary maintenance or repair, or both, on the clutch/brake mechanism, antirepeat feature, and single-stroke mechanism before operating the press; and\n\n(C) Maintain a certification record of each maintenance task performed under the directed component of the inspection program that includes the date of the maintenance task, the signature of the person who performed the maintenance task, and the serial number, or other identifier, of the power press maintained.\n\nInspections of the clutch/brake mechanism, antirepeat feature, and single-stroke mechanism conducted under the directed component of the inspection program are exempt from the requirement to maintain certification records specified by paragraph (e)(1)(i)(C) of this section, but inspections of the clutch/brake mechanism, antirepeat feature, and single-stroke mechanism conducted under the general component of the inspection program are not exempt from this requirement.\n\n(iii) Paragraph (e)(1)(ii) of this section does not apply to presses that comply with paragraphs (b)(13) and (14) of this section.\n\n(2)  Modification.  It shall be the responsibility of any person modifying a power press to furnish instructions with the modification to establish new or changed guidelines for use and care of the power press so modified.\n\n(3)  Training of maintenance personnel.  It shall be the responsibility of the employer to insure the original and continuing competence of personnel caring for, inspecting, and maintaining power presses.\n\n(f)  Operation of power presses \u2014(1) [Reserved]\n\n(2)  Instruction to operators.  The employer shall train and instruct the operator in the safe method of work before starting work on any operation covered by this section. The employer shall insure by adequate supervision that correct operating procedures are being followed.\n\n(3)  Work area.  The employer shall provide clearance between machines so that movement of one operator will not interfere with the work of another. Ample room for cleaning machines, handling material, work pieces, and scrap shall also be provided. All surrounding floors shall be kept in good condition and free from obstructions, grease, oil, and water.\n\n(4)  Overloading.  The employer shall operate his presses within the tonnage and attachment weight ratings specified by the manufacturer.\n\nExplanation of above diagram:\n \n This diagram shows the accepted safe openings between the bottom edge of a guard and feed table at various distances from the danger line (point of operation).\n \n The  clearance line  marks the distance required to prevent contact between guard and moving parts.\n \n The  minimum guarding line  is the distance between the infeed side of the guard and the danger line which is one-half inch from the danger line.\n \n The various openings are such that for average size hands an operator's fingers won't reach the point of operation.\n \n After installation of point of operation guards and before a job is released for operation a check should be made to verify that the guard will prevent the operator's hands from reaching the point of operation.\n \n Table O-10\n [In inches]\n Distance of opening from point of operation hazard\n Maximum width of opening\n \n 1/2  to 1\n 1/2 \n 1/4 \n 1\n 1/2  to 2\n 1/2 \n 3/8 \n 2\n 1/2  to 3\n 1/2 \n 1/2 \n 3\n 1/2  to 5\n 1/2 \n 5/8 \n 5\n 1/2  to 6\n 1/2 \n 3/4 \n 6\n 1/2  to 7\n 1/2 \n 7/8 \n 7\n 1/2  to 12\n 1/2 1\n 1/4 \n 12\n 1/2  to 15\n 1/2 1\n 1/2 \n 15\n 1/2  to 17\n 1/2 1\n 7/8 \n 17\n 1/2  to 31\n 1/2 2\n 1/8 \n This table shows the distances that guards shall be positioned from the danger line in accordance with the required openings.\n\nExplanation of above diagram:\n\nThis diagram shows the accepted safe openings between the bottom edge of a guard and feed table at various distances from the danger line (point of operation).\n\nThe  clearance line  marks the distance required to prevent contact between guard and moving parts.\n\nThe  minimum guarding line  is the distance between the infeed side of the guard and the danger line which is one-half inch from the danger line.\n\nThe various openings are such that for average size hands an operator's fingers won't reach the point of operation.\n\nAfter installation of point of operation guards and before a job is released for operation a check should be made to verify that the guard will prevent the operator's hands from reaching the point of operation.\n\nTable O-10\n\n[In inches]\n\nThis table shows the distances that guards shall be positioned from the danger line in accordance with the required openings.\n\n(g)  Reports of injuries to employees operating mechanical power presses.  (1) The employer shall report, within 30 days of the occurrence, all point-of-operation injuries to operators or other employees to either the Director of the Directorate of Standards and Guidance at OSHA, U.S. Department of Labor, Washington, DC 20210 or electronically at  http://www.osha.gov/pls/oshaweb/mechanical.html;  or to the State Agency administering a plan approved by the Assistant Secretary of Labor for Occupational Safety and Health.\n\n(2) The report shall include the following information:\n\n(i) Employer's name, address and location of the workplace (establishment).\n\n(ii) Employee's name, injury sustained, and the task being performed (operation, set-up, maintenance, or other).\n\n(iii) Type of clutch used on the press (full revolution, part revolution, or direct drive).\n\n(iv) Type of safeguard(s) being used (two hand control, two hand trip, pullouts, sweeps, or other). If the safeguard is not described in this section, give a complete description.\n\n(v) Cause of the accident (repeat of press, safeguard failure, removing stuck part or scrap, no safeguard provided, no safeguard in use, or other).\n\n(vi) Type of feeding (manual with hands in dies or with hands out of dies, semiautomatic, automatic, or other).\n\n(vii) Means used to actuate press stroke (foot trip, foot control, hand trip, hand control, or other).\n\n(viii) Number of operators required for the operation and the number of operators provided with controls and safeguards.\n\n(h)  Presence sensing device initiation (PSDI) \u2014(1)  General.  (i) The requirements of paragraph (h) shall apply to all part revolution mechanical power presses used in the PSDI mode of operation.\n\n(ii) The relevant requirements of paragraphs (a) through (g) of this section also shall apply to all presses used in the PSDI mode of operation, whether or not cross referenced in this paragraph (h). Such cross-referencing of specific requirements from paragraphs (a) through (g) of this section is intended only to enhance convenience and understanding in relating to the new provisions to the existing standard, and is not to be construed as limiting the applicability of other provisions in paragraphs (a) through (g) of this section.\n\n(iii) Full revolution mechanical power presses shall not be used in the PSDI mode of operation.\n\n(iv) Mechanical power presses with a configuration which would allow a person to enter, pass through, and become clear of the sensing field into the hazardous portion of the press shall not be used in the PSDI mode of operation.\n\n(v) The PSDI mode of operation shall be used only for normal production operations. Die-setting and maintenance procedures shall comply with paragraphs (a) through (g) of this section, and shall not be done in the PSDI mode.\n\n(2)  Brake and clutch requirements.  (i) Presses with flexible steel band brakes or with mechanical linkage actuated brakes or clutches shall not be used in the PSDI mode.\n\n(ii) Brake systems on presses used in the PSDI mode shall have sufficient torque so that each average value of stopping times (Ts) for stops initiated at approximately 45 degrees, 60 degrees, and 90 degrees, respectively, of crankshaft angular position, shall not be more than 125 percent of the average value of the stopping time at the top crankshaft position. Compliance with this requirement shall be determined by using the heaviest upper die to be used on the press, and operating at the fastest press speed if there is speed selection.\n\n(iii) Where brake engagement and clutch release is effected by spring action, such spring(s) shall operate in compression on a rod or within a hole or tube, and shall be of non-interleaving design.\n\n(3)  Pneumatic systems.  (i) Air valve and air pressure supply/control.\n\n(A) The requirements of paragraphs (b)(7)(xiii), (b)(7)(xiv), (b)(10), (b)(12) and (c)(5)(iii) of this section apply to the pneumatic systems of machines used in the PSDI mode.\n\n(B) The air supply for pneumatic clutch/brake control valves shall incorporate a filter, an air regulator, and, when necessary for proper operation, a lubricator.\n\n(C) The air pressure supply for clutch/brake valves on machines used in the PSDI mode shall be regulated to pressures less than or equal to the air pressure used when making the stop time measurements required by paragraph (h)(2)(ii) of this section.\n\n(ii) Air counterbalance systems.\n\n(A) Where presses that have slide counterbalance systems are used in the PSDI mode, the counterbalance system shall also meet the requirements of paragraph (b)(9) of this section.\n\n(B) Counterbalances shall be adjusted in accordance with the press manufacturer's recommendations to assure correct counterbalancing of the slide attachment (upper die) weight for all operations performed on presses used in the PSDI mode. The adjustments shall be made before performing the stopping time measurements required by paragraphs (h)(2)(ii), (h)(5)(iii), and (h)(9)(v) of this section.\n\n(4)  Flywheels and bearings.  Presses whose designs incorporate flywheels running on journals on the crankshaft or back shaft, or bull gears running on journals mounted on the crankshaft, shall be inspected, lubricated, and maintained as provided in paragraph (h)(10) of this section to reduce the possibility of unintended and uncontrolled press strokes caused by bearing seizure.\n\n(5)  Brake monitoring.  (i) Presses operated in the PSDI mode shall be equipped with a brake monitor that meets the requirements of paragraphs (b)(13) and (b)(14) of this section. In addition, the brake monitor shall be adjusted during installation certification to prevent successive stroking of the press if increases in stopping time cause an increase in the safety distance above that required by paragraph (h)(9)(v) of this section.\n\n(ii) Once the PSDI safety system has been certified/validated, adjustment of the brake monitor shall not be done without prior approval of the validation organization for both the brake monitor adjustment and the corresponding adjustment of the safety distance. The validation organization shall in its installation validation, state that in what circumstances, if any, the employer has advance approval for adjustment, when prior oral approval is appropriate and when prior approval must be in writing. The adjustment shall be done under the supervision of an authorized person whose qualifications include knowledge of safety distance requirements and experience with the brake system and its adjustment. When brake wear or other factors extend press stopping time beyond the limit permitted by the brake monitor, adjustment, repair, or maintenance shall be performed on the brake or other press system element that extends the stopping time.\n\n(iii) The brake monitor setting shall allow an increase of no more than 10 percent of the longest stopping time for the press, or 10 milliseconds, whichever is longer, measured at the top of the stroke.\n\n(6)  Cycle control and control systems.  (i) The control system on presses used in the PSDI mode shall meet the applicable requirements of paragraphs (b)(7), (b)(8), (b)(13), and (c)(5) of this section.\n\n(ii) The control system shall incorporate a means of dynamically monitoring for decoupling of the rotary position indicating mechanism drive from the crankshaft. This monitor shall stop slide motion and prevent successive press strokes if decoupling occurs, or if the monitor itself fails.\n\n(iii) The mode selection means of paragraph (b)(7)(iii) of this section shall have at least one position for selection of the PSDI mode. Where more than one interruption of the light sensing field is used in the initiation of a stroke, either the mode selection means must have one position for each function, or a separate selection means shall be provided which becomes operable when the PSDI mode is selected. Selection of PSDI mode and the number of interruptions/withdrawals of the light sensing field required to initiate a press cycle shall be by means capable of supervision by the employer.\n\n(iv) A PSDI set-up/reset means shall be provided which requires an overt action by the operator, in addition to PSDI mode selection, before operation of the press by means of PSDI can be started.\n\n(v) An indicator visible to the operator and readily seen by the employer shall be provided which shall clearly indicate that the system is set-up for cycling in the PSDI mode.\n\n(vi) The control system shall incorporate a timer to deactivate PSDI when the press does not stroke within the period of time set by the timer. The timer shall be manually adjustable, to a maximum time of 30 seconds. For any timer setting greater than 15 seconds, the adjustment shall be made by the use of a special tool available only to authorized persons. Following a deactivation of PSDI by the timer, the system shall make it necessary to reset the set-up/reset means in order to reactivate the PSDI mode.\n\n(vii) Reactivation of PSDI operation following deactivation of the PSDI mode from any other cause, such as activation of the red color stop control required by paragraph (b)(7)(ii) of this section, interruption of the presence sensing field, opening of an interlock, or reselection of the number of sensing field interruptions/withdrawals required to cycle the press, shall require resetting of the set-up/reset means.\n\n(viii) The control system shall incorporate an automatic means to prevent initiation or continued operation in the PSDI mode unless the press drive motor is energized in the forward direction of crankshaft rotation.\n\n(ix) The control design shall preclude any movement of the slide caused by operation of power on, power off, or selector switches, or from checks for proper operations as required by paragraph (h)(6)(xiv) of this section.\n\n(x) All components and subsystems of the control system shall be designed to operate together to provide total control system compliance with the requirements of this section.\n\n(xi) Where there is more than one operator of a press used for PSDI, each operator shall be protected by a separate, independently functioning, presence sensing device. The control system shall require that each sensing field be interrupted the selected number of times prior to initiating a stroke. Further, each operator shall be provided with a set-up/reset means that meets the requirements of paragraph (h)(6) of this section, and which must be actuated to initiate operation of the press in the PSDI mode.\n\n(xii) [Reserved]\n\n(xiii) The Control system shall incorporate interlocks for supplemental guards, if used, which will prevent stroke initiation or will stop a stroke in progress if any supplemental guard fails or is deactivated.\n\n(xiv) The control system shall perform checks for proper operation of all cycle control logic element switches and contacts at least once each cycle. Control elements shall be checked for correct status after power \u201con\u201d and before the initial PSDI stroke.\n\n(xv) The control system shall have provisions for an \u201cinch\u201d operating means meeting the requirements of paragraph (b)(7)(iv) of this section. Die-setting shall not be done in the PSDI mode. Production shall not be done in the \u201cinch\u201d mode.\n\n(xvi) The control system shall permit only a single stroke per initiation command.\n\n(xvii) Controls with internally stored programs (e.g., mechanical, electro-mechanical, or electronic) shall meet the requirements of paragraph (b)(13) of this section, and shall default to a predetermined safe condition in the event of any single failure within the system. Programmable controllers which meet the requirements for controls with internally stored programs stated above shall be permitted only if all logic elements affecting the safety system and point of operation safety are internally stored and protected in such a manner that they cannot be altered or manipulated by the user to an unsafe condition.\n\n(7)  Environmental requirements.  Control components shall be selected, constructed, and connected together in such a way as to withstand expected operational and environmental stresses, at least including those outlined in appendix A. Such stresses shall not so affect the control system as to cause unsafe operation.\n\n(8)  Safety system.  (i) Mechanical power presses used in the PSDI mode shall be operated under the control of a safety system which, in addition to meeting the applicable requirements of paragraphs (b)(13) and (c)(5) and other applicable provisions of this section, shall function such that a single failure or single operating error shall not cause injury to personnel from point of operation hazards.\n\n(ii) The safety system shall be designed, constructed, and arranged as an integral total system, including all elements of the press, the controls, the safeguarding and any required supplemental safeguarding, and their interfaces with the operator and that part of the environment which has effect on the protection against point of operation hazards.\n\n(9)  Safeguarding the point of operation.  (i) The point of operation of presses operated in the PSDI mode shall be safeguarded in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (c) of this section, except that the safety distance requirements of paragraph (h)(9)(v) of this section shall be used for PSDI operation.\n\n(ii)(A) PSDI shall be implemented only by use of light curtain (photo-electric) presence sensing devices which meet the requirements of paragraph (c)(3)(iii)( c ) of this section unless the requirements of the following paragraph have been met.\n\n(B) Alternatives to photo-electric light curtains may be used for PSDI when the employer can demonstrate, through tests and analysis by the employer or the manufacturer, that the alternative is as safe as the photo-electric light curtain, that the alternative meets the conditions of this section, has the same long term reliability as light curtains and can be integrated into the entire safety system as provided for in this section. Prior to use, both the employer and manufacturer must certify that these requirements and all the other applicable requirements of this section are met and these certifications must be validated by an OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization to meet these additional requirements and all the other applicable requirements of paragraphs (a) through (h) and appendix A of this section. Three months prior to the operation of any alternative system, the employer must notify the OSHA Directorate of Safety Standards Programs of the name of the system to be installed, the manufacturer and the OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization immediately. Upon request, the employer must make available to that office all tests and analyses for OSHA review.\n\n(iii) Individual sensing fields of presence sensing devices used to initiate strokes in the PSDI mode shall cover only one side of the press.\n\n(iv) Light curtains used for PSDI operation shall have minimum object sensitivity not to exceed one and one-fourth inches (31.75 mm). Where light curtain object sensitivity is user-adjustable, either discretely or continuously, design features shall limit the minimum object sensitivity adjustment not to exceed one and one-fourth inches (31.75 mm). Blanking of the sensing field is not permitted.\n\n(v) The safety distance (Ds) from the sensing field of the presence sensing device to the point of operation shall be greater than or equal to the distance determined by the formula:\n\nDs = Hs \u00d7 (Ts + Tp + Tr + 2Tm) + Dp\n\nWhere:\n \n Ds = Minimum safety distance.\n \n Hs = Hand speed constant of 63 inches per second (1.6 m/s).\n \n Ts = Longest press stopping time, in seconds, computed by taking averages of multiple measurements at each of three positions (45 degrees, 60 degrees, and 90 degrees) of crankshaft angular position; the longest of the three averages is the stopping time to use. (Ts is defined as the sum of the kinetic energy dissipation time plus the pneumatic/magnetic/hydraulic reaction time of the clutch/brake operating mechanism(s).)\n \n Tp = Longest presence sensing device response time, in seconds.\n \n Tr = Longest response time, in seconds, of all interposing control elements between the presence sensing device and the clutch/brake operating mechanism(s).\n \n Tm = Increase in the press stopping time at the top of the stroke, in seconds, allowed by the brake monitor for brake wear. The time increase allowed shall be limited to no more than 10 percent of the longest press stopping time measured at the top of the stroke, or 10 milliseconds, whichever is longer.\n \n Dp = Penetration depth factor, required to provide for possible penetration through the presence sensing field by fingers or hand before detection occurs. The penetration depth factor shall be determined from Graph h-1 using the minimum object sensitivity size.\n\nWhere:\n\nDs = Minimum safety distance.\n\nHs = Hand speed constant of 63 inches per second (1.6 m/s).\n\nTs = Longest press stopping time, in seconds, computed by taking averages of multiple measurements at each of three positions (45 degrees, 60 degrees, and 90 degrees) of crankshaft angular position; the longest of the three averages is the stopping time to use. (Ts is defined as the sum of the kinetic energy dissipation time plus the pneumatic/magnetic/hydraulic reaction time of the clutch/brake operating mechanism(s).)\n\nTp = Longest presence sensing device response time, in seconds.\n\nTr = Longest response time, in seconds, of all interposing control elements between the presence sensing device and the clutch/brake operating mechanism(s).\n\nTm = Increase in the press stopping time at the top of the stroke, in seconds, allowed by the brake monitor for brake wear. The time increase allowed shall be limited to no more than 10 percent of the longest press stopping time measured at the top of the stroke, or 10 milliseconds, whichever is longer.\n\nDp = Penetration depth factor, required to provide for possible penetration through the presence sensing field by fingers or hand before detection occurs. The penetration depth factor shall be determined from Graph h-1 using the minimum object sensitivity size.\n\n(vi) The presence sensing device location shall either be set at each tool change and set-up to provide at least the minimum safety distance, or fixed in location to provide a safety distance greater than or equal to the minimum safety distance for all tooling set-ups which are to be used on that press.\n\n(vii) Where presence sensing device location is adjustable, adjustment shall require the use of a special tool available only to authorized persons.\n\n(viii) Supplemental safeguarding shall be used to protect all areas of access to the point of operation which are unprotected by the PSDI presence sensing device. Such supplemental safeguarding shall consist of either additional light curtain (photo-electric) presence sensing devices or other types of guards which meet the requirements of paragraphs (c) and (h) of this section.\n\n(A) Presence sensing devices used as supplemental safeguarding shall not initiate a press stroke, and shall conform to the requirements of paragraph (c)(3)(iii) and other applicable provisions of this section, except that the safety distance shall comply with paragraph (h)(9)(v) of this section.\n\n(B) Guards used as supplemental safeguarding shall conform to the design, construction and application requirements of paragraph (c)(2) of this section, and shall be interlocked with the press control to prevent press PSDI operation if the guard fails, is removed, or is out of position.\n\n(ix) Barriers shall be fixed to the press frame or bolster to prevent personnel from passing completely through the sensing field, where safety distance or press configuration is such that personnel could pass through the PSDI presence sensing field and assume a position where the point of operation could be accessed without detection by the PSDI presence sensing device. As an alternative, supplemental presence sensing devices used only in the safeguard mode may be provided. If used, these devices shall be located so as to detect all operator locations and positions not detected by the PSDI sensing field, and shall prevent stroking or stop a stroke in process when any supplemental sensing field(s) are interrupted.\n\n(x) Hand tools. Where tools are used for feeding, removal of scrap, lubrication of parts, or removal of parts that stick on the die in PSDI operations:\n\n(A) The minimum diameter of the tool handle extension shall be greater than the minimum object sensitivity of the presence sensing device(s) used to initiate press strokes; or\n\n(B) The length of the hand tool shall be such as to ensure that the operator's hand will be detected for any safety distance required by the press set-ups.\n\n(10)  Inspection and maintenance.  (i) Any press equipped with presence sensing devices for use in PSDI, or for supplemental safeguarding on presses used in the PSDI mode, shall be equipped with a test rod of diameter specified by the presence sensing device manufacturer to represent the minimum object sensitivity of the sensing field. Instructions for use of the test rod shall be noted on a label affixed to the presence sensing device.\n\n(ii) The following checks shall be made at the beginning of each shift and whenever a die change is made.\n\n(A) A check shall be performed using the test rod according to the presence sensing device manufacturer's instructions to determine that the presence sensing device used for PSDI is operational.\n\n(B) The safety distance shall be checked for compliance with (h)(9)(v) of this section.\n\n(C) A check shall be made to determine that all supplemental safeguarding is in place. Where presence sensing devices are used for supplemental safeguarding, a check for proper operation shall be performed using the test rod according to the presence sensing device manufacturer's instructions.\n\n(D) A check shall be made to assure that the barriers and/or supplemental presence sensing devices required by paragraph (h)(9)(ix) of this section are operating properly.\n\n(E) A system or visual check shall be made to verify correct counterbalance adjustment for die weight according to the press manufacturer's instructions, when a press is equipped with a slide counterbalance system.\n\n(iii) When presses used in the PSDI mode have flywheel or bullgear running on crankshaft mounted journals and bearings, or a flywheel mounted on back shaft journals and bearings, periodic inspections following the press manufacturer's recommendations shall be made to ascertain that bearings are in good working order, and that automatic lubrication systems for these bearings (if automatic lubrication is provided) are supplying proper lubrication. On presses with provision for manual lubrication of flywheel or bullgear bearings, lubrication shall be provided according to the press manufacturer's recommendations.\n\n(iv) Periodic inspections of clutch and brake mechanisms shall be performed to assure they are in proper operating condition. The press manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed.\n\n(v) When any check of the press, including those performed in accordance with the requirements of paragraphs (h)(10)(ii), (iii) or (iv) of this section, reveals a condition of noncompliance, improper adjustment, or failure, the press shall not be operated until the condition has been corrected by adjustment, replacement, or repair.\n\n(vi) It shall be the responsibility of the employer to ensure the competence of personnel caring for, inspecting, and maintaining power presses equipped for PSDI operation, through initial and periodic training.\n\n(11)  Safety system certification/validation.  (i) Prior to the initial use of any mechanical press in the PSDI mode, two sets of certification and validation are required:\n\n(A) The design of the safety system required for the use of a press in the PSDI mode shall be certified and validated prior to installation. The manufacturer's certification shall be validated by an OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization to meet all applicable requirements of paragraphs (a) through (h) and appendix A of this section.\n\n(B) After a press has been equipped with a safety system whose design has been certified and validated in accordance with paragraph (h)(11)(i) of this section, the safety system installation shall be certified by the employer, and then shall be validated by an OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization to meet all applicable requirements of paragraphs (a) through (h) and appendix A of this section.\n\n(ii) At least annually thereafter, the safety system on a mechanical power press used in the PSDI mode shall be recertified by the employer and revalidated by an OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization to meet all applicable requirements of paragraphs (a) through (h) and appendix A of this section. Any press whose safety system has not been recertified and revalidated within the preceding 12 months shall be removed from service in the PSDI mode until the safety system is recertified and revalidated.\n\n(iii) A label shall be affixed to the press as part of each installation certification/validation and the most recent recertification/revalidation. The label shall indicate the press serial number, the minimum safety distance (Ds) required by paragraph (h)(9)(v) of this section, the fulfillment of design certification/validation, the employer's signed certification, the identification of the OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization, its signed validation, and the date the certification/validation and recertification/revalidation are issued.\n\n(iv) Records of the installation certification and validation and the most recent recertification and revalidation shall be maintained for each safety system equipped press by the employer as long as the press is in use. The records shall include the manufacture and model number of each component and subsystem, the calculations of the safety distance as required by paragraph (h)(9)(v) of this section, and the stopping time measurements required by paragraph (h)(2)(ii) of this section. The most recent records shall be made available to OSHA upon request.\n\n(v) The employer shall notify the OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization within five days whenever a component or a subsystem of the safety system fails or modifications are made which may affect the safety of the system. The failure of a critical component shall necessitate the removal of the safety system from service until it is recertified and revalidated, except recertification by the employer without revalidation is permitted when a non-critical component or subsystem is replaced by one of the same manufacture and design as the original, or determined by the third-party validation organization to be equivalent by similarity analysis, as set forth in appendix A.\n\n(vi) The employer shall notify the OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization within five days of the occurrence of any point of operation injury while a press is used in the PSDI mode. This is in addition to the report of injury required by paragraph (g) of this section; however, a copy of that report may be used for this purpose.\n\n(12)  Die setting and work set-up.  (i) Die setting on presses used in the PSDI mode shall be performed in accordance with paragraphs (d) and (h) of this section.\n\n(ii) The PSDI mode shall not be used for die setting or set-up. An alternative manual cycle initiation and control means shall be supplied for use in die setting which meets the requirements of paragraph (b)(7) of this section.\n\n(iii) Following a die change, the safety distance, the proper application of supplemental safeguarding, and the slide counterbalance adjustment (if the press is equipped with a counterbalance) shall be checked and maintained by authorized persons whose qualifications include knowledge of the safety distance, supplemental safeguarding requirements, and the manufacturer's specifications for counterbalance adjustment. Adjustment of the location of the PSDI presence sensing device shall require use of a special tool available only to the authorized persons.\n\n(13)  Operator training.  (i) The operator training required by paragraph (f)(2) of this section shall be provided to the employee before the employee initially operates the press and as needed to maintain competence, but not less than annually thereafter. It shall include instruction relative to the following items for presses used in the PSDI mode.\n\n(A) The manufacturer's recommended test procedures for checking operation of the presence sensing device. This shall include the use of the test rod required by paragraph (h)(10)(i) of this section.\n\n(B) The safety distance required.\n\n(C) The operation, function and performance of the PSDI mode.\n\n(D) The requirements for hand tools that may be used in the PSDI mode.\n\n(E) The severe consequences that can result if he or she attempts to circumvent or by-pass any of the safeguard or operating functions of the PSDI system.\n\n(ii) The employer shall certify that employees have been trained by preparing a certification record which includes the identity of the person trained, the signature of the employer or the person who conducted the training, and the date the training was completed. The certification record shall be prepared at the completion of training and shall be maintained on file for the duration of the employee's employment. The certification record shall be made available upon request to the Assistant Secretary for Occupational Safety and Health.\n\nAppendix A to \u00a7 1910.217\u2014Mandatory Requirements for Certification/Validation of Safety Systems for Presence Sensing Device Initiation of Mechanical Power Presses\n \n Purpose\n \n The purpose of the certification/validation of safety systems for presence sensing device initiation (PSDI) of mechanical power presses is to ensure that the safety systems are designed, installed, and maintained in accordance with all applicable requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A.\n \n General\n \n The certification/validation process shall utilize an independent third-party validation organization recognized by OSHA in accordance with the requirements specified in appendix C of this section.\n \n While the employer is responsible for assuring that the certification/validation requirements in \u00a7 1910.217(h)(11) are fulfilled, the design certification of PSDI safety systems may be initiated by manufacturers, employers, and/or their representatives. The term  manufacturers  refers to the manufacturer of any of the components of the safety system. An employer who assembles a PSDI safety system would be a manufacturer as well as employer for purposes of this standard and appendix.\n \n The certification/validation process includes two stages. For design certification, in the first stage, the manufacturer (which can be an employer) certifies that the PSDI safety system meets the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A, based on appropriate design criteria and tests. In the second stage, the OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization validates that the PSDI safety system meets the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A and the manufacturer's certification by reviewing the manufacturer's design and test data and performing any additional reviews required by this standard or which it believes appropriate.\n \n For installation certification/validation and annual recertification/revalidation, in the first stage the employer certifies or recertifies that the employer is installing or utilizing a PSDI safety system validated as meeting the design requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A by an OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization and that the installation, operation and maintenance meet the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A. In the second stage, the OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization validates or revalidates that the PSDI safety system installation meets the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A and the employer's certification, by reviewing that the PSDI safety system has been certified; the employer's certification, designs and tests, if any; the installation, operation, maintenance and training; and by performing any additional tests and reviews which the validation organization believes is necessary.\n \n Summary\n \n The certification/validation of safety systems for PSDI shall consider the press, controls, safeguards, operator, and environment as an integrated system which shall comply with all of the requirements in 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A. The certification/validation process shall verify that the safety system complies with the OSHA safety requirements as follows:\n \n A. Design Certification/Validation\n \n 1. The major parts, components and subsystems used shall be defined by part number or serial number, as appropriate, and by manufacturer to establish the configuration of the system.\n \n 2. The identified parts, components and subsystems shall be certified by the manufacturer to be able to withstand the functional and operational environments of the PSDI safety system.\n \n 3. The total system design shall be certified by the manufacturer as complying with all requirements in 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A.\n \n 4. The third-party validation organization shall validate the manufacturer's certification under paragraphs 2 and 3.\n \n B. Installation Certification/Validation\n \n 1. The employer shall certify that the PSDI safety system has been design certified and validated, that the installation meets the operational and environmental requirements specified by the manufacturer, that the installation drawings are accurate, and that the installation meets the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A. (The operational and installation requirements of the PSDI safety system may vary for different applications.)\n \n 2. The third-party validation organization shall validate the employer's certifications that the PSDI safety system is design certified and validated, that the installation meets the installation and environmental requirements specified by the manufacturer, and that the installation meets the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A.\n \n C. Recertification/Revalidation\n \n 1. The PSDI safety system shall remain under certification/validation for the shorter of one year or until the system hardware is changed, modified or refurbished, or operating conditions are changed (including environmental, application or facility changes), or a failure of a critical component has occurred.\n \n 2. Annually, or after a change specified in paragraph 1., the employer shall inspect and recertify the installation as meeting the requirements set forth under B., Installation Certification/Validation.\n \n 3. The third-party validation organization, annually or after a change specified in paragraph 1., shall validate the employer's certification that the requirements of paragraph B., Installation Certification/Validation have been met.\n \n \n (Note: \n Such changes in operational conditions as die changes or press relocations not involving disassembly or revision to the safety system would not require recertification/revalidation.) \n Certification/Validation Requirements\n \n A. General Design Certification/Validation Requirements\n \n 1.  Certification/Validation Program Requirements.  The manufacturer shall certify and the OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization shall validate that:\n \n (a) The design of components, subsystems, software and assemblies meets OSHA performance requirements and are ready for the intended use; and\n \n (b) The performance of combined subsystems meets OSHA's operational requirements.\n \n 2.  Certification/Validation Program Level of Risk Evaluation Requirements.  The manufacturer shall evaluate and certify, and the OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization shall validate, the design and operation of the safety system by determining conformance with the following:\n \n a. The safety system shall have the ability to sustain a single failure or a single operating error and not cause injury to personnel from point of operation hazards. Acceptable design features shall demonstrate, in the following order or precedence, that:\n \n (1) No single failure points may cause injury; or\n \n (2) Redundancy, and comparison and/or diagnostic checking, exist for the critical items that may cause injury, and the electrical, electronic, electromechanical and mechanical parts and components are selected so that they can withstand operational and external environments. The safety factor and/or derated percentage shall be specifically noted and complied with.\n \n b. The manufacturer shall design, evaluate, test and certify, and the third-party validation organization shall evaluate and validate, that the PSDI safety system meets appropriate requirements in the following areas.\n \n (1) Environmental Limits\n \n (a) Temperature\n \n (b) Relative humidity\n \n (c) Vibration\n \n (d) Fluid compatability with other materials\n \n (2) Design Limits\n \n (a) Power requirements\n \n (b) Power transient tolerances\n \n (c) Compatability of materials used\n \n (d) Material stress tolerances and limits\n \n (e) Stability to long term power fluctuations\n \n (f) Sensitivity to signal acquisition\n \n (g) Repeatability of measured parameter without inadvertent initiation of a press stroke\n \n (h) Operational life of components in cycles, hours, or both\n \n (i) Electromagnetic tolerance to:\n \n ( 1 ) Specific operational wave lengths; and\n \n ( 2 ) Externally generated wave lengths\n \n (3)  New Design Certification/Validation.  Design certification/validation for a new safety system, i.e., a new design or new integration of specifically identified components and subsystems, would entail a single certification/validation which would be applicable to all identical safety systems. It would not be necessary to repeat the tests on individual safety systems of the same manufacture or design. Nor would it be necessary to repeat these tests in the case of modifications where determined by the manufacturer and validated by the third-party validation organization to be equivalent by similarity analysis. Minor modifications not affecting the safety of the system may be made by the manufacturer without revalidation.\n \n Substantial modifications would require testing as a new safety system, as deemed necessary by the validation organization.\n \n B. Additional Detailed Design Certification/Validation Requirements\n \n 1.  General.  The manufacturer or the manufacturer's representative shall certify to and submit to an OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization the documentation necessary to demonstrate that the PSDI safety system design is in full compliance with the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217(a)-(h) and this appendix A, as applicable, by means of analysis, tests, or combination of both, establishing that the following additional certification/validation requirements are fulfilled.\n \n 2.  Reaction Times.  For the purpose of demonstrating compliance with the reaction time required by \u00a7 1910.217(h), the tests shall use the following definitions and requirements:\n \n a.  Reaction time  means the time, in seconds, it takes the signal, required to activate/deactivate the system, to travel through the system, measured from the time of signal initiation to the time the function being measured is completed.\n \n b.  Full stop  or  No movement of the slide or ram  means when the crankshaft rotation has slowed to two or less revolutions per minute, just before stopping completely.\n \n c.  Function completion  means for, electrical, electromechanical and electronic devices, when the circuit produces a change of state in the output element of the device.\n \n d. When the change of state is motion, the measurement shall be made at the completion of the motion.\n \n e. The generation of the test signal introduced into the system for measuring reaction time shall be such that the initiation time can be established with an error of less than 0.5 percent of the reaction time measured.\n \n f. The instrument used to measure reaction time shall be calibrated to be accurate to within 0.001 second.\n \n 3.  Compliance with \u00a7 1910.217(h)(2)(ii).  For compliance with these requirements, the average value of the stopping time, Ts, shall be the arithmetic mean of at least 25 stops for each stop angle initiation measured with the brake and/or clutch unused, 50 percent worn, and 90 percent worn. The recommendations of the brake system manufacturer shall be used to simulate or estimate the brake wear. The manufacturer's recommended minimum lining depth shall be identified and documented, and an evaluation made that the minimum depth will not be exceeded before the next (annual) recertification/revalidation. A correlation of the brake and/or clutch degradation based on the above tests and/or estimates shall be made and documented. The results shall document the conditions under which the brake and/or clutch will and will not comply with the requirement. Based upon this determination, a scale shall be developed to indicate the allowable 10 percent of the stopping time at the top of the stroke for slide or ram overtravel due to brake wear. The scale shall be marked to indicate that brake adjustment and/or replacement is required. The explanation and use of the scale shall be documented.\n \n The test specification and procedure shall be submitted to the validation organization for review and validation prior to the test. The validation organization representative shall witness at least one set of tests.\n \n 4.  Compliance with \u00a7\u00a7 1910.217(h)(5)(iii) and (h)(9)(v).  Each reaction time required to calculate the Safety Distance, including the brake monitor setting, shall be documented in separate reaction time tests. These tests shall specify the acceptable tolerance band sufficient to assure that tolerance build-up will not render the safety distance unsafe.\n \n a. Integrated test of the press fully equipped to operate in the PSDI mode shall be conducted to establish the total system reaction time.\n \n b. Brakes which are the adjustable type shall be adjusted properly before the test.\n \n 5.  Compliance with \u00a7 1910.217(h)(2)(iii).  a. Prior to conducting the brake system test required by paragraph (h)(2)(ii), a visual check shall be made of the springs. The visual check shall include a determination that the spring housing or rod does not show damage sufficient to degrade the structural integrity of the unit, and the spring does not show any tendency to interleave.\n \n b. Any detected broken or unserviceable springs shall be replaced before the test is conducted. The test shall be considered successful if the stopping time remains within that which is determined by paragraph (h)(9)(v) for the safety distance setting. If the increase in press stopping time exceeds the brake monitor setting limit defined in paragraph (h)(5)(iii), the test shall be considered unsuccessful, and the cause of the excessive stopping time shall be investigated. It shall be ascertained that the springs have not been broken and that they are functioning properly.\n \n 6.  Compliance with \u00a7 1910.217(h)(7).  a. Tests which are conducted by the manufacturers of electrical components to establish stress, life, temperature and loading limits must be tests which are in compliance with the provisions of the National Electrical Code.\n \n b. Electrical and/or electronic cards or boards assembled with discreet components shall be considered a subsystem and shall require separate testing that the subsystems do not degrade in any of the following conditions:\n \n (1) Ambient temperature variation from \u221220 \u00b0C to + 50 \u00b0C.\n \n (2) Ambient relative humidity of 99 percent.\n \n (3) Vibration of 45G for one millisecond per stroke when the item is to be mounted on the press frame.\n \n (4) Electromagnetic interference at the same wavelengths used for the radiation sensing field, at the power line frequency fundamental and harmonics, and also from outogenous radiation due to system switching.\n \n (5) Electrical power supply variations of \u00b115 percent.\n \n c. The manufacturer shall specify the test requirements and procedures from existing consensus tests in compliance with the provisions of the National Electrical Code.\n \n d. Tests designed by the manufacturer shall be made available upon request to the validation organization. The validation organization representative shall witness at least one set of each of these tests.\n \n 7.  Compliance with \u00a7 1910.217(h)(9)(iv).  a. The manufacturer shall design a test to demonstrate that the prescribed minimum object sensitivity of the presence sensing device is met.\n \n b. The test specifications and procedures shall be made available upon request to the validation organization.\n \n 8.  Compliance with \u00a7 1910.217(h)(9)(x).  a. The manufacturer shall design a test(s) to establish the hand tool extension diameters allowed for variations in minimum object sensitivity response.\n \n b. The test(s) shall document the range of object diameter sizes which will produce both single and double break conditions.\n \n c. The test(s) specifications and procedures shall be made available upon request to the validation organization.\n \n 9.  Integrated Tests Certification/Validation.  a. The manufacturer shall design a set of integrated tests to demonstrate compliance with the following requirements:\n \n Sections 1910.217(h)(6) (ii); (iii); (iv); (v); (vi); (vii); (viii); (ix); (xi); (xii); (xiii); (xiv); (xv); and (xvii).\n \n b. The integrated test specifications and procedures shall be made available to the validation organization.\n \n 10.  Analysis.  a. The manufacturer shall submit to the validation organization the technical analysis such as Hazard Analysis, Failure Mode and Effect Analysis, Stress Analysis, Component and Material Selection Analysis, Fluid Compatability, and/or other analyses which may be necessary to demonstrate, compliance with the following requirements:\n \n Sections 1910.217(h)(8) (i) and (ii); (h)(2) (ii) and (iii); (h)(3)(i) (A) and (C), and (ii); (h)(5) (i), (ii) and (iii); (h)(6) (i), (iii), (iv), (vi), (vii), (viii), (ix), (x), (xi), (xiii), (xiv), (xv), (xvi), and (xvii); (h)(7) (i) and (ii); (h)(9) (iv), (v), (viii), (ix) and (x); (h)(10) (i) and (ii).\n \n 11.  Types of Tests Acceptable for Certification/Validation.  a. Test results obtained from development testing may be used to certify/validate the design.\n \n b. The test results shall provide the engineering data necessary to establish confidence that the hardware and software will meet specifications, the manufacturing process has adequate quality control and the data acquired was used to establish processes, procedures, and test levels supporting subsequent hardware design, production, installation and maintenance.\n \n 12.  Validation for Design Certification/Validation.  If, after review of all documentation, tests, analyses, manufacturer's certifications, and any additional tests which the third-party validation organization believes are necessary, the third-party validation organization determines that the PSDI safety system is in full compliance with the applicable requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217(a) through (h) and this appendix A, it shall validate the manufacturer's certification that it so meets the stated requirements.\n \n C. Installation Certification/Validation Requirements\n \n 1. The employer shall evaluate and test the PSDI system installation, shall submit to the OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization the necessary supporting documentation, and shall certify that the requirements of \u00a7 1910.217(a) through (h) and this appendix A have been met and that the installation is proper.\n \n 2. The OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization shall conduct tests, and/or review and evaluate the employer's installation tests, documentation and representations. If it so determines, it shall validate the employer's certification that the PSDI safety system is in full conformance with all requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217(a) through (h) and this appendix A.\n \n D. Recertification/Revalidation Requirements\n \n 1. A PSDI safety system which has received installation certification/validation shall undergo recertification/revalidation the earlier of:\n \n a. Each time the systems hardware is significantly changed, modified, or refurbished;\n \n b. Each time the operational conditions are significantly changed (including environmental, application or facility changes, but excluding such changes as die changes or press relocations not involving revision to the safety system);\n \n c. When a failure of a significant component has occurred or a change has been made which may affect safety; or\n \n d. When one year has elapsed since the installation certification/validation or the last recertification/revalidation.\n \n 2.  Conduct or recertification/revalidation.  The employer shall evaluate and test the PSDI safety system installation, shall submit to the OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization the necessary supporting documentation, and shall recertify that the requirements of \u00a7 1910.217(a) through (h) and this appendix are being met. The documentation shall include, but not be limited to, the following items:\n \n a. Demonstration of a thorough inspection of the entire press and PSDI safety system to ascertain that the installation, components and safeguarding have not been changed, modified or tampered with since the installation certification/validation or last recertification/revalidation was made.\n \n b. Demonstrations that such adjustments as may be needed (such as to the brake monitor setting) have been accomplished with proper changes made in the records and on such notices as are located on the press and safety system.\n \n c. Demonstration that review has been made of the reports covering the design certification/validation, the installation certification/validation, and all recertification/revalidations, in order to detect any degradation to an unsafe condition, and that necessary changes have been made to restore the safety system to previous certification/validation levels.\n \n 3. The OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization shall conduct tests, and/or review and evaluate the employer's installation, tests, documentation and representations. If it so determines, it shall revalidate the employer's recertification that the PSDI system is in full conformance with all requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217(a) through (h) and this appendix A.\n\nThe purpose of the certification/validation of safety systems for presence sensing device initiation (PSDI) of mechanical power presses is to ensure that the safety systems are designed, installed, and maintained in accordance with all applicable requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A.\n\nThe certification/validation process shall utilize an independent third-party validation organization recognized by OSHA in accordance with the requirements specified in appendix C of this section.\n\nWhile the employer is responsible for assuring that the certification/validation requirements in \u00a7 1910.217(h)(11) are fulfilled, the design certification of PSDI safety systems may be initiated by manufacturers, employers, and/or their representatives. The term  manufacturers  refers to the manufacturer of any of the components of the safety system. An employer who assembles a PSDI safety system would be a manufacturer as well as employer for purposes of this standard and appendix.\n\nThe certification/validation process includes two stages. For design certification, in the first stage, the manufacturer (which can be an employer) certifies that the PSDI safety system meets the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A, based on appropriate design criteria and tests. In the second stage, the OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization validates that the PSDI safety system meets the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A and the manufacturer's certification by reviewing the manufacturer's design and test data and performing any additional reviews required by this standard or which it believes appropriate.\n\nFor installation certification/validation and annual recertification/revalidation, in the first stage the employer certifies or recertifies that the employer is installing or utilizing a PSDI safety system validated as meeting the design requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A by an OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization and that the installation, operation and maintenance meet the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A. In the second stage, the OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization validates or revalidates that the PSDI safety system installation meets the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A and the employer's certification, by reviewing that the PSDI safety system has been certified; the employer's certification, designs and tests, if any; the installation, operation, maintenance and training; and by performing any additional tests and reviews which the validation organization believes is necessary.\n\nThe certification/validation of safety systems for PSDI shall consider the press, controls, safeguards, operator, and environment as an integrated system which shall comply with all of the requirements in 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A. The certification/validation process shall verify that the safety system complies with the OSHA safety requirements as follows:\n\n1. The major parts, components and subsystems used shall be defined by part number or serial number, as appropriate, and by manufacturer to establish the configuration of the system.\n\n2. The identified parts, components and subsystems shall be certified by the manufacturer to be able to withstand the functional and operational environments of the PSDI safety system.\n\n3. The total system design shall be certified by the manufacturer as complying with all requirements in 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A.\n\n4. The third-party validation organization shall validate the manufacturer's certification under paragraphs 2 and 3.\n\n1. The employer shall certify that the PSDI safety system has been design certified and validated, that the installation meets the operational and environmental requirements specified by the manufacturer, that the installation drawings are accurate, and that the installation meets the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A. (The operational and installation requirements of the PSDI safety system may vary for different applications.)\n\n2. The third-party validation organization shall validate the employer's certifications that the PSDI safety system is design certified and validated, that the installation meets the installation and environmental requirements specified by the manufacturer, and that the installation meets the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A.\n\n1. The PSDI safety system shall remain under certification/validation for the shorter of one year or until the system hardware is changed, modified or refurbished, or operating conditions are changed (including environmental, application or facility changes), or a failure of a critical component has occurred.\n\n2. Annually, or after a change specified in paragraph 1., the employer shall inspect and recertify the installation as meeting the requirements set forth under B., Installation Certification/Validation.\n\n3. The third-party validation organization, annually or after a change specified in paragraph 1., shall validate the employer's certification that the requirements of paragraph B., Installation Certification/Validation have been met.\n\nSuch changes in operational conditions as die changes or press relocations not involving disassembly or revision to the safety system would not require recertification/revalidation.)\n\n1.  Certification/Validation Program Requirements.  The manufacturer shall certify and the OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization shall validate that:\n\n(a) The design of components, subsystems, software and assemblies meets OSHA performance requirements and are ready for the intended use; and\n\n(b) The performance of combined subsystems meets OSHA's operational requirements.\n\n2.  Certification/Validation Program Level of Risk Evaluation Requirements.  The manufacturer shall evaluate and certify, and the OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization shall validate, the design and operation of the safety system by determining conformance with the following:\n\na. The safety system shall have the ability to sustain a single failure or a single operating error and not cause injury to personnel from point of operation hazards. Acceptable design features shall demonstrate, in the following order or precedence, that:\n\n(1) No single failure points may cause injury; or\n\n(2) Redundancy, and comparison and/or diagnostic checking, exist for the critical items that may cause injury, and the electrical, electronic, electromechanical and mechanical parts and components are selected so that they can withstand operational and external environments. The safety factor and/or derated percentage shall be specifically noted and complied with.\n\nb. The manufacturer shall design, evaluate, test and certify, and the third-party validation organization shall evaluate and validate, that the PSDI safety system meets appropriate requirements in the following areas.\n\n(1) Environmental Limits\n\n(a) Temperature\n\n(b) Relative humidity\n\n(c) Vibration\n\n(d) Fluid compatability with other materials\n\n(2) Design Limits\n\n(a) Power requirements\n\n(b) Power transient tolerances\n\n(c) Compatability of materials used\n\n(d) Material stress tolerances and limits\n\n(e) Stability to long term power fluctuations\n\n(f) Sensitivity to signal acquisition\n\n(g) Repeatability of measured parameter without inadvertent initiation of a press stroke\n\n(h) Operational life of components in cycles, hours, or both\n\n(i) Electromagnetic tolerance to:\n\n( 1 ) Specific operational wave lengths; and\n\n( 2 ) Externally generated wave lengths\n\n(3)  New Design Certification/Validation.  Design certification/validation for a new safety system, i.e., a new design or new integration of specifically identified components and subsystems, would entail a single certification/validation which would be applicable to all identical safety systems. It would not be necessary to repeat the tests on individual safety systems of the same manufacture or design. Nor would it be necessary to repeat these tests in the case of modifications where determined by the manufacturer and validated by the third-party validation organization to be equivalent by similarity analysis. Minor modifications not affecting the safety of the system may be made by the manufacturer without revalidation.\n\nSubstantial modifications would require testing as a new safety system, as deemed necessary by the validation organization.\n\n1.  General.  The manufacturer or the manufacturer's representative shall certify to and submit to an OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization the documentation necessary to demonstrate that the PSDI safety system design is in full compliance with the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217(a)-(h) and this appendix A, as applicable, by means of analysis, tests, or combination of both, establishing that the following additional certification/validation requirements are fulfilled.\n\n2.  Reaction Times.  For the purpose of demonstrating compliance with the reaction time required by \u00a7 1910.217(h), the tests shall use the following definitions and requirements:\n\na.  Reaction time  means the time, in seconds, it takes the signal, required to activate/deactivate the system, to travel through the system, measured from the time of signal initiation to the time the function being measured is completed.\n\nb.  Full stop  or  No movement of the slide or ram  means when the crankshaft rotation has slowed to two or less revolutions per minute, just before stopping completely.\n\nc.  Function completion  means for, electrical, electromechanical and electronic devices, when the circuit produces a change of state in the output element of the device.\n\nd. When the change of state is motion, the measurement shall be made at the completion of the motion.\n\ne. The generation of the test signal introduced into the system for measuring reaction time shall be such that the initiation time can be established with an error of less than 0.5 percent of the reaction time measured.\n\nf. The instrument used to measure reaction time shall be calibrated to be accurate to within 0.001 second.\n\n3.  Compliance with \u00a7 1910.217(h)(2)(ii).  For compliance with these requirements, the average value of the stopping time, Ts, shall be the arithmetic mean of at least 25 stops for each stop angle initiation measured with the brake and/or clutch unused, 50 percent worn, and 90 percent worn. The recommendations of the brake system manufacturer shall be used to simulate or estimate the brake wear. The manufacturer's recommended minimum lining depth shall be identified and documented, and an evaluation made that the minimum depth will not be exceeded before the next (annual) recertification/revalidation. A correlation of the brake and/or clutch degradation based on the above tests and/or estimates shall be made and documented. The results shall document the conditions under which the brake and/or clutch will and will not comply with the requirement. Based upon this determination, a scale shall be developed to indicate the allowable 10 percent of the stopping time at the top of the stroke for slide or ram overtravel due to brake wear. The scale shall be marked to indicate that brake adjustment and/or replacement is required. The explanation and use of the scale shall be documented.\n\nThe test specification and procedure shall be submitted to the validation organization for review and validation prior to the test. The validation organization representative shall witness at least one set of tests.\n\n4.  Compliance with \u00a7\u00a7 1910.217(h)(5)(iii) and (h)(9)(v).  Each reaction time required to calculate the Safety Distance, including the brake monitor setting, shall be documented in separate reaction time tests. These tests shall specify the acceptable tolerance band sufficient to assure that tolerance build-up will not render the safety distance unsafe.\n\na. Integrated test of the press fully equipped to operate in the PSDI mode shall be conducted to establish the total system reaction time.\n\nb. Brakes which are the adjustable type shall be adjusted properly before the test.\n\n5.  Compliance with \u00a7 1910.217(h)(2)(iii).  a. Prior to conducting the brake system test required by paragraph (h)(2)(ii), a visual check shall be made of the springs. The visual check shall include a determination that the spring housing or rod does not show damage sufficient to degrade the structural integrity of the unit, and the spring does not show any tendency to interleave.\n\nb. Any detected broken or unserviceable springs shall be replaced before the test is conducted. The test shall be considered successful if the stopping time remains within that which is determined by paragraph (h)(9)(v) for the safety distance setting. If the increase in press stopping time exceeds the brake monitor setting limit defined in paragraph (h)(5)(iii), the test shall be considered unsuccessful, and the cause of the excessive stopping time shall be investigated. It shall be ascertained that the springs have not been broken and that they are functioning properly.\n\n6.  Compliance with \u00a7 1910.217(h)(7).  a. Tests which are conducted by the manufacturers of electrical components to establish stress, life, temperature and loading limits must be tests which are in compliance with the provisions of the National Electrical Code.\n\nb. Electrical and/or electronic cards or boards assembled with discreet components shall be considered a subsystem and shall require separate testing that the subsystems do not degrade in any of the following conditions:\n\n(1) Ambient temperature variation from \u221220 \u00b0C to + 50 \u00b0C.\n\n(2) Ambient relative humidity of 99 percent.\n\n(3) Vibration of 45G for one millisecond per stroke when the item is to be mounted on the press frame.\n\n(4) Electromagnetic interference at the same wavelengths used for the radiation sensing field, at the power line frequency fundamental and harmonics, and also from outogenous radiation due to system switching.\n\n(5) Electrical power supply variations of \u00b115 percent.\n\nc. The manufacturer shall specify the test requirements and procedures from existing consensus tests in compliance with the provisions of the National Electrical Code.\n\nd. Tests designed by the manufacturer shall be made available upon request to the validation organization. The validation organization representative shall witness at least one set of each of these tests.\n\n7.  Compliance with \u00a7 1910.217(h)(9)(iv).  a. The manufacturer shall design a test to demonstrate that the prescribed minimum object sensitivity of the presence sensing device is met.\n\nb. The test specifications and procedures shall be made available upon request to the validation organization.\n\n8.  Compliance with \u00a7 1910.217(h)(9)(x).  a. The manufacturer shall design a test(s) to establish the hand tool extension diameters allowed for variations in minimum object sensitivity response.\n\nb. The test(s) shall document the range of object diameter sizes which will produce both single and double break conditions.\n\nc. The test(s) specifications and procedures shall be made available upon request to the validation organization.\n\n9.  Integrated Tests Certification/Validation.  a. The manufacturer shall design a set of integrated tests to demonstrate compliance with the following requirements:\n\nSections 1910.217(h)(6) (ii); (iii); (iv); (v); (vi); (vii); (viii); (ix); (xi); (xii); (xiii); (xiv); (xv); and (xvii).\n\nb. The integrated test specifications and procedures shall be made available to the validation organization.\n\n10.  Analysis.  a. The manufacturer shall submit to the validation organization the technical analysis such as Hazard Analysis, Failure Mode and Effect Analysis, Stress Analysis, Component and Material Selection Analysis, Fluid Compatability, and/or other analyses which may be necessary to demonstrate, compliance with the following requirements:\n\nSections 1910.217(h)(8) (i) and (ii); (h)(2) (ii) and (iii); (h)(3)(i) (A) and (C), and (ii); (h)(5) (i), (ii) and (iii); (h)(6) (i), (iii), (iv), (vi), (vii), (viii), (ix), (x), (xi), (xiii), (xiv), (xv), (xvi), and (xvii); (h)(7) (i) and (ii); (h)(9) (iv), (v), (viii), (ix) and (x); (h)(10) (i) and (ii).\n\n11.  Types of Tests Acceptable for Certification/Validation.  a. Test results obtained from development testing may be used to certify/validate the design.\n\nb. The test results shall provide the engineering data necessary to establish confidence that the hardware and software will meet specifications, the manufacturing process has adequate quality control and the data acquired was used to establish processes, procedures, and test levels supporting subsequent hardware design, production, installation and maintenance.\n\n12.  Validation for Design Certification/Validation.  If, after review of all documentation, tests, analyses, manufacturer's certifications, and any additional tests which the third-party validation organization believes are necessary, the third-party validation organization determines that the PSDI safety system is in full compliance with the applicable requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217(a) through (h) and this appendix A, it shall validate the manufacturer's certification that it so meets the stated requirements.\n\n1. The employer shall evaluate and test the PSDI system installation, shall submit to the OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization the necessary supporting documentation, and shall certify that the requirements of \u00a7 1910.217(a) through (h) and this appendix A have been met and that the installation is proper.\n\n2. The OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization shall conduct tests, and/or review and evaluate the employer's installation tests, documentation and representations. If it so determines, it shall validate the employer's certification that the PSDI safety system is in full conformance with all requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217(a) through (h) and this appendix A.\n\n1. A PSDI safety system which has received installation certification/validation shall undergo recertification/revalidation the earlier of:\n\na. Each time the systems hardware is significantly changed, modified, or refurbished;\n\nb. Each time the operational conditions are significantly changed (including environmental, application or facility changes, but excluding such changes as die changes or press relocations not involving revision to the safety system);\n\nc. When a failure of a significant component has occurred or a change has been made which may affect safety; or\n\nd. When one year has elapsed since the installation certification/validation or the last recertification/revalidation.\n\n2.  Conduct or recertification/revalidation.  The employer shall evaluate and test the PSDI safety system installation, shall submit to the OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization the necessary supporting documentation, and shall recertify that the requirements of \u00a7 1910.217(a) through (h) and this appendix are being met. The documentation shall include, but not be limited to, the following items:\n\na. Demonstration of a thorough inspection of the entire press and PSDI safety system to ascertain that the installation, components and safeguarding have not been changed, modified or tampered with since the installation certification/validation or last recertification/revalidation was made.\n\nb. Demonstrations that such adjustments as may be needed (such as to the brake monitor setting) have been accomplished with proper changes made in the records and on such notices as are located on the press and safety system.\n\nc. Demonstration that review has been made of the reports covering the design certification/validation, the installation certification/validation, and all recertification/revalidations, in order to detect any degradation to an unsafe condition, and that necessary changes have been made to restore the safety system to previous certification/validation levels.\n\n3. The OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization shall conduct tests, and/or review and evaluate the employer's installation, tests, documentation and representations. If it so determines, it shall revalidate the employer's recertification that the PSDI system is in full conformance with all requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217(a) through (h) and this appendix A.\n\nAppendix B to \u00a7 1910.217\u2014Nonmandatory Guidelines for Certification/Validation of Safety Systems for Presence Sensing Device Initiation of Mechanical Power Presses\n \n Objectives\n \n This appendix provides employers, manufacturers, and their representatives, with nonmandatory guidelines for use in developing certification documents. Employers and manufacturers are encouraged to recommend other approaches if there is a potential for improving safety and reducing cost. The guidelines apply to certification/validation activity from design evaluation through the completion of the installation test and the annual recertification/revalidation tests.\n \n General Guidelines\n \n A. The certification/validation process should confirm that hazards identified by hazard analysis, (HA), failure mode effect analysis (FMEA), and other system analyses have been eliminated by design or reduced to an acceptable level through the use of appropriate design features, safety devices, warning devices, or special procedures. The certification/validation process should also confirm that residual hazards identified by operational analysis are addressed by warning, labeling safety instructions or other appropriate means.\n \n B. The objective of the certification/validation program is to demonstrate and document that the system satisfies specification and operational requirements for safe operations.\n \n Quality Control\n \n The safety attributes of a certified/validated PSDI safety system are more likely to be maintained if the quality of the system and its parts, components and subsystem is consistently controlled. Each manufacturer supplying parts, components, subsystems, and assemblies needs to maintain the quality of the product, and each employer needs to maintain the system in a non-degraded condition.\n \n Analysis Guidelines\n \n A. Certification/validation of hardware design below the system level should be accomplished by test and/or analysis.\n \n B. Analytical methods may be used in lieu of, in combination with, or in support of tests to satisfy specification requirements.\n \n C. Analyses may be used for certification/validation when existing data are available or when test is not feasible.\n \n D. Similarity analysis may be used in lieu of tests where it can be shown that the article is similar in design, manufacturing process, and quality control to another article that was previously certified/validated in accordance with equivalent or more stringent criteria. If previous design, history and application are considered to be similar, but not equal to or more exacting than earlier experiences, the additional or partial certification/validation tests should concentrate on the areas of changed or increased requirements.\n \n Analysis Reports\n \n The analysis reports should identify: (1) The basis for the analysis; (2) the hardware or software items analyzed; (3) conclusions; (4) safety factors; and (5) limit of the analysis. The assumptions made during the analysis should be clearly stated and a description of the effects of these assumptions on the conclusions and limits should be included.\n \n Certification/validation by similarity analysis reports should identify, in addition to the above, application of the part, component or subsystem for which certification/validation is being sought as well as data from previous usage establishing adequacy of the item. Similarity analysis should not be accepted when the internal and external stresses on the item being certified/validated are not defined.\n \n Usage experience should also include failure data supporting adequacy of the design.\n\nThis appendix provides employers, manufacturers, and their representatives, with nonmandatory guidelines for use in developing certification documents. Employers and manufacturers are encouraged to recommend other approaches if there is a potential for improving safety and reducing cost. The guidelines apply to certification/validation activity from design evaluation through the completion of the installation test and the annual recertification/revalidation tests.\n\nA. The certification/validation process should confirm that hazards identified by hazard analysis, (HA), failure mode effect analysis (FMEA), and other system analyses have been eliminated by design or reduced to an acceptable level through the use of appropriate design features, safety devices, warning devices, or special procedures. The certification/validation process should also confirm that residual hazards identified by operational analysis are addressed by warning, labeling safety instructions or other appropriate means.\n\nB. The objective of the certification/validation program is to demonstrate and document that the system satisfies specification and operational requirements for safe operations.\n\nThe safety attributes of a certified/validated PSDI safety system are more likely to be maintained if the quality of the system and its parts, components and subsystem is consistently controlled. Each manufacturer supplying parts, components, subsystems, and assemblies needs to maintain the quality of the product, and each employer needs to maintain the system in a non-degraded condition.\n\nA. Certification/validation of hardware design below the system level should be accomplished by test and/or analysis.\n\nB. Analytical methods may be used in lieu of, in combination with, or in support of tests to satisfy specification requirements.\n\nC. Analyses may be used for certification/validation when existing data are available or when test is not feasible.\n\nD. Similarity analysis may be used in lieu of tests where it can be shown that the article is similar in design, manufacturing process, and quality control to another article that was previously certified/validated in accordance with equivalent or more stringent criteria. If previous design, history and application are considered to be similar, but not equal to or more exacting than earlier experiences, the additional or partial certification/validation tests should concentrate on the areas of changed or increased requirements.\n\nThe analysis reports should identify: (1) The basis for the analysis; (2) the hardware or software items analyzed; (3) conclusions; (4) safety factors; and (5) limit of the analysis. The assumptions made during the analysis should be clearly stated and a description of the effects of these assumptions on the conclusions and limits should be included.\n\nCertification/validation by similarity analysis reports should identify, in addition to the above, application of the part, component or subsystem for which certification/validation is being sought as well as data from previous usage establishing adequacy of the item. Similarity analysis should not be accepted when the internal and external stresses on the item being certified/validated are not defined.\n\nUsage experience should also include failure data supporting adequacy of the design.\n\nAppendix C to \u00a7 1910.217\u2014Mandatory Requirements for OSHA Recognition of Third-Party Validation Organizations for the PSDI Standard\n \n This appendix prescribes mandatory requirements and procedures for OSHA recognition of third-party validation organizations to validate employer and manufacturer certifications that their equipment and practices meet the requirements of the PSDI standard. The scope of the appendix includes the three categories of certification/validation required by the PSDI standard: Design Certification/Validation, Installation Certification/Validation, and Annual Recertification/Revalidation.\n \n If further detailing of these provisions will assist the validation organization or OSHA in this activity, this detailing will be done through appropriate OSHA Program Directives.\n \n I. Procedure for OSHA Recognition of Validation Organizations\n \n A. Applications\n \n 1.  Eligibility.  a. Any person or organization considering itself capable of conducting a PSDI-related third-party validation function may apply for OSHA recognition.\n \n b. However, in determining eligibility for a foreign-based third-party validation organization, OSHA shall take into consideration whether there is reciprocity of treatment by the foreign government after consultation with relevant U.S. government agencies.\n \n 2.  Content of application.  a. The application shall identify the scope of the validation activity for which the applicant wishes to be recognized, based on one of the following alternatives:\n \n (1) Design Certification/Validation, Installation Certification/Validation, and Annual Recertification/Revalidation;\n \n (2) Design Certification/Validation only; or\n \n (3) Installation/Certification/Validation and Annual Recertification/Revalidation.\n \n b. The application shall provide information demonstrating that it and any validating laboratory utilized meet the qualifications set forth in section II of this appendix.\n \n c. The applicant shall provide information demonstrating that it and any validating laboratory utilized meet the program requirements set forth in section III of this appendix.\n \n d. The applicant shall identify the test methods it or the validating laboratory will use to test or judge the components and operations of the PSDI safety system required to be tested by the PSDI standard and appendix A, and shall specify the reasons the test methods are appropriate.\n \n e. The applicant may include whatever enclosures, attachments, or exhibits the applicant deems appropriate. The application need not be submitted on a Federal form.\n \n f. The applicant shall certify that the information submitted is accurate.\n \n 3.  Filing office location.  The application shall be filed with: PSDI Certification/Validation Program, Office of Variance Determination, Occupational Safety and Health Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, Room N3653, 200 Constitution Avenue, NW., Washington, DC 20210.\n \n 4.  Amendments and withdrawals.  a. An application may be revised by an applicant at any time prior to the completion of the final staff recommendation.\n \n b. An application may be withdrawn by an applicant, without prejudice, at any time prior to the final decision by the Assistant Secretary in paragraph I.B.8.b.(4) of this appendix.\n \n B. Review and Decision Process\n \n 1.  Acceptance and field inspection.  All applications submitted will be accepted by OSHA, and their receipt acknowledged in writing. After receipt of an application, OSHA may request additional information if it believes information relevant to the requirements for recognition have been omitted. OSHA may inspect the facilities of the third-party validation organization and any validating laboratory, and while there shall review any additional documentation underlying the application. A report shall be made of each field inspection.\n \n 2.  Requirements for recognition.  The requirements for OSHA recognition of a third-party validation organization for the PSDI standard are that the program has fulfilled the requirements of section II of this appendix for qualifications and of section III of this appendix for program requirements, and the program has identified appropriate test and analysis methods to meet the requirements of the PSDI standard and appendix A.\n \n 3.  Preliminary approval.  If, after review of the application, any additional information, and the inspection report, the applicant and any validating laboratory appear to have met the requirements for recognition, a written recommendation shall be submitted by the responsible OSHA personnel to the Assistant Secretary to approve the application with a supporting explanation.\n \n 4.  Preliminary disapproval.  If, after review of the application, additional information, and inspection report, the applicant does not appear to have met the requirements for recognition, the Director of the PSDI certification/validation program shall notify the applicant in writing, listing the specific requirements of this appendix which the applicant has not met, and the reasons.\n \n 5.  Revision of application.  After receipt of a notification of preliminary disapproval, the applicant may submit a revised application for further review by OSHA pursuant to subsection I.B. of this appendix or may request that the original application be submitted to the Assistant Secretary with a statement of reasons supplied by the applicant as to why the application should be approved.\n \n 6.  Preliminary decision by Assistant Secretary.  a. The Assistant Secretary, or a special designee for this purpose, will make a preliminary decision whether the applicant has met the requirements for recognition based on the completed application file and the written staff recommendation, as well as the statement of reasons by the applicant if there is a recommendation of disapproval.\n \n b. This preliminary decision will be sent to the applicant and subsequently published in the  Federal Register. \n \n 7.  Public review and comment period.  a. The  Federal Register  notice of preliminary decision will provide a period of not less than 60 calendar days for the written comments on the applicant's fulfillment of the requirements for recognition. The application, supporting documents, staff recommendation, statement of applicant's reasons, and any comments received, will be available for public inspection in the OSHA Docket Office.\n \n b. If the preliminary decision is in favor of recognition, a member of the public, or if the preliminary decision is against recognition, the applicant may request a public hearing by the close of the comment period, if it supplies detailed reasons and evidence challenging the basis of the Assistant Secretary's preliminary decision and justifying the need for a public hearing to bring out evidence which could not be effectively supplied through written submissions.\n \n 8.  Final decision by Assistant Secretary \u2014a.  Without hearing.  If there are no valid requests for a hearing, based on the application, supporting documents, staff recommendation, evidence and public comment, the Assistant Secretary shall issue the final decision (including reasons) of the Department of Labor on whether the applicant has demonstrated by a preponderance of the evidence that it meets the requirements for recognition.\n \n b.  After hearing.  If there is a valid request for a hearing pursuant to paragraph I.B.7.b. of this appendix, the following procedures will be used:\n \n (1) The Assistant Secretary will issue a notice of hearing before an administrative law judge of the Department of Labor pursuant to the rules specified in 29 CFR part 1905, subpart C.\n \n (2) After the hearing, pursuant to subpart C, the administrative law judge shall issue a decision (including reasons) based on the application, the supporting documentation, the staff recommendation, the public comments and the evidence submitted during the hearing (the record), stating whether it has been demonstrated, based on a preponderance of evidence, that the applicant meets the requirements for recognition. If no exceptions are filed, this is the final decision of the Department of Labor.\n \n (3) Upon issuance of the decision, any party to the hearing may file exceptions within 20 days pursuant to subpart C. If exceptions are filed, the administrative law judge shall forward the decision, exceptions and record to the Assistant Secretary for the final decision on the application.\n \n (4) The Assistant Secretary shall review the record, the decision by the administrative law judge, and the exceptions. Based on this, the Assistant Secretary shall issue the final decision (including reasons) of the Department of Labor stating whether the applicant has demonstrated by a preponderance of evidence that it meets the requirements for recognition.\n \n b.  Publication.  A notification of the final decision shall be published in the  Federal Register. \n \n C. Terms and Conditions of Recognition, Renewal and Revocation\n \n 1. The following terms and conditions shall be part of every recognition:\n \n a. The recognition of any validation organization will be evidenced by a letter of recognition from OSHA. The letter will provide the specific details of the scope of the OSHA recognition as well as any conditions imposed by OSHA, including any Federal monitoring requirements.\n \n b. The recognition of each validation organization will be valid for five years, unless terminated before or renewed after the expiration of the period. The dates of the period of recognition will be stated in the recognition letter.\n \n c. The recognized validation organization shall continue to satisfy all the requirements of this appendix and the letter of recognition during the period of recognition.\n \n 2. A recognized validation organization may change a test method of the PSDI safety system certification/validation program by notifying the Assistant Secretary of the change, certifying that the revised method will be at least as effective as the prior method, and providing the supporting data upon which its conclusions are based.\n \n 3. A recognized validation organization may renew its recognition by filing a renewal request at the address in paragraph I.A.3. of this appendix, above, not less than 180 calendar days, nor more than one year, before the expiration date of its current recognition. When a recognized validation organization has filed such a renewal request, its current recognition will not expire until a final decision has been made on the request. The renewal request will be processed in accordance with subsection I.B. of this appendix, above, except that a reinspection is not required but may be performed by OSHA. A hearing will be granted to an objecting member of the public if evidence of failure to meet the requirements of this appendix is supplied to OSHA.\n \n 4. A recognized validation organization may apply to OSHA for an expansion of its current recognition to cover other categories of PSDI certification/validation in addition to those included in the current recognition. The application for expansion will be acted upon and processed by OSHA in accordance with subsection I.B. of this appendix, subject to the possible reinspection exception. If the validation organization has been recognized for more than one year, meets the requirements for expansion of recognition, and there is no evidence that the recognized validation organization has not been following the requirements of this appendix and the letter of recognition, an expansion will normally be granted. A hearing will be granted to an objecting member of the public only if evidence of failure to meet the requirements of this appendix is supplied to OSHA.\n \n 5. A recognized validation organization may voluntarily terminate its recognition, either in its entirety or with respect to any area covered in its recognition, by giving written notice to OSHA at any time. The written notice shall indicate the termination date. A validation organization may not terminate its installation certification and recertification validation functions earlier than either one year from the date of the written notice, or the date on which another recognized validation organization is able to perform the validation of installation certification and recertification.\n \n 6.a. OSHA may revoke its recognition of a validation organization if its program either has failed to continue to satisfy the requirements of this appendix or its letter of recognition, has not been performing the validation functions required by the PSDI standard and appendix A, or has misrepresented itself in its applications. Before proposing to revoke recognition, the Agency will notify the recognized validation organization of the basis of the proposed revocation and will allow rebuttal or correction of the alleged deficiencies. If the deficiencies are not corrected, OSHA may revoke recognition, effective in 60 days, unless the validation organization requests a hearing within that time.\n \n b. If a hearing is requested, it shall be held before an administrative law judge of the Department of Labor pursuant to the rules specified in 29 CFR part 1905, subpart C.\n \n c. The parties shall be OSHA and the recognized validation organization. The decision shall be made pursuant to the procedures specified in paragraphs I.B.8.b.(2) through (4) of this appendix except that the burden of proof shall be on OSHA to demonstrate by a preponderance of the evidence that the recognition should be revoked because the validation organization either is not meeting the requirements for recognition, has not been performing the validation functions required by the PSDI standard and appendix A, or has misrepresented itself in its applications.\n \n D. Provisions of OSHA Recognition\n \n Each recognized third-party validation organization and its validating laboratories shall:\n \n 1. Allow OSHA to conduct unscheduled reviews or on-site audits of it or the validating laboratories on matters relevant to PSDI, and cooperate in the conduct of these reviews and audits;\n \n 2. Agree to terms and conditions established by OSHA in the grant of recognition on matters such as exchange of data, submission of accident reports, and assistance in studies for improving PSDI or the certification/validation process.\n \n II. Qualifications\n \n The third-party validation organization, the validating laboratory, and the employees of each shall meet the requirements set forth in this section of this appendix.\n \n A. Experience of Validation Organization\n \n 1. The third-party validation organization shall have legal authority to perform certification/validation activities.\n \n 2. The validation organization shall demonstrate competence and experience in either power press design, manufacture or use, or testing, quality control or certification/validation of equipment comparable to power presses and associated control systems.\n \n 3. The validation organization shall demonstrate a capability for selecting, reviewing, and/or validating appropriate standards and test methods to be used for validating the certification of PSDI safety systems, as well as for reviewing judgements on the safety of PSDI safety systems and their conformance with the requirements of this section.\n \n 4. The validating organization may utilize the competence, experience, and capability of its employees to demonstrate this competence, experience and capability.\n \n B. Independence of Validation Organization\n \n 1. The validation organization shall demonstrate that:\n \n a. It is financially capable to conduct the work;\n \n b. It is free of direct influence or control by manufacturers, suppliers, vendors, representatives of employers and employees, and employer or employee organizations; and\n \n c. Its employees are secure from discharge resulting from pressures from manufacturers, suppliers, vendors, employers or employee representatives.\n \n 2. A validation organization may be considered independent even if it has ties with manufacturers, employers or employee representatives if these ties are with at least two of these three groups; it has a board of directors (or equivalent leadership responsible for the certification/validation activities) which includes representatives of the three groups; and it has a binding commitment of funding for a period of three years or more.\n \n C. Validating Laboratory\n \n The validation organization's laboratory (which organizationally may be a part of the third-party validation organization):\n \n 1. Shall have legal authority to perform the validation of certification;\n \n 2. Shall be free of operational control and influence of manufacturers, suppliers, vendors, employers, or employee representatives that would impair its integrity of performance; and\n \n 3. Shall not engage in the design, manufacture, sale, promotion, or use of the certified equipment.\n \n D. Facilities and Equipment\n \n The validation organization's validating laboratory shall have available all testing facilities and necessary test and inspection equipment relevant to the validation of the certification of PSDI safety systems, installations and operations.\n \n E. Personnel\n \n The validation organization and the validating laboratory shall be adequately staffed by personnel who are qualified by technical training and/or experience to conduct the validation of the certification of PSDI safety systems.\n \n 1. The validation organization shall assign overall responsibility for the validation of PSDI certification to an Administrative Director. Minimum requirements for this position are a Bachelor's degree and five years professional experience, at least one of which shall have been in responsible charge of a function in the areas of power press design or manufacture or a broad range of power press use, or in the areas of testing, quality control, or certification/validation of equipment comparable to power presses or their associated control systems.\n \n 2. The validating laboratory, if a separate organization from the validation organization, shall assign technical responsibility for the validation of PSDI certification to a Technical Director. Minimum requirements for this position are a Bachelor's degree in a technical field and five years of professional experience, at least one of which shall have been in responsible charge of a function in the area of testing, quality control or certification/validation of equipment comparable to power presses or their associated control systems.\n \n 3. If the validation organization and the validating laboratory are the same organization, the administrative and technical responsibilities may be combined in a single position, with minimum requirements as described in E.1. and 2. for the combined position.\n \n 4. The validation organization and validating laboratory shall have adequate administrative and technical staffs to conduct the validation of the certification of PSDI safety systems.\n \n F. Certification/Validation Mark or Logo\n \n 1. The validation organization or the validating laboratory shall own a registered certification/validation mark or logo.\n \n 2. The mark or logo shall be suitable for incorporation into the label required by paragraph (h)(11)(iii) of this section.\n \n III. Program Requirements\n \n A. Test and Certification/Validation Procedures\n \n 1. The validation organization and/or validating laboratory shall have established written procedures for test and certification/validation of PSDI safety systems. The procedures shall be based on pertinent OSHA standards and test methods, or other publicly available standards and test methods generally recognized as appropriate in the field, such as national consensus standards or published standards of professional societies or trade associations.\n \n 2. The written procedures for test and certification/validation of PSDI systems, and the standards and test methods on which they are based, shall be reproducible and be available to OSHA and to the public upon request.\n \n B. Test Reports\n \n 1. A test report shall be prepared for each PSDI safety system that is tested. The test report shall be signed by a technical staff representative and the Technical Director.\n \n 2. The test report shall include the following:\n \n a. Name of manufacturer and catalog or model number of each subsystem or major component.\n \n b. Identification and description of test methods or procedures used. (This may be through reference to published sources which describe the test methods or procedures used.)\n \n c. Results of all tests performed.\n \n d. All safety distance calculations.\n \n 3. A copy of the test report shall be maintained on file at the validation organization and/or validating laboratory, and shall be available to OSHA upon request.\n \n C. Certification/Validation Reports\n \n 1. A certification/validation report shall be prepared for each PSDI safety system for which the certification is validated. The certification/validation report shall be signed by the Administrative Director and the Technical Director.\n \n 2. The certification/validation report shall include the following:\n \n a. Name of manufacturer and catalog or model number of each subsystem or major component.\n \n b. Results of all tests which serve as the basis for the certification.\n \n c. All safety distance calculations.\n \n d. Statement that the safety system conforms with all requirements of the PSDI standard and appendix A.\n \n 3. A copy of the certification/validation report shall be maintained on file at the validation organization and/or validating laboratory, and shall be available to the public upon request.\n \n 4. A copy of the certification/validation report shall be submitted to OSHA within 30 days of its completion.\n \n D. Publications System\n \n The validation organization shall make available upon request a list of PSDI safety systems which have been certified/validated by the program.\n \n E. Follow-up Activities\n \n 1. The validation organization or validating laboratory shall have a follow-up system for inspecting or testing manufacturer's production of design certified/validated PSDI safety system components and subassemblies where deemed appropriate by the validation organization.\n \n 2. The validation organization shall notify the appropriate product manufacturer(s) of any reports from employers of point of operation injuries which occur while a press is operated in a PSDI mode.\n \n F. Records\n \n The validation organization or validating laboratory shall maintain a record of each certification/validation of a PSDI safety system, including manufacturer and/or employer certification documentation, test and working data, test report, certification/validation report, any follow-up inspections or testing, and reports of equipment failures, any reports of accidents involving the equipment, and any other pertinent information. These records shall be available for inspection by OSHA and OSHA State Plan offices.\n \n G. Dispute Resolution Procedures\n \n 1. The validation organization shall have a reasonable written procedure for acknowledging and processing appeals or complaints from program participants (manufacturers, producers, suppliers, vendors and employers) as well as other interested parties (employees or their representatives, safety personnel, government agencies, etc.), concerning certification or validation.\n \n 2. The validation organization may charge any complainant the reasonable charge for repeating tests needed for the resolution of disputes.\n\nThis appendix prescribes mandatory requirements and procedures for OSHA recognition of third-party validation organizations to validate employer and manufacturer certifications that their equipment and practices meet the requirements of the PSDI standard. The scope of the appendix includes the three categories of certification/validation required by the PSDI standard: Design Certification/Validation, Installation Certification/Validation, and Annual Recertification/Revalidation.\n\nIf further detailing of these provisions will assist the validation organization or OSHA in this activity, this detailing will be done through appropriate OSHA Program Directives.\n\n1.  Eligibility.  a. Any person or organization considering itself capable of conducting a PSDI-related third-party validation function may apply for OSHA recognition.\n\nb. However, in determining eligibility for a foreign-based third-party validation organization, OSHA shall take into consideration whether there is reciprocity of treatment by the foreign government after consultation with relevant U.S. government agencies.\n\n2.  Content of application.  a. The application shall identify the scope of the validation activity for which the applicant wishes to be recognized, based on one of the following alternatives:\n\n(1) Design Certification/Validation, Installation Certification/Validation, and Annual Recertification/Revalidation;\n\n(2) Design Certification/Validation only; or\n\n(3) Installation/Certification/Validation and Annual Recertification/Revalidation.\n\nb. The application shall provide information demonstrating that it and any validating laboratory utilized meet the qualifications set forth in section II of this appendix.\n\nc. The applicant shall provide information demonstrating that it and any validating laboratory utilized meet the program requirements set forth in section III of this appendix.\n\nd. The applicant shall identify the test methods it or the validating laboratory will use to test or judge the components and operations of the PSDI safety system required to be tested by the PSDI standard and appendix A, and shall specify the reasons the test methods are appropriate.\n\ne. The applicant may include whatever enclosures, attachments, or exhibits the applicant deems appropriate. The application need not be submitted on a Federal form.\n\nf. The applicant shall certify that the information submitted is accurate.\n\n3.  Filing office location.  The application shall be filed with: PSDI Certification/Validation Program, Office of Variance Determination, Occupational Safety and Health Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, Room N3653, 200 Constitution Avenue, NW., Washington, DC 20210.\n\n4.  Amendments and withdrawals.  a. An application may be revised by an applicant at any time prior to the completion of the final staff recommendation.\n\nb. An application may be withdrawn by an applicant, without prejudice, at any time prior to the final decision by the Assistant Secretary in paragraph I.B.8.b.(4) of this appendix.\n\n1.  Acceptance and field inspection.  All applications submitted will be accepted by OSHA, and their receipt acknowledged in writing. After receipt of an application, OSHA may request additional information if it believes information relevant to the requirements for recognition have been omitted. OSHA may inspect the facilities of the third-party validation organization and any validating laboratory, and while there shall review any additional documentation underlying the application. A report shall be made of each field inspection.\n\n2.  Requirements for recognition.  The requirements for OSHA recognition of a third-party validation organization for the PSDI standard are that the program has fulfilled the requirements of section II of this appendix for qualifications and of section III of this appendix for program requirements, and the program has identified appropriate test and analysis methods to meet the requirements of the PSDI standard and appendix A.\n\n3.  Preliminary approval.  If, after review of the application, any additional information, and the inspection report, the applicant and any validating laboratory appear to have met the requirements for recognition, a written recommendation shall be submitted by the responsible OSHA personnel to the Assistant Secretary to approve the application with a supporting explanation.\n\n4.  Preliminary disapproval.  If, after review of the application, additional information, and inspection report, the applicant does not appear to have met the requirements for recognition, the Director of the PSDI certification/validation program shall notify the applicant in writing, listing the specific requirements of this appendix which the applicant has not met, and the reasons.\n\n5.  Revision of application.  After receipt of a notification of preliminary disapproval, the applicant may submit a revised application for further review by OSHA pursuant to subsection I.B. of this appendix or may request that the original application be submitted to the Assistant Secretary with a statement of reasons supplied by the applicant as to why the application should be approved.\n\n6.  Preliminary decision by Assistant Secretary.  a. The Assistant Secretary, or a special designee for this purpose, will make a preliminary decision whether the applicant has met the requirements for recognition based on the completed application file and the written staff recommendation, as well as the statement of reasons by the applicant if there is a recommendation of disapproval.\n\nb. This preliminary decision will be sent to the applicant and subsequently published in the  Federal Register.\n\n7.  Public review and comment period.  a. The  Federal Register  notice of preliminary decision will provide a period of not less than 60 calendar days for the written comments on the applicant's fulfillment of the requirements for recognition. The application, supporting documents, staff recommendation, statement of applicant's reasons, and any comments received, will be available for public inspection in the OSHA Docket Office.\n\nb. If the preliminary decision is in favor of recognition, a member of the public, or if the preliminary decision is against recognition, the applicant may request a public hearing by the close of the comment period, if it supplies detailed reasons and evidence challenging the basis of the Assistant Secretary's preliminary decision and justifying the need for a public hearing to bring out evidence which could not be effectively supplied through written submissions.\n\n8.  Final decision by Assistant Secretary \u2014a.  Without hearing.  If there are no valid requests for a hearing, based on the application, supporting documents, staff recommendation, evidence and public comment, the Assistant Secretary shall issue the final decision (including reasons) of the Department of Labor on whether the applicant has demonstrated by a preponderance of the evidence that it meets the requirements for recognition.\n\nb.  After hearing.  If there is a valid request for a hearing pursuant to paragraph I.B.7.b. of this appendix, the following procedures will be used:\n\n(1) The Assistant Secretary will issue a notice of hearing before an administrative law judge of the Department of Labor pursuant to the rules specified in 29 CFR part 1905, subpart C.\n\n(2) After the hearing, pursuant to subpart C, the administrative law judge shall issue a decision (including reasons) based on the application, the supporting documentation, the staff recommendation, the public comments and the evidence submitted during the hearing (the record), stating whether it has been demonstrated, based on a preponderance of evidence, that the applicant meets the requirements for recognition. If no exceptions are filed, this is the final decision of the Department of Labor.\n\n(3) Upon issuance of the decision, any party to the hearing may file exceptions within 20 days pursuant to subpart C. If exceptions are filed, the administrative law judge shall forward the decision, exceptions and record to the Assistant Secretary for the final decision on the application.\n\n(4) The Assistant Secretary shall review the record, the decision by the administrative law judge, and the exceptions. Based on this, the Assistant Secretary shall issue the final decision (including reasons) of the Department of Labor stating whether the applicant has demonstrated by a preponderance of evidence that it meets the requirements for recognition.\n\nb.  Publication.  A notification of the final decision shall be published in the  Federal Register.\n\n1. The following terms and conditions shall be part of every recognition:\n\na. The recognition of any validation organization will be evidenced by a letter of recognition from OSHA. The letter will provide the specific details of the scope of the OSHA recognition as well as any conditions imposed by OSHA, including any Federal monitoring requirements.\n\nb. The recognition of each validation organization will be valid for five years, unless terminated before or renewed after the expiration of the period. The dates of the period of recognition will be stated in the recognition letter.\n\nc. The recognized validation organization shall continue to satisfy all the requirements of this appendix and the letter of recognition during the period of recognition.\n\n2. A recognized validation organization may change a test method of the PSDI safety system certification/validation program by notifying the Assistant Secretary of the change, certifying that the revised method will be at least as effective as the prior method, and providing the supporting data upon which its conclusions are based.\n\n3. A recognized validation organization may renew its recognition by filing a renewal request at the address in paragraph I.A.3. of this appendix, above, not less than 180 calendar days, nor more than one year, before the expiration date of its current recognition. When a recognized validation organization has filed such a renewal request, its current recognition will not expire until a final decision has been made on the request. The renewal request will be processed in accordance with subsection I.B. of this appendix, above, except that a reinspection is not required but may be performed by OSHA. A hearing will be granted to an objecting member of the public if evidence of failure to meet the requirements of this appendix is supplied to OSHA.\n\n4. A recognized validation organization may apply to OSHA for an expansion of its current recognition to cover other categories of PSDI certification/validation in addition to those included in the current recognition. The application for expansion will be acted upon and processed by OSHA in accordance with subsection I.B. of this appendix, subject to the possible reinspection exception. If the validation organization has been recognized for more than one year, meets the requirements for expansion of recognition, and there is no evidence that the recognized validation organization has not been following the requirements of this appendix and the letter of recognition, an expansion will normally be granted. A hearing will be granted to an objecting member of the public only if evidence of failure to meet the requirements of this appendix is supplied to OSHA.\n\n5. A recognized validation organization may voluntarily terminate its recognition, either in its entirety or with respect to any area covered in its recognition, by giving written notice to OSHA at any time. The written notice shall indicate the termination date. A validation organization may not terminate its installation certification and recertification validation functions earlier than either one year from the date of the written notice, or the date on which another recognized validation organization is able to perform the validation of installation certification and recertification.\n\n6.a. OSHA may revoke its recognition of a validation organization if its program either has failed to continue to satisfy the requirements of this appendix or its letter of recognition, has not been performing the validation functions required by the PSDI standard and appendix A, or has misrepresented itself in its applications. Before proposing to revoke recognition, the Agency will notify the recognized validation organization of the basis of the proposed revocation and will allow rebuttal or correction of the alleged deficiencies. If the deficiencies are not corrected, OSHA may revoke recognition, effective in 60 days, unless the validation organization requests a hearing within that time.\n\nb. If a hearing is requested, it shall be held before an administrative law judge of the Department of Labor pursuant to the rules specified in 29 CFR part 1905, subpart C.\n\nc. The parties shall be OSHA and the recognized validation organization. The decision shall be made pursuant to the procedures specified in paragraphs I.B.8.b.(2) through (4) of this appendix except that the burden of proof shall be on OSHA to demonstrate by a preponderance of the evidence that the recognition should be revoked because the validation organization either is not meeting the requirements for recognition, has not been performing the validation functions required by the PSDI standard and appendix A, or has misrepresented itself in its applications.\n\nEach recognized third-party validation organization and its validating laboratories shall:\n\n1. Allow OSHA to conduct unscheduled reviews or on-site audits of it or the validating laboratories on matters relevant to PSDI, and cooperate in the conduct of these reviews and audits;\n\n2. Agree to terms and conditions established by OSHA in the grant of recognition on matters such as exchange of data, submission of accident reports, and assistance in studies for improving PSDI or the certification/validation process.\n\nThe third-party validation organization, the validating laboratory, and the employees of each shall meet the requirements set forth in this section of this appendix.\n\n1. The third-party validation organization shall have legal authority to perform certification/validation activities.\n\n2. The validation organization shall demonstrate competence and experience in either power press design, manufacture or use, or testing, quality control or certification/validation of equipment comparable to power presses and associated control systems.\n\n3. The validation organization shall demonstrate a capability for selecting, reviewing, and/or validating appropriate standards and test methods to be used for validating the certification of PSDI safety systems, as well as for reviewing judgements on the safety of PSDI safety systems and their conformance with the requirements of this section.\n\n4. The validating organization may utilize the competence, experience, and capability of its employees to demonstrate this competence, experience and capability.\n\n1. The validation organization shall demonstrate that:\n\na. It is financially capable to conduct the work;\n\nb. It is free of direct influence or control by manufacturers, suppliers, vendors, representatives of employers and employees, and employer or employee organizations; and\n\nc. Its employees are secure from discharge resulting from pressures from manufacturers, suppliers, vendors, employers or employee representatives.\n\n2. A validation organization may be considered independent even if it has ties with manufacturers, employers or employee representatives if these ties are with at least two of these three groups; it has a board of directors (or equivalent leadership responsible for the certification/validation activities) which includes representatives of the three groups; and it has a binding commitment of funding for a period of three years or more.\n\nThe validation organization's laboratory (which organizationally may be a part of the third-party validation organization):\n\n1. Shall have legal authority to perform the validation of certification;\n\n2. Shall be free of operational control and influence of manufacturers, suppliers, vendors, employers, or employee representatives that would impair its integrity of performance; and\n\n3. Shall not engage in the design, manufacture, sale, promotion, or use of the certified equipment.\n\nThe validation organization's validating laboratory shall have available all testing facilities and necessary test and inspection equipment relevant to the validation of the certification of PSDI safety systems, installations and operations.\n\nThe validation organization and the validating laboratory shall be adequately staffed by personnel who are qualified by technical training and/or experience to conduct the validation of the certification of PSDI safety systems.\n\n1. The validation organization shall assign overall responsibility for the validation of PSDI certification to an Administrative Director. Minimum requirements for this position are a Bachelor's degree and five years professional experience, at least one of which shall have been in responsible charge of a function in the areas of power press design or manufacture or a broad range of power press use, or in the areas of testing, quality control, or certification/validation of equipment comparable to power presses or their associated control systems.\n\n2. The validating laboratory, if a separate organization from the validation organization, shall assign technical responsibility for the validation of PSDI certification to a Technical Director. Minimum requirements for this position are a Bachelor's degree in a technical field and five years of professional experience, at least one of which shall have been in responsible charge of a function in the area of testing, quality control or certification/validation of equipment comparable to power presses or their associated control systems.\n\n3. If the validation organization and the validating laboratory are the same organization, the administrative and technical responsibilities may be combined in a single position, with minimum requirements as described in E.1. and 2. for the combined position.\n\n4. The validation organization and validating laboratory shall have adequate administrative and technical staffs to conduct the validation of the certification of PSDI safety systems.\n\n1. The validation organization or the validating laboratory shall own a registered certification/validation mark or logo.\n\n2. The mark or logo shall be suitable for incorporation into the label required by paragraph (h)(11)(iii) of this section.\n\n1. The validation organization and/or validating laboratory shall have established written procedures for test and certification/validation of PSDI safety systems. The procedures shall be based on pertinent OSHA standards and test methods, or other publicly available standards and test methods generally recognized as appropriate in the field, such as national consensus standards or published standards of professional societies or trade associations.\n\n2. The written procedures for test and certification/validation of PSDI systems, and the standards and test methods on which they are based, shall be reproducible and be available to OSHA and to the public upon request.\n\n1. A test report shall be prepared for each PSDI safety system that is tested. The test report shall be signed by a technical staff representative and the Technical Director.\n\n2. The test report shall include the following:\n\na. Name of manufacturer and catalog or model number of each subsystem or major component.\n\nb. Identification and description of test methods or procedures used. (This may be through reference to published sources which describe the test methods or procedures used.)\n\nc. Results of all tests performed.\n\nd. All safety distance calculations.\n\n3. A copy of the test report shall be maintained on file at the validation organization and/or validating laboratory, and shall be available to OSHA upon request.\n\n1. A certification/validation report shall be prepared for each PSDI safety system for which the certification is validated. The certification/validation report shall be signed by the Administrative Director and the Technical Director.\n\n2. The certification/validation report shall include the following:\n\na. Name of manufacturer and catalog or model number of each subsystem or major component.\n\nb. Results of all tests which serve as the basis for the certification.\n\nc. All safety distance calculations.\n\nd. Statement that the safety system conforms with all requirements of the PSDI standard and appendix A.\n\n3. A copy of the certification/validation report shall be maintained on file at the validation organization and/or validating laboratory, and shall be available to the public upon request.\n\n4. A copy of the certification/validation report shall be submitted to OSHA within 30 days of its completion.\n\nThe validation organization shall make available upon request a list of PSDI safety systems which have been certified/validated by the program.\n\n1. The validation organization or validating laboratory shall have a follow-up system for inspecting or testing manufacturer's production of design certified/validated PSDI safety system components and subassemblies where deemed appropriate by the validation organization.\n\n2. The validation organization shall notify the appropriate product manufacturer(s) of any reports from employers of point of operation injuries which occur while a press is operated in a PSDI mode.\n\nThe validation organization or validating laboratory shall maintain a record of each certification/validation of a PSDI safety system, including manufacturer and/or employer certification documentation, test and working data, test report, certification/validation report, any follow-up inspections or testing, and reports of equipment failures, any reports of accidents involving the equipment, and any other pertinent information. These records shall be available for inspection by OSHA and OSHA State Plan offices.\n\n1. The validation organization shall have a reasonable written procedure for acknowledging and processing appeals or complaints from program participants (manufacturers, producers, suppliers, vendors and employers) as well as other interested parties (employees or their representatives, safety personnel, government agencies, etc.), concerning certification or validation.\n\n2. The validation organization may charge any complainant the reasonable charge for repeating tests needed for the resolution of disputes.\n\nAppendix D to \u00a7 1910.217\u2014Nonmandatory Supplementary Information\n \n This appendix provides nonmandatory supplementary information and guidelines to assist in the understanding and use of 29 CFR 1910.217(h) to allow presence sensing device initiation (PSDI) of mechanical power presses. Although this appendix as such is not mandatory, it references sections and requirements which are made mandatory by other parts of the PSDI standard and appendices.\n \n 1. General\n \n OSHA intends that PSDI continue to be prohibited where present state-of-the-art technology will not allow it to be done safely. Only  part revolution  type mechanical power presses are approved for PSDI. Similarly, only presses with a configuration such that a person's body cannot completely enter the bed area are approved for PSDI.\n \n 2. Brake and Clutch\n \n Flexible steel band brakes do not possess a long-term reliability against structural failure as compared to other types of brakes, and therefore are not acceptable on presses used in the PSDI mode of operation.\n \n Fast and consistent stopping times are important to safety for the PSDI mode of operation. Consistency of braking action is enhanced by high brake torque. The requirement in paragraph (h)(2)(ii) defines a high torque capability which should ensure fast and consistent stopping times.\n \n Brake design parameters important to PSDI are high torque, low moment of inertia, low air volume (if pneumatic) mechanisms, non-interleaving engagement springs, and structural integrity which is enhanced by over-design. The requirement in paragrpah (h)(2)(iii) reduces the possibility of significantly increased stopping time if a spring breaks.\n \n As an added precaution to the requirements in paragraph (h)(2)(iii), brake adjustment locking means should be secured. Where brake springs are externally accessible, lock nuts or other means may be provided to reduce the possibility of backing off of the compression nut which holds the springs in place.\n \n 3. Pneumatic Systems\n \n Elevated clutch/brake air pressure results in longer stopping time. The requirement in paragraph (h)(3)(i)( C ) is intended to prevent degradation in stoping speed from higher air pressure. Higher pressures may be permitted, however, to increase clutch torque to free \u201cjammed\u201d dies, provided positive measures are provided to prevent the higher pressure at other times.\n \n 4. Flywheels and Bearings\n \n Lubrication of bearings is considered the single greatest deterrent to their failure. The manufacturer's recommended procedures for maintenance and inspection should be closely followed.\n \n 5. Brake Monitoring\n \n The approval of brake monitor adjustments, as required in paragraph (h)(5)(ii), is not considered a  recertification,  and does not necessarily involve an on-site inspection by a representative of the validation organization. It is expected that the brake monitor adjustment normally could be evaluated on the basis of the effect on the safety system certification/validation documentation retained by the validation organization.\n \n Use of a brake monitor does not eliminate the need for periodic brake inspection and maintenance to reduce the possibility of catastrophic failures.\n \n 6. Cycle Control and Control Systems\n \n The PSDI set-up/reset means required by paragraph (h)(6)(iv) may be initiated by the actuation of a special momentary pushbutton or by the actuation of a special momentary pushbutton and the initiation of a first stroke with two hand controls.\n \n It would normally be preferable to limit the adjustment of the time required in paragraph (h)(6)(vi) to a maximum of 15 seconds. However, where an operator must do many operations outside the press, such as lubricating, trimming, deburring, etc., a longer interval up to 30 seconds is permitted.\n \n When a press is equipped for PSDI operation, it is recommended that the presence sensing device be active as a guarding device in other production modes. This should enhance the reliability of the device and ensure that it remains operable.\n \n An acceptable method for interlocking supplemental guards as required by paragraph (h)(6)(xiii) would be to incorporate the supplemental guard and the PSDI presence sensing device into a hinged arrangement in which the alignment of the presence sensing device serves, in effect, as the interlock. If the supplemental guards are moved, the presence sensing device would become misaligned and the press control would be deactivated. No extra microswitches or interlocking sensors would be required.\n \n Paragraph (h)(6)(xv) of the standard requires that the control system have provisions for an \u201cinch\u201d operating means; that die-setting not be done in the PSDI mode; and that production not be done in the \u201cinch\u201d mode. It should be noted that the sensing device would be by-passed in the \u201cinch\u201d mode. For that reason, the prohibitions against die-setting in the PSDI mode, and against production in the \u201cinch\u201d mode are cited to emphasize that \u201cinch\u201d operation is of reduced safety and is not compatible with PSDI or other production modes.\n \n 7. Environmental Requirements\n \n It is the intent of paragraph (h)(7) that control components be provided with inherent design protection against operating stresses and environmental factors affecting safety and reliability.\n \n 8. Safety system\n \n The safety system provision continues the concept of paragraph (b)(13) that the probability of two independent failures in the length of time required to make one press cycle is so remote as to be a negligible risk factor in the total array of equipment and human factors. The emphasis is on an integrated total system including all elements affecting point of operation safety.\n \n It should be noted that this does not require redundancy for press components such as structural elements, clutch/brake mechanisms, plates, etc., for which adequate reliability may be achieved by proper design, maintenance, and inspection.\n \n 9. Safeguarding the Point of Operation\n \n The intent of paragraph (h)(9)(iii) is to prohibit use of mirrors to \u201cbend\u201d a single light curtain sensing field around corners to cover more than one side of a press. This prohibition is needed to increase the reliability of the presence sensing device in initiating a stroke only when the desired work motion has been completed.\n \n Object sensitivity  describes the capability of a presence sensing device to detect an object in the sensing field, expressed as the linear measurement of the smallest interruption which can be detected at any point in the field. Minimum object sensitivity describes the largest acceptable size of the interruption in the sensing field. A minimum object sensitivity of one and one-fourth inches (31.75 mm) means that a one and one-fourth inch (31.75 mm) diameter object will be continuously detected at all locations in the sensing field.\n \n In deriving the safety distance required in paragraph (h)(9)(v), all stopping time measurements should be made with clutch/brake air pressure regulated to the press manufacturer's recommended value for full clutch torque capability. The stopping time measurements should be made with the heaviest upper die that is planned for use in the press. If the press has a slide counterbalance system, it is important that the counterbalance be adjusted correctly for upper die weight according to the manufacturer's instructions. While the brake monitor setting is based on the stopping time it actually measures, i.e., the normal stopping time at the top of the stroke, it is important that the safety distance be computed from the longest stopping time measured at any of the indicated three downstroke stopping positions listed in the explanation of Ts. The use in the formula of twice the stopping time increase, Tm, allowed by the brake monitor for brake wear allows for greater increases in the downstroke stopping time than occur in normal stopping time at the top of the stroke.\n \n 10. Inspection and Maintenance.  [Reserved] \n \n 11. Safety System Certification/Validation\n \n Mandatory requirements for certification/validation of the PSDI safety system are provided in appendix A and appendix C to this standard. Nonmandatory supplementary information and guidelines relating to certification/validation of the PSDI safety system are provided to appendix B to this standard.\n\nThis appendix provides nonmandatory supplementary information and guidelines to assist in the understanding and use of 29 CFR 1910.217(h) to allow presence sensing device initiation (PSDI) of mechanical power presses. Although this appendix as such is not mandatory, it references sections and requirements which are made mandatory by other parts of the PSDI standard and appendices.\n\nOSHA intends that PSDI continue to be prohibited where present state-of-the-art technology will not allow it to be done safely. Only  part revolution  type mechanical power presses are approved for PSDI. Similarly, only presses with a configuration such that a person's body cannot completely enter the bed area are approved for PSDI.\n\nFlexible steel band brakes do not possess a long-term reliability against structural failure as compared to other types of brakes, and therefore are not acceptable on presses used in the PSDI mode of operation.\n\nFast and consistent stopping times are important to safety for the PSDI mode of operation. Consistency of braking action is enhanced by high brake torque. The requirement in paragraph (h)(2)(ii) defines a high torque capability which should ensure fast and consistent stopping times.\n\nBrake design parameters important to PSDI are high torque, low moment of inertia, low air volume (if pneumatic) mechanisms, non-interleaving engagement springs, and structural integrity which is enhanced by over-design. The requirement in paragrpah (h)(2)(iii) reduces the possibility of significantly increased stopping time if a spring breaks.\n\nAs an added precaution to the requirements in paragraph (h)(2)(iii), brake adjustment locking means should be secured. Where brake springs are externally accessible, lock nuts or other means may be provided to reduce the possibility of backing off of the compression nut which holds the springs in place.\n\nElevated clutch/brake air pressure results in longer stopping time. The requirement in paragraph (h)(3)(i)( C ) is intended to prevent degradation in stoping speed from higher air pressure. Higher pressures may be permitted, however, to increase clutch torque to free \u201cjammed\u201d dies, provided positive measures are provided to prevent the higher pressure at other times.\n\nLubrication of bearings is considered the single greatest deterrent to their failure. The manufacturer's recommended procedures for maintenance and inspection should be closely followed.\n\nThe approval of brake monitor adjustments, as required in paragraph (h)(5)(ii), is not considered a  recertification,  and does not necessarily involve an on-site inspection by a representative of the validation organization. It is expected that the brake monitor adjustment normally could be evaluated on the basis of the effect on the safety system certification/validation documentation retained by the validation organization.\n\nUse of a brake monitor does not eliminate the need for periodic brake inspection and maintenance to reduce the possibility of catastrophic failures.\n\nThe PSDI set-up/reset means required by paragraph (h)(6)(iv) may be initiated by the actuation of a special momentary pushbutton or by the actuation of a special momentary pushbutton and the initiation of a first stroke with two hand controls.\n\nIt would normally be preferable to limit the adjustment of the time required in paragraph (h)(6)(vi) to a maximum of 15 seconds. However, where an operator must do many operations outside the press, such as lubricating, trimming, deburring, etc., a longer interval up to 30 seconds is permitted.\n\nWhen a press is equipped for PSDI operation, it is recommended that the presence sensing device be active as a guarding device in other production modes. This should enhance the reliability of the device and ensure that it remains operable.\n\nAn acceptable method for interlocking supplemental guards as required by paragraph (h)(6)(xiii) would be to incorporate the supplemental guard and the PSDI presence sensing device into a hinged arrangement in which the alignment of the presence sensing device serves, in effect, as the interlock. If the supplemental guards are moved, the presence sensing device would become misaligned and the press control would be deactivated. No extra microswitches or interlocking sensors would be required.\n\nParagraph (h)(6)(xv) of the standard requires that the control system have provisions for an \u201cinch\u201d operating means; that die-setting not be done in the PSDI mode; and that production not be done in the \u201cinch\u201d mode. It should be noted that the sensing device would be by-passed in the \u201cinch\u201d mode. For that reason, the prohibitions against die-setting in the PSDI mode, and against production in the \u201cinch\u201d mode are cited to emphasize that \u201cinch\u201d operation is of reduced safety and is not compatible with PSDI or other production modes.\n\nIt is the intent of paragraph (h)(7) that control components be provided with inherent design protection against operating stresses and environmental factors affecting safety and reliability.\n\nThe safety system provision continues the concept of paragraph (b)(13) that the probability of two independent failures in the length of time required to make one press cycle is so remote as to be a negligible risk factor in the total array of equipment and human factors. The emphasis is on an integrated total system including all elements affecting point of operation safety.\n\nIt should be noted that this does not require redundancy for press components such as structural elements, clutch/brake mechanisms, plates, etc., for which adequate reliability may be achieved by proper design, maintenance, and inspection.\n\nThe intent of paragraph (h)(9)(iii) is to prohibit use of mirrors to \u201cbend\u201d a single light curtain sensing field around corners to cover more than one side of a press. This prohibition is needed to increase the reliability of the presence sensing device in initiating a stroke only when the desired work motion has been completed.\n\nObject sensitivity  describes the capability of a presence sensing device to detect an object in the sensing field, expressed as the linear measurement of the smallest interruption which can be detected at any point in the field. Minimum object sensitivity describes the largest acceptable size of the interruption in the sensing field. A minimum object sensitivity of one and one-fourth inches (31.75 mm) means that a one and one-fourth inch (31.75 mm) diameter object will be continuously detected at all locations in the sensing field.\n\nIn deriving the safety distance required in paragraph (h)(9)(v), all stopping time measurements should be made with clutch/brake air pressure regulated to the press manufacturer's recommended value for full clutch torque capability. The stopping time measurements should be made with the heaviest upper die that is planned for use in the press. If the press has a slide counterbalance system, it is important that the counterbalance be adjusted correctly for upper die weight according to the manufacturer's instructions. While the brake monitor setting is based on the stopping time it actually measures, i.e., the normal stopping time at the top of the stroke, it is important that the safety distance be computed from the longest stopping time measured at any of the indicated three downstroke stopping positions listed in the explanation of Ts. The use in the formula of twice the stopping time increase, Tm, allowed by the brake monitor for brake wear allows for greater increases in the downstroke stopping time than occur in normal stopping time at the top of the stroke.\n\nMandatory requirements for certification/validation of the PSDI safety system are provided in appendix A and appendix C to this standard. Nonmandatory supplementary information and guidelines relating to certification/validation of the PSDI safety system are provided to appendix B to this standard."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.15.37.8", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "O", "Subpart O\u2014Machinery and Machine Guarding", "", "\u00a7 1910.218 Forging machines.", "OSHA", "", "", "[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984; 51 FR 34561, Sept. 29, 1986; 61 FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996]", "(a)  General requirements \u2014(1)  Use of lead.  The safety requirements of this subparagraph apply to lead casts or other use of lead in the forge shop or die shop.\n\n(i) Thermostatic control of heating elements shall be provided to maintain proper melting temperature and prevent overheating.\n\n(ii) Fixed or permanent lead pot installations shall be exhausted.\n\n(iii) Portable units shall be used only in areas where good, general room ventilation is provided.\n\n(iv) Personal protective equipment (gloves, goggles, aprons, and other items) shall be worn.\n\n(v) A covered container shall be provided to store dross skimmings.\n\n(vi) Equipment shall be kept clean, particularly from accumulations of yellow lead oxide.\n\n(2)  Inspection and maintenance.  It shall be the responsibility of the employer to maintain all forge shop equipment in a condition which will insure continued safe operation. This responsibility includes:\n\n(i) Establishing periodic and regular maintenance safety checks and keeping certification records of these inspections which include the date of inspection, the signature of the person who performed the inspection and the serial number, or other identifier, for the forging machine which was inspected.\n\n(ii) Scheduling and recording the inspection of guards and point of operation protection devices at frequent and regular intervals. Recording of inspections shall be in the form of a certification record which includes the date the inspection was performed, the signature of the person who performed the inspection and the serial number, or other identifier, of the equipment inspected.\n\n(iii) Training personnel for the proper inspection and maintenance of forging machinery and equipment.\n\n(iv) All overhead parts shall be fastened or protected in such a manner that they will not fly off or fall in event of failure.\n\n(3)  Hammers and presses.  (i) All hammers shall be positioned or installed in such a manner that they remain on or are anchored to foundations sufficient to support them according to applicable engineering standards.\n\n(ii) All presses shall be installed in such a manner that they remain where they are positioned or they are anchored to foundations sufficient to support them according to applicable engineering standards.\n\nTable O-11\u2014Strength and Dimensions for Wood Ram Props\n\n1  Actual dimension.\n\n2  Adapted from U.S. Department of Agriculture Technical Bulletin 479. Hardwoods recommended are those whose ultimate crushing strengths in compression parallel to grain are 5,000 p.s.i. (pounds per square inch) or greater.\n\n3  Slenderness ratio formula for short columns is  L/d  = 11, where  L  = length of timber in inches and  d  = least dimension in inches; this ratio should not exceed 11.\n\n(iii) Means shall be provided for disconnecting the power to the machine and for locking out or rendering cycling controls inoperable.\n\n(iv) The ram shall be blocked when dies are being changed or other work is being done on the hammer. Blocks or wedges shall be made of material the strength and construction of which should meet or exceed the specifications and dimensions shown in Table O-11.\n\n(v) Tongs shall be of sufficient length to clear the body of the worker in case of kickback, and shall not have sharp handle ends.\n\n(vi) Oil swabs, or scale removers, or other devices to remove scale shall be provided. These devices shall be long enough to enable a man to reach the full length of the die without placing his hand or arm between the dies.\n\n(vii) Material handling equipment shall be of adequate strength, size, and dimension to handle diesetting operations safely.\n\n(viii) A scale guard of substantial construction shall be provided at the back of every hammer, so arranged as to stop flying scale.\n\n(ix) A scale guard of substantial construction shall be provided at the back of every press, so arranged as to stop flying scale.\n\n(b)  Hammers, general \u2014(1)  Keys.  Die keys and shims shall be made from a grade of material that will not unduly crack or splinter.\n\n(2)  Foot operated devices.  All foot operated devices (i.e., treadles, pedals, bars, valves, and switches) shall be substantially and effectively protected from unintended operation.\n\n(c)  Presses.  All manually operated valves and switches shall be clearly identified and readily accessible.\n\n(d)  Power-driven hammers \u2014(1)  Safety cylinder head.  Every steam or airhammer shall have a safety cylinder head to act as a cushion if the rod should break or pullout of the ram.\n\n(2)  Shutoff valve.  Steam hammers shall be provided with a quick closing emergency valve in the admission pipeline at a convenient location. This valve shall be closed and locked in the off position while the hammer is being adjusted, repaired, or serviced, or when the dies are being changed.\n\n(3)  Cylinder draining.  Steam hammers shall be provided with a means of cylinder draining, such as a self-draining arrangement or a quick-acting drain cock.\n\n(4)  Pressure pipes.  Steam or air piping shall conform to the specifications of American National Standard ANSI B31.1.0-1967, Power Piping with Addenda issued before April 28, 1971, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(e)  Gravity hammers \u2014(1)  Air-lift hammers.  (i) Air-lift hammers shall have a safety cylinder head as required in paragraph (d)(1) of this section.\n\n(ii) Air-lift hammers shall have an air shutoff valve as required in paragraph (d)(2) of this section.\n\n(iii) Air-lift hammers shall be provided with two drain cocks: one on main head cylinder, and one on clamp cylinder.\n\n(iv) Air piping shall conform to the specifications of the ANSI B31.1.0-1967, Power Piping with Addenda issued before April 28, 1971, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(2)  Board drophammers.  (i) A suitable enclosure shall be provided to prevent damaged or detached boards from falling. The board enclosure shall be securely fastened to the hammer.\n\n(ii) All major assemblies and fittings which can loosen and fall shall be properly secured in place.\n\n(f)  Forging presses \u2014(1)  Mechanical forging presses.  When dies are being changed or maintenance is being performed on the press, the following shall be accomplished:\n\n(i) The power to the press shall be locked out.\n\n(ii) The flywheel shall be at rest.\n\n(iii) The ram shall be blocked with a material the strength of which shall meet or exceed the specifications or dimensions shown in Table O-11.\n\n(2)  Hydraulic forging presses.  When dies are being changed or maintenance is being performed on the press, the following shall be accomplished:\n\n(i) The hydraulic pumps and power apparatus shall be locked out.\n\n(ii) The ram shall be blocked with a material the strength of which shall meet or exceed the specifications or dimensions shown in Table O-11.\n\n(g)  Trimming presses \u2014(1)  Hot trimming presses.  The requirements of paragraph (f)(1) of this section shall also apply to hot trimming presses.\n\n(2)  Cold trimming presses.  Cold trimming presses shall be safeguarded in accordance with \u00a7 1910.217(c).\n\n(h)  Upsetters \u2014(1)  General requirements.  All upsetters shall be installed so that they remain on their supporting foundations.\n\n(2)  Lockouts.  Upsetters shall be provided with a means for locking out the power at its entry point to the machine and rendering its cycling controls inoperable.\n\n(3)  Manually operated controls.  All manually operated valves and switches shall be clearly identified and readily accessible.\n\n(4)  Tongs.  Tongs shall be of sufficient length to clear the body of the worker in case of kickback, and shall not have sharp handle ends.\n\n(5)  Changing dies.  When dies are being changed, maintenance performed, or any work done on the machine, the power to the upsetter shall be locked out, and the flywheel shall be at rest.\n\n(i)  Other forging equipment \u2014(1)  Boltheading.  The provisions of paragraph (h) of this section shall apply to boltheading.\n\n(2)  Rivet making.  The provisions of paragraph (h) of this section shall apply to rivet making.\n\n(j)  Other forge facility equipment \u2014(1)  Billet shears.  A positive-type lockout device for disconnecting the power to the shear shall be provided.\n\n(2)  Saws.  Every saw shall be provided with a guard of not less than one-eighth inch sheet metal positioned to stop flying sparks.\n\n(3)  Conveyors.  Conveyor power transmission equipment shall be guarded in accordance with ANSI B20.1-1957, Safety Code for Conveyors, Cableways, and Related Equipment, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(4)  Shot blast.  The cleaning chamber shall have doors or guards to protect operators.\n\n(5)  Grinding.  Personal protective equipment shall be used in grinding operations, and equipment shall be used and maintained in accordance with ANSI B7.1-1970, Safety Code for the Use, Care, and Protection of Abrasive Wheels, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6, and with \u00a7 1910.215."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.15.37.9", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "O", "Subpart O\u2014Machinery and Machine Guarding", "", "\u00a7 1910.219 Mechanical power-transmission apparatus.", "OSHA", "", "", "[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49750, Oct. 24, 1978; 43 FR 51760; Nov. 7, 1978; 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984; 61 FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996; 69 FR 31882, June 8, 2004]", "(a)  General requirements.  (1) This section covers all types and shapes of power-transmission belts, except the following when operating at two hundred and fifty (250) feet per minute or less: (i) Flat belts one (1) inch or less in width, (ii) flat belts two (2) inches or less in width which are free from metal lacings or fasteners, (iii) round belts one-half (\n 1/2 ) inch or less in diameter; and (iv) single strand V-belts, the width of which is thirteen thirty-seconds (\n 13/32 ) inch or less.\n\n(2) Vertical and inclined belts (paragraphs (e) (3) and (4) of this section) if not more than two and one-half (2\n 1/2 ) inches wide and running at a speed of less than one thousand (1,000) feet per minute, and if free from metal lacings or fastenings may be guarded with a nip-point belt and pulley guard.\n\n(3) For the Textile Industry, because of the presence of excessive deposits of lint, which constitute a serious fire hazard, the sides and face sections only of nip-point belt and pulley guards are required, provided the guard shall extend at least six (6) inches beyond the rim of the pulley on the in-running and off-running sides of the belt and at least two (2) inches away from the rim and face of the pulley in all other directions.\n\n(4) This section covers the principal features with which power transmission safeguards shall comply.\n\n(b)  Prime-mover guards \u2014(1)  Flywheels.  Flywheels located so that any part is seven (7) feet or less above floor or platform shall be guarded in accordance with the requirements of this subparagraph:\n\n(i) With an enclosure of sheet, perforated, or expanded metal, or woven wire;\n\n(ii) With guard rails placed not less than fifteen (15) inches nor more than twenty (20) inches from rim. When flywheel extends into pit or is within 12 inches of floor, a standard toeboard shall also be provided;\n\n(iii) When the upper rim of flywheel protrudes through a working floor, it shall be entirely enclosed or surrounded by a guardrail and toeboard.\n\n(iv) For flywheels with smooth rims five (5) feet or less in diameter, where the preceding methods cannot be applied, the following may be used: A disk attached to the flywheel in such manner as to cover the spokes of the wheel on the exposed side and present a smooth surface and edge, at the same time providing means for periodic inspection. An open space, not exceeding four (4) inches in width, may be left between the outside edge of the disk and the rim of the wheel if desired, to facilitate turning the wheel over. Where a disk is used, the keys or other dangerous projections not covered by disk shall be cut off or covered. This subdivision does not apply to flywheels with solid web centers.\n\n(v) Adjustable guard to be used for starting engine or for running adjustment may be provided at the flywheel of gas or oil engines. A slot opening for jack bar will be permitted.\n\n(vi) Wherever flywheels are above working areas, guards shall be installed having sufficient strength to hold the weight of the flywheel in the event of a shaft or wheel mounting failure.\n\n(2)  Cranks and connecting rods.  Cranks and connecting rods, when exposed to contact, shall be guarded in accordance with paragraphs (m) and (n) of this section, or by a guardrail as described in paragraph (o)(5) of this section.\n\n(3)  Tail rods or extension piston rods.  Tail rods or extension piston rods shall be guarded in accordance with paragraphs (m) and (o) of this section, or by a guardrail on sides and end, with a clearance of not less than fifteen (15) nor more than twenty (20) inches when rod is fully extended.\n\n(c)  Shafting \u2014(1)  Installation.  (i) Each continuous line of shafting shall be secured in position against excessive endwise movement.\n\n(ii) Inclined and vertical shafts, particularly inclined idler shafts, shall be securely held in position against endwise thrust.\n\n(2)  Guarding horizontal shafting.  (i) All exposed parts of horizontal shafting seven (7) feet or less from floor or working platform, excepting runways used exclusively for oiling, or running adjustments, shall be protected by a stationary casing enclosing shafting completely or by a trough enclosing sides and top or sides and bottom of shafting as location requires.\n\n(ii) Shafting under bench machines shall be enclosed by a stationary casing, or by a trough at sides and top or sides and bottom, as location requires. The sides of the trough shall come within at least six (6) inches of the underside of table, or if shafting is located near floor within six (6) inches of floor. In every case the sides of trough shall extend at least two (2) inches beyond the shafting or protuberance.\n\n(3)  Guarding vertical and inclined shafting.  Vertical and inclined shafting seven (7) feet or less from floor or working platform, excepting maintenance runways, shall be enclosed with a stationary casing in accordance with requirements of paragraphs (m) and (o) of this section.\n\n(4)  Projecting shaft ends.  (i) Projecting shaft ends shall present a smooth edge and end and shall not project more than one-half the diameter of the shaft unless guarded by nonrotating caps or safety sleeves.\n\n(ii) Unused keyways shall be filled up or covered.\n\n(5)  Power-transmission apparatus located in basements.  All mechanical power transmission apparatus located in basements, towers, and rooms used exclusively for power transmission equipment shall be guarded in accordance with this section, except that the requirements for safeguarding belts, pulleys, and shafting need not be complied with when the following requirements are met:\n\n(i) The basement, tower, or room occupied by transmission equipment is locked against unauthorized entrance.\n\n(ii) The vertical clearance in passageways between the floor and power transmission beams, ceiling, or any other objects, is not less than five feet six inches (5 ft. 6 in.).\n\n(iii) The intensity of illumination conforms to the requirements of ANSI A11.1-1965 (R-1970), which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(iv) [Reserved]\n\n(v) The route followed by the oiler is protected in such manner as to prevent accident.\n\n(d)  Pulleys \u2014(1)  Guarding.  Pulleys, any parts of which are seven (7) feet or less from the floor or working platform, shall be guarded in accordance with the standards specified in paragraphs (m) and (o) of this section. Pulleys serving as balance wheels (e.g., punch presses) on which the point of contact between belt and pulley is more than six feet six inches (6 ft. 6 in.) from the floor or platform may be guarded with a disk covering the spokes.\n\n(2)  Location of pulleys.  (i) Unless the distance to the nearest fixed pulley, clutch, or hanger exceeds the width of the belt used, a guide shall be provided to prevent the belt from leaving the pulley on the side where insufficient clearance exists.\n\n(ii) [Reserved]\n\n(3)  Broken pulleys.  Pulleys with cracks, or pieces broken out of rims, shall not be used.\n\n(4)  Pulley speeds.  Pulleys intended to operate at rim speed in excess of manufacturers normal recommendations shall be specially designed and carefully balanced for the speed at which they are to operate.\n\n(e)  Belt, rope, and chain drives \u2014(1)  Horizontal belts and ropes.  (i) Where both runs of horizontal belts are seven (7) feet or less from the floor level, the guard shall extend to at least fifteen (15) inches above the belt or to a standard height except that where both runs of a horizontal belt are 42 inches or less from the floor, the belt shall be fully enclosed in accordance with paragraphs (m) and (o) of this section.\n\n(ii) In powerplants or power-development rooms, a guardrail may be used in lieu of the guard required by subdivision (i) of this subparagraph.\n\n(2)  Overhead horizontal belts.  (i) Overhead horizontal belts, with lower parts seven (7) feet or less from the floor or platform, shall be guarded on sides and bottom in accordance with paragraph (o)(3) of this section.\n\n(ii) Horizontal overhead belts more than seven (7) feet above floor or platform shall be guarded for their entire length under the following conditions:\n\n( a ) If located over passageways or work places and traveling 1,800 feet or more per minute.\n\n( b ) If center to center distance between pulleys is ten (10) feet or more.\n\n( c ) If belt is eight (8) inches or more in width.\n\n(iii) Where the upper and lower runs of horizontal belts are so located that passage of persons between them would be possible, the passage shall be either:\n\n( a ) Completely barred by a guardrail or other barrier in accordance with paragraphs (m) and (o) of this section; or\n\n( b ) Where passage is regarded as necessary, there shall be a platform over the lower run guarded on either side by a railing completely filled in with wire mesh or other filler, or by a solid barrier. The upper run shall be so guarded as to prevent contact therewith either by the worker or by objects carried by him. In powerplants only the lower run of the belt need be guarded.\n\n(iv) Overhead chain and link belt drives are governed by the same rules as overhead horizontal belts and shall be guarded in the same manner as belts.\n\n(3)  Vertical and inclined belts.  (i) Vertical and inclined belts shall be enclosed by a guard conforming to standards in paragraphs (m) and (o) of this section.\n\n(ii) All guards for inclined belts shall be arranged in such a manner that a minimum clearance of seven (7) feet is maintained between belt and floor at any point outside of guard.\n\n(4)  Vertical belts.  Vertical belts running over a lower pulley more than seven (7) feet above floor or platform shall be guarded at the bottom in the same manner as horizontal overhead belts, if conditions are as stated in paragraphs (e)(2)(ii) ( a ) and ( c ) of this section.\n\n(5)  Cone-pulley belts.  (i) The cone belt and pulley shall be equipped with a belt shifter so constructed as to adequately guard the nip point of the belt and pulley. If the frame of the belt shifter does not adequately guard the nip point of the belt and pulley, the nip point shall be further protected by means of a vertical guard placed in front of the pulley and extending at least to the top of the largest step of the cone.\n\n(ii) If the belt is of the endless type or laced with rawhide laces, and a belt shifter is not desired, the belt will be considered guarded if the nip point of the belt and pulley is protected by a nip point guard located in front of the cone extending at least to the top of the largest step of the cone, and formed to show the contour of the cone in order to give the nip point of the belt and pulley the maximum protection.\n\n(iii) If the cone is located less than 3 feet from the floor or working platform, the cone pulley and belt shall be guarded to a height of 3 feet regardless of whether the belt is endless or laced with rawhide.\n\n(6)  Belt tighteners.  (i) Suspended counterbalanced tighteners and all parts thereof shall be of substantial construction and securely fastened; the bearings shall be securely capped. Means must be provided to prevent tightener from falling, in case the belt breaks.\n\n(ii) Where suspended counterweights are used and not guarded by location, they shall be so encased as to prevent accident.\n\n(f)  Gears, sprockets, and chains \u2014(1)  Gears.  Gears shall be guarded in accordance with one of the following methods:\n\n(i) By a complete enclosure; or\n\n(ii) By a standard guard as described in paragraph (o) of this section, at least seven (7) feet high extending six (6) inches above the mesh point of the gears; or\n\n(iii) By a band guard covering the face of gear and having flanges extended inward beyond the root of the teeth on the exposed side or sides. Where any portion of the train of gears guarded by a band guard is less than six (6) feet from the floor a disk guard or a complete enclosure to the height of six (6) feet shall be required.\n\n(2)  Hand-operated gears.  Paragraph (f)(1) of this section does not apply to hand-operated gears used only to adjust machine parts and which do not continue to move after hand power is removed. However, the guarding of these gears is highly recommended.\n\n(3)  Sprockets and chains.  All sprocket wheels and chains shall be enclosed unless they are more than seven (7) feet above the floor or platform. Where the drive extends over other machine or working areas, protection against falling shall be provided. This subparagraph does not apply to manually operated sprockets.\n\n(4)  Openings for oiling.  When frequent oiling must be done, openings with hinged or sliding self-closing covers shall be provided. All points not readily accessible shall have oil feed tubes if lubricant is to be added while machinery is in motion.\n\n(g)  Guarding friction drives.  The driving point of all friction drives when exposed to contact shall be guarded, all arm or spoke friction drives and all web friction drives with holes in the web shall be entirely enclosed, and all projecting belts on friction drives where exposed to contact shall be guarded.\n\n(h)  Keys, setscrews, and other projections.  (1) All projecting keys, setscrews, and other projections in revolving parts shall be removed or made flush or guarded by metal cover. This subparagraph does not apply to keys or setscrews within gear or sprocket casings or other enclosures, nor to keys, setscrews, or oilcups in hubs of pulleys less than twenty (20) inches in diameter where they are within the plane of the rim of the pulley.\n\n(2) It is recommended, however, that no projecting setscrews or oilcups be used in any revolving pulley or part of machinery.\n\n(i)  Collars and couplings \u2014(1)  Collars.  All revolving collars, including split collars, shall be cylindrical, and screws or bolts used in collars shall not project beyond the largest periphery of the collar.\n\n(2)  Couplings.  Shaft couplings shall be so constructed as to present no hazard from bolts, nuts, setscrews, or revolving surfaces. Bolts, nuts, and setscrews will, however, be permitted where they are covered with safety sleeves or where they are used parallel with the shafting and are countersunk or else do not extend beyond the flange of the coupling.\n\n(j)  Bearings and facilities for oiling.  All drip cups and pans shall be securely fastened.\n\n(k)  Guarding of clutches, cutoff couplings, and clutch pulleys \u2014(1)  Guards.  Clutches, cutoff couplings, or clutch pulleys having projecting parts, where such clutches are located seven (7) feet or less above the floor or working platform, shall be enclosed by a stationary guard constructed in accordance with this section. A \u201cU\u201d type guard is permissible.\n\n(2)  Engine rooms.  In engine rooms a guardrail, preferably with toeboard, may be used instead of the guard required by paragraph (k)(1) of this section, provided such a room is occupied only by engine room attendants.\n\n(l)  Belt shifters, clutches, shippers, poles, perches, and fasteners \u2014(1)  Belt shifters.  (i) Tight and loose pulleys on all new installations made on or after August 31, 1971, shall be equipped with a permanent belt shifter provided with mechanical means to prevent belt from creeping from loose to tight pulley. It is recommended that old installations be changed to conform to this rule.\n\n(ii) Belt shifter and clutch handles shall be rounded and be located as far as possible from danger of accidental contact, but within easy reach of the operator. Where belt shifters are not directly located over a machine or bench, the handles shall be cut off six feet six inches (6 ft. 6 in.) above floor level.\n\n(2)  Belt shippers and shipper poles.  The use of belt poles as substitutes for mechanical shifters is not recommended.\n\n(3)  Belt perches.  Where loose pulleys or idlers are not practicable, belt perches in form of brackets, rollers, etc., shall be used to keep idle belts away from the shafts.\n\n(4)  Belt fasteners.  Belts which of necessity must be shifted by hand and belts within seven (7) feet of the floor or working platform which are not guarded in accordance with this section shall not be fastened with metal in any case, nor with any other fastening which by construction or wear will constitute an accident hazard.\n\n(m)  Standard guards\u2014general requirements \u2014(1)  Materials.  (i) Standard conditions shall be secured by the use of the following materials. Expanded metal, perforated or solid sheet metal, wire mesh on a frame of angle iron, or iron pipe securely fastened to floor or to frame of machine.\n\n(ii) All metal should be free from burrs and sharp edges.\n\n(2)  Methods of manufacture.  (i) Expanded metal, sheet or perforated metal, and wire mesh shall be securely fastened to frame.\n\n(ii) [Reserved]\n\n(n) [Reserved]\n\n(o)  Approved materials \u2014(1)  Minimum requirements.  The materials and dimensions specified in this paragraph shall apply to all guards, except horizontal overhead belts, rope, cable, or chain guards more than seven (7) feet above floor, or platform.\n\n(i) [Reserved]\n\n( a ) All guards shall be rigidly braced every three (3) feet or fractional part of their height to some fixed part of machinery or building structure. Where guard is exposed to contact with moving equipment additional strength may be necessary.\n\n( b ) [Reserved]\n\n(ii) [Reserved]\n\n(2)  Wood guards.  (i) Wood guards may be used in the woodworking and chemical industries, in industries where the presence of fumes or where manufacturing conditions would cause the rapid deterioration of metal guards; also in construction work and in locations outdoors where extreme cold or extreme heat make metal guards and railings undesirable. In all other industries, wood guards shall not be used.\n\n(ii) [Reserved]\n\n(3)  Guards for horizontal overhead belts.  (i) Guards for horizontal overhead belts shall run the entire length of the belt and follow the line of the pulley to the ceiling or be carried to the nearest wall, thus enclosing the belt effectively. Where belts are so located as to make it impracticable to carry the guard to wall or ceiling, construction of guard shall be such as to enclose completely the top and bottom runs of belt and the face of pulleys.\n\n(ii) [Reserved]\n\n(iii) Suitable reinforcement shall be provided for the ceiling rafters or overhead floor beams, where such is necessary, to sustain safely the weight and stress likely to be imposed by the guard. The interior surface of all guards, by which is meant the surface of the guard with which a belt will come in contact, shall be smooth and free from all projections of any character, except where construction demands it; protruding shallow roundhead rivets may be used. Overhead belt guards shall be at least one-quarter wider than belt which they protect, except that this clearance need not in any case exceed six (6) inches on each side. Overhead rope drive and block and roller-chain-drive guards shall be not less than six (6) inches wider than the drive on each side. In overhead silent chain-drive guards where the chain is held from lateral displacement on the sprockets, the side clearances required on drives of twenty (20) inch centers or under shall be not less than one-fourth inch from the nearest moving chain part, and on drives of over twenty (20) inch centers a minimum of one-half inch from the nearest moving chain part.\n\n(4)  Guards for horizontal overhead rope and chain drives.  Overhead-rope and chain-drive guard construction shall conform to the rules for overhead-belt guard.\n\n(5)  Guardrails and toeboards.  (i) Guardrail shall be forty-two (42) inches in height, with midrail between top rail and floor.\n\n(ii) Posts shall be not more than eight (8) feet apart; they are to be permanent and substantial, smooth, and free from protruding nails, bolts, and splinters. If made of pipe, the post shall be one and one-fourth (1\n 1/4 ) inches inside diameter, or larger. If made of metal shapes or bars, their section shall be equal in strength to that of one and one-half (1\n 1/2 ) by one and one-half (1\n 1/2 ) by three-sixteenths (\n 3/16 ) inch angle iron. If made of wood, the posts shall be two by four (2 \u00d7 4) inches or larger. The upper rail shall be two by four (2 \u00d7 4) inches, or two one by four (1 \u00d7 4) strips, one at the top and one at the side of posts. The midrail may be one by four (1 \u00d7 4) inches or more. Where panels are fitted with expanded metal or wire mesh the middle rails may be omitted. Where guard is exposed to contact with moving equipment, additional strength may be necessary.\n\n(iii) Toeboards shall be four (4) inches or more in height, of wood, metal, or of metal grill not exceeding one (1) inch mesh.\n\n(p)  Care of equipment \u2014(1)  General.  All power-transmission equipment shall be inspected at intervals not exceeding 60 days and be kept in good working condition at all times.\n\n(2)  Shafting.  (i) Shafting shall be kept in alignment, free from rust and excess oil or grease.\n\n(ii) Where explosives, explosive dusts, flammable vapors or flammable liquids exist, the hazard of static sparks from shafting shall be carefully considered.\n\n(3)  Bearings.  Bearings shall be kept in alignment and properly adjusted.\n\n(4)  Hangers.  Hangers shall be inspected to make certain that all supporting bolts and screws are tight and that supports of hanger boxes are adjusted properly.\n\n(5)  Pulleys.  (i) Pulleys shall be kept in proper alignment to prevent belts from running off.\n\n(ii) [Reserved]\n\n(6)  Care of belts.\n\n(i) [Reserved]\n\n(ii) Inspection shall be made of belts, lacings, and fasteners and such equipment kept in good repair.\n\n(7)  Lubrication.  The regular oilers shall wear tight-fitting clothing. Machinery shall be oiled when not in motion, wherever possible."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.16.37.1", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "P", "Subpart P\u2014Hand and Portable Powered Tools and Other Hand-Held Equipment", "", "\u00a7 1910.241 Definitions.", "OSHA", "", "", "[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49750, Oct. 24, 1978]", "As used in this subpart:\n\n(a)  Explosive-actuated fastening tool terms \u2014(1)  Hammer-operated piston tool \u2014 low-velocity type.  A tool which, by means of a heavy mass hammer supplemented by a load, moves a piston designed to be captive to drive a stud, pin, or fastener into a work surface, always starting the fastener at rest and in contact with the work surface. It shall be so designed that when used with any load that accurately chambers in it and that is commercially available at the time the tool is submitted for approval, it will not cause such stud, pin, or fastener to have a mean velocity in excess of 300 feet per second when measured 6.5 feet from the muzzle end of the barrel.\n\n(2)  High-velocity tool.  A tool or machine which, when used with a load, propels or discharges a stud, pin, or fastener, at velocities in excess of 300 feet per second when measured 6.5 feet from the muzzle end of the barrel, for the purpose of impinging it upon, affixing it to, or penetrating another object or material.\n\n(3)  Low-velocity piston tool.  A tool that utilizes a piston designed to be captive to drive a stud, pin, or fastener into a work surface. It shall be so designed that when used with any load that accurately chambers in it and that is commercially available at the time the tool is submitted for approval, it will not cause such stud, pin, or fastener to have a mean velocity in excess of 300 feet per second when measured 6.5 feet from the muzzle end of the barrel.\n\n(4)  Stud, pin, or fastener.  A fastening device specifically designed and manufactured for use in explosive-actuated fastening tools.\n\n(5)  To chamber.  To fit properly without the use of excess force, the case being duly supported.\n\n(6)  Explosive powerload, also known as load.  Any substance in any form capable of producing a propellant force.\n\n(7)  Tool.  An explosive-actuated fastening tool, unless otherwise indicated, and all accessories pertaining thereto.\n\n(8)  Protective shield or guard.  A device or guard attached to the muzzle end of the tool, which is designed to confine flying particles.\n\n(b)  Abrasive wheel terms \u2014(1)  Mounted wheels.  Mounted wheels, usually 2-inch diameter or smaller, and of various shapes, may be either organic or inorganic bonded abrasive wheels. They are secured to plain or threaded steel mandrels.\n\n(2)  Tuck pointing.  Removal, by grinding, of cement, mortar, or other nonmetallic jointing material.\n\n(3)  Tuck pointing wheels.  Tuck pointing wheels, usually Type 1, reinforced organic bonded wheels have diameter, thickness and hole size dimension. They are subject to the same limitations of use and mounting as Type 1 wheels defined in subparagraph (10) of this paragraph.\n\nLimitation:  Wheels used for tuck pointing should be reinforced, organic bonded. (See \u00a7 1910.243(c)(1)(ii)( c. ))\n\nLimitation:  Wheels used for tuck pointing should be reinforced, organic bonded. (See \u00a7 1910.243(c)(1)(ii)( c. ))\n\n(4)  Portable grinding.  A grinding operation where the grinding machine is designed to be hand held and may be easily moved from one location to another.\n\n(5)  Organic bonded wheels.  Organic wheels are wheels which are bonded by means of an organic material such as resin, rubber, shellac, or other similar bonding agent.\n\n(6)  Safety guard.  A safety guard is an enclosure designed to restrain the pieces of the grinding wheel and furnish all possible protection in the event that the wheel is broken in operation.\n\n(7)  Reinforced wheels.  The term  reinforced  as applied to grinding wheels shall define a class of organic wheels which contain strengthening fabric or filament. The term  reinforced  does not cover wheels using such mechanical additions as steel rings, steel cup backs or wire or tape winding.\n\n(8)  Type 11 flaring cup wheels.  Type 11 flaring cup wheels have double diameter dimensions D and J, and in addition have thickness, hole size, rim and back thickness dimensions. Grinding is always performed on rim face, W dimension. Type 11 wheels are subject to all limitations of use and mounting listed for Type 6 straight sided cup wheels definition in subparagraph (9) of this paragraph.\n\nType 11\u2014Flaring-cup Wheel\n \n Side grinding wheel having a wall flared or tapered outward from the back. Wall thickness at the back is normally greater than at the grinding face (W). \n \n Limitation:  Minimum back thickness, E dimension, should not be less than one-fourth T dimension. In addition when unthreaded hole wheels are specified the inside flat, K dimension, shall be large enough to accommodate a suitable flange.\n\nSide grinding wheel having a wall flared or tapered outward from the back. Wall thickness at the back is normally greater than at the grinding face (W).\n\nLimitation:  Minimum back thickness, E dimension, should not be less than one-fourth T dimension. In addition when unthreaded hole wheels are specified the inside flat, K dimension, shall be large enough to accommodate a suitable flange.\n\n(9)  Type 6 straight cup wheels.  Type 6 cup wheels have diameter, thickness, hole size, rim thickness, and back thickness dimensions. Grinding is always performed on rim face, W dimension.\n\nLimitation:  Minimum back thickness, E dimension, should not be less than one-fourth T dimension. In addition, when unthreaded hole wheels are specified, the inside flat, K dimension, must be large enough to accommodate a suitable flange.\n \n Type 6 Straight Cup Wheels \n \n  \n Figure P-2 \n Type 6\u2014Straight Cup Wheel\n \n Side grinding wheel having a diameter, thickness and hole with one side straight or flat and the opposite side recessed. This type, however, differs from Type 5 in that the grinding is performed on the wall of the abrasive created by the difference between the diameter of the recess and the outside diameter of the wheel. Therefore, the wall dimension \u201cW\u201d takes precedence over the diameter of the recess as an essential intermediate dimension to describe this shape type.\n\nLimitation:  Minimum back thickness, E dimension, should not be less than one-fourth T dimension. In addition, when unthreaded hole wheels are specified, the inside flat, K dimension, must be large enough to accommodate a suitable flange.\n\nSide grinding wheel having a diameter, thickness and hole with one side straight or flat and the opposite side recessed. This type, however, differs from Type 5 in that the grinding is performed on the wall of the abrasive created by the difference between the diameter of the recess and the outside diameter of the wheel. Therefore, the wall dimension \u201cW\u201d takes precedence over the diameter of the recess as an essential intermediate dimension to describe this shape type.\n\n(10)  Type 1 straight wheels.  Type 1 straight wheels have diameter, thickness, and hole size dimensions and should be used only on the periphery. Type 1 wheels shall be mounted between flanges.\n\nLimitation:  Hole dimension (H) should not be greater than two-thirds of wheel diameter dimension (D) for precision, cylindrical, centerless, or surface grinding applications. Maximum hole size for all other applications should not exceed one-half wheel diameter.\n \n Type 1 Straight Wheels \n \n  \n Figure P-3 \n Type 1\u2014Straight Wheel\n \n Peripheral grinding wheel having a diameter, thickness and hole.\n\nLimitation:  Hole dimension (H) should not be greater than two-thirds of wheel diameter dimension (D) for precision, cylindrical, centerless, or surface grinding applications. Maximum hole size for all other applications should not exceed one-half wheel diameter.\n\n(c) [Reserved]\n\n(d)  Jack terms \u2014(1)  Jack.  A jack is an appliance for lifting and lowering or moving horizontally a load by application of a pushing force.\n\nJacks may be of the following types: Lever and ratchet, screw and hydraulic.\n\n(2)  Rating.  The rating of a jack is the maximum working load for which it is designed to lift safely that load throughout its specified amount of travel.\n\nTo raise the rated load of a jack, the point of application of the load, the applied force, and the length of lever arm should be those designated by the manufacturer for the particular jack considered."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.16.37.2", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "P", "Subpart P\u2014Hand and Portable Powered Tools and Other Hand-Held Equipment", "", "\u00a7 1910.242 Hand and portable powered tools and equipment, general.", "OSHA", "", "", "", "(a)  General requirements.  Each employer shall be responsible for the safe condition of tools and equipment used by employees, including tools and equipment which may be furnished by employees.\n\n(b)  Compressed air used for cleaning.  Compressed air shall not be used for cleaning purposes except where reduced to less than 30 p.s.i. and then only with effective chip guarding and personal protective equipment."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.16.37.3", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "P", "Subpart P\u2014Hand and Portable Powered Tools and Other Hand-Held Equipment", "", "\u00a7 1910.243 Guarding of portable powered tools.", "OSHA", "", "", "[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49750, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984; 50 FR 4649, Feb. 1, 1985; 61 FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996; 70 FR 53929, Sept. 13, 2005; 72 FR 71070, Dec. 14, 2007]", "(a)  Portable powered tool \u2014(1)  Portable circular saws.  (i) All portable, power-driven circular saws having a blade diameter greater than 2 in. shall be equipped with guards above and below the base plate or shoe. The upper guard shall cover the saw to the depth of the teeth, except for the minimum arc required to permit the base to be tilted for bevel cuts. The lower guard shall cover the saw to the depth of the teeth, except for the minimum arc required to allow proper retraction and contact with the work. When the tool is withdrawn from the work, the lower guard shall automatically and instantly return to covering position.\n\n(ii) Paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this section does not apply to circular saws used in the meat industry for meat cutting purposes.\n\n(2)  Switches and controls.  (i) All hand-held powered circular saws having a blade diameter greater than 2 inches, electric, hydraulic or pneumatic chain saws, and percussion tools without positive accessory holding means shall be equipped with a constant pressure switch or control that will shut off the power when the pressure is released. All hand-held gasoline powered chain saws shall be equipped with a constant pressure throttle control that will shut off the power to the saw chain when the pressure is released.\n\n(ii) All hand-held powered drills, tappers, fastener drivers, horizontal, vertical, and angle grinders with wheels greater than 2 inches in diameter, disc sanders with discs greater than 2 inches in diameter, belt sanders, reciprocating saws, saber, scroll, and jig saws with blade shanks greater than a nominal one-fourth inch, and other similarly operating powered tools shall be equipped with a constant pressure switch or control, and may have a lock-on control provided that turnoff can be accomplished by a single motion of the same finger or fingers that turn it on.\n\n(iii)( a ) All other hand-held powered tools, such as, but not limited to, platen sanders, grinders with wheels 2 inches in diameter or less, disc sanders with discs 2 inches in diameter or less, routers, planers, laminate trimmers, nibblers, shears, saber, scroll, and jig saws with blade shanks a nominal one-fourth of an inch wide or less, may be equipped with either a positive \u201con-off\u201d control, or other controls as described by paragraph (a)(2)(i) and (ii) of this section.\n\n( b ) Saber, scroll, and jig saws with nonstandard blade holders may use blades with shanks which are nonuniform in width, provided the narrowest portion of the blade shank is an integral part in mounting the blade.\n\n( c ) Blade shank width shall be measured at the narrowest portion of the blade shank when saber, scroll, and jig saws have nonstandard blade holders.\n\n( d )  Nominal  in this subparagraph means \u00b10.05 inch.\n\n(iv) The operating control on hand-held power tools shall be so located as to minimize the possibility of its accidental operation, if such accidental operation would constitute a hazard to employees.\n\n(v) This subparagraph does not apply to concrete vibrators, concrete breakers, powered tampers, jack hammers, rock drills, garden appliances, household and kitchen appliances, personal care appliances, medical or dental equipment, or to fixed machinery.\n\n(3)  Portable belt sanding machines.  Belt sanding machines shall be provided with guards at each nip point where the sanding belt runs onto a pulley. These guards shall effectively prevent the hands or fingers of the operator from coming in contact with the nip points. The unused run of the sanding belt shall be guarded against accidental contact.\n\n(4)  Cracked saws.  All cracked saws shall be removed from service.\n\n(5)  Grounding.  Portable electric powered tools shall meet the electrical requirements of subpart S of this part.\n\n(b)  Pneumatic powered tools and hose \u2014(1)  Tool retainer.  A tool retainer shall be installed on each piece of utilization equipment which, without such a retainer, may eject the tool.\n\n(2)  Airhose.  Hose and hose connections used for conducting compressed air to utilization equipment shall be designed for the pressure and service to which they are subjected.\n\n(c)  Portable abrasive wheels \u2014(1)  General requirements.  Abrasive wheels shall be used only on machine provided with safety guards as defined in paragraph (c) (1) through (4) of this section.\n\n(i)  Exceptions.  The requirements of this paragraph (c)(1) shall not apply to the following classes of wheels and conditions.\n\n( a ) Wheels used for internal work while within the work being ground;\n\n( b ) Mounted wheels used in portable operations 2 inches and smaller in diameter; (see definition \u00a7 1910.241(b)(1)); and\n\n( c ) Types 16, 17, 18, 18R, and 19 cones, and plugs, and threaded hole pot balls where the work offers protection.\n\n(ii)( a ) A safety guard shall cover the spindle end, nut and flange projections. The safety guard shall be mounted so as to maintain proper alignment with the wheel, and the strength of the fastenings shall exceed the strength of the guard.\n\n( b )  Exception.  Safety guards on all operations where the work provides a suitable measure of protection to the operator may be so constructed that the spindle end, nut and outer flange are exposed. Where the nature of the work is such as to entirely cover the side of the wheel, the side covers of the guard may be omitted.\n\n( c )  Exception.  The spindle end, nut, and outer flange may be exposed on portable machines designed for, and used with, type 6, 11, 27, and 28 abrasive wheels, cutting off wheels, and tuck pointing wheels.\n\n(2)  Cup wheels.  Cup wheels (Types 6 and 11) shall be protected by:\n\n(i) Safety guards as specified in paragraph (c)(1) of this section; or,\n\n(ii) Special \u201crevolving cup guards\u201d which mount behind the wheel and turn with it. They shall be made of steel or other material with adequate strength and shall enclose the wheel sides upward from the back for one-third of the wheel thickness. The mounting features shall conform with all regulations. (See paragraph (c)(5) of this section.) It is necessary to maintain clearance between the wheel side and the guard. The clearance shall not exceed one-sixteenth inch; or,\n\n(iii) Some other form of guard that will insure as good protection as that which would be provided by the guards specified in paragraph (c)(1) (i) or (ii) of this subparagraph.\n\n(3)  Vertical portable grinders.  Safety guards used on machines known as right angle head or vertical portable grinders shall have a maximum exposure angle of 180\u00b0, and the guard shall be so located so as to be between the operator and the wheel during use. Adjustment of guard shall be such that pieces of an accidentally broken wheel will be deflected away from the operator. (See Figure P-4.)\n\n(4)  Other portable grinders.  The maximum angular exposure of the grinding wheel periphery and sides for safety guards used on other portable grinding machines shall not exceed 180\u00b0 and the top half of the wheel shall be enclosed at all times. (See Figures P-5 and P-6.)\n\n(5)  Mounting and inspection of abrasive wheels.  (i) Immediately before mounting, all wheels shall be closely inspected and sounded by the user (ring test, see subpart O, \u00a7 1910.215(d)(1)) to make sure they have not been damaged in transit, storage, or otherwise. The spindle speed of the machine shall be checked before mounting of the wheel to be certain that it does not exceed the maximum operating speed marked on the wheel.\n\n(ii) Grinding wheels shall fit freely on the spindle and remain free under all grinding conditions. A controlled clearance between the wheel hole and the machine spindle (or wheel sleeves or adaptors) is essential to avoid excessive pressure from mounting and spindle expansion. To accomplish this, the machine spindle shall be made to nominal (standard) size plus zero minus .002 inch, and the wheel hole shall be made suitably oversize to assure safety clearance under the conditions of operating heat and pressure.\n\n(iii) All contact surfaces of wheels, blotters, and flangers shall be flat and free of foreign matter.\n\n(iv) When a bushing is used in the wheel hole it shall not exceed the width of the wheel and shall not contact the flanges.\n\n(v) Requirements for the use of flanges and blotters, see subpart O, \u00a7 1910.215(c).\n\n(6)  Excluded machinery.  Natural sandstone wheels and metal, wooden, cloth, or paper discs, having a layer of abrasive on the surface are not covered by this paragraph.\n\n(d)  Explosive actuated fastening tools \u2014(1)  General requirements.  (i) Explosive-actuated fastening tools that are actuated by explosives or any similar means, and propel a stud, pin, fastener, or other object for the purpose of affixing it by penetration to any other object shall meet the design requirements specified by paragraph (d)(2) of this section. This requirement does not apply to devices designed for attaching objects to soft construction materials, such as wood, plaster, tar, dry wallboard, and the like, or to stud-welding equipment.\n\n(ii) Operators and assistants using tools shall be safeguarded by means of eye protection. Head and face protection shall be used, as required by working conditions, as set forth in subpart I.\n\n(2)  Inspection, maintenance, and tool handling \u2014(i)  High-velocity tools.  Tools of this type shall have the characteristics outlined in ( a ) through ( h ) of this section.\n\n( a ) The muzzle end of the tool shall have a protective shield or guard at least 3\n 1/2  inches in diameter, mounted perpendicular to and concentric with the barrel, and designed to confine any flying fragments or particles that might otherwise create a hazard at the time of firing.\n\n( b ) Where a standard shield or guard cannot be used, or where it does not cover all apparent avenues through which flying particles might escape, a special shield, guard, fixture, or jig designed and built by the manufacturer of the tool being used, which provides this degree of protection, shall be used as a substitute.\n\n( c ) The tool shall be so designed that it cannot be fired unless it is equipped with a standard protective shield or guard, or a special shield, guard, fixture, or jig.\n\n( d )( 1 ) The firing mechanism shall be so designed that the tool cannot fire during loading or preparation to fire, or if the tool should be dropped while loaded.\n\n( 2 ) Firing of the tool shall be dependent upon at least two separate and distinct operations of the operator, with the final firing movement being separate from the operation of bringing the tool into the firing position.\n\n( e ) The tool shall be so designed as not to be operable other than against a work surface, and unless the operator is holding the tool against the work surface with a force at least 5 pounds greater than the total weight of the tool.\n\n( f ) The tool shall be so designed that it will not operate when equipped with the standard guard indexed to the center position if any bearing surface of the guard is tilted more than 8\u00b0 from contact with the work surface.\n\n( g ) The tool shall be so designed that positive means of varying the power are available or can be made available to the operator as part of the tool, or as an auxiliary, in order to make it possible for the operator to select a power level adequate to perform the desired work without excessive force.\n\n( h ) The tool shall be so designed that all breeching parts will be reasonably visible to allow a check for any foreign matter that may be present.\n\n(ii) Tools of the low-velocity-piston type shall have the characteristics outlined in paragraphs (d)(2)(ii) ( a ) through ( e ) of this section and any additional safety features he may wish to incorporate.\n\n( a ) The muzzle end of the tool shall be designed so that suitable protective shields, guards, jigs, or fixtures, designed and built by the manufacturer of the tool being used, can be mounted perpendicular to the barrel. A standard spall shield shall be supplied with each tool.\n\n( b )( 1 ) The tool shall be designed so that it shall not in ordinary usage propel or discharge a stud, pin, or fastener while loading or during preparation to fire, or if the tool should be dropped while loaded.\n\n( 2 ) Firing of the tool shall be dependent upon at least two separate and distinct operations of the operator, with the final firing movement being separate from the operation of bringing the tool into the firing position.\n\n( c ) The tool shall be so designed as not to be operable other than against a work surface, and unless the operator is holding the tool against the work surface with a force at least 5 pounds greater than the total weight of the tool.\n\n( d ) The tool shall be so designed that positive means of varying the power are available or can be made available to the operator as part of the tool, or as an auxiliary, in order to make it possible for the operator to select a power level adequate to perform the desired work without excessive force.\n\n( e ) The tool shall be so designed that all breeching parts will be reasonably visible to allow a check for any foreign matter that may be present.\n\n(iii) Tools of the hammer-operated piston tools\u2014low-velocity type shall have the characteristics outlined in paragraphs (d)(2)(iii) ( a ) through ( e ) of this section.\n\n( a ) The muzzle end of the tool shall be so designed that suitable protective shields, guards, jigs, or fixtures, designed and built by the manufacturer of the tool being used, can be mounted perpendicular to the barrel. A standard spall shield shall be supplied with each tool.\n\n( b ) The tool shall be so designed that it shall not in ordinary usage propel or discharge a stud, pin, or fastener while loading, or during preparation to fire, or if the tool should be dropped while loaded.\n\n( c ) Firing of the tool shall be dependent upon at least two separate and distinct operations of the operator, with the final firing movement being separate from the operation of bringing the tool into the firing position.\n\n( d ) The tool shall be so designed that positive means of varying the power are available or can be made available to the operator as part of the tool, or as an auxiliary, in order to make it possible for the operator to select a power level adequate to perform the desired work without excessive force.\n\n( e ) The tool shall be so designed that all breeching parts will be reasonably visible to allow a check for any foreign matter that may be present.\n\n(3)  Requirements for loads and fasteners.  (i) There shall be a standard means of identifying the power levels of loads used in tools.\n\n(ii) [Reserved]\n\n(iii) No load (cased or caseless) shall be used if it will accurately chamber in any existing approved commercially available low-velocity piston tool or hammer operated piston tool\u2014low-velocity type and will cause a fastener to have a mean velocity in excess of 300 feet per second when measured 6.5 feet from the muzzle end of the barrel. No individual test firing of a series shall exceed 300 feet per second by more than 8 percent.\n\n(iv) Fasteners used in tools shall be only those specifically manufactured for use in such tools.\n\n(4)  Operating requirements.  (i) Before using a tool, the operator shall inspect it to determine to his satisfaction that it is clean, that all moving parts operate freely, and that the barrel is free from obstructions.\n\n(ii) When a tool develops a defect during use, the operator shall immediately cease to use it, until it is properly repaired.\n\n(iii) Tools shall not be loaded until just prior to the intended firing time. Neither loaded nor empty tools are to be pointed at any workmen.\n\n(iv) No tools shall be loaded unless being prepared for immediate use, nor shall an unattended tool be left loaded.\n\n(v) In case of a misfire, the operator shall hold the tool in the operating position for at least 30 seconds. He shall then try to operate the tool a second time. He shall wait another 30 seconds, holding the tool in the operating position; then he shall proceed to remove the explosive load in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.\n\n(vi) A tool shall never be left unattended in a place where it would be available to unauthorized persons.\n\n(vii) Fasteners shall not be driven into very hard or brittle materials including, but not limited to, cast iron, glazed tile, surface-hardened steel, glass block, live rock, face brick, or hollow tile.\n\n(viii) Driving into materials easily penetrated shall be avoided unless such materials are backed by a substance that will prevent the pin or fastener from passing completely through and creating a flying-missile hazard on the other side.\n\n(ix)( a ) Fasteners shall not be driven directly into materials such as brick or concrete closer than 3 inches from the unsupported edge or corner, or into steel surfaces closer than one-half inch from the unsupported edge or corner, unless a special guard, fixture, or jig is used. (Exception: Low-velocity tools may drive no closer than 2 inches from an edge in concrete or one-fourth inch in steel.)\n\n( b ) When fastening other materials, such as a 2- by 4-inch wood section to a concrete surface, it is permissible to drive a fastener of no greater than \n 7/32 -inch shank diameter not closer than 2 inches from the unsupported edge or corner of the work surface.\n\n(x) Fasteners shall not be driven through existing holes unless a positive guide is used to secure accurate alignment.\n\n(xi) No fastener shall be driven into a spalled area caused by an unsatisfactory fastening.\n\n(xii) Tools shall not be used in an explosive or flammable atmosphere.\n\n(xiii) All tools shall be used with the correct shield, guard, or attachment recommended by the manufacturer.\n\n(xiv) Any tool found not in proper working order shall be immediately removed from service. The tool shall be inspected at regular intervals and shall be repaired in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications.\n\n(e)  Power lawnmowers \u2014(1)  General requirements.  (i) Power lawnmowers of the walk-behind, riding-rotary, and reel power lawnmowers shall be guarded in accordance with the machine guarding requirements in 29 CFR 1910.212, General requirements for all machines.\n\n(ii) All power-driven chains, belts, and gears shall be so positioned or otherwise guarded to prevent the operator's accidental contact therewith, during normal starting, mounting, and operation of the machine.\n\n(iii) A shutoff device shall be provided to stop operation of the motor or engine. This device shall require manual and intentional reactivation to restart the motor or engine.\n\n(iv) All positions of the operating controls shall be clearly identified.\n\n(v) The words, \u201cCaution. Be sure the operating control(s) is in neutral before starting the engine,\u201d or similar wording shall be clearly visible at an engine starting control point on self-propelled mowers.\n\n(2)  Walk-behind and riding rotary mowers.  (i) The mower blade shall be enclosed except on the bottom and the enclosure shall extend to or below the lowest cutting point of the blade in the lowest blade position.\n\n(ii) Guards which must be removed to install a catcher assembly shall comply with the following:\n\n( a ) Warning instructions shall be affixed to the mower near the opening stating that the mower shall not be used without either the catcher assembly or the guard in place.\n\n( b ) The catcher assembly or the guard shall be shipped and sold as part of the mower.\n\n( c ) The instruction manual shall state that the mower shall not be used without either the catcher assembly or the guard in place.\n\n( d ) The catcher assembly, when properly and completely installed, shall not create a condition which violates the limits given for the guarded opening.\n\n(iii) Openings in the blade enclosure, intended for the discharge of grass, shall be limited to a maximum vertical angle of the opening of 30\u00b0. Measurements shall be taken from the lowest blade position.\n\n(iv) The total effective opening area of the grass discharge opening(s) shall not exceed 1,000 square degrees on units having a width of cut less than 27\n 1/2  inches, or 2,000 square degrees on units having a width of cut 27\n 1/2  inches or over.\n\n(v) The word \u201cCaution.\u201d or stronger wording, shall be placed on the mower at or near each discharge opening.\n\n(vi) [Reserved]\n\n(vii) Blade(s) shall stop rotating from the manufacturer's specified maximum speed within 15 seconds after declutching, or shutting off power.\n\n(viii) In a multipiece blade, the means of fastening the cutting members to the body of the blade or disc shall be so designed that they will not become worn to a hazardous condition before the cutting members themselves are worn beyond use.\n\n(ix) The maximum tip speed of any blade shall be 19,000 feet per minute.\n\n(3)  Walk-behind rotary mowers.  (i) The horizontal angle of the opening(s) in the blade enclosure, intended for the discharge of grass, shall not contact the operator area.\n\n(ii) There shall be one of the following at all openings in the blade enclosure intended for the discharge of grass:\n\n( a ) A minimum unobstructed horizontal distance of 3 inches from the end of the discharge chute to the blade tip circle.\n\n( b ) A rigid bar fastened across the discharge opening, secured to prevent removal without the use of tools. The bottom of the bar shall be no higher than the bottom edge of the blade enclosure.\n\n(iii) The highest point(s) of the front of the blade enclosure, except discharge openings, shall be such that any line extending a maximum of 15\u00b0 downward from the horizontal toward the blade shaft axis (axes) shall not intersect the horizontal plane within the blade tip circle. The highest point(s) on the blade enclosure front, except discharge-openings, shall not exceed 1\n 1/4  inches above the lowest cutting point of the blade in the lowest blade position. Mowers with a swingover handle are to be considered as having no front in the blade enclosure and therefore shall comply with paragraph (e)(2)(i) of this section.\n\n(iv) The mower handle shall be fastened to the mower so as to prevent loss of control by unintentional uncoupling while in operation.\n\n(v) A positive upstop or latch shall be provided for the mower handle in the normal operating position(s). The upstop shall not be subject to unintentional disengagement during normal operation of the mower. The upstop or latch shall not allow the center or the handle grips to come closer than 17 inches horizontally behind the closest path of the mower blade(s) unless manually disengaged.\n\n(vi) A swing-over handle, which complies with the above requirements, will be permitted.\n\n(vii) Wheel drive disengaging controls, except deadman controls, shall move opposite to the direction of the vehicle motion in order to disengage the drive. Deadman controls shall automatically interrupt power to a drive when the operator's actuating force is removed, and may operate in any direction to disengage the drive.\n\n(4)  Riding rotary mowers.  (i) The highest point(s) of all openings in the blade enclosure, front shall be limited by a vertical angle of opening of 15\u00b0 and a maximum distance of 1\n 1/4  inches above the lowest cutting point of the blade in the lowest blade position.\n\n(ii) Opening(s) shall be placed so that grass or debris will not discharge directly toward any part of an operator seated in a normal operator position.\n\n(iii) There shall be one of the following at all openings in the blade enclosure intended for the discharge of grass:\n\n( a ) A minimum unobstructed horizontal distance of 6 inches from the end of the discharge chute to the blade tip circle.\n\n( b ) A rigid bar fastened across the discharge opening, secured to prevent removal without the use of tools. The bottom of the bar shall be no higher than the bottom edge of the blade enclosure.\n\n(iv) Mowers shall be provided with stops to prevent jackknifing or locking of the steering mechanism.\n\n(v) Vehicle stopping means shall be provided.\n\n(vi) Hand-operated wheel drive disengaging controls shall move opposite to the direction of vehicle motion in order to disengage the drive. Foot-operated wheel drive disengaging controls shall be depressed to disengage the drive. Deadman controls, both hand and foot operated, shall automatically interrupt power to a drive when the operator's actuating force is removed, and may operate in any direction to disengage the drive."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.16.37.4", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "P", "Subpart P\u2014Hand and Portable Powered Tools and Other Hand-Held Equipment", "", "\u00a7 1910.244 Other portable tools and equipment.", "OSHA", "", "", "[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984]", "(a)  Jacks \u2014(1)  Loading and marking.  (i) The operator shall make sure that the jack used has a rating sufficient to lift and sustain the load.\n\n(ii) The rated load shall be legibly and permanently marked in a prominent location on the jack by casting, stamping, or other suitable means.\n\n(2)  Operation and maintenance.  (i) In the absence of a firm foundation, the base of the jack shall be blocked. If there is a possibility of slippage of the cap, a block shall be placed in between the cap and the load.\n\n(ii) The operator shall watch the stop indicator, which shall be kept clean, in order to determine the limit of travel. The indicated limit shall not be overrun.\n\n(iii) After the load has been raised, it shall be cribbed, blocked, or otherwise secured at once.\n\n(iv) Hydraulic jacks exposed to freezing temperatures shall be supplied with an adequate antifreeze liquid.\n\n(v) All jacks shall be properly lubricated at regular intervals.\n\n(vi) Each jack shall be thoroughly inspected at times which depend upon the service conditions. Inspections shall be not less frequent than the following:\n\n( a ) For constant or intermittent use at one locality, once every 6 months,\n\n( b ) For jacks sent out of shop for special work, when sent out and when returned,\n\n( c ) For a jack subjected to abnormal load or shock, immediately before and immediately thereafter.\n\n(vii) Repair or replacement parts shall be examined for possible defects.\n\n(viii) Jacks which are out of order shall be tagged accordingly, and shall not be used until repairs are made.\n\n(b)  Abrasive blast cleaning nozzles.  The blast cleaning nozzles shall be equipped with an operating valve which must be held open manually. A support shall be provided on which the nozzle may be mounted when it is not in use."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.17.37.1", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "Q", "Subpart Q\u2014Welding, Cutting and Brazing", "", "\u00a7 1910.251 Definitions.", "OSHA", "", "", "[55 FR 13696, Apr. 11, 1990, as amended at 61 FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996; 72 FR 71070, Dec. 14, 2007]", "As used in this subpart:\n\n(a)  Welder  and  welding operator  mean any operator of electric or gas welding and cutting equipment.\n\n(b)  Approved  means listed or approved by a nationally recognized testing laboratory. Refer to \u00a7 1910.155(c)(3) for definitions of listed and approved, and \u00a7 1910.7 for nationally recognized testing laboratory."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.17.37.2", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "Q", "Subpart Q\u2014Welding, Cutting and Brazing", "", "\u00a7 1910.252 General requirements.", "OSHA", "", "", "[55 FR 13696, Apr. 11, 1990, as amended at 61 FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 1284, Jan. 8, 1998; 74 FR 46357, Sept. 9, 2009; 77 FR 17777, Mar. 26, 2012]", "(a)  Fire prevention and protection \u2014(1)  Basic precautions.  For elaboration of these basic precautions and of the special precautions of paragraph (a)(2) of this section as well as a delineation of the fire protection and prevention responsibilities of welders and cutters, their supervisors (including outside contractors) and those in management on whose property cutting and welding is to be performed, see Standard for Fire Prevention in Use of Cutting and Welding Processes, NFPA Standard 51B, 1962, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6. The basic precautions for fire prevention in welding or cutting work are:\n\n(i)  Fire hazards.  If the object to be welded or cut cannot readily be moved, all movable fire hazards in the vicinity shall be taken to a safe place.\n\n(ii)  Guards.  If the object to be welded or cut cannot be moved and if all the fire hazards cannot be removed, then guards shall be used to confine the heat, sparks, and slag, and to protect the immovable fire hazards.\n\n(iii)  Restrictions.  If the requirements stated in paragraphs (a)(1)(i) and (a)(1)(ii) of this section cannot be followed then welding and cutting shall not be performed.\n\n(2)  Special precautions.  When the nature of the work to be performed falls within the scope of paragraph (a)(1)(ii) of this section certain additional precautions may be necessary:\n\n(i)  Combustible material.  Wherever there are floor openings or cracks in the flooring that cannot be closed, precautions shall be taken so that no readily combustible materials on the floor below will be exposed to sparks which might drop through the floor. The same precautions shall be observed with regard to cracks or holes in walls, open doorways and open or broken windows.\n\n(ii)  Fire extinquishers.  Suitable fire extinguishing equipment shall be maintained in a state of readiness for instant use. Such equipment may consist of pails of water, buckets of sand, hose or portable extinguishers depending upon the nature and quantity of the combustible material exposed.\n\n(iii)  Fire watch.  (A) Fire watchers shall be required whenever welding or cutting is performed in locations where other than a minor fire might develop, or any of the following conditions exist:\n\n( 1 ) Appreciable combustible material, in building construction or contents, closer than 35 feet (10.7 m) to the point of operation.\n\n( 2 ) Appreciable combustibles are more than 35 feet (10.7 m) away but are easily ignited by sparks.\n\n( 3 ) Wall or floor openings within a 35-foot (10.7 m) radius expose combustible material in adjacent areas including concealed spaces in walls or floors.\n\n( 4 ) Combustible materials are adjacent to the opposite side of metal partitions, walls, ceilings, or roofs and are likely to be ignited by conduction or radiation.\n\n(B) Fire watchers shall have fire extinguishing equipment readily available and be trained in its use. They shall be familiar with facilities for sounding an alarm in the event of a fire. They shall watch for fires in all exposed areas, try to extinguish them only when obviously within the capacity of the equipment available, or otherwise sound the alarm. A fire watch shall be maintained for at least a half hour after completion of welding or cutting operations to detect and extinguish possible smoldering fires.\n\n(iv)  Authorization.  Before cutting or welding is permitted, the area shall be inspected by the individual responsible for authorizing cutting and welding operations. He shall designate precautions to be followed in granting authorization to proceed preferably in the form of a written permit.\n\n(v)  Floors.  Where combustible materials such as paper clippings, wood shavings, or textile fibers are on the floor, the floor shall be swept clean for a radius of 35 feet (10.7 m). Combustible floors shall be kept wet, covered with damp sand, or protected by fire-resistant shields. Where floors have been wet down, personnel operating arc welding or cutting equipment shall be protected from possible shock.\n\n(vi)  Prohibited areas.  Cutting or welding shall not be permitted in the following situations:\n\n(A) In areas not authorized by management.\n\n(B) In sprinklered buildings while such protection is impaired.\n\n(C) In the presence of explosive atmospheres (mixtures of flammable gases, vapors, liquids, or dusts with air), or explosive atmospheres that may develop inside uncleaned or improperly prepared tanks or equipment which have previously contained such materials, or that may develop in areas with an accumulation of combustible dusts.\n\n(D) In areas near the storage of large quantities of exposed, readily ignitible materials such as bulk sulfur, baled paper, or cotton.\n\n(vii)  Relocation of combustibles.  Where practicable, all combustibles shall be relocated at least 35 feet (10.7 m) from the work site. Where relocation is impracticable, combustibles shall be protected with flameproofed covers or otherwise shielded with metal or asbestos guards or curtains.\n\n(viii)  Ducts.  Ducts and conveyor systems that might carry sparks to distant combustibles shall be suitably protected or shut down.\n\n(ix)  Combustible walls.  Where cutting or welding is done near walls, partitions, ceiling or roof of combustible construction, fire-resistant shields or guards shall be provided to prevent ignition.\n\n(x)  Noncombustible walls.  If welding is to be done on a metal wall, partition, ceiling or roof, precautions shall be taken to prevent ignition of combustibles on the other side, due to conduction or radiation, preferably by relocating combustibles. Where combustibles are not relocated, a fire watch on the opposite side from the work shall be provided.\n\n(xi)  Combustible cover.  Welding shall not be attempted on a metal partition, wall, ceiling or roof having a combustible covering nor on walls or partitions of combustible sandwich-type panel construction.\n\n(xii)  Pipes.  Cutting or welding on pipes or other metal in contact with combustible walls, partitions, ceilings or roofs shall not be undertaken if the work is close enough to cause ignition by conduction.\n\n(xiii)  Management.  Management shall recognize its responsibility for the safe usage of cutting and welding equipment on its property and:\n\n(A) Based on fire potentials of plant facilities, establish areas for cutting and welding, and establish procedures for cutting and welding, in other areas.\n\n(B) Designate an individual responsible for authorizing cutting and welding operations in areas not specifically designed for such processes.\n\n(C) Insist that cutters or welders and their supervisors are suitably trained in the safe operation of their equipment and the safe use of the process.\n\n(D) Advise all contractors about flammable materials or hazardous conditions of which they may not be aware.\n\n(xiv)  Supervisor.  The Supervisor:\n\n(A) Shall be responsible for the safe handling of the cutting or welding equipment and the safe use of the cutting or welding process.\n\n(B) Shall determine the combustible materials and hazardous areas present or likely to be present in the work location.\n\n(C) Shall protect combustibles from ignition by the following:\n\n( 1 ) Have the work moved to a location free from dangerous combustibles.\n\n( 2 ) If the work cannot be moved, have the combustibles moved to a safe distance from the work or have the combustibles properly shielded against ignition.\n\n( 3 ) See that cutting and welding are so scheduled that plant operations that might expose combustibles to ignition are not started during cutting or welding.\n\n(D) Shall secure authorization for the cutting or welding operations from the designated management representative.\n\n(E) Shall determine that the cutter or welder secures his approval that conditions are safe before going ahead.\n\n(F) Shall determine that fire protection and extinguishing equipment are properly located at the site.\n\n(G) Where fire watches are required, he shall see that they are available at the site.\n\n(xv)  Fire prevention precautions.  Cutting or welding shall be permitted only in areas that are or have been made fire safe. When work cannot be moved practically, as in most construction work, the area shall be made safe by removing combustibles or protecting combustibles from ignition sources.\n\n(3)  Welding or cutting containers \u2014(i)  Used containers.  No welding, cutting, or other hot work shall be performed on used drums, barrels, tanks or other containers until they have been cleaned so thoroughly as to make absolutely certain that there are no flammable materials present or any substances such as greases, tars, acids, or other materials which when subjected to heat, might produce flammable or toxic vapors. Any pipe lines or connections to the drum or vessel shall be disconnected or blanked.\n\n(ii)  Venting and purging.  All hollow spaces, cavities or containers shall be vented to permit the escape of air or gases before preheating, cutting or welding. Purging with inert gas is recommended.\n\n(4)  Confined spaces \u2014(i)  Accidental contact.  When arc welding is to be suspended for any substantial period of time, such as during lunch or overnight, all electrodes shall be removed from the holders and the holders carefully located so that accidental contact cannot occur and the machine be disconnected from the power source.\n\n(ii)  Torch valve.  In order to eliminate the possibility of gas escaping through leaks or improperly closed valves, when gas welding or cutting, the torch valves shall be closed and the gas supply to the torch positively shut off at some point outside the confined area whenever the torch is not to be used for a substantial period of time, such as during lunch hour or overnight. Where practicable, the torch and hose shall also be removed from the confined space.\n\n(b)  Protection of personnel \u2014(1)  General \u2014(i)  Railing.  A welder or helper working on platforms, scaffolds, or runways shall be protected against falling. This may be accomplished by the use of railings, safety belts, life lines, or some other equally effective safeguards.\n\n(ii)  Welding cable.  Welders shall place welding cable and other equipment so that it is clear of passageways, ladders, and stairways.\n\n(2)  Eye protection \u2014(i)  Selection.  (A) Helmets or hand shields shall be used during all arc welding or arc cutting operations, excluding submerged arc welding. Helpers or attendants shall be provided with proper eye protection.\n\n(B) Goggles or other suitable eye protection shall be used during all gas welding or oxygen cutting operations. Spectacles without side shields, with suitable filter lenses are permitted for use during gas welding operations on light work, for torch brazing or for inspection.\n\n(C) All operators and attendants of resistance welding or resistance brazing equipment shall use transparent face shields or goggles, depending on the particular job, to protect their faces or eyes, as required.\n\n(D) Eye protection in the form of suitable goggles shall be provided where needed for brazing operations not covered in paragraphs (b)(2)(i)(A) through (b)(2)(i)(C) of this section.\n\n(ii)  Specifications for protectors.  (A) Helmets and hand shields shall be made of a material which is an insulator for heat and electricity. Helmets, shields and goggles shall be not readily flammable and shall be capable of withstanding sterilization.\n\n(B) Helmets and hand shields shall be arranged to protect the face, neck and ears from direct radiant energy from the arc.\n\n(C) Helmets shall be provided with filter plates and cover plates designed for easy removal.\n\n(D) All parts shall be constructed of a material which will not readily corrode or discolor the skin.\n\n(E) Goggles shall be ventilated to prevent fogging of the lenses as much as practicable.\n\n(F) All glass for lenses shall be tempered, substantially free from striae, air bubbles, waves and other flaws. Except when a lens is ground to provide proper optical correction for defective vision, the front and rear surfaces of lenses and windows shall be smooth and parallel.\n\n(G) Lenses shall bear some permanent distinctive marking by which the source and shade may be readily identified.\n\n(H) The following is a guide for the selection of the proper shade numbers. These recommendations may be varied to suit the individual's needs.\n\nNote: In gas welding or oxygen cutting where the torch produces a high yellow light, it is desirable to use a filter or lens that absorbs the yellow or sodium line in the visible light of the operation.\n\n(I) Filter lenses must meet the test for transmission of radiant energy prescribed by any of the consensus standards listed in 29 CFR 1910.133(b)(1).\n\n(iii)  Protection from arc welding rays.  Where the work permits, the welder should be enclosed in an individual booth painted with a finish of low reflectivity such as zinc oxide (an important factor for absorbing ultraviolet radiations) and lamp black, or shall be enclosed with noncombustible screens similarly painted. Booths and screens shall permit circulation of air at floor level. Workers or other persons adjacent to the welding areas shall be protected from the rays by noncombustible or flameproof screens or shields or shall be required to wear appropriate goggles.\n\n(3)  Protective clothing\u2014General requirements.  Employees exposed to the hazards created by welding, cutting, or brazing operations shall be protected by personal protective equipment in accordance with the requirements of \u00a7 1910.132 of this part. Appropriate protective clothing required for any welding operation will vary with the size, nature and location of the work to be performed.\n\n(4)  Work in confined spaces \u2014(i)  General.  As used herein confined space is intended to mean a relatively small or restricted space such as a tank, boiler, pressure vessel, or small compartment of a ship.\n\n(ii)  Ventilation.  Ventilation is a prerequisite to work in confined spaces. For ventilation requirements see paragraph (c) of this section.\n\n(iii)  Securing cylinders and machinery.  When welding or cutting is being performed in any confined spaces the gas cylinders and welding machines shall be left on the outside. Before operations are started, heavy portable equipment mounted on wheels shall be securely blocked to prevent accidental movement.\n\n(iv)  Lifelines.  Where a welder must enter a confined space through a manhole or other small opening, means shall be provided for quickly removing him in case of emergency. When safety belts and lifelines are used for this purpose they shall be so attached to the welder's body that his body cannot be jammed in a small exit opening. An attendant with a preplanned rescue procedure shall be stationed outside to observe the welder at all times and be capable of putting rescue operations into effect.\n\n(v)  Electrode removal.  When arc welding is to be suspended for any substantial period of time, such as during lunch or overnight, all electrodes shall be removed from the holders and the holders carefully located so that accidental contact cannot occur and the machine disconnected from the power source.\n\n(vi)  Gas cylinder shutoff.  In order to eliminate the possibility of gas escaping through leaks of improperly closed valves, when gas welding or cutting, the torch valves shall be closed and the fuel-gas and oxygen supply to the torch positively shut off at some point outside the confined area whenever the torch is not to be used for a substantial period of time, such as during lunch hour or overnight. Where practicable the torch and hose shall also be removed from the confined space.\n\n(vii)  Warning sign.  After welding operations are completed, the welder shall mark the hot metal or provide some other means of warning other workers.\n\n(c)  Health protection and ventilation \u2014(1)  General \u2014(i)  Contamination.  The requirements in this paragraph have been established on the basis of the following three factors in arc and gas welding which govern the amount of contamination to which welders may be exposed:\n\n(A) Dimensions of space in which welding is to be done (with special regard to height of ceiling).\n\n(B) Number of welders.\n\n(C) Possible evolution of hazardous fumes, gases, or dust according to the metals involved.\n\n(ii)  Screens.  When welding must be performed in a space entirely screened on all sides, the screens shall be so arranged that no serious restriction of ventilation exists. It is desirable to have the screens so mounted that they are about 2 feet (0.61 m) above the floor unless the work is performed at so low a level that the screen must be extended nearer to the floor to protect nearby workers from the glare of welding.\n\n(iii)  Maximum allowable concentration.  Local exhaust or general ventilating systems shall be provided and arranged to keep the amount of toxic fumes, gases, or dusts below the maximum allowable concentration as specified in \u00a7 1910.1000 of this part.\n\n(iv)  Hazard communication.  The employer shall include the potentially hazardous materials employed in fluxes, coatings, coverings, and filler metals, all of which are potentially used in welding and cutting, or are released to the atmosphere during welding and cutting, in the program established to comply with the Hazard Communication Standard (HCS) (\u00a7 1910.1200). The employer shall ensure that each employee has access to labels on containers of such materials and safety data sheets, and is trained in accordance with the provisions of \u00a7 1910.1200. Potentially hazardous materials shall include but not be limited to the materials itemized in paragraphs (c)(5) through (c)(12) of this section.\n\n(v)  Additional considerations for hazard communication in welding, cutting, and brazing.  (A) The suppliers shall determine and shall label in accordance with \u00a7 1910.1200 any hazards associated with the use of their materials in welding, cutting, and brazing.\n\n(B) In addition to any requirements imposed by \u00a7 1910.1200, all filler metals and fusible granular materials shall carry the following notice, as a minimum, on tags, boxes, or other containers:\n\nDo not use in areas without adequate ventilation.  See  ANSI Z49.1-1967 Safety in Welding, Cutting, and Allied Processes published by the American Welding Society.\n\nDo not use in areas without adequate ventilation.  See  ANSI Z49.1-1967 Safety in Welding, Cutting, and Allied Processes published by the American Welding Society.\n\n(C) Where brazing (welding) filler metals contain cadmium in significant amounts, the labels shall indicate the hazards associated with cadmium including cancer, lung and kidney effects, and acute toxicity effects.\n\n(D) Where brazing and gas welding fluxes contain fluorine compounds, the labels shall indicate the hazards associated with fluorine compounds including eye and respiratory tract effects.\n\n(vi) Prior to June 1, 2015, employers may include the following information on labels in lieu of the labeling requirements in paragraph (c)(1)(v) of this section:\n\n(A) All filler metals and fusible granular materials shall carry the following notice, as a minimum, on tags, boxes, or other containers:\n\nCAUTION\n\nCAUTION\n\nWelding may produce fumes and gases hazardous to health. Avoid breathing these fumes and gases. Use adequate ventilation.  See  ANSI Z49.1-1967 Safety in Welding and Cutting published by the American Welding Society.\n\n(B) Brazing (welding) filler metals containing cadmium in significant amounts shall carry the following notice on tags, boxes, or other containers:\n\nWARNING\n \n CONTAINS CADMIUM\u2014POISONOUS FUMES MAY BE FORMED ON HEATING\n\nWARNING\n\nCONTAINS CADMIUM\u2014POISONOUS FUMES MAY BE FORMED ON HEATING\n\nDo not breathe fumes. Use only with adequate ventilation such as fume collectors, exhaust ventilators, or air-supplied respirators.  See  ANSI Z49.1-1967. If chest pain, cough, or fever develops after use call physician immediately.\n\n(C) Brazing and gas welding fluxes containing fluorine compounds shall have a cautionary wording to indicate that they contain fluorine compounds. One such cautionary wording recommended by the American Welding Society for brazing and gas welding fluxes reads as follows:\n\nCAUTION\n \n CONTAINS FLUORIDES\n\nCAUTION\n\nCONTAINS FLUORIDES\n\nThis flux when heated gives off fumes that may irritate eyes, nose and throat.\n\n1. Avoid fumes\u2014use only in well-ventilated spaces.\n\n2. Avoid contact of flux with eyes or skin.\n\n3. Do not take internally.\n\n(2)  Ventilation for general welding and cutting \u2014(i)  General.  Mechanical ventilation shall be provided when welding or cutting is done on metals not covered in paragraphs (c)(5) through (c)(12) of this section. (For specific materials, see the ventilation requirements of paragraphs (c)(5) through (c)(12) of this section.)\n\n(A) In a space of less than 10,000 cubic feet (284 m \n 3 ) per welder.\n\n(B) In a room having a ceiling height of less than 16 feet (5 m).\n\n(C) In confined spaces or where the welding space contains partitions, balconies, or other structural barriers to the extent that they significantly obstruct cross ventilation.\n\n(ii)  Minimum rate.  Such ventilation shall be at the minimum rate of 2,000 cubic feet (57 m\n 3 ) per minute per welder, except where local exhaust hoods and booths as per paragraph (c)(3) of this section, or airline respirators approved by the Mine Safety and Health Administration and the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, pursuant to the provisions of 30 CFR part 11, are provided. Natural ventilation is considered sufficient for welding or cutting operations where the restrictions in paragraph (c)(2)(i) of this section are not present.\n\n(3)  Local exhaust hoods and booths.  Mechanical local exhaust ventilation may be by means of either of the following:\n\n(i)  Hoods.  Freely movable hoods intended to be placed by the welder as near as practicable to the work being welded and provided with a rate of air-flow sufficient to maintain a velocity in the direction of the hood of 100 linear feet (30 m) per minute in the zone of welding when the hood is at its most remote distance from the point of welding. The rates of ventilation required to accomplish this control velocity using a 3-inch (7.6 cm) wide flanged suction opening are shown in the following table:\n\n1  When brazing with cadmium bearing materials or when cutting on such materials increased rates of ventilation may be required.\n\n2  Nearest half-inch duct diameter based on 4,000 feet per minute velocity in pipe.\n\n(ii)  Fixed enclosure.  A fixed enclosure with a top and not less than two sides which surround the welding or cutting operations and with a rate of airflow sufficient to maintain a velocity away from the welder of not less than 100 linear feet (30 m) per minute.\n\n(4)  Ventilation in confined spaces \u2014(i)  Air replacement.  All welding and cutting operations carried on in confined spaces shall be adequately ventilated to prevent the accumulation of toxic materials or possible oxygen deficiency. This applies not only to the welder but also to helpers and other personnel in the immediate vicinity. All air replacing that withdrawn shall be clean and respirable.\n\n(ii)  Airline respirators.  In circumstances for which it is impossible to provide such ventilation, airline respirators or hose masks approved for this purpose by the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) under 42 CFR part 84 must be used.\n\n(iii)  Self-contained units.  In areas immediately hazardous to life, a full-facepiece, pressure-demand, self-contained breathing apparatus or a combination full-facepiece, pressure-demand supplied-air respirator with an auxiliary, self-contained air supply approved by NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84 must be used.\n\n(iv)  Outside helper.  Where welding operations are carried on in confined spaces and where welders and helpers are provided with hose masks, hose masks with blowers or self-contained breathing equipment approved by the Mine Safety and Health Administration and the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, a worker shall be stationed on the outside of such confined spaces to insure the safety of those working within.\n\n(v)  Oxygen for ventilation.  Oxygen shall never be used for ventilation.\n\n(5)  Fluorine compounds \u2014(i)  General.  In confined spaces, welding or cutting involving fluxes, coverings, or other materials which contain fluorine compounds shall be done in accordance with paragraph (c)(4) of this section. A fluorine compound is one that contains fluorine, as an element in chemical combination, not as a free gas.\n\n(ii)  Maximum allowable concentration.  The need for local exhaust ventilation or airline respirators for welding or cutting in other than confined spaces will depend upon the individual circumstances. However, experience has shown such protection to be desirable for fixed-location production welding and for all production welding on stainless steels. Where air samples taken at the welding location indicate that the fluorides liberated are below the maximum allowable concentration, such protection is not necessary.\n\n(6)  Zinc \u2014(i)  Confined spaces.  In confined spaces welding or cutting involving zinc-bearing base or filler metals or metals coated with zinc-bearing materials shall be done in accordance with paragraph (c)(4) of this section.\n\n(ii)  Indoors.  Indoors, welding or cutting involving zinc-bearing base or filler metals coated with zinc-bearing materials shall be done in accordance with paragraph (c)(3) of this section.\n\n(7)  Lead \u2014(i)  Confined spaces.  In confined spaces, welding involving lead-base metals (erroneously called lead-burning) shall be done in accordance with paragraph (c)(4) of this section.\n\n(ii)  Indoors.  Indoors, welding involving lead-base metals shall be done in accordance with paragraph (c)(3) of this section.\n\n(iii)  Local ventilation.  In confined spaces or indoors, welding or cutting operations involving metals containing lead, other than as an impurity, or metals coated with lead-bearing materials, including paint, must be done using local exhaust ventilation or airline respirators. Such operations, when done outdoors, must be done using respirators approved for this purpose by NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84. In all cases, workers in the immediate vicinity of the cutting operation must be protected by local exhaust ventilation or airline respirators.\n\n(8)  Beryllium.  Welding or cutting indoors, outdoors, or in confined spaces involving beryllium-containing base or filler metals shall be done using local exhaust ventilation and airline respirators unless atmospheric tests under the most adverse conditions have established that the workers' exposure is within the acceptable concentrations defined by \u00a7 1910.1000 of this part. In all cases, workers in the immediate vicinity of the welding or cutting operations shall be protected as necessary by local exhaust ventilation or airline respirators.\n\n(9)  Cadmium \u2014(i)  General.  In confined spaces or indoors, welding or cutting operations involving cadmium-bearing or cadmium-coated base metals must be done using local exhaust ventilation or airline respirators unless atmospheric tests under the most adverse conditions show that employee exposure is within the acceptable concentrations specified by 29 CFR 1910.1000. Such operations, when done outdoors, must be done using respirators, such as fume respirators, approved for this purpose by NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84.\n\n(ii)  Confined space.  Welding (brazing) involving cadmium-bearing filler metals shall be done using ventilation as prescribed in paragraph (c)(3) or (c)(4) of this section if the work is to be done in a confined space.\n\n(10)  Mercury.  In confined spaces or indoors, welding or cutting operations involving metals coated with mercury-bearing materials, including paint, must be done using local exhaust ventilation or airline respirators unless atmospheric tests under the most adverse conditions show that employee exposure is within the acceptable concentrations specified by 29 CFR 1910.1000. Such operations, when done outdoors, must be done using respirators approved for this purpose by NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84.\n\n(11)  Cleaning compounds \u2014(i)  Manufacturer's instructions.  In the use of cleaning materials, because of their possible toxicity or flammability, appropriate precautions such as manufacturers instructions shall be followed.\n\n(ii)  Degreasing.  Degreasing and other cleaning operations involving chlorinated hydrocarbons shall be so located that no vapors from these operations will reach or be drawn into the atmosphere surrounding any welding operation. In addition, trichloroethylene and perchlorethylene should be kept out of atmospheres penetrated by the ultraviolet radiation of gas-shielded welding operations.\n\n(12)  Cutting of stainless steels.  Oxygen cutting, using either a chemical flux or iron powder or gas-shielded arc cutting of stainless steel, shall be done using mechanical ventilation adequate to remove the fumes generated.\n\n(13)  First-aid equipment.  First-aid equipment shall be available at all times. All injuries shall be reported as soon as possible for medical attention. First aid shall be rendered until medical attention can be provided.\n\n(d)  Industrial applications \u2014(1)  Transmission pipeline \u2014(i)  General.  The requirements of paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section and \u00a7 1910.254 of this part shall be observed.\n\n(ii)  Field shop operations.  Where field shop operations are involved for fabrication of fittings, river crossings, road crossings, and pumping and compressor stations the requirements of paragraphs (a), (b), and (c) of this section and \u00a7\u00a7 1910.253 and 1910.254 of this part shall be observed.\n\n(iii)  Electric shock.  When arc welding is performed in wet conditions, or under conditions of high humidity, special protection against electric shock shall be supplied.\n\n(iv)  Pressure testing.  In pressure testing of pipelines, the workers and the public shall be protected against injury by the blowing out of closures or other pressure restraining devices. Also, protection shall be provided against expulsion of loose dirt that may have become trapped in the pipe.\n\n(v)  Construction standards.  The welded construction of transmission pipelines shall be conducted in accordance with the Standard for Welding Pipe Lines and Related Facilities, API Std. 1104\u20141968, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(vi)  Flammable substance lines.  The connection, by welding, of branches to pipelines carrying flammable substances shall be performed in accordance with Welding or Hot Tapping on Equipment Containing Flammables, API Std. PSD No. 2201\u20141963, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(vii)  X-ray inspection.  The use of X-rays and radioactive isotopes for the inspection of welded pipeline joints shall be carried out in conformance with the American National Standard Safety Standard for Non-Medical X-ray and Sealed Gamma-Ray Sources, ANSI Z54.1\u20141963, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(2)  Mechanical piping systems \u2014(i)  General.  The requirements of paragraphs (a), (b), and (c) of this section and \u00a7\u00a7 1910.253 and 1910.254 of this part shall be observed.\n\n(ii)  X-ray inspection.  The use of X-rays and radioactive isotopes for the inspection of welded piping joints shall be in conformance with the American National Standard Safety Standard for Non-Medical X-ray and Sealed Gamma-Ray Sources, ANSI Z54.1\u20141963."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.17.37.3", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "Q", "Subpart Q\u2014Welding, Cutting and Brazing", "", "\u00a7 1910.253 Oxygen-fuel gas welding and cutting.", "OSHA", "", "", "[55 FR 13696, Apr. 11, 1990, as amended at 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 55 FR 46053, Nov. 1, 1990; 61 FR 9241, Mar. 7, 1996; 72 FR 71070, Dec. 14, 2007]", "(a)  General requirements \u2014(1)  Flammable mixture.  Mixtures of fuel gases and air or oxygen may be explosive and shall be guarded against. No device or attachment facilitating or permitting mixtures of air or oxygen with flammable gases prior to consumption, except at the burner or in a standard torch, shall be allowed unless approved for the purpose.\n\n(2)  Maximum pressure.  Under no condition shall acetylene be generated, piped (except in approved cylinder manifolds) or utilized at a pressure in excess of 15 psig (103 kPa gauge pressure) or 30 psia (206 kPa absolute). The 30 psia (206 kPa absolute) limit is intended to prevent unsafe use of acetylene in pressurized chambers such as caissons, underground excavations or tunnel construction.) This requirement is not intended to apply to storage of acetylene dissolved in a suitable solvent in cylinders manufactured and maintained according to U.S. Department of Transportation requirements, or to acetylene for chemical use. The use of liquid acetylene shall be prohibited.\n\n(3)  Apparatus.  Only approved apparatus such as torches, regulators or pressure-reducing valves, acetylene generators, and manifolds shall be used.\n\n(4)  Personnel.  Workmen in charge of the oxygen or fuel-gas supply equipment, including generators, and oxygen or fuel-gas distribution piping systems shall be instructed and judged competent by their employers for this important work before being left in charge. Rules and instructions covering the operation and maintenance of oxygen or fuel-gas supply equipment including generators, and oxygen or fuel-gas distribution piping systems shall be readily available.\n\n(b)  Cylinders and containers \u2014(1)  Approval and marking.  (i) All portable cylinders used for the storage and shipment of compressed gases shall be constructed and maintained in accordance with the regulations of the U.S. Department of Transportation, 49 CFR parts 171-179.\n\n(ii) Compressed gas cylinders shall be legibly marked, for the purpose of identifying the gas content, with either the chemical or the trade name of the gas. Such marking shall be by means of stenciling, stamping, or labeling, and shall not be readily removable. Whenever practical, the marking shall be located on the shoulder of the cylinder.\n\n(iii) Compressed gas cylinders shall be equipped with connections complying with the American National Standard Compressed Gas Cylinder Valve Outlet and Inlet Connections, ANSI B57.1\u20141965, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(iv) All cylinders with a water weight capacity of over 30 pounds (13.6 kg) shall be equipped with means of connecting a valve protection cap or with a collar or recess to protect the valve.\n\n(2)  Storage of cylinders\u2014general.  (i) Cylinders shall be kept away from radiators and other sources of heat.\n\n(ii) Inside of buildings, cylinders shall be stored in a well-protected, well-ventilated, dry location, at least 20 feet (6.1 m) from highly combustible materials such as oil or excelsior. Cylinders should be stored in definitely assigned places away from elevators, stairs, or gangways. Assigned storage spaces shall be located where cylinders will not be knocked over or damaged by passing or falling objects, or subject to tampering by unauthorized persons. Cylinders shall not be kept in unventilated enclosures such as lockers and cupboards.\n\n(iii) Empty cylinders shall have their valves closed.\n\n(iv) Valve protection caps, where cylinder is designed to accept a cap, shall always be in place, hand-tight, except when cylinders are in use or connected for use.\n\n(3)  Fuel-gas cylinder storage.  Inside a building, cylinders, except those in actual use or attached ready for use, shall be limited to a total gas capacity of 2,000 cubic feet (56 m\n 3 ) or 300 pounds (135.9 kg) of liquefied petroleum gas.\n\n(i) For storage in excess of 2,000 cubic feet (56 m\n 3 ) total gas capacity of cylinders or 300 (135.9 kg) pounds of liquefied petroleum gas, a separate room or compartment conforming to the requirements specified in paragraphs (f)(6)(i)(H) and (f)(6)(i)(I) of this section shall be provided, or cylinders shall be kept outside or in a special building. Special buildings, rooms or compartments shall have no open flame for heating or lighting and shall be well ventilated. They may also be used for storage of calcium carbide in quantities not to exceed 600 (271.8 kg) pounds, when contained in metal containers complying with paragraphs (g)(1)(i) and (g)(1)(ii) of this section.\n\n(ii) Acetylene cylinders shall be stored valve end up.\n\n(4)  Oxygen storage.  (i) Oxygen cylinders shall not be stored near highly combustible material, especially oil and grease; or near reserve stocks of carbide and acetylene or other fuel-gas cylinders, or near any other substance likely to cause or accelerate fire; or in an acetylene generator compartment.\n\n(ii) Oxygen cylinders stored in outside generator houses shall be separated from the generator or carbide storage rooms by a noncombustible partition having a fire-resistance rating of at least 1 hour. This partition shall be without openings and shall be gastight.\n\n(iii) Oxygen cylinders in storage shall be separated from fuel-gas cylinders or combustible materials (especially oil or grease), a minimum distance of 20 feet (6.1 m) or by a noncombustible barrier at least 5 feet (1.5 m) high having a fire-resistance rating of at least one-half hour.\n\n(iv) Where a liquid oxygen system is to be used to supply gaseous oxygen for welding or cutting and the system has a storage capacity of more than 13,000 cubic feet (364 m\n 3 ) of oxygen (measured at 14.7 psia (101 kPa) and 70 \u00b0F (21.1 \u00b0C)), connected in service or ready for service, or more than 25,000 cubic feet (700 m\n 3 ) of oxygen (measured at 14.7 psia (101 kPa) and 70 \u00b0F (21.1 \u00b0C)), including unconnected reserves on hand at the site, it shall comply with the provisions of the Standard for Bulk Oxygen Systems at Consumer Sites, NFPA No. 566\u20141965, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(5)  Operating procedures.  (i) Cylinders, cylinder valves, couplings, regulators, hose, and apparatus shall be kept free from oily or greasy substances. Oxygen cylinders or apparatus shall not be handled with oily hands or gloves. A jet of oxygen must never be permitted to strike an oily surface, greasy clothes, or enter a fuel oil or other storage tank.\n\n(ii)(A) When transporting cylinders by a crane or derrick, a cradle, boat, or suitable platform shall be used. Slings or electric magnets shall not be used for this purpose. Valve-protection caps, where cylinder is designed to accept a cap, shall always be in place.\n\n(B) Cylinders shall not be dropped or struck or permitted to strike each other violently.\n\n(C) Valve-protection caps shall not be used for lifting cylinders from one vertical position to another. Bars shall not be used under valves or valve-protection caps to pry cylinders loose when frozen to the ground or otherwise fixed; the use of warm (not boiling) water is recommended. Valve-protection caps are designed to protect cylinder valves from damage.\n\n(D) Unless cylinders are secured on a special truck, regulators shall be removed and valve-protection caps, when provided for, shall be put in place before cylinders are moved.\n\n(E) Cylinders not having fixed hand wheels shall have keys, handles, or nonadjustable wrenches on valve stems while these cylinders are in service. In multiple cylinder installations only one key or handle is required for each manifold.\n\n(F) Cylinder valves shall be closed before moving cylinders.\n\n(G) Cylinder valves shall be closed when work is finished.\n\n(H) Valves of empty cylinders shall be closed.\n\n(I) Cylinders shall be kept far enough away from the actual welding or cutting operation so that sparks, hot slag, or flame will not reach them, or fire-resistant shields shall be provided.\n\n(J) Cylinders shall not be placed where they might become part of an electric circuit. Contacts with third rails, trolley wires, etc., shall be avoided. Cylinders shall be kept away from radiators, piping systems, layout tables, etc., that may be used for grounding electric circuits such as for arc welding machines. Any practice such as the tapping of an electrode against a cylinder to strike an arc shall be prohibited.\n\n(K) Cylinders shall never be used as rollers or supports, whether full or empty.\n\n(L) The numbers and markings stamped into cylinders shall not be tampered with.\n\n(M) No person, other than the gas supplier, shall attempt to mix gases in a cylinder. No one, except the owner of the cylinder or person authorized by him, shall refill a cylinder.\n\n(N) No one shall tamper with safety devices in cylinders or valves.\n\n(O) Cylinders shall not be dropped or otherwise roughly handled.\n\n(P) Unless connected to a manifold, oxygen from a cylinder shall not be used without first attaching an oxygen regulator to the cylinder valve. Before connecting the regulator to the cylinder valve, the valve shall be opened slightly for an instant and then closed. Always stand to one side of the outlet when opening the cylinder valve.\n\n(Q) A hammer or wrench shall not be used to open cylinder valves. If valves cannot be opened by hand, the supplier shall be notified.\n\n(R)( 1 ) Cylinder valves shall not be tampered with nor should any attempt be made to repair them. If trouble is experienced, the supplier should be sent a report promptly indicating the character of the trouble and the cylinder's serial number. Supplier's instructions as to its disposition shall be followed.\n\n( 2 ) Complete removal of the stem from a diaphragm-type cylinder valve shall be avoided.\n\n(iii)(A) Fuel-gas cylinders shall be placed with valve end up whenever they are in use. Liquefied gases shall be stored and shipped with the valve end up.\n\n(B) Cylinders shall be handled carefully. Rough handling, knocks, or falls are liable to damage the cylinder, valve or safety devices and cause leakage.\n\n(C) Before connecting a regulator to a cylinder valve, the valve shall be opened slightly and closed immediately. The valve shall be opened while standing to one side of the outlet; never in front of it. Never crack a fuel-gas cylinder valve near other welding work or near sparks, flame, or other possible sources of ignition.\n\n(D) Before a regulator is removed from a cylinder valve, the cylinder valve shall be closed and the gas released from the regulator.\n\n(E) Nothing shall be placed on top of an acetylene cylinder when in use which may damage the safety device or interfere with the quick closing of the valve.\n\n(F) If cylinders are found to have leaky valves or fittings which cannot be stopped by closing of the valve, the cylinders shall be taken outdoors away from sources of ignition and slowly emptied.\n\n(G) A warning should be placed near cylinders having leaking fuse plugs or other leaking safety devices not to approach them with a lighted cigarette or other source of ignition. Such cylinders should be plainly tagged; the supplier should be promptly notified and his instructions followed as to their return.\n\n(H) Safety devices shall not be tampered with.\n\n(I) Fuel-gas shall never be used from cylinders through torches or other devices equipped with shutoff valves without reducing the pressure through a suitable regulator attached to the cylinder valve or manifold.\n\n(J) The cylinder valve shall always be opened slowly.\n\n(K) An acetylene cylinder valve shall not be opened more than one and one-half turns of the spindle, and preferably no more than three-fourths of a turn.\n\n(L) Where a special wrench is required it shall be left in position on the stem of the valve while the cylinder is in use so that the fuel-gas flow can be quickly turned off in case of emergency. In the case of manifolded or coupled cylinders at least one such wrench shall always be available for immediate use.\n\n(c)  Manifolding of cylinders \u2014(1)  Fuel-gas manifolds.  (i) Manifolds shall be approved either separately for each component part or as an assembled unit.\n\n(ii) Except as provided in paragraph (c)(1)(iii) of this section fuel-gas cylinders connected to one manifold inside a building shall be limited to a total capacity not exceeding 300 pounds (135.9 kg) of liquefied petroleum gas or 3,000 cubic feet (84 m \n 3 ) of other fuel-gas. More than one such manifold with connected cylinders may be located in the same room provided the manifolds are at least 50 feet (15 m) apart or separated by a noncombustible barrier at least 5 feet (1.5 m) high having a fire-resistance rating of at least one-half hour.\n\n(iii) Fuel-gas cylinders connected to one manifold having an aggregate capacity exceeding 300 pounds (135.9 kg) of liquefied petroleum gas or 3,000 cubic feet (84 m \n 3 ) of other fuel-gas shall be located outdoors, or in a separate building or room constructed in accordance with paragraphs (f)(6)(i)(H) and (f)(6)(i)(I) of this section.\n\n(iv) Separate manifold buildings or rooms may also be used for the storage of drums of calcium carbide and cylinders containing fuel gases as provided in paragraph (b)(3) of this section. Such buildings or rooms shall have no open flames for heating or lighting and shall be well-ventilated.\n\n(v) High-pressure fuel-gas manifolds shall be provided with approved pressure regulating devices.\n\n(2)  High-pressure oxygen manifolds (for use with cylinders having a Department of Transportation service pressure above 200 psig (1.36 MPa)).  (i) Manifolds shall be approved either separately for each component part or as an assembled unit.\n\n(ii) Oxygen manifolds shall not be located in an acetylene generator room. Oxygen manifolds shall be separated from fuel-gas cylinders or combustible materials (especially oil or grease), a minimum distance of 20 feet (6.1 m) or by a noncombustible barrier at least 5 feet (1.5 m) high having a fire-resistance rating of at least one-half hour.\n\n(iii) Except as provided in paragraph (c)(2)(iv) of this section, oxygen cylinders connected to one manifold shall be limited to a total gas capacity of 6,000 cubic feet (168 m \n 3 ). More than one such manifold with connected cylinders may be located in the same room provided the manifolds are at least 50 feet (15 m) apart or separated by a noncombustible barrier at least 5 feet (1.5 m) high having a fire-resistance rating of at least one-half hour.\n\n(iv) An oxygen manifold, to which cylinders having an aggregate capacity of more than 6,000 cubic feet (168 m \n 3 ) of oxygen are connected, should be located outdoors or in a separate noncombustible building. Such a manifold, if located inside a building having other occupancy, shall be located in a separate room of noncombustible construction having a fire-resistance rating of at least one-half hour or in an area with no combustible material within 20 feet (6.1 m) of the manifold.\n\n(v) An oxygen manifold or oxygen bulk supply system which has storage capacity of more than 13,000 cubic feet (364 m \n 3 ) of oxygen (measured at 14.7 psia (101 kPa) and 70 \u00b0F (21.1 \u00b0C)), connected in service or ready for service, or more than 25,000 cubic feet (700 m \n 3 ) of oxygen (measured at 14.7 psia (101 kPa) and 70 \u00b0F (21.1 \u00b0C)), including unconnected reserves on hand at the site, shall comply with the provisions of the Standard for Bulk Oxygen Systems at Consumer Sites, NFPA No. 566-1965.\n\n(vi) High-pressure oxygen manifolds shall be provided with approved pressure-regulating devices.\n\n(3)  Low-pressure oxygen manifolds (for use with cylinders having a Department of Transportation service pressure not exceeding 200 psig (1.36 MPa)).  (i) Manifolds shall be of substantial construction suitable for use with oxygen at a pressure of 250 psig (1.7 MPa). They shall have a minimum bursting pressure of 1,000 psig (6.8 MPa) and shall be protected by a safety relief device which will relieve at a maximum pressure of 500 psig (3.4 MPa). DOT-4L200 cylinders have safety devices which relieve at a maximum pressure of 250 psig (1.7 MPa) (or 235 psig (1.6 MPa) if vacuum insulation is used).\n\n(ii) Hose and hose connections subject to cylinder pressure shall comply with paragraph (e)(5) of this section. Hose shall have a minimum bursting pressure of 1,000 psig (6.8 MPa).\n\n(iii) The assembled manifold including leads shall be tested and proven gas-tight at a pressure of 300 psig (2.04 MPa). The fluid used for testing oxygen manifolds shall be oil-free and not combustible.\n\n(iv) The location of manifolds shall comply with paragraphs (c)(2)(ii), (c)(2)(iii), (c)(2)(iv), and (c)(2)(v) of this section.\n\n(v) The following sign shall be conspicuously posted at each manifold:\n\nLow-Pressure Manifold\n \n Do Not Connect High-Pressure Cylinders\n \n Maximum Pressure\u2014250 psig (1.7 MPa)\n\n(4)  Portable outlet headers.  (i) Portable outlet headers shall not be used indoors except for temporary service where the conditions preclude a direct supply from outlets located on the service piping system.\n\n(ii) Each outlet on the service piping from which oxygen or fuel-gas is withdrawn to supply a portable outlet header shall be equipped with a readily accessible shutoff valve.\n\n(iii) Hose and hose connections used for connecting the portable outlet header to the service piping shall comply with paragraph (e)(5) of this section.\n\n(iv) Master shutoff valves for both oxygen and fuel-gas shall be provided at the entry end of the portable outlet header.\n\n(v) Portable outlet headers for fuel-gas service shall be provided with an approved hydraulic back-pressure valve installed at the inlet and preceding the service outlets, unless an approved pressure-reducing regulator, an approved back-flow check valve, or an approved hydraulic back-pressure valve is installed at each outlet. Outlets provided on headers for oxygen service may be fitted for use with pressure-reducing regulators or for direct hose connection.\n\n(vi) Each service outlet on portable outlet headers shall be provided with a valve assembly that includes a detachable outlet seal cap, chained or otherwise attached to the body of the valve.\n\n(vii) Materials and fabrication procedures for portable outlet headers shall comply with paragraphs (d)(1), (d)(2), and (d)(5) of this section.\n\n(viii) Portable outlet headers shall be provided with frames which will support the equipment securely in the correct operating position and protect them from damage during handling and operation.\n\n(5)  Manifold operation procedures.  (i) Cylinder manifolds shall be installed under the supervision of someone familiar with the proper practices with reference to their construction and use.\n\n(ii) All manifolds and parts used in methods of manifolding shall be used only for the gas or gases for which they are approved.\n\n(iii) When acetylene cylinders are coupled, approved flash arresters shall be installed between each cylinder and the coupler block. For outdoor use only, and when the number of cylinders coupled does not exceed three, one flash arrester installed between the coupler block and regulator is acceptable.\n\n(iv) The aggregate capacity of fuel-gas cylinders connected to a portable manifold inside a building shall not exceed 3,000 cubic feet (84 m \n 3 ) of gas.\n\n(v) Acetylene and liquefied fuel-gas cylinders shall be manifolded in a vertical position.\n\n(vi) The pressure in the gas cylinders connected to and discharged simultaneously through a common manifold shall be approximately equal.\n\n(d)  Service piping systems \u2014(1)  Materials and design.  (i)(A) Piping and fittings shall comply with section 2, Industrial Gas and Air Piping Systems, of the American National Standard Code for Pressure Piping ANSI B31.1, 1967, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6, insofar as it does not conflict with paragraphs (d)(1)(i)(A)( 1 ) and (d)(1)(i)(A)( 2 ) of this section:\n\n( 1 ) Pipe shall be at least Schedule 40 and fittings shall be at least standard weight in sizes up to and including 6-inch nominal.\n\n( 2 ) Copper tubing shall be Types K or L in accordance with the Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube, ASTM B88-66a, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(B) Piping shall be steel, wrought iron, brass or copper pipe, or seamless copper, brass or stainless steel tubing, except as provided in paragraphs (d)(1)(ii) and (d)(1)(iii) of this section.\n\n(ii)(A) Oxygen piping and fittings at pressures in excess of 700 psi (4.8 MPa), shall be stainless steel or copper alloys.\n\n(B) Hose connections and hose complying with paragraph (e)(5) of this section may be used to connect the outlet of a manifold pressure regulator to piping providing the working pressure of the piping is 250 psi (1.7 MPa) or less and the length of the hose does not exceed 5 feet (1.5 m). Hose shall have a minimum bursting pressure of 1,000 psig (6.8 MPa).\n\n(C) When oxygen is supplied to a service piping system from a low-pressure oxygen manifold without an intervening pressure regulating device, the piping system shall have a minimum design pressure of 250 psig (1.7 MPa). A pressure regulating device shall be used at each station outlet when the connected equipment is for use at pressures less than 250 psig (1.7 MPa).\n\n(iii)(A) Piping for acetylene or acetylenic compounds shall be steel or wrought iron.\n\n(B) Unalloyed copper shall not be used for acetylene or acetylenic compounds except in listed equipment.\n\n(2)  Piping joints.  (i) Joints in steel or wrought iron piping shall be welded, threaded or flanged. Fittings, such as ells, tees, couplings, and unions, may be rolled, forged or cast steel, malleable iron or nodular iron. Gray or white cast iron fittings are prohibited.\n\n(ii) Joints in brass or copper pipe shall be welded, brazed, threaded, or flanged. If of the socket type, they shall be brazed with silver-brazing alloy or similar high melting point (not less than 800 \u00b0F (427 \u00b0C)) filler metal.\n\n(iii) Joints in seamless copper, brass, or stainless steel tubing shall be approved gas tubing fittings or the joints shall be brazed. If of the socket type, they shall be brazed with silver-brazing alloy or similar high melting point (not less than 800 \u00b0F (427 \u00b0C)) filler metal.\n\n(3)  Installation.  (i) Distribution lines shall be installed and maintained in a safe operating condition.\n\n(ii) All piping shall be run as directly as practicable, protected against physical damage, proper allowance being made for expansion and contraction, jarring and vibration. Pipe laid underground in earth shall be located below the frost line and protected against corrosion. After assembly, piping shall be thoroughly blown out with air, nitrogen, or carbon dioxide to remove foreign materials. For oxygen piping, only oil-free air, oil-free nitrogen, or oil-free carbon dioxide shall be used.\n\n(iii) Only piping which has been welded or brazed shall be installed in tunnels, trenches or ducts. Shutoff valves shall be located outside such conduits. Oxygen piping may be placed in the same tunnel, trench or duct with fuel-gas pipelines, provided there is good natural or forced ventilation.\n\n(iv) Low points in piping carrying moist gas shall be drained into drip pots constructed so as to permit pumping or draining out the condensate at necessary intervals. Drain valves shall be installed for this purpose having outlets normally closed with screw caps or plugs. No open end valves or petcocks shall be used, except that in drips located out of doors, underground, and not readily accessible, valves may be used at such points if they are equipped with means to secure them in the closed position. Pipes leading to the surface of the ground shall be cased or jacketed where necessary to prevent loosening or breaking.\n\n(v) Gas cocks or valves shall be provided for all buildings at points where they will be readily accessible for shutting off the gas supply to these buildings in any emergency. There shall also be provided a shutoff valve in the discharge line from the generator, gas holder, manifold or other source of supply.\n\n(vi) Shutoff valves shall not be installed in safety relief lines in such a manner that the safety relief device can be rendered ineffective.\n\n(vii) Fittings and lengths of pipe shall be examined internally before assembly and, if necessary freed from scale or dirt. Oxygen piping and fittings shall be washed out with a suitable solution which will effectively remove grease and dirt but will not react with oxygen. Hot water solutions of caustic soda or trisodium phosphate are effective cleaning agents for this purpose.\n\n(viii) Piping shall be thoroughly blown out after assembly to remove foreign materials. For oxygen piping, oil-free air, oil-free nitrogen, or oil-free carbon dioxide shall be used. For other piping, air or inert gas may be used.\n\n(ix) When flammable gas lines or other parts of equipment are being purged of air or gas, open lights or other sources of ignition shall not be permitted near uncapped openings.\n\n(x) No welding or cutting shall be performed on an acetylene or oxygen pipeline, including the attachment of hangers or supports, until the line has been purged. Only oil-free air, oil-free nitrogen, or oil-free carbon dioxide shall be used to purge oxygen lines.\n\n(4)  Painting and signs.  (i) Underground pipe and tubing and outdoor ferrous pipe and tubing shall be covered or painted with a suitable material for protection against corrosion.\n\n(ii) Aboveground piping systems shall be marked in accordance with the American National Standard Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems, ANSI A13.1\u22121956, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(iii) Station outlets shall be marked to indicate the name of the gas.\n\n(5)  Testing.  (i) Piping systems shall be tested and proved gastight at 1\n 1/2  times the maximum operating pressure, and shall be thoroughly purged of air before being placed in service. The material used for testing oxygen lines shall be oil free and noncombustible. Flames shall not be used to detect leaks.\n\n(ii) When flammable gas lines or other parts of equipment are being purged of air or gas, sources of ignition shall not be permitted near uncapped openings.\n\n(e)  Protective equipment, hose, and regulators \u2014(1)  General.  Equipment shall be installed and used only in the service for which it is approved and as recommended by the manufacturer.\n\n(2)  Pressure relief devices.  Service piping systems shall be protected by pressure relief devices set to function at not more than the design pressure of the systems and discharging upwards to a safe location.\n\n(3)  Piping protective equipment.  (i) The fuel-gas and oxygen piping systems, including portable outlet headers shall incorporate the protective equipment shown in Figures Q-1, Q-2, and Q-3. When only a portion of a fuel-gas system is to be used with oxygen, only that portion need comply with this paragraph (e)(3)(i).\n\n(ii) Approved protective equipment (designated P F  in Figures Q-1, Q-2, and Q-3) shall be installed in fuel-gas piping to prevent:\n\n(A) Backflow of oxygen into the fuel-gas supply system;\n\n(B) Passage of a flash back into the fuel-gas supply system; and\n\n(C) Excessive back pressure of oxygen in the fuel-gas supply system. The three functions of the protective equipment may be combined in one device or may be provided by separate devices.\n\n( 1 ) The protective equipment shall be located in the main supply line, as in Figure Q-1 or at the head of each branch line, as in Figure Q-2 or at each location where fuel-gas is withdrawn, as in Figure Q-3. Where branch lines are of 2-inch pipe size or larger or of substantial length, protective equipment (designated as P F ) shall be located as shown in either Q-2 and Q-3.\n\n( 2 ) Backflow protection shall be provided by an approved device that will prevent oxygen from flowing into the fuel-gas system or fuel from flowing into the oxygen system (see S F , Figures Q-1 and Q-2).\n\n( 3 ) Flash-back protection shall be provided by an approved device that will prevent flame from passing into the fuel-gas system.\n\n( 4 ) Back-pressure protection shall be provided by an approved pressure-relief device set at a pressure not greater than the pressure rating of the backflow or the flashback protection device, whichever is lower. The pressure-relief device shall be located on the downstream side of the backflow and flashback protection devices. The vent from the pressure-relief device shall be at least as large as the relief device inlet and shall be installed without low points that may collect moisture. If low points are unavoidable, drip pots with drains closed with screw plugs or caps shall be installed at the low points. The vent terminus shall not endanger personnel or property through gas discharge; shall be located away from ignition sources; and shall terminate in a hood or bend.\n\n(iii) If pipeline protective equipment incorporates a liquid, the liquid level shall be maintained, and a suitable antifreeze may be used to prevent freezing.\n\n(iv) Fuel gas for use with equipment not requiring oxygen shall be withdrawn upstream of the piping protective devices.\n\n(4)  Station outlet protective equipment.  (i) A check valve, pressure regulator, hydraulic seal, or combination of these devices shall be provided at each station outlet, including those on portable headers, to prevent backflow, as shown in Figures Q-1, Q-2, and Q-3 and designated as S F  and S O .\n\n(ii) When approved pipeline protective equipment (designated P F ) is located at the station outlet as in Figure Q-3, no additional check valve, pressure regulator, or hydraulic seal is required.\n\n(iii) A shutoff valve (designated V F  and V O ) shall be installed at each station outlet and shall be located on the upstream side of other station outlet equipment.\n\n(iv) If the station outlet is equipped with a detachable regulator, the outlet shall terminate in a union connection that complies with the Regulator Connection Standards, 1958, Compressed Gas Association, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(v) If the station outlet is connected directly to a hose, the outlet shall terminate in a union connection complying with the Standard Hose Connection Specifications, 1957, Compressed Gas Association, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(vi) Station outlets may terminate in pipe threads to which permanent connections are to be made, such as to a machine.\n\n(vii) Station outlets shall be equipped with a detachable outlet seal cap secured in place. This cap shall be used to seal the outlet except when a hose, a regulator, or piping is attached.\n\n(viii) Where station outlets are equipped with approved backflow and flashback protective devices, as many as four torches may be supplied from one station outlet through rigid piping, provided each outlet from such piping is equipped with a shutoff valve and provided the fuel-gas capacity of any one torch does not exceed 15 cubic feet (0.42 m\n 3 ) per hour. This paragraph (e)(4)(viii) does not apply to machines.\n\n(5)  Hose and hose connections.  (i) Hose for oxy-fuel gas service shall comply with the Specification for Rubber Welding Hose, 1958, Compressed Gas Association and Rubber Manufacturers Association, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(ii) When parallel lengths of oxygen and acetylene hose are taped together for convenience and to prevent tangling, not more than 4 inches (10.2 cm) out of 12 inches (30.5 cm) shall be covered by tape.\n\n(iii) Hose connections shall comply with the Standard Hose Connection Specifications, 1957, Compressed Gas Association.\n\n(iv) Hose connections shall be clamped or otherwise securely fastened in a manner that will withstand, without leakage, twice the pressure to which they are normally subjected in service, but in no case less than a pressure of 300 psi (2.04 MPa). Oil-free air or an oil-free inert gas shall be used for the test.\n\n(v) Hose showing leaks, burns, worn places, or other defects rendering it unfit for service shall be repaired or replaced.\n\n(6)  Pressure-reducing regulators.  (i) Pressure-reducing regulators shall be used only for the gas and pressures for which they are intended. The regulator inlet connections shall comply with Regulator Connection Standards, 1958, Compressed Gas Association.\n\n(ii) When regulators or parts of regulators, including gages, need repair, the work shall be performed by skilled mechanics who have been properly instructed.\n\n(iii) Gages on oxygen regulators shall be marked \u201cUSE NO OIL.\u201d\n\n(iv) Union nuts and connections on regulators shall be inspected before use to detect faulty seats which may cause leakage of gas when the regulators are attached to the cylinder valves.\n\n(f)  Acetylene generators \u2014(1)  Approval and marking.  (i) Generators shall be of approved construction and shall be plainly marked with the maximum rate of acetylene in cubic feet per hour for which they are designed; the weight and size of carbide necessary for a single charge; the manufacturer's name and address; and the name or number of the type of generator.\n\n(ii) Carbide shall be of the size marked on the generator nameplate.\n\n(2)  Rating and pressure limitations.  (i) The total hourly output of a generator shall not exceed the rate for which it is approved and marked. Unless specifically approved for higher ratings, carbide-feed generators shall be rated at 1 cubic foot (0.028 m\n 3 ) per hour per pound of carbide required for a single complete charge.\n\n(ii) Relief valves shall be regularly operated to insure proper functioning. Relief valves for generating chambers shall be set to open at a pressure not in excess of 15 psig (103 kPa gauge pressure). Relief valves for hydraulic back pressure valves shall be set to open at a pressure not in excess of 20 psig (137 kPa gauge pressure).\n\n(iii) Nonautomatic generators shall not be used for generating acetylene at pressures exceeding l psig (7 kPa gauge pressure), and all water overflows shall be visible.\n\n(3)  Location.  The space around the generator shall be ample for free, unobstructed operation and maintenance and shall permit ready adjustment and charging.\n\n(4)  Stationary acetylene generators (automatic and nonautomatic).  (i)(A) The foundation shall be so arranged that the generator will be level and so that no excessive strain will be placed on the generator or its connections. Acetylene generators shall be grounded.\n\n(B) Generators shall be placed where water will not freeze. The use of common salt (sodium chloride) or other corrosive chemicals for protection against freezing is not permitted. (For heating systems see paragraph (f)(6)(iii) of this section.)\n\n(C) Except when generators are prepared in accordance with paragraph (f)(7)(v) of this section, sources of ignition shall be prohibited in outside generator houses or inside generator rooms.\n\n(D) Water shall not be supplied through a continuous connection to the generator except when the generator is provided with an adequate open overflow or automatic water shutoff which will effectively prevent overfilling of the generator. Where a noncontinuous connection is used, the supply line shall terminate at a point not less than 2 inches (5 cm) above the regularly provided opening for filling so that the water can be observed as it enters the generator.\n\n(E) Unless otherwise specifically approved, generators shall not be fitted with continuous drain connections leading to sewers, but shall discharge through an open connection into a suitably vented outdoor receptacle or residue pit which may have such connections. An open connection for the sludge drawoff is desirable to enable the generator operator to observe leakage of generating water from the drain valve or sludge cock.\n\n(ii)(A) Each generator shall be provided with a vent pipe.\n\n(B) The escape or relief pipe shall be rigidly installed without traps and so that any condensation will drain back to the generator.\n\n(C) The escape or relief pipe shall be carried full size to a suitable point outside the building. It shall terminate in a hood or bend located at least 12 feet (3.7 m) above the ground, preferably above the roof, and as far away as practicable from windows or other openings into buildings and as far away as practicable from sources of ignition such as flues or chimneys and tracks used by locomotives. Generating chamber relief pipes shall not be inter-connected but shall be separately led to the outside air. The hood or bend shall be so constructed that it will not be obstructed by rain, snow, ice, insects, or birds. The outlet shall be at least 3 feet (0.9 m) from combustible construction.\n\n(iii)(A) Gas holders shall be constructed on the gasometer principle, the bell being suitably guided. The gas bell shall move freely without tendency to bind and shall have a clearance of at least 2 inches (5 cm) from the shell.\n\n(B) The gas holder may be located in the generator room, in a separate room or out of doors. In order to prevent collapse of the gas bell or infiltration of air due to a vacuum caused by the compressor or booster pump or cooling of the gas, a compressor or booster cutoff shall be provided at a point 12 inches (0.3 m) or more above the landing point of the bell. When the gas holder is located indoors, the room shall be ventilated in accordance with paragraph (f)(6)(ii) of this section and heated and lighted in accordance with paragraphs (f)(6)(iii) and (f)(6)(iv) of this section.\n\n(C) When the gas holder is not located within a heated building, gas holder seals shall be protected against freezing.\n\n(D) Means shall be provided to stop the generator-feeding mechanism before the gas holder reaches the upper limit of its travel.\n\n(E) When the gas holder is connected to only one generator, the gas capacity of the holder shall be not less than one-third of the hourly rating of the generator.\n\n(F) If acetylene is used from the gas holder without increase in pressure at some points but with increase in pressure by a compressor or booster pump at other points, approved piping protective devices shall be installed in each supply line. The low-pressure protective device shall be located between the gas holder and the shop piping, and the medium-pressure protective device shall be located between the compressor or booster pump and the shop piping (see Figure Q-4). Approved protective equipment (designated P F ) is used to prevent: Backflow of oxygen into the fuel-gas supply system; passage of a flashback into the fuel-gas supply system; and excessive back pressure of oxygen in the fuel-gas supply system. The three functions of the protective equipment may be combined in one device or may be provided by separate devices.\n\n(iv)(A) The compressor or booster system shall be of an approved type.\n\n(B) Wiring and electric equipment in compressor or booster pump rooms or enclosures shall conform to the provisions of subpart S of this part for Class I, Division 2 locations.\n\n(C) Compressors and booster pump equipment shall be located in well-ventilated areas away from open flames, electrical or mechanical sparks, or other ignition sources.\n\n(D) Compressor or booster pumps shall be provided with pressure relief valves which will relieve pressure exceeding 15 psig (103 kPa gauge pressure) to a safe outdoor location as provided in paragraph (f)(4)(ii) of this section, or by returning the gas to the inlet side or to the gas supply source.\n\n(E) Compressor or booster pump discharge outlets shall be provided with approved protective equipment. (See paragraph (e) of this section.)\n\n(5)  Portable acetylene generators.  (i)(A) All portable generators shall be of a type approved for portable use.\n\n(B) Portable generators shall not be used within 10 feet (3 m) of combustible material other than the floor.\n\n(C) Portable generators shall not be used in rooms of total volume less than 35 times the total gas-generating capacity per charge of all generators in the room. Generators shall not be used in rooms having a ceiling height of less than 10 feet (3 m). (To obtain the gas-generating capacity in cubic feet per charge, multiply the pounds of carbide per charge by 4.5.)\n\n(D) Portable generators shall be protected against freezing. The use of salt or other corrosive chemical to prevent freezing is prohibited.\n\n(ii)(A) Portable generators shall be cleaned and recharged and the air mixture blown off outside buildings.\n\n(B) When charged with carbide, portable generators shall not be moved by crane or derrick.\n\n(C) When not in use, portable generators shall not be stored in rooms in which open flames are used unless the generators contain no carbide and have been thoroughly purged of acetylene. Storage rooms shall be well ventilated.\n\n(D) When portable acetylene generators are to be transported and operated on vehicles, they shall be securely anchored to the vehicles. If transported by truck, the motor shall be turned off during charging, cleaning, and generating periods.\n\n(E) Portable generators shall be located at a safe distance from the welding position so that they will not be exposed to sparks, slag, or misdirection of the torch flame or overheating from hot materials or processes.\n\n(6)  Outside generator houses and inside generator rooms for stationary acetylene generators.  (i)(A) No opening in any outside generator house shall be located within 5 feet (1.5 m) of any opening in another building.\n\n(B) Walls, floors, and roofs of outside generator houses shall be of noncombustible construction.\n\n(C) When a part of the generator house is to be used for the storage or manifolding of oxygen cylinders, the space to be so occupied shall be separated from the generator or carbide storage section by partition walls continuous from floor to roof or ceiling, of the type of construction stated in paragraph (f)(6)(i)(H) of this section. Such separation walls shall be without openings and shall be joined to the floor, other walls and ceiling or roof in a manner to effect a permanent gas-tight joint.\n\n(D) Exit doors shall be located so as to be readily accessible in case of emergency.\n\n(E) Explosion venting for outside generator houses and inside generator rooms shall be provided in exterior walls or roofs. The venting areas shall be equal to not less than 1 square foot (0.09 m\n 2 ) per 50 cubic feet (1.4 m\n 3 ) of room volume and may consist of any one or any combination of the following: Walls of light, noncombustible material preferably single-thickness, single-strength glass; lightly fastened hatch covers; lightly fastened swinging doors in exterior walls opening outward; lightly fastened walls or roof designed to relieve at a maximum pressure of 25 pounds per square foot (0.001 MPa).\n\n(F) The installation of acetylene generators within buildings shall be restricted to buildings not exceeding one story in height;  provided, however,  that this will not be construed as prohibiting such installations on the roof or top floor of a building exceeding such height.\n\n(G) Generators installed inside buildings shall be enclosed in a separate room.\n\n(H) The walls, partitions, floors, and ceilings of inside generator rooms shall be of noncombustible construction having a fire-resistance rating of at least 1 hour. The walls or partitions shall be continuous from floor to ceiling and shall be securely anchored. At least one wall of the room shall be an exterior wall.\n\n(I) Openings from an inside generator room to other parts of the building shall be protected by a swinging type, self-closing fire door for a Class B opening and having a rating of at least 1 hour. Windows in partitions shall be wired glass and approved metal frames with fixed sash. Installation shall be in accordance with the Standard for the Installation of Fire Doors and Windows, NFPA 80-1970, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(ii) Inside generator rooms or outside generator houses shall be well ventilated with vents located at floor and ceiling levels.\n\n(iii) Heating shall be by steam, hot water, enclosed electrically heated elements or other indirect means. Heating by flames or fires shall be prohibited in outside generator houses or inside generator rooms, or in any enclosure communicating with them.\n\n(iv)(A) Generator houses or rooms shall have natural light during daylight hours. Where artificial lighting is necessary it shall be restricted to electric lamps installed in a fixed position. Unless specifically approved for use in atmospheres containing acetylene, such lamps shall be provided with enclosures of glass or other noncombustible material so designed and constructed as to prevent gas vapors from reaching the lamp or socket and to resist breakage. Rigid conduit with threaded connections shall be used.\n\n(B) Lamps installed outside of wired-glass panels set in gas-tight frames in the exterior walls or roof of the generator house or room are acceptable.\n\n(v) Electric switches, telephones, and all other electrical apparatus which may cause a spark, unless specifically approved for use inside acetylene generator rooms, shall be located outside the generator house or in a room or space separated from the generator room by a gas-tight partition, except that where the generator system is designed so that no carbide fill opening or other part of the generator is open to the generator house or room during the operation of the generator, and so that residue is carried in closed piping from the residue discharge valve to a point outside the generator house or room, electrical equipment in the generator house or room shall conform to the provisions of subpart S of this part for Class I, Division 2 locations.\n\n(7)  Maintenance and operation.  (i) Unauthorized persons shall not be permitted in outside generator houses or inside generator rooms.\n\n(A) Operating instructions shall be posted in a conspicuous place near the generator or kept in a suitable place available for ready reference.\n\n(B) When recharging generators the order of operations specified in the instructions supplied by the manufacturer shall be followed.\n\n(C) In the case of batch-type generators, when the charge of carbide is exhausted and before additional carbide is added, the generating chamber shall always be flushed out with water, renewing the water supply in accordance with the instruction card furnished by the manufacturer.\n\n(D) The water-carbide residue mixture drained from the generator shall not be discharged into sewer pipes or stored in areas near open flames. Clear water from residue settling pits may be discharged into sewer pipes.\n\n(ii) The carbide added each time the generator is recharged shall be sufficient to refill the space provided for carbide without ramming the charge. Steel or other ferrous tools shall not be used in distributing the charge.\n\n(iii) Generator water chambers shall be kept filled to proper level at all times except while draining during the recharging operation.\n\n(iv) Whenever repairs are to be made or the generator is to be charged or carbide is to be removed, the water chamber shall be filled to the proper level.\n\n(v) Previous to making repairs involving welding, soldering, or other hot work or other operations which produce a source of ignition, the carbide charge and feed mechanism shall be completely removed. All acetylene shall be expelled by completely flooding the generator shell with water and the generator shall be disconnected from the piping system. The generator shall be kept filled with water, if possible, or positioned to hold as much water as possible.\n\n(vi) Hot repairs shall not be made in a room where there are other generators unless all the generators and piping have been purged of acetylene.\n\n(g)  Calcium carbide storage \u2014(1)  Packaging.  (i) Calcium carbide shall be contained in metal packages of sufficient strength to prevent rupture. The packages shall be provided with a screw top or equivalent. These packages shall be constructed water- and air-tight. Solder shall not be used in such a manner that the package would fail if exposed to fire.\n\n(ii) Packages containing calcium carbide shall be conspicuously marked \u201cCalcium Carbide\u2014Dangerous If Not Kept Dry\u201d or with equivalent warning.\n\n(iii) Caution: Metal tools, even the so-called spark resistant type may cause ignition of an acetylene and air mixture when opening carbide containers.\n\n(iv) Sprinkler systems shall not be installed in carbide storage rooms.\n\n(2)  Storage indoors.  (i) Calcium carbide in quantities not to exceed 600 pounds (272.2 kg) may be stored indoors in dry, waterproof, and well-ventilated locations.\n\n(A) Calcium carbide not exceeding 600 pounds (272.2 kg) may be stored indoors in the same room with fuel-gas cylinders.\n\n(B) Packages of calcium carbide, except for one of each size, shall be kept sealed. The seals shall not be broken when there is carbide in excess of 1 pound (0.5 kg) in any other unsealed package of the same size of carbide in the room.\n\n(ii) Calcium carbide exceeding 600 pounds (272.2 kg) but not exceeding 5,000 pounds (2,268 kg) shall be stored:\n\n(A) In accordance with paragraph (g)(2)(iii) of this section;\n\n(B) In an inside generator room or outside generator house; or\n\n(C) In a separate room in a one-story building which may contain other occupancies, but without cellar or basement beneath the carbide storage section. Such rooms shall be constructed in accordance with paragraphs (f)(6)(i)(H) and (f)(6)(i)(I) of this section and ventilated in accordance with paragraph (f)(6)(ii) of this section. These rooms shall be used for no other purpose.\n\n(iii) Calcium carbide in excess of 5,000 pounds (2,268 kg) shall be stored in one-story buildings without cellar or basement and used for no other purpose, or in outside generator houses. If the storage building is of noncombustible construction, it may adjoin other one-story buildings if separated therefrom by unpierced firewalls; if it is detached less than 10 feet (3 m) from such building or buildings, there shall be no opening in any of the mutually exposing sides of such buildings within 10 feet (3 m). If the storage building is of combustible construction, it shall be at least 20 feet (6.1 m) from any other one- or two-story building, and at least 30 feet (9.1 m) from any other building exceeding two stories.\n\n(3)  Storage outdoors.  (i) Calcium carbide in unopened metal containers may be stored outdoors.\n\n(ii) Carbide containers to be stored outdoors shall be examined to make sure that they are in good condition. Periodic reexaminations shall be made for rusting or other damage to a container that might affect its water or air tightness.\n\n(iii) The bottom tier of each row shall be placed on wooden planking or equivalent, so that the containers will not come in contact with the ground or ground water.\n\n(iv) Containers of carbide which have been in storage the longest shall be used first."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.17.37.4", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "Q", "Subpart Q\u2014Welding, Cutting and Brazing", "", "\u00a7 1910.254 Arc welding and cutting.", "OSHA", "", "", "[55 FR 13696, Apr. 11, 1990, as amended at 61 FR 9241, Mar. 7, 1996; 70 FR 53929, Sept. 13, 2005]", "(a)  General \u2014(1)  Equipment selection.  Welding equipment shall be chosen for safe application to the work to be done as specified in paragraph (b) of this section.\n\n(2)  Installation.  Welding equipment shall be installed safely as specified by paragraph (c) of this section.\n\n(3)  Instruction.  Workmen designated to operate arc welding equipment shall have been properly instructed and qualified to operate such equipment as specified in paragraph (d) of this section.\n\n(b)  Application of arc welding equipment \u2014(1)  General.  Assurance of consideration of safety in design is obtainable by choosing apparatus complying with the Requirements for Electric Arc-Welding Apparatus, NEMA EW-1-1962, National Electrical Manufacturers Association or the Safety Standard for Transformer-Type Arc-Welding Machines, ANSI C33.2\u20141956, Underwriters' Laboratories, both of which are incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(2)  Environmental conditions.  (i) Standard machines for arc welding service shall be designed and constructed to carry their rated load with rated temperature rises where the temperature of the cooling air does not exceed 40 \u00b0C (104 \u00b0F) and where the altitude does not exceed 3,300 feet (1,005.8 m), and shall be suitable for operation in atmospheres containing gases, dust, and light rays produced by the welding arc.\n\n(ii) Unusual service conditions may exist, and in such circumstances machines shall be especially designed to safely meet the requirements of the service. Chief among these conditions are:\n\n(A) Exposure to unusually corrosive fumes.\n\n(B) Exposure to steam or excessive humidity.\n\n(C) Exposure to excessive oil vapor.\n\n(D) Exposure to flammable gases.\n\n(E) Exposure to abnormal vibration or shock.\n\n(F) Exposure to excessive dust.\n\n(G) Exposure to weather.\n\n(H) Exposure to unusual seacoast or shipboard conditions.\n\n(3)  Voltage.  The following limits shall not be exceeded:\n\n(i) Alternating-current machines\n\n(A) Manual arc welding and cutting\u201480 volts.\n\n(B) Automatic (machine or mechanized) arc welding and cutting\u2014100 volts.\n\n(ii) Direct-current machines\n\n(A) Manual arc welding and cutting\u2014100 volts.\n\n(B) Automatic (machine or mechanized) arc welding and cutting-100 volts.\n\n(iii) When special welding and cutting processes require values of open circuit voltages higher than the above, means shall be provided to prevent the operator from making accidental contact with the high voltage by adequate insulation or other means.\n\n(iv) For a.c. welding under wet conditions or warm surroundings where perspiration is a factor, the use of reliable automatic controls for reducing no load voltage is recommended to reduce the shock hazard.\n\n(4)  Design.  (i) A controller integrally mounted in an electric motor driven welder shall have capacity for carrying rated motor current, shall be capable of making and interrupting stalled rotor current of the motor, and may serve as the running overcurrent device if provided with the number of overcurrent units as specified by subpart S of this part.\n\n(ii) On all types of arc welding machines, control apparatus shall be enclosed except for the operating wheels, levers, or handles.\n\n(iii) Input power terminals, tap change devices and live metal parts connected to input circuits shall be completely enclosed and accessible only by means of tools.\n\n(iv) Terminals for welding leads should be protected from accidental electrical contact by personnel or by metal objects, i.e., vehicles, crane hooks, etc. Protection may be obtained by use of: Dead-front receptacles for plug connections; recessed openings with nonremovable hinged covers; heavy insulating sleeving or taping or other equivalent electrical and mechanical protection. If a welding lead terminal which is intended to be used exclusively for connection to the work is connected to the grounded enclosure, it must be done by a conductor at least two AWG sizes smaller than the grounding conductor and the terminal shall be marked to indicate that it is grounded.\n\n(v) No connections for portable control devices such as push buttons to be carried by the operator shall be connected to an a.c. circuit of higher than 120 volts. Exposed metal parts of portable control devices operating on circuits above 50 volts shall be grounded by a grounding conductor in the control cable.\n\n(vi) Auto transformers or a.c. reactors shall not be used to draw welding current directly from any a.c. power source having a voltage exceeding 80 volts.\n\n(c)  Installation of arc welding equipment \u2014(1)  General.  Installation including power supply shall be in accordance with the requirements of subpart S of this part.\n\n(2)  Grounding.  (i) The frame or case of the welding machine (except engine-driven machines) shall be grounded under the conditions and according to the methods prescribed in subpart S of this part.\n\n(ii) Conduits containing electrical conductors shall not be used for completing a work-lead circuit. Pipelines shall not be used as a permanent part of a work-lead circuit, but may be used during construction, extension or repair providing current is not carried through threaded joints, flanged bolted joints, or caulked joints and that special precautions are used to avoid sparking at connection of the work-lead cable.\n\n(iii) Chains, wire ropes, cranes, hoists, and elevators shall not be used to carry welding current.\n\n(iv) Where a structure, conveyor, or fixture is regularly employed as a welding current return circuit, joints shall be bonded or provided with adequate current collecting devices.\n\n(v) All ground connections shall be checked to determine that they are mechanically strong and electrically adequate for the required current.\n\n(3)  Supply connections and conductors.  (i) A disconnecting switch or controller shall be provided at or near each welding machine which is not equipped with such a switch or controller mounted as an integral part of the machine. The switch shall be in accordance with subpart S of this part. Overcurrent protection shall be provided as specified in subpart S of this part. A disconnect switch with overload protection or equivalent disconnect and protection means, permitted by subpart S of this part, shall be provided for each outlet intended for connection to a portable welding machine.\n\n(ii) For individual welding machines, the rated current-carrying capacity of the supply conductors shall be not less than the rated primary current of the welding machines.\n\n(iii) For groups of welding machines, the rated current-carrying capacity of conductors may be less than the sum of the rated primary currents of the welding machines supplied. The conductor rating shall be determined in each case according to the machine loading based on the use to be made of each welding machine and the allowance permissible in the event that all the welding machines supplied by the conductors will not be in use at the same time.\n\n(iv) In operations involving several welders on one structure, d.c. welding process requirements may require the use of both polarities; or supply circuit limitations for a.c. welding may require distribution of machines among the phases of the supply circuit. In such cases no load voltages between electrode holders will be 2 times normal in d.c. or 1, 1.41, 1.73, or 2 times normal on a.c. machines. Similar voltage differences will exist if both a.c. and d.c. welding are done on the same structure.\n\n(A) All d.c. machines shall be connected with the same polarity.\n\n(B) All a.c. machines shall be connected to the same phase of the supply circuit and with the same instantaneous polarity.\n\n(d)  Operation and maintenance \u2014(1)  General.  Workers assigned to operate or maintain arc welding equipment shall be acquainted with the requirements of this section and with 1910.252 (a), (b), and (c) of this part.\n\n(2)  Machine hook up.  Before starting operations all connections to the machine shall be checked to make certain they are properly made. The work lead shall be firmly attached to the work; magnetic work clamps shall be freed from adherent metal particles of spatter on contact surfaces. Coiled welding cable shall be spread out before use to avoid serious overheating and damage to insulation.\n\n(3)  Grounding.  Grounding of the welding machine frame shall be checked. Special attention shall be given to safety ground connections of portable machines.\n\n(4)  Leaks.  There shall be no leaks of cooling water, shielding gas or engine fuel.\n\n(5)  Switches.  It shall be determined that proper switching equipment for shutting down the machine is provided.\n\n(6)  Manufacturers' instructions.  Printed rules and instructions covering operation of equipment supplied by the manufacturers shall be strictly followed.\n\n(7)  Electrode holders.  Electrode holders when not in use shall be so placed that they cannot make electrical contact with persons, conducting objects, fuel or compressed gas tanks.\n\n(8)  Electric shock.  Cables with splices within 10 feet (3 m) of the holder shall not be used. The welder should not coil or loop welding electrode cable around parts of his body.\n\n(9)  Maintenance.  (i) The operator should report any equipment defect or safety hazard to his supervisor and the use of the equipment shall be discontinued until its safety has been assured. Repairs shall be made only by qualified personnel.\n\n(ii) Machines which have become wet shall be thoroughly dried and tested before being used.\n\n(iii) Cables with damaged insulation or exposed bare conductors shall be replaced. Joining lengths of work and electrode cables shall be done by the use of connecting means specifically intended for the purpose. The connecting means shall have insulation adequate for the service conditions."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.17.37.5", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "Q", "Subpart Q\u2014Welding, Cutting and Brazing", "", "\u00a7 1910.255 Resistance welding.", "OSHA", "", "", "", "(a)  General \u2014(1)  Installation.  All equipment shall be installed by a qualified electrician in conformance with subpart S of this part. There shall be a safety-type disconnecting switch or a circuit breaker or circuit interrupter to open each power circuit to the machine, conveniently located at or near the machine, so that the power can be shut off when the machine or its controls are to be serviced.\n\n(2)  Thermal protection.  Ignitron tubes used in resistance welding equipment shall be equipped with a thermal protection switch.\n\n(3)  Personnel.  Workmen designated to operate resistance welding equipment shall have been properly instructed and judged competent to operate such equipment.\n\n(4)  Guarding.  Controls of all automatic or air and hydraulic clamps shall be arranged or guarded to prevent the operator from accidentally activating them.\n\n(b)  Spot and seam welding machines (nonportable) \u2014(1)  Voltage.  All external weld initiating control circuits shall operate on low voltage, not over 120 volts, for the safety of the operators.\n\n(2)  Capacitor welding.  Stored energy or capacitor discharge type of resistance welding equipment and control panels involving high voltage (over 550 volts) shall be suitably insulated and protected by complete enclosures, all doors of which shall be provided with suitable interlocks and contacts wired into the control circuit (similar to elevator interlocks). Such interlocks or contacts shall be so designed as to effectively interrupt power and short circuit all capacitors when the door or panel is open. A manually operated switch or suitable positive device shall be installed, in addition to the mechanical interlocks or contacts, as an added safety measure assuring absolute discharge of all capacitors.\n\n(3)  Interlocks.  All doors and access panels of all resistance welding machines and control panels shall be kept locked and interlocked to prevent access, by unauthorized persons, to live portions of the equipment.\n\n(4)  Guarding.  All press welding machine operations, where there is a possibility of the operator's fingers being under the point of operation, shall be effectively guarded by the use of a device such as an electronic eye safety circuit, two hand controls or protection similar to that prescribed for punch press operation, \u00a7 1910.217 of this part. All chains, gears, operating bus linkage, and belts shall be protected by adequate guards, in accordance with \u00a7 1910.219 of this part.\n\n(5)  Shields.  The hazard of flying sparks shall be, wherever practical, eliminated by installing a shield guard of safety glass or suitable fire-resistant plastic at the point of operation. Additional shields or curtains shall be installed as necessary to protect passing persons from flying sparks. (See \u00a7 1910.252(b)(2)(i)(C) of this part.)\n\n(6)  Foot switches.  All foot switches shall be guarded to prevent accidental operation of the machine.\n\n(7)  Stop buttons.  Two or more safety emergency stop buttons shall be provided on all special multispot welding machines, including 2-post and 4-post weld presses.\n\n(8)  Safety pins.  On large machines, four safety pins with plugs and receptacles (one in each corner) shall be provided so that when safety pins are removed and inserted in the ram or platen, the press becomes inoperative.\n\n(9)  Grounding.  Where technically practical, the secondary of all welding transformers used in multispot, projection and seam welding machines shall be grounded. This may be done by permanently grounding one side of the welding secondary current circuit. Where not technically practical, a center tapped grounding reactor connected across the secondary or the use of a safety disconnect switch in conjunction with the welding control are acceptable alternates. Safety disconnect shall be arranged to open both sides of the line when welding current is not present.\n\n(c)  Portable welding machines \u2014(1)  Counterbalance.  All portable welding guns shall have suitable counterbalanced devices for supporting the guns, including cables, unless the design of the gun or fixture makes counterbalancing impractical or unnecessary.\n\n(2)  Safety chains.  All portable welding guns, transformers and related equipment that is suspended from overhead structures, eye beams, trolleys, etc., shall be equipped with safety chains or cables. Safety chains or cables shall be capable of supporting the total shock load in the event of failure of any component of the supporting system.\n\n(3)  Clevis.  Each clevis shall be capable of supporting the total shock load of the suspended equipment in the event of trolley failure.\n\n(4)  Switch guards.  All initiating switches, including retraction and dual schedule switches, located on the portable welding gun shall be equipped with suitable guards capable of preventing accidental initiation through contact with fixturing, operator's clothing, etc. Initiating switch voltage shall not exceed 24 volts.\n\n(5)  Moving holder.  The movable holder, where it enters the gun frame, shall have sufficient clearance to prevent the shearing of fingers carelessly placed on the operating movable holder.\n\n(6)  Grounding.  The secondary and case of all portable welding transformers shall be grounded. Secondary grounding may be by center tapped secondary or by a center tapped grounding reactor connected across the secondary.\n\n(d)  Flash welding equipment \u2014(1)  Ventilation and flash guard.  Flash welding machines shall be equipped with a hood to control flying flash. In cases of high production, where materials may contain a film of oil and where toxic elements and metal fumes are given off, ventilation shall be provided in accordance with \u00a7 1910.252(c) of this part.\n\n(2)  Fire curtains.  For the protection of the operators of nearby equipment, fire-resistant curtains or suitable shields shall be set up around the machine and in such a manner that the operators movements are not hampered.\n\n(e)  Maintenance.  Periodic inspection shall be made by qualified maintenance personnel, and a certification record maintained. The certification record shall include the date of inspection, the signature of the person who performed the inspection and the serial number, or other identifier, for the equipment inspected. The operator shall be instructed to report any equipment defects to his supervisor and the use of the equipment shall be discontinued until safety repairs have been completed."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.18.37.1", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "R", "Subpart R\u2014Special Industries", "", "\u00a7 1910.261 Pulp, paper, and paperboard mills.", "OSHA", "", "", "[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40 FR 23073, May 28, 1975; 43 FR 49751, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9241, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 1285, Jan. 8, 1998; 63 FR 33467, June 18, 1998; 72 FR 71070, Dec. 14, 2007; 76 FR 80739, Dec. 27, 2011; 78 FR 35566, June 13, 2013; 81 FR 83005, Nov. 18, 2016]", "(a)  General requirements \u2014(1)  Application.  This section applies to establishments where pulp, paper, and paperboard are manufactured and converted. This section does not apply to logging and the transportation of logs to pulp, paper, and paperboard mills.\n\n(2)  Standards incorporated by reference.  Standards covering issues of occupational safety and health which have general application without regard to any specific industry are incorporated by reference in paragraphs (b) through (m) of this section and in subparagraphs (3) and (4) of this paragraph and made applicable under this section. Such standards shall be construed according to the rules set forth in \u00a7 1910.5.\n\n(3)  General incorporation of standards.  Establishments subject to this section shall comply with the following standards of the American National Standards Institute, which are incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6:\n\n(i) Practice for Industrial Lighting, A11.1\u20141965 (R-1970).\n\n(ii) Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems, A13.1\u20141956.\n\n(iii) Safety Code for Elevators, Dumbwaiters, and Moving Walks, A17.1\u20141965, including Supplements A17.1a\u20141967, A17.1b\u20141968, A17.1c\u20141969, and A17.1d\u20141970.\n\n(iv) Practice for the Inspection of Elevators (Inspector's Manual), A17.2\u20141960, including Suppelements A17.2a\u20141965 and A17.2b\u20141967.\n\n(v) Safety Code for Conveyors, Cableways, and Related Equipment, B20.1\u20141957.\n\n(vi) Power Piping, B31.1.0\u20141967 and addenda B31.10a\u20141969. Fuel Gas Piping, B31.2\u20141968.\n\n(vii) Identification of Gas-Mask Canisters, K13.1\u20141967.\n\n(viii) Prevention of Sulfur Fires and Explosions, Z12.12\u20141968.\n\n(ix) Installation of Blower and Exhaust Systems for Dust, Stock, and Vapor Removal or Conveying, Z33.1\u20141961.\n\n(4)  Other standards.  The following standards, which are incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6, shall be considered standards under this section:\n\n(i) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Unfired Pressure Vessels, including addenda 1969.\n\n(ii) Building Exits Code for Life Safety from Fire, NFPA 101\u20141970.\n\n(iii) Safety in the Handling and Use of Explosives, IME Pamphlet No. 17, July 1960, Institute of Makers of Explosives.\n\n(b)  Safe practices \u2014(1)  Lockouts.  Devices such as padlocks shall be provided for locking out the source of power at the main disconnect switch. Before any maintenance, inspection, cleaning, adjusting, or servicing of equipment (electrical, mechanical, or other) that requires entrance into or close contact with the machinery or equipment, the main power disconnect switch or valve, or both, controlling its source of power or flow of material, shall be locked out or blocked off with padlock, blank flange, or similar device.\n\n(2)  Emergency lighting.  Emergency lighting shall be provided wherever it is necessary for employees to remain at their machines or stations to shut down equipment in case of power failure. Emergency lighting shall be provided at stairways and passageways or aisleways used by employees for emergency exit in case of power failure. Emergency lighting shall be provided in all plant first aid and medical facilities.\n\n(c)  Handling and storage of pulpwood and pulp chips \u2014(1)  Handling pulpwood with forklift trucks.  Where large forklift trucks, or lift trucks with clam-jaws, are used in the yard, the operator's enclosed cab shall be provided with an escape hatch, whenever the hydraulic arm blocks escape through the side doors.\n\n(2)  Handling pulpwood with cranes or stackers.  (i) Where locomotive cranes are used for loading or unloading pulpwood, the pulpwood shall be piled so as to allow a clearance of not less than 24 inches between the pile and the end of the cab of any locomotive crane in use, when the cab is turned in any working position.\n\n(ii) The minimum distance of the pulpwood pile from the centerline of a standard-gage track shall be maintained at not less than 8\n 1/2  feet.\n\n(iii) Logs shall be piled in an orderly and stable manner, with no projection into walkways or roadways.\n\n(iv) Railroad cars shall not be spotted on tracks adjacent to the locomotive cranes unless a 24-inch clearance is maintained, as required in paragraph (c)(2)(i) of this section.\n\n(v) The handling and storage of other materials shall conform to paragraphs (c)(2) (i) and (ii) of this section with respect to clearance.\n\n(vi) No person shall be permitted to walk beneath a suspended load, bucket, or hook.\n\n(3)  Handling pulpwood from ships.\n\n(i) [Reserved]\n\n(ii) The hatch tender shall be required to signal the hoisting engineer to move the load only after the men working in the hold are in the clear.\n\n(iii) The air in the ship's hold, tanks, or closed vessels shall be tested for oxygen deficiency and for both toxic and explosive gases and vapors.\n\n(4)  Handling pulpwood from flatcars and all other railway cars.  (i) Railroad flatcars for the conveyance of pulpwood loaded parallel to the length of the car shall be equipped with safety-stake pockets.\n\n(ii) Where pulpwood is loaded crosswise on a flatcar sufficient stakes of sizes not smaller than 4 by 4 inches shall be used to prevent the load from shifting.\n\n(iii) When it is necessary to cut stakes, those on the unloading side should be partially cut through first, and then the binder wires cut on the opposite side. Wire cutters equipped with long extension handles shall be used. No person shall be permitted along the dumping side of the car after the stakes have been cut.\n\n(iv) When steel straps without stakes are used, the steel straps shall be cut from a safe area to prevent employees from being struck by the falling logs.\n\n(v) Flatcars and all other cars shall be chocked during unloading. Where equipment is not provided with hand brakes, rail clamping chocks shall be used.\n\n(vi) A derail shall be used to prevent movement of other rail equipment into cars where persons are working.\n\n(5)  Handling pulpwood from trucks.  (i) Cutting of stakes and binder wires shall be done in accordance with paragraph (c)4(iii) of this section.\n\n(ii) Where binder chain and steel stakes are used, the binder chains shall be released and the stakes tripped from the opposite side of the load spillage.\n\n(iii) Where binder chains and crane slings are used, the crane slings shall be attached and taut before the binder chains are released. The hooker shall see that the helper is clear before signaling for the movement of the load.\n\n(6)  Handling pulp chips from railway cars.  All cars shall be securely fastened in place and all employees in the clear before dumping is started.\n\n(7)  Handling pulp chips from trucks and trailers.  All trucks and trailers shall be securely fastened in place and all employees in the clear before dumping is started.\n\n(8)  Cranes.\n\n(i) [Reserved]\n\n(ii) A safety device such as a heavy chain or cable at least equal in strength to the lifting cables shall be fastened to the boom and to the frame of the boom crane (if it is other than locomotive) at the base. Alternatively, a telescoping safety device shall be fastened to the boom and to the cab frame, so as to prevent the boom from snapping back over the cab in the event of lifting cable breakage.\n\n(iii) A crane shall not be operated where any part thereof may come within 10 feet of overhead powerlines (or other overhead obstructions) unless the powerlines have been deenergized. The boom shall be painted bright yellow from and including the head sheave to a point 6 feet down the boom towards the cab.\n\n(iv) Standard signals for the operation of cranes shall be established for all movements of the crane, in accordance with American National Standards B30.2\u20141943 (reaffirmed 1968) and B30.2.0\u20141967.\n\n(v) Only one member of the crew shall be authorized to give signals to the crane operator.\n\n(vi) All cranes shall be equipped with a suitable warning device such as a horn or whistle.\n\n(vii) A sheave guard shall be provided beneath the head sheave of the boom.\n\n(9)  Traffic warning signs or signals.  (i) A flagman shall direct the movement of cranes or locomotives being moved across railroad tracks or roads, and at any points where the vision of the operator is restricted. The flagman must always remain in sight of the operator when the crane or locomotive is in motion. The blue flag policy shall be used to mark stationary cars day and night. This policy shall include marking the track in advance of the spotted cars (flag for daytime, light for darkness).\n\n(ii) After cars are spotted for loading or unloading, warning flags or signs shall be placed in the center of the track at least 50 feet away from the cars and a derail set to protect workmen in the car.\n\n(10)  Illumination.  Artificial illumination shall be provided when loading or unloading is performed after dark, in accordance with American National Standard A11.1\u20141965 (R\u20141970).\n\n(11) [Reserved]\n\n(12)  Barking devices.  When barking drums are employed in the yard, the requirements of paragraph (e)(12) of this section shall apply.\n\n(13)  Hand tools.  Handles of wood hooks shall be locked to the shank to prevent them from rotating.\n\n(14)  Removal of pulpwood.  (i) The ends of a woodpile shall be properly sloped and cross-tiered into the pile. Upright poles shall not be used at the ends of woodpiles. To knock down wood from the woodpile, mechanical equipment shall be used to permit employees to keep in the clear of loosened wood.\n\n(ii) If dynamite is used to loosen the pile, only authorized personnel shall be permitted to handle and discharge the explosive. An electric detonator is preferable for firing; if a fuse is used, it shall be an approved safety fuse with a burning rate of not less than 120 seconds per yard and a minimum length of 3 feet, in accordance with Safety in the Handling and Use of Explosives, IME Pamphlet No. 17, July 1960.\n\n(15)  Belt conveyors.  (i) The sides of the conveyor shall be constructed so that the wood will not fall off.\n\n(ii) Where conveyors cross passageways or roadways, a horizontal platform shall be provided under the conveyor, extended out from the sides of the conveyor a distance equal to 1\n 1/2  times the length of the wood handled. The platform shall extend the width of the road plus 2 feet (61 cm) on each side, and shall be kept free of wood and rubbish. The edges of the platform shall be provided with toeboards or other protection that meet the requirements of subpart D of this part, to prevent wood from falling.\n\n(iii) All conveyors for pulpwood shall have the inrunning nips between chain and sprockets guarded; also, turning drums shall be guarded.\n\n(iv) Every belt conveyor shall have an emergency stop cable extending the length of the conveyor so that it may be stopped from any location along the line, or conveniently located stop buttons within 10 feet of each work station, in accordance with American National Standard B20.1\u20141957.\n\n(16)  Signs.  When conveyors cross walkways or roadways in the yards, the employer must erect signs reading \u201cDanger\u2014Overhead Conveyor\u201d or an equivalent warning, in accordance with ANSI Z35.1-1968 or ANSI Z535.2-2011, incorporated by reference in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(d)  Handling and storage of raw materials other than pulpwood or pulp chips \u2014(1)  Personal protective equipment.  Whenever possible, all dust, fumes, and gases incident to handling materials shall be controlled at the source, in accordance with American National Standard Z9.2\u20141960. Where control at the source is not possible, respirators with goggles or protective masks shall be provided, and employees shall wear them when handling alum, clay, soda ash, lime, bleach powder, sulfur, chlorine, and similar materials, and when opening rag bales.\n\n(2)  Clearance.  (i) When materials are being piled inside a building and upon platforms, an aisle clearance at least 3 feet greater than the widest truck in use shall be provided.\n\n(ii) Baled paper and rags stored inside a building shall not be piled closer than 18 inches to walls, partitions, or sprinkler heads.\n\n(3)  Piling and unpiling pulp.  (i) Piles of wet lap pulp (unless palletized) shall be stepped back one-half the width of the sheet for each 8 feet of pile height. Sheets of pulp shall be interlapped to make the pile secure. Pulp shall not be piled over pipelines to jeopardize pipes, or so as to cause overloading of floors, or to within 18 inches below sprinkler heads.\n\n(ii) Piles of pulp shall not be undermined when being unpiled.\n\n(iii) Floor capacities shall be clearly marked on all floors.\n\n(4)(i) [Reserved]\n\n(ii) Where rolls are pyramided two or more high, chocks shall be installed between each roll on the floor and at every row. Where pulp and paper rolls are stored on smooth floors in processing areas, rubber chocks with wooden core shall be used.\n\n(iii) When rolls are decked two or more high, the bottom rolls shall be chocked on each side to prevent shifting in either direction.\n\n(e)  Preparing pulpwood \u2014(1)  Gang and slasher saws.  A guard shall be provided in front of all gang and slasher saws to protect workers from wood thrown by saws. A guard shall be placed over tail sprockets.\n\n(2)  Slasher tables.  Saws shall be stopped and power switches shall be locked out and tagged whenever it is necessary for any person to be on the slasher table.\n\n(3) [Reserved]\n\n(4)  Runway to the jack ladder.  The runway from the pond or unloading dock to the table shall be protected with standard handrails and toeboards. Inclined portions shall have cleats or equivalent nonslip surfacing that complies with subpart D of this part. Protective equipment shall be provided for persons working over water.\n\n(5)  Guards below table.  Where not protected by the frame of the machine, the underside of the slasher saws shall be enclosed with guards.\n\n(6)  Conveyors.  The requirements of paragraph (c)(15)(iv) of this section shall apply.\n\n(7) [Reserved]\n\n(8)  Barker feed.  Each barker shall be equipped with a feed and turnover device which will make it unnecessary for the operator to hold a bolt or log by hand during the barking operation. Eye, ear, and head protection shall be provided for the operator, in accordance with paragraph (b)(2) of this section.\n\n(9) [Reserved]\n\n(10)  Stops.  All control devices shall be locked out and tagged when knives are being changed.\n\n(11)  Speed governor.  Water wheels, when directly connected to barker disks or grinders, shall be provided with speed governors, if operated with gate wide open.\n\n(12)  Continuous barking drums.  (i) When platforms or floors allow access to the sides of the drums, a standard railing shall be constructed around the drums. When two or more drums are arranged side by side, proper walkways with standard handrails shall be provided between each set, in accordance with the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.23, Guarding floor and wall openings and holes.\n\n(ii) Sprockets and chains, gears, and trunnions shall have standard guards, in accordance with the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.219, Mechanical power-transmission apparatus.\n\n(iii) Whenever it becomes necessary for a workman to go within a drum, the driving mechanism shall be locked and tagged, at the main disconnect switch, in accordance with paragraph (b)(1) of this section.\n\n(13)  Intermittent barking drums.  In addition to motor switch, clutch, belt shifter, or other power disconnecting device, intermittent barking drums shall be equipped with a device which may be locked to prevent the drum from moving while it is being emptied or filled.\n\n(14)  Hydraulic barkers.  Hydraulic barkers shall be enclosed with strong baffles at the inlet and the outlet. The operator shall be protected by at least five-ply laminated glass.\n\n(15)  Splitter block.  The block upon or against which the wood is rested shall have a corrugated surface or other means provided that the wood will not slip. Wood to be split, and also the splitting block, shall be free of ice, snow, or chips. The operator shall be provided with eye and foot protection. A clear and unobstructed view shall be maintained between equipment and workers around the block and the workers' help area.\n\n(16)  Power control.  Power for the operation of the splitter shall be controlled by a clutch or equivalent device.\n\n(17)  Knot cleaners.  The operators of knot cleaners of the woodpecker type shall wear eye protection equipment.\n\n(18)  Chipper spout.  The feed system to the chipper spout shall be arranged in such a way that the operator does not stand in a direct line with the chipper spout. All chipper spouts shall be enclosed to a height of at least 42 inches from the floor or operator's platform. When other protection is not sufficient, the operator shall wear a safety belt line. The safety belt line shall be fastened in such a manner as to make it impossible for the operator to fall into the throat of the chipper. Ear protection equipment shall be worn by the operator and others in the immediate area if there is any possibility that the noise level may be harmful (see \u00a7 1910.95).\n\n(19)  Carriers for knives.  Carriers shall be provided and used for transportation of knives.\n\n(f)  Rag and old paper preparation \u2014(1)  Ripping and trimming tools.  (i) Hand knives and scissors shall have blunt points, shall be fastened to the table with chain or thong, and shall not be carried on the person but placed safely in racks or sheaths when not in use.\n\n(ii) Hand knives and sharpening steels shall be provided with guards at the junction of the handle and the blade.\n\n(2)  Shredders, cutters, and dusters.  (i) Rotating heads or cylinders shall be completely enclosed except for an opening at the feed side sufficient to permit only the entry of stock. The enclosure shall extend over the top of the feed rolls. It shall be constructed either of solid material or with mesh or openings not exceeding one-half inch and substantial enough to contain flying particles and prevent accidental contact with moving parts. The enclosure shall be bolted or locked into place.\n\n(ii) A smooth-pivoted idler roll resting on the stock or feed table shall be provided in front of feed rolls except when arrangements prevent the operator from standing closer than 36 inches to any part of the feed rolls.\n\n(iii) Any manually fed cutter, shredder, or duster shall be provided with an idler roll as per subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph or the operator shall use special hand-feeding tools.\n\n(iv) Hoods of cutters, shredders, and dusters shall have exhaust ventilation, in accordance with American National Standard Z9.2\u20141960.\n\n(3)  Blowers.  (i) Blowers used for transporting rags shall be provided with feed hoppers having outer edges located not less than 48 inches from the fan.\n\n(ii) The arrangement of the blower discharge outlets and work areas shall be such as to prevent material from falling on workers.\n\n(4)  Conveyors.  Conveyors and conveyor drive belts and pulleys shall be fully enclosed or, if open and within 7 feet of the floor, shall be constructed and guarded in accordance with paragraph (c)(15) of this section and American National Standards B15.1\u20141953 (Reaffirmed 1958) and B20.1\u20141957.\n\n(5)  Dust.  Measures for the control of dust shall be provided, in accordance with American National Standards Z33.1\u20141961, Z87.1\u20141968, and Z88.2\u20141969.\n\n(6)  Rag cookers.  (i) When cleaning, inspection, or other work requires that persons enter rag cookers, all steam and water valves, or other control devices, shall be locked and tagged in the closed or \u201coff\u201d position. Blank flanging of pipelines is acceptable in place of closed and locked valves.\n\n(ii) When cleaning, inspection, or other work requires that persons must enter the cooker, one person shall be stationed outside in a position to observe and assist in case of emergency, in accordance with paragraph (b)(5) of this section.\n\n(iii) [Reserved]\n\n(iv) Rag cookers shall be provided with safety valves in accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Unfired Pressure Vessels\u20141968, with Addenda.\n\n(g)  Chemical processes of making pulp \u2014(1)  Sulfur burners.  (i) Sulfur-burner houses shall be safely and adequately ventilated, and every precaution shall be taken to guard against dust explosion hazards and fires, in accordance with American National Standards Z9.2\u20141960 and Z12.12\u20141968.\n\n(ii) Nonsparking tools and equipment shall be used in handling dry sulfur.\n\n(iii) Sulfur storage bins shall be kept free of sulfur dust accumulation, in accordance with American National Standard Z9.2\u20141960.\n\n(iv) Sulfur-melting equipment shall not be located in the burner room.\n\n(2)  Protection for employees (acid plants).  (i) Supplied air respirators shall be strategically located for emergency and rescue use.\n\n(ii) The worker shall be provided with eye protection, a supplied air respirator and a personal fall protection system that meets the requirements of subpart I of this part, during inspection, repairs or maintenance of acid towers. The line shall be extended to an attendant stationed outside the tower opening.\n\n(3)  Acid tower structure.  Outside elevators shall be inspected daily during winter months when ice materially affects safety. Elevators, runways, stairs, etc., for the acid tower shall be inspected monthly for defects that may occur because of exposure to acid or corrosive gases.\n\n(4)  Tanks (acid).  (i) Tanks shall be free of acid and shall be washed out with water, and fresh air shall be blown into them before allowing men to enter. Men entering the tanks shall be provided with supplied air respirators, lifebelts, and attached lifelines.\n\n(ii) A man shall be stationed outside to summon assistance if necessary. All intake valves to a tank shall be blanked off or disconnected.\n\n(5)  Clothing.  Where lime slaking takes place, employees shall be provided with rubber boots, rubber gloves, protective aprons, and eye protection. A deluge shower and eye fountain shall be provided to flush the skin and eyes to counteract lime or acid burns.\n\n(6)  Lead burning.  When lead burning is being done within tanks, fresh air shall be forced into the tanks so that fresh air will reach the face of the worker first and the direction of the current will never be from the source of the fumes toward the face of the workers. Supplied air respirators (constant-flow type) shall be provided.\n\n(7)  Hoops for acid storage tanks.  Hoops of tanks shall be made of rods rather than flat strips and shall be safely maintained by scheduled inspections.\n\n(8)  Chip and sawdust bins.  Steam or compressed-air lances, or other facilities, shall be used for breaking down the arches caused by jamming in chip lofts. No worker shall be permitted to enter a bin unless provided with a safety belt, with line attached, and an attendant stationed at the bin to summon assistance.\n\n(9)  Exits (digester building).  At least one unobstructed exit at each end of the room shall be provided on each floor of a digester building.\n\n(10)  Gas masks (digester building).  Gas masks must be available, and they must furnish adequate protection against sulfurous acid and chlorine gases and be inspected and repaired in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.134.\n\n(11)  Elevators.  (i) Elevators shall be constructed in accordance with American National Standard A17.1\u20141965.\n\n(ii) Elevators shall be equipped with gas masks for the maximum number of passengers.\n\n(iii) Elevators shall be equipped with an alarm system to advise of failure.\n\n(12)  Blowoff valves and piping.  (i) The blowoff valve of a digester shall be arranged so as to be operated from another room, remote from safety valves.\n\n(ii) Through bolts instead of cap bolts shall be used on all digester pipings.\n\n(iii) Heavy duty pipe, valves, and fittings shall be used between the digester and blow pit. These valves, fittings, and pipes shall be inspected at least semiannually to determine the degree of deterioration.\n\n(iv) Digester blow valves shall be pinned or locked in closed position throughout the entire cooking period.\n\n(13)  Blow pits and blow tanks.  (i) Blow-pit openings preferably shall be on the side of the pit instead of on the top. Openings shall be as small as possible when located on top, and shall be protected in accordance with subpart D of this part.\n\n(ii) A specially constructed ladder shall be used for access to blow pits, to be constructed so that the door of the blow pit cannot be closed when the ladder is in place; other means shall be provided to prevent the closing of the pit door when anyone is in the pit.\n\n(iii) A signaling device shall be installed in the digester and blow-pit rooms and chip bins to be operated as a warning before and while digesters are being blown.\n\n(iv) Blow-pit hoops shall be maintained in a safe condition.\n\n(14)  Blowing digester.  (i) Blowoff valves shall be opened slowly.\n\n(ii) After the digester has started to be blown, the blowoff valve shall be left open, and the hand plate shall not be removed until the digester cook signals the blow-pit man that the blow is completed. Whenever it becomes necessary to remove the hand plate to clear stock, operators shall wear eye protection equipment and protective clothing to guard against burns from hot stock.\n\n(iii) Means shall be provided whereby the digester cook shall signal the man in the chip bin before starting to load the digester.\n\n(15)  Inspecting and repairing digester.  (i) Valves controlling lines leading into a digester shall be locked out and tagged. The keys to the locks shall be in the possession of a person or persons doing the inspecting or making repairs.\n\n(ii) Fresh air shall be blown into the digester constantly while workmen are inside. Supplied air respirators shall be available in the event the fresh air supply fails or is inadequate.\n\n(iii) No inspector shall enter a digester unless a lifeline is securely fastened to his body by means of a safety belt and at least one other experienced employee is stationed outside the digester to handle the line and to summon assistance. All ladders and lifelines shall be inspected before each use.\n\n(iv) All employees entering digesters for inspection or repair work shall be provided with protective headgear. Eye protection and dust masks shall be provided to workmen while the old brick lining is being removed, in accordance with American National Standards, Z87.1\u20141968, Z88.2\u20141969, and Z99.1\u20141969.\n\n(16)  Pressure tanks-accumulators (acid).  (i) Safety regulations governing inspection and repairing of pressure tanks-accumulators (acid) shall be the same as those specified in subparagraph (15) of this paragraph.\n\n(ii) The pressure tanks-accumulators shall be inspected twice annually. (See the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Unfired Pressure Vessels\u20141968, with Addenda.)\n\n(17)  Pressure vessels (safety devices).  (i) A safety valve shall be installed in a separate line from each pressure vessel; no hand valve shall be installed between this safety valve and the pressure vessel. Safety valves shall be checked between each cook to be sure they have not become plugged or corroded to the point of being inoperative. (See the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Unfired Pressure Vessels\u20141968, with Addenda.)\n\n(ii) All safety devices shall conform to Paragraph U-2 in the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Unfired Pressure Vessels\u20141968, with Addenda.\n\n(18)  Miscellaneous.  Insofar as the processes of the sulfate and soda operations are similar to those of the sulfite processes, the standard of paragraphs (g) (1) through (17) of this section shall apply.\n\n(i) Quick operating showers, bubblers, etc., shall be available for emergency use in case of caustic soda burns.\n\n(ii) Rotary tenders, smelter operators, and those cleaning smelt spouts shall be provided with eye protection equipment (fitted with lenses that filter out the harmful rays emanating from the light source) when actively engaged in their duties, in accordance with American National Standard Z87.1\u20141968.\n\n(iii) Heavy-duty pipe, valves, and fittings shall be used between digester and blow pit. These shall be inspected at least semiannually to determine the degree of deterioration and repaired or replaced when necessary, in accordance with American National Standards B31.1\u20141955, B31.1a\u20141963, B31.1.0\u20141967, and B31.2\u20141968.\n\n(iv) Smelt-dissolving tanks shall be covered and the cover kept closed, except when samples are being taken.\n\n(v) Smelt tanks shall be provided with vent stacks and explosion doors, in accordance with American National Standard Z9.1\u20141951.\n\n(19)  Blow lines.\n\n(i)-(ii) [Reserved]\n\n(iii) When blow lines from more than one digester lead into one pipe, the cock or valve of the blow line from the tank being inspected or repaired shall be locked or tagged out, or the line shall be disconnected and blocked off.\n\n(20)  Furnace room.  Exhaust ventilation shall be provided where niter cake is fed into a rotary furnace and shall be so designed and maintained as to keep the concentration of hydrogen sulfide gas below the parts per million listed in \u00a7 1910.1000.\n\n(21)  Inspection and repair of tanks.  All piping leading to tanks shall be blanked off or valved and locked or tagged. Any lines to sewers shall be blanked off to protect workers from air contaminants.\n\n(22)  Welding.  Welding on blow tanks, accumulator tanks, or any other vessels where turpentine vapor or other combustible vapor could gather shall be done only after the vessel has been completely purged of fumes. Fresh air shall be supplied workers inside of vessels.\n\n(23)  Turpentine systems and storage tanks.  Nonsparking tools and ground hose shall be used when pumping out the tank. The tank shall be surrounded by a berm or moat.\n\n(h)  Bleaching \u2014(1)  Bleaching engines.  Bleaching engines, except the Bellmer type, shall be completely covered on the top, with the exception of one small opening large enough to allow filling, but too small to admit an employee. Platforms leading from one engine to another shall have standard guardrails that meet the requirements in subpart D of this part.\n\n(2)  Bleach mixing rooms.  (i) The room in which the bleach powder is mixed shall be provided with adequate exhaust ventilation, located at the floor level, in accordance with American National Standard Z9.1\u20141951.\n\n(ii) Chlorine gas shall be carried away from the work place and breathing area by an exhaust system. The gas shall be rendered neutral or harmless before being discharged into the atmosphere. The requirements of American National Standard Z9.2\u20141960 shall apply to this subdivision.\n\n(iii) For emergency and rescue operations, the employer must provide employees with self-contained breathing apparatuses or supplied-air respirators, and ensure that employees use these respirators, in accordance with the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.134.\n\n(3)  Liquid chlorine.  (i) Tanks of liquid chlorine shall be stored in an adequately ventilated unoccupied room, where their possible leakage cannot affect workers.\n\n(ii) Gas masks capable of absorbing chlorine shall be supplied, conveniently placed, and regularly inspected, and workers who may be exposed to chlorine gas shall be instructed in their use.\n\n(iii) For emergency and rescue work, independent self-contained oxygen-type masks or supplied air equipment shall be provided.\n\n(iv) At least two exits, remote from each other, shall be provided for all rooms in which chlorine is stored.\n\n(v) Spur tracks upon which tank cars containing chlorine and caustic are spotted and connected to pipelines shall be protected by means of a derail in front of the cars.\n\n(vi) All chlorine, caustic, and acid lines shall be marked for positive identification, in accordance with American National Standard A13.1\u20141967.\n\n(4)  Bagged or drummed chemicals.  Bagged or drummed chemicals require efficient handling to prevent damage and spillage. Certain oxidizing chemicals used in bleaching pulp and also in some sanitizing work require added precautions for safety in storage and handling. In storage, these chemicals must be isolated from combustible materials and other chemicals with which they will react such as acids. They must also be kept dry, clean and uncontaminated.\n\n(i)  Mechanical pulp process \u2014(1)  Pulp grinders.  (i) Water wheels directly connected to pulp grinders shall be provided with speed governors limiting the peripheral speed of the grinder to that recommended by the manufacturer.\n\n(ii) Doors of pocket grinders shall be arranged so as to keep them from closing accidentally.\n\n(2)  Butting saws.  Hood guards shall be provided on butting saws, in accordance with American National Standard O1.1\u20141954 (reaffirmed 1961).\n\n(3)  Floors and platforms.  The requirements of paragraph (b)(3) of this section shall apply.\n\n(4)  Personal protection.  Persons exposed to falling material shall wear eye, head, foot, and shin protection equipment, in accordance with American National Standards Z87.1\u20141968, Z88.2\u20141969, Z89.1\u20141969, and Z41.1\u20141967.\n\n(j)  Stock preparation \u2014(1)  Pulp shredders.  (i) Cutting heads shall be completely enclosed except for an opening at the feed side sufficient to permit only entry of stock. The enclosure shall be bolted or locked in place. The enclosure shall be of solid material or with mesh or other openings not exceeding one-half inch.\n\n(ii) Either a slanting feed table with its outer edge not less than 36 inches from the cutting head or an automatic feeding device shall be provided.\n\n(iii) Repairs for cleaning of blockage shall be done only when the shredder is shutdown and control devices locked.\n\n(2)  Pulp conveyors.  Pulp conveyors and conveyor drive belts and pulleys shall be fully enclosed, or if open and within 7 feet of the floor, shall be constructed and guarded in accordance with American National Standard B20.1\u20141957.\n\n(3) [Reserved]\n\n(4)  Beaters.  (i) Beater rolls shall be provided with covers.\n\n(ii) When cleaning, inspecting, or other work requires that persons enter the beaters, all control devices shall be locked or tagged out, in accordance with paragraph (b)(4) of this section.\n\n(iii) When beaters are fed from the floor above, the chute opening, if less than 42 inches (1.06 m) from the floor, shall be provided with a guardrail system that meets the requirements in subpart D of this part, or other equivalent enclosures. Openings for manual feeding shall be sufficient only for entry of stock, and shall be provided with at least two permanently secured crossrails or other fall protection system that meet the requirements in subpart D.\n\n(iv) [Reserved]\n\n(v) Floors around beaters shall be provided with sufficient drainage to remove wastes.\n\n(5)  Pulpers.  (i) All pulpers having the top or any other opening of a vessel less than 42 inches (107 cm) from the floor or work platform shall have such openings guarded by guardrail systems that meet the requirements in subpart D of this part, or other equivalent enclosures. For manual changing, openings shall be sufficient only to permit the entry of stock, and shall be provided with at least two permanently secured crossrails, or other fall protection systems that meet the requirements in subpart D.\n\n(ii) When cleaning, inspecting, or other work requires that persons enter the pulpers, they shall be equipped with safety belt and lifeline, and one person shall be stationed outside at a position to observe and assist in case of emergency.\n\n(iii) When cleaning, inspecting, or other work requires that persons enter pulpers, all steam, water, or other control devices shall be locked or tagged out. Blank flanging and tagging of pipe lines is acceptable in place of closed and locked or tagged valves. Blank flanging of steam and water lines shall be acceptable in place of valve locks.\n\n(6)  Stock chests.  (i) All control devices shall be locked or tagged out when persons enter stock chests, in accordance with paragraph (b)(4) of this section.\n\n(ii) When cleaning, inspecting, or other work requires that persons enter stock chests, they shall be provided with a low-voltage extension light.\n\n(k)  Machine room \u2014(1)  Emergency stops.  Paper machines shall be equipped with devices that will stop the machine quickly in an emergency. The devices shall consist of push buttons for electric motive power (or electrically operated engine stops), pull cords connected directly to the prime mover, control clutches, or other devices, interlocked with adequate braking action. The devices shall be tested periodically by making use of them when stopping the machine and shall be so located that any person working on the machine can quickly disconnect the machine from the source of power in case of emergency.\n\n(2)  Drives.  (i) All drives shall be provided with lockout devices at the power switch which interrupts the flow of current to the unit.\n\n(ii) All ends of rotating shafts including dryer drum shafts shall be completely guarded.\n\n(iii) All accessible disengaged doctor blades should be covered.\n\n(iv) All exposed shafts shall be guarded. Crossovers shall be provided.\n\n(v) Oil cups and grease fittings shall be placed in a safe area remote from nip and heat hazards.\n\n(3)  Protective equipment.  Face shields, aprons, and rubber gloves shall be provided for workmen handling acids in accordance with paragraphs (b)(2) and (d)(1) of this section.\n\n(4)-(5) [Reserved]\n\n(6)  Steps.  Steps of uniform rise and tread with nonslip surfaces that meet the requirements in subpart D of this part shall be provided at each press.\n\n(7)  Plank walkways.  A removable plank shall be provided along each press, with standard guardrails installed. The planks shall have nonslip surfaces in accordance with paragraph (b)(3) of this section.\n\n(8)  Dryer lubrication.  If a gear bearing must be oiled while the machine is in operation, an automatic oiling device to protect the oiler shall be provided, or oil cups and grease fittings shall be placed along the walkways out of reach of hot pipes and dryer gears.\n\n(9)  Levers.  All levers carrying weights shall be constructed so that weights will not slip or fall off.\n\n(10)  First dryer.  Either a permanent guardrail or apron guard or both shall be installed in front of the first dryer in each section in accordance with paragraph (b)(1) of this section.\n\n(11)  Steam and hot-water pipes.  All exposed steam and hot-water pipes within 7 feet of the floor or working platform or within 15 inches measured horizontally from stairways, ramps, or fixed ladders shall be covered with an insulating material, or guarded in such manner as to prevent contact.\n\n(12)  Dryer gears.  Dryer gears shall be guarded excepting where the oilers' walkway is removed out of reach of the gears' nips and spokes and hot pipes in accordance with American National Standard B15.1\u20141953 (reaffirmed 1958).\n\n(i) A guardrail shall be provided at broke holes in accordance with \u00a7 1910.23.\n\n(13)  Broke hole.  (i) A guardrail that complies with subpart D of this part shall be provided at broke holes.\n\n(ii) Where pulpers are located directly below the broke hole on a paper machine and where the broke hole opening is large enough to permit a worker to fall through, any employee pushing broke down the hole shall wear a safety belt attached to a safety belt line. The safety belt line shall be fastened in such a manner that it is impossible for the person to fall into the pulper.\n\n(iii) An alarm bell or a flashing light shall be actuated before dropping material through the broke hole.\n\n(14)  Feeder belt.  A feeder belt or other effective device shall be provided for starting paper through the calender stack.\n\n(15)  Steps.  Steps or ladders that comply with subpart D of this part and tread with nonslip surfaces shall be provided at each calendar stack. Handrails and hand grips complying with subpart D shall be provided at each calendar stack.\n\n(16) [Reserved]\n\n(17)  Sole plates.  All exposed sole plates between dryers, calenders, reels, and rewinders shall have a nonskid surface.\n\n(18)  Nip points.  The hazard of the nip points on all calender rolls shall be eliminated or minimized by means of an effective barrier device, or by feeding the paper into the rolls by means of a rope carrier, air jets, or hand feeding devices.\n\n(19)  Platforms.  [Reserved]\n\n(20)  Scrapers.  Alloy steel scrapers with pullthrough blades approximately 3 by 5 inches in size shall be used to remove \u201cscabs\u201d from calender rolls.\n\n(21)  Illumination.  Permanent lighting shall be installed in all areas where employees are required to make machine adjustments and sheet transfers in accordance with the American National Standard A11.1\u20141965 (R 1970).\n\n(22)  Control panels.  All control panel handles and buttons shall be protected from accidental contact.\n\n(23) [Reserved]\n\n(24)  Lifting reels.  (i) The reels shall stop rotating before being lifted from bearings.\n\n(ii) All lifting equipment (clamps, cables, and slings) shall be maintained in a safe condition and inspected regularly.\n\n(iii) Reel shafts with square block ends shall be guarded.\n\n(25)  Feeder belts.  Feeder belts, carrier ropes, air carriage, or other equally effective means shall be provided for starting paper into the nip or drum-type reels.\n\n(26)  Inrunning nip.  (i) Where the nipping points of all drum winders and rewinders is on the operator's side, it shall be guarded by barrier guards interlocked with the drive mechanism.\n\n(ii) [Reserved]\n\n(27)  Core collars.  Set screws for securing core collars to winding and unwinding shafts shall not protrude above the face of the collar. All edges of the collar with which an operator's hand comes in contact shall be beveled to remove all sharp corners.\n\n(28)  Slitter knives.  Slitter knives shall be guarded so as to prevent accidental contact. Carriers shall be provided and used for transportation of slitter knives.\n\n(29)  Winder shaft.  The winder shall have a guide rail to align the shaft for easy entrance into the opened rewind shaft bearing housings.\n\n(30)  Core shaft.  When the core shaft weighs in excess of the safe standard, a mechanical device such as a dolly shall be provided for carrying all or part of the weight when it is being removed from the set of paper and placed in the dressing brackets on the winder.\n\n(31)  Winder area.  A nonskid surface shall be provided in the front vicinity of the winder to prevent accidental slipping.\n\n(32)  Radiation.  Special standards regarding the use of radiation equipment shall be posted and followed as required by \u00a7 1910.96.\n\n(l)  Finishing room \u2014(1)  Cleaning rolls.  Rolls shall be cleaned only on the outrunning side.\n\n(2)  Emergency stops.  Electrically or manually operated quick power disconnecting devices, interlocked with braking action, shall be provided on all operating sides of the machine within easy reach of all employees. These devices shall be tested by making use of them when stopping the machine.\n\n(3)  Core collars.  The requirements of paragraph (k)(27) of this section and the American National Standard B15.1\u20141953 (reaffirmed 1958) shall apply.\n\n(4)  Elevators.  These shall be in accordance with American National Standard A17.1\u20141965.\n\n(5)  Control panels.  The requirements of paragraph (k)(22) of this section shall apply.\n\n(6)  Guillotine-type cutters.  (i) Each guillotine-type cutter shall be equipped with a control which requires the operator and his helper, if any, to use both hands to engage the clutch.\n\n(ii) Each guillotine-type cutter shall be equipped with a nonrepeat device.\n\n(iii) Carriers shall be provided and used for transportation of guillotine-type cutter knives.\n\n(7)  Rotary cutter.  (i) On single-knife machines a guard shall be provided at a point of contact to the knife.\n\n(ii) On duplex cutters the protection required for single-knife machines shall be provided for the first knife, and a hood shall be provided for the second knife.\n\n(iii) Safe access shall be provided to the knives of a rotary cutter by means of catwalks with nonslip surfaces, railings, and toeboards in accordance with paragraph (b)(3) of this section.\n\n(iv) A guard shall be provided for the spreader or squeeze roll at the nip side on sheet cutters.\n\n(v) Electrically or manually operated quick power disconnecting devices with adequate braking action shall be provided on all operating sides of the machine within easy reach of all operators.\n\n(vi) The outside slitters shall be guarded.\n\n(8)  Platers.  (i) A guard shall be arranged across the face of the rolls to serve as a warning that the operator's hand is approaching the danger zone.\n\n(ii) A quick power disconnecting device shall be installed on each machine within easy reach of the operator.\n\n(9)  Finishing room rewinders.  (i) The nipping points of all drum winders and rewinders located on the operator's side shall be guarded by either automatic or manually operated barrier guards of sufficient height to protect fully anyone working around them. The barrier guard shall be interlocked with the drive mechanism to prevent operating above jog speed without the guard in place.\n\nA zero speed switch should be installed to prevent the guard from being raised while the roll is turning.\n\n(ii) A nonskid surface shall be provided in front of the rewinder to prevent an employee from slipping in accordance with paragraph (b)(3) of this section.\n\n(iii) Mechanical lifting devices shall be provided for placing and removing rolls from the machine.\n\n(10)  Control panels.  The requirements of paragraph (k)(22) of this section shall apply.\n\n(11)  Roll-type embosser.  The nipping point located on the operator's side shall be guarded by either automatic or manually operated barrier guards interlocked with the drive.\n\n(12)  Sorting and counting tables.  (i) Tables shall be smooth and free from splinters, with edges and corners rounded.\n\n(ii) Paddles shall be smooth and free from splinters.\n\n(13)  Roll splitters.  The nip point and cutter knife shall be guarded by either automatic or manually operated barrier guards.\n\n(m)  Materials handling \u2014(1)  Hand trucks.  No person shall be permitted to ride on a powered hand truck unless it is so designed by the manufacturer. A limit switch shall be on operating handle\u201430 degrees each way from a 45-degree angle up and down.\n\n(2) [Reserved]\n\n(3)  Cartons.  The carton-stitching machine shall be guarded to prevent the operator from coming in contact with the stitching head.\n\n(4) [Reserved]\n\n(5)  Unloading cars.  Flag signals, derails, or other protective devices shall be used to protect men during switching operations. The blue flag policy shall be invoked according to paragraph (c)(9)(i) of this section."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.18.37.2", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "R", "Subpart R\u2014Special Industries", "", "\u00a7 1910.262 Textiles.", "OSHA", "", "", "[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40 FR 23073, May 28, 1975; 49 FR 5324, Feb. 10, 1984; 61 FR 9241, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 33467, June 18, 1998; 81 FR 83006, Nov. 18, 2016]", "(a)  Application requirements \u2014(1)  Application.  The requirements of this subpart for textile safety apply to the design, installation, processes, operation, and maintenance of textile machinery, equipment, and other plant facilities in all plants engaged in the manufacture and processing of textiles, except those processes used exclusively in the manufacture of synthetic fibers.\n\n(2)  Standards incorporated by reference.  Standards covering issues of occupational safety and health which are of general application without regard to any specific industry are incorporated by reference in paragraphs of this section and made applicable to textiles. All such standards shall be construed according to the rules of construction set out in \u00a7 1910.5.\n\n(b)  Definitions applicable to this section \u2014(1)  Belt shifter.  A  belt shifter  is a device for mechanically shifting a belt from one pulley to another.\n\n(2)  Belt shifter lock.  A  belt shifter lock  is a device for positively locking the belt shifter in position while the machine is stopped and the belt is idling on the loose pulleys.\n\n(3)  Calender.  A  calender  in essence consists of a set of heavy rollers mounted on vertical side frames and arranged to pass cloth between them. Calenders may have two to ten rollers, or bowls, some of which can be heated.\n\n(4)  Embossing calender.  An  embossing calender  is a calender with two or more rolls, one of which is engraved for producing figured effects of various kinds on a fabric.\n\n(5)  Cans (drying).  Drying  cans  are hollow cylindrical drums mounted in a frame so they can rotate. They are heated with steam and are used to dry fabrics or yarn as it passes around the perimeter of the can.\n\n(6)  Carbonizing. Carbonizing  means the removing of vegetable matter such as burns, straws, etc., from wool by treatment with acid, followed by heat. The undesired matter is reduced to a carbon-like form which may be removed by dusting or shaking.\n\n(7)  Card.  A  card  machine consists of cylinders of various sizes\u2014and in certain cases flats\u2014covered with card clothing and set in relation to each other so that fibers in staple form may be separated into individual relationship. The speed of the cylinders and their direction of rotation varies. The finished product is delivered as a sliver. Cards of different types are: The revolving flat card, the roller-and-clearer card, etc.\n\n(8)  Card clothing. Card clothing  is the material with which many of the surfaces of a card are covered; e.g., the cylinder, doffer, etc. It consists of a thick foundation material, usually made of textile fabrics, through which are pressed many fine, closely spaced, specially bent wires.\n\n(9)  Comber.  A  comber  is a machine for combing fibers of cotton, wool, etc. The essential parts are a device for feeding forward a fringe of fibers at regular intervals and an arrangement of combs or pins which, at the right time, pass through the fringe. All tangled fibers, short fibers, and neps are removed and the long fibers are laid parallel.\n\n(10)  Combing machinery. Combing machinery  is a general classification, including combers, sliver lap machines, ribbon lap machines, and gill boxes, but excluding cards.\n\n(11)  Cutter (rotary staple).  A rotary staple  cutter  is a machine consisting of one or more rotary blades used for the purpose of cutting textile fibers into staple lengths.\n\n(12)  Exposed to contact. Exposed to contact  shall mean that the location of an object, material, nip point, or point of operation is such that a person is liable to come in contact with it in his normal course of employment.\n\n(13)  Garnett machine.  A  Garnett machine  means any of a number of types of machines for opening hard twisted waste of wool, cotton, silk, etc. Essentially, such machines consist of a lickerin; one or more cylinders, each having a complement worker and stripper rolls; and a fancy roll and doffer. The action of such machines is somewhat like that of a wool card, but it is much more severe in that the various rolls are covered with garnett wire instead of card clothing.\n\n(14)  Gill box.  A  gill box  is a machine used in the worsted system of manufacturing yarns. Its function is to arrange the fibers in parallel order. Essentially, it consists of a pair of feed rolls and a series of followers where the followers move at a faster surface speed and perform a combing action.\n\n(15)  Interlock.  An  interlock  is a device that operates to prevent the operation of machine while the cover or door of the machine is open or unlocked, and which will also hold the cover or door closed and locked while the machine is in motion.\n\n(16)  Jig (dye).  A dye  jig  is a machine for dyeing piece goods. The cloth, at full width, passes from a roller through the dye liquor in an open vat and is then wound on another roller. The operation is repeated until the desired shade is obtained.\n\n(17)  Kier.  A  kier  is a large metal vat, usually a pressure type, in which fabrics may be boiled out, bleached, etc.\n\n(18)  Lapper (ribbon).  A ribbon  lapper  is a machine used to prepare laps for feeding a cotton comb; its purpose is to provide a uniform lap in which the fibers have been straightened as much as possible.\n\n(19)  Lapper (sliver).  A sliver  lapper  is a machine in which a number of parallel card slivers are drafted slightly, laid side by side in a compact sheet, and wound into a cylindrical package.\n\n(20)  Loom.  A  loom  is a machine for effecting the interlacing of two series of yarns crossing one another at right angles. The warp yarns are wound on a warp beam and pass through heddles and reed. The filling is shot across in a shuttle and settled in place by reed and lay, and the fabric is wound on a cloth beam.\n\n(21)  Mangle (starch).  A  starch mangle  is a mangle that is used specifically for starching cotton goods. It commonly consists of two large rolls and a shallow open vat with several immersion rolls. The vat contains the starch solution.\n\n(22)  Mangle (water).  A  water mangle  is a calender having two or more rolls used for squeezing water from fabrics before drying. Water mangles also may be used in other ways during the finishing of various fabrics.\n\n(23)  Mule.  A  mule  is a type of spinning frame having a head stock and a carriage as its two main sections. The head stock is stationary. The carriage is movable and it carries the spindles which draft and spin the roving into the yarn. The carriage extends over the whole width of the machine and moves slowly toward and away from the head stock during the spinning operation.\n\n(24)  Nip. Nip  shall mean the point of contact between two in-running rolls.\n\n(25)  Openers and pickers. Openers and pickers  means a general classification which includes breaker pickers, intermediate pickers, finisher pickers, single process pickers, multiple process pickers, willow machines, card and picker waste cleaners, thread extractors, shredding machines, roving waste openers, shoddy pickers, bale breakers, feeders, vertical openers, lattice cleaners, horizontal cleaners, and any similar machinery equipped with either cylinders, screen section, calender section, rolls, or beaters used for the preparation of stock for further processing.\n\n(26)  Paddler.  A  paddler  consists of a trough for a solution and two or more squeeze rolls between which cloth passes after being passed through a mordant or dye bath.\n\n(27)  Point of operation. Point of operation  shall mean that part of the machine where the work of cutting, shearing, squeezing, drawing, or manipulating the stock in any other way is done.\n\n(28)  Printing machine (roller type).  A  roller printing machine  is a machine consisting of a large central cylinder, or pressure bowl, around the lower part of the perimeter of which is placed a series of engraved color rollers (each having a color trough), a furnisher roller, doctor blades, etc. The machine is used for printing fabrics.\n\n(29)  Ranges (bleaching continuous). Continuous bleaching ranges  are of several types and may be made for cloth in rope or open-width form. The goods, after wetting out, pass through a squeeze roll into a saturator containing a solution of caustic soda and then to an enclosed J-box. A V-shaped arrangement is attached to the front part of the J-box for uniform and rapid saturation of the cloth with steam before it is packed down in the J-box. The cloth, in a single strand rope form, passes over a guide roll down the first arm of the \u201cV\u201d and up the second. Steam is injected into the \u201cV\u201d at the upper end of the second arm so that the cloth is rapidly saturated with steam at this point. The J-box capacity is such that cloth will remain hot for a sufficient time to complete the scouring action. It then passes a series of washers with a squeeze roll in between. The cloth then passes through a second set of saturator, J-box, and washer, where it is treated with the peroxide solution. By slight modification of the form of the unit, the same process can be applied to open-width cloth.\n\n(30)  Range (mercerizing).  A  mercerizing range  consists generally of a 3-bowl mangle, a tenter frame, and a number of boxes for washing and scouring. The whole setup is in a straight line and all parts operate continuously. The combination is used to saturate the cloth with sodium hydroxide, stretch it while saturated, and washing out most of the caustic before releasing tension.\n\n(31)  Sanforizing machine.  A  sanforizing machine  is a machine consisting of a large steam-heated cylinder, an endless, thick, woolen felt blanket which is in close contact with the cylinder for most of its perimeter, and an electrically heated shoe which presses the cloth against the blanket while the latter is in a stretched condition as it curves around feed-in roll.\n\n(32)  Shearing machine.  A  shearing machine  is a machine used in shearing cloth. Cutting action is provided by a number of steel blades spirally mounted on a roller. The roller rotates in close contact with a fixed ledger blade. There may be from one to six such rollers on a machine.\n\n(33)  Singeing machine.  A  singeing machine  is a machine used particularly with cotton; it comprises of a heated roller, plate, or an open gas flame. The material is rapidly passed over the roller or the plate or through the open gas flame to remove, fuzz or hairiness on yarn or cloth by burning.\n\n(34)  Slasher.  A  slasher  is a machine used for applying a size mixture to warp yarns. Essentially, it consists of a stand for holding section beams, a size box, one or more cylindrical dryers or an enclosed hot air dryer, and a beaming end for finding the yarn on the loom beams.\n\n(35)  Solvent (industrial organic). Industrial organic solvent  means any organic volatile liquid or compound, or any combination of these substances which are used to dissolve or suspend a nonvolatile or slightly volatile substance for industrial utilization. It shall also apply to such substances when used as detergents or cleansing agents. It shall not apply to petroleum products when such products are used as fuel.\n\n(36)  Tenter frame.  A  tenter frame  is a machine for drying cloth under tension. It essentially consists of a pair of endless traveling chains fitted with clips of fine pins and carried on tracks. The cloth is firmly held at the selvages by the two chains which diverge as they move forward so that the cloth is brought to the desired width.\n\n(37)  Warper.  A  warper  is any machine for preparing and arranging the yarns intended for the warp of a fabric, specifically, a beam warper.\n\n(c)  General safety requirements \u2014(1)  Means of stopping machines.  Every textile machine shall be provided with individual mechanical or electrical means for stopping such machines. On machines driven by belts and shafting, a locking-type shifter or an equivalent positive device shall be used. On operations where injury to the operator might result if motors were to restart after power failures, provision shall be made to prevent machines from automatically restarting upon restoration of power.\n\n(2)  Handles.  Stopping and starting handles shall be designed to the proper length to prevent the worker's hand or fingers from striking against any revolving part, gear guard, or any other part of the machine.\n\n(3)-(4) [Reserved]\n\n(5)  Inspection and maintenance.  All guards and other safety devices, including starting and stopping devices, shall be properly maintained.\n\n(6)  Lighting.  Lighting shall conform to American National Standard A11.1\u20141965, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(7)  Identification of piping systems.  Identification of piping systems shall conform to American National Standard A13.1\u20141956, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(8)  Identification of physical hazards.  Identification of physical hazards shall be in accordance with the requirements of \u00a7 1910.144.\n\n(9)  Steam pipes.  All pipes carrying steam or hot water for process or servicing machinery, when exposed to contact and located within seven feet of the floor or working platform shall be covered with a heat-insulating material, or otherwise properly guarded.\n\n(d)  Openers and pickers \u2014(1)  Beater guards.  When any opening or picker machinery is equipped with a beater, such beater shall be provided with metal covers which will prevent contact with the beater. Such covers shall be provided with an interlock which will prevent the cover from being raised while the machine is in motion and prevent the operation of the machine while the cover is open.\n\n(2)  Cleanout holes.  Cleanout holes within reaching distance of the fan or picker beater shall have their covers securely fastened and they shall not be opened while the machine is in motion.\n\n(3)  Feed rolls.  The feed rolls on all opening and picking machinery shall be covered with a guard designed to prevent the operator from reaching the nip while the machinery is in operation.\n\n(4)  Removal of foreign ferrous material.  All textile opener lines shall be equipped with magnetic separators, tramp iron separators, or other means for the removal of foreign ferrous material.\n\n(e)  Cotton cards \u2014(1)  Enclosures.  Cylinder and lickerins shall be completely protected and the doffers should be enclosed.\n\n(2)  Enclosure fastenings.  The enclosures or covers shall be kept in place while the machine is in operation, except when stripping or grinding.\n\n(3)  Stripping rolls.  On operations calling for flat strippings which are allowed to fall on the doffer cover, where such strippings are removed by hand, the doffer cover shall be kept closed and securely fastened to prevent the opening of the cover while the machine is in operation. When it becomes necessary to clean the cards while they are in motion, a long-handled brush or dust mop shall be used.\n\n(f)  Garnett machines \u2014(1)  Lickerin.  Garnett lickerins shall be enclosed.\n\n(2)  Fancy rolls.  Garnett fancy rolls shall be enclosed by covers. These shall be installed in a way that keeps worker rolls reasonably accessible for removal or adjustment.\n\n(3)  Underside of machine.  The underside of the garnett shall be guarded by a screen mesh or other form of enclosure to prevent access.\n\n(g)  Spinning mules \u2014A substantial fender of metal or hardwood shall be installed in front of the carriage wheels, the fender to extend to within one-fourth inch of the rail.\n\n(h)  Slashers \u2014(1)  Cylinder dryers \u2014(i)  Reducing valves, safety valves, and pressure gages.  Reducing valves, safety valves, and pressure gages shall conform to the ASME Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Unfired Pressure Vessels, 1968, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(ii)  Vacuum relief valves.  Vacuum relief valves shall conform to the ASME Code for Pressure Vessels, Section VIII, Unfired Pressure Vessels, 1968.\n\n(iii)  Lever control.  When slashers are operated by control levers, these levers shall be connected to a horizontal bar or treadle located not more than 69 inches above the floor to control the operation from any point.\n\n(iv)  Pushbutton control.  Slashers operated by pushbutton control shall have stop and start buttons located at each end of the machine, and additional buttons located on both sides of the machine, at the size box and the delivery end. If calender rolls are used, additional buttons shall be provided at both sides of the machine at points near the nips, except when slashers are equipped with an enclosed dryer.\n\n(v)  Nip guards.  All nip guards shall comply with the requirements of paragraph (h)(2)(iv) of this section.\n\n(vi)  Cylinder enclosure.  When enclosures or hoods are used over cylinder drying rolls, such enclosures or hoods shall be provided with an exhaust system which will effectively prevent wet air and steam from escaping into the workroom.\n\n(vii)  Expansion chambers.  Slasher kettles and cookers shall be provided with expansion chambers in the covers, or drains, to prevent surging over. Steam-control valves shall be so located that they can be operated without exposing the worker to moving parts, hot surfaces, or steam.\n\n(2)  Enclosed hot air dryer \u2014(i)  Lever control.  When slashers are operated by control levers, these levers shall be connected to a horizontal bar or treadle located not more than 69 inches above the floor to control the operation from any point.\n\n(ii)  Push-button control.  Slashers operated by push-button control shall have one start button at each end of the machine and stop buttons shall be located on both sides of the machines at intervals spaced not more than 6 feet on centers. Inching buttons should be installed.\n\n(iii)  Dryer enclosure.  The dryer enclosure shall be provided with an exhaust system which will effectively prevent wet air and steam from escaping into the workroom.\n\n(iv)  Nip guards.  All nip guards shall comply with Table R-1.\n\nTable R-1\u2014Guard Openings\n\n[Openings in the guard or between the guard and working surface shall not be greater than the following]\n\nThe measurements in Table R-1 are all in inches.\n\n(v)  Expansion chambers.  Slasher kettles and cookers shall be provided with expansion chambers in the covers, or drains, to prevent surging over. Steam control valves shall be so located that they can be operated without exposing the worker to moving parts, hot surfaces, or steam.\n\n(i)  Warpers \u2014(1)  Swiveled double-bar gates.  Swiveled double-bar gates shall be installed on all warpers operating in excess of 450 yards per minute. These gates shall be so interlocked that the machine cannot be operated until the gate is in the \u201cclosed position,\u201d except for the purpose of inching or jogging.\n\n(2)  Closed position. Closed position  shall mean that the top bar of the gate shall be at least 42 inches from the floor or working platform; and the lower bar shall be at least 21 inches from the floor or working platform; and the gate shall be located 15 inches from the vertical tangent to the beam head.\n\n(j)  Drawing frames, slubbers, roving parts, cotton combers, ring spinning frames, twisters.  Gear housing covers on all installations of drawing frames, slubbers, roving frames, cotton combers, ring spinning frames, and twisters shall be equipped with interlocks.\n\n(k)  Gill boxes \u2014(1)  Pin guard.  A guard shall be placed ahead of the feed end and shall be so designed that it will prevent the worker's fingers from being caught in the pins of the intersecting fallers.\n\n(2)  Nip guards.  All nip guards shall comply with the requirements of paragraph (h)(2)(iv) of this section.\n\n(l)  Heavy draw boxes, finishers, and speeders used in worsted drawing \u2014(1)  Band pulley covers.  Covers for band pulleys shall be closed when the machine is in motion.\n\n(2)  Benches or working platforms.  Branches or working platforms approximately 10 inches in height and 8 inches in width should be installed along the entire running length of the machine for the worker to stand on while creeling the machine. Such benches or platforms shall be covered with an abrasive or nonslip material.\n\n(m)  Sliver and ribbon lappers (cotton).  Cover guard. An interlocking cover guard shall be installed over the large calender drums and the lap spool, designed to prevent the operator from coming in contact with the nip.\n\n(n)  Looms \u2014(1)  Shuttle guard.  Each loom shall be equipped with a guard designed to minimize the danger of the shuttle flying out of the shed.\n\n(2)  Protection for loom fixer.  Provisions shall be made so that every loom fixer can prevent the loom from being started while he is at work on the loom. This may be accomplished by means of a lock, the key to which is retained in the possession of the loom fixer, or by some other effective means to prevent starting the loom.\n\n(o)  Shearing machines.  All revolving blades on shearing machines shall be guarded so that the opening between the cloth surface and the bottom of the guard will not exceed three-eighths inch.\n\n(p)  Continuous bleach range (cotton and rayon) \u2014(1)  J-box protection.  Each valve controlling the flow of steam, injurious gases, or liquids into a J-box shall be equipped with a chain, lock, and key, so that any worker who enters the J-box can lock the valve and retain the key in his possession. Any other method which will prevent steam, injurious gases, or liquids from entering the J-box while the worker is in it will be acceptable.\n\n(2)  Open-width bleaching.  The nip of all in-running rolls on open-width bleaching machine rolls shall be protected with a guard to prevent the worker from being caught at the nip. The guard shall extend across the entire length of the nip.\n\n(q)  Kiers \u2014(1)  Reducing valves, safety valves, and pressure gages.  Reducing valves, safety valves, and pressure gages shall conform to the ASME Code for Unfired Pressure Vessels, Section VIII, Unfired/Pressure Vessels, 1968.\n\n(2)  Kier valve protection.  Each valve controlling the flow of steam, injurious gases, or liquids into a kier shall be equipped with a chain, lock, and key, so that any worker who enters the kier can lock the valve and retain the key in his possession. Any other method which will prevent steam, injurious gases, or liquids from entering the kier while the worker is in it will be acceptable.\n\n(r)  Gray and white bins.  On new installations guardrails that comply with subpart D of this part shall be provided where workers are required to plait by hand from the top of the bin so as to protect the worker from falling to a lower level.\n\n(s)  Mercerizing range (piece goods) \u2014(1)  Stopping devices.  A stopping device shall be provided at each end of the machine.\n\n(2)  Frame ends.  A guard shall be installed at each end of the frame between the in-running chain and the clip opener, to prevent the worker's fingers from being caught.\n\n(3)  Mangle and washers.  The nip at the in-running rolls shall conform to \u00a7 1910.264.\n\n(t)  Tenter frames \u2014(1)  Stopping devices.  A stopping device shall be provided at each end of the machine.\n\n(2)  Frame ends.  A guard shall be installed at each end of the frame at the in-running chain and clip opener.\n\n(3)  Oil cups.  Oil cups shall be safely located to permit easy access.\n\n(u)  Dyeing jigs \u2014(1)  Stopping devices.  Each dye jig shall be equipped with individual mechanical or electrical means for stopping the machine.\n\n(2)  Roll arms.  Roll arms on jigs shall be built to allow for extra large batches, and to prevent the center bar from being forced off, causing the batch to fall.\n\n(v)  Padders \u2014 Nip guards.  All nip guards shall comply with the requirements of paragraph (h)(2)(iv) of this section.\n\n(w)  Drying cans \u2014(1)  Pressure reducing valves and pressure gages.  Pressure reducing valves and pressure gages shall conform to the ASME Code for Pressure Vessels, Section VIII, 1968, Unfired Pressure Vessels.\n\n(2)  Vacuum collapse.  If cans are not designed to prevent vacuum collapse, each can shall be equipped with one or more vacuum relief valves with openings of sufficient size to prevent the collapse of the can if vacuum occurs.\n\n(x)  Flat-work ironer \u2014(1)  Feed rolls.  The feed rolls shall be guarded to conform to \u00a7 1910.264.\n\n(2)  Pressure rolls.  Pressure rolls shall be covered or guarded to conform to \u00a7 1910.264.\n\n(y)  Extractors \u2014(1)  Centrifugal extractor \u2014(i)  Cover.  Each extractor shall be equipped with a metal cover.\n\n(ii)  Interlocking device.  Each extractor shall be equipped with an interlocking device that will prevent the cover from being opened while the basket is in motion, and also prevent the power operation of the basket while the cover is open.\n\n(iii)  Brakes.  Each extractor shall be equipped with a mechanically or electrically operated brake to quickly stop the basket when the power driving the basket is shut off.\n\n(iv)  Maximum allowable speed.  Each centrifugal extractor shall be effectively secured in position on the floor or foundation so as to eliminate unnecessary vibration, and should not be operated at a speed greater than the manufacturer's rating, which shall be stamped where easily visible in letters not less than one-quarter inch in height. The maximum allowable speed shall be given in revolutions per minute (rpm).\n\n(2)  Engine drum extractor \u2014 Over-speed governor.  Each engine individually driving an extractor shall be provided with an approved engine stop and speed limit governor.\n\n(3)  Squeezer or wringer extractor \u2014 Nip guards.  All nip guards shall comply with the requirements of paragraph (h)(2)(iv) of this section.\n\n(z)  Nip guards.  All nip guards for water mangle, starch mangle, back-washer (worsted yarn) crabbing machines, decating machines, shall comply with the requirements of paragraph (h)(2)(iv).\n\n(aa)  Sanforizing and palmer machine.  A safety trip rod, cable, or wire center cord shall be provided across the front and back of all palmer cylinders extending the length of the face of the cylinder. It shall operate readily whether pushed or pulled. This safety trip shall be not more than 72 inches above the level on which the operator stands and shall be readily accessible.\n\n(bb)  Rope washers \u2014(1)  Splash guard.  Splash guards shall be installed on all rope washers unless the machine is so designed as to prevent the water or liquid from splashing the operator, the floor, or working surface.\n\n(2)  Safety stop bar.  A safety trip rod, cable or wire center cord shall be provided across the front and back of all rope washers extending the length of the face of the washer. It shall operate readily whether pushed or pulled. This safety trip shall be not more than 72 inches above the level on which the operator stands and shall be readily accessible.\n\n(cc)  Laundry washer tumbler or shaker \u2014(1)  Interlocking device.  Each drying tumbler, each double cylinder shaker or clothes tumbler, and each washing machine shall be equipped with an interlock device which will prevent the power operation of the inside cylinder when the outer door on the case or shell is open, and which will also prevent the outer door on the case or shell from being opened without shutting off the power.\n\n(2)  Means of holding covers or doors in open position.  Each enclosed barrel shall also be equipped with adequate means for holding open the doors or covers of the inner and outer cylinders or shells while it is being loaded or unloaded.\n\n(dd)  Printing machine (roller type) \u2014(1)  Nip guards.  All nip guards shall comply with the requirements of paragraph (h)(2)(iv) of this section.\n\n(2)  Crown wheel and roller gear nip protection.  The engraved roller gears and the large crown wheel shall be provided with a protective disc which will enclose the nips of the in-running gears. Individual discs for each nip will be acceptable.\n\n(ee)  Calenders.  The nip at the in-running side of the rolls shall be provided with a guard extending across the entire length of the nip and arranged to prevent the fingers of the workers from being pulled in between the rolls or between the guard and the rolls, and constructed so that the cloth can be fed into the rolls safely.\n\n(ff)  Rotary staple cutters.  A guard shall be installed completely enclosing the cutters to prevent the hands of the operator from reaching the cutting zone.\n\n(gg) [Reserved]\n\n(hh)  Hand bailing machine.  An angle-iron-handle stop guard shall be installed at the right angle to the frame of the machine. The stop guard shall be so designed and so located that it will prevent the handle from traveling beyond the vertical position should the handle slip from the operator's hand when the pawl has been released from the teeth of the takeup gear.\n\n(ii)  Roll bench.  Cleats shall be installed on the ends of roll benches.\n\n(jj)  Cuttle or swing folder (overhead type).  The bottom of the overhead folders shall be located not less than 7 feet from the floor or working surface.\n\n(kk)  Color-mixing room.  Floors in color-mixing rooms shall be constructed to drain easily.\n\n(ll)  Open tanks and vats for mixing and storage of hot or corrosive liquids \u2014 Shutoff valves.  Boiling tanks, caustic tanks, and hot liquid containers, so located that the operator cannot see the contents from the floor or working area, shall have emergency shutoff valves controlled from a point not subject to danger of splash. Valves shall conform to the ASME Pressure Vessel Code, section VIII, Unfired Pressure Vessels, 1968.\n\n(mm)  Dye kettles and vats \u2014Pipes or drains of sufficient capacity to carry the contents safely away from the working area shall be installed where there are dye kettles and vats which may at any time contain hot or corrosive liquids. These shall not empty directly onto the floor.\n\n(nn)  Acid carboys.  Carboys shall be provided with inclinators, or the acid shall be withdrawn from the carboys by means of pumping without pressure in the carboy, or by means of hand operated siphons.\n\n(oo)  Handling caustic soda and caustic potash.  Means shall be provided for handling and emptying caustic soda and caustic potash containers to prevent workers from coming in contact with the caustic (see paragraph (qq) of this section).\n\n(pp)  First aid.  Wherever acids or caustics are used, provision shall be made for a copious and flowing supply of fresh, clean water."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.18.37.3", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "R", "Subpart R\u2014Special Industries", "", "\u00a7 1910.263 Bakery equipment.", "OSHA", "", "", "[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49765, Oct. 24, 1978; 43 FR 51760, Nov. 7, 1978; 61 FR 9241, Mar. 7, 1996]", "(a)  General requirements \u2014(1)  Application.  The requirements of this section shall apply to the design, installation, operation and maintenance of machinery and equipment used within a bakery.\n\n(2) [Reserved]\n\n(b) [Reserved]\n\n(c)  General machine guarding.  (1) [Reserved]\n\n(2)  Gears.  All gears shall be completely enclosed regardless of location.\n\n(3)  Sprockets and V-belt drives.  Sprockets and V-belt drives located within reach from platforms or pasageways or located within 8 feet 6 inches from the floor shall be completely enclosed.\n\n(4) [Reserved]\n\n(5)  Lubrication.  Where machinery must be lubricated while in motion, stationary lubrication fittings inside a machine shall be provided with extension piping to a point of safety so that the employee will not have to reach into any dangerous part of the machine when lubricating.\n\n(6)-(7) [Reserved]\n\n(8)  Hot pipes.  Exposed hot water and steam pipes shall be covered with insulating material wherever necessary to protect employee from contact.\n\n(d)  Flour-handling equipment \u2014(1)  General requirements for flour handling.  (i) Wherever any of the various pieces of apparatus comprising a flour-handling system are run in electrical unity with one another the following safeguards shall apply:\n\n( a ) [Reserved]\n\n( b ) Wherever a flour-handling system is of such size that the beginning of its operation is far remote from its final delivery end, all electric motors operating each apparatus comprising this system shall be controlled at each of two points, one located at each remote end, either of which will stop all motors.\n\n( c ) [Reserved]\n\n( d ) Control circuits for magnetic controllers shall be so arranged that the opening of any one of several limit switches, which may be on an individual unit, will serve to de-energize all of the motors of that unit.\n\n(ii) [Reserved]\n\n(2)  Bag chutes and bag lifts (bag-arm elevators).  (i) Bag chutes (gravity chutes for handling flour bags) shall be so designed so as to keep to a minimum the speed of flour bags. If the chute inclines more than 30\u00b0 from the horizontal, there shall be an upturn at the lower end of the chute to slow down the bags.\n\n(ii) Bag-arm elevators with manual takeoff shall be designed to operate at a capacity not exceeding seven bags per minute. The arms on the conveyor chain shall be so spaced as to obtain the full capacity of the elevator with the lowest possible chain speed. There shall be an electric limit switch at the unloading end of the bag-arm elevator so installed as to automatically stop the conveyor chain if any bag fails to clear the conveyor arms.\n\n(iii) [Reserved]\n\n(iv) Man lifts shall be prohibited in bakeries. Bag or barrel lifts shall not be used as man lifts.\n\n(3)  Dumpbin and blender.\n\n(i)-(iv) [Reserved]\n\n(v) All dumpbin and blender hoods shall be of sufficient capacity to prevent circulation of flour dust outside the hoods.\n\n(vi) All dumpbins shall be of a suitable height from floor to enable the operator to dump flour from bags, without causing undue strain or fatigue. Where the edge of any bin is more than 24 inches above the flour, a bag rest step shall be provided.\n\n(vii) A control device for stopping the dumpbin and blender shall be provided close to the normal location of the operator.\n\n(4)-(5) [Reserved]\n\n(6)  Storage bins.\n\n(i) [Reserved]\n\n(ii) Storage bins shall be provided with gaskets and locks or latches to keep the cover closed, or other equivalent devices in order to insure the dust tightness of the cover. Covers at openings where an employee may enter the bin shall also be provided with a hasp and a lock, so located that the employee may lock the cover in the open position whenever it is necessary to enter the bin.\n\n(iii) Storage bins where the side is more than 5 feet in depth shall be provided with standard stationary safety ladders, both inside and outside, to reach from floor level to top of bin and from top of bin to inside bottom, keeping the ladder end away from the moving screw conveyor.\n\n(iv)-(v) [Reserved]\n\n(vi) The main entrance cover of large storage bins located at the interior exit ladder shall be provided with an electric interlock for motors operating both feed and unloading screw, so that these motors cannot operate while the cover is open.\n\n(7)  Screw conveyors.\n\n(i)-(ii) [Reserved]\n\n(iii) The covers of all screw conveyors shall be made removable in convenient sections, held on with stationary clamps located at proper intervals keeping all covers dust-tight. Where drop or hinged bottom sections are provided this provision shall not apply.\n\n(8)  Sifters.  (i) Enclosures of all types of flour sifters shall be so constructed that they are dust-tight but readily accessible for interior inspection.\n\n(ii) [Reserved]\n\n(9)  Flour scales.\n\n(i)-(ii) [Reserved]\n\n(iii) Traveling or track-type flour scales shall be equipped with bar handles for moving same. The bar should be at least 1 inch in diameter and well away from trolley track wheels.\n\n(e)  Mixers \u2014(1)  Horizontal dough mixers.  (i) Mixers with external power application shall have all belts, chains, gears, pulleys, sprockets, clutches, and other moving parts completely enclosed.\n\n(ii) [Reserved]\n\n(iii) Each mixer shall be equipped with an individual motor and control, and with a conveniently located manual switch to prevent the mixer from being started in the usual manner while the machine is being serviced and cleaned.\n\n(iv) All electrical control stations shall be so located that the operator must be in full view of the bowl in its open position. No duplication of such controls other than a stop switch shall be permitted.\n\n(v) All mixers with power and manual dumping arrangements shall be equipped with safety devices which shall:\n\n( a ) Engage both hands of the operator, when the agitator is in motion under power, and while the bowl is opened more than one-fifth of its total opening.\n\n( b ) Prevent the agitator from being started, while the bowl is more than one-fifth open, without engaging both hands of the operator;\n\n(vi)-(vii) [Reserved]\n\n(viii) Every mixer shall be equipped with a full enclosure over the bowl which is closed at all times while the agitator is in motion. Only minor openings in this enclosure, such as ingredient doors, flour inlets, etc., each representing less than 1\n 1/2  square feet in area, shall be capable of being opened while the mixer is in operation.\n\n(ix) [Reserved]\n\n(x) Overhead covers or doors which are subject to accidental closure shall be counterbalanced to remain in an open position or provided with means to hold them open until positively released by the operator.\n\n(xi)-(xvii) [Reserved]\n\n(xviii) Valves and controls to regulate the coolant in mixer jackets shall be located so as to permit access by the operator without jeopardizing his safety.\n\n(2)  Vertical mixers.  (i) Vertical mixers shall comply with paragraphs (e)(1) (i), (iii), (ix) and (x), of this section.\n\n(ii) [Reserved]\n\n(iii) Bowl locking devices shall be of a positive type which require the attention of the operator for unlocking.\n\n(iv) Devices shall be made available for moving bowls weighing more than 80 pounds, with contents, into and out of the mixing position on the machine.\n\n(f)  Dividers.  (1)-(2) [Reserved]\n\n(3)  Rear of divider.  The back of the divider shall have a complete cover to enclose all of the moving parts, or each individual part shall be enclosed or guarded to remove the separate hazards. The rear cover shall be provided with a limit switch in order that the machine cannot operate when this cover is open. The guard on the back shall be hinged so that it cannot be completely removed and if a catch or brace is provided for holding the cover open, it shall be designed so that it will not release due to vibrations or minor bumping whereby the cover may drop on an employee.\n\n(g)  Moulders \u2014(1)  Hoppers.  Mechanical feed moulders shall be provided with hoppers so designed and connected to the proofer that an employee's hands cannot get into the hopper where they will come in contact with the in-running rolls.\n\n(2)  Hand-fed moulders.  Hand-fed moulders shall be provided with a belt-feed device or the hopper shall be extended high enough so that the hands of the operator cannot get into the feed rolls. The top edge of such a hopper shall be well rounded to prevent injury when it is struck or bumped by the employee's hand.\n\n(3)  Stopping devices.  There shall be a stopping device within easy reach of the operator who feeds the moulder and another stopping device within the reach of the employee taking the dough away from the moulder.\n\n(h)  Manually fed dough brakes \u2014(1)  Top-roll protection.  The top roll shall be protected by a heavy gage metal shield extending over the roll to go within 6 inches of the hopper bottom board. The shield may be perforated to permit observation of the dough entering the rolls.\n\n(2)  Emergency stop bar \u2014An emergency stop bar shall be provided, and so located that the body of the operator will press against the bar if the operator slips and falls toward the rolls, or if the operator gets his hand caught in the rolls. The bar shall apply the body pressure to open positively a circuit that will deenergize the drive motor. In addition, a brake which is inherently self-engaging by requiring power or force from an external source to cause disengagement shall be activated at the same time causing the rolls to stop instantly. The emergency stop bar shall be checked for proper operation every 30 days.\n\n(i)  Miscellaneous equipment \u2014(1)  Proof boxes.  All door locks shall be operable both from within and outside the box. Guide rails shall be installed to center the rack as it enters, passes through, and leaves the proof box.\n\n(2)  Fermentation room.  Fermentation room doors shall have nonshatterable wire glass or plastic panels for vision through doors.\n\n(3)  Troughs.  Troughs shall be mounted on antifriction bearing casters thus making it possible for the operator to move and direct the motion of the trough with a minimum of effort.\n\n(4)  Hand trucks.  (i) Casters shall be set back from corners to be out of the way of toes and heels, but not far enough back to cause the truck to be unstable.\n\n(ii) A lock or other device shall be provided to hold the handle in vertical position when the truck is not in use.\n\n(5)  Lift trucks.  A lock or other device shall be provided to hold the handle in vertical position when the truck is not in use.\n\n(6)  Racks.\n\n(i) [Reserved]\n\n(ii) Racks shall be equipped with handles so located with reference to the frame of the rack that no part of the operator's hands extends beyond the outer edge of the frame when holding onto the handles.\n\n(iii) Antifriction bearing casters shall be used to give the operator better control of the rack.\n\n(7)  Conveyors.  (i) Wherever a conveyor passes over a main aisleway, regularly occupied work area, or passageway, the underside of the conveyor shall be completely enclosed to prevent broken chains or other material from falling in the passageway.\n\n(ii) Stop bumpers shall be installed on all delivery ends of conveyors, wherever manual removal of the product carried is practiced.\n\n(iii) Where hazard of getting caught exists a sufficient number of stop buttons shall be provided to enable quick stopping of the conveyor.\n\n(8)-(10) [Reserved]\n\n(11)  Ingredient premixers, emulsifiers, etc.  (i) All top openings shall be provided with covers attached to the machines. These covers should be so arranged and interlocked that power will be shut off whenever the cover is opened to a point where the operator's fingers might come in contact with the beaters.\n\n(ii) [Reserved]\n\n(12)  Chain tackle.  (i) All chain tackle shall be marked prominently, permanently, and legibly with maximum load capacity.\n\n(ii) All chain tackle shall be marked permanently and legibly with minimum support specification.\n\n(iii) Safety hooks shall be used.\n\n(13)  Trough hoists, etc.  (i) All hoists shall be marked prominently, permanently, and legibly with maximum load capacity.\n\n(ii) All hoists shall be marked permanently and legibly with minimum support specifications.\n\n(iii) Safety catches shall be provided for the chain so that the chain will hold the load in any position.\n\n(iv) Safety hooks shall be used.\n\n(14)  Air-conditioning units.\n\n(i) [Reserved]\n\n(ii) On large units with doors to chambers large enough to be entered, all door locks shall be operable from both inside and outside.\n\n(15)  Pan washing tanks.\n\n(i) [Reserved]\n\n(ii) The surface of the floor of the working platform shall be maintained in nonslip condition.\n\n(iii)-(iv) [Reserved]\n\n(v) Power ventilated exhaust hoods shall be provided over the tanks.\n\n(16)-(19) [Reserved]\n\n(20)  Bread coolers, rack type.\n\n(i) [Reserved]\n\n(ii) All door locks shall be operable from both within and outside the cooler.\n\n(21) [Reserved]\n\n(22)  Doughnut machines.  Separate flues shall be provided, (i) for venting vapors from the frying section, and (ii) for venting products of combustion from the combustion chamber used to heat the fat.\n\n(23)  Open fat kettles.  (i) The floor around kettles shall be maintained in nonslip condition.\n\n(ii)-(iii) [Reserved]\n\n(iv) The top of the kettle shall be not less than 36 inches above floor or working level.\n\n(24)  Steam kettles.  (i) Positive locking devices shall be provided to hold kettles in the desired position.\n\n(ii) Kettles with steam jackets shall be provided with safety valves in accordance with the ASME Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Unfired Pressure Vessels, 1968, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(j)  Slicers and wrappers \u2014(1)  Slicers.\n\n(i)-(ii) [Reserved]\n\n(iii) The cover over the knife head of reciprocating-blade slicers shall be provided with an interlocking arrangement so that the machine cannot operate unless the cover is in place.\n\n(iv) On slicers with endless band knives, each motor shall be equipped with a magnet brake which operates whenever the motor is not energized. Each door, panel, or other point of access to the cutting blades shall be arranged by means of mechanical or electric interlocks so that the motor will be deenergized if all such access doors, panels, or access points are not closed.\n\n(v) When it is necessary to sharpen slicer blades on the machine, a barrier shall be provided leaving only sufficient opening for the sharpening stone to reach the knife blades.\n\n(vi) [Reserved]\n\n(vii)  Slicer wrapper conditions.\n\n( a )-( b ) [Reserved]\n\n( c ) Mechanical control levers for starting and stopping both slicing machine conveyors and wrapping machines shall be extended or so located that an operator in one location can control both machines. Such levers should be provided wherever necessary, but these should be so arranged that there is only one station capable of starting the wrapping machine and conveyor assembly, and this starting station should be so arranged or guarded as to prevent accidental starting. The electric control station for starting and stopping the electric motor driving the wrapping machine and conveyor should be located near the clutch starting lever.\n\n(2)  Wrappers.\n\n(i)-(ii) [Reserved]\n\n(iii) Electrical heaters on wrappers shall be protected by a cover plate properly separated or insulated from the heaters in order that accidental contact with this cover plate will not cause a burn to the operator.\n\n(k)  Biscuit and cracker equipment \u2014(1)  Meal, peanut, and fig grinders.  (i) If the hopper is removable it shall be provided with an electric interlock so that the machine cannot be put in operation when the hopper is removed.\n\n(ii) Where grid guards cannot be used, feed conveyors to hoppers, or baffle-type hoppers, shall be provided. Hoppers in such cases shall be enclosed and provided with hinged covers, and equipped with electric interlock to prevent operation of the machine with the cover open.\n\n(2)  Sugar and spice pulverizers.  (i) All drive belts used in connection with sugar and spice pulverizers shall be grounded by means of metal combs or other effective means of removing static electricity. All pulverizing of sugar or spice grinding shall be done in accordance with NFPA 62\u20141967 (Standard for Dust Hazards of Sugar and Cocoa) and NFPA 656\u20141959 (Standard for Dust Hazards in Spice Grinding Plants), which are incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(ii) Magnetic separators shall be provided to reduce fire and explosion hazards.\n\n(3)  Cheese, fruit, and food cutters.  These machines shall be protected in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (k)(1) of this section.\n\n(4) [Reserved]\n\n(5)  Reversible dough brakes.  Reversible brakes shall be provided with a guard or tripping mechanism on each side of the rolls. These guards shall be so arranged as to stop the machine or reverse the direction of the rolls so that they are outrunning if the guard is moved by contact of the operator.\n\n(6)  Cross-roll brakes.  Cross-roll brakes shall be provided with guards that are similar in number and equal in effectiveness to guards on hand-fed brakes.\n\n(7)  Box- and roll-type dough sheeters.\n\n(i) [Reserved]\n\n(ii) Hoppers for sheeters shall have an automatic stop bar or automatic stopping device along the back edge of the hopper. If construction does not permit location at the back edge, the automatic stop bar or automatic stopping device shall be located where it will be most effective to accomplish the desired protection.\n\n(8) [Reserved]\n\n(9)  Rotary, die machines, pretzel rolling, and pretzel-stick extruding machines.  Dough hoppers shall have the entire opening protected with substantial grid-type guards to prevent the employee from getting his hands caught in moving parts, or the hopper shall be extended high enough so that the operator's hands cannot get into moving parts.\n\n(10)-(11) [Reserved]\n\n(12)  Pan cooling towers.  (i) Where pan cooling towers extend to two or more floors, a lockout switch shall be provided on each floor in order that mechanics working on the tower may positively lock the mechanism against starting. Only one start switch shall be used in the motor control circuit.\n\n(ii) [Reserved]\n\n(13)  Chocolate melting, refining, and mixing kettles.  Each kettle shall be provided with a cover to enclose the top of the kettle. The bottom outlet of each kettle shall be of such size and shape that the operator cannot reach in to touch the revolving paddle or come in contact with the shear point between the paddle and the side of the kettle.\n\n(14)-(16) [Reserved]\n\n(17)  Peanut cooling trucks.  Mechanically operated peanut cooling trucks shall have a grid-type cover over the entire top.\n\n(l)  Ovens \u2014(1)  General location.\n\n(i)-(vi) [Reserved]\n\n(vii) Ovens shall be located so that possible fire or explosion will not expose groups of persons to possible injury. For this reason ovens shall not adjoin lockers, lunch or sales rooms, main passageways, or exits.\n\n(2) [Reserved]\n\n(3)  Safeguards of mechanical parts.  (i) Emergency stop buttons shall be provided on mechanical ovens near the point where operators are stationed.\n\n(ii) All piping at ovens shall be tested to be gastight.\n\n(iii) Main shutoff valves, operable separately from any automatic valve, shall be provided to permit turning off the fuel or steam in case of an emergency.\n\n( a ) Main shutoff valves shall be located so that explosions, fires, etc. will not prevent access to these valves.\n\n( b ) Main shutoff valves shall be locked in the closed position when men must enter the oven or when the oven is not in service.\n\n(4)-(7) [Reserved]\n\n(8)  Electrical heating equipment.\n\n(i)-(ii) [Reserved]\n\n(iii) A main disconnect switch or circuit breaker shall be provided. This switch or circuit breaker shall be so located that it can be reached quickly and safely. The main switch or circuit breaker shall have provisions for locking it in the open position if any work on the electrical equipment or inside the oven must be performed.\n\n(9)  General requirements.  (i) Protecting devices shall be properly maintained and kept in working order.\n\n(ii) All safety devices on ovens shall be inspected at intervals of not less than twice a month by an especially appointed, properly instructed bakery employee, and not less than once a year by representatives of the oven manufacturers.\n\n(iii)( a ) Protection of gas pilot lights shall be provided when it is impracticable to protect the main flame of the burner and where the pilot flame cannot contact the flame electrode without being in the path of the main flame of the burner. Failure of any gas pilot shall automatically shut off the fuel supply to the burner.\n\n( b ) Ovens with multiple burners shall be equipped with individual atmospheric pilot lights where there is sufficient secondary air in the baking chamber and where gas is available; or else each burner shall be equipped with an electric spark-type ignition device.\n\n(iv) Burners of a capacity exceeding 150,000 B.t.u. per hour equipped with electric ignition shall be protected in addition by quick-acting combustion safeguards.\n\n( a ) The high-tension current for any electric spark-type ignition device shall originate in a power supply line which is interlocked with the fuel supply for the oven in such a way that in case of current failure both the source of electricity to the high-tension circuits and the fuel supply shall be turned off simultaneously.\n\n( b ) [Reserved]\n\n( c ) Combustion safeguards used in connection with electric ignition systems on ovens shall be so designed as to prevent an explosive mixture from accumulating inside the oven before ignition has taken place.\n\n(v) When fuel is supplied and used at line pressure, safety shutoff valves shall be provided in the fuel line leading to the burner.\n\n( a ) When fuel is supplied in excess of line pressure, safety shutoff valves shall be provided in the fuel line leading to the burners, unless the fuel supply lines are equipped with other automatic valves which will prevent the flow of fuel when the compressing equipment is stopped.\n\n( b ) The safety shutoff valve shall be positively tight and shall be tested at least twice monthly.\n\n( c )-( d ) [Reserved]\n\n( e ) A safety shutoff valve shall require manual operation for reopening after it has closed, or the electric circuit shall be so arranged that it will require a manual operation for reopening the safety shutoff valve.\n\n( f ) Manual reset-type safety shutoff valves shall be so arranged that they cannot be locked in an open position by external means.\n\n( g ) Where blowers are used for supplying the air for combustion the safety shutoff valve shall be interlocked so that it will close in case of air failure.\n\n( h ) Where gas or electric ignition is used, the safety shutoff valve shall close in case of ignition failure. On burners equipped with combustion safeguards, the valve shall close in case of burner flame failure.\n\n(vi) One main, manually operated, fuel shutoff valve shall be provided on each oven, and shall be located ahead of all other valves in the system.\n\n(vii) All individual gas or oil burners with a heating capacity over 150,000 B.t.u. per hour shall be protected by a safeguard which is actuated by the flame and which will react to flame failure in a time interval not to exceed 2 seconds. All safeguards, once having shut down a gas or oil burner, shall require manual resetting and starting of the burner or burners.\n\n(viii) Any space in an oven (except direct fired ovens) which could be filled with an explosive mixture shall be protected by explosion vents. Explosion vents shall be made of minimum weight consistent with adequate insulation.\n\n( a ) Explosion doors which have a substantial weight shall be attached by chains or similar means to prevent flying parts from injuring the personnel in case of an explosion.\n\n( b ) Where explosion vents are so located that flying parts or gases might endanger the personnel working on or near the oven, internal or external protecting means shall be provided in the form of heavily constructed shields or deflectors made from noncombustible material.\n\n( c ) Specifically exempted from the provisions of paragraph paragraph (l)(8)(viii) of this section are heating systems on ovens in which the fuel is admitted only to enclosed spaces which shall have been tested to prove that their construction will resist repeated explosions without deformation are exempt from the requirements of paragraph (l)(8)(viii) ( a ) and ( b ) of this section.\n\n(ix)-(x) [Reserved]\n\n(xi) Where the gas supply pressure is substantially higher than that at which the burners of an oven are designed to operate, a gas pressure regulator shall be employed.\n\n( a )-( c ) [Reserved]\n\n( d ) A relief valve shall be placed on the outlet side of gas pressure regulators where gas is supplied at high pressure. The discharge from this valve shall be piped to the outside of the building.\n\n(10)  Direct-fired ovens.  (i) Direct-fired ovens shall be safeguarded against failure of fuel, air, or ignition.\n\n(ii) To prevent the possible accumulation of explosive gases from being ignited after a shutdown, all direct-fired ovens with a heating capacity over 150,000 B.t.u. per hour shall be ventilated before the ignition system, combustion air blower, and the fuel can be turned on. The preventilation shall insure at least four complete changes of atmosphere in the baking chamber by discharging the oven atmosphere to the outside of the building and entraining fresh air into it. The preventilation shall be repeated whenever the heating equipment is shut down by a safety device.\n\n(11)  Direct recirculating ovens.  (i) Each circulating fan in direct recirculating ovens shall be interconnected with the burner in such a manner that the fuel is shut off by a safety valve when the fan is not running.\n\n(ii) The flame of the burner or burners in direct recirculating ovens shall be protected by a quick-acting flame-sensitive safeguard which will automatically shut off the fuel supply in case of burner failure.\n\n(12)-(14) [Reserved]\n\n(15)  Indirect recirculating ovens.\n\n(i)-(ii) [Reserved]\n\n(iii) Duct systems (in ovens) operating under pressure shall be tested for tightness in the initial starting of the oven and also at intervals not farther apart than 6 months."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.18.37.4", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "R", "Subpart R\u2014Special Industries", "", "\u00a7 1910.264 Laundry machinery and operations.", "OSHA", "", "", "[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49767, Oct. 24, 1978; 43 FR 51760, Nov. 7, 1978]", "(a) [Reserved]\n\n(b)  General requirements.  This section applies to moving parts of equipment used in laundries and to conditions peculiar to this industry, with special reference to the point of operation of laundry machines. This section does not apply to dry-cleaning operations.\n\n(c)  Point-of-operation guards \u2014(1)  Washroom machines.\n\n(i) [Reserved]\n\n(ii)  Washing machine.\n\n( a ) [Reserved]\n\n( b ) Each washing machine shall be provided with means for holding open the doors or covers of inner and outer cylinders or shells while being loaded or unloaded.\n\n(2)  Starching and drying machines.\n\n(i)-(ii) [Reserved]\n\n(iii)  Drying tumbler.\n\n( a ) [Reserved]\n\n( b ) Each drying tumbler shall be provided with means for holding open the doors or covers of inner and outer cylinders or shells while being loaded or unloaded.\n\n(iv)  Shaker (clothes tumbler).\n\n( a ) through ( b )( 1 ) [Reserved]\n\n( 2 ) Each shaker or clothes tumbler of the double-cylinder type shall be provided with means for holding open the doors or covers of inner and outer cylinders or shells while being loaded or unloaded.\n\n(v)  Exception.  Provisions of paragraph (c)(2) (iii), (iv)( a )( 1 ), and (iv)( b ) of this section shall not apply to shakeout or conditioning tumblers where the clothes are loaded into the open end of the revolving cylinder and are automatically discharged out of the opposite end.\n\n(3) [Reserved]\n\n(4)  Miscellaneous machines and equipment.\n\n(i)-(ii) [Reserved]\n\n(iii)  Steam pipes.  ( a ) All steam pipes that are within 7 feet of the floor or working platform, and with which the worker may come into contact, shall be insulated or covered with a heat-resistive material or shall be otherwise properly guarded.\n\n( b ) Where pressure-reducing valves are used, one or more relief or safety valves shall be provided on the low-pressure side of the reducing valve, in case the piping or equipment on the low-pressure side does not meet the requirements for full initial pressure. The relief or safety valve shall be located adjacent to, or as close as possible to, the reducing valve. Proper protection shall be provided to prevent injury or damage caused by fluid escaping from relief or safety valves if vented to the atmosphere. The vents shall be of ample size and as short and direct as possible. The combined discharge capacity of the relief valves shall be such that the pressure rating of the lower-pressure piping and equipment will not be exceeded if the reducing valve sticks or fails to open.\n\n(d)  Operating rules \u2014(1)  General.\n\n(i)-(ii) [Reserved]\n\n(iii)  Markers.  Markers and others handling soiled clothes shall be warned against touching the eyes, mouth, or any part of the body on which the skin has been broken by a scratch or abrasion; and they shall be cautioned not to touch or eat food until their hands have been thoroughly washed.\n\n(iv) [Reserved]\n\n(v)  Instruction of employees.  Employees shall be properly instructed as to the hazards of their work and be instructed in safe practices, by bulletins, printed rules, and verbal instructions.\n\n(2)  Mechanical \u2014(i)  Safety guards.  ( a ) No safeguard, safety appliance, or device attached to, or forming an integral part of any machinery shall be removed or made ineffective except for the purpose of making immediate repairs or adjustments. Any such safeguard, safety appliance, or device removed or made ineffective during the repair or adjustment of such machinery shall be replaced immediately upon the completion of such repairs or adjustments.\n\n(b) [Reserved]"], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.18.37.5", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "R", "Subpart R\u2014Special Industries", "", "\u00a7 1910.265 Sawmills.", "OSHA", "", "", "[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40 FR 23073, May 28, 1975; 43 FR 49751, Oct. 24, 1978; 43 FR 51760, Nov. 7, 1978; 53 FR 12123, Apr. 12, 1988; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9241, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 33467, June 18, 1998; 70 FR 53929, Sept. 13, 2005; 76 FR 80739, Dec. 27, 2011; 81 FR 83006, Nov. 18, 2016]", "(a)  General requirements\u2014Application.  This section includes safety requirements for sawmill operations including, but not limited to, log and lumber handling, sawing, trimming, and planing; waste disposal; operation of dry kilns; finishing; shipping; storage; yard and yard equipment; and for power tools and affiliated equipment used in connection with such operations, but excluding the manufacture of plywood, cooperage, and veneer.\n\n(b)  Definitions applicable to this section \u2014(1)  A-frame.  The term  A-frame  means a structure made of two independent columns fastened together at the top and separated at the bottom for stability.\n\n(2)  Annealing.  The term  annealing  means heating then cooling to soften and render less brittle.\n\n(3)  Binder.  The term  binder  means a chain, cable, rope, or other approved material used for binding loads.\n\n(4)  Boom.  The term  boom  means logs or timbers fastened together end to end and used to contain floating logs. The term includes enclosed logs.\n\n(5)  Brow log.  The term  brow log  means a log placed parallel to a roadway at a landing or dump to protect vehicles while loading or unloading.\n\n(6)  Bunk.  The term  bunk  means a cross support for a load.\n\n(7)  Cant.  The term  cant  means a log slabbed on one or more sides.\n\n(8)  Carriage (log carriage).  The term  carriage  means a framework mounted on wheels which runs on tracks or in grooves in a direction parallel to the face of the saw, and which contains apparatus to hold a log securely and advance it towards the saw.\n\n(9)  Carrier.  The term  carrier  means an industrial truck so designed and constructed that it straddles the load to be transported with mechanisms to pick up the load and support it during transportation.\n\n(10)  Chipper.  The term  chipper  means a machine which cuts material into chips.\n\n(11)  Chock (bunk block) (cheese block).  The terms  chock, bunk block,  and  cheese block  mean a wedge that prevents logs or loads from moving.\n\n(12)  Cold deck.  The term  cold deck  means a pile of logs stored for future removal.\n\n(13)  Crotch lines.  The term  crotch lines  means two short lines attached to a hoisting line by a ring or shackle, the lower ends being attached to loading hooks.\n\n(14)  Dog (carriage dog).  The term  dog  means a steel tooth, one or more of which are attached to each carriage knee to hold log firmly in place on carriage.\n\n(15)  Drag saw.  The term  drag saw  means a power-driven, reciprocating crosscut saw mounted on suitable frame and used for bucking logs.\n\n(16)  Head block.  The term  head block  means that part of a carriage which holds the log and upon which it rests. It generally consists of base, knee, taper set, and mechanism.\n\n(17)  Head rig.  The term  head rig  means a combination of head saw and log carriage used for the initial breakdown of logs into timbers, cants, and boards.\n\n(18)  Hog.  The term  hog  means a machine for cutting or grinding slabs and other coarse residue from the mill.\n\n(19)  Husk.  The term  husk  means a head saw framework on a circular mill.\n\n(20)  Industrial truck.  The term  industrial truck  means a mobile powerdriven truck or tractor.\n\n(21)  Kiln tender.  The term  kiln tender  means the operator of a kiln.\n\n(22)  Lift truck.  The term  lift truck  means an industrial truck used for lateral transportation and equipped with a power-operated lifting device, usually in the form of forks, for piling or unpiling lumber units or packages.\n\n(23)  Live rolls.  The term  live rolls  means cylinders of wood or metal mounted on horizontal axes and rotated by power, which are used to convey slabs, lumber, and other wood products.\n\n(24)  Loading boom.  The term  loading boom  means any structure projecting from a pivot point to guide a log when lifted.\n\n(25)  Log deck.  The term  Log deck  means a platform in the sawmill on which the logs remain until needed for sawing.\n\n(26)  Lumber hauling truck.  The term  lumber hauling truck  means an industrial truck, other than a lift truck or a carrier, used for the transport of lumber.\n\n(27)  Log haul.  The term  log haul  means a conveyor for transferring logs to mill.\n\n(28)  Package.  The term  package  means a unit of lumber.\n\n(29)  Peavy.  The term  peavy  means a stout wooden handle fitted with a spike and hook and used for rolling logs.\n\n(30)  Pike pole.  The term  pike pole  means a long pole whose end is shod with a sharp pointed spike.\n\n(31)  Pitman rod.  The term  pitman rod  means connecting rod.\n\n(32)  Resaw.  The term  resaw  means band, circular, or sash gang saws used to break down slabs, cants, or flitches into lumber.\n\n(33)  Running line.  The term  running line  means any moving rope as distinguished from a stationary rope such as a guyline.\n\n(34)  Safety factor.  The term  safety factor  means a calculated reduction factor which may be applied to laboratory test values to obtain safe working stresses for wooden beams and other mechanical members; ratio of breaking load to safe load.\n\n(35)  Saw guide.  The term  saw guide  means a device for steadying a circular or bandsaw.\n\n(36)  Setwork.  The term  setwork  means a mechanism on a sawmill carriage which enables an operator to move the log into position for another cut.\n\n(37)  Sorting gaps.  The term  sorting gaps  means the areas on a log pond enclosed by boom sticks into which logs are sorted.\n\n(38)  Spreader wheel.  The term  spreader wheel  means a metal wheel that separates the board from the log in back of circular saws to prevent binding.\n\n(39)  Splitter.  The term  splitter  means a knife-type, nonrotating spreader.\n\n(40)  Sticker.  The term  sticker  means a strip of wood or other material used to separate layers of lumber.\n\n(41)  Stiff boom.  The term  stiff boom  means the anchored, stationary boom sticks which are tied together and on which boom men work.\n\n(42)  Swifter.  The term  swifter  is a means of tying boom sticks together to prevent them from spreading while being towed.\n\n(43)  Telltale.  The term  telltale  means a device used to serve as a warning for overhead objects.\n\n(44)  Top saw.  The term  top saw  means the upper of two circular saws on a head rig, both being on the same husk.\n\n(45)  Tramway.  The term  tramway  means a way for trams, usually consisting of parallel tracks laid on wooden beams.\n\n(46)  Trestle.  The term  trestle  means a braced framework of timbers, piles or steelwork for carrying a road or railroad over a depression.\n\n(c)  Building facilities, and isolated equipment \u2014(1)  Safety factor.  All buildings, docks, tramways, walkways, log dumps, and other structures shall be designed, constructed and maintained so as to support the imposed load in accordance with a safety factor.\n\n(2)  Work areas.  Work areas under mills shall be as evenly surfaced as local conditions permit. They shall be free from unnecessary obstructions and provided with lighting facilities in accordance with American National Standard for Industrial Lighting A11.1\u20141965, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(3)  Floors.  Flooring in buildings and on ramps and walkways shall be constructed and installed in accordance with established principles of mechanics and sound engineering practices. They shall be of adequate strength to support the estimated or actual dead and live loads acting on them with the resultant stress not exceeding the allowable stress for the material being used.\n\n(i) [Reserved]\n\n(ii)  Areas beneath floor openings.  Areas under floor openings shall, where practical, be fenced off. When this is not practical, they shall be plainly marked and telltales shall be installed to hang over these areas.\n\n(iii)  Floor maintenance.  The flooring of buildings, docks, and passageways shall be kept in good repair. When a hazardous condition develops that cannot be immediately repaired, the area shall be guarded until adequate repairs are made.\n\n(iv)  Nonslip floors.  Floors, footwalks, and passageways in the work area around machines or other places where a person is required to stand or walk shall be provided with effective means to minimize slipping.\n\n(4)  Walkways, docks, and platforms \u2014(i)  Width.  Walkways, docks, and platforms shall be of sufficient width to provide adequate passage and working areas.\n\n(ii)  Maintenance.  Walkways shall be evenly floored and kept in good repair.\n\n(iii)  Docks.  Docks and runways used for the operation of lift trucks and other vehicles shall have a substantial guard or shear timber except where loading and unloading are being performed.\n\n(iv)  Elevated walks.  All elevated walks, runways, or platforms, if 4 feet or more from the floor level, shall be provided with a standard railing except on loading or unloading sides of platforms. If height exceeds 6 feet, a standard toe board also shall be provided to prevent material from rolling or falling off.\n\n(v)  Elevated platforms.  Where elevated platforms are used routinely on a daily basis, they shall be equipped with stairways or fixed ladders that comply with subpart D of this part.\n\n(vi)  Hazardous locations.  Where required, walkways and stairways with standard handrails shall be provided in elevated and hazardous locations. Where such passageways are over walkways or work areas, standard toe boards shall be provided.\n\n(5)  Stairways \u2014(i)  Construction.  Stairways shall be constructed in accordance with subpart D of this part.\n\n(ii)  Handrails.  Stairways shall be provided with a standard handrail on at least one side or on any open side. Where stairs are more than four feet wide there shall be a standard handrail at each side, and where more than eight feet wide, a third standard handrail shall be erected in the center of the stairway.\n\n(iii)  Lighting.  All stairways shall be adequately lighted as prescribed in paragraph (c)(9) of this section.\n\n(6)  Emergency exits including doors and fire escapes \u2014(i)  Opening.  Doors shall not open directly on or block a flight of stairs, and shall swing in the direction of exit travel.\n\n(ii)  Identification.  Exits shall be located and identified in a manner that affords ready exit from all work areas.\n\n(iii)  Swinging doors.  All swinging doors shall be provided with windows; with one window for each section of double swinging doors. Such windows shall be of shatterproof or safety glass unless otherwise protected against breakage.\n\n(iv)  Sliding doors.  Where sliding doors are used as exits, an inner door shall be cut inside each of the main doors and arranged to open outward.\n\n(v)  Barriers and warning signs.  Where a doorway opens upon a railroad track or upon a tramway or dock over which vehicles travel, a barrier or other warning device shall be placed to prevent workmen from stepping into moving traffic.\n\n(7)  Air requirements.  Ventilation shall be provided to supply adequate fresh healthful air to rooms, buildings, and work areas.\n\n(8)  Vats and tanks.  All open vats and tanks into which workmen could fall shall be guarded.\n\n(9)  Lighting \u2014(i)  Adequacy.  Illumination shall be provided and designed to supply adequate general and local lighting to rooms, buildings, and work areas during the time of use.\n\n(ii)  Effectiveness.  Factors upon which the adequacy and effectiveness of illumination will be judged, include the following:\n\n( a ) The quantity of light in foot-candle intensity shall be sufficient for the work being done.\n\n( b ) The quality of the light shall be such that it is free from glare, and has correct direction, diffusion, and distribution.\n\n( c ) Shadows and extreme contrasts shall be avoided or kept to a minimum.\n\n(10) [Reserved]\n\n(11)  Hazard marking.  Physical hazard marking shall be as specified in \u00a7 1910.144 of this part.\n\n(12) [Reserved]\n\n(13)  Hydraulic systems.  Means shall be provided to block, chain, or otherwise secure equipment normally supported by hydraulic pressure so as to provide for safe maintenance.\n\n(14) [Reserved]\n\n(15)  Gas piping and appliances.  All gas piping and appliances shall be installed in accordance with the American National Standard Requirements for the Installation of Gas Appliances and Gas Piping Z21.30\u20141964, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(16)-(17) [Reserved]\n\n(18)  Conveyors \u2014(i)  Standards.  Construction, operation, and maintenance of conveyors shall be in accordance with American National Standard B20.1\u20141957, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(ii)  Guarding.  Spiked live rolls shall be guarded.\n\n(19)  Stationary tramways and trestles \u2014(i)  Foundations and walkways.  Tramways and trestles shall have substantial mud sills or foundations which shall be frequently inspected and kept in repair. When vehicles are operated on tramways and trestles which are used for foot passage, traffic shall be controlled or a walkway with standard handrails at the outer edge and shear timber on the inner edge shall be provided. This walkway shall be wide enough to allow adequate clearance to vehicles. When walkways cross over other thoroughfares, they shall be solidly fenced at the outer edge to a height of 42 inches over such thoroughfares.\n\n(ii)  Clearance.  Stationary tramways and trestles shall have a vertical clearance of 22 feet over railroad rails. When constructed over carrier docks or roads, they shall have a clearance of 6 feet above the driver's foot rest on the carrier, and in no event shall this clearance be less than 12 feet from the roadway. In existing operations where it is impractical to obtain such clearance, telltales, electric signals, signs or other precautionary measures shall be installed.\n\n(20)  Blower, collecting, and exhaust systems \u2014(i)  Design, construction, and maintenance.  Blower collecting, and exhaust systems should be designed, constructed, and maintained in accordance with American National Standards Z33.1\u20141961 (For the Installation of Blower and Exhaust Systems for Dust, Stock, and Vapor Removal or Conveying) and Z12.2\u20141962 (R1969) (Code for the Prevention of Dust Explosion in Woodworking and Wood Flour Manufacturing Plants), which are incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(ii)  Collecting systems.  All mills containing one or more machines that create dust, shavings, chips, or slivers during a period of time equal to or greater than one-fourth of the working day, shall be equipped with a collecting system. It may be either continuous or automatic, and shall be of sufficient strength and capacity to enable it to remove such refuse from points of operation and immediate vicinities of machines and work areas.\n\n(iii)  Exhaust or conveyor systems.  Each woodworking machine that creates dust, shavings, chips, or slivers shall be equipped with an exhaust or conveyor system located and adjusted to remove the maximum amount of refuse from the point of operation and immediate vicinity.\n\n(iv) [Reserved]\n\n(v)  Dust chambers.  Exhaust pipes shall not discharge into an unconfined outside pile if uncontrolled fire or explosion hazards are created. They may empty into settling or dust chambers, designed to prevent the dust or refuse from entering any work area. Such chambers shall be constructed and operated to minimize the danger of fire or dust explosion.\n\n(vi)  Hand removal of refuse.  Provision for the daily removal of refuse shall be made in all operations not required to have an exhaust system or having refuse too heavy, bulky, or otherwise unsuitable to be handled by the exhaust system.\n\n(21)  Chippers \u2014(i)  Whole-log chippers.  The feed system to the chipper shall be arranged so the operator does not stand in direct line with the chipper spout (hopper). The chipper spout shall be enclosed to a height of not less than 36 inches from the floor or the operator's platform. A safety belt and lifeline shall be worn by workmen when working at or near the spout unless the spout is guarded. The lifeline shall be short enough to prevent workers from falling into the chipper.\n\n(ii)  Hogs.  ( a ) Hog mills shall be so designed and arranged that from no position on the rim of the chute shall the distance to the cutter knives be less than 40 inches.\n\n( b ) Hog feed chutes shall be provided with suitable and approved baffles, which shall minimize material from being thrown from the mill.\n\n( c ) Employees feeding hog mills shall be provided with safety belts and lines unless guarded.\n\n(22) [Reserved]\n\n(23)  Bins, bunkers, hoppers, and fuel houses \u2014(i)  Guarding.  Open bins, bunkers, and hoppers whose upper edges extend less than 3 feet above working level shall be equipped with standard handrails and toe boards, or have their tops covered by a substantial grill or grating with openings small enough to prevent a man from falling through.\n\n(ii)  Use of wheeled equipment to load bins.  Where automotive or other wheeled equipment is used to move materials into bins, bunkers, and hoppers, adequate guard rails shall be installed along each side of the runway, and a substantial bumper stop provided when necessary.\n\n(iii)  Exits, lighting, and safety devices.  Fuel houses and bins shall have adequate exits and lighting, and all necessary safety devices shall be provided and shall be used by persons entering these structures.\n\n(iv)  Walkways.  Where needed, fuel houses and bins shall have a standard railed platform or walkway near the top.\n\n(24)  Ropes, cables, slings, and chains \u2014(i)  Safe usage.  Ropes, cables, slings, and chains shall be used in accordance with safe use practices recommended by the manufacturer or within safe limits recommended by the equipment manufacturer when used in conjunction with it.\n\n(ii)  Hooks.  No open hook shall be used in rigging to lift any load where there is hazard from relieving the tension on the hook from the load or hook catching or fouling.\n\n(iii)  Work by qualified persons.  Installation, inspection, maintenance, repair, and testing of ropes, cables, slings, and chains shall be done only by persons qualified to do such work.\n\n(iv)  Slings.  Proper storage shall be provided for slings while not in use.\n\n(v)  Ropes or cables.  ( a ) Wire rope or cable shall be inspected when installed and once each week thereafter, when in use. It shall be removed from hoisting or load-carrying service when kinked or when one of the following conditions exists:\n\n( 1 ) When three broken wires are found in one lay of 6 by 6 wire rope.\n\n( 2 ) When six broken wires are found in one lay of 6 by 19 wire rope.\n\n( 3 ) When nine broken wires are found in one lay of 6 by 37 wire rope.\n\n( 4 ) When eight broken wires are found in one lay of 8 by 19 wire rope.\n\n( 5 ) When marked corrosion appears.\n\n( 6 ) Wire rope of a type not described herein shall be removed from service when 4 percent of the total number of wires composing such rope are found to be broken in one lay.\n\n( b ) Wire rope removed from service due to defects shall be plainly marked or identified as being unfit for further use on cranes, hoists, and other load-carrying devices.\n\n( c ) The ratio between the rope diameter and the drum, block, sheave, or pulley tread diameter shall be such that the rope will adjust itself to the bend without excessive wear, deformation, or injury. In no case shall the safe value of drums, blocks, sheaves, or pulleys be reduced when replacing such items unless compensating changes are made for rope used and for safe loading limits.\n\n(vi)  Drums, sheaves, and pulleys.  Drums, sheaves, and pulleys shall be smooth and free from surface defects liable to injure rope. Drums, sheaves, or pulleys having eccentric bores or cracked hubs, spokes, or flanges shall be removed from service.\n\n(vii)  Connections.  Connections, fittings, fastenings, and other parts used in connection with ropes and cables shall be of good quality and of proper size and strength, and shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.\n\n(viii)  Socketing, splicing, and seizing.  ( a ) Socketing, splicing, and seizing of cables shall be performed only by qualified persons.\n\n( b ) All eye splices shall be made in an approved manner and wire rope thimbles of proper size shall be fitted in the eye, except that in slings the use of thimbles shall be optional.\n\n( c ) Wire rope clips attached with U-bolts shall have these bolts on the dead or short end of the rope. The U-bolt nuts shall be retightened immediately after initial load carrying use and at frequent intervals thereafter.\n\n( d ) When a wedge socket-type fastening is used, the dead or short end of the cable shall be clipped with a U-bolt or otherwise made secure against loosening.\n\n( e )  Fittings.  Hooks, shackles, rings, pad eyes, and other fittings that show excessive wear or that have been bent, twisted, or otherwise damaged shall be removed from service.\n\n( f )  Running lines.  Running lines of hoisting equipment located within 6 feet 6 inches of the ground or working level shall be boxed off or otherwise guarded, or the operating area shall be restricted.\n\n( g )  Number of wraps on drum.  There shall be not less than two full wraps of hoisting cable on the drum of cranes and hoists at all times of operation.\n\n( h )  Drum flanges.  Drums shall have a flange at each end to prevent the cable from slipping off.\n\n( i )  Sheave guards.  Bottom sheaves shall be protected by close fitting guards to prevent cable from jumping the sheave.\n\n( j )  Preventing abrasion.  The reeving of a rope shall be so arranged as to minimize chafing or abrading while in use.\n\n(ix)  Chains.  ( a ) Chains used in load carrying service shall be inspected before initial use and weekly thereafter.\n\n( b ) Chain shall be normalized or annealed periodically as recommended by the manufacturer.\n\n( c ) If at any time any 3-foot length of chain is found to have stretched one-third the length of a link it shall be discarded.\n\n( d ) Bolts or nails shall not be placed between two links to shorten or join chains.\n\n( e ) Broken chains shall not be spliced by inserting a bolt between two links with the head of the bolt and nut sustaining the load, or by passing one link through another and inserting a bolt or nail to hold it.\n\n(x)  Fiber rope.  ( a ) Frozen fiber rope shall not be used in load carrying service.\n\n( b ) Fiber rope that has been subjected to acid or excessive heat shall not be used for load carrying purposes.\n\n( c ) Fiber rope shall be protected from abrasion by padding where it is fastened or drawn over square corners or sharp or rough surfaces.\n\n(25) [Reserved]\n\n(26)  Mechanical stackers and unstackers.\n\n(i) [Reserved]\n\n(ii)  Lumber lifting devices.  Lumber lifting devices on all stackers shall be designed and arranged so as to minimize the possibility of lumber falling from such devices.\n\n(iii)  Blocking hoisting platform.  Means shall be provided to positively block the hoisting platform when employees must go beneath the stacker or unstacker hoist.\n\n(iv)  Identifying controls.  Every manually operated control switch shall be properly identified and so located as to be readily accessible to the operator.\n\n(v)  Locking main control switches.  Main control switches shall be so designed that they can be locked in the open position.\n\n(vi)  Guarding side openings.  The hoistway side openings at the top level of the stacker and unstacker shall be protected by enclosures of standard railings.\n\n(vii)  Guarding hoistway openings.  When the hoist platform or top of the load is below the working platform, the hoistway openings shall be guarded.\n\n(viii)  Guarding lower landing area.  The lower landing area of stackers and unstackers shall be guarded by enclosures that prevent entrance to the area or pit below the hoist platform. Entrances should be protected by electrically interlocked gates which, when open, will disconnect the power and set the hoist brakes. When the interlock is not installed, other positive means of protecting the entrance shall be provided.\n\n(ix)  Inspection.  Every stacker and unstacker shall be inspected at frequent intervals and all defective parts shall be immediately repaired or replaced.\n\n(x)  Cleaning pits.  Safe means of entrance and exit shall be provided to permit cleaning of pits.\n\n(xi)  Preventing entry to hazardous area.  Where the return of trucks from unstacker to stacker is by mechanical power or gravity, adequate signs, warning devices, or barriers shall be erected to prevent entry into the hazardous area.\n\n(27)  Lumber piling and storage \u2014(i)  Pile foundations.  In stacking units of lumber, pile foundations shall be designed and arranged to support maximum loads without sinking, sagging, or permitting the piles to topple. In unit package piles, substantial bolsters or unit separators shall be placed between each package directly over the stickers.\n\n(ii)  Stacking dissimilar unit packages.  Long units of lumber shall not be stacked upon shorter packages except where a stable pile can be made with the use of package separators.\n\n(iii)  Unstable piles.  Piles of lumber which have become unstable shall be immediately made safe, or the area into which they might fall shall be fenced or barricaded and employees prohibited from entering it.\n\n(iv)  Stickers.  Unit packages of lumber shall be provided with stickers as necessary to insure stability under ordinary operating conditions.\n\n(v)  Sticker alignment.  Stickers shall extend the full width of the package, shall be uniformly spaced, and shall be aligned one above the other. Stickers may be lapped with a minimum overlapping of 12 inches. Stickers shall not protrude more than 2 inches beyond the sides of the package.\n\n(vi)  Pile height.  The height of unit package piles shall be dependent on the dimensions of the packages and shall be such as to provide stability under normal operating conditions. Adjacent lumber piles may be tied together with separators to increase stability.\n\n(28)  Lumber loading.  Loads shall be built and secured to insure stability in transit.\n\n(29)  Burners \u2014(i)  Guying.  If the burner stack is not self-supporting, it shall be guyed or otherwise supported.\n\n(ii)  Runway.  The conveyor runway to the burner shall be equipped with a standard handrail. If the runway crosses a roadway or thoroughfare, standard toe boards shall be provided in addition.\n\n(30)  Vehicles \u2014(i)  Scope.  Vehicles shall include all mobile equipment normally used in sawmill, planing mill, storage, shipping, and yard operations.\n\n(ii)  Warning signals and spark arrestors.  All vehicles shall be equipped with audible warning signals and where practicable shall have spark arrestors.\n\n(iii)  Lights.  All vehicles operated in the dark or in poorly lighted areas shall be equipped with head and tail lights.\n\n(iv)  Overhead guard.  All vehicles operated in areas where overhead hazards exist shall be equipped with an approved overhead guard. See American National Standard Safety Code for Powered Industrial Trucks, B56.1\u20141969, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(v)  Platform guard.  Where the operator is exposed to hazard from backing the vehicle into objects, an approved platform guard shall be provided and so arranged as to not impede exit of driver from vehicle.\n\n(vi) [Reserved]\n\n(vii)  Operation in buildings.  Vehicles powered by internal combustion engines shall not operate in buildings unless the buildings are adequately ventilated.\n\n(viii)  Load limits.  No vehicle shall be operated with loads exceeding its safe load capacity.\n\n(ix)  Brakes.  All vehicles shall be equipped with brakes capable of holding and controlling the vehicle and capacity load upon any incline or grade over which they may be operated.\n\n(x) [Reserved]\n\n(xi)  Carriers.  ( a ) Carriers shall be so designed and constructed that the operator's field of vision shall not be unnecessarily restricted.\n\n( b ) Carriers shall be provided with an access ladder or equivalent.\n\n(xii)  Lumber hauling trucks.  ( a ) On trucks where movement of load on stopping would endanger the operator, a substantial bulkhead shall be installed behind the operator's seat. This shall extend to the top of the operator's compartment.\n\n( b ) Stakes, stake pockets, racks, tighteners, and binders shall provide adequate means to secure the load against any movement during transit.\n\n( c ) Where rollers are used, at least two shall be equipped with locks which shall be locked when supporting loads during transit.\n\n(31)  Traffic control and flow \u2014(i)  Hazardous crossings.  Railroad tracks and other hazardous crossings shall be plainly posted.\n\n(ii)  Restricted overhead clearance.  All areas of restricted side or overhead clearance shall be plainly marked.\n\n(iii)  Pickup and unloading points.  Pickup and unloading points and paths for lumber packages on conveyors and transfers and other areas where accurate spotting is required, shall be plainly marked and wheel stops provided where necessary.\n\n(iv)  Aisles, passageways, and roadways.  Aisles, passageways, and roadways shall be sufficiently wide to provide safe side clearance. One-way aisles may be used for two-way traffic if suitable turnouts are provided.\n\n(d)  Log handling, sorting, and storage \u2014(1)  Log unloading methods, equipment, and facilities \u2014(i)  Unloading methods.  ( a ) Stakes and chocks which trip shall be constructed in such manner that the tripping mechanism that releases the stake or chocks is activated at the opposite side of the load being tripped.\n\n( b ) Binders on logs shall not be released prior to securing with unloading lines or other unloading device.\n\n( c ) Binders shall be released only from the side on which the unloader operates, except when released by remote control devices or except when person making release is protected by racks or stanchions or other equivalent means.\n\n( d ) Loads on which a binder is fouled by the unloading machine shall have an extra binder or metal band of equal strength placed around the load, or the load shall be otherwise secured so the fouled binder can be safely removed.\n\n(ii)  Unloading equipment and facilities.  ( a ) Machines used for hoisting, unloading, or lowering logs shall be equipped with brakes capable of controlling or holding the maximum load in midair.\n\n( b ) The lifting cylinders of all hydraulically operated log handling machines shall be equipped with a positive device for preventing the uncontrolled lowering of the load or forks in case of a failure in the hydraulic system.\n\n( c ) A limit switch shall be installed on powered log handling machines to prevent the lift arms from traveling too far in the event the control switch is not released in time.\n\n( d ) When forklift-type machines are used to load trailers, a means of securing the loading attachment to the fork shall be installed and used.\n\n( e ) A-frames and similar log unloading devices shall have adequate height to provide safe clearance for swinging loads and to provide for adequate crotch lines and spreader bar devices.\n\n( f ) Log handling machines used to stack logs or lift loads above operator's head shall be equipped with adequate overhead protection.\n\n( g ) All mobile log handling machines shall be equipped with headlights and backup lights.\n\n( h ) Unloading devices shall be equipped with a horn or other plainly audible signaling device.\n\n( i ) Movement of unloading equipment shall be coordinated by audible or hand signals when operator's vision is impaired or operating in the vicinity of other employees.\n\n( j ) Wood pike poles shall be made of straight-grained, select material. Metal or conductive pike poles shall not be used around exposed energized electrical conductors. Defective, blunt, or dull pike poles shall not be used.\n\n(2)  Log unloading and storage areas \u2014(i)  General.  ( a ) Log dumps, booms, ponds, or storage areas used at night shall be illuminated in accordance with the requirements of American National Standard A11.1-1965 (R-1970) Standard Practice for Industrial Lighting, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n( b ) Log unloading areas shall be arranged and maintained to provide a safe working area.\n\n( c ) Where skids are used, space adequate to clear a man's body shall be maintained between the top of the skids and the ground.\n\n( d ) Signs prohibiting unauthorized foot or vehicle traffic in log unloading and storage areas shall be posted.\n\n(ii)  Water log dumps.  ( a ) Ungrounded electrically powered hoists using handheld remote control in grounded locations, such as log dumps or mill log lifts, shall be actuated by circuits operating at less than 50 volts to ground.\n\n( b ) Roadbeds at log dumps shall be of sufficient width and evenness to insure safe operation of equipment.\n\n( c ) An adequate brow log or skid timbers or the equivalent shall be provided where necessary. Railroad-type dumps, when located where logs are dumped directly into water or where entire loads are lifted from vehicle, may be exempted providing such practice does not create a hazardous exposure of personnel or equipment.\n\n( d ) Unloading lines shall be arranged so that it is not necessary for the employees to attach them from the pond or dump side of the load except when entire loads are lifted from the log-transporting vehicle.\n\n( e ) Unloading lines, crotch lines, or equally effective means shall be arranged and used in a manner to minimize the possibility of any log from swinging or rolling back.\n\n( f ) When logs are unloaded with peavys or similar manual methods, means shall be provided and used that will minimize the danger from rolling or swinging logs.\n\n( g ) Guardrails, walkways, and standard handrails shall be installed\n\n( h ) Approved life rings (see: 46 CFR 160.099 and 46 CFR 160.050) with line attached and maintained to retain buoyancy shall be provided.\n\n(iii)  Log booms and ponds.  ( a ) Walkways and floats shall be installed and securely anchored to provide adequate passageway for employees.\n\n( b ) All regular boom sticks and foot logs shall be reasonably straight, with no protruding knots and bark, and shall be capable of supporting, above the water line at either end, the weight of an employee and equipment.\n\n( c ) Permanent cable swifters shall be so arranged that it will not be necessary to roll boom sticks in order to attach or detach them.\n\n( d ) Periodic inspection of cable or dogging lines shall be made to determine when repair or removal from service is necessary.\n\n( e ) The banks of the log pond in the vicinity of the log haul shall be reinforced to prevent caving in.\n\n( f ) Artificial log ponds shall be drained, cleaned, and refilled when unhealthy stagnation or pollution occurs.\n\n( g ) Employees whose duties require them to work from boats, floating logs, boom sticks, or walkways along or on water shall be provided with and shall wear appropriate buoyant devices while performing such duties.\n\n( h ) Stiff booms shall be two float logs wide secured by boom chains or other connecting devices, and of a width adequate for the working needs. Walking surfaces shall be free of loose material and maintained in good repair.\n\n( i ) Boom sticks shall be fastened together with adequate crossties or couplings.\n\n( j ) Floating donkeys or other power-driven machinery used on booms shall be placed on a raft or float with enough buoyancy to keep the deck well above water.\n\n( k ) All sorting gaps shall have a substantial stiff boom on each side.\n\n(iv)  Pond boats and rafts.  The applicable provisions of the Standard for Fire Protection for Motorcraft, NFPA No. 302\u20141968, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6, shall be complied with.\n\n( a ) Decks of pond boats shall be covered with nonslip material.\n\n( b ) Powered pond boats or rafts shall be provided with at least one approved fire extinguisher, and one lifering with line attached.\n\n( c ) Boat fuel shall be transported and stored in approved safety containers. Refer to \u00a7 1910.155(c)(3) for definition of approved.\n\n( d ) Inspection, maintenance, and ventilation of the bilge area shall be provided to prevent accumulation of highly combustible materials.\n\n( e ) Adequate ventilation shall be provided for the cabin area on enclosed cabin-type boats to prevent accumulation of harmful gases or vapors.\n\n(v)  Dry deck storage.  ( a ) Dry deck storage areas shall be kept orderly and shall be maintained in a condition which is conducive to safe operation of mobile equipment.\n\n( b ) Logs shall be stored in a safe and orderly manner, and roadways and traffic lanes shall be maintained at a width adequate for safe travel of log handling equipment.\n\n( c ) Logs shall be arranged to minimize the chance of accidentally rolling from the deck.\n\n(vi)  Log hauls and slips.  ( a ) Walkways along log hauls shall have a standard handrail on the outer edge, and cleats or other means to assure adequate footing and enable employees to walk clear of the log chute.\n\n( b ) Log haul bull chains or cable shall be designed, installed, and maintained to provide adequate safety for the work need.\n\n( c ) Log haul gear and bull chain drive mechanism shall be guarded.\n\n( d ) Substantial troughs for the return strand of log haul chains shall be provided over passageways.\n\n( e ) Log haul controls shall be located and identified to operate from a position where the operator will, at all times, be in the clear of logs, machinery, lines, and rigging. In operations where control is by lever exposed to incoming logs, the lever shall be arranged to operate the log haul only when moved toward the log slip or toward the log pond.\n\n( f ) A positive stop shall be installed on all log hauls to prevent logs from traveling too far ahead in the mill.\n\n( g ) Overhead protection shall be provided for employees working below logs being moved to the log deck.\n\n( h ) Log wells shall be provided with safeguards to minimize the possibility of logs rolling back into well from log deck.\n\n(3)  Log decks \u2014(i)  Access.  Safe access to the head rig shall be provided.\n\n(ii)  Stops.  Log decks shall be provided with adequate stops, chains, or other safeguards to prevent logs from rolling down the deck onto the carriage or its runway.\n\n(iii)  Barricade.  A barricade or other positive stop of sufficient strength to stop any log shall be erected between the sawyer's stand and the log deck.\n\n(iv)  Loose chains.  Loose chains from overhead canting devices or other equipment shall not be allowed to hang over the log deck in such manner as to strike employees.\n\n(v)  Swing saws.  Swing saws on log decks shall be equipped with a barricade and stops for protection of employees who may be on the opposite side of the log haul chute.\n\n(vi)  Drag saws.  Where reciprocating log cutoff saws (drag saws) are provided, they shall not project into walkway or aisle.\n\n(vii)  Circular cutoff saws.  Circular log bucking or cutoff saws shall be so located and guarded as to allow safe entrance to and exit from the building.\n\n(viii)  Entrance doorway.  Where the cutoff saw partially blocks the entrance from the log haul runway, the entrance shall be guarded.\n\n(4)  Mechanical barkers \u2014(i)  Rotary barkers.  Rotary barking devices shall be so guarded as to protect employees from flying chips, bark, or other extraneous material.\n\n(ii)  Elevating ramp.  If an elevating ramp or gate is used, it shall be provided with a safety chain, hook, or other means of suspension while employees are underneath.\n\n(iii)  Area around barkers.  The hazardous area around ring barkers and their conveyors shall be fenced off or posted as a prohibited area for unauthorized persons.\n\n(iv)  Enclosing hydraulic barkers.  Hydraulic barkers shall be enclosed with strong baffles at the inlet and outlet. The operator shall be protected by adequate safety glass or equivalent.\n\n(v)  Holddown rolls.  Holddown rolls shall be installed at the infeed and outfeed sections of mechanical ring barkers to control the movement of logs.\n\n(e)  Log breakdown and related machinery and facilities \u2014(1)  Log carriages and carriage runways \u2014(i)  Bumpers.  A substantial stop or bumper with adequate shock-absorptive qualities shall be installed at each end of the carriage runway.\n\n(ii)  Footing.  Rider-type carriages shall be floored to provide secure footing and a firm working platform for the block setter.\n\n(iii)  Sheave housing.  Sheaves on rope-driven carriages shall be guarded at floor line with substantial housings.\n\n(iv)  Carriage control.  A positive means shall be provided to prevent unintended movement of the carriage. This may involve a control locking device, a carriage tie-down, or both.\n\n(v)  Barriers and warning signs.  A barrier shall be provided to prevent employees from entering the space necessary for travel of the carriage, with headblocks fully receded, for the full length and extreme ends of carriage runways. Warning signs shall be posted at possible entry points to this area.\n\n(vi)  Overhead clearance.  For a rider-type carriage adequate overhead clear space above the carriage deck shall be provided for the full carriage runway length.\n\n(vii)  Sweeping devices.  Carriage track sweeping devices shall be used to keep track rails clear of debris.\n\n(viii)  Dogs.  Dogging devices shall be adequate to secure logs, cants, or boards, during sawing operations.\n\n(2)  Head saws \u2014(i)  Band head saws.  ( a ) Band head saws shall not be operated at speeds in excess of those recommended by the manufacturer\n\n( b ) Band head saws shall be thoroughly inspected for cracks, splits, broken teeth, and other defects. A bandsaw with a crack greater than one-tenth the width of the saw shall not be placed in service until width of saw is reduced to eliminate crack, until cracked section is removed, or crack development is stopped.\n\n( c ) Provisions shall be made for alerting and warning employees before starting band head saws, and measures shall be taken to insure that all persons are in the clear.\n\n(ii)  Bandsaw wheels.  ( a ) No bandsaw wheel shall be run at a peripheral speed in excess of that recommended by the manufacturer. The manufacturer's recommended maximum speed shall be stamped in plainly legible figures on some portion of the wheel.\n\n( b ) Band head saw wheels shall be subjected to monthly inspections. Hubs, spokes, rims, bolts, and rivets shall be thoroughly examined in the course of such inspections. A loose or damaged hub, a rim crack, or loose spokes shall make the wheel unfit for service.\n\n( c ) Band wheels shall be completely encased or guarded, except for a portion of the upper wheel immediately around the point where the blade leaves the wheel, to permit operator to observe movement of equipment. Necessary ventilating and observation ports may be permitted. Substantial doors or gates are allowed for repair, lubrication, and saw changes; such doors or gates shall be closed securely during operation. Band head rigs shall be equipped with a saw catcher or guard of substantial construction.\n\n(iii)  Single circular head saws.  ( a ) Circular head saws shall not be operated at speeds in excess of those specified by the manufacturer. Maximum speed shall be etched on the saw.\n\n( b ) Circular head saws shall be equipped with safety guides which can be readily adjusted without use of hand tools.\n\n( c ) The upper saw of a double circular mill shall be provided with a substantial hood or guard. A screen or other suitable device shall be placed so as to protect the sawyer from flying particles.\n\n( d ) All circular sawmills where live rolls are not used behind the head saw shall be equipped with a spreader wheel or splitter.\n\n(iv)  Twin circular head saws.  Twin circular head saws rigs such as scrag saws shall meet the specifications for single circular head saws in paragraph (e)(2)(iii) of this section where applicable.\n\n(v)  Whole-log sash gang saws (Swedish gangs).  ( a ) Cranks, pitman rods, and other moving parts shall be adequately guarded.\n\n( b ) Feed rolls shall be enclosed by a cover over the top, front, and open ends except where guarded by location. Drive mechanism to feed rolls shall be enclosed.\n\n( c ) Carriage cradles of whole-log sash gang saws (Swedish gangs), shall be of adequate height to prevent logs from kicking out while being loaded.\n\n(3)  Resaws \u2014(i)  Band resaws.  Band resaws shall meet the specifications for band head saws as required by paragraph (e)(2)(i) of this section.\n\n(ii)  Circular gang resaws.  ( a ) Banks of circular gang resaws shall be guarded by a hood.\n\n( b ) Circular gang resaws shall be provided with safety fingers or other antikickback devices.\n\n( c ) Circular gang resaws shall not be operated at speeds exceeding those recommended by the manufacturer.\n\n( d ) [Reserved]\n\n( e ) Feed rolls shall be guarded.\n\n( f ) Each circular gang resaw, except self-feed saws with a live roll or wheel at back of saw, shall be provided with spreaders.\n\n(iii)  Sash gang resaws.  Sash gang resaws shall meet the safety specifications of whole-log sash gang saws in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (e)(2)(v) of this section.\n\n(4)  Trimmer saws \u2014(i)  Maximum speed.  Trimmer saws shall not be run at peripheral speeds in excess of those recommended by the manufacturer.\n\n(ii)  Guards.  ( a ) Trimmer saws shall be guarded in front by adequate baffles to protect against flying debris and they shall be securely bolted to a substantial frame. These guards for a series of saws shall be set as close to the top of the trimmer table as is practical.\n\n( b ) The end saws on trimmer shall be guarded.\n\n( c ) The rear of trimmer saws shall have a guard the full width of the saws and as much wider as practical.\n\n(iii)  Safety stops.  Automatic trimmer saws shall be provided with safety stops or hangers to prevent saws from dropping on table.\n\n(5)  Edgers \u2014(i)  Location.  ( a ) Where vertical arbor edger saws are located ahead of the main saw, they shall be so guarded that an employee cannot contact any part of the edger saw from his normal position.\n\n( b ) Edgers shall not be located in the main roll case behind the head saws.\n\n(ii)  Guards.  ( a ) The top and the openings in end and side frames of edgers shall be adequately guarded and gears and chains shall be fully housed. Guards may be hinged or otherwise arranged to permit oiling and the removal of saws.\n\n( b ) All edgers shall be equipped with pressure feed rolls.\n\n( c ) Pressure feed rolls on edgers shall be guarded against accidental contact.\n\n(iii)  Antikickback devices.  ( a ) Edgers shall be provided with safety fingers or other approved methods of preventing kickbacks or guarding against them. A barricade in line with the edger, if properly fenced off, may be used if safety fingers are not feasible to install.\n\n( b ) A controlling device shall be installed and located so that the operator can stop the feed mechanism without releasing the tension of the pressure rolls.\n\n(iv)  Operating speed of live rolls.  Live rolls and tailing devices in back of edger shall operate at a speed not less than the speed of the edger feed rolls.\n\n(6)  Planers \u2014(i)  Guards.  ( a ) All cutting heads shall be guarded.\n\n( b ) Side head hoods shall be of sufficient height to safeguard the head setscrew.\n\n( c ) Pressure feed rolls and \u201cpineapples\u201d shall be guarded.\n\n( d ) Levers or controls shall be so arranged or guarded as to reduce the possibility of accidental operation.\n\n(f)  Dry kilns and facilities \u2014(1)  Kiln foundations.  Dry kilns shall be constructed upon solid foundations to prevent tracks from sagging\n\n(2)  Passageways.  A passageway shall be provided to give adequate clearance on at least one side or in the center of end-piled kilns and on two sides of cross-piled kilns.\n\n(3)  Doors \u2014(i)  Main kiln doors.  ( a ) Main kiln doors shall be provided with a method of holding them open while kiln is being loaded.\n\n( b ) Counterweights on vertical lift doors shall be boxed or otherwise guarded.\n\n( c ) Adequate means shall be provided to firmly secure main doors, when they are disengaged from carriers and hangers, to prevent toppling.\n\n(ii)  Escape doors.  ( a ) If operating procedures require access to kilns, kilns shall be provided with escape doors that operate easily from the inside, swing in the direction of exit, and are located in or near the main door at the end of the passageway.\n\n( b ) Escape doors shall be of adequate height and width to accommodate an average size man.\n\n(4)  Pits.  Pits shall be well ventilated, drained, and lighted, and shall be large enough to safely accommodate the kiln operator together with operating devices such as valves, dampers, damper rods, and traps.\n\n(5)  Steam mains.  All high-pressure steam mains located in or adjacent to an operating pit shall be covered with heat-insulating material.\n\n(6)  Ladders.  A fixed ladder complying with the requirements of subpart D of this part, or other adequate means, shall be provided to permit access to the roof. Where controls and machinery are mounted on the roof, a permanent stairway with standard handrail shall be installed in accordance with the requirements in subpart D.\n\n(7)  Chocks.  A means shall be provided for chocking or blocking cars.\n\n(8)  Kiln tender room.  A warm room shall be provided for kiln employees to stay in during cold weather after leaving a hot kiln."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.18.37.6", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "R", "Subpart R\u2014Special Industries", "", "\u00a7 1910.266 Logging operations.", "OSHA", "", "", "[59 FR 51741, Oct. 12, 1994, as amended at 60 FR 7449, Feb. 8, 1995; 60 FR 40458, Aug. 9, 1996; 60 FR 47035, Sept. 8, 1995; 61 FR 9241, 9242, Mar. 7, 1996; 69 FR 18803, Apr. 9, 2004; 71 FR 16673, Apr. 3, 2006; 79 FR 37190, July 1, 2014]", "(a)  Table of contents.  This paragraph contains the list of paragraphs and appendices contained in this section.\n\na. Table of contents\n \n b. Scope and application\n \n c. Definitions\n \n d. General requirements\n \n 1. Personal protective equipment\n \n 2. First-aid kits\n \n 3. Seat belts\n \n 4. Fire extinguishers\n \n 5. Environmental conditions\n \n 6. Work areas\n \n 7. Signaling and signal equipment\n \n 8. Overhead electric lines\n \n 9. Flammable and combustible liquids\n \n 10. Explosives and blasting agents\n \n e. Hand and portable powered tools\n \n 1. General requirements\n \n 2. Chain saws\n \n f. Machines\n \n 1. General requirements\n \n 2. Machine operation\n \n 3. Protective structures\n \n 4. Overhead guards\n \n 5. Machine access\n \n 6. Exhaust systems\n \n 7. Brakes\n \n 8. Guarding\n \n g. Vehicles\n \n h. Tree harvesting\n \n 1. General requirements\n \n 2. Manual felling\n \n 3. Bucking and limbing\n \n 4. Chipping\n \n 5. Yarding\n \n 6. Loading and unloading\n \n 7. Transport\n \n 8. Storage\n \n i. Training\n \n j. Appendices\n \n Appendix A\u2014Minimum First-aid Supplies \n \n Appendix B\u2014Minimum First-aid Training \n \n Appendix C\u2014Corresponding ISO Agreements\n\na. Table of contents\n\nb. Scope and application\n\nc. Definitions\n\nd. General requirements\n\n1. Personal protective equipment\n\n2. First-aid kits\n\n3. Seat belts\n\n4. Fire extinguishers\n\n5. Environmental conditions\n\n6. Work areas\n\n7. Signaling and signal equipment\n\n8. Overhead electric lines\n\n9. Flammable and combustible liquids\n\n10. Explosives and blasting agents\n\ne. Hand and portable powered tools\n\n1. General requirements\n\n2. Chain saws\n\nf. Machines\n\n1. General requirements\n\n2. Machine operation\n\n3. Protective structures\n\n4. Overhead guards\n\n5. Machine access\n\n6. Exhaust systems\n\n7. Brakes\n\n8. Guarding\n\ng. Vehicles\n\nh. Tree harvesting\n\n1. General requirements\n\n2. Manual felling\n\n3. Bucking and limbing\n\n4. Chipping\n\n5. Yarding\n\n6. Loading and unloading\n\n7. Transport\n\n8. Storage\n\ni. Training\n\nj. Appendices\n\nAppendix A\u2014Minimum First-aid Supplies\n\nAppendix B\u2014Minimum First-aid Training\n\nAppendix C\u2014Corresponding ISO Agreements\n\n(b)  Scope and application.  (1) This standard establishes safety practices, means, methods and operations for all types of logging, regardless of the end use of the wood. These types of logging include, but are not limited to, pulpwood and timber harvesting and the logging of sawlogs, veneer bolts, poles, pilings and other forest products. This standard does not cover the construction or use of cable yarding systems.\n\n(2) This standard applies to all logging operations as defined by this section.\n\n(3) Hazards and working conditions not specifically addressed by this section are covered by other applicable sections of part 1910.\n\n(c)  Definitions applicable to this section.\n\nArch.  An open-framed trailer or built-up framework used to suspend the leading ends of trees or logs when they are skidded.\n\nBackcut (felling cut).  The final cut in a felling operation.\n\nBallistic nylon.  A nylon fabric of high tensile properties designed to provide protection from lacerations.\n\nBuck.  To cut a felled tree into logs.\n\nButt.  The bottom of the felled part of a tree.\n\nCable yarding.  The movement of felled trees or logs from the area where they are felled to the landing on a system composed of a cable suspended from spars and/or towers. The trees or logs may be either dragged across the ground on the cable or carried while suspended from the cable.\n\nChock.  A block, often wedge shaped, which is used to prevent movement; e.g., a log from rolling, a wheel from turning.\n\nChoker.  A sling used to encircle the end of a log for yarding. One end is passed around the load, then through a loop eye, end fitting or other device at the other end of the sling. The end that passed through the end fitting or other device is then hooked to the lifting or pulling machine.\n\nDanger tree.  A standing tree that presents a hazard to employees due to conditions such as, but not limited to, deterioration or physical damage to the root system, trunk, stem or limbs, and the direction and lean of the tree.\n\nDebark.  To remove bark from trees or logs.\n\nDeck.  A stack of trees or logs.\n\nDesignated person.  An employee who has the requisite knowledge, training and experience to perform specific duties.\n\nDomino felling.  The partial cutting of multiple trees which are left standing and then pushed over with a pusher tree.\n\nFell (fall).  To cut down trees.\n\nFeller (faller).  An employee who fells trees.\n\nGrounded.  The placement of a component of a machine on the ground or on a device where it is firmly supported.\n\nGuarded.  Covered, shielded, fenced, enclosed, or otherwise protected by means of suitable enclosures, covers, casings, shields, troughs, railings, screens, mats, or platforms, or by location, to prevent injury.\n\nHealth care provider.  A health care practitioner operating with the scope of his/her license, certificate, registration or legally authorized practice.\n\nLanding.  Any place where logs are laid after being yarded, and before transport from the work site.\n\nLimbing.  To cut branches off felled trees.\n\nLodged tree (hung tree).  A tree leaning against another tree or object which prevents it from falling to the ground.\n\nLog.  A segment sawed or split from a felled tree, such as, but not limited to, a section, bolt, or tree length.\n\nLogging operations.  Operations associated with felling and moving trees and logs from the stump to the point of delivery, such as, but not limited to, marking danger trees and trees/logs to be cut to length, felling, limbing, bucking, debarking, chipping, yarding, loading, unloading, storing, and transporting machines, equipment and personnel to, from and between logging sites.\n\nMachine.  A piece of stationary or mobile equipment having a self-contained powerplant, that is operated off-road and used for the movement of material. Machines include, but are not limited to, tractors, skidders, front-end loaders, scrapers, graders, bulldozers, swing yarders, log stackers, log loaders, and mechanical felling devices, such as tree shears and feller-bunchers. Machines do not include airplanes or aircraft (e.g., helicopters).\n\nRated capacity.  The maximum load a system, vehicle, machine or piece of equipment was designed by the manufacturer to handle.\n\nRoot wad.  The ball of a tree root and dirt that is pulled from the ground when a tree is uprooted.\n\nServiceable condition.  A state or ability of a tool, machine, vehicle or other device to operate as it was intended by the manufacturer to operate.\n\nSkidding.  The yarding of trees or logs by pulling or towing them across the ground.\n\nSlope (grade).  The increase or decrease in altitude over a horizontal distance expressed as a percentage. For example, a change of altitude of 20 feet (6 m) over a horizontal distance of 100 feet (30 m) is expressed as a 20 percent slope.\n\nSnag.  Any standing dead tree or portion thereof.\n\nSpring pole.  A tree, segment of a tree, limb, or sapling which is under stress or tension due to the pressure or weight of another object.\n\nTie down.  Chain, cable, steel strips or fiber webbing and binders attached to a truck, trailer or other conveyance as a means to secure loads and to prevent them from shifting or moving when they are being transported.\n\nUndercut.  A notch cut in a tree to guide the direction of the tree fall and to prevent splitting or kickback.\n\nVehicle.  A car, bus, truck, trailer or semi-trailer owned, leased or rented by the employer that is used for transportation of employees or movement of material.\n\nWinching.  The winding of cable or rope onto a spool or drum.\n\nYarding.  The movement of logs from the place they are felled to a landing.\n\n(d)  General requirements \u2014(1)  Personal protective equipment.  (i) The employer shall assure that personal protective equipment, including any personal protective equipment provided by an employee, is maintained in a serviceable condition.\n\n(ii) The employer shall assure that personal protective equipment, including any personal protective equipment provided by an employee, is inspected before initial use during each workshift. Defects or damage shall be repaired or the unserviceable personal protective equipment shall be replaced before work is commenced.\n\n(iii) The employer shall provide, at no cost to the employee, and assure that each employee handling wire rope wears, hand protection which provides adequate protection from puncture wounds, cuts and lacerations.\n\n(iv) The employer shall provide, at no cost to the employee, and assure that each employee who operates a chain saw wears leg protection constructed with cut-resistant material, such as ballistic nylon. The leg protection shall cover the full length of the thigh to the top of the boot on each leg to protect against contact with a moving chain saw.  Exception:  This requirement does not apply when an employee is working as a climber if the employer demonstrates that a greater hazard is posed by wearing leg protection in the particular situation, or when an employee is working from a vehicular mounted elevating and rotating work platform meeting the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.67.\n\n(v) The employer shall assure that each employee wears foot protection, such as heavy-duty logging boots that are waterproof or water repellant, cover and provide support to the ankle. The employer shall assure that each employee who operates a chain saw wears foot protection that is constructed with cut-resistant material which will protect the employee against contact with a running chain saw. Sharp, calk-soled boots or other slip-resistant type boots may be worn where the employer demonstrates that they are necessary for the employee's job, the terrain, the timber type, and the weather conditions, provided that foot protection otherwise required by this paragraph is met.\n\n(vi) The employer shall provide, at no cost to the employee, and assure that each employee who works in an area where there is potential for head injury from falling or flying objects wears head protection meeting the requirements of subpart I of part 1910.\n\n(vii) The employer shall provide, at no cost to the employee, and assure that each employee wears the following:\n\n(A) Eye protection meeting the requirements of subpart I of part 1910 where there is potential for eye injury due to falling or flying objects; and\n\n(B) Face protection meeting the requirements of subpart I of part 1910 where there is potential for facial injury such as, but not limited to, operating a chipper. Logger-type mesh screens may be worn by employees performing chain-saw operations and yarding.\n\nThe employee does not have to wear a separate eye protection device where face protection covering both the eyes and face is worn.\n\n(2)  First-aid kits.  (i) The employer shall provide first-aid kits at each work site where trees are being cut (e.g., felling, bucking, limbing), at each active landing, and on each employee transport vehicle. The number of first-aid kits and the content of each kit shall reflect the degree of isolation, the number of employees, and the hazards reasonably anticipated at the work site.\n\n(ii) At a minimum, each first-aid kit shall contain the items listed in appendix A at all times.\n\n(iii) The employer also may have the number and content of first-aid kits reviewed and approved annually by a health care provider.\n\n(iv) The employer shall maintain the contents of each first-aid kit in a serviceable condition.\n\n(3)  Seat belts.  For each vehicle or machine (equipped with ROPS/FOPS or overhead guards), including any vehicle or machine provided by an employee, the employer shall assure:\n\n(i) That a seat belt is provided for each vehicle or machine operator;\n\n(ii) That each employee uses the available seat belt while the vehicle or machine is being operated;\n\n(iii) That each employee securely and tightly fastens the seat belt to restrain the employee within the vehicle or machine cab;\n\n(iv) That each machine seat belt meets the requirements of the Society of Automotive Engineers Standard SAE J386, June 1985, \u201cOperator Restraint Systems for Off-Road Work Machines\u201d, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(v) That seat belts are not removed from any vehicle or machine. The employer shall replace each seat belt which has been removed from any vehicle or machine that was equipped with seat belts at the time of manufacture; and\n\n(vi) That each seat belt is maintained in a serviceable condition.\n\n(4)  Fire extinguishers.  The employer shall provide and maintain portable fire extinguishers on each machine and vehicle in accordance with the requirements of subpart L of part 1910.\n\n(5)  Environmental conditions.  All work shall terminate and each employee shall move to a place of safety when environmental conditions, such as but not limited to, electrical storms, strong winds which may affect the fall of a tree, heavy rain or snow, extreme cold, dense fog, fires, mudslides, and darkness, create a hazard for the employee in the performance of the job.\n\n(6)  Work areas.  (i) Employees shall be spaced and the duties of each employee shall be organized so the actions of one employee will not create a hazard for any other employee.\n\n(ii) Work areas shall be assigned so that trees cannot fall into an adjacent occupied work area. The distance between adjacent occupied work areas shall be at least two tree lengths of the trees being felled. The distance between adjacent occupied work areas shall reflect the degree of slope, the density of the growth, the height of the trees, the soil structure and other hazards reasonably anticipated at that work site. A distance of greater than two tree lengths shall be maintained between adjacent occupied work areas on any slope where rolling or sliding of trees or logs is reasonably foreseeable.\n\n(iii) Each employee performing a logging operation at a logging work site shall work in a position or location that is within visual or audible contact with another employee.\n\n(iv) The employer shall account for each employee at the end of each workshift.\n\n(7)  Signaling and signal equipment.  (i) Hand signals or audible contact, such as but not limited to, whistles, horns, or radios, shall be utilized whenever noise, distance, restricted visibility, or other factors prevent clear understanding of normal voice communications between employees.\n\n(ii) Engine noise, such as from a chain saw, is not an acceptable means of signaling. Other locally and regionally recognized signals may be used.\n\n(iii) Only a designated person shall give signals, except in an emergency.\n\n(8)  Overhead electric lines.  (i) Logging operations near overhead electric lines shall be done in accordance with the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.333(c)(3).\n\n(ii) The employer shall notify the power company immediately if a felled tree makes contact with any power line. Each employee shall remain clear of the area until the power company advises that there are no electrical hazards.\n\n(9)  Flammable and combustible liquids.  (i) Flammable and combustible liquids shall be stored, handled, transported, and used in accordance with the requirements of subpart H of part 1910.\n\n(ii) Flammable and combustible liquids shall not be transported in the driver compartment or in any passenger-occupied area of a machine or vehicle.\n\n(iii) Each machine, vehicle, and portable powered tool shall be shut off during fueling. Diesel-powered machines and vehicles may be fueled while they are at idle, provided that continued operation is intended and that the employer follows safe fueling and operating procedures.\n\n(iv) Flammable and combustible liquids, including chain-saw and diesel fuel, may be used to start a fire, provided the employer assures that in the particular situation its use does not create a hazard for an employee.\n\n(10)  Explosives and blasting agents.  (i) Explosives and blasting agents shall be stored, handled, transported, and used in accordance with the requirements of subpart H of part 1910.\n\n(ii) Only a designated person shall handle or use explosives and blasting agents.\n\n(iii) Explosives and blasting agents shall not be transported in the driver compartment or in any passenger-occupied area of a machine or vehicle.\n\n(e)  Hand and portable powered tools \u2014(1)  General requirements.  (i) The employer shall assure that each hand and portable powered tool, including any tool provided by an employee, is maintained in serviceable condition.\n\n(ii) The employer shall assure that each tool, including any tool provided by an employee, is inspected before initial use during each workshift. At a minimum, the inspection shall include the following:\n\n(A) Handles and guards, to assure that they are sound, tight-fitting, properly shaped, free of splinters and sharp edges, and in place;\n\n(B) Controls, to assure proper function;\n\n(C) Chain-saw chains, to assure proper adjustment;\n\n(D) Chain-saw mufflers, to assure that they are operational and in place;\n\n(E) Chain brakes and nose shielding devices, to assure that they are in place and function properly;\n\n(F) Heads of shock, impact-driven and driving tools, to assure that there is no mushrooming;\n\n(G) Cutting edges, to assure that they are sharp and properly shaped; and\n\n(H) All other safety devices, to assure that they are in place and function properly.\n\n(iii) The employer shall assure that each tool is used only for purposes for which it has been designed.\n\n(iv) When the head of any shock, impact-driven or driving tool begins to chip, it shall be repaired or removed from service.\n\n(v) The cutting edge of each tool shall be sharpened in accordance with manufacturer's specifications whenever it becomes dull during the workshift.\n\n(vi) Each tool shall be stored in the provided location when not being used at a work site.\n\n(vii) Racks, boxes, holsters or other means shall be provided, arranged and used for the transportation of tools so that a hazard is not created for any vehicle operator or passenger.\n\n(2)  Chain saws.  (i) Each chain saw placed into initial service after the effective date of this section shall be equipped with a chain brake and shall otherwise meet the requirements of the ANSI B175.1-1991 \u201cSafety Requirements for Gasoline-Powered Chain Saws\u201d, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6. Each chain saw placed into service before the effective date of this section shall be equipped with a protective device that minimizes chain-saw kickback. No chain-saw kickback device shall be removed or otherwise disabled.\n\n(ii) Each gasoline-powered chain saw shall be equipped with a continuous pressure throttle control system which will stop the chain when pressure on the throttle is released.\n\n(iii) The chain saw shall be operated and adjusted in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.\n\n(iv) The chain saw shall be fueled at least 10 feet (3 m) from any open flame or other source of ignition.\n\n(v) The chain saw shall be started at least 10 feet (3 m) from the fueling area.\n\n(vi) The chain saw shall be started on the ground or where otherwise firmly supported. Drop starting a chain saw is prohibited.\n\n(vii) The chain saw shall be started with the chain brake engaged.\n\n(viii) The chain saw shall be held with the thumbs and fingers of both hands encircling the handles during operation unless the employer demonstrates that a greater hazard is posed by keeping both hands on the chain saw in that particular situation.\n\n(ix) The chain-saw operator shall be certain of footing before starting to cut. The chain saw shall not be used in a position or at a distance that could cause the operator to become off-balance, to have insecure footing, or to relinquish a firm grip on the saw.\n\n(x) Prior to felling any tree, the chain-saw operator shall clear away brush or other potential obstacles which might interfere with cutting the tree or using the retreat path.\n\n(xi) The chain saw shall not be used to cut directly overhead.\n\n(xii) The chain saw shall be carried in a manner that will prevent operator contact with the cutting chain and muffler.\n\n(xiii) The chain saw shall be shut off or the throttle released before the feller starts his retreat.\n\n(xiv) The chain saw shall be shut down or the chain brake shall be engaged whenever a saw is carried further than 50 feet (15.2 m). The chain saw shall be shut down or the chain brake shall be engaged when a saw is carried less than 50 feet if conditions such as, but not limited to, the terrain, underbrush and slippery surfaces, may create a hazard for an employee.\n\n(f)  Machines \u2014(1)  General requirements.  (i) The employer shall assure that each machine, including any machine provided by an employee, is maintained in serviceable condition.\n\n(ii) The employer shall assure that each machine, including any machine provided by an employee, is inspected before initial use during each workshift. Defects or damage shall be repaired or the unserviceable machine shall be replaced before work is commenced.\n\n(iii) The employer shall assure that operating and maintenance instructions are available on the machine or in the area where the machine is being operated. Each machine operator and maintenance employee shall comply with the operating and maintenance instructions.\n\n(2)  Machine operation.  (i) The machine shall be started and operated only by a designated person.\n\n(ii) Stationary logging machines and their components shall be anchored or otherwise stabilized to prevent movement during operation.\n\n(iii) The rated capacity of any machine shall not be exceeded.\n\n(iv) To maintain stability, the machine must be operated within the limitations imposed by the manufacturer as described in the operating and maintenance instructions for that machine.\n\n(v) Before starting or moving any machine, the operator shall determine that no employee is in the path of the machine.\n\n(vi) The machine shall be operated only from the operator's station or as otherwise recommended by the manufacturer.\n\n(vii) The machine shall be operated at such a distance from employees and other machines such that operation will not create a hazard for an employee.\n\n(viii) No employee other than the operator shall ride on any mobile machine unless seating, seat belts and other protection equivalent to that provided for the operator are provided.\n\n(ix) No employee shall ride on any load.\n\n(x) Before the operator leaves the operator's station of a machine, it shall be secured as follows:\n\n(A) The parking brake or brake locks shall be applied;\n\n(B) The transmission shall be placed in the manufacturer's specified park position; and\n\n(C) Each moving element such as, but not limited to blades, buckets, saws and shears, shall be lowered to the ground or otherwise secured.\n\n(xi) If a hydraulic or pneumatic storage device can move the moving elements such as, but not limited to, blades, buckets, saws and shears, after the machine is shut down, the pressure or stored energy from the element shall be discharged as specified by the manufacturer.\n\n(xii) The rated capacity of any vehicle transporting a machine shall not be exceeded.\n\n(xiii) The machine shall be loaded, secured and unloaded so that it will not create a hazard for any employee.\n\n(3)  Protective structures.  (i) Each tractor, skidder, swing yarder, log stacker, log loader and mechanical felling device, such as tree shears or feller-buncher, placed into initial service after February 9, 1995, shall be equipped with falling object protective structure (FOPS) and/or rollover protective structure (ROPS). The employer shall replace FOPS or ROPS which have been removed from any machine.  Exception:  This requirement does not apply to machines which are capable of 360 degree rotation.\n\n(ii)(A) ROPS shall be tested, installed, and maintained in serviceable condition.\n\n(B) Each machine manufactured after August 1, 1996, shall have ROPS tested, installed, and maintained in accordance with the Society of Automotive Engineers SAE J1040, April 1988, \u201cPerformance Criteria for Rollover Protective Structures (ROPS) for Construction, Earthmoving, Forestry, and Mining Machines\u201d, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(C) This incorporation by reference was approved by the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies may be obtained from the Society of Automotive Engineers, 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA 15096. Copies may be inspected at the Docket Office, Occupational Safety and Health Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, 200 Constitution Avenue NW., room N2625, Washington, DC 20210, or at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to:  http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html.\n\n(iii) FOPS shall be installed, tested and maintained in accordance with the Society of Automotive Engineers SAE J231, January 1981, \u201cMinimum Performance Criteria for Falling Object Protective Structures (FOPS)\u201d, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(iv) ROPS and FOPS shall meet the requirements of the Society of Automotive Engineers SAE J397, April 1988, \u201cDeflection Limiting Volume-ROPS/FOPS Laboratory Evaluation\u201d, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(v) Each protective structure shall be of a size that does not impede the operator's normal movements.\n\n(vi) The overhead covering of each cab shall be of solid material and shall extend over the entire canopy.\n\n(vii) Each machine manufactured after August 1, 1996, shall have a cab that is fully enclosed with mesh material with openings no greater than 2 inches (5.08 cm) at its least dimension. The cab may be enclosed with other material(s) where the employer demonstrates such material(s) provides equivalent protection and visibility. Exception: Equivalent visibility is not required for the lower portion of the cab where there are control panels or similar obstructions in the cab, or where visibility is not necessary for safe operation of the machine.\n\n(viii) Each machine manufactured on or before August 1, 1996 shall have a cab which meets the requirements specified in paragraph (f)(3)(vii) or a protective canopy for the operator which meets the following requirements:\n\n(A) The protective canopy shall be constructed to protect the operator from injury due to falling trees, limbs, saplings or branches which might enter the compartment side areas and from snapping winch lines or other objects;\n\n(B) The lower portion of the cab shall be fully enclosed with solid material, except at entrances, to prevent the operator from being injured from obstacles entering the cab;\n\n(C) The upper rear portion of the cab shall be fully enclosed with open mesh material with openings of such size as to reject the entrance of an object larger than 2 inches in diameter. It shall provide maximum rearward visibility; and\n\n(D) Open mesh shall be extended forward as far as possible from the rear corners of the cab sides so as to give the maximum protection against obstacles, branches, etc., entering the cab area.\n\n(ix) The enclosure of the upper portion of each cab shall allow maximum visibility.\n\n(x) When transparent material is used to enclose the upper portion of the cab, it shall be made of safety glass or other material that the employer demonstrates provides equivalent protection and visibility.\n\n(xi) Transparent material shall be kept clean to assure operator visibility.\n\n(xii) Transparent material that may create a hazard for the operator, such as but not limited to, cracked, broken or scratched safety glass, shall be replaced.\n\n(xiii) Deflectors shall be installed in front of each cab to deflect whipping saplings and branches. Deflectors shall be located so as not to impede visibility and access to the cab.\n\n(xiv) The height of each cab entrance shall be at least 52 inches (1.3 meters) from the floor of the cab.\n\n(xv) Each machine operated near cable yarding operations shall be equipped with sheds or roofs of sufficient strength to provide protection from breaking lines.\n\n(4)  Overhead guards.  Each forklift shall be equipped with an overhead guard meeting the requirements of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers, ASME B56.6-1992 (with addenda), \u201cSafety Standard for Rough Terrain Forklift Trucks\u201d, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(5)  Machine access.  (i) Machine access systems, meeting the specifications of the Society of Automotive Engineers, SAE J185, June 1988, \u201cRecommended Practice for Access Systems for Off-Road Machines\u201d, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6, shall be provided for each machine where the operator or any other employee must climb onto the machine to enter the cab or to perform maintenance.\n\n(ii) Each machine cab shall have a second means of egress.\n\n(iii) Walking and working surfaces of each machine and machine work station shall have a slip resistant surface to assure safe footing.\n\n(iv) The walking and working surface of each machine shall be kept free of waste, debris and any other material which might result in fire, slipping, or falling.\n\n(6)  Exhaust systems.  (i) The exhaust pipes on each machine shall be located so exhaust gases are directed away from the operator.\n\n(ii) The exhaust pipes on each machine shall be mounted or guarded to protect each employee from accidental contact.\n\n(iii) The exhaust pipes shall be equipped with spark arresters. Engines equipped with turbochargers do not require spark arresters.\n\n(iv) Each machine muffler provided by the manufacturer, or their equivalent, shall be in place at all times the machine is in operation.\n\n(7)  Brakes.  (i) Service brakes shall be sufficient to stop and hold each machine and its rated load capacity on the slopes over which it is being operated.\n\n(ii) Each machine placed into initial service on or after September 8, 1995 shall also be equipped with: back-up or secondary brakes that are capable of stopping the machine regardless of the direction of travel or whether the engine is running; and parking brakes that are capable of continuously holding a stopped machine stationary.\n\n(8)  Guarding.  (i) Each machine shall be equipped with guarding to protect employees from exposed moving elements, such as but not limited to, shafts, pulleys, belts on conveyors, and gears, in accordance with the requirements of subpart O of part 1910.\n\n(ii) Each machine used for debarking, limbing and chipping shall be equipped with guarding to protect employees from flying wood chunks, logs, chips, bark, limbs and other material in accordance with the requirements of subpart O of part 1910.\n\n(iii) The guarding on each machine shall be in place at all times the machine is in operation.\n\n(g)  Vehicles.  (1) The employer shall assure that each vehicle used to perform any logging operation is maintained in serviceable condition.\n\n(2) The employer shall assure that each vehicle used to perform any logging operation is inspected before initial use during each workshift. Defects or damage shall be repaired or the unserviceable vehicle shall be replaced before work is commenced.\n\n(3) The employer shall assure that operating and maintenance instructions are available in each vehicle. Each vehicle operator and maintenance employee shall comply with the operating and maintenance instructions.\n\n(4) The employer shall assure that each vehicle operator has a valid operator's license for the class of vehicle being operated.\n\n(5) Mounting steps and handholds shall be provided for each vehicle wherever it is necessary to prevent an employee from being injured when entering or leaving the vehicle.\n\n(6) The seats of each vehicle shall be securely fastened.\n\n(7) The requirements of paragraphs (f)(2)(iii), (f)(2)(v), (f)(2)(vii), (f)(2)(x), (f)(2)(xiii), and (f)(7) of this section shall also apply to each vehicle used to transport any employee off public roads or to perform any logging operation, including any vehicle provided by an employee.\n\n(h)  Tree harvesting \u2014(1)  General requirements.  (i) Trees shall not be felled in a manner that may create a hazard for an employee, such as but not limited to, striking a rope, cable, power line, or machine.\n\n(ii) The immediate supervisor shall be consulted when unfamiliar or unusually hazardous conditions necessitate the supervisor's approval before cutting is commenced.\n\n(iii) While manual felling is in progress, no yarding machine shall be operated within two tree lengths of trees being manually felled. Exception: This provision does not apply to yarding machines performing tree pulling operations.\n\n(iv) No employee shall approach a feller closer than two tree lengths of trees being felled until the feller has acknowledged that it is safe to do so, unless the employer demonstrates that a team of employees is necessary to manually fell a particular tree.\n\n(v) No employee shall approach a mechanical felling operation closer than two tree lengths of the trees being felled until the machine operator has acknowledged that it is safe to do so.\n\n(vi) Each danger tree shall be felled, removed or avoided. Each danger tree, including lodged trees and snags, shall be felled or removed using mechanical or other techniques that minimize employee exposure before work is commenced in the area of the danger tree. If the danger tree is not felled or removed, it shall be marked and no work shall be conducted within two tree lengths of the danger tree unless the employer demonstrates that a shorter distance will not create a hazard for an employee.\n\n(vii) Each danger tree shall be carefully checked for signs of loose bark, broken branches and limbs or other damage before they are felled or removed. Accessible loose bark and other damage that may create a hazard for an employee shall be removed or held in place before felling or removing the tree.\n\n(viii) Felling on any slope where rolling or sliding of trees or logs is reasonably foreseeable shall be done uphill from, or on the same level as, previously felled trees.\n\n(ix) Domino felling of trees is prohibited.\n\nThe definition of domino felling does not include the felling of a single danger tree by felling another single tree into it.\n\n(2)  Manual felling.  (i) Before felling is started, the feller shall plan and clear a retreat path. The retreat path shall extend diagonally away from the expected felling line unless the employer demonstrates that such a retreat path poses a greater hazard than an alternate path. Once the backcut has been made the feller shall immediately move a safe distance away from the tree on the retreat path.\n\n(ii) Before each tree is felled, conditions such as, but not limited to, snow and ice accumulation, the wind, the lean of tree, dead limbs, and the location of other trees, shall be evaluated by the feller and precautions taken so a hazard is not created for an employee.\n\n(iii) Each tree shall be checked for accumulations of snow and ice. Accumulations of snow and ice that may create a hazard for an employee shall be removed before felling is commenced in the area or the area shall be avoided.\n\n(iv) When a spring pole or other tree under stress is cut, no employee other than the feller shall be closer than two trees lengths when the stress is released.\n\n(v) An undercut shall be made in each tree being felled unless the employer demonstrates that felling the particular tree without an undercut will not create a hazard for an employee. The undercut shall be of a size so the tree will not split and will fall in the intended direction.\n\n(vi) A backcut shall be made in each tree being felled. The backcut shall leave sufficient hinge wood to hold the tree to the stump during most of its fall so that the hinge is able to guide the tree's fall in the intended direction.\n\n(vii) The backcut shall be above the level of the horizontal facecut in order to provide an adequate platform to prevent kickback. Exception: The backcut may be at or below the horizontal facecut in tree pulling operations.\n\nThis requirement does not apply to open face felling where two angled facecuts rather than a horizontal facecut are used.\n\n(3)  Limbing and bucking.  (i) Limbing and bucking on any slope where rolling or sliding of trees or logs is reasonably foreseeable shall be done on the uphill side of each tree or log.\n\n(ii) Before bucking or limbing wind-thrown trees, precautions shall be taken to prevent the root wad, butt or logs from striking an employee. These precautions include, but are not limited to, chocking or moving the tree to a stable position.\n\n(4)  Chipping (in-woods locations).  (i) Chipper access covers or doors shall not be opened until the drum or disc is at a complete stop.\n\n(ii) Infeed and discharge ports shall be guarded to prevent contact with the disc, knives, or blower blades.\n\n(iii) The chipper shall be shut down and locked out in accordance with the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.147 when an employee performs any servicing or maintenance.\n\n(iv) Detached trailer chippers shall be chocked during usage on any slope where rolling or sliding of the chipper is reasonably foreseeable.\n\n(5)  Yarding.  (i) No log shall be moved until each employee is in the clear.\n\n(ii) Each choker shall be hooked and unhooked from the uphill side or end of the log, unless the employer demonstrates that is it not feasible in the particular situation to hook or unhook the choker from the uphill side. Where the choker is hooked or unhooked from the downhill side or end of the log, the log shall be securely chocked to prevent rolling, sliding or swinging.\n\n(iii) Each choker shall be positioned near the end of the log or tree length.\n\n(iv) Each machine shall be positioned during winching so the machine and winch are operated within their design limits.\n\n(v) No yarding line shall be moved unless the yarding machine operator has clearly received and understood the signal to do so. When in doubt, the yarding machine operator shall repeat the signal and wait for a confirming signal before moving any line.\n\n(vi) No load shall exceed the rated capacity of the pallet, trailer, or other carrier.\n\n(vii) Towed equipment, such as but not limited to, skid pans, pallets, arches, and trailers, shall be attached to each machine or vehicle in such a manner as to allow a full 90 degree turn; to prevent overrunning of the towing machine or vehicle; and to assure that the operator is always in control of the towed equipment.\n\n(viii) The yarding machine or vehicle, including its load, shall be operated with safe clearance from all obstructions that may create a hazard for an employee.\n\n(ix) Each yarded tree shall be placed in a location that does not create a hazard for an employee and an orderly manner so that the trees are stable before bucking or limbing is commenced.\n\n(6)  Loading and unloading.  (i) The transport vehicle shall be positioned to provide working clearance between the vehicle and the deck.\n\n(ii) Only the loading or unloading machine operator and other personnel the employer demonstrates are essential shall be in the loading or unloading work area during this operation.\n\n(iii) No transport vehicle operator shall remain in the cab during loading and unloading if the logs are carried or moved over the truck cab, unless the employer demonstrates that it is necessary for the operator to do so. Where the transport vehicle operator remains in the cab, the employer shall provide operator protection, such as but not limited to, reinforcement of the cab.\n\n(iv) Each log shall be placed on a transport vehicle in an orderly manner and tightly secured.\n\n(v) The load shall be positioned to prevent slippage or loss during handling and transport.\n\n(vi) Each stake and chock which is used to trip loads shall be so constructed that the tripping mechanism is activated on the side opposite the release of the load.\n\n(vii) Each tie down shall be left in place over the peak log to secure all logs until the unloading lines or other protection the employer demonstrates is equivalent has been put in place. A stake of sufficient strength to withstand the forces of shifting or moving logs, shall be considered equivalent protection provided that the logs are not loaded higher than the stake.\n\n(viii) Each tie down shall be released only from the side on which the unloading machine operates, except as follows:\n\n(A) When the tie down is released by a remote control device; and\n\n(B) When the employee making the release is protected by racks, stanchions or other protection the employer demonstrates is capable of withstanding the force of the logs.\n\n(7)  Transport.  The transport vehicle operator shall assure that each tie down is tight before transporting the load. While enroute, the operator shall check and tighten the tie downs whenever there is reason to believe that the tie downs have loosened or the load has shifted.\n\n(8)  Storage.  Each deck shall be constructed and located so it is stable and provides each employee with enough room to safely move and work in the area.\n\n(i)  Training.  (1) The employer shall provide training for each employee, including supervisors, at no cost to the employee.\n\n(2)  Frequency.  Training shall be provided as follows:\n\n(i) As soon as possible but not later than the effective date of this section for initial training for each current and new employee;\n\n(ii) Prior to initial assignment for each new employee;\n\n(iii) Whenever the employee is assigned new work tasks, tools, equipment, machines or vehicles; and\n\n(iv) Whenever an employee demonstrates unsafe job performance.\n\n(3)  Content.  At a minimum, training shall consist of the following elements:\n\n(i) Safe performance of assigned work tasks;\n\n(ii) Safe use, operation and maintenance of tools, machines and vehicles the employee uses or operates, including emphasis on understanding and following the manufacturer's operating and maintenance instructions, warnings and precautions;\n\n(iii) Recognition of safety and health hazards associated with the employee's specific work tasks, including the use of measures and work practices to prevent or control those hazards;\n\n(iv) Recognition, prevention and control of other safety and health hazards in the logging industry;\n\n(v) Procedures, practices and requirements of the employer's work site; and\n\n(vi) The requirements of this standard.\n\n(4) Training of an employee due to unsafe job performance, or assignment of new work tasks, tools, equipment, machines, or vehicles; may be limited to those elements in paragraph (i)(3) of this section which are relevant to the circumstances giving rise to the need for training.\n\n(5)  Portability of training.  (i) Each current employee who has received training in the particular elements specified in paragraph (i)(3) of this section shall not be required to be retrained in those elements.\n\n(ii) Each new employee who has received training in the particular elements specified in paragraph (i)(3) of this section shall not be required to be retrained in those elements prior to initial assignment.\n\n(iii) The employer shall train each current and new employee in those elements for which the employee has not received training.\n\n(iv) The employer is responsible for ensuring that each current and new employee can properly and safely perform the work tasks and operate the tools, equipment, machines, and vehicles used in their job.\n\n(6) Each new employee and each employee who is required to be trained as specified in paragraph (i)(2) of this section, shall work under the close supervision of a designated person until the employee demonstrates to the employer the ability to safely perform their new duties independently.\n\n(7)  First-aid training.  (i) The employer shall assure that each employee, including supervisors, receives or has received first-aid and CPR training meeting at least the requirements specified in appendix B.\n\n(ii) The employer shall assure that each employee's first-aid and CPR training and/or certificate of training remain current.\n\n(8) All training shall be conducted by a designated person.\n\n(9) The employer shall assure that all training required by this section is presented in a manner that the employee is able to understand. The employer shall assure that all training materials used are appropriate in content and vocabulary to the educational level, literacy, and language skills of the employees being trained.\n\n(10)  Certification of training.  (i) The employer shall verify compliance with paragraph (i) of this section by preparing a written certification record. The written certification record shall contain the name or other identity of the employee trained, the date(s) of the training, and the signature of the person who conducted the training or the signature of the employer. If the employer relies on training conducted prior to the employee's hiring or completed prior to the effective date of this section, the certification record shall indicate the date the employer determined the prior training was adequate.\n\n(ii) The most recent training certification shall be maintained.\n\n(11)  Safety and health meetings.  The employer shall hold safety and health meetings as necessary and at least each month for each employee. Safety and health meetings may be conducted individually, in crew meetings, in larger groups, or as part of other staff meetings.\n\n(j)  Appendices.  Appendices A and B of this section are mandatory. The information contained in appendix C of this section is informational and is not intended to create any additional obligations not otherwise imposed or to detract from existing regulations.\n\nIn the  Federal Register  of August 9, 1995, OSHA extended the stay of the following paragraphs of \u00a7 1910.266 until September 8, 1995. The remaining requirements of \u00a7 1910.266, which became effective on February 9, 1995, are unaffected by the extension of the partial stay:\n\n1. (d)(1)(v)\u2014insofar as it requires foot protection to be chain-saw resistant.\n\n2. (d)(1)(vii)\u2014insofar as it required face protection.\n\n3. (d)(2)(iii).\n\n4. (f)(2)(iv).\n\n5. (f)(2)(xi).\n\n6. (f)(3)(ii).\n\n7. (f)(3)(vii).\n\n8. (f)(3)(viii).\n\n9. (f)(7)(ii)\u2014insofar as it requires parking brakes to be able to stop a moving machine.\n\n10. (g)(1) and (g)(2) insofar as they require inspection and maintenance of employee-owned vehicles.\n\n11. (h)(2)(vii)\u2014insofar as it precludes backcuts at the level of the horizontal cut of the undercut when the Humboldt cutting method is used.\n\nAppendix A to \u00a7 1910.266\u2014First-Aid Kits (Mandatory)\n \n The following list sets forth the minimally acceptable number and type of first-aid supplies for first-aid kits required under paragraph (d)(2) of the logging standard. The contents of the first-aid kit listed should be adequate for small work sites, consisting of approximately two to three employees. When larger operations or multiple operations are being conducted at the same location, additional first-aid kits should be provided at the work site or additional quantities of supplies should be included in the first-aid kits:\n \n 1. Gauze pads (at least 4 \u00d7 4 inches).\n \n 2. Two large gauze pads (at least 8 \u00d7 10 inches).\n \n 3. Box adhesive bandages (band-aids).\n \n 4. One package gauze roller bandage at least 2 inches wide.\n \n 5. Two triangular bandages.\n \n 6. Wound cleaning agent such as sealed moistened towelettes.\n \n 7. Scissors.\n \n 8. At least one blanket.\n \n 9. Tweezers.\n \n 10. Adhesive tape.\n \n 11. Latex gloves.\n \n 12. Resuscitation equipment such as resuscitation bag, airway, or pocket mask.\n \n 13. Two elastic wraps.\n \n 14. Splint.\n \n 15. Directions for requesting emergency assistance.\n\nThe following list sets forth the minimally acceptable number and type of first-aid supplies for first-aid kits required under paragraph (d)(2) of the logging standard. The contents of the first-aid kit listed should be adequate for small work sites, consisting of approximately two to three employees. When larger operations or multiple operations are being conducted at the same location, additional first-aid kits should be provided at the work site or additional quantities of supplies should be included in the first-aid kits:\n\n1. Gauze pads (at least 4 \u00d7 4 inches).\n\n2. Two large gauze pads (at least 8 \u00d7 10 inches).\n\n3. Box adhesive bandages (band-aids).\n\n4. One package gauze roller bandage at least 2 inches wide.\n\n5. Two triangular bandages.\n\n6. Wound cleaning agent such as sealed moistened towelettes.\n\n7. Scissors.\n\n8. At least one blanket.\n\n9. Tweezers.\n\n10. Adhesive tape.\n\n11. Latex gloves.\n\n12. Resuscitation equipment such as resuscitation bag, airway, or pocket mask.\n\n13. Two elastic wraps.\n\n14. Splint.\n\n15. Directions for requesting emergency assistance.\n\nAppendix B to \u00a7 1910.266\u2014First-aid and CPR Training (Mandatory)\n \n The following is deemed to be the minimal acceptable first-aid and CPR training program for employees engaged in logging activities.\n \n First-aid and CPR training shall be conducted using the conventional methods of training such as lecture, demonstration, practical exercise and examination (both written and practical). The length of training must be sufficient to assure that trainees understand the concepts of first aid and can demonstrate their ability to perform the various procedures contained in the outline below.\n \n At a minimum, first-aid and CPR training shall consist of the following:\n \n 1. The definition of first aid.\n \n 2. Legal issues of applying first aid (Good Samaritan Laws).\n \n 3. Basic anatomy.\n \n 4. Patient assessment and first aid for the following:\n \n a. Respiratory arrest.\n \n b. Cardiac arrest.\n \n c. Hemorrhage.\n \n d. Lacerations/abrasions.\n \n e. Amputations.\n \n f. Musculoskeletal injuries.\n \n g. Shock.\n \n h. Eye injuries.\n \n i. Burns.\n \n j. Loss of consciousness.\n \n k. Extreme temperature exposure (hypothermia/hyperthermia)\n \n l. Paralysis\n \n m. Poisoning.\n \n n. Loss of mental functioning (psychosis/hallucinations, etc.). Artificial ventilation.\n \n o. Drug overdose.\n \n 5. CPR.\n \n 6. Application of dressings and slings.\n \n 7. Treatment of strains, sprains, and fractures.\n \n 8. Immobilization of injured persons.\n \n 9. Handling and transporting injured persons.\n \n 10. Treatment of bites, stings, or contact with poisonous plants or animals.\n\nThe following is deemed to be the minimal acceptable first-aid and CPR training program for employees engaged in logging activities.\n\nFirst-aid and CPR training shall be conducted using the conventional methods of training such as lecture, demonstration, practical exercise and examination (both written and practical). The length of training must be sufficient to assure that trainees understand the concepts of first aid and can demonstrate their ability to perform the various procedures contained in the outline below.\n\nAt a minimum, first-aid and CPR training shall consist of the following:\n\n1. The definition of first aid.\n\n2. Legal issues of applying first aid (Good Samaritan Laws).\n\n3. Basic anatomy.\n\n4. Patient assessment and first aid for the following:\n\na. Respiratory arrest.\n\nb. Cardiac arrest.\n\nc. Hemorrhage.\n\nd. Lacerations/abrasions.\n\ne. Amputations.\n\nf. Musculoskeletal injuries.\n\ng. Shock.\n\nh. Eye injuries.\n\ni. Burns.\n\nj. Loss of consciousness.\n\nk. Extreme temperature exposure (hypothermia/hyperthermia)\n\nl. Paralysis\n\nm. Poisoning.\n\nn. Loss of mental functioning (psychosis/hallucinations, etc.). Artificial ventilation.\n\no. Drug overdose.\n\n5. CPR.\n\n6. Application of dressings and slings.\n\n7. Treatment of strains, sprains, and fractures.\n\n8. Immobilization of injured persons.\n\n9. Handling and transporting injured persons.\n\n10. Treatment of bites, stings, or contact with poisonous plants or animals.\n\nAppendix C to \u00a7 1910.266\u2014Comparable ISO Standards (Non-mandatory)\n \n The following International Labor Organization (ISO) standards are comparable to the corresponding Society of Automotive Engineers (Standards that are referenced in this standard.)\n \n Utilization of the ISO standards in lieu of the corresponding SAE standards should result in a machine that meets the OSHA standard.\n \n SAE standard\n ISO standard\n Subject\n SAE J1040 ISO 3471-1 Performance Criteria for Rollover Protective Structures (ROPS) for Construction, Earthmoving, Forestry and Mining Machines.\n SAE J397 ISO 3164 Deflection Limiting Volume\u2014ROPS/FOPS Laboratory Evaluation.\n SAE J231 ISO 3449 Minimum Performance Criteria for Falling Object Protective Structures (FOPS).\n SAE J386 ISO 6683 Operator Restraint Systems for Off-Road Work Machines.\n SAE J185 ISO 2897 Access Systems for Off-Road Machines.\n\nThe following International Labor Organization (ISO) standards are comparable to the corresponding Society of Automotive Engineers (Standards that are referenced in this standard.)\n\nUtilization of the ISO standards in lieu of the corresponding SAE standards should result in a machine that meets the OSHA standard."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.18.37.7", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "R", "Subpart R\u2014Special Industries", "", "\u00a7 1910.268 Telecommunications.", "OSHA", "", "", "[40 FR 13441, Mar. 26, 1975, as amended at 43 FR 49751, Oct. 24, 1978; 47 FR 14706, Apr. 6, 1982; 52 FR 36387, Sept. 28, 1987; 54 FR 24334, June 7, 1989; 61 FR 9242, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 33467, June 18, 1998; 67 FR 67965, Nov. 7, 2002; 69 FR 31882, June 8, 2004; 70 FR 1141, Jan. 5, 2005; 81 FR 83006, Nov. 18, 2016]", "(a)  Application.  (1) This section sets forth safety and health standards that apply to the work conditions, practices, means, methods, operations, installations and processes performed at telecommunications centers and at telecommunications field installations, which are located outdoors or in building spaces used for such field installations.  Center  work includes the installation, operation, maintenance, rearrangement, and removal of communications equipment and other associated equipment in telecommunications switching centers.  Field  work includes the installation, operation, maintenance, rearrangement, and removal of conductors and other equipment used for signal or communication service, and of their supporting or containing structures, overhead or underground, on public or private rights of way, including buildings or other structures.\n\n(2) These standards do not apply: (i) To construction work, as defined in \u00a7 1910.12, nor (ii) to installations under the exclusive control of electric utilities used for the purpose of communications or metering, or for generation, control, transformation, transmission, and distribution of electric energy, which are located in buildings used exclusively by the electric utilities for such purposes, or located outdoors on property owned or leased by the electric utilities or on public highways, streets, roads, etc., or outdoors by established rights on private property.\n\n(3) Operations or conditions not specifically covered by this section are subject to all the applicable standards contained in this part 1910. See \u00a7 1910.5(c). Operations which involve construction work, as defined in \u00a7 1910.12 are subject to all the applicable standards contained in part 1926 of this chapter.\n\n(b)  General \u2014(1)  Buildings containing telecommunications centers \u2014(i)  Illumination.  Lighting in telecommunication centers shall be provided in an adequate amount such that continuing work operations, routine observations, and the passage of employees can be carried out in a safe and healthful manner. Certain specific tasks in centers, such as splicing cable and the maintenance and repair of equipment frame lineups, may require a higher level of illumination. In such cases, the employer shall install permanent lighting or portable supplemental lighting to attain a higher level of illumination shall be provided as needed to permit safe performance of the required task.\n\n(ii)  Working surfaces.  Guard rails and toe boards may be omitted on distribution frame mezzanine platforms to permit access to equipment. This exemption applies only on the side or sides of the platform facing the frames and only on those portions of the platform adjacent to equipped frames.\n\n(iii)  Working spaces.  Maintenance aisles, or wiring aisles, between equipment frame lineups are working spaces and are not an exit route for purposes of 29 CFR 1910.34.\n\n(iv)  Special doors.  When blastproof or power actuated doors are installed in specially designed hardsite security buildings and spaces, they shall be designed and installed so that they can be used as a means of egress in emergencies.\n\n(v)  Equipment, machinery and machine guarding.  When power plant machinery in telecommunications centers is operated with commutators and couplings uncovered, the adjacent housing shall be clearly marked to alert personnel to the rotating machinery.\n\n(2)  Battery handling.  (i) Eye protection devices which provide side as well as frontal eye protection for employees shall be provided when measuring storage battery specific gravity or handling electrolyte, and the employer shall ensure that such devices are used by the employees. The employer shall also ensure that acid resistant gloves and aprons shall be worn for protection against spattering. Facilities for quick drenching or flushing of the eyes and body shall be provided unless the storage batteries are of the enclosed type and equipped with explosion proof vents, in which case sealed water rinse or neutralizing packs may be substituted for the quick drenching or flushing facilities. Employees assigned to work with storage batteries shall be instructed in emergency procedures such as dealing with accidental acid spills.\n\n(ii) Electrolyte (acid or base, and distilled water) for battery cells shall be mixed in a well ventilated room. Acid or base shall be poured gradually, while stirring, into the water. Water shall never be poured into concentrated (greater than 75 percent) acid solutions. Electrolyte shall never be placed in metal containers nor stirred with metal objects.\n\n(iii) When taking specific gravity readings, the open end of the hydrometer shall be covered with an acid resistant material while moving it from cell to cell to avoid splashing or throwing the electrolyte.\n\n(3) Employers must provide employees with readily accessible, adequate, and appropriate first aid supplies. A non-mandatory example of appropriate supplies is listed in appendix A to 29 CFR 1910.151.\n\n(4)  Hazardous materials.  Highway mobile vehicles and trailers stored in garages in accordance with \u00a7 1910.110 may be equipped to carry more than one LP-gas container, but the total capacity of LP-gas containers per work vehicle stored in garages shall not exceed 100 pounds of LP-gas. All container valves shall be closed when not in use.\n\n(5)  Compressed gas.  When using or transporting nitrogen cylinders in a horizontal position, special compartments, racks, or adequate blocking shall be provided to prevent cylinder movement. Regulators shall be removed or guarded before a cylinder is transported.\n\n(6)  Support structures.  No employee, or any material or equipment, may be supported or permitted to be supported on any portion of a pole structure, platform, ladder, walkway or other elevated structure or aerial device unless the employer ensures that the support structure is first inspected by a competent person and it is determined to be adequately strong, in good working condition and properly secured in place.\n\n(7)  Approach distances to exposed energized overhead power lines and parts.  The employer shall ensure that no employee approaches or takes any conductive object closer to any electrically energized overhead power lines and parts than prescribed in Table R-2, unless:\n\n(i) The employee is insulated or guarded from the energized parts (insulating gloves rated for the voltage involved shall be considered adequate insulation), or\n\n(ii) The energized parts are insulated or guarded from the employee and any other conductive object at a different potential, or\n\n(iii) The power conductors and equipment are deenergized and grounded.\n\nTable R-2\u2014Approach Distances to Exposed Energized Overhead Power Lines and Parts\n\n1  Avoid contact.\n\n(8)  Illumination of field work.  Whenever natural light is insufficient to adequately illuminate the worksite, artificial illumination shall be provided to enable the employee to perform the work safely.\n\n(c)  Training.  Employers shall provide training in the various precautions and safe practices described in this section and shall insure that employees do not engage in the activities to which this section applies until such employees have received proper training in the various precautions and safe practices required by this section. However, where the employer can demonstrate that an employee is already trained in the precautions and safe practices required by this section prior to his employment, training need not be provided to that employee in accordance with this section. Where training is required, it shall consist of on-the-job training or classroom-type training or a combination of both. The employer shall certify that employees have been trained by preparing a certification record which includes the identity of the person trained, the signature of the employer or the person who conducted the training, and the date the training was completed. The certification record shall be prepared at the completion of training and shall be maintained on file for the duration of the employee's employment. The certification record shall be made available upon request to the Assistant Secretary for Occupational Safety and Health. Such training shall, where appropriate, include the following subjects:\n\n(1) Recognition and avoidance of dangers relating to encounters with harmful substances and animal, insect, or plant life;\n\n(2) Procedures to be followed in emergency situations; and,\n\n(3) First aid training, including instruction in artificial respiration.\n\n(d)  Employee protection in public work areas.  (1) Before work is begun in the vicinity of vehicular or pedestrian traffic which may endanger employees, warning signs and/or flags or other traffic control devices shall be placed conspicuously to alert and channel approaching traffic. Where further protection is needed, barriers shall be utilized. At night, warning lights shall be prominently displayed, and excavated areas shall be enclosed with protective barricades.\n\n(2) If work exposes energized or moving parts that are normally protected, danger signs shall be displayed and barricades erected, as necessary, to warn other personnel in the area.\n\n(3) The employer shall insure that an employee finding any crossed or fallen wires which create or may create a hazardous situation at the work area: (i) Remains on guard or adopts other adequate means to warn other employees of the danger and (ii) has the proper authority notified at the earliest practical moment.\n\n(e)  Tools and personal protective equipment\u2014Generally.  Personal protective equipment, protective devices and special tools needed for the work of employees shall be provided and the employer shall ensure that they are used by employees. Before each day's use the employer shall ensure that these personal protective devices, tools, and equipment are carefully inspected by a competent person to ascertain that they are in good condition.\n\n(f)  Rubber insulating equipment.  (1) Rubber insulating equipment designed for the voltage levels to be encountered shall be provided and the employer shall ensure that they are used by employees as required by this section. The requirements of \u00a7 1910.137, Electrical Protective Equipment, shall be followed except for Table I-6.\n\n(2) The employer is responsible for the periodic retesting of all insulating gloves, blankets, and other rubber insulating equipment. This retesting shall be electrical, visual and mechanical. The following maximum retesting intervals shall apply:\n\n(3) Gloves and blankets shall be marked to indicate compliance with the retest schedule, and shall be marked with the date the next test is due. Gloves found to be defective in the field or by the tests set forth in paragraph (f)(2) of this section shall be destroyed by cutting them open from the finger to the gauntlet.\n\n(g)  Personal climbing equipment \u2014(1)  General.  A positioning system or a personal fall arrest system shall be provided and the employer shall ensure their use when work is performed at positions more than 4 feet (1.2 m) above the ground, on poles, and on towers, except as provided in paragraphs (n)(7) and (8) of this section. These systems shall meet the applicable requirements in subpart I of this part. The employer shall ensure that all climbing equipment is inspected before each day's use to determine that it is in safe working condition.\n\n(2)  Pole climbers.  (i) Pole climbers may not be used if the gaffs are less than 1\n 1/4  inches in length as measured on the underside of the gaff. The gaffs of pole climbers shall be covered with safety caps when not being used for their intended use.\n\n(ii) The employer shall ensure that pole climbers are inspected by a competent person for the following conditions: Fractured or cracked gaffs or leg irons, loose or dull gaffs, broken straps or buckles. If any of these conditions exist, the defect shall be corrected before the climbers are used.\n\n(iii) Pole climbers shall be inspected as required in this paragraph (g)(3) before each day's use and a gaff cut-out test performed at least weekly when in use.\n\n(iv) Pole climbers may not be worn when:\n\n(A) Working in trees (specifically designed tree climbers shall be used for tree climbing),\n\n(B) Working on ladders,\n\n(C) Working in an aerial lift,\n\n(D) Driving a vehicle, nor\n\n(E) Walking on rocky, hard, frozen, brushy or hilly terrain.\n\n(h)  Ladders.  Ladders, step bolts, and manhole steps shall meet the applicable requirements in subpart D of this part.\n\n(i)  Other tools and personal protective equipment \u2014(1)  Head protection.  Head protection meeting the requirements of ANSI Z89.2-1971, \u201cSafety Requirements for Industrial Protective Helmets for Electrical Workers, Class B\u201d shall be provided whenever there is exposure to possible high voltage electrical contact, and the employer shall ensure that the head protection is used by employees. ANSI Z89.2-1971 is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(2)  Eye protection.  Eye protection meeting the requirements of \u00a7 1910.133 (a)(2) thru (a)(6) shall be provided and the employer shall ensure its use by employees where foreign objects may enter the eyes due to work operations such as but not limited to:\n\n(i) Drilling or chipping stone, brick or masonry, breaking concrete or pavement, etc. by hand tools (sledgehammer, etc.) or power tools such as pneumatic drills or hammers;\n\n(ii) Working on or around high speed emery or other grinding wheels unprotected by guards;\n\n(iii) Cutting or chipping terra cotta ducts, tile, etc.;\n\n(iv) Working under motor vehicles requiring hammering;\n\n(v) Cleaning operations using compressed air, steam, or sand blast;\n\n(vi) Acetylene welding or similar operations where sparks are thrown off;\n\n(vii) Using powder actuated stud drivers;\n\n(viii) Tree pruning or cutting underbrush;\n\n(ix) Handling battery cells and solutions, such as taking battery readings with a hydrometer and thermometer;\n\n(x) Removing or rearranging strand or open wire; and\n\n(xi) Performing lead sleeve wiping and while soldering.\n\n(3)  Tent heaters.  Flame-type heaters may not be used within ground tents or on platforms within aerial tents unless:\n\n(i) The tent covers are constructed of fire resistant materials, and\n\n(ii) Adequate ventilation is provided to maintain safe oxygen levels and avoid harmful buildup of combustion products and combustible gases.\n\n(4)  Torches.  Torches may be used on aerial splicing platforms or in buckets enclosed by tents provided the tent material is constructed of fire resistant material and the torch is turned off when not in actual use. Aerial tents shall be adequately ventilated while the torch is in operation.\n\n(5)  Portable power equipment.  Nominal 120V, or less, portable generators used for providing power at work locations do not require grounding if the output circuit is completely isolated from the frame of the unit.\n\n(6)  Vehicle-mounted utility generators.  Vehicle-mounted utility generators used for providing nominal 240V AC or less for powering portable tools and equipment need not be grounded to earth if all of the following conditions are met:\n\n(i) One side of the voltage source is solidly strapped to the metallic structure of the vehicle;\n\n(ii) Grounding-type outlets are used, with a \u201cgrounding\u201d conductor between the outlet grounding terminal and the side of the voltage source that is strapped to the vehicle;\n\n(iii) All metallic encased tools and equipment that are powered from this system are equipped with three-wire cords and grounding-type attachment plugs, except as designated in paragraph (i)(7) of this section.\n\n(7)  Portable lights, tools, and appliances.  Portable lights, tools, and appliances having noncurrent-carrying external metal housing may be used with power equipment described in paragraph (i)(5) of this section without an equipment grounding conductor. When operated from commercial power such metal parts of these devices shall be grounded, unless these tools or appliances are protected by a system of double insulation, or its equivalent. Where such a system is employed, the equipment shall be distinctively marked to indicate double insulation.\n\n(8)  Soldering devices.  Grounding shall be omitted when using soldering irons, guns or wire-wrap tools on telecommunications circuits.\n\n(9)  Lead work.  The wiping of lead joints using melted solder, gas fueled torches, soldering irons or other appropriate heating devices, and the soldering of wires or other electrical connections do not constitute the welding, cutting and brazing described in subpart Q of this part. When operated from commercial power the metal housing of electric solder pots shall be grounded. Electric solder pots may be used with the power equipment described in paragraph (i)(5) of this section without a grounding conductor. The employer shall ensure that wiping gloves or cloths and eye protection are used in lead wiping operations. A drip pan to catch hot lead drippings shall also be provided and used.\n\n(j)  Vehicle-mounted material handling devices and other mechanical equipment \u2014(1)  General.  (i) The employer shall ensure that visual inspections are made of the equipment by a competent person each day the equipment is to be used to ascertain that it is in good condition.\n\n(ii) The employer shall ensure that tests shall be made at the beginning of each shift by a competent person to insure the vehicle brakes and operating systems are in proper working condition.\n\n(2)  Scrapers, loaders, dozers, graders and tractors.  (i) All rubber-tired, self-propelled scrapers, rubber-tired front end loaders, rubber-tired dozers, agricultural and industrial tractors, crawler tractors, crawler-type loaders, and motor graders, with or without attachments, that are used in telecommunications work shall have rollover protective structures that meet the requirements of subpart W of part 1926 of this Title.\n\n(ii) Eye protection shall be provided and the employer shall ensure that it is used by employees when working in areas where flying material is generated.\n\n(3)  Vehicle-mounted elevating and rotating work platforms.  These devices shall not be operated with any conductive part of the equipment closer to exposed energized power lines than the clearances set forth in Table R-2 of this section.\n\n(4)  Derrick trucks and similar equipment.  (i) This equipment shall not be operated with any conductive part of the equipment closer to exposed energized power lines than the clearances set forth in Table R-2 of this section.\n\n(ii) When derricks are used to handle poles near energized power conductors, these operations shall comply with the requirements contained in paragraphs (b)(7) and (n)(11) of this section.\n\n(iii) Moving parts of equipment and machinery carried on or mounted on telecommunications line trucks shall be guarded. This may be done with barricades as specified in paragraph (d)(2) of this section.\n\n(iv) Derricks and the operation of derricks shall comply with the following requirements: (A) Manufacturer's specifications, load ratings and instructions for derrick operation shall be strictly observed.\n\n(B) Rated load capacities and instructions related to derrick operation shall be conspicuously posted on a permanent weather-resistant plate or decal in a location on the derrick that is plainly visible to the derrick operator.\n\n(C) Prior to derrick operation the parking brake must be set and the stabilizers extended if the vehicle is so equipped. When the vehicle is situated on a grade, at least two wheels must be chocked on the downgrade side.\n\n(D) Only persons trained in the operation of the derrick shall be permitted to operate the derrick.\n\n(E) Hand signals to derrick operators shall be those prescribed by ANSI B30.6-1969, \u201cSafety Code for Derricks\u201d, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6.\n\n(F) The employer shall ensure that the derrick and its associated equipment are inspected by a competent person at intervals set by the manufacturer but in no case less than once per year. Records shall be maintained including the dates of inspections, and necessary repairs made, if corrective action was required.\n\n(G) Modifications or additions to the derrick and its associated equipment that alter its capacity or affect its safe operation shall be made only with written certification from the manufacturer, or other equivalent entity, such as a nationally recognized testing laboratory, that the modification results in the equipment being safe for its intended use. Such changes shall require the changing and posting of revised capacity and instruction decals or plates. These new ratings or limitations shall be as provided by the manufacturer or other equivalent entity.\n\n(H) Wire rope used with derricks shall be of improved plow steel or equivalent. Wire rope safety factors shall be in accordance with American National Standards Institute B30.6-1969.\n\n(I) Wire rope shall be taken out of service, or the defective portion removed, when any of the following conditions exist: ( 1 ) The rope strength has been significantly reduced due to corrosion, pitting, or excessive heat, or\n\n( 2 ) The thickness of the outer wires of the rope has been reduced to two-thirds or less of the original thickness, or\n\n( 3 ) There are more than six broken wires in any one rope lay, or\n\n( 4 ) There is excessive permanent distortion caused by kinking, crushing, or severe twisting of the rope.\n\n(k)  Materials handling and storage \u2014(1)  Poles.  When working with poles in piles or stacks, work shall be performed from the ends of the poles as much as possible, and precautions shall be taken for the safety of employees at the other end of the pole. During pole hauling operations, all loads shall be secured to prevent displacement. Lights, reflectors and/or flags shall be displayed on the end and sides of the load as necessary. The requirements for installation, removal, or other handling of poles in pole lines are prescribed in paragraph (n) of this section which pertains to overhead lines. In the case of hoisting machinery equipped with a positive stop loadholding device, it shall be permissible for the operator to leave his position at the controls (while a load is suspended) for the sole purpose of assisting in positioning the load prior to landing it. Prior to unloading steel, poles, crossarms, and similar material, the load shall be thoroughly examined to ascertain that the load has not shifted, that binders or stakes have not broken, and that the load is not otherwise hazardous to employees.\n\n(2)  Cable reels.  Cable reels in storage shall be checked or otherwise restrained when there is a possibility that they might accidentally roll from position.\n\n(l)  Cable fault locating and testing.  (1) Employees involved in using high voltages to locate trouble or test cables shall be instructed in the precautions necessary for their own safety and the safety of other employees.\n\n(2) Before the voltage is applied, cable conductors shall be isolated to the extent practicable. Employees shall be warned, by such techniques as briefing and tagging at all affected locations, to stay clear while the voltage is applied.\n\n(m)  Grounding for employee protection\u2014pole lines \u2014(1)  Power conductors.  Electric power conductors and equipment shall be considered as energized unless the employee can visually determine that they are bonded to one of the grounds listed in paragraph (m)(4) of this section.\n\n(2)  Nonworking open wire.  Nonworking open wire communications lines shall be bonded to one of the grounds listed in paragraph (m)(4) of this section.\n\n(3)  Vertical power conduit, power ground wires and street light fixtures.  (i) Metal power conduit on joint use poles, exposed vertical power ground wires, and street light fixtures which are below communications attachments or less than 20 inches above these attachments, shall be considered energized and shall be tested for voltage unless the employee can visually determine that they are bonded to the communications suspension strand or cable sheath.\n\n(ii) If no hazardous voltage is shown by the voltage test, a temporary bond shall be placed between such street light fixture, exposed vertical power grounding conductor, or metallic power conduit and the communications cable strand. Temporary bonds used for this purpose shall have sufficient conductivity to carry at least 500 amperes for a period of one second without fusing.\n\n(4)  Suitable protective grounding.  Acceptable grounds for protective grounding are as follows:\n\n(i) A vertical ground wire which has been tested, found safe, and is connected to a power system multigrounded neutral or the grounded neutral of a power secondary system where there are at least three services connected;\n\n(ii) Communications cable sheath or shield and its supporting strand where the sheath or shield is:\n\n(A) Bonded to an underground or buried cable which is connected to a central office ground, or\n\n(B) Bonded to an underground metallic piping system, or\n\n(C) Bonded to a power system multigrounded neutral or grounded neutral of a power secondary system which has at least three services connected;\n\n(iii) Guys which are bonded to the grounds specified in paragraphs (m)(4) (i) and (ii) of this section and which have continuity uninterrupted by an insulator; and\n\n(iv) If all of the preceding grounds are not available, arrays of driven ground rods where the resultant resistance to ground will be low enough to eliminate danger to personnel or permit prompt operation of protective devices.\n\n(5)  Attaching and removing temporary bonds.  When attaching grounds (bonds), the first attachment shall be made to the protective ground. When removing bonds, the connection to the line or equipment shall be removed first. Insulating gloves shall be worn during these operations.\n\n(6)  Temporary grounding of suspension strand.  (i) The suspension strand shall be grounded to the existing grounds listed in paragraph (m)(4) of this section when being placed on jointly used poles or during thunderstorm activity.\n\n(ii) Where power crossings are encountered on nonjoint lines, the strand shall be bonded to an existing ground listed in paragraph (m)(4) of this section as close as possible to the crossing. This bonding is not required where crossings are made on a common crossing pole unless there is an upward change in grade at the pole.\n\n(iii) Where roller-type bonds are used, they shall be restrained so as to avoid stressing the electrical connections.\n\n(iv) Bonds between the suspension strand and the existing ground shall be at least No. 6AWG copper.\n\n(v) Temporary bonds shall be left in place until the strand has been tensioned, dead-ended, and permanently grounded.\n\n(vi) The requirements of paragraphs (m)(6)(i) through (m)(6)(v) of this section do not apply to the installation of insulated strand.\n\n(7)  Antenna work-radio transmitting stations 3-30 MHZ.  (i) Prior to grounding a radio transmitting station antenna, the employer shall insure that the rigger in charge:\n\n(A) Prepares a danger tag signed with his signature,\n\n(B) Requests the transmitting technician to shutdown the transmitter and to ground the antenna with its grounding switch,\n\n(C) Is notified by the transmitting technician that the transmitter has been shutdown, and\n\n(D) Tags the antenna ground switch personally in the presence of the transmitting technician after the antenna has been grounded by the transmitting technician.\n\n(ii) Power shall not be applied to the antenna, nor shall the grounding switch be opened under any circumstances while the tag is affixed.\n\n(iii)(A) Where no grounding switches are provided, grounding sticks shall be used, one on each side of line, and tags shall be placed on the grounding sticks, antenna switch, or plate power switch in a conspicuous place.\n\n(B) When necessary to further reduce excessive radio frequency pickup, ground sticks or short circuits shall be placed directly on the transmission lines near the transmitter in addition to the regular grounding switches.\n\n(C) In other cases, the antenna lines may be disconnected from ground and the transmitter to reduce pickup at the point in the field.\n\n(iv) All radio frequency line wires shall be tested for pickup with an insulated probe before they are handled either with bare hands or with metal tools.\n\n(v) The employer shall insure that the transmitting technician warn the riggers about adjacent lines which are, or may become energized.\n\n(vi) The employer shall insure that when antenna work has been completed, the rigger in charge of the job returns to the transmitter, notifies the transmitting technician in charge that work has been completed, and personally removes the tag from the antenna ground switch.\n\n(n)  Overhead lines \u2014(1)  Handling suspension strand.  (i) The employer shall insure that when handling cable suspension strand which is being installed on poles carrying exposed energized power conductors, employees shall wear insulating gloves and shall avoid body contact with the strand until after it has been tensioned, dead-ended and permanently grounded.\n\n(ii) The strand shall be restrained against upward movement during installation:\n\n(A) On joint-use poles, where there is an upward change in grade at the pole, and\n\n(B) On non-joint-use poles, where the line croses under energized power conductors.\n\n(2)  Need for testing wood poles.  Unless temporary guys or braces are attached, the following poles shall be tested in accordance with paragraph (n)(3) of this section and determined to be safe before employees are permitted to climb them:\n\n(i) Dead-end poles, except properly braced or guyed \u201cY\u201d or \u201cT\u201d cable junction poles,\n\n(ii) Straight line poles which are not storm guyed and where adjacent span lengths exceed 165 feet,\n\n(iii) Poles at which there is a downward change in grade and which are not guyed or braced corner poles or cable junction poles,\n\n(iv) Poles which support only telephone drop wire, and\n\n(v) Poles which carry less than ten communication line wires. On joint use poles, one power line wire shall be considered as two communication wires for purposes of this paragraph (n)(2)(v).\n\n(3)  Methods for testing wood poles.  One of the following methods or an equivalent method shall be used for testing wood poles:\n\n(i) Rap the pole sharply with a hammer weighing about 3 pounds, starting near the ground line and continuing upwards circumferentially around the pole to a height of approximately 6 feet. The hammer will produce a clear sound and rebound sharply when striking sound wood. Decay pockets will be indicated by a dull sound and/or a less pronounced hammer rebound. When decay pockets are indicated, the pole shall be considered unsafe. Also, prod the pole as near the ground line as possible using a pole prod or a screwdriver with a blade at least 5 inches long. If substantial decay is encountered, the pole shall be considered unsafe.\n\n(ii) Apply a horizontal force to the pole and attempt to rock it back and forth in a direction perpendicular to the line. Caution shall be exercised to avoid causing power wires to swing together. The force may be applied either by pushing with a pike pole or pulling with a rope. If the pole cracks during the test, it shall be considered unsafe.\n\n(4)  Unsafe poles or structures.  Poles or structures determined to be unsafe by test or observation may not be climbed until made safe by guying, bracing or other adequate means. Poles determined to be unsafe to climb shall, until they are made safe, be tagged in a conspicuous place to alert and warn all employees of the unsafe condition.\n\n(5)  Test requirements for cable suspension strand.  (i) Before attaching a splicing platform to a cable suspension strand, the strand shall be tested and determined to have strength sufficient to support the weight of the platform and the employee. Where the strand crosses above power wires or railroad tracks it may not be tested but shall be inspected in accordance with paragraph (n)(6) of this section.\n\n(ii) The following method or an equivalent method shall be used for testing the strength of the strand: A rope, at least three-eighths inch in diameter, shall be thrown over the strand. On joint lines, the rope shall be passed over the strand using tree pruner handles or a wire raising tool. If two employees are present, both shall grip the double rope and slowly transfer their entire weight to the rope and attempt to raise themselves off the ground. If only one employee is present, one end of the rope which has been passed over the strand shall be tied to the bumper of the truck, or other equally secure anchorage. The employee then shall grasp the other end of the rope and attempt to raise himself off the ground.\n\n(6)  Inspection of strand.  Where strand passes over electric power wires or railroad tracks, it shall be inspected from an elevated working position at each pole supporting the span in question. The strand may not be used to support any splicing platform, scaffold or cable car, if any of the following conditions exist:\n\n(i) Corrosion so that no galvanizing can be detected,\n\n(ii) One or more wires of the strand are broken,\n\n(iii) Worn spots, or\n\n(iv) Burn marks such as those caused by contact with electric power wires.\n\n(7)  Outside work platforms.  Unless adequate railings are provided, safety straps and body belts shall be used while working on elevated work platforms such as aerial splicing platforms, pole platforms, ladder platforms and terminal balconies.\n\n(8)  Other elevated locations.  Safety straps and body belts shall be worn when working at elevated positions on poles, towers or similar structures, which do not have adequately guarded work areas.\n\n(9)  Installing and removing wire and cable.  Before installing or removing wire or cable, the pole or structure shall be guyed, braced, or otherwise supported, as necessary, to prevent failure of the pole or structure.\n\n(10)  Avoiding contact with energized power conductors or equipment.  When cranes, derricks, or other mechanized equipment are used for setting, moving, or removing poles, all necessary precautions shall be taken to avoid contact with energized power conductors or equipment.\n\n(11)  Handling poles near energized power conductors.  (i) Joint use poles may not be set, moved, or removed where the nominal voltage of open electrical power conductors exceeds 34.5kV phase to phase (20kV to ground).\n\n(ii) Poles that are to be placed, moved or removed during heavy rains, sleet or wet snow in joint lines carrying more than 8.7kV phase to phase voltage (5kV to ground) shall be guarded or otherwise prevented from direct contact with overhead energized power conductors.\n\n(iii)(A) In joint lines where the power voltage is greater than 750 volts but less than 34.5kV phase to phase (20 kV to ground), wet poles being placed, moved or removed shall be insulated with either a rubber insulating blanket, a fiberglass box guide, or equivalent protective equipment.\n\n(B) In joint lines where the power voltage is greater than 8.7 kV phase to phase (5kV to ground) but less than 34.5kV phase to phase (20 kV to ground), dry poles being placed, moved, or removed shall be insulated with either a rubber insulating blanket, a fiberglass box guide, or equivalent protective equipment.\n\n(C) Where wet or dry poles are being removed, insulation of the pole is not required if the pole is cut off 2 feet or more below the lowest power wire and also cut off near the ground line.\n\n(iv) Insulating gloves shall be worn when handling the pole with either hands or tools, when there exists a possibility that the pole may contact a power conductor. Where the voltage to ground of the power conductor exceeds 15kV to ground, Class II gloves (as defined in ANSI J6.6-1971) shall be used. For voltages not exceeding 15kV to ground, insulating gloves shall have a breakdown voltage of at least 17kV.\n\n(v) The guard or insulating material used to protect the pole shall meet the appropriate 3 minute proof test voltage requirements contained in the ANSI J6.4-1971.\n\n(vi) When there exists a possibility of contact between the pole or the vehicle-mounted equipment used to handle the pole, and an energized power conductor, the following precautions shall be observed:\n\n(A) When on the vehicle which carries the derrick, avoid all contact with the ground, with persons standing on the ground, and with all grounded objects such as guys, tree limbs, or metal sign posts. To the extent feasible, remain on the vehicle as long as the possibility of contact exists.\n\n(B) When it is necessary to leave the vehicle, step onto an insulating blanket and break all contact with the vehicle before stepping off the blanket and onto the ground. As a last resort, if a blanket is not available, the employee may jump cleanly from the vehicle.\n\n(C) When it is necessary to enter the vehicle, first step onto an insulating blanket and break all contact with the ground, grounded objects and other persons before touching the truck or derrick.\n\n(12)  Working position on poles.  Climbing and working are prohibited above the level of the lowest electric power conducter on the pole (exclusive of vertical runs and street light wiring), except:\n\n(i) Where communications facilities are attached above the electric power conductors, and a rigid fixed barrier is installed between the electric power facility and the communications facility, or\n\n(ii) Where the electric power conductors are cabled secondary service drops carrying less than 300 volts to ground and are attached 40 inches or more below the communications conductors or cables.\n\n(13)  Metal tapes and ropes.  (i) Metal measuring tapes, metal measuring ropes, or tapes containing conductive strands may not be used when working near exposed energized parts.\n\n(ii) Where it is necessary to measure clearances from energized parts, only nonconductive devices shall be used.\n\n(o)  Underground lines.  The provisions of this paragraph apply to the guarding of manholes and street openings, and to the ventilation and testing for gas in manholes and unvented vaults, where telecommunications field work is performed on or with underground lines.\n\n(1)  Guarding manholes and street openings.  (i) When covers of manholes or vaults are removed, the opening shall be promptly guarded by a railing, temporary cover, or other suitable temporary barrier which is appropriate to prevent an accidental fall through the opening and to protect employees working in the manhole from foreign objects entering the manhole.\n\n(ii) While work is being performed in the manhole, a person with basic first aid training shall be immediately available to render assistance if there is cause for believing that a safety hazard exists, and if the requirements contained in paragraphs (d)(1) and (o)(1)(i) of this section do not adequately protect the employee(s). Examples of manhole worksite hazards which shall be considered to constitute a safety hazard include, but are not limited to:\n\n(A) Manhole worksites where safety hazards are created by traffic patterns that cannot be corrected by provisions of paragraph (d)(1) of this section.\n\n(B) Manhole worksites that are subject to unusual water hazards that cannot be abated by conventional means.\n\n(C) Manhole worksites that are occupied jointly with power utilities as described in paragraph (o)(3) of this section.\n\n(2)  Requirements prior to entering manholes and unvented vaults.  (i) Before an employee enters a manhole, the following steps shall be taken:\n\n(A) The internal atmosphere shall be tested for combustible gas and, except when continuous forced ventilation is provided, the atmosphere shall also be tested for oxygen deficiency.\n\n(B) When unsafe conditions are detected by testing or other means, the work area shall be ventilated and otherwise made safe before entry.\n\n(ii) An adequate continuous supply of air shall be provided while work is performed in manholes under any of the following conditions:\n\n(A) Where combustible or explosive gas vapors have been initially detected and subsequently reduced to a safe level by ventilation,\n\n(B) Where organic solvents are used in the work procedure,\n\n(C) Where open flame torches are used in the work procedure,\n\n(D) Where the manhole is located in that portion of a public right of way open to vehicular traffic and/or exposed to a seepage of gas or gases, or\n\n(E) Where a toxic gas or oxygen deficiency is found.\n\n(iii)(A) The requirements of paragraphs (o)(2) (i) and (ii) of this section do not apply to work in central office cable vaults that are adequately ventilated.\n\n(B) The requirements of paragraphs (o)(2) (i) and (ii) of this section apply to work in unvented vaults.\n\n(3)  Joint power and telecommunication manholes.  While work is being performed in a manhole occupied jointly by an electric utility and a telecommunication utility, an employee with basic first aid training shall be available in the immediate vicinity to render emergency assistance as may be required. The employee whose presence is required in the immediate vicinity for the purposes of rendering emergency assistance is not to be precluded from occasionally entering a manhole to provide assistance other than in an emergency. The requirement of this paragraph (o)(3) does not preclude a qualified employee, working alone, from entering for brief periods of time, a manhole where energized cables or equipment are in service, for the purpose of inspection, housekeeping, taking readings, or similar work if such work can be performed safely.\n\n(4)  Ladders.  Ladders shall be used to enter and exit manholes exceeding 4 feet in depth.\n\n(5)  Flames.  When open flames are used in manholes, the following precautions shall be taken to protect against the accumulation of combustible gas:\n\n(i) A test for combustible gas shall be made immediately before using the open flame device, and at least once per hour while using the device; and\n\n(ii) a fuel tank (e.g., acetylene) may not be in the manhole unless in actual use.\n\n(p)  Microwave transmission \u2014(1)  Eye protection.  Employers shall insure that employees do not look into an open waveguide which is connected to an energized source of microwave radiation.\n\n(2)  Hazardous area.  Accessible areas associated with microwave communication systems where the electromagnetic radiation level exceeds the radiation protection guide given in \u00a7 1910.97 shall be posted as described in that section. The lower half of the warning symbol shall include the following:\n\nRadiation in this area may exceed hazard limitations and special precautions are required. Obtain specific instruction before entering.\n\nRadiation in this area may exceed hazard limitations and special precautions are required. Obtain specific instruction before entering.\n\n(3)  Protective measures.  When an employee works in an area where the electromagnetic radiation exceeds the radiation protection guide, the employer shall institute measures that insure that the employee's exposure is not greater than that permitted by the radiation guide. Such measures shall include, but not be limited to those of an administrative or engineering nature or those involving personal protective equipment.\n\n(q)  Tree trimming \u2014 electrical hazards \u2014(1)  General.  (i) Employees engaged in pruning, trimming, removing, or clearing trees from lines shall be required to consider all overhead and underground electrical power conductors to be energized with potentially fatal voltages, never to be touched (contacted) either directly or indirectly.\n\n(ii) Employees engaged in line-clearing operations shall be instructed that:\n\n(A) A direct contact is made when any part of the body touches or contacts an energized conductor, or other energized electrical fixture or apparatus.\n\n(B) An indirect contact is made when any part of the body touches any object in contact with an energized electrical conductor, or other energized fixture or apparatus.\n\n(C) An indirect contact can be made through conductive tools, tree branches, trucks, equipment, or other objects, or as a result of communications wires, cables, fences, or guy wires being accidentally energized.\n\n(D) Electric shock will occur when an employee, by either direct or indirect contact with an energized conductor, energized tree limb, tool, equipment, or other object, provides a path for the flow of electricity to a grounded object or to the ground itself. Simultaneous contact with two energized conductors will also cause electric shock which may result in serious or fatal injury.\n\n(iii) Before any work is performed in proximity to energized conductors, the system operator/owner of the energized conductors shall be contacted to ascertain if he knows of any hazards associated with the conductors which may not be readily apparent. This rule does not apply when operations are performed by or on behalf of, the system operator/owner.\n\n(2)  Working in proximity to electrical hazards.  (i) Employers shall ensure that a close inspection is made by the employee and by the foremen or supervisor in charge before climbing, entering, or working around any tree, to determine whether an electrical power conductor passes through the tree, or passes within reaching distance of an employee working in the tree. If any of these conditions exist either directly or indirectly, an electrical hazard shall be considered to exist unless the system operator/owner has caused the hazard to be removed by deenergizing the lines, or installing protective equipment.\n\n(ii) Only qualified employees or trainees, familiar with the special techniques and hazards involved in line clearance, shall be permitted to perform the work if it is found that an electrical hazard exists.\n\n(iii) During all tree working operations aloft where an electrical hazard of more than 750V exists, there shall be a second employee or trainee qualified in line clearance tree trimming within normal voice communication.\n\n(iv) Where tree work is performed by employees qualified in line-clearance tree trimming and trainees qualified in line-clearance tree trimming, the clearances from energized conductors given in Table R-3 shall apply.\n\nTable R-3\u2014Minimum Working Distances From Energized Conductors for Line-Clearance Tree Trimmers and Line-Clearance Tree-Trimmer Trainees\n\n(v) Branches hanging on an energized conductor may only be removed using appropriately insulated equipment.\n\n(vi) Rubber footwear, including lineman's overshoes, shall not be considered as providing any measure of safety from electrical hazards.\n\n(vii) Ladders, platforms, and aerial devices, including insulated aerial devices, may not be brought in contact with an electrical conductor. Reliance shall not be placed on their dielectric capabilities.\n\n(viii) When an aerial lift device contacts an electrical conductor, the truck supporting the aerial lift device shall be considered as energized.\n\n(3)  Storm work and emergency conditions.  (i) Since storm work and emergency conditions create special hazards, only authorized representatives of the electric utility system operator/owner and not telecommunication workers may perform tree work in these situations where energized electrical power conductors are involved.\n\n(ii) When an emergency condition develops due to tree operations, work shall be suspended and the system operator/owner shall be notified immediately.\n\n(r)  Buried facilities\u2014Communications lines and power lines in the same trench.  [Reserved]\n\n(s)  Definitions \u2014(1)  Aerial lifts.  Aerial lifts include the following types of vehicle-mounted aerial devices used to elevate personnel to jobsites above ground:\n\n(i) Extensible boom platforms,\n\n(ii) Aerial ladders,\n\n(iii) Articulating boom platforms,\n\n(iv) Vertical towers,\n\n(v) A combination of any of the above defined in ANSI A92.2-1969, which is incorporated by reference as specified in \u00a7 1910.6. These devices are made of metal, wood, fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP), or other material; are powered or manually operated; and are deemed to be aerial lifts whether or not they are capable of rotating about a substantially vertical axis.\n\n(2)  Aerial splicing platform.  This consists of a platform, approximately 3 ft. \u00d7 4 ft., used to perform aerial cable work. It is furnished with fiber or synthetic ropes for supporting the platform from aerial strand, detachable guy ropes for anchoring it, and a device for raising and lowering it with a handline.\n\n(3)  Aerial tent.  A small tent usually constructed of vinyl coated canvas which is usually supported by light metal or plastic tubing. It is designed to protect employees in inclement weather while working on ladders, aerial splicing platforms, or aerial devices.\n\n(4)  Alive or live (energized).  Electrically connected to a source of potential difference, or electrically charged so as to have a potential significantly different from that of the earth in the vicinity. The term  live  is sometimes used in the place of the term  current-carrying,  where the intent is clear, to avoid repetition of the longer term.\n\n(5)  Barricade.  A physical obstruction such as tapes, cones, or \u201cA\u201d frame type wood and/or metal structure intended to warn and limit access to a work area.\n\n(6)  Barrier.  A physical obstruction which is intended to prevent contact with energized lines or equipment, or to prevent unauthorized access to work area.\n\n(7)  Bond.  An electrical connection from one conductive element to another for the purpose of minimizing potential differences or providing suitable conductivity for fault current or for mitigation of leakage current and electrolytic action.\n\n(8)  Cable.  A conductor with insulation, or a stranded conductor with or without insulation and other coverings (single-conductor cable), or a combination of conductors insulated from one another (multiple-conductor cable).\n\n(9)  Cable sheath.  A protective covering applied to cables.\n\nA cable sheath may consist of multiple layers of which one or more is conductive.\n\n(10)  Circuit.  A conductor or system of conductors through which an electric current is intended to flow.\n\n(11)  Communication lines.  The conductors and their supporting or containing structures for telephone, telegraph, railroad signal, data, clock, fire, police-alarm, community television antenna and other systems which are used for public or private signal or communication service, and which operate at potentials not exceeding 400 volts to ground or 750 volts between any two points of the circuit, and the transmitted power of which does not exceed 150 watts. When communications lines operate at less than 150 volts to ground, no limit is placed on the capacity of the system. Specifically designed communications cables may include communication circuits not complying with the preceding limitations, where such circuits are also used incidentally to supply power to communication equipment.\n\n(12)  Conductor.  A material, usually in the form of a wire, cable, or bus bar, suitable for carrying an electric current.\n\n(13)  Effectively grounded.  Intentionally connected to earth through a ground connection or connections of sufficiently low impedance and having sufficient current-carrying capacity to prevent the build-up of voltages which may result in undue hazard to connected equipment or to persons.\n\n(14)  Equipment.  A general term which includes materials, fittings, devices, appliances, fixtures, apparatus, and similar items used as part of, or in connection with, a supply or communications installation.\n\n(15)  Ground (reference).  That conductive body, usually earth, to which an electric potential is referenced.\n\n(16)  Ground (as a noun).  A conductive connection, whether intentional or accidental, by which an electric circuit or equipment is connected to reference ground.\n\n(17)  Ground (as a verb).  The connecting or establishment of a connection, whether by intention or accident, of an electric circuit or equipment to reference ground.\n\n(18)  Ground tent.  A small tent usually constructed of vinyl coated canvas supported by a metal or plastic frame. Its purpose is to protect employees from inclement weather while working at buried cable pedestal sites or similar locations.\n\n(19)  Grounded conductor.  A system or circuit conductor which is intentionally grounded.\n\n(20)  Grounded systems.  A system of conductors in which at least one conductor or point (usually the middle wire, or the neutral point of transformer or generator windings) is intentionally grounded, either solidly or through a current-limiting device (not a current-interrupting device).\n\n(21)  Grounding electrode conductor. (Grounding conductor).  A conductor used to connect equipment or the grounded circuit of a wiring system to a grounding electrode.\n\n(22)  Insulated.  Separated from other conducting surfaces by a dielectric substance (including air space) offering a high resistance to the passage of current.\n\nWhen any object is said to be insulated, it is understood to be insulated in suitable manner for the conditions to which it is subjected. Otherwise, it is, within the purpose of these rules, uninsulated. Insulating coverings of conductors in one means of making the conductor insulated.\n\n(23)  Insulation (as applied to cable).  That which is relied upon to insulate the conductor from other conductors or conducting parts or from ground.\n\n(24)  Joint use.  The sharing of a common facility, such as a manhole, trench or pole, by two or more different kinds of utilities (e.g., power and telecommunications).\n\n(25)  Ladder platform.  A device designed to facilitate working aloft from an extension ladder. A typical device consists of a platform (approximately 9\u2033 \u00d7 18\u2033) hinged to a welded pipe frame. The rear edge of the platform and the bottom cross-member of the frame are equipped with latches to lock the platform to ladder rungs.\n\n(26)  Ladder seat.  A removable seat used to facilitate work at an elevated position on rolling ladders in telecommunication centers.\n\n(27)  Manhole.  A subsurface enclosure which personnel may enter and which is used for the purpose of installing, operating, and maintaining submersible equipment and/or cable.\n\n(28)  Manhole platform.  A platform consisting of separate planks which are laid across steel platform supports. The ends of the supports are engaged in the manhole cable racks.\n\n(29)  Microwave transmission.  The act of communicating or signaling utilizing a frequency between 1 GH z  (gigahertz) and 300 GH z  inclusively.\n\n(30)  Nominal voltage.  The nominal voltage of a system or circuit is the value assigned to a system or circuit of a given voltage class for the purpose of convenient designation. The actual voltage may vary above or below this value.\n\n(31)  Pole balcony or seat.  A balcony or seat used as a support for workmen at pole-mounted equipment or terminal boxes. A typical device consists of a bolted assembly of steel details and a wooden platform. Steel braces run from the pole to the underside of the balcony. A guard rail (approximately 30\u2033 high) may be provided.\n\n(32)  Pole platform.  A platform intended for use by a workman in splicing and maintenance operations in an elevated position adjacent to a pole. It consists of a platform equipped at one end with a hinged chain binder for securing the platform to a pole. A brace from the pole to the underside of the platform is also provided.\n\n(33)  Qualified employee.  Any worker who by reason of his training and experience has demonstrated his ability to safely perform his duties.\n\n(34)  Qualified line-clearance tree trimmer.  A tree worker who through related training and on-the-job experience is familar with the special techniques and hazards involved in line clearance.\n\n(35)  Qualified line-clearance tree-trimmer trainee.  Any worker regularly assigned to a line-clearance tree-trimming crew and undergoing on-the-job training who, in the course of such training, has demonstrated his ability to perform his duties safely at his level of training.\n\n(36)  System operator/owner.  The person or organization that operates or controls the electrical conductors involved.\n\n(37)  Telecommunications center.  An installation of communication equipment under the exclusive control of an organization providing telecommunications service, that is located outdoors or in a vault, chamber, or a building space used primarily for such installations.\n\nTelecommunication centers are facilities established, equipped and arranged in accordance with engineered plans for the purpose of providing telecommunications service. They may be located on premises owned or leased by the organization providing telecommunication service, or on the premises owned or leased by others. This definition includes switch rooms (whether electromechanical, electronic, or computer controlled), terminal rooms, power rooms, repeater rooms, transmitter and receiver rooms, switchboard operating rooms, cable vaults, and miscellaneous communications equipment rooms. Simulation rooms of telecommunication centers for training or developmental purposes are also included.\n\n(38)  Telecommunications derricks.  Rotating or nonrotating derrick structures permanently mounted on vehicles for the purpose of lifting, lowering, or positioning hardware and materials used in telecommunications work.\n\n(39)  Telecommunication line truck.  A truck used to transport men, tools, and material, and to serve as a traveling workshop for telecommunication installation and maintenance work. It is sometimes equipped with a boom and auxiliary equipment for setting poles, digging holes, and elevating material or men.\n\n(40)  Telecommunication service.  The furnishing of a capability to signal or communicate at a distance by means such as telephone, telegraph, police and firealarm, community antenna television, or similar system, using wire, conventional cable, coaxial cable, wave guides, microwave transmission, or other similar means.\n\n(41)  Unvented vault.  An enclosed vault in which the only openings are access openings.\n\n(42)  Vault.  An enclosure above or below ground which personnel may enter, and which is used for the purpose of installing, operating, and/or maintaining equipment and/or cable which need not be of submersible design.\n\n(43)  Vented vault.  An enclosure as described in paragraph(s) (42) of this section, with provision for air changes using exhaust flue stack(s) and low level air intake(s), operating on differentials of pressure and temperature providing for air flow.\n\n(44)  Voltage of an effectively grounded circuit.  The voltage between any conductor and ground unless otherwise indicated.\n\n(45)  Voltage of a circuit not effectively grounded.  The voltage between any two conductors. If one circuit is directly connected to and supplied from another circuit of higher voltage (as in the case of an autotransformer), both are considered as of the higher voltage, unless the circuit of lower voltage is effectively grounded, in which case its voltage is not determined by the circuit of higher voltage. Direct connection implies electric connection as distinguished from connection merely through electromagnetic or electrostatic induction."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.18.37.8", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "R", "Subpart R\u2014Special Industries", "", "\u00a7 1910.269 Electric power generation, transmission, and distribution.", "OSHA", "", "", "[79 FR 20633, Apr. 11, 2014, as amended at 79 FR 56960, Sept. 24, 2014; 80 FR 60036, Oct. 5, 2015; 81 FR 83006, Nov. 18, 2016; 84 FR 68797, Dec. 17, 2019; 85 FR 8732, Feb. 18, 2020]", "(a)  General \u2014(1)  Application.  (i) This section covers the operation and maintenance of electric power generation, control, transformation, transmission, and distribution lines and equipment. These provisions apply to:\n\n(A) Power generation, transmission, and distribution installations, including related equipment for the purpose of communication or metering that are accessible only to qualified employees;\n\nThe types of installations covered by this paragraph include the generation, transmission, and distribution installations of electric utilities, as well as equivalent installations of industrial establishments. Subpart S of this part covers supplementary electric generating equipment that is used to supply a workplace for emergency, standby, or similar purposes only. (See paragraph (a)(1)(i)(B) of this section.)\n\n(B) Other installations at an electric power generating station, as follows:\n\n( 1 ) Fuel and ash handling and processing installations, such as coal conveyors,\n\n( 2 ) Water and steam installations, such as penstocks, pipelines, and tanks, providing a source of energy for electric generators, and\n\n( 3 ) Chlorine and hydrogen systems;\n\n(C) Test sites where employees perform electrical testing involving temporary measurements associated with electric power generation, transmission, and distribution in laboratories, in the field, in substations, and on lines, as opposed to metering, relaying, and routine line work;\n\n(D) Work on, or directly associated with, the installations covered in paragraphs (a)(1)(i)(A) through (a)(1)(i)(C) of this section; and\n\n(E) Line-clearance tree trimming performed for the purpose of clearing space around electric power generation, transmission, or distribution lines or equipment and on behalf of an organization that operates, or that controls the operating procedures for, those lines or equipment, as follows:\n\n( 1 ) Entire \u00a7 1910.269, except paragraph (r)(1) of this section, applies to line-clearance tree trimming covered by the introductory text to paragraph (a)(1)(i)(E) of the section when performed by qualified employees (those who are knowledgeable in the construction and operation of the electric power generation, transmission, or distribution equipment involved, along with the associated hazards).\n\n( 2 ) Paragraphs (a)(2), (a)(3), (b), (c), (g), (k), (p), and (r) of this section apply to line-clearance tree trimming covered by the introductory text to paragraph (a)(1)(i)(E) of this section when performed by line-clearance tree trimmers who are not qualified employees.\n\n(ii) Notwithstanding paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this section, \u00a7 1910.269 of this part does not apply:\n\n(A) To construction work, as defined in \u00a7 1910.12 of this part, except for line-clearance tree trimming and work involving electric power generation installations as specified in \u00a7 1926.950(a)(3) of this chapter; or\n\n(B) To electrical installations, electrical safety-related work practices, or electrical maintenance considerations covered by subpart S of this part.\n\nThe Occupational Safety and Health Administration considers work practices conforming to \u00a7\u00a7 1910.332 through 1910.335 as complying with the electrical safety-related work-practice requirements of \u00a7 1910.269 identified in Table 1 of appendix A-2 to this section, provided that employers are performing the work on a generation or distribution installation meeting \u00a7\u00a7 1910.303 through 1910.308. This table also identifies provisions in \u00a7 1910.269 that apply to work by qualified persons directly on, or associated with, installations of electric power generation, transmission, and distribution lines or equipment, regardless of compliance with \u00a7\u00a7 1910.332 through 1910.335.\n\nThe Occupational Safety and Health Administration considers work practices performed by qualified persons and conforming to \u00a7 1910.269 as complying with \u00a7\u00a7 1910.333(c) and 1910.335.\n\n(iii) This section applies in addition to all other applicable standards contained in this part 1910. Employers covered under this section are not exempt from complying with other applicable provisions in part 1910 by the operation of \u00a7 1910.5(c). Specific references in this section to other sections of part 1910 are for emphasis only.\n\n(2)  Training.  (i) All employees performing work covered by this section shall be trained as follows:\n\n(A) Each employee shall be trained in, and familiar with, the safety-related work practices, safety procedures, and other safety requirements in this section that pertain to his or her job assignments.\n\n(B) Each employee shall also be trained in and familiar with any other safety practices, including applicable emergency procedures (such as pole-top and manhole rescue), that are not specifically addressed by this section but that are related to his or her work and are necessary for his or her safety.\n\n(C) The degree of training shall be determined by the risk to the employee for the hazard involved.\n\n(ii) Each qualified employee shall also be trained and competent in:\n\n(A) The skills and techniques necessary to distinguish exposed live parts from other parts of electric equipment,\n\n(B) The skills and techniques necessary to determine the nominal voltage of exposed live parts,\n\n(C) The minimum approach distances specified in this section corresponding to the voltages to which the qualified employee will be exposed and the skills and techniques necessary to maintain those distances,\n\n(D) The proper use of the special precautionary techniques, personal protective equipment, insulating and shielding materials, and insulated tools for working on or near exposed energized parts of electric equipment, and\n\n(E) The recognition of electrical hazards to which the employee may be exposed and the skills and techniques necessary to control or avoid these hazards.\n\nFor the purposes of this section, a person must have the training required by paragraph (a)(2)(ii) of this section to be considered a qualified person.\n\n(iii) Each line-clearance tree trimmer who is not a qualified employee shall also be trained and competent in:\n\n(A) The skills and techniques necessary to distinguish exposed live parts from other parts of electric equipment,\n\n(B) The skills and techniques necessary to determine the nominal voltage of exposed live parts, and\n\n(C) The minimum approach distances specified in this section corresponding to the voltages to which the employee will be exposed and the skills and techniques necessary to maintain those distances.\n\n(iv) The employer shall determine, through regular supervision and through inspections conducted on at least an annual basis, that each employee is complying with the safety-related work practices required by this section.\n\n(v) An employee shall receive additional training (or retraining) under any of the following conditions:\n\n(A) If the supervision or annual inspections required by paragraph (a)(2)(iv) of this section indicate that the employee is not complying with the safety-related work practices required by this section, or\n\n(B) If new technology, new types of equipment, or changes in procedures necessitate the use of safety-related work practices that are different from those which the employee would normally use, or\n\n(C) If he or she must employ safety-related work practices that are not normally used during his or her regular job duties.\n\nThe Occupational Safety and Health Administration considers tasks that are performed less often than once per year to necessitate retraining before the performance of the work practices involved.\n\n(vi) The training required by paragraph (a)(2) of this section shall be of the classroom or on-the-job type.\n\n(vii) The training shall establish employee proficiency in the work practices required by this section and shall introduce the procedures necessary for compliance with this section.\n\n(viii) The employer shall ensure that each employee has demonstrated proficiency in the work practices involved before that employee is considered as having completed the training required by paragraph (a)(2) of this section.\n\nThough they are not required by this paragraph, employment records that indicate that an employee has successfully completed the required training are one way of keeping track of when an employee has demonstrated proficiency.\n\nFor an employee with previous training, an employer may determine that that employee has demonstrated the proficiency required by this paragraph using the following process:\n\n(1) Confirm that the employee has the training required by paragraph (a)(2) of this section,\n\n(2) Use an examination or interview to make an initial determination that the employee understands the relevant safety-related work practices before he or she performs any work covered by this section, and\n\n(3) Supervise the employee closely until that employee has demonstrated proficiency as required by this paragraph.\n\n(3)  Information transfer.  (i) Before work begins, the host employer shall inform contract employers of:\n\n(A) The characteristics of the host employer's installation that are related to the safety of the work to be performed and are listed in paragraphs (a)(4)(i) through (a)(4)(v) of this section;\n\nThis paragraph requires the host employer to obtain information listed in paragraphs (a)(4)(i) through (a)(4)(v) of this section if it does not have this information in existing records.\n\n(B) Conditions that are related to the safety of the work to be performed, that are listed in paragraphs (a)(4)(vi) through (a)(4)(viii) of this section, and that are known to the host employer;\n\nFor the purposes of this paragraph, the host employer need only provide information to contract employers that the host employer can obtain from its existing records through the exercise of reasonable diligence. This paragraph does not require the host employer to make inspections of worksite conditions to obtain this information.\n\n(C) Information about the design and operation of the host employer's installation that the contract employer needs to make the assessments required by this section; and\n\nThis paragraph requires the host employer to obtain information about the design and operation of its installation that contract employers need to make required assessments if it does not have this information in existing records.\n\n(D) Any other information about the design and operation of the host employer's installation that is known by the host employer, that the contract employer requests, and that is related to the protection of the contract employer's employees.\n\nFor the purposes of this paragraph, the host employer need only provide information to contract employers that the host employer can obtain from its existing records through the exercise of reasonable diligence. This paragraph does not require the host employer to make inspections of worksite conditions to obtain this information.\n\n(ii) Contract employers shall comply with the following requirements:\n\n(A) The contract employer shall ensure that each of its employees is instructed in the hazardous conditions relevant to the employee's work that the contract employer is aware of as a result of information communicated to the contract employer by the host employer under paragraph (a)(3)(i) of this section.\n\n(B) Before work begins, the contract employer shall advise the host employer of any unique hazardous conditions presented by the contract employer's work.\n\n(C) The contract employer shall advise the host employer of any unanticipated hazardous conditions found during the contract employer's work that the host employer did not mention under paragraph (a)(3)(i) of this section. The contract employer shall provide this information to the host employer within 2 working days after discovering the hazardous condition.\n\n(iii) The contract employer and the host employer shall coordinate their work rules and procedures so that each employee of the contract employer and the host employer is protected as required by this section.\n\n(4)  Existing characteristics and conditions.  Existing characteristics and conditions of electric lines and equipment that are related to the safety of the work to be performed shall be determined before work on or near the lines or equipment is started. Such characteristics and conditions include, but are not limited to:\n\n(i) The nominal voltages of lines and equipment,\n\n(ii) The maximum switching-transient voltages,\n\n(iii) The presence of hazardous induced voltages,\n\n(iv) The presence of protective grounds and equipment grounding conductors,\n\n(v) The locations of circuits and equipment, including electric supply lines, communication lines, and fire-protective signaling circuits,\n\n(vi) The condition of protective grounds and equipment grounding conductors,\n\n(vii) The condition of poles, and\n\n(viii) Environmental conditions relating to safety.\n\n(b)  Medical services and first aid.  The employer shall provide medical services and first aid as required in \u00a7 1910.151. In addition to the requirements of \u00a7 1910.151, the following requirements also apply:\n\n(1)  First-aid training.  When employees are performing work on, or associated with, exposed lines or equipment energized at 50 volts or more, persons with first-aid training shall be available as follows:\n\n(i) For field work involving two or more employees at a work location, at least two trained persons shall be available. However, for line-clearance tree trimming performed by line-clearance tree trimmers who are not qualified employees, only one trained person need be available if all new employees are trained in first aid within 3 months of their hiring dates.\n\n(ii) For fixed work locations such as substations, the number of trained persons available shall be sufficient to ensure that each employee exposed to electric shock can be reached within 4 minutes by a trained person. However, where the existing number of employees is insufficient to meet this requirement (at a remote substation, for example), each employee at the work location shall be a trained employee.\n\n(2)  First-aid supplies.  First-aid supplies required by \u00a7 1910.151(b) shall be placed in weatherproof containers if the supplies could be exposed to the weather.\n\n(3)  First-aid kits.  The employer shall maintain each first-aid kit, shall ensure that it is readily available for use, and shall inspect it frequently enough to ensure that expended items are replaced. The employer also shall inspect each first aid kit at least once per year.\n\n(c)  Job briefing \u2014(1)  Before each job.  (i) In assigning an employee or a group of employees to perform a job, the employer shall provide the employee in charge of the job with all available information that relates to the determination of existing characteristics and conditions required by paragraph (a)(4) of this section.\n\n(ii) The employer shall ensure that the employee in charge conducts a job briefing that meets paragraphs (c)(2), (c)(3), and (c)(4) of this section with the employees involved before they start each job.\n\n(2)  Subjects to be covered.  The briefing shall cover at least the following subjects: hazards associated with the job, work procedures involved, special precautions, energy-source controls, and personal protective equipment requirements.\n\n(3)  Number of briefings.  (i) If the work or operations to be performed during the work day or shift are repetitive and similar, at least one job briefing shall be conducted before the start of the first job of each day or shift.\n\n(ii) Additional job briefings shall be held if significant changes, which might affect the safety of the employees, occur during the course of the work.\n\n(4)  Extent of briefing.  (i) A brief discussion is satisfactory if the work involved is routine and if the employees, by virtue of training and experience, can reasonably be expected to recognize and avoid the hazards involved in the job.\n\n(ii) A more extensive discussion shall be conducted:\n\n(A) If the work is complicated or particularly hazardous, or\n\n(B) If the employee cannot be expected to recognize and avoid the hazards involved in the job.\n\nThe briefing must address all the subjects listed in paragraph (c)(2) of this section.\n\n(5)  Working alone.  An employee working alone need not conduct a job briefing. However, the employer shall ensure that the tasks to be performed are planned as if a briefing were required.\n\n(d)  Hazardous energy control (lockout/tagout) procedures \u2014(1)  Application.  The provisions of paragraph (d) of this section apply to the use of lockout/tagout procedures for the control of energy sources in installations for the purpose of electric power generation, including related equipment for communication or metering. Locking and tagging procedures for the deenergizing of electric energy sources which are used exclusively for purposes of transmission and distribution are addressed by paragraph (m) of this section.\n\nInstallations in electric power generation facilities that are not an integral part of, or inextricably commingled with, power generation processes or equipment are covered under \u00a7 1910.147 and Subpart S of this part.\n\n(2)  General.  (i) The employer shall establish a program consisting of energy control procedures, employee training, and periodic inspections to ensure that, before any employee performs any servicing or maintenance on a machine or equipment where the unexpected energizing, start up, or release of stored energy could occur and cause injury, the machine or equipment is isolated from the energy source and rendered inoperative.\n\n(ii) The employer's energy control program under paragraph (d)(2) of this section shall meet the following requirements:\n\n(A) If an energy isolating device is not capable of being locked out, the employer's program shall use a tagout system.\n\n(B) If an energy isolating device is capable of being locked out, the employer's program shall use lockout, unless the employer can demonstrate that the use of a tagout system will provide full employee protection as follows:\n\n( 1 ) When a tagout device is used on an energy isolating device which is capable of being locked out, the tagout device shall be attached at the same location that the lockout device would have been attached, and the employer shall demonstrate that the tagout program will provide a level of safety equivalent to that obtained by the use of a lockout program.\n\n( 2 ) In demonstrating that a level of safety is achieved in the tagout program equivalent to the level of safety obtained by the use of a lockout program, the employer shall demonstrate full compliance with all tagout-related provisions of this standard together with such additional elements as are necessary to provide the equivalent safety available from the use of a lockout device. Additional means to be considered as part of the demonstration of full employee protection shall include the implementation of additional safety measures such as the removal of an isolating circuit element, blocking of a controlling switch, opening of an extra disconnecting device, or the removal of a valve handle to reduce the likelihood of inadvertent energizing.\n\n(C) After November 1, 1994, whenever replacement or major repair, renovation, or modification of a machine or equipment is performed, and whenever new machines or equipment are installed, energy isolating devices for such machines or equipment shall be designed to accept a lockout device.\n\n(iii) Procedures shall be developed, documented, and used for the control of potentially hazardous energy covered by paragraph (d) of this section.\n\n(iv) The procedure shall clearly and specifically outline the scope, purpose, responsibility, authorization, rules, and techniques to be applied to the control of hazardous energy, and the measures to enforce compliance including, but not limited to, the following:\n\n(A) A specific statement of the intended use of this procedure;\n\n(B) Specific procedural steps for shutting down, isolating, blocking and securing machines or equipment to control hazardous energy;\n\n(C) Specific procedural steps for the placement, removal, and transfer of lockout devices or tagout devices and the responsibility for them; and\n\n(D) Specific requirements for testing a machine or equipment to determine and verify the effectiveness of lockout devices, tagout devices, and other energy control measures.\n\n(v) The employer shall conduct a periodic inspection of the energy control procedure at least annually to ensure that the procedure and the provisions of paragraph (d) of this section are being followed.\n\n(A) The periodic inspection shall be performed by an authorized employee who is not using the energy control procedure being inspected.\n\n(B) The periodic inspection shall be designed to identify and correct any deviations or inadequacies.\n\n(C) If lockout is used for energy control, the periodic inspection shall include a review, between the inspector and each authorized employee, of that employee's responsibilities under the energy control procedure being inspected.\n\n(D) Where tagout is used for energy control, the periodic inspection shall include a review, between the inspector and each authorized and affected employee, of that employee's responsibilities under the energy control procedure being inspected, and the elements set forth in paragraph (d)(2)(vii) of this section.\n\n(E) The employer shall certify that the inspections required by paragraph (d)(2)(v) of this section have been accomplished. The certification shall identify the machine or equipment on which the energy control procedure was being used, the date of the inspection, the employees included in the inspection, and the person performing the inspection.\n\nIf normal work schedule and operation records demonstrate adequate inspection activity and contain the required information, no additional certification is required.\n\n(vi) The employer shall provide training to ensure that the purpose and function of the energy control program are understood by employees and that the knowledge and skills required for the safe application, usage, and removal of energy controls are acquired by employees. The training shall include the following:\n\n(A) Each authorized employee shall receive training in the recognition of applicable hazardous energy sources, the type and magnitude of energy available in the workplace, and in the methods and means necessary for energy isolation and control.\n\n(B) Each affected employee shall be instructed in the purpose and use of the energy control procedure.\n\n(C) All other employees whose work operations are or may be in an area where energy control procedures may be used shall be instructed about the procedures and about the prohibition relating to attempts to restart or reenergize machines or equipment that are locked out or tagged out.\n\n(vii) When tagout systems are used, employees shall also be trained in the following limitations of tags:\n\n(A) Tags are essentially warning devices affixed to energy isolating devices and do not provide the physical restraint on those devices that is provided by a lock.\n\n(B) When a tag is attached to an energy isolating means, it is not to be removed without authorization of the authorized person responsible for it, and it is never to be bypassed, ignored, or otherwise defeated.\n\n(C) Tags must be legible and understandable by all authorized employees, affected employees, and all other employees whose work operations are or may be in the area, in order to be effective.\n\n(D) Tags and their means of attachment must be made of materials which will withstand the environmental conditions encountered in the workplace.\n\n(E) Tags may evoke a false sense of security, and their meaning needs to be understood as part of the overall energy control program.\n\n(F) Tags must be securely attached to energy isolating devices so that they cannot be inadvertently or accidentally detached during use.\n\n(viii) Retraining shall be provided by the employer as follows:\n\n(A) Retraining shall be provided for all authorized and affected employees whenever there is a change in their job assignments, a change in machines, equipment, or processes that present a new hazard or whenever there is a change in the energy control procedures.\n\n(B) Retraining shall also be conducted whenever a periodic inspection under paragraph (d)(2)(v) of this section reveals, or whenever the employer has reason to believe, that there are deviations from or inadequacies in an employee's knowledge or use of the energy control procedures.\n\n(C) The retraining shall reestablish employee proficiency and shall introduce new or revised control methods and procedures, as necessary.\n\n(ix) The employer shall certify that employee training has been accomplished and is being kept up to date. The certification shall contain each employee's name and dates of training.\n\n(3)  Protective materials and hardware.  (i) Locks, tags, chains, wedges, key blocks, adapter pins, self-locking fasteners, or other hardware shall be provided by the employer for isolating, securing, or blocking of machines or equipment from energy sources.\n\n(ii) Lockout devices and tagout devices shall be singularly identified; shall be the only devices used for controlling energy; may not be used for other purposes; and shall meet the following requirements:\n\n(A) Lockout devices and tagout devices shall be capable of withstanding the environment to which they are exposed for the maximum period of time that exposure is expected.\n\n( 1 ) Tagout devices shall be constructed and printed so that exposure to weather conditions or wet and damp locations will not cause the tag to deteriorate or the message on the tag to become illegible.\n\n( 2 ) Tagout devices shall be so constructed as not to deteriorate when used in corrosive environments.\n\n(B) Lockout devices and tagout devices shall be standardized within the facility in at least one of the following criteria: color, shape, size. Additionally, in the case of tagout devices, print and format shall be standardized.\n\n(C) Lockout devices shall be substantial enough to prevent removal without the use of excessive force or unusual techniques, such as with the use of bolt cutters or metal cutting tools.\n\n(D) Tagout devices, including their means of attachment, shall be substantial enough to prevent inadvertent or accidental removal. Tagout device attachment means shall be of a non-reusable type, attachable by hand, self-locking, and nonreleasable with a minimum unlocking strength of no less than 50 pounds and shall have the general design and basic characteristics of being at least equivalent to a one-piece, all-environment-tolerant nylon cable tie.\n\n(E) Each lockout device or tagout device shall include provisions for the identification of the employee applying the device.\n\n(F) Tagout devices shall warn against hazardous conditions if the machine or equipment is energized and shall include a legend such as the following: Do Not Start, Do Not Open, Do Not Close, Do Not Energize, Do Not Operate.\n\nFor specific provisions covering accident prevention tags, see \u00a7 1910.145.\n\n(4)  Energy isolation.  Lockout and tagout device application and removal may only be performed by the authorized employees who are performing the servicing or maintenance.\n\n(5)  Notification.  Affected employees shall be notified by the employer or authorized employee of the application and removal of lockout or tagout devices. Notification shall be given before the controls are applied and after they are removed from the machine or equipment.\n\nSee also paragraph (d)(7) of this section, which requires that the second notification take place before the machine or equipment is reenergized.\n\n(6)  Lockout/tagout application.  The established procedures for the application of energy control (the lockout or tagout procedures) shall include the following elements and actions, and these procedures shall be performed in the following sequence:\n\n(i) Before an authorized or affected employee turns off a machine or equipment, the authorized employee shall have knowledge of the type and magnitude of the energy, the hazards of the energy to be controlled, and the method or means to control the energy.\n\n(ii) The machine or equipment shall be turned off or shut down using the procedures established for the machine or equipment. An orderly shutdown shall be used to avoid any additional or increased hazards to employees as a result of the equipment stoppage.\n\n(iii) All energy isolating devices that are needed to control the energy to the machine or equipment shall be physically located and operated in such a manner as to isolate the machine or equipment from energy sources.\n\n(iv) Lockout or tagout devices shall be affixed to each energy isolating device by authorized employees.\n\n(A) Lockout devices shall be attached in a manner that will hold the energy isolating devices in a \u201csafe\u201d or \u201coff\u201d position.\n\n(B) Tagout devices shall be affixed in such a manner as will clearly indicate that the operation or movement of energy isolating devices from the \u201csafe\u201d or \u201coff\u201d position is prohibited.\n\n( 1 ) Where tagout devices are used with energy isolating devices designed with the capability of being locked out, the tag attachment shall be fastened at the same point at which the lock would have been attached.\n\n( 2 ) Where a tag cannot be affixed directly to the energy isolating device, the tag shall be located as close as safely possible to the device, in a position that will be immediately obvious to anyone attempting to operate the device.\n\n(v) Following the application of lockout or tagout devices to energy isolating devices, all potentially hazardous stored or residual energy shall be relieved, disconnected, restrained, or otherwise rendered safe.\n\n(vi) If there is a possibility of reaccumulation of stored energy to a hazardous level, verification of isolation shall be continued until the servicing or maintenance is completed or until the possibility of such accumulation no longer exists.\n\n(vii) Before starting work on machines or equipment that have been locked out or tagged out, the authorized employee shall verify that isolation and deenergizing of the machine or equipment have been accomplished. If normally energized parts will be exposed to contact by an employee while the machine or equipment is deenergized, a test shall be performed to ensure that these parts are deenergized.\n\n(7)  Release from lockout/tagout.  Before lockout or tagout devices are removed and energy is restored to the machine or equipment, procedures shall be followed and actions taken by the authorized employees to ensure the following:\n\n(i) The work area shall be inspected to ensure that nonessential items have been removed and that machine or equipment components are operationally intact.\n\n(ii) The work area shall be checked to ensure that all employees have been safely positioned or removed.\n\n(iii) After lockout or tagout devices have been removed and before a machine or equipment is started, affected employees shall be notified that the lockout or tagout devices have been removed.\n\n(iv) Each lockout or tagout device shall be removed from each energy isolating device by the authorized employee who applied the lockout or tagout device. However, if that employee is not available to remove it, the device may be removed under the direction of the employer, provided that specific procedures and training for such removal have been developed, documented, and incorporated into the employer's energy control program. The employer shall demonstrate that the specific procedure provides a degree of safety equivalent to that provided by the removal of the device by the authorized employee who applied it. The specific procedure shall include at least the following elements:\n\n(A) Verification by the employer that the authorized employee who applied the device is not at the facility;\n\n(B) Making all reasonable efforts to contact the authorized employee to inform him or her that his or her lockout or tagout device has been removed; and\n\n(C) Ensuring that the authorized employee has this knowledge before he or she resumes work at that facility.\n\n(8)  Additional requirements.  (i) If the lockout or tagout devices must be temporarily removed from energy isolating devices and the machine or equipment must be energized to test or position the machine, equipment, or component thereof, the following sequence of actions shall be followed:\n\n(A) Clear the machine or equipment of tools and materials in accordance with paragraph (d)(7)(i) of this section;\n\n(B) Remove employees from the machine or equipment area in accordance with paragraphs (d)(7)(ii) and (d)(7)(iii) of this section;\n\n(C) Remove the lockout or tagout devices as specified in paragraph (d)(7)(iv) of this section;\n\n(D) Energize and proceed with the testing or positioning; and\n\n(E) Deenergize all systems and reapply energy control measures in accordance with paragraph (d)(6) of this section to continue the servicing or maintenance.\n\n(ii) When servicing or maintenance is performed by a crew, craft, department, or other group, they shall use a procedure which affords the employees a level of protection equivalent to that provided by the implementation of a personal lockout or tagout device. Group lockout or tagout devices shall be used in accordance with the procedures required by paragraphs (d)(2)(iii) and (d)(2)(iv) of this section including, but not limited to, the following specific requirements:\n\n(A) Primary responsibility shall be vested in an authorized employee for a set number of employees working under the protection of a group lockout or tagout device (such as an operations lock);\n\n(B) Provision shall be made for the authorized employee to ascertain the exposure status of all individual group members with regard to the lockout or tagout of the machine or equipment;\n\n(C) When more than one crew, craft, department, or other group is involved, assignment of overall job-associated lockout or tagout control responsibility shall be given to an authorized employee designated to coordinate affected work forces and ensure continuity of protection; and\n\n(D) Each authorized employee shall affix a personal lockout or tagout device to the group lockout device, group lockbox, or comparable mechanism when he or she begins work and shall remove those devices when he or she stops working on the machine or equipment being serviced or maintained.\n\n(iii) Procedures shall be used during shift or personnel changes to ensure the continuity of lockout or tagout protection, including provision for the orderly transfer of lockout or tagout device protection between off-going and on-coming employees, to minimize their exposure to hazards from the unexpected energizing or start-up of the machine or equipment or from the release of stored energy.\n\n(iv) Whenever outside servicing personnel are to be engaged in activities covered by paragraph (d) of this section, the on-site employer and the outside employer shall inform each other of their respective lockout or tagout procedures, and each employer shall ensure that his or her personnel understand and comply with restrictions and prohibitions of the energy control procedures being used.\n\n(v) If energy isolating devices are installed in a central location and are under the exclusive control of a system operator, the following requirements apply:\n\n(A) The employer shall use a procedure that affords employees a level of protection equivalent to that provided by the implementation of a personal lockout or tagout device.\n\n(B) The system operator shall place and remove lockout and tagout devices in place of the authorized employee under paragraphs (d)(4), (d)(6)(iv), and (d)(7)(iv) of this section.\n\n(C) Provisions shall be made to identify the authorized employee who is responsible for (that is, being protected by) the lockout or tagout device, to transfer responsibility for lockout and tagout devices, and to ensure that an authorized employee requesting removal or transfer of a lockout or tagout device is the one responsible for it before the device is removed or transferred.\n\nLockout and tagging procedures that comply with paragraphs (c) through (f) of \u00a7 1910.147 will also be deemed to comply with paragraph (d) of this section if the procedures address the hazards covered by paragraph (d) of this section.\n\n(e)  Enclosed spaces.  This paragraph covers enclosed spaces that may be entered by employees. It does not apply to vented vaults if the employer makes a determination that the ventilation system is operating to protect employees before they enter the space. This paragraph applies to routine entry into enclosed spaces in lieu of the permit-space entry requirements contained in paragraphs (d) through (k) of \u00a7 1910.146. If, after the employer takes the precautions given in paragraphs (e) and (t) of this section, the hazards remaining in the enclosed space endanger the life of an entrant or could interfere with an entrant's escape from the space, then entry into the enclosed space shall meet the permit-space entry requirements of paragraphs (d) through (k) of \u00a7 1910.146.\n\n(1)  Safe work practices.  The employer shall ensure the use of safe work practices for entry into, and work in, enclosed spaces and for rescue of employees from such spaces.\n\n(2)  Training.  Each employee who enters an enclosed space or who serves as an attendant shall be trained in the hazards of enclosed-space entry, in enclosed-space entry procedures, and in enclosed-space rescue procedures.\n\n(3)  Rescue equipment.  Employers shall provide equipment to ensure the prompt and safe rescue of employees from the enclosed space.\n\n(4)  Evaluating potential hazards.  Before any entrance cover to an enclosed space is removed, the employer shall determine whether it is safe to do so by checking for the presence of any atmospheric pressure or temperature differences and by evaluating whether there might be a hazardous atmosphere in the space. Any conditions making it unsafe to remove the cover shall be eliminated before the cover is removed.\n\nThe determination called for in this paragraph may consist of a check of the conditions that might foreseeably be in the enclosed space. For example, the cover could be checked to see if it is hot and, if it is fastened in place, could be loosened gradually to release any residual pressure. An evaluation also needs to be made of whether conditions at the site could cause a hazardous atmosphere, such as an oxygen-deficient or flammable atmosphere, to develop within the space.\n\n(5)  Removing covers.  When covers are removed from enclosed spaces, the opening shall be promptly guarded by a railing, temporary cover, or other barrier designed to prevent an accidental fall through the opening and to protect employees working in the space from objects entering the space.\n\n(6)  Hazardous atmosphere.  Employees may not enter any enclosed space while it contains a hazardous atmosphere, unless the entry conforms to the permit-required confined spaces standard in \u00a7 1910.146.\n\n(7)  Attendants.  While work is being performed in the enclosed space, an attendant with first-aid training shall be immediately available outside the enclosed space to provide assistance if a hazard exists because of traffic patterns in the area of the opening used for entry. The attendant is not precluded from performing other duties outside the enclosed space if these duties do not distract the attendant from: monitoring employees within the space or ensuring that it is safe for employees to enter and exit the space.\n\nSee paragraph (t) of this section for additional requirements on attendants for work in manholes and vaults.\n\n(8)  Calibration of test instruments.  Test instruments used to monitor atmospheres in enclosed spaces shall be kept in calibration and shall have a minimum accuracy of \u00b110 percent.\n\n(9)  Testing for oxygen deficiency.  Before an employee enters an enclosed space, the atmosphere in the enclosed space shall be tested for oxygen deficiency with a direct-reading meter or similar instrument, capable of collection and immediate analysis of data samples without the need for off-site evaluation. If continuous forced-air ventilation is provided, testing is not required provided that the procedures used ensure that employees are not exposed to the hazards posed by oxygen deficiency.\n\n(10)  Testing for flammable gases and vapors.  Before an employee enters an enclosed space, the internal atmosphere shall be tested for flammable gases and vapors with a direct-reading meter or similar instrument capable of collection and immediate analysis of data samples without the need for off-site evaluation. This test shall be performed after the oxygen testing and ventilation required by paragraph (e)(9) of this section demonstrate that there is sufficient oxygen to ensure the accuracy of the test for flammability.\n\n(11)  Ventilation, and monitoring for flammable gases or vapors.  If flammable gases or vapors are detected or if an oxygen deficiency is found, forced-air ventilation shall be used to maintain oxygen at a safe level and to prevent a hazardous concentration of flammable gases and vapors from accumulating. A continuous monitoring program to ensure that no increase in flammable gas or vapor concentration above safe levels occurs may be followed in lieu of ventilation if flammable gases or vapors are initially detected at safe levels.\n\nSee the definition of \u201chazardous atmosphere\u201d for guidance in determining whether a specific concentration of a substance is hazardous.\n\n(12)  Specific ventilation requirements.  If continuous forced-air ventilation is used, it shall begin before entry is made and shall be maintained long enough for the employer to be able to demonstrate that a safe atmosphere exists before employees are allowed to enter the work area. The forced-air ventilation shall be so directed as to ventilate the immediate area where employees are present within the enclosed space and shall continue until all employees leave the enclosed space.\n\n(13)  Air supply.  The air supply for the continuous forced-air ventilation shall be from a clean source and may not increase the hazards in the enclosed space.\n\n(14)  Open flames.  If open flames are used in enclosed spaces, a test for flammable gases and vapors shall be made immediately before the open flame device is used and at least once per hour while the device is used in the space. Testing shall be conducted more frequently if conditions present in the enclosed space indicate that once per hour is insufficient to detect hazardous accumulations of flammable gases or vapors.\n\nSee the definition of \u201chazardous atmosphere\u201d for guidance in determining whether a specific concentration of a substance is hazardous.\n\nEntries into enclosed spaces conducted in accordance with the permit-space entry requirements of paragraphs (d) through (k) of \u00a7 1910.146 are considered as complying with paragraph (e) of this section.\n\n(f)  Excavations.  Excavation operations shall comply with subpart P of part 1926 of this chapter.\n\n(g)  Personal protective equipment \u2014(1)  General.  Personal protective equipment shall meet the requirements of subpart I of this part.\n\nParagraph (h) of \u00a7 1910.132 sets employer payment obligations for the personal protective equipment required by this section, including, but not limited to, the fall protection equipment required by paragraph (g)(2) of this section, the electrical protective equipment required by paragraph (l)(3) of this section, and the flame-resistant and arc-rated clothing and other protective equipment required by paragraph (l)(8) of this section.\n\n(2)  Fall protection.  (i) Personal fall arrest systems shall meet the requirements of subpart I of this part.\n\n(ii) Personal fall arrest equipment used by employees who are exposed to hazards from flames or electric arcs, as determined by the employer under paragraph (l)(8)(i) of this section, shall be capable of passing a drop test equivalent to that required by paragraph (g)(2)(iii)(L) of this section after exposure to an electric arc with a heat energy of 40\u00b15 cal/cm\n 2 .\n\n(iii) Body belts and positioning straps for work-positioning equipment shall meet the following requirements:\n\n(A) Hardware for body belts and positioning straps shall meet the following requirements:\n\n( 1 ) Hardware shall be made of drop-forged steel, pressed steel, formed steel, or equivalent material.\n\n( 2 ) Hardware shall have a corrosion-resistant finish.\n\n( 3 ) Hardware surfaces shall be smooth and free of sharp edges.\n\n(B) Buckles shall be capable of withstanding an 8.9-kilonewton (2,000-pound-force) tension test with a maximum permanent deformation no greater than 0.4 millimeters (0.0156 inches).\n\n(C) D rings shall be capable of withstanding a 22-kilonewton (5,000-pound-force) tensile test without cracking or breaking.\n\n(D) Snaphooks shall be capable of withstanding a 22-kilonewton (5,000-pound-force) tension test without failure.\n\nDistortion of the snaphook sufficient to release the keeper is considered to be tensile failure of a snaphook.\n\n(E) Top grain leather or leather substitute may be used in the manufacture of body belts and positioning straps; however, leather and leather substitutes may not be used alone as a load-bearing component of the assembly.\n\n(F) Plied fabric used in positioning straps and in load-bearing parts of body belts shall be constructed in such a way that no raw edges are exposed and the plies do not separate.\n\n(G) Positioning straps shall be capable of withstanding the following tests:\n\n( 1 ) A dielectric test of 819.7 volts, AC, per centimeter (25,000 volts per foot) for 3 minutes without visible deterioration;\n\n( 2 ) A leakage test of 98.4 volts, AC, per centimeter (3,000 volts per foot) with a leakage current of no more than 1 mA;\n\nPositioning straps that pass direct-current tests at equivalent voltages are considered as meeting this requirement.\n\n( 3 ) Tension tests of 20 kilonewtons (4,500 pounds-force) for sections free of buckle holes and of 15 kilonewtons (3,500 pounds-force) for sections with buckle holes;\n\n( 4 ) A buckle-tear test with a load of 4.4 kilonewtons (1,000 pounds-force); and\n\n( 5 ) A flammability test in accordance with Table R-2.\n\nTable R-2\u2014Flammability Test\n\n(H) The cushion part of the body belt shall contain no exposed rivets on the inside and shall be at least 76 millimeters (3 inches) in width.\n\n(I) Tool loops shall be situated on the body of a body belt so that the 100 millimeters (4 inches) of the body belt that is in the center of the back, measuring from D ring to D ring, is free of tool loops and any other attachments.\n\n(J) Copper, steel, or equivalent liners shall be used around the bars of D rings to prevent wear between these members and the leather or fabric enclosing them.\n\n(K) Snaphooks shall be of the locking type meeting the following requirements:\n\n( 1 ) The locking mechanism shall first be released, or a destructive force shall be placed on the keeper, before the keeper will open.\n\n( 2 ) A force in the range of 6.7 N (1.5 lbf) to 17.8 N (4 lbf) shall be required to release the locking mechanism.\n\n( 3 ) With the locking mechanism released and with a force applied on the keeper against the face of the nose, the keeper may not begin to open with a force of 11.2 N (2.5 lbf) or less and shall begin to open with a maximum force of 17.8 N (4 lbf).\n\n(L) Body belts and positioning straps shall be capable of withstanding a drop test as follows:\n\n( 1 ) The test mass shall be rigidly constructed of steel or equivalent material with a mass of 100 kg (220.5 lbm). For work-positioning equipment used by employees weighing more than 140 kg (310 lbm) fully equipped, the test mass shall be increased proportionately (that is, the test mass must equal the mass of the equipped worker divided by 1.4).\n\n( 2 ) For body belts, the body belt shall be fitted snugly around the test mass and shall be attached to the test-structure anchorage point by means of a wire rope.\n\n( 3 ) For positioning straps, the strap shall be adjusted to its shortest length possible to accommodate the test and connected to the test-structure anchorage point at one end and to the test mass on the other end.\n\n( 4 ) The test mass shall be dropped an unobstructed distance of 1 meter (39.4 inches) from a supporting structure that will sustain minimal deflection during the test.\n\n( 5 ) Body belts shall successfully arrest the fall of the test mass and shall be capable of supporting the mass after the test.\n\n( 6 ) Positioning straps shall successfully arrest the fall of the test mass without breaking, and the arrest force may not exceed 17.8 kilonewtons (4,000 pounds-force). Additionally, snaphooks on positioning straps may not distort to such an extent that the keeper would release.\n\nWhen used by employees weighing no more than 140 kg (310 lbm) fully equipped, body belts and positioning straps that conform to American Society of Testing and Materials  Standard Specifications for Personal Climbing Equipment,  ASTM F887-12\n e1 , are deemed to be in compliance with paragraph (g)(2)(iii) of this section.\n\n(iv) The following requirements apply to the care and use of personal fall protection equipment.\n\n(A) Work-positioning equipment shall be inspected before use each day to determine that the equipment is in safe working condition. Work-positioning equipment that is not in safe working condition may not be used.\n\nAppendix F to this section contains guidelines for inspecting work-positioning equipment.\n\n(B) Personal fall arrest systems shall be used in accordance with subpart I of this part.\n\nFall protection equipment rigged to arrest falls is considered a fall arrest system and must meet the applicable requirements for the design and use of those systems. Fall protection equipment rigged for work positioning is considered work-positioning equipment and must meet the applicable requirements for the design and use of that equipment.\n\n(C) The employer shall ensure that employees use fall protection systems as follows:\n\n(1) Each employee working from an aerial lift shall use a travel restraint system or a personal fall arrest system.\n\n(2) Except as provided in paragraph (g)(2)(iv)(C)(3) of this section, each employee in elevated locations more than 1.2 meters (4 feet) above the ground on poles, towers, or similar structures shall use a personal fall arrest system, work-positioning equipment, or fall restraint system, as appropriate, if the employer has not provided other fall protection meeting Subpart D of this part.\n\n(3) Until March 31, 2015, a qualified employee climbing or changing location on poles, towers, or similar structures need not use fall protection equipment, unless conditions, such as, but not limited to, ice, high winds, the design of the structure (for example, no provision for holding on with hands), or the presence of contaminants on the structure, could cause the employee to lose his or her grip or footing. On and after April 1, 2015, each qualified employee climbing or changing location on poles, towers, or similar structures must use fall protection equipment unless the employer can demonstrate that climbing or changing location with fall protection is infeasible or creates a greater hazard than climbing or changing location without it.\n\nThese paragraphs apply to structures that support overhead electric power transmission and distribution lines and equipment. They do not apply to portions of buildings, such as loading docks, or to electric equipment, such as transformers and capacitors. Subpart D of this part contains the duty to provide fall protection associated with walking and working surfaces.\n\nUntil the employer ensures that employees are proficient in climbing and the use of fall protection under paragraph (a)(2)(viii) of this section, the employees are not considered \u201cqualified employees\u201d for the purposes of paragraphs (g)(2)(iv)(C)( 2 ) and (g)(2)(iv)(C)( 3 ) of this section. These paragraphs require unqualified employees (including trainees) to use fall protection any time they are more than 1.2 meters (4 feet) above the ground.\n\n(D) On and after April 1, 2015, work-positioning systems shall be rigged so that an employee can free fall no more than 0.6 meters (2 feet).\n\n(E) Anchorages for work-positioning equipment shall be capable of supporting at least twice the potential impact load of an employee's fall, or 13.3 kilonewtons (3,000 pounds-force), whichever is greater.\n\nWood-pole fall-restriction devices meeting American Society of Testing and Materials  Standard Specifications for Personal Climbing Equipment,  ASTM F887-12\n e1 , are deemed to meet the anchorage-strength requirement when they are used in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.\n\n(F) Unless the snaphook is a locking type and designed specifically for the following connections, snaphooks on work-positioning equipment may not be engaged:\n\n( 1 ) Directly to webbing, rope, or wire rope;\n\n( 2 ) To each other;\n\n( 3 ) To a D ring to which another snaphook or other connector is attached;\n\n( 4 ) To a horizontal lifeline; or\n\n( 5 ) To any object that is incompatibly shaped or dimensioned in relation to the snaphook such that accidental disengagement could occur should the connected object sufficiently depress the snaphook keeper to allow release of the object.\n\n(h)  Portable ladders and platforms \u2014(1)  General.  Requirements for portable ladders contained in subpart D of this part apply in addition to the requirements of paragraph (h) of this section, except as specifically noted in paragraph (h)(2) of this section.\n\n(2)  Special ladders and platforms.  Portable ladders used on structures or conductors in conjunction with overhead line work need not meet \u00a7 1910.23(c)(4) and (9). Portable ladders and platforms used on structures or conductors in conjunction with overhead line work shall meet the following requirements:\n\n(i) In the configurations in which they are used, portable ladders and platforms shall be capable of supporting without failure at least 2.5 times the maximum intended load.\n\n(ii) Portable ladders and platforms may not be loaded in excess of the working loads for which they are designed.\n\n(iii) Portable ladders and platforms shall be secured to prevent them from becoming dislodged.\n\n(iv) Portable ladders and platforms may be used only in applications for which they are designed.\n\n(3)  Conductive ladders.  Portable metal ladders and other portable conductive ladders may not be used near exposed energized lines or equipment. However, in specialized high-voltage work, conductive ladders shall be used when the employer demonstrates that nonconductive ladders would present a greater hazard to employees than conductive ladders.\n\n(i)  Hand and portable power equipment \u2014(1)  General.  Paragraph (i)(2) of this section applies to electric equipment connected by cord and plug. Paragraph (i)(3) of this section applies to portable and vehicle-mounted generators used to supply cord- and plug-connected equipment. Paragraph (i)(4) of this section applies to hydraulic and pneumatic tools.\n\n(2)  Cord- and plug-connected equipment.  Cord- and plug-connected equipment not covered by subpart S of this part shall comply with one of the following instead of \u00a7 1910.243(a)(5):\n\n(i) The equipment shall be equipped with a cord containing an equipment grounding conductor connected to the equipment frame and to a means for grounding the other end of the conductor (however, this option may not be used where the introduction of the ground into the work environment increases the hazard to an employee); or\n\n(ii) The equipment shall be of the double-insulated type conforming to subpart S of this part; or\n\n(iii) The equipment shall be connected to the power supply through an isolating transformer with an ungrounded secondary of not more than 50 volts.\n\n(3)  Portable and vehicle-mounted generators.  Portable and vehicle-mounted generators used to supply cord- and plug-connected equipment covered by paragraph (i)(2) of this section shall meet the following requirements:\n\n(i) The generator may only supply equipment located on the generator or the vehicle and cord- and plug-connected equipment through receptacles mounted on the generator or the vehicle.\n\n(ii) The non-current-carrying metal parts of equipment and the equipment grounding conductor terminals of the receptacles shall be bonded to the generator frame.\n\n(iii) For vehicle-mounted generators, the frame of the generator shall be bonded to the vehicle frame.\n\n(iv) Any neutral conductor shall be bonded to the generator frame.\n\n(4)  Hydraulic and pneumatic tools.  (i) Safe operating pressures for hydraulic and pneumatic tools, hoses, valves, pipes, filters, and fittings may not be exceeded.\n\nIf any hazardous defects are present, no operating pressure is safe, and the hydraulic or pneumatic equipment involved may not be used. In the absence of defects, the maximum rated operating pressure is the maximum safe pressure.\n\n(ii) A hydraulic or pneumatic tool used where it may contact exposed energized parts shall be designed and maintained for such use.\n\n(iii) The hydraulic system supplying a hydraulic tool used where it may contact exposed live parts shall provide protection against loss of insulating value, for the voltage involved, due to the formation of a partial vacuum in the hydraulic line.\n\nUse of hydraulic lines that do not have check valves and that have a separation of more than 10.7 meters (35 feet) between the oil reservoir and the upper end of the hydraulic system promotes the formation of a partial vacuum.\n\n(iv) A pneumatic tool used on energized electric lines or equipment, or used where it may contact exposed live parts, shall provide protection against the accumulation of moisture in the air supply.\n\n(v) Pressure shall be released before connections are broken, unless quick-acting, self-closing connectors are used.\n\n(vi) Employers must ensure that employees do not use any part of their bodies to locate, or attempt to stop, a hydraulic leak.\n\n(vii) Hoses may not be kinked.\n\n(j)  Live-line tools \u2014(1)  Design of tools.  Live-line tool rods, tubes, and poles shall be designed and constructed to withstand the following minimum tests:\n\n(i) If the tool is made of fiberglass-reinforced plastic (FRP), it shall withstand 328,100 volts per meter (100,000 volts per foot) of length for 5 minutes, or\n\nLive-line tools using rod and tube that meet ASTM F711-02 (2007),  Standard Specification for Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Rod and Tube Used in Live Line Tools,  are deemed to comply with paragraph (j)(1) of this section.\n\n(ii) If the tool is made of wood, it shall withstand 246,100 volts per meter (75,000 volts per foot) of length for 3 minutes, or\n\n(iii) The tool shall withstand other tests that the employer can demonstrate are equivalent.\n\n(2)  Condition of tools.  (i) Each live-line tool shall be wiped clean and visually inspected for defects before use each day.\n\n(ii) If any defect or contamination that could adversely affect the insulating qualities or mechanical integrity of the live-line tool is present after wiping, the tool shall be removed from service and examined and tested according to paragraph (j)(2)(iii) of this section before being returned to service.\n\n(iii) Live-line tools used for primary employee protection shall be removed from service every 2 years, and whenever required under paragraph (j)(2)(ii) of this section, for examination, cleaning, repair, and testing as follows:\n\n(A) Each tool shall be thoroughly examined for defects.\n\n(B) If a defect or contamination that could adversely affect the insulating qualities or mechanical integrity of the live-line tool is found, the tool shall be repaired and refinished or shall be permanently removed from service. If no such defect or contamination is found, the tool shall be cleaned and waxed.\n\n(C) The tool shall be tested in accordance with paragraphs (j)(2)(iii)(D) and (j)(2)(iii)(E) of this section under the following conditions:\n\n( 1 ) After the tool has been repaired or refinished; and\n\n( 2 ) After the examination if repair or refinishing is not performed, unless the tool is made of FRP rod or foam-filled FRP tube and the employer can demonstrate that the tool has no defects that could cause it to fail during use.\n\n(D) The test method used shall be designed to verify the tool's integrity along its entire working length and, if the tool is made of fiberglass-reinforced plastic, its integrity under wet conditions.\n\n(E) The voltage applied during the tests shall be as follows:\n\n( 1 ) 246,100 volts per meter (75,000 volts per foot) of length for 1 minute if the tool is made of fiberglass, or\n\n( 2 ) 164,000 volts per meter (50,000 volts per foot) of length for 1 minute if the tool is made of wood, or\n\n( 3 ) Other tests that the employer can demonstrate are equivalent.\n\nGuidelines for the examination, cleaning, repairing, and in-service testing of live-line tools are specified in the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers'  IEEE Guide for Maintenance Methods on Energized Power Lines,  IEEE Std 516-2009.\n\n(k)  Materials handling and storage \u2014(1)  General.  Materials handling and storage shall comply with applicable material-handling and material-storage requirements in this part, including those in subpart N of this part.\n\n(2)  Materials storage near energized lines or equipment.  (i) In areas to which access is not restricted to qualified persons only, materials or equipment may not be stored closer to energized lines or exposed energized parts of equipment than the following distances, plus a distance that provides for the maximum sag and side swing of all conductors and for the height and movement of material-handling equipment:\n\n(A) For lines and equipment energized at 50 kilovolts or less, the distance is 3.05 meters (10 feet).\n\n(B) For lines and equipment energized at more than 50 kilovolts, the distance is 3.05 meters (10 feet) plus 0.10 meter (4 inches) for every 10 kilovolts over 50 kilovolts.\n\n(ii) In areas restricted to qualified employees, materials may not be stored within the working space about energized lines or equipment.\n\nParagraphs (u)(1) and (v)(3) of this section specify the size of the working space.\n\n(l)  Working on or near exposed energized parts.  This paragraph applies to work on exposed live parts, or near enough to them to expose the employee to any hazard they present.\n\n(1)  General.  (i) Only qualified employees may work on or with exposed energized lines or parts of equipment.\n\n(ii) Only qualified employees may work in areas containing unguarded, uninsulated energized lines or parts of equipment operating at 50 volts or more.\n\n(iii) Electric lines and equipment shall be considered and treated as energized unless they have been deenergized in accordance with paragraph (d) or (m) of this section.\n\n(2)  At least two employees.  (i) Except as provided in paragraph (l)(2)(ii) of this section, at least two employees shall be present while any employees perform the following types of work:\n\n(A) Installation, removal, or repair of lines energized at more than 600 volts,\n\n(B) Installation, removal, or repair of deenergized lines if an employee is exposed to contact with other parts energized at more than 600 volts,\n\n(C) Installation, removal, or repair of equipment, such as transformers, capacitors, and regulators, if an employee is exposed to contact with parts energized at more than 600 volts,\n\n(D) Work involving the use of mechanical equipment, other than insulated aerial lifts, near parts energized at more than 600 volts, and\n\n(E) Other work that exposes an employee to electrical hazards greater than, or equal to, the electrical hazards posed by operations listed specifically in paragraphs (l)(2)(i)(A) through (l)(2)(i)(D) of this section.\n\n(ii) Paragraph (l)(2)(i) of this section does not apply to the following operations:\n\n(A) Routine circuit switching, when the employer can demonstrate that conditions at the site allow safe performance of this work,\n\n(B) Work performed with live-line tools when the position of the employee is such that he or she is neither within reach of, nor otherwise exposed to contact with, energized parts, and\n\n(C) Emergency repairs to the extent necessary to safeguard the general public.\n\n(3)  Minimum approach distances.  (i) The employer shall establish minimum approach distances no less than the distances computed by Table R-3 for ac systems or Table R-8 for dc systems.\n\n(ii) No later than April 1, 2015, for voltages over 72.5 kilovolts, the employer shall determine the maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, through an engineering analysis or assume a maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, in accordance with Table R-9. When the employer uses portable protective gaps to control the maximum transient overvoltage, the value of the maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, must provide for five standard deviations between the statistical sparkover voltage of the gap and the statistical withstand voltage corresponding to the electrical component of the minimum approach distance. The employer shall make any engineering analysis conducted to determine maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage available upon request to employees and to the Assistant Secretary or designee for examination and copying.\n\nSee appendix B to this section for information on how to calculate the maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, when the employer uses portable protective gaps to reduce maximum transient overvoltages.\n\n(iii) The employer shall ensure that no employee approaches or takes any conductive object closer to exposed energized parts than the employer's established minimum approach distance, unless:\n\n(A) The employee is insulated from the energized part (rubber insulating gloves or rubber insulating gloves and sleeves worn in accordance with paragraph (l)(4) of this section constitutes insulation of the employee from the energized part upon which the employee is working provided that the employee has control of the part in a manner sufficient to prevent exposure to uninsulated portions of the employee's body), or\n\n(B) The energized part is insulated from the employee and from any other conductive object at a different potential, or\n\n(C) The employee is insulated from any other exposed conductive object in accordance with the requirements for live-line barehand work in paragraph (q)(3) of this section.\n\n(4)  Type of insulation.  (i) When an employee uses rubber insulating gloves as insulation from energized parts (under paragraph (l)(3)(iii)(A) of this section), the employer shall ensure that the employee also uses rubber insulating sleeves. However, an employee need not use rubber insulating sleeves if:\n\n(A) Exposed energized parts on which the employee is not working are insulated from the employee; and\n\n(B) When installing insulation for purposes of paragraph (l)(4)(i)(A) of this section, the employee installs the insulation from a position that does not expose his or her upper arm to contact with other energized parts.\n\n(ii) When an employee uses rubber insulating gloves or rubber insulating gloves and sleeves as insulation from energized parts (under paragraph (l)(3)(iii)(A) of this section), the employer shall ensure that the employee:\n\n(A) Puts on the rubber insulating gloves and sleeves in a position where he or she cannot reach into the minimum approach distance, established by the employer under paragraph (l)(3)(i) of this section; and\n\n(B) Does not remove the rubber insulating gloves and sleeves until he or she is in a position where he or she cannot reach into the minimum approach distance, established by the employer under paragraph (l)(3)(i) of this section.\n\n(5)  Working position.  (i) The employer shall ensure that each employee, to the extent that other safety-related conditions at the worksite permit, works in a position from which a slip or shock will not bring the employee's body into contact with exposed, uninsulated parts energized at a potential different from the employee's.\n\n(ii) When an employee performs work near exposed parts energized at more than 600 volts, but not more than 72.5 kilovolts, and is not wearing rubber insulating gloves, being protected by insulating equipment covering the energized parts, performing work using live-line tools, or performing live-line barehand work under paragraph (q)(3) of this section, the employee shall work from a position where he or she cannot reach into the minimum approach distance, established by the employer under paragraph (l)(3)(i) of this section.\n\n(6)  Making connections.  The employer shall ensure that employees make connections as follows:\n\n(i) In connecting deenergized equipment or lines to an energized circuit by means of a conducting wire or device, an employee shall first attach the wire to the deenergized part;\n\n(ii) When disconnecting equipment or lines from an energized circuit by means of a conducting wire or device, an employee shall remove the source end first; and\n\n(iii) When lines or equipment are connected to or disconnected from energized circuits, an employee shall keep loose conductors away from exposed energized parts.\n\n(7)  Conductive articles.  When an employee performs work within reaching distance of exposed energized parts of equipment, the employer shall ensure that the employee removes or renders nonconductive all exposed conductive articles, such as keychains or watch chains, rings, or wrist watches or bands, unless such articles do not increase the hazards associated with contact with the energized parts.\n\n(8)  Protection from flames and electric arcs.  (i) The employer shall assess the workplace to identify employees exposed to hazards from flames or from electric arcs.\n\n(ii) For each employee exposed to hazards from electric arcs, the employer shall make a reasonable estimate of the incident heat energy to which the employee would be exposed.\n\nAppendix E to this section provides guidance on estimating available heat energy. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration will deem employers following the guidance in appendix E to this section to be in compliance with paragraph (l)(8)(ii) of this section. An employer may choose a method of calculating incident heat energy not included in appendix E to this section if the chosen method reasonably predicts the incident energy to which the employee would be exposed.\n\nThis paragraph does not require the employer to estimate the incident heat energy exposure for every job task performed by each employee. The employer may make broad estimates that cover multiple system areas provided the employer uses reasonable assumptions about the energy-exposure distribution throughout the system and provided the estimates represent the maximum employee exposure for those areas. For example, the employer could estimate the heat energy just outside a substation feeding a radial distribution system and use that estimate for all jobs performed on that radial system.\n\n(iii) The employer shall ensure that each employee who is exposed to hazards from flames or electric arcs does not wear clothing that could melt onto his or her skin or that could ignite and continue to burn when exposed to flames or the heat energy estimated under paragraph (l)(8)(ii) of this section.\n\nThis paragraph prohibits clothing made from acetate, nylon, polyester, rayon and polypropylene, either alone or in blends, unless the employer demonstrates that the fabric has been treated to withstand the conditions that may be encountered by the employee or that the employee wears the clothing in such a manner as to eliminate the hazard involved.\n\n(iv) The employer shall ensure that the outer layer of clothing worn by an employee, except for clothing not required to be arc rated under paragraphs (l)(8)(v)(A) through (l)(8)(v)(E) of this section, is flame resistant under any of the following conditions:\n\n(A) The employee is exposed to contact with energized circuit parts operating at more than 600 volts,\n\n(B) An electric arc could ignite flammable material in the work area that, in turn, could ignite the employee's clothing,\n\n(C) Molten metal or electric arcs from faulted conductors in the work area could ignite the employee's clothing, or\n\nThis paragraph does not apply to conductors that are capable of carrying, without failure, the maximum available fault current for the time the circuit protective devices take to interrupt the fault.\n\n(D) The incident heat energy estimated under paragraph (l)(8)(ii) of this section exceeds 2.0 cal/cm\n 2 .\n\n(v) The employer shall ensure that each employee exposed to hazards from electric arcs wears protective clothing and other protective equipment with an arc rating greater than or equal to the heat energy estimated under paragraph (l)(8)(ii) of this section whenever that estimate exceeds 2.0 cal/cm\n 2 . This protective equipment shall cover the employee's entire body, except as follows:\n\n(A) Arc-rated protection is not necessary for the employee's hands when the employee is wearing rubber insulating gloves with protectors or, if the estimated incident energy is no more than 14 cal/cm\n 2 , heavy-duty leather work gloves with a weight of at least 407 gm/m\n 2  (12 oz/yd\n 2 ),\n\n(B) Arc-rated protection is not necessary for the employee's feet when the employee is wearing heavy-duty work shoes or boots,\n\n(C) Arc-rated protection is not necessary for the employee's head when the employee is wearing head protection meeting \u00a7 1910.135 if the estimated incident energy is less than 9 cal/cm\n 2  for exposures involving single-phase arcs in open air or 5 cal/cm\n 2  for other exposures,\n\n(D) The protection for the employee's head may consist of head protection meeting \u00a7 1910.135 and a faceshield with a minimum arc rating of 8 cal/cm\n 2  if the estimated incident-energy exposure is less than 13 cal/cm\n 2  for exposures involving single-phase arcs in open air or 9 cal/cm\n 2  for other exposures, and\n\n(E) For exposures involving single-phase arcs in open air, the arc rating for the employee's head and face protection may be 4 cal/cm\n 2  less than the estimated incident energy.\n\nSee appendix E to this section for further information on the selection of appropriate protection.\n\n(vi) Dates. (A) The obligation in paragraph (l)(8)(ii) of this section for the employer to make reasonable estimates of incident energy commences January 1, 2015.\n\n(B) The obligation in paragraph (l)(8)(iv)(D) of this section for the employer to ensure that the outer layer of clothing worn by an employee is flame-resistant when the estimated incident heat energy exceeds 2.0 cal/cm\n 2  commences April 1, 2015.\n\n(C) The obligation in paragraph (l)(8)(v) of this section for the employer to ensure that each employee exposed to hazards from electric arcs wears the required arc-rated protective equipment commences April 1, 2015.\n\n(9)  Fuse handling.  When an employee must install or remove fuses with one or both terminals energized at more than 300 volts, or with exposed parts energized at more than 50 volts, the employer shall ensure that the employee uses tools or gloves rated for the voltage. When an employee installs or removes expulsion-type fuses with one or both terminals energized at more than 300 volts, the employer shall ensure that the employee wears eye protection meeting the requirements of subpart I of this part, uses a tool rated for the voltage, and is clear of the exhaust path of the fuse barrel.\n\n(10)  Covered (noninsulated) conductors.  The requirements of this section that pertain to the hazards of exposed live parts also apply when an employee performs work in proximity to covered (noninsulated) wires.\n\n(11)  Non-current-carrying metal parts.  Non-current-carrying metal parts of equipment or devices, such as transformer cases and circuit-breaker housings, shall be treated as energized at the highest voltage to which these parts are exposed, unless the employer inspects the installation and determines that these parts are grounded before employees begin performing the work.\n\n(12)  Opening and closing circuits under load.  (i) The employer shall ensure that devices used by employees to open circuits under load conditions are designed to interrupt the current involved.\n\n(ii) The employer shall ensure that devices used by employees to close circuits under load conditions are designed to safely carry the current involved.\n\nTable R-3\u2014AC Live-Line Work Minimum Approach Distance\n\n[The minimum approach distance (MAD; in meters) shall conform to the following equations.]\n\n1  Employers may use the minimum approach distances in Table R-6. If the worksite is at an elevation of more than 900 meters (3,000 feet), see footnote 1 to Table R-6.\n\n2  Employers may use the minimum approach distances in Table R-7, except that the employer may not use the minimum approach distances in Table R-7 for phase-to-phase exposures if an insulated tool spans the gap or if any large conductive object is in the gap. If the worksite is at an elevation of more than 900 meters (3,000 feet), see footnote 1 to Table R-7. Employers may use the minimum approach distances in Table 14 through Table 21 in appendix B to this section, which calculated MAD for various values of  T,  provided the employer follows the notes to those tables.\n\n3  Use the equations for phase-to-ground exposures (with  V Peak  for phase-to-phase exposures) unless the employer can demonstrate that no insulated tool spans the gap and that no large conductive object is in the gap.\n\n4  Until March 31, 2015, employers may use the minimum approach distances in Table 6 through Table 13 in Appendix B to this section.\n\nTable R-4\u2014Electrical Component of the Minimum Approach Distance at 5.1 to 72.5 kV\n\n[D; In meters]\n\nTable R-5\u2014Altitude Correction Factor\n\nTable R-6\u2014Alternative Minimum Approach Distances for Voltages of 72.5 kV and Less \n 1\n\n1  Employers may use the minimum approach distances in this table provided the worksite is at an elevation of 900 meters (3,000 feet) or less. If employees will be working at elevations greater than 900 meters (3,000 feet) above mean sea level, the employer shall determine minimum approach distances by multiplying the distances in this table by the correction factor in Table R-5 corresponding to the altitude of the work.\n\n2  For single-phase systems, use voltage-to-ground.\n\nTable R-7\u2014Alternative Minimum Approach Distances for Voltages of More Than 72.5 kV\n 1  \n 2  \n 3\n\n1  Employers may use the minimum approach distances in this table provided the worksite is at an elevation of 900 meters (3,000 feet) or less. If employees will be working at elevations greater than 900 meters (3,000 feet) above mean sea level, the employer shall determine minimum approach distances by multiplying the distances in this table by the correction factor in Table R-5 corresponding to the altitude of the work.\n\n2  Employers may use the phase-to-phase minimum approach distances in this table provided that no insulated tool spans the gap and no large conductive object is in the gap.\n\n3  The clear live-line tool distance shall equal or exceed the values for the indicated voltage ranges.\n\nTable R-8\u2014DC Live-Line Minimum Approach Distance with Overvoltage Factor \n 1\n\n[In meters]\n\n1  The distances specified in this table are for air, bare-hand, and live-line tool conditions. If employees will be working at elevations greater than 900 meters (3,000 feet) above mean sea level, the employer shall determine minimum approach distances by multiplying the distances in this table by the correction factor in Table R-5 corresponding to the altitude of the work.\n\nTable R-9\u2014Assumed Maximum Per-Unit Transient Overvoltage\n\n(m)  Deenergizing lines and equipment for employee protection \u2014(1)  Application.  Paragraph (m) of this section applies to the deenergizing of transmission and distribution lines and equipment for the purpose of protecting employees. See paragraph (d) of this section for requirements on the control of hazardous energy sources used in the generation of electric energy. Conductors and parts of electric equipment that have been deenergized under procedures other than those required by paragraph (d) or (m) of this section, as applicable, shall be treated as energized.\n\n(2)  General.  (i) If a system operator is in charge of the lines or equipment and their means of disconnection, the employer shall designate one employee in the crew to be in charge of the clearance and shall comply with all of the requirements of paragraph (m)(3) of this section in the order specified.\n\n(ii) If no system operator is in charge of the lines or equipment and their means of disconnection, the employer shall designate one employee in the crew to be in charge of the clearance and to perform the functions that the system operator would otherwise perform under paragraph (m) of this section. All of the requirements of paragraph (m)(3) of this section apply, in the order specified, except as provided in paragraph (m)(2)(iii) of this section.\n\n(iii) If only one crew will be working on the lines or equipment and if the means of disconnection is accessible and visible to, and under the sole control of, the employee in charge of the clearance, paragraphs (m)(3)(i), (m)(3)(iii), and (m)(3)(v) of this section do not apply. Additionally, the employer does not need to use the tags required by the remaining provisions of paragraph (m)(3) of this section.\n\n(iv) If two or more crews will be working on the same lines or equipment, then:\n\n(A) The crews shall coordinate their activities under paragraph (m) of this section with a single employee in charge of the clearance for all of the crews and follow the requirements of paragraph (m) of this section as if all of the employees formed a single crew, or\n\n(B) Each crew shall independently comply with paragraph (m) of this section and, if there is no system operator in charge of the lines or equipment, shall have separate tags and coordinate deenergizing and reenergizing the lines and equipment with the other crews.\n\n(v) The employer shall render any disconnecting means that are accessible to individuals outside the employer's control (for example, the general public) inoperable while the disconnecting means are open for the purpose of protecting employees.\n\n(3)  Deenergizing lines and equipment.  (i) The employee that the employer designates pursuant to paragraph (m)(2) of this section as being in charge of the clearance shall make a request of the system operator to deenergize the particular section of line or equipment. The designated employee becomes the employee in charge (as this term is used in paragraph (m)(3) of this section) and is responsible for the clearance.\n\n(ii) The employer shall ensure that all switches, disconnectors, jumpers, taps, and other means through which known sources of electric energy may be supplied to the particular lines and equipment to be deenergized are open. The employer shall render such means inoperable, unless its design does not so permit, and then ensure that such means are tagged to indicate that employees are at work.\n\n(iii) The employer shall ensure that automatically and remotely controlled switches that could cause the opened disconnecting means to close are also tagged at the points of control. The employer shall render the automatic or remote control feature inoperable, unless its design does not so permit.\n\n(iv) The employer need not use the tags mentioned in paragraphs (m)(3)(ii) and (m)(3)(iii) of this section on a network protector for work on the primary feeder for the network protector's associated network transformer when the employer can demonstrate all of the following conditions:\n\n(A) Every network protector is maintained so that it will immediately trip open if closed when a primary conductor is deenergized;\n\n(B) Employees cannot manually place any network protector in a closed position without the use of tools, and any manual override position is blocked, locked, or otherwise disabled; and\n\n(C) The employer has procedures for manually overriding any network protector that incorporate provisions for determining, before anyone places a network protector in a closed position, that: The line connected to the network protector is not deenergized for the protection of any employee working on the line; and (if the line connected to the network protector is not deenergized for the protection of any employee working on the line) the primary conductors for the network protector are energized.\n\n(v) Tags shall prohibit operation of the disconnecting means and shall indicate that employees are at work.\n\n(vi) After the applicable requirements in paragraphs (m)(3)(i) through (m)(3)(v) of this section have been followed and the system operator gives a clearance to the employee in charge, the employer shall ensure that the lines and equipment are deenergized by testing the lines and equipment to be worked with a device designed to detect voltage.\n\n(vii) The employer shall ensure the installation of protective grounds as required by paragraph (n) of this section.\n\n(viii) After the applicable requirements of paragraphs (m)(3)(i) through (m)(3)(vii) of this section have been followed, the lines and equipment involved may be considered deenergized.\n\n(ix) To transfer the clearance, the employee in charge (or the employee's supervisor if the employee in charge must leave the worksite due to illness or other emergency) shall inform the system operator and employees in the crew; and the new employee in charge shall be responsible for the clearance.\n\n(x) To release a clearance, the employee in charge shall:\n\n(A) Notify each employee under that clearance of the pending release of the clearance;\n\n(B) Ensure that all employees under that clearance are clear of the lines and equipment;\n\n(C) Ensure that all protective grounds protecting employees under that clearance have been removed; and\n\n(D) Report this information to the system operator and then release the clearance.\n\n(xi) Only the employee in charge who requested the clearance may release the clearance, unless the employer transfers responsibility under paragraph (m)(3)(ix) of this section.\n\n(xii) No one may remove tags without the release of the associated clearance as specified under paragraphs (m)(3)(x) and (m)(3)(xi) of this section.\n\n(xiii) The employer shall ensure that no one initiates action to reenergize the lines or equipment at a point of disconnection until all protective grounds have been removed, all crews working on the lines or equipment release their clearances, all employees are clear of the lines and equipment, and all protective tags are removed from that point of disconnection.\n\n(n)  Grounding for the protection of employees \u2014(1)  Application.  Paragraph (n) of this section applies to grounding of generation, transmission, and distribution lines and equipment for the purpose of protecting employees. Paragraph (n)(4) of this section also applies to protective grounding of other equipment as required elsewhere in this section.\n\nThis paragraph covers grounding of generation, transmission, and distribution lines and equipment when this section requires protective grounding and whenever the employer chooses to ground such lines and equipment for the protection of employees.\n\n(2)  General.  For any employee to work transmission and distribution lines or equipment as deenergized, the employer shall ensure that the lines or equipment are deenergized under the provisions of paragraph (m) of this section and shall ensure proper grounding of the lines or equipment as specified in paragraphs (n)(3) through (n)(8) of this section. However, if the employer can demonstrate that installation of a ground is impracticable or that the conditions resulting from the installation of a ground would present greater hazards to employees than working without grounds, the lines and equipment may be treated as deenergized provided that the employer establishes that all of the following conditions apply:\n\n(i) The employer ensures that the lines and equipment are deenergized under the provisions of paragraph (m) of this section.\n\n(ii) There is no possibility of contact with another energized source.\n\n(iii) The hazard of induced voltage is not present.\n\n(3)  Equipotential zone.  Temporary protective grounds shall be placed at such locations and arranged in such a manner that the employer can demonstrate will prevent each employee from being exposed to hazardous differences in electric potential.\n\nAppendix C to this section contains guidelines for establishing the equipotential zone required by this paragraph. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration will deem grounding practices meeting these guidelines as complying with paragraph (n)(3) of this section.\n\n(4)  Protective grounding equipment.  (i) Protective grounding equipment shall be capable of conducting the maximum fault current that could flow at the point of grounding for the time necessary to clear the fault.\n\n(ii) Protective grounding equipment shall have an ampacity greater than or equal to that of No. 2 AWG copper.\n\n(iii) Protective grounds shall have an impedance low enough so that they do not delay the operation of protective devices in case of accidental energizing of the lines or equipment.\n\nAmerican Society for Testing and Materials  Standard Specifications for Temporary Protective Grounds to Be Used on De-Energized Electric Power Lines and Equipment,  ASTM F855-09, contains guidelines for protective grounding equipment. The Institute of Electrical Engineers  Guide for Protective Grounding of Power Lines,  IEEE Std 1048-2003, contains guidelines for selecting and installing protective grounding equipment.\n\n(5)  Testing.  The employer shall ensure that, unless a previously installed ground is present, employees test lines and equipment and verify the absence of nominal voltage before employees install any ground on those lines or that equipment.\n\n(6)  Connecting and removing grounds.  (i) The employer shall ensure that, when an employee attaches a ground to a line or to equipment, the employee attaches the ground-end connection first and then attaches the other end by means of a live-line tool. For lines or equipment operating at 600 volts or less, the employer may permit the employee to use insulating equipment other than a live-line tool if the employer ensures that the line or equipment is not energized at the time the ground is connected or if the employer can demonstrate that each employee is protected from hazards that may develop if the line or equipment is energized.\n\n(ii) The employer shall ensure that, when an employee removes a ground, the employee removes the grounding device from the line or equipment using a live-line tool before he or she removes the ground-end connection. For lines or equipment operating at 600 volts or less, the employer may permit the employee to use insulating equipment other than a live-line tool if the employer ensures that the line or equipment is not energized at the time the ground is disconnected or if the employer can demonstrate that each employee is protected from hazards that may develop if the line or equipment is energized.\n\n(7)  Additional precautions.  The employer shall ensure that, when an employee performs work on a cable at a location remote from the cable terminal, the cable is not grounded at the cable terminal if there is a possibility of hazardous transfer of potential should a fault occur.\n\n(8)  Removal of grounds for test.  The employer may permit employees to remove grounds temporarily during tests. During the test procedure, the employer shall ensure that each employee uses insulating equipment, shall isolate each employee from any hazards involved, and shall implement any additional measures necessary to protect each exposed employee in case the previously grounded lines and equipment become energized.\n\n(o)  Testing and test facilities \u2014(1)  Application.  Paragraph (o) of this section provides for safe work practices for high-voltage and high-power testing performed in laboratories, shops, and substations, and in the field and on electric transmission and distribution lines and equipment. It applies only to testing involving interim measurements using high voltage, high power, or combinations of high voltage and high power, and not to testing involving continuous measurements as in routine metering, relaying, and normal line work.\n\nOSHA considers routine inspection and maintenance measurements made by qualified employees to be routine line work not included in the scope of paragraph (o) of this section, provided that the hazards related to the use of intrinsic high-voltage or high-power sources require only the normal precautions associated with routine work specified in the other paragraphs of this section. Two typical examples of such excluded test work procedures are \u201cphasing-out\u201d testing and testing for a \u201cno-voltage\u201d condition.\n\n(2)  General requirements.  (i) The employer shall establish and enforce work practices for the protection of each worker from the hazards of high-voltage or high-power testing at all test areas, temporary and permanent. Such work practices shall include, as a minimum, test area safeguarding, grounding, the safe use of measuring and control circuits, and a means providing for periodic safety checks of field test areas.\n\n(ii) The employer shall ensure that each employee, upon initial assignment to the test area, receives training in safe work practices, with retraining provided as required by paragraph (a)(2) of this section.\n\n(3)  Safeguarding of test areas.  (i) The employer shall provide safeguarding within test areas to control access to test equipment or to apparatus under test that could become energized as part of the testing by either direct or inductive coupling and to prevent accidental employee contact with energized parts.\n\n(ii) The employer shall guard permanent test areas with walls, fences, or other barriers designed to keep employees out of the test areas.\n\n(iii) In field testing, or at a temporary test site not guarded by permanent fences and gates, the employer shall ensure the use of one of the following means to prevent employees without authorization from entering:\n\n(A) Distinctively colored safety tape supported approximately waist high with safety signs attached to it,\n\n(B) A barrier or barricade that limits access to the test area to a degree equivalent, physically and visually, to the barricade specified in paragraph (o)(3)(iii)(A) of this section, or\n\n(C) One or more test observers stationed so that they can monitor the entire area.\n\n(iv) The employer shall ensure the removal of the safeguards required by paragraph (o)(3)(iii) of this section when employees no longer need the protection afforded by the safeguards.\n\n(4)  Grounding practices.  (i) The employer shall establish and implement safe grounding practices for the test facility.\n\n(A) The employer shall maintain at ground potential all conductive parts accessible to the test operator while the equipment is operating at high voltage.\n\n(B) Wherever ungrounded terminals of test equipment or apparatus under test may be present, they shall be treated as energized until tests demonstrate that they are deenergized.\n\n(ii) The employer shall ensure either that visible grounds are applied automatically, or that employees using properly insulated tools manually apply visible grounds, to the high-voltage circuits after they are deenergized and before any employee performs work on the circuit or on the item or apparatus under test. Common ground connections shall be solidly connected to the test equipment and the apparatus under test.\n\n(iii) In high-power testing, the employer shall provide an isolated ground-return conductor system designed to prevent the intentional passage of current, with its attendant voltage rise, from occurring in the ground grid or in the earth. However, the employer need not provide an isolated ground-return conductor if the employer can demonstrate that both of the following conditions exist:\n\n(A) The employer cannot provide an isolated ground-return conductor due to the distance of the test site from the electric energy source, and\n\n(B) The employer protects employees from any hazardous step and touch potentials that may develop during the test.\n\nSee appendix C to this section for information on measures that employers can take to protect employees from hazardous step and touch potentials.\n\n(iv) For tests in which using the equipment grounding conductor in the equipment power cord to ground the test equipment would result in greater hazards to test personnel or prevent the taking of satisfactory measurements, the employer may use a ground clearly indicated in the test set-up if the employer can demonstrate that this ground affords protection for employees equivalent to the protection afforded by an equipment grounding conductor in the power supply cord.\n\n(v) The employer shall ensure that, when any employee enters the test area after equipment is deenergized, a ground is placed on the high-voltage terminal and any other exposed terminals.\n\n(A) Before any employee applies a direct ground, the employer shall discharge high capacitance equipment through a resistor rated for the available energy.\n\n(B) A direct ground shall be applied to the exposed terminals after the stored energy drops to a level at which it is safe to do so.\n\n(vi) If the employer uses a test trailer or test vehicle in field testing, its chassis shall be grounded. The employer shall protect each employee against hazardous touch potentials with respect to the vehicle, instrument panels, and other conductive parts accessible to employees with bonding, insulation, or isolation.\n\n(5)  Control and measuring circuits.  (i) The employer may not run control wiring, meter connections, test leads, or cables from a test area unless contained in a grounded metallic sheath and terminated in a grounded metallic enclosure or unless the employer takes other precautions that it can demonstrate will provide employees with equivalent safety.\n\n(ii) The employer shall isolate meters and other instruments with accessible terminals or parts from test personnel to protect against hazards that could arise should such terminals and parts become energized during testing. If the employer provides this isolation by locating test equipment in metal compartments with viewing windows, the employer shall provide interlocks to interrupt the power supply when someone opens the compartment cover.\n\n(iii) The employer shall protect temporary wiring and its connections against damage, accidental interruptions, and other hazards. To the maximum extent possible, the employer shall keep signal, control, ground, and power cables separate from each other.\n\n(iv) If any employee will be present in the test area during testing, a test observer shall be present. The test observer shall be capable of implementing the immediate deenergizing of test circuits for safety purposes.\n\n(6)  Safety check.  (i) Safety practices governing employee work at temporary or field test areas shall provide, at the beginning of each series of tests, for a routine safety check of such test areas.\n\n(ii) The test operator in charge shall conduct these routine safety checks before each series of tests and shall verify at least the following conditions:\n\n(A) Barriers and safeguards are in workable condition and placed properly to isolate hazardous areas;\n\n(B) System test status signals, if used, are in operable condition;\n\n(C) Clearly marked test-power disconnects are readily available in an emergency;\n\n(D) Ground connections are clearly identifiable;\n\n(E) Personal protective equipment is provided and used as required by Subpart I of this part and by this section; and\n\n(F) Proper separation between signal, ground, and power cables.\n\n(p)  Mechanical equipment \u2014(1)  General requirements.  (i) The critical safety components of mechanical elevating and rotating equipment shall receive a thorough visual inspection before use on each shift.\n\nCritical safety components of mechanical elevating and rotating equipment are components for which failure would result in free fall or free rotation of the boom.\n\n(ii) No motor vehicle or earthmoving or compacting equipment having an obstructed view to the rear may be operated on off-highway jobsites where any employee is exposed to the hazards created by the moving vehicle, unless:\n\n(A) The vehicle has a reverse signal alarm audible above the surrounding noise level, or\n\n(B) The vehicle is backed up only when a designated employee signals that it is safe to do so.\n\n(iii) Rubber-tired self-propelled scrapers, rubber-tired front-end loaders, rubber-tired dozers, wheel-type agricultural and industrial tractors, crawler-type tractors, crawler-type loaders, and motor graders, with or without attachments, shall have rollover protective structures that meet the requirements of Subpart W of Part 1926 of this chapter.\n\n(iv) The operator of an electric line truck may not leave his or her position at the controls while a load is suspended, unless the employer can demonstrate that no employee (including the operator) is endangered.\n\n(2)  Outriggers.  (i) Mobile equipment, if provided with outriggers, shall be operated with the outriggers extended and firmly set, except as provided in paragraph (p)(2)(iii) of this section.\n\n(ii) Outriggers may not be extended or retracted outside of the clear view of the operator unless all employees are outside the range of possible equipment motion.\n\n(iii) If the work area or the terrain precludes the use of outriggers, the equipment may be operated only within its maximum load ratings specified by the equipment manufacturer for the particular configuration of the equipment without outriggers.\n\n(3)  Applied loads.  Mechanical equipment used to lift or move lines or other material shall be used within its maximum load rating and other design limitations for the conditions under which the mechanical equipment is being used.\n\n(4)  Operations near energized lines or equipment.  (i) Mechanical equipment shall be operated so that the minimum approach distances, established by the employer under paragraph (l)(3)(i) of this section, are maintained from exposed energized lines and equipment. However, the insulated portion of an aerial lift operated by a qualified employee in the lift is exempt from this requirement if the applicable minimum approach distance is maintained between the uninsulated portions of the aerial lift and exposed objects having a different electrical potential.\n\n(ii) A designated employee other than the equipment operator shall observe the approach distance to exposed lines and equipment and provide timely warnings before the minimum approach distance required by paragraph (p)(4)(i) of this section is reached, unless the employer can demonstrate that the operator can accurately determine that the minimum approach distance is being maintained.\n\n(iii) If, during operation of the mechanical equipment, that equipment could become energized, the operation also shall comply with at least one of paragraphs (p)(4)(iii)(A) through (p)(4)(iii)(C) of this section.\n\n(A) The energized lines or equipment exposed to contact shall be covered with insulating protective material that will withstand the type of contact that could be made during the operation.\n\n(B) The mechanical equipment shall be insulated for the voltage involved. The mechanical equipment shall be positioned so that its uninsulated portions cannot approach the energized lines or equipment any closer than the minimum approach distances, established by the employer under paragraph (l)(3)(i) of this section.\n\n(C) Each employee shall be protected from hazards that could arise from mechanical equipment contact with energized lines or equipment. The measures used shall ensure that employees will not be exposed to hazardous differences in electric potential. Unless the employer can demonstrate that the methods in use protect each employee from the hazards that could arise if the mechanical equipment contacts the energized line or equipment, the measures used shall include all of the following techniques:\n\n( 1 ) Using the best available ground to minimize the time the lines or electric equipment remain energized,\n\n( 2 ) Bonding mechanical equipment together to minimize potential differences,\n\n( 3 ) Providing ground mats to extend areas of equipotential, and\n\n( 4 ) Employing insulating protective equipment or barricades to guard against any remaining hazardous electrical potential differences.\n\nAppendix C to this section contains information on hazardous step and touch potentials and on methods of protecting employees from hazards resulting from such potentials.\n\n(q)  Overhead lines and live-line barehand work.  This paragraph provides additional requirements for work performed on or near overhead lines and equipment and for live-line barehand work.\n\n(1)  General.  (i) Before allowing employees to subject elevated structures, such as poles or towers, to such stresses as climbing or the installation or removal of equipment may impose, the employer shall ascertain that the structures are capable of sustaining the additional or unbalanced stresses. If the pole or other structure cannot withstand the expected loads, the employer shall brace or otherwise support the pole or structure so as to prevent failure.\n\nAppendix D to this section contains test methods that employers can use in ascertaining whether a wood pole is capable of sustaining the forces imposed by an employee climbing the pole. This paragraph also requires the employer to ascertain that the pole can sustain all other forces imposed by the work employees will perform.\n\n(ii) When a pole is set, moved, or removed near an exposed energized overhead conductor, the pole may not contact the conductor.\n\n(iii) When a pole is set, moved, or removed near an exposed energized overhead conductor, the employer shall ensure that each employee wears electrical protective equipment or uses insulated devices when handling the pole and that no employee contacts the pole with uninsulated parts of his or her body.\n\n(iv) To protect employees from falling into holes used for placing poles, the employer shall physically guard the holes, or ensure that employees attend the holes, whenever anyone is working nearby.\n\n(2)  Installing and removing overhead lines.  The following provisions apply to the installation and removal of overhead conductors or cable (overhead lines).\n\n(i) When lines that employees are installing or removing can contact energized parts, the employer shall use the tension-stringing method, barriers, or other equivalent measures to minimize the possibility that conductors and cables the employees are installing or removing will contact energized power lines or equipment.\n\n(ii) For conductors, cables, and pulling and tensioning equipment, the employer shall provide the protective measures required by paragraph (p)(4)(iii) of this section when employees are installing or removing a conductor or cable close enough to energized conductors that any of the following failures could energize the pulling or tensioning equipment or the conductor or cable being installed or removed:\n\n(A) Failure of the pulling or tensioning equipment,\n\n(B) Failure of the conductor or cable being pulled, or\n\n(C) Failure of the previously installed lines or equipment.\n\n(iii) If the conductors that employees are installing or removing cross over energized conductors in excess of 600 volts and if the design of the circuit-interrupting devices protecting the lines so permits, the employer shall render inoperable the automatic-reclosing feature of these devices.\n\n(iv) Before employees install lines parallel to existing energized lines, the employer shall make a determination of the approximate voltage to be induced in the new lines, or work shall proceed on the assumption that the induced voltage is hazardous. Unless the employer can demonstrate that the lines that employees are installing are not subject to the induction of a hazardous voltage or unless the lines are treated as energized, temporary protective grounds shall be placed at such locations and arranged in such a manner that the employer can demonstrate will prevent exposure of each employee to hazardous differences in electric potential.\n\nIf the employer takes no precautions to protect employees from hazards associated with involuntary reactions from electric shock, a hazard exists if the induced voltage is sufficient to pass a current of 1 milliampere through a 500-ohm resistor. If the employer protects employees from injury due to involuntary reactions from electric shock, a hazard exists if the resultant current would be more than 6 milliamperes.\n\nAppendix C to this section contains guidelines for protecting employees from hazardous differences in electric potential as required by this paragraph.\n\n(v) Reel-handling equipment, including pulling and tensioning devices, shall be in safe operating condition and shall be leveled and aligned.\n\n(vi) The employer shall ensure that employees do not exceed load ratings of stringing lines, pulling lines, conductor grips, load-bearing hardware and accessories, rigging, and hoists.\n\n(vii) The employer shall repair or replace defective pulling lines and accessories.\n\n(viii) The employer shall ensure that employees do not use conductor grips on wire rope unless the manufacturer specifically designed the grip for this application.\n\n(ix) The employer shall ensure that employees maintain reliable communications, through two-way radios or other equivalent means, between the reel tender and the pulling-rig operator.\n\n(x) Employees may operate the pulling rig only when it is safe to do so.\n\nExamples of unsafe conditions include: employees in locations prohibited by paragraph (q)(2)(xi) of this section, conductor and pulling line hang-ups, and slipping of the conductor grip.\n\n(xi) While a power-driven device is pulling the conductor or pulling line and the conductor or pulling line is in motion, the employer shall ensure that employees are not directly under overhead operations or on the crossarm, except as necessary for the employees to guide the stringing sock or board over or through the stringing sheave.\n\n(3)  Live-line barehand work.  In addition to other applicable provisions contained in this section, the following requirements apply to live-line barehand work:\n\n(i) Before an employee uses or supervises the use of the live-line barehand technique on energized circuits, the employer shall ensure that the employee completes training conforming to paragraph (a)(2) of this section in the technique and in the safety requirements of paragraph (q)(3) of this section.\n\n(ii) Before any employee uses the live-line barehand technique on energized high-voltage conductors or parts, the employer shall ascertain the following information in addition to information about other existing conditions required by paragraph (a)(4) of this section:\n\n(A) The nominal voltage rating of the circuit on which employees will perform the work,\n\n(B) The clearances to ground of lines and other energized parts on which employees will perform the work, and\n\n(C) The voltage limitations of equipment employees will use.\n\n(iii) The employer shall ensure that the insulated equipment, insulated tools, and aerial devices and platforms used by employees are designed, tested, and made for live-line barehand work.\n\n(iv) The employer shall ensure that employees keep tools and equipment clean and dry while they are in use.\n\n(v) The employer shall render inoperable the automatic-reclosing feature of circuit-interrupting devices protecting the lines if the design of the devices permits.\n\n(vi) The employer shall ensure that employees do not perform work when adverse weather conditions would make the work hazardous even after the employer implements the work practices required by this section. Additionally, employees may not perform work when winds reduce the phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground clearances at the work location below the minimum approach distances specified in paragraph (q)(3)(xiv) of this section, unless insulating guards cover the grounded objects and other lines and equipment.\n\nThunderstorms in the vicinity, high winds, snow storms, and ice storms are examples of adverse weather conditions that make live-line barehand work too hazardous to perform safely even after the employer implements the work practices required by this section.\n\n(vii) The employer shall provide and ensure that employees use a conductive bucket liner or other conductive device for bonding the insulated aerial device to the energized line or equipment.\n\n(A) The employee shall be connected to the bucket liner or other conductive device by the use of conductive shoes, leg clips, or other means.\n\n(B) Where differences in potentials at the worksite pose a hazard to employees, the employer shall provide electrostatic shielding designed for the voltage being worked.\n\n(viii) The employer shall ensure that, before the employee contacts the energized part, the employee bonds the conductive bucket liner or other conductive device to the energized conductor by means of a positive connection. This connection shall remain attached to the energized conductor until the employee completes the work on the energized circuit.\n\n(ix) Aerial lifts used for live-line barehand work shall have dual controls (lower and upper) as follows:\n\n(A) The upper controls shall be within easy reach of the employee in the bucket. On a two-bucket-type lift, access to the controls shall be within easy reach of both buckets.\n\n(B) The lower set of controls shall be near the base of the boom and shall be designed so that they can override operation of the equipment at any time.\n\n(x) Lower (ground-level) lift controls may not be operated with an employee in the lift except in case of emergency.\n\n(xi) The employer shall ensure that, before employees elevate an aerial lift into the work position, the employees check all controls (ground level and bucket) to determine that they are in proper working condition.\n\n(xii) The employer shall ensure that, before employees elevate the boom of an aerial lift, the employees ground the body of the truck or barricade the body of the truck and treat it as energized.\n\n(xiii) The employer shall ensure that employees perform a boom-current test before starting work each day, each time during the day when they encounter a higher voltage, and when changed conditions indicate a need for an additional test.\n\n(A) This test shall consist of placing the bucket in contact with an energized source equal to the voltage to be encountered for a minimum of 3 minutes.\n\n(B) The leakage current may not exceed 1 microampere per kilovolt of nominal phase-to-ground voltage.\n\n(C) The employer shall immediately suspend work from the aerial lift when there is any indication of a malfunction in the equipment.\n\n(xiv) The employer shall ensure that employees maintain the minimum approach distances, established by the employer under paragraph (l)(3)(i) of this section, from all grounded objects and from lines and equipment at a potential different from that to which the live-line barehand equipment is bonded, unless insulating guards cover such grounded objects and other lines and equipment.\n\n(xv) The employer shall ensure that, while an employee is approaching, leaving, or bonding to an energized circuit, the employee maintains the minimum approach distances, established by the employer under paragraph (l)(3)(i) of this section, between the employee and any grounded parts, including the lower boom and portions of the truck and between the employee and conductive objects energized at different potentials.\n\n(xvi) While the bucket is alongside an energized bushing or insulator string, the employer shall ensure that employees maintain the phase-to-ground minimum approach distances, established by the employer under paragraph (l)(3)(i) of this section, between all parts of the bucket and the grounded end of the bushing or insulator string or any other grounded surface.\n\n(xvii) The employer shall ensure that employees do not use handlines between the bucket and the boom or between the bucket and the ground. However, employees may use nonconductive-type handlines from conductor to ground if not supported from the bucket. The employer shall ensure that no one uses ropes used for live-line barehand work for other purposes.\n\n(xviii) The employer shall ensure that employees do not pass uninsulated equipment or material between a pole or structure and an aerial lift while an employee working from the bucket is bonded to an energized part.\n\n(xix) A nonconductive measuring device shall be readily accessible to employees performing live-line barehand work to assist them in maintaining the required minimum approach distance.\n\n(4)  Towers and structures.  The following requirements apply to work performed on towers or other structures that support overhead lines.\n\n(i) The employer shall ensure that no employee is under a tower or structure while work is in progress, except when the employer can demonstrate that such a working position is necessary to assist employees working above.\n\n(ii) The employer shall ensure that employees use tag lines or other similar devices to maintain control of tower sections being raised or positioned, unless the employer can demonstrate that the use of such devices would create a greater hazard to employees.\n\n(iii) The employer shall ensure that employees do not detach the loadline from a member or section until they safely secure the load.\n\n(iv) The employer shall ensure that, except during emergency restoration procedures, employees discontinue work when adverse weather conditions would make the work hazardous in spite of the work practices required by this section.\n\nThunderstorms in the vicinity, high winds, snow storms, and ice storms are examples of adverse weather conditions that make this work too hazardous to perform even after the employer implements the work practices required by this section.\n\n(r)  Line-clearance tree trimming.  This paragraph provides additional requirements for line-clearance tree trimming and for equipment used in this type of work.\n\n(1)  Electrical hazards.  This paragraph does not apply to qualified employees.\n\n(i) Before an employee climbs, enters, or works around any tree, a determination shall be made of the nominal voltage of electric power lines posing a hazard to employees. However, a determination of the maximum nominal voltage to which an employee will be exposed may be made instead, if all lines are considered as energized at this maximum voltage.\n\n(ii) There shall be a second line-clearance tree trimmer within normal (that is, unassisted) voice communication under any of the following conditions:\n\n(A) If a line-clearance tree trimmer is to approach more closely than 3.05 meters (10 feet) to any conductor or electric apparatus energized at more than 750 volts or\n\n(B) If branches or limbs being removed are closer to lines energized at more than 750 volts than the distances listed in Table R-5, Table R-6, Table R-7, and Table R-8 or\n\n(C) If roping is necessary to remove branches or limbs from such conductors or apparatus.\n\n(iii) Line-clearance tree trimmers shall maintain the minimum approach distances from energized conductors given in Table R-5, Table R-6, Table R-7, and Table R-8.\n\n(iv) Branches that are contacting exposed energized conductors or equipment or that are within the distances specified in Table R-5, Table R-6, Table R-7, and Table R-8 may be removed only through the use of insulating equipment.\n\nA tool constructed of a material that the employer can demonstrate has insulating qualities meeting paragraph (j)(1) of this section is considered as insulated under paragraph (r)(1)(iv) of this section if the tool is clean and dry.\n\n(v) Ladders, platforms, and aerial devices may not be brought closer to an energized part than the distances listed in Table R-5, Table R-6, Table R-7, and Table R-8.\n\n(vi) Line-clearance tree trimming may not be performed when adverse weather conditions make the work hazardous in spite of the work practices required by this section. Each employee performing line-clearance tree trimming in the aftermath of a storm or under similar emergency conditions shall be trained in the special hazards related to this type of work.\n\nThunderstorms in the immediate vicinity, high winds, snow storms, and ice storms are examples of adverse weather conditions that are presumed to make line-clearance tree trimming too hazardous to perform safely.\n\n(2)  Brush chippers.  (i) Brush chippers shall be equipped with a locking device in the ignition system.\n\n(ii) Access panels for maintenance and adjustment of the chipper blades and associated drive train shall be in place and secure during operation of the equipment.\n\n(iii) Brush chippers not equipped with a mechanical infeed system shall be equipped with an infeed hopper of length sufficient to prevent employees from contacting the blades or knives of the machine during operation.\n\n(iv) Trailer chippers detached from trucks shall be chocked or otherwise secured.\n\n(v) Each employee in the immediate area of an operating chipper feed table shall wear personal protective equipment as required by Subpart I of this part.\n\n(3)  Sprayers and related equipment.  (i) Walking and working surfaces of sprayers and related equipment shall be covered with slip-resistant material. If slipping hazards cannot be eliminated, slip-resistant footwear or handrails and stair rails meeting the requirements of subpart D of this part may be used instead of slip-resistant material.\n\n(ii) Equipment on which employees stand to spray while the vehicle is in motion shall be equipped with guardrails around the working area. The guardrail shall be constructed in accordance with subpart D of this part.\n\n(4)  Stump cutters.  (i) Stump cutters shall be equipped with enclosures or guards to protect employees.\n\n(ii) Each employee in the immediate area of stump grinding operations (including the stump cutter operator) shall wear personal protective equipment as required by subpart I of this part.\n\n(5)  Gasoline-engine power saws.  Gasoline-engine power saw operations shall meet the requirements of \u00a7 1910.266(e) and the following:\n\n(i) Each power saw weighing more than 6.8 kilograms (15 pounds, service weight) that is used in trees shall be supported by a separate line, except when work is performed from an aerial lift and except during topping or removing operations where no supporting limb will be available.\n\n(ii) Each power saw shall be equipped with a control that will return the saw to idling speed when released.\n\n(iii) Each power saw shall be equipped with a clutch and shall be so adjusted that the clutch will not engage the chain drive at idling speed.\n\n(iv) A power saw shall be started on the ground or where it is otherwise firmly supported. Drop starting of saws over 6.8 kilograms (15 pounds), other than chain saws, is permitted outside of the bucket of an aerial lift only if the area below the lift is clear of personnel.\n\nParagraph (e)(2)(vi) of \u00a7 1910.266 prohibits drop starting of chain saws.\n\n(v) A power saw engine may be started and operated only when all employees other than the operator are clear of the saw.\n\n(vi) A power saw may not be running when the saw is being carried up into a tree by an employee.\n\n(vii) Power saw engines shall be stopped for all cleaning, refueling, adjustments, and repairs to the saw or motor, except as the manufacturer's servicing procedures require otherwise.\n\n(6)  Backpack power units for use in pruning and clearing.  (i) While a backpack power unit is running, no one other than the operator may be within 3.05 meters (10 feet) of the cutting head of a brush saw.\n\n(ii) A backpack power unit shall be equipped with a quick shutoff switch readily accessible to the operator.\n\n(iii) Backpack power unit engines shall be stopped for all cleaning, refueling, adjustments, and repairs to the saw or motor, except as the manufacturer's servicing procedures require otherwise.\n\n(7)  Rope.  (i) Climbing ropes shall be used by employees working aloft in trees. These ropes shall have a minimum diameter of 12 millimeters (0.5 inch) with a minimum breaking strength of 10.2 kilonewtons (2,300 pounds). Synthetic rope shall have elasticity of not more than 7 percent.\n\n(ii) Rope shall be inspected before each use and, if unsafe (for example, because of damage or defect), may not be used.\n\n(iii) Rope shall be stored away from cutting edges and sharp tools. Rope contact with corrosive chemicals, gas, and oil shall be avoided.\n\n(iv) When stored, rope shall be coiled and piled, or shall be suspended, so that air can circulate through the coils.\n\n(v) Rope ends shall be secured to prevent their unraveling.\n\n(vi) Climbing rope may not be spliced to effect repair.\n\n(vii) A rope that is wet, that is contaminated to the extent that its insulating capacity is impaired, or that is otherwise not considered to be insulated for the voltage involved may not be used near exposed energized lines.\n\n(8)  Fall protection.  Each employee shall be tied in with a climbing rope and safety saddle when the employee is working above the ground in a tree, unless he or she is ascending into the tree.\n\n(s)  Communication facilities \u2014(1)  Microwave transmission.  (i) The employer shall ensure that no employee looks into an open waveguide or antenna connected to an energized microwave source.\n\n(ii) If the electromagnetic-radiation level within an accessible area associated with microwave communications systems exceeds the radiation-protection guide specified by \u00a7 1910.97(a)(2), the employer shall post the area with warning signs containing the warning symbol described in \u00a7 1910.97(a)(3). The lower half of the warning symbol shall include the following statements, or ones that the employer can demonstrate are equivalent: \u201cRadiation in this area may exceed hazard limitations and special precautions are required. Obtain specific instruction before entering.\u201d\n\n(iii) When an employee works in an area where the electromagnetic radiation could exceed the radiation-protection guide, the employer shall institute measures that ensure that the employee's exposure is not greater than that permitted by that guide. Such measures may include administrative and engineering controls and personal protective equipment.\n\n(2)  Power-line carrier.  The employer shall ensure that employees perform power-line carrier work, including work on equipment used for coupling carrier current to power line conductors, in accordance with the requirements of this section pertaining to work on energized lines.\n\n(t)  Underground electrical installations.  This paragraph provides additional requirements for work on underground electrical installations.\n\n(1)  Access.  The employer shall ensure that employees use a ladder or other climbing device to enter and exit a manhole or subsurface vault exceeding 1.22 meters (4 feet) in depth. No employee may climb into or out of a manhole or vault by stepping on cables or hangers.\n\n(2)  Lowering equipment into manholes.  (i) Equipment used to lower materials and tools into manholes or vaults shall be capable of supporting the weight to be lowered and shall be checked for defects before use.\n\n(ii) Before anyone lowers tools or material into the opening for a manhole or vault, each employee working in the manhole or vault shall be clear of the area directly under the opening.\n\n(3)  Attendants for manholes and vaults.  (i) While work is being performed in a manhole or vault containing energized electric equipment, an employee with first-aid training shall be available on the surface in the immediate vicinity of the manhole or vault entrance to render emergency assistance.\n\n(ii) Occasionally, the employee on the surface may briefly enter a manhole or vault to provide nonemergency assistance.\n\nParagraph (e)(7) of this section may also require an attendant and does not permit this attendant to enter the manhole or vault.\n\nParagraph (l)(1)(ii) of this section requires employees entering manholes or vaults containing unguarded, uninsulated energized lines or parts of electric equipment operating at 50 volts or more to be qualified.\n\n(iii) For the purpose of inspection, housekeeping, taking readings, or similar work, an employee working alone may enter, for brief periods of time, a manhole or vault where energized cables or equipment are in service if the employer can demonstrate that the employee will be protected from all electrical hazards.\n\n(iv) The employer shall ensure that employees maintain reliable communications, through two-way radios or other equivalent means, among all employees involved in the job.\n\n(4)  Duct rods.  The employer shall ensure that, if employees use duct rods, the employees install the duct rods in the direction presenting the least hazard to employees. The employer shall station an employee at the far end of the duct line being rodded to ensure that the employees maintain the required minimum approach distances.\n\n(5)  Multiple cables.  When multiple cables are present in a work area, the employer shall identify the cable to be worked by electrical means, unless its identity is obvious by reason of distinctive appearance or location or by other readily apparent means of identification. The employer shall protect cables other than the one being worked from damage.\n\n(6)  Moving cables.  Except when paragraph (t)(7)(ii) of this section permits employees to perform work that could cause a fault in an energized cable in a manhole or vault, the employer shall ensure that employees inspect energized cables to be moved for abnormalities.\n\n(7)  Protection against faults.  (i) Where a cable in a manhole or vault has one or more abnormalities that could lead to a fault or be an indication of an impending fault, the employer shall deenergize the cable with the abnormality before any employee may work in the manhole or vault, except when service-load conditions and a lack of feasible alternatives require that the cable remain energized. In that case, employees may enter the manhole or vault provided the employer protects them from the possible effects of a failure using shields or other devices that are capable of containing the adverse effects of a fault. The employer shall treat the following abnormalities as indications of impending faults unless the employer can demonstrate that the conditions could not lead to a fault: Oil or compound leaking from cable or joints, broken cable sheaths or joint sleeves, hot localized surface temperatures of cables or joints, or joints swollen beyond normal tolerance.\n\n(ii) If the work employees will perform in a manhole or vault could cause a fault in a cable, the employer shall deenergize that cable before any employee works in the manhole or vault, except when service-load conditions and a lack of feasible alternatives require that the cable remain energized. In that case, employees may enter the manhole or vault provided the employer protects them from the possible effects of a failure using shields or other devices that are capable of containing the adverse effects of a fault.\n\n(8)  Sheath continuity.  When employees perform work on buried cable or on cable in a manhole or vault, the employer shall maintain metallic-sheath continuity, or the cable sheath shall be treated as energized.\n\n(u)  Substations.  This paragraph provides additional requirements for substations and for work performed in them.\n\n(1)  Access and working space.  The employer shall provide and maintain sufficient access and working space about electric equipment to permit ready and safe operation and maintenance of such equipment by employees.\n\nAmerican National Standard  National Electrical Safety Code,  ANSI/IEEE C2-2012 contains guidelines for the dimensions of access and working space about electric equipment in substations. Installations meeting the ANSI provisions comply with paragraph (u)(1) of this section. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration will determine whether an installation that does not conform to this ANSI standard complies with paragraph (u)(1) of this section based on the following criteria:\n\n(1) Whether the installation conforms to the edition of ANSI C2 that was in effect when the installation was made,\n\n(2) Whether the configuration of the installation enables employees to maintain the minimum approach distances, established by the employer under paragraph (l)(3)(i) of this section, while the employees are working on exposed, energized parts, and\n\n(3) Whether the precautions taken when employees perform work on the installation provide protection equivalent to the protection provided by access and working space meeting ANSI/IEEE C2-2012.\n\n(2)  Draw-out-type circuit breakers.  The employer shall ensure that, when employees remove or insert draw-out-type circuit breakers, the breaker is in the open position. The employer shall also render the control circuit inoperable if the design of the equipment permits.\n\n(3)  Substation fences.  Conductive fences around substations shall be grounded. When a substation fence is expanded or a section is removed, fence sections shall be isolated, grounded, or bonded as necessary to protect employees from hazardous differences in electric potential.\n\nIEEE Std 80-2000,  IEEE Guide for Safety in AC Substation Grounding,  contains guidelines for protection against hazardous differences in electric potential.\n\n(4)  Guarding of rooms and other spaces containing electric supply equipment.  (i) Rooms and other spaces in which electric supply lines or equipment are installed shall meet the requirements of paragraphs (u)(4)(ii) through (u)(4)(v) of this section under the following conditions:\n\n(A) If exposed live parts operating at 50 to 150 volts to ground are within 2.4 meters (8 feet) of the ground or other working surface inside the room or other space,\n\n(B) If live parts operating at 151 to 600 volts to ground and located within 2.4 meters (8 feet) of the ground or other working surface inside the room or other space are guarded only by location, as permitted under paragraph (u)(5)(i) of this section, or\n\n(C) If live parts operating at more than 600 volts to ground are within the room or other space, unless:\n\n( 1 ) The live parts are enclosed within grounded, metal-enclosed equipment whose only openings are designed so that foreign objects inserted in these openings will be deflected from energized parts, or\n\n( 2 ) The live parts are installed at a height, above ground and any other working surface, that provides protection at the voltage on the live parts corresponding to the protection provided by a 2.4-meter (8-foot) height at 50 volts.\n\n(ii) Fences, screens, partitions, or walls shall enclose the rooms and other spaces so as to minimize the possibility that unqualified persons will enter.\n\n(iii) Unqualified persons may not enter the rooms or other spaces while the electric supply lines or equipment are energized.\n\n(iv) The employer shall display signs at entrances to the rooms and other spaces warning unqualified persons to keep out.\n\n(v) The employer shall keep each entrance to a room or other space locked, unless the entrance is under the observation of a person who is attending the room or other space for the purpose of preventing unqualified employees from entering.\n\n(5)  Guarding of energized parts.  (i) The employer shall provide guards around all live parts operating at more than 150 volts to ground without an insulating covering unless the location of the live parts gives sufficient clearance (horizontal, vertical, or both) to minimize the possibility of accidental employee contact.\n\nAmerican National Standard  National Electrical Safety Code,  ANSI/IEEE C2-2002 contains guidelines for the dimensions of clearance distances about electric equipment in substations. Installations meeting the ANSI provisions comply with paragraph (u)(5)(i) of this section. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration will determine whether an installation that does not conform to this ANSI standard complies with paragraph (u)(5)(i) of this section based on the following criteria:\n\n(1) Whether the installation conforms to the edition of ANSI C2 that was in effect when the installation was made,\n\n(2) Whether each employee is isolated from energized parts at the point of closest approach; and\n\n(3) Whether the precautions taken when employees perform work on the installation provide protection equivalent to the protection provided by horizontal and vertical clearances meeting ANSI/IEEE C2-2002.\n\n(ii) Except for fuse replacement and other necessary access by qualified persons, the employer shall maintain guarding of energized parts within a compartment during operation and maintenance functions to prevent accidental contact with energized parts and to prevent dropped tools or other equipment from contacting energized parts.\n\n(iii) Before guards are removed from energized equipment, the employer shall install barriers around the work area to prevent employees who are not working on the equipment, but who are in the area, from contacting the exposed live parts.\n\n(6)  Substation entry.  (i) Upon entering an attended substation, each employee, other than employees regularly working in the station, shall report his or her presence to the employee in charge of substation activities to receive information on special system conditions affecting employee safety.\n\n(ii) The job briefing required by paragraph (c) of this section shall cover information on special system conditions affecting employee safety, including the location of energized equipment in or adjacent to the work area and the limits of any deenergized work area.\n\n(v)  Power generation.  This paragraph provides additional requirements and related work practices for power generating plants.\n\n(1)  Interlocks and other safety devices.  (i) Interlocks and other safety devices shall be maintained in a safe, operable condition.\n\n(ii) No interlock or other safety device may be modified to defeat its function, except for test, repair, or adjustment of the device.\n\n(2)  Changing brushes.  Before exciter or generator brushes are changed while the generator is in service, the exciter or generator field shall be checked to determine whether a ground condition exists. The brushes may not be changed while the generator is energized if a ground condition exists.\n\n(3)  Access and working space.  The employer shall provide and maintain sufficient access and working space about electric equipment to permit ready and safe operation and maintenance of such equipment by employees.\n\nAmerican National Standard  National Electrical Safety Code,  ANSI/IEEE C2-2012 contains guidelines for the dimensions of access and working space about electric equipment in substations. Installations meeting the ANSI provisions comply with paragraph (v)(3) of this section. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration will determine whether an installation that does not conform to this ANSI standard complies with paragraph (v)(3) of this section based on the following criteria:\n\n(1) Whether the installation conforms to the edition of ANSI C2 that was in effect when the installation was made;\n\n(2) Whether the configuration of the installation enables employees to maintain the minimum approach distances, established by the employer under paragraph (l)(3)(i) of this section, while the employees are working on exposed, energized parts, and;\n\n(3) Whether the precautions taken when employees perform work on the installation provide protection equivalent to the protection provided by access and working space meeting ANSI/IEEE C2-2012.\n\n(4)  Guarding of rooms and other spaces containing electric supply equipment.  (i) Rooms and other spaces in which electric supply lines or equipment are installed shall meet the requirements of paragraphs (v)(4)(ii) through (v)(4)(v) of this section under the following conditions:\n\n(A) If exposed live parts operating at 50 to 150 volts to ground are within 2.4 meters (8 feet) of the ground or other working surface inside the room or other space,\n\n(B) If live parts operating at 151 to 600 volts to ground and located within 2.4 meters (8 feet) of the ground or other working surface inside the room or other space are guarded only by location, as permitted under paragraph (v)(5)(i) of this section, or\n\n(C) If live parts operating at more than 600 volts to ground are within the room or other space, unless:\n\n( 1 ) The live parts are enclosed within grounded, metal-enclosed equipment whose only openings are designed so that foreign objects inserted in these openings will be deflected from energized parts, or\n\n( 2 ) The live parts are installed at a height, above ground and any other working surface, that provides protection at the voltage on the live parts corresponding to the protection provided by a 2.4-meter (8-foot) height at 50 volts.\n\n(ii) Fences, screens, partitions, or walls shall enclose the rooms and other spaces so as to minimize the possibility that unqualified persons will enter.\n\n(iii) Unqualified persons may not enter the rooms or other spaces while the electric supply lines or equipment are energized.\n\n(iv) The employer shall display signs at entrances to the rooms and other spaces warning unqualified persons to keep out.\n\n(v) The employer shall keep each entrance to a room or other space locked, unless the entrance is under the observation of a person who is attending the room or other space for the purpose of preventing unqualified employees from entering.\n\n(5)  Guarding of energized parts.  (i) The employer shall provide guards around all live parts operating at more than 150 volts to ground without an insulating covering unless the location of the live parts gives sufficient clearance (horizontal, vertical, or both) to minimize the possibility of accidental employee contact.\n\nAmerican National Standard  National Electrical Safety Code,  ANSI/IEEE C2-2002 contains guidelines for the dimensions of clearance distances about electric equipment in substations. Installations meeting the ANSI provisions comply with paragraph (v)(5)(i) of this section. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration will determine whether an installation that does not conform to this ANSI standard complies with paragraph (v)(5)(i) of this section based on the following criteria:\n\n(1) Whether the installation conforms to the edition of ANSI C2 that was in effect when the installation was made;\n\n(2) Whether each employee is isolated from energized parts at the point of closest approach; and\n\n(3) Whether the precautions taken when employees perform work on the installation provide protection equivalent to the protection provided by horizontal and vertical clearances meeting ANSI/IEEE C2-2002.\n\n(ii) Except for fuse replacement and other necessary access by qualified persons, the employer shall maintain guarding of energized parts within a compartment during operation and maintenance functions to prevent accidental contact with energized parts and to prevent dropped tools or other equipment from contacting energized parts.\n\n(iii) Before guards are removed from energized equipment, the employer shall install barriers around the work area to prevent employees who are not working on the equipment, but who are in the area, from contacting the exposed live parts.\n\n(6)  Water or steam spaces.  The following requirements apply to work in water and steam spaces associated with boilers:\n\n(i) A designated employee shall inspect conditions before work is permitted and after its completion. Eye protection, or full face protection if necessary, shall be worn at all times when condenser, heater, or boiler tubes are being cleaned.\n\n(ii) Where it is necessary for employees to work near tube ends during cleaning, shielding shall be installed at the tube ends.\n\n(7)  Chemical cleaning of boilers and pressure vessels.  The following requirements apply to chemical cleaning of boilers and pressure vessels:\n\n(i) Areas where chemical cleaning is in progress shall be cordoned off to restrict access during cleaning. If flammable liquids, gases, or vapors or combustible materials will be used or might be produced during the cleaning process, the following requirements also apply:\n\n(A) The area shall be posted with signs restricting entry and warning of the hazards of fire and explosion; and\n\n(B) Smoking, welding, and other possible ignition sources are prohibited in these restricted areas.\n\n(ii) The number of personnel in the restricted area shall be limited to those necessary to accomplish the task safely.\n\n(iii) There shall be ready access to water or showers for emergency use.\n\nSee \u00a7 1910.141 for requirements that apply to the water supply and to washing facilities.\n\n(iv) Employees in restricted areas shall wear protective equipment meeting the requirements of Subpart I of this part and including, but not limited to, protective clothing, boots, goggles, and gloves.\n\n(8)  Chlorine systems.  (i) Chlorine system enclosures shall be posted with signs restricting entry and warning of the hazard to health and the hazards of fire and explosion.\n\nSee subpart Z of this part for requirements necessary to protect the health of employees from the effects of chlorine.\n\n(ii) Only designated employees may enter the restricted area. Additionally, the number of personnel shall be limited to those necessary to accomplish the task safely.\n\n(iii) Emergency repair kits shall be available near the shelter or enclosure to allow for the prompt repair of leaks in chlorine lines, equipment, or containers.\n\n(iv) Before repair procedures are started, chlorine tanks, pipes, and equipment shall be purged with dry air and isolated from other sources of chlorine.\n\n(v) The employer shall ensure that chlorine is not mixed with materials that would react with the chlorine in a dangerously exothermic or other hazardous manner.\n\n(9)  Boilers.  (i) Before internal furnace or ash hopper repair work is started, overhead areas shall be inspected for possible falling objects. If the hazard of falling objects exists, overhead protection such as planking or nets shall be provided.\n\n(ii) When opening an operating boiler door, employees shall stand clear of the opening of the door to avoid the heat blast and gases which may escape from the boiler.\n\n(10)  Turbine generators.  (i) Smoking and other ignition sources are prohibited near hydrogen or hydrogen sealing systems, and signs warning of the danger of explosion and fire shall be posted.\n\n(ii) Excessive hydrogen makeup or abnormal loss of pressure shall be considered as an emergency and shall be corrected immediately.\n\n(iii) A sufficient quantity of inert gas shall be available to purge the hydrogen from the largest generator.\n\n(11)  Coal and ash handling.  (i) Only designated persons may operate railroad equipment.\n\n(ii) Before a locomotive or locomotive crane is moved, a warning shall be given to employees in the area.\n\n(iii) Employees engaged in switching or dumping cars may not use their feet to line up drawheads.\n\n(iv) Drawheads and knuckles may not be shifted while locomotives or cars are in motion.\n\n(v) When a railroad car is stopped for unloading, the car shall be secured from displacement that could endanger employees.\n\n(vi) An emergency means of stopping dump operations shall be provided at railcar dumps.\n\n(vii) The employer shall ensure that employees who work in coal- or ash-handling conveyor areas are trained and knowledgeable in conveyor operation and in the requirements of paragraphs (v)(11)(viii) through (v)(11)(xii) of this section.\n\n(viii) Employees may not ride a coal- or ash-handling conveyor belt at any time. Employees may not cross over the conveyor belt, except at walkways, unless the conveyor's energy source has been deenergized and has been locked out or tagged in accordance with paragraph (d) of this section.\n\n(ix) A conveyor that could cause injury when started may not be started until personnel in the area are alerted by a signal or by a designated person that the conveyor is about to start.\n\n(x) If a conveyor that could cause injury when started is automatically controlled or is controlled from a remote location, an audible device shall be provided that sounds an alarm that will be recognized by each employee as a warning that the conveyor will start and that can be clearly heard at all points along the conveyor where personnel may be present. The warning device shall be actuated by the device starting the conveyor and shall continue for a period of time before the conveyor starts that is long enough to allow employees to move clear of the conveyor system. A visual warning may be used in place of the audible device if the employer can demonstrate that it will provide an equally effective warning in the particular circumstances involved. However if the employer can demonstrate that the system's function would be seriously hindered by the required time delay, warning signs may be provided in place of the audible warning device. If the system was installed before January 31, 1995, warning signs may be provided in place of the audible warning device until such time as the conveyor or its control system is rebuilt or rewired. These warning signs shall be clear, concise, and legible and shall indicate that conveyors and allied equipment may be started at any time, that danger exists, and that personnel must keep clear. These warning signs shall be provided along the conveyor at areas not guarded by position or location.\n\n(xi) Remotely and automatically controlled conveyors, and conveyors that have operating stations which are not manned or which are beyond voice and visual contact from drive areas, loading areas, transfer points, and other locations on the conveyor path not guarded by location, position, or guards shall be furnished with emergency stop buttons, pull cords, limit switches, or similar emergency stop devices. However, if the employer can demonstrate that the design, function, and operation of the conveyor do not expose an employee to hazards, an emergency stop device is not required.\n\n(A) Emergency stop devices shall be easily identifiable in the immediate vicinity of such locations.\n\n(B) An emergency stop device shall act directly on the control of the conveyor involved and may not depend on the stopping of any other equipment.\n\n(C) Emergency stop devices shall be installed so that they cannot be overridden from other locations.\n\n(xii) Where coal-handling operations may produce a combustible atmosphere from fuel sources or from flammable gases or dust, sources of ignition shall be eliminated or safely controlled to prevent ignition of the combustible atmosphere.\n\nLocations that are hazardous because of the presence of combustible dust are classified as Class II hazardous locations. See \u00a7 1910.307.\n\n(xiii) An employee may not work on or beneath overhanging coal in coal bunkers, coal silos, or coal storage areas, unless the employee is protected from all hazards posed by shifting coal.\n\n(xiv) An employee entering a bunker or silo to dislodge the contents shall wear a body harness with lifeline attached. The lifeline shall be secured to a fixed support outside the bunker and shall be attended at all times by an employee located outside the bunker or facility.\n\n(12)  Hydroplants and equipment.  Employees working on or close to water gates, valves, intakes, forebays, flumes, or other locations where increased or decreased water flow or levels may pose a significant hazard shall be warned and shall vacate such dangerous areas before water flow changes are made.\n\n(w)  Special conditions \u2014(1)  Capacitors.  The following additional requirements apply to work on capacitors and on lines connected to capacitors.\n\nSee paragraphs (m) and (n) of this section for requirements pertaining to the deenergizing and grounding of capacitor installations.\n\n(i) Before employees work on capacitors, the employer shall disconnect the capacitors from energized sources and short circuit the capacitors. The employer shall ensure that the employee short circuiting the capacitors waits at least 5 minutes from the time of disconnection before applying the short circuit,\n\n(ii) Before employees handle the units, the employer shall short circuit each unit in series-parallel capacitor banks between all terminals and the capacitor case or its rack. If the cases of capacitors are on ungrounded substation racks, the employer shall bond the racks to ground.\n\n(iii) The employer shall short circuit any line connected to capacitors before the line is treated as deenergized.\n\n(2)  Current transformer secondaries.  The employer shall ensure that employees do not open the secondary of a current transformer while the transformer is energized. If the employer cannot deenergize the primary of the current transformer before employees perform work on an instrument, a relay, or other section of a current transformer secondary circuit, the employer shall bridge the circuit so that the current transformer secondary does not experience an open-circuit condition.\n\n(3)  Series streetlighting.  (i) If the open-circuit voltage exceeds 600 volts, the employer shall ensure that employees work on series streetlighting circuits in accordance with paragraph (q) or (t) of this section, as appropriate.\n\n(ii) Before any employee opens a series loop, the employer shall deenergize the streetlighting transformer and isolate it from the source of supply or shall bridge the loop to avoid an open-circuit condition.\n\n(4)  Illumination.  The employer shall provide sufficient illumination to enable the employee to perform the work safely.\n\n(5)  Protection against drowning.  (i) Whenever an employee may be pulled or pushed, or might fall, into water where the danger of drowning exists, the employer shall provide the employee with, and shall ensure that the employee uses, a U.S. Coast Guard-approved personal flotation device.\n\n(ii) The employer shall maintain each personal flotation device in safe condition and shall inspect each personal flotation device frequently enough to ensure that it does not have rot, mildew, water saturation, or any other condition that could render the device unsuitable for use.\n\n(iii) An employee may cross streams or other bodies of water only if a safe means of passage, such as a bridge, is available.\n\n(6)  Employee protection in public work areas.  (i) Traffic-control signs and traffic-control devices used for the protection of employees shall meet \u00a7 1926.200(g)(2) of this chapter.\n\n(ii) Before employees begin work in the vicinity of vehicular or pedestrian traffic that may endanger them, the employer shall place warning signs or flags and other traffic-control devices in conspicuous locations to alert and channel approaching traffic.\n\n(iii) The employer shall use barricades where additional employee protection is necessary.\n\n(iv) The employer shall protect excavated areas with barricades.\n\n(v) The employer shall display warning lights prominently at night.\n\n(7)  Backfeed.  When there is a possibility of voltage backfeed from sources of cogeneration or from the secondary system (for example, backfeed from more than one energized phase feeding a common load), the requirements of paragraph (l) of this section apply if employees will work the lines or equipment as energized, and the requirements of paragraphs (m) and (n) of this section apply if employees will work the lines or equipment as deenergized.\n\n(8)  Lasers.  The employer shall install, adjust, and operate laser equipment in accordance with \u00a7 1926.54 of this chapter.\n\n(9)  Hydraulic fluids.  Hydraulic fluids used for the insulated sections of equipment shall provide insulation for the voltage involved.\n\n(x)  Definitions.\n\nAffected employee.  An employee whose job requires him or her to operate or use a machine or equipment on which servicing or maintenance is being performed under lockout or tagout, or whose job requires him or her to work in an area in which such servicing or maintenance is being performed.\n\nAttendant.  An employee assigned to remain immediately outside the entrance to an enclosed or other space to render assistance as needed to employees inside the space.\n\nAuthorized employee.  An employee who locks out or tags out machines or equipment in order to perform servicing or maintenance on that machine or equipment. An affected employee becomes an authorized employee when that employee's duties include performing servicing or maintenance covered under this section.\n\nAutomatic circuit recloser.  A self-controlled device for automatically interrupting and reclosing an alternating-current circuit, with a predetermined sequence of opening and reclosing followed by resetting, hold closed, or lockout.\n\nBarricade.  A physical obstruction such as tapes, cones, or A-frame type wood or metal structures that provides a warning about, and limits access to, a hazardous area.\n\nBarrier.  A physical obstruction that prevents contact with energized lines or equipment or prevents unauthorized access to a work area.\n\nBond.  The electrical interconnection of conductive parts designed to maintain a common electric potential.\n\nBus.  A conductor or a group of conductors that serve as a common connection for two or more circuits.\n\nBushing.  An insulating structure that includes a through conductor or that provides a passageway for such a conductor, and that, when mounted on a barrier, insulates the conductor from the barrier for the purpose of conducting current from one side of the barrier to the other.\n\nCable.  A conductor with insulation, or a stranded conductor with or without insulation and other coverings (single-conductor cable), or a combination of conductors insulated from one another (multiple-conductor cable).\n\nCable sheath.  A conductive protective covering applied to cables.\n\nA cable sheath may consist of multiple layers one or more of which is conductive.\n\nCircuit.  A conductor or system of conductors through which an electric current is intended to flow.\n\nClearance (between objects).  The clear distance between two objects measured surface to surface.\n\nClearance (for work).  Authorization to perform specified work or permission to enter a restricted area.\n\nCommunication lines.  (See  Lines;  (1)  Communication lines. )\n\nConductor.  A material, usually in the form of a wire, cable, or bus bar, used for carrying an electric current.\n\nContract employer.  An employer, other than a host employer, that performs work covered by this section under contract.\n\nCovered conductor.  A conductor covered with a dielectric having no rated insulating strength or having a rated insulating strength less than the voltage of the circuit in which the conductor is used.\n\nCurrent-carrying part.  A conducting part intended to be connected in an electric circuit to a source of voltage. Non-current-carrying parts are those not intended to be so connected.\n\nDeenergized.  Free from any electrical connection to a source of potential difference and from electric charge; not having a potential that is different from the potential of the earth.\n\nThe term applies only to current-carrying parts, which are sometimes energized (alive).\n\nDesignated employee (designated person).  An employee (or person) who is assigned by the employer to perform specific duties under the terms of this section and who has sufficient knowledge of the construction and operation of the equipment, and the hazards involved, to perform his or her duties safely.\n\nElectric line truck.  A truck used to transport personnel, tools, and material for electric supply line work.\n\nElectric supply equipment.  Equipment that produces, modifies, regulates, controls, or safeguards a supply of electric energy.\n\nElectric supply lines.  (See  Lines;  (2)  Electric supply lines. )\n\nElectric utility.  An organization responsible for the installation, operation, or maintenance of an electric supply system.\n\nEnclosed space.  A working space, such as a manhole, vault, tunnel, or shaft, that has a limited means of egress or entry, that is designed for periodic employee entry under normal operating conditions, and that, under normal conditions, does not contain a hazardous atmosphere, but may contain a hazardous atmosphere under abnormal conditions.\n\nThe Occupational Safety and Health Administration does not consider spaces that are enclosed but not designed for employee entry under normal operating conditions to be enclosed spaces for the purposes of this section. Similarly, the Occupational Safety and Health Administration does not consider spaces that are enclosed and that are expected to contain a hazardous atmosphere to be enclosed spaces for the purposes of this section. Such spaces meet the definition of permit spaces in \u00a7 1910.146, and entry into them must conform to that standard.\n\nEnergized (alive, live).  Electrically connected to a source of potential difference, or electrically charged so as to have a potential significantly different from that of earth in the vicinity.\n\nEnergy isolating device.  A physical device that prevents the transmission or release of energy, including, but not limited to, the following: a manually operated electric circuit breaker, a disconnect switch, a manually operated switch, a slide gate, a slip blind, a line valve, blocks, and any similar device with a visible indication of the position of the device. (Push buttons, selector switches, and other control-circuit-type devices are not energy isolating devices.)\n\nEnergy source.  Any electrical, mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic, chemical, nuclear, thermal, or other energy source that could cause injury to employees.\n\nEntry (as used in paragraph (e) of this section).  The action by which a person passes through an opening into an enclosed space. Entry includes ensuing work activities in that space and is considered to have occurred as soon as any part of the entrant's body breaks the plane of an opening into the space.\n\nEquipment (electric).  A general term including material, fittings, devices, appliances, fixtures, apparatus, and the like used as part of or in connection with an electrical installation.\n\nExposed, Exposed to contact (as applied to energized parts).  Not isolated or guarded.\n\nFall restraint system.  A fall protection system that prevents the user from falling any distance.\n\nFirst-aid training.  Training in the initial care, including cardiopulmonary resuscitation (which includes chest compressions, rescue breathing, and, as appropriate, other heart and lung resuscitation techniques), performed by a person who is not a medical practitioner, of a sick or injured person until definitive medical treatment can be administered.\n\nGround.  A conducting connection, whether planned or unplanned, between an electric circuit or equipment and the earth, or to some conducting body that serves in place of the earth.\n\nGrounded.  Connected to earth or to some conducting body that serves in place of the earth.\n\nGuarded.  Covered, fenced, enclosed, or otherwise protected, by means of suitable covers or casings, barrier rails or screens, mats, or platforms, designed to minimize the possibility, under normal conditions, of dangerous approach or inadvertent contact by persons or objects.\n\nWires that are insulated, but not otherwise protected, are not guarded.\n\nHazardous atmosphere.  An atmosphere that may expose employees to the risk of death, incapacitation, impairment of ability to self-rescue (that is, escape unaided from an enclosed space), injury, or acute illness from one or more of the following causes:\n\n(1) Flammable gas, vapor, or mist in excess of 10 percent of its lower flammable limit (LFL);\n\n(2) Airborne combustible dust at a concentration that meets or exceeds its LFL;\n\nThis concentration may be approximated as a condition in which the dust obscures vision at a distance of 1.52 meters (5 feet) or less.\n\n(3) Atmospheric oxygen concentration below 19.5 percent or above 23.5 percent;\n\n(4) Atmospheric concentration of any substance for which a dose or a permissible exposure limit is published in subpart G,  Occupational Health and Environmental Control,  or in Subpart Z,  Toxic and Hazardous Substances,  of this part and which could result in employee exposure in excess of its dose or permissible exposure limit;\n\nAn atmospheric concentration of any substance that is not capable of causing death, incapacitation, impairment of ability to self-rescue, injury, or acute illness due to its health effects is not covered by this provision.\n\n(5) Any other atmospheric condition that is immediately dangerous to life or health.\n\nFor air contaminants for which the Occupational Safety and Health Administration has not determined a dose or permissible exposure limit, other sources of information, such as Safety Data Sheets (SDS) that comply with the Hazard Communication Standard, \u00a7 1910.1200, published information, and internal documents can provide guidance in establishing acceptable atmospheric conditions.\n\nHigh-power tests.  Tests in which the employer uses fault currents, load currents, magnetizing currents, and line-dropping currents to test equipment, either at the equipment's rated voltage or at lower voltages.\n\nHigh-voltage tests.  Tests in which the employer uses voltages of approximately 1,000 volts as a practical minimum and in which the voltage source has sufficient energy to cause injury.\n\nHigh wind.  A wind of such velocity that one or more of the following hazards would be present:\n\n(1) The wind could blow an employee from an elevated location,\n\n(2) The wind could cause an employee or equipment handling material to lose control of the material, or\n\n(3) The wind would expose an employee to other hazards not controlled by the standard involved.\n\nThe Occupational Safety and Health Administration normally considers winds exceeding 64.4 kilometers per hour (40 miles per hour), or 48.3 kilometers per hour (30 miles per hour) if the work involves material handling, as meeting this criteria, unless the employer takes precautions to protect employees from the hazardous effects of the wind.\n\nHost employer.  An employer that operates, or that controls the operating procedures for, an electric power generation, transmission, or distribution installation on which a contract employer is performing work covered by this section.\n\nThe Occupational Safety and Health Administration will treat the electric utility or the owner of the installation as the host employer if it operates or controls operating procedures for the installation. If the electric utility or installation owner neither operates nor controls operating procedures for the installation, the Occupational Safety and Health Administration will treat the employer that the utility or owner has contracted with to operate or control the operating procedures for the installation as the host employer. In no case will there be more than one host employer.\n\nImmediately dangerous to life or health (IDLH).  Any condition that poses an immediate or delayed threat to life or that would cause irreversible adverse health effects or that would interfere with an individual's ability to escape unaided from a permit space.\n\nSome materials\u2014hydrogen fluoride gas and cadmium vapor, for example\u2014may produce immediate transient effects that, even if severe, may pass without medical attention, but are followed by sudden, possibly fatal collapse 12-72 hours after exposure. The victim \u201cfeels normal\u201d from recovery from transient effects until collapse. Such materials in hazardous quantities are considered to be \u201cimmediately\u201d dangerous to life or health.\n\nInsulated.  Separated from other conducting surfaces by a dielectric (including air space) offering a high resistance to the passage of current.\n\nWhen any object is said to be insulated, it is understood to be insulated for the conditions to which it normally is subjected. Otherwise, it is, for the purpose of this section, uninsulated.\n\nInsulation (cable).  Material relied upon to insulate the conductor from other conductors or conducting parts or from ground.\n\nIsolated.  Not readily accessible to persons unless special means for access are used.\n\nLine-clearance tree trimmer.  An employee who, through related training or on-the-job experience or both, is familiar with the special techniques and hazards involved in line-clearance tree trimming.\n\nAn employee who is regularly assigned to a line-clearance tree-trimming crew and who is undergoing on-the-job training and who, in the course of such training, has demonstrated an ability to perform duties safely at his or her level of training and who is under the direct supervision of a line-clearance tree trimmer is considered to be a line-clearance tree trimmer for the performance of those duties.\n\nA line-clearance tree trimmer is not considered to be a \u201cqualified employee\u201d under this section unless he or she has the training required for a qualified employee under paragraph (a)(2)(ii) of this section. However, under the electrical safety-related work practices standard in subpart S of this part, a line-clearance tree trimmer is considered to be a \u201cqualified employee.\u201d Tree trimming performed by such \u201cqualified employees\u201d is not subject to the electrical safety-related work practice requirements contained in \u00a7\u00a7 1910.331 through 1910.335 when it is directly associated with electric power generation, transmission, or distribution lines or equipment. (See \u00a7 1910.331 for requirements on the applicability of the electrical safety-related work practice requirements contained in \u00a7\u00a7 1910.331 through 1910.335 to line-clearance tree trimming performed by such \u201cqualified employees,\u201d and see the note following \u00a7 1910.332(b)(3) for information regarding the training an employee must have to be considered a qualified employee under \u00a7\u00a7 1910.331 through 1910.335.)\n\nLine-clearance tree trimming.  The pruning, trimming, repairing, maintaining, removing, or clearing of trees, or the cutting of brush, that is within the following distance of electric supply lines and equipment:\n\n(1) For voltages to ground of 50 kilovolts or less\u20143.05 meters (10 feet);\n\n(2) For voltages to ground of more than 50 kilovolts\u20143.05 meters (10 feet) plus 0.10 meters (4 inches) for every 10 kilovolts over 50 kilovolts.\n\nThis section applies only to line-clearance tree trimming performed for the purpose of clearing space around electric power generation, transmission, or distribution lines or equipment and on behalf of an organization that operates, or that controls the operating procedures for, those lines or equipment. See paragraph (a)(1) of this section. Tree trimming performed on behalf of a homeowner or commercial entity other than an organization that operates, or that controls the operating procedures for, electric power generation, transmission, or distribution lines or equipment is not directly associated with an electric power generation, transmission, or distribution installation and is outside the scope of this section. In addition, tree trimming that is not for the purpose of clearing space around electric power generation, transmission, or distribution lines or equipment is not directly associated with an electric power generation, transmission, or distribution installation and is outside the scope of this section. Such tree trimming may be covered by other applicable standards. See, for example, \u00a7\u00a7 1910.268 and 1910.331 through 1910.335.\n\nLines \u2014(1)  Communication lines.  The conductors and their supporting or containing structures which are used for public or private signal or communication service, and which operate at potentials not exceeding 400 volts to ground or 750 volts between any two points of the circuit, and the transmitted power of which does not exceed 150 watts. If the lines are operating at less than 150 volts, no limit is placed on the transmitted power of the system. Under certain conditions, communication cables may include communication circuits exceeding these limitations where such circuits are also used to supply power solely to communication equipment.\n\nTelephone, telegraph, railroad signal, data, clock, fire, police alarm, cable television, and other systems conforming to this definition are included. Lines used for signaling purposes, but not included under this definition, are considered as electric supply lines of the same voltage.\n\n(2)  Electric supply lines.  Conductors used to transmit electric energy and their necessary supporting or containing structures. Signal lines of more than 400 volts are always supply lines within this section, and those of less than 400 volts are considered as supply lines, if so run and operated throughout.\n\nManhole.  A subsurface enclosure that personnel may enter and that is used for installing, operating, and maintaining submersible equipment or cable.\n\nMinimum approach distance.  The closest distance an employee may approach an energized or a grounded object.\n\nParagraph (l)(3)(i) of this section requires employers to establish minimum approach distances.\n\nPersonal fall arrest system.  A system used to arrest an employee in a fall from a working level.\n\nQualified employee (qualified person).  An employee (person) knowledgeable in the construction and operation of the electric power generation, transmission, and distribution equipment involved, along with the associated hazards.\n\nAn employee must have the training required by (a)(2)(ii) of this section to be a qualified employee.\n\nExcept under (g)(2)(iv)(C)(2) and (g)(2)(iv)(C)(3) of this section, an employee who is undergoing on-the-job training and who has demonstrated, in the course of such training, an ability to perform duties safely at his or her level of training and who is under the direct supervision of a qualified person is a qualified person for the performance of those duties.\n\nStatistical sparkover voltage.  A transient overvoltage level that produces a 97.72-percent probability of sparkover (that is, two standard deviations above the voltage at which there is a 50-percent probability of sparkover).\n\nStatistical withstand voltage.  A transient overvoltage level that produces a 0.14-percent probability of sparkover (that is, three standard deviations below the voltage at which there is a 50-percent probability of sparkover).\n\nSwitch.  A device for opening and closing or for changing the connection of a circuit. In this section, a switch is manually operable, unless otherwise stated.\n\nSystem operator.  A qualified person designated to operate the system or its parts.\n\nVault.  An enclosure, above or below ground, that personnel may enter and that is used for installing, operating, or maintaining equipment or cable.\n\nVented vault.  A vault that has provision for air changes using exhaust-flue stacks and low-level air intakes operating on pressure and temperature differentials that provide for airflow that precludes a hazardous atmosphere from developing.\n\nVoltage.  The effective (root mean square, or rms) potential difference between any two conductors or between a conductor and ground. This section expresses voltages in nominal values, unless otherwise indicated. The nominal voltage of a system or circuit is the value assigned to a system or circuit of a given voltage class for the purpose of convenient designation. The operating voltage of the system may vary above or below this value.\n\nWork-positioning equipment.  A body belt or body harness system rigged to allow an employee to be supported on an elevated vertical surface, such as a utility pole or tower leg, and work with both hands free while leaning.\n\nAppendix A to \u00a7 1910.269\u2014Flow Charts\n \n This appendix presents information, in the form of flow charts, that illustrates the scope and application of \u00a7 1910.269. This appendix addresses the interface between \u00a7 1910.269 and Subpart S of this Part (Electrical), between \u00a7 1910.269 and \u00a7 1910.146 (Permit-required confined spaces), and between \u00a7 1910.269 and \u00a7 1910.147 (The control of hazardous energy (lockout/tagout)). These flow charts provide guidance for employers trying to implement the requirements of \u00a7 1910.269 in combination with other General Industry Standards contained in Part 1910. Employers should always consult the relevant standards, in conjunction with this appendix, to ensure compliance with all applicable requirements.\n\nThis appendix presents information, in the form of flow charts, that illustrates the scope and application of \u00a7 1910.269. This appendix addresses the interface between \u00a7 1910.269 and Subpart S of this Part (Electrical), between \u00a7 1910.269 and \u00a7 1910.146 (Permit-required confined spaces), and between \u00a7 1910.269 and \u00a7 1910.147 (The control of hazardous energy (lockout/tagout)). These flow charts provide guidance for employers trying to implement the requirements of \u00a7 1910.269 in combination with other General Industry Standards contained in Part 1910. Employers should always consult the relevant standards, in conjunction with this appendix, to ensure compliance with all applicable requirements.\n\nAppendix A-2 to \u00a7 1910.269\u2014Application of \u00a7 1910.269 and Subpart S of this Part to Electrical Safety-Related Work Practices\n 1\n\nTable 1\u2014Electrical Safety Requirements in \u00a7 1910.269\n\n1  If the electrical installation meets the requirements of \u00a7\u00a7 1910.302 through 1910.308 of this part, then the electrical installation and any associated electrical safety-related work practices conforming to \u00a7\u00a7 1910.332 through 1910.335 of this part are considered to comply with these provisions of \u00a7 1910.269 of this part.\n\n2  These provisions include electrical safety and other requirements that must be met regardless of compliance with subpart S of this part.\n\nAppendix B to \u00a7 1910.269\u2014Working on Exposed Energized Parts\n \n I. Introduction\n \n Electric utilities design electric power generation, transmission, and distribution installations to meet National Electrical Safety Code (NESC), ANSI C2, requirements. Electric utilities also design transmission and distribution lines to limit line outages as required by system reliability criteria \n 1 \n   and to withstand the maximum overvoltages impressed on the system. Conditions such as switching surges, faults, and lightning can cause overvoltages. Electric utilities generally select insulator design and lengths and the clearances to structural parts so as to prevent outages from contaminated line insulation and during storms. Line insulator lengths and structural clearances have, over the years, come closer to the minimum approach distances used by workers. As minimum approach distances and structural clearances converge, it is increasingly important that system designers and system operating and maintenance personnel understand the concepts underlying minimum approach distances.\n \n \n \n 1  Federal, State, and local regulatory bodies and electric utilities set reliability requirements that limit the number and duration of system outages. \n The information in this appendix will assist employers in complying with the minimum approach-distance requirements contained in \u00a7 1910.269(l)(3) and (q)(3). Employers must use the technical criteria and methodology presented in this appendix in establishing minimum approach distances in accordance with \u00a7 1910.269(l)(3)(i) and Table R-3 and Table R-8. This appendix provides essential background information and technical criteria for the calculation of the required minimum approach distances for live-line work on electric power generation, transmission, and distribution installations.\n \n Unless an employer is using the maximum transient overvoltages specified in Table R-9 for voltages over 72.5 kilovolts, the employer must use persons knowledgeable in the techniques discussed in this appendix, and competent in the field of electric transmission and distribution system design, to determine the maximum transient overvoltage.\n \n II. General\n \n A.  Definitions.  The following definitions from \u00a7 1910.269(x) relate to work on or near electric power generation, transmission, and distribution lines and equipment and the electrical hazards they present.\n \n Exposed.  . . . Not isolated or guarded.\n \n Guarded.  Covered, fenced, enclosed, or otherwise protected, by means of suitable covers or casings, barrier rails or screens, mats, or platforms, designed to minimize the possibility, under normal conditions, of dangerous approach or inadvertent contact by persons or objects.\n \n \n Note to the definition of \u201cguarded\u201d: \n Wires that are insulated, but not otherwise protected, are not guarded. \n Insulated.  Separated from other conducting surfaces by a dielectric (including air space) offering a high resistance to the passage of current.\n \n \n Note to the definition of \u201cinsulated\u201d: \n When any object is said to be insulated, it is understood to be insulated for the conditions to which it normally is subjected. Otherwise, it is, for the purpose of this section, uninsulated. \n Isolated.  Not readily accessible to persons unless special means for access are used.\n \n Statistical sparkover voltage.  A transient overvoltage level that produces a 97.72-percent probability of sparkover (that is, two standard deviations above the voltage at which there is a 50-percent probability of sparkover).\n \n Statistical withstand voltage.  A transient overvoltage level that produces a 0.14-percent probability of sparkover (that is, three standard deviations below the voltage at which there is a 50-percent probability of sparkover).\n \n B.  Installations energized at 50 to 300 volts.  The hazards posed by installations energized at 50 to 300 volts are the same as those found in many other workplaces. That is not to say that there is no hazard, but the complexity of electrical protection required does not compare to that required for high-voltage systems. The employee must avoid contact with the exposed parts, and the protective equipment used (such as rubber insulating gloves) must provide insulation for the voltages involved.\n \n C.  Exposed energized parts over 300 volts AC.  Paragraph (l)(3)(i) of \u00a7 1910.269 requires the employer to establish minimum approach distances no less than the distances computed by Table R-3 for ac systems so that employees can work safely without risk of sparkover.\n 2 \n  \n \n \n \n 2  Sparkover is a disruptive electric discharge in which an electric arc forms and electric current passes through air. \n Unless the employee is using electrical protective equipment, air is the insulating medium between the employee and energized parts. The distance between the employee and an energized part must be sufficient for the air to withstand the maximum transient overvoltage that can reach the worksite under the working conditions and practices the employee is using. This distance is the minimum air insulation distance, and it is equal to the electrical component of the minimum approach distance.\n \n Normal system design may provide or include a means (such as lightning arrestors) to control maximum anticipated transient overvoltages, or the employer may use temporary devices (portable protective gaps) or measures (such as preventing automatic circuit breaker reclosing) to achieve the same result. Paragraph (l)(3)(ii) of \u00a7 1910.269 requires the employer to determine the maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, through an engineering analysis or assume a maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, in accordance with Table R-9, which specifies the following maximums for ac systems:\n \n 72.6 to 420.0 kilovolts\u20143.5 per unit\n \n 420.1 to 550.0 kilovolts\u20143.0 per unit\n \n 550.1 to 800.0 kilovolts\u20142.5 per unit\n \n See paragraph IV.A.2, later in this appendix, for additional discussion of maximum transient overvoltages.\n \n D.  Types of exposures.  Employees working on or near energized electric power generation, transmission, and distribution systems face two kinds of exposures: Phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase. The exposure is phase-to-ground: (1) With respect to an energized part, when the employee is at ground potential or (2) with respect to ground, when an employee is at the potential of the energized part during live-line barehand work. The exposure is phase-to-phase, with respect to an energized part, when an employee is at the potential of another energized part (at a different potential) during live-line barehand work.\n \n III. Determination of Minimum Approach Distances for AC Voltages Greater Than 300 Volts\n \n A.  Voltages of 301 to 5,000 volts.  Test data generally forms the basis of minimum air insulation distances. The lowest voltage for which sufficient test data exists is 5,000 volts, and these data indicate that the minimum air insulation distance at that voltage is 20 millimeters (1 inch). Because the minimum air insulation distance increases with increasing voltage, and, conversely, decreases with decreasing voltage, an assumed minimum air insulation distance of 20 millimeters will protect against sparkover at voltages of 301 to 5,000 volts. Thus, 20 millimeters is the electrical component of the minimum approach distance for these voltages.\n \n B.  Voltages of 5.1 to 72.5 kilovolts.  For voltages from 5.1 to 72.5 kilovolts, the Occupational Safety and Health Administration bases the methodology for calculating the electrical component of the minimum approach distance on Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) Standard 4-1995,  Standard Techniques for High-Voltage Testing.  Table 1 lists the critical sparkover distances from that standard as listed in IEEE Std 516-2009,  IEEE Guide for Maintenance Methods on Energized Power Lines. \n \n Table 1\u2014Sparkover Distance for Rod-to-Rod Gap\n 60 Hz Rod-to-Rod sparkover\n  (kV peak)\n Gap spacing from IEEE Std 4-1995\n  (cm)\n 25 2\n 36 3\n 46 4\n 53 5\n 60 6\n 70 8\n 79 10\n 86 12\n 95 14\n 104 16\n 112 18\n 120 20\n 143 25\n 167 30\n 192 35\n 218 40\n 243 45\n 270 50\n 322 60\n Source: IEEE Std 516-2009. \n To use this table to determine the electrical component of the minimum approach distance, the employer must determine the peak phase-to-ground transient overvoltage and select a gap from the table that corresponds to that voltage as a withstand voltage rather than a critical sparkover voltage. To calculate the electrical component of the minimum approach distance for voltages between 5 and 72.5 kilovolts, use the following procedure:\n \n 1. Divide the phase-to-phase voltage by the square root of 3 to convert it to a phase-to-ground voltage.\n \n 2. Multiply the phase-to-ground voltage by the square root of 2 to convert the rms value of the voltage to the peak phase-to-ground voltage.\n \n 3. Multiply the peak phase-to-ground voltage by the maximum per-unit transient overvoltage, which, for this voltage range, is 3.0, as discussed later in this appendix. This is the maximum phase-to-ground transient overvoltage, which corresponds to the withstand voltage for the relevant exposure.\n 3 \n  \n \n \n \n 3  The withstand voltage is the voltage at which sparkover is not likely to occur across a specified distance. It is the voltage taken at the 3\u03c3 point below the sparkover voltage, assuming that the sparkover curve follows a normal distribution. \n 4. Divide the maximum phase-to-ground transient overvoltage by 0.85 to determine the corresponding critical sparkover voltage. (The critical sparkover voltage is 3 standard deviations (or 15 percent) greater than the withstand voltage.)\n \n 5. Determine the electrical component of the minimum approach distance from Table 1 through interpolation.\n \n Table 2 illustrates how to derive the electrical component of the minimum approach distance for voltages from 5.1 to 72.5 kilovolts, before the application of any altitude correction factor, as explained later.\n \n Table 2\u2014Calculating the Electrical Component of MAD 751 V to 72.5 kV\n Step\n Maximum system phase-to-phase voltage (kV)\n 15\n 36\n 46\n 72.5\n 1. Divide by \u221a3 8.7 20.8 26.6 41.9\n 2. Multiply by \u221a2 12.2 29.4 37.6 59.2\n 3. Multiply by 3.0 36.7 88.2 112.7 177.6\n 4. Divide by 0.85 43.2 103.7 132.6 208.9\n 5. Interpolate from Table 1 3 + (7.2/10)*1 14 + (8.7/9)*2 20 + (12.6/23)*5 35 + (16.9/26)*5\n Electrical component of MAD (cm) 3.72 15.93 22.74 38.25 \n C.  Voltages of 72.6 to 800 kilovolts.  For voltages of 72.6 kilovolts to 800 kilovolts, this section bases the electrical component of minimum approach distances, before the application of any altitude correction factor, on the following formula:\n \n Equation 1\u2014For Voltages of 72.6 kV to 800 kV\n \n D  = 0.3048( C  +  a )  V L - G T \n \n Where:\n \n D  = Electrical component of the minimum approach distance in air in meters;\n \n C  = a correction factor associated with the variation of gap sparkover with voltage;\n \n a  = A factor relating to the saturation of air at system voltages of 345 kilovolts or higher; \n 4 \n  \n \n \n \n 4  Test data demonstrates that the saturation factor is greater than 0 at peak voltages of about 630 kilovolts. Systems operating at 345 kilovolts (or maximum system voltages of 362 kilovolts) can have peak maximum transient overvoltages exceeding 630 kilovolts. Table R-3 sets equations for calculating  a  based on peak voltage. \n V L-G  = Maximum system line-to-ground rms voltage in kilovolts\u2014it should be the \u201cactual\u201d maximum, or the normal highest voltage for the range (for example, 10 percent above the nominal voltage); and\n \n T  = Maximum transient overvoltage factor in per unit.\n \n In Equation 1,  C  is 0.01: (1) For phase-to-ground exposures that the employer can demonstrate consist only of air across the approach distance (gap) and (2) for phase-to-phase exposures if the employer can demonstrate that no insulated tool spans the gap and that no large conductive object is in the gap. Otherwise,  C  is 0.011.\n \n In Equation 1, the term  a  varies depending on whether the employee's exposure is phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase and on whether objects are in the gap. The employer must use the equations in Table 3 to calculate  a.  Sparkover test data with insulation spanning the gap form the basis for the equations for phase-to-ground exposures, and sparkover test data with only air in the gap form the basis for the equations for phase-to-phase exposures. The phase-to-ground equations result in slightly higher values of  a,  and, consequently, produce larger minimum approach distances, than the phase-to-phase equations for the same value of V Peak .\n \n Table 3\u2014Equations for Calculating the Surge Factor,  a \n Phase-to-ground exposures \n V Peak  =  T L-G V L-G  \u221a2 635 kV or less 635.1 to 915 kV 915.1 to 1,050 kV\n a 0 ( V Peak - 635)/140,000 ( V Peak -645)/135,000\n V Peak  =  T L-G V L-G \u221a2 More than 1,050 kV\n a ( V Peak -675)/125,000\n Phase-to-phase exposures \n 1 \n V Peak  = (1.35 T L-G  + 0.45) V L-G \u221a2 630 kV or less 630.1 to 848 kV 848.1 to 1,131 kV\n a 0 ( V Peak -630)/155,000 ( V Peak -633.6)/152,207 \n V Peak  = (1.35 T L-G  + 0.45) V L-G \u221a2 1,131.1 to 1,485 kV More than 1,485 kV\n a ( V Peak -628)/153,846 ( V Peak -350.5)/203,666\n \n 1  Use the equations for phase-to-ground exposures (with  V Peak  for phase-to-phase exposures) unless the employer can demonstrate that no insulated tool spans the gap and that no large conductive object is in the gap. \n In Equation 1,  T  is the maximum transient overvoltage factor in per unit. As noted earlier, \u00a7 1910.269(l)(3)(ii) requires the employer to determine the maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, through an engineering analysis or assume a maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, in accordance with Table R-9. For phase-to-ground exposures, the employer uses this value, called  T L-G , as  T  in Equation 1. IEEE Std 516-2009 provides the following formula to calculate the phase-to-phase maximum transient overvoltage,  T L-L , from  T L-G :\n \n T L-L  = 1.35 T L-G  + 0.45\n \n For phase-to-phase exposures, the employer uses this value as  T  in Equation 1.\n \n D.  Provisions for inadvertent movement.  The minimum approach distance must include an \u201cadder\u201d to compensate for the inadvertent movement of the worker relative to an energized part or the movement of the part relative to the worker. This \u201cadder\u201d must account for this possible inadvertent movement and provide the worker with a comfortable and safe zone in which to work. Employers must add the distance for inadvertent movement (called the \u201cergonomic component of the minimum approach distance\u201d) to the electrical component to determine the total safe minimum approach distances used in live-line work.\n \n The Occupational Safety and Health Administration based the ergonomic component of the minimum approach distance on response time-distance analysis. This technique uses an estimate of the total response time to a hazardous incident and converts that time to the distance traveled. For example, the driver of a car takes a given amount of time to respond to a \u201cstimulus\u201d and stop the vehicle. The elapsed time involved results in the car's traveling some distance before coming to a complete stop. This distance depends on the speed of the car at the time the stimulus appears and the reaction time of the driver.\n \n In the case of live-line work, the employee must first perceive that he or she is approaching the danger zone. Then, the worker responds to the danger and must decelerate and stop all motion toward the energized part. During the time it takes to stop, the employee will travel some distance. This is the distance the employer must add to the electrical component of the minimum approach distance to obtain the total safe minimum approach distance.\n \n At voltages from 751 volts to 72.5 kilovolts,\n 5 \n   the electrical component of the minimum approach distance is smaller than the ergonomic component. At 72.5 kilovolts, the electrical component is only a little more than 0.3 meters (1 foot). An ergonomic component of the minimum approach distance must provide for all the worker's unanticipated movements. At these voltages, workers generally use rubber insulating gloves; however, these gloves protect only a worker's hands and arms. Therefore, the energized object must be at a safe approach distance to protect the worker's face. In this case, 0.61 meters (2 feet) is a sufficient and practical ergonomic component of the minimum approach distance.\n \n \n \n 5  For voltages of 50 to 300 volts, Table R-3 specifies a minimum approach distance of \u201cavoid contact.\u201d The minimum approach distance for this voltage range contains neither an electrical component nor an ergonomic component. \n For voltages between 72.6 and 800 kilovolts, employees must use different work practices during energized line work. Generally, employees use live-line tools (hot sticks) to perform work on energized equipment. These tools, by design, keep the energized part at a constant distance from the employee and, thus, maintain the appropriate minimum approach distance automatically.\n \n The location of the worker and the type of work methods the worker is using also influence the length of the ergonomic component of the minimum approach distance. In this higher voltage range, the employees use work methods that more tightly control their movements than when the workers perform work using rubber insulating gloves. The worker, therefore, is farther from the energized line or equipment and must be more precise in his or her movements just to perform the work. For these reasons, this section adopts an ergonomic component of the minimum approach distance of 0.31 m (1 foot) for voltages between 72.6 and 800 kilovolts.\n \n Table 4 summarizes the ergonomic component of the minimum approach distance for various voltage ranges.\n \n Table 4\u2014Ergonomic Component of Minimum Approach Distance\n Voltage range (kV)\n Distance\n m\n ft\n 0.301 to 0.750 0.31 1.0\n 0.751 to 72.5 0.61 2.0\n 72.6 to 800 0.31 1.0\n Note:  The employer must add this distance to the electrical component of the minimum approach distance to obtain the full minimum approach distance. \n The ergonomic component of the minimum approach distance accounts for errors in maintaining the minimum approach distance (which might occur, for example, if an employee misjudges the length of a conductive object he or she is holding), and for errors in judging the minimum approach distance. The ergonomic component also accounts for inadvertent movements by the employee, such as slipping. In contrast, the working position selected to properly maintain the minimum approach distance must account for all of an employee's reasonably likely movements and still permit the employee to adhere to the applicable minimum approach distance. (See Figure 1.) Reasonably likely movements include an employee's adjustments to tools, equipment, and working positions and all movements needed to perform the work. For example, the employee should be able to perform all of the following actions without straying into the minimum approach distance:\n \n \u2022 Adjust his or her hardhat,\n \n \u2022 maneuver a tool onto an energized part with a reasonable amount of overreaching or underreaching,\n \n \u2022 reach for and handle tools, material, and equipment passed to him or her, and\n \n \u2022 adjust tools, and replace components on them, when necessary during the work procedure.\n \n The training of qualified employees required under \u00a7 1910.269(a)(2), and the job planning and briefing required under \u00a7 1910.269(c), must address selection of a proper working position.\n \n  \n E.  Miscellaneous correction factors.  Changes in the air medium that forms the insulation influences the strength of an air gap. A brief discussion of each factor follows.\n \n 1.  Dielectric strength of air.  The dielectric strength of air in a uniform electric field at standard atmospheric conditions is approximately 3 kilovolts per millimeter.\n 6 \n   The pressure, temperature, and humidity of the air, the shape, dimensions, and separation of the electrodes, and the characteristics of the applied voltage (wave shape) affect the disruptive gradient.\n \n \n \n 6  For the purposes of estimating arc length, \u00a7 1910.269 generally assumes a more conservative dielectric strength of 10 kilovolts per 25.4 millimeters, consistent with assumptions made in consensus standards such as the National Electrical Safety Code (IEEE C2-2012). The more conservative value accounts for variables such as electrode shape, wave shape, and a certain amount of overvoltage. \n 2.  Atmospheric effect.  The empirically determined electrical strength of a given gap is normally applicable at standard atmospheric conditions (20 \u00b0C, 101.3 kilopascals, 11 grams/cubic centimeter humidity). An increase in the density (humidity) of the air inhibits sparkover for a given air gap. The combination of temperature and air pressure that results in the lowest gap sparkover voltage is high temperature and low pressure. This combination of conditions is not likely to occur. Low air pressure, generally associated with high humidity, causes increased electrical strength. An average air pressure generally correlates with low humidity. Hot and dry working conditions normally result in reduced electrical strength. The equations for minimum approach distances in Table R-3 assume standard atmospheric conditions.\n \n 3.  Altitude.  The reduced air pressure at high altitudes causes a reduction in the electrical strength of an air gap. An employer must increase the minimum approach distance by about 3 percent per 300 meters (1,000 feet) of increased altitude for altitudes above 900 meters (3,000 feet). Table R-5 specifies the altitude correction factor that the employer must use in calculating minimum approach distances.\n \n IV. Determining Minimum Approach Distances\n \n A.  Factors Affecting Voltage Stress at the Worksite \n \n 1.  System voltage (nominal).  The nominal system voltage range determines the voltage for purposes of calculating minimum approach distances. The employer selects the range in which the nominal system voltage falls, as given in the relevant table, and uses the highest value within that range in per-unit calculations.\n \n 2.  Transient overvoltages.  Operation of switches or circuit breakers, a fault on a line or circuit or on an adjacent circuit, and similar activities may generate transient overvoltages on an electrical system. Each overvoltage has an associated transient voltage wave shape. The wave shape arriving at the site and its magnitude vary considerably.\n \n In developing requirements for minimum approach distances, the Occupational Safety and Health Administration considered the most common wave shapes and the magnitude of transient overvoltages found on electric power generation, transmission, and distribution systems. The equations in Table R-3 for minimum approach distances use per-unit maximum transient overvoltages, which are relative to the nominal maximum voltage of the system. For example, a maximum transient overvoltage value of 3.0 per unit indicates that the highest transient overvoltage is 3.0 times the nominal maximum system voltage.\n \n 3.  Typical magnitude of overvoltages.  Table 5 lists the magnitude of typical transient overvoltages.\n \n Table 5\u2014Magnitude of Typical Transient Overvoltages\n Cause\n Magnitude\n  (per unit)\n Energized 200-mile line without closing resistors 3.5\n Energized 200-mile line with one-step closing resistor 2.1\n Energized 200-mile line with multistep resistor 2.5\n Reclosing with trapped charge one-step resistor 2.2\n Opening surge with single restrike 3.0\n Fault initiation unfaulted phase 2.1\n Fault initiation adjacent circuit 2.5\n Fault clearing 1.7 to 1.9 \n 4.  Standard deviation\u2014air-gap withstand.  For each air gap length under the same atmospheric conditions, there is a statistical variation in the breakdown voltage. The probability of breakdown against voltage has a normal (Gaussian) distribution. The standard deviation of this distribution varies with the wave shape, gap geometry, and atmospheric conditions. The withstand voltage of the air gap is three standard deviations (3\u03c3) below the critical sparkover voltage. (The critical sparkover voltage is the crest value of the impulse wave that, under specified conditions, causes sparkover 50 percent of the time. An impulse wave of three standard deviations below this value, that is, the withstand voltage, has a probability of sparkover of approximately 1 in 1,000.)\n \n 5.  Broken Insulators.  Tests show reductions in the insulation strength of insulator strings with broken skirts. Broken units may lose up to 70 percent of their withstand capacity. Because an employer cannot determine the insulating capability of a broken unit without testing it, the employer must consider damaged units in an insulator to have no insulating value. Additionally, the presence of a live-line tool alongside an insulator string with broken units may further reduce the overall insulating strength. The number of good units that must be present in a string for it to be \u201cinsulated\u201d as defined by \u00a7 1910.269(x) depends on the maximum overvoltage possible at the worksite.\n \n B.  Minimum Approach Distances Based on Known, Maximum-Anticipated Per-Unit Transient Overvoltages \n \n 1.  Determining the minimum approach distance for AC systems.  Under \u00a7 1910.269(l)(3)(ii), the employer must determine the maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, through an engineering analysis or must assume a maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, in accordance with Table R-9. When the employer conducts an engineering analysis of the system and determines that the maximum transient overvoltage is lower than specified by Table R-9, the employer must ensure that any conditions assumed in the analysis, for example, that employees block reclosing on a circuit or install portable protective gaps, are present during energized work. To ensure that these conditions are present, the employer may need to institute new live-work procedures reflecting the conditions and limitations set by the engineering analysis.\n \n 2.  Calculation of reduced approach distance values.  An employer may take the following steps to reduce minimum approach distances when the maximum transient overvoltage on the system (that is, the maximum transient overvoltage without additional steps to control overvoltages) produces unacceptably large minimum approach distances:\n \n Step 1.  Determine the maximum voltage (with respect to a given nominal voltage range) for the energized part.\n \n Step 2.  Determine the technique to use to control the maximum transient overvoltage. (See paragraphs IV.C and IV.D of this appendix.) Determine the maximum transient overvoltage that can exist at the worksite with that form of control in place and with a confidence level of 3\u03c3. This voltage is the withstand voltage for the purpose of calculating the appropriate minimum approach distance.\n \n Step 3.  Direct employees to implement procedures to ensure that the control technique is in effect during the course of the work.\n \n Step 4.  Using the new value of transient overvoltage in per unit, calculate the required minimum approach distance from Table R-3.\n \n C.  Methods of Controlling Possible Transient Overvoltage Stress Found on a System \n \n 1.  Introduction.  There are several means of controlling overvoltages that occur on transmission systems. For example, the employer can modify the operation of circuit breakers or other switching devices to reduce switching transient overvoltages. Alternatively, the employer can hold the overvoltage to an acceptable level by installing surge arresters or portable protective gaps on the system. In addition, the employer can change the transmission system to minimize the effect of switching operations. Section 4.8 of IEEE Std 516-2009 describes various ways of controlling, and thereby reducing, maximum transient overvoltages.\n \n 2.  Operation of circuit breakers.  \n 7 \n   The maximum transient overvoltage that can reach the worksite is often the result of switching on the line on which employees are working. Disabling automatic reclosing during energized line work, so that the line will not be reenergized after being opened for any reason, limits the maximum switching surge overvoltage to the larger of the opening surge or the greatest possible fault-generated surge, provided that the devices (for example, insertion resistors) are operable and will function to limit the transient overvoltage and that circuit breaker restrikes do not occur. The employer must ensure the proper functioning of insertion resistors and other overvoltage-limiting devices when the employer's engineering analysis assumes their proper operation to limit the overvoltage level. If the employer cannot disable the reclosing feature (because of system operating conditions), other methods of controlling the switching surge level may be necessary.\n \n \n \n 7  The detailed design of a circuit interrupter, such as the design of the contacts, resistor insertion, and breaker timing control, are beyond the scope of this appendix. The design of the system generally accounts for these features. This appendix only discusses features that can limit the maximum switching transient overvoltage on a system. \n Transient surges on an adjacent line, particularly for double circuit construction, may cause a significant overvoltage on the line on which employees are working. The employer's engineering analysis must account for coupling to adjacent lines.\n \n 3.  Surge arresters.  The use of modern surge arresters allows a reduction in the basic impulse-insulation levels of much transmission system equipment. The primary function of early arresters was to protect the system insulation from the effects of lightning. Modern arresters not only dissipate lightning-caused transients, but may also control many other system transients caused by switching or faults.\n \n The employer may use properly designed arresters to control transient overvoltages along a transmission line and thereby reduce the requisite length of the insulator string and possibly the maximum transient overvoltage on the line.\n 8 \n  \n \n \n \n 8  Surge arrester application is beyond the scope of this appendix. However, if the employer installs the arrester near the work site, the application would be similar to the protective gaps discussed in paragraph IV.D of this appendix. \n 4.  Switching Restrictions.  Another form of overvoltage control involves establishing switching restrictions, whereby the employer prohibits the operation of circuit breakers until certain system conditions are present. The employer restricts switching by using a tagging system, similar to that used for a permit, except that the common term used for this activity is a \u201chold-off\u201d or \u201crestriction.\u201d These terms indicate that the restriction does not prevent operation, but only modifies the operation during the live-work activity.\n \n D. Minimum Approach Distance Based on Control of Maximum Transient Overvoltage at the Worksite\n \n When the employer institutes control of maximum transient overvoltage at the worksite by installing portable protective gaps, the employer may calculate the minimum approach distance as follows:\n \n Step 1.  Select the appropriate withstand voltage for the protective gap based on system requirements and an acceptable probability of gap sparkover.\n 9 \n  \n \n \n \n 9  The employer should check the withstand voltage to ensure that it results in a probability of gap flashover that is acceptable from a system outage perspective. (In other words, a gap sparkover will produce a system outage. The employer should determine whether such an outage will impact overall system performance to an acceptable degree.) In general, the withstand voltage should be at least 1.25 times the maximum crest operating voltage. \n Step 2.  Determine a gap distance that provides a withstand voltage \n 10 \n   greater than or equal to the one selected in the first step.\n 11 \n  \n \n \n \n 10  The manufacturer of the gap provides, based on test data, the critical sparkover voltage for each gap spacing (for example, a critical sparkover voltage of 665 kilovolts for a gap spacing of 1.2 meters). The withstand voltage for the gap is equal to 85 percent of its critical sparkover voltage. \n \n \n 11  Switch steps 1 and 2 if the length of the protective gap is known. \n Step 3.  Use 110 percent of the gap's critical sparkover voltage to determine the phase-to-ground peak voltage at gap sparkover ( V PPG Peak ).\n \n Step 4.  Determine the maximum transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, at the worksite from the following formula:\n \n  \n Step 5.  Use this value of  T  \n 12 \n   in the equation in Table R-3 to obtain the minimum approach distance. If the worksite is no more than 900 meters (3,000 feet) above sea level, the employer may use this value of  T  to determine the minimum approach distance from Table 14 through Table 21.\n \n \n \n 12  IEEE Std 516-2009 states that most employers add 0.2 to the calculated value of  T  as an additional safety factor. \n \n Note: \n All rounding must be to the next higher value (that is, always round up). \n Sample protective gap calculations. \n \n Problem:  Employees are to perform work on a 500-kilovolt transmission line at sea level that is subject to transient overvoltages of 2.4 p.u. The maximum operating voltage of the line is 550 kilovolts. Determine the length of the protective gap that will provide the minimum practical safe approach distance. Also, determine what that minimum approach distance is.\n \n Step 1.  Calculate the smallest practical maximum transient overvoltage (1.25 times the crest phase-to-ground voltage): \n 13 \n  \n \n \n \n 13  To eliminate sparkovers due to minor system disturbances, the employer should use a withstand voltage no lower than 1.25 p.u. Note that this is a practical, or operational, consideration only. It may be feasible for the employer to use lower values of withstand voltage. \n  \n This value equals the withstand voltage of the protective gap.\n \n Step 2.  Using test data for a particular protective gap, select a gap that has a critical sparkover voltage greater than or equal to:\n \n 561 kV  \u00f7 0.85 = 660 kV \n \n For example, if a protective gap with a 1.22-m (4.0-foot) spacing tested to a critical sparkover voltage of 665 kilovolts (crest), select this gap spacing.\n \n Step 3.  The phase-to-ground peak voltage at gap sparkover ( V PPG Peak ) is 110 percent of the value from the previous step:\n \n 665 kV  \u00d7 1.10 = 732 kV \n \n This value corresponds to the withstand voltage of the electrical component of the minimum approach distance.\n \n Step 4.  Use this voltage to determine the worksite value of  T: \n \n  \n Step 5.  Use this value of  T  in the equation in Table R-3 to obtain the minimum approach distance, or look up the minimum approach distance in Table 14 through Table 21:\n \n MAD  = 2.29m (7.6 ft).\n \n E. Location of Protective Gaps\n \n 1.  Adjacent structures.  The employer may install the protective gap on a structure adjacent to the worksite, as this practice does not significantly reduce the protection afforded by the gap.\n \n 2.  Terminal stations.  Gaps installed at terminal stations of lines or circuits provide a level of protection; however, that level of protection may not extend throughout the length of the line to the worksite. The use of substation terminal gaps raises the possibility that separate surges could enter the line at opposite ends, each with low enough magnitude to pass the terminal gaps without sparkover. When voltage surges occur simultaneously at each end of a line and travel toward each other, the total voltage on the line at the point where they meet is the arithmetic sum of the two surges. A gap installed within 0.8 km (0.5 mile) of the worksite will protect against such intersecting waves. Engineering studies of a particular line or system may indicate that employers can adequately protect employees by installing gaps at even more distant locations. In any event, unless using the default values for  T  from Table R-9, the employer must determine  T  at the worksite.\n \n 3.  Worksite.  If the employer installs protective gaps at the worksite, the gap setting establishes the worksite impulse insulation strength. Lightning strikes as far as 6 miles from the worksite can cause a voltage surge greater than the gap withstand voltage, and a gap sparkover can occur. In addition, the gap can sparkover from overvoltages on the line that exceed the withstand voltage of the gap. Consequently, the employer must protect employees from hazards resulting from any sparkover that could occur.\n \n F.  Disabling automatic reclosing.  There are two reasons to disable the automatic-reclosing feature of circuit-interrupting devices while employees are performing live-line work:\n \n \u2022 To prevent reenergization of a circuit faulted during the work, which could create a hazard or result in more serious injuries or damage than the injuries or damage produced by the original fault;\n \n \u2022 To prevent any transient overvoltage caused by the switching surge that would result if the circuit were reenergized.\n \n However, due to system stability considerations, it may not always be feasible to disable the automatic-reclosing feature.\n \n V. Minimum Approach-Distance Tables\n \n A.  Legacy tables.  Employers may use the minimum approach distances in Table 6 through Table 13 until March 31, 2015.\n\nElectric utilities design electric power generation, transmission, and distribution installations to meet National Electrical Safety Code (NESC), ANSI C2, requirements. Electric utilities also design transmission and distribution lines to limit line outages as required by system reliability criteria \n 1 \n   and to withstand the maximum overvoltages impressed on the system. Conditions such as switching surges, faults, and lightning can cause overvoltages. Electric utilities generally select insulator design and lengths and the clearances to structural parts so as to prevent outages from contaminated line insulation and during storms. Line insulator lengths and structural clearances have, over the years, come closer to the minimum approach distances used by workers. As minimum approach distances and structural clearances converge, it is increasingly important that system designers and system operating and maintenance personnel understand the concepts underlying minimum approach distances.\n\n1  Federal, State, and local regulatory bodies and electric utilities set reliability requirements that limit the number and duration of system outages.\n\nThe information in this appendix will assist employers in complying with the minimum approach-distance requirements contained in \u00a7 1910.269(l)(3) and (q)(3). Employers must use the technical criteria and methodology presented in this appendix in establishing minimum approach distances in accordance with \u00a7 1910.269(l)(3)(i) and Table R-3 and Table R-8. This appendix provides essential background information and technical criteria for the calculation of the required minimum approach distances for live-line work on electric power generation, transmission, and distribution installations.\n\nUnless an employer is using the maximum transient overvoltages specified in Table R-9 for voltages over 72.5 kilovolts, the employer must use persons knowledgeable in the techniques discussed in this appendix, and competent in the field of electric transmission and distribution system design, to determine the maximum transient overvoltage.\n\nA.  Definitions.  The following definitions from \u00a7 1910.269(x) relate to work on or near electric power generation, transmission, and distribution lines and equipment and the electrical hazards they present.\n\nExposed.  . . . Not isolated or guarded.\n\nGuarded.  Covered, fenced, enclosed, or otherwise protected, by means of suitable covers or casings, barrier rails or screens, mats, or platforms, designed to minimize the possibility, under normal conditions, of dangerous approach or inadvertent contact by persons or objects.\n\nWires that are insulated, but not otherwise protected, are not guarded.\n\nInsulated.  Separated from other conducting surfaces by a dielectric (including air space) offering a high resistance to the passage of current.\n\nWhen any object is said to be insulated, it is understood to be insulated for the conditions to which it normally is subjected. Otherwise, it is, for the purpose of this section, uninsulated.\n\nIsolated.  Not readily accessible to persons unless special means for access are used.\n\nStatistical sparkover voltage.  A transient overvoltage level that produces a 97.72-percent probability of sparkover (that is, two standard deviations above the voltage at which there is a 50-percent probability of sparkover).\n\nStatistical withstand voltage.  A transient overvoltage level that produces a 0.14-percent probability of sparkover (that is, three standard deviations below the voltage at which there is a 50-percent probability of sparkover).\n\nB.  Installations energized at 50 to 300 volts.  The hazards posed by installations energized at 50 to 300 volts are the same as those found in many other workplaces. That is not to say that there is no hazard, but the complexity of electrical protection required does not compare to that required for high-voltage systems. The employee must avoid contact with the exposed parts, and the protective equipment used (such as rubber insulating gloves) must provide insulation for the voltages involved.\n\nC.  Exposed energized parts over 300 volts AC.  Paragraph (l)(3)(i) of \u00a7 1910.269 requires the employer to establish minimum approach distances no less than the distances computed by Table R-3 for ac systems so that employees can work safely without risk of sparkover.\n 2\n\n2  Sparkover is a disruptive electric discharge in which an electric arc forms and electric current passes through air.\n\nUnless the employee is using electrical protective equipment, air is the insulating medium between the employee and energized parts. The distance between the employee and an energized part must be sufficient for the air to withstand the maximum transient overvoltage that can reach the worksite under the working conditions and practices the employee is using. This distance is the minimum air insulation distance, and it is equal to the electrical component of the minimum approach distance.\n\nNormal system design may provide or include a means (such as lightning arrestors) to control maximum anticipated transient overvoltages, or the employer may use temporary devices (portable protective gaps) or measures (such as preventing automatic circuit breaker reclosing) to achieve the same result. Paragraph (l)(3)(ii) of \u00a7 1910.269 requires the employer to determine the maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, through an engineering analysis or assume a maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, in accordance with Table R-9, which specifies the following maximums for ac systems:\n\n72.6 to 420.0 kilovolts\u20143.5 per unit\n\n420.1 to 550.0 kilovolts\u20143.0 per unit\n\n550.1 to 800.0 kilovolts\u20142.5 per unit\n\nSee paragraph IV.A.2, later in this appendix, for additional discussion of maximum transient overvoltages.\n\nD.  Types of exposures.  Employees working on or near energized electric power generation, transmission, and distribution systems face two kinds of exposures: Phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase. The exposure is phase-to-ground: (1) With respect to an energized part, when the employee is at ground potential or (2) with respect to ground, when an employee is at the potential of the energized part during live-line barehand work. The exposure is phase-to-phase, with respect to an energized part, when an employee is at the potential of another energized part (at a different potential) during live-line barehand work.\n\nA.  Voltages of 301 to 5,000 volts.  Test data generally forms the basis of minimum air insulation distances. The lowest voltage for which sufficient test data exists is 5,000 volts, and these data indicate that the minimum air insulation distance at that voltage is 20 millimeters (1 inch). Because the minimum air insulation distance increases with increasing voltage, and, conversely, decreases with decreasing voltage, an assumed minimum air insulation distance of 20 millimeters will protect against sparkover at voltages of 301 to 5,000 volts. Thus, 20 millimeters is the electrical component of the minimum approach distance for these voltages.\n\nB.  Voltages of 5.1 to 72.5 kilovolts.  For voltages from 5.1 to 72.5 kilovolts, the Occupational Safety and Health Administration bases the methodology for calculating the electrical component of the minimum approach distance on Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) Standard 4-1995,  Standard Techniques for High-Voltage Testing.  Table 1 lists the critical sparkover distances from that standard as listed in IEEE Std 516-2009,  IEEE Guide for Maintenance Methods on Energized Power Lines.\n\nTable 1\u2014Sparkover Distance for Rod-to-Rod Gap\n\nSource: IEEE Std 516-2009.\n\nTo use this table to determine the electrical component of the minimum approach distance, the employer must determine the peak phase-to-ground transient overvoltage and select a gap from the table that corresponds to that voltage as a withstand voltage rather than a critical sparkover voltage. To calculate the electrical component of the minimum approach distance for voltages between 5 and 72.5 kilovolts, use the following procedure:\n\n1. Divide the phase-to-phase voltage by the square root of 3 to convert it to a phase-to-ground voltage.\n\n2. Multiply the phase-to-ground voltage by the square root of 2 to convert the rms value of the voltage to the peak phase-to-ground voltage.\n\n3. Multiply the peak phase-to-ground voltage by the maximum per-unit transient overvoltage, which, for this voltage range, is 3.0, as discussed later in this appendix. This is the maximum phase-to-ground transient overvoltage, which corresponds to the withstand voltage for the relevant exposure.\n 3\n\n3  The withstand voltage is the voltage at which sparkover is not likely to occur across a specified distance. It is the voltage taken at the 3\u03c3 point below the sparkover voltage, assuming that the sparkover curve follows a normal distribution.\n\n4. Divide the maximum phase-to-ground transient overvoltage by 0.85 to determine the corresponding critical sparkover voltage. (The critical sparkover voltage is 3 standard deviations (or 15 percent) greater than the withstand voltage.)\n\n5. Determine the electrical component of the minimum approach distance from Table 1 through interpolation.\n\nTable 2 illustrates how to derive the electrical component of the minimum approach distance for voltages from 5.1 to 72.5 kilovolts, before the application of any altitude correction factor, as explained later.\n\nTable 2\u2014Calculating the Electrical Component of MAD 751 V to 72.5 kV\n\nC.  Voltages of 72.6 to 800 kilovolts.  For voltages of 72.6 kilovolts to 800 kilovolts, this section bases the electrical component of minimum approach distances, before the application of any altitude correction factor, on the following formula:\n\nD  = 0.3048( C  +  a )  V L - G T\n\nWhere:\n\nD  = Electrical component of the minimum approach distance in air in meters;\n\nC  = a correction factor associated with the variation of gap sparkover with voltage;\n\na  = A factor relating to the saturation of air at system voltages of 345 kilovolts or higher; \n 4\n\n4  Test data demonstrates that the saturation factor is greater than 0 at peak voltages of about 630 kilovolts. Systems operating at 345 kilovolts (or maximum system voltages of 362 kilovolts) can have peak maximum transient overvoltages exceeding 630 kilovolts. Table R-3 sets equations for calculating  a  based on peak voltage.\n\nV L-G  = Maximum system line-to-ground rms voltage in kilovolts\u2014it should be the \u201cactual\u201d maximum, or the normal highest voltage for the range (for example, 10 percent above the nominal voltage); and\n\nT  = Maximum transient overvoltage factor in per unit.\n\nIn Equation 1,  C  is 0.01: (1) For phase-to-ground exposures that the employer can demonstrate consist only of air across the approach distance (gap) and (2) for phase-to-phase exposures if the employer can demonstrate that no insulated tool spans the gap and that no large conductive object is in the gap. Otherwise,  C  is 0.011.\n\nIn Equation 1, the term  a  varies depending on whether the employee's exposure is phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase and on whether objects are in the gap. The employer must use the equations in Table 3 to calculate  a.  Sparkover test data with insulation spanning the gap form the basis for the equations for phase-to-ground exposures, and sparkover test data with only air in the gap form the basis for the equations for phase-to-phase exposures. The phase-to-ground equations result in slightly higher values of  a,  and, consequently, produce larger minimum approach distances, than the phase-to-phase equations for the same value of V Peak .\n\nTable 3\u2014Equations for Calculating the Surge Factor,  a\n\n1  Use the equations for phase-to-ground exposures (with  V Peak  for phase-to-phase exposures) unless the employer can demonstrate that no insulated tool spans the gap and that no large conductive object is in the gap.\n\nIn Equation 1,  T  is the maximum transient overvoltage factor in per unit. As noted earlier, \u00a7 1910.269(l)(3)(ii) requires the employer to determine the maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, through an engineering analysis or assume a maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, in accordance with Table R-9. For phase-to-ground exposures, the employer uses this value, called  T L-G , as  T  in Equation 1. IEEE Std 516-2009 provides the following formula to calculate the phase-to-phase maximum transient overvoltage,  T L-L , from  T L-G :\n\nT L-L  = 1.35 T L-G  + 0.45\n\nFor phase-to-phase exposures, the employer uses this value as  T  in Equation 1.\n\nD.  Provisions for inadvertent movement.  The minimum approach distance must include an \u201cadder\u201d to compensate for the inadvertent movement of the worker relative to an energized part or the movement of the part relative to the worker. This \u201cadder\u201d must account for this possible inadvertent movement and provide the worker with a comfortable and safe zone in which to work. Employers must add the distance for inadvertent movement (called the \u201cergonomic component of the minimum approach distance\u201d) to the electrical component to determine the total safe minimum approach distances used in live-line work.\n\nThe Occupational Safety and Health Administration based the ergonomic component of the minimum approach distance on response time-distance analysis. This technique uses an estimate of the total response time to a hazardous incident and converts that time to the distance traveled. For example, the driver of a car takes a given amount of time to respond to a \u201cstimulus\u201d and stop the vehicle. The elapsed time involved results in the car's traveling some distance before coming to a complete stop. This distance depends on the speed of the car at the time the stimulus appears and the reaction time of the driver.\n\nIn the case of live-line work, the employee must first perceive that he or she is approaching the danger zone. Then, the worker responds to the danger and must decelerate and stop all motion toward the energized part. During the time it takes to stop, the employee will travel some distance. This is the distance the employer must add to the electrical component of the minimum approach distance to obtain the total safe minimum approach distance.\n\nAt voltages from 751 volts to 72.5 kilovolts,\n 5 \n   the electrical component of the minimum approach distance is smaller than the ergonomic component. At 72.5 kilovolts, the electrical component is only a little more than 0.3 meters (1 foot). An ergonomic component of the minimum approach distance must provide for all the worker's unanticipated movements. At these voltages, workers generally use rubber insulating gloves; however, these gloves protect only a worker's hands and arms. Therefore, the energized object must be at a safe approach distance to protect the worker's face. In this case, 0.61 meters (2 feet) is a sufficient and practical ergonomic component of the minimum approach distance.\n\n5  For voltages of 50 to 300 volts, Table R-3 specifies a minimum approach distance of \u201cavoid contact.\u201d The minimum approach distance for this voltage range contains neither an electrical component nor an ergonomic component.\n\nFor voltages between 72.6 and 800 kilovolts, employees must use different work practices during energized line work. Generally, employees use live-line tools (hot sticks) to perform work on energized equipment. These tools, by design, keep the energized part at a constant distance from the employee and, thus, maintain the appropriate minimum approach distance automatically.\n\nThe location of the worker and the type of work methods the worker is using also influence the length of the ergonomic component of the minimum approach distance. In this higher voltage range, the employees use work methods that more tightly control their movements than when the workers perform work using rubber insulating gloves. The worker, therefore, is farther from the energized line or equipment and must be more precise in his or her movements just to perform the work. For these reasons, this section adopts an ergonomic component of the minimum approach distance of 0.31 m (1 foot) for voltages between 72.6 and 800 kilovolts.\n\nTable 4 summarizes the ergonomic component of the minimum approach distance for various voltage ranges.\n\nTable 4\u2014Ergonomic Component of Minimum Approach Distance\n\nNote:  The employer must add this distance to the electrical component of the minimum approach distance to obtain the full minimum approach distance.\n\nThe ergonomic component of the minimum approach distance accounts for errors in maintaining the minimum approach distance (which might occur, for example, if an employee misjudges the length of a conductive object he or she is holding), and for errors in judging the minimum approach distance. The ergonomic component also accounts for inadvertent movements by the employee, such as slipping. In contrast, the working position selected to properly maintain the minimum approach distance must account for all of an employee's reasonably likely movements and still permit the employee to adhere to the applicable minimum approach distance. (See Figure 1.) Reasonably likely movements include an employee's adjustments to tools, equipment, and working positions and all movements needed to perform the work. For example, the employee should be able to perform all of the following actions without straying into the minimum approach distance:\n\n\u2022 Adjust his or her hardhat,\n\n\u2022 maneuver a tool onto an energized part with a reasonable amount of overreaching or underreaching,\n\n\u2022 reach for and handle tools, material, and equipment passed to him or her, and\n\n\u2022 adjust tools, and replace components on them, when necessary during the work procedure.\n\nThe training of qualified employees required under \u00a7 1910.269(a)(2), and the job planning and briefing required under \u00a7 1910.269(c), must address selection of a proper working position.\n\nE.  Miscellaneous correction factors.  Changes in the air medium that forms the insulation influences the strength of an air gap. A brief discussion of each factor follows.\n\n1.  Dielectric strength of air.  The dielectric strength of air in a uniform electric field at standard atmospheric conditions is approximately 3 kilovolts per millimeter.\n 6 \n   The pressure, temperature, and humidity of the air, the shape, dimensions, and separation of the electrodes, and the characteristics of the applied voltage (wave shape) affect the disruptive gradient.\n\n6  For the purposes of estimating arc length, \u00a7 1910.269 generally assumes a more conservative dielectric strength of 10 kilovolts per 25.4 millimeters, consistent with assumptions made in consensus standards such as the National Electrical Safety Code (IEEE C2-2012). The more conservative value accounts for variables such as electrode shape, wave shape, and a certain amount of overvoltage.\n\n2.  Atmospheric effect.  The empirically determined electrical strength of a given gap is normally applicable at standard atmospheric conditions (20 \u00b0C, 101.3 kilopascals, 11 grams/cubic centimeter humidity). An increase in the density (humidity) of the air inhibits sparkover for a given air gap. The combination of temperature and air pressure that results in the lowest gap sparkover voltage is high temperature and low pressure. This combination of conditions is not likely to occur. Low air pressure, generally associated with high humidity, causes increased electrical strength. An average air pressure generally correlates with low humidity. Hot and dry working conditions normally result in reduced electrical strength. The equations for minimum approach distances in Table R-3 assume standard atmospheric conditions.\n\n3.  Altitude.  The reduced air pressure at high altitudes causes a reduction in the electrical strength of an air gap. An employer must increase the minimum approach distance by about 3 percent per 300 meters (1,000 feet) of increased altitude for altitudes above 900 meters (3,000 feet). Table R-5 specifies the altitude correction factor that the employer must use in calculating minimum approach distances.\n\n1.  System voltage (nominal).  The nominal system voltage range determines the voltage for purposes of calculating minimum approach distances. The employer selects the range in which the nominal system voltage falls, as given in the relevant table, and uses the highest value within that range in per-unit calculations.\n\n2.  Transient overvoltages.  Operation of switches or circuit breakers, a fault on a line or circuit or on an adjacent circuit, and similar activities may generate transient overvoltages on an electrical system. Each overvoltage has an associated transient voltage wave shape. The wave shape arriving at the site and its magnitude vary considerably.\n\nIn developing requirements for minimum approach distances, the Occupational Safety and Health Administration considered the most common wave shapes and the magnitude of transient overvoltages found on electric power generation, transmission, and distribution systems. The equations in Table R-3 for minimum approach distances use per-unit maximum transient overvoltages, which are relative to the nominal maximum voltage of the system. For example, a maximum transient overvoltage value of 3.0 per unit indicates that the highest transient overvoltage is 3.0 times the nominal maximum system voltage.\n\n3.  Typical magnitude of overvoltages.  Table 5 lists the magnitude of typical transient overvoltages.\n\nTable 5\u2014Magnitude of Typical Transient Overvoltages\n\n4.  Standard deviation\u2014air-gap withstand.  For each air gap length under the same atmospheric conditions, there is a statistical variation in the breakdown voltage. The probability of breakdown against voltage has a normal (Gaussian) distribution. The standard deviation of this distribution varies with the wave shape, gap geometry, and atmospheric conditions. The withstand voltage of the air gap is three standard deviations (3\u03c3) below the critical sparkover voltage. (The critical sparkover voltage is the crest value of the impulse wave that, under specified conditions, causes sparkover 50 percent of the time. An impulse wave of three standard deviations below this value, that is, the withstand voltage, has a probability of sparkover of approximately 1 in 1,000.)\n\n5.  Broken Insulators.  Tests show reductions in the insulation strength of insulator strings with broken skirts. Broken units may lose up to 70 percent of their withstand capacity. Because an employer cannot determine the insulating capability of a broken unit without testing it, the employer must consider damaged units in an insulator to have no insulating value. Additionally, the presence of a live-line tool alongside an insulator string with broken units may further reduce the overall insulating strength. The number of good units that must be present in a string for it to be \u201cinsulated\u201d as defined by \u00a7 1910.269(x) depends on the maximum overvoltage possible at the worksite.\n\n1.  Determining the minimum approach distance for AC systems.  Under \u00a7 1910.269(l)(3)(ii), the employer must determine the maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, through an engineering analysis or must assume a maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, in accordance with Table R-9. When the employer conducts an engineering analysis of the system and determines that the maximum transient overvoltage is lower than specified by Table R-9, the employer must ensure that any conditions assumed in the analysis, for example, that employees block reclosing on a circuit or install portable protective gaps, are present during energized work. To ensure that these conditions are present, the employer may need to institute new live-work procedures reflecting the conditions and limitations set by the engineering analysis.\n\n2.  Calculation of reduced approach distance values.  An employer may take the following steps to reduce minimum approach distances when the maximum transient overvoltage on the system (that is, the maximum transient overvoltage without additional steps to control overvoltages) produces unacceptably large minimum approach distances:\n\nStep 1.  Determine the maximum voltage (with respect to a given nominal voltage range) for the energized part.\n\nStep 2.  Determine the technique to use to control the maximum transient overvoltage. (See paragraphs IV.C and IV.D of this appendix.) Determine the maximum transient overvoltage that can exist at the worksite with that form of control in place and with a confidence level of 3\u03c3. This voltage is the withstand voltage for the purpose of calculating the appropriate minimum approach distance.\n\nStep 3.  Direct employees to implement procedures to ensure that the control technique is in effect during the course of the work.\n\nStep 4.  Using the new value of transient overvoltage in per unit, calculate the required minimum approach distance from Table R-3.\n\n1.  Introduction.  There are several means of controlling overvoltages that occur on transmission systems. For example, the employer can modify the operation of circuit breakers or other switching devices to reduce switching transient overvoltages. Alternatively, the employer can hold the overvoltage to an acceptable level by installing surge arresters or portable protective gaps on the system. In addition, the employer can change the transmission system to minimize the effect of switching operations. Section 4.8 of IEEE Std 516-2009 describes various ways of controlling, and thereby reducing, maximum transient overvoltages.\n\n2.  Operation of circuit breakers.  \n 7 \n   The maximum transient overvoltage that can reach the worksite is often the result of switching on the line on which employees are working. Disabling automatic reclosing during energized line work, so that the line will not be reenergized after being opened for any reason, limits the maximum switching surge overvoltage to the larger of the opening surge or the greatest possible fault-generated surge, provided that the devices (for example, insertion resistors) are operable and will function to limit the transient overvoltage and that circuit breaker restrikes do not occur. The employer must ensure the proper functioning of insertion resistors and other overvoltage-limiting devices when the employer's engineering analysis assumes their proper operation to limit the overvoltage level. If the employer cannot disable the reclosing feature (because of system operating conditions), other methods of controlling the switching surge level may be necessary.\n\n7  The detailed design of a circuit interrupter, such as the design of the contacts, resistor insertion, and breaker timing control, are beyond the scope of this appendix. The design of the system generally accounts for these features. This appendix only discusses features that can limit the maximum switching transient overvoltage on a system.\n\nTransient surges on an adjacent line, particularly for double circuit construction, may cause a significant overvoltage on the line on which employees are working. The employer's engineering analysis must account for coupling to adjacent lines.\n\n3.  Surge arresters.  The use of modern surge arresters allows a reduction in the basic impulse-insulation levels of much transmission system equipment. The primary function of early arresters was to protect the system insulation from the effects of lightning. Modern arresters not only dissipate lightning-caused transients, but may also control many other system transients caused by switching or faults.\n\nThe employer may use properly designed arresters to control transient overvoltages along a transmission line and thereby reduce the requisite length of the insulator string and possibly the maximum transient overvoltage on the line.\n 8\n\n8  Surge arrester application is beyond the scope of this appendix. However, if the employer installs the arrester near the work site, the application would be similar to the protective gaps discussed in paragraph IV.D of this appendix.\n\n4.  Switching Restrictions.  Another form of overvoltage control involves establishing switching restrictions, whereby the employer prohibits the operation of circuit breakers until certain system conditions are present. The employer restricts switching by using a tagging system, similar to that used for a permit, except that the common term used for this activity is a \u201chold-off\u201d or \u201crestriction.\u201d These terms indicate that the restriction does not prevent operation, but only modifies the operation during the live-work activity.\n\nWhen the employer institutes control of maximum transient overvoltage at the worksite by installing portable protective gaps, the employer may calculate the minimum approach distance as follows:\n\nStep 1.  Select the appropriate withstand voltage for the protective gap based on system requirements and an acceptable probability of gap sparkover.\n 9\n\n9  The employer should check the withstand voltage to ensure that it results in a probability of gap flashover that is acceptable from a system outage perspective. (In other words, a gap sparkover will produce a system outage. The employer should determine whether such an outage will impact overall system performance to an acceptable degree.) In general, the withstand voltage should be at least 1.25 times the maximum crest operating voltage.\n\nStep 2.  Determine a gap distance that provides a withstand voltage \n 10 \n   greater than or equal to the one selected in the first step.\n 11\n\n10  The manufacturer of the gap provides, based on test data, the critical sparkover voltage for each gap spacing (for example, a critical sparkover voltage of 665 kilovolts for a gap spacing of 1.2 meters). The withstand voltage for the gap is equal to 85 percent of its critical sparkover voltage.\n\n11  Switch steps 1 and 2 if the length of the protective gap is known.\n\nStep 3.  Use 110 percent of the gap's critical sparkover voltage to determine the phase-to-ground peak voltage at gap sparkover ( V PPG Peak ).\n\nStep 4.  Determine the maximum transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, at the worksite from the following formula:\n\nStep 5.  Use this value of  T  \n 12 \n   in the equation in Table R-3 to obtain the minimum approach distance. If the worksite is no more than 900 meters (3,000 feet) above sea level, the employer may use this value of  T  to determine the minimum approach distance from Table 14 through Table 21.\n\n12  IEEE Std 516-2009 states that most employers add 0.2 to the calculated value of  T  as an additional safety factor.\n\nAll rounding must be to the next higher value (that is, always round up).\n\nSample protective gap calculations.\n\nProblem:  Employees are to perform work on a 500-kilovolt transmission line at sea level that is subject to transient overvoltages of 2.4 p.u. The maximum operating voltage of the line is 550 kilovolts. Determine the length of the protective gap that will provide the minimum practical safe approach distance. Also, determine what that minimum approach distance is.\n\nStep 1.  Calculate the smallest practical maximum transient overvoltage (1.25 times the crest phase-to-ground voltage): \n 13\n\n13  To eliminate sparkovers due to minor system disturbances, the employer should use a withstand voltage no lower than 1.25 p.u. Note that this is a practical, or operational, consideration only. It may be feasible for the employer to use lower values of withstand voltage.\n\nThis value equals the withstand voltage of the protective gap.\n\nStep 2.  Using test data for a particular protective gap, select a gap that has a critical sparkover voltage greater than or equal to:\n\n561 kV  \u00f7 0.85 = 660 kV\n\nFor example, if a protective gap with a 1.22-m (4.0-foot) spacing tested to a critical sparkover voltage of 665 kilovolts (crest), select this gap spacing.\n\nStep 3.  The phase-to-ground peak voltage at gap sparkover ( V PPG Peak ) is 110 percent of the value from the previous step:\n\n665 kV  \u00d7 1.10 = 732 kV\n\nThis value corresponds to the withstand voltage of the electrical component of the minimum approach distance.\n\nStep 4.  Use this voltage to determine the worksite value of  T:\n\nStep 5.  Use this value of  T  in the equation in Table R-3 to obtain the minimum approach distance, or look up the minimum approach distance in Table 14 through Table 21:\n\nMAD  = 2.29m (7.6 ft).\n\n1.  Adjacent structures.  The employer may install the protective gap on a structure adjacent to the worksite, as this practice does not significantly reduce the protection afforded by the gap.\n\n2.  Terminal stations.  Gaps installed at terminal stations of lines or circuits provide a level of protection; however, that level of protection may not extend throughout the length of the line to the worksite. The use of substation terminal gaps raises the possibility that separate surges could enter the line at opposite ends, each with low enough magnitude to pass the terminal gaps without sparkover. When voltage surges occur simultaneously at each end of a line and travel toward each other, the total voltage on the line at the point where they meet is the arithmetic sum of the two surges. A gap installed within 0.8 km (0.5 mile) of the worksite will protect against such intersecting waves. Engineering studies of a particular line or system may indicate that employers can adequately protect employees by installing gaps at even more distant locations. In any event, unless using the default values for  T  from Table R-9, the employer must determine  T  at the worksite.\n\n3.  Worksite.  If the employer installs protective gaps at the worksite, the gap setting establishes the worksite impulse insulation strength. Lightning strikes as far as 6 miles from the worksite can cause a voltage surge greater than the gap withstand voltage, and a gap sparkover can occur. In addition, the gap can sparkover from overvoltages on the line that exceed the withstand voltage of the gap. Consequently, the employer must protect employees from hazards resulting from any sparkover that could occur.\n\nF.  Disabling automatic reclosing.  There are two reasons to disable the automatic-reclosing feature of circuit-interrupting devices while employees are performing live-line work:\n\n\u2022 To prevent reenergization of a circuit faulted during the work, which could create a hazard or result in more serious injuries or damage than the injuries or damage produced by the original fault;\n\n\u2022 To prevent any transient overvoltage caused by the switching surge that would result if the circuit were reenergized.\n\nHowever, due to system stability considerations, it may not always be feasible to disable the automatic-reclosing feature.\n\nA.  Legacy tables.  Employers may use the minimum approach distances in Table 6 through Table 13 until March 31, 2015.\n\nTable 6\u2014Minimum Approach Distances Until December 31, 2014\n\nNote:  The clear live-line tool distance must equal or exceed the values for the indicated voltage ranges.\n\nTable 7\u2014Minimum Approach Distances Until March 31, 2015\u201472.6 to 121.0 kV With Overvoltage Factor\n\nNote 1:  The employer may apply the distance specified in this table only where the employer determines the maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage by engineering analysis. (Table 6 applies otherwise.)\n\nNote 2:  The distances specified in this table are the air, bare-hand, and live-line tool distances.\n\nTable 8\u2014Minimum Approach Distances Until March 31, 2015\u2014121.1 to 145.0 kV With Overvoltage Factor\n\nNote 1:  The employer may apply the distance specified in this table only where the employer determines the maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage by engineering analysis. (Table 6 applies otherwise.)\n\nNote 2:  The distances specified in this table are the air, bare-hand, and live-line tool distances.\n\nTable 9\u2014Minimum Approach Distances Until March 31, 2015\u2014145.1 to 169.0 kV With Overvoltage Factor\n\nNote 1:  The employer may apply the distance specified in this table only where the employer determines the maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage by engineering analysis. (Table 6 applies otherwise.)\n\nNote 2:  The distances specified in this table are the air, bare-hand, and live-line tool distances.\n\nTable 10\u2014Minimum Approach Distances Until March 31, 2015\u2014169.1 to 242.0 kV With Overvoltage Factor\n\nNote 1:  The employer may apply the distance specified in this table only where the employer determines the maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage by engineering analysis. (Table 6 applies otherwise.)\n\nNote 2:  The distances specified in this table are the air, bare-hand, and live-line tool distances.\n\nTable 11\u2014Minimum Approach Distances Until March 31, 2015\u2014242.1 to 362.0 kV With Overvoltage Factor\n\nNote 1:  The employer may apply the distance specified in this table only where the employer determines the maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage by engineering analysis. (Table 6 applies otherwise.)\n\nNote 2:  The distances specified in this table are the air, bare-hand, and live-line tool distances.\n\nTable 12\u2014Minimum Approach Distances Until March 31, 2015\u2014362.1 to 552.0 kV With Overvoltage Factor\n\nNote 1:  The employer may apply the distance specified in this table only where the employer determines the maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage by engineering analysis. (Table 6 applies otherwise.)\n\nNote 2:  The distances specified in this table are the air, bare-hand, and live-line tool distances.\n\nTable 13\u2014Minimum Approach Distances Until March 31, 2015\u2014552.1 to 800.0 kV With Overvoltage Factor\n\nNote 1:  The employer may apply the distance specified in this table only where the employer determines the maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage by engineering analysis. (Table 6 applies otherwise.)\n\nNote 2:  The distances specified in this table are the air, bare-hand, and live-line tool distances.\n\nB.  Alternative minimum approach distances.  Employers may use the minimum approach distances in Table 14 through Table 21 provided that the employer follows the notes to those tables.\n\nTable 14\u2014AC Minimum Approach Distances\u201472.6 to 121.0 kV\n\nTable 15\u2014AC Minimum Approach Distances\u2014121.1 to 145.0 kV\n\nTable 16\u2014AC Minimum Approach Distances\u2014145.1 to 169.0 kV\n\nTable 17\u2014AC Minimum Approach Distances\u2014169.1 to 242.0 kV\n\nTable 18\u2014AC Minimum Approach Distances\u2014242.1 to 362.0 kV\n\nTable 19\u2014AC Minimum Approach Distances\u2014362.1 to 420.0 kV\n\nTable 20\u2014AC Minimum Approach Distances\u2014420.1 to 550.0 kV\n\nTable 21\u2014AC Minimum Approach Distances\u2014550.1 to 800.0 kV\n\nNotes to Table 14 through Table 21:\n\n1. The employer must determine the maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, through an engineering analysis, as required by \u00a7 1910.269(l)(3)(ii), or assume a maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, in accordance with Table R-9.\n\n2. For phase-to-phase exposures, the employer must demonstrate that no insulated tool spans the gap and that no large conductive object is in the gap.\n\n3. The worksite must be at an elevation of 900 meters (3,000 feet) or less above sea level.\n\nAppendix C to \u00a7 1910.269\u2014Protection From Hazardous Differences in Electric Potential\n \n I. Introduction\n \n Current passing through an impedance impresses voltage across that impedance. Even conductors have some, albeit low, value of impedance. Therefore, if a \u201cgrounded\u201d \n 1 \n   object, such as a crane or deenergized and grounded power line, results in a ground fault on a power line, voltage is impressed on that grounded object. The voltage impressed on the grounded object depends largely on the voltage on the line, on the impedance of the faulted conductor, and on the impedance to \u201ctrue,\u201d or \u201cabsolute,\u201d ground represented by the object. If the impedance of the object causing the fault is relatively large, the voltage impressed on the object is essentially the phase-to-ground system voltage. However, even faults to grounded power lines or to well grounded transmission towers or substation structures (which have relatively low values of impedance to ground) can result in hazardous voltages.\n 2 \n   In all cases, the degree of the hazard depends on the magnitude of the current through the employee and the time of exposure. This appendix discusses methods of protecting workers against the possibility that grounded objects, such as cranes and other mechanical equipment, will contact energized power lines and that deenergized and grounded power lines will become accidentally energized.\n \n \n \n 1  This appendix generally uses the term \u201cgrounded\u201d only with respect to grounding that the employer intentionally installs, for example, the grounding an employer installs on a deenergized conductor. However, in this case, the term \u201cgrounded\u201d means connected to earth, regardless of whether or not that connection is intentional. \n \n \n 2  Thus, grounding systems for transmission towers and substation structures should be designed to minimize the step and touch potentials involved. \n II. Voltage-Gradient Distribution\n \n A.  Voltage-gradient distribution curve.  Absolute, or true, ground serves as a reference and always has a voltage of 0 volts above ground potential. Because there is an impedance between a grounding electrode and absolute ground, there will be a voltage difference between the grounding electrode and absolute ground under ground-fault conditions. Voltage dissipates from the grounding electrode (or from the grounding point) and creates a ground potential gradient. The voltage decreases rapidly with increasing distance from the grounding electrode. A voltage drop associated with this dissipation of voltage is a ground potential. Figure 1 is a typical voltage-gradient distribution curve (assuming a uniform soil texture).\n \n  \n B.  Step and touch potentials.  Figure 1 also shows that workers are at risk from step and touch potentials. Step potential is the voltage between the feet of a person standing near an energized grounded object (the electrode). In Figure 1, the step potential is equal to the difference in voltage between two points at different distances from the electrode (where the points represent the location of each foot in relation to the electrode). A person could be at risk of injury during a fault simply by standing near the object.\n \n Touch potential is the voltage between the energized grounded object (again, the electrode) and the feet of a person in contact with the object. In Figure 1, the touch potential is equal to the difference in voltage between the electrode (which is at a distance of 0 meters) and a point some distance away from the electrode (where the point represents the location of the feet of the person in contact with the object). The touch potential could be nearly the full voltage across the grounded object if that object is grounded at a point remote from the place where the person is in contact with it. For example, a crane grounded to the system neutral and that contacts an energized line would expose any person in contact with the crane or its uninsulated load line to a touch potential nearly equal to the full fault voltage.\n \n Figure 2 illustrates step and touch potentials.\n \n  \n III. Protecting Workers From Hazardous Differences in Electrical Potential\n \n A.  Definitions.  The following definitions apply to section III of this appendix:\n \n Bond.  The electrical interconnection of conductive parts designed to maintain a common electric potential.\n \n Bonding cable (bonding jumper).  A cable connected to two conductive parts to bond the parts together.\n \n Cluster bar.  A terminal temporarily attached to a structure that provides a means for the attachment and bonding of grounding and bonding cables to the structure.\n \n Ground.  A conducting connection between an electric circuit or equipment and the earth, or to some conducting body that serves in place of the earth.\n \n Grounding cable (grounding jumper).  A cable connected between a deenergized part and ground. Note that grounding cables carry fault current and bonding cables generally do not. A cable that bonds two conductive parts but carries substantial fault current (for example, a jumper connected between one phase and a grounded phase) is a grounding cable.\n \n Ground mat (grounding grid).  A temporarily or permanently installed metallic mat or grating that establishes an equipotential surface and provides connection points for attaching grounds.\n \n B.  Analyzing the hazard.  The employer can use an engineering analysis of the power system under fault conditions to determine whether hazardous step and touch voltages will develop. The analysis should determine the voltage on all conductive objects in the work area and the amount of time the voltage will be present. Based on the this analysis, the employer can select appropriate measures and protective equipment, including the measures and protective equipment outlined in Section III of this appendix, to protect each employee from hazardous differences in electric potential. For example, from the analysis, the employer will know the voltage remaining on conductive objects after employees install bonding and grounding equipment and will be able to select insulating equipment with an appropriate rating, as described in paragraph III.C.2 of this appendix.\n \n C.  Protecting workers on the ground.  The employer may use several methods, including equipotential zones, insulating equipment, and restricted work areas, to protect employees on the ground from hazardous differences in electrical potential.\n \n 1. An equipotential zone will protect workers within it from hazardous step and touch potentials. (See Figure 3.) Equipotential zones will not, however, protect employees located either wholly or partially outside the protected area. The employer can establish an equipotential zone for workers on the ground, with respect to a grounded object, through the use of a metal mat connected to the grounded object. The employer can use a grounding grid to equalize the voltage within the grid or bond conductive objects in the immediate work area to minimize the potential between the objects and between each object and ground. (Bonding an object outside the work area can increase the touch potential to that object, however.) Section III.D of this appendix discusses equipotential zones for employees working on deenergized and grounded power lines.\n \n 2. Insulating equipment, such as rubber gloves, can protect employees handling grounded equipment and conductors from hazardous touch potentials. The insulating equipment must be rated for the highest voltage that can be impressed on the grounded objects under fault conditions (rather than for the full system voltage).\n \n 3. Restricting employees from areas where hazardous step or touch potentials could arise can protect employees not directly involved in performing the operation. The employer must ensure that employees on the ground in the vicinity of transmission structures are at a distance where step voltages would be insufficient to cause injury. Employees must not handle grounded conductors or equipment likely to become energized to hazardous voltages unless the employees are within an equipotential zone or protected by insulating equipment.\n \n  \n D.  Protecting employees working on deenergized and grounded power lines.  This Section III.D of Appendix C establishes guidelines to help employers comply with requirements in \u00a7 1910.269(n) for using protective grounding to protect employees working on deenergized power lines. Paragraph (n) of \u00a7 1910.269 applies to grounding of transmission and distribution lines and equipment for the purpose of protecting workers. Paragraph (n)(3) of \u00a7 1910.269 requires temporary protective grounds to be placed at such locations and arranged in such a manner that the employer can demonstrate will prevent exposure of each employee to hazardous differences in electric potential.\n 3 \n   Sections III.D.1 and III.D.2 of this appendix provide guidelines that employers can use in making the demonstration required by \u00a7 1910.269(n)(3). Section III.D.1 of this appendix provides guidelines on how the employer can determine whether particular grounding practices expose employees to hazardous differences in electric potential. Section III.D.2 of this appendix describes grounding methods that the employer can use in lieu of an engineering analysis to make the demonstration required by \u00a7 1910.269(n)(3). The Occupational Safety and Health Administration will consider employers that comply with the criteria in this appendix as meeting \u00a7 1910.269(n)(3).\n \n \n \n 3  The protective grounding required by \u00a7 1910.269(n) limits to safe values the potential differences between accessible objects in each employee's work environment. Ideally, a protective grounding system would create a true equipotential zone in which every point is at the same electric potential. In practice, current passing through the grounding and bonding elements creates potential differences. If these potential differences are hazardous, the employer may not treat the zone as an equipotential zone. \n Finally, Section III.D.3 of this appendix discusses other safety considerations that will help the employer comply with other requirements in \u00a7 1910.269(n). Following these guidelines will protect workers from hazards that can occur when a deenergized and grounded line becomes energized.\n \n 1.  Determining safe body current limits.  This Section III.D.1 of Appendix C provides guidelines on how an employer can determine whether any differences in electric potential to which workers could be exposed are hazardous as part of the demonstration required by \u00a7 1910.269(n)(3).\n \n Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) Standard 1048-2003,  IEEE Guide for Protective Grounding of Power Lines,  provides the following equation for determining the threshold of ventricular fibrillation when the duration of the electric shock is limited:\n \n  \n where  I  is the current through the worker's body, and  t  is the duration of the current in seconds. This equation represents the ventricular fibrillation threshold for 95.5 percent of the adult population with a mass of 50 kilograms (110 pounds) or more. The equation is valid for current durations between 0.0083 to 3.0 seconds.\n \n To use this equation to set safe voltage limits in an equipotential zone around the worker, the employer will need to assume a value for the resistance of the worker's body. IEEE Std 1048-2003 states that \u201ctotal body resistance is usually taken as 1000 \u03a9 for determining . . . body current limits.\u201d However, employers should be aware that the impedance of a worker's body can be substantially less than that value. For instance, IEEE Std 1048-2003 reports a minimum hand-to-hand resistance of 610 ohms and an internal body resistance of 500 ohms. The internal resistance of the body better represents the minimum resistance of a worker's body when the skin resistance drops near zero, which occurs, for example, when there are breaks in the worker's skin, for instance, from cuts or from blisters formed as a result of the current from an electric shock, or when the worker is wet at the points of contact.\n \n Employers may use the IEEE Std 1048-2003 equation to determine safe body current limits only if the employer protects workers from hazards associated with involuntary muscle reactions from electric shock (for example, the hazard to a worker from falling as a result of an electric shock). Moreover, the equation applies only when the duration of the electric shock is limited. If the precautions the employer takes, including those required by applicable standards, do not adequately protect employees from hazards associated with involuntary reactions from electric shock, a hazard exists if the induced voltage is sufficient to pass a current of 1 milliampere through a 500-ohm resistor. (The 500-ohm resistor represents the resistance of an employee. The 1-milliampere current is the threshold of perception.) Finally, if the employer protects employees from injury due to involuntary reactions from electric shock, but the duration of the electric shock is unlimited (that is, when the fault current at the work location will be insufficient to trip the devices protecting the circuit), a hazard exists if the resultant current would be more than 6 milliamperes (the recognized let-go threshold for workers \n 4 \n  ).\n \n \n \n 4  Electric current passing through the body has varying effects depending on the amount of the current. At the let-go threshold, the current overrides a person's control over his or her muscles. At that level, an employee grasping an object will not be able to let go of the object. The let-go threshold varies from person to person; however, the recognized value for workers is 6 milliamperes. \n 2.  Acceptable methods of grounding for employers that do not perform an engineering determination.  The grounding methods presented in this section of this appendix ensure that differences in electric potential are as low as possible and, therefore, meet \u00a7 1910.269(n)(3) without an engineering determination of the potential differences. These methods follow two principles: (i) The grounding method must ensure that the circuit opens in the fastest available clearing time, and (ii) the grounding method must ensure that the potential differences between conductive objects in the employee's work area are as low as possible.\n \n Paragraph (n)(3) of \u00a7 1910.269 does not require grounding methods to meet the criteria embodied in these principles. Instead, the paragraph requires that protective grounds be \u201cplaced at such locations and arranged in such a manner that the employer can demonstrate will prevent exposure of each employee to hazardous differences in electric potential.\u201d However, when the employer's grounding practices do not follow these two principles, the employer will need to perform an engineering analysis to make the demonstration required by \u00a7 1910.269(n)(3).\n \n i.  Ensuring that the circuit opens in the fastest available clearing time.  Generally, the higher the fault current, the shorter the clearing times for the same type of fault. Therefore, to ensure the fastest available clearing time, the grounding method must maximize the fault current with a low impedance connection to ground. The employer accomplishes this objective by grounding the circuit conductors to the best ground available at the worksite. Thus, the employer must ground to a grounded system neutral conductor, if one is present. A grounded system neutral has a direct connection to the system ground at the source, resulting in an extremely low impedance to ground. In a substation, the employer may instead ground to the substation grid, which also has an extremely low impedance to the system ground and, typically, is connected to a grounded system neutral when one is present. Remote system grounds, such as pole and tower grounds, have a higher impedance to the system ground than grounded system neutrals and substation grounding grids; however, the employer may use a remote ground when lower impedance grounds are not available. In the absence of a grounded system neutral, substation grid, and remote ground, the employer may use a temporary driven ground at the worksite.\n \n In addition, if employees are working on a three-phase system, the grounding method must short circuit all three phases. Short circuiting all phases will ensure faster clearing and lower the current through the grounding cable connecting the deenergized line to ground, thereby lowering the voltage across that cable. The short circuit need not be at the worksite; however, the employer must treat any conductor that is not grounded at the worksite as energized because the ungrounded conductors will be energized at fault voltage during a fault.\n \n ii.  Ensuring that the potential differences between conductive objects in the employee's work area are as low as possible.  To achieve as low a voltage as possible across any two conductive objects in the work area, the employer must bond all conductive objects in the work area. This section of this appendix discusses how to create a zone that minimizes differences in electric potential between conductive objects in the work area.\n \n The employer must use bonding cables to bond conductive objects, except for metallic objects bonded through metal-to-metal contact. The employer must ensure that metal-to-metal contacts are tight and free of contamination, such as oxidation, that can increase the impedance across the connection. For example, a bolted connection between metal lattice tower members is acceptable if the connection is tight and free of corrosion and other contamination. Figure 4 shows how to create an equipotential zone for metal lattice towers.\n \n Wood poles are conductive objects. The poles can absorb moisture and conduct electricity, particularly at distribution and transmission voltages. Consequently, the employer must either: (1) Provide a conductive platform, bonded to a grounding cable, on which the worker stands or (2) use cluster bars to bond wood poles to the grounding cable. The employer must ensure that employees install the cluster bar below, and close to, the worker's feet. The inner portion of the wood pole is more conductive than the outer shell, so it is important that the cluster bar be in conductive contact with a metal spike or nail that penetrates the wood to a depth greater than or equal to the depth the worker's climbing gaffs will penetrate the wood. For example, the employer could mount the cluster bar on a bare pole ground wire fastened to the pole with nails or staples that penetrate to the required depth. Alternatively, the employer may temporarily nail a conductive strap to the pole and connect the strap to the cluster bar. Figure 5 shows how to create an equipotential zone for wood poles.\n \n  \n  \n For underground systems, employers commonly install grounds at the points of disconnection of the underground cables. These grounding points are typically remote from the manhole or underground vault where employees will be working on the cable. Workers in contact with a cable grounded at a remote location can experience hazardous potential differences if the cable becomes energized or if a fault occurs on a different, but nearby, energized cable. The fault current causes potential gradients in the earth, and a potential difference will exist between the earth where the worker is standing and the earth where the cable is grounded. Consequently, to create an equipotential zone for the worker, the employer must provide a means of connecting the deenergized cable to ground at the worksite by having the worker stand on a conductive mat bonded to the deenergized cable. If the cable is cut, the employer must install a bond across the opening in the cable or install one bond on each side of the opening to ensure that the separate cable ends are at the same potential. The employer must protect the worker from any hazardous differences in potential any time there is no bond between the mat and the cable (for example, before the worker installs the bonds).\n \n 3.  Other safety-related considerations.  To ensure that the grounding system is safe and effective, the employer should also consider the following factors: \n 5 \n  \n \n \n \n 5  This appendix only discusses factors that relate to ensuring an equipotential zone for employees. The employer must consider other factors in selecting a grounding system that is capable of conducting the maximum fault current that could flow at the point of grounding for the time necessary to clear the fault, as required by \u00a7 1910.269(n)(4)(i). IEEE Std 1048-2003 contains guidelines for selecting and installing grounding equipment that will meet \u00a7 1910.269(n)(4)(i). \n i.  Maintenance of grounding equipment.  It is essential that the employer properly maintain grounding equipment. Corrosion in the connections between grounding cables and clamps and on the clamp surface can increase the resistance of the cable, thereby increasing potential differences. In addition, the surface to which a clamp attaches, such as a conductor or tower member, must be clean and free of corrosion and oxidation to ensure a low-resistance connection. Cables must be free of damage that could reduce their current-carrying capacity so that they can carry the full fault current without failure. Each clamp must have a tight connection to the cable to ensure a low resistance and to ensure that the clamp does not separate from the cable during a fault.\n \n ii.  Grounding cable length and movement.  The electromagnetic forces on grounding cables during a fault increase with increasing cable length. These forces can cause the cable to move violently during a fault and can be high enough to damage the cable or clamps and cause the cable to fail. In addition, flying cables can injure workers. Consequently, cable lengths should be as short as possible, and grounding cables that might carry high fault current should be in positions where the cables will not injure workers during a fault.\n\nCurrent passing through an impedance impresses voltage across that impedance. Even conductors have some, albeit low, value of impedance. Therefore, if a \u201cgrounded\u201d \n 1 \n   object, such as a crane or deenergized and grounded power line, results in a ground fault on a power line, voltage is impressed on that grounded object. The voltage impressed on the grounded object depends largely on the voltage on the line, on the impedance of the faulted conductor, and on the impedance to \u201ctrue,\u201d or \u201cabsolute,\u201d ground represented by the object. If the impedance of the object causing the fault is relatively large, the voltage impressed on the object is essentially the phase-to-ground system voltage. However, even faults to grounded power lines or to well grounded transmission towers or substation structures (which have relatively low values of impedance to ground) can result in hazardous voltages.\n 2 \n   In all cases, the degree of the hazard depends on the magnitude of the current through the employee and the time of exposure. This appendix discusses methods of protecting workers against the possibility that grounded objects, such as cranes and other mechanical equipment, will contact energized power lines and that deenergized and grounded power lines will become accidentally energized.\n\n1  This appendix generally uses the term \u201cgrounded\u201d only with respect to grounding that the employer intentionally installs, for example, the grounding an employer installs on a deenergized conductor. However, in this case, the term \u201cgrounded\u201d means connected to earth, regardless of whether or not that connection is intentional.\n\n2  Thus, grounding systems for transmission towers and substation structures should be designed to minimize the step and touch potentials involved.\n\nA.  Voltage-gradient distribution curve.  Absolute, or true, ground serves as a reference and always has a voltage of 0 volts above ground potential. Because there is an impedance between a grounding electrode and absolute ground, there will be a voltage difference between the grounding electrode and absolute ground under ground-fault conditions. Voltage dissipates from the grounding electrode (or from the grounding point) and creates a ground potential gradient. The voltage decreases rapidly with increasing distance from the grounding electrode. A voltage drop associated with this dissipation of voltage is a ground potential. Figure 1 is a typical voltage-gradient distribution curve (assuming a uniform soil texture).\n\nB.  Step and touch potentials.  Figure 1 also shows that workers are at risk from step and touch potentials. Step potential is the voltage between the feet of a person standing near an energized grounded object (the electrode). In Figure 1, the step potential is equal to the difference in voltage between two points at different distances from the electrode (where the points represent the location of each foot in relation to the electrode). A person could be at risk of injury during a fault simply by standing near the object.\n\nTouch potential is the voltage between the energized grounded object (again, the electrode) and the feet of a person in contact with the object. In Figure 1, the touch potential is equal to the difference in voltage between the electrode (which is at a distance of 0 meters) and a point some distance away from the electrode (where the point represents the location of the feet of the person in contact with the object). The touch potential could be nearly the full voltage across the grounded object if that object is grounded at a point remote from the place where the person is in contact with it. For example, a crane grounded to the system neutral and that contacts an energized line would expose any person in contact with the crane or its uninsulated load line to a touch potential nearly equal to the full fault voltage.\n\nFigure 2 illustrates step and touch potentials.\n\nA.  Definitions.  The following definitions apply to section III of this appendix:\n\nBond.  The electrical interconnection of conductive parts designed to maintain a common electric potential.\n\nBonding cable (bonding jumper).  A cable connected to two conductive parts to bond the parts together.\n\nCluster bar.  A terminal temporarily attached to a structure that provides a means for the attachment and bonding of grounding and bonding cables to the structure.\n\nGround.  A conducting connection between an electric circuit or equipment and the earth, or to some conducting body that serves in place of the earth.\n\nGrounding cable (grounding jumper).  A cable connected between a deenergized part and ground. Note that grounding cables carry fault current and bonding cables generally do not. A cable that bonds two conductive parts but carries substantial fault current (for example, a jumper connected between one phase and a grounded phase) is a grounding cable.\n\nGround mat (grounding grid).  A temporarily or permanently installed metallic mat or grating that establishes an equipotential surface and provides connection points for attaching grounds.\n\nB.  Analyzing the hazard.  The employer can use an engineering analysis of the power system under fault conditions to determine whether hazardous step and touch voltages will develop. The analysis should determine the voltage on all conductive objects in the work area and the amount of time the voltage will be present. Based on the this analysis, the employer can select appropriate measures and protective equipment, including the measures and protective equipment outlined in Section III of this appendix, to protect each employee from hazardous differences in electric potential. For example, from the analysis, the employer will know the voltage remaining on conductive objects after employees install bonding and grounding equipment and will be able to select insulating equipment with an appropriate rating, as described in paragraph III.C.2 of this appendix.\n\nC.  Protecting workers on the ground.  The employer may use several methods, including equipotential zones, insulating equipment, and restricted work areas, to protect employees on the ground from hazardous differences in electrical potential.\n\n1. An equipotential zone will protect workers within it from hazardous step and touch potentials. (See Figure 3.) Equipotential zones will not, however, protect employees located either wholly or partially outside the protected area. The employer can establish an equipotential zone for workers on the ground, with respect to a grounded object, through the use of a metal mat connected to the grounded object. The employer can use a grounding grid to equalize the voltage within the grid or bond conductive objects in the immediate work area to minimize the potential between the objects and between each object and ground. (Bonding an object outside the work area can increase the touch potential to that object, however.) Section III.D of this appendix discusses equipotential zones for employees working on deenergized and grounded power lines.\n\n2. Insulating equipment, such as rubber gloves, can protect employees handling grounded equipment and conductors from hazardous touch potentials. The insulating equipment must be rated for the highest voltage that can be impressed on the grounded objects under fault conditions (rather than for the full system voltage).\n\n3. Restricting employees from areas where hazardous step or touch potentials could arise can protect employees not directly involved in performing the operation. The employer must ensure that employees on the ground in the vicinity of transmission structures are at a distance where step voltages would be insufficient to cause injury. Employees must not handle grounded conductors or equipment likely to become energized to hazardous voltages unless the employees are within an equipotential zone or protected by insulating equipment.\n\nD.  Protecting employees working on deenergized and grounded power lines.  This Section III.D of Appendix C establishes guidelines to help employers comply with requirements in \u00a7 1910.269(n) for using protective grounding to protect employees working on deenergized power lines. Paragraph (n) of \u00a7 1910.269 applies to grounding of transmission and distribution lines and equipment for the purpose of protecting workers. Paragraph (n)(3) of \u00a7 1910.269 requires temporary protective grounds to be placed at such locations and arranged in such a manner that the employer can demonstrate will prevent exposure of each employee to hazardous differences in electric potential.\n 3 \n   Sections III.D.1 and III.D.2 of this appendix provide guidelines that employers can use in making the demonstration required by \u00a7 1910.269(n)(3). Section III.D.1 of this appendix provides guidelines on how the employer can determine whether particular grounding practices expose employees to hazardous differences in electric potential. Section III.D.2 of this appendix describes grounding methods that the employer can use in lieu of an engineering analysis to make the demonstration required by \u00a7 1910.269(n)(3). The Occupational Safety and Health Administration will consider employers that comply with the criteria in this appendix as meeting \u00a7 1910.269(n)(3).\n\n3  The protective grounding required by \u00a7 1910.269(n) limits to safe values the potential differences between accessible objects in each employee's work environment. Ideally, a protective grounding system would create a true equipotential zone in which every point is at the same electric potential. In practice, current passing through the grounding and bonding elements creates potential differences. If these potential differences are hazardous, the employer may not treat the zone as an equipotential zone.\n\nFinally, Section III.D.3 of this appendix discusses other safety considerations that will help the employer comply with other requirements in \u00a7 1910.269(n). Following these guidelines will protect workers from hazards that can occur when a deenergized and grounded line becomes energized.\n\n1.  Determining safe body current limits.  This Section III.D.1 of Appendix C provides guidelines on how an employer can determine whether any differences in electric potential to which workers could be exposed are hazardous as part of the demonstration required by \u00a7 1910.269(n)(3).\n\nInstitute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) Standard 1048-2003,  IEEE Guide for Protective Grounding of Power Lines,  provides the following equation for determining the threshold of ventricular fibrillation when the duration of the electric shock is limited:\n\nwhere  I  is the current through the worker's body, and  t  is the duration of the current in seconds. This equation represents the ventricular fibrillation threshold for 95.5 percent of the adult population with a mass of 50 kilograms (110 pounds) or more. The equation is valid for current durations between 0.0083 to 3.0 seconds.\n\nTo use this equation to set safe voltage limits in an equipotential zone around the worker, the employer will need to assume a value for the resistance of the worker's body. IEEE Std 1048-2003 states that \u201ctotal body resistance is usually taken as 1000 \u03a9 for determining . . . body current limits.\u201d However, employers should be aware that the impedance of a worker's body can be substantially less than that value. For instance, IEEE Std 1048-2003 reports a minimum hand-to-hand resistance of 610 ohms and an internal body resistance of 500 ohms. The internal resistance of the body better represents the minimum resistance of a worker's body when the skin resistance drops near zero, which occurs, for example, when there are breaks in the worker's skin, for instance, from cuts or from blisters formed as a result of the current from an electric shock, or when the worker is wet at the points of contact.\n\nEmployers may use the IEEE Std 1048-2003 equation to determine safe body current limits only if the employer protects workers from hazards associated with involuntary muscle reactions from electric shock (for example, the hazard to a worker from falling as a result of an electric shock). Moreover, the equation applies only when the duration of the electric shock is limited. If the precautions the employer takes, including those required by applicable standards, do not adequately protect employees from hazards associated with involuntary reactions from electric shock, a hazard exists if the induced voltage is sufficient to pass a current of 1 milliampere through a 500-ohm resistor. (The 500-ohm resistor represents the resistance of an employee. The 1-milliampere current is the threshold of perception.) Finally, if the employer protects employees from injury due to involuntary reactions from electric shock, but the duration of the electric shock is unlimited (that is, when the fault current at the work location will be insufficient to trip the devices protecting the circuit), a hazard exists if the resultant current would be more than 6 milliamperes (the recognized let-go threshold for workers \n 4 \n  ).\n\n4  Electric current passing through the body has varying effects depending on the amount of the current. At the let-go threshold, the current overrides a person's control over his or her muscles. At that level, an employee grasping an object will not be able to let go of the object. The let-go threshold varies from person to person; however, the recognized value for workers is 6 milliamperes.\n\n2.  Acceptable methods of grounding for employers that do not perform an engineering determination.  The grounding methods presented in this section of this appendix ensure that differences in electric potential are as low as possible and, therefore, meet \u00a7 1910.269(n)(3) without an engineering determination of the potential differences. These methods follow two principles: (i) The grounding method must ensure that the circuit opens in the fastest available clearing time, and (ii) the grounding method must ensure that the potential differences between conductive objects in the employee's work area are as low as possible.\n\nParagraph (n)(3) of \u00a7 1910.269 does not require grounding methods to meet the criteria embodied in these principles. Instead, the paragraph requires that protective grounds be \u201cplaced at such locations and arranged in such a manner that the employer can demonstrate will prevent exposure of each employee to hazardous differences in electric potential.\u201d However, when the employer's grounding practices do not follow these two principles, the employer will need to perform an engineering analysis to make the demonstration required by \u00a7 1910.269(n)(3).\n\ni.  Ensuring that the circuit opens in the fastest available clearing time.  Generally, the higher the fault current, the shorter the clearing times for the same type of fault. Therefore, to ensure the fastest available clearing time, the grounding method must maximize the fault current with a low impedance connection to ground. The employer accomplishes this objective by grounding the circuit conductors to the best ground available at the worksite. Thus, the employer must ground to a grounded system neutral conductor, if one is present. A grounded system neutral has a direct connection to the system ground at the source, resulting in an extremely low impedance to ground. In a substation, the employer may instead ground to the substation grid, which also has an extremely low impedance to the system ground and, typically, is connected to a grounded system neutral when one is present. Remote system grounds, such as pole and tower grounds, have a higher impedance to the system ground than grounded system neutrals and substation grounding grids; however, the employer may use a remote ground when lower impedance grounds are not available. In the absence of a grounded system neutral, substation grid, and remote ground, the employer may use a temporary driven ground at the worksite.\n\nIn addition, if employees are working on a three-phase system, the grounding method must short circuit all three phases. Short circuiting all phases will ensure faster clearing and lower the current through the grounding cable connecting the deenergized line to ground, thereby lowering the voltage across that cable. The short circuit need not be at the worksite; however, the employer must treat any conductor that is not grounded at the worksite as energized because the ungrounded conductors will be energized at fault voltage during a fault.\n\nii.  Ensuring that the potential differences between conductive objects in the employee's work area are as low as possible.  To achieve as low a voltage as possible across any two conductive objects in the work area, the employer must bond all conductive objects in the work area. This section of this appendix discusses how to create a zone that minimizes differences in electric potential between conductive objects in the work area.\n\nThe employer must use bonding cables to bond conductive objects, except for metallic objects bonded through metal-to-metal contact. The employer must ensure that metal-to-metal contacts are tight and free of contamination, such as oxidation, that can increase the impedance across the connection. For example, a bolted connection between metal lattice tower members is acceptable if the connection is tight and free of corrosion and other contamination. Figure 4 shows how to create an equipotential zone for metal lattice towers.\n\nWood poles are conductive objects. The poles can absorb moisture and conduct electricity, particularly at distribution and transmission voltages. Consequently, the employer must either: (1) Provide a conductive platform, bonded to a grounding cable, on which the worker stands or (2) use cluster bars to bond wood poles to the grounding cable. The employer must ensure that employees install the cluster bar below, and close to, the worker's feet. The inner portion of the wood pole is more conductive than the outer shell, so it is important that the cluster bar be in conductive contact with a metal spike or nail that penetrates the wood to a depth greater than or equal to the depth the worker's climbing gaffs will penetrate the wood. For example, the employer could mount the cluster bar on a bare pole ground wire fastened to the pole with nails or staples that penetrate to the required depth. Alternatively, the employer may temporarily nail a conductive strap to the pole and connect the strap to the cluster bar. Figure 5 shows how to create an equipotential zone for wood poles.\n\nFor underground systems, employers commonly install grounds at the points of disconnection of the underground cables. These grounding points are typically remote from the manhole or underground vault where employees will be working on the cable. Workers in contact with a cable grounded at a remote location can experience hazardous potential differences if the cable becomes energized or if a fault occurs on a different, but nearby, energized cable. The fault current causes potential gradients in the earth, and a potential difference will exist between the earth where the worker is standing and the earth where the cable is grounded. Consequently, to create an equipotential zone for the worker, the employer must provide a means of connecting the deenergized cable to ground at the worksite by having the worker stand on a conductive mat bonded to the deenergized cable. If the cable is cut, the employer must install a bond across the opening in the cable or install one bond on each side of the opening to ensure that the separate cable ends are at the same potential. The employer must protect the worker from any hazardous differences in potential any time there is no bond between the mat and the cable (for example, before the worker installs the bonds).\n\n3.  Other safety-related considerations.  To ensure that the grounding system is safe and effective, the employer should also consider the following factors: \n 5\n\n5  This appendix only discusses factors that relate to ensuring an equipotential zone for employees. The employer must consider other factors in selecting a grounding system that is capable of conducting the maximum fault current that could flow at the point of grounding for the time necessary to clear the fault, as required by \u00a7 1910.269(n)(4)(i). IEEE Std 1048-2003 contains guidelines for selecting and installing grounding equipment that will meet \u00a7 1910.269(n)(4)(i).\n\ni.  Maintenance of grounding equipment.  It is essential that the employer properly maintain grounding equipment. Corrosion in the connections between grounding cables and clamps and on the clamp surface can increase the resistance of the cable, thereby increasing potential differences. In addition, the surface to which a clamp attaches, such as a conductor or tower member, must be clean and free of corrosion and oxidation to ensure a low-resistance connection. Cables must be free of damage that could reduce their current-carrying capacity so that they can carry the full fault current without failure. Each clamp must have a tight connection to the cable to ensure a low resistance and to ensure that the clamp does not separate from the cable during a fault.\n\nii.  Grounding cable length and movement.  The electromagnetic forces on grounding cables during a fault increase with increasing cable length. These forces can cause the cable to move violently during a fault and can be high enough to damage the cable or clamps and cause the cable to fail. In addition, flying cables can injure workers. Consequently, cable lengths should be as short as possible, and grounding cables that might carry high fault current should be in positions where the cables will not injure workers during a fault.\n\nAppendix D to \u00a7 1910.269\u2014Methods of Inspecting and Testing Wood Poles\n \n I. Introduction\n \n When employees are to perform work on a wood pole, it is important to determine the condition of the pole before employees climb it. The weight of the employee, the weight of equipment to be installed, and other working stresses (such as the removal or retensioning of conductors) can lead to the failure of a defective pole or a pole that is not designed to handle the additional stresses.\n 1 \n   For these reasons, it is essential that, before an employee climbs a wood pole, the employer ascertain that the pole is capable of sustaining the stresses of the work. The determination that the pole is capable of sustaining these stresses includes an inspection of the condition of the pole.\n \n \n \n 1  A properly guyed pole in good condition should, at a minimum, be able to handle the weight of an employee climbing it. \n If the employer finds the pole to be unsafe to climb or to work from, the employer must secure the pole so that it does not fail while an employee is on it. The employer can secure the pole by a line truck boom, by ropes or guys, or by lashing a new pole alongside it. If a new one is lashed alongside the defective pole, employees should work from the new one.\n \n II. Inspecting Wood Poles\n \n A qualified employee should inspect wood poles for the following conditions: \n 2 \n  \n \n \n \n 2  The presence of any of these conditions is an indication that the pole may not be safe to climb or to work from. The employee performing the inspection must be qualified to make a determination as to whether it is safe to perform the work without taking additional precautions. \n A.  General condition.  Buckling at the ground line or an unusual angle with respect to the ground may indicate that the pole has rotted or is broken.\n \n B.  Cracks.  Horizontal cracks perpendicular to the grain of the wood may weaken the pole. Vertical cracks, although not normally considered to be a sign of a defective pole, can pose a hazard to the climber, and the employee should keep his or her gaffs away from them while climbing.\n \n C.  Holes.  Hollow spots and woodpecker holes can reduce the strength of a wood pole.\n \n D.  Shell rot and decay.  Rotting and decay are cutout hazards and possible indications of the age and internal condition of the pole.\n \n E.  Knots.  One large knot or several smaller ones at the same height on the pole may be evidence of a weak point on the pole.\n \n F.  Depth of setting.  Evidence of the existence of a former ground line substantially above the existing ground level may be an indication that the pole is no longer buried to a sufficient depth.\n \n G.  Soil conditions.  Soft, wet, or loose soil around the base of the pole may indicate that the pole will not support any change in stress.\n \n H.  Burn marks.  Burning from transformer failures or conductor faults could damage the pole so that it cannot withstand changes in mechanical stress.\n \n III. Testing Wood Poles\n \n The following tests, which are from \u00a7 1910.268(n)(3), are acceptable methods of testing wood poles:\n \n A.  Hammer test.  Rap the pole sharply with a hammer weighing about 1.4 kg (3 pounds), starting near the ground line and continuing upwards circumferentially around the pole to a height of approximately 1.8 meters (6 feet). The hammer will produce a clear sound and rebound sharply when striking sound wood. Decay pockets will be indicated by a dull sound or a less pronounced hammer rebound. Also, prod the pole as near the ground line as possible using a pole prod or a screwdriver with a blade at least 127 millimeters (5 inches) long. If substantial decay is present, the pole is unsafe.\n \n B.  Rocking test.  Apply a horizontal force to the pole and attempt to rock it back and forth in a direction perpendicular to the line. Exercise caution to avoid causing power lines to swing together. Apply the force to the pole either by pushing it with a pike pole or pulling the pole with a rope. If the pole cracks during the test, it is unsafe.\n\nWhen employees are to perform work on a wood pole, it is important to determine the condition of the pole before employees climb it. The weight of the employee, the weight of equipment to be installed, and other working stresses (such as the removal or retensioning of conductors) can lead to the failure of a defective pole or a pole that is not designed to handle the additional stresses.\n 1 \n   For these reasons, it is essential that, before an employee climbs a wood pole, the employer ascertain that the pole is capable of sustaining the stresses of the work. The determination that the pole is capable of sustaining these stresses includes an inspection of the condition of the pole.\n\n1  A properly guyed pole in good condition should, at a minimum, be able to handle the weight of an employee climbing it.\n\nIf the employer finds the pole to be unsafe to climb or to work from, the employer must secure the pole so that it does not fail while an employee is on it. The employer can secure the pole by a line truck boom, by ropes or guys, or by lashing a new pole alongside it. If a new one is lashed alongside the defective pole, employees should work from the new one.\n\nA qualified employee should inspect wood poles for the following conditions: \n 2\n\n2  The presence of any of these conditions is an indication that the pole may not be safe to climb or to work from. The employee performing the inspection must be qualified to make a determination as to whether it is safe to perform the work without taking additional precautions.\n\nA.  General condition.  Buckling at the ground line or an unusual angle with respect to the ground may indicate that the pole has rotted or is broken.\n\nB.  Cracks.  Horizontal cracks perpendicular to the grain of the wood may weaken the pole. Vertical cracks, although not normally considered to be a sign of a defective pole, can pose a hazard to the climber, and the employee should keep his or her gaffs away from them while climbing.\n\nC.  Holes.  Hollow spots and woodpecker holes can reduce the strength of a wood pole.\n\nD.  Shell rot and decay.  Rotting and decay are cutout hazards and possible indications of the age and internal condition of the pole.\n\nE.  Knots.  One large knot or several smaller ones at the same height on the pole may be evidence of a weak point on the pole.\n\nF.  Depth of setting.  Evidence of the existence of a former ground line substantially above the existing ground level may be an indication that the pole is no longer buried to a sufficient depth.\n\nG.  Soil conditions.  Soft, wet, or loose soil around the base of the pole may indicate that the pole will not support any change in stress.\n\nH.  Burn marks.  Burning from transformer failures or conductor faults could damage the pole so that it cannot withstand changes in mechanical stress.\n\nThe following tests, which are from \u00a7 1910.268(n)(3), are acceptable methods of testing wood poles:\n\nA.  Hammer test.  Rap the pole sharply with a hammer weighing about 1.4 kg (3 pounds), starting near the ground line and continuing upwards circumferentially around the pole to a height of approximately 1.8 meters (6 feet). The hammer will produce a clear sound and rebound sharply when striking sound wood. Decay pockets will be indicated by a dull sound or a less pronounced hammer rebound. Also, prod the pole as near the ground line as possible using a pole prod or a screwdriver with a blade at least 127 millimeters (5 inches) long. If substantial decay is present, the pole is unsafe.\n\nB.  Rocking test.  Apply a horizontal force to the pole and attempt to rock it back and forth in a direction perpendicular to the line. Exercise caution to avoid causing power lines to swing together. Apply the force to the pole either by pushing it with a pike pole or pulling the pole with a rope. If the pole cracks during the test, it is unsafe.\n\nAppendix E to \u00a7 1910.269\u2014Protection From Flames and Electric Arcs \n \n I. Introduction\n \n Paragraph (l)(8) of \u00a7 1910.269 addresses protecting employees from flames and electric arcs. This paragraph requires employers to: (1) Assess the workplace for flame and electric-arc hazards (paragraph (l)(8)(i)); (2) estimate the available heat energy from electric arcs to which employees would be exposed (paragraph (l)(8)(ii)); (3) ensure that employees wear clothing that will not melt, or ignite and continue to burn, when exposed to flames or the estimated heat energy (paragraph (l)(8)(iii)); and (4) ensure that employees wear flame-resistant clothing \n 1 \n   and protective clothing and other protective equipment that has an arc rating greater than or equal to the available heat energy under certain conditions (paragraphs (l)(8)(iv) and (l)(8)(v)). This appendix contains information to help employers estimate available heat energy as required by \u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(ii), select protective clothing and other protective equipment with an arc rating suitable for the available heat energy as required by \u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(v), and ensure that employees do not wear flammable clothing that could lead to burn injury as addressed by \u00a7\u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(iii) and (l)(8)(iv).\n \n \n \n 1  Flame-resistant clothing includes clothing that is inherently flame resistant and clothing chemically treated with a flame retardant. (See ASTM F1506-10a,  Standard Performance Specification for Flame Resistant Textile Materials for Wearing Apparel for Use by Electrical Workers Exposed to Momentary Electric Arc and Related Thermal Hazards,  and ASTM F1891-12  Standard Specification for Arc and Flame Resistant Rainwear. ) \n II. Assessing the Workplace for Flame and Electric-Arc Hazards\n \n Paragraph (l)(8)(i) of \u00a7 1910.269 requires the employer to assess the workplace to identify employees exposed to hazards from flames or from electric arcs. This provision ensures that the employer evaluates employee exposure to flames and electric arcs so that employees who face such exposures receive the required protection. The employer must conduct an assessment for each employee who performs work on or near exposed, energized parts of electric circuits.\n \n A.  Assessment Guidelines \n \n Sources electric arcs.  Consider possible sources of electric arcs, including:\n \n \u2022 Energized circuit parts not guarded or insulated,\n \n \u2022 Switching devices that produce electric arcs in normal operation,\n \n \u2022 Sliding parts that could fault during operation (for example, rack-mounted circuit breakers), and\n \n \u2022 Energized electric equipment that could fail (for example, electric equipment with damaged insulation or with evidence of arcing or overheating).\n \n Exposure to flames.  Identify employees exposed to hazards from flames. Factors to consider include:\n \n \u2022 The proximity of employees to open flames, and\n \n \u2022 For flammable material in the work area, whether there is a reasonable likelihood that an electric arc or an open flame can ignite the material.\n \n Probability that an electric arc will occur.  Identify employees exposed to electric-arc hazards. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration will consider an employee exposed to electric-arc hazards if there is a reasonable likelihood that an electric arc will occur in the employee's work area, in other words, if the probability of such an event is higher than it is for the normal operation of enclosed equipment. Factors to consider include:\n \n \u2022 For energized circuit parts not guarded or insulated, whether conductive objects can come too close to or fall onto the energized parts,\n \n \u2022 For exposed, energized circuit parts, whether the employee is closer to the part than the minimum approach distance established by the employer (as permitted by \u00a7 1910.269(l)(3)(iii)).\n \n \u2022 Whether the operation of electric equipment with sliding parts that could fault during operation is part of the normal operation of the equipment or occurs during servicing or maintenance, and\n \n \u2022 For energized electric equipment, whether there is evidence of impending failure, such as evidence of arcing or overheating.\n \n B. Examples\n \n Table 1 provides task-based examples of exposure assessments.\n \n Table 1\u2014Example Assessments for Various Tasks\n Task Is employee exposed to flame or electric-arc hazard?\n Normal operation of enclosed equipment, such as closing or opening a switch The employer properly installs and maintains enclosed equipment, and there is no evidence of impending failure No.\n   There is evidence of arcing or overheating Yes.\n   Parts of the equipment are loose or sticking, or the equipment otherwise exhibits signs of lack of maintenance Yes.\n Servicing electric equipment, such as racking in a circuit breaker or replacing a switch Yes.\n Inspection of electric equipment with exposed energized parts. The employee is not holding conductive objects and remains outside the minimum approach distance established by the employer No.\n   The employee is holding a conductive object, such as a flashlight, that could fall or otherwise contact energized parts (irrespective of whether the employee maintains the minimum approach distance) Yes.\n   The employee is closer than the minimum approach distance established by the employer (for example, when wearing rubber insulating gloves or rubber insulating gloves and sleeves) Yes.\n Using open flames, for example, in wiping cable splice sleeves Yes. \n III. Protection Against Burn Injury\n \n A. Estimating Available Heat Energy\n \n Calculation methods.  Paragraph (l)(8)(ii) of \u00a7 1910.269 provides that, for each employee exposed to an electric-arc hazard, the employer must make a reasonable estimate of the heat energy to which the employee would be exposed if an arc occurs. Table 2 lists various methods of calculating values of available heat energy from an electric circuit. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration does not endorse any of these specific methods. Each method requires the input of various parameters, such as fault current, the expected length of the electric arc, the distance from the arc to the employee, and the clearing time for the fault (that is, the time the circuit protective devices take to open the circuit and clear the fault). The employer can precisely determine some of these parameters, such as the fault current and the clearing time, for a given system. The employer will need to estimate other parameters, such as the length of the arc and the distance between the arc and the employee, because such parameters vary widely.\n \n Table 2\u2014Methods of Calculating Incident Heat Energy From an Electric Arc\n  \n 1.  Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces,  NFPA 70E-2012, Annex D, \u201cSample Calculation of Flash Protection Boundary.\u201d\n 2. Doughty, T.E., Neal, T.E., and Floyd II, H.L., \u201cPredicting Incident Energy to Better Manage the Electric Arc Hazard on 600 V Power Distribution Systems,\u201d  Record of Conference Papers IEEE IAS 45th Annual Petroleum and Chemical Industry Conference,  September 28-30, 1998.\n 3.  Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations,  IEEE Std 1584-2002, 1584a-2004 (Amendment 1 to IEEE Std 1584-2002), and 1584b-2011 (Amendment 2: Changes to Clause 4 of IEEE Std 1584-2002).*\n 4. ARCPRO, a commercially available software program developed by Kinectrics, Toronto, ON, CA.\n * This appendix refers to IEEE Std 1584-2002 with both amendments as IEEE Std 1584b-2011. \n The amount of heat energy calculated by any of the methods is approximately inversely proportional to the square of the distance between the employee and the arc. In other words, if the employee is very close to the arc, the heat energy is very high; but if the employee is just a few more centimeters away, the heat energy drops substantially. Thus, estimating the distance from the arc to the employee is key to protecting employees.\n \n The employer must select a method of estimating incident heat energy that provides a reasonable estimate of incident heat energy for the exposure involved. Table 3 shows which methods provide reasonable estimates for various exposures.\n \n Table 3\u2014Selecting a Reasonable Incident-Energy Calculation Method \n 1 \n Incident-energy calculation method\n 600 V and Less \n 2 \n 601 V to 15 kV \n 2 \n More than 15 kV\n 1\u03a6\n 3\u03a6a\n 3\u03a6b\n 1\u03a6\n 3\u03a6a\n 3\u03a6b\n 1\u03a6\n 3\u03a6a\n 3\u03a6b\n NFPA 70E-2012 Annex D (Lee equation) Y-C Y N Y-C Y-C N N \n 3 N \n 3 N \n 3 \n Doughty, Neal, and Floyd Y-C Y Y N N N N N N\n IEEE Std 1584b-2011 Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N\n ARCPRO Y N N Y N N Y Y \n 4 Y \n 4 \n Key:\n 1\u03a6: Single-phase arc in open air.\n 3\u03a6a: Three-phase arc in open air.\n 3\u03a6b: Three-phase arc in an enclosure (box).\n Y: Acceptable; produces a reasonable estimate of incident heat energy from this type of electric arc.\n N: Not acceptable; does not produce a reasonable estimate of incident heat energy from this type of electric arc.\n Y-C: Acceptable; produces a reasonable, but conservative, estimate of incident heat energy from this type of electric arc.\n Notes: \n \n 1  Although the Occupational Safety and Health Administration will consider these methods reasonable for enforcement purposes when employers use the methods in accordance with this table, employers should be aware that the listed methods do not necessarily result in estimates that will provide full protection from internal faults in transformers and similar equipment or from arcs in underground manholes or vaults.\n \n 2  At these voltages, the presumption is that the arc is three-phase unless the employer can demonstrate that only one phase is present or that the spacing of the phases is sufficient to prevent a multiphase arc from occurring.\n \n 3  Although the Occupational Safety and Health Administration will consider this method acceptable for purposes of assessing whether incident energy exceeds 2.0 cal/cm\n 2 , the results at voltages of more than 15 kilovolts are extremely conservative and unrealistic.\n \n 4  The Occupational Safety and Health Administration will deem the results of this method reasonable when the employer adjusts them using the conversion factors for three-phase arcs in open air or in an enclosure, as indicated in the program's instructions. \n Selecting a reasonable distance from the employee to the arc.  In estimating available heat energy, the employer must make some reasonable assumptions about how far the employee will be from the electric arc. Table 4 lists reasonable distances from the employee to the electric arc. The distances in Table 4 are consistent with national consensus standards, such as the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers'  National Electrical Safety Code,  ANSI/IEEE C2-2012, and  IEEE Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations,  IEEE Std 1584b-2011. The employer is free to use other reasonable distances, but must consider equipment enclosure size and the working distance to the employee in selecting a distance from the employee to the arc. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration will consider a distance reasonable when the employer bases it on equipment size and working distance.\n \n Table 4\u2014Selecting a Reasonable Distance From the Employee to the Electric Arc\n Class of equipment\n Single-phase arc mm\n  (inches)\n Three-phase arc mm\n  (inches)\n Cable * NA 455 (18)\n Low voltage MCCs and panelboards NA 455 (18)\n Low-voltage switchgear NA 610 (24)\n 5-kV switchgear NA 910 (36)\n 15-kV switchgear NA 910 (36)\n Single conductors in air (up to 46 kilovolts), work with rubber insulating gloves 380 (15) NA\n Single conductors in air, work with live-line tools and live-line barehand work MAD  \u2212 (2 \u00d7  kV  \u00d7 2.54)\n  ( MAD  \u2212 (2 \u00d7  kV  /10)) \u2020 NA\n * NA = not applicable.\n \u2020 The terms in this equation are:\n MAD  = The applicable minimum approach distance, and\n kV  = The system voltage in kilovolts. \n Selecting a reasonable arc gap.  For a single-phase arc in air, the electric arc will almost always occur when an energized conductor approaches too close to ground. Thus, an employer can determine the arc gap, or arc length, for these exposures by the dielectric strength of air and the voltage on the line. The dielectric strength of air is approximately 10 kilovolts for every 25.4 millimeters (1 inch). For example, at 50 kilovolts, the arc gap would be 50 \u00f7 10 \u00d7 25.4 (or 50 \u00d7 2.54), which equals 127 millimeters (5 inches).\n \n For three-phase arcs in open air and in enclosures, the arc gap will generally be dependent on the spacing between parts energized at different electrical potentials. Documents such as IEEE Std 1584b-2011 provide information on these distances. Employers may select a reasonable arc gap from Table 5, or they may select any other reasonable arc gap based on sparkover distance or on the spacing between (1) live parts at different potentials or (2) live parts and grounded parts (for example, bus or conductor spacings in equipment). In any event, the employer must use an estimate that reasonably resembles the actual exposures faced by the employee.\n \n Table 5\u2014Selecting a Reasonable Arc Gap\n Class of equipment\n Single-phase arc mm\n  (inches)\n Three-phase arc mm \n 1 \n  (inches)\n Cable NA \n 2 13 (0.5).\n Low voltage MCCs and panelboards NA 25 (1.0).\n Low-voltage switchgear NA 32 (1.25).\n 5-kV switchgear NA 104 (4.0).\n 15-kV switchgear NA 152 (6.0).\n Single conductors in air, 15 kV and less. 51 (2.0) Phase conductor spacing.\n Single conductor in air, more than 15 kV Voltage in  kV  \u00d7 2.54\n  (Voltage in  kV  \u00d7 0.1), but no less than 51 mm (2 inches) Phase conductor spacing.\n \n 1  Source: IEEE Std 1584b-2011.\n \n 2  NA = not applicable. \n Making estimates over multiple system areas.  The employer need not estimate the heat-energy exposure for every job task performed by each employee. Paragraph (l)(8)(ii) of \u00a7 1910.269 permits the employer to make broad estimates that cover multiple system areas provided that: (1) The employer uses reasonable assumptions about the energy-exposure distribution throughout the system, and (2) the estimates represent the maximum exposure for those areas. For example, the employer can use the maximum fault current and clearing time to cover several system areas at once.\n \n Incident heat energy for single-phase-to-ground exposures.  Table 6 and Table 7 provide incident heat energy levels for open-air, phase-to-ground electric-arc exposures typical for overhead systems.\n 2 \n   Table 6 presents estimates of available energy for employees using rubber insulating gloves to perform work on overhead systems operating at 4 to 46 kilovolts. The table assumes that the employee will be 380 millimeters (15 inches) from the electric arc, which is a reasonable estimate for rubber insulating glove work. Table 6 also assumes that the arc length equals the sparkover distance for the maximum transient overvoltage of each voltage range.\n 3 \n   To use the table, an employer would use the voltage, maximum fault current, and maximum clearing time for a system area and, using the appropriate voltage range and fault-current and clearing-time values corresponding to the next higher values listed in the table, select the appropriate heat energy (4, 5, 8, or 12 cal/cm\n 2 ) from the table. For example, an employer might have a 12,470-volt power line supplying a system area. The power line can supply a maximum fault current of 8 kiloamperes with a maximum clearing time of 10 cycles. For rubber glove work, this system falls in the 4.0-to-15.0-kilovolt range; the next-higher fault current is 10 kA (the second row in that voltage range); and the clearing time is under 18 cycles (the first column to the right of the fault current column). Thus, the available heat energy for this part of the system will be 4 cal/cm\n 2  or less (from the column heading), and the employer could select protection with a 5-cal/cm\n 2  rating to meet \u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(v). Alternatively, an employer could select a base incident-energy value and ensure that the clearing times for each voltage range and fault current listed in the table do not exceed the corresponding clearing time specified in the table. For example, an employer that provides employees with arc-flash protective equipment rated at 8 cal/cm\n 2  can use the table to determine if any system area exceeds 8 cal/cm\n 2  by checking the clearing time for the highest fault current for each voltage range and ensuring that the clearing times do not exceed the values specified in the 8-cal/cm\n 2  column in the table.\n \n \n \n 2  The Occupational Safety and Health Administration used metric values to calculate the clearing times in Table 6 and Table 7. An employer may use English units to calculate clearing times instead even though the results will differ slightly. \n \n \n 3  The Occupational Safety and Health Administration based this assumption, which is more conservative than the arc length specified in Table 5, on Table 410-2 of the 2012 NESC. \n Table 7 presents similar estimates for employees using live-line tools to perform work on overhead systems operating at voltages of 4 to 800 kilovolts. The table assumes that the arc length will be equal to the sparkover distance \n 4 \n   and that the employee will be a distance from the arc equal to the minimum approach distance minus twice the sparkover distance.\n \n \n \n 4  The dielectric strength of air is about 10 kilovolts for every 25.4 millimeters (1 inch). Thus, the employer can estimate the arc length in millimeters to be the phase-to-ground voltage in kilovolts multiplied by 2.54 (or voltage (in kilovolts) \u00d7 2.54). \n The employer will need to use other methods for estimating available heat energy in situations not addressed by Table 6 or Table 7. The calculation methods listed in Table 2 and the guidance provided in Table 3 will help employers do this. For example, employers can use IEEE Std 1584b-2011 to estimate the available heat energy (and to select appropriate protective equipment) for many specific conditions, including lower-voltage, phase-to-phase arc, and enclosed arc exposures.\n \n Table 6\u2014Incident Heat Energy for Various Fault Currents, Clearing Times, and Voltages of 4.0 to 46.0 kV: Rubber Insulating Glove Exposures Involving Phase-to-Ground Arcs in Open Air Only * \u2020 \u2021\n Voltage range\n  (kV) **\n Fault current\n  (kA)\n Maximum clearing time (cycles)\n 4 cal/cm\n 2 \n 5 cal/cm\n 2 \n 8 cal/cm\n 2 \n 12 cal/cm\n 2 \n 4.0 to 15.0 5 46 58 92 138\n   10 18 22 36 54\n   15 10 12 20 30\n   20 6 8 13 19\n 15.1 to 25.0 5 28 34 55 83\n   10 11 14 23 34\n   15 7 8 13 20\n   20 4 5 9 13\n 25.1 to 36.0 5 21 26 42 62\n   10 9 11 18 26\n   15 5 6 10 16\n   20 4 4 7 11\n 36.1 to 46.0 5 16 20 32 48\n   10 7 9 14 21\n   15 4 5 8 13\n   20 3 4 6 9\n Notes: * This table is for open-air, phase-to-ground electric-arc exposures. It is not for phase-to-phase arcs or enclosed arcs (arc in a box).\n \u2020 The table assumes that the employee will be 380 mm (15 in.) from the electric arc. The table also assumes the arc length to be the sparkover distance for the maximum transient overvoltage of each voltage range (see Appendix B to \u00a7 1910.269), as follows:\n 4.0 to 15.0 kV 51 mm (2 in.)\n 15.1 to 25.0 kV 102 mm (4 in.)\n 25.1 to 36.0 kV 152 mm (6 in.)\n 36.1 to 46.0 kV 229 mm (9 in.)\n \u2021The Occupational Safety and Health Administration calculated the values in this table using the ARCPRO method listed in Table 2.\n ** The voltage range is the phase-to-phase system voltage. \n Table 7\u2014Incident Heat Energy for Various Fault Currents, Clearing Times, and Voltages: Live-Line Tool Exposures Involving Phase-to-Ground Arcs in Open Air Only * \u2020 \u2021  #\n Voltage range\n  (kV) **\n Fault current\n  (kA)\n Maximum clearing time (cycles)\n 4 cal/cm\n 2 \n 5 cal/cm\n 2 \n 8 cal/cm\n 2 \n 12 cal/cm\n 2 \n 4.0 to 15.0 5 197 246 394 591\n   10 73 92 147 220\n   15 39 49 78 117\n   20 24 31 49 73\n 15.1 to 25.0 5 197 246 394 591\n   10 75 94 150 225\n   15 41 51 82 122\n   20 26 33 52 78\n 25.1 to 36.0 5 138 172 275 413\n   10 53 66 106 159\n   15 30 37 59 89\n   20 19 24 38 58\n 36.1 to 46.0 5 129 161 257 386\n   10 51 64 102 154\n   15 29 36 58 87\n   20 19 24 38 57\n 46.1 to 72.5 20 18 23 36 55\n   30 10 13 20 30\n   40 6 8 13 19\n   50 4 6 9 13\n 72.6 to 121.0 20 10 12 20 30\n   30 6 7 11 17\n   40 4 5 7 11\n   50 3 3 5 8\n 121.1 to 145.0 20 12 15 24 35\n   30 7 9 15 22\n   40 5 6 10 15\n   50 4 5 8 11\n 145.1 to 169.0 20 12 15 24 36\n   30 7 9 15 22\n   40 5 7 10 16\n   50 4 5 8 12\n 169.1 to 242.0 20 13 17 27 40\n   30 8 10 17 25\n   40 6 7 12 17\n   50 4 5 9 13\n 242.1 to 362.0 20 25 32 51 76\n   30 16 19 31 47\n   40 11 14 22 33\n   50 8 10 16 25\n 362.1 to 420.0 20 12 15 25 37\n   30 8 10 15 23\n   40 5 7 11 16\n   50 4 5 8 12\n 420.1 to 550.0 20 23 29 47 70\n   30 14 18 29 43\n   40 10 13 20 30\n   50 8 9 15 23\n 550.1 to 800.0 20 25 31 50 75\n   30 15 19 31 46\n   40 11 13 21 32\n   50 8 10 16 24\n Notes: \n * This table is for open-air, phase-to-ground electric-arc exposures. It is not for phase-to-phase arcs or enclosed arcs (arc in a box).\n \u2020 The table assumes the arc length to be the sparkover distance for the maximum phase-to-ground voltage of each voltage range (see Appendix B to this section). The table also assumes that the employee will be the minimum approach distance minus twice the arc length from the electric arc.\n \u2021 The Occupational Safety and Health Administration calculated the values in this table using the ARCPRO method listed in Table 2.\n # For voltages of more than 72.6 kV, employers may use this table only when the minimum approach distance established under \u00a7 1910.269(l)(3)(i) is greater than or equal to the following values:\n 72.6 to 121.0 kV 1.02 m.\n 121.1 to 145.0 kV 1.16 m.\n 145.1 to 169.0 kV 1.30 m.\n 169.1 to 242.0 kV 1.72 m.\n 242.1 to 362.0 kV 2.76 m.\n 362.1 to 420.0 kV 2.50 m.\n 420.1 to 550.0 kV 3.62 m.\n 550.1 to 800.0 kV 4.83 m.\n ** The voltage range is the phase-to-phase system voltage. \n B. Selecting Protective Clothing and Other Protective Equipment\n \n Paragraph (l)(8)(v) of \u00a7 1910.269 requires employers, in certain situations, to select protective clothing and other protective equipment with an arc rating that is greater than or equal to the incident heat energy estimated under \u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(ii). Based on laboratory testing required by ASTM F1506-10a, the expectation is that protective clothing with an arc rating equal to the estimated incident heat energy will be capable of preventing second-degree burn injury to an employee exposed to that incident heat energy from an electric arc. Note that actual electric-arc exposures may be more or less severe than the estimated value because of factors such as arc movement, arc length, arcing from reclosing of the system, secondary fires or explosions, and weather conditions. Additionally, for arc rating based on the fabric's arc thermal performance value \n 5 \n   (ATPV), a worker exposed to incident energy at the arc rating has a 50-percent chance of just barely receiving a second-degree burn. Therefore, it is possible (although not likely) that an employee will sustain a second-degree (or worse) burn wearing clothing conforming to \u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(v) under certain circumstances. However, reasonable employer estimates and maintaining appropriate minimum approach distances for employees should limit burns to relatively small burns that just barely extend beyond the epidermis (that is, just barely a second-degree burn). Consequently, protective clothing and other protective equipment meeting \u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(v) will provide an appropriate degree of protection for an employee exposed to electric-arc hazards.\n \n \n \n 5  ASTM F1506-10a defines \u201carc thermal performance value\u201d as \u201cthe incident energy on a material or a multilayer system of materials that results in a 50% probability that sufficient heat transfer through the tested specimen is predicted to cause the onset of a second-degree skin burn injury based on the Stoll [footnote] curve, cal/cm\n 2 .\u201d The footnote to this definition reads: \u201cDerived from: Stoll, A. M., and Chianta, M. A., `Method and Rating System for Evaluations of Thermal Protection,' Aerospace Medicine, Vol 40, 1969, pp. 1232-1238 and Stoll, A. M., and Chianta, M. A., `Heat Transfer through Fabrics as Related to Thermal Injury,' Transactions\u2014New York Academy of Sciences, Vol 33(7), Nov. 1971, pp. 649-670.\u201d \n Paragraph (l)(8)(v) of \u00a7 1910.269 does not require arc-rated protection for exposures of 2 cal/cm\n 2  or less. Untreated cotton clothing will reduce a 2-cal/cm\n 2  exposure below the 1.2- to 1.5-cal/cm\n 2  level necessary to cause burn injury, and this material should not ignite at such low heat energy levels. Although \u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(v) does not require clothing to have an arc rating when exposures are 2 cal/cm\n 2  or less, \u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(iv) requires the outer layer of clothing to be flame resistant under certain conditions, even when the estimated incident heat energy is less than 2 cal/cm\n 2 , as discussed later in this appendix. Additionally, it is especially important to ensure that employees do not wear undergarments made from fabrics listed in the note to \u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(iii) even when the outer layer is flame resistant or arc rated. These fabrics can melt or ignite easily when an electric arc occurs. Logos and name tags made from non-flame-resistant material can adversely affect the arc rating or the flame-resistant characteristics of arc-rated or flame-resistant clothing. Such logos and name tags may violate \u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(iii), (l)(8)(iv), or (l)(8)(v).\n \n Paragraph (l)(8)(v) of \u00a7 1910.269 requires that arc-rated protection cover the employee's entire body, with limited exceptions for the employee's hands, feet, face, and head. Paragraph (l)(8)(v)(A) of \u00a7 1910.269 provides that arc-rated protection is not necessary for the employee's hands under the following conditions:\n \n For any estimated incident heat energy When the employee is wearing rubber insulating gloves with protectors.\n If the estimated incident heat energy does not exceed 14 cal/cm\n 2 When the employee is wearing heavy-duty leather work gloves with a weight of at least 407 gm/m\n 2  (12 oz/yd\n 2 ). \n Paragraph (l)(8)(v)(B) of \u00a7 1910.269 provides that arc-rated protection is not necessary for the employee's feet when the employee is wearing heavy-duty work shoes or boots. Finally, \u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(v)(C), (l)(8)(v)(D), and (l)(8)(v)(E) require arc-rated head and face protection as follows:\n \n Exposure\n Minimum head and face protection\n None *\n Arc-rated faceshield with a minimum\n  rating of 8 cal/cm\n 2 *\n Arc-rated hood or faceshield with balaclava\n Single-phase, open air 2-8 cal/cm\n 2 9-12 cal/cm\n 2 13 cal/cm\n 2  or higher \u2020.\n Three-phase 2-4 cal/cm\n 2 5-8 cal/cm\n 2 9 cal/cm\n 2  or higher \u2021.\n * These ranges assume that employees are wearing hardhats meeting the specifications in \u00a7 1910.135 or \u00a7 1926.100(b)(2), as applicable.\n \u2020 The arc rating must be a minimum of 4 cal/cm\n 2  less than the estimated incident energy. Note that \u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(v)(E) permits this type of head and face protection, with a minimum arc rating of 4 cal/cm\n 2  less than the estimated incident energy, at any incident energy level.\n \u2021 Note that \u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(v) permits this type of head and face protection at any incident energy level. \n IV. Protection Against Ignition\n \n Paragraph (l)(8)(iii) of \u00a7 1910.269 prohibits clothing that could melt onto an employee's skin or that could ignite and continue to burn when exposed to flames or to the available heat energy estimated by the employer under \u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(ii). Meltable fabrics, such as acetate, nylon, polyester, and polypropylene, even in blends, must be avoided. When these fibers melt, they can adhere to the skin, thereby transferring heat rapidly, exacerbating burns, and complicating treatment. These outcomes can result even if the meltable fabric is not directly next to the skin. The remainder of this section focuses on the prevention of ignition.\n \n Paragraph (l)(8)(v) of \u00a7 1910.269 generally requires protective clothing and other protective equipment with an arc rating greater than or equal to the employer's estimate of available heat energy. As explained earlier in this appendix, untreated cotton is usually acceptable for exposures of 2 cal/cm\n 2  or less.\n 6 \n   If the exposure is greater than that, the employee generally must wear flame-resistant clothing with a suitable arc rating in accordance with \u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(iv) and (l)(8)(v). However, even if an employee is wearing a layer of flame-resistant clothing, there are circumstances under which flammable layers of clothing would be uncovered, and an electric arc could ignite them. For example, clothing ignition is possible if the employee is wearing flammable clothing under the flame-resistant clothing and the underlayer is uncovered because of an opening in the flame-resistant clothing. Thus, for purposes of \u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(iii), it is important for the employer to consider the possibility of clothing ignition even when an employee is wearing flame-resistant clothing with a suitable arc rating.\n \n \n \n 6  See \u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(iv)(A), (l)(8)(iv)(B), and (l)(8)(iv)(C) for conditions under which employees must wear flame-resistant clothing as the outer layer of clothing even when the incident heat energy does not exceed 2 cal/cm\n 2 . \n Under \u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(iii), employees may not wear flammable clothing in conjunction with flame-resistant clothing if the flammable clothing poses an ignition hazard.\n 7 \n   Although outer flame-resistant layers may not have openings that expose flammable inner layers, when an outer flame-resistant layer would be unable to resist breakopen,\n 8 \n   the next (inner) layer must be flame-resistant if it could ignite.\n \n \n \n 7  Paragraph (l)(8)(iii) of \u00a7 1910.269 prohibits clothing that could ignite and continue to burn when exposed to the heat energy estimated under paragraph (l)(8)(ii) of that section. \n \n \n 8  Breakopen occurs when a hole, tear, or crack develops in the exposed fabric such that the fabric no longer effectively blocks incident heat energy. \n Non-flame-resistant clothing can ignite even when the heat energy from an electric arc is insufficient to ignite the clothing. For example, nearby flames can ignite an employee's clothing; and, even in the absence of flames, electric arcs pose ignition hazards beyond the hazard of ignition from incident energy under certain conditions. In addition to requiring flame-resistant clothing when the estimated incident energy exceeds 2.0 cal/cm\n 2 , \u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(iv) requires flame-resistant clothing when: The employee is exposed to contact with energized circuit parts operating at more than 600 volts (\u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(iv)(A)), an electric arc could ignite flammable material in the work area that, in turn, could ignite the employee's clothing (\u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(iv)(B)), and molten metal or electric arcs from faulted conductors in the work area could ignite the employee's clothing (\u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(iv)(C)). For example, grounding conductors can become a source of heat energy if they cannot carry fault current without failure. The employer must consider these possible sources of electric arcs \n 9 \n   in determining whether the employee's clothing could ignite under \u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(iv)(C).\n \n \n \n 9  Static wires and pole grounds are examples of grounding conductors that might not be capable of carrying fault current without failure. Grounds that can carry the maximum available fault current are not a concern, and employers need not consider such grounds a possible electric arc source.\n\nParagraph (l)(8) of \u00a7 1910.269 addresses protecting employees from flames and electric arcs. This paragraph requires employers to: (1) Assess the workplace for flame and electric-arc hazards (paragraph (l)(8)(i)); (2) estimate the available heat energy from electric arcs to which employees would be exposed (paragraph (l)(8)(ii)); (3) ensure that employees wear clothing that will not melt, or ignite and continue to burn, when exposed to flames or the estimated heat energy (paragraph (l)(8)(iii)); and (4) ensure that employees wear flame-resistant clothing \n 1 \n   and protective clothing and other protective equipment that has an arc rating greater than or equal to the available heat energy under certain conditions (paragraphs (l)(8)(iv) and (l)(8)(v)). This appendix contains information to help employers estimate available heat energy as required by \u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(ii), select protective clothing and other protective equipment with an arc rating suitable for the available heat energy as required by \u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(v), and ensure that employees do not wear flammable clothing that could lead to burn injury as addressed by \u00a7\u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(iii) and (l)(8)(iv).\n\n1  Flame-resistant clothing includes clothing that is inherently flame resistant and clothing chemically treated with a flame retardant. (See ASTM F1506-10a,  Standard Performance Specification for Flame Resistant Textile Materials for Wearing Apparel for Use by Electrical Workers Exposed to Momentary Electric Arc and Related Thermal Hazards,  and ASTM F1891-12  Standard Specification for Arc and Flame Resistant Rainwear. )\n\nParagraph (l)(8)(i) of \u00a7 1910.269 requires the employer to assess the workplace to identify employees exposed to hazards from flames or from electric arcs. This provision ensures that the employer evaluates employee exposure to flames and electric arcs so that employees who face such exposures receive the required protection. The employer must conduct an assessment for each employee who performs work on or near exposed, energized parts of electric circuits.\n\nSources electric arcs.  Consider possible sources of electric arcs, including:\n\n\u2022 Energized circuit parts not guarded or insulated,\n\n\u2022 Switching devices that produce electric arcs in normal operation,\n\n\u2022 Sliding parts that could fault during operation (for example, rack-mounted circuit breakers), and\n\n\u2022 Energized electric equipment that could fail (for example, electric equipment with damaged insulation or with evidence of arcing or overheating).\n\nExposure to flames.  Identify employees exposed to hazards from flames. Factors to consider include:\n\n\u2022 The proximity of employees to open flames, and\n\n\u2022 For flammable material in the work area, whether there is a reasonable likelihood that an electric arc or an open flame can ignite the material.\n\nProbability that an electric arc will occur.  Identify employees exposed to electric-arc hazards. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration will consider an employee exposed to electric-arc hazards if there is a reasonable likelihood that an electric arc will occur in the employee's work area, in other words, if the probability of such an event is higher than it is for the normal operation of enclosed equipment. Factors to consider include:\n\n\u2022 For energized circuit parts not guarded or insulated, whether conductive objects can come too close to or fall onto the energized parts,\n\n\u2022 For exposed, energized circuit parts, whether the employee is closer to the part than the minimum approach distance established by the employer (as permitted by \u00a7 1910.269(l)(3)(iii)).\n\n\u2022 Whether the operation of electric equipment with sliding parts that could fault during operation is part of the normal operation of the equipment or occurs during servicing or maintenance, and\n\n\u2022 For energized electric equipment, whether there is evidence of impending failure, such as evidence of arcing or overheating.\n\nTable 1 provides task-based examples of exposure assessments.\n\nTable 1\u2014Example Assessments for Various Tasks\n\nCalculation methods.  Paragraph (l)(8)(ii) of \u00a7 1910.269 provides that, for each employee exposed to an electric-arc hazard, the employer must make a reasonable estimate of the heat energy to which the employee would be exposed if an arc occurs. Table 2 lists various methods of calculating values of available heat energy from an electric circuit. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration does not endorse any of these specific methods. Each method requires the input of various parameters, such as fault current, the expected length of the electric arc, the distance from the arc to the employee, and the clearing time for the fault (that is, the time the circuit protective devices take to open the circuit and clear the fault). The employer can precisely determine some of these parameters, such as the fault current and the clearing time, for a given system. The employer will need to estimate other parameters, such as the length of the arc and the distance between the arc and the employee, because such parameters vary widely.\n\nTable 2\u2014Methods of Calculating Incident Heat Energy From an Electric Arc\n\n* This appendix refers to IEEE Std 1584-2002 with both amendments as IEEE Std 1584b-2011.\n\nThe amount of heat energy calculated by any of the methods is approximately inversely proportional to the square of the distance between the employee and the arc. In other words, if the employee is very close to the arc, the heat energy is very high; but if the employee is just a few more centimeters away, the heat energy drops substantially. Thus, estimating the distance from the arc to the employee is key to protecting employees.\n\nThe employer must select a method of estimating incident heat energy that provides a reasonable estimate of incident heat energy for the exposure involved. Table 3 shows which methods provide reasonable estimates for various exposures.\n\nTable 3\u2014Selecting a Reasonable Incident-Energy Calculation Method \n 1\n\nKey:\n\n1\u03a6: Single-phase arc in open air.\n\n3\u03a6a: Three-phase arc in open air.\n\n3\u03a6b: Three-phase arc in an enclosure (box).\n\nY: Acceptable; produces a reasonable estimate of incident heat energy from this type of electric arc.\n\nN: Not acceptable; does not produce a reasonable estimate of incident heat energy from this type of electric arc.\n\nY-C: Acceptable; produces a reasonable, but conservative, estimate of incident heat energy from this type of electric arc.\n\nNotes:\n\n1  Although the Occupational Safety and Health Administration will consider these methods reasonable for enforcement purposes when employers use the methods in accordance with this table, employers should be aware that the listed methods do not necessarily result in estimates that will provide full protection from internal faults in transformers and similar equipment or from arcs in underground manholes or vaults.\n\n2  At these voltages, the presumption is that the arc is three-phase unless the employer can demonstrate that only one phase is present or that the spacing of the phases is sufficient to prevent a multiphase arc from occurring.\n\n3  Although the Occupational Safety and Health Administration will consider this method acceptable for purposes of assessing whether incident energy exceeds 2.0 cal/cm\n 2 , the results at voltages of more than 15 kilovolts are extremely conservative and unrealistic.\n\n4  The Occupational Safety and Health Administration will deem the results of this method reasonable when the employer adjusts them using the conversion factors for three-phase arcs in open air or in an enclosure, as indicated in the program's instructions.\n\nSelecting a reasonable distance from the employee to the arc.  In estimating available heat energy, the employer must make some reasonable assumptions about how far the employee will be from the electric arc. Table 4 lists reasonable distances from the employee to the electric arc. The distances in Table 4 are consistent with national consensus standards, such as the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers'  National Electrical Safety Code,  ANSI/IEEE C2-2012, and  IEEE Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations,  IEEE Std 1584b-2011. The employer is free to use other reasonable distances, but must consider equipment enclosure size and the working distance to the employee in selecting a distance from the employee to the arc. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration will consider a distance reasonable when the employer bases it on equipment size and working distance.\n\nTable 4\u2014Selecting a Reasonable Distance From the Employee to the Electric Arc\n\n* NA = not applicable.\n\n\u2020 The terms in this equation are:\n\nMAD  = The applicable minimum approach distance, and\n\nkV  = The system voltage in kilovolts.\n\nSelecting a reasonable arc gap.  For a single-phase arc in air, the electric arc will almost always occur when an energized conductor approaches too close to ground. Thus, an employer can determine the arc gap, or arc length, for these exposures by the dielectric strength of air and the voltage on the line. The dielectric strength of air is approximately 10 kilovolts for every 25.4 millimeters (1 inch). For example, at 50 kilovolts, the arc gap would be 50 \u00f7 10 \u00d7 25.4 (or 50 \u00d7 2.54), which equals 127 millimeters (5 inches).\n\nFor three-phase arcs in open air and in enclosures, the arc gap will generally be dependent on the spacing between parts energized at different electrical potentials. Documents such as IEEE Std 1584b-2011 provide information on these distances. Employers may select a reasonable arc gap from Table 5, or they may select any other reasonable arc gap based on sparkover distance or on the spacing between (1) live parts at different potentials or (2) live parts and grounded parts (for example, bus or conductor spacings in equipment). In any event, the employer must use an estimate that reasonably resembles the actual exposures faced by the employee.\n\nTable 5\u2014Selecting a Reasonable Arc Gap\n\n1  Source: IEEE Std 1584b-2011.\n\n2  NA = not applicable.\n\nMaking estimates over multiple system areas.  The employer need not estimate the heat-energy exposure for every job task performed by each employee. Paragraph (l)(8)(ii) of \u00a7 1910.269 permits the employer to make broad estimates that cover multiple system areas provided that: (1) The employer uses reasonable assumptions about the energy-exposure distribution throughout the system, and (2) the estimates represent the maximum exposure for those areas. For example, the employer can use the maximum fault current and clearing time to cover several system areas at once.\n\nIncident heat energy for single-phase-to-ground exposures.  Table 6 and Table 7 provide incident heat energy levels for open-air, phase-to-ground electric-arc exposures typical for overhead systems.\n 2 \n   Table 6 presents estimates of available energy for employees using rubber insulating gloves to perform work on overhead systems operating at 4 to 46 kilovolts. The table assumes that the employee will be 380 millimeters (15 inches) from the electric arc, which is a reasonable estimate for rubber insulating glove work. Table 6 also assumes that the arc length equals the sparkover distance for the maximum transient overvoltage of each voltage range.\n 3 \n   To use the table, an employer would use the voltage, maximum fault current, and maximum clearing time for a system area and, using the appropriate voltage range and fault-current and clearing-time values corresponding to the next higher values listed in the table, select the appropriate heat energy (4, 5, 8, or 12 cal/cm\n 2 ) from the table. For example, an employer might have a 12,470-volt power line supplying a system area. The power line can supply a maximum fault current of 8 kiloamperes with a maximum clearing time of 10 cycles. For rubber glove work, this system falls in the 4.0-to-15.0-kilovolt range; the next-higher fault current is 10 kA (the second row in that voltage range); and the clearing time is under 18 cycles (the first column to the right of the fault current column). Thus, the available heat energy for this part of the system will be 4 cal/cm\n 2  or less (from the column heading), and the employer could select protection with a 5-cal/cm\n 2  rating to meet \u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(v). Alternatively, an employer could select a base incident-energy value and ensure that the clearing times for each voltage range and fault current listed in the table do not exceed the corresponding clearing time specified in the table. For example, an employer that provides employees with arc-flash protective equipment rated at 8 cal/cm\n 2  can use the table to determine if any system area exceeds 8 cal/cm\n 2  by checking the clearing time for the highest fault current for each voltage range and ensuring that the clearing times do not exceed the values specified in the 8-cal/cm\n 2  column in the table.\n\n2  The Occupational Safety and Health Administration used metric values to calculate the clearing times in Table 6 and Table 7. An employer may use English units to calculate clearing times instead even though the results will differ slightly.\n\n3  The Occupational Safety and Health Administration based this assumption, which is more conservative than the arc length specified in Table 5, on Table 410-2 of the 2012 NESC.\n\nTable 7 presents similar estimates for employees using live-line tools to perform work on overhead systems operating at voltages of 4 to 800 kilovolts. The table assumes that the arc length will be equal to the sparkover distance \n 4 \n   and that the employee will be a distance from the arc equal to the minimum approach distance minus twice the sparkover distance.\n\n4  The dielectric strength of air is about 10 kilovolts for every 25.4 millimeters (1 inch). Thus, the employer can estimate the arc length in millimeters to be the phase-to-ground voltage in kilovolts multiplied by 2.54 (or voltage (in kilovolts) \u00d7 2.54).\n\nThe employer will need to use other methods for estimating available heat energy in situations not addressed by Table 6 or Table 7. The calculation methods listed in Table 2 and the guidance provided in Table 3 will help employers do this. For example, employers can use IEEE Std 1584b-2011 to estimate the available heat energy (and to select appropriate protective equipment) for many specific conditions, including lower-voltage, phase-to-phase arc, and enclosed arc exposures.\n\nTable 6\u2014Incident Heat Energy for Various Fault Currents, Clearing Times, and Voltages of 4.0 to 46.0 kV: Rubber Insulating Glove Exposures Involving Phase-to-Ground Arcs in Open Air Only * \u2020 \u2021\n\nNotes: * This table is for open-air, phase-to-ground electric-arc exposures. It is not for phase-to-phase arcs or enclosed arcs (arc in a box).\n\n\u2020 The table assumes that the employee will be 380 mm (15 in.) from the electric arc. The table also assumes the arc length to be the sparkover distance for the maximum transient overvoltage of each voltage range (see Appendix B to \u00a7 1910.269), as follows:\n\n4.0 to 15.0 kV 51 mm (2 in.)\n\n15.1 to 25.0 kV 102 mm (4 in.)\n\n25.1 to 36.0 kV 152 mm (6 in.)\n\n36.1 to 46.0 kV 229 mm (9 in.)\n\n\u2021The Occupational Safety and Health Administration calculated the values in this table using the ARCPRO method listed in Table 2.\n\n** The voltage range is the phase-to-phase system voltage.\n\nTable 7\u2014Incident Heat Energy for Various Fault Currents, Clearing Times, and Voltages: Live-Line Tool Exposures Involving Phase-to-Ground Arcs in Open Air Only * \u2020 \u2021  #\n\nNotes:\n\n* This table is for open-air, phase-to-ground electric-arc exposures. It is not for phase-to-phase arcs or enclosed arcs (arc in a box).\n\n\u2020 The table assumes the arc length to be the sparkover distance for the maximum phase-to-ground voltage of each voltage range (see Appendix B to this section). The table also assumes that the employee will be the minimum approach distance minus twice the arc length from the electric arc.\n\n\u2021 The Occupational Safety and Health Administration calculated the values in this table using the ARCPRO method listed in Table 2.\n\n# For voltages of more than 72.6 kV, employers may use this table only when the minimum approach distance established under \u00a7 1910.269(l)(3)(i) is greater than or equal to the following values:\n\n72.6 to 121.0 kV 1.02 m.\n\n121.1 to 145.0 kV 1.16 m.\n\n145.1 to 169.0 kV 1.30 m.\n\n169.1 to 242.0 kV 1.72 m.\n\n242.1 to 362.0 kV 2.76 m.\n\n362.1 to 420.0 kV 2.50 m.\n\n420.1 to 550.0 kV 3.62 m.\n\n550.1 to 800.0 kV 4.83 m.\n\n** The voltage range is the phase-to-phase system voltage.\n\nParagraph (l)(8)(v) of \u00a7 1910.269 requires employers, in certain situations, to select protective clothing and other protective equipment with an arc rating that is greater than or equal to the incident heat energy estimated under \u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(ii). Based on laboratory testing required by ASTM F1506-10a, the expectation is that protective clothing with an arc rating equal to the estimated incident heat energy will be capable of preventing second-degree burn injury to an employee exposed to that incident heat energy from an electric arc. Note that actual electric-arc exposures may be more or less severe than the estimated value because of factors such as arc movement, arc length, arcing from reclosing of the system, secondary fires or explosions, and weather conditions. Additionally, for arc rating based on the fabric's arc thermal performance value \n 5 \n   (ATPV), a worker exposed to incident energy at the arc rating has a 50-percent chance of just barely receiving a second-degree burn. Therefore, it is possible (although not likely) that an employee will sustain a second-degree (or worse) burn wearing clothing conforming to \u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(v) under certain circumstances. However, reasonable employer estimates and maintaining appropriate minimum approach distances for employees should limit burns to relatively small burns that just barely extend beyond the epidermis (that is, just barely a second-degree burn). Consequently, protective clothing and other protective equipment meeting \u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(v) will provide an appropriate degree of protection for an employee exposed to electric-arc hazards.\n\n5  ASTM F1506-10a defines \u201carc thermal performance value\u201d as \u201cthe incident energy on a material or a multilayer system of materials that results in a 50% probability that sufficient heat transfer through the tested specimen is predicted to cause the onset of a second-degree skin burn injury based on the Stoll [footnote] curve, cal/cm\n 2 .\u201d The footnote to this definition reads: \u201cDerived from: Stoll, A. M., and Chianta, M. A., `Method and Rating System for Evaluations of Thermal Protection,' Aerospace Medicine, Vol 40, 1969, pp. 1232-1238 and Stoll, A. M., and Chianta, M. A., `Heat Transfer through Fabrics as Related to Thermal Injury,' Transactions\u2014New York Academy of Sciences, Vol 33(7), Nov. 1971, pp. 649-670.\u201d\n\nParagraph (l)(8)(v) of \u00a7 1910.269 does not require arc-rated protection for exposures of 2 cal/cm\n 2  or less. Untreated cotton clothing will reduce a 2-cal/cm\n 2  exposure below the 1.2- to 1.5-cal/cm\n 2  level necessary to cause burn injury, and this material should not ignite at such low heat energy levels. Although \u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(v) does not require clothing to have an arc rating when exposures are 2 cal/cm\n 2  or less, \u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(iv) requires the outer layer of clothing to be flame resistant under certain conditions, even when the estimated incident heat energy is less than 2 cal/cm\n 2 , as discussed later in this appendix. Additionally, it is especially important to ensure that employees do not wear undergarments made from fabrics listed in the note to \u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(iii) even when the outer layer is flame resistant or arc rated. These fabrics can melt or ignite easily when an electric arc occurs. Logos and name tags made from non-flame-resistant material can adversely affect the arc rating or the flame-resistant characteristics of arc-rated or flame-resistant clothing. Such logos and name tags may violate \u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(iii), (l)(8)(iv), or (l)(8)(v).\n\nParagraph (l)(8)(v) of \u00a7 1910.269 requires that arc-rated protection cover the employee's entire body, with limited exceptions for the employee's hands, feet, face, and head. Paragraph (l)(8)(v)(A) of \u00a7 1910.269 provides that arc-rated protection is not necessary for the employee's hands under the following conditions:\n\nParagraph (l)(8)(v)(B) of \u00a7 1910.269 provides that arc-rated protection is not necessary for the employee's feet when the employee is wearing heavy-duty work shoes or boots. Finally, \u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(v)(C), (l)(8)(v)(D), and (l)(8)(v)(E) require arc-rated head and face protection as follows:\n\n* These ranges assume that employees are wearing hardhats meeting the specifications in \u00a7 1910.135 or \u00a7 1926.100(b)(2), as applicable.\n\n\u2020 The arc rating must be a minimum of 4 cal/cm\n 2  less than the estimated incident energy. Note that \u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(v)(E) permits this type of head and face protection, with a minimum arc rating of 4 cal/cm\n 2  less than the estimated incident energy, at any incident energy level.\n\n\u2021 Note that \u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(v) permits this type of head and face protection at any incident energy level.\n\nParagraph (l)(8)(iii) of \u00a7 1910.269 prohibits clothing that could melt onto an employee's skin or that could ignite and continue to burn when exposed to flames or to the available heat energy estimated by the employer under \u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(ii). Meltable fabrics, such as acetate, nylon, polyester, and polypropylene, even in blends, must be avoided. When these fibers melt, they can adhere to the skin, thereby transferring heat rapidly, exacerbating burns, and complicating treatment. These outcomes can result even if the meltable fabric is not directly next to the skin. The remainder of this section focuses on the prevention of ignition.\n\nParagraph (l)(8)(v) of \u00a7 1910.269 generally requires protective clothing and other protective equipment with an arc rating greater than or equal to the employer's estimate of available heat energy. As explained earlier in this appendix, untreated cotton is usually acceptable for exposures of 2 cal/cm\n 2  or less.\n 6 \n   If the exposure is greater than that, the employee generally must wear flame-resistant clothing with a suitable arc rating in accordance with \u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(iv) and (l)(8)(v). However, even if an employee is wearing a layer of flame-resistant clothing, there are circumstances under which flammable layers of clothing would be uncovered, and an electric arc could ignite them. For example, clothing ignition is possible if the employee is wearing flammable clothing under the flame-resistant clothing and the underlayer is uncovered because of an opening in the flame-resistant clothing. Thus, for purposes of \u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(iii), it is important for the employer to consider the possibility of clothing ignition even when an employee is wearing flame-resistant clothing with a suitable arc rating.\n\n6  See \u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(iv)(A), (l)(8)(iv)(B), and (l)(8)(iv)(C) for conditions under which employees must wear flame-resistant clothing as the outer layer of clothing even when the incident heat energy does not exceed 2 cal/cm\n 2 .\n\nUnder \u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(iii), employees may not wear flammable clothing in conjunction with flame-resistant clothing if the flammable clothing poses an ignition hazard.\n 7 \n   Although outer flame-resistant layers may not have openings that expose flammable inner layers, when an outer flame-resistant layer would be unable to resist breakopen,\n 8 \n   the next (inner) layer must be flame-resistant if it could ignite.\n\n7  Paragraph (l)(8)(iii) of \u00a7 1910.269 prohibits clothing that could ignite and continue to burn when exposed to the heat energy estimated under paragraph (l)(8)(ii) of that section.\n\n8  Breakopen occurs when a hole, tear, or crack develops in the exposed fabric such that the fabric no longer effectively blocks incident heat energy.\n\nNon-flame-resistant clothing can ignite even when the heat energy from an electric arc is insufficient to ignite the clothing. For example, nearby flames can ignite an employee's clothing; and, even in the absence of flames, electric arcs pose ignition hazards beyond the hazard of ignition from incident energy under certain conditions. In addition to requiring flame-resistant clothing when the estimated incident energy exceeds 2.0 cal/cm\n 2 , \u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(iv) requires flame-resistant clothing when: The employee is exposed to contact with energized circuit parts operating at more than 600 volts (\u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(iv)(A)), an electric arc could ignite flammable material in the work area that, in turn, could ignite the employee's clothing (\u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(iv)(B)), and molten metal or electric arcs from faulted conductors in the work area could ignite the employee's clothing (\u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(iv)(C)). For example, grounding conductors can become a source of heat energy if they cannot carry fault current without failure. The employer must consider these possible sources of electric arcs \n 9 \n   in determining whether the employee's clothing could ignite under \u00a7 1910.269(l)(8)(iv)(C).\n\n9  Static wires and pole grounds are examples of grounding conductors that might not be capable of carrying fault current without failure. Grounds that can carry the maximum available fault current are not a concern, and employers need not consider such grounds a possible electric arc source.\n\nAppendix F to \u00a7 1910.269\u2014Work-Positioning Equipment Inspection Guidelines\n \n I. Body Belts\n \n Inspect body belts to ensure that:\n \n A. The hardware has no cracks, nicks, distortion, or corrosion;\n \n B. No loose or worn rivets are present;\n \n C. The waist strap has no loose grommets;\n \n D. The fastening straps are not 100-percent leather; and\n \n E. No worn materials that could affect the safety of the user are present.\n \n II. Positioning Straps\n \n Inspect positioning straps to ensure that:\n \n A. The warning center of the strap material is not exposed;\n \n B. No cuts, burns, extra holes, or fraying of strap material is present;\n \n C. Rivets are properly secured;\n \n D. Straps are not 100-percent leather; and\n \n E. Snaphooks do not have cracks, burns, or corrosion.\n \n III. Climbers\n \n Inspect pole and tree climbers to ensure that:\n \n A. Gaffs are at least as long as the manufacturer's recommended minimums (generally 32 and 51 millimeters (1.25 and 2.0 inches) for pole and tree climbers, respectively, measured on the underside of the gaff);\n \n \n Note: \n Gauges are available to assist in determining whether gaffs are long enough and shaped to easily penetrate poles or trees. \n B. Gaffs and leg irons are not fractured or cracked;\n \n C. Stirrups and leg irons are free of excessive wear;\n \n D. Gaffs are not loose;\n \n E. Gaffs are free of deformation that could adversely affect use;\n \n F. Gaffs are properly sharpened; and\n \n G. There are no broken straps or buckles.\n\nInspect body belts to ensure that:\n\nA. The hardware has no cracks, nicks, distortion, or corrosion;\n\nB. No loose or worn rivets are present;\n\nC. The waist strap has no loose grommets;\n\nD. The fastening straps are not 100-percent leather; and\n\nE. No worn materials that could affect the safety of the user are present.\n\nInspect positioning straps to ensure that:\n\nA. The warning center of the strap material is not exposed;\n\nB. No cuts, burns, extra holes, or fraying of strap material is present;\n\nC. Rivets are properly secured;\n\nD. Straps are not 100-percent leather; and\n\nE. Snaphooks do not have cracks, burns, or corrosion.\n\nInspect pole and tree climbers to ensure that:\n\nA. Gaffs are at least as long as the manufacturer's recommended minimums (generally 32 and 51 millimeters (1.25 and 2.0 inches) for pole and tree climbers, respectively, measured on the underside of the gaff);\n\nGauges are available to assist in determining whether gaffs are long enough and shaped to easily penetrate poles or trees.\n\nB. Gaffs and leg irons are not fractured or cracked;\n\nC. Stirrups and leg irons are free of excessive wear;\n\nD. Gaffs are not loose;\n\nE. Gaffs are free of deformation that could adversely affect use;\n\nF. Gaffs are properly sharpened; and\n\nG. There are no broken straps or buckles.\n\nAppendix G to \u00a7 1910.269\u2014Reference Documents\n \n The references contained in this appendix provide information that can be helpful in understanding and complying with the requirements contained in \u00a7 1910.269. The national consensus standards referenced in this appendix contain detailed specifications that employers may follow in complying with the more performance-based requirements of \u00a7 1910.269. Except as specifically noted in \u00a7 1910.269, however, the Occupational Safety and Health Administration will not necessarily deem compliance with the national consensus standards to be compliance with the provisions of \u00a7 1910.269.\n \n ANSI/SIA A92.2-2009,  American National Standard for Vehicle-Mounted Elevating and Rotating Aerial Devices. \n \n ANSI Z133-2012,  American National Standard Safety Requirements for Arboricultural Operations\u2014Pruning, Trimming, Repairing, Maintaining, and Removing Trees, and Cutting Brush. \n \n ANSI/IEEE Std 935-1989,  IEEE Guide on Terminology for Tools and Equipment to Be Used in Live Line Working. \n \n ASME B20.1-2012,  Safety Standard for Conveyors and Related Equipment. \n \n ASTM D120-09,  Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Gloves. \n \n ASTM D149-09 (2013),  Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage and Dielectric Strength of Solid Electrical Insulating Materials at Commercial Power Frequencies. \n \n ASTM D178-01 (2010),  Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Matting. \n \n ASTM D1048-12,  Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Blankets. \n \n ASTM D1049-98 (2010),  Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Covers. \n \n ASTM D1050-05 (2011),  Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Line Hose. \n \n ASTM D1051-08,  Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Sleeves. \n \n ASTM F478-09,  Standard Specification for In-Service Care of Insulating Line Hose and Covers. \n \n ASTM F479-06 (2011),  Standard Specification for In-Service Care of Insulating Blankets. \n \n ASTM F496-08,  Standard Specification for In-Service Care of Insulating Gloves and Sleeves. \n \n ASTM F711-02 (2007),  Standard Specification for Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Rod and Tube Used in Live Line Tools. \n \n ASTM F712-06 (2011),  Standard Test Methods and Specifications for Electrically Insulating Plastic Guard Equipment for Protection of Workers. \n \n ASTM F819-10,  Standard Terminology Relating to Electrical Protective Equipment for Workers. \n \n ASTM F855-09,  Standard Specifications for Temporary Protective Grounds to Be Used on De-energized Electric Power Lines and Equipment. \n \n ASTM F887-12\n e1 ,  Standard Specifications for Personal Climbing Equipment. \n \n ASTM F914/F914M-10,  Standard Test Method for Acoustic Emission for Aerial Personnel Devices Without Supplemental Load Handling Attachments. \n \n ASTM F1116-03 (2008),  Standard Test Method for Determining Dielectric Strength of Dielectric Footwear. \n \n ASTM F1117-03 (2008),  Standard Specification for Dielectric Footwear. \n \n ASTM F1236-96 (2012),  Standard Guide for Visual Inspection of Electrical Protective Rubber Products. \n \n ASTM F1430/F1430M-10,  Standard Test Method for Acoustic Emission Testing of Insulated and Non-Insulated Aerial Personnel Devices with Supplemental Load Handling Attachments. \n \n ASTM F1505-10,  Standard Specification for Insulated and Insulating Hand Tools. \n \n ASTM F1506-10a,  Standard Performance Specification for Flame Resistant and Arc Rated Textile Materials for Wearing Apparel for Use by Electrical Workers Exposed to Momentary Electric Arc and Related Thermal Hazards. \n \n ASTM F1564-13,  Standard Specification for Structure-Mounted Insulating Work Platforms for Electrical Workers. \n \n ASTM F1701-12,  Standard Specification for Unused Polypropylene Rope with Special Electrical Properties. \n \n ASTM F1742-03 (2011),  Standard Specification for PVC Insulating Sheeting. \n \n ASTM F1796-09,  Standard Specification for High Voltage Detectors\u2014Part 1 Capacitive Type to be Used for Voltages Exceeding 600 Volts AC. \n \n ASTM F1797-09 \u03b5 \n 1 ,  Standard Test Method for Acoustic Emission Testing of Insulated and Non-Insulated Digger Derricks. \n \n ASTM F1825-03 (2007),  Standard Specification for Clampstick Type Live Line Tools. \n \n ASTM F1826-00 (2011),  Standard Specification for Live Line and Measuring Telescoping Tools. \n \n ASTM F1891-12,  Standard Specification for Arc and Flame Resistant Rainwear. \n \n ASTM F1958/F1958M-12,  Standard Test Method for Determining the Ignitability of Non-flame-Resistant Materials for Clothing by Electric Arc Exposure Method Using Mannequins. \n \n ASTM F1959/F1959M-12,  Standard Test Method for Determining the Arc Rating of Materials for Clothing. \n \n IEEE Stds 4-1995, 4a-2001 (Amendment to  IEEE Standard Techniques for High-Voltage Testing ),  IEEE Standard Techniques for High-Voltage Testing. \n \n IEEE Std 62-1995,  IEEE Guide for Diagnostic Field Testing of Electric Power Apparatus\u2014Part 1: Oil Filled Power Transformers, Regulators, and Reactors. \n \n IEEE Std 80-2000,  Guide for Safety in AC Substation Grounding. \n \n IEEE Std 100-2000,  The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms Seventh Edition. \n \n IEEE Std 516-2009,  IEEE Guide for Maintenance Methods on Energized Power Lines. \n \n IEEE Std 524-2003,  IEEE Guide to the Installation of Overhead Transmission Line Conductors  .\n \n IEEE Std 957-2005,  IEEE Guide for Cleaning Insulators. \n \n IEEE Std 1048-2003,  IEEE Guide for Protective Grounding of Power Lines. \n \n IEEE Std 1067-2005,  IEEE Guide for In-Service Use, Care, Maintenance, and Testing of Conductive Clothing for Use on Voltages up to 765 kV AC and \u00b1750 kV DC. \n \n IEEE Std 1307-2004,  IEEE Standard for Fall Protection for Utility Work. \n \n IEEE Stds 1584-2002, 1584a-2004 (Amendment 1 to IEEE Std 1584-2002), and 1584b-2011 (Amendment 2: Changes to Clause 4 of IEEE Std 1584-2002),  IEEE Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations. \n \n IEEE C2-2012,  National Electrical Safety Code. \n \n NFPA 70E-2012,  Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace.\n\nThe references contained in this appendix provide information that can be helpful in understanding and complying with the requirements contained in \u00a7 1910.269. The national consensus standards referenced in this appendix contain detailed specifications that employers may follow in complying with the more performance-based requirements of \u00a7 1910.269. Except as specifically noted in \u00a7 1910.269, however, the Occupational Safety and Health Administration will not necessarily deem compliance with the national consensus standards to be compliance with the provisions of \u00a7 1910.269.\n\nANSI/SIA A92.2-2009,  American National Standard for Vehicle-Mounted Elevating and Rotating Aerial Devices.\n\nANSI Z133-2012,  American National Standard Safety Requirements for Arboricultural Operations\u2014Pruning, Trimming, Repairing, Maintaining, and Removing Trees, and Cutting Brush.\n\nANSI/IEEE Std 935-1989,  IEEE Guide on Terminology for Tools and Equipment to Be Used in Live Line Working.\n\nASME B20.1-2012,  Safety Standard for Conveyors and Related Equipment.\n\nASTM D120-09,  Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Gloves.\n\nASTM D149-09 (2013),  Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage and Dielectric Strength of Solid Electrical Insulating Materials at Commercial Power Frequencies.\n\nASTM D178-01 (2010),  Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Matting.\n\nASTM D1048-12,  Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Blankets.\n\nASTM D1049-98 (2010),  Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Covers.\n\nASTM D1050-05 (2011),  Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Line Hose.\n\nASTM D1051-08,  Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Sleeves.\n\nASTM F478-09,  Standard Specification for In-Service Care of Insulating Line Hose and Covers.\n\nASTM F479-06 (2011),  Standard Specification for In-Service Care of Insulating Blankets.\n\nASTM F496-08,  Standard Specification for In-Service Care of Insulating Gloves and Sleeves.\n\nASTM F711-02 (2007),  Standard Specification for Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Rod and Tube Used in Live Line Tools.\n\nASTM F712-06 (2011),  Standard Test Methods and Specifications for Electrically Insulating Plastic Guard Equipment for Protection of Workers.\n\nASTM F819-10,  Standard Terminology Relating to Electrical Protective Equipment for Workers.\n\nASTM F855-09,  Standard Specifications for Temporary Protective Grounds to Be Used on De-energized Electric Power Lines and Equipment.\n\nASTM F887-12\n e1 ,  Standard Specifications for Personal Climbing Equipment.\n\nASTM F914/F914M-10,  Standard Test Method for Acoustic Emission for Aerial Personnel Devices Without Supplemental Load Handling Attachments.\n\nASTM F1116-03 (2008),  Standard Test Method for Determining Dielectric Strength of Dielectric Footwear.\n\nASTM F1117-03 (2008),  Standard Specification for Dielectric Footwear.\n\nASTM F1236-96 (2012),  Standard Guide for Visual Inspection of Electrical Protective Rubber Products.\n\nASTM F1430/F1430M-10,  Standard Test Method for Acoustic Emission Testing of Insulated and Non-Insulated Aerial Personnel Devices with Supplemental Load Handling Attachments.\n\nASTM F1505-10,  Standard Specification for Insulated and Insulating Hand Tools.\n\nASTM F1506-10a,  Standard Performance Specification for Flame Resistant and Arc Rated Textile Materials for Wearing Apparel for Use by Electrical Workers Exposed to Momentary Electric Arc and Related Thermal Hazards.\n\nASTM F1564-13,  Standard Specification for Structure-Mounted Insulating Work Platforms for Electrical Workers.\n\nASTM F1701-12,  Standard Specification for Unused Polypropylene Rope with Special Electrical Properties.\n\nASTM F1742-03 (2011),  Standard Specification for PVC Insulating Sheeting.\n\nASTM F1796-09,  Standard Specification for High Voltage Detectors\u2014Part 1 Capacitive Type to be Used for Voltages Exceeding 600 Volts AC.\n\nASTM F1797-09 \u03b5 \n 1 ,  Standard Test Method for Acoustic Emission Testing of Insulated and Non-Insulated Digger Derricks.\n\nASTM F1825-03 (2007),  Standard Specification for Clampstick Type Live Line Tools.\n\nASTM F1826-00 (2011),  Standard Specification for Live Line and Measuring Telescoping Tools.\n\nASTM F1891-12,  Standard Specification for Arc and Flame Resistant Rainwear.\n\nASTM F1958/F1958M-12,  Standard Test Method for Determining the Ignitability of Non-flame-Resistant Materials for Clothing by Electric Arc Exposure Method Using Mannequins.\n\nASTM F1959/F1959M-12,  Standard Test Method for Determining the Arc Rating of Materials for Clothing.\n\nIEEE Stds 4-1995, 4a-2001 (Amendment to  IEEE Standard Techniques for High-Voltage Testing ),  IEEE Standard Techniques for High-Voltage Testing.\n\nIEEE Std 62-1995,  IEEE Guide for Diagnostic Field Testing of Electric Power Apparatus\u2014Part 1: Oil Filled Power Transformers, Regulators, and Reactors.\n\nIEEE Std 80-2000,  Guide for Safety in AC Substation Grounding.\n\nIEEE Std 100-2000,  The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms Seventh Edition.\n\nIEEE Std 516-2009,  IEEE Guide for Maintenance Methods on Energized Power Lines.\n\nIEEE Std 524-2003,  IEEE Guide to the Installation of Overhead Transmission Line Conductors  .\n\nIEEE Std 957-2005,  IEEE Guide for Cleaning Insulators.\n\nIEEE Std 1048-2003,  IEEE Guide for Protective Grounding of Power Lines.\n\nIEEE Std 1067-2005,  IEEE Guide for In-Service Use, Care, Maintenance, and Testing of Conductive Clothing for Use on Voltages up to 765 kV AC and \u00b1750 kV DC.\n\nIEEE Std 1307-2004,  IEEE Standard for Fall Protection for Utility Work.\n\nIEEE Stds 1584-2002, 1584a-2004 (Amendment 1 to IEEE Std 1584-2002), and 1584b-2011 (Amendment 2: Changes to Clause 4 of IEEE Std 1584-2002),  IEEE Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations.\n\nIEEE C2-2012,  National Electrical Safety Code.\n\nNFPA 70E-2012,  Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.18.37.9", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "R", "Subpart R\u2014Special Industries", "", "\u00a7 1910.272 Grain handling facilities.", "OSHA", "", "", "[52 FR 49625, Dec. 31, 1987, as amended at 53 FR 17696, May 18, 1988; 54 FR 24334, June 7, 1989; 55 FR 25094, June 20, 1990; 61 FR 9242, Mar. 7, 1996; 61 FR 9584, Mar. 8, 1996; 67 FR 67965, Nov. 7, 2002; 76 FR 80740, Dec. 27, 2011]", "(a)  Scope.  This section contains requirements for the control of grain dust fires and explosions, and certain other safety hazards associated with grain handling facilities. It applies in addition to all other relevant provisions of part 1910 (or part 1917 at marine terminals).\n\nFor grain-handling facilities in the marine-terminal industry only, 29 CFR 1910.272 is to be enforced consistent with the interpretations in OSHA Compliance Directive 02-00-066, which is available on OSHA's Web page at  www.osha.gov.\n\n(b)  Application.  (1) Paragraphs (a) through (n) of this section apply to grain elevators, feed mills, flour mills, rice mills, dust pelletizing plants, dry corn mills, soybean flaking operations, and the dry grinding operations of soycake.\n\n(2) Paragraphs (o), (p), and (q) of this section apply only to grain elevators.\n\n(c)  Definitions.\n\nChoked leg  means a condition of material buildup in the bucket elevator that results in the stoppage of material flow and bucket movement. A bucket elevator is not considered choked that has the up-leg partially or fully loaded and has the boot and discharge cleared allowing bucket movement.\n\nFlat storage structure  means a grain storage building or structure that will not empty completely by gravity, has an unrestricted ground level opening for entry, and must be entered to reclaim the residual grain using powered equipment or manual means.\n\nFugitive grain dust  means combustible dust particles, emitted from the stock handling system, of such size as will pass through a U.S. Standard 40 mesh sieve (425 microns or less).\n\nGrain elevator  means a facility engaged in the receipt, handling, storage, and shipment of bulk raw agricultural commodities such as corn, wheat, oats, barley, sunflower seeds, and soybeans.\n\nHot work  means work involving electric or gas welding, cutting, brazing, or similar flame producing operations.\n\nInside bucket elevator  means a bucket elevator that has the boot and more than 20 percent of the total leg height (above grade or ground level) inside the grain elevator structure. Bucket elevators with leg casings that are inside (and pass through the roofs) of rail or truck dump sheds with the remainder of the leg outside of the grain elevator structure, are not considered inside bucket elevators.\n\nJogging  means repeated starting and stopping of drive motors in an attempt to clear choked legs.\n\nLagging  means a covering on drive pulleys used to increase the coefficient of friction between the pulley and the belt.\n\nPermit  means the written certification by the employer authorizing employees to perform identified work operations subject to specified precautions.\n\n(d)  Emergency action plan.  The employer shall develop and implement an emergency action plan meeting the requirements contained in 29 CFR 1910.38.\n\n(e)  Training.  (1) The employer shall provide training to employees at least annually and when changes in job assignment will expose them to new hazards. Current employees, and new employees prior to starting work, shall be trained in at least the following:\n\n(i) General safety precautions associated with the facility, including recognition and preventive measures for the hazards related to dust accumulations and common ignition sources such as smoking; and,\n\n(ii) Specific procedures and safety practices applicable to their job tasks including but not limited to, cleaning procedures for grinding equipment, clearing procedures for choked legs, housekeeping procedures, hot work procedures, preventive maintenance procedures and lock-out/tag-out procedures.\n\n(2) Employees assigned special tasks, such as bin entry and handling of flammable or toxic substances, shall be provided training to perform these tasks safely.\n\nTraining for an employee who enters grain storage structures includes training about engulfment and mechanical hazards and how to avoid them.\n\n(f)  Hot work permit.  (1) The employer shall issue a permit for all hot work, with the following exceptions:\n\n(i) Where the employer or the employer's representative (who would otherwise authorize the permit) is present while the hot work is being performed;\n\n(ii) In welding shops authorized by the employer;\n\n(iii) In hot work areas authorized by the employer which are located outside of the grain handling structure.\n\n(2) The permit shall certify that the requirements contained in \u00a7 1910.252(a) have been implemented prior to beginning the hot work operations. The permit shall be kept on file until completion of the hot work operations.\n\n(g)  Entry into grain storage structures.  This paragraph applies to employee entry into bins, silos , tanks, and other grain storage structures.  Exception:  Entry through unrestricted ground level openings into flat storage structures in which there are no toxicity, flammability, oxygen-deficiency, or other atmospheric hazards is covered by paragraph (h) of this section. For the purposes of this paragraph (g), the term \u201cgrain\u201d includes raw and processed grain and grain products in facilities within the scope of paragraph (b)(1) of this section.\n\n(1) The following actions shall be taken before employees enter bins, silos, or tanks:\n\n(i) The employer shall issue a permit for entering bins, silos, or tanks unless the employer or the employer's representative (who would otherwise authorize the permit) is present during the entire operation. The permit shall certify that the precautions contained in this paragraph (\u00a7 1910.272(g)) have been implemented prior to employees entering bins, silos or tanks. The permit shall be kept on file until completion of the entry operations.\n\n(ii) All mechanical, electrical, hydraulic, and pneumatic equipment which presents a danger to employees inside grain storage structures shall be deenergized and shall be disconnected, locked-out and tagged, blocked-off, or otherwise prevented from operating by other equally effective means or methods.\n\n(iii) The atmosphere within a bin, silo, or tank shall be tested for the presence of combustible gases, vapors, and toxic agents when the employer has reason to believe they may be present. Additionally, the atmosphere within a bin, silo, or tank shall be tested for oxygen content unless there is continuous natural air movement or continuous forced-air ventilation before and during the period employees are inside. If the oxygen level is less than 19.5%, or if combustible gas or vapor is detected in excess of 10% of the lower flammable limit, or if toxic agents are present in excess of the ceiling values listed in subpart Z of 29 CFR part 1910, or if toxic agents are present in concentrations that will cause health effects which prevent employees from effecting self-rescue or communication to obtain assistance, the following provisions apply.\n\n(A) Ventilation shall be provided until the unsafe condition or conditions are eliminated, and the ventilation shall be continued as long as there is a possibility of recurrence of the unsafe condition while the bin, silo, or tank is occupied by employees.\n\n(B) If toxicity or oxygen deficiency cannot be eliminated by ventilation, employees entering the bin, silo, or tank shall wear an appropriate respirator. Respirator use shall be in accordance with the requirements of \u00a7 1910.134.\n\n(iv) \u201cWalking down grain\u201d and similar practices where an employee walks on grain to make it flow within or out from a grain storage structure, or where an employee is on moving grain, are prohibited.\n\n(2) Whenever an employee enters a grain storage structure from a level at or above the level of the stored grain or grain products, or whenever an employee walks or stands on or in stored grain of a depth which poses an engulfment hazard, the employer shall equip the employee with a body harness with lifeline, or a boatswain's chair that meets the requirements of subpart D of this part. The lifeline shall be so positioned, and of sufficient length, to prevent the employee from sinking further than waist-deep in the grain.  Exception:  Where the employer can demonstrate that the protection required by this paragraph is not feasible or creates a greater hazard, the employer shall provide an alternative means of protection which is demonstrated to prevent the employee from sinking further than waist-deep in the grain.\n\nWhen the employee is standing or walking on a surface which the employer demonstrates is free from engulfment hazards, the lifeline or alternative means may be disconnected or removed.\n\n(3) An observer, equipped to provide assistance, shall be stationed outside the bin, silo, or tank being entered by an employee. Communications (visual, voice, or signal line) shall be maintained between the observer and employee entering the bin, silo, or tank.\n\n(4) The employer shall provide equipment for rescue operations which is specifically suited for the bin, silo, or tank being entered.\n\n(5) The employee acting as observer shall be trained in rescue procedures, including notification methods for obtaining additional assistance.\n\n(6) Employees shall not enter bins, silos, or tanks underneath a bridging condition, or where a buildup of grain products on the sides could fall and bury them.\n\n(h)  Entry into flat storage structures.  For the purposes of this paragraph (h), the term \u201cgrain\u201d means raw and processed grain and grain products in facilities within the scope of paragraph (b)(1) of this section.\n\n(1) Each employee who walks or stands on or in stored grain, where the depth of the grain poses an engulfment hazard, shall be equipped with a lifeline or alternative means which the employer demonstrates will prevent the employee from sinking further than waist-deep into the grain.\n\nWhen the employee is standing or walking on a surface which the employer demonstrates is free from engulfment hazards, the lifeline or alternative means may be disconnected or removed.\n\n(2)(i) Whenever an employee walks or stands on or in stored grain or grain products of a depth which poses an engulfment hazard, all equipment which presents a danger to that employee (such as an auger or other grain transport equipment) shall be deenergized, and shall be disconnected, locked-out and tagged, blocked-off, or otherwise prevented from operating by other equally effective means or methods.\n\n(ii) \u201cWalking down grain\u201d and similar practices where an employee walks on grain to make it flow within or out from a grain storage structure, or where an employee is on moving grain, are prohibited.\n\n(3) No employee shall be permitted to be either underneath a bridging condition, or in any other location where an accumulation of grain on the sides or elsewhere could fall and engulf that employee.\n\n(i)  Contractors.  (1) The employer shall inform contractors performing work at the grain handling facility of known potential fire and explosion hazards related to the contractor's work and work area. The employer shall also inform contractors of the applicable safety rules of the facility.\n\n(2) The employer shall explain the applicable provisions of the emergency action plan to contractors.\n\n(j)  Housekeeping.  (1) The employer shall develop and implement a written housekeeping program that establishes the frequency and method(s) determined best to reduce accumulations of fugitive grain dust on ledges, floors, equipment, and other exposed surfaces.\n\n(2) In addition, the housekeeping program for  grain elevators  shall address fugitive grain dust accumulations at priority housekeeping areas.\n\n(i) Priority housekeeping areas shall include  at least  the following:\n\n(A) Floor areas within 35 feet (10.7 m) of inside bucket elevators;\n\n(B) Floors of enclosed areas containing grinding equipment;\n\n(C) Floors of enclosed areas containing grain dryers located inside the facility.\n\n(ii) The employer shall immediately remove any fugitive grain dust accumulations whenever they exceed \n 1/8  inch (.32 cm) at priority housekeeping areas, pursuant to the housekeeping program, or shall demonstrate and assure, through the development and implementation of the housekeeping program, that equivalent protection is provided.\n\n(3) The use of compressed air to blow dust from ledges, walls, and other areas shall only be permitted when all machinery that presents an ignition source in the area is shut-down, and all other known potential ignition sources in the area are removed or controlled.\n\n(4) Grain and product spills shall not be considered fugitive grain dust accumulations. However, the housekeeping program shall address the procedures for removing such spills from the work area.\n\n(k)  Grate openings.  Receiving-pit feed openings, such as truck or railcar receiving-pits, shall be covered by grates. The width of openings in the grates shall be a maximum of 2\n 1/2  inches (6.35 cm).\n\n(l)  Filter collectors.  (1) All fabric dust filter collectors which are a part of a pneumatic dust collection system shall be equipped with a monitoring device that will indicate a pressure drop across the surface of the filter.\n\n(2) Filter collectors installed after March 30, 1988 shall be:\n\n(i) Located outside the facility; or\n\n(ii) Located in an area inside the facility protected by an explosion suppression system; or\n\n(iii) Located in an area inside the facility that is separated from other areas of the facility by construction having at least a one hour fire-resistance rating, and which is adjacent to an exterior wall and vented to the outside. The vent and ductwork shall be designed to resist rupture due to deflagration.\n\n(m)  Preventive maintenance.  (1) The employer shall implement preventive maintenance procedures consisting of:\n\n(i) Regularly scheduled inspections of at least the mechanical and safety control equipment associated with dryers, grain stream processing equipment, dust collection equipment including filter collectors, and bucket elevators;\n\n(ii) Lubrication and other appropriate maintenance in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations, or as determined necessary by prior operating records.\n\n(2) The employer shall promptly correct dust collection systems which are malfunctioning or which are operating below designed efficiency. Additionally, the employer shall promptly correct, or remove from service, overheated bearings and slipping or misaligned belts associated with inside bucket elevators.\n\n(3) A certification record shall be maintained of each inspection, performed in accordance with this paragraph (m), containing the date of the inspection, the name of the person who performed the inspection and the serial number, or other identifier, of the equipment specified in paragraph (m)(1)(i) of this section that was inspected.\n\n(4) The employer shall implement procedures for the use of tags and locks which will prevent the inadvertent application of energy or motion to equipment being repaired, serviced, or adjusted, which could result in employee injury. Such locks and tags shall be removed in accordance with established procedures only by the employee installing them or, if unavailable, by his or her supervisor.\n\n(n)  Grain stream processing equipment.  The employer shall equip grain stream processing equipment (such as hammer mills, grinders, and pulverizers) with an effective means of removing ferrous material from the incoming grain stream.\n\n(o)  Emergency escape.  (1) The employer shall provide at least two means of emergency escape from galleries (bin decks).\n\n(2) The employer shall provide at least one means of emergency escape in tunnels of existing grain elevators. Tunnels in grain elevators constructed after the effective date of this standard shall be provided with at least two means of emergency escape.\n\n(p)  Continuous-flow bulk raw grain dryers.  (1) All direct-heat grain dryers shall be equipped with automatic controls that:\n\n(i) Will shut-off the fuel supply in case of power or flame failure or interruption of air movement through the exhaust fan; and,\n\n(ii) Will stop the grain from being fed into the dryer if excessive temperature occurs in the exhaust of the drying section.\n\n(2) Direct-heat grain dryers installed after March 30, 1988 shall be:\n\n(i) Located outside the grain elevator; or\n\n(ii) Located in an area inside the grain elevator protected by a fire or explosion suppression system; or\n\n(iii) Located in an area inside the grain elevator which is separated from other areas of the facility by construction having at least a one hour fire-resistance rating.\n\n(q)  Inside bucket elevators.  (1) Bucket elevators shall not be jogged to free a choked leg.\n\n(2) All belts and lagging purchased after March 30, 1988 shall be conductive. Such belts shall have a surface electrical resistance not to exceed 300 megohms.\n\n(3) All bucket elevators shall be equipped with a means of access to the head pulley section to allow inspection of the head pulley, lagging, belt, and discharge throat of the elevator head. The boot section shall also be provided with a means of access for clean-out of the boot and for inspection of the boot, pulley, and belt.\n\n(4) All the employer shall:\n\n(i) Mount bearings externally to the leg casing; or,\n\n(ii) Provide vibration monitoring, temperature monitoring, or other means to monitor the condition of those bearings mounted inside or partially-inside the leg casing.\n\n(5) All the employer shall equip bucket elevators with a motion detection device which will shut-down the bucket elevator when the belt speed is reduced by no more than 20% of the normal operating speed.\n\n(6) All the employer shall:\n\n(i) Equip bucket elevators with a belt alignment monitoring device which will initiate an alarm to employees when the belt is not tracking properly; or,\n\n(ii) Provide a means to keep the belt tracking properly, such as a system that provides constant alignment adjustment of belts.\n\n(7) Paragraphs (q)(5) and (q)(6) of this section do not apply to grain elevators having a permanent storage capacity of less than one million bushels, provided that daily visual inspection is made of bucket movement and tracking of the belt.\n\n(8) Paragraphs (q)(4), (q)(5), and (q)(6) of this section do not apply to the following:\n\n(i) Bucket elevators which are equipped with an operational fire and explosion suppression system capable of protecting at least the head and boot section of the bucket elevator; or,\n\n(ii) Bucket elevators which are equipped with pneumatic or other dust control systems or methods that keep the dust concentration inside the bucket elevator at least 25% below the lower explosive limit at all times during operations.\n\nThe following appendices to \u00a7 1910.272 serve as nonmandatory guidelines to assist employers and employees in complying with the requirements of this section, as well as to provide other helpful information.\n\nNo additional burdens are imposed through these appendices.\n\nAppendix A to \u00a7 1910.272 Grain Handling Facilities\n \n Examples presented in this appendix may not be the only means of achieving the performance goals in the standard.\n \n 1. Scope and Application\n \n The provisions of this standard apply in addition to any other applicable requirements of this part 1910 (or part 1917 at marine terminals). The standard contains requirements for new and existing grain handling facilities. The standard does not apply to seed plants which handle and prepare seeds for planting of future crops, nor to on-farm storage or feed lots.\n \n 2. Emergency Action Plan\n \n The standard requires the employer to develop and implement an emergency action plan. The emergency action plan (\u00a7 1910.38) covers those designated actions employers and employees are to take to ensure employee safety from fire and other emergencies. The plan specifies certain minimum elements which are to be addressed. These elements include the establishment of an employee alarm system, the development of evacuation procedures, and training employees in those actions they are to take during an emergency.\n \n The standard does not specify a particular method for notifying employees of an emergency. Public announcement systems, air horns, steam whistles, a standard fire alarm system, or other types of employee alarm may be used. However, employers should be aware that employees in a grain facility may have difficulty hearing an emergency alarm, or distinguishing an emergency alarm from other audible signals at the facility, or both. Therefore, it is important that the type of employee alarm used be distinguishable and distinct.\n \n The use of floor plans or workplace maps which clearly show the emergency escape routes should be included in the emergency action plan; color coding will aid employees in determining their route assignments. The employer should designate a safe area, outside the facility, where employees can congregate after evacuation, and implement procedures to account for all employees after emergency evacuation has been completed.\n \n It is also recommended that employers seek the assistance of the local fire department for the purpose of preplanning for emergencies. Preplanning is encouraged to facilitate coordination and cooperation between facility personnel and those who may be called upon for assistance during an emergency. It is important for emergency service units to be aware of the usual work locations of employees at the facility.\n \n 3. Training\n \n It is important that employees be trained in the recognition and prevention of hazards associated with grain facilities, especially those hazards associated with their own work tasks. Employees should understand the factors which are necessary to produce a fire or explosion, i.e., fuel (such as grain dust), oxygen, ignition source, and (in the case of explosions) confinement. Employees should be made aware that any efforts they make to keep these factors from occurring simultaneously will be an important step in reducing the potential for fires and explosions.\n \n The standard provides flexibility for the employer to design a training program which fulfills the needs of a facility. The type, amount, and frequency of training will need to reflect the tasks that employees are expected to perform. Although training is to be provided to employees at least annually, it is recommended that safety meetings or discussions and drills be conducted at more frequent intervals.\n \n The training program should include those topics applicable to the particular facility, as well as topics such as: Hot work procedures; lock-out/tag-out procedures; bin entry procedures; bin cleaning procedures; grain dust explosions; fire prevention; procedures for handling \u201chot grain\u201d; housekeeping procedures, including methods and frequency of dust removal; pesticide and fumigant usage; proper use and maintenance of personal protective equipment; and, preventive maintenance. The types of work clothing should also be considered in the program at least to caution against using polyester clothing that easily melts and increases the severity of burns, as compared to wool or fire retardant cotton.\n \n In implementing the training program, it is recommended that the employer utilize films, slide-tape presentations, pamphlets, and other information which can be obtained from such sources as the Grain Elevator and Processing Society, the Cooperative Extension Service of the U.S. Department of Agriculture, Kansas State University's Extension Grain Science and Industry, and other state agriculture schools, industry associations, union organizations, and insurance groups.\n \n 4. Hot Work Permit\n \n The implementation of a permit system for hot work is intended to assure that employers maintain control over operations involving hot work and to assure that employees are aware of and utilize appropriate safeguards when conducting these activities.\n \n Precautions for hot work operations are specified in 29 CFR 1910.252(a), and include such safeguards as relocating the hot work operation to a safe location if possible, relocating or covering combustible material in the vicinity, providing fire extinguishers, and provisions for establishing a fire watch. Permits are not required for hot work operations conducted in the presence of the employer or the employer's authorized representative who would otherwise issue the permit, or in an employer authorized welding shop or when work is conducted outside and away from the facility.\n \n It should be noted that the permit is not a record, but is an authorization of the employer certifying that certain safety precautions have been implemented prior to the beginning of work operations.\n \n 5. Entry Into Bins, Silos, And Tanks\n \n In order to assure that employers maintain control over employee entry into bins, silos, and tanks, OSHA is requiring that the employer issue a permit for entry into bins, silos, and tanks unless the employer (or the employer's representative who would otherwise authorize the permit) is present at the entry and during the entire operation.\n \n Employees should have a thorough understanding of the hazards associated with entry into bins, silos, and tanks. Employees are not to be permitted to enter these spaces from the bottom when grain or other agricultural products are hung up or sticking to the sides which might fall and injure or kill an employee. Employees should be made aware that the atmosphere in bins, silos, and tanks can be oxygen deficient or toxic. Employees should be trained in the proper methods of testing the atmosphere, as well as in the appropriate procedures to be taken if the atmosphere is found to be oxygen deficient or toxic. When a fumigant has been recently applied in these areas and entry must be made, aeration fans should be running continuously to assure a safe atmosphere for those inside. Periodic monitoring of toxic levels shuld be done by direct reading instruments to measure the levels, and, if there is an increase in these readings, appropriate actions should be promptly taken.\n \n Employees have been buried and suffocated in grain or other agricultural products because they sank into the material. Therefore, it is suggested that employees not be permitted to walk or stand on the grain or other grain product where the depth is greater than waist high. In this regard, employees must use a full body harness or boatswain's chair with a lifeline when entering from the top. A winch system with mechanical advantage (either powered or manual) would allow better control of the employee than just using a hand held hoist line, and such a system would allow the observer to remove the employee easily without having to enter the space.\n \n It is important that employees be trained in the proper selection and use of any personal protective equipment which is to be worn. Equally important is the training of employees in the planned emergency rescue procedures. Employers should carefully read \u00a7 1910.134(e)(3) and assure that their procedures follow these requirements. The employee acting as observer is to be equipped to provide assistance and is to know procedures for obtaining additional assistance. The observer should not enter a space until adequate assistance is available. It is recommended that an employee trained in CPR be readily available to provide assistance to those employees entering bins, silos, or tanks.\n \n 6. Contractors\n \n These provisions of the standard are intended to ensure that outside contractors are cognizant of the hazards associated with grain handling facilities, particularly in relation to the work they are to perform for the employer. Also, in the event of an emergency, contractors should be able to take appropriate action as a part of the overall facility emergency action plan. Contractors should also be aware of the employer's permit systems. Contractors should develop specified procedures for performing hot work and for entry into bins, silos, and tanks and these activities should be coordinated with the employer. Contractors are responsible for informing their own employees.\n \n This coordination will help to ensure that employers know what work is being performed at the facility by contractors; where it is being performed; and, that it is being performed in a manner that will not endanger employees.\n \n 7. Housekeeping.\n \n The housekeeping program is to be designed to keep dust accumulations and emissions under control inside grain facilities. The housekeeping program, which is to be written, is to specify the frequency and method(s) used to best reduce dust accumulations.\n \n Ship, barge, and rail loadout and receiving areas which are located outside the facility need not be addressed in the housekeeping program. Additionally, truck dumps which are open on two or more sides need not be addressed by the housekeeping program. Other truck dumps should be addressed in the housekeeping program to provide for regular cleaning during periods of receiving grain or agricultural products. The housekeeping program should provide coverage for all workspaces in the facility and include walls, beams, etc., especially in relation to the extent that dust could accumulate.\n \n Dust Accumulations\n \n Almost all facilities will require some level of manual housekeeping. Manual housekeeping methods, such as vacuuming or sweeping with soft bristle brooms, should be used which will minimize the possibility of layered dust being suspended in the air when it is being removed.\n \n The housekeeping program should include a contingency plan to respond to situations where dust accumulates rapidly due to a failure of a dust enclosure hood, an unexpected breakdown of the dust control system, a dust-tight connection inadvertently knocked open, etc.\n \n The housekeeping program should also specify the manner of handling spills. Grain spills are not considered to be dust accumulations.\n \n A fully enclosed horizontal belt conveying system where the return belt is inside the enclosure should have inspection access such as sliding panels or doors to permit checking of equipment, checking for dust accumulations and facilitate cleaning if needed.\n \n Dust Emissions\n \n Employers should analyze the entire stock handling system to determine the location of dust emissions and effective methods to control or to eliminate them. The employer should make sure that holes in spouting, casings of bucket elevators, pneumatic conveying pipes, screw augers, or drag conveyor casings, are patched or otherwise properly repaired to prevent leakage. Minimizing free falls of grain or grain products by using choke feeding techniques, and utilization of dust-tight enclosures at transfer points, can be effective in reducing dust emissions.\n \n Each housekeeping program should specify the schedules and control measures which will be used to control dust emitted from the stock handling system. The housekeeping program should address the schedules to be used for cleaning dust accumulations from motors, critical bearings and other potential ignition sources in the working areas. Also, the areas around bucket elevator legs, milling machinery and similar equipment should be given priority in the cleaning schedule. The method of disposal of the dust which is swept or vacuumed should also be planned.\n \n Dust may accumulate in somewhat inaccessible areas, such as those areas where ladders or scaffolds might be necessary to reach them. The employer may want to consider the use of compressed air and long lances to blow down these areas frequently. The employer may also want to consider the periodic use of water and hoselines to wash down these areas. If these methods are used, they are to be specified in the housekeeping program along with the appropriate safety precautions, including the use of personal protective equipment such as eyewear and dust respirators.\n \n Several methods have been effective in controlling dust emissions. A frequently used method of controlling dust emissions is a pneumatic dust collection system. However, the installation of a poorly designed pneumatic dust collection system has fostered a false sense of security and has often led to an inappropriate reduction in manual housekeeping. Therefore, it is imperative that the system be designed properly and installed by a competent contractor. Those employers who have a pneumatic dust control system that is not working according to expectations should request the engineering design firm, or the manufacturer of the filter and related equipment, to conduct an evaluation of the system to determine the corrections necessary for proper operation of the system. If the design firm or manufacturer of the equipment is not known, employers should contact their trade association for recommendations of competent designers of pneumatic dust control systems who could provide assistance.\n \n When installing a new or upgraded pneumatic control system, the employer should insist on an acceptance test period of 30 to 45 days of operation to ensure that the system is operating as intended and designed. The employer should also obtain maintenance, testing, and inspection information from the manufacturer to ensure that the system will continue to operate as designed.\n \n Aspiration of the leg, as part of a pneumatic dust collection system, is another effective method of controlling dust emissions. Aspiration of the leg consists of a flow of air across the entire boot, which entrains the liberated dust and carries it up the up-leg to take-off points. With proper aspiration, dust concentrations in the leg can be lowered below the lower explosive limit. Where a prototype leg installation has been instrumented and shown to be effective in keeping the dust level 25% below the lower explosive limit during normal operations for the various products handled, then other legs of similar size, capacity and products being handled which have the same design criteria for the air aspiration would be acceptable to OSHA, provided the prototype test report is available on site.\n \n Another method of controlling dust emissions is enclosing the conveying system, pressurizing the general work area, and providing a lower pressure inside the enclosed conveying system. Although this method is effective in controlling dust emissions from the conveying system, adequate access to the inside of the enclosure is necessary to facilitate frequent removal of dust accumulations. This is also necessary for those systems called \u201cself-cleaning.\u201d\n \n The use of edible oil sprayed on or into a moving stream of grain is another method which has been used to control dust emissions. Tests performed using this method have shown that the oil treatment can reduce dust emissions. Repeated handling of the grain may necessitate additional oil treatment to prevent liberation of dust. However, before using this method, operators of grain handling facilities should be aware that the Food and Drug Administration must approve the specific oil treatment used on products for food or feed.\n \n As a part of the housekeeping program, grain elevators are required to address accumulations of dust at priority areas using the action level. The standard specifies a maximum accumulation of \n 1/8  inch dust, measurable by a ruler or other measuring device, anywhere within a priority area as the upper limit at which time employers must initiate action to remove the accumulations using designated means or methods. Any accumulation in excess of this amount and where no action has been initiated to implement cleaning would constitute a violation of the standard, unless the employer can demonstrate equivalent protection. Employers should make every effort to minimize dust accumulations on exposed surfaces since dust is the fuel for a fire or explosion, and it is recognized that a \n 1/8  inch dust accumulation is more than enough to fuel such occurrences.\n \n 8. Filter Collectors\n \n Proper sizing of filter collectors for the pneumatic dust control system they serve is very important for the overall effectiveness of the system. The air to cloth ratio of the system should be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. If higher ratios are used, they can result in more maintenance on the filter, shorter bag or sock life, increased differential pressure resulting in higher energy costs, and an increase in operational problems.\n \n A photohelic gauge, magnehelic gauge, or manometer, may be used to indicate the pressure rise across the inlet and outlet of the filter. When the pressure exceeds the design value for the filter, the air volume will start to drop, and maintenance will be required. Any of these three monitoring devices is acceptable as meeting paragraph (l)(1) of the standard.\n \n The employer should establish a level or target reading on the instrument which is consistent with the manufacturer's recommendations that will indicate when the filter should be serviced. This target reading on the instrument and the accompanying procedures should be in the preventive maintenance program. These efforts would minimize the blinding of the filter and the subsequent failure of the pneumatic dust control system.\n \n There are other instruments that the employer may want to consider using to monitor the operation of the filter. One instrument is a zero motion switch for detecting a failure of motion by the rotary discharge valve on the hopper. If the rotary discharge valve stops turning, the dust released by the bag or sock will accumulate in the filter hopper until the filter becomes clogged. Another instrument is a level indicator which is installed in the hopper of the filter to detect the buildup of dust that would otherwise cause the filter hopper to be plugged. The installation of these instruments should be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.\n \n All of these monitoring devices and instruments are to be capable of being read at an accessible location and checked as frequently as specified in the preventive maintenance program.\n \n Filter collectors on portable vacuum cleaners, and those used where fans are not part of the system, are not covered by requirements of paragraph (l) of the standard.\n \n 9. Preventive Maintenance\n \n The control of dust and the control of ignition sources are the most effective means for reducing explosion hazards. Preventive maintenance is related to ignition sources in the same manner as housekeeping is related to dust control and should be treated as a major function in a facility. Equipment such as critical bearings, belts, buckets, pulleys, and milling machinery are potential ignition sources, and periodic inspection and lubrication of such equipment through a scheduled preventive maintenance program is an effective method for keeping equipment functioning properly and safely. The use of vibration detection methods, heat sensitive tape or other heat detection methods that can be seen by the inspector or maintenance person will allow for a quick, accurate, and consistent evaluation of bearings and will help in the implementation of the program.\n \n The standard does not require a specific frequency for preventive maintenance. The employer is permitted flexibility in determining the appropriate interval for maintenance provided that the effectiveness of the maintenance program can be demonstrated. Scheduling of preventive maintenance should be based on manufacturer's recommendations for effective operation, as well as from the employer's previous experience with the equipment. However, the employer's schedule for preventive maintenance should be frequent enough to allow for both prompt identification and correction of any problems concerning the failure or malfunction of the mechanical and safety control equipment associated with bucket elevators, dryers, filter collectors and magnets. The pressure-drop monitoring device for a filter collector, and the condition of the lagging on the head pulley, are examples of items that require regularly scheduled inspections. A system of identifying the date, the equipment inspected and the maintenance performed, if any, will assist employers in continually refining their preventive maintenance schedules and identifying equipment problem areas. Open work orders where repair work or replacement is to be done at a designated future date as scheduled, would be an indication of an effective preventive maintenance program.\n \n It is imperative that the prearranged schedule of maintenance be adhered to regardless of other facility constraints. The employer should give priority to the maintenance or repair work associated with safety control equipment, such as that on dryers, magnets, alarm and shut-down systems on bucket elevators, bearings on bucket elevators, and the filter collectors in the dust control system. Benefits of a strict preventive maintenance program can be a reduction of unplanned downtime, improved equipment performance, planned use of resources, more efficient operations, and, most importantly, safer operations.\n \n The standard also requires the employer to develop and implement procedures consisting of locking out and tagging equipment to prevent the inadvertent application of energy or motion to equipment being repaired, serviced, or adjusted, which could result in employee injury. All employees who have responsibility for repairing or servicing equipment, as well as those who operate the equipment, are to be familiar with the employer's lock and tag procedures. A lock is to be used as the positive means to prevent operation of the disconnected equipment. Tags are to be used to inform employees why equipment is locked out. Tags are to meet requirements in \u00a7 1910.145(f). Locks and tags may only be removed by employees that placed them, or by their supervisor, to ensure the safety of the operation.\n \n 10. Grain Stream Processing Equipment\n \n The standard requires an effective means of removing ferrous material from grain streams so that such material does not enter equipment such as hammer mills, grinders and pulverizers. Large foreign objects, such as stones, should have been removed at the receiving pit. Introduction of foreign objects and ferrous material into such equipment can produce sparks which can create an explosion hazard. Acceptable means for removal of ferrous materials include the use of permanent or electromagnets. Means used to separate foreign objects and ferrous material should be cleaned regularly and kept in good repair as part of the preventive maintenance program in order to maximize their effectiveness.\n \n 11. Emergency Escape\n \n The standard specifies that at least two means of escape must be provided from galleries (bin decks). Means of emergency escape may include any available means of egress (consisting of three components, exit access, exit, and exit discharge as defined in \u00a7 1910.35), the use of controlled descent devices with landing velocities not to exceed 15 ft/sec., or emergency escape ladders from galleries. Importantly, the means of emergency escape are to be addressed in the facility emergency action plan. Employees are to know the location of the nearest means of emergency escape and the action they must take during an emergency.\n \n 12. Dryers\n \n Liquefied petroleum gas fired dryers should have the vaporizers installed at least ten feet from the dryer. The gas piping system should be protected from mechanical damage. The employer should establish procedures for locating and repairing leaks when there is a strong odor of gas or other signs of a leak.\n \n 13. Inside Bucket Elevators\n \n Hazards associated with inside bucket elevator legs are the source of many grain elevator fires and explosions. Therefore, to mitigate these hazards, the standard requires the implementation of special safety precautions and procedures, as well as the installation of safety control devices. The standard provides for a phase-in period for many of the requirements to provide the employer time for planning the implementation of the requirements. Additionally, for elevators with a permanent storage capacity of less than one million bushels, daily visual inspection of belt alignment and bucket movement can be substituted for alignment monitoring devices and motion detection devices.\n \n The standard requires that belts (purchased after the effective date of the standard) have surface electrical resistance not to exceed 300 megohms. Test methods available regarding electrical resistance of belts are: The American Society for Testing and Materials D257-76, \u201cStandard Test Methods for D-C Resistance or Conductance of Insulating Materials\u201d; and, the International Standards Organization's #284, \u201cConveyor Belts-Electrical Conductivity-Specification and Method of Test.\u201d When an employer has a written certification from the manufacturer that a belt has been tested using one of the above test methods, and meets the 300 megohm criteria, the belt is acceptable as meeting this standard. When using conductive belts, the employer should make certain that the head pulley and shaft are grounded through the drive motor ground or by some other equally effective means. When V-type belts are used to transmit power to the head pulley assembly from the motor drive shaft, it will be necessary to provide electrical continuity from the head pulley assembly to ground, e.g., motor grounds.\n \n Employers should also consider purchasing new belts that are flame retardant or fire resistive. A flame resistance test for belts is contained in 30 CFR 18.65.\n\nExamples presented in this appendix may not be the only means of achieving the performance goals in the standard.\n\nThe provisions of this standard apply in addition to any other applicable requirements of this part 1910 (or part 1917 at marine terminals). The standard contains requirements for new and existing grain handling facilities. The standard does not apply to seed plants which handle and prepare seeds for planting of future crops, nor to on-farm storage or feed lots.\n\nThe standard requires the employer to develop and implement an emergency action plan. The emergency action plan (\u00a7 1910.38) covers those designated actions employers and employees are to take to ensure employee safety from fire and other emergencies. The plan specifies certain minimum elements which are to be addressed. These elements include the establishment of an employee alarm system, the development of evacuation procedures, and training employees in those actions they are to take during an emergency.\n\nThe standard does not specify a particular method for notifying employees of an emergency. Public announcement systems, air horns, steam whistles, a standard fire alarm system, or other types of employee alarm may be used. However, employers should be aware that employees in a grain facility may have difficulty hearing an emergency alarm, or distinguishing an emergency alarm from other audible signals at the facility, or both. Therefore, it is important that the type of employee alarm used be distinguishable and distinct.\n\nThe use of floor plans or workplace maps which clearly show the emergency escape routes should be included in the emergency action plan; color coding will aid employees in determining their route assignments. The employer should designate a safe area, outside the facility, where employees can congregate after evacuation, and implement procedures to account for all employees after emergency evacuation has been completed.\n\nIt is also recommended that employers seek the assistance of the local fire department for the purpose of preplanning for emergencies. Preplanning is encouraged to facilitate coordination and cooperation between facility personnel and those who may be called upon for assistance during an emergency. It is important for emergency service units to be aware of the usual work locations of employees at the facility.\n\nIt is important that employees be trained in the recognition and prevention of hazards associated with grain facilities, especially those hazards associated with their own work tasks. Employees should understand the factors which are necessary to produce a fire or explosion, i.e., fuel (such as grain dust), oxygen, ignition source, and (in the case of explosions) confinement. Employees should be made aware that any efforts they make to keep these factors from occurring simultaneously will be an important step in reducing the potential for fires and explosions.\n\nThe standard provides flexibility for the employer to design a training program which fulfills the needs of a facility. The type, amount, and frequency of training will need to reflect the tasks that employees are expected to perform. Although training is to be provided to employees at least annually, it is recommended that safety meetings or discussions and drills be conducted at more frequent intervals.\n\nThe training program should include those topics applicable to the particular facility, as well as topics such as: Hot work procedures; lock-out/tag-out procedures; bin entry procedures; bin cleaning procedures; grain dust explosions; fire prevention; procedures for handling \u201chot grain\u201d; housekeeping procedures, including methods and frequency of dust removal; pesticide and fumigant usage; proper use and maintenance of personal protective equipment; and, preventive maintenance. The types of work clothing should also be considered in the program at least to caution against using polyester clothing that easily melts and increases the severity of burns, as compared to wool or fire retardant cotton.\n\nIn implementing the training program, it is recommended that the employer utilize films, slide-tape presentations, pamphlets, and other information which can be obtained from such sources as the Grain Elevator and Processing Society, the Cooperative Extension Service of the U.S. Department of Agriculture, Kansas State University's Extension Grain Science and Industry, and other state agriculture schools, industry associations, union organizations, and insurance groups.\n\nThe implementation of a permit system for hot work is intended to assure that employers maintain control over operations involving hot work and to assure that employees are aware of and utilize appropriate safeguards when conducting these activities.\n\nPrecautions for hot work operations are specified in 29 CFR 1910.252(a), and include such safeguards as relocating the hot work operation to a safe location if possible, relocating or covering combustible material in the vicinity, providing fire extinguishers, and provisions for establishing a fire watch. Permits are not required for hot work operations conducted in the presence of the employer or the employer's authorized representative who would otherwise issue the permit, or in an employer authorized welding shop or when work is conducted outside and away from the facility.\n\nIt should be noted that the permit is not a record, but is an authorization of the employer certifying that certain safety precautions have been implemented prior to the beginning of work operations.\n\nIn order to assure that employers maintain control over employee entry into bins, silos, and tanks, OSHA is requiring that the employer issue a permit for entry into bins, silos, and tanks unless the employer (or the employer's representative who would otherwise authorize the permit) is present at the entry and during the entire operation.\n\nEmployees should have a thorough understanding of the hazards associated with entry into bins, silos, and tanks. Employees are not to be permitted to enter these spaces from the bottom when grain or other agricultural products are hung up or sticking to the sides which might fall and injure or kill an employee. Employees should be made aware that the atmosphere in bins, silos, and tanks can be oxygen deficient or toxic. Employees should be trained in the proper methods of testing the atmosphere, as well as in the appropriate procedures to be taken if the atmosphere is found to be oxygen deficient or toxic. When a fumigant has been recently applied in these areas and entry must be made, aeration fans should be running continuously to assure a safe atmosphere for those inside. Periodic monitoring of toxic levels shuld be done by direct reading instruments to measure the levels, and, if there is an increase in these readings, appropriate actions should be promptly taken.\n\nEmployees have been buried and suffocated in grain or other agricultural products because they sank into the material. Therefore, it is suggested that employees not be permitted to walk or stand on the grain or other grain product where the depth is greater than waist high. In this regard, employees must use a full body harness or boatswain's chair with a lifeline when entering from the top. A winch system with mechanical advantage (either powered or manual) would allow better control of the employee than just using a hand held hoist line, and such a system would allow the observer to remove the employee easily without having to enter the space.\n\nIt is important that employees be trained in the proper selection and use of any personal protective equipment which is to be worn. Equally important is the training of employees in the planned emergency rescue procedures. Employers should carefully read \u00a7 1910.134(e)(3) and assure that their procedures follow these requirements. The employee acting as observer is to be equipped to provide assistance and is to know procedures for obtaining additional assistance. The observer should not enter a space until adequate assistance is available. It is recommended that an employee trained in CPR be readily available to provide assistance to those employees entering bins, silos, or tanks.\n\nThese provisions of the standard are intended to ensure that outside contractors are cognizant of the hazards associated with grain handling facilities, particularly in relation to the work they are to perform for the employer. Also, in the event of an emergency, contractors should be able to take appropriate action as a part of the overall facility emergency action plan. Contractors should also be aware of the employer's permit systems. Contractors should develop specified procedures for performing hot work and for entry into bins, silos, and tanks and these activities should be coordinated with the employer. Contractors are responsible for informing their own employees.\n\nThis coordination will help to ensure that employers know what work is being performed at the facility by contractors; where it is being performed; and, that it is being performed in a manner that will not endanger employees.\n\nThe housekeeping program is to be designed to keep dust accumulations and emissions under control inside grain facilities. The housekeeping program, which is to be written, is to specify the frequency and method(s) used to best reduce dust accumulations.\n\nShip, barge, and rail loadout and receiving areas which are located outside the facility need not be addressed in the housekeeping program. Additionally, truck dumps which are open on two or more sides need not be addressed by the housekeeping program. Other truck dumps should be addressed in the housekeeping program to provide for regular cleaning during periods of receiving grain or agricultural products. The housekeeping program should provide coverage for all workspaces in the facility and include walls, beams, etc., especially in relation to the extent that dust could accumulate.\n\nAlmost all facilities will require some level of manual housekeeping. Manual housekeeping methods, such as vacuuming or sweeping with soft bristle brooms, should be used which will minimize the possibility of layered dust being suspended in the air when it is being removed.\n\nThe housekeeping program should include a contingency plan to respond to situations where dust accumulates rapidly due to a failure of a dust enclosure hood, an unexpected breakdown of the dust control system, a dust-tight connection inadvertently knocked open, etc.\n\nThe housekeeping program should also specify the manner of handling spills. Grain spills are not considered to be dust accumulations.\n\nA fully enclosed horizontal belt conveying system where the return belt is inside the enclosure should have inspection access such as sliding panels or doors to permit checking of equipment, checking for dust accumulations and facilitate cleaning if needed.\n\nEmployers should analyze the entire stock handling system to determine the location of dust emissions and effective methods to control or to eliminate them. The employer should make sure that holes in spouting, casings of bucket elevators, pneumatic conveying pipes, screw augers, or drag conveyor casings, are patched or otherwise properly repaired to prevent leakage. Minimizing free falls of grain or grain products by using choke feeding techniques, and utilization of dust-tight enclosures at transfer points, can be effective in reducing dust emissions.\n\nEach housekeeping program should specify the schedules and control measures which will be used to control dust emitted from the stock handling system. The housekeeping program should address the schedules to be used for cleaning dust accumulations from motors, critical bearings and other potential ignition sources in the working areas. Also, the areas around bucket elevator legs, milling machinery and similar equipment should be given priority in the cleaning schedule. The method of disposal of the dust which is swept or vacuumed should also be planned.\n\nDust may accumulate in somewhat inaccessible areas, such as those areas where ladders or scaffolds might be necessary to reach them. The employer may want to consider the use of compressed air and long lances to blow down these areas frequently. The employer may also want to consider the periodic use of water and hoselines to wash down these areas. If these methods are used, they are to be specified in the housekeeping program along with the appropriate safety precautions, including the use of personal protective equipment such as eyewear and dust respirators.\n\nSeveral methods have been effective in controlling dust emissions. A frequently used method of controlling dust emissions is a pneumatic dust collection system. However, the installation of a poorly designed pneumatic dust collection system has fostered a false sense of security and has often led to an inappropriate reduction in manual housekeeping. Therefore, it is imperative that the system be designed properly and installed by a competent contractor. Those employers who have a pneumatic dust control system that is not working according to expectations should request the engineering design firm, or the manufacturer of the filter and related equipment, to conduct an evaluation of the system to determine the corrections necessary for proper operation of the system. If the design firm or manufacturer of the equipment is not known, employers should contact their trade association for recommendations of competent designers of pneumatic dust control systems who could provide assistance.\n\nWhen installing a new or upgraded pneumatic control system, the employer should insist on an acceptance test period of 30 to 45 days of operation to ensure that the system is operating as intended and designed. The employer should also obtain maintenance, testing, and inspection information from the manufacturer to ensure that the system will continue to operate as designed.\n\nAspiration of the leg, as part of a pneumatic dust collection system, is another effective method of controlling dust emissions. Aspiration of the leg consists of a flow of air across the entire boot, which entrains the liberated dust and carries it up the up-leg to take-off points. With proper aspiration, dust concentrations in the leg can be lowered below the lower explosive limit. Where a prototype leg installation has been instrumented and shown to be effective in keeping the dust level 25% below the lower explosive limit during normal operations for the various products handled, then other legs of similar size, capacity and products being handled which have the same design criteria for the air aspiration would be acceptable to OSHA, provided the prototype test report is available on site.\n\nAnother method of controlling dust emissions is enclosing the conveying system, pressurizing the general work area, and providing a lower pressure inside the enclosed conveying system. Although this method is effective in controlling dust emissions from the conveying system, adequate access to the inside of the enclosure is necessary to facilitate frequent removal of dust accumulations. This is also necessary for those systems called \u201cself-cleaning.\u201d\n\nThe use of edible oil sprayed on or into a moving stream of grain is another method which has been used to control dust emissions. Tests performed using this method have shown that the oil treatment can reduce dust emissions. Repeated handling of the grain may necessitate additional oil treatment to prevent liberation of dust. However, before using this method, operators of grain handling facilities should be aware that the Food and Drug Administration must approve the specific oil treatment used on products for food or feed.\n\nAs a part of the housekeeping program, grain elevators are required to address accumulations of dust at priority areas using the action level. The standard specifies a maximum accumulation of \n 1/8  inch dust, measurable by a ruler or other measuring device, anywhere within a priority area as the upper limit at which time employers must initiate action to remove the accumulations using designated means or methods. Any accumulation in excess of this amount and where no action has been initiated to implement cleaning would constitute a violation of the standard, unless the employer can demonstrate equivalent protection. Employers should make every effort to minimize dust accumulations on exposed surfaces since dust is the fuel for a fire or explosion, and it is recognized that a \n 1/8  inch dust accumulation is more than enough to fuel such occurrences.\n\nProper sizing of filter collectors for the pneumatic dust control system they serve is very important for the overall effectiveness of the system. The air to cloth ratio of the system should be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. If higher ratios are used, they can result in more maintenance on the filter, shorter bag or sock life, increased differential pressure resulting in higher energy costs, and an increase in operational problems.\n\nA photohelic gauge, magnehelic gauge, or manometer, may be used to indicate the pressure rise across the inlet and outlet of the filter. When the pressure exceeds the design value for the filter, the air volume will start to drop, and maintenance will be required. Any of these three monitoring devices is acceptable as meeting paragraph (l)(1) of the standard.\n\nThe employer should establish a level or target reading on the instrument which is consistent with the manufacturer's recommendations that will indicate when the filter should be serviced. This target reading on the instrument and the accompanying procedures should be in the preventive maintenance program. These efforts would minimize the blinding of the filter and the subsequent failure of the pneumatic dust control system.\n\nThere are other instruments that the employer may want to consider using to monitor the operation of the filter. One instrument is a zero motion switch for detecting a failure of motion by the rotary discharge valve on the hopper. If the rotary discharge valve stops turning, the dust released by the bag or sock will accumulate in the filter hopper until the filter becomes clogged. Another instrument is a level indicator which is installed in the hopper of the filter to detect the buildup of dust that would otherwise cause the filter hopper to be plugged. The installation of these instruments should be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.\n\nAll of these monitoring devices and instruments are to be capable of being read at an accessible location and checked as frequently as specified in the preventive maintenance program.\n\nFilter collectors on portable vacuum cleaners, and those used where fans are not part of the system, are not covered by requirements of paragraph (l) of the standard.\n\nThe control of dust and the control of ignition sources are the most effective means for reducing explosion hazards. Preventive maintenance is related to ignition sources in the same manner as housekeeping is related to dust control and should be treated as a major function in a facility. Equipment such as critical bearings, belts, buckets, pulleys, and milling machinery are potential ignition sources, and periodic inspection and lubrication of such equipment through a scheduled preventive maintenance program is an effective method for keeping equipment functioning properly and safely. The use of vibration detection methods, heat sensitive tape or other heat detection methods that can be seen by the inspector or maintenance person will allow for a quick, accurate, and consistent evaluation of bearings and will help in the implementation of the program.\n\nThe standard does not require a specific frequency for preventive maintenance. The employer is permitted flexibility in determining the appropriate interval for maintenance provided that the effectiveness of the maintenance program can be demonstrated. Scheduling of preventive maintenance should be based on manufacturer's recommendations for effective operation, as well as from the employer's previous experience with the equipment. However, the employer's schedule for preventive maintenance should be frequent enough to allow for both prompt identification and correction of any problems concerning the failure or malfunction of the mechanical and safety control equipment associated with bucket elevators, dryers, filter collectors and magnets. The pressure-drop monitoring device for a filter collector, and the condition of the lagging on the head pulley, are examples of items that require regularly scheduled inspections. A system of identifying the date, the equipment inspected and the maintenance performed, if any, will assist employers in continually refining their preventive maintenance schedules and identifying equipment problem areas. Open work orders where repair work or replacement is to be done at a designated future date as scheduled, would be an indication of an effective preventive maintenance program.\n\nIt is imperative that the prearranged schedule of maintenance be adhered to regardless of other facility constraints. The employer should give priority to the maintenance or repair work associated with safety control equipment, such as that on dryers, magnets, alarm and shut-down systems on bucket elevators, bearings on bucket elevators, and the filter collectors in the dust control system. Benefits of a strict preventive maintenance program can be a reduction of unplanned downtime, improved equipment performance, planned use of resources, more efficient operations, and, most importantly, safer operations.\n\nThe standard also requires the employer to develop and implement procedures consisting of locking out and tagging equipment to prevent the inadvertent application of energy or motion to equipment being repaired, serviced, or adjusted, which could result in employee injury. All employees who have responsibility for repairing or servicing equipment, as well as those who operate the equipment, are to be familiar with the employer's lock and tag procedures. A lock is to be used as the positive means to prevent operation of the disconnected equipment. Tags are to be used to inform employees why equipment is locked out. Tags are to meet requirements in \u00a7 1910.145(f). Locks and tags may only be removed by employees that placed them, or by their supervisor, to ensure the safety of the operation.\n\nThe standard requires an effective means of removing ferrous material from grain streams so that such material does not enter equipment such as hammer mills, grinders and pulverizers. Large foreign objects, such as stones, should have been removed at the receiving pit. Introduction of foreign objects and ferrous material into such equipment can produce sparks which can create an explosion hazard. Acceptable means for removal of ferrous materials include the use of permanent or electromagnets. Means used to separate foreign objects and ferrous material should be cleaned regularly and kept in good repair as part of the preventive maintenance program in order to maximize their effectiveness.\n\nThe standard specifies that at least two means of escape must be provided from galleries (bin decks). Means of emergency escape may include any available means of egress (consisting of three components, exit access, exit, and exit discharge as defined in \u00a7 1910.35), the use of controlled descent devices with landing velocities not to exceed 15 ft/sec., or emergency escape ladders from galleries. Importantly, the means of emergency escape are to be addressed in the facility emergency action plan. Employees are to know the location of the nearest means of emergency escape and the action they must take during an emergency.\n\nLiquefied petroleum gas fired dryers should have the vaporizers installed at least ten feet from the dryer. The gas piping system should be protected from mechanical damage. The employer should establish procedures for locating and repairing leaks when there is a strong odor of gas or other signs of a leak.\n\nHazards associated with inside bucket elevator legs are the source of many grain elevator fires and explosions. Therefore, to mitigate these hazards, the standard requires the implementation of special safety precautions and procedures, as well as the installation of safety control devices. The standard provides for a phase-in period for many of the requirements to provide the employer time for planning the implementation of the requirements. Additionally, for elevators with a permanent storage capacity of less than one million bushels, daily visual inspection of belt alignment and bucket movement can be substituted for alignment monitoring devices and motion detection devices.\n\nThe standard requires that belts (purchased after the effective date of the standard) have surface electrical resistance not to exceed 300 megohms. Test methods available regarding electrical resistance of belts are: The American Society for Testing and Materials D257-76, \u201cStandard Test Methods for D-C Resistance or Conductance of Insulating Materials\u201d; and, the International Standards Organization's #284, \u201cConveyor Belts-Electrical Conductivity-Specification and Method of Test.\u201d When an employer has a written certification from the manufacturer that a belt has been tested using one of the above test methods, and meets the 300 megohm criteria, the belt is acceptable as meeting this standard. When using conductive belts, the employer should make certain that the head pulley and shaft are grounded through the drive motor ground or by some other equally effective means. When V-type belts are used to transmit power to the head pulley assembly from the motor drive shaft, it will be necessary to provide electrical continuity from the head pulley assembly to ground, e.g., motor grounds.\n\nEmployers should also consider purchasing new belts that are flame retardant or fire resistive. A flame resistance test for belts is contained in 30 CFR 18.65.\n\nAppendix B to \u00a7 1910.272 Grain Handling Facilities\n \n National Consensus Standards\n \n The following table contains a cross-reference listing of current national consensus standards which provide information that may be of assistance to grain handling operations. Employers who comply with provisions in these national consensus standards that provide equal or greater protection than those in \u00a7 1910.272 will be considered in compliance with the corresponding requirements in \u00a7 1910.272.\n \n Subject\n National consensus standards\n Grain elevators and facilities handling bulk raw agricultural commodities ANSI/NFPA 61B\n Feed mills ANSI/NFPA 61C\n Facilities handling agricultural commodities for human consumption ANSI/NFPA 61D\n Pneumatic conveying systems for agricultural commodities ANSI/NFPA 66\n Guide for explosion venting ANSI/NFPA 68\n Explosion prevention systems ANSI/NFPA 69\n Dust removal and exhaust systems ANSI/NFPA 91\n\nThe following table contains a cross-reference listing of current national consensus standards which provide information that may be of assistance to grain handling operations. Employers who comply with provisions in these national consensus standards that provide equal or greater protection than those in \u00a7 1910.272 will be considered in compliance with the corresponding requirements in \u00a7 1910.272.\n\nAppendix C to \u00a7 1910.272 Grain handling facilities\n \n References for Further Information\n \n The following references provide information which can be helpful in understanding the requirements contained in various provisions of the standard, as well as provide other helpful information.\n \n 1.  Accident Prevention Manual for Industrial Operations;  National Safety Council, 425 North Michigan Avenue, Chicago, Illinois 60611.\n \n 2.  Practical Guide to Elevator Design;  National Grain and Feed Association, P.O. Box 28328, Washington, DC 20005.\n \n 3.  Dust Control for Grain Elevators;  National Grain and Feed Association, P.O. Box 28328, Washington, DC 20005.\n \n 4.  Prevention of Grain Elevator and Mill Explosions;  National Academy of Sciences, Washington, DC. (Available from National Technical Information Service, Springfield, Virginia 22151.)\n \n 5.  Standard for the Prevention of Fires and Explosions in Grain Elevators and Facilities Handling Bulk Raw Agricultural Commodities,  NFPA 61B; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, Massachusetts 02269.\n \n 6.  Standard for the Prevention of Fire and Dust Explosions in Feed Mills,  NFPA 61C; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, Massachusetts 02269.\n \n 7.  Standard for the Prevention of Fire and Dust Explosions in the Milling of Agricultural Commodities for Human Consumption,  NFPA 61D; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, Massachusetts 02269.\n \n 8.  Standard for Pneumatic Conveying Systems for Handling Feed, Flour, Grain and Other Agricultural Dusts,  NFPA 66; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, Massachusetts 02269.\n \n 9.  Guide for Explosion Venting,  NFPA 68; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, Massachusetts 02269.\n \n 10.  Standard on Explosion Prevention Systems,  NFPA 69; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, Massachusetts 02269.\n \n 11.  Safety-Operations Plans;  U.S. Department of Agriculture, Washington, DC 20250.\n \n 12.  Inplant Fire Prevention Control Programs;  Mill Mutual Fire Prevention Mutual Fire Prevention Bureau, 1 Pierce Place, Suite 1260 West, Itasca, Illinois 60143-1269.\n \n 13.  Guidelines for Terminal Elevators;  Mill Mutual Fire Prevention Bureau, 1 Pierce Place, Suite 1260 West, Itasca, Illinois 60143-1269.\n \n 14.  Standards for Preventing the Horizontal and Vertical Spread of Fires in Grain Handling Properties;  Mill Mutual Fire Mutual Fire Prevention Bureau, 1 Pierce Place, Suite 1260 West, Itasca, Illinois 60143-1269.\n \n 15.  Belt Conveyors for Bulk Materials,  Part I and Part II, Data Sheet 570, Revision A; National Safety Council, 425 North Michigan Avenue, Chicago, Illinois 60611.\n \n 16.  Suggestions for Precautions and Safety Practices in Welding and Cutting;  Mill Mutual Fire Prevention Bureau, 1 Pierce Place, Suite 1260 West, Itasca, Illinois 60143-1269.\n \n 17.  Food Bins and Tanks,  Data Sheet 524; National Safety Council, 425 North Michigan Avenue, Chicago, Illinois 60611.\n \n 18.  Pneumatic Dust Control in Grain Elevators;  National Academy of Sciences, Washington, DC. (Available from National Technical Information Service, Springfield, Virginia 22151.)\n \n 19.  Dust Control Analysis and Layout Procedures for Grain Storage and Processing Plants ; Mill Mutual Fire Prevention Bureau, 1 Pierce Place, Suite 1260 West, Itasca, Illinois 60143-1269.\n \n 20.  Standard for the Installation of Blower and Exhaust Systems for Dust, Stock and Vapor Removal,  NFPA 91; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, Massachusetts 02269.\n \n 21.  Standards for the Installation of Direct Heat Grain Driers in Grain and Milling Properties;  Mill Mutual Fire Prevention Bureau, 1 Pierce Place, Suite 1260 West, Itasca, Illinois 60143-1269.\n \n 22.  Guidelines for Lubrication and Bearing Maintenance;  Mill Mutual Fire Prevention Bureau, 1 Pierce Place, Suite 1260 West, Itasca, Illinois 60143-1269.\n \n 23.  Organized Maintenance in Grain and Milling Properties;  Mill Mutual Fire Prevention Bureau, 1 Pierce Place, Suite 1260 West, Itasca, Illinois 60143-1269.\n \n 24.  Safe and Efficient Elevator Legs for Grain and Milling Properties;  Mill Mutual Fire Prevention Bureau, 1 Pierce Place, Suite 1260 West, Itasca, Illinois 60143-1269.\n \n 25.  Explosion Venting and Supression of Bucket Elevators;  National Grain and Feed Association, P.O. Box 28328, Washington, DC 20005.\n \n 26.  Lightning Protection Code,  NFPA 78; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, Massachusetts 02269.\n \n 27.  Occupational Safety in Grain Elevators,  DHHS (NIOSH) Publication No. 83-126); National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, Morgantown, West Virginia 26505.\n \n 28.  Retrofitting and Constructing Grain Elevators;  National Grain and Feed Association, P.O. Box 28328, Washington, DC 20005.\n \n 29.  Grain Industry Safety and Health Center\u2014Training Series  (Preventing grain dust explosions, operations maintenance safety, transportation safety, occupational safety and health); Grain Elevator and Processing Society, P.O. Box 15026, Commerce Station, Minneapolis, Minnesota 55415-0026.\n \n 30.  Suggestions for Organized Maintenance;  The Mill Mutuals Loss Control Department, 1 Pierce Place, Suite 1260 West, Itasca, Illinois 60143-1269.\n \n 31.  Safety\u2014The First Step to Success;  The Mill Mutual Loss Control Department, 1 Pierce Place, Suite 1260 West, Itasca, Illinois 60143-1269.\n \n 32.  Emergency Plan Notebook;  Schoeff, Robert W. and James L. Balding, Kansas State University, Cooperative Extension Service, Extension Grain Science and Industry, Shellenberger Hall, Manhattan, Kansas 66506.\n\nThe following references provide information which can be helpful in understanding the requirements contained in various provisions of the standard, as well as provide other helpful information.\n\n1.  Accident Prevention Manual for Industrial Operations;  National Safety Council, 425 North Michigan Avenue, Chicago, Illinois 60611.\n\n2.  Practical Guide to Elevator Design;  National Grain and Feed Association, P.O. Box 28328, Washington, DC 20005.\n\n3.  Dust Control for Grain Elevators;  National Grain and Feed Association, P.O. Box 28328, Washington, DC 20005.\n\n4.  Prevention of Grain Elevator and Mill Explosions;  National Academy of Sciences, Washington, DC. (Available from National Technical Information Service, Springfield, Virginia 22151.)\n\n5.  Standard for the Prevention of Fires and Explosions in Grain Elevators and Facilities Handling Bulk Raw Agricultural Commodities,  NFPA 61B; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, Massachusetts 02269.\n\n6.  Standard for the Prevention of Fire and Dust Explosions in Feed Mills,  NFPA 61C; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, Massachusetts 02269.\n\n7.  Standard for the Prevention of Fire and Dust Explosions in the Milling of Agricultural Commodities for Human Consumption,  NFPA 61D; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, Massachusetts 02269.\n\n8.  Standard for Pneumatic Conveying Systems for Handling Feed, Flour, Grain and Other Agricultural Dusts,  NFPA 66; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, Massachusetts 02269.\n\n9.  Guide for Explosion Venting,  NFPA 68; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, Massachusetts 02269.\n\n10.  Standard on Explosion Prevention Systems,  NFPA 69; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, Massachusetts 02269.\n\n11.  Safety-Operations Plans;  U.S. Department of Agriculture, Washington, DC 20250.\n\n12.  Inplant Fire Prevention Control Programs;  Mill Mutual Fire Prevention Mutual Fire Prevention Bureau, 1 Pierce Place, Suite 1260 West, Itasca, Illinois 60143-1269.\n\n13.  Guidelines for Terminal Elevators;  Mill Mutual Fire Prevention Bureau, 1 Pierce Place, Suite 1260 West, Itasca, Illinois 60143-1269.\n\n14.  Standards for Preventing the Horizontal and Vertical Spread of Fires in Grain Handling Properties;  Mill Mutual Fire Mutual Fire Prevention Bureau, 1 Pierce Place, Suite 1260 West, Itasca, Illinois 60143-1269.\n\n15.  Belt Conveyors for Bulk Materials,  Part I and Part II, Data Sheet 570, Revision A; National Safety Council, 425 North Michigan Avenue, Chicago, Illinois 60611.\n\n16.  Suggestions for Precautions and Safety Practices in Welding and Cutting;  Mill Mutual Fire Prevention Bureau, 1 Pierce Place, Suite 1260 West, Itasca, Illinois 60143-1269.\n\n17.  Food Bins and Tanks,  Data Sheet 524; National Safety Council, 425 North Michigan Avenue, Chicago, Illinois 60611.\n\n18.  Pneumatic Dust Control in Grain Elevators;  National Academy of Sciences, Washington, DC. (Available from National Technical Information Service, Springfield, Virginia 22151.)\n\n19.  Dust Control Analysis and Layout Procedures for Grain Storage and Processing Plants ; Mill Mutual Fire Prevention Bureau, 1 Pierce Place, Suite 1260 West, Itasca, Illinois 60143-1269.\n\n20.  Standard for the Installation of Blower and Exhaust Systems for Dust, Stock and Vapor Removal,  NFPA 91; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, Massachusetts 02269.\n\n21.  Standards for the Installation of Direct Heat Grain Driers in Grain and Milling Properties;  Mill Mutual Fire Prevention Bureau, 1 Pierce Place, Suite 1260 West, Itasca, Illinois 60143-1269.\n\n22.  Guidelines for Lubrication and Bearing Maintenance;  Mill Mutual Fire Prevention Bureau, 1 Pierce Place, Suite 1260 West, Itasca, Illinois 60143-1269.\n\n23.  Organized Maintenance in Grain and Milling Properties;  Mill Mutual Fire Prevention Bureau, 1 Pierce Place, Suite 1260 West, Itasca, Illinois 60143-1269.\n\n24.  Safe and Efficient Elevator Legs for Grain and Milling Properties;  Mill Mutual Fire Prevention Bureau, 1 Pierce Place, Suite 1260 West, Itasca, Illinois 60143-1269.\n\n25.  Explosion Venting and Supression of Bucket Elevators;  National Grain and Feed Association, P.O. Box 28328, Washington, DC 20005.\n\n26.  Lightning Protection Code,  NFPA 78; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, Massachusetts 02269.\n\n27.  Occupational Safety in Grain Elevators,  DHHS (NIOSH) Publication No. 83-126); National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, Morgantown, West Virginia 26505.\n\n28.  Retrofitting and Constructing Grain Elevators;  National Grain and Feed Association, P.O. Box 28328, Washington, DC 20005.\n\n29.  Grain Industry Safety and Health Center\u2014Training Series  (Preventing grain dust explosions, operations maintenance safety, transportation safety, occupational safety and health); Grain Elevator and Processing Society, P.O. Box 15026, Commerce Station, Minneapolis, Minnesota 55415-0026.\n\n30.  Suggestions for Organized Maintenance;  The Mill Mutuals Loss Control Department, 1 Pierce Place, Suite 1260 West, Itasca, Illinois 60143-1269.\n\n31.  Safety\u2014The First Step to Success;  The Mill Mutual Loss Control Department, 1 Pierce Place, Suite 1260 West, Itasca, Illinois 60143-1269.\n\n32.  Emergency Plan Notebook;  Schoeff, Robert W. and James L. Balding, Kansas State University, Cooperative Extension Service, Extension Grain Science and Industry, Shellenberger Hall, Manhattan, Kansas 66506."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.19.37.1", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "S", "Subpart S\u2014Electrical", "", "\u00a7 1910.301 Introduction.", "OSHA", "", "", "[46 FR 4056, Jan. 16, 1981; 46 FR 40185, Aug. 7, 1981]", "This subpart addresses electrical safety requirements that are necessary for the practical safeguarding of employees in their workplaces and is divided into four major divisions as follows:\n\n(a)  Design safety standards for electrical systems.  These regulations are contained in \u00a7\u00a7 1910.302 through 1910.330. Sections 1910.302 through 1910.308 contain design safety standards for electric utilization systems. Included in this category are all electric equipment and installations used to provide electric power and light for employee workplaces. Sections 1910.309 through 1910.330 are reserved for possible future design safety standards for other electrical systems.\n\n(b)  Safety-related work practices.  These regulations will be contained in \u00a7\u00a7 1910.331 through 1910.360.\n\n(c)  Safety-related maintenance requirements.  These regulations will be contained in \u00a7\u00a7 1910.361 through 1910.380.\n\n(d)  Safety requirements for special equipment.  These regulations will be contained in \u00a7\u00a7 1910.381 through 1910.398.\n\n(e)  Definitions.  Definitions applicable to each division are contained in \u00a7 1910.399."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.19.38.2", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "S", "Subpart S\u2014Electrical", "", "\u00a7 1910.302 Electric utilization systems.", "OSHA", "", "", "", "Sections 1910.302 through 1910.308 contain design safety standards for electric utilization systems.\n\n(a)  Scope \u2014(1)  Covered.  The provisions of \u00a7\u00a7 1910.302 through 1910.308 cover electrical installations and utilization equipment installed or used within or on buildings, structures, and other premises, including:\n\n(i) Yards;\n\n(ii) Carnivals;\n\n(iii) Parking and other lots;\n\n(iv) Mobile homes;\n\n(v) Recreational vehicles;\n\n(vi) Industrial substations;\n\n(vii) Conductors that connect the installations to a supply of electricity; and\n\n(viii) Other outside conductors on the premises.\n\n(2)  Not covered.  The provisions of \u00a7\u00a7 1910.302 through 1910.308 do not cover:\n\n(i) Installations in ships, watercraft, railway rolling stock, aircraft, or automotive vehicles other than mobile homes and recreational vehicles;\n\n(ii) Installations underground in mines;\n\n(iii) Installations of railways for generation, transformation, transmission, or distribution of power used exclusively for operation of rolling stock or installations used exclusively for signaling and communication purposes;\n\n(iv) Installations of communication equipment under the exclusive control of communication utilities, located outdoors or in building spaces used exclusively for such installations; or\n\n(v) Installations under the exclusive control of electric utilities for the purpose of communication or metering; or for the generation, control, transformation, transmission, and distribution of electric energy located in buildings used exclusively by utilities for such purposes or located outdoors on property owned or leased by the utility or on public highways, streets, roads, etc., or outdoors by established rights on private property.\n\n(b)  Extent of application \u2014(1)  Requirements applicable to all installations.  The following requirements apply to all electrical installations and utilization equipment, regardless of when they were designed or installed:\n\n\u00a7 1910.303(b)\u2014Examination, installation, and use of equipment\n\n\u00a7 1910.303(c)(3)\u2014Electrical connections\u2014Splices\n\n\u00a7 1910.303(d)\u2014Arcing parts\n\n\u00a7 1910.303(e)\u2014Marking\n\n\u00a7 1910.303(f), except (f)(4) and (f)(5)\u2014Disconnecting means and circuits\n\n\u00a7 1910.303(g)(2)\u2014600 volts or less\u2014Guarding of live parts\n\n\u00a7 1910.304(a)(3)\u2014Use of grounding terminals and devices\n\n\u00a7 1910.304(f)(1)(i), (f)(1)(iv), and (f)(1)(v)\u2014Overcurrent protection\u2014600 volts, nominal, or less\n\n\u00a7 1910.304(g)(1)(ii), (g)(1)(iii), (g)(1)(iv), and (g)(1)(v)\u2014Grounding\u2014Systems to be grounded\n\n\u00a7 1910.304(g)(4)\u2014Grounding\u2014Grounding connections\n\n\u00a7 1910.304(g)(5)\u2014Grounding\u2014Grounding path\n\n\u00a7 1910.304(g)(6)(iv)(A) through (g)(6)(iv)(D), and (g)(6)(vi)\u2014Grounding\u2014Supports, enclosures, and equipment to be grounded\n\n\u00a7 1910.304(g)(7)\u2014Grounding\u2014Nonelectrical equipment\n\n\u00a7 1910.304(g)(8)(i)\u2014Grounding\u2014Methods of grounding fixed equipment\n\n\u00a7 1910.305(g)(1)\u2014Flexible cords and cables\u2014Use of flexible cords and cables\n\n\u00a7 1910.305(g)(2)(ii) and (g)(2)(iii)\u2014Flexible cords and cables\u2014Identification, splices, and terminations\n\n\u00a7 1910.307, except as specified in \u00a7 1910.307(b)\u2014Hazardous (classified) locations\n\n(2)  Requirements applicable to installations made after March 15, 1972.  Every electrical installation and all utilization equipment installed or overhauled after March 15, 1972, shall comply with the provisions of \u00a7\u00a7 1910.302 through 1910.308, except as noted in paragraphs (b)(3) and (b)(4) of this section.\n\n(3)  Requirements applicable only to installations made after April 16, 1981.  The following requirements apply only to electrical installations and utilization equipment installed after April 16, 1981:\n\n\u00a7 1910.303(h)(4)\u2014Over 600 volts, nominal\u2014Entrance and access to work space\n\n\u00a7 1910.304(f)(1)(vii) and (f)(1)(viii)\u2014Overcurrent protection\u2014600 volts, nominal, or less\n\n\u00a7 1910.304(g)(9)(i)\u2014Grounding\u2014Grounding of systems and circuits of 1000 volts and over (high voltage)\n\n\u00a7 1910.305(j)(6)(ii)(D)\u2014Equipment for general use\u2014Capacitors\n\n\u00a7 1910.306(c)(9)\u2014Elevators, dumbwaiters, escalators, moving walks, wheelchair lifts, and stairway chair lifts\u2014Interconnection between multicar controllers\n\n\u00a7 1910.306(i)\u2014Electrically driven or controlled irrigation machines\n\n\u00a7 1910.306(j)(5)\u2014Swimming pools, fountains, and similar installations\u2014Fountains\n\n\u00a7 1910.308(a)(1)(ii)\u2014Systems over 600 volts, nominal\u2014Aboveground wiring methods\n\n\u00a7 1910.308(c)(2)\u2014Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote control, signaling, and power-limited circuits\u2014Marking\n\n\u00a7 1910.308(d)\u2014Fire alarm systems\n\n(4)  Requirements applicable only to installations made after August 13, 2007.  The following requirements apply only to electrical installations and utilization equipment installed after August 13, 2007:\n\n\u00a7 1910.303(f)(4)\u2014Disconnecting means and circuits\u2014Capable of accepting a lock\n\n\u00a7 1910.303(f)(5)\u2014Disconnecting means and circuits\u2014Marking for series combination ratings\n\n\u00a7 1910.303(g)(1)(iv) and (g)(1)(vii)\u2014600 Volts, nominal, or less\u2014Space about electric equipment\n\n\u00a7 1910.303(h)(5)(vi)\u2014Over 600 volts, nominal\u2014Working space and guarding\n\n\u00a7 1910.304(b)(1)\u2014Branch circuits\u2014Identification of multiwire branch circuits\n\n\u00a7 1910.304(b)(3)(i)\u2014Branch circuits\u2014Ground-fault circuit interrupter protection for personnel\n\n\u00a7 1910.304(f)(2)(i)(A), (f)(2)(i)(B) (but not the introductory text to \u00a7 1910.304(f)(2)(i)), and (f)(2)(iv)(A)\u2014Overcurrent protection\u2014Feeders and branch circuits over 600 volts, nominal\n\n\u00a7 1910.305(c)(3)(ii)\u2014Switches\u2014Connection of switches\n\n\u00a7 1910.305(c)(5)\u2014Switches\u2014Grounding\n\n\u00a7 1910.306(a)(1)(ii)\u2014Electric signs and outline lighting\u2014Disconnecting means\n\n\u00a7 1910.306(c)(4)\u2014Elevators, dumbwaiters, escalators, moving walks, wheelchair lifts, and stairway chair lifts\u2014Operation\n\n\u00a7 1910.306(c)(5)\u2014Elevators, dumbwaiters, escalators, moving walks, wheelchair lifts, and stairway chair lifts\u2014Location\n\n\u00a7 1910.306(c)(6)\u2014Elevators, dumbwaiters, escalators, moving walks, wheelchair lifts, and stairway chair lifts\u2014Identification and signs\n\n\u00a7 1910.306(c)(7)\u2014Elevators, dumbwaiters, escalators, moving walks, wheelchair lifts, and stairway chair lifts\u2014Single-car and multicar installations\n\n\u00a7 1910.306(j)(1)(iii)\u2014Swimming pools, fountains, and similar installations\u2014Receptacles\n\n\u00a7 1910.306(k)\u2014Carnivals, circuses, fairs, and similar events\n\n\u00a7 1910.308(a)(5)(v) and (a)(5)(vi)(B)\u2014Systems over 600 volts, nominal\u2014Interrupting and isolating devices\n\n\u00a7 1910.308(a)(7)(vi)\u2014Systems over 600 volts, nominal\u2014Tunnel installations\n\n\u00a7 1910.308(b)(3)\u2014Emergency power systems\u2014Signs\n\n\u00a7 1910.308(c)(3)\u2014Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote control, signaling, and power-limited circuits\u2014Separation from conductors of other circuits\n\n\u00a7 1910.308(f)\u2014Solar photovoltaic systems\n\n(c)  Applicability of requirements for disconnecting means.  The requirement in \u00a7 1910.147(c)(2)(iii) that energy isolating devices be capable of accepting a lockout device whenever replacement or major repair, renovation or modification of a machine or equipment is performed, and whenever new machines or equipment are installed after January 2, 1990, applies in addition to any requirements in \u00a7\u00a7 1910.303 through 1910.308 that disconnecting means be capable of being locked in the open position under certain conditions."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.19.38.3", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "S", "Subpart S\u2014Electrical", "", "\u00a7 1910.303 General.", "OSHA", "", "", "[46 FR 4056, Jan. 16, 1981, as amended at 73 FR 64205, Oct. 29, 2008]", "(a)  Approval.  The conductors and equipment required or permitted by this subpart shall be acceptable only if approved, as defined in \u00a7 1910.399.\n\n(b)  Examination, installation, and use of equipment \u2014(1)  Examination.  Electric equipment shall be free from recognized hazards that are likely to cause death or serious physical harm to employees. Safety of equipment shall be determined using the following considerations:\n\n(i) Suitability for installation and use in conformity with the provisions of this subpart;\n\nSuitability of equipment for an identified purpose may be evidenced by listing or labeling for that identified purpose.\n\n(ii) Mechanical strength and durability, including, for parts designed to enclose and protect other equipment, the adequacy of the protection thus provided;\n\n(iii) Wire-bending and connection space;\n\n(iv) Electrical insulation;\n\n(v) Heating effects under all conditions of use;\n\n(vi) Arcing effects;\n\n(vii) Classification by type, size, voltage, current capacity, and specific use; and\n\n(viii) Other factors that contribute to the practical safeguarding of persons using or likely to come in contact with the equipment.\n\n(2)  Installation and use.  Listed or labeled equipment shall be installed and used in accordance with any instructions included in the listing or labeling.\n\n(3)  Insulation integrity.  Completed wiring installations shall be free from short circuits and from grounds other than those required or permitted by this subpart.\n\n(4)  Interrupting rating.  Equipment intended to interrupt current at fault levels shall have an interrupting rating sufficient for the nominal circuit voltage and the current that is available at the line terminals of the equipment. Equipment intended to interrupt current at other than fault levels shall have an interrupting rating at nominal circuit voltage sufficient for the current that must be interrupted.\n\n(5)  Circuit impedance and other characteristics.  The overcurrent protective devices, the total impedance, the component short-circuit current ratings, and other characteristics of the circuit to be protected shall be selected and coordinated to permit the circuit protective devices used to clear a fault to do so without the occurrence of extensive damage to the electrical components of the circuit. This fault shall be assumed to be either between two or more of the circuit conductors, or between any circuit conductor and the grounding conductor or enclosing metal raceway.\n\n(6)  Deteriorating agents.  Unless identified for use in the operating environment, no conductors or equipment shall be located in damp or wet locations; where exposed to gases, fumes, vapors, liquids, or other agents that have a deteriorating effect on the conductors or equipment; or where exposed to excessive temperatures.\n\n(7)  Mechanical execution of work.  Electric equipment shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner.\n\n(i) Unused openings in boxes, raceways, auxiliary gutters, cabinets, equipment cases, or housings shall be effectively closed to afford protection substantially equivalent to the wall of the equipment.\n\n(ii) Conductors shall be racked to provide ready and safe access in underground and subsurface enclosures that persons enter for installation and maintenance.\n\n(iii) Internal parts of electrical equipment, including busbars, wiring terminals, insulators, and other surfaces, may not be damaged or contaminated by foreign materials such as paint, plaster, cleaners, abrasives, or corrosive residues.\n\n(iv) There shall be no damaged parts that may adversely affect safe operation or mechanical strength of the equipment, such as parts that are broken, bent, cut, or deteriorated by corrosion, chemical action, or overheating.\n\n(8)  Mounting and cooling of equipment.  (i) Electric equipment shall be firmly secured to the surface on which it is mounted.\n\nWooden plugs driven into holes in masonry, concrete, plaster, or similar materials are not considered secure means of fastening electric equipment.\n\n(ii) Electric equipment that depends on the natural circulation of air and convection principles for cooling of exposed surfaces shall be installed so that room airflow over such surfaces is not prevented by walls or by adjacent installed equipment. For equipment designed for floor mounting, clearance between top surfaces and adjacent surfaces shall be provided to dissipate rising warm air.\n\n(iii) Electric equipment provided with ventilating openings shall be installed so that walls or other obstructions do not prevent the free circulation of air through the equipment.\n\n(c)  Electrical connections \u2014(1)  General.  Because of different characteristics of dissimilar metals:\n\n(i) Devices such as pressure terminal or pressure splicing connectors and soldering lugs shall be identified for the material of the conductor and shall be properly installed and used;\n\n(ii) Conductors of dissimilar metals may not be intermixed in a terminal or splicing connector where physical contact occurs between dissimilar conductors (such as copper and aluminum, copper and copper-clad aluminum, or aluminum and copper-clad aluminum) unless the device is identified for the purpose and conditions of use; and\n\n(iii) Materials such as solder, fluxes, inhibitors, and compounds, where employed, shall be suitable for the use and shall be of a type that will not adversely affect the conductors, installation, or equipment.\n\n(2)  Terminals.  (i) Connection of conductors to terminal parts shall ensure a good connection without damaging the conductors and shall be made by means of pressure connectors (including set-screw type), solder lugs, or splices to flexible leads. However, No. 10 or smaller conductors may be connected by means of wire binding screws or studs and nuts having upturned lugs or equivalent.\n\n(ii) Terminals for more than one conductor and terminals used to connect aluminum shall be so identified.\n\n(3)  Splices.  (i) Conductors shall be spliced or joined with splicing devices identified for the use or by brazing, welding, or soldering with a fusible metal or alloy. Soldered splices shall first be spliced or joined to be mechanically and electrically secure without solder and then soldered. All splices and joints and the free ends of conductors shall be covered with an insulation equivalent to that of the conductors or with an insulating device identified for the purpose.\n\n(ii) Wire connectors or splicing means installed on conductors for direct burial shall be listed for such use.\n\n(d)  Arcing parts.  Parts of electric equipment that in ordinary operation produce arcs, sparks, flames, or molten metal shall be enclosed or separated and isolated from all combustible material.\n\n(e)  Marking \u2014(1)  Identification of manufacturer and ratings.  Electric equipment may not be used unless the following markings have been placed on the equipment:\n\n(i) The manufacturer's name, trademark, or other descriptive marking by which the organization responsible for the product may be identified; and\n\n(ii) Other markings giving voltage, current, wattage, or other ratings as necessary.\n\n(2)  Durability.  The marking shall be of sufficient durability to withstand the environment involved.\n\n(f)  Disconnecting means and circuits \u2014(1)  Motors and appliances.  Each disconnecting means required by this subpart for motors and appliances shall be legibly marked to indicate its purpose, unless located and arranged so the purpose is evident.\n\n(2)  Services, feeders, and branch circuits.  Each service, feeder, and branch circuit, at its disconnecting means or overcurrent device, shall be legibly marked to indicate its purpose, unless located and arranged so the purpose is evident.\n\n(3)  Durability of markings.  The markings required by paragraphs (f)(1) and (f)(2) of this section shall be of sufficient durability to withstand the environment involved.\n\n(4)  Capable of accepting a lock.  Disconnecting means required by this subpart shall be capable of being locked in the open position.\n\n(5)  Marking for series combination ratings.  (i) Where circuit breakers or fuses are applied in compliance with the series combination ratings marked on the equipment by the manufacturer, the equipment enclosures shall be legibly marked in the field to indicate that the equipment has been applied with a series combination rating.\n\n(ii) The marking required by paragraph (f)(5)(i) of this section shall be readily visible and shall state \u201cCaution\u2014Series Combination System Rated __ Amperes. Identified Replacement Component Required.\u201d\n\n(g)  600 Volts, nominal, or less.  This paragraph applies to electric equipment operating at 600 volts, nominal, or less to ground.\n\n(1)  Space about electric equipment.  Sufficient access and working space shall be provided and maintained about all electric equipment to permit ready and safe operation and maintenance of such equipment.\n\n(i) Working space for equipment likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized shall comply with the following dimensions, except as required or permitted elsewhere in this subpart:\n\n(A) The depth of the working space in the direction of access to live parts may not be less than indicated in Table S-1. Distances shall be measured from the live parts if they are exposed or from the enclosure front or opening if they are enclosed;\n\n(B) The width of working space in front of the electric equipment shall be the width of the equipment or 762 mm (30 in.), whichever is greater. In all cases, the working space shall permit at least a 90-degree opening of equipment doors or hinged panels; and\n\n(C) The work space shall be clear and extend from the grade, floor, or platform to the height required by paragraph (g)(1)(vi) of this section. However, other equipment associated with the electrical installation and located above or below the electric equipment may extend not more than 153 mm (6 in.) beyond the front of the electric equipment.\n\n(ii) Working space required by this standard may not be used for storage. When normally enclosed live parts are exposed for inspection or servicing, the working space, if in a passageway or general open space, shall be suitably guarded.\n\n(iii) At least one entrance of sufficient area shall be provided to give access to the working space about electric equipment.\n\n(iv) For equipment rated 1200 amperes or more and over 1.83 m (6.0 ft) wide, containing overcurrent devices, switching devices, or control devices, there shall be one entrance not less than 610 mm (24 in.) wide and 1.98 m (6.5 ft) high at each end of the working space, except that:\n\n(A) Where the location permits a continuous and unobstructed way of exit travel, one means of exit is permitted; or\n\n(B) Where the working space required by paragraph (g)(1)(i) of this section is doubled, only one entrance to the working space is required; however, the entrance shall be located so that the edge of the entrance nearest the equipment is the minimum clear distance given in Table S-1 away from such equipment.\n\n(v) Illumination shall be provided for all working spaces about service equipment, switchboards, panelboards, and motor control centers installed indoors. Additional lighting fixtures are not required where the working space is illuminated by an adjacent light source. In electric equipment rooms, the illumination may not be controlled by automatic means only.\n\n(vi) The minimum headroom of working spaces about service equipment, switchboards, panelboards, or motor control centers shall be as follows:\n\n(A) For installations built before August 13, 2007, 1.91 m (6.25 ft); and\n\n(B) For installations built on or after August 13, 2007, 1.98 m (6.5 ft), except that where the electrical equipment exceeds 1.98 m (6.5 ft) in height, the minimum headroom may not be less than the height of the equipment.\n\nTable S-1\u2014Minimum Depth of Clear Working Space at Electric Equipment, 600 V or Less\n\nNotes to Table S-1:\n\n1. Minimum clear distances may be 0.7 m (2.5 ft) for installations built before April 16, 1981.\n\n2. Conditions A, B, and C are as follows:\n\nCondition A\u2014Exposed live parts on one side and no live or grounded parts on the other side of the working space, or exposed live parts on both sides effectively guarded by suitable wood or other insulating material. Insulated wire or insulated busbars operating at not over 300 volts are not considered live parts.\n\nCondition B\u2014Exposed live parts on one side and grounded parts on the other side.\n\nCondition C\u2014Exposed live parts on both sides of the work space (not guarded as provided in Condition A) with the operator between.\n\n3. Working space is not required in back of assemblies such as dead-front switchboards or motor control centers where there are no renewable or adjustable parts (such as fuses or switches) on the back and where all connections are accessible from locations other than the back. Where rear access is required to work on deenergized parts on the back of enclosed equipment, a minimum working space of 762 mm (30 in.) horizontally shall be provided.\n\n(vii) Switchboards, panelboards, and distribution boards installed for the control of light and power circuits, and motor control centers shall be located in dedicated spaces and protected from damage.\n\n(A) For indoor installation, the dedicated space shall comply with the following:\n\n( 1 ) The space equal to the width and depth of the equipment and extending from the floor to a height of 1.83 m (6.0 ft) above the equipment or to the structural ceiling, whichever is lower, shall be dedicated to the electrical installation. Unless isolated from equipment by height or physical enclosures or covers that will afford adequate mechanical protection from vehicular traffic or accidental contact by unauthorized personnel or that complies with paragraph (g)(1)(vii)(A)(2) of this section, piping, ducts, or equipment foreign to the electrical installation may not be located in this area;\n\n( 2 ) The space equal to the width and depth of the equipment shall be kept clear of foreign systems unless protection is provided to avoid damage from condensation, leaks, or breaks in such foreign systems. This area shall extend from the top of the electric equipment to the structural ceiling;\n\n( 3 ) Sprinkler protection is permitted for the dedicated space where the piping complies with this section; and\n\n( 4 ) Control equipment that by its very nature or because of other requirements in this subpart must be adjacent to or within sight of its operating machinery is permitted in the dedicated space.\n\nA dropped, suspended, or similar ceiling that does not add strength to the building structure is not considered a structural ceiling.\n\n(B) Outdoor electric equipment shall be installed in suitable enclosures and shall be protected from accidental contact by unauthorized personnel, or by vehicular traffic, or by accidental spillage or leakage from piping systems. No architectural appurtenance or other equipment may be located in the working space required by paragraph (g)(1)(i) of this section.\n\n(2)  Guarding of live parts.  (i) Except as elsewhere required or permitted by this standard, live parts of electric equipment operating at 50 volts or more shall be guarded against accidental contact by use of approved cabinets or other forms of approved enclosures or by any of the following means:\n\n(A) By location in a room, vault, or similar enclosure that is accessible only to qualified persons;\n\n(B) By suitable permanent, substantial partitions or screens so arranged so that only qualified persons will have access to the space within reach of the live parts. Any openings in such partitions or screens shall be so sized and located that persons are not likely to come into accidental contact with the live parts or to bring conducting objects into contact with them;\n\n(C) By placement on a suitable balcony, gallery, or platform so elevated and otherwise located as to prevent access by unqualified persons; or\n\n(D) By elevation of 2.44 m (8.0 ft) or more above the floor or other working surface.\n\n(ii) In locations where electric equipment is likely to be exposed to physical damage, enclosures or guards shall be so arranged and of such strength as to prevent such damage.\n\n(iii) Entrances to rooms and other guarded locations containing exposed live parts shall be marked with conspicuous warning signs forbidding unqualified persons to enter.\n\n(h)  Over 600 volts, nominal \u2014(1)  General.  Conductors and equipment used on circuits exceeding 600 volts, nominal, shall comply with all applicable provisions of the paragraphs (a) through (g) of this section and with the following provisions, which supplement or modify the preceding requirements. However, paragraphs (h)(2), (h)(3), and (h)(4) of this section do not apply to the equipment on the supply side of the service point.\n\n(2)  Enclosure for electrical installations.  (i) Electrical installations in a vault, room, or closet or in an area surrounded by a wall, screen, or fence, access to which is controlled by lock and key or other approved means, are considered to be accessible to qualified persons only. The type of enclosure used in a given case shall be designed and constructed according to the hazards associated with the installation.\n\n(ii) For installations other than equipment described in paragraph (h)(2)(v) of this section, a wall, screen, or fence shall be used to enclose an outdoor electrical installation to deter access by persons who are not qualified. A fence may not be less than 2.13 m (7.0 ft) in height or a combination of 1.80 m (6.0 ft) or more of fence fabric and a 305-mm (1-ft) or more extension utilizing three or more strands of barbed wire or equivalent.\n\n(iii) The following requirements apply to indoor installations that are accessible to other than qualified persons:\n\n(A) The installations shall be made with metal-enclosed equipment or shall be enclosed in a vault or in an area to which access is controlled by a lock;\n\n(B) Metal-enclosed switchgear, unit substations, transformers, pull boxes, connection boxes, and other similar associated equipment shall be marked with appropriate caution signs; and\n\n(C) Openings in ventilated dry-type transformers and similar openings in other equipment shall be designed so that foreign objects inserted through these openings will be deflected from energized parts.\n\n(iv) Outdoor electrical installations having exposed live parts shall be accessible to qualified persons only.\n\n(v) The following requirements apply to outdoor enclosed equipment accessible to unqualified employees:\n\n(A) Ventilating or similar openings in equipment shall be so designed that foreign objects inserted through these openings will be deflected from energized parts;\n\n(B) Where exposed to physical damage from vehicular traffic, suitable guards shall be provided;\n\n(C) Nonmetallic or metal-enclosed equipment located outdoors and accessible to the general public shall be designed so that exposed nuts or bolts cannot be readily removed, permitting access to live parts;\n\n(D) Where nonmetallic or metal-enclosed equipment is accessible to the general public and the bottom of the enclosure is less than 2.44 m (8.0 ft) above the floor or grade level, the enclosure door or hinged cover shall be kept locked; and\n\n(E) Except for underground box covers that weigh over 45.4 kg (100 lb), doors and covers of enclosures used solely as pull boxes, splice boxes, or junction boxes shall be locked, bolted, or screwed on.\n\n(3)  Work space about equipment.  Sufficient space shall be provided and maintained about electric equipment to permit ready and safe operation and maintenance of such equipment. Where energized parts are exposed, the minimum clear work space may not be less than 1.98 m (6.5 ft) high (measured vertically from the floor or platform) or less than 914 mm (3.0 ft) wide (measured parallel to the equipment). The depth shall be as required in paragraph (h)(5)(i) of this section. In all cases, the work space shall be adequate to permit at least a 90-degree opening of doors or hinged panels.\n\n(4)  Entrance and access to work space.  (i) At least one entrance not less than 610 mm (24 in.) wide and 1.98 m (6.5 ft) high shall be provided to give access to the working space about electric equipment.\n\n(A) On switchboard and control panels exceeding 1.83 m (6.0 ft) in width, there shall be one entrance at each end of such boards unless the location of the switchboards and control panels permits a continuous and unobstructed way of exit travel, or unless the work space required in paragraph (h)(5)(i) of this section is doubled.\n\n(B) Where one entrance to the working space is permitted under the conditions described in paragraph (h)(4)(i)(A) of this section, the entrance shall be located so that the edge of the entrance nearest the switchboards and control panels is at least the minimum clear distance given in Table S-2 away from such equipment.\n\n(C) Where bare energized parts at any voltage or insulated energized parts above 600 volts, nominal, to ground are located adjacent to such entrance, they shall be suitably guarded.\n\n(ii) Permanent ladders or stairways shall be provided to give safe access to the working space around electric equipment installed on platforms, balconies, mezzanine floors, or in attic or roof rooms or spaces.\n\n(5)  Working space and guarding.  (i) Except as elsewhere required or permitted in this subpart, the minimum clear working space in the direction of access to live parts of electric equipment may not be less than specified in Table S-2. Distances shall be measured from the live parts, if they are exposed, or from the enclosure front or opening, if they are enclosed.\n\n(ii) If switches, cutouts, or other equipment operating at 600 volts, nominal, or less, are installed in a room or enclosure where there are exposed live parts or exposed wiring operating at over 600 volts, nominal, the high-voltage equipment shall be effectively separated from the space occupied by the low-voltage equipment by a suitable partition, fence, or screen. However, switches or other equipment operating at 600 volts, nominal, or less, and serving only equipment within the high-voltage vault, room, or enclosure may be installed in the high-voltage enclosure, room, or vault if accessible to qualified persons only.\n\n(iii) The following requirements apply to the entrances to all buildings, rooms, or enclosures containing exposed live parts or exposed conductors operating at over 600 volts, nominal:\n\n(A) The entrances shall be kept locked unless they are under the observation of a qualified person at all times; and\n\n(B) Permanent and conspicuous warning signs shall be provided, reading substantially as follows:\n\n(iv) Illumination shall be provided for all working spaces about electric equipment.\n\n(A) The lighting outlets shall be arranged so that persons changing lamps or making repairs on the lighting system will not be endangered by live parts or other equipment.\n\n(B) The points of control shall be located so that persons are prevented from contacting any live part or moving part of the equipment while turning on the lights.\n\n(v) Unguarded live parts above working space shall be maintained at elevations not less than specified in Table S-3.\n\n(vi) Pipes or ducts that are foreign to the electrical installation and that require periodic maintenance or whose malfunction would endanger the operation of the electrical system may not be located in the vicinity of service equipment, metal-enclosed power switchgear, or industrial control assemblies. Protection shall be provided where necessary to avoid damage from condensation leaks and breaks in such foreign systems.\n\nPiping and other facilities are not considered foreign if provided for fire protection of the electrical installation.\n\nTable S-2\u2014Minimum Depth of Clear Working Space at Electric Equipment, Over 600 V\n\nNotes to Table S-2:\n\n1  Minimum depth of clear working space in front of electric equipment with a nominal voltage to ground above 25,000 volts may be the same as that for 25,000 volts under Conditions A, B, and C for installations built before April 16, 1981.\n\n2  Conditions A, B, and C are as follows:\n\nCondition A\u2014Exposed live parts on one side and no live or grounded parts on the other side of the working space, or exposed live parts on both sides effectively guarded by suitable wood or other insulating material. Insulated wire or insulated busbars operating at not over 300 volts are not considered live parts.\n\nCondition B\u2014Exposed live parts on one side and grounded parts on the other side. Concrete, brick, and tile walls are considered as grounded surfaces.\n\nCondition C\u2014Exposed live parts on both sides of the work space (not guarded as provided in Condition A) with the operator between.\n\n3  Working space is not required in back of equipment such as dead-front switchboards or control assemblies that has no renewable or adjustable parts (such as fuses or switches) on the back and where all connections are accessible from locations other than the back. Where rear access is required to work on the deenergized parts on the back of enclosed equipment, a minimum working space 762 mm (30 in.) horizontally shall be provided.\n\nTable S-3\u2014Elevation of Unguarded Live Parts Above Working Space\n\n1  The minimum elevation may be 2.6 m (8.5 ft) for installations built before August 13, 2007. The minimum elevation may be 2.4 m (8.0 ft) for installations built before April 16, 1981, if the nominal voltage between phases is in the range of 601-6600 volts."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.19.38.4", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "S", "Subpart S\u2014Electrical", "", "\u00a7 1910.304 Wiring design and protection.", "OSHA", "", "", "[46 FR 4056, Jan. 16, 1981, as amended at 73 FR 64205, Oct. 29, 2008]", "(a)  Use and identification of grounded and grounding conductors \u2014(1)  Identification of conductors.  (i) A conductor used as a grounded conductor shall be identifiable and distinguishable from all other conductors.\n\n(ii) A conductor used as an equipment grounding conductor shall be identifiable and distinguishable from all other conductors.\n\n(2)  Polarity of connections.  No grounded conductor may be attached to any terminal or lead so as to reverse designated polarity.\n\n(3)  Use of grounding terminals and devices.  A grounding terminal or grounding-type device on a receptacle, cord connector, or attachment plug may not be used for purposes other than grounding.\n\n(b)  Branch circuits \u2014(1)  Identification of multiwire branch circuits.  Where more than one nominal voltage system exists in a building containing multiwire branch circuits, each ungrounded conductor of a multiwire branch circuit, where accessible, shall be identified by phase and system. The means of identification shall be permanently posted at each branch-circuit panelboard.\n\n(2)  Receptacles and cord connectors.  (i) Receptacles installed on 15- and 20-ampere branch circuits shall be of the grounding type except as permitted for replacement receptacles in paragraph (b)(2)(iv) of this section. Grounding-type receptacles shall be installed only on circuits of the voltage class and current for which they are rated, except as provided in Table S-4 and Table S-5.\n\n(ii) Receptacles and cord connectors having grounding contacts shall have those contacts effectively grounded except for receptacles mounted on portable and vehicle-mounted generators in accordance with paragraph (g)(3) of this section and replacement receptacles installed in accordance with paragraph (b)(2)(iv) of this section.\n\n(iii) The grounding contacts of receptacles and cord connectors shall be grounded by connection to the equipment grounding conductor of the circuit supplying the receptacle or cord connector. The branch circuit wiring method shall include or provide an equipment grounding conductor to which the grounding contacts of the receptacle or cord connector shall be connected.\n\n(iv) Replacement of receptacles shall comply with the following requirements:\n\n(A) Where a grounding means exists in the receptacle enclosure or a grounding conductor is installed, grounding-type receptacles shall be used and shall be connected to the grounding means or conductor;\n\n(B) Ground-fault circuit-interrupter protected receptacles shall be provided where replacements are made at receptacle outlets that are required to be so protected elsewhere in this subpart; and\n\n(C) Where a grounding means does not exist in the receptacle enclosure, the installation shall comply with one of the following provisions:\n\n( 1 ) A nongrounding-type receptacle may be replaced with another nongrounding-type receptacle; or\n\n( 2 ) A nongrounding-type receptacle may be replaced with a ground-fault circuit-interrupter-type of receptacle that is marked \u201cNo Equipment Ground;\u201d an equipment grounding conductor may not be connected from the ground-fault circuit-interrupter-type receptacle to any outlet supplied from the ground-fault circuit-interrupter receptacle; or\n\n( 3 ) A nongrounding-type receptacle may be replaced with a grounding-type receptacle where supplied through a ground-fault circuit-interrupter; the replacement receptacle shall be marked \u201cGFCI Protected\u201d and \u201cNo Equipment Ground;\u201d an equipment grounding conductor may not be connected to such grounding-type receptacles.\n\n(v) Receptacles connected to circuits having different voltages, frequencies, or types of current (ac or dc) on the same premises shall be of such design that the attachment plugs used on these circuits are not interchangeable.\n\n(3)  Ground-fault circuit interrupter protection for personnel.  (i) All 125-volt, single-phase, 15- and 20-ampere receptacles installed in bathrooms or on rooftops shall have ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection for personnel.\n\n(ii) The following requirements apply to temporary wiring installations that are used during construction-like activities, including certain maintenance, remodeling, or repair activities, involving buildings, structures or equipment.\n\n(A) All 125-volt, single-phase,15-, 20-, and 30-ampere receptacle outlets that are not part of the permanent wiring of the building or structure and that are in use by personnel shall have ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection for personnel.\n\nA cord connector on an extension cord set is considered to be a receptacle outlet if the cord set is used for temporary electric power.\n\nCord sets and devices incorporating the required ground-fault circuit-interrupter that are connected to the receptacle closest to the source of power are acceptable forms of protection.\n\n(B) Receptacles other than 125 volt, single-phase, 15-, 20-, and 30-ampere receptacles that are not part of the permanent wiring of the building or structure and that are in use by personnel shall have ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection for personnel.\n\n(C) Where the ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection required by paragraph (b)(3)(ii)(B) of this section is not available for receptacles other than 125-volt, single-phase, 15-, 20-, and 30-ampere, the employer shall establish and implement an assured equipment grounding conductor program covering cord sets, receptacles that are not a part of the building or structure, and equipment connected by cord and plug that are available for use or used by employees on those receptacles. This program shall comply with the following requirements:\n\n( 1 ) A written description of the program, including the specific procedures adopted by the employer, shall be available at the jobsite for inspection and copying by the Assistant Secretary of Labor and any affected employee;\n\n( 2 ) The employer shall designate one or more competent persons to implement the program;\n\n( 3 ) Each cord set, attachment cap, plug, and receptacle of cord sets, and any equipment connected by cord and plug, except cord sets and receptacles which are fixed and not exposed to damage, shall be visually inspected before each day's use for external defects, such as deformed or missing pins or insulation damage, and for indications of possible internal damage. Equipment found damaged or defective shall not be used until repaired;\n\n( 4 ) The following tests shall be performed on all cord sets and receptacles which are not a part of the permanent wiring of the building or structure, and cord- and plug-connected equipment required to be grounded:\n\n( i ) All equipment grounding conductors shall be tested for continuity and shall be electrically continuous;\n\n( ii ) Each receptacle and attachment cap or plug shall be tested for correct attachment of the equipment grounding conductor. The equipment grounding conductor shall be connected to its proper terminal; and\n\n( iii ) All required tests shall be performed before first use; before equipment is returned to service following any repairs; before equipment is used after any incident which can be reasonably suspected to have caused damage (for example, when a cord set is run over); and at intervals not to exceed 3 months, except that cord sets and receptacles which are fixed and not exposed to damage shall be tested at intervals not exceeding 6 months;\n\n( 5 ) The employer shall not make available or permit the use by employees of any equipment which has not met the requirements of paragraph (b)(3)(ii)(C) of this section; and\n\n( 6 ) Tests performed as required in paragraph (b)(3)(ii)(C) of this section shall be recorded. This test record shall identify each receptacle, cord set, and cord- and plug-connected equipment that passed the test and shall indicate the last date it was tested or the interval for which it was tested. This record shall be kept by means of logs, color coding, or other effective means and shall be maintained until replaced by a more current record. The record shall be made available on the jobsite for inspection by the Assistant Secretary and any affected employee.\n\n(4)  Outlet devices.  Outlet devices shall have an ampere rating not less than the load to be served and shall comply with the following provisions:\n\n(i) Where connected to a branch circuit having a rating in excess of 20 amperes, lampholders shall be of the heavy-duty type. A heavy-duty lampholder shall have a rating of not less than 660 watts if of the admedium type and not less than 750 watts if of any other type; and\n\n(ii) Receptacle outlets shall comply with the following provisions:\n\n(A) A single receptacle installed on an individual branch circuit shall have an ampere rating of not less than that of the branch circuit;\n\n(B) Where connected to a branch circuit supplying two or more receptacles or outlets, a receptacle may not supply a total cord- and plug-connected load in excess of the maximum specified in Table S-4; and\n\n(C) Where connected to a branch circuit supplying two or more receptacles or outlets, receptacle ratings shall conform to the values listed in Table S-5; or, where larger than 50 amperes, the receptacle rating may not be less than the branch-circuit rating. However, receptacles of cord- and plug-connected arc welders may have ampere ratings not less than the minimum branch-circuit conductor ampacity.\n\n(5)  Cord connections.  A receptacle outlet shall be installed wherever flexible cords with attachment plugs are used. Where flexible cords are permitted to be permanently connected, receptacles may be omitted.\n\nTable S-4\u2014Maximum Cord- and Plug-Connected Load to Receptacle\n\nTable S-5\u2014Receptacle Ratings for Various Size Circuits\n\n(c)  Outside conductors, 600 volts, nominal, or less.  The following requirements apply to branch-circuit, feeder, and service conductors rated 600 volts, nominal, or less and run outdoors as open conductors.\n\n(1)  Conductors on poles.  Conductors on poles shall have a separation of not less than 305 mm (1.0 ft) where not placed on racks or brackets. Conductors supported on poles shall provide a horizontal climbing space not less than the following:\n\n(i) Power conductors below communication conductors\u2014762 mm (30 in.);\n\n(ii) Power conductors alone or above communication conductors:\n\n(A) 300 volts or less\u2014610 mm (24 in.),\n\n(B) Over 300 volts\u2014762 mm (30 in.);\n\n(iii) Communication conductors below power conductors\u2014same as power conductors; and\n\n(iv) Communications conductors alone\u2014no requirement.\n\n(2)  Clearance from ground.  Open conductors, open multiconductor cables, and service-drop conductors of not over 600 volts, nominal, shall conform to the minimum clearances specified in Table S-6.\n\nTable S-6\u2014Clearances From Ground\n\n(3)  Clearance from building openings.  (i) Service conductors installed as open conductors or multiconductor cable without an overall outer jacket shall have a clearance of not less than 914 mm (3.0 ft) from windows that are designed to be opened, doors, porches, balconies, ladders, stairs, fire escapes, and similar locations. However, conductors that run above the top level of a window may be less than 914 mm (3.0 ft) from the window. Vertical clearance of final spans above, or within 914 mm (3.0 ft) measured horizontally of, platforms, projections, or surfaces from which they might be reached shall be maintained in accordance with paragraph (c)(2) of this section.\n\n(ii) Overhead service conductors may not be installed beneath openings through which materials may be moved, such as openings in farm and commercial buildings, and may not be installed where they will obstruct entrance to these building openings.\n\n(4)  Above roofs.  Overhead spans of open conductors and open multiconductor cables shall have a vertical clearance of not less than 2.44 m (8.0 ft) above the roof surface. The vertical clearance above the roof level shall be maintained for a distance not less than 914 mm (3.0 ft) in all directions from the edge of the roof.\n\n(i) The area above a roof surface subject to pedestrian or vehicular traffic shall have a vertical clearance from the roof surface in accordance with the clearance requirements of paragraph (c)(2) of this section.\n\n(ii) A reduction in clearance to 914 mm (3.0 ft) is permitted where the voltage between conductors does not exceed 300 and the roof has a slope of 102 mm (4 in.) in 305 mm (12 in.) or greater.\n\n(iii) A reduction in clearance above only the overhanging portion of the roof to not less than 457 mm (18 in.) is permitted where the voltage between conductors does not exceed 300 if:\n\n(A) The conductors do not pass above the roof overhang for a distance of more than 1.83 m (6.0 ft), 1.22 m (4.0 ft) horizontally, and\n\n(B) The conductors are terminated at a through-the-roof raceway or approved support.\n\n(iv) The requirement for maintaining a vertical clearance of 914 mm (3.0 ft) from the edge of the roof does not apply to the final conductor span, where the conductors are attached to the side of a building.\n\n(d)  Location of outdoor lamps.  Lamps for outdoor lighting shall be located below all energized conductors, transformers, or other electric equipment, unless such equipment is controlled by a disconnecting means that can be locked in the open position, or unless adequate clearances or other safeguards are provided for relamping operations.\n\n(e)  Services \u2014(1)  Disconnecting means.  (i) Means shall be provided to disconnect all conductors in a building or other structure from the service-entrance conductors. The service disconnecting means shall plainly indicate whether it is in the open or closed position and shall be installed at a readily accessible location nearest the point of entrance of the service-entrance conductors.\n\n(ii) Each service disconnecting means shall simultaneously disconnect all ungrounded conductors.\n\n(iii) Each service disconnecting means shall be suitable for the prevailing conditions.\n\n(2)  Services over 600 volts, nominal.  The following additional requirements apply to services over 600 volts, nominal.\n\n(i) Service-entrance conductors installed as open wires shall be guarded to make them accessible only to qualified persons.\n\n(ii) Signs warning of high voltage shall be posted where unqualified employees might come in contact with live parts.\n\n(f)  Overcurrent protection \u2014(1)  600 volts, nominal, or less.  The following requirements apply to overcurrent protection of circuits rated 600 volts, nominal, or less.\n\n(i) Conductors and equipment shall be protected from overcurrent in accordance with their ability to safely conduct current.\n\n(ii) Except for motor running overload protection, overcurrent devices may not interrupt the continuity of the grounded conductor unless all conductors of the circuit are opened simultaneously.\n\n(iii) A disconnecting means shall be provided on the supply side of all fuses in circuits over 150 volts to ground and cartridge fuses in circuits of any voltage where accessible to other than qualified persons so that each individual circuit containing fuses can be independently disconnected from the source of power. However, a current-limiting device without a disconnecting means is permitted on the supply side of the service disconnecting means. In addition, a single disconnecting means is permitted on the supply side of more than one set of fuses as permitted by the exception in \u00a7 1910.305(j)(4)(vi) for group operation of motors, and a single disconnecting means is permitted for fixed electric space-heating equipment.\n\n(iv) Overcurrent devices shall be readily accessible to each employee or authorized building management personnel. These overcurrent devices may not be located where they will be exposed to physical damage or in the vicinity of easily ignitable material.\n\n(v) Fuses and circuit breakers shall be so located or shielded that employees will not be burned or otherwise injured by their operation. Handles or levers of circuit breakers, and similar parts that may move suddenly in such a way that persons in the vicinity are likely to be injured by being struck by them, shall be guarded or isolated.\n\n(vi) Circuit breakers shall clearly indicate whether they are in the open (off) or closed (on) position.\n\n(vii) Where circuit breaker handles on switchboards are operated vertically rather than horizontally or rotationally, the up position of the handle shall be the closed (on) position.\n\n(viii) Circuit breakers used as switches in 120-volt and 277-volt, fluorescent lighting circuits shall be listed and marked \u201cSWD.\u201d\n\n(ix) A circuit breaker with a straight voltage rating, such as 240 V or 480 V, may only be installed in a circuit in which the nominal voltage between any two conductors does not exceed the circuit breaker's voltage rating. A two-pole circuit breaker may not be used for protecting a 3-phase, corner-grounded delta circuit unless the circuit breaker is marked 1\u03a6\u20143\u03a6 to indicate such suitability. A circuit breaker with a slash rating, such as 120/240 V or 480Y/277 V, may only be installed in a circuit where the nominal voltage of any conductor to ground does not exceed the lower of the two values of the circuit breaker's voltage rating and the nominal voltage between any two conductors does not exceed the higher value of the circuit breaker's voltage rating.\n\n(2)  Feeders and branch circuits over 600 volts, nominal.  The following requirements apply to feeders and branch circuits energized at more than 600 volts, nominal:\n\n(i) Feeder and branch-circuit conductors shall have overcurrent protection in each ungrounded conductor located at the point where the conductor receives its supply or at a location in the circuit determined under engineering supervision;\n\n(A) Circuit breakers used for overcurrent protection of three-phase circuits shall have a minimum of three overcurrent relays operated from three current transformers. On three-phase, three-wire circuits, an overcurrent relay in the residual circuit of the current transformers may replace one of the phase relays. An overcurrent relay, operated from a current transformer that links all phases of a three-phase, three-wire circuit, may replace the residual relay and one other phase-conductor current transformer. Where the neutral is not grounded on the load side of the circuit, the current transformer may link all three phase conductors and the grounded circuit conductor (neutral); and\n\n(B) If fuses are used for overcurrent protection, a fuse shall be connected in series with each ungrounded conductor;\n\n(ii) Each protective device shall be capable of detecting and interrupting all values of current that can occur at its location in excess of its trip setting or melting point;\n\n(iii) The operating time of the protective device, the available short-circuit current, and the conductor used shall be coordinated to prevent damaging or dangerous temperatures in conductors or conductor insulation under short-circuit conditions; and\n\n(iv) The following additional requirements apply to feeders only:\n\n(A) The continuous ampere rating of a fuse may not exceed three times the ampacity of the conductors. The long-time trip element setting of a breaker or the minimum trip setting of an electronically actuated fuse may not exceed six times the ampacity of the conductor. For fire pumps, conductors may be protected for short circuit only; and\n\n(B) Conductors tapped to a feeder may be protected by the feeder overcurrent device where that overcurrent device also protects the tap conductor.\n\n(g)  Grounding.  Paragraphs (g)(1) through (g)(9) of this section contain grounding requirements for systems, circuits, and equipment.\n\n(1)  Systems to be grounded.  Systems that supply premises wiring shall be grounded as follows:\n\n(i) All 3-wire dc systems shall have their neutral conductor grounded;\n\n(ii) Two-wire dc systems operating at over 50 volts through 300 volts between conductors shall be grounded unless:\n\n(A) They supply only industrial equipment in limited areas and are equipped with a ground detector;\n\n(B) They are rectifier-derived from an ac system complying with paragraphs (g)(1)(iii), (g)(1)(iv), and (g)(1)(v) of this section; or\n\n(C) They are fire-alarm circuits having a maximum current of 0.030 amperes;\n\n(iii) AC circuits of less than 50 volts shall be grounded if they are installed as overhead conductors outside of buildings or if they are supplied by transformers and the transformer primary supply system is ungrounded or exceeds 150 volts to ground;\n\n(iv) AC systems of 50 volts to 1000 volts shall be grounded under any of the following conditions, unless exempted by paragraph (g)(1)(v) of this section:\n\n(A) If the system can be so grounded that the maximum voltage to ground on the ungrounded conductors does not exceed 150 volts;\n\n(B) If the system is nominally rated three-phase, four-wire wye connected in which the neutral is used as a circuit conductor;\n\n(C) If the system is nominally rated three-phase, four-wire delta connected in which the midpoint of one phase is used as a circuit conductor; or\n\n(D) If a service conductor is uninsulated;\n\n(v) AC systems of 50 volts to 1000 volts are not required to be grounded under any of the following conditions:\n\n(A) If the system is used exclusively to supply industrial electric furnaces for melting, refining, tempering, and the like;\n\n(B) If the system is separately derived and is used exclusively for rectifiers supplying only adjustable speed industrial drives;\n\n(C) If the system is separately derived and is supplied by a transformer that has a primary voltage rating less than 1000 volts, provided all of the following conditions are met:\n\n( 1 ) The system is used exclusively for control circuits;\n\n( 2 ) The conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that only qualified persons will service the installation;\n\n( 3 ) Continuity of control power is required; and\n\n( 4 ) Ground detectors are installed on the control system;\n\n(D) If the system is an isolated power system that supplies circuits in health care facilities; or\n\n(E) If the system is a high-impedance grounded neutral system in which a grounding impedance, usually a resistor, limits the ground-fault current to a low value for 3-phase ac systems of 480 volts to 1000 volts provided all of the following conditions are met:\n\n( 1 ) The conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that only qualified persons will service the installation;\n\n( 2 ) Continuity of power is required;\n\n( 3 ) Ground detectors are installed on the system; and\n\n( 4 ) Line-to-neutral loads are not served.\n\n(2)  Conductor to be grounded.  The conductor to be grounded for ac premises wiring systems required to be grounded by paragraph (g)(1) of this section shall be as follows:\n\n(i) One conductor of a single-phase, two-wire system shall be grounded;\n\n(ii) The neutral conductor of a single-phase, three-wire system shall be grounded;\n\n(iii) The common conductor of a multiphase system having one wire common to all phases shall be grounded;\n\n(iv) One phase conductor of a multiphase system where one phase is grounded shall be grounded; and\n\n(v) The neutral conductor of a multiphase system in which one phase is used as a neutral conductor shall be grounded.\n\n(3)  Portable and vehicle-mounted generators.  (i) The frame of a portable generator need not be grounded and may serve as the grounding electrode for a system supplied by the generator under the following conditions:\n\n(A) The generator supplies only equipment mounted on the generator or cord- and plug-connected equipment through receptacles mounted on the generator, or both; and\n\n(B) The noncurrent-carrying metal parts of equipment and the equipment grounding conductor terminals of the receptacles are bonded to the generator frame.\n\n(ii) The frame of a vehicle need not be grounded and may serve as the grounding electrode for a system supplied by a generator located on the vehicle under the following conditions:\n\n(A) The frame of the generator is bonded to the vehicle frame;\n\n(B) The generator supplies only equipment located on the vehicle and cord- and plug-connected equipment through receptacles mounted on the vehicle;\n\n(C) The noncurrent-carrying metal parts of equipment and the equipment grounding conductor terminals of the receptacles are bonded to the generator frame; and\n\n(D) The system complies with all other provisions of paragraph (g) of this section.\n\n(iii) A system conductor that is required to be grounded by the provisions of paragraph (g)(2) of this section shall be bonded to the generator frame where the generator is a component of a separately derived system.\n\n(4)  Grounding connections.  (i) For a grounded system, a grounding electrode conductor shall be used to connect both the equipment grounding conductor and the grounded circuit conductor to the grounding electrode. Both the equipment grounding conductor and the grounding electrode conductor shall be connected to the grounded circuit conductor on the supply side of the service disconnecting means or on the supply side of the system disconnecting means or overcurrent devices if the system is separately derived.\n\n(ii) For an ungrounded service-supplied system, the equipment grounding conductor shall be connected to the grounding electrode conductor at the service equipment. For an ungrounded separately derived system, the equipment grounding conductor shall be connected to the grounding electrode conductor at, or ahead of, the system disconnecting means or overcurrent devices.\n\n(iii) On extensions of existing branch circuits that do not have an equipment grounding conductor, grounding-type receptacles may be grounded to a grounded cold water pipe near the equipment if the extension was installed before August 13, 2007. When any element of this branch circuit is replaced, the entire branch circuit shall use an equipment grounding conductor that complies with all other provisions of paragraph (g) of this section.\n\n(5)  Grounding path.  The path to ground from circuits, equipment, and enclosures shall be permanent, continuous, and effective.\n\n(6)  Supports, enclosures, and equipment to be grounded.  (i) Metal cable trays, metal raceways, and metal enclosures for conductors shall be grounded, except that:\n\n(A) Metal enclosures such as sleeves that are used to protect cable assemblies from physical damage need not be grounded; and\n\n(B) Metal enclosures for conductors added to existing installations of open wire, knob-and-tube wiring, and nonmetallic-sheathed cable need not be grounded if all of the following conditions are met:\n\n( 1 ) Runs are less than 7.62 meters (25.0 ft);\n\n( 2 ) Enclosures are free from probable contact with ground, grounded metal, metal laths, or other conductive materials; and\n\n( 3 ) Enclosures are guarded against employee contact.\n\n(ii) Metal enclosures for service equipment shall be grounded.\n\n(iii) Frames of electric ranges, wall-mounted ovens, counter-mounted cooking units, clothes dryers, and metal outlet or junction boxes that are part of the circuit for these appliances shall be grounded.\n\n(iv) Exposed noncurrent-carrying metal parts of fixed equipment that may become energized shall be grounded under any of the following conditions:\n\n(A) If within 2.44 m (8 ft) vertically or 1.52 m (5 ft) horizontally of ground or grounded metal objects and subject to employee contact;\n\n(B) If located in a wet or damp location and not isolated;\n\n(C) If in electrical contact with metal;\n\n(D) If in a hazardous (classified) location;\n\n(E) If supplied by a metal-clad, metal-sheathed, or grounded metal raceway wiring method; or\n\n(F) If equipment operates with any terminal at over 150 volts to ground.\n\n(v) Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph (g)(6)(iv) of this section, exposed noncurrent-carrying metal parts of the following types of fixed equipment need not be grounded:\n\n(A) Enclosures for switches or circuit breakers used for other than service equipment and accessible to qualified persons only;\n\n(B) Electrically heated appliances that are permanently and effectively insulated from ground;\n\n(C) Distribution apparatus, such as transformer and capacitor cases, mounted on wooden poles, at a height exceeding 2.44 m (8.0 ft) above ground or grade level; and\n\n(D) Listed equipment protected by a system of double insulation, or its equivalent, and distinctively marked as such.\n\n(vi) Exposed noncurrent-carrying metal parts of cord- and plug-connected equipment that may become energized shall be grounded under any of the following conditions:\n\n(A) If in hazardous (classified) locations (see \u00a7 1910.307);\n\n(B) If operated at over 150 volts to ground, except for guarded motors and metal frames of electrically heated appliances if the appliance frames are permanently and effectively insulated from ground;\n\n(C) If the equipment is of the following types:\n\n( 1 ) Refrigerators, freezers, and air conditioners;\n\n( 2 ) Clothes-washing, clothes-drying, and dishwashing machines, sump pumps, and electric aquarium equipment;\n\n( 3 ) Hand-held motor-operated tools, stationary and fixed motor-operated tools, and light industrial motor-operated tools;\n\n( 4 ) Motor-operated appliances of the following types: hedge clippers, lawn mowers, snow blowers, and wet scrubbers;\n\n( 5 ) Cord- and plug-connected appliances used in damp or wet locations, or by employees standing on the ground or on metal floors or working inside of metal tanks or boilers;\n\n( 6 ) Portable and mobile X-ray and associated equipment;\n\n( 7 ) Tools likely to be used in wet and conductive locations; and\n\n( 8  Portable hand lamps.\n\n(vii) Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph (g)(6)(vi) of this section, the following equipment need not be grounded:\n\n(A) Tools likely to be used in wet and conductive locations if supplied through an isolating transformer with an ungrounded secondary of not over 50 volts; and\n\n(B) Listed or labeled portable tools and appliances if protected by an approved system of double insulation, or its equivalent, and distinctively marked.\n\n(7)  Nonelectrical equipment.  The metal parts of the following nonelectrical equipment shall be grounded: frames and tracks of electrically operated cranes and hoists; frames of nonelectrically driven elevator cars to which electric conductors are attached; hand-operated metal shifting ropes or cables of electric elevators; and metal partitions, grill work, and similar metal enclosures around equipment of over 750 volts between conductors.\n\n(8)  Methods of grounding fixed equipment.  (i) Noncurrent-carrying metal parts of fixed equipment, if required to be grounded by this subpart, shall be grounded by an equipment grounding conductor that is contained within the same raceway, cable, or cord, or runs with or encloses the circuit conductors. For dc circuits only, the equipment grounding conductor may be run separately from the circuit conductors.\n\n(ii) Electric equipment is considered to be effectively grounded if it is secured to, and in electrical contact with, a metal rack or structure that is provided for its support and the metal rack or structure is grounded by the method specified for the noncurrent-carrying metal parts of fixed equipment in paragraph (g)(8)(i) of this section. Metal car frames supported by metal hoisting cables attached to or running over metal sheaves or drums of grounded elevator machines are also considered to be effectively grounded.\n\n(iii) For installations made before April 16, 1981, electric equipment is also considered to be effectively grounded if it is secured to, and in metallic contact with, the grounded structural metal frame of a building. When any element of this branch circuit is replaced, the entire branch circuit shall use an equipment grounding conductor that complies with all other provisions of paragraph (g) of this section.\n\n(9)  Grounding of systems and circuits of 1000 volts and over (high voltage).  If high voltage systems are grounded, they shall comply with all applicable provisions of paragraphs (g)(1) through (g)(8) of this section as supplemented and modified by the following requirements:\n\n(i) Systems supplying portable or mobile high voltage equipment, other than substations installed on a temporary basis, shall comply with the following:\n\n(A) The system shall have its neutral grounded through an impedance. If a delta-connected high voltage system is used to supply the equipment, a system neutral shall be derived.\n\n(B) Exposed noncurrent-carrying metal parts of portable and mobile equipment shall be connected by an equipment grounding conductor to the point at which the system neutral impedance is grounded.\n\n(C) Ground-fault detection and relaying shall be provided to automatically deenergize any high voltage system component that has developed a ground fault. The continuity of the equipment grounding conductor shall be continuously monitored so as to deenergize automatically the high voltage feeder to the portable equipment upon loss of continuity of the equipment grounding conductor.\n\n(D) The grounding electrode to which the portable equipment system neutral impedance is connected shall be isolated from and separated in the ground by at least 6.1 m (20.0 ft) from any other system or equipment grounding electrode, and there shall be no direct connection between the grounding electrodes, such as buried pipe, fence, and so forth.\n\n(ii) All noncurrent-carrying metal parts of portable equipment and fixed equipment, including their associated fences, housings, enclosures, and supporting structures, shall be grounded. However, equipment that is guarded by location and isolated from ground need not be grounded. Additionally, pole-mounted distribution apparatus at a height exceeding 2.44 m (8.0 ft) above ground or grade level need not be grounded."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.19.38.5", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "S", "Subpart S\u2014Electrical", "", "\u00a7 1910.305 Wiring methods, components, and equipment for general use.", "OSHA", "", "", "", "(a)  Wiring methods.  The provisions of this section do not apply to conductors that are an integral part of factory-assembled equipment.\n\n(1)  General requirements.  (i) Metal raceways, cable trays, cable armor, cable sheath, enclosures, frames, fittings, and other metal noncurrent-carrying parts that are to serve as grounding conductors, with or without the use of supplementary equipment grounding conductors, shall be effectively bonded where necessary to ensure electrical continuity and the capacity to conduct safely any fault current likely to be imposed on them. Any nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating shall be removed at threads, contact points, and contact surfaces or be connected by means of fittings designed so as to make such removal unnecessary.\n\n(ii) Where necessary for the reduction of electrical noise (electromagnetic interference) of the grounding circuit, an equipment enclosure supplied by a branch circuit may be isolated from a raceway containing circuits supplying only that equipment by one or more listed nonmetallic raceway fittings located at the point of attachment of the raceway to the equipment enclosure. The metal raceway shall be supplemented by an internal insulated equipment grounding conductor installed to ground the equipment enclosure.\n\n(iii) No wiring systems of any type may be installed in ducts used to transport dust, loose stock, or flammable vapors. No wiring system of any type may be installed in any duct used for vapor removal or for ventilation of commercial-type cooking equipment, or in any shaft containing only such ducts.\n\n(2)  Temporary wiring.  Except as specifically modified in this paragraph, all other requirements of this subpart for permanent wiring shall also apply to temporary wiring installations.\n\n(i) Temporary electrical power and lighting installations of 600 volts, nominal, or less may be used only as follows:\n\n(A) During and for remodeling, maintenance, or repair of buildings, structures, or equipment, and similar activities;\n\n(B) For a period not to exceed 90 days for Christmas decorative lighting, carnivals, and similar purposes; or\n\n(C) For experimental or development work, and during emergencies.\n\n(ii) Temporary wiring shall be removed immediately upon completion of the project or purpose for which the wiring was installed.\n\n(iii) Temporary electrical installations of more than 600 volts may be used only during periods of tests, experiments, emergencies, or construction-like activities.\n\n(iv) The following requirements apply to feeders:\n\n(A) Feeders shall originate in an approved distribution center.\n\n(B) Conductors shall be run as multiconductor cord or cable assemblies. However, if installed as permitted in paragraph (a)(2)(i)(C) of this section, and if accessible only to qualified persons, feeders may be run as single insulated conductors.\n\n(v) The following requirements apply to branch circuits:\n\n(A) Branch circuits shall originate in an approved power outlet or panelboard.\n\n(B) Conductors shall be multiconductor cord or cable assemblies or open conductors. If run as open conductors, they shall be fastened at ceiling height every 3.05 m (10.0 ft).\n\n(C) No branch-circuit conductor may be laid on the floor.\n\n(D) Each branch circuit that supplies receptacles or fixed equipment shall contain a separate equipment grounding conductor if run as open conductors.\n\n(vi) Receptacles shall be of the grounding type. Unless installed in a continuous grounded metallic raceway or metallic covered cable, each branch circuit shall contain a separate equipment grounding conductor and all receptacles shall be electrically connected to the grounding conductor.\n\n(vii) No bare conductors nor earth returns may be used for the wiring of any temporary circuit.\n\n(viii) Suitable disconnecting switches or plug connectors shall be installed to permit the disconnection of all ungrounded conductors of each temporary circuit. Multiwire branch circuits shall be provided with a means to disconnect simultaneously all ungrounded conductors at the power outlet or panelboard where the branch circuit originated.\n\nCircuit breakers with their handles connected by approved handle ties are considered a single disconnecting means for the purpose of this requirement.\n\n(ix) All lamps for general illumination shall be protected from accidental contact or breakage by a suitable fixture or lampholder with a guard. Brass shell, paper-lined sockets, or other metal-cased sockets may not be used unless the shell is grounded.\n\n(x) Flexible cords and cables shall be protected from accidental damage, as might be caused, for example, by sharp corners, projections, and doorways or other pinch points.\n\n(xi) Cable assemblies and flexible cords and cables shall be supported in place at intervals that ensure that they will be protected from physical damage. Support shall be in the form of staples, cables ties, straps, or similar type fittings installed so as not to cause damage.\n\n(3)  Cable trays.  (i) Only the following wiring methods may be installed in cable tray systems: armored cable; electrical metallic tubing; electrical nonmetallic tubing; fire alarm cables; flexible metal conduit; flexible metallic tubing; instrumentation tray cable; intermediate metal conduit; liquidtight flexible metal conduit; liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit; metal-clad cable; mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed cable; multiconductor service-entrance cable; multiconductor underground feeder and branch-circuit cable; multipurpose and communications cables; nonmetallic-sheathed cable; power and control tray cable; power-limited tray cable; optical fiber cables; and other factory-assembled, multiconductor control, signal, or power cables that are specifically approved for installation in cable trays, rigid metal conduit, and rigid nonmetallic conduit.\n\n(ii) In industrial establishments where conditions of maintenance and supervision assure that only qualified persons will service the installed cable tray system, the following cables may also be installed in ladder, ventilated-trough, or ventilated-channel cable trays:\n\n(A) Single conductor cable; the cable shall be No. 1/0 or larger and shall be of a type listed and marked on the surface for use in cable trays; where Nos. 1/0 through 4/0 single conductor cables are installed in ladder cable tray, the maximum allowable rung spacing for the ladder cable tray shall be 229 mm (9 in.); where exposed to direct rays of the sun, cables shall be identified as being sunlight resistant;\n\n(B) Welding cables installed in dedicated cable trays;\n\n(C) Single conductors used as equipment grounding conductors; these conductors, which may be insulated, covered, or bare, shall be No. 4 or larger; and\n\n(D) Multiconductor cable, Type MV; where exposed to direct rays of the sun, the cable shall be identified as being sunlight resistant.\n\n(iii) Metallic cable trays may be used as equipment grounding conductors only where continuous maintenance and supervision ensure that qualified persons will service the installed cable tray system.\n\n(iv) Cable trays in hazardous (classified) locations may contain only the cable types permitted in such locations. (See \u00a7 1910.307.)\n\n(v) Cable tray systems may not be used in hoistways or where subjected to severe physical damage.\n\n(4)  Open wiring on insulators.  (i) Open wiring on insulators is only permitted on systems of 600 volts, nominal, or less for industrial or agricultural establishments, indoors or outdoors, in wet or dry locations, where subject to corrosive vapors, and for services.\n\n(ii) Conductors smaller than No. 8 shall be rigidly supported on noncombustible, nonabsorbent insulating materials and may not contact any other objects. Supports shall be installed as follows:\n\n(A) Within 152 mm (6 in.) from a tap or splice;\n\n(B) Within 305 mm (12 in.) of a dead-end connection to a lampholder or receptacle; and\n\n(C) At intervals not exceeding 1.37 m (4.5 ft), and at closer intervals sufficient to provide adequate support where likely to be disturbed.\n\n(iii) In dry locations, where not exposed to severe physical damage, conductors may be separately enclosed in flexible nonmetallic tubing. The tubing shall be in continuous lengths not exceeding 4.57 m (15.0 ft) and secured to the surface by straps at intervals not exceeding 1.37 m (4.5 ft).\n\n(iv) Open conductors shall be separated from contact with walls, floors, wood cross members, or partitions through which they pass by tubes or bushings of noncombustible, nonabsorbent insulating material. If the bushing is shorter than the hole, a waterproof sleeve of nonconductive material shall be inserted in the hole and an insulating bushing slipped into the sleeve at each end in such a manner as to keep the conductors absolutely out of contact with the sleeve. Each conductor shall be carried through a separate tube or sleeve.\n\n(v) Where open conductors cross ceiling joints and wall studs and are exposed to physical damage (for example, located within 2.13 m (7.0 ft) of the floor), they shall be protected.\n\n(b)  Cabinets, boxes, and fittings \u2014(1)  Conductors entering boxes, cabinets, or fittings.  (i) Conductors entering cutout boxes, cabinets, or fittings shall be protected from abrasion, and openings through which conductors enter shall be effectively closed.\n\n(ii) Unused openings in cabinets, boxes, and fittings shall be effectively closed.\n\n(iii) Where cable is used, each cable shall be secured to the cabinet, cutout box, or meter socket enclosure. However, where cable with an entirely nonmetallic sheath enters the top of a surface-mounted enclosure through one or more nonflexible raceways not less than 457 mm (18 in.) or more than 3.05 m (10.0 ft) in length, the cable need not be secured to the cabinet, box, or enclosure provided all of the following conditions are met:\n\n(A) Each cable is fastened within 305 mm (12 in.) of the outer end of the raceway, measured along the sheath;\n\n(B) The raceway extends directly above the enclosure and does not penetrate a structural ceiling;\n\n(C) A fitting is provided on each end of the raceway to protect the cable from abrasion, and the fittings remain accessible after installation;\n\n(D) The raceway is sealed or plugged at the outer end using approved means so as to prevent access to the enclosure through the raceway;\n\n(E) The cable sheath is continuous through the raceway and extends into the enclosure not less than 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) beyond the fitting;\n\n(F) The raceway is fastened at its outer end and at other points as necessary; and\n\n(G) Where installed as conduit or tubing, the allowable cable fill does not exceed that permitted for complete conduit or tubing systems.\n\n(2)  Covers and canopies.  (i) All pull boxes, junction boxes, and fittings shall be provided with covers identified for the purpose. If metal covers are used, they shall be grounded. In completed installations, each outlet box shall have a cover, faceplate, or fixture canopy. Covers of outlet boxes having holes through which flexible cord pendants pass shall be provided with bushings designed for the purpose or shall have smooth, well-rounded surfaces on which the cords may bear.\n\n(ii) Where a fixture canopy or pan is used, any combustible wall or ceiling finish exposed between the edge of the canopy or pan and the outlet box shall be covered with noncombustible material.\n\n(3)  Pull and junction boxes for systems over 600 volts, nominal.  In addition to other requirements in this section, the following requirements apply to pull and junction boxes for systems over 600 volts, nominal:\n\n(i) Boxes shall provide a complete enclosure for the contained conductors or cables.\n\n(ii) Boxes shall be closed by suitable covers securely fastened in place.\n\nUnderground box covers that weigh over 45.4 kg (100 lbs) meet this requirement.\n\n(iii) Covers for boxes shall be permanently marked \u201cHIGH VOLTAGE.\u201d The marking shall be on the outside of the box cover and shall be readily visible and legible.\n\n(c)  Switches \u2014(1)  Single-throw knife switches.  Single-throw knife switches shall be so placed that gravity will not tend to close them. Single-throw knife switches approved for use in the inverted position shall be provided with a locking device that will ensure that the blades remain in the open position when so set.\n\n(2)  Double-throw knife switches.  Double-throw knife switches may be mounted so that the throw will be either vertical or horizontal. However, if the throw is vertical, a locking device shall be provided to ensure that the blades remain in the open position when so set.\n\n(3)  Connection of switches.  (i) Single-throw knife switches and switches with butt contacts shall be connected so that the blades are deenergized when the switch is in the open position.\n\n(ii) Single-throw knife switches, molded-case switches, switches with butt contacts, and circuit breakers used as switches shall be connected so that the terminals supplying the load are deenergized when the switch is in the open position. However, blades and terminals supplying the load of a switch may be energized when the switch is in the open position where the switch is connected to circuits or equipment inherently capable of providing a backfeed source of power. For such installations, a permanent sign shall be installed on the switch enclosure or immediately adjacent to open switches that read, \u201cWARNING\u2014LOAD SIDE TERMINALS MAY BE ENERGIZED BY BACKFEED.\u201d\n\n(4)  Faceplates for flush-mounted snap switches.  Snap switches mounted in boxes shall have faceplates installed so as to completely cover the opening and seat against the finished surface.\n\n(5)  Grounding.  Snap switches, including dimmer switches, shall be effectively grounded and shall provide a means to ground metal faceplates, whether or not a metal faceplate is installed. However, if no grounding means exists within the snap-switch enclosure, or where the wiring method does not include or provide an equipment ground, a snap switch without a grounding connection is permitted for replacement purposes only. Such snap switches shall be provided with a faceplate of nonconducting, noncombustible material if they are located within reach of conducting floors or other conducting surfaces.\n\n(d)  Switchboards and panelboards \u2014(1)  Switchboards with exposed live parts.  Switchboards that have any exposed live parts shall be located in permanently dry locations and shall be accessible only to qualified persons.\n\n(2)  Panelboard enclosures.  Panelboards shall be mounted in cabinets, cutout boxes, or enclosures designed for the purpose and shall be dead front. However, panelboards other than the dead front externally-operable type are permitted where accessible only to qualified persons.\n\n(3)  Knife switches mounted in switchboards or panelboards.  Exposed blades of knife switches mounted in switchboards or panelboards shall be dead when open.\n\n(e)  Enclosures for damp or wet locations \u2014(1)  Cabinets, cutout boxes, fittings, boxes, and panelboard enclosures.  Cabinets, cutout boxes, fittings, boxes, and panelboard enclosures in damp or wet locations shall be installed so as to prevent moisture or water from entering and accumulating within the enclosures and shall be mounted so there is at least 6.35-mm (0.25-in.) airspace between the enclosure and the wall or other supporting surface. However, nonmetallic enclosures may be installed without the airspace on a concrete, masonry, tile, or similar surface. The enclosures shall be weatherproof in wet locations.\n\n(2)  Switches, circuit breakers, and switchboards.  Switches, circuit breakers, and switchboards installed in wet locations shall be enclosed in weatherproof enclosures.\n\n(f)  Conductors for general wiring \u2014(1)  Insulation.  All conductors used for general wiring shall be insulated unless otherwise permitted in this subpart.\n\n(2)  Type.  The conductor insulation shall be of a type that is approved for the voltage, operating temperature, and location of use.\n\n(3)  Distinguishable.  Insulated conductors shall be distinguishable by appropriate color or other suitable means as being grounded conductors, ungrounded conductors, or equipment grounding conductors.\n\n(g)  Flexible cords and cables \u2014(1)  Use of flexible cords and cables.  (i) Flexible cords and cables shall be approved for conditions of use and location.\n\n(ii) Flexible cords and cables may be used only for:\n\n(A) Pendants;\n\n(B) Wiring of fixtures;\n\n(C) Connection of portable lamps or appliances;\n\n(D) Portable and mobile signs;\n\n(E) Elevator cables;\n\n(F) Wiring of cranes and hoists;\n\n(G) Connection of stationary equipment to facilitate their frequent interchange;\n\n(H) Prevention of the transmission of noise or vibration;\n\n(I) Appliances where the fastening means and mechanical connections are designed to permit removal for maintenance and repair;\n\n(J) Data processing cables approved as a part of the data processing system;\n\n(K) Connection of moving parts; and\n\n(L) Temporary wiring as permitted in paragraph (a)(2) of this section.\n\n(iii) If used as permitted in paragraphs (g)(1)(ii)(C), (g)(1)(ii)(G), or (g)(1)(ii)(I) of this section, the flexible cord shall be equipped with an attachment plug and shall be energized from an approved receptacle outlet.\n\n(iv) Unless specifically permitted otherwise in paragraph (g)(1)(ii) of this section, flexible cords and cables may not be used:\n\n(A) As a substitute for the fixed wiring of a structure;\n\n(B) Where run through holes in walls, ceilings, or floors;\n\n(C) Where run through doorways, windows, or similar openings;\n\n(D) Where attached to building surfaces;\n\n(E) Where concealed behind building walls, ceilings, or floors; or\n\n(F) Where installed in raceways, except as otherwise permitted in this subpart.\n\n(v) Flexible cords used in show windows and showcases shall be Type S, SE, SEO, SEOO, SJ, SJE, SJEO, SJEOO, SJO, SJOO, SJT, SJTO, SJTOO, SO, SOO, ST, STO, or STOO, except for the wiring of chain-supported lighting fixtures and supply cords for portable lamps and other merchandise being displayed or exhibited.\n\n(2)  Identification, splices, and terminations.  (i) A conductor of a flexible cord or cable that is used as a grounded conductor or an equipment grounding conductor shall be distinguishable from other conductors. Types S, SC, SCE, SCT, SE, SEO, SEOO, SJ, SJE, SJEO, SJEOO, SJO, SJT, SJTO, SJTOO, SO, SOO, ST, STO, and STOO flexible cords and Types G, G-GC, PPE, and W flexible cables shall be durably marked on the surface at intervals not exceeding 610 mm (24 in.) with the type designation, size, and number of conductors.\n\n(ii) Flexible cords may be used only in continuous lengths without splice or tap. Hard-service cord and junior hard-service cord No. 14 and larger may be repaired if spliced so that the splice retains the insulation, outer sheath properties, and usage characteristics of the cord being spliced.\n\n(iii) Flexible cords and cables shall be connected to devices and fittings so that strain relief is provided that will prevent pull from being directly transmitted to joints or terminal screws.\n\n(h)  Portable cables over 600 volts, nominal.  This paragraph applies to portable cables used at more than 600 volts, nominal.\n\n(1)  Conductor construction.  Multiconductor portable cable for use in supplying power to portable or mobile equipment at over 600 volts, nominal, shall consist of No. 8 or larger conductors employing flexible stranding. However, the minimum size of the insulated ground-check conductor of Type G-GC cables shall be No. 10.\n\n(2)  Shielding.  Cables operated at over 2,000 volts shall be shielded for the purpose of confining the voltage stresses to the insulation.\n\n(3)  Equipment grounding conductors.  Grounding conductors shall be provided.\n\n(4)  Grounding shields.  All shields shall be grounded.\n\n(5)  Minimum bending radii.  The minimum bending radii for portable cables during installation and handling in service shall be adequate to prevent damage to the cable.\n\n(6)  Fittings.  Connectors used to connect lengths of cable in a run shall be of a type that lock firmly together. Provisions shall be made to prevent opening or closing these connectors while energized. Strain relief shall be provided at connections and terminations.\n\n(7)  Splices.  Portable cables may not be operated with splices unless the splices are of the permanent molded, vulcanized, or other approved type.\n\n(8)  Terminations.  Termination enclosures shall be suitably marked with a high voltage hazard warning, and terminations shall be accessible only to authorized and qualified employees.\n\n(i)  Fixture wires \u2014(1)  General.  Fixture wires shall be approved for the voltage, temperature, and location of use. A fixture wire which is used as a grounded conductor shall be identified.\n\n(2)  Uses permitted.  Fixture wires may be used only:\n\n(i) For installation in lighting fixtures and in similar equipment where enclosed or protected and not subject to bending or twisting in use; or\n\n(ii) For connecting lighting fixtures to the branch-circuit conductors supplying the fixtures.\n\n(3)  Uses not permitted.  Fixture wires may not be used as branch-circuit conductors except as permitted for Class 1 power limited circuits and for fire alarm circuits.\n\n(j)  Equipment for general use \u2014(1)  Lighting fixtures, lampholders, lamps, and receptacles.  (i) Fixtures, lampholders, lamps, rosettes, and receptacles may have no live parts normally exposed to employee contact. However, rosettes and cleat-type lampholders and receptacles located at least 2.44 m (8.0 ft) above the floor may have exposed terminals.\n\n(ii) Handlamps of the portable type supplied through flexible cords shall be equipped with a handle of molded composition or other material identified for the purpose, and a substantial guard shall be attached to the lampholder or the handle. Metal shell, paper-lined lampholders may not be used.\n\n(iii) Lampholders of the screw-shell type shall be installed for use as lampholders only. Where supplied by a circuit having a grounded conductor, the grounded conductor shall be connected to the screw shell. Lampholders installed in wet or damp locations shall be of the weatherproof type.\n\n(iv) Fixtures installed in wet or damp locations shall be identified for the purpose and shall be so constructed or installed that water cannot enter or accumulate in wireways, lampholders, or other electrical parts.\n\n(2)  Receptacles, cord connectors, and attachment plugs (caps).  (i) All 15- and 20-ampere attachment plugs and connectors shall be constructed so that there are no exposed current-carrying parts except the prongs, blades, or pins. The cover for wire terminations shall be a part that is essential for the operation of an attachment plug or connector (dead-front construction). Attachment plugs shall be installed so that their prongs, blades, or pins are not energized unless inserted into an energized receptacle. No receptacles may be installed so as to require an energized attachment plug as its source of supply.\n\n(ii) Receptacles, cord connectors, and attachment plugs shall be constructed so that no receptacle or cord connector will accept an attachment plug with a different voltage or current rating than that for which the device is intended. However, a 20-ampere T-slot receptacle or cord connector may accept a 15-ampere attachment plug of the same voltage rating.\n\n(iii) Nongrounding-type receptacles and connectors may not be used for grounding-type attachment plugs.\n\n(iv) A receptacle installed in a wet or damp location shall be suitable for the location.\n\n(v) A receptacle installed outdoors in a location protected from the weather or in other damp locations shall have an enclosure for the receptacle that is weatherproof when the receptacle is covered (attachment plug cap not inserted and receptacle covers closed).\n\nA receptacle is considered to be in a location protected from the weather when it is located under roofed open porches, canopies, marquees, or the like and where it will not be subjected to a beating rain or water runoff.\n\n(vi) A receptacle installed in a wet location where the product intended to be plugged into it is not attended while in use (for example, sprinkler system controllers, landscape lighting, and holiday lights) shall have an enclosure that is weatherproof with the attachment plug cap inserted or removed.\n\n(vii) A receptacle installed in a wet location where the product intended to be plugged into it will be attended while in use (for example, portable tools) shall have an enclosure that is weatherproof when the attachment plug cap is removed.\n\n(3)  Appliances.  (i) Appliances may have no live parts normally exposed to contact other than parts functioning as open-resistance heating elements, such as the heating elements of a toaster, which are necessarily exposed.\n\n(ii) Each appliance shall have a means to disconnect it from all ungrounded conductors. If an appliance is supplied by more than one source, the disconnecting means shall be grouped and identified.\n\n(iii) Each electric appliance shall be provided with a nameplate giving the identifying name and the rating in volts and amperes, or in volts and watts. If the appliance is to be used on a specific frequency or frequencies, it shall be so marked. Where motor overload protection external to the appliance is required, the appliance shall be so marked.\n\n(iv) Marking shall be located so as to be visible or easily accessible after installation.\n\n(4)  Motors.  This paragraph applies to motors, motor circuits, and controllers.\n\n(i) If specified in paragraph (j)(4) of this section that one piece of equipment shall be \u201cwithin sight of\u201d another piece of equipment, the piece of equipment shall be visible and not more than 15.24 m (50.0 ft) from the other.\n\n(ii) An individual disconnecting means shall be provided for each controller. A disconnecting means shall be located within sight of the controller location. However, a single disconnecting means may be located adjacent to a group of coordinated controllers mounted adjacent to each other on a multi-motor continuous process machine. The controller disconnecting means for motor branch circuits over 600 volts, nominal, may be out of sight of the controller, if the controller is marked with a warning label giving the location and identification of the disconnecting means that is to be locked in the open position.\n\n(iii) The disconnecting means shall disconnect the motor and the controller from all ungrounded supply conductors and shall be so designed that no pole can be operated independently.\n\n(iv) The disconnecting means shall plainly indicate whether it is in the open (off) or closed (on) position.\n\n(v) The disconnecting means shall be readily accessible. If more than one disconnect is provided for the same equipment, only one need be readily accessible.\n\n(vi) An individual disconnecting means shall be provided for each motor, but a single disconnecting means may be used for a group of motors under any one of the following conditions:\n\n(A) If a number of motors drive several parts of a single machine or piece of apparatus, such as a metal or woodworking machine, crane, or hoist;\n\n(B) If a group of motors is under the protection of one set of branch-circuit protective devices; or\n\n(C) If a group of motors is in a single room within sight of the location of the disconnecting means.\n\n(vii) Motors, motor-control apparatus, and motor branch-circuit conductors shall be protected against overheating due to motor overloads or failure to start, and against short-circuits or ground faults. These provisions do not require overload protection that will stop a motor where a shutdown is likely to introduce additional or increased hazards, as in the case of fire pumps, or where continued operation of a motor is necessary for a safe shutdown of equipment or process and motor overload sensing devices are connected to a supervised alarm.\n\n(viii) Where live parts of motors or controllers operating at over 150 volts to ground are guarded against accidental contact only by location, and where adjustment or other attendance may be necessary during the operation of the apparatus, suitable insulating mats or platforms shall be provided so that the attendant cannot readily touch live parts unless standing on the mats or platforms.\n\n(5)  Transformers.  (i) Paragraph (j)(5) of this section covers the installation of all transformers except the following:\n\n(A) Current transformers;\n\n(B) Dry-type transformers installed as a component part of other apparatus;\n\n(C) Transformers that are an integral part of an X-ray, high frequency, or electrostatic-coating apparatus;\n\n(D) Transformers used with Class 2 and Class 3 circuits, sign and outline lighting, electric discharge lighting, and power-limited fire-alarm circuits; and\n\n(E) Liquid-filled or dry-type transformers used for research, development, or testing, where effective safeguard arrangements are provided.\n\n(ii) The operating voltage of exposed live parts of transformer installations shall be indicated by signs or visible markings on the equipment or structure.\n\n(iii) Dry-type, high fire point liquid-insulated, and askarel-insulated transformers installed indoors and rated over 35kV shall be in a vault.\n\n(iv) Oil-insulated transformers installed indoors shall be installed in a vault.\n\n(v) Combustible material, combustible buildings and parts of buildings, fire escapes, and door and window openings shall be safeguarded from fires that may originate in oil-insulated transformers attached to or adjacent to a building or combustible material.\n\n(vi) Transformer vaults shall be constructed so as to contain fire and combustible liquids within the vault and to prevent unauthorized access. Locks and latches shall be so arranged that a vault door can be readily opened from the inside.\n\n(vii) Any pipe or duct system foreign to the electrical installation may not enter or pass through a transformer vault.\n\nPiping or other facilities provided for vault fire protection, or for transformer cooling, are not considered foreign to the electrical installation.\n\n(viii) Material may not be stored in transformer vaults.\n\n(6)  Capacitors.  (i) All capacitors, except surge capacitors or capacitors included as a component part of other apparatus, shall be provided with an automatic means of draining the stored charge after the capacitor is disconnected from its source of supply.\n\n(ii) The following requirements apply to capacitors installed on circuits operating at more than 600 volts, nominal:\n\n(A) Group-operated switches shall be used for capacitor switching and shall be capable of the following:\n\n( 1 ) Carrying continuously not less than 135 percent of the rated current of the capacitor installation;\n\n( 2 ) Interrupting the maximum continuous load current of each capacitor, capacitor bank, or capacitor installation that will be switched as a unit;\n\n( 3 ) Withstanding the maximum inrush current, including contributions from adjacent capacitor installations; and\n\n( 4 ) Carrying currents due to faults on the capacitor side of the switch;\n\n(B) A means shall be installed to isolate from all sources of voltage each capacitor, capacitor bank, or capacitor installation that will be removed from service as a unit. The isolating means shall provide a visible gap in the electric circuit adequate for the operating voltage;\n\n(C) Isolating or disconnecting switches (with no interrupting rating) shall be interlocked with the load interrupting device or shall be provided with prominently displayed caution signs to prevent switching load current; and\n\n(D) For series capacitors, the proper switching shall be assured by use of at least one of the following:\n\n( 1 ) Mechanically sequenced isolating and bypass switches;\n\n( 2 ) Interlocks; or\n\n( 3 ) Switching procedure prominently displayed at the switching location.\n\n(7)  Storage Batteries.  Provisions shall be made for sufficient diffusion and ventilation of gases from storage batteries to prevent the accumulation of explosive mixtures."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.19.38.6", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "S", "Subpart S\u2014Electrical", "", "\u00a7 1910.306 Specific purpose equipment and installations.", "OSHA", "", "", "", "(a)  Electric signs and outline lighting \u2014(1)  Disconnecting means.  (i) Each sign and outline lighting system, or feeder circuit or branch circuit supplying a sign or outline lighting system, shall be controlled by an externally operable switch or circuit breaker that will open all ungrounded conductors. However, a disconnecting means is not required for an exit directional sign located within a building or for cord-connected signs with an attachment plug.\n\n(ii) Signs and outline lighting systems located within fountains shall have the disconnect located at least 1.52 m (5.0 ft) from the inside walls of the fountain.\n\n(2)  Location.  (i) The disconnecting means shall be within sight of the sign or outline lighting system that it controls. Where the disconnecting means is out of the line of sight from any section that may be energized, the disconnecting means shall be capable of being locked in the open position.\n\n(ii) Signs or outline lighting systems operated by electronic or electromechanical controllers located external to the sign or outline lighting system may have a disconnecting means located within sight of the controller or in the same enclosure with the controller. The disconnecting means shall disconnect the sign or outline lighting system and the controller from all ungrounded supply conductors. It shall be designed so no pole can be operated independently and shall be capable of being locked in the open position.\n\n(iii) Doors or covers giving access to uninsulated parts of indoor signs or outline lighting exceeding 600 volts and accessible to other than qualified persons shall either be provided with interlock switches to disconnect the primary circuit or shall be so fastened that the use of other than ordinary tools will be necessary to open them.\n\n(b)  Cranes and hoists.  This paragraph applies to the installation of electric equipment and wiring used in connection with cranes, monorail hoists, hoists, and all runways.\n\n(1)  Disconnecting means for runway conductors.  A disconnecting means shall be provided between the runway contact conductors and the power supply. Such disconnecting means shall consist of a motor-circuit switch, circuit breaker, or molded case switch. The disconnecting means shall open all ungrounded conductors simultaneously and shall be:\n\n(i) Readily accessible and operable from the ground or floor level;\n\n(ii) Arranged to be locked in the open position; and\n\n(iii) Placed within view of the runway contact conductors.\n\n(2)  Disconnecting means for cranes and monorail hoists.  (i) Except as provided in paragraph (b)(2)(iv) of this section, a motor-circuit switch, molded case switch, or circuit breaker shall be provided in the leads from the runway contact conductors or other power supply on all cranes and monorail hoists.\n\n(ii) The disconnecting means shall be capable of being locked in the open position.\n\n(iii) Means shall be provided at the operating station to open the power circuit to all motors of the crane or monorail hoist where the disconnecting means is not readily accessible from the crane or monorail hoist operating station.\n\n(iv) The disconnecting means may be omitted where a monorail hoist or hand-propelled crane bridge installation meets all of the following conditions:\n\n(A) The unit is controlled from the ground or floor level;\n\n(B) The unit is within view of the power supply disconnecting means; and\n\n(C) No fixed work platform has been provided for servicing the unit.\n\n(3)  Limit switch.  A limit switch or other device shall be provided to prevent the load block from passing the safe upper limit of travel of any hoisting mechanism.\n\n(4)  Clearance.  The dimension of the working space in the direction of access to live parts that may require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while alive shall be a minimum of 762 mm (2.5 ft). Where controls are enclosed in cabinets, the doors shall either open at least 90 degrees or be removable.\n\n(c)  Elevators, dumbwaiters, escalators, moving walks, wheelchair lifts, and stairway chair lifts.  The following requirements apply to elevators, dumbwaiters, escalators, moving walks, wheelchair lifts, and stairway chair lifts.\n\n(1)  Disconnecting means.  Elevators, dumbwaiters, escalators, moving walks, wheelchair lifts, and stairway chair lifts shall have a single means for disconnecting all ungrounded main power supply conductors for each unit.\n\n(2)  Control panels.  Control panels not located in the same space as the drive machine shall be located in cabinets with doors or panels capable of being locked closed.\n\n(3)  Type.  The disconnecting means shall be an enclosed externally operable fused motor circuit switch or circuit breaker capable of being locked in the open position. The disconnecting means shall be a listed device.\n\n(4)  Operation.  No provision may be made to open or close this disconnecting means from any other part of the premises. If sprinklers are installed in hoistways, machine rooms, or machinery spaces, the disconnecting means may automatically open the power supply to the affected elevators prior to the application of water. No provision may be made to close this disconnecting means automatically (that is, power may only be restored by manual means).\n\n(5)  Location.  The disconnecting means shall be located where it is readily accessible to qualified persons.\n\n(i) On elevators without generator field control, the disconnecting means shall be located within sight of the motor controller. Driving machines or motion and operation controllers not within sight of the disconnecting means shall be provided with a manually operated switch installed in the control circuit adjacent to the equipment in order to prevent starting. Where the driving machine is located in a remote machinery space, a single disconnecting means for disconnecting all ungrounded main power supply conductors shall be provided and be capable of being locked in the open position.\n\n(ii) On elevators with generator field control, the disconnecting means shall be located within sight of the motor controller for the driving motor of the motor-generator set. Driving machines, motor-generator sets, or motion and operation controllers not within sight of the disconnecting means shall be provided with a manually operated switch installed in the control circuit to prevent starting. The manually operated switch shall be installed adjacent to this equipment. Where the driving machine or the motor-generator set is located in a remote machinery space, a single means for disconnecting all ungrounded main power supply conductors shall be provided and be capable of being locked in the open position.\n\n(iii) On escalators and moving walks, the disconnecting means shall be installed in the space where the controller is located.\n\n(iv) On wheelchair lifts and stairway chair lifts, the disconnecting means shall be located within sight of the motor controller.\n\n(6)  Identification and signs.  (i) Where there is more than one driving machine in a machine room, the disconnecting means shall be numbered to correspond to the identifying number of the driving machine that they control.\n\n(ii) The disconnecting means shall be provided with a sign to identify the location of the supply-side overcurrent protective device.\n\n(7)  Single-car and multicar installations.  On single-car and multicar installations, equipment receiving electrical power from more than one source shall be provided with a disconnecting means for each source of electrical power. The disconnecting means shall be within sight of the equipment served.\n\n(8)  Warning sign for multiple disconnecting means.  A warning sign shall be mounted on or next to the disconnecting means where multiple disconnecting means are used and parts of the controllers remain energized from a source other than the one disconnected. The sign shall be clearly legible and shall read \u201cWARNING\u2014PARTS OF THE CONTROLLER ARE NOT DEENERGIZED BY THIS SWITCH.\u201d\n\n(9)  Interconnection between multicar controllers.  A warning sign worded as required in paragraph (c)(8) of this section shall be mounted on or next to the disconnecting means where interconnections between controllers are necessary for the operation of the system on multicar installations that remain energized from a source other than the one disconnected.\n\n(10)  Motor controllers.  Motor controllers may be located outside the spaces otherwise required by paragraph (c) of this section, provided they are in enclosures with doors or removable panels capable of being locked closed and the disconnecting means is located adjacent to or is an integral part of the motor controller. Motor controller enclosures for escalators or moving walks may be located in the balustrade on the side located away from the moving steps or moving treadway. If the disconnecting means is an integral part of the motor controller, it shall be operable without opening the enclosure.\n\n(d)  Electric welders\u2014disconnecting means \u2014(1)  Arc welders.  A disconnecting means shall be provided in the supply circuit for each arc welder that is not equipped with a disconnect mounted as an integral part of the welder. The disconnecting means shall be a switch or circuit breaker, and its rating may not be less than that necessary to accommodate overcurrent protection.\n\n(2)  Resistance welders.  A switch or circuit breaker shall be provided by which each resistance welder and its control equipment can be disconnected from the supply circuit. The ampere rating of this disconnecting means may not be less than the supply conductor ampacity. The supply circuit switch may be used as the welder disconnecting means where the circuit supplies only one welder.\n\n(e)  Information technology equipment \u2014(1)  Disconnecting means.  A means shall be provided to disconnect power to all electronic equipment in an information technology equipment room. There shall also be a similar means to disconnect the power to all dedicated heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning (HVAC) systems serving the room and to cause all required fire/smoke dampers to close.\n\n(2)  Grouping.  The control for these disconnecting means shall be grouped and identified and shall be readily accessible at the principal exit doors. A single means to control both the electronic equipment and HVAC system is permitted.\n\n(3)  Exception.  Integrated electrical systems covered by \u00a7 1910.308(g) need not have the disconnecting means required by paragraph (e)(1) of this section.\n\n(f)  X-Ray equipment.  This paragraph applies to X-ray equipment.\n\n(1)  Disconnecting means.  (i) A disconnecting means shall be provided in the supply circuit. The disconnecting means shall be operable from a location readily accessible from the X-ray control. For equipment connected to a 120-volt branch circuit of 30 amperes or less, a grounding-type attachment plug cap and receptacle of proper rating may serve as a disconnecting means.\n\n(ii) If more than one piece of equipment is operated from the same high-voltage circuit, each piece or each group of equipment as a unit shall be provided with a high-voltage switch or equivalent disconnecting means. The disconnecting means shall be constructed, enclosed, or located so as to avoid contact by employees with its live parts.\n\n(2)  Control.  The following requirements apply to industrial and commercial laboratory equipment.\n\n(i) Radiographic and fluoroscopic-type equipment shall be effectively enclosed or shall have interlocks that deenergize the equipment automatically to prevent ready access to live current-carrying parts.\n\n(ii) Diffraction- and irradiation-type equipment shall have a pilot light, readable meter deflection, or equivalent means to indicate when the equipment is energized, unless the equipment or installation is effectively enclosed or is provided with interlocks to prevent access to live current-carrying parts during operation.\n\n(g)  Induction and dielectric heating equipment.  This paragraph applies to induction and dielectric heating equipment and accessories for industrial and scientific applications, but not for medical or dental applications or for appliances.\n\n(1)  Guarding and grounding.  (i) The converting apparatus (including the dc line) and high-frequency electric circuits (excluding the output circuits and remote-control circuits) shall be completely contained within enclosures of noncombustible material.\n\n(ii) All panel controls shall be of dead-front construction.\n\n(iii) Doors or detachable panels shall be employed for internal access. Where doors are used giving access to voltages from 500 to 1000 volts ac or dc, either door locks shall be provided or interlocks shall be installed. Where doors are used giving access to voltages of over 1000 volts ac or dc, either mechanical lockouts with a disconnecting means to prevent access until circuit parts within the cubicle are deenergized, or both door interlocking and mechanical door locks, shall be provided. Detachable panels not normally used for access to such parts shall be fastened in a manner that will make them difficult to remove (for example, by requiring the use of tools).\n\n(iv) Warning labels or signs that read \u201cDANGER\u2014HIGH VOLTAGE\u2014KEEP OUT\u201d shall be attached to the equipment and shall be plainly visible where persons might contact energized parts when doors are opened or closed or when panels are removed from compartments containing over 250 volts ac or dc.\n\n(v) Induction and dielectric heating equipment shall be protected as follows:\n\n(A) Protective cages or adequate shielding shall be used to guard work applicators other than induction heating coils.\n\n(B) Induction heating coils shall be protected by insulation or refractory materials or both.\n\n(C) Interlock switches shall be used on all hinged access doors, sliding panels, or other such means of access to the applicator, unless the applicator is an induction heating coil at dc ground potential or operating at less than 150 volts ac.\n\n(D) Interlock switches shall be connected in such a manner as to remove all power from the applicator when any one of the access doors or panels is open.\n\n(vi) A readily accessible disconnecting means shall be provided by which each heating equipment can be isolated from its supply circuit. The ampere rating of this disconnecting means may not be less than the nameplate current rating of the equipment. The supply circuit disconnecting means is permitted as a heating equipment disconnecting means where the circuit supplies only one piece of equipment.\n\n(2)  Remote control.  (i) If remote controls are used for applying power, a selector switch shall be provided and interlocked to provide power from only one control point at a time.\n\n(ii) Switches operated by foot pressure shall be provided with a shield over the contact button to avoid accidental closing of the switch.\n\n(h)  Electrolytic cells.  This paragraph applies to the installation of the electrical components and accessory equipment of electrolytic cells, electrolytic cell lines, and process power supply for the production of aluminum, cadmium, chlorine, copper, fluorine, hydrogen peroxide, magnesium, sodium, sodium chlorate, and zinc. Cells used as a source of electric energy and for electroplating processes and cells used for production of hydrogen are not covered by this paragraph.\n\n(1)  Application.  Installations covered by paragraph (h) of this section shall comply with all applicable provisions of this subpart, except as follows:\n\n(i) Overcurrent protection of electrolytic cell dc process power circuits need not comply with the requirements of \u00a7 1910.304(f);\n\n(ii) Equipment located or used within the cell line working zone or associated with the cell line dc power circuits need not comply with the provisions of \u00a7 1910.304(g); and\n\n(iii) Electrolytic cells, cell line conductors, cell line attachments, and the wiring of auxiliary equipment and devices within the cell line working zone need not comply with the provisions of \u00a7 1910.303 or \u00a7 1910.304(b) and (c).\n\n(2)  Disconnecting means.  If more than one dc cell line process power supply serves the same cell line, a disconnecting means shall be provided on the cell line circuit side of each power supply to disconnect it from the cell line circuit. Removable links or removable conductors may be used as the disconnecting means.\n\n(3)  Portable electric equipment.  (i) The frames and enclosures of portable electric equipment used within the cell line working zone may not be grounded, unless the cell line circuit voltage does not exceed 200 volts DC or the frames are guarded.\n\n(ii) Ungrounded portable electric equipment shall be distinctively marked and shall employ plugs and receptacles of a configuration that prevents connection of this equipment to grounding receptacles and that prevents inadvertent interchange of ungrounded and grounded portable electric equipment.\n\n(4)  Power supply circuits and receptacles for portable electric equipment.  (i) Circuits supplying power to ungrounded receptacles for hand-held, cord- and plug-connected equipment shall meet the following requirements:\n\n(A) The circuits shall be electrically isolated from any distribution system supplying areas other than the cell line working zone and shall be ungrounded;\n\n(B) The circuits shall be supplied through isolating transformers with primaries operating at not more than 600 volts between conductors and protected with proper overcurrent protection;\n\n(C) The secondary voltage of the isolating transformers may not exceed 300 volts between conductors; and\n\n(D) All circuits supplied from the secondaries shall be ungrounded and shall have an approved overcurrent device of proper rating in each conductor.\n\n(ii) Receptacles and their mating plugs for ungrounded equipment may not have provision for a grounding conductor and shall be of a configuration that prevents their use for equipment required to be grounded.\n\n(iii) Receptacles on circuits supplied by an isolating transformer with an ungrounded secondary:\n\n(A) Shall have a distinctive configuration;\n\n(B) Shall be distinctively marked; and\n\n(C) May not be used in any other location in the facility.\n\n(5)  Fixed and portable electric equipment.  (i) The following need not be grounded:\n\n(A) AC systems supplying fixed and portable electric equipment within the cell line working zone; and\n\n(B) Exposed conductive surfaces, such as electric equipment housings, cabinets, boxes, motors, raceways and the like that are within the cell line working zone.\n\n(ii) Auxiliary electric equipment, such as motors, transducers, sensors, control devices, and alarms, mounted on an electrolytic cell or other energized surface shall be connected to the premises wiring systems by any of the following means:\n\n(A) Multiconductor hard usage or extra hard usage flexible cord;\n\n(B) Wire or cable in suitable nonmetallic raceways or cable trays; or\n\n(C) Wire or cable in suitable metal raceways or metal cable trays installed with insulating breaks such that they will not cause a potentially hazardous electrical condition.\n\n(iii) Fixed electric equipment may be bonded to the energized conductive surfaces of the cell line, its attachments, or auxiliaries. If fixed electric equipment is mounted on an energized conductive surface, it shall be bonded to that surface.\n\n(6)  Auxiliary nonelectrical connections.  Auxiliary nonelectrical connections such as air hoses, water hoses, and the like, to an electrolytic cell, its attachments, or auxiliary equipment may not have continuous conductive reinforcing wire, armor, braids, or the like. Hoses shall be of a nonconductive material.\n\n(7)  Cranes and hoists.  (i) The conductive surfaces of cranes and hoists that enter the cell line working zone need not be grounded. The portion of an overhead crane or hoist that contacts an energized electrolytic cell or energized attachments shall be insulated from ground.\n\n(ii) Remote crane or hoist controls that may introduce hazardous electrical conditions into the cell line working zone shall employ one or more of the following systems:\n\n(A) Isolated and ungrounded control circuit;\n\n(B) Nonconductive rope operator;\n\n(C) Pendant pushbutton with nonconductive supporting means and with nonconductive surfaces or ungrounded exposed conductive surfaces; or\n\n(D) Radio.\n\n(i)  Electrically driven or controlled irrigation machines \u2014(1)  Lightning protection.  If an irrigation machine has a stationary point, a grounding electrode system shall be connected to the machine at the stationary point for lightning protection.\n\n(2)  Disconnecting means.  (i) The main disconnecting means for a center pivot irrigation machine shall be located at the point of connection of electrical power to the machine or shall be visible and not more than 15.2 m (50 ft) from the machine.\n\n(ii) The disconnecting means shall be readily accessible and capable of being locked in the open position.\n\n(iii) A disconnecting means shall be provided for each motor and controller.\n\n(j)  Swimming pools, fountains, and similar installations.  This paragraph applies to electric wiring for and equipment in or adjacent to all swimming, wading, therapeutic, and decorative pools and fountains; hydro-massage bathtubs, whether permanently installed or storable; and metallic auxiliary equipment, such as pumps, filters, and similar equipment. Therapeutic pools in health care facilities are exempt from these provisions.\n\n(1)  Receptacles.  (i) A single receptacle of the locking and grounding type that provides power for a permanently installed swimming pool recirculating pump motor may be located not less than 1.52 m (5 ft) from the inside walls of a pool. All other receptacles on the property shall be located at least 3.05 m (10 ft) from the inside walls of a pool.\n\n(ii) Receptacles that are located within 4.57 m (15 ft), or 6.08 m (20 ft) if the installation was built after August 13, 2007, of the inside walls of the pool shall be protected by ground-fault circuit interrupters.\n\n(iii) Where a pool is installed permanently at a dwelling unit, at least one 125-volt, 15- or 20-ampere receptacle on a general-purpose branch circuit shall be located a minimum of 3.05 m (10 ft) and not more than 6.08 m (20 ft) from the inside wall of the pool. This receptacle shall be located not more than 1.98 m (6.5 ft) above the floor, platform, or grade level serving the pool.\n\nIn determining these dimensions, the distance to be measured is the shortest path the supply cord of an appliance connected to the receptacle would follow without piercing a floor, wall, or ceiling of a building or other effective permanent barrier.\n\n(2)  Lighting fixtures, lighting outlets, and ceiling suspended (paddle) fans.  (i) In outdoor pool areas, lighting fixtures, lighting outlets, and ceiling-suspended (paddle) fans may not be installed over the pool or over the area extending 1.52 m (5 ft) horizontally from the inside walls of a pool unless no part of the lighting fixture of a ceiling-suspended (paddle) fan is less than 3.66 m (12 ft) above the maximum water level. However, a lighting fixture or lighting outlet that was installed before April 16, 1981, may be located less than 1.52 m (5 ft) measured horizontally from the inside walls of a pool if it is at least 1.52 m (5 ft) above the surface of the maximum water level and is rigidly attached to the existing structure. It shall also be protected by a ground-fault circuit interrupter installed in the branch circuit supplying the fixture.\n\n(ii) Lighting fixtures and lighting outlets installed in the area extending between 1.52 m (5 ft) and 3.05 m (10 ft) horizontally from the inside walls of a pool shall be protected by a ground-fault circuit interrupter unless installed 1.52 m (5 ft) above the maximum water level and rigidly attached to the structure adjacent to or enclosing the pool.\n\n(3)  Cord- and plug-connected equipment.  Flexible cords used with the following equipment may not exceed 0.9 m (3 ft) in length and shall have a copper equipment grounding conductor with a grounding-type attachment plug:\n\n(i) Cord- and plug-connected lighting fixtures installed within 4.88 m (16 ft) of the water surface of permanently installed pools; and\n\n(ii) Other cord- and plug-connected, fixed or stationary equipment used with permanently installed pools.\n\n(4)  Underwater equipment.  (i) A ground-fault circuit interrupter shall be installed in the branch circuit supplying underwater fixtures operating at more than 15 volts. Equipment installed underwater shall be identified for the purpose.\n\n(ii) No underwater lighting fixtures may be installed for operation at over 150 volts between conductors.\n\n(iii) A lighting fixture facing upward shall have the lens adequately guarded to prevent contact by any person.\n\n(5)  Fountains.  All electric equipment, including power supply cords, operating at more than 15 volts and used with fountains shall be protected by ground-fault circuit interrupters.\n\n(k)  Carnivals, circuses, fairs, and similar events.  This paragraph covers the installation of portable wiring and equipment, including wiring in or on all structures, for carnivals, circuses, exhibitions, fairs, traveling attractions, and similar events.\n\n(1)  Protection of electric equipment.  Electric equipment and wiring methods in or on rides, concessions, or other units shall be provided with mechanical protection where such equipment or wiring methods are subject to physical damage.\n\n(2)  Installation.  (i) Services shall be installed in accordance with applicable requirements of this subpart, and, in addition, shall comply with the following:\n\n(A) Service equipment may not be installed in a location that is accessible to unqualified persons, unless the equipment is lockable; and\n\n(B) Service equipment shall be mounted on solid backing and installed so as to be protected from the weather, unless the equipment is of weatherproof construction.\n\n(ii) Amusement rides and amusement attractions shall be maintained not less than 4.57 m (15 ft) in any direction from overhead conductors operating at 600 volts or less, except for the conductors supplying the amusement ride or attraction. Amusement rides or attractions may not be located under or within 4.57 m (15 ft) horizontally of conductors operating in excess of 600 volts.\n\n(iii) Flexible cords and cables shall be listed for extra-hard usage. When used outdoors, flexible cords and cables shall also be listed for wet locations and shall be sunlight resistant.\n\n(iv) Single conductor cable shall be size No. 2 or larger.\n\n(v) Open conductors are prohibited except as part of a listed assembly or festoon lighting installed in accordance with \u00a7 1910.304(c).\n\n(vi) Flexible cords and cables shall be continuous without splice or tap between boxes or fittings. Cord connectors may not be laid on the ground unless listed for wet locations. Connectors and cable connections may not be placed in audience traffic paths or within areas accessible to the public unless guarded.\n\n(vii) Wiring for an amusement ride, attraction, tent, or similar structure may not be supported by another ride or structure unless specifically identified for the purpose.\n\n(viii) Flexible cords and cables run on the ground, where accessible to the public, shall be covered with approved nonconductive mats. Cables and mats shall be arranged so as not to present a tripping hazard.\n\n(ix) A box or fitting shall be installed at each connection point, outlet, switch point, or junction point.\n\n(3)  Inside tents and concessions.  Electrical wiring for temporary lighting, where installed inside of tents and concessions, shall be securely installed, and, where subject to physical damage, shall be provided with mechanical protection. All temporary lamps for general illumination shall be protected from accidental breakage by a suitable fixture or lampholder with a guard.\n\n(4)  Portable distribution and termination boxes.  Employers may only use portable distribution and termination boxes that meet the following requirements:\n\n(i) Boxes shall be designed so that no live parts are exposed to accidental contact. Where installed outdoors, the box shall be of weatherproof construction and mounted so that the bottom of the enclosure is not less than 152 mm (6 in.) above the ground;\n\n(ii) Busbars shall have an ampere rating not less than the overcurrent device supplying the feeder supplying the box. Busbar connectors shall be provided where conductors terminate directly on busbars;\n\n(iii) Receptacles shall have overcurrent protection installed within the box. The overcurrent protection may not exceed the ampere rating of the receptacle, except as permitted in \u00a7 1910.305(j)(4) for motor loads;\n\n(iv) Where single-pole connectors are used, they shall comply with the following:\n\n(A) Where ac single-pole portable cable connectors are used, they shall be listed and of the locking type. Where paralleled sets of current-carrying single-pole separable connectors are provided as input devices, they shall be prominently labeled with a warning indicating the presence of internal parallel connections. The use of single-pole separable connectors shall comply with at least one of the following conditions:\n\n( 1 ) Connection and disconnection of connectors are only possible where the supply connectors are interlocked to the source and it is not possible to connect or disconnect connectors when the supply is energized; or\n\n( 2 ) Line connectors are of the listed sequential-interlocking type so that load connectors are connected in the following sequence:\n\n( i ) Equipment grounding conductor connection;\n\n( ii ) Grounded circuit-conductor connection, if provided; and\n\n( iii ) Ungrounded conductor connection; and so that disconnection is in the reverse order; or\n\n( 3 ) A caution notice is provided adjacent to the line connectors indicating that plug connection must be in the following sequence:\n\n( i ) Equipment grounding conductor connection;\n\n( ii ) Grounded circuit-conductor connection, if provided; and\n\n( iii ) Ungrounded conductor connection; and indicating that disconnection is in the reverse order; and\n\n(B) Single-pole separable connectors used in portable professional motion picture and television equipment may be interchangeable for ac or dc use or for different current ratings on the same premises only if they are listed for ac/dc use and marked to identify the system to which they are connected;\n\n(v) Overcurrent protection of equipment and conductors shall be provided; and\n\n(vi) The following equipment connected to the same source shall be bonded:\n\n(A) Metal raceways and metal sheathed cable;\n\n(B) Metal enclosures of electrical equipment; and\n\n(C) Metal frames and metal parts of rides, concessions, trailers, trucks, or other equipment that contain or support electrical equipment.\n\n(5)  Disconnecting means.  (i) Each ride and concession shall be provided with a fused disconnect switch or circuit breaker located within sight and within 1.83 m (6 ft) of the operator's station.\n\n(ii) The disconnecting means shall be readily accessible to the operator, including when the ride is in operation.\n\n(iii) Where accessible to unqualified persons, the enclosure for the switch or circuit breaker shall be of the lockable type.\n\n(iv) A shunt trip device that opens the fused disconnect or circuit breaker when a switch located in the ride operator's console is closed is a permissible method of opening the circuit."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.19.38.7", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "S", "Subpart S\u2014Electrical", "", "\u00a7 1910.307 Hazardous (classified) locations.", "OSHA", "", "", "", "(a)  Scope \u2014(1)  Applicability.  This section covers the requirements for electric equipment and wiring in locations that are classified depending on the properties of the flammable vapors, liquids or gases, or combustible dusts or fibers that may be present therein and the likelihood that a flammable or combustible concentration or quantity is present. Hazardous (classified) locations may be found in occupancies such as, but not limited to, the following: aircraft hangars, gasoline dispensing and service stations, bulk storage plants for gasoline or other volatile flammable liquids, paint-finishing process plants, health care facilities, agricultural or other facilities where excessive combustible dusts may be present, marinas, boat yards, and petroleum and chemical processing plants. Each room, section or area shall be considered individually in determining its classification.\n\n(2)  Classifications.  (i) These hazardous (classified) locations are assigned the following designations:\n\n(A) Class I, Division 1\n\n(B) Class I, Division 2\n\n(C) Class I, Zone 0\n\n(D) Class I, Zone 1\n\n(E) Class I, Zone 2\n\n(F) Class II, Division 1\n\n(G) Class II, Division 2\n\n(H) Class III, Division 1\n\n(I) Class III, Division 2\n\n(ii) For definitions of these locations, see \u00a7 1910.399.\n\n(3)  Other sections of this subpart.  All applicable requirements in this subpart apply to hazardous (classified) locations unless modified by provisions of this section.\n\n(4)  Division and zone classification.  In Class I locations, an installation must be classified as using the division classification system meeting paragraphs (c), (d), (e), and (f) of this section or using the zone classification system meeting paragraph (g) of this section. In Class II and Class III locations, an installation must be classified using the division classification system meeting paragraphs (c), (d), (e), and (f) of this section.\n\n(b)  Documentation.  All areas designated as hazardous (classified) locations under the Class and Zone system and areas designated under the Class and Division system established after August 13, 2007 shall be properly documented. This documentation shall be available to those authorized to design, install, inspect, maintain, or operate electric equipment at the location.\n\n(c)  Electrical installations.  Equipment, wiring methods, and installations of equipment in hazardous (classified) locations shall be intrinsically safe, approved for the hazardous (classified) location, or safe for the hazardous (classified) location. Requirements for each of these options are as follows:\n\n(1)  Intrinsically safe.  Equipment and associated wiring approved as intrinsically safe is permitted in any hazardous (classified) location for which it is approved;\n\n(2)  Approved for the hazardous (classified) location.  (i) Equipment shall be approved not only for the class of location, but also for the ignitable or combustible properties of the specific gas, vapor, dust, or fiber that will be present.\n\nNFPA 70, the National Electrical Code, lists or defines hazardous gases, vapors, and dusts by \u201cGroups\u201d characterized by their ignitable or combustible properties.\n\n(ii) Equipment shall be marked to show the class, group, and operating temperature or temperature range, based on operation in a 40-degree C ambient, for which it is approved. The temperature marking may not exceed the ignition temperature of the specific gas or vapor to be encountered. However, the following provisions modify this marking requirement for specific equipment:\n\n(A) Equipment of the nonheat-producing type, such as junction boxes, conduit, and fittings, and equipment of the heat-producing type having a maximum temperature not more than 100 \u00b0C (212 \u00b0F) need not have a marked operating temperature or temperature range;\n\n(B) Fixed lighting fixtures marked for use in Class I, Division 2 or Class II, Division 2 locations only need not be marked to indicate the group;\n\n(C) Fixed general-purpose equipment in Class I locations, other than lighting fixtures, that is acceptable for use in Class I, Division 2 locations need not be marked with the class, group, division, or operating temperature;\n\n(D) Fixed dust-tight equipment, other than lighting fixtures, that is acceptable for use in Class II, Division 2 and Class III locations need not be marked with the class, group, division, or operating temperature; and\n\n(E) Electric equipment suitable for ambient temperatures exceeding 40 \u00b0C (104 \u00b0F) shall be marked with both the maximum ambient temperature and the operating temperature or temperature range at that ambient temperature; and\n\n(3)  Safe for the hazardous (classified) location.  Equipment that is safe for the location shall be of a type and design that the employer demonstrates will provide protection from the hazards arising from the combustibility and flammability of vapors, liquids, gases, dusts, or fibers involved.\n\nThe National Electrical Code, NFPA 70, contains guidelines for determining the type and design of equipment and installations that will meet this requirement. Those guidelines address electric wiring, equipment, and systems installed in hazardous (classified) locations and contain specific provisions for the following: wiring methods, wiring connections; conductor insulation, flexible cords, sealing and drainage, transformers, capacitors, switches, circuit breakers, fuses, motor controllers, receptacles, attachment plugs, meters, relays, instruments, resistors, generators, motors, lighting fixtures, storage battery charging equipment, electric cranes, electric hoists and similar equipment, utilization equipment, signaling systems, alarm systems, remote control systems, local loud speaker and communication systems, ventilation piping, live parts, lightning surge protection, and grounding.\n\n(d)  Conduits.  All conduits shall be threaded and shall be made wrench-tight. Where it is impractical to make a threaded joint tight, a bonding jumper shall be utilized.\n\n(e)  Equipment in Division 2 locations.  Equipment that has been approved for a Division 1 location may be installed in a Division 2 location of the same class and group. General-purpose equipment or equipment in general-purpose enclosures may be installed in Division 2 locations if the employer can demonstrate that the equipment does not constitute a source of ignition under normal operating conditions.\n\n(f)  Protection techniques.  The following are acceptable protection techniques for electric and electronic equipment in hazardous (classified) locations.\n\n(1)  Explosionproof apparatus.  This protection technique is permitted for equipment in the Class I, Division 1 and 2 locations for which it is approved.\n\n(2)  Dust ignitionproof.  This protection technique is permitted for equipment in the Class II, Division 1 and 2 locations for which it is approved.\n\n(3)  Dust-tight.  This protection technique is permitted for equipment in the Class II, Division 2 and Class III locations for which it is approved.\n\n(4)  Purged and pressurized.  This protection technique is permitted for equipment in any hazardous (classified) location for which it is approved.\n\n(5)  Nonincendive circuit.  This protection technique is permitted for equipment in Class I, Division 2; Class II, Division 2; or Class III, Division 1or 2 locations.\n\n(6)  Nonincendive equipment.  This protection technique is permitted for equipment in Class I, Division 2; Class II, Division 2; or Class III, Division 1 or 2 locations.\n\n(7)  Nonincendive component.  This protection technique is permitted for equipment in Class I, Division 2; Class II, Division 2; or Class III, Division 1 or 2 locations.\n\n(8)  Oil immersion.  This protection technique is permitted for current-interrupting contacts in Class I, Division 2 locations as described in the Subpart.\n\n(9)  Hermetically sealed.  This protection technique is permitted for equipment in Class I, Division 2; Class II, Division 2; and Class III, Division 1 or 2 locations.\n\n(10)  Other protection techniques.  Any other protection technique that meets paragraph (c) of this section is acceptable in any hazardous (classified) location.\n\n(g)  Class I, Zone 0, 1, and 2 locations \u2014(1)  Scope.  Employers may use the zone classification system as an alternative to the division classification system for electric and electronic equipment and wiring for all voltage in Class I, Zone 0, Zone 1, and Zone 2 hazardous (classified) locations where fire or explosion hazards may exist due to flammable gases, vapors, or liquids.\n\n(2)  Location and general requirements.  (i) Locations shall be classified depending on the properties of the flammable vapors, liquids, or gases that may be present and the likelihood that a flammable or combustible concentration or quantity is present. Where pyrophoric materials are the only materials used or handled, these locations need not be classified.\n\n(ii) Each room, section, or area shall be considered individually in determining its classification.\n\n(iii) All threaded conduit shall be threaded with an NPT (National (American) Standard Pipe Taper) standard conduit cutting die that provides \n 3/4 -in. taper per foot. The conduit shall be made wrench tight to prevent sparking when fault current flows through the conduit system and to ensure the explosionproof or flameproof integrity of the conduit system where applicable.\n\n(iv) Equipment provided with threaded entries for field wiring connection shall be installed in accordance with paragraph (g)(2)(iv)(A) or (g)(2)(iv)(B) of this section.\n\n(A) For equipment provided with threaded entries for NPT threaded conduit or fittings, listed conduit, conduit fittings, or cable fittings shall be used.\n\n(B) For equipment with metric threaded entries, such entries shall be identified as being metric, or listed adaptors to permit connection to conduit of NPT-threaded fittings shall be provided with the equipment. Adapters shall be used for connection to conduit or NPT-threaded fittings.\n\n(3)  Protection techniques.  One or more of the following protection techniques shall be used for electric and electronic equipment in hazardous (classified) locations classified under the zone classification system.\n\n(i) Flameproof \u201cd\u201d\u2014This protection technique is permitted for equipment in the Class I, Zone 1 locations for which it is approved.\n\n(ii) Purged and pressurized\u2014This protection technique is permitted for equipment in the Class I, Zone 1 or Zone 2 locations for which it is approved.\n\n(iii) Intrinsic safety\u2014This protection technique is permitted for equipment in the Class I, Zone 0 or Zone 1 locations for which it is approved.\n\n(iv) Type of protection \u201cn\u201d\u2014This protection technique is permitted for equipment in the Class I, Zone 2 locations for which it is approved. Type of protection \u201cn\u201d is further subdivided into nA, nC, and nR.\n\n(v) Oil Immersion \u201co\u201d\u2014This protection technique is permitted for equipment in the Class I, Zone 1 locations for which it is approved.\n\n(vi) Increased safety \u201ce\u201d\u2014This protection technique is permitted for equipment in the Class I, Zone 1 locations for which it is approved.\n\n(vii) Encapsulation \u201cm\u201d\u2014This protection technique is permitted for equipment in the Class I, Zone 1 locations for which it is approved.\n\n(viii) Powder Filling \u201cq\u201d\u2014This protection technique is permitted for equipment in the Class I, Zone 1 locations for which it is approved.\n\n(4)  Special precaution.  Paragraph (g) of this section requires equipment construction and installation that will ensure safe performance under conditions of proper use and maintenance.\n\n(i) Classification of areas and selection of equipment and wiring methods shall be under the supervision of a qualified registered professional engineer.\n\n(ii) In instances of areas within the same facility classified separately, Class I, Zone 2 locations may abut, but not overlap, Class I, Division 2 locations. Class I, Zone 0 or Zone 1 locations may not abut Class I, Division 1 or Division 2 locations.\n\n(iii) A Class I, Division 1 or Division 2 location may be reclassified as a Class I, Zone 0, Zone 1, or Zone 2 location only if all of the space that is classified because of a single flammable gas or vapor source is reclassified.\n\nLow ambient conditions require special consideration. Electric equipment depending on the protection techniques described by paragraph (g)(3)(i) of this section may not be suitable for use at temperatures lower than \u221220 \u00b0C (\u22124 \u00b0F) unless they are approved for use at lower temperatures. However, at low ambient temperatures, flammable concentrations of vapors may not exist in a location classified Class I, Zone 0, 1, or 2 at normal ambient temperature.\n\n(5)  Listing and marking.  (i) Equipment that is listed for a Zone 0 location may be installed in a Zone 1 or Zone 2 location of the same gas or vapor. Equipment that is listed for a Zone 1 location may be installed in a Zone 2 location of the same gas or vapor.\n\n(ii) Equipment shall be marked in accordance with paragraph (g)(5)(ii)(A) and (g)(5)(ii)(B) of this section, except as provided in (g)(5)(ii)(C).\n\n(A) Equipment approved for Class I, Division 1 or Class 1, Division 2 shall, in addition to being marked in accordance with (c)(2)(ii), be marked with the following:\n\n( 1 ) Class I, Zone 1 or Class I, Zone 2 (as applicable);\n\n( 2 ) Applicable gas classification groups; and\n\n( 3 ) Temperature classification; or\n\n(B) Equipment meeting one or more of the protection techniques described in paragraph (g)(3) of this section shall be marked with the following in the order shown:\n\n( 1 ) Class, except for intrinsically safe apparatus;\n\n( 2 ) Zone, except for intrinsically safe apparatus;\n\n( 3 ) Symbol \u201cAEx;\u201d\n\n( 4 ) Protection techniques;\n\n( 5 ) Applicable gas classification groups; and\n\n( 6 ) Temperature classification, except for intrinsically safe apparatus.\n\nAn example of such a required marking is \u201cClass I, Zone 0, AEx ia IIC T6.\u201d See Figure S-1 for an explanation of this marking.\n\n(C) Equipment that the employer demonstrates will provide protection from the hazards arising from the flammability of the gas or vapor and the zone of location involved and will be recognized as providing such protection by employees need not be marked.\n\nThe National Electrical Code, NFPA 70, contains guidelines for determining the type and design of equipment and installations that will meet this provision."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.19.38.8", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "S", "Subpart S\u2014Electrical", "", "\u00a7 1910.308 Special systems.", "OSHA", "", "", "", "(a)  Systems over 600 volts, nominal.  This paragraph covers the general requirements for all circuits and equipment operated at over 600 volts.\n\n(1)  Aboveground wiring methods.  (i) Aboveground conductors shall be installed in rigid metal conduit, in intermediate metal conduit, in electrical metallic tubing, in rigid nonmetallic conduit, in cable trays, as busways, as cablebus, in other identified raceways, or as open runs of metal-clad cable suitable for the use and purpose. In locations accessible to qualified persons only, open runs of Type MV cables, bare conductors, and bare busbars are also permitted. Busbars shall be either copper or aluminum. Open runs of insulated wires and cables having a bare lead sheath or a braided outer covering shall be supported in a manner designed to prevent physical damage to the braid or sheath.\n\n(ii) Conductors emerging from the ground shall be enclosed in approved raceways.\n\n(2)  Braid-covered insulated conductors\u2014open installations.  The braid on open runs of braid-covered insulated conductors shall be flame retardant or shall have a flame-retardant saturant applied after installation. This treated braid covering shall be stripped back a safe distance at conductor terminals, according to the operating voltage.\n\n(3)  Insulation shielding.  (i) Metallic and semiconductor insulation shielding components of shielded cables shall be removed for a distance dependent on the circuit voltage and insulation. Stress reduction means shall be provided at all terminations of factory-applied shielding.\n\n(ii) Metallic shielding components such as tapes, wires, or braids, or combinations thereof, and their associated conducting and semiconducting components shall be grounded.\n\n(4)  Moisture or mechanical protection for metal-sheathed cables.  Where cable conductors emerge from a metal sheath and where protection against moisture or physical damage is necessary, the insulation of the conductors shall be protected by a cable sheath terminating device.\n\n(5)  Interrupting and isolating devices.  (i) Circuit breaker installations located indoors shall consist of metal-enclosed units or fire-resistant cell-mounted units. In locations accessible only to qualified employees, open mounting of circuit breakers is permitted. A means of indicating the open and closed position of circuit breakers shall be provided.\n\n(ii) Where fuses are used to protect conductors and equipment, a fuse shall be placed in each ungrounded conductor. Two power fuses may be used in parallel to protect the same load, if both fuses have identical ratings, and if both fuses are installed in an identified common mounting with electrical connections that will divide the current equally. Power fuses of the vented type may not be used indoors, underground, or in metal enclosures unless identified for the use.\n\n(iii) Fused cutouts installed in buildings or transformer vaults shall be of a type identified for the purpose. Distribution cutouts may not be used indoors, underground, or in metal enclosures. They shall be readily accessible for fuse replacement.\n\n(iv) Where fused cutouts are not suitable to interrupt the circuit manually while carrying full load, an approved means shall be installed to interrupt the entire load. Unless the fused cutouts are interlocked with the switch to prevent opening of the cutouts under load, a conspicuous sign shall be placed at such cutouts reading: \u201cWARNING\u2014DO NOT OPERATE UNDER LOAD.\u201d\n\n(v) Suitable barriers or enclosures shall be provided to prevent contact with nonshielded cables or energized parts of oil-filled cutouts.\n\n(vi) Load interrupter switches may be used only if suitable fuses or circuits are used in conjunction with these devices to interrupt fault currents.\n\n(A) Where these devices are used in combination, they shall be coordinated electrically so that they will safely withstand the effects of closing, carrying, or interrupting all possible currents up to the assigned maximum short-circuit rating.\n\n(B) Where more than one switch is installed with interconnected load terminals to provide for alternate connection to different supply conductors, each switch shall be provided with a conspicuous sign reading: \u201cWARNING\u2014SWITCH MAY BE ENERGIZED BY BACKFEED.\u201d\n\n(vii) A means (for example, a fuseholder and fuse designed for the purpose) shall be provided to completely isolate equipment for inspection and repairs. Isolating means that are not designed to interrupt the load current of the circuit shall be either interlocked with an approved circuit interrupter or provided with a sign warning against opening them under load.\n\n(6)  Mobile and portable equipment.  (i) A metallic enclosure shall be provided on the mobile machine for enclosing the terminals of the power cable. The enclosure shall include provisions for a solid connection for the grounding terminal to effectively ground the machine frame. The method of cable termination used shall prevent any strain or pull on the cable from stressing the electrical connections. The enclosure shall have provision for locking so only authorized qualified persons may open it and shall be marked with a sign warning of the presence of energized parts.\n\n(ii) All energized switching and control parts shall be enclosed in effectively grounded metal cabinets or enclosures. Circuit breakers and protective equipment shall have the operating means projecting through the metal cabinet or enclosure so these units can be reset without locked doors being opened. Enclosures and metal cabinets shall be locked so that only authorized qualified persons have access and shall be marked with a sign warning of the presence of energized parts. Collector ring assemblies on revolving-type machines (shovels, draglines, etc.) shall be guarded.\n\n(7)  Tunnel installations.  This paragraph applies to installation and use of high-voltage power distribution and utilization equipment that is portable or mobile, such as substations, trailers, cars, mobile shovels, draglines, hoists, drills, dredges, compressors, pumps, conveyors, and underground excavators.\n\n(i) Conductors in tunnels shall be installed in one or more of the following:\n\n(A) Metal conduit or other metal raceway;\n\n(B) Type MC cable; or\n\n(C) Other approved multiconductor cable.\n\n(ii) Multiconductor portable cable may supply mobile equipment.\n\n(iii) Conductors and cables shall also be so located or guarded as to protect them from physical damage. An equipment grounding conductor shall be run with circuit conductors inside the metal raceway or inside the multiconductor cable jacket. The equipment grounding conductor may be insulated or bare.\n\n(iv) Bare terminals of transformers, switches, motor controllers, and other equipment shall be enclosed to prevent accidental contact with energized parts.\n\n(v) Enclosures for use in tunnels shall be drip-proof, weatherproof, or submersible as required by the environmental conditions.\n\n(vi) Switch or contactor enclosures may not be used as junction boxes or raceways for conductors feeding through or tapping off to other switches, unless special designs are used to provide adequate space for this purpose.\n\n(vii) A disconnecting means that simultaneously opens all ungrounded conductors shall be installed at each transformer or motor location.\n\n(viii) All nonenergized metal parts of electric equipment and metal raceways and cable sheaths shall be effectively grounded and bonded to all metal pipes and rails at the portal and at intervals not exceeding 305 m (1000 ft) throughout the tunnel.\n\n(b)  Emergency power systems.  This paragraph applies to circuits, systems, and equipment intended to supply power for illumination and special loads in the event of failure of the normal supply.\n\n(1)  Wiring methods.  Emergency circuit wiring shall be kept entirely independent of all other wiring and equipment and may not enter the same raceway, cable, box, or cabinet or other wiring except either where common circuit elements suitable for the purpose are required, or for transferring power from the normal to the emergency source.\n\n(2)  Emergency illumination.  Emergency illumination shall include all required means of egress lighting, illuminated exit signs, and all other lights necessary to provide illumination. Where emergency lighting is necessary, the system shall be so arranged that the failure of any individual lighting element, such as the burning out of a light bulb, cannot leave any space in total darkness.\n\n(3)  Signs.  (i) A sign shall be placed at the service entrance equipment indicating the type and location of on-site emergency power sources. However, a sign is not required for individual unit equipment.\n\n(ii) Where the grounded circuit conductor connected to the emergency source is connected to a grounding electrode conductor at a location remote from the emergency source, there shall be a sign at the grounding location that shall identify all emergency and normal sources connected at that location.\n\n(c)  Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote control, signaling, and power-limited circuits \u2014(1)  Classification.  Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote control, signaling, or power-limited circuits are characterized by their usage and electrical power limitation that differentiates them from light and power circuits. These circuits are classified in accordance with their respective voltage and power limitations as summarized in paragraphs (c)(1)(i) through (c)(1)(iii) of this section.\n\n(i) A Class 1 power-limited circuit shall be supplied from a source having a rated output of not more than 30 volts and 1000 volt-amperes.\n\n(ii) A Class 1 remote control circuit or a Class 1 signaling circuit shall have a voltage not exceeding 600 volts; however, the power output of the source need not be limited.\n\n(iii) The power source for a Class 2 or Class 3 circuit shall be listed equipment marked as a Class 2 or Class 3 power source, except as follows:\n\n(A) Thermocouples do not require listing as a Class 2 power source; and\n\n(B) A dry cell battery is considered an inherently limited Class 2 power source, provided the voltage is 30 volts or less and the capacity is less than or equal to that available from series-connected No. 6 carbon zinc cells.\n\n(2)  Marking.  A Class 2 or Class 3 power supply unit shall be durably marked where plainly visible to indicate the class of supply and its electrical rating.\n\n(3)  Separation from conductors of other circuits.  Cables and conductors of Class 2 and Class 3 circuits may not be placed in any cable, cable tray, compartment, enclosure, manhole, outlet box, device box, raceway, or similar fitting with conductors of electric light, power, Class 1, nonpower-limited fire alarm circuits, and medium power network-powered broadband communications cables unless a barrier or other equivalent form of protection against contact is employed.\n\n(d)  Fire alarm systems \u2014(1)  Classifications.  Fire alarm circuits shall be classified either as nonpower limited or power limited.\n\n(2)  Power sources.  The power sources for use with fire alarm circuits shall be either power limited or nonpower limited as follows:\n\n(i) The power source of nonpower-limited fire alarm (NPLFA) circuits shall have an output voltage of not more than 600 volts, nominal; and\n\n(ii) The power source for a power-limited fire alarm (PLFA) circuit shall be listed equipment marked as a PLFA power source.\n\n(3)  Separation from conductors of other circuits.  (i) Nonpower-limited fire alarm circuits and Class 1 circuits may occupy the same enclosure, cable, or raceway provided all conductors are insulated for maximum voltage of any conductor within the enclosure, cable, or raceway. Power supply and fire alarm circuit conductors are permitted in the same enclosure, cable, or raceway only if connected to the same equipment.\n\n(ii) Power-limited circuit cables and conductors may not be placed in any cable, cable tray, compartment, enclosure, outlet box, raceway, or similar fitting with conductors of electric light, power, Class 1, nonpower-limited fire alarm circuit conductors, or medium power network-powered broadband communications circuits.\n\n(iii) Power-limited fire alarm circuit conductors shall be separated at least 50.8 mm (2 in.) from conductors of any electric light, power, Class 1, nonpower-limited fire alarm, or medium power network-powered broadband communications circuits unless a special and equally protective method of conductor separation is employed.\n\n(iv) Conductors of one or more Class 2 circuits are permitted within the same cable, enclosure, or raceway with conductors of power-limited fire alarm circuits provided that the insulation of Class 2 circuit conductors in the cable, enclosure, or raceway is at least that needed for the power-limited fire alarm circuits.\n\n(4)  Identification.  Fire alarm circuits shall be identified at terminal and junction locations in a manner that will prevent unintentional interference with the signaling circuit during testing and servicing. Power-limited fire alarm circuits shall be durably marked as such where plainly visible at terminations.\n\n(e)  Communications systems.  This paragraph applies to central-station-connected and non-central-station-connected telephone circuits, radio and television receiving and transmitting equipment, including community antenna television and radio distribution systems, telegraph, district messenger, and outside wiring for fire and burglar alarm, and similar central station systems. These installations need not comply with the provisions of \u00a7 1910.303 through \u00a7 1910.308(d), except for \u00a7\u00a7 1910.304(c)(1) and 1910.307.\n\n(1)  Protective devices.  (i) A listed primary protector shall be provided on each circuit run partly or entirely in aerial wire or aerial cable not confined within a block.\n\n(ii) A listed primary protector shall be also provided on each aerial or underground circuit when the location of the circuit within the block containing the building served allows the circuit to be exposed to accidental contact with electric light or power conductors operating at over 300 volts to ground.\n\n(iii) In addition, where there exists a lightning exposure, each interbuilding circuit on premises shall be protected by a listed primary protector at each end of the interbuilding circuit.\n\n(2)  Conductor location.  (i) Lead-in or aerial-drop cables from a pole or other support, including the point of initial attachment to a building or structure, shall be kept away from electric light, power, Class 1, or nonpower-limited fire alarm circuit conductors so as to avoid the possibility of accidental contact.\n\n(ii) A separation of at least 1.83 m (6 ft) shall be maintained between communications wires and cables on buildings and lightning conductors.\n\n(iii) Where communications wires and cables and electric light or power conductors are supported by the same pole or run parallel to each other in-span, the following conditions shall be met:\n\n(A) Where practicable, communication wires and cables on poles shall be located below the electric light or power conductors; and\n\n(B) Communications wires and cables may not be attached to a crossarm that carries electric light or power conductors.\n\n(iv) Indoor communications wires and cables shall be separated at least 50.8 mm (2 in.) from conductors of any electric light, power, Class 1, nonpower-limited fire alarm, or medium power network-powered broadband communications circuits, unless a special and equally protective method of conductor separation, identified for the purpose, is employed.\n\n(3)  Equipment location.  Outdoor metal structures supporting antennas, as well as self-supporting antennas such as vertical rods or dipole structures, shall be located as far away from overhead conductors of electric light and power circuits of over 150 volts to ground as necessary to prevent the antenna or structure from falling into or making accidental contact with such circuits.\n\n(4)  Grounding.  (i) If exposed to contact with electric light and power conductors, the metal sheath of aerial cables entering buildings shall be grounded or shall be interrupted close to the entrance to the building by an insulating joint or equivalent device. Where protective devices are used, they shall be grounded in an approved manner.\n\n(ii) Masts and metal structures supporting antennas shall be permanently and effectively grounded without splice or connection in the grounding conductor.\n\n(iii) Transmitters shall be enclosed in a metal frame or grill or separated from the operating space by a barrier, all metallic parts of which are effectively connected to ground. All external metal handles and controls accessible to the operating personnel shall be effectively grounded. Unpowered equipment and enclosures are considered to be grounded where connected to an attached coaxial cable with an effectively grounded metallic shield.\n\n(f)  Solar photovoltaic systems.  This paragraph covers solar photovoltaic systems that can be interactive with other electric power production sources or can stand alone with or without electrical energy storage such as batteries. These systems may have ac or dc output for utilization.\n\n(1)  Conductors of different systems.  Photovoltaic source circuits and photovoltaic output circuits may not be contained in the same raceway, cable tray, cable, outlet box, junction box, or similar fitting as feeders or branch circuits of other systems, unless the conductors of the different systems are separated by a partition or are connected together.\n\n(2)  Disconnecting means.  Means shall be provided to disconnect all current-carrying conductors of a photovoltaic power source from all other conductors in a building or other structure. Where a circuit grounding connection is not designed to be automatically interrupted as part of the ground-fault protection system, a switch or circuit breaker used as disconnecting means may not have a pole in the grounded conductor.\n\n(g)  Integrated electrical systems \u2014(1)  Scope.  Paragraph (g) of this section covers integrated electrical systems, other than unit equipment, in which orderly shutdown is necessary to ensure safe operation. An integrated electrical system as used in this section shall be a unitized segment of an industrial wiring system where all of the following conditions are met:\n\n(i) An orderly shutdown process minimizes employee hazard and equipment damage;\n\n(ii) The conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that only qualified persons will service the system; and\n\n(iii) Effective safeguards are established and maintained.\n\n(2)  Location of overcurrent devices in or on premises.  Overcurrent devices that are critical to integrated electrical systems need not be readily accessible to employees as required by \u00a7 1910.304(f)(1)(iv) if they are located with mounting heights to ensure security from operation by nonqualified persons."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.19.38.9", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "S", "Subpart S\u2014Electrical", "", "\u00a7\u00a7 1910.309-1910.330 [Reserved]", "OSHA", "", "", "", ""], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.19.39.10", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "S", "Subpart S\u2014Electrical", "", "\u00a7 1910.331 Scope.", "OSHA", "", "", "[55 FR 32016, Aug. 6, 1990, as amended at 59 FR 4476, Jan. 31, 1994; 79 FR 20692, Apr. 11, 2014; 80 FR 60039, Oct. 5, 2015]", "(a)  Covered work by both qualified and unqualified persons.  The provisions of \u00a7\u00a7 1910.331 through 1910.335 cover electrical safety-related work practices for both qualified persons (those who have training in avoiding the electrical hazards of working on or near exposed energized parts) and unqualified persons (those with little or no such training) working on, near, or with the following installations:\n\n(1)  Premises wiring.  Installations of electric conductors and equipment within or on buildings or other structures, and on other premises such as yards, carnival, parking, and other lots, and industrial substations;\n\n(2)  Wiring for connection to supply.  Installations of conductors that connect to the supply of electricity; and\n\n(3)  Other wiring.  Installations of other outside conductors on the premises.\n\n(4)  Optical fiber cable.  Installations of optical fiber cable where such installations are made along with electric conductors.\n\nSee \u00a7 1910.399 for the definition of \u201cqualified person.\u201d See \u00a7 1910.332 for training requirements that apply to qualified and unqualified persons.\n\n(b)  Other covered work.  The provisions of \u00a7\u00a7 1910.331 through 1910.335 also cover:\n\n(1) Work performed by unqualified persons on, near, or with the installations listed in paragraphs (c)(1) through (4) of this section; and\n\n(2) Work performed by qualified persons near the installations listed in paragraphs (c)(1) through (c)(4) of this section when that work is not on or directly associated with those installations.\n\n(c)  Excluded work by qualified persons.  The provisions of \u00a7\u00a7 1910.331 through 1910.335 do not apply to work performed by qualified persons on or directly associated with the following installations:\n\n(1)  Generation, transmission, and distribution installations.  Installations for the generation, control, transformation, transmission, and distribution of electric energy (including communication and metering) located in buildings used for such purposes or located outdoors.\n\nWork on or directly associated with installations of utilization equipment used for purposes other than generating, transmitting, or distributing electric energy (such as installations which are in office buildings, warehouses, garages, machine shops, or recreational buildings, or other utilization installations which are not an integral part of a generating installation, substation, or control center) is covered under paragraph (a)(1) of this section.\n\nFor work on or directly associated with utilization installations, an employer who complies with the work practices of \u00a7 1910.269 (electric power generation, transmission, and distribution) will be deemed to be in compliance with \u00a7\u00a7 1910.333(c) and 1910.335. However, the requirements of \u00a7\u00a7 1910.332, 1910.333(a), 1910.333(b), and 1910.334 apply to  all  work on or directly associated with utilization installations, regardless of whether the work is performed by qualified or unqualified persons.\n\nWork on or directly associated with generation, transmission, or distribution installations includes:\n\n(1) Work performed directly on such installations, such as repairing overhead or underground distribution lines or repairing a feed-water pump for the boiler in a generating plant.\n\n(2) Work directly associated with such installations, such as line-clearance tree trimming and replacing utility poles, when that work is covered by \u00a7 1910.269 (see \u00a7 1910.269(a)(1)(i)(D) and (E) and the definition of \u201cline-clearance tree trimming\u201d in \u00a7 1910.269(x)).\n\n(3) Work on electric utilization circuits in a generating plant provided that:\n\n(A) Such circuits are commingled with installations of power generation equipment or circuits, and\n\n(B) The generation equipment or circuits present greater electrical hazards than those posed by the utilization equipment or circuits (such as exposure to higher voltages or lack of overcurrent protection).\n\nThis work is covered by \u00a7 1910.269.\n\n(2)  Communications installations.  Installations of communication equipment to the extent that the work is covered under \u00a7 1910.268.\n\n(3)  Installations in vehicles.  Installations in ships, watercraft, railway rolling stock, aircraft, or automotive vehicles other than mobile homes and recreational vehicles.\n\n(4)  Railway installations.  Installations of railways for generation, transformation, transmission, or distribution of power used exclusively for operation of rolling stock or installations of railways used exclusively for signaling and communication purposes."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.19.39.11", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "S", "Subpart S\u2014Electrical", "", "\u00a7 1910.332 Training.", "OSHA", "", "", "[55 FR 32016, Aug. 6, 1990]", "(a)  Scope.  The training requirements contained in this section apply to employees who face a risk of electric shock that is not reduced to a safe level by the electrical installation requirements of \u00a7\u00a7 1910.303 through 1910.308.\n\nEmployees in occupations listed in Table S-4 face such a risk and are required to be trained. Other employees who also may reasonably be expected to face a comparable risk of injury due to electric shock or other electrical hazards must also be trained.\n\n(b)  Content of training \u2014(1)  Practices addressed in this standard.  Employees shall be trained in and familiar with the safety-related work practices required by \u00a7\u00a7 1910.331 through 1910.335 that pertain to their respective job assignments.\n\n(2)  Additional requirements for unqualified persons.  Employees who are covered by paragraph (a) of this section but who are not qualified persons shall also be trained in and familiar with any electrically related safety practices not specifically addressed by \u00a7\u00a7 1910.331 through 1910.335 but which are necessary for their safety.\n\n(3)  Additional requirements for qualified persons.  Qualified persons (i.e., those permitted to work on or near exposed energized parts) shall, at a minimum, be trained in and familiar with the following:\n\n(i) The skills and techniques necessary to distinguish exposed live parts from other parts of electric equipment,\n\n(ii) The skills and techniques necessary to determine the nominal voltage of exposed live parts, and\n\n(iii) The clearance distances specified in \u00a7 1910.333(c) and the corresponding voltages to which the qualified person will be exposed.\n\nFor the purposes of \u00a7\u00a7 1910.331 through 1910.335, a person must have the training required by paragraph (b)(3) of this section in order to be considered a qualified person.\n\nQualified persons whose work on energized equipment involves either direct contact or contact by means of tools or materials must also have the training needed to meet \u00a7 1910.333(c)(2).\n\n(c)  Type of training.  The training required by this section shall be of the classroom or on-the-job type. The degree of training provided shall be determined by the risk to the employee.\n\nTable S-4\u2014Typical Occupational Categories of Employees Facing a Higher Than Normal Risk of Electrical Accident\n\n1  Workers in these groups do not need to be trained if their work or the work of those they supervise does not bring them or the employees they supervise close enough to exposed parts of electric circuits operating at 50 volts or more to ground for a hazard to exist."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.19.39.12", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "S", "Subpart S\u2014Electrical", "", "\u00a7 1910.333 Selection and use of work practices.", "OSHA", "", "", "[55 FR 32016, Aug. 6, 1990; 55 FR 46053, Nov. 1, 1990, as amended at 59 FR 4476, Jan. 31, 1994]", "(a)  General.  Safety-related work practices shall be employed to prevent electric shock or other injuries resulting from either direct or indirect electrical contacts, when work is performed near or on equipment or circuits which are or may be energized. The specific safety-related work practices shall be consistent with the nature and extent of the associated electrical hazards.\n\n(1)  Deenergized parts.  Live parts to which an employee may be exposed shall be deenergized before the employee works on or near them, unless the employer can demonstrate that deenergizing introduces additional or increased hazards or is infeasible due to equipment design or operational limitations. Live parts that operate at less than 50 volts to ground need not be deenergized if there will be no increased exposure to electrical burns or to explosion due to electric arcs.\n\nExamples of increased or additional hazards include interruption of life support equipment, deactivation of emergency alarm systems, shutdown of hazardous location ventilation equipment, or removal of illumination for an area.\n\nExamples of work that may be performed on or near energized circuit parts because of infeasibility due to equipment design or operational limitations include testing of electric circuits that can only be performed with the circuit energized and work on circuits that form an integral part of a continuous industrial process in a chemical plant that would otherwise need to be completely shut down in order to permit work on one circuit or piece of equipment.\n\nWork on or near deenergized parts is covered by paragraph (b) of this section.\n\n(2)  Energized parts.  If the exposed live parts are not deenergized (i.e., for reasons of increased or additional hazards or infeasibility), other safety-related work practices shall be used to protect employees who may be exposed to the electrical hazards involved. Such work practices shall protect employees against contact with energized circuit parts directly with any part of their body or indirectly through some other conductive object. The work practices that are used shall be suitable for the conditions under which the work is to be performed and for the voltage level of the exposed electric conductors or circuit parts. Specific work practice requirements are detailed in paragraph (c) of this section.\n\n(b)  Working on or near exposed deenergized parts \u2014(1)  Application.  This paragraph applies to work on exposed deenergized parts or near enough to them to expose the employee to any electrical hazard they present. Conductors and parts of electric equipment that have been deenergized but have not been locked out or tagged in accordance with paragraph (b) of this section shall be treated as energized parts, and paragraph (c) of this section applies to work on or near them.\n\n(2)  Lockout and tagging.  While any employee is exposed to contact with parts of fixed electric equipment or circuits which have been deenergized, the circuits energizing the parts shall be locked out or tagged or both in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph. The requirements shall be followed in the order in which they are presented (i.e., paragraph (b)(2)(i) first, then paragraph (b)(2)(ii), etc.).\n\nAs used in this section, fixed equipment refers to equipment fastened in place or connected by permanent wiring methods.\n\nLockout and tagging procedures that comply with paragraphs (c) through (f) of \u00a7 1910.147 will also be deemed to comply with paragraph (b)(2) of this section provided that:\n\n(1) The procedures address the electrical safety hazards covered by this Subpart; and\n\n(2) The procedures also incorporate the requirements of paragraphs (b)(2)(iii)(D) and (b)(2)(iv)(B) of this section.\n\n(i)  Procedures.  The employer shall maintain a written copy of the procedures outlined in paragraph (b)(2) and shall make it available for inspection by employees and by the Assistant Secretary of Labor and his or her authorized representatives.\n\nThe written procedures may be in the form of a copy of paragraph (b) of this section.\n\n(ii)  Deenergizing equipment.  (A) Safe procedures for deenergizing circuits and equipment shall be determined before circuits or equipment are deenergized.\n\n(B) The circuits and equipment to be worked on shall be disconnected from all electric energy sources. Control circuit devices, such as push buttons, selector switches, and interlocks, may not be used as the sole means for deenergizing circuits or equipment. Interlocks for electric equipment may not be used as a substitute for lockout and tagging procedures.\n\n(C) Stored electric energy which might endanger personnel shall be released. Capacitors shall be discharged and high capacitance elements shall be short-circuited and grounded, if the stored electric energy might endanger personnel.\n\nIf the capacitors or associated equipment are handled in meeting this requirement, they shall be treated as energized.\n\n(D) Stored non-electrical energy in devices that could reenergize electric circuit parts shall be blocked or relieved to the extent that the circuit parts could not be accidentally energized by the device.\n\n(iii)  Application of locks and tags.  (A) A lock and a tag shall be placed on each disconnecting means used to deenergize circuits and equipment on which work is to be performed, except as provided in paragraphs (b)(2)(iii)(C) and (b)(2)(iii)(E) of this section. The lock shall be attached so as to prevent persons from operating the disconnecting means unless they resort to undue force or the use of tools.\n\n(B) Each tag shall contain a statement prohibiting unauthorized operation of the disconnecting means and removal of the tag.\n\n(C) If a lock cannot be applied, or if the employer can demonstrate that tagging procedures will provide a level of safety equivalent to that obtained by the use of a lock, a tag may be used without a lock.\n\n(D) A tag used without a lock, as permitted by paragraph (b)(2)(iii)(C) of this section, shall be supplemented by at least one additional safety measure that provides a level of safety equivalent to that obtained by the use of a lock. Examples of additional safety measures include the removal of an isolating circuit element, blocking of a controlling switch, or opening of an extra disconnecting device.\n\n(E) A lock may be placed without a tag only under the following conditions:\n\n( 1 ) Only one circuit or piece of equipment is deenergized, and\n\n( 2 ) The lockout period does not extend beyond the work shift, and\n\n( 3 ) Employees exposed to the hazards associated with reenergizing the circuit or equipment are familiar with this procedure.\n\n(iv) Verification of deenergized condition. The requirements of this paragraph shall be met before any circuits or equipment can be considered and worked as deenergized.\n\n(A) A qualified person shall operate the equipment operating controls or otherwise verify that the equipment cannot be restarted.\n\n(B) A qualified person shall use test equipment to test the circuit elements and electrical parts of equipment to which employees will be exposed and shall verify that the circuit elements and equipment parts are deenergized. The test shall also determine if any energized condition exists as a result of inadvertently induced voltage or unrelated voltage backfeed even though specific parts of the circuit have been deenergized and presumed to be safe. If the circuit to be tested is over 600 volts, nominal, the test equipment shall be checked for proper operation immediately before and immediately after this test.\n\n(v)  Reenergizing equipment.  These requirements shall be met, in the order given, before circuits or equipment are reenergized, even temporarily.\n\n(A) A qualified person shall conduct tests and visual inspections, as necessary, to verify that all tools, electrical jumpers, shorts, grounds, and other such devices have been removed, so that the circuits and equipment can be safely energized.\n\n(B) Employees exposed to the hazards associated with reenergizing the circuit or equipment shall be warned to stay clear of circuits and equipment.\n\n(C) Each lock and tag shall be removed by the employee who applied it or under his or her direct supervision. However, if this employee is absent from the workplace, then the lock or tag may be removed by a qualified person designated to perform this task provided that:\n\n( 1 ) The employer ensures that the employee who applied the lock or tag is not available at the workplace, and\n\n( 2 ) The employer ensures that the employee is aware that the lock or tag has been removed before he or she resumes work at that workplace.\n\n(D) There shall be a visual determination that all employees are clear of the circuits and equipment.\n\n(c)  Working on or near exposed energized parts \u2014(1)  Application.  This paragraph applies to work performed on exposed live parts (involving either direct contact or contact by means of tools or materials) or near enough to them for employees to be exposed to any hazard they present.\n\n(2)  Work on energized equipment.  Only qualified persons may work on electric circuit parts or equipment that have not been deenergized under the procedures of paragraph (b) of this section. Such persons shall be capable of working safely on energized circuits and shall be familiar with the proper use of special precautionary techniques, personal protective equipment, insulating and shielding materials, and insulated tools.\n\n(3)  Overhead lines.  If work is to be performed near overhead lines, the lines shall be deenergized and grounded, or other protective measures shall be provided before work is started. If the lines are to be deenergized, arrangements shall be made with the person or organization that operates or controls the electric circuits involved to deenergize and ground them. If protective measures, such as guarding, isolating, or insulating are provided, these precautions shall prevent employees from contacting such lines directly with any part of their body or indirectly through conductive materials, tools, or equipment.\n\nThe work practices used by qualified persons installing insulating devices on overhead power transmission or distribution lines are covered by \u00a7 1910.269 of this part, not by \u00a7\u00a7 1910.332 through 1910.335 of this part. Under paragraph (c)(2) of this section, unqualified persons are prohibited from performing this type of work.\n\n(i)  Unqualified persons.  (A) When an unqualified person is working in an elevated position near overhead lines, the location shall be such that the person and the longest conductive object he or she may contact cannot come closer to any unguarded, energized overhead line than the following distances:\n\n( 1 ) For voltages to ground 50kV or below\u201410 ft. (305 cm);\n\n( 2 ) For voltages to ground over 50kV\u201410 ft. (305 cm) plus 4 in. (10 cm) for every 10kV over 50kV.\n\n(B) When an unqualified person is working on the ground in the vicinity of overhead lines, the person may not bring any conductive object closer to unguarded, energized overhead lines than the distances given in paragraph (c)(3)(i)(A) of this section.\n\nFor voltages normally encountered with overhead power lines, objects which do not have an insulating rating for the voltage involved are considered to be conductive.\n\n(ii)  Qualified persons.  When a qualified person is working in the vicinity of overhead lines, whether in an elevated position or on the ground, the person may not approach or take any conductive object without an approved insulating handle closer to exposed energized parts than shown in Table S-5 unless:\n\n(A) The person is insulated from the energized part (gloves, with sleeves if necessary, rated for the voltage involved are considered to be insulation of the person from the energized part on which work is performed), or\n\n(B) The energized part is insulated both from all other conductive objects at a different potential and from the person, or\n\n(C) The person is insulated from all conductive objects at a potential different from that of the energized part.\n\nTable S-5\u2014Approach Distances for Qualified Employees\u2014Alternating Current\n\n(iii)  Vehicular and mechanical equipment.  (A) Any vehicle or mechanical equipment capable of having parts of its structure elevated near energized overhead lines shall be operated so that a clearance of 10 ft. (305 cm) is maintained. If the voltage is higher than 50kV, the clearance shall be increased 4 in. (10 cm) for every 10kV over that voltage. However, under any of the following conditions, the clearance may be reduced:\n\n( 1 ) If the vehicle is in transit with its structure lowered, the clearance may be reduced to 4 ft. (122 cm). If the voltage is higher than 50kV, the clearance shall be increased 4 in. (10 cm) for every 10kV over that voltage.\n\n( 2 ) If insulating barriers are installed to prevent contact with the lines, and if the barriers are rated for the voltage of the line being guarded and are not a part of or an attachment to the vehicle or its raised structure, the clearance may be reduced to a distance within the designed working dimensions of the insulating barrier.\n\n( 3 ) If the equipment is an aerial lift insulated for the voltage involved, and if the work is performed by a qualified person, the clearance (between the uninsulated portion of the aerial lift and the power line) may be reduced to the distance given in Table S-5.\n\n(B) Employees standing on the ground may not contact the vehicle or mechanical equipment or any of its attachments, unless:\n\n( 1 ) The employee is using protective equipment rated for the voltage; or\n\n( 2 ) The equipment is located so that no uninsulated part of its structure (that portion of the structure that provides a conductive path to employees on the ground) can come closer to the line than permitted in paragraph (c)(3)(iii) of this section.\n\n(C) If any vehicle or mechanical equipment capable of having parts of its structure elevated near energized overhead lines is intentionally grounded, employees working on the ground near the point of grounding may not stand at the grounding location whenever there is a possibility of overhead line contact. Additional precautions, such as the use of barricades or insulation, shall be taken to protect employees from hazardous ground potentials, depending on earth resistivity and fault currents, which can develop within the first few feet or more outward from the grounding point.\n\n(4)  Illumination.  (i) Employees may not enter spaces containing exposed energized parts, unless illumination is provided that enables the employees to perform the work safely.\n\n(ii) Where lack of illumination or an obstruction precludes observation of the work to be performed, employees may not perform tasks near exposed energized parts. Employees may not reach blindly into areas which may contain energized parts.\n\n(5)  Confined or enclosed work spaces.  When an employee works in a confined or enclosed space (such as a manhole or vault) that contains exposed energized parts, the employer shall provide, and the employee shall use, protective shields, protective barriers, or insulating materials as necessary to avoid inadvertent contact with these parts. Doors, hinged panels, and the like shall be secured to prevent their swinging into an employee and causing the employee to contact exposed energized parts.\n\n(6)  Conductive materials and equipment.  Conductive materials and equipment that are in contact with any part of an employee's body shall be handled in a manner that will prevent them from contacting exposed energized conductors or circuit parts. If an employee must handle long dimensional conductive objects (such as ducts and pipes) in areas with exposed live parts, the employer shall institute work practices (such as the use of insulation, guarding, and material handling techniques) which will minimize the hazard.\n\n(7)  Portable ladders.  Portable ladders shall have nonconductive siderails if they are used where the employee or the ladder could contact exposed energized parts.\n\n(8)  Conductive apparel.  Conductive articles of jewelry and clothing (such as watch bands, bracelets, rings, key chains, necklaces, metalized aprons, cloth with conductive thread, or metal headgear) may not be worn if they might contact exposed energized parts. However, such articles may be worn if they are rendered nonconductive by covering, wrapping, or other insulating means.\n\n(9)  Housekeeping duties.  Where live parts present an electrical contact hazard, employees may not perform housekeeping duties at such close distances to the parts that there is a possibility of contact, unless adequate safeguards (such as insulating equipment or barriers) are provided. Electrically conductive cleaning materials (including conductive solids such as steel wool, metalized cloth, and silicon carbide, as well as conductive liquid solutions) may not be used in proximity to energized parts unless procedures are followed which will prevent electrical contact.\n\n(10)  Interlocks.  Only a qualified person following the requirements of paragraph (c) of this section may defeat an electrical safety interlock, and then only temporarily while he or she is working on the equipment. The interlock system shall be returned to its operable condition when this work is completed."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.19.39.13", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "S", "Subpart S\u2014Electrical", "", "\u00a7 1910.334 Use of equipment.", "OSHA", "", "", "[55 FR 32019, Aug. 6, 1990]", "(a)  Portable electric equipment.  This paragraph applies to the use of cord- and plug-connected equipment, including flexible cord sets (extension cords).\n\n(1)  Handling.  Portable equipment shall be handled in a manner which will not cause damage. Flexible electric cords connected to equipment may not be used for raising or lowering the equipment. Flexible cords may not be fastened with staples or otherwise hung in such a fashion as could damage the outer jacket or insulation.\n\n(2)  Visual inspection.  (i) Portable cord- and plug-connected equipment and flexible cord sets (extension cords) shall be visually inspected before use on any shift for external defects (such as loose parts, deformed and missing pins, or damage to outer jacket or insulation) and for evidence of possible internal damage (such as pinched or crushed outer jacket). Cord- and plug-connected equipment and flexible cord sets (extension cords) which remain connected once they are put in place and are not exposed to damage need not be visually inspected until they are relocated.\n\n(ii) If there is a defect or evidence of damage that might expose an employee to injury, the defective or damaged item shall be removed from service, and no employee may use it until repairs and tests necessary to render the equipment safe have been made.\n\n(iii) When an attachment plug is to be connected to a receptacle (including any on a cord set), the relationship of the plug and receptacle contacts shall first be checked to ensure that they are of proper mating configurations.\n\n(3)  Grounding-type equipment.  (i) A flexible cord used with grounding-type equipment shall contain an equipment grounding conductor.\n\n(ii) Attachment plugs and receptacles may not be connected or altered in a manner which would prevent proper continuity of the equipment grounding conductor at the point where plugs are attached to receptacles. Additionally, these devices may not be altered to allow the grounding pole of a plug to be inserted into slots intended for connection to the current-carrying conductors.\n\n(iii) Adapters which interrupt the continuity of the equipment grounding connection may not be used.\n\n(4)  Conductive work locations.  Portable electric equipment and flexible cords used in highly conductive work locations (such as those inundated with water or other conductive liquids), or in job locations where employees are likely to contact water or conductive liquids, shall be approved for those locations.\n\n(5)  Connecting attachment plugs.  (i) Employees' hands may not be wet when plugging and unplugging flexible cords and cord- and plug-connected equipment, if energized equipment is involved.\n\n(ii) Energized plug and receptacle connections may be handled only with insulating protective equipment if the condition of the connection could provide a conducting path to the employee's hand (if, for example, a cord connector is wet from being immersed in water).\n\n(iii) Locking-type connectors shall be properly secured after connection.\n\n(b)  Electric power and lighting circuits \u2014(1)  Routine opening and closing of circuits.  Load rated switches, circuit breakers, or other devices specifically designed as disconnecting means shall be used for the opening, reversing, or closing of circuits under load conditions. Cable connectors not of the load-break type, fuses, terminal lugs, and cable splice connections may not be used for such purposes, except in an emergency.\n\n(2)  Reclosing circuits after protective device operation.  After a circuit is deenergized by a circuit protective device, the circuit may not be manually reenergized until it has been determined that the equipment and circuit can be safely energized. The repetitive manual reclosing of circuit breakers or reenergizing circuits through replaced fuses is prohibited.\n\nWhen it can be determined from the design of the circuit and the overcurrent devices involved that the automatic operation of a device was caused by an overload rather than a fault condition, no examination of the circuit or connected equipment is needed before the circuit is reenergized.\n\n(3)  Overcurrent protection modification.  Overcurrent protection of circuits and conductors may not be modified, even on a temporary basis, beyond that allowed by \u00a7 1910.304(e), the installation safety requirements for overcurrent protection.\n\n(c)  Test instruments and equipment \u2014(1)  Use.  Only qualified persons may perform testing work on electric circuits or equipment.\n\n(2)  Visual inspection.  Test instruments and equipment and all associated test leads, cables, power cords, probes, and connectors shall be visually inspected for external defects and damage before the equipment is used. If there is a defect or evidence of damage that might expose an employee to injury, the defective or damaged item shall be removed from service, and no employee may use it until repairs and tests necessary to render the equipment safe have been made.\n\n(3)  Rating of equipment.  Test instruments and equipment and their accessories shall be rated for the circuits and equipment to which they will be connected and shall be designed for the environment in which they will be used.\n\n(d)  Occasional use of flammable or ignitible materials.  Where flammable materials are present only occasionally, electric equipment capable of igniting them shall not be used, unless measures are taken to prevent hazardous conditions from developing. Such materials include, but are not limited to: flammable gases, vapors, or liquids; combustible dust; and ignitible fibers or flyings.\n\nElectrical installation requirements for locations where flammable materials are present on a regular basis are contained in \u00a7 1910.307."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.19.39.14", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "S", "Subpart S\u2014Electrical", "", "\u00a7 1910.335 Safeguards for personnel protection.", "OSHA", "", "", "[55 FR 32020, Aug. 6, 1990]", "(a)  Use of protective equipment \u2014(1)  Personal protective equipment.  (i) Employees working in areas where there are potential electrical hazards shall be provided with, and shall use, electrical protective equipment that is appropriate for the specific parts of the body to be protected and for the work to be performed.\n\nPersonal protective equipment requirements are contained in subpart I of this part.\n\n(ii) Protective equipment shall be maintained in a safe, reliable condition and shall be periodically inspected or tested, as required by \u00a7 1910.137.\n\n(iii) If the insulating capability of protective equipment may be subject to damage during use, the insulating material shall be protected. (For example, an outer covering of leather is sometimes used for the protection of rubber insulating material.)\n\n(iv) Employees shall wear nonconductive head protection wherever there is a danger of head injury from electric shock or burns due to contact with exposed energized parts.\n\n(v) Employees shall wear protective equipment for the eyes or face wherever there is danger of injury to the eyes or face from electric arcs or flashes or from flying objects resulting from electrical explosion.\n\n(2)  General protective equipment and tools.  (i) When working near exposed energized conductors or circuit parts, each employee shall use insulated tools or handling equipment if the tools or handling equipment might make contact with such conductors or parts. If the insulating capability of insulated tools or handling equipment is subject to damage, the insulating material shall be protected.\n\n(A) Fuse handling equipment, insulated for the circuit voltage, shall be used to remove or install fuses when the fuse terminals are energized.\n\n(B) Ropes and handlines used near exposed energized parts shall be nonconductive.\n\n(ii) Protective shields, protective barriers, or insulating materials shall be used to protect each employee from shock, burns, or other electrically related injuries while that employee is working near exposed energized parts which might be accidentally contacted or where dangerous electric heating or arcing might occur. When normally enclosed live parts are exposed for maintenance or repair, they shall be guarded to protect unqualified persons from contact with the live parts.\n\n(b)  Alerting techniques.  The following alerting techniques shall be used to warn and protect employees from hazards which could cause injury due to electric shock, burns, or failure of electric equipment parts:\n\n(1)  Safety signs and tags.  Safety signs, safety symbols, or accident prevention tags shall be used where necessary to warn employees about electrical hazards which may endanger them, as required by \u00a7 1910.145.\n\n(2)  Barricades.  Barricades shall be used in conjunction with safety signs where it is necessary to prevent or limit employee access to work areas exposing employees to uninsulated energized conductors or circuit parts. Conductive barricades may not be used where they might cause an electrical contact hazard.\n\n(3)  Attendants.  If signs and barricades do not provide sufficient warning and protection from electrical hazards, an attendant shall be stationed to warn and protect employees."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.19.39.15", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "S", "Subpart S\u2014Electrical", "", "\u00a7\u00a7 1910.336-1910.360 [Reserved]", "OSHA", "", "", "", ""], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.19.40.16", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "S", "Subpart S\u2014Electrical", "", "\u00a7\u00a7 1910.361-1910.380 [Reserved]", "OSHA", "", "", "", ""], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.19.41.17", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "S", "Subpart S\u2014Electrical", "", "\u00a7\u00a7 1910.381-1910.398 [Reserved]", "OSHA", "", "", "", ""], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.19.42.18", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "S", "Subpart S\u2014Electrical", "", "\u00a7 1910.399 Definitions applicable to this subpart.", "OSHA", "", "", "[72 FR 7215, Feb. 14, 2007, as amended at 79 FR 20692, Apr. 11, 2014]", "Acceptable.  An installation or equipment is acceptable to the Assistant Secretary of Labor, and approved within the meaning of this subpart S:\n\n(1) If it is accepted, or certified, or listed, or labeled, or otherwise determined to be safe by a nationally recognized testing laboratory recognized pursuant to \u00a7 1910.7; or\n\n(2) With respect to an installation or equipment of a kind that no nationally recognized testing laboratory accepts, certifies, lists, labels, or determines to be safe, if it is inspected or tested by another Federal agency, or by a State, municipal, or other local authority responsible for enforcing occupational safety provisions of the National Electrical Code, and found in compliance with the provisions of the National Electrical Code as applied in this subpart; or\n\n(3) With respect to custom-made equipment or related installations that are designed, fabricated for, and intended for use by a particular customer, if it is determined to be safe for its intended use by its manufacturer on the basis of test data which the employer keeps and makes available for inspection to the Assistant Secretary and his authorized representatives.\n\nAccepted.  An installation is \u201caccepted\u201d if it has been inspected and found by a nationally recognized testing laboratory to conform to specified plans or to procedures of applicable codes.\n\nAccessible.  (As applied to wiring methods.) Capable of being removed or exposed without damaging the building structure or finish, or not permanently closed in by the structure or finish of the building. (See \u201cconcealed\u201d and \u201cexposed.\u201d)\n\nAccessible.  (As applied to equipment.) Admitting close approach; not guarded by locked doors, elevation, or other effective means. (See \u201cReadily accessible.\u201d)\n\nAmpacity.  The current, in amperes, that a conductor can carry continuously under the conditions of use without exceeding its temperature rating.\n\nAppliances.  Utilization equipment, generally other than industrial, normally built in standardized sizes or types, that is installed or connected as a unit to perform one or more functions.\n\nApproved.  Acceptable to the authority enforcing this subpart. The authority enforcing this subpart is the Assistant Secretary of Labor for Occupational Safety and Health. The definition of \u201cacceptable\u201d indicates what is acceptable to the Assistant Secretary of Labor, and therefore approved within the meaning of this subpart.\n\nArmored cable (Type AC).  A fabricated assembly of insulated conductors in a flexible metallic enclosure.\n\nAskarel.  A generic term for a group of nonflammable synthetic chlorinated hydrocarbons used as electrical insulating media. Askarels of various compositional types are used. Under arcing conditions, the gases produced, while consisting predominantly of noncombustible hydrogen chloride, can include varying amounts of combustible gases depending upon the askarel type.\n\nAttachment plug (Plug cap)(Cap).  A device that, by insertion in a receptacle, establishes a connection between the conductors of the attached flexible cord and the conductors connected permanently to the receptacle.\n\nAutomatic.  Self-acting, operating by its own mechanism when actuated by some impersonal influence, as, for example, a change in current strength, pressure, temperature, or mechanical configuration.\n\nBare conductor.  See Conductor.\n\nBarrier.  A physical obstruction that is intended to prevent contact with equipment or live parts or to prevent unauthorized access to a work area.\n\nBathroom.  An area including a basin with one or more of the following: a toilet, a tub, or a shower.\n\nBonding (Bonded).  The permanent joining of metallic parts to form an electrically conductive path that ensures electrical continuity and the capacity to conduct safely any current likely to be imposed.\n\nBonding jumper.  A conductor that assures the necessary electrical conductivity between metal parts required to be electrically connected.\n\nBranch circuit.  The circuit conductors between the final overcurrent device protecting the circuit and the outlets.\n\nBuilding.  A structure that stands alone or is cut off from adjoining structures by fire walls with all openings therein protected by approved fire doors.\n\nCabinet.  An enclosure designed either for surface or flush mounting, and provided with a frame, mat, or trim in which a swinging door or doors are or can be hung.\n\nCable tray system.  A unit or assembly of units or sections and associated fittings forming a rigid structural system used to securely fasten or support cables and raceways. Cable tray systems include ladders, troughs, channels, solid bottom trays, and other similar structures.\n\nCablebus.  An assembly of insulated conductors with fittings and conductor terminations in a completely enclosed, ventilated, protective metal housing.\n\nCell line.  An assembly of electrically interconnected electrolytic cells supplied by a source of direct current power.\n\nCell line attachments and auxiliary equipment.  Cell line attachments and auxiliary equipment include, but are not limited to, auxiliary tanks, process piping, ductwork, structural supports, exposed cell line conductors, conduits and other raceways, pumps, positioning equipment, and cell cutout or bypass electrical devices. Auxiliary equipment also includes tools, welding machines, crucibles, and other portable equipment used for operation and maintenance within the electrolytic cell line working zone. In the cell line working zone, auxiliary equipment includes the exposed conductive surfaces of ungrounded cranes and crane-mounted cell-servicing equipment.\n\nCenter pivot irrigation machine.  A multi-motored irrigation machine that revolves around a central pivot and employs alignment switches or similar devices to control individual motors.\n\nCertified.  Equipment is \u201ccertified\u201d if it bears a label, tag, or other record of certification that the equipment:\n\n(1) Has been tested and found by a nationally recognized testing laboratory to meet nationally recognized standards or to be safe for use in a specified manner; or\n\n(2) Is of a kind whose production is periodically inspected by a nationally recognized testing laboratory and is accepted by the laboratory as safe for its intended use.\n\nCircuit breaker.  A device designed to open and close a circuit by nonautomatic means and to open the circuit automatically on a predetermined overcurrent without damage to itself when properly applied within its rating.\n\nClass I locations.  Class I locations are those in which flammable gases or vapors are or may be present in the air in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitable mixtures. Class I locations include the following:\n\n(1)  Class I, Division 1.  A Class I, Division 1 location is a location:\n\n(i) In which ignitable concentrations of flammable gases or vapors may exist under normal operating conditions; or\n\n(ii) In which ignitable concentrations of such gases or vapors may exist frequently because of repair or maintenance operations or because of leakage; or\n\n(iii) In which breakdown or faulty operation of equipment or processes might release ignitable concentrations of flammable gases or vapors, and might also cause simultaneous failure of electric equipment.\n\nThis classification usually includes locations where volatile flammable liquids or liquefied flammable gases are transferred from one container to another; interiors of spray booths and areas in the vicinity of spraying and painting operations where volatile flammable solvents are used; locations containing open tanks or vats of volatile flammable liquids; drying rooms or compartments for the evaporation of flammable solvents; locations containing fat and oil extraction equipment using volatile flammable solvents; portions of cleaning and dyeing plants where flammable liquids are used; gas generator rooms and other portions of gas manufacturing plants where flammable gas may escape; inadequately ventilated pump rooms for flammable gas or for volatile flammable liquids; the interiors of refrigerators and freezers in which volatile flammable materials are stored in open, lightly stoppered, or easily ruptured containers; and all other locations where ignitable concentrations of flammable vapors or gases are likely to occur in the course of normal operations.\n\n(2)  Class I, Division 2.  A Class I, Division 2 location is a location:\n\n(i) In which volatile flammable liquids or flammable gases are handled, processed, or used, but in which the hazardous liquids, vapors, or gases will normally be confined within closed containers or closed systems from which they can escape only in the event of accidental rupture or breakdown of such containers or systems, or as a result of abnormal operation of equipment; or\n\n(ii) In which ignitable concentrations of gases or vapors are normally prevented by positive mechanical ventilation, and which might become hazardous through failure or abnormal operations of the ventilating equipment; or\n\n(iii) That is adjacent to a Class I, Division 1 location, and to which ignitable concentrations of gases or vapors might occasionally be communicated unless such communication is prevented by adequate positive-pressure ventilation from a source of clean air, and effective safeguards against ventilation failure are provided.\n\nThis classification usually includes locations where volatile flammable liquids or flammable gases or vapors are used, but which would become hazardous only in case of an accident or of some unusual operating condition. The quantity of flammable material that might escape in case of accident, the adequacy of ventilating equipment, the total area involved, and the record of the industry or business with respect to explosions or fires are all factors that merit consideration in determining the classification and extent of each location.\n\nPiping without valves, checks, meters, and similar devices would not ordinarily introduce a hazardous condition even though used for flammable liquids or gases. Locations used for the storage of flammable liquids or liquefied or compressed gases in sealed containers would not normally be considered hazardous unless also subject to other hazardous conditions.\n\nElectrical conduits and their associated enclosures separated from process fluids by a single seal or barrier are classed as a Division 2 location if the outside of the conduit and enclosures is a nonhazardous location.\n\n(3)  Class I, Zone 0.  A Class I, Zone 0 location is a location in which one of the following conditions exists:\n\n(i) Ignitable concentrations of flammable gases or vapors are present continuously; or\n\n(ii) Ignitable concentrations of flammable gases or vapors are present for long periods of time.\n\nAs a guide in determining when flammable gases or vapors are present continuously or for long periods of time, refer to  Recommended Practice for Classification of Locations for Electrical Installations of Petroleum Facilities Classified as Class I, Zone 0, Zone 1 or Zone 2,  API RP 505-1997;  Electrical Apparatus for Explosive Gas Atmospheres, Classifications of Hazardous Areas,  IEC 79-10-1995;  Area Classification Code for Petroleum Installations, Model Code\u2014Part 15,  Institute for Petroleum; and  Electrical Apparatus for Explosive Gas Atmospheres, Classifications of Hazardous (Classified) Locations,  ISA S12.24.01-1997.\n\n(4)  Class I, Zone 1.  A Class I, Zone 1 location is a location in which one of the following conditions exists:\n\n(i) Ignitable concentrations of flammable gases or vapors are likely to exist under normal operating conditions; or\n\n(ii) Ignitable concentrations of flammable gases or vapors may exist frequently because of repair or maintenance operations or because of leakage; or\n\n(iii) Equipment is operated or processes are carried on of such a nature that equipment breakdown or faulty operations could result in the release of ignitable concentrations of flammable gases or vapors and also cause simultaneous failure of electric equipment in a manner that would cause the electric equipment to become a source of ignition; or\n\n(iv) A location that is adjacent to a Class I, Zone 0 location from which ignitable concentrations of vapors could be communicated, unless communication is prevented by adequate positive pressure ventilation from a source of clean air and effective safeguards against ventilation failure are provided.\n\n(5)  Class I, Zone 2.  A Class I, Zone 2 location is a location in which one of the following conditions exists:\n\n(i) Ignitable concentrations of flammable gases or vapors are not likely to occur in normal operation and if they do occur will exist only for a short period; or\n\n(ii) Volatile flammable liquids, flammable gases, or flammable vapors are handled, processed, or used, but in which the liquids, gases, or vapors are normally confined within closed containers or closed systems from which they can escape only as a result of accidental rupture or breakdown of the containers or system or as the result of the abnormal operation of the equipment with which the liquids or gases are handled, processed, or used; or\n\n(iii) Ignitable concentrations of flammable gases or vapors normally are prevented by positive mechanical ventilation, but which may become hazardous as the result of failure or abnormal operation of the ventilation equipment; or\n\n(iv) A location that is adjacent to a Class I, Zone 1 location, from which ignitable concentrations of flammable gases or vapors could be communicated, unless such communication is prevented by adequate positive-pressure ventilation from a source of clean air, and effective safeguards against ventilation failure are provided.\n\nClass II locations.  Class II locations are those that are hazardous because of the presence of combustible dust. Class II locations include the following:\n\n(1)  Class II, Division 1.  A Class II, Division 1 location is a location:\n\n(i) In which combustible dust is or may be in suspension in the air under normal operating conditions, in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitable mixtures; or\n\n(ii) Where mechanical failure or abnormal operation of machinery or equipment might cause such explosive or ignitable mixtures to be produced, and might also provide a source of ignition through simultaneous failure of electric equipment, through operation of protection devices, or from other causes; or\n\n(iii) In which combustible dusts of an electrically conductive nature may be present.\n\nThis classification may include areas of grain handling and processing plants, starch plants, sugar-pulverizing plants, malting plants, hay-grinding plants, coal pulverizing plants, areas where metal dusts and powders are produced or processed, and other similar locations that contain dust producing machinery and equipment (except where the equipment is dust-tight or vented to the outside). These areas would have combustible dust in the air, under normal operating conditions, in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitable mixtures. Combustible dusts that are electrically nonconductive include dusts produced in the handling and processing of grain and grain products, pulverized sugar and cocoa, dried egg and milk powders, pulverized spices, starch and pastes, potato and wood flour, oil meal from beans and seed, dried hay, and other organic materials which may produce combustible dusts when processed or handled. Dusts containing magnesium or aluminum are particularly hazardous, and the use of extreme caution is necessary to avoid ignition and explosion.\n\n(2)  Class II, Division 2.  A Class II, Division 2 location is a location where:\n\n(i) Combustible dust will not normally be in suspension in the air in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitable mixtures, and dust accumulations will normally be insufficient to interfere with the normal operation of electric equipment or other apparatus, but combustible dust may be in suspension in the air as a result of infrequent malfunctioning of handling or processing equipment; and\n\n(ii) Resulting combustible dust accumulations on, in, or in the vicinity of the electric equipment may be sufficient to interfere with the safe dissipation of heat from electric equipment or may be ignitable by abnormal operation or failure of electric equipment.\n\nThis classification includes locations where dangerous concentrations of suspended dust would not be likely, but where dust accumulations might form on or in the vicinity of electric equipment. These areas may contain equipment from which appreciable quantities of dust would escape under abnormal operating conditions or be adjacent to a Class II Division 1 location, as described above, into which an explosive or ignitable concentration of dust may be put into suspension under abnormal operating conditions.\n\nClass III locations.  Class III locations are those that are hazardous because of the presence of easily ignitable fibers or flyings, but in which such fibers or flyings are not likely to be in suspension in the air in quantities sufficient to produce ignitable mixtures. Class III locations include the following:\n\n(1)  Class III, Division 1.  A Class III, Division 1 location is a location in which easily ignitable fibers or materials producing combustible flyings are handled, manufactured, or used.\n\nSuch locations usually include some parts of rayon, cotton, and other textile mills; combustible fiber manufacturing and processing plants; cotton gins and cotton-seed mills; flax-processing plants; clothing manufacturing plants; woodworking plants, and establishments; and industries involving similar hazardous processes or conditions.\n\nEasily ignitable fibers and flyings include rayon, cotton (including cotton linters and cotton waste), sisal or henequen, istle, jute, hemp, tow, cocoa fiber, oakum, baled waste kapok, Spanish moss, excelsior, and other materials of similar nature.\n\n(2)  Class III, Division 2.  A Class III, Division 2 location is a location in which easily ignitable fibers are stored or handled, other than in the process of manufacture.\n\nCollector ring.  An assembly of slip rings for transferring electric energy from a stationary to a rotating member.\n\nCompetent Person.  One who is capable of identifying existing and predictable hazards in the surroundings or working conditions that are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to employees and who has authorization to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate them.\n\nConcealed.  Rendered inaccessible by the structure or finish of the building. Wires in concealed raceways are considered concealed, even though they may become accessible by withdrawing them. (See Accessible. (As applied to wiring methods.))\n\nConductor \u2014(1)  Bare.  A conductor having no covering or electrical insulation whatsoever.\n\n(2)  Covered.  A conductor encased within material of composition or thickness that is not recognized by this subpart as electrical insulation.\n\n(3)  Insulated.  A conductor encased within material of composition and thickness that is recognized by this subpart as electrical insulation.\n\nConduit body.  A separate portion of a conduit or tubing system that provides access through one or more removable covers to the interior of the system at a junction of two or more sections of the system or at a terminal point of the system. Boxes such as FS and FD or larger cast or sheet metal boxes are not classified as conduit bodies.\n\nController.  A device or group of devices that serves to govern, in some predetermined manner, the electric power delivered to the apparatus to which it is connected.\n\nCovered conductor.  See Conductor.\n\nCutout.  (Over 600 volts, nominal.) An assembly of a fuse support with either a fuseholder, fuse carrier, or disconnecting blade. The fuseholder or fuse carrier may include a conducting element (fuse link), or may act as the disconnecting blade by the inclusion of a nonfusible member.\n\nCutout box.  An enclosure designed for surface mounting and having swinging doors or covers secured directly to and telescoping with the walls of the box proper. (See Cabinet.)\n\nDamp location.  See Location.\n\nDead front.  Without live parts exposed to a person on the operating side of the equipment\n\nDeenergized.  Free from any electrical connection to a source of potential difference and from electrical charge; not having a potential different from that of the earth.\n\nDevice.  A unit of an electrical system that is intended to carry but not utilize electric energy.\n\nDielectric heating.  The heating of a nominally insulating material due to its own dielectric losses when the material is placed in a varying electric field.\n\nDisconnecting means.  A device, or group of devices, or other means by which the conductors of a circuit can be disconnected from their source of supply.\n\nDisconnecting (or Isolating) switch. (Over 600 volts, nominal.)  A mechanical switching device used for isolating a circuit or equipment from a source of power.\n\nElectrolytic cell line working zone.  The cell line working zone is the space envelope wherein operation or maintenance is normally performed on or in the vicinity of exposed energized surfaces of electrolytic cell lines or their attachments.\n\nElectrolytic cells.  A tank or vat in which electrochemical reactions are caused by applying energy for the purpose of refining or producing usable materials.\n\nEnclosed.  Surrounded by a case, housing, fence, or walls that will prevent persons from accidentally contacting energized parts.\n\nEnclosure.  The case or housing of apparatus, or the fence or walls surrounding an installation to prevent personnel from accidentally contacting energized parts, or to protect the equipment from physical damage.\n\nEnergized.  Electrically connected to a source of potential difference.\n\nEquipment.  A general term including material, fittings, devices, appliances, fixtures, apparatus, and the like, used as a part of, or in connection with, an electrical installation.\n\nEquipment grounding conductor.  See Grounding conductor, equipment.\n\nExplosion-proof apparatus.  Apparatus enclosed in a case that is capable of withstanding an explosion of a specified gas or vapor that may occur within it and of preventing the ignition of a specified gas or vapor surrounding the enclosure by sparks, flashes, or explosion of the gas or vapor within, and that operates at such an external temperature that it will not ignite a surrounding flammable atmosphere.\n\nExposed. (As applied to live parts.)  Capable of being inadvertently touched or approached nearer than a safe distance by a person. It is applied to parts not suitably guarded, isolated, or insulated. (See Accessible and Concealed.)\n\nExposed. (As applied to wiring methods.)  On or attached to the surface, or behind panels designed to allow access. (See Accessible. (As applied to wiring methods.))\n\nExposed. (For the purposes of \u00a7 1910.308(e).)  Where the circuit is in such a position that in case of failure of supports or insulation, contact with another circuit may result.\n\nExternally operable.  Capable of being operated without exposing the operator to contact with live parts.\n\nFeeder.  All circuit conductors between the service equipment, the source of a separate derived system, or other power supply source and the final branch-circuit overcurrent device.\n\nFitting.  An accessory such as a locknut, bushing, or other part of a wiring system that is intended primarily to perform a mechanical rather than an electrical function.\n\nFountain.  Fountains, ornamental pools, display pools, and reflection pools.\n\nThis definition does not include drinking fountains.\n\nFuse. (Over 600 volts, nominal.)  An overcurrent protective device with a circuit opening fusible part that is heated and severed by the passage of overcurrent through it. A fuse comprises all the parts that form a unit capable of performing the prescribed functions. It may or may not be the complete device necessary to connect it into an electrical circuit.\n\nGround.  A conducting connection, whether intentional or accidental, between an electric circuit or equipment and the earth, or to some conducting body that serves in place of the earth.\n\nGrounded.  Connected to the earth or to some conducting body that serves in place of the earth.\n\nGrounded, effectively.  Intentionally connected to earth through a ground connection or connections of sufficiently low impedance and having sufficient current-carrying capacity to prevent the buildup of voltages that may result in undue hazards to connected equipment or to persons.\n\nGrounded conductor.  A system or circuit conductor that is intentionally grounded.\n\nGrounding conductor.  A conductor used to connect equipment or the grounded circuit of a wiring system to a grounding electrode or electrodes.\n\nGrounding conductor, equipment.  The conductor used to connect the noncurrent-carrying metal parts of equipment, raceways, and other enclosures to the system grounded conductor, the grounding electrode conductor, or both, at the service equipment or at the source of a separately derived system.\n\nGrounding electrode conductor.  The conductor used to connect the grounding electrode to the equipment grounding conductor, to the grounded conductor, or to both, of the circuits at the service equipment or at the source of a separately derived system.\n\nGround-fault circuit-interrupter.  A device intended for the protection of personnel that functions to deenergize a circuit or a portion of a circuit within an established period of time when a current to ground exceeds some predetermined value that is less than that required to operate the overcurrent protective device of the supply circuit.\n\nGuarded.  Covered, shielded, fenced, enclosed, or otherwise protected by means of suitable covers, casings, barriers, rails, screens, mats, or platforms to remove the likelihood of approach to a point of danger or contact by persons or objects.\n\nHealth care facilities.  Buildings or portions of buildings in which medical, dental, psychiatric, nursing, obstetrical, or surgical care are provided.\n\nHealth care facilities include, but are not limited to, hospitals, nursing homes, limited care facilities, clinics, medical and dental offices, and ambulatory care centers, whether permanent or movable.\n\nHeating equipment.  For the purposes of \u00a7 1910.306(g), the term \u201cheating equipment\u201d includes any equipment used for heating purposes if heat is generated by induction or dielectric methods.\n\nHoistway.  Any shaftway, hatchway, well hole, or other vertical opening or space that is designed for the operation of an elevator or dumbwaiter.\n\nIdentified (as applied to equipment).  Approved as suitable for the specific purpose, function, use, environment, or application, where described in a particular requirement.\n\nSome examples of ways to determine suitability of equipment for a specific purpose, environment, or application include investigations by a nationally recognized testing laboratory (through listing and labeling), inspection agency, or other organization recognized under the definition of \u201cacceptable.\u201d\n\nInduction heating.  The heating of a nominally conductive material due to its own I \n 2 R losses when the material is placed in a varying electromagnetic field.\n\nInsulated.  Separated from other conducting surfaces by a dielectric (including air space) offering a high resistance to the passage of current.\n\nInsulated conductor.  See Conductor, Insulated.\n\nInterrupter switch. (Over 600 volts, nominal.)  A switch capable of making, carrying, and interrupting specified currents.\n\nIrrigation Machine.  An electrically driven or controlled machine, with one or more motors, not hand portable, and used primarily to transport and distribute water for agricultural purposes.\n\nIsolated. (As applied to location.)  Not readily accessible to persons unless special means for access are used.\n\nIsolated power system.  A system comprising an isolating transformer or its equivalent, a line isolation monitor, and its ungrounded circuit conductors.\n\nLabeled.  Equipment is \u201clabeled\u201d if there is attached to it a label, symbol, or other identifying mark of a nationally recognized testing laboratory:\n\n(1) That makes periodic inspections of the production of such equipment, and\n\n(2) Whose labeling indicates compliance with nationally recognized standards or tests to determine safe use in a specified manner.\n\nLighting outlet.  An outlet intended for the direct connection of a lampholder, a lighting fixture, or a pendant cord terminating in a lampholder.\n\nListed.  Equipment is \u201clisted\u201d if it is of a kind mentioned in a list that:\n\n(1) Is published by a nationally recognized laboratory that makes periodic inspection of the production of such equipment, and\n\n(2) States that such equipment meets nationally recognized standards or has been tested and found safe for use in a specified manner.\n\nLive parts.  Energized conductive components.\n\nLocation \u2014(1)  Damp location.  Partially protected locations under canopies, marquees, roofed open porches, and like locations, and interior locations subject to moderate degrees of moisture, such as some basements, some barns, and some cold-storage warehouses.\n\n(2)  Dry location.  A location not normally subject to dampness or wetness. A location classified as dry may be temporarily subject to dampness or wetness, as in the case of a building under construction.\n\n(3)  Wet location.  Installations underground or in concrete slabs or masonry in direct contact with the earth, and locations subject to saturation with water or other liquids, such as vehicle-washing areas, and locations unprotected and exposed to weather.\n\nMedium voltage cable (Type MV).  A single or multiconductor solid dielectric insulated cable rated 2001 volts or higher.\n\nMetal-clad cable (Type MC).  A factory assembly of one or more insulated circuit conductors with or without optical fiber members enclosed in an armor of interlocking metal tape, or a smooth or corrugated metallic sheath.\n\nMineral-insulated metal-sheathed cable (Type MI).  Type MI, mineral-insulated metal-sheathed, cable is a factory assembly of one or more conductors insulated with a highly compressed refractory mineral insulation and enclosed in a liquidtight and gastight continuous copper or alloy steel sheath.\n\nMobile X-ray.  X-ray equipment mounted on a permanent base with wheels or casters or both for moving while completely assembled.\n\nMotor control center.  An assembly of one or more enclosed sections having a common power bus and principally containing motor control units.\n\nNonmetallic-sheathed cable (Types NM, NMC, and NMS).  A factory assembly of two or more insulated conductors having an outer sheath of moisture resistant, flame-retardant, nonmetallic material.\n\nOil (filled) cutout. (Over 600 volts, nominal.)  A cutout in which all or part of the fuse support and its fuse link or disconnecting blade are mounted in oil with complete immersion of the contacts and the fusible portion of the conducting element (fuse link), so that arc interruption by severing of the fuse link or by opening of the contacts will occur under oil.\n\nOpen wiring on insulators.  Open wiring on insulators is an exposed wiring method using cleats, knobs, tubes, and flexible tubing for the protection and support of single insulated conductors run in or on buildings, and not concealed by the building structure.\n\nOutlet.  A point on the wiring system at which current is taken to supply utilization equipment.\n\nOutline lighting.  An arrangement of incandescent lamps or electric discharge lighting to outline or call attention to certain features, such as the shape of a building or the decoration of a window.\n\nOvercurrent.  Any current in excess of the rated current of equipment or the ampacity of a conductor. It may result from overload, short circuit, or ground fault.\n\nOverhaul  means to perform a major replacement, modification, repair, or rehabilitation similar to that involved when a new building or facility is built, a new wing is added, or an entire floor is renovated.\n\nOverload.  Operation of equipment in excess of normal, full-load rating, or of a conductor in excess of rated ampacity that, when it persists for a sufficient length of time, would cause damage or dangerous overheating. A fault, such as a short circuit or ground fault, is not an overload. (See Overcurrent.)\n\nPanelboard.  A single panel or group of panel units designed for assembly in the form of a single panel; including buses, automatic overcurrent devices, and with or without switches for the control of light, heat, or power circuits; designed to be placed in a cabinet or cutout box placed in or against a wall or partition and accessible only from the front. (See Switchboard.)\n\nPermanently installed decorative fountains and reflection pools.  Pools that are constructed in the ground, on the ground, or in a building in such a manner that the fountain or pool cannot be readily disassembled for storage, whether or not served by electrical circuits of any nature. These units are primarily constructed for their aesthetic value and are not intended for swimming or wading.\n\nPermanently installed swimming, wading, and therapeutic pools.  Pools that are constructed in the ground or partially in the ground, and all other capable of holding water in a depth greater than 1.07 m (42 in.). The definition also applies to all pools installed inside of a building, regardless of water depth, whether or not served by electric circuits of any nature.\n\nPortable X-ray.  X-ray equipment designed to be hand-carried.\n\nPower and control tray cable (Type TC).  A factory assembly of two or more insulated conductors, with or without associated bare or covered grounding conductors under a nonmetallic sheath, approved for installation in cable trays, in raceways, or where supported by a messenger wire.\n\nPower fuse.  (Over 600 volts, nominal.) See Fuse.\n\nPower-limited tray cable (Type PLTC).  A factory assembly of two or more insulated conductors under a nonmetallic jacket.\n\nPower outlet.  An enclosed assembly, which may include receptacles, circuit breakers, fuseholders, fused switches, buses, and watt-hour meter mounting means, that is intended to supply and control power to mobile homes, recreational vehicles, or boats or to serve as a means for distributing power needed to operate mobile or temporarily installed equipment.\n\nPremises wiring. (Premises wiring system.)  The interior and exterior wiring, including power, lighting, control, and signal circuit wiring together with all of their associated hardware, fittings, and wiring devices, both permanently and temporarily installed, that extends from the service point of utility conductors or source of power (such as a battery, a solar photovoltaic system, or a generator, transformer, or converter) to the outlets. Such wiring does not include wiring internal to appliances, fixtures, motors, controllers, motor control centers, and similar equipment.\n\nQualified person.  One who has received training in and has demonstrated skills and knowledge in the construction and operation of electric equipment and installations and the hazards involved.\n\nWhether an employee is considered to be a \u201cqualified person\u201d will depend upon various circumstances in the workplace. For example, it is possible and, in fact, likely for an individual to be considered \u201cqualified\u201d with regard to certain equipment in the workplace, but \u201cunqualified\u201d as to other equipment. (See 1910.332(b)(3) for training requirements that specifically apply to qualified persons.)\n\nAn employee who is undergoing on-the-job training and who, in the course of such training, has demonstrated an ability to perform duties safely at his or her level of training and who is under the direct supervision of a qualified person is considered to be a qualified person for the performance of those duties.\n\nRaceway.  An enclosed channel of metal or nonmetallic materials designed expressly for holding wires, cables, or busbars, with additional functions as permitted in this standard. Raceways include, but are not limited to, rigid metal conduit, rigid nonmetallic conduit, intermediate metal conduit, liquidtight flexible conduit, flexible metallic tubing, flexible metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing, electrical nonmetallic tubing, underfloor raceways, cellular concrete floor raceways, cellular metal floor raceways, surface raceways, wireways, and busways.\n\nReadily accessible.  Capable of being reached quickly for operation, renewal, or inspections, so that those needing ready access do not have to climb over or remove obstacles or to resort to portable ladders, chairs, etc. (See Accessible.)\n\nReceptacle.  A receptacle is a contact device installed at the outlet for the connection of an attachment plug. A single receptacle is a single contact device with no other contact device on the same yoke. A multiple receptacle is two or more contact devices on the same yoke.\n\nReceptacle outlet.  An outlet where one or more receptacles are installed.\n\nRemote-control circuit.  Any electric circuit that controls any other circuit through a relay or an equivalent device.\n\nSealable equipment.  Equipment enclosed in a case or cabinet that is provided with a means of sealing or locking so that live parts cannot be made accessible without opening the enclosure. The equipment may or may not be operable without opening the enclosure.\n\nSeparately derived system.  A premises wiring system whose power is derived from a battery, a solar photovoltaic system, or from a generator, transformer, or converter windings, and that has no direct electrical connection, including a solidly connected grounded circuit conductor, to supply conductors originating in another system.\n\nService.  The conductors and equipment for delivering electric energy from the serving utility to the wiring system of the premises served.\n\nService cable.  Service conductors made up in the form of a cable.\n\nService conductors.  The conductors from the service point to the service disconnecting means.\n\nService drop.  The overhead service conductors from the last pole or other aerial support to and including the splices, if any, connecting to the service-entrance conductors at the building or other structure.\n\nService-entrance cable.  A single conductor or multiconductor assembly provided with or without an overall covering, primarily used for services, and is of the following types:\n\n(1)  Type SE.  Type SE, having a flame-retardant, moisture resistant covering; and\n\n(2)  Type USE.  Type USE, identified for underground use, having a moisture-resistant covering, but not required to have a flame-retardant covering. Cabled, single-conductor, Type USE constructions recognized for underground use may have a bare copper conductor cabled with the assembly. Type USE single, parallel, or cable conductor assemblies recognized for underground use may have a bare copper concentric conductor applied. These constructions do not require an outer overall covering.\n\nService-entrance conductors, overhead system.  The service conductors between the terminals of the service equipment and a point usually outside the building, clear of building walls, where joined by tap or splice to the service drop.\n\nService entrance conductors, underground system.  The service conductors between the terminals of the service equipment and the point of connection to the service lateral.\n\nService equipment.  The necessary equipment, usually consisting of one or more circuit breakers or switches and fuses, and their accessories, connected to the load end of service conductors to a building or other structure, or an otherwise designated area, and intended to constitute the main control and cutoff of the supply.\n\nService point.  The point of connection between the facilities of the serving utility and the premises wiring.\n\nShielded nonmetallic-sheathed cable (Type SNM).  A factory assembly of two or more insulated conductors in an extruded core of moisture-resistant, flame-resistant nonmetallic material, covered with an overlapping spiral metal tape and wire shield and jacketed with an extruded moisture-, flame-, oil-, corrosion-, fungus-, and sunlight-resistant nonmetallic material.\n\nShow window.  Any window used or designed to be used for the display of goods or advertising material, whether it is fully or partly enclosed or entirely open at the rear and whether or not it has a platform raised higher than the street floor level.\n\nSignaling circuit.  Any electric circuit that energizes signaling equipment.\n\nStorable swimming or wading pool.  A pool that is constructed on or above the ground and is capable of holding water to a maximum depth of 1.07 m (42 in.), or a pool with nonmetallic, molded polymeric walls or inflatable fabric walls regardless of dimension.\n\nSwitchboard.  A large single panel, frame, or assembly of panels on which are mounted, on the face or back, or both, switches, overcurrent and other protective devices, buses, and (usually) instruments. Switchboards are generally accessible from the rear as well as from the front and are not intended to be installed in cabinets. (See Panelboard.)\n\nSwitch \u2014(1)  General-use switch.  A switch intended for use in general distribution and branch circuits. It is rated in amperes, and it is capable of interrupting its rated current at its rated voltage.\n\n(2)  General-use snap switch.  A form of general-use switch constructed so that it can be installed in device boxes or on box covers, or otherwise used in conjunction with wiring systems recognized by this subpart.\n\n(3)  Isolating switch.  A switch intended for isolating an electric circuit from the source of power. It has no interrupting rating, and it is intended to be operated only after the circuit has been opened by some other means.\n\n(4)  Motor-circuit switch.  A switch, rated in horsepower, capable of interrupting the maximum operating overload current of a motor of the same horsepower rating as the switch at the rated voltage.\n\nSwitching devices. (Over 600 volts, nominal.)  Devices designed to close and open one or more electric circuits. Included in this category are circuit breakers, cutouts, disconnecting (or isolating) switches, disconnecting means, interrupter switches, and oil (filled) cutouts.\n\nTransportable X-ray.  X-ray equipment installed in a vehicle or that may readily be disassembled for transport in a vehicle.\n\nUtilization equipment.  Equipment that utilizes electric energy for electronic, electromechanical, chemical, heating, lighting, or similar purposes.\n\nVentilated.  Provided with a means to permit circulation of air sufficient to remove an excess of heat, fumes, or vapors.\n\nVolatile flammable liquid.  A flammable liquid having a flash point below 38 \u00b0C (100 \u00b0F), or a flammable liquid whose temperature is above its flash point, or a Class II combustible liquid having a vapor pressure not exceeding 276 kPa (40 psia) at 38 \u00b0C (100 \u00b0F) and whose temperature is above its flash point.\n\nVoltage (of a circuit).  The greatest root-mean-square (rms) (effective) difference of potential between any two conductors of the circuit concerned.\n\nVoltage, nominal.  A nominal value assigned to a circuit or system for the purpose of conveniently designating its voltage class (as 120/240 volts, 480Y/277 volts, 600 volts). The actual voltage at which a circuit operates can vary from the nominal within a range that permits satisfactory operation of equipment.\n\nVoltage to ground.  For grounded circuits, the voltage between the given conductor and that point or conductor of the circuit that is grounded; for ungrounded circuits, the greatest voltage between the given conductor and any other conductor of the circuit.\n\nWatertight.  So constructed that moisture will not enter the enclosure.\n\nWeatherproof.  So constructed or protected that exposure to the weather will not interfere with successful operation. Rainproof, raintight, or watertight equipment can fulfill the requirements for weatherproof where varying weather conditions other than wetness, such as snow, ice, dust, or temperature extremes, are not a factor.\n\nWireways.  Sheet-metal troughs with hinged or removable covers for housing and protecting electric wires and cable and in which conductors are laid in place after the wireway has been installed as a complete system."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.2.33.1", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "B", "Subpart B\u2014Adoption and Extension of Established Federal Standards", "", "\u00a7 1910.11 Scope and purpose.", "OSHA", "", "", "", "(a) The provisions of this subpart B adopt and extend the applicability of, established Federal standards in effect on April 28, 1971, with respect to every employer, employee, and employment covered by the Act.\n\n(b) It bears emphasis that only standards (i.e., substantive rules) relating to safety or health are adopted by any incorporations by reference of standards prescribed elsewhere in this chapter or this title. Other materials contained in the referenced parties are not adopted. Illustrations of the types of materials which are not adopted are these. The incorporations by reference of parts 1915, 1916, 1917, 1918 in \u00a7\u00a7 1910.13, 1910.14, 1910.15, and 1910.16 are not intended to include the discussion in those parts of the coverage of the Longshoremen's and Harbor Workers' Compensation Act or the penalty provisions of the Act. Similarly, the incorporation by reference of part 1926 in \u00a7 1910.12 is not intended to include references to interpretative rules having relevance to the application of the Construction Safety Act, but having no relevance to the application to the Occupational Safety and Health Act."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.2.33.2", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "B", "Subpart B\u2014Adoption and Extension of Established Federal Standards", "", "\u00a7 1910.12 Construction work.", "OSHA", "", "", "", "(a)  Standards.  The standards prescribed in part 1926 of this chapter are adopted as occupational safety and health standards under section 6 of the Act and shall apply, according to the provisions thereof, to every employment and place of employment of every employee engaged in construction work. Each employer shall protect the employment and places of employment of each of his employees engaged in construction work by complying with the appropriate standards prescribed in this paragraph.\n\n(b)  Definition.  For purposes of this section,  Construction work  means work for construction, alteration, and/or repair, including painting and decorating. See discussion of these terms in \u00a7 1926.13 of this title.\n\n(c)  Construction Safety Act distinguished.  This section adopts as occupational safety and health standards under section 6 of the Act the standards which are prescribed in part 1926 of this chapter. Thus, the standards (substantive rules) published in subpart C and the following subparts of part 1926 of this chapter are applied. This section does not incorporate subparts A and B of part 1926 of this chapter. Subparts A and B have pertinence only to the application of section 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (the Construction Safety Act). For example, the interpretation of the term \u201csubcontractor\u201d in paragraph (c) of \u00a7 1926.13 of this chapter is significant in discerning the coverage of the Construction Safety Act and duties thereunder. However, the term \u201csubcontractor\u201d has no significance in the application of the Act, which was enacted under the Commerce Clause and which establishes duties for \u201cemployers\u201d which are not dependent for their application upon any contractual relationship with the Federal Government or upon any form of Federal financial assistance.\n\n(d) For the purposes of this part, to the extent that it may not already be included in paragraph (b) of this section, \u201cconstruction work\u201d includes the erection of new electric transmission and distribution lines and equipment, and the alteration, conversion, and improvement of the existing transmission and distribution lines and equipment."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.2.33.3", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "B", "Subpart B\u2014Adoption and Extension of Established Federal Standards", "", "\u00a7 1910.15 Shipyard employment.", "OSHA", "", "", "[58 FR 35308, June 30, 1993]", "(a)  Adoption and extension of established safety and health standards for shipyard employment.  The standards prescribed by part 1915 (formerly parts 1501-1503) of this title and in effect on April 28, 1971 (as revised), are adopted as occupational safety or health standards under section 6(a) of the Act and shall apply, according to the provisions thereof, to every employment and place of employment of every employee engaged in ship repair, shipbreaking, and shipbuilding, or a related employment. Each employer shall protect the employment and places of employment of each of his employees engaged in ship repair, shipbreaking, and shipbuilding, or a related employment, by complying with the appropriate standards prescribed by this paragraph.\n\n(b)  Definitions.  For purposes of this section:\n\n(1)  Ship repair  means any repair of a vessel, including, but not restricted to, alterations, conversions, installations, cleaning, painting, and maintenance work;\n\n(2)  Shipbreaking  means any breaking down of a vessel's structure for the purpose of scrapping the vessel, including the removal of gear, equipment, or any component of a vessel;\n\n(3)  Shipbuilding  means the construction of a vessel, including the installation of machinery and equipment;\n\n(4)  Related employment  means any employment performed as an incident to, or in conjunction with, ship repair, shipbreaking, and shipbuilding work, including, but not restricted to, inspection, testing, and employment as a watchman; and\n\n(5)  Vessel  includes every description of watercraft or other artificial contrivance used, or capable of being used, as a means of transportation on water, including special purpose floating structures not primarily designed for, or used as a means of, transportation on water."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.2.33.4", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "B", "Subpart B\u2014Adoption and Extension of Established Federal Standards", "", "\u00a7 1910.16 Longshoring and marine terminals.", "OSHA", "", "", "[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 48 FR 30908, July 5, 1983; 52 FR 36026, Sept. 25, 1987; 62 FR 40195, July 25, 1997; 63 FR 66270, Dec. 1, 1998]", "(a)  Safety and health standards for longshoring.  (1) Part 1918 of this chapter shall apply exclusively, according to the provisions thereof, to all employment of every employee engaged in longshoring operations or related employment aboard any vessel. All cargo transfer accomplished with the use of shore-based material handling devices shall be governed by part 1917 of this chapter.\n\n(2) Part 1910 does not apply to longshoring operations except for the following provisions:\n\n(i)  Access to employee exposure and medical records.  Subpart Z, \u00a7 1910.1020;\n\n(ii)  Commercial diving operations.  Subpart T;\n\n(iii)  Electrical.  Subpart S when shore-based electrical installations provide power for use aboard vessels;\n\n(iv)  Hazard communication.  Subpart Z, \u00a7 1910.1200;\n\n(v)  Ionizing radiation.  Subpart Z, \u00a7 1910.1096;\n\n(vi)  Noise.  Subpart G, \u00a7 1910.95;\n\n(vii)  Nonionizing radiation.  Subpart G, \u00a7 1910.97;\n\nExposures to nonionizing radiation emissions from commercial vessel transmitters are considered hazardous under the following conditions: (1) where the radar is transmitting, the scanner is stationary, and the exposure distance is 18.7 feet (6 m.) or less; or (2) where the radar is transmitting, the scanner is rotating, and the exposure distance is 5.2 feet (1.8 m.) or less.\n\n(viii)  Respiratory protection.  Subpart I, \u00a7 1910.134;\n\n(ix)  Toxic and hazardous substances.  Subpart Z applies to marine cargo handling activities except for the following:\n\n(A) When a substance or cargo is contained within a sealed, intact means of packaging or containment complying with Department of Transportation or International Maritime Organization requirements;\n 1\n\n1  The International Maritime Organization publishes the International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code to aid compliance with the international legal requirements of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1960.\n\n(B) Bloodborne pathogens, \u00a7 1910.1030;\n\n(C) Carbon monoxide, \u00a7 1910.1000 (See \u00a7 1918.94 (a)); and\n\n(D) Hydrogen sulfide, \u00a7 1910.1000 (See \u00a7 1918.94 (f)).\n\n(x) Powered industrial truck operator training, Subpart N, \u00a7 1910.178(l).\n\n(b)  Safety and health standards for marine terminals.  Part 1917 of this chapter shall apply exclusively, according to the provisions thereof, to employment within a marine terminal, except as follows:\n\n(1) The provisions of part 1917 of this chapter do not apply to the following:\n\n(i) Facilities used solely for the bulk storage, handling, and transfer of flammable and combustible liquids and gases.\n\n(ii) Facilities subject to the regulations of the Office of Pipeline Safety of the Research and Special Programs Administration, Department of Transportation (49 CFR chapter I, subchapter D), to the extent such regulations apply to specific working conditions.\n\n(iii) Fully automated bulk coal handling facilities contiguous to electrical power generating plants.\n\n(2) Part 1910 does not apply to marine terminals except for the following:\n\n(i)  Abrasive blasting.  Subpart G, \u00a7 1910.94(a);\n\n(ii)  Access to employee exposure and medical records.  Subpart Z, \u00a7 1910.1020;\n\n(iii)  Commercial diving operations.  Subpart T;\n\n(iv)  Electrical.  Subpart S;\n\n(v)  Grain handling facilities.  Subpart R, \u00a7 1910.272;\n\n(vi)  Hazard communication.  Subpart Z, \u00a7 1910.1200;\n\n(vii)  Ionizing radiation.  Subpart Z, \u00a7 1910.1096;\n\n(viii)  Noise.  Subpart G, \u00a7 1910.95;\n\n(ix)  Nonionizing radiation.  Subpart G, \u00a7 1910.97.\n\n(x)  Respiratory protection.  Subpart I, \u00a7 1910.134.\n\n(xi)  Safety requirements for scaffolding.  Subpart D, \u00a7 1910.28;\n\n(xii)  Servicing multi-piece and single piece rim wheels.  Subpart N, \u00a7 1910.177;\n\n(xiii)  Toxic and hazardous substances.  Subpart Z applies to marine cargo handling activities except for the following:\n\n(A) When a substance or cargo is contained within a sealed, intact means of packaging or containment complying with Department of Transportation or International Maritime Organization requirements; \n 2\n\n2  The International Maritime Organization publishes the International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code to aid compliance with the international legal requirements of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1960.\n\n(B) Bloodborne pathogens, \u00a7 1910.1030;\n\n(C) Carbon monoxide, \u00a7 1910.1000 (See \u00a7 1917.24(a)); and\n\n(D) Hydrogen sulfide, \u00a7 1910.1000 (See \u00a7 1917.73(a)(2)); and\n\n(xiv) Powered industrial truck operator training, subpart N, \u00a7 1910.178(l).\n\n(c)  Definitions.  For purposes of this section:\n\n(1)  Longshoring operation  means the loading, unloading, moving, or handling of, cargo, ship's stores, gear, etc., into, in, on, or out of any vessel;\n\n(2)  Related employment  means any employment performed as an incident to or in conjunction with, longshoring operations including, but not restricted to, securing cargo, rigging, and employment as a porter, checker, or watchman; and\n\n(3)  Vessel  includes every description of watercraft or other artificial contrivance used, or capable of being used, as a means of transportation on water, including special purpose floating structures not primarily designed for, or used as a means of, transportation on water.\n\n(4)  Marine terminal  means wharves, bulkheads, quays, piers, docks and other berthing locations and adjacent storage or adjacent areas and structures associated with the primary movement of cargo or materials from vessel to shore or shore to vessel including structures which are devoted to receiving, handling, holding, consolidation and loading or delivery of waterborne shipments or passengers, including areas devoted to the maintenance of the terminal or equipment. The term does not include production or manufacturing areas having their own docking facilities and located at a marine terminal nor does the term include storage facilities directly associated with those production or manufacturing areas."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.2.33.5", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "B", "Subpart B\u2014Adoption and Extension of Established Federal Standards", "", "\u00a7 1910.17 Effective dates.", "OSHA", "", "", "[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 61 FR 9235, Mar. 7, 1996]", "(a)-(b) [Reserved]\n\n(c) Except whenever any employment or place of employment is, or becomes, subject to any safety and health standard prescribed in part 1915, 1916, 1917, 1918, or 1926 of this title on a date before August 27, 1971, by virtue of the Construction Safety Act or the Longshoremen's and Harbor Workers' Compensation Act, that occupational safety and health standard as incorporated by reference in this subpart shall also become effective under the Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 on that date."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.2.33.6", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "B", "Subpart B\u2014Adoption and Extension of Established Federal Standards", "", "\u00a7 1910.18 Changes in established Federal standards.", "OSHA", "", "", "", "Whenever an occupational safety and health standard adopted and incorporated by reference in this subpart B is changed pursuant to section 6(b) of the Act and the statute under which the standard was originally promulgated, and in accordance with part 1911 of this chapter, the standard shall be deemed changed for purposes of that statute and this subpart B, and shall apply under this subpart B. For the purposes of this section, a change in a standard includes any amendment, addition, or repeal, in whole or in part, of any standard."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.2.33.7", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "B", "Subpart B\u2014Adoption and Extension of Established Federal Standards", "", "\u00a7 1910.19 Special provisions for air contaminants.", "OSHA", "", "", "[43 FR 28473, June 30, 1978, as amended at 43 FR 45809, Oct. 3, 1978; 43 FR 53007, Nov. 14, 1978; 44 FR 5447, Jan. 26, 1979; 46 FR 32022, June 19, 1981; 49 FR 25796, June 22, 1984; 50 FR 51173, Dec. 13, 1985; 52 FR 46291, Dec. 4, 1987; 57 FR 35666, Aug. 10, 1992; 57 FR 42388, Sept. 14, 1992; 59 FR 41057, Aug. 10, 1994; 61 FR 56831, Nov. 4, 1996; 62 FR 1600, Jan. 10, 1997]", "(a)  Asbestos, tremolite, anthophyllite, and actinolite dust.  Section 1910.1001 shall apply to the exposure of every employee to asbestos, tremolite, anthophyllite, and actinolite dust in every employment and place of employment covered by \u00a7 1910.16, in lieu of any different standard on exposure to asbestos, tremolite, anthophyllite, and actinolite dust which would otherwise be applicable by virtue of any of those sections.\n\n(b)  Vinyl chloride.  Section 1910.1017 shall apply to the exposure of every employee to vinyl chloride in every employment and place of employment covered by \u00a7 1910.12, \u00a7 1910.13, \u00a7 1910.14, \u00a7 1910.15, or \u00a7 1910.16, in lieu of any different standard on exposure to vinyl chloride which would otherwise be applicable by virtue of any of those sections.\n\n(c)  Acrylonitrile.  Section 1910.1045 shall apply to the exposure of every employee to acrylonitrile in every employment and place of employment covered by \u00a7 1910.12, \u00a7 1910.13, \u00a7 1910.14, \u00a7 1910.15, or \u00a7 1910.16, in lieu of any different standard on exposure to acrylonitrile which would otherwise be applicable by virtue of any of those sections.\n\n(d) [Reserved]\n\n(e)  Inorganic arsenic.  Section 1910.1018 shall apply to the exposure of every employee to inorganic arsenic in every employment covered by \u00a7 1910.12, \u00a7 1910.13, \u00a7 1910.14, \u00a7 1910.15, or \u00a7 1910.16, in lieu of any different standard on exposure to inorganic arsenic which would otherwise be applicable by virtue of any of those sections.\n\n(f) [Reserved]\n\n(g)  Lead.  Section 1910.1025 shall apply to the exposure of every employee to lead in every employment and place of employment covered by \u00a7\u00a7 1910.13, 1910.14, 1910.15, and 1910.16, in lieu of any different standard on exposure to lead which would otherwise be applicable by virtue of those sections.\n\n(h)  Ethylene oxide.  Section 1910.1047 shall apply to the exposure of every employee to ethylene oxide in every employment and place of employment covered by \u00a7 1910.12, \u00a7 1910.13, \u00a7 1910.14, \u00a7 1910.15, or \u00a7 1910.16, in lieu of any different standard on exposure to ethylene oxide which would otherwise be applicable by virtue of those sections.\n\n(i)  4,4\u2032-Methylenedianiline (MDA).  Section 1910.1050 shall apply to the exposure of every employee to MDA in every employment and place of employment covered by \u00a7 1910.13, \u00a7 1910.14, \u00a7 1910.15, or \u00a7 1910.16, in lieu of any different standard on exposure to MDA which would otherwise be applicable by virtue of those sections.\n\n(j)  Formaldehyde.  Section 1910.1048 shall apply to the exposure of every employee to formaldehyde in every employment and place of employment covered by \u00a7 1910.12, \u00a7 1910.13, \u00a7 1910.14, \u00a7 1910.15 or \u00a7 1910.16 in lieu of any different standard on exposure to formaldehyde which would otherwise be applicable by virtue of those sections.\n\n(k)  Cadmium.  Section 1910.1027 shall apply to the exposure of every employee to cadmium in every employment and place of employment covered by \u00a7 1910.16 in lieu of any different standard on exposures to cadmium that would otherwise be applicable by virtue of those sections.\n\n(l)  1,3-Butadiene (BD).  Section 1910.1051 shall apply to the exposure of every employee to BD in every employment and place of employment covered by \u00a7 1910.12, \u00a7 1910.13, \u00a7 1910.14, \u00a7 1910.15, or \u00a7 1910.16, in lieu of any different standard on exposure to BD which would otherwise be applicable by virtue of those sections.\n\n(m)  Methylene chloride (MC).  Section 1910.1052 shall apply to the exposure of every employee to MC in every employment and place of employment covered by \u00a7 1910.16 in lieu of any different standard on exposure to MC which would otherwise be applicable by virtue of that section when it is not present in sealed, intact containers."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.20.43.1", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "T", "Subpart T\u2014Commercial Diving Operations", "", "\u00a7 1910.401 Scope and application.", "OSHA", "", "", "[42 FR 37668, July 22, 1977, as amended at 47 FR 53365, Nov. 26, 1982; 58 FR 35310, June 30, 1993; 69 FR 7363, Feb. 17, 2004]", "(a)  Scope.  (1) This subpart (standard) applies to every place of employment within the waters of the United States, or within any State, the District of Columbia, the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, the Virgin Islands, American Samoa, Guam, the Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands, Wake Island, Johnston Island, the Canal Zone, or within the Outer Continental Shelf lands as defined in the Outer Continental Shelf Lands Act (67 Stat. 462, 43 U.S.C. 1331), where diving and related support operations are performed.\n\n(2) This standard applies to diving and related support operations conducted in connection with all types of work and employments, including general industry, construction, ship repairing, shipbuilding, shipbreaking and longshoring. However, this standard does not apply to any diving operation:\n\n(i) Performed solely for instructional purposes, using open-circuit, compressed-air SCUBA and conducted within the no-decompression limits;\n\n(ii) Performed solely for search, rescue, or related public safety purposes by or under the control of a governmental agency; or\n\n(iii) Governed by 45 CFR part 46 (Protection of Human Subjects, U.S. Department of Health and Human Services) or equivalent rules or regulations established by another federal agency, which regulate research, development, or related purposes involving human subjects.\n\n(iv) Defined as scientific diving and which is under the direction and control of a diving program containing at least the following elements:\n\n(A) Diving safety manual which includes at a minimum: Procedures covering all diving operations specific to the program; procedures for emergency care, including recompression and evacuation; and criteria for diver training and certification.\n\n(B) Diving control (safety) board, with the majority of its members being active divers, which shall at a minimum have the authority to: Approve and monitor diving projects; review and revise the diving safety manual; assure compliance with the manual; certify the depths to which a diver has been trained; take disciplinary action for unsafe practices; and, assure adherence to the buddy system (a diver is accompanied by and is in continuous contact with another diver in the water) for SCUBA diving.\n\n(3)  Alternative requirements for recreational diving instructors and diving guides.  Employers of recreational diving instructors and diving guides are not required to comply with the decompression-chamber requirements specified by paragraphs (b)(2) and (c)(3)(iii) of \u00a7 1910.423 and paragraph (b)(1) of \u00a7 1910.426 when they meet all of the following conditions:\n\n(i) The instructor or guide is engaging solely in recreational diving instruction or dive-guiding operations;\n\n(ii) The instructor or guide is diving within the no-decompression limits in these operations;\n\n(iii) The instructor or guide is using a nitrox breathing-gas mixture consisting of a high percentage of oxygen (more than 22% by volume) mixed with nitrogen;\n\n(iv) The instructor or guide is using an open-circuit, semi-closed-circuit, or closed-circuit self-contained underwater breathing apparatus (SCUBA); and\n\n(v) The employer of the instructor or guide is complying with all requirements of appendix C of this subpart.\n\n(b)  Application in emergencies.  An employer may deviate from the requirements of this standard to the extent necessary to prevent or minimize a situation which is likely to cause death, serious physical harm, or major environmental damage, provided that the employer:\n\n(1) Notifies the Area Director, Occupational Safety and Health Administration within 48 hours of the onset of the emergency situation indicating the nature of the emergency and extent of the deviation from the prescribed regulations; and\n\n(2) Upon request from the Area Director, submits such information in writing.\n\n(c)  Employer obligation.  The employer shall be responsible for compliance with:\n\n(1) All provisions of this standard of general applicability; and\n\n(2) All requirements pertaining to specific diving modes to the extent diving operations in such modes are conducted."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.20.43.2", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "T", "Subpart T\u2014Commercial Diving Operations", "", "\u00a7 1910.402 Definitions.", "OSHA", "", "", "[42 FR 37668, July 22, 1977, as amended at 47 FR 53365, Nov. 26, 1982; 69 FR 7363, Feb. 17, 2004]", "As used in this standard, the listed terms are defined as follows:\n\nAcfm:  Actual cubic feet per minute.\n\nASME Code or equivalent:  ASME (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, or an equivalent code which the employer can demonstrate to be equally effective.\n\nATA:  Atmosphere absolute.\n\nBell:  An enclosed compartment, pressurized (closed bell) or unpressurized (open bell), which allows the diver to be transported to and from the underwater work area and which may be used as a temporary refuge during diving operations.\n\nBottom time:  The total elasped time measured in minutes from the time when the diver leaves the surface in descent to the time that the diver begins ascent.\n\nBursting pressure:  The pressure at which a pressure containment device would fail structurally.\n\nCylinder:  A pressure vessel for the storage of gases.\n\nDecompression chamber:  A pressure vessel for human occupancy such as a surface decompression chamber, closed bell, or deep diving system used to decompress divers and to treat decompression sickness.\n\nDecompression sickness:  A condition with a variety of symptoms which may result from gas or bubbles in the tissues of divers after pressure reduction.\n\nDecompression table:  A profile or set of profiles of depth-time relationships for ascent rates and breathing mixtures to be followed after a specific depth-time exposure or exposures.\n\nDive-guiding operations  means leading groups of sports divers, who use an open-circuit, semi-closed-circuit, or closed-circuit self-contained underwater breathing apparatus, to local undersea diving locations for recreational purposes.\n\nDive location:  A surface or vessel from which a diving operation is conducted.\n\nDive-location reserve breathing gas:  A supply system of air or mixed-gas (as appropriate) at the dive location which is independent of the primary supply system and sufficient to support divers during the planned decompression.\n\nDive team:  Divers and support employees involved in a diving operation, including the designated person-in-charge.\n\nDiver:  An employee working in water using underwater apparatus which supplies compressed breathing gas at the ambient pressure.\n\nDiver-carried reserve breathing gas:  A diver-carried supply of air or mixed gas (as appropriate) sufficient under standard operating conditions to allow the diver to reach the surface, or another source of breathing gas, or to be reached by a standby diver.\n\nDiving mode:  A type of diving requiring specific equipment, procedures and techniques (SCUBA, surface-supplied air, or mixed gas).\n\nFsw:  Feet of seawater (or equivalent static pressure head).\n\nHeavy gear:  Diver-worn deep-sea dress including helmet, breastplate, dry suit, and weighted shoes.\n\nHyperbaric conditions:  Pressure conditions in excess of surface pressure.\n\nInwater stage:  A suspended underwater platform which supports a diver in the water.\n\nLiveboating:  The practice of supporting a surfaced-supplied air or mixed gas diver from a vessel which is underway.\n\nMixed-gas diving:  A diving mode in which the diver is supplied in the water with a breathing gas other than air.\n\nNo-decompression limits:  The depth-time limits of the \u201cno-decompression limits and repetitive dive group designation table for no-decompression air dives\u201d, U.S. Navy Diving Manual or equivalent limits which the employer can demonstrate to be equally effective.\n\nPsi(g):  Pounds per square inch (gauge).\n\nRecreational diving instruction  means training diving students in the use of recreational diving procedures and the safe operation of diving equipment, including an open-circuit, semi-closed-circuit, or closed-circuit self-contained underwater breathing apparatus, during dives.\n\nScientific diving  means diving performed solely as a necessary part of a scientific, research, or educational activity by employees whose sole purpose for diving is to perform scientific research tasks. Scientific diving does not include performing any tasks usually associated with commercial diving such as: Placing or removing heavy objects underwater; inspection of pipelines and similar objects; construction; demolition; cutting or welding; or the use of explosives.\n\nSCUBA diving:  A diving mode independent of surface supply in which the diver uses open circuit self-contained underwater breathing apparatus.\n\nStandby diver:  A diver at the dive location available to assist a diver in the water.\n\nSurface-supplied air diving:  A diving mode in which the diver in the water is supplied from the dive location with compressed air for breathing.\n\nTreatment table:  A depth-time and breathing gas profile designed to treat decompression sickness.\n\nUmbilical:  The composite hose bundle between a dive location and a diver or bell, or between a diver and a bell, which supplies the diver or bell with breathing gas, communications, power, or heat as appropriate to the diving mode or conditions, and includes a safety line between the diver and the dive location.\n\nVolume tank:  A pressure vessel connected to the outlet of a compressor and used as an air reservoir.\n\nWorking pressure:  The maximum pressure to which a pressure containment device may be exposed under standard operating conditions."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.20.44.3", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "T", "Subpart T\u2014Commercial Diving Operations", "", "\u00a7 1910.410 Qualifications of dive team.", "OSHA", "", "", "", "(a)  General.  (1) Each dive team member shall have the experience or training necessary to perform assigned tasks in a safe and healthful manner.\n\n(2) Each dive team member shall have experience or training in the following:\n\n(i) The use of tools, equipment and systems relevant to assigned tasks;\n\n(ii) Techniques of the assigned diving mode: and\n\n(iii) Diving operations and emergency procedures.\n\n(3) All dive team members shall be trained in cardiopulmonary resuscitation and first aid (American Red Cross standard course or equivalent).\n\n(4) Dive team members who are exposed to or control the exposure of others to hyperbaric conditions shall be trained in diving-related physics and physiology.\n\n(b)  Assignments.  (1) Each dive team member shall be assigned tasks in accordance with the employee's experience or training, except that limited additional tasks may be assigned to an employee undergoing training provided that these tasks are performed under the direct supervision of an experienced dive team member.\n\n(2) The employer shall not require a dive team member to be exposed to hyperbaric conditions against the employee's will, except when necessary to complete decompression or treatment procedures.\n\n(3) The employer shall not permit a dive team member to dive or be otherwise exposed to hyperbaric conditions for the duration of any temporary physical impairment or condition which is known to the employer and is likely to affect adversely the safety or health of a dive team member.\n\n(c)  Designated person-in-charge.  (1) The employer or an employee designated by the employer shall be at the dive location in charge of all aspects of the diving operation affecting the safety and health of dive team members.\n\n(2) The designated person-in-charge shall have experience and training in the conduct of the assigned diving operation."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.20.45.4", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "T", "Subpart T\u2014Commercial Diving Operations", "", "\u00a7 1910.420 Safe practices manual.", "OSHA", "", "", "[42 FR 37668, July 22, 1977, as amended at 49 FR 18295, Apr. 30, 1984]", "(a)  General.  The employer shall develop and maintain a safe practices manual which shall be made available at the dive location to each dive team member.\n\n(b)  Contents.  (1) The safe practices manual shall contain a copy of this standard and the employer's policies for implementing the requirements of this standard.\n\n(2) For each diving mode engaged in, the safe practices manual shall include:\n\n(i) Safety procedures and checklists for diving operations;\n\n(ii) Assignments and responsibilities of the dive team members;\n\n(iii) Equipment procedures and checklists; and\n\n(iv) Emergency procedures for fire, equipment failure, adverse environmental conditions, and medical illness and injury."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.20.45.5", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "T", "Subpart T\u2014Commercial Diving Operations", "", "\u00a7 1910.421 Pre-dive procedures.", "OSHA", "", "", "[42 FR 37668, July 22, 1977, as amended at 47 FR 14706, Apr. 6, 1982; 54 FR 24334, June 7, 1989]", "(a)  General.  The employer shall comply with the following requirements prior to each diving operation, unless otherwise specified.\n\n(b)  Emergency aid.  A list shall be kept at the dive location of the telephone or call numbers of the following:\n\n(1) An operational decompression chamber (if not at the dive location);\n\n(2) Accessible hospitals;\n\n(3) Available physicians;\n\n(4) Available means of transportation; and\n\n(5) The nearest U.S. Coast Guard Rescue Coordination Center.\n\n(c)  First aid supplies.  (1) A first aid kit appropriate for the diving operation and approved by a physician shall be available at the dive location.\n\n(2) When used in a decompression chamber or bell, the first aid kit shall be suitable for use under hyperbaric conditions.\n\n(3) In addition to any other first aid supplies, an American Red Cross standard first aid handbook or equivalent, and a bag-type manual resuscitator with transparent mask and tubing shall be available at the dive location.\n\n(d)  Planning and assessment.  Planning of a diving operation shall include an assessment of the safety and health aspects of the following:\n\n(1) Diving mode;\n\n(2) Surface and underwater conditions and hazards;\n\n(3) Breathing gas supply (including reserves);\n\n(4) Thermal protection;\n\n(5) Diving equipment and systems;\n\n(6) Dive team assignments and physical fitness of dive team members (including any impairment known to the employer);\n\n(7) Repetitive dive designation or residual inert gas status of dive team members;\n\n(8) Decompression and treatment procedures (including altitude corrections); and\n\n(9) Emergency procedures.\n\n(e)  Hazardous activities.  To minimize hazards to the dive team, diving operations shall be coordinated with other activities in the vicinity which are likely to interfere with the diving operation.\n\n(f)  Employee briefing.  (1) Dive team members shall be briefed on:\n\n(i) The tasks to be undertaken;\n\n(ii) Safety procedures for the diving mode;\n\n(iii) Any unusual hazards or environmental conditions likely to affect the safety of the diving operation; and\n\n(iv) Any modifications to operating procedures necessitated by the specific diving operation.\n\n(2) Prior to making individual dive team member assignments, the employer shall inquire into the dive team member's current state of physical fitness, and indicate to the dive team member the procedure for reporting physical problems or adverse physiological effects during and after the dive.\n\n(g)  Equipment inspection.  The breathing gas supply system including reserve breathing gas supplies, masks, helmets, thermal protection, and bell handling mechanism (when appropriate) shall be inspected prior to each dive.\n\n(h)  Warning signal.  When diving from surfaces other than vessels in areas capable of supporting marine traffic, a rigid replica of the international code flag \u201cA\u201d at least one meter in height shall be displayed at the dive location in a manner which allows all-round visibility, and shall be illuminated during night diving operations."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.20.45.6", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "T", "Subpart T\u2014Commercial Diving Operations", "", "\u00a7 1910.422 Procedures during dive.", "OSHA", "", "", "", "(a)  General.  The employer shall comply with the following requirements which are applicable to each diving operation unless otherwise specified.\n\n(b)  Water entry and exit.  (1) A means capable of supporting the diver shall be provided for entering and exiting the water.\n\n(2) The means provided for exiting the water shall extend below the water surface.\n\n(3) A means shall be provided to assist an injured diver from the water or into a bell.\n\n(c)  Communications.  (1) An operational two-way voice communication system shall be used between:\n\n(i) Each surface-supplied air or mixed-gas diver and a dive team member at the dive location or bell (when provided or required); and\n\n(ii) The bell and the dive location.\n\n(2) An operational, two-way communication system shall be available at the dive location to obtain emergency assistance.\n\n(d)  Decompression tables.  Decompression, repetitive, and no-decompression tables (as appropriate) shall be at the dive location.\n\n(e)  Dive profiles.  A depth-time profile, including when appropriate any breathing gas changes, shall be maintained for each diver during the dive including decompression.\n\n(f)  Hand-held power tools and equipment.  (1) Hand-held electrical tools and equipment shall be de-energized before being placed into or retrieved from the water.\n\n(2) Hand-held power tools shall not be supplied with power from the dive location until requested by the diver.\n\n(g)  Welding and burning.  (1) A current supply switch to interrupt the current flow to the welding or burning electrode shall be:\n\n(i) Tended by a dive team member in voice communication with the diver performing the welding or burning; and\n\n(ii) Kept in the open position except when the diver is welding or burning.\n\n(2) The welding machine frame shall be grounded.\n\n(3) Welding and burning cables, electrode holders, and connections shall be capable of carrying the maximum current required by the work, and shall be properly insulated.\n\n(4) Insulated gloves shall be provided to divers performing welding and burning operations.\n\n(5) Prior to welding or burning on closed compartments, structures or pipes, which contain a flammable vapor or in which a flammable vapor may be generated by the work, they shall be vented, flooded, or purged with a mixture of gases which will not support combustion.\n\n(h)  Explosives.  (1) Employers shall transport, store, and use explosives in accordance with this section and the applicable provisions of \u00a7\u00a7 1910.109 and 1926.912 of Title 29 of the Code of Federal Regulations.\n\n(2) Electrical continuity of explosive circuits shall not be tested until the diver is out of the water.\n\n(3) Explosives shall not be detonated while the diver is in the water.\n\n(i)  Termination of dive.  The working interval of a dive shall be terminated when:\n\n(1) A diver requests termination;\n\n(2) A diver fails to respond correctly to communications or signals from a dive team member;\n\n(3) Communications are lost and can not be quickly re-established between the diver and a dive team member at the dive location, and between the designated person-in-charge and the person controlling the vessel in liveboating operations; or\n\n(4) A diver begins to use diver-carried reserve breathing gas or the dive-location reserve breathing gas."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.20.45.7", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "T", "Subpart T\u2014Commercial Diving Operations", "", "\u00a7 1910.423 Post-dive procedures.", "OSHA", "", "", "[42 FR 37668, July 22, 1977, as amended at 49 FR 18295, Apr. 30, 1984]", "(a)  General.  The employer shall comply with the following requirements which are applicable after each diving operation, unless otherwise specified.\n\n(b)  Precautions.  (1) After the completion of any dive, the employer shall:\n\n(i) Check the physical condition of the diver;\n\n(ii) Instruct the diver to report any physical problems or adverse physiological effects including symptoms of decompression sickness;\n\n(iii) Advise the diver of the location of a decompression chamber which is ready for use; and\n\n(iv) Alert the diver to the potential hazards of flying after diving.\n\n(2) For any dive outside the no-decompression limits, deeper than 100 fsw or using mixed gas as a breathing mixture, the employer shall instruct the diver to remain awake and in the vicinity of the decompression chamber which is at the dive location for at least one hour after the dive (including decompression or treatment as appropriate).\n\n(c)  Recompression capability.  (1) A decompression chamber capable of recompressing the diver at the surface to a minimum of 165 fsw (6 ATA) shall be available at the dive location for:\n\n(i) Surface-supplied air diving to depths deeper than 100 fsw and shallower than 220 fsw;\n\n(ii) Mixed gas diving shallower than 300 fsw; or\n\n(iii) Diving outside the no-decompression limits shallower than 300 fsw.\n\n(2) A decompression chamber capable of recompressing the diver at the surface to the maximum depth of the dive shall be available at the dive location for dives deeper than 300 fsw.\n\n(3) The decompression chamber shall be:\n\n(i) Dual-lock;\n\n(ii) Multiplace; and\n\n(iii) Located within 5 minutes of the dive location.\n\n(4) The decompression chamber shall be equipped with:\n\n(i) A pressure gauge for each pressurized compartment designed for human occupancy;\n\n(ii) A built-in-breathing-system with a minimum of one mask per occupant;\n\n(iii) A two-way voice communication system between occupants and a dive team member at the dive location;\n\n(iv) A viewport; and\n\n(v) Illumination capability to light the interior.\n\n(5) Treatment tables, treatment gas appropriate to the diving mode, and sufficient gas to conduct treatment shall be available at the dive location.\n\n(6) A dive team member shall be available at the dive location during and for at least one hour after the dive to operate the decompression chamber (when required or provided).\n\n(d)  Record of dive.  (1) The following information shall be recorded and maintained for each diving operation:\n\n(i) Names of dive team members including designated person-in-charge;\n\n(ii) Date, time, and location;\n\n(iii) Diving modes used;\n\n(iv) General nature of work performed;\n\n(v) Approximate underwater and surface conditions (visibility, water temperature and current); and\n\n(vi) Maximum depth and bottom time for each diver.\n\n(2) For each dive outside the no-decompression limits, deeper than 100 fsw or using mixed gas, the following additional information shall be recorded and maintained:\n\n(i) Depth-time and breathing gas profiles;\n\n(ii) Decompression table designation (including modification); and\n\n(iii) Elapsed time since last pressure exposure if less than 24 hours or repetitive dive designation for each diver.\n\n(3) For each dive in which decompression sickness is suspected or symptoms are evident, the following additional information shall be recorded and maintained:\n\n(i) Description of decompression sickness symptoms (including depth and time of onset); and\n\n(ii) Description and results of treatment.\n\n(e)  Decompression procedure assessment.  The employer shall:\n\n(1) Investigate and evaluate each incident of decompression sickness based on the recorded information, consideration of the past performance of decompression table used, and individual susceptibility;\n\n(2) Take appropriate corrective action to reduce the probability of recurrence of decompression sickness; and\n\n(3) Prepare a written evaluation of the decompression procedure assessment, including any corrective action taken, within 45 days of the incident of decompression sickness."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.20.46.10", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "T", "Subpart T\u2014Commercial Diving Operations", "", "\u00a7 1910.426 Mixed-gas diving.", "OSHA", "", "", "", "(a)  General.  Employers engaged in mixed-gas diving shall comply with the following requirements, unless otherwise specified.\n\n(b)  Limits.  Mixed-gas diving shall be conducted only when:\n\n(1) A decompression chamber is ready for use at the dive location; and\n\n(i) A bell is used at depths greater than 220 fsw or when the dive involves inwater decompression time of greater than 120 minutes, except when heavy gear is worn or when diving in physically confining spaces; or\n\n(ii) A closed bell is used at depths greater than 300 fsw, except when diving is conducted in physically confining spaces.\n\n(c)  Procedures.  (1) A separate dive team member shall tend each diver in the water.\n\n(2) A standby diver shall be available while a diver is in the water.\n\n(3) A diver shall be stationed at the underwater point of entry when diving is conducted in enclosed or physically confining spaces.\n\n(4) Each diving operation shall have a primary breathing gas supply sufficient to support divers for the duration of the planned dive including decompression.\n\n(5) Each diving operation shall have a dive-location reserve breathing gas supply.\n\n(6) When heavy gear is worn:\n\n(i) An extra breathing gas hose capable of supplying breathing gas to the diver in the water shall be available to the standby diver; and\n\n(ii) An inwater stage shall be provided to divers in the water.\n\n(7) An inwater stage shall be provided for divers without access to a bell for dives deeper than 100 fsw or outside the no-decompression limits.\n\n(8) When a closed bell is used, one dive team member in the bell shall be available and tend the diver in the water.\n\n(9) Except when heavy gear is worn or where physical space does not permit, a diver-carried reserve breathing gas supply shall be provided for each diver:\n\n(i) Diving deeper than 100 fsw or outside the no-decompression limits; or\n\n(ii) Prevented by the configuration of the dive area from directly ascending to the surface."], ["29:29:5.1.1.1.8.20.46.11", 29, "Labor", "XVII", "", "1910", "PART 1910\u2014OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS", "T", "Subpart T\u2014Commercial Diving Operations", "", "\u00a7 1910.427 Liveboating.", "OSHA", "", "", "", "(a)  General.  Employers engaged in diving operations involving liveboating shall comply with the following requirements.\n\n(b)  Limits.  Diving operations involving liveboating shall not be conducted:\n\n(1) With an inwater decompression time of greater than 120 minutes;\n\n(2) Using surface-supplied air at depths deeper than 190 fsw, except that dives with bottom times of 30 minutes or less may be conducted to depths of 220 fsw;\n\n(3) Using mixed gas at depths greater than 220 fsw;\n\n(4) In rough seas which significantly inpede diver mobility or work function; or\n\n(5) In other than daylight hours.\n\n(c)  Procedures.  (1) The propeller of the vessel shall be stopped before the diver enters or exits the water.\n\n(2) A device shall be used which minimizes the possibility of entanglement of the diver's hose in the propeller of the vessel.\n\n(3) Two-way voice communication between the designated person-in-charge and the person controlling the vessel shall be available while the diver is in the water.\n\n(4) A standby diver shall be available while a diver is in the water.\n\n(5) A diver-carried reserve breathing gas supply shall be carried by each diver engaged in liveboating operations."]], "truncated": false, "filtered_table_rows_count": 204, "expanded_columns": [], "expandable_columns": [], "columns": ["section_id", "title_number", "title_name", "chapter", "subchapter", "part_number", "part_name", "subpart", "subpart_name", "section_number", "section_heading", "agency", "authority", "source_citation", "amendment_citations", "full_text"], "primary_keys": ["section_id"], "units": {}, "query": {"sql": "select section_id, title_number, title_name, chapter, subchapter, part_number, part_name, subpart, subpart_name, section_number, section_heading, agency, authority, source_citation, amendment_citations, full_text from cfr_sections where \"part_number\" = :p0 order by section_id limit 101", "params": {"p0": "1910"}}, "facet_results": {"title_number": {"name": "title_number", "type": "column", "hideable": false, "toggle_url": "/openregs/cfr_sections.json?part_number=1910", "results": [{"value": 29, "label": 29, "count": 204, "toggle_url": "https://www.pawtectors.org/openregs/cfr_sections.json?part_number=1910&title_number=29", "selected": false}], "truncated": false}, "agency": {"name": "agency", "type": "column", "hideable": false, "toggle_url": "/openregs/cfr_sections.json?part_number=1910", "results": [{"value": "OSHA", "label": "OSHA", "count": 204, "toggle_url": "https://www.pawtectors.org/openregs/cfr_sections.json?part_number=1910&agency=OSHA", "selected": false}], "truncated": false}, "part_number": {"name": "part_number", "type": "column", "hideable": false, "toggle_url": "/openregs/cfr_sections.json?part_number=1910", "results": [{"value": "1910", "label": "1910", "count": 204, "toggle_url": "https://www.pawtectors.org/openregs/cfr_sections.json", "selected": true}], "truncated": false}}, "suggested_facets": [{"name": "part_name", "toggle_url": "https://www.pawtectors.org/openregs/cfr_sections.json?part_number=1910&_facet=part_name"}, {"name": "subpart", "toggle_url": "https://www.pawtectors.org/openregs/cfr_sections.json?part_number=1910&_facet=subpart"}, {"name": "subpart_name", "toggle_url": "https://www.pawtectors.org/openregs/cfr_sections.json?part_number=1910&_facet=subpart_name"}], "next": "29~3A29~3A5~2E1~2E1~2E1~2E8~2E20~2E46~2E11,29~3A29~3A5~2E1~2E1~2E1~2E8~2E20~2E46~2E11", "next_url": "https://www.pawtectors.org/openregs/cfr_sections.json?part_number=1910&_next=29~3A29~3A5~2E1~2E1~2E1~2E8~2E20~2E46~2E11%2C29~3A29~3A5~2E1~2E1~2E1~2E8~2E20~2E46~2E11&_sort=section_id", "private": false, "allow_execute_sql": true, "query_ms": 4445.578700047918, "source": "Federal Register API & Regulations.gov API", "source_url": "https://www.federalregister.gov/developers/api/v1", "license": "Public Domain (U.S. Government data)", "license_url": "https://www.regulations.gov/faq"}